Microsoft Excel Help Contents

To learn how to use Help, press F1.

	Using Microsoft Excel Step-by-step instructions to help you complete your task
	Reference Information Answers to common questions, tips, and guides to terminology, commands, buttons, worksheet functions, macro functions, and the keyboard
	Programming with Visual Basic Complete reference information about the Visual Basic macro language
	Technical Support Available support options so that you can get the most from your Microsoft product


  Using Microsoft Excel

Essential Skills

Creating Charts

Organizing and Analyzing Data in a List

Retrieving and Analyzing Data from Lists and Tables

Solving Problems by Analyzing Data

Presenting, Reviewing, and Sharing Workbooks

Customizing Microsoft Excel

Exchanging Data with Other Applications

Switching from Other Applications


Essential Skills

What's New in Microsoft Excel Version 5.0

Getting Information While You Work

Installing and Starting Microsoft Excel

Managing Workbook Files

Working in Workbooks

Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands

Entering Data

Using Formulas to Calculate Values

Editing a Worksheet

Formatting a Worksheet

Printing

Consolidating Data


Creating Charts

Creating a Chart

Working with Chart Types and Autoformats

Changing Data in a Chart

Formatting a Chart

Using Charts to Analyze Data


Organizing and Analyzing Data in a List

Using a List to Organize Data

Sorting and Filtering Data in a List

Summarizing Data in a List


Retrieving and Analyzing Data from Lists and Tables

Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query

Creating a Pivot Table

Customizing a Pivot Table


Solving Problems by Analyzing Data

Solving What-If Problems

Managing What-If Scenarios

Using Solver to Analyze Multiple-Variable Problems

Statistical Analysis of Data


Presenting, Reviewing, and Sharing Workbooks

Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts

Producing a Slide Show

Auditing and Adding Comments to Documents

Protecting a Workbook

Routing Workbooks with Electronic Mail


Customizing Microsoft Excel

Changing How You View Your Worksheet

Outlining a Worksheet

Customizing Your Workspace

Controlling What Happens When You Start Microsoft Excel

Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks

Installing Add-in Features

Creating User-Defined Functions

Automating Repeated Tasks with Macros


Exchanging Data with Other Applications

Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications

Importing and Exporting Documents


Switching from Other Applications

Switching from Lotus 1-2-3

Switching from Borland Quattro Pro for MS-DOS

Switching from Multiplan

Switching from Microsoft Works


Switching from Lotus 1-2-3

Microsoft Excel Help provides information about how to perform Lotus 1-2-3 tasks in Microsoft Excel. When you select a Lotus topic from the list below, Help gives you information about the Microsoft Excel equivalent or provides an index with more specific topics.

Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users

Terms You Need to Know

Frequently Used Lotus 1-2-3 Commands

Lotus 1-2-3 Commands

File Formats

Lotus 1-2-3 Functions

Transition Navigation Keys

Transferring 1-2-3 Settings to Microsoft Excel

Keyboard

Macro Interpreter for Lotus 1-2-3 Users

Macro Translation Assistant


Switching from Multiplan

Microsoft Excel Help provides information about how to perform Multiplan tasks in Microsoft Excel. When you select a Multiplan topic from the list below, Help gives you information about the Microsoft Excel equivalent of that topic.

Commands

File Formats

Keyboard

Macro Translation Assistant


Switching from Borland Quattro Pro for MS-DOS

Microsoft Excel version 5.0 lets you preserve your investment in Quattro Pro for MS-DOS while taking advantage of the ease and power of Microsoft Excel. You can open Quattro Pro for MS-DOS files in Microsoft Excel and run Quattro Pro macros that are compatible with Lotus 1-2-3 release 2.01.

Opening Quattro Pro for MS-DOS Files in Microsoft Excel

Running Quattro Pro for MS-DOS Macros in Microsoft Excel


Switching from Microsoft Works

Microsoft Excel version 5.0 lets you open files created with Microsoft Works. Now you can easily move up to Microsoft Excel or just use it's analytical and presentation abilities to finish work you started in Microsoft Works.

Opening Microsoft Works Files in Microsoft Excel


  Reference Information

Late Breaking Information about Excel

Excel Readme Help

General Reference

Definitions

Keyboard Guide

Menu Commands

Parts of the Microsoft Excel Screen

Worksheet Functions

Microsoft Excel Macro Functions Contents

Using Toolbar Buttons

Error Values

Microsoft Excel Specifications

Installing and Starting Microsoft Excel

Overview of Using the EXCEL5.INI File to Customize Microsoft Excel

Using the Pen with Microsoft Excel

Visual Basic Reference (Programming with Microsoft Excel)

Common Questions and Tips

Answers to Common Questions about Microsoft Excel

Tips

Accessibility for People with Disabilities

Accessibility for People with Disabilities


Menu Commands

To get information about individual menu commands

1.	Click the Help button on the Standard toolbar.

The mouse pointer turns into a question mark.

2.	Click the menu you want, and then click the command you want information about.

Excel displays the Help window.

See Also

Help

  Help Button

Menu Command Changes in Version 5.0


  Microsoft Excel Technical Support

Main Excel Help Contents

When You Have a Question

Types of Technical Support

Answers to Common Questions About Microsoft Excel

Microsoft Product Support Services in the United States

Microsoft Product Support Services Worldwide


'[Entry]' is not valid.

Either the data you entered in the dialog box could not be converted to the data type specified by the type argument of the INPUT macro function, or the data type specified for the INPUT macro function is not valid.

The type-num argument of the INPUT macro function must be one of the following numbers or the sum of a combination of two or more of the following numbers.

Type-num	Data Type

0	Formula

1	Number

2	Text

4	Logical

8	Reference

16	Error

64	Array

When you specify the type as a sum of data types, the input box accepts data of more than one type. For example, =INPUT("Enter text or a number.",3) allows input of text or numbers.


'[Formula or text]' is too long.

Formula is too long.

The formula you are entering is too long or complex. Try breaking the formula into two or more parts and entering each into a different cell.

Text is too long.

The text you are entering is too long. You can enter a maximum of 255 characters in the formula bar or in a dialog box. Reduce the number of characters used in the text string or cancel the entry.


Name in formula is unclear.

Microsoft Excel could not understand the text in the formula bar. One of the following has happened:

You want text to appear on the chart as the name of a series, but you forgot to put quotation marks around the series's title argument in the SERIES function. For example, =SERIES("Total Income", , ([FINANCES.XLS]Budget!B13:G13, Budget!B14:G14), 1)

You want to link a data series or text label to a name on a worksheet, but you forgot to specify the workbook in the formula. For example, for the SERIES function:  =SERIES(, , [FINANCES.XLS]Revenue!Sales, 1); for a linked text formula:  =[FINANCES.XLS]Revenue!ChartTitle

You want a text label on your chart to begin with an equal sign (=), but you did not enter the formula correctly. For example:  ="=Total"

Determine the problem in the formula, correct it, and try again.


That name is not valid.

The name you entered to define a name for a formula or an area of the worksheet is not valid.

To enter a valid name

1.	Choose the OK button to close the message box.

2.	In the Name box, type a valid name.

3.	Choose the OK button to define the name.

Use the following guidelines to define a name:

The first character must be a letter or an underline character. Other characters can be letters, numbers, periods or underlines.

The name cannot look like a cell reference ("A1" or "R1C1").

Use an underline character or a period, not a space, to separate words.

The name must be less than 256 characters long.


Cannot enter an external reference to a chart.

You tried to enter an external reference to a chart.

If you want to use an external reference to the data presented in a chart, you must use a reference to the worksheet cells included in the chart series formula; otherwise, you cannot enter an external reference to a chart.


Name is not defined.

The name you typed is not defined on this worksheet.

From the Insert menu, choose Name, then choose Paste to see a list of the names defined on this worksheet and their correct spelling.


Number format is not valid.

Microsoft Excel cannot accept the number format you typed.

Correct the format or choose one of the built-in formats.

See Also

Help

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)


Selection too large.
Selection is too large.

Too many cells are selected for the operation you are performing. A selection may be too large because:

You have nonadjacent selections that include more than 2048 separate cell ranges.

You are creating an array formula and the selection exceeds 1636 cells. If possible, enter two or more separate array formulas.

Using the Special button in the Go To dialog box may start to build a selection that is too complex.

Reduce the number of cells selected and try the operation again. To complete the operation on the entire area, you may need to perform the operation on two or more smaller areas.


Cannot resolve circular references.

There is a circular reference and the Iteration check box is not selected in the Calculation tab in the Options dialog box. Circular references can be resolved only when Iteration is selected.

If you want to use iteration to resolve a circular reference, select the Calculation tab in the Options dialog box and select Iteration.

If you did not intend to create a circular reference, locate the cells involved and correct the formulas.

To locate circular references

1.	Look at the status bar at the bottom of the Microsoft Excel window. There will be a reference to one of the cells in the circular reference after the word "Circular."

2.	Select the referenced cell.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Go To.

4. Select the Special button.

5.	Select Precedents or Dependents, and All Levels. This selects all cells involved in the circular reference. If just one cell is selected, that cell contains a formula that refers to itself.

6.	Edit the formulas to resolve the circular reference.

See Also

Help

Calculation Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Go To Special


Series order must be an integer between 0 and 255.

In the series formula, the series order is the order in which the series will be plotted in the chart. Series order 1 indicates the series that will be plotted first, series order 2, the series that will be plotted second, and so on.

You must either specify an integer for the series order or leave it blank. If you leave the series order blank, Microsoft Excel plots the series last and enters the series order for you.


Series must contain at least one value.

A series formula requires at least one value to display on the chart.

Enter at least one value for the series formula and try the operation again. If you are creating a template, either specify a placeholder value in the series formula or do not enter a series formula at all.


Formula must refer to a single cell or result in a text string.

In the series formula, the argument used to generate the title of the series must result in text. You must use one of the following:

Text enclosed in quotation marks.

A reference to a cell containing text.

A reference to a name that results in text.

A formula that results in an array cannot be converted to text even if each component of the array contains text.

You cannot enter an array constant. If you use a name in the argument that refers to an array or multiple cells, this message will appear whenever the chart is updated.


Cannot do that command on nonadjacent selections.

The current task cannot be performed when there are nonadjacent selections.

To complete your task, select only one area at a time and repeat the action.


Disk is full.

Before saving your workbook on the specified disk or drive, Microsoft Excel saves it in the temporary directory. However, this location is full or write-protected.

Microsoft Excel saves the temporary files in C:\TMP, or whatever location is set as the temporary directory in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file, under set TMP= or set TEMP=.

If the workbook was previously saved to this temporary directory, the previous copy might have been deleted to make room for the current version.

Delete some files from the disk or set your temporary directory to another disk, and try again.

If the temporary directory is on a floppy disk, make sure the disk is not write-protected.


Cannot access read-only document '[filename]'.

You are trying to save, open, or link to a document that currently cannot be accessed. Some possible reasons for this include:

The document you are trying to open is being used by another application. When the document is no longer being used, try to open it again.

The name of the workbook you are trying to save is the same as the name of another document that is read-only or that is being used by another application. Save your workbook with a different name. If you want your workbook to have the same name, change the read-only document's attributes to read-write, or wait until the document that is currently in use is no longer being used.

You are trying to save a workbook to a read-only network directory or disk. Save the workbook to a different network directory or disk.

You are trying to revert to the saved version of an open workbook, but the saved version has been deleted. Save the open workbook with another name, and then open the backup version of the deleted workbook if one exists.

The buttons that appear in the message box vary depending on the cause of the error.

OK

Closes the message box.

Retry

Tries to access the document again.

Cancel

Cancels the command.


'[External Copy or SYLK]' file format is not valid.

External Copy

The file to which you are trying to establish an external reference is not a valid Microsoft Excel workbook. Three reasons may be:

You did not save the workbook in Normal format. Load and save it now; then try entering the external reference again.

You misspelled the name of the workbook or sheet to which you are trying to establish a link. Correct the spelling; then try entering the external reference again.

You may be attempting to open a Lotus 1-2-3 file which has a damaged or invalid .FMT or .FM3 file.

SYLK

The file you are trying to open appears to be in SYLK (Symbolic Link) file format, but the format is not correct.

If the file was created with Multiplan or with Microsoft Excel for the Apple Macintosh and you saved the original file in Normal format, try opening the document with the original application and saving it again in SYLK.


Maximum number of data series per chart is 255.

Microsoft Excel allows you to use up to 255 data series in a chart.

If you want to plot more than 255 data series, you have to create two or more charts.


Maximum number of data points in a data series is 4000.

Microsoft Excel allows you to use up to 4000 data points per series.

If you want to plot more than 4000 data points, you have to create two or more series.


Did not encounter RETURN() or HALT() on macro sheet.
No RETURN() or HALT() function found on macro sheet.

While running a macro, Microsoft Excel reached the end of a column without encountering the RETURN or HALT function.

To stop a macro, you need to enter either a RETURN or HALT function. If it appears that you have entered RETURN or HALT correctly, try using the STEP function to step through the macro and determine why Microsoft Excel did not encounter the RETURN or HALT function.


Error printing on '[printer]'.

Microsoft Excel is unable to print. There are several possible reasons for this:

Not enough memory. Try closing other documents and applications (such as Help), and then try printing again.

If you use a network for printing, the network connection may have been cancelled or your computer or printer may not be connected to the network.

There may be loose cables or bad connections between your computer and printer.

There may be a problem with the printer driver. Try installing it again.


Cannot add any more custom formats.

You can have only a total of 256 built-in and custom formats.

Before creating another format, you must delete one of the custom formats.

To delete a custom format

1.	From the Format menu, choose Cells, and select the Number tab.

2.	Select the custom format to delete.

3.	Choose the Delete button.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)


Cannot change part of an array.

Microsoft Excel treats an array as a single unit; therefore, you cannot change part of an array and you cannot sort it using the Sort command on the Data menu.

To continue

1.	Choose the OK button.

2.	If necessary, press ESC to cancel the current action.

To change the individual values in an array, you must replace the array with its values.

To replace an array with its values

1.	Select the entire array by pressing CTRL+/ (slash).

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Copy.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

4.	In the Paste box, select the Values option.

The array no longer exists; only its values remain. You can change these values if you want.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)


Cannot change part of a table.

Microsoft Excel treats a data table as a single unit; therefore, you cannot change part of a table and you cannot sort it using the Sort command on the Data menu.

To continue

1.	Choose the OK button.

2.	If necessary, press ESC to cancel the current action.

To change the individual values in a table, you must replace the table with its values.

To replace a table with its values

1.	Select the entire table by pressing CTRL+/ (slash).

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Copy.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

4.	In the Paste box, select the Values option.

The table no longer exists; only its values remain. You can change these values if you want.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)


Cannot change part of a subscriber.

Microsoft Excel treats the cells in a subscriber as an array. You cannot change part of this array, nor can you sort it using the Sort command on the Data menu.

To continue

1.	Choose the OK button.

2.	If necessary, press ESC to cancel the current action.

To alter the individual values, either replace the subscriber cells with their values or change the publisher supplying the information. If you replace the array, you will no longer be linked to the publisher containing the original values.

To replace the array with its values

1.	Select the entire array by pressing CTRL+/ (slash).

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Copy.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

4.	In the Paste box, select the Values option.

The array no longer exists; only its values remain. You can change these values if you want.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)


Cannot delete built-in format.

You cannot delete the selected format because it is a built-in format; you can delete only custom formats.

See Also

Help

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)


'[Name]' is not a valid name.

One of the names in the selected range is not valid.

Use the following guidelines to define a name:

The first character must be a letter or an underline character. Other characters can be letters, numbers, periods, or underlines.

The name cannot look like a cell reference ("$A$1" or "R1C1").

Use an underline character or a period, not a space, to separate words.

The name must be less than 256 characters long.

OK

Skips the invalid name and continues to create all remaining valid names.

Cancel

Cancels the Create command so it creates no more names.

To create a valid name to replace the invalid name

1.	Choose the Cancel button.

2.	Correct the invalid name.

3.	Select the range again.

4.	From the Insert menu, choose Name, and then choose Create again.


Replace existing definition of '[name]'?

You tried to create a name that already exists on this worksheet. Microsoft Excel needs to know if you want the existing definition of the name to be replaced with the new definition you are giving it.

Yes

Replaces the existing definition of the name with the new definition.

No

Leaves the existing definition of the name as it is and continues creating names.

Cancel

Cancels the Create command. No additional names are created. Names created up to the point of canceling remain in effect.


Number is not valid.

Depending on the command you've chosen, you must enter either an integer or a decimal number in the box.

If it appears you have entered a valid number, try deleting the number completely and then reentering it.


Integer is not valid.

You typed a noninteger value in a dialog box that accepts only integers.

Type an integer in the dialog box.


That name already exists.

In the last dialog box, you typed a new name for the formula to use. However, the name you typed exists on this worksheet.

Choose OK, and then type another name for the formula to use.


No match.

No matches were found in the selection or on the active worksheet.

If you used the Find or Replace command on the Edit menu, no cell in the selection contains what you typed.

If you think there should be a match, check your typing and then try the search operation again.


Shortcut key must be a letter.

A number, punctuation mark, or other symbol was typed as a shortcut key instead of a letter.

Type any letter of the alphabet as the shortcut key.


Column width must be between 0 and 255.
Column width must be between 0 and 255 characters.

Microsoft Excel sets column width based on the width of unformatted numeric characters. A column with a width of zero is hidden; negative values are not valid. The maximum column width is 255 unformatted numeric characters. The number of characters actually displayed in a cell may vary depending on the font and format.

In the Column Width box, type a value between 0 and 255.

To hide a column, choose Column from the Format menu, and then choose the Hide Detail Button.


Row height must be between 0 and 409.

Row height is measured in points. A row with a height of 0 points is hidden. Type a number between 0 and 409.

To hide a row, choose Row from the Format menu, and then choose the Hide Detail Button.


Cannot open the Clipboard.

You are trying to do a procedure that requires the Clipboard, but Microsoft Excel is unable to open the Clipboard. Some possible reasons for this:

Another application may be using the Clipboard for copying or pasting. Wait for the operation to finish and try again.

There may not be enough memory to use the Clipboard. After closing other documents and applications (such as Help), try again.


Cannot empty the Clipboard.

You are doing a procedure that requires using the Clipboard, but the Clipboard is full and Microsoft Excel is unable to empty it. There are several possible reasons for this:

Another application is using the Clipboard while Microsoft Excel is trying to cut or copy data onto the Clipboard. Try performing the current operation again.

Another application used the Clipboard but did not close it properly, preventing other applications from using it. Quit Microsoft Excel, restart Microsoft Excel, and then try again.

There is not enough memory to use the Clipboard. After closing other documents and applications (such as Help), try again.


Too complex to record.

The action you are attempting to record is too complex or long.

Reduce the complex or long formulas, names, or text to two or more simpler or shorter formulas, names, or text, and then try recording again.


Cannot shift nonblank cells off sheet.

To prevent possible loss of data, Microsoft Excel will not allow you to use the Cells command on the Insert menu to shift cells containing data or borders beyond the edges of the worksheet.

Delete or clear the cells, or move the data to a new location and try again.


Cannot shift objects off sheet.

To prevent possible loss of data, Microsoft Excel will not allow you to use the Object command on the Insert menu to shift objects beyond the edges of the worksheet.

To shift an object on your worksheet, move the object to a new location, and try again.


Fixed objects will move.

You changed the dimensions of your worksheet. Microsoft Excel moves the fixed objects you placed near the boundaries of your worksheet so that the objects remain visible.


Number must be greater than or equal to zero.

If the Iteration check box in the Calculation tab of the Options dialog box is selected, calculation stops when all cells change by less than the number specified in the Maximum Change box. This number is used to limit the number of iterations and cannot be less than zero. Change the number to be greater than or equal to zero.

See Also

Help

Calculation Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)


Cannot open printer driver.

The printer driver that is needed to print your document cannot be opened.

Some possible reasons for this:

Not enough memory. After closing other documents and applications (such as Help), try again.

There may be some problem with the printer driver. Try installing it again with the Control Panel.

Note If you are creating a chart, the chart will be created, but it will be sized with the window and not sized with a page. If you install a valid printer driver, the chart will be automatically sized to the page size set for that printer.

See Also

Help

Sized With Window Command (View Menu)


File error: data may have been lost.

An error occurred while opening a Microsoft Excel binary file. Some of the data in the file may not be in memory. The problem may have been caused by another application creating a Microsoft Excel binary file incorrectly.

Resave the file and try opening it again.


Not enough system resources to display completely.
Not enough memory to display completely.

The percentage of system resources available is not sufficient for Microsoft Excel to update what is displayed on the screen. Any command you have just chosen was completed successfully, but the screen does not completely reflect the update.

To check system resources, switch to the Microsoft Windows Program Manager and choose the About Program Manager command from the Help menu. The percentage of free system resources is displayed in the dialog box.

To free more system resources, try closing other applications or worksheet windows. Then, to have the data on the screen updated, move the window off the screen and back again, minimize and restore the window, or close and reopen the window.


Use existing definition of '[name]'?

The formula you are pasting contains a name that already exists on the destination worksheet. Microsoft Excel needs to know whether to use the existing definition of the name, or redefine the name to refer to the same area on the destination worksheet as it does on the original.

Yes

The name in the formula you are pasting will refer to the existing definition of the name on the destination sheet.

No

The name in the formula you are pasting will refer to the same area on the destination sheet as it does on the original sheet. You will be asked to type a new name for these cells. The name you type will be defined on the destination worksheet and the name in the formula will change to the new name.

Cancel

Cancels the Paste command.


Name cannot resemble a reference.

While changing from R1C1 to A1 reference style, Microsoft Excel encountered a name that looks like a reference. Although names can resemble references when you are using the R1C1 reference style, they cannot do so when you are using the A1 reference style.

You must either cancel this command or type a valid name in place of the invalid one.

OK

Accepts the new name you type, if it is valid. All formulas using the old name are changed to include the new name.

Cancel

Cancels the command.


Name cannot be the same as built in name.
Name cannot be the same as a built-in name.

You are opening a spreadsheet saved by a Microsoft Excel version that was produced for another country, and a defined name on the spreadsheet matches a name that is reserved as a special name for your version of Microsoft Excel.

Type a different defined name.


Name already exists on destination sheet.

The formula you are pasting contains a name that already exists on the destination worksheet.

You chose No in the preceding message box to indicate that the name in the formula should not refer to the destination worksheet's existing definition of the name.

You now need to specify a new name for the formula to use. The name you type will be defined on the destination worksheet and the name in the formula will change to the new name. Choose OK and then type the name you want to use.


No match in current cell.
No match in active cell.

No matches were found in the current cell.

If you think there should be a match, check your typing and then try the Replace operation again.


Cannot paste data.

This error is usually caused by conditions beyond the control of Microsoft Excel. The Clipboard may not contain information suitable for pasting into a Microsoft Excel document, or another application may be using the Clipboard.


Formula is not valid.

Entering a formula

The formula you have entered is not a valid Microsoft Excel formula.

Enter a valid Microsoft Excel formula, or press ESC to cancel the current invalid formula.

To enter a valid Microsoft Excel formula

1.	From the Insert menu, choose Function.

2.	Select a function category in the Function Category box.

3.	Select a function name in the Function Name box.

4.	Choose the Next button.

5.	Enter any required arguments.

6.	Choose the Finish button.

Choosing a user-defined command

The formula associated with the command does not result in a valid macro sheet reference. Either the workbook containing the macro sheet associated with that command is not open, or you specified an invalid menu descriptor in an ADD.COMMAND or ADD.MENU function. Make sure the macro references in the menu descriptor are external references entered as text.


Error in formula.

The formula you tried to enter contains an error. Microsoft Excel attempts to highlight the error.

If you are entering a mathematical formula, correct the formula or cancel it. If you cannot correct the formula now and don't want to cancel it, delete the equal sign from the beginning of the formula. Microsoft Excel will enter the data as text. Remember to fix the error and reinsert the equal sign later.

To correct the formula

1.	Choose the OK button to close the message.

2.	Edit the formula in the formula bar.

3.	Press ENTER.

For more information about the correct syntax for the formula

1.	Choose the OK button to close the message.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Function.

3.	Select a function category in the Function Category box.

4.	Select a function name in the Function Name box.

5.	Choose the Next button.

To cancel the formula

1.	Choose the OK button to close the message.

2.	Press ESC.

Some common formula issues include:

Unmatched parentheses.

Too few or too many arguments in a function.

Invalid character where an operator was expected. For example:  =5@7

Workbook name enclosed in quotation marks but not followed by an exclamation point. For example:  ='[FINANCES.XLS]budget'5

External reference without a workbook name. For example:  =!A5

Incorrectly constructed number. For example:  =5c3

External reference referring to something other than a name or a reference. For example:  =[FINANCES.XLS]budget!5

Missing operand. For example:  =5+

Missing closing bracket for array constants. For example:  ={1, 2, 3,

Nonrectangular array constant. For example:  ={1, 2, 3; 4, 5}

Reference number out of range. For example:  A16385, R5C258  (a worksheet is 16384 rows by 256 columns).

Nested external references.

Transition Formula Entry is on. Clear the Transition Formula Entry check box in the Transition Tab and try again.


Function is not valid.

The function you are using is either not valid in Microsoft Excel or is not valid in this type of sheet. For example, the SERIES function is valid in a chart but invalid in a worksheet or macro sheet.

If you are creating a macro and using a function with a ? (question mark) attached, make sure the function corresponds to a command that has a dialog box.

Check the function, and then try again.


Cannot paste that macro formula onto a worksheet.

You are attempting to paste a formula containing macro functions onto a worksheet.

Either paste the formula onto a macro sheet or choose a valid worksheet formula to paste onto the worksheet.


Cannot access '[filename]'.

You are trying to save, open, or link to a document that currently cannot be accessed. Some possible reasons for this include:

The document name or path you specified in a dialog box does not exist.

Check the spelling of the name or path, and try to access the document again.

The document you are trying to open is being used by another application.

When the document is no longer being used, try to open it again.

The name of the workbook you are trying to save is the same as the name of another document that is read-only or that is being used by another application.

Save your workbook with a different name. If you want your workbook to have the same name, save the read-only workbook as a normal read-write workbook, or wait until the document in-use is no longer being used.

You are trying to save a workbook to a read-only network directory or disk, or to a network drive that has run out of disk space.

Save the workbook to a different network directory or disk.

You are trying to reopen the last-saved version of an open workbook, but the saved version has been deleted.

Save the open workbook with another name, and then open the backup version of the deleted workbook if one exists.

The buttons that appear in the message box vary depending on the cause of the error.

Retry

Tries to access the document again.

Cancel

Closes the message box.


Cannot open or save any more documents.

Either there is not enough memory to open or save any more documents, or there is a problem with the SHARE.EXE file.

To make more memory available

Close workbooks you no longer need.

Close any other applications you no longer need.

Close and then reopen some of your workbooks as read-only. Read-only documents require less memory than documents with read and write access.

To run SHARE.EXE

Make sure that SHARE.EXE is loaded, and that the correct parameters are specified in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.

1.	Quit Microsoft Windows.

2.	Open the file AUTOEXEC.BAT in a text editor program.

3.	Modify or add the SHARE.EXE line so that it reads share.exe /L:500 /F:5100

4.	Save AUTOEXEC.BAT and quit the text editor.

5.	Restart your computer, run Windows, and start Microsoft Excel again.

See Also

Help

Excel Readme Help


Filename is not valid.

Microsoft Excel tried to save a workbook and failed. The filename is not valid, the specified directory does not exist, or the directory is read-only.

If you are trying to save a Personal Macro Workbook, Microsoft Excel could not find the XLSTART directory.

In Microsoft Excel for Windows 3.1, a valid filename is:

Made up of two parts separated by a period. The first part, called a name, can be up to eight characters long. The second part, called an extension, can be up to three characters long. For example:  SALES.XLS

Made up of the following characters:  a-z, A-Z, 0-9, . (period), %, ', -, @, {, }, ~, !, &, and _.

In Microsoft Excel for Windows NT, a valid filename is:

Made up of a path and filenames no longer than 218 characters.

 	Made up of any characters except: [  ], ', ", ?, *, |, \, /, >, < and : All other characters are valid.


Replace existing '[filename]'?

You are trying to save your document with a filename that already exists on the disk.

OK

Saves the active document and replaces the document on the disk.

Cancel

Cancels the command.


Cannot save to an open document.
Cannot save this file with the same name as an open document.

There is already an open document with the name you specified.

Choose a different name for your workbook or close the open document before saving.


Document is not completely saved.

The save process was terminated. There is probably not enough room on your disk for your entire document; however, some of the document may have been saved. Your previous copy of the document on this disk may have also been erased to make room for the current version if you have saved the document on this disk before.

Make some room on your disk and save the document again, or save the document on another disk.


Delete file '[filename]'?

Microsoft Excel is asking if you really want to delete this file from the disk.

Yes

Permanently deletes the file from the disk.

No

Prevents the file from being deleted from the disk.


Negative or zero values cannot be plotted correctly on log charts.

Only positive values can be interpreted on a logarithmic scale. Therefore, only values greater than zero can be plotted correctly on a log chart.

Select only positive values for the chart or choose another chart type.


Tick mark intervals must be greater than 0.

In the Scale tab of the Format Axis dialog box, Major Unit and Minor Unit refer to subdivisions of the axis. The length of a subdivision must be a positive number.

Either select the Auto check boxes for the Major Unit and Minor Unit options, or specify a number greater than zero for both.


'[Filename]' is read-only.

You are either trying to open a read-only document or trying to save changes to a read-only workbook using the current filename.

To open the document as read-only, choose the OK button.

To save changes to this workbook, choose the OK button, and then choose the Save As command from the File menu and specify a new filename.


'[Filename]' is currently in use. Open as read-only?

The document you want to open is being used by another application. You can open the document, but you cannot change it.

OK

Opens the document as read-only.

Cancel

Does not open the document.

If you need to open and change the document, wait until it is no longer being used and try to open it again, or open it now as read-only and save it with a new name.


Cannot save to that name.  Another document is linked to a document with that name.

An open document has links to both the file you are trying to rename and to a file that has the name you typed.

Type a unique name for the file you want to rename. Or open the file with the name you want to use and resave it with a different name. You can then rename the first file as you intended.


Value must be a number.

When you were working in the Scale tab of the Format Axis dialog box, you cleared one or more Auto check boxes in the dialog box, but forgot to specify a number in the edit box associated with it.

Either enter a number or select the Auto check box you want.


Minor unit must be less than major unit.

Major and minor units are subdivisions of the axis. Major units specify major subdivisions; minor units specify more refined or minor subdivisions of the axis. In the Scale tab of the Format Axis dialog box, the number you specify for the minor unit increment must be less than the number you specify for the major unit increment.

If you don't know what values to specify, select the Auto check box next to Major Unit and Minor Unit in the Scale tab of the Format Axis dialog box. Microsoft Excel will suggest a correct set of values. Specify major unit and minor unit increments only if you want to customize your chart.


Maximum axis value must be greater than minimum axis value.

The minimum value is the smallest number on the axis and the maximum value is the largest number on the axis. Numbers labeled on the axis are scaled between the minimum and the maximum. In the Scale tab of the Format Axis dialog box, the number you specify for the minimum value must be less than the number you specify for the maximum value.

If you don't know what values to specify, select the Auto check box next to Minimum and Maximum in the Scale tab of the Format Axis dialog box. Microsoft Excel will determine a correct set of values. Specify numbers only if you want to customize your chart. Make sure that the maximum axis value you have specified is greater than the minimum axis value. Use the Values In Reverse Order check box to plot data from the largest to the smallest number.


Recording failed.

The recording of your macro failed due to some interference with the recorder area. The recorder area was defined when you chose Record Macro from the Tools menu, and then chose Mark Position For Recording. It is also possible that Microsoft Excel ran out of memory while recording.

You cannot redefine the recorder area while you are recording a macro. To continue with your work, the macro must be recorded again, starting at the point where the recording failed.

To resume recording

1.	Select the area on the macro sheet where you want to record.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Record Macro , and then choose Mark Position For Recording .

3.	From the Tools menu, choose Record Macro, and then choose Record At Mark.

4.	Resume recording.


Recorder range is full.

There are no more cells available in the selected area of the macro sheet for recording actions.

If you do not want to limit the area in which you can record actions, select a single cell before you choose the Record New Macro or Mark Position For Recording command from the Record Macro command on the Tools menu. Make sure there are enough blank cells under the single cell to accommodate the recorded commands.


Cannot insert object.

You attempted to insert an object and either memory was insufficient to complete the operation, or the object specified by a macro containing an INSERT.OBJECT macro function was not a supported object type. Close any unneeded open documents and applications, or check the argument in the INSERT.OBJECT macro function and try again.

See Also

Help

Object Command (Insert Menu)


A document with the name '[filename]' is already open.

You cannot open two documents with the same name. Even if your documents have the same name in different directories, they must have different names if you want to open both of them at once.

To open the second document, either close the document that is now open or rename one of the documents.


'[Copy or cut]' and paste areas are different shapes.

The paste area you selected is either too large, too small, or the wrong shape.

If you chose Copy before choosing Paste from the Edit menu or Copied Cells from the Insert menu, the paste area must be one of the following:

A single cell.

A rectangle the exact size and shape of the copied area.

A rectangle able to contain two or more rectangles the exact shape of the copied area.

If you chose Cut before choosing Paste from the Edit menu or Cut Cells from the Insert menu, the paste area must be one of the following:

A single cell.

A rectangle the exact size and shape of the cut area.

Check the paste area and try again.


Cannot paste a table onto a macro sheet.

The area you cut includes a table created with the Table command on the Data menu. Microsoft Excel does not allow this type of table on a macro sheet.

To copy data from the table to a macro sheet, use the Copy command on the Edit menu.


Cannot find '[filename]'.

Microsoft Excel cannot find the document you are trying to open. Either the document does not exist, you specified the wrong directory or disk, or you made a spelling error.

Choose the OK button, and then choose the Open command again. In the Open dialog box, find the correct name and location of the file you want to open, and try again. If you are using a macro to open a document, you will probably need to include the path as part of the document name.


Cannot access '[filename]'.

You are trying to save, open, or link to a document that currently cannot be accessed.

Some possible reasons for this include:

The document name or path you specified in a dialog box does not exist. Check the spelling of the name or path, and try to access the document again.

The document you are trying to open is being used by another application. When the document is no longer being used, try to open it again.

The name of the document you are trying to save is the same as the name of another document that is read-only or that is being used by another application. Save your document with a different name. If you want your document to have the same name, change the read-only document's attributes to read-write, or wait until the other document is no longer being used.

You are trying to save a document to a read-only network directory or disk, or to a network drive that has run out of disk space. Save the document to a different network directory or disk.

You are trying to revert to the saved version of an open document, but the saved version has been deleted. Save the open document with another name, and then open the backup version of the deleted document if one exists.

The buttons that appear in the message box vary depending on the cause of the error.

OK

Closes the message box.

Retry

Tries to access the document again.

Cancel

Cancels the command.


Matching records will be deleted permanently.
Matching records will be permanently deleted.

You are about to permanently delete all records that match the criteria.

The only way to retrieve deleted records is to reopen the original document. When you reopen the document, you discard any changes you have made since the last time you saved it.


Incorrect password.

You tried to either turn off workbook or sheet protection, or open a protected workbook without the correct password.

You cannot turn off document protection or open a protected document without typing the correct password.

Check the password you typed and try again.


Cannot open a dependent document that contains references to different sheets with the same name.

Formulas in the dependent document contain external references to sheets with the same name in different directories. Some of the formulas were entered without a path, and some were entered with a full path.

Example

Formula A:	=[BOOK1.XLS]SHEET1!A1 (no path)

Formula B:	=C:\BUDGET\[BOOK1.XLS]SHEET1!A1

Formula B:	=HARD DRIVE:BUDGET:[BOOK1.XLS]SHEET1!A1 (full path)

Microsoft Excel assumes that formulas A and B were entered this way to differentiate between two sheets named [BOOK1.XLS]SHEET1 located in different directories. It looks for [BOOK1.XLS]SHEET1 in formula A in the same directory as the dependent document and uses the specified path to look in the BUDGET directory on Drive C to find the [BOOK1.XLS]SHEET1 in formula B.

You are now trying to open the dependent document from the directory you specified in formula B, but Microsoft Excel cannot distinguish between the two documents named [BOOK1.XLS]SHEET1.

To open the document, switch to the directory in which it was created or include the entire path in the formula.


Data on the Clipboard is not the same size and shape as the selected area.  Paste anyway?

The size and shape of the area selected do not match the size and shape of the data on the Clipboard.

OK

Pastes the data from the Clipboard, starting at the upper-left corner of the selected area until it fills the selected area.

Cancel

Cancels the command, leaving the data on the Clipboard.

If you choose Cancel, you can reselect the area and try again.


No link to paste.

The information necessary to create a link is not available.

If you are trying to create a link between two Microsoft Excel workbooks

The workbook you copied from is no longer open. Reopen the workbook and repeat the copy and paste sequence.

If you are trying to create a link between a Microsoft Excel workbook and a document created with another application

The document is no longer open, the application is no longer running, or the application does not support links with other applications.

Make sure that the other application is running, the document is open, and the application supports links to other applications; then repeat the copy and paste sequence.


Unable to paste link.

This error is generally caused by conditions beyond the control of Microsoft Excel. Microsoft Excel was not able to create the link because the Clipboard does not contain information suitable for pasting into a Microsoft Excel document.

Try the complete operation again.


Locked cells cannot be changed.

When a sheet is protected with the Protection Command on the Tools menu you cannot change a locked cell. You generally cannot modify the sheet if it has been protected.

To allow editing of certain cells on a protected sheet while still protecting other parts of the sheet

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Protection, and then choose Unprotect Sheet.

2.	Type the password, if necessary, and choose the OK button.

3.	Select the cells you want to change.

4.	From the Format menu, choose Cells, and then select the Protection tab.

5.	Clear the Locked check box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

7.	From the Tools menu, choose Protection, and then choose Protect Sheet.

8.	Type the password, if necessary, and choose the OK button.

You may now change the contents of the cells you unlocked.

See Also

Help

Protection Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)


Cell with looping function should not contain anything else.

The FOR, FOR.CELL, WHILE, and NEXT functions are used to control loops in a macro.

Because these functions control how other macro functions are carried out, you cannot enter anything else in a cell containing one of these functions.

Examples

=FOR("I",1,10) is legal.

=IF(1=1,FOR("I",1,10)) is not legal.

Remove the extraneous information from the cell or enter the looping function on a line by itself, and enter the function again.


Save changes in '[filename]'?

You have made changes to a workbook since the last time you saved it and you chose the Close or Exit command from the File menu, or the Close command from the Windows Control menu.

Yes

Saves the changes you have made in the workbook before closing it or quitting.

No

Does not save the changes you have made since the last time you saved the workbook.

Cancel

Cancels the command.


Reference must be to a single cell.

The reference in the Cell box of the Cell Note dialog box refers to more than one cell. A note can refer to only one cell. From the Insert menu, choose the Note command and type a reference to a single cell in the Cell box.


Select cells in one column only.

The range you want to parse can have any number of rows; however, it can only be one column wide. Select cells in one column.

See Also

Help

Text To Columns Command (Data Menu)


Cannot find data source.

You entered a reference to a document created with another application, but you did not include either the application name or the document name. No document matching the description you provided is available.

If your reference specifies the application but not the document, make sure the application is running, has open documents, and supports DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange).

If your reference specifies the document but not the application, make sure at least one application is running with the specified document open, and supports DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange).

If your reference specifies neither the document nor the application, make sure at least one application is running, has open documents, and supports DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange).

If you cannot solve the problem by opening the document with the application that created it, remove the reference from your formula.

You can enter a reference to a document created with another application even if the document or the application is not available. To do this, you must specify both the application and the document name. For example:

=WinWord|'C:\SALES\NEWSALES.DOC'!DDE_LINK


Reference is not valid.

The reference you specified is not a valid reference or is not valid for the particular command you chose; or, you did not enter a reference where one was required. Microsoft Excel could not recognize what you typed as a reference.

To enter references with the mouse, first make sure that the status bar displays "Enter," then click the cell, or drag through the cell range you want to select. To enter references with the keyboard, use the arrow keys to select a cell, and then press SHIFT+ARROW to extend the selection.

These techniques work when referring to cells on the same sheet and when referring to cells in different sheets within the same workbook. A reference to another Microsoft Excel workbook is an external reference. To create external references by pointing to them, both workbooks must be open.

To create external references to workbooks that are not open, use one of the following methods:

Change the current directory to the directory containing the unopened workbook. Then, refer to the sheet as you would if it were open. For example:

=[BOOK1.XLS]SHEET!!$A$1

Or, to refer to the workbook location including its path, you must enclose the path and filename in single quotation marks; type the exclamation mark following the closing single quotation mark. For example:

='C:\EXCEL\[BOOK1.XLS]SHEET1'!$A$1


Data will permanently lose accuracy.

When you select a number format using the Number Tab in the Format Cells dialog box, data is normally stored as entered and displayed according to the selected format. To replace the original values, choose Options from the Tools menu, then select the Calculation Tab and select the Precision As Displayed check box.

For example, if you format a cell containing the number 1.11601 to be displayed with two decimal places, it appears as 1.12 on your worksheet. If you select the Precision As Displayed check box, the stored value changes to 1.12, and the displayed number remains the same.

OK

Stores values with the precision as displayed.

Cancel

Cancels the action.


Data_Form is not correct.
Custom data_form is not properly defined.

The name Data_Form is defined on the worksheet, but does not refer to a properly defined custom data form. A custom data form description follows the same description rules as a custom dialog box description.

Some common custom data form issues include:

Numbers in cells for item numbers, field coordinates, height, or width are invalid.

The custom data form description has more than 32 fields.

The data form area is less than seven columns wide.

The cell range containing the custom dialog box description in the Refers To box is incorrect.

Check the areas mentioned above and try the operation again.


Cannot justify cells containing numbers or formulas.

Only empty cells or cells containing text can be justified. Change the selection to include only empty cells or cells containing text, and then try again.


Text will extend below range
Text will extend below selected range.

There is more text to justify than will fit in the area you selected.

OK

Justifies text into cells below the area you selected, overwriting existing data, if necessary.

Cancel

Cancels the action.


Displayed record will be deleted permanently.
Displayed record will be permanently deleted.

The single record displayed in the data form will be permanently removed. Once the record is removed, the only way to retrieve it is to reopen the last saved version of the workbook without saving the changes in the current workbook, or save the current workbook under another name.

OK

Deletes the record.

Cancel

Cancels the action.


No cells found.

Microsoft Excel found no cells of the type you were looking for. Try selecting a larger or different area of the worksheet and then, from the Edit menu, choose the Go To command and choose the Special button again.


Cannot read record '[cell or name]'
Cannot read record '[cell or name]'.

While opening a WKS, WK1, WK3, or SYLK document, Microsoft Excel found an error in the cell or name indicated. Microsoft Excel is asking if you want additional errors to be reported as they occur, or if you want the total number displayed once the file is completely opened.

An error occurs while loading a WKS, WK1, or WK3 file if Microsoft Excel interprets two names as the same name. For example, Microsoft Excel interprets TOTAL$ and TOTAL# as the same name ( TOTAL_ ). In this instance, change one of the names and try the procedure again.

Whether you choose Yes or No, the total number of errors will be displayed once the file is completely opened. It's usually best to have each reported as it occurs so you can determine where problems are.

Yes

Reports each error as it occurs.

No

Does not report each error as it occurs.

Cancel

Cancels the Open command.


Cannot write record '[cell or name]'
Cannot write record '[cell or name]'.

While saving a WKS, WK1, WK3, or SYLK document, or while saving a document in a file format for a previous version of Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Excel found an error in the cell or name indicated. Microsoft Excel is asking if you want additional errors to be reported as they occur, or if you want the total number displayed once the file is saved.

Whether you choose Yes or No, the total number of errors will be displayed once the file is completely saved. It's usually best to have each reported as it occurs so you can determine where problems are.

Yes

Reports each error as it occurs.

No

Does not report each error as it occurs.

Cancel

Cancels the Save command.


Cannot convert 3-D reference '[reference]'.
Cannot convert 3-D reference: '[reference]'.

Microsoft Excel cannot convert some Lotus 1-2-3 3-D references. In a multiple worksheet file, a Lotus 1-2-3 function might use an argument that does not refer to the same worksheet in which the function appears. (This limitation applies only to a few functions with specific worksheet arguments, such as @COORD.)


A high-low-close stock chart must contain three series.

This type of chart is intended to compare a stock's high price, low price, and closing price for each day. The chart must contain exactly three series in this order:

High prices

Low prices

Closing prices

The chart categories should be the days that the various prices occurred.

If the chart is being created from less than three days of stock data (or less than three different stocks), Microsoft Excel will assume that each day (each stock) represents a series, instead of a category.


Redefine '[style]' based on selection?

The style you just selected is already applied to the selected cell. Since the style was originally applied, additional formatting has been added to the cell using the toolbar or the Font Tab of the Format Cells dialog box.

Yes

Redefines the current style name to include the new formatting.

No

Reapplies the original style name and removes any new formatting.

Cancel

Cancels the command. The cell retains all existing formatting.


Macro with name '[name]' already exists.  Overwrite?
Macro with name '[name]' already exists. Replace existing macro?

You attempted to name a macro using a name that already is defined on the current macro sheet, or the default name for a macro you are attempting to record already exists on the current macro sheet.

Yes

The name will be assigned to the new macro, replacing the definition of the existing macro name.

No

You must provide a unique name for the macro.

Cancel

Cancels the command.


Cannot change this cell while a macro is paused.

You attempted to make a change to a cell that is necessary for running the currently paused macro. If you need to make changes to the paused macro or one of its subroutines, you must first stop the macro and then edit the cell.


Too many different cell formats.

For any cell, you can apply any combination of number formatting, font, alignment, borders, patterns, and protection, but Microsoft Excel can store only 4,000 unique combinations of these attributes. It is possible that you have applied the maximum number of cell formats, and no more can be added.

First, try saving the workbook, closing it, and reopening it to make more memory available, and then try to format the selection again. If the message reappears, you must either format the selection with the same combination of attributes as another cell on the worksheet, or apply a cell style to it.

See Also

Help

Applying a style

Creating and deleting a style


Note will be permanently deleted.

You are about to permanently delete a note. Once the note is deleted, there is no way to retrieve it.

OK

Permanently deletes the selected note.

Cancel

Cancels the command.


Save large Clipboard from '[filename]'?

You chose the Close or Exit command on the File menu after performing a large (greater than 50 cells) copy operation. When you're copying a large amount of data, it is placed on the Clipboard and uses a significant amount of memory. Microsoft Excel asks if you want to save the data on the Clipboard for later use.

Yes

Saves the data on the Clipboard.

No

Does not save the data on the Clipboard.

Cancel

Cancels the Close command.


Save '[filename]' with references to unsaved documents?

The workbook you are saving contains external references to documents that have never been saved. If you choose the OK button to save the workbook and then close it before saving the source documents, the external references to those documents may not be valid because the names of unsaved documents often change when you save them.

To save source documents

1.	Choose the Cancel button.

2.	Save the unsaved source documents.

3.	Save the dependent document.

Choose the OK button only if you are sure you will save the unsaved source documents before closing the dependent document.


Cannot quit Microsoft Excel.

You tried to quit Microsoft Excel before it was ready to quit.

To return to Microsoft Excel, choose the OK button to close the message box, and then

If a dialog box is still displayed, close it.

If a macro is still running or a long calculation is in progress, wait until Microsoft Excel is finished with the task, or press ESC to cancel the task.

If the formula bar is active, press ENTER or ESC to deactivate it.

Try to quit Microsoft Excel again.


Help reference is not valid.

One of the following actions occurred:

Online Help was requested for a custom menu, custom dialog box, or custom data form that does not have a custom Help topic.

A macro containing the HELP macro function was run. The Help reference is not in the form FILE.HLP!N, where FILE.HLP is the name of the custom Help file, and N is an integer specifying a topic in the custom Help file. Correct the Help reference so it is in the proper form.


Cannot delete '[filename]'.

Microsoft Excel cannot find the document you are trying to delete. The document does not exist, you specified the wrong directory or disk, or you made a typing error.

Choose the OK button, and then choose the Open command from the File menu. Use the Open dialog box to find the correct name and location of the file you want to delete, and try again.

If you are using a macro to delete a document, you will probably need to include the path as part of the document name.


Margins do not fit page size.

The margins you specified don't leave any room for printing on this paper size; for example, a left margin of 4 inches and a right margin of 6 inches on paper that is 8.5 inches wide. Choose the Page Setup command from the File menu, and select the Margins tab to adjust the margins or select the Page tab to increase the paper size. This often happens when a user-defined paper size cannot accommodate the existing margins.


Number must be between '[number]' and '[number]'.

Numbers outside of the range given in the message are not valid.

Enter a number within the specified range and try again.


'[Name]' on '[filename]' is not defined or is too complex.

The name you specified is either not defined in the specified workbook, or it is defined as something other than a rectangular cell reference; for example, another name or intersection of named ranges, a formula or a constant, or an array.

Check the name and then try again.


Merge styles that have the same names?

When you merge styles from one workbook to another and two or more styles have the same name, Microsoft Excel warns you that the workbook you are copying to contains styles with the same names. You receive this message only once, regardless of the number of conflicting style names.

Yes

Changes the existing styles in the active workbook.

No

Keeps the existing styles in the active workbook.

Cancel

Cancels the procedure. No styles are merged.


Cannot save to that name. Document was opened as Read-Only.
Cannot save as that name. Document was opened as read-only.

The document you are trying to save was named and opened in a read-only format. In a read-only format, you cannot make changes to a document or save it. To save the document now, you must give it a new name.


Name conflict.  Rename the document you want to open.

This document has been given two different external references.

Rename the document and try again.


Cannot open protected file.

You are trying to open a file that is password-protected. Remove the password before opening the file in Microsoft Excel.


Font name is too long.

The font name you typed in the Font tab is too long. The maximum number of characters you can enter is 32.

Check the length of the font name you typed and try again.


Text extends beyond worksheet.  Some text will be lost
Text extends beyond worksheet.  Some text will be lost.

There is not enough room on the worksheet to justify the text you have selected. If you choose the OK button, some text will be lost.

To prevent the text from being lost, choose the Cancel button and select an area on the worksheet that is large enough to accommodate your selection.


Command not available at cell:

The macro you are running has a function that corresponds to a command that is not supported in this version of Microsoft Excel.

Edit the cell by replacing the unsupported function with one that is supported.


Cannot create backup file.  Save '[filename]' without backup?

Microsoft Excel cannot create a current backup file. You may have locked or protected the previous backup file.

In order to create a current backup file, the previous backup file must be unlocked or unprotected. Check the file and try again.

OK

Continues to save without creating a backup.

Cancel

Cancels the action.

See Also

Help

Protect Workbook Command and Unprotect Workbook Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)


File format is not valid.

External Copy

You are trying to establish an external reference to a file that is not a valid Microsoft Excel workbook. Three reasons may be:

You did not save the workbook in Normal format. Open and save it now; then try to enter the external reference again.

You misspelled the name of the workbook to which you are trying to link. Correct the spelling and then try to enter the external reference again.

You may be attempting to open a Lotus 1-2-3 file that has a damaged or invalid .FMT or .FM3 file.

SYLK

The file you are trying to open appears to be in SYLK (Symbolic Link) file format, but the format is not correct.

If the file was created with Multiplan or with Microsoft Excel for the Apple Macintosh and you have the original, Normal format file, try opening the document with the original application and saving it again in SYLK format.


Cell must contain a value.

To use Goal Seek, you must enter in the By Changing Cell box a reference to a cell that contains a number.

Make sure that the referenced cell contains a number, and try again.


Reference must be on the active sheet.

You entered a reference to a sheet that is not the active sheet.

If you are using Goal Seek, switch to the sheet on which you want to use Goal Seek and repeat the procedure. If you are using scenarios, the cells you select or define as the changing cells for a scenario must be on the same sheet.

See Also

Help

Creating a scenario


Cell must contain a formula.

To use Goal Seek, you must enter in the Set Cell box a reference to a cell that contains a formula.

Make sure the referenced cell contains a formula and try again.


Formula in cell must result in a number
Formula in cell must result in a number.

To use Goal Seek, you must enter in the Set Cell box a reference to a cell that contains a formula that results in a number.

Check the formula you are using and try again.


Calculation is incomplete. Recalculate before saving?

The workbook you are trying to save is set to recalculate before saving, but you pressed ESC before Microsoft Excel finished recalculating.

Yes

Recalculates the workbook and then saves it.

No

Saves the workbook without recalculating it first.

Cancel

Cancels the Save command.

See Also

Help

Calculation Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)


'[Filename or formula]' contains incomplete calculation.

Microsoft Excel is unable to complete the calculation operation for several possible reasons:

The workbook you are trying to open is linked to one or more workbooks that were not recalculated before they were last saved.

The formula you typed in the formula bar contains a reference to a workbook that was not recalculated before it was last saved.

OK

Opens the workbook or enters the formula but does not recalculate the source data.

Cancel

Does not open the workbook or cancels the formula.

Before continuing, you may want to cancel the current operation, open the workbooks that were not recalculated, and recalculate them.


'[Filename]' contains incomplete calculation.  Continue reporting each error?

One of the workbooks you are consolidating was not recalculated before it was saved.

Before continuing, you may want to cancel the Consolidate command, open the workbooks that were not recalculated, and recalculate them.

Yes

Continues to display this message for each occurrence of a workbook that was not recalculated.

No

Does not display the message if other workbooks were not recalculated.

Cancel

Cancels the Consolidate command.


Operation failed. '[Filename]' is reserved by '[user]'.

You entered the name of a document that was saved with a write-reservation password. You cannot save changes to this document name. You can save changes by providing the write-reservation password.

See Also

Help

Save As Command (File Menu)


Operation failed. '[Filename]' is write reserved
Operation failed. '[Filename]' is write reserved.

You entered the name of a document that was saved as a write-reserved document in an application other than Microsoft Excel. You cannot save changes to this document name. Save the document with a different name.

See Also

Help

Save As Command (File Menu)


Sheet is already protected.

The active sheet is already protected. You cannot protect a sheet a second time without first removing the original protection. If you are using a macro to change how a sheet is protected, you must first unprotect the sheet using the Unprotect Sheet command.


Existing categories will be permanently deleted.

You are using the Paste Special command to paste a new data series onto a chart, and you chose to replace the existing categories.

OK

Permanently replaces existing categories with the new categories.

Cancel

Adds the new series to the chart and retains the existing categories for the chart's original series.


Total number of file errors: '[number]'.

When opening or saving a WKS, WK1, WK3, or SYLK file, or while saving a document in a file format for a previous version of Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Excel could not translate some of the cells. This message indicates the total number of errors found.

Each cell that contains an error now has a cell note attached to it. You can search for cells that contain notes by choosing the Go To command from the Edit menu, choosing the Special button and then selecting Notes in the Go To Special dialog box. Also, cells with notes can be identified by a small red square in the upper right corner of the cell (when Note Indicator has been checked in the View Tab of the Options dialog box).


Cannot create Personal Macro Sheet.
Cannot create Personal Macro Workbook.

You have tried to create a personal macro workbook but either there is not enough memory available, or there is already a non-macro workbook open that has been named PERSONAL.XLS.

If there was not enough memory available to create the personal macro workbook, close any unneeded windows, save unsaved documents, or quit other open applications as necessary to make more memory available.

If a non-macro workbook with the name PERSONAL.XLS is open, close it or rename it using the Save As command on the File menu.


Save changes to Personal Macro Sheet?
Save changes to Personal Macro Workbook?

You have made changes to the personal macro workbook (PERSONAL.XLS) during this Microsoft Excel session by recording a macro to the personal macro workbook, by manually editing PERSONAL.XLS, or by unhiding PERSONAL.XLS. The personal macro workbook is hidden, and must be saved now to preserve the changes made to it.

Yes

Saves any changes to the personal macro workbook, and then quits Microsoft Excel. Choose "Yes" if you want macros that were recorded to the personal macro workbook during this session to be available when you start subsequent Microsoft Excel sessions.

No

Quits Microsoft Excel without saving the hidden personal macro workbook.

Cancel

Cancels the command.


Too many fields in the data form.

You are attempting to use the data form with a list that has more than 32 fields (columns). A data form can display a maximum of 32 fields. You can work around this limitation by using one of these options:

Make sure your list includes 32 or fewer fields (columns).

Hide some of the columns in your list so that your data form displays 32 or fewer fields.

See Also

Help

Form Command (Data Menu)


Cannot create data form for a database in which all columns are hidden.

You are trying to create a data form for a list, but all of the columns in the list are hidden (have a width of zero). The widths of the fields in the data form correspond to the widths of the columns in the list. If all field widths are zero, nothing will appear in the data form.

To create the data form, you must unhide one or more columns in the list.

See Also

Help

Form Command (Data Menu)


A volume-high-low-close stock chart must contain four series.

This type of chart is intended to show the daily volumes of stock traded and to compare a stock's high price, low price, and closing price for each day. The chart must contain exactly four series in this order:

Volume traded

High prices

Low prices

Closing prices

The chart categories should be the days the various prices occurred.

If the chart is being created from less than four days of stock data (or less than four different stocks), Microsoft Excel will assume that each day (each stock) represents a series, instead of a category.


An open-high-low-close stock chart must contain four series.

This type of chart is intended to compare a stock's opening price, high price, low price, and closing price for each day. The chart must contain exactly four series in this order:

Opening prices

High prices

Low prices

Closing prices

The chart categories should be the days the various prices occurred.

If the chart is being created from less than four days of stock data (or less than four different stocks), Microsoft Excel will assume that each day (each stock) represents a series, instead of a category.


A volume-open-high-low-close stock chart must contain five series.

This type of chart is intended to show the daily volumes of stock traded and to compare a stock's opening price, high price, low price, and closing price for each day. The chart must contain exactly five series in this order:

Volume traded

Opening prices

High prices

Low prices

Closing prices

The chart categories should be the days the various prices occurred.

If the chart is being created from less than five days of stock data (or less than five different stocks), Microsoft Excel will assume that each day (each stock) represents a series, instead of a category.


Cannot enter a formula in a data form.

You tried to enter a formula in the data form. Only numbers or text are allowed.

Change the formula to a number or text.


There is nothing to print in the specified pages.

There is no data on the pages that you have specified to print.

You might have specified an incorrect range of page numbers in the Print dialog box.

The Notes check box under Print in the Sheet tab of the Page Setup dialog box might be checked.

You might have specified a print area (in the Sheet tab of the Page Setup dialog box) that contains no data.


Confirmation password is not identical.

The text you typed in the Reenter [password type] Password box does not match your password. Type the password and the confirmation password and try again.


Password contains accented characters or certain punctuation marks which will not transfer correctly to Microsoft Excel for OS/2
Password contains accented characters or certain punctuation marks which will not transfer correctly to Microsoft Excel for Windows or OS/2.

The password you typed in the Save Options dialog box or the Protect Sheet dialog box can be interpreted only by Microsoft Excel for Windows. If you want to export this document to Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh or Microsoft Excel for OS/2, your password should not contain accented characters or punctuation marks not used in English.

OK

Accepts the password you typed and carries out the command.

Cancel

Returns you to the dialog box so you can type another password.


Cannot link to Excel 1.5 file. Open and save in normal format.
Cannot link to Microsoft Excel 1.5 file.

The document you are trying to link was created by Microsoft Excel version 1.5. Before you can link to this document, you must convert it to the Microsoft Excel version 5.0 Workbook format.

If you will need to use the document with both Microsoft Excel version 1.5 and the newer version of Microsoft Excel, save the document in SYLK format instead of Microsoft Excel Workbook format.

To convert the document permanently

1.	Open the document.

2.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

Microsoft Excel displays the Save As dialog box, and proposes to save the file in the Microsoft Excel Workbook format.

3.	Choose the OK button. Microsoft Excel asks if you want to replace the existing version of your document.

4.	Choose the OK button.


'[Document]' is being modified by '[user]'. Open as read-only?

The document you want to open is being used by another user on the network. You can open the document, but you cannot change it.

OK

Opens the document as read-only.

Cancel

Does not open the document.

If you need to open and change the document, wait until it is no longer being used and open it again, or open it now as read-only and save it with a new name.


'[Document]' should be opened as read-only unless you need to change to it. Open as read-only?
'[Document]' should be opened as read-only unless you need to save changes to it. Open as read-only?

The document you want to open was saved as read-only recommended. This is useful if the document is intended for several users on a network, because only one user at a time can open the file and change it; other users must open the file as read-only. If you do not intend to change the file, open it as read-only.

Yes

Opens the document as read-only.

No

Opens the document with write access.

Cancel

Does not open the document.


Cell with block IF function should not contain anything else.

The cell containing the block IF function can only contain the conditional portion of the IF function. Any nested or combined information in the cell will not be accepted. Remove the extraneous information from the cell and enter the function again.


Reference is too complex.

You created nonadjacent selections on a worksheet and did one or both of the following:

You started with a selection on a sheet and then selected Visible Cells Only in the Go To Special dialog box, which created nonadjacent selections too complex for Microsoft Excel to handle.

You exceeded the maximum number of references allowed for nonadjacent selections. The maximum number of references is 2048.

Choose the OK button and create nonadjacent selections with fewer references.


Cannot use that command on a protected sheet.

The button you selected cannot be used on a protected sheet.

To use this button, remove the protection from the sheet by choosing Protection from the Tools menu, choosing Unprotect Sheet and entering the correct password. You can then try the command again.


Reference must be to a single cell on the active sheet.

The reference in the Cell box in the Cell Note dialog box refers to more than one cell or to a cell on a different sheet.

Change the reference in the Cell box to refer to a single cell on the active sheet.


Cannot find macro '[name]'.

Microsoft Excel cannot find the macro you assigned to a custom command or object, or the macro named in an ON function. Make sure the path you specified is correct and that the name of the macro sheet and the reference to the macro are correct. Then try the operation again.


Saving to an old file format; data may be lost.

The document you saved contains features that are not supported by the old Microsoft Excel file format that you selected. To avoid losing data and formatting, save the document in the Normal file format for Microsoft Excel version 5.0.


Cannot find '[macro]', which has been assigned to run each time '[document]' is opened.  Continuing could cause errors.  Cancel
Cannot find '[macro]', which has been assigned to run each time '[document]' is opened. Continuing could cause errors. Cancel opening '[document]'?

Microsoft Excel cannot find the macro that is assigned to run each time this document is opened. Make sure the path you have specified is correct and that the name of the macro sheet and the reference to the macro are correct, and try again.

Yes

Cancels opening the document.

No

Opens the document.


Cannot find '[macro]' which has been assigned to run each time '[document]' is closed.  Continuing could cause errors.  Cancel c
Cannot find '[macro]', which has been assigned to run each time '[document]' is closed. Continuing could cause errors. Cancel closing '[document]'?

Microsoft Excel cannot find the macro that is assigned to run each time this document is closed. Make sure the path you specified is correct and that the name of the macro sheet and the reference to the macro are correct, and then try again.

Yes

Cancels closing the document.

No

Closes the document.


Cannot find '[name]'.

You tried to activate or deactivate a sheet containing a macro assigned to run whenever the sheet is activated or deactivated. However, the macro could not be found.

If you used an Auto_activate or Auto_deactivate name that runs a macro on a sheet in a different location, be sure to include the full pathname in the name definition, and verify that the pathname is still correct.


Cannot start the source application for this embedded object.
Cannot start the source application for this object.

Microsoft Excel is unable to activate the source application for the embedded object you are trying to edit. There may not be enough memory, or the application may have stopped due to an unrecoverable error.

Quit all unneeded applications, close all unneeded windows, and then try to edit the embedded object again.


Cannot find the source application for this embedded object.

Microsoft Excel cannot find the source application for the embedded object you are trying to edit. There are several possible reasons for this:

The application might not be installed on your computer.

If the source application is installed on a network, you might not be connected to the correct network disk.

Make sure the source application is installed or that you are connected to the correct network disk, and then try to edit the embedded object again.


Sheet is protected with password.  File format cannot be used.

This sheet has been protected with the Protect Sheet command and cannot be saved in any spreadsheet file format, including Microsoft Excel 2.x, SYLK, WKS, WK1, WK3, or DBx.

If you want to save the file, you can do one of the following:

Remove the sheet protection using the Unprotect Sheet command.

Save the file in the Normal file format or as a template.


Sheet is protected with password and formulas are displayed.  File format cannot be used.

This sheet has been protected with the Protect Sheet command and cannot be saved in the Text, CSV, or DIF file format while formulas are displayed.

If you want to save the file, you can do one of the following:

Display values and save in a Text, CSV, or DIF file format.

Remove the sheet protection using the Unprotect Sheet command.

Save the file in the Normal file format or as a template.


Value is too large.

The value you specified while running a demonstration in Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users is too large. The valid range varies depending on the specific action.

Run the command again and enter a smaller value.


Value is too small.

The value you specified while running a demonstration in Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users is too small. The valid range varies depending on the specific action.

Run the demonstration again and enter a larger value.


Unable to import file.

The Lotus 1-2-3 command /File Import was not able to import the specified file. Check to make sure that the filename and pathname are accurate.


Unable to combine file.

The Lotus 1-2-3 command /File Combine was not able to combine the specified file. Check to make sure that the filename and pathname are accurate.


Unable to extract file.

The Lotus 1-2-3 command /File Xtract was not able to extract the specified file. This could be caused by insufficient disk space or insufficient memory to complete the operation.

Try deleting unnecessary documents from your disk, using a different disk, or closing other open applications to make more memory available.


Cannot import from an open file.

In Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users, Microsoft Excel cannot run the File Import Text or File Import Numbers demonstration using a file that is already open. Close the file containing the text or numbers you want to import, and run the demonstration again.


Cannot extract to an open file.

The Lotus 1-2-3 command /File Xtract was not able to extract the specified file. Check to make sure that the file to which you are extracting is not open. Close the file and try again.


Directory does not exist.

The directory you specified for the File Directory demonstration in Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users does not exist.

Check the drive letter and the spelling of the path, and then run the demonstration again.

Example of a valid directory: "C:\EXCEL"


Cannot split when windows are locked.

The Lotus 1-2-3 command /Worksheet Window Horizontal (or Vertical) was not able to split the active window because the sheet is locked. Unlock the sheet using the Protection command on the Tools menu, and try again.

See Also

Help

Split and Remove Split Commands (Window Menu)


Lotus 1-2-3 Help demonstrations cannot be recorded.  Stop recording and continue?

You tried to start Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users while recording a macro, but Microsoft Excel does not record Lotus 1-2-3 Help demonstrations.

OK

Stops recording your macro and starts Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users.

Cancel

Cancels Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users and continues recording your macro.


Cannot post instructions because worksheet objects are currently hidden or protected.

In Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users, Microsoft Excel cannot post instructions to a worksheet with hidden or protected objects.

To post the instructions, you must either unhide or unprotect worksheet objects. You can also post the instructions to another worksheet.

To unhide worksheet objects

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options and then choose the View tab.

2.	Under Objects, select the Show All option button.

3.	Choose the OK button.

To unprotect worksheet objects

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Protection, and then choose Unprotect Sheet.

2.	Enter the password, and choose the OK button.


The date and time separators specified by the system are identical.  Substituting ':' for the time separator.

The date and time separators specified in the Country settings of the Control Panel are identical. Microsoft Excel will substitute a colon for the time separator. Use the International option in Windows Control Panel to manually change one of these  settings. See your system documentation for more information.


Text in your macro may need to be translated manually.

You are either saving a macro in the International format or saving a macro in a non-International format that was previously saved in the International format. This may cause problems if your macro was written or recorded when United States was not the country selected in the Control Panel's International dialog box, or when other Control Panel settings were not standard for an International macro.

If you decide to save your macro in the specified format, run your macro later and make sure it works correctly. You may have to modify the macro to run correctly under the current Control Panel settings.

OK

Saves the macro in specified format.

Cancel

Cancels the command.


No objects found.

You chose the Special button in the Go To dialog box and tried to select all objects in the document, but the document contains no objects, or all the objects are hidden.

To unhide objects

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options and then select the View tab.

2.	Under Objects, select the Show All option button.

3.	Choose the OK button.


Unable to save external link values.

You are saving a workbook with external links, but there is not enough free memory to save the link values.

The workbook will be saved as if you had chosen the Options command from the Tools menu, selected the Calculation tab, and cleared the Save External Link Values check box. Only the links to the external documents are saved, not the actual values. You can update the values the next time you open the workbook, provided that there is enough memory available.


Document not saved.

The save process was terminated. Some possible reasons for this include:

You pressed ESC to cancel the save operation.

A disk read or write error occurred.

The disk does not have enough space to hold the document.

Insert another disk, save on a disk in a different drive, or delete any unnecessary files, and then try saving again.


Cannot add duplicate source reference.

The source reference you are trying to add already exists in the All References list box in the Consolidate dialog box.

Specify a source reference that has not been added already.

See Also

Help

Consolidate Command (Data Menu)


Reference cannot be to a closed sheet.

The reference you specified while running a demonstration in Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users does not refer to an open document.

Open the document and run the demonstration again.


The list and decimal separators specified by the system are identical.  Substituting '[punctuation mark]' for the list separator
The list and decimal separators specified by the system are identical.  Substituting '[punctuation mark]' for the list separator.

The list and decimal separators specified in the International settings of the Control Panel are identical. Microsoft Excel will substitute an appropriate punctuation mark for the list separator. To manually change the International settings, see your system documentation.


Matrix must be square.

Only square matrices can be inverted.

A square matrix is a cell range containing the same number of columns as rows.

Example: $A$1:$D$4

Make sure the range you want to invert is a square matrix containing values, and then try again.


Matrices are incompatible for multiplication.

You specified two incompatible matrices while running the Data Matrix Multiply command in Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users. When you multiply two matrices, the number of columns in the first matrix must be the same as the number of rows in the second. Check the contents, size, and shape of each matrix, and then run the demonstration again.


Output range extends beyond edge of worksheet.

The output cell or range you specified while running a demonstration in Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users is too close to the bottom of the worksheet to accommodate the result. Specify a cell or range that is further up from the bottom of the worksheet, and then run the demonstration again.


Cannot post instructions because a worksheet is not active.

You opened Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users with the Instructions option selected, but the current sheet is not a worksheet. Make sure that the active sheet is a worksheet and try again.

-- Or --

The active worksheet is protected and must be unprotected before instructions can be posted. Choose Protection from the Tools menu, and then choose Unprotect Sheet. Enter the password if needed, and try again.


Cannot post instructions because worksheet is protected.

You opened Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users with the Instructions option selected, but the active worksheet is protected. To unprotect the worksheet, choose Protection from the Tools menu, and then choose Unprotect Sheet. Enter the password if needed, and try again.


Not enough data for Graph demonstration.

Microsoft Excel cannot run the Graph View demonstration in Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users because you have not specified an x-axis range, one or more series ranges, or both.

To specify the x-axis and series ranges and to see the Graph View demonstration

1.	In Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users, run the Graph X demonstration.

2.	Enter the x-axis range.

3.	Run the Graph A demonstration.

4.	Enter the first series range.

5.	To continue entering ranges for other series, run the demonstrations for Graph B, Graph C, and so on.

6.	Run the Graph View demonstration.

For a pie chart, you only need to specify one series range by running the Graph A demonstration. No x-axis range is required.


Cannot demo with custom menus.

In Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users, Microsoft Excel cannot complete the demonstration because you have modified one or more of the menus it needs.

You should avoid using custom menus when running demonstrations with Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users.


Missing NEXT function for loop.

There is a FOR or WHILE statement in the macro without a NEXT statement to go with it.

Halt

Stops the macro.

Step

Starts the "single-step" process to step through the macro one function at a time.

Continue

Continues running the macro.

Goto

Switches to the macro sheet and selects the cell where the error occurred.


Missing loop.

There is a NEXT statement in the macro without a FOR or WHILE statement to go with it.

Halt

Stops the macro.

Step

Starts the "single-step" process to step through the macro one function at a time.

Continue

Continues running the macro.

Goto

Switches to the macro sheet and selects the cell where the error occurred.


Missing IF.

There is an ELSE, ELSE.IF, or END.IF statement in the macro without an IF statement to go with it.

Halt

Stops the macro.

Step

Starts the "single-step" process to step through the macro one function at a time.

Continue

Continues running the macro.

Goto

Switches to the macro sheet and selects the cell where the error occurred.


Missing an END.IF function.

For every block form of the IF function (IF-THEN-ELSE), there must be one END.IF function to complete the block. Check the number of block form IF functions. Make sure you have an equal number of END.IF functions and that they are properly placed to complete each logical block of macro functions.


Cannot add another menu bar.

You have already added the maximum number of menu bars. The maximum number of custom menu bars is 15. Use the DELETE.BAR macro function to delete any menu bars you are not using before adding the new menu bar. Make sure you do not use the numbers of any deleted menu bars as arguments to other functions.


Command or menu does not exist.

You are attempting to display a command or menu that doesn't exist. If you are displaying a built-in command or menu, make sure you are using the correct identifying name or number. If you are displaying a custom command or menu, make sure it is correctly defined on the macro sheet.


Cannot delete built-in or active menu bars.

You cannot delete built-in Microsoft Excel menu bars or the active custom menu bar.

To delete the displayed custom menu bar, use the SHOW.BAR macro function to display another menu bar, and then try the delete operation again.


Cannot enable built-in commands.

You can neither enable nor disable built-in Microsoft Excel commands using a macro. You can enable and disable custom menu commands only by using the ENABLE.COMMAND macro function.


Names cannot look like references.

A name in your macro resembles a reference. Names cannot resemble an A1-style reference when you are using that style. If you are using the R1C1 reference style, however, names can resemble the A1 reference style. Type a valid name in place of the invalid one.


Cannot use name that is a noncontiguous reference.

The selected object or chart contains a formula that refers to a name that is a reference to nonadjacent cells.

From the Insert menu, choose Name and then choose Define and redefine the name as a simple reference, or use another named reference.


Stationery document is not saved in Normal format. Opening as a nonstationery file.

You created a stationery document from the Apple desktop that was not saved in Microsoft Excel Workbook file format. Microsoft Excel will open the file as a nonstationery file.

You can save the document as a template in Microsoft Excel. The template will function in the same way as a stationery document.

You can also save the document in Microsoft Excel Workbook format, and then make it a stationery document from the Apple desktop.


Cannot cut part of a publisher.

Microsoft Excel treats the cells in a publisher as an array. You cannot change part of this array by cutting part of it.

To continue

1.	Choose the OK button.

2. If necessary, press ESC to cancel the current action.

To alter the individual values, you must replace the publisher cells with their values. If you replace the array, it will no longer be a publisher. If you open any documents that contain subscribers to this publisher's edition file, an error message will be displayed.

To replace the array with its values

1.	Select the array by pressing CONTROL+SLASH (/).

--Or--

From the Edit menu, choose Go To, and choose the Special button. Choose the Current Array option, and then press RETURN.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Copy.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

4.	Select the Values option.

The array no longer exists; only its values remain. You can change these values if you want.

See Also

Help

Go To Special Dialog Box

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)


Selection too large. Continue without Undo?

Microsoft Excel will not be able to undo changes made to that many cells. You might be able to complete the operation, but you will not be able to undo it with the Undo command on the Edit menu.

OK

Proceeds with the operation; you will not be able to undo it.

Cancel

Cancels the operation, leaving the document as it was before the operation began.


Document not saved. Any previously saved copy has been deleted.

The save process was terminated. Microsoft Excel deleted the original document from the disk in order to save the version in memory, but has not saved the new version successfully.

Insert another disk, save on a disk in a different drive, or delete unnecessary files with the Find File command on the File menu, and then try saving again.

This happens most often when the file you are attempting to save contains changes that were made since the file was opened. These changes increased the size of the file beyond the capacity of its original source (disk).


No source references specified for consolidation.

You must specify at least one reference as a source for data consolidation in the All References box in the Consolidate dialog box.

To specify a source reference

1.	Choose the OK button.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Consolidate again.

3.	In the Reference box, specify a source reference.

4.	Choose the Add button to add the reference to the list of source references.


Cannot open consolidation source file '[filename]'.

Microsoft Excel is unable to open the consolidation source file and therefore cannot perform the consolidation.

There are several possible reasons for this:

Check to be sure that you have specified either Microsoft Excel or Lotus 1-2-3 files as the source files for your consolidation.

The file doesn't exist in the current directory. Change to the correct directory or copy the file to the current directory.

The spelling is incorrect. Check it and try again.

You have used an incomplete or incorrect path. Type a full path and try again.

The source refers to a protected file and you entered the wrong password. Check the password and try again.


No data was consolidated.

Microsoft Excel was not able to consolidate any data.

There are several possible reasons for this:

The categories used in the destination don't match those found in the source references.

All of the cells in the destination area contain formulas. Microsoft Excel will not replace formulas with consolidated data.

An error occurred during the opening of one or more of the source references.

Check the source references for missing data and the destination area for formulas, and then try again.


Consolidate_Area reference is not valid.

The Consolidate_Area must refer to a single rectangular reference on the current worksheet. From the Insert menu, choose Name, and then choose Define. Verify that the cells referenced in the Refers To box are correct.


Source reference overlaps destination area.

The source reference and the destination reference are overlapping. Microsoft Excel will not consolidate data if these references overlap.

Check the references you have typed and try again.

See Also

Help

Consolidate Command (Data Menu)


Cannot create links to consolidation sheet.

In the Consolidate dialog box, the current worksheet is specified as a source reference, and the Create Links To Source Data check box is selected. A consolidation worksheet cannot create a link to itself.

Either consolidate your data onto another worksheet, or delete any references to the current worksheet in the All References list.

See Also

Help

Consolidate Command (Data Menu)


Style name is not valid.

The style name you selected consists of only blank spaces or other invalid characters.

Check the style name you entered in the Style Name box in the Style dialog box, and try the operation again.

See Also

Help

Applying a style

Copying styles from another workbook

Redefining a style


Style '[name]' not found.

You tried to apply a style that does not exist, using the APPLY.STYLE macro function. Check to see that the style name is spelled correctly in the macro, and that the desired style exists on the sheet on which you are applying it. You might need to first define the style on the sheet using the DEFINE.STYLE macro function.

See Also

APPLY.STYLE

DEFINE.STYLE


Input and output ranges overlap.

The input range and output range you specified for the Data Matrix Multiply or Data Matrix Invert command contain one or more of the same cells.

Specify an output range that does not include any cells in the input range, and then run the command again.


The selection already contains only visible cells.
The selection already contains only visible cells..

You clicked the Select Visible Cells button on the toolbar, but there are no hidden cells in the current selection.

Choose the OK button to close the message box.


Cannot use that command in data entry mode.

You tried to issue a command that is not allowed while in Data Entry mode, which was activated by the ENTER.DATA macro function. You can use the ENTER.DATA macro function again to exit Data Entry mode, or you can press the ESC key to exit Data Entry mode.

See Also

Help

ENTER.DATA


Insert new page into printer.

You are using the LINE.PRINT macro function with the Wait argument set to TRUE or you are running a Lotus 1-2-3 macro that has the /wgdpw (Wait) feature on. Insert a new page into the printer.

See Also

Help

LINE.PRINT


AutoFormat cannot detect a table around the active cell. Select the range you want to format, and then choose the command again.
AutoFormat cannot detect a table around the active cell. Select the range you want to format and choose the command again.

You tried to perform an AutoFormat operation with only one cell selected, a cell that has no adjacent nonblank cells. If you select one cell in a range of adjacent nonblank cells, AutoFormat selects the entire range--called the current region--and applies the selected table format. If you select a cell with no adjacent nonblank cells, AutoFormat cannot determine which cells are part of a table. Select the range you want to format; then choose the AutoFormat command again.

See Also

Help

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Worksheets)

Go To Special Dialog Box


Continue checking at beginning of sheet?

Microsoft Excel has checked the worksheet from the active cell to the last cell. Spell checking continues from the active cell to the right and down the worksheet.

Yes

Continues checking from the beginning of the worksheet to the active cell.

No

Cancels the operation. Any corrections that have already been made will remain.


Finished checking spelling '[document]'.
Finished spell checking '[document]'.

Microsoft Excel has completed the spelling check.


Cannot initialize spelling checker.

Microsoft Excel could not run the spelling checker. Make sure that the file named MSSPELL.DLL is in your WINDOWS\MSAPPS\PROOF directory.

If the spelling file does not exist on your hard drive, run the Microsoft Excel Setup program again to reinstall the spelling checker.


Incompatible version of spelling checker.

Microsoft Excel cannot find a compatible version of the spelling checker on your machine. Run the Microsoft Excel Setup program again to reinstall Microsoft Excel.


Custom dictionary '[name]' does not exist. Do you want to create it?

Microsoft Excel could not find the indicated custom dictionary. Make sure that the file is in your WINDOWS\MSAPPS\PROOF directory.

If the indicated file does not exist on your hard drive, choose Yes to create it.


Selection is not valid.

If you chose the Copy or Paste command from the Edit menu, the copy and paste areas cannot overlap unless they are exactly the same.

If you chose the Cut or Paste command from the Edit menu, and the paste area you select is a single cell, the pasted data must not extend beyond the edges of the worksheet.

If you chose the Name command from the Insert menu, and then chose Create, the row or column containing the proposed names will not be included in the definitions of the names.

If the names you are creating are listed in a row, you must select more than one row.

If the names you are creating are listed in a column, you must select more than one column.

If you chose the Table command from the Data menu, you must select a single rectangle that is more than one row high and more than one column wide.


Formula is too long.

The formula you are entering is too long or complex. Try breaking the formula into two or more parts and entering each into a different cell.


Text is too long.

The text you are entering is too long. You can enter a maximum of 255 characters in the formula bar or in a dialog box. Reduce the number of characters used in the text string or cancel the entry. If you are running a spell check, the maximum allowed length of a word is 40 characters. Please click the Ignore button to bypass words over 40 characters in length.


Number format is too long.

On the Number tab in the Format Cells dialog box, you typed a custom format that is invalid. Check the type and number of placeholders and format codes, and try again.

See Also

Help

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)


Parentheses do not match.

You have entered a formula in the formula bar with incorrect or missing parentheses. Although Microsoft Excel can add missing parentheses to simple formulas automatically, the formula you entered has more than one possible location for additional parentheses. Check the formula and add the parentheses in the appropriate place in the formula.


'[Incorrect number of]' arguments.

You have added either too few or too many arguments to the function you just entered. Check the proper syntax of the function, and reenter it.

See Also

Help

Function Command (Insert Menu)


Error in formula: missing operand.

You have typed an incomplete formula. You must include an operand following each operator. For example, =A1+A2+ is an incomplete formula with a missing operand following the second plus sign. Add the missing operand to the formula or delete the extra operator.


Cannot access file '[filename]'.

You are trying to save, open, or link to a document that currently cannot be accessed. Some possible reasons and solutions for this include:

The document name or path you specified in a dialog box does not exist. Check the spelling of the name or path, and try to access the document again.

The document you are trying to open is being used by another application. When the document is no longer being used, try to open it again.

The name of the document you are trying to save is the same as the name of another document that is read-only or that is being used by another application.

Save your document with a different name. If you want your document to have the same name, change the read-only document's attributes to read-write, or wait until the in-use document is no longer being used.

You are trying to save a document to a read-only network directory or disk. Save the document to a different network directory or disk.

You are trying to revert to the saved version of an open document, but the saved version has been deleted. Save the open document with another name, and then open the backup version of the deleted document if one exists.

The document has become corrupt or damaged. The buttons that appear in the message box vary depending on the cause of the error.

OK

Closes the message.

Retry

Tries to access the document again.

Cancel

Cancels the command.


Invalid register id, or function not registered yet.

You have used a dynamic link library (DLL) function or command that has not been registered in the current session. DLL functions and commands that you want to use must be registered each time Microsoft Excel is started.


No references found.

You tried to use the Apply command to replace references in formulas with their equivalent names. Microsoft Excel could not find any references that match the definitions of the selected names.

See Also

Help

Apply Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)


Input cell reference is not valid.

When you are constructing a data table, references for the row and column input cells must refer to single cells. The cell referenced for each cannot be within the table itself.

For a one-input table, you will have either a row input cell or a column input cell, but not both.

See Also

Help

Table Command (Data Menu)


Update embedded objects?

You chose the Save or Save As command from the File menu while a workbook containing open embedded objects was active. You can choose to save or discard the newly edited versions of the embedded objects.

Yes

Updates the embedded objects and saves the workbook.

No

Does not update the embedded objects and saves the workbook.

Cancel

Cancels the command.


Workbook is protected and cannot be changed.

You cannot make changes to protected workbooks. To unprotect the workbook, choose the Protection command from the Tools menu, and then choose Unprotect Workbook.


This chart plots data from a closed worksheet. Use the Links command on the Edit menu to open the source workbook.

You have chosen the ChartWizard button while the source worksheet for the active chart is not open. The ChartWizard uses references to the source worksheet to adjust the data series of a selected chart. Choose the Links command on the Edit menu to open the source worksheet.

See Also

Help

ChartWizard Button

Links Command (Edit Menu)


Update '[filename]'?

You chose the Exit command from the File menu while editing a Microsoft Excel document that will become an embedded object in another document. You can choose to send the Microsoft Excel object to the destination document, or discard it.

Yes

Sends the embedded object to the destination document and quits Microsoft Excel.

No

Does not send the embedded object to the destination document and quits Microsoft Excel.

Cancel

Cancels the command.


Cannot run '[program]'. The program or one of its components is damaged or missing.

You ran a macro that includes the EXEC macro function, but the EXEC function could not open the indicated program. Check to make sure that all the files necessary for the program to run are available, and that the syntax of the EXEC function is correct. You may need to include the path along with the name of the program you need to run.

The EXEC function uses the form:  =EXEC(program_text, window_num)

Make sure that the name of the program matches the argument program_text exactly, and that it is surrounded by quotation marks in the formula.

For example:  =EXEC("C:\WINWORD.EXE", 1)

See Also

EXEC


A surface chart must contain at least two series.

You attempted to create a surface chart with only one data series selected on the worksheet. Either select two or more data series before creating the surface chart, or select another chart type.


Criteria range is not valid.

The criteria range must be a single rectangle more than one row high.

Redefine the criteria range by choosing the Filter command from the Data menu, and then choosing Advanced Filter. Select the Criteria Range box, and then select the cells you wish to use as a criteria range.


Database or list range is not valid.

Your list must be a single rectangle more than one row high. The first row of the list must contain the field names.

When defining a list, make sure you include in the selection the field names and an extra blank row below the last record of your list. A worksheet can have only one list defined at a time.

Redefine the list by selecting the data, choosing Filter from the Data menu, and then choosing the Advanced Filter command.

See Also

Help

Sorting and Filtering Data in a List


Extract range is not valid.

A field name in the range specified in the Copy To box of the Advanced Filter dialog box does not match any of the field names in your list.

The extract range must be a single rectangle containing either field names, or field names with empty cells beneath them that will contain the extracted data. The field names in the extract range must match the field names in the original list. Either one or more field names in the extract range is not from the original list.

Try copying the field names from the first row of the list and pasting them into the first row of the extract range. Choose Filter from the Data menu, choose the Advanced Filter command, redefine the extract range in the Copy To box, and then choose OK.


Personal Macro Workbook in the startup directory must stay open for recording.

You tried to record a personal macro, but the Personal Macro Workbook in the startup directory is closed, empty, or corrupted.

To open the Personal Macro Workbook

1.	From the File menu, choose Open.

2.	Select PERSONAL.XLS in the XLSTART directory.

3.	Choose the OK button.

If you cannot open the Personal Macro Workbook, it may be corrupted. If you think the Personal Macro Workbook is corrupted, you can delete it using the Find File command on the File Menu

Note  If you delete the Personal Macro Workbook, any previously recorded personal macro will also be deleted.

When you next record a personal macro, a new Personal Macro Workbook will be created.


You cannot save the Personal Macro Workbook in the startup directory. Save it elsewhere now and move it to the startup directory
You cannot save the Personal Macro Workbook in the startup directory. Save it elsewhere now and move it to the startup directory later.

You tried to save a Personal Macro Workbook, but the XLSTART directory does not exist, the disk on which the XLSTART directory resides is full, or you do not have write privileges for the PERSONAL.XLS workbook. Save the Personal Macro Workbook to another directory, and move it to the startup directory later.

See Also

Help

Alternate Startup Directory


Invalid '[dictionary name]'.

You attempted to check spelling, but Microsoft Excel could not open the specified dictionary. If the main dictionary was specified, you must rerun the Microsoft Excel Setup program. If a custom dictionary was specified, you will need to first delete or rename the existing custom dictionary file on disk and then re-create it.

See Also

Help

Spelling Command (Tools Menu)


Cannot read '[dictionary name]'.

You attempted to check spelling, but Microsoft Excel could not read the specified dictionary. If the main dictionary was specified, rerun the Microsoft Excel Setup program. If a custom dictionary was specified, either specify another dictionary, or delete or rename the existing custom dictionary file on disk and then re-create it.

See Also

Help

Spelling Command (Tools Menu)


Cannot write '[dictionary name]'.

You attempted to check spelling, but Microsoft Excel could not write to the specified dictionary file. Check to make sure that the specified dictionary file is not read-only. Otherwise, if the main dictionary was specified, you must rerun the Microsoft Excel Setup program. If a custom dictionary was specified, you will need to first delete or rename the existing custom dictionary file on disk and then re-create it.

See Also

Help

Spelling Command (Tools Menu)


Cannot create '[dictionary name]'.

You attempted to create a new custom dictionary, but Microsoft Excel could not create the file. Possible causes are:

The filename you used for the custom dictionary is invalid.

There is not enough room on your disk for the custom dictionary file.

You tried to save the custom dictionary to a read-only disk.

See Also

Help

Spelling Command (Tools Menu)


Cannot share '[dictionary name]'.

You attempted to check spelling, but the specified dictionary file was in use by another application. If you are running another application that is using the dictionary file, quit the other application and try running the spelling checker again. If you are using Microsoft Excel on a network, another person may be using the dictionary file. Wait and try to check spelling again later.


Custom dictionary is full.

The specified custom dictionary is full. Create a new custom dictionary with a different name, or delete some entries in the current custom dictionary to make room for the new entries you want to include.

See Also

Help

Spelling Command (Tools Menu)


Cannot open '[dictionary name]'.

You attempted to check spelling, but Microsoft Excel could not open the specified dictionary. If the main dictionary was specified, you must rerun the Microsoft Excel Setup program. If a custom dictionary was specified, make sure the filename refers to an actual dictionary file.

See Also

Help

Spelling Command (Tools Menu)


Dictionary is too large.

The specified custom dictionary is too large. Create a new custom dictionary with a different name, or delete some entries in the current custom dictionary to make room for the new entries you want to include.

See Also

Help

Spelling Command (Tools Menu)


No spelling errors found in '[selected text]'.

You selected text in the formula bar, on the worksheet, or in a text box and then chose the Spelling Command from the Tools menu. Microsoft Excel determined that the selected text is spelled correctly.

See Also

Help

Spelling Command (Tools Menu)


Font size must be between 1 and 409 points.
Font size must be between 1 and 409.

Font size is measured in points. Negative values are not valid. The maximum size you can enter is 409 points. The Font Tab in the Format Cells dialog box lists the sizes available for display or for printing. If you type a size that differs from one of those in the box, Microsoft Excel attempts to produce that size as closely as possible.

Depending on your screen display and your printer driver, the results may appear ragged. Check the font size you specified and try the operation again.


Cannot find '[linked document]'. Copy from:

The document to which you have established a link has been moved, renamed, or deleted, or was never created. You can copy the linked values from a different document, or from the same document if it was moved or renamed.

OK

Copies values from the alternate document you have selected. Select documents the same way you select them using the Open command on the File menu.

Cancel

Cancels the dialog box and does not update the linked values.

Selecting a document in this dialog box and choosing the OK button is only a temporary solution.

To redirect links permanently

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Links.

2.	Select the correct source file in the Links list.

3.	Choose the Change Source button.

See Also

Help

Links Command (Edit Menu)


Cannot open chart created in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh version 1.X.

This chart, created in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh version 1.5 or earlier, cannot be opened.

You must open the Macintosh worksheet from which you got the data for the chart and then recreate the chart using a newer version of Microsoft Excel.


Cannot open normal document created in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh version 1.X.

This is a normal document created in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh version 1.5 or earlier.

To open the document with Microsoft Excel for Windows

1.	Open the file in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh.

2.	Save it in SYLK format.

3.	Transfer the file to an IBM PC or compatible computer.

4.	Open the file in Microsoft Excel for Windows by choosing the Open command from the File menu.


Remote data not accessible. Start application '[application]'?

You initiated a dynamic data exchange (DDE) link to an application that is not running.

Yes

Microsoft Excel starts the application to access the data.

No

Microsoft Excel does not start the application. The procedure is canceled, and the data is not accessed.


Existing remote links will be terminated.

You chose the General tab from the Options dialog box and selected the Ignore Other Applications check box. This terminates existing remote links.

OK

Remote requests will be ignored and existing remote links will be terminated.

Cancel

Cancels the command.


Macro interrupted at cell: '[reference]'

You pressed CTRL+BREAK while running a Lotus 1-2-3 macro.

Click the OK button or press ENTER to return to Ready mode.


Macro error at cell: '[reference]'

This cell contains one of the following:

A misspelled or invalid command, keyword, or argument.

A macro statement that is not compatible with Lotus 1-2-3 Release 2.01. You can open any 1-2-3 file in Microsoft Excel, but you can run only macros that are compatible with Lotus 1-2-3 Release 2.01. The Macro Interpreter for Lotus 1-2-3 Users does provide some 1-2-3 Release 2.2 macro compatibility.

A command that attaches or starts a Lotus 1-2-3 add-in. Lotus 1-2-3 add-ins are not supported.

The macro code /a was used to attach or invoke an add-in. Remove all occurrences of this keystroke, as well as any add-in commands such as {app1}.

The macro was invoked from a frozen pane. You must start a macro from an unfrozen pane.

The {let} command was used to insert a file linking formula. You can use the syntax '+<<file.wk1>>A1~ instead.

The code {getlabel} or {getnumber} was called from Edit mode.

A macro statement that leaves the macro in Menu mode.

A macro statement that calls a subroutine on another sheet. This is Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3.0 or greater functionality and is not supported.

See Also

Help

Switching from Other Applications


Cannot end macro in a menu.

When you run a Lotus 1-2-3 macro in Microsoft Excel, the macro cannot end with a menu activated. Edit the macro so that it does not end with keystrokes that leave the macro with a menu activated.

Click the OK button or press ENTER to return to Ready mode.


Too many files to mail
Too many files to mail.

You attempted to mail too many files as a group. Send smaller groups of files.


Cannot load the mail service.  Check your mail installation
Cannot load the mail service. Check your mail installation.

You attempted to send mail, but a necessary mail resource was missing or damaged. Reinstall your mail service and try again.


Cannot open files with FM? or ALL format files directly. Open the corresponding WK? file.
Cannot open files with FM? or ALL format directly. Open the corresponding WK? file.

You tried to open a Lotus 1-2-3 FMT or FM3 format file created by the Impress add-in. Microsoft Excel uses these files for formatting information, but cannot open them directly. Instead, open the WK1 or WK3 file associated with the FMT or FM3 file you want. The corresponding FMT or FM3 file information will be incorporated when the file is opened in Microsoft Excel.


Reference is not valid.  Reference must be a simple external reference to a worksheet.

The selected reference either refers to a document other than a workbook, or is a complex external reference. A simple reference is an absolute reference to a cell, range, named cell, or named range. A complex reference is anything that is not a simple reference. For example, =[BOOK1.XLS]Sheet1!$A$1 is a simple reference, while =[BOOK1.XLS]Sheet1!$A$1+[BOOK1.XLS]Sheet2!$A$1 is a complex reference.


Reference is not valid.  Reference must be to an open worksheet.

You are trying to edit a reference to a workbook that is not open. When you are editing a series, the source workbook must be open. Open the source workbook and try again.


Cannot enter an array formula into a range of cells which are not all locked or all unlocked.

You tried to enter an array formula into a range of cells in which some of the cells are locked and others are unlocked. To enter the array formula in this range of cells, use the Protection tab in the Format Cells dialog box to either lock or unlock all of the cells in the range.


Cannot read this binary file. If the file was created in a version of Microsoft Excel later than 5.0, use that version to save i
Cannot read this binary file. If the file was created in a version of Microsoft Excel later than 5.0, use that version to save it as a Microsoft Excel 5.0 file. Open file as text?

You tried to open a binary file that was in a format that Microsoft Excel could not read. This file could be:

A file from a version of Microsoft Excel that is later than the version you are running. In this case, quit this version of Microsoft Excel, run the later version of Microsoft Excel, open the file, and use the Save As command on the File menu to change the file type to Excel 5.0.

A file from another program in a format that Microsoft Excel does not read. Try copying the data from the other application and pasting it into Microsoft Excel.

A file, such as a program, that is not intended to be opened in a spreadsheet. Try opening another file.

A file that has been corrupted. Try opening another file.


Formula is too complex to be assigned to object.

You tried to assign to a worksheet object an expression that cannot be used here. Try using a reference or a name. If you need to use a register_id number or a more complicated expression, assign it to a name, and then assign the name to the object.


File may contain nondisplayable text and formats from the Far East.

A Microsoft Excel document that was created by a Chinese, Japanese, or Korean version of Microsoft Excel has been loaded into a Western version of Microsoft Excel. Only ASCII characters are transferred in a readable form. The character sets are significantly different and have only ASCII characters in common. Kanji, Hiragana, Katakana, Chinese, Hangeul, and Hanja characters and number formats using these are not displayed properly in Western versions of Microsoft Excel.

This message can be ignored if the file contains only ASCII text and uses no Far Eastern number formats. To preserve and read the text properly, one must reload the file using the Far Eastern version of Microsoft Excel that was used to create the file originally. Resaving a Far Eastern file once from a Western version will not corrupt the Far Eastern text in the file. However, the text may be corrupted by Microsoft Excel's built-in code page conversion, if it is subjected to multiple open and save sequences in more than one environment (Macintosh, Windows, or OS/2).


Cannot save '[filename]' because the volume is locked
Cannot save '[filename]' because the volume is locked.

You tried to save a file on a disk that is locked, or on a disk for which you do not have write privileges. Try saving the document on a different disk.


Database or list range is not defined.
Database range is not defined.

You tried to perform an operation that requires a defined list range.

To define a list

1.	On the worksheet, select the range that you want to define as a list.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Filter, and then choose Advanced Filter.

See Also

Help

Sorting and Filtering Data in a List


Criteria range is not defined.

You tried to perform an operation that requires a defined criteria range.

To define a criteria range

1.	On the worksheet, select the range that you want to define as the criteria range.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Filter, and then choose Advanced Filter.

See Also

Help

Sorting and Filtering Data in a List


Extract range is not defined
Extract range is not defined.

To define this range

1.	From the Data menu, choose Filter, and then choose Advanced Filter.

2.	Under Action, select Copy To Another Location.

3.	In the Copy To box, select or enter the range you want to copy the filtered data to.

4.	Choose OK.

See Also

Help

Sorting and Filtering Data in a List


Reference must be to a macro sheet.

You can run a macro by choosing Macro from the Tools Menu, and then choosing one of the macros listed in the Macro Name/Reference box.

If the macro you want to run is on the active macro sheet, the reference you type in the Macro Name/Reference box should be either a single cell reference or a name defined on the macro sheet that refers to the first cell in a macro.

If the macro you want to run is on another macro sheet, you must include the name of the macro sheet as part of the reference.

If the macro you want to run is in another workbook, you must include the name of the book and the macro sheet as part of the reference.

Examples

A1	Runs the macro starting in cell A1 on the active macro sheet.

[BOOK1.XLS]Macros!A1	Runs the macro starting in cell A1 on the Macros macro sheet in BOOK1.XLS.

[BOOK2.XLS]Plans!Sort	Runs the macro starting in the cell with the name Sort on the Plans macro sheet in BOOK2.XLS.

Note that the Run button in the Macro dialog box cannot be used to run a Lotus 1-2-3 macro. Instead, use the CTRL+[letter] key combination.


That user-defined autoformat option does not exist.

One of the autoformat macro functions calls for a chart type that is not available. Change the number to correspond to an existing chart type.


Some custom formats will not fit on the destination sheet.

When you are cutting and pasting between worksheets or copying filtered data to a different worksheet, all custom number formats are copied to the destination sheet. The total number of formats on the destination sheet plus the number of custom formats needed for the filtered data cannot be more than 64. Filtered data that uses the custom formats will not revert to General format.

To regain formatting, you must choose the Cells command from the Format menu and select the Number tab to delete some custom formats from the destination sheet. This makes room for the new formats. Next, do one of the following:

Add the custom formats you want to use and reformat the transferred data.

From the Data menu, choose Filter, and then choose Advanced Filter and copy the data again.


Unit of log scale must be at least 10.

A log scale axis is based on powers of 10.

When specifying major and minor unit increments, you must specify a value of at least 10, and the value must be a multiple of 10.


Cannot show outline symbols because no outline exists on the active worksheet. Create an outline?

Outline symbols are displayed only when you have an outline on the active worksheet. If a range is selected on your worksheet, Microsoft Excel creates an outline using that data. If there is no selection, Microsoft Excel creates an outline using all the data below and to the right of the active cell.

OK

Creates an outline.

Cancel

Cancels the action.

See Also

Help

Group And Outline Command (Data Menu)


This button can be used only with Microsoft Windows for Pen Computing.

You clicked the Constrain Numeric button, but Microsoft Windows is the active environment. This button can be used only with Microsoft Windows for Pen Computing.


Cannot find matching data.

Microsoft Excel could not find what you are searching for.

If you used the Find command on the Edit menu, no cell in the selection contains what you typed.

If you think there should be a match, check your typing and try again.


Consolidation reference is not valid.

You entered an invalid reference for a consolidation. To enter a valid reference, use the form: [workbook_name]sheet_name!cell_ref

Check the form of your references in the Consolidate dialog box, and try again.

See Also

Help

Consolidate Command (Data Menu)


Replace contents of destination cells?

You tried to move cells by selecting them and dragging them to a new location, but the destination area is not blank. Choose the OK button to replace the existing cells with the cells you are moving; choose the Cancel button to cancel the operation.

Note You can cancel the display of this alert by clearing the Alert Before Overwriting Cells check box in the Edit Tab of the Options dialog box.


Cannot access directory '[directory name]'.

You are trying to save, open, or link to a document in a directory that currently cannot be accessed. Possible reasons for this include:

The path you specified in a dialog box does not exist. Check the spelling of the path, and try to access the directory again.

You are trying to save a document to a read-only network directory or disk.

Save the document to a different network directory or disk.

OK

Closes the message box.

Retry

Tries to access the directory again.

Cancel

Cancels the operation.


Current printer is unavailable. Select another printer.

The printer you specified to print your document cannot be found. Make sure the printer is properly connected and try again, or select a different printer by using the Printers option in the Control Panel. For more information, see your Windows documentation.


There are no printers installed.  Use the Printers option in the Control Panel to install a printer.
There are no printers installed. Use the Printers option in Control Panel to install a printer.

There are no printers currently installed. Install a printer by selecting the Printers option in the Control Panel.  For more information, see your Windows documentation.


The header or footer cannot be longer than 255 characters. Delete some text, or make the formatting less complex.

The combination of text and formatting you entered in the Header /Footer tab of the Page Setup dialog box exceeds 255 characters. If you have entered fewer than 255 characters, your formatting may be too complex. For example, changing the font to MS Sans Serif uses an additional 16 characters, which are not visible in the dialog box.

Either delete some text or simplify the formatting to reduce the length to fewer than 255 characters.


'[Filename]' was created in a previous version of Microsoft Excel. Do you want to update it to Microsoft Excel 5.0 format?

You are trying to save a file from a previous version of Microsoft Excel. To replace the existing file format with the Microsoft Excel 5.0 format, choose the Yes button. To retain the previous version's file format, choose the No button.


Cannot rename a sheet with the same name as another sheet.

You are trying to change the name of a sheet in a workbook to a name that is already being used in this workbook. Try again, specifying a unique name for the sheet.

See Also

Help

Sheet Command (Format Menu)


File is not a valid wave file.

The file you specified does not contain sound data that Microsoft Excel accepts. Try specifying another file instead. Typically, sound files used with Microsoft Windows have a .WAV filename extension.


Recording buffer is full.

You tried to record a sound that was longer than two minutes, which is the maximum length that Microsoft Excel allows. You can accept the first two minutes of recorded sound, or you can record a shorter sound. To monitor the length of a recording, watch the recording status bar.


Cannot load wave file.

Microsoft Excel encountered an error while opening the specified sound file. The file may be corrupted, or it may be in use by another application.


Cannot open waveform output device.

Microsoft Excel could not play the requested sound because the output device was unavailable. Make sure that you are not currently running other applications that are trying to play sounds, and then try again.


Cannot open waveform input device.

Microsoft Excel could not record any sounds because the input device was unavailable. Make sure that you are not currently running other applications that are trying to record sounds, and then try again.


Cannot play Macintosh sounds with Windows.

While using Microsoft Excel for Windows, you tried to play a sound that was recorded using Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh. Microsoft Excel for Windows can only play sounds that were recorded using Windows applications. Try playing another sound, or play the sound using Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh.


File error Some number formats may have been lost.
File error. Some number formats may have been lost.

The Microsoft Excel workbook you are opening contains some number format errors. These number formats have been changed to General. No data has been lost.


Illegal reference argument at: '[reference]'

The macro function contains an error at the specified cell.

In the macro function, check the reference argument in the specified cell and try again.


Cannot open a copy while the template '[template]' is already open.
Cannot open a copy while the template '[template]' is open.

You are attempting to open a copy of a template while the template itself is open. Before you can open a copy of the template, you must close the template.

See Also

Help

Creating a new workbook based on a template


Modify existing outline?

You tried to create an outline on a worksheet that already contains an outline.

OK

Ignores the existing outline and creates a new one.

Cancel

Cancels the procedure.

See Also

Help

Settings Command (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)


Cannot print chart with the current scale and paper size. Select a larger scale percentage or a smaller paper size.

You can print charts on most standard paper sizes, but Microsoft Excel cannot print on paper that is longer than approximately 22 inches on any side. Some plotter paper sizes may be too large.

There are three ways to get the chart to print at the size you want:

In the Page tab in the Page Setup dialog box, select a smaller paper size.

Under Scaling in the Page tab in the Page Setup dialog box, enter a higher number. Then manually adjust the size of the chart window on the screen to the size you want.

Embed the chart in a worksheet.


Invalid sheet for consolidation.

You entered an invalid reference for a consolidation. You cannot use chart sheets in a consolidation.

Check your references in the Consolidate dialog box, and try again.


Delete the '[name]' toolbar?

You chose the Delete button in the Toolbars dialog box with the name of a custom toolbar selected in the Show Toolbars box.

OK

Permanently deletes the selected custom toolbar.

Cancel

Cancels the operation.


Error in parse line.

The parse line contains an error. A right bracket ( ] ) may be missing following a left bracket. Check to see that every left bracket has a matching right bracket and vice versa. Also check to see that there are no nested brackets.


References in series formulas must be external references to worksheets.

The references you entered for your chart are not external references to the workbook containing the data for your chart.

External references take the following form:

[workbook name!]worksheet name!cell or range reference.

Example: [BOOK1.XLS]Sheet1!A1:B2

Change the references to external references by editing the series formula in the formula bar. You can type the changes to the references or select the cells on the underlying worksheet, and Microsoft Excel will enter them as external references automatically.


Cannot ungroup.  To start an outline, select the detail rows or columns and group them.

You tried to ungroup a row or column without first creating an outline on your worksheet. To create an outline, select the detail rows or columns, choose the Group And Outline command from the Data menu, and then choose Group.


Cannot create an outline.

Microsoft Excel is unable to create an outline because it can't determine a relationship between any formulas on which to base the outline. There are several possible reasons for this:

The worksheet is blank or contains only constant values or text.

None of the formulas in the worksheet depend on cells in the same row or column.

The relationships among the formulas in the worksheet are ambiguous, and the resulting outline summaries point in conflicting directions.

Examples

Cell A5 contains =A3+A4+A6.  All references are in the same column (as required), but no outline direction is apparent, so the outline could not be created.

Cell A5 contains =A2+A3+A4.  In this example, an outline can be created in which row 5 is a summary row for the three preceding subordinate rows.

Make sure your formulas depend on cells in the same rows or columns and that their relationships are in one direction, and then try to create the outline again.

See Also

Help

Group And Outline Command (Data Menu)


A group must contain two or more sheets.

To edit several worksheets and macro sheets as a single group, you must have at least two sheets selected.

To continue

1.	Choose the OK button.

2.	Hold down CTRL and select the sheets you want to add to the group.


This chart plots data from more than one worksheet. Double-click the series you want to change, and then select the Name and Val
This chart plots data from more than one worksheet.  Double-click the series you want to change, and then select the Name and Values tab to change the series' plot data.

You have chosen the ChartWizard button while a chart that uses data from multiple worksheets is active. The ChartWizard can only be used to adjust the data series of a chart that has a single source worksheet. The active chart has references to more than one worksheet in its data series formulas. Double-click the series you want to change, and then select the Name And Values tab to change the series' plot. To add new data, you can drag and drop the new points or series from a worksheet directly onto the chart, or you can use the New Data command on the Insert menu.

See Also

Help

Overview of Adding and Deleting Chart Data

Overview of Changing the Way Your Data Is Plotted


This chart graphs constant data. Double-click the series you want to change, and then select the Name and Values tab to change t
This chart plots constant data.  Double-click the series you want to change, and then select the Name And Values tab to change the series' plot data.

You have chosen the ChartWizard button while an unlinked chart is active. The ChartWizard uses external references to another worksheet to adjust the data series of a selected chart. The active chart has no external references in its data series formulas. Double-click the series you want to change, and then select the Name And Values tab to change its plot data.

See Also

Help

Overview of Changing the Way Your Data Is Plotted


You cannot use Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users while in group edit mode.

You cannot use Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users when you are editing multiple sheets as a group.

To continue

1.	Choose the OK button to close the message box.

2.	Select only one sheet, or choose Ungroup Sheets from the sheet tab shortcut menu.

3.	Start Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users again.


Multiple selection usage is not valid.

You are creating a complex reference for a series that violates one or both of the following rules:

All references in a complex reference must refer to the same sheet.

All references in a complex reference must refer to rectangles of similar size. For example, in a single complex reference, some of the references should not be to ranges of 1-by-8 cells while others are to ranges of 10-by-10 cells.


Source worksheet is closed.
Source worksheet is closed

You cannot change a data point on a chart when the source workbook is closed.

Open the source workbook and try again.


Data point corresponds to a formula on a macro sheet.
Data point corresponds to a formula on a macro sheet

You attempted to drag a chart data point to perform a graphical goal-seek operation, but the source sheet is a macro sheet. You cannot perform goal-seeking on a macro sheet.


Can only paste a subscriber onto a worksheet or macro sheet.

You are trying to paste a subscriber onto a chart, but you can paste a subscriber only onto a worksheet or macro sheet.

Switch to a worksheet or macro sheet and try again.

If you want a chart and a subscriber to appear in the same document, paste the subscriber onto a worksheet or macro sheet, and then paste a picture of the chart onto the sheet, or create an embedded chart using one of the charting tools. You can then move the subscriber on top of the chart using the techniques for moving and grouping objects.


Reference is not valid. Reference must be to a single cell.

The title of the selected series refers to more than one cell. The series title must refer to a single cell containing the title text. Enter the correct cell reference.


Cannot revert a file that is currently running a macro.

Press ESC to halt the macro before trying to revert to the previous version of the file.


Cannot enter an external reference to a workbook.

You entered a reference to a workbook file without including a sheet name. To refer to a cell in a sheet, you must refer to the workbook filename, the sheet name, and the cell reference. The proper syntax for a workbook reference is

[workbook_name]sheet_name!cell_ref


Specify sheet to copy from workbook file.
Specify sheet to copy from workbook.

You tried to perform a consolidate operation, but a reference to a workbook was entered incorrectly. The proper syntax for a workbook reference is

[workbook_name]sheet_name!cell_ref

Be sure that you refer to worksheets or macro sheets, and include the workbook name as part of the reference.


Not a workbook.

You entered an invalid reference to a workbook file. The proper syntax for a workbook reference is:

[workbook_name]sheet_name!cell_ref

Be sure that you entered the name of a valid workbook, and that you used the proper syntax.


Workbook has no bound sheets.

You tried to update or change links, or to enter an external reference formula to a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 workbook file that has no bound sheets in it. Try selecting another file or a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 workbook that does have bound sheets in it.


Sheet name is not valid.

You tried to rename a sheet in a workbook, but doing so would result in an invalid sheet name. Possible reasons for this are:

The name exceeds the 31-character limit for sheets.

The sheet has the same name as another sheet.

The sheet name contains a colon (:).

The sheet name contains a slash (/).

The sheet name contains a backslash (\).

The sheet name is 0 characters in length.

The sheet name begins with an opening square bracket ( [ ), followed by 0 or more characters and a closing square bracket ( ] ).

Rename the sheet with a valid sheet name and try again.


Cannot find that sheet in workbook.

You are trying to open a workbook using the Links command on the Edit menu, but the specified sheet does not exist in the workbook. Check to make sure that you're using the correct workbook and sheet names.


Destination reference is not valid.

The reference you have entered in the Destination box of the TextWizard is not valid. The Text To Columns command cannot parse data into a nonadjacent selection or into cells on another worksheet. Enter a reference to a single cell or to a rectangular range of cells, and try again.

See Also

Help

Text To Columns Command (Data Menu)


Cannot link to a chart.

You chose the Links command from the Edit menu and attempted to create or change links to a chart. Microsoft Excel cannot establish or change a link from a chart to another sheet. You can create links from either a worksheet or a macro sheet to a chart.

If you want to create a link to the information in a chart, you must open the workbook containing the chart's source data.


Print titles must be contiguous and complete rows or columns.

Print titles must consist of entire rows or entire columns. Partial rows and/or columns are not accepted.

Define the print titles again by choosing the Page Setup command from the File menu and selecting the Sheet tab.


Cannot open normal Multiplan document.

If the file was saved in MS-DOS Multiplan 3.0 or 4.2, run the Microsoft Excel Setup program to install the Multiplan converter, and try again to open the file.

If the file was saved in a version of Multiplan other than MS-DOS 3.0 or 4.2, save the file in SYLK format in Multiplan, and open it in SYLK format in Microsoft Excel version 5.0.

See Also

Help

Exchanging Data with Other Applications

Installing components of Microsoft Excel


Selected sheets will be permanently deleted. Continue?

OK

Permanently deletes the selected sheets.

Cancel

Cancels the deletion.

To hide a sheet

1.	Select the sheet or sheets that you want to hide.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Sheet, and then choose Hide.

See Also

Help

Deleting sheets

Hiding and unhiding a sheet


Microsoft Excel 5.0 menus are required when using Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users.

You must be using Microsoft Excel version 5.0 menus to run Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users.

To display Microsoft Excel version 5.0 menus

1.	Choose the OK button to close the message.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

3.	Select the General tab.

4.	Under Menus, clear the Microsoft Excel 4.0 Menus check box.

You can now choose Lotus 1-2-3 from the Help menu.


Reference cannot be discontiguous.
Cannot use a name that refers to nonadjacent cells.

Select a single cell as the upper-left corner for the pivot table.

See Also

Help

Creating a pivot table


All series in a 3-D chart must be of the same type. Change all series to 3-D type?
Cannot combine 2-D and 3-D types.  Change all series in chart to 3-D?

Only one series in the chart is selected. You cannot change only one series to 3-D type.

OK

Changes all of the series in the chart to 3-D type.

Cancel

Cancels the change and leaves the chart formatted as 2-D.

See Also

Help

Changing the chart type of a data series

Changing the chart type of an entire chart


Cannot delete last entry in legend.

You cannot delete the last remaining entry in a legend. You must leave at least one entry in the legend, or else delete the entire legend.

To delete the legend

1.	Click the legend border to select the legend.

2.	Press DEL, or choose Clear from the legend shortcut menu.

See Also

Help

Deleting data labels, titles, legends, or gridlines


There are more new points than series in the chart. Add new points to only the existing series?

OK

Adds the new data to the existing series, leaving out any additional points.

Cancel

Cancels the Paste Special command.

You can add the additional data as a new series by selecting New Series in the Paste Special dialog box.

See Also

Help

Overview of Adding and Deleting Chart Data


No headers detected. Assume top row of selection is header row?

Microsoft Excel cannot determine which row you want to use as the column labels for this list.

OK

Uses the first row of the selection for the column labels.

Cancel

Cancels the Filter command.

If you want to add an additional row to use as column labels, choose the Cancel button, add the label data to your selection, and choose the Filter command again.

See Also

Help

Overview of Filtering Data in a List


You may only extract to the currently active sheet.
You can only copy filtered data to the active sheet.

The Copy To box in the Advanced Filter dialog box cannot contain a reference to another sheet. After the filtering is complete, you can then copy or cut this data from the active sheet and paste it onto another sheet.

See Also

Help

Overview of Filtering Data in a List


The version of XLINTL.DLL is incorrect. Continuing can cause severe errors. Quit Microsoft Excel?

OK

Quits Microsoft Excel.

Cancel

Starts Microsoft Excel, despite the possibility of severe errors.

Check to see whether you have more than one copy of XLINTL.DLL on your hard disk. If you do, delete or rename the other copies of XLINTL.DLL.

If you do not have other copies of XLINTL.DLL on your hard disk, or if deleting those copies does not prevent this message, run the Microsoft Excel Setup program to get the correct version of XLINTL.DLL.


Value must be between zero and 0.5.

In any chart other than an xy (scatter) chart, the value of a backward forecast period must be between 0 and 0.5.

1.	Choose Selected Trendline from the Format menu, or choose Trendline from the Insert menu.

2.	Select the Options tab.

3.	Under Forecast, type a number between 0 and 0.5 in the Backward box.


Value must be greater than or equal to zero.

The value of a forecast period for xy (scatter) charts must be greater than or equal to 0.

1.	Choose Selected Trendline from the Format menu, or choose Trendline from the Insert menu.

2.	Select the Options tab.

3.	Under Forecast, type 0 or a positive number in the Forward box or the Backward box.


Value must be greater than zero.
Value must be greater than zero..

The intercept value for an exponential trendline must be greater than zero.

1.	Choose Selected Trendline from the Format menu, or choose Trendline from the Insert menu.

2.	Select the Options tab.

3.	Type a positive number in the Set Intercept box.


Moving Average must have a period that is greater than one and less than the number of points in the selected series.
Moving Average must have a period that is greater than one and less than the number of points in the source data series.

The moving average period must be an integer that is greater than 1 and less than the total number of points in the source data series.

1.	Choose Selected Trendline from the Format menu, or choose Trendline from the Insert menu.

2.	Select the Type tab.

3.	Under Trend Or Regression Type, type a number that meets these criteria in the Period box.


Polynomial order must be an integer from 2 through 6.

The polynomial order must be an integer between 2 and 6, inclusive.

1.	Choose Selected Trendline from the Format menu, or choose Trendline from the Insert menu.

2.	Select the Type tab.

3.	Under Trend Or Regression Type, type an integer from 2 through 6 in the Order box.


'[Filename]' is already open.  Reopening will cause your changes to be discarded.  Do you want to reopen?

The file you are trying to open is already open.

OK

Opens a new copy of the file, replacing the one that is already open. You will lose all changes made since the last time you saved the document.

Cancel

Cancels the Open command.


Unable to copy add-in to library
Unable to copy add-in to library.

The copying process has been interrupted.

If you are copying from a network, make sure that the network connection still exists.

If you are copying from a floppy disk or compact disc, make sure that the disk is still in the appropriate drive.

Make sure that the LIBRARY subdirectory still exists.

See Also

Help

Add-ins Included with Microsoft Excel

Installing or removing an add-in


'[Add-in name]' is not a valid add-in.

The file you are trying to install is not a Microsoft Excel add-in, or it is a corrupted add-in file.

Make sure that the file is a valid Microsoft Excel add-in. If you suspect that the file is corrupted, run the Microsoft Excel Setup program to reinstall the add-in on your hard disk.

See Also

Help

Add-ins Included with Microsoft Excel

Installing or removing an add-in


List will be permanently deleted.

Your custom list will be permanently deleted.

OK

Permanently deletes the selected custom list.

Cancel

Cancels the deletion.

See Also

Help

Custom Lists Tab


Cannot open files from later versions.
Cannot open files from later versions of Microsoft Excel.

You cannot open a file from a version of Microsoft Excel later than version 5.0.

To open this file in Microsoft Excel version 5.0

1.	Open the file in the newer version of Microsoft Excel.

2.	Save it in Microsoft Excel version 5.0 format.

3.	Open it in Microsoft Excel version 5.0.

See Also

Help

Open Command (File Menu)

File Formats (Windows)


Select a font name.

When you are changing a Style, you must have a font name selected.


This font style name does not exist.

The available font styles are listed in the Font Style box on the Font tab in the Format Cells dialog box. Select a style from the Font Style list.


No list found. Select a single cell within your list and Microsoft Excel will select the list for you.

The active cell is not within a list. Select a single cell within your list, and choose the command again.

See Also

Help

Filter Command (Data Menu)

Form Command (Data Menu)

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Subtotals Command (Data Menu)


Sort reference is not valid
Sort reference is not valid.

A sort reference (entered or listed in the Sort By box in the Sort dialog box) identifies the column you want to sort by when sorting rows, or the row you want to sort by when sorting columns. If you are sorting rows and your list contains column labels, the sort reference is the column label. If you are sorting rows without column labels, or you are sorting columns, the sort reference is the row number or column number or letter.

Some possible causes of an invalid sort reference are:

The first Sort By box is blank. Blank sort references are not valid.

The sort reference is misspelled. Check the spelling of the sort reference typed in the Sort By box, or select one from the list.

Two sort references are identical. You cannot have duplicate sort references.

A reference outside of the selection was entered as a sort reference.

See Also

Help

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)


This list is outlined. Only the summary data will be sorted.

Although the outline symbols are not visible, this list is outlined. Only the summary information will be sorted. The detail information will move with the summary information.

OK

Sorts data based on the summary information. Detail information remains unsorted and moves with the summary information.

Cancel

Cancels the Sort command.

To sort all of the data in the list, choose Group And Outline from the Data menu, and then choose Clear Outline. Then choose Sort from the Data menu again.


This document contains links. Re-establish links?

The document you are opening contains automatic links.

Yes

Updates the linked data with the most current information.

No

Retains the current linked data.

See Also

Help

Overview of Linking and Embedding


Delete entire row?

You have not selected the entire row. Only entire rows can be deleted while you are using the AutoFilter or Advanced Filter command.


Cannot find add-in '[add-in]'. Delete from list?

Check that you typed the correct filename and path in the Filename box and the Directories box in the Browse dialog box.

OK

Deletes the add-in from the list in the Add-In dialog box.

Cancel

Cancels the message.

See Also

Help

Add-ins Included with Microsoft Excel

Installing or removing an add-in


You must enter a valid reference you want to go to, or type a valid name for the selection.

You must type or select a valid reference or type a new name for the selection.

Some possible causes for the invalid reference or name are:

The reference must take the form A1, Sheet1!A1, or A1:A3.

The name contains invalid characters. Numbers, letters, and underscores (_) are valid characters for cell and range names.

The name or reference is longer than 255 characters.

You are typing or editing a formula in the formula bar. Enter or cancel the formula before using the Name box.

See Also

Help

Going to specific cells or ranges


The Trace Precedents command requires that the active cell contain a formula.

The Trace Precedents command draws arrows from all cells that supply values directly to the formula in the active cell (precedents).

Because the active cell does not contain a formula, tracer arrows cannot be drawn.

Select a cell that contains a formula, and then choose the Trace Precedents command again.


The Trace Dependents command found no formulas that refer to the active cell
The Trace Dependents command found no formulas that refer to the active cell.

The Trace Dependents command draws arrows from the active cell to cells containing formulas that use the values in the active cell (dependents).

Because the active cell is not referred to by any formula on the active sheet, tracer arrows cannot be drawn.

Select a cell that is referred to by a formula on the active sheet, and then choose the Trace Dependents command again.


The Trace Error command requires that the active cell contain an error value.

The Trace Error command draws arrows from the error value in the active cell to cells that might have caused the error.

Because the active cell does not contain an error value, tracer arrows cannot be drawn.

Select a cell that contains an error value, and then choose the Trace Error command again.

See Also

Help

Overview of Error Values


The Remove All Arrows command found no tracer arrows to remove
The Remove All Arrows command found no tracer arrows to remove.

The Remove All Arrows command deletes all tracer arrows from the sheet. There are no tracer arrows on this sheet.


The Error Tracer has encountered a branch point. Double-click the branch you want to follow and choose Trace Error again.

The Trace Error command has encountered an unresolvable branch in tracing the error.

Select another branch by double-clicking it, and then choose the Trace Error command or click the Trace Error button again to continue tracing.

See Also

Help

Using the error tracer to find error values visually


The Error Tracer has encountered either existing arrows or a circular reference. Remove all tracer arrows or fix the circular re
The Error Tracer encountered existing arrows or a circular reference. Delete all tracer arrows or resolve the circular reference, and then choose Trace Error again.

The Error Tracer has encountered other arrows in tracing the error, indicating either that there is a circular reference or that arrows are still on the sheet from a previous trace operation. Resolve the circular reference or remove the arrows before continuing.

See Also

Help

Trace Error Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

Using the error tracer to find error values visually


Entire subtotal row will be deleted.

All data in the rows containing totals, subtotals, or grand totals will be deleted.

OK

Deletes entire subtotal rows, including additional data to the right or left of the list.

Cancel

Cancels the deletion of the subtotal rows.

See Also

Help

Subtotals Command (Data Menu)


You must quit and then restart Microsoft Excel before your  changes to the standard font will take effect
You must quit and then restart Microsoft Excel before your changes to the standard font will take effect.

You have changed the standard font. If you want these changes to take effect, restart Microsoft Excel.

To restart Microsoft Excel

1.	Quit Microsoft Excel by choosing Exit from the File menu.

2.	In the Program Manager window, double-click the Microsoft Excel 5.0 group icon or the group icon that contains Microsoft Excel.

You can also use the arrow keys to select the program group and then press ENTER to open the program group.

3.	Double-click the Microsoft Excel icon.

You can also use the arrow keys to select the Microsoft Excel icon and then press ENTER to start Microsoft Excel.

See Also

Help

General Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)


Workbook must contain at least one visible sheet.

You are trying to delete the last visible sheet in a workbook. To hide or delete the selected sheet(s), you must first unhide at least one other sheet (or if no sheets are hidden, insert a new sheet).

To hide a sheet

Select the sheet.

From the Format menu, choose Sheet, and then choose Hide.

To unhide a sheet

From the Format menu, choose Sheet, and then choose Unhide.

To delete a sheet

From the Edit menu, choose Delete Sheet.

To insert a sheet

From the Insert menu, choose Worksheet.


Selected file type will save only the active sheet.

The file type you have selected in the Save File As Type box in the Save As dialog box can contain only one sheet, the active sheet. If you want to save all of the sheets in this workbook in the selected file type, you must select each sheet and save each sheet as a separate file.


Copy '[add-in]' to Microsoft Excel Add-in library?

OK

Copies the selected add-in from the floppy disk, compact disc, or network to the macro library.

Cancel

Runs the add-in from the floppy disk, compact disc, or network.

See Also

Help

Add-ins Included with Microsoft Excel

Installing or removing an add-in


'[Document]' has a routing slip.  Route now to '[name]'?

Your file is being routed to multiple recipients by electronic mail, and the routing is not complete.

Yes

Continues to route the document.

No

Cancels the Close or Exit command and continues to route the document.

Cancel

Does not route the document and closes the file.

See Also

Help

Overview of Routing a Workbook


Workbook is already protected.

The workbook you are trying to protect is already protected.

See Also

Help

Protect Workbook Command and Unprotect Workbook Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)


Recorder range is not valid.

When you start recording a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 macro, or mark a position to start recording on a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 macro sheet, Micosoft Excel defines a range on your sheet with the name "Recorder." Once the recorder range has been defined, do not delete the recorder name or alter the recorder range until you have recorded the macro. Otherwise, you will have to define the recorder range again before you begin recording.

To redefine a recorder range, delete the invalid recorder name, or mark the recorder position again.

To delete an invalid recorder name

1.	From the Insert menu, choose Name, and then choose Define.

2.	In the Names In Workbook list, select the invalid recorder name.

3.	Choose the Delete button.

To reset the recorder location

From the Tools menu, choose Record Macro, and then choose Mark Position For Recording.

See Also

Help

Automating Repeated Tasks with Macros


The destination range is not large enough to accommodate all copied rows. Data below destination range will be lost. Continue co
The destination range is not large enough to accommodate all copied rows. Data below the destination range will be lost. Continue copying anyway?

There is no more room available in the selected area of the worksheet to copy filtered records to. Any data below the range specified in the Copy To box in the Advanced Filter dialog box will be replaced by the copied records.

If you want to copy all records that match the criteria without replacing any other data, select another range that can accommodate all of the copied records. You could also filter the data in place.

See Also

Help

Overview of Filtering Data in a List


Cannot print chart in draft quality.

You cannot use draft quality for charts unless you are using a plotter. You must print charts in standard graphics mode when not using a plotter.

To print the chart

1.	From the File menu, choose Page Setup.

2.	Select the Chart tab.

3.	Clear the Draft Quality check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Chart Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)


Save changes to selected series?

You changed one series and then selected another series without choosing the OK or Define button.

OK

Saves the changes you made to the selected series and selects the other series.

Cancel

Cancels the changes you made to the selected series.

See Also

Help

Changing Data in a Chart


Series definition must include a '[Y or Z]' reference.

After you entered a name for the series, you chose the OK or Define button before supplying the external reference for the y axis (for 2-D charts) or the z axis (for 3-D charts). Before Microsoft Excel can create the series, you must enter the y or z values you want to plot.

Type the external reference containing the values you want to plot, or select the reference on the worksheet, and then choose the OK or Define button again.

See Also

Help

Changing Data in a Chart


No point number is specified.

For all chart types except area charts, you must specify both the series number and the data point number in order to attach a data label (the value of the data point) to a data point marker using ATTACH.TEXT. In area charts, you only need to specify the series number; the text you type is then attached to the center of the series area.

See Also

Help

Overview of Adding Data Labels, Titles, and Other Items to a Chart


No series number is specified.

For all chart types except area charts, you must specify both the series number and the data point number in order to attach a data label (the value of the data point) to a data point marker using ATTACH.TEXT. In area charts, you only need to specify the series number; the text you type is then attached to the center of the series area.

See Also

Help

Overview of Adding Data Labels, Titles, and Other Items to a Chart


Reference is not valid. Reference for categories or values must be a single row or column.

The reference for the selected category or value axis is an incorrect cell range. Category or value references must be to a cell range in a single column or a single row. References to cells in more than one row and column are not valid. Enter a reference to a valid category or value range.

See Also

Help

Changing Data in a Chart


Cell in source worksheet contains nonnumeric data.
Cell in source worksheet contains nonnumeric data

The category range for your xy (scatter) chart contains nonnumeric data. You are trying to change a data point on your chart by dragging it in the x-axis direction, but you cannot drag data points that correspond to nonnumeric data in the x-axis direction.

In the formula bar, edit the SERIES formula for the first series, specifying numeric data for the category argument (the second argument), and then try again to change the data point.

See Also

Help

Changing Data in a Chart


That name is already assigned to a source sheet. Charts cannot be source sheets.

You cannot save a chart with the specified name because:

An open workbook contains an external reference to a sheet with that name.

External references to charts are not valid.

The chart might have been saved with the same name as an existing sheet, thus replacing the sheet referred to. Any external references to that sheet are now invalid.

If you want to use this name for your chart, save the source sheet with a different name.

See Also

Help

Overview of Linking Microsoft Excel Workbooks


Cannot extend list or database.

You can't add a new record to the list or database because either it would replace existing data or there are no more rows available at the bottom of the worksheet. Close the data form and insert more rows, or move the existing data to make room below the list or database.

See Also

Help

Overview of Maintaining a List by Using a Data Form


Cannot find matching data to delete.

Microsoft Excel could not find the database record or records you want to delete using the Delete command on the Microsoft Excel version 4.0 Data menu. This means that all records matching the criteria have been deleted, or that no records match the criteria.

If you think there should be a match, check your typing and choose the command again.

See Also

Help

Delete Command (Edit Menu)

Form Command (Data Menu)

Overview of Filtering Data in a List


Cannot find matching data to replace.

No cell in the selection contains what you typed, or no records match the criteria.

If you think there should be a match, check your typing and try again.

See Also

Help

Replace Command (Edit Menu)


Mail system failure. Check your mail installation.

The mail system has failed. Make sure that you are still connected to the network, and restart the mail system.

See Also

Help

Overview of Mailing a Workbook


Ambiguous recipient name found in the recipient list.  Use a valid name and try again.

Make sure that you are using a valid name, and try sending the mail again.

See Also

Help

Overview of Mailing a Workbook


Unknown recipient name found in the recipient list.  Use a valid name and try again.

Make sure that the name is a valid name in the mail system, and try sending the mail again.

See Also

Help

Overview of Mailing a Workbook


Too many recipients specified. Send the document several times to smaller groups of recipients.

Divide the list of recipients up into smaller lists, and send the document to each of the smaller groups.

See Also

Help

Overview of Mailing a Workbook


The name '[name]' is unknown. Specify a valid name.

Select the name of the recipient from the list in the mail system.

See Also

Help

Overview of Mailing a Workbook


General mail failure. Quit Microsoft Excel, restart the mail system, and try again.

The mail system has failed. Quit Microsoft Excel and the mail system.

Some possible problems and solutions:

The network connection has failed. Reconnect, restart Microsoft Excel and the mail system, and try again.

There is not enough disk space available. Delete any unneeded files, restart Microsoft Excel and the mail system, and try again.

There is not enough memory available. Close any unneeded files or applications, restart Microsoft Excel and the mail system, and try again.

See Also

Help

Overview of Mailing a Workbook


Your mail system does not support certain services needed for document routing.

Workbook mailing and routing requires Microsoft Mail (or another mail system that complies with Messaging Application Programming Interface [MAPI]) or Lotus cc:Mail (or another mail system that complies with Vendor Independent Messaging [VIM]).

See Also

Help

Overview of Routing a Workbook


Too many mail sessions. Quit other mail sessions and try again.

Quit any other applications that are using the mail system, and try again.

See Also

Help

Overview of Mailing a Workbook


Too many recipients specified.  Route the document several times to smaller groups of recipients.

Divide the list of recipients up into smaller lists, and route the document to each of the smaller groups.

See Also

Help

Overview of Routing a Workbook


Message too long for your mail system. Shorten the message and try again.

The message and the workbook attached to the message are too long to mail.

To mail this message

1.	Edit the message text.

2.	Delete any uneeded sheets from the workbook.

3.	Remove any uneeded formatting from the workbook.

4.	Try to mail or route the message again.

See Also

Help

Overview of Mailing a Workbook


External reference is not valid.

Your chart formula contains an invalid external reference to a worksheet.

Entering a formula on a chart

A possible cause is that the workbook containing the cells you're referring to is not open. Open the workbook, and then enter the reference.

Updating a chart

Some possible causes include:

A text label formula refers to a name on a worksheet that doesn't result in text. Make sure the name is defined as text or that it refers to a cell or formula that returns text.

An external reference in the SERIES formula for the chart's categories or values refers to a name on the worksheet, but that name defines something other than a rectangular reference or array. Make sure the name refers to a rectangular range of cells or an array.

See Also

Help

Changing Data in a Chart


Cannot change linked data '[message]'.
Cannot change linked data: '[message]'.

Category range contains nonnumeric data

You are trying to change a data point on an xy (scatter) chart by dragging it in the x-axis direction, but the category range for this chart contains nonnumeric data. You cannot drag data points that correspond to nonnumeric data in the x-axis direction. To change a data point on an xy (scatter) chart, edit the cells in the category range so that they contain only numeric values, and then try changing the data point again.

Cell in source worksheet contains nonnumeric data

The cell in the source sheet that corresponds to the data point you are trying to change contains nonnumeric data. Before you can change the data point, you must edit the cell so that it contains a number, a formula that returns a number, nothing, or the #N/A error value.

Cell in source worksheet is locked

The cell in the source sheet that corresponds to the data point you are trying to change is locked.

To drag the data point, remove the protection from the source sheet or workbook. Choose Protection from the Tools menu, and then choose Unprotect Sheet or Unprotect Workbook.

Data point corresponds to a formula on a macro sheet

You are trying to drag a data point that corresponds to a cell on a macro sheet. To change the value of the data point, you must switch to the macro sheet and directly edit the corresponding cell.

Source worksheet is closed

You cannot change a data point on a chart when the source sheet is closed. Open the source worksheet and try again.

See Also

Help

Changing Data in a Chart


Category range contains nonnumeric data.
Category range contains nonnumeric data

In the SERIES formula for your xy (scatter) chart, the category argument contains constants that include nonnumeric data. You are trying to change a data point on your chart by dragging it in the x-axis direction, but you cannot drag data points that correspond to nonnumeric data in the x-axis direction.

Edit the SERIES formula for the first series, specifying numeric data for the category argument (the second argument), and then try agin to change the data point.

See Also

Help

Changing Data in a Chart


Names are not valid in complex references.

You are creating a complex reference for a series that contains a name. Only cell or range references are valid in complex references.

From the Insert menu, choose Name, and then choose Define. Then check the cell or range reference the name refers to and enter that reference into the complex reference for the series.

See Also

Help

Changing Data in a Chart


Series formula too long.
Series formula is too long.

You have entered too many references for a single series.

Use fewer references in your series, or create more than one chart.

See Also

Help

Changing Data in a Chart


Cell in source worksheet is locked.
Cell in source worksheet is locked

The cell in the source sheet that corresponds to the data point you are trying to change is locked.

To drag the point, remove the protection from the source sheet or workbook by choosing Protection from the Tools menu and then choosing Unprotect Sheet or Unprotect Workbook.

See Also

Help

Changing Data in a Chart


Pivot table name is not valid.

Type a name for the pivot table in the PivotTable Name box.

See Also

Help

Creating a pivot table


Pivot table field name already exists.

Two fields cannot have the same name. To change a field name, select the cell that contains the field name and type a unique name for the field. If the field name is not visible in the pivot table, choose the PivotTable Field command from the Data menu to edit the field name.

See Also

Help

Changing the name of a pivot table field

Creating a pivot table


Pivot table cannot overlap another pivot table.

Pivot tables cannot overlap. In the PivotTable Starting Cell box, type or select a cell for the upper-left corner of the pivot table so that no part of the pivot table will overlap another pivot table.

See Also

Help

Creating a pivot table


Replace crosstab tabl with pivot table?
Replace crosstab table with pivot table?

OK

Replaces a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 crosstab table with a Microsoft Excel version 5.0 pivot table.

Cancel

Cancels the creation of the pivot table, leaving the crosstab table intact.

See Also

Help

Converting a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 crosstab table to a pivot table


Replace crosstab with pivot table, ignoring criteria range?
Replace crosstab table with pivot table, ignoring criteria range?

Microsoft Excel version 5.0 uses all the data contained in a crosstab table when converting it to a pivot table.

OK

Replaces a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 crosstab table with a Microsoft Excel version 5.0 pivot table, ignoring any criteria range that has been set.

Cancel

Cancels the creation of the pivot table, leaving the crosstab table intact.

See Also

Help

Converting a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 crosstab table to a pivot table

Customizing a Pivot Table


Pivot table field name is not valid.

To create a pivot table, you must use data that is organized as a list with labeled columns.

If you are changing the name of a pivot table field, you must type a new name for the field. The Name box in the PivotTable Field dialog box cannot be blank.

See Also

Help

Changing the name of a pivot table field

Creating a pivot table


Number must be greater than zero
Number must be greater than zero.

When you group numeric items into ranges in a pivot table, you can assign a range of numeric items to evenly incremented groups (such as tens or hundreds) by typing a number greater than 0 in the By box in the Grouping dialog box.

When you are grouping dates by day in a pivot table (as opposed to by minutes, hours, years, and so on), you can specify the number of days you want to group by in the Number Of Days box in the Grouping dialog box.

See Also

Help

Grouping dates into ranges in a pivot table

Grouping numeric items into ranges in a pivot table


Cannot group that selection.

You cannot group only one text item. Select the items you want to group, and choose the command again. The items you select do not have to be adjacent.

See Also

Help

Grouping selected items in a pivot table field


Cannot open pivot table source file '[filename]'.

Make sure that the path and filename entered in the Range box in Step 2 of the PivotTable Wizard are correct and that the source file exists.

Make sure that the network connection exists.

See Also

Help

Creating a pivot table

Using an external data source

User's Guide

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"

Microsoft Query User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Getting Started with Queries"


Cannot determine which pivot table field to sort by.

Select items in a column, row, or data field, and then click the Sort Ascending or Sort Descending button on the Query And Pivot toolbar, or choose the Sort command from the Data menu.

You cannot sort when the active cell is a data label, a grand total label, or a blank cell in the pivot area for columns.

See Also

Help

Overview of Sorting Pivot Table Items


You have entered an invalid source range for your pivot table. Enter a valid range in the Ranges box and then choose Add.

Type or select a worksheet range that contains data organized with both row and column labels.

See Also

Help

Using multiple consolidation ranges


Cannot delete every item of '[field name]' field from pivot table.
Cannot delete every item of '[field name]' field from the pivot table.

You cannot delete all the items in a field. You can hide some items, as long as at least one item is displayed, or you can hide the entire field.

See Also

Help

Hiding or displaying items in a pivot table field

Removing a data field from a pivot table


Cannot hide the (all) item of a page field.

You cannot hide the (all) item in a page field. To hide the page field, select it and then drag the field out of the pivot table area, or choose Delete from the pivot table shortcut menu.

See Also

Help

Removing a row, column, or page field from a pivot table


Cannot delete the last item in a page field.

You cannot delete the last item in a page field. To hide the page field, select it and then drag the field out of the pivot table area, or choose Delete from the pivot table shortcut menu.

See Also

Help

Removing a row, column, or page field from a pivot table


Cannot create a pivot table on a hidden sheet.

You cannot enter a reference to a hidden sheet in the PivotTable Starting Cell box in Step 4 of the PivotTable Wizard.

Enter a reference to another sheet or unhide the hidden sheet by choosing Sheet from the Format menu and then choosing Unhide.

See Also

Help

Creating a pivot table


At least one item must be showing.  Chosse the Delete button to hide the field.
At least one item must be showing. Choose the Delete button to hide the field.

You cannot hide all the items in a field. You can hide the entire field by choosing the Delete button in the PivotTable Field dialog box.

See Also

Help

Hiding or displaying items in a pivot table field


Too many items are hidden. Unhide some items to continue.

You cannot hide more than 512 items in a pivot table. Unhide enough items in the Hide Items box in the PivotTable Field dialog box to reduce the total number hidden to 512 items or fewer. To unhide items, select the items in the Hide Items box.

See Also

Help

Hiding or displaying items in a pivot table field


Unable to obtain PivotTable data from disk.

Make sure that the file exists, that the disk is in the appropriate drive (if it is a floppy disk), and that the network connection still exists.

See Also

Help

Using an external data source


Ending value must be greater than starting value.

You can assign a range of numeric items to evenly incremented groups, but the Ending At number must be greater than the Starting At number.

For example, if a field contains integers from 1 to 100 and you want to group them into 10 groups of 10, type 1 in the Starting At box, type 100 in the Ending At box, and type 10 in the By box.

See Also

Help

Grouping numeric items into ranges in a pivot table


Specify a data field.

To create a valid pivot table, you must drag the field or fields whose data you want to summarize into the Data area in Step 3 of the PivotTable Wizard.

See Also

Help

Creating a pivot table


Cannot enter a null value as an item or field name in a pivot table.

You can enter text as a placeholder, or you can hide fields that you do not currently need.

See Also

Help

Removing a row, column, or page field from a pivot table


Cannot delete this selection from the pivot table.

You cannot delete multiple page fields or the blank cells in the pivot area for columns and rows.

See Also

Help

Overview of Adding and Removing Pivot Table Data


Cannot edit a pivot table in group edit mode.

Select only the sheet that contains the pivot table, and then try the editing operation again.

See Also

Help

Overview of Editing and Formatting a Pivot Table


Cannot edit subtotal, block total, or grand total names.

You cannot edit subtotal, block total, or grand total names.

If you want to hide grand totals in a pivot table, click the PivotTable button on the Query And Pivot toolbar, and then choose the Next button to display Step 4 of the PivotTable Wizard. Clear one or both of the grand total check boxes.

If you want to hide subtotals or block totals in a pivot table, double-click the field that contains the subtotaled or block totaled items, and then select the None option button under Subtotals.

See Also

Help

Overview of Editing and Formatting a Pivot Table

Overview of Working with Totals in a Pivot Table


Cannot move a pivot table to a macro sheet.

You cannot move a pivot table to a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 macro sheet.

If you want to add data from a pivot table to a macro sheet, you can copy the data, paste the values into the macro sheet, and then edit the cells in the data area. The copied range will no longer be a pivot table, so it will not be linked to the original source list.

1.	Select the pivot table that contains the data you want to move to the macro sheet.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Copy.

3.	Select the range in which you want to paste the data.

4.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

5.	Select the Values option button.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Creating a pivot table


Cannot create a pivot table on a macro sheet.

A Microsoft Excel version 4.0 macro sheet cannot be the destination sheet for a pivot table. Make sure that a worksheet is the destination reference in the PivotTable Wizard.

See Also

Help

Creating a pivot table


Cannot move totals or subtotals in a pivot table.
Cannot move subtotals or block totals.

You cannot move subtotals or block totals, but you can hide them. Click the PivotTable Field button on the Query And Pivot toolbar, and then select the None option button under Subtotals.

See Also

Help

Overview of Working with Totals in a Pivot Table


No data source specified.

You must specify a data source for your pivot table. Choose the Get Data button to start Microsoft Query.

See Also

Help

Using an external data source

User's Guide

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"

Microsoft Query User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Getting Started with Queries"


The source database must have at least one record.

Advanced Filter - Microsoft Excel List or Database

Select a range of cells that contains data organized in at least two rows, choose Filter from the Data menu, and then choose Advanced Filter again.

Pivot Table - Microsoft Excel List or Database

Type a cell reference or select a range of cells that contains data organized in at least two rows.

Pivot Table - External Data Source

No records were retrieved from the query definition you created in Microsoft Query. Make sure that your query results in records organized in at least two rows.

Pivot Table - Multiple Consolidation Ranges

For each range that you add to the All Ranges box, make sure that you type a cell reference or select a range of cells that contains the data you want to use to create a pivot table.

See Also

Help

Overview of Filtering Data in a List

Creating a pivot table

Using a Microsoft Excel list or database

Using an external data source

Using multiple consolidation ranges


Cannot show or hide detail for this selection.

Double-click the item whose detail you want to show or hide, or select the item and choose Hide Detail or Show Detail from the shortcut menu.

See Also

Help

Overview of Hiding and Showing Detail Data in a Pivot Table


Cannot show or hide detail for the data area.

Double-click the item whose detail you want to show or hide, or select the item and choose Hide Detail or Show Detail from the shortcut menu.

See Also

Help

Overview of Hiding and Showing Detail Data in a Pivot Table


You have not specified any source ranges for your pivot table.  Type or select at least one range in the Range box before choosi
You have not specified any source ranges for your pivot table. Type or select at least one range in the Ranges box before choosing Next or Finish.

To create a pivot table that summarizes data from multiple ranges, you must select each source range or type the cell reference in the Range box. Then choose the Add button to add each reference to the list in the All Ranges box before choosing the Next or Finish button.

See Also

Help

Using multiple consolidation ranges


'[Text]' is not an item of this field.

The (all) item in a page field cannot be renamed. You can change the name of other items in the page field, or you can delete the page field.

See Also

Help

Overview of Working with Pivot Table Pages


Not enough memory to completely display pivot table.

There is not enough memory available to display the entire pivot table.

Close any files or quit any applications that you do not currently need, and try again.

See Also

Help

Creating a pivot table


Not all source records have been copied.

The Show Detail command was canceled before all the data was copied. Use the Delete Sheet command on the Edit menu to delete any sheets that contain partially copied data, and try again.

See Also

Help

Displaying source data for a cell in the data area of a pivot table


Pivot table saved without underlying data. Use the Refresh Data command to update the pivot table.

The pivot table has been saved without the most recent data. Choose Refresh Data from the Data menu to update the pivot table.

See Also

Help

Changing source data for a pivot table

Updating data in a pivot table


Problems obtaining Microsoft Query data.

Make sure that the network connection still exists.

Make sure that Microsoft Query is installed correctly.

Make sure that the appropriate Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) drivers have been installed.

Run the Microsoft Excel Setup program to install the correct versions of Microsoft Query and the appropriate ODBC drivers.

See Also

Help

The Setup You Need to Retrieve Data with Microsoft Query

Using an external data source

User's Guide

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"

Microsoft Query User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Getting Started with Queries"


No item of this name exists in the pivot table. Rename '[current item name]' to '[proposed item name]'?

Confirm that you want to rename the displayed item.

OK

Renames the page field item.

Cancel

Cancels renaming the page field item.

Note  If you typed a new name in order to display another page item, that page cannot be displayed because it does not exist in this page field.

See Also

Help

Overview of Working with Pivot Table Pages


Data will not be saved with other pivot tables using the same  data as this pivot table.
Data will not be saved with other pivot tables using the same source data as this pivot table.

You have cleared the Save Data With Table Layout check box in Step 4 of the PivotTable Wizard. The hidden source data will be not be saved when you save this workbook.

Data in other pivot tables in this workbook that use the same source will also be discarded.

To update a pivot table whose data has been discarded, use the Refresh Data command on the shortcut menu.

See Also

Help

Creating a pivot table


Data will be saved with other pivot tables using the same source data as this pivot table.

You have selected the Save Data With Table Layout check box in Step 4 of the Pivot Table Wizard. All pivot tables in the workbook that use this source will now have their data saved with the workbook.

See Also

Help

Creating a pivot table


Pivot table will not fit onextends beyond edge of sheet.  Show as much as possible?
Pivot table will not fit on sheet. Show as much as possible?

There is not enough room on the active sheet for the pivot table you are creating.

OK

Creates the pivot table, omitting any data that does not fit on the sheet.

Cancel

Cancels the creation of the pivot table.

To create the complete pivot table

In the PivotTable Starting Cell box in Step 4 of the PivotTable Wizard, type another cell reference or select another starting cell so that there will be enough room for the pivot table you are creating.

If there is not enough room on the active sheet, select a cell on another sheet.

See Also

Help

Creating a pivot table


Pivot table was changed during Refresh Data operation.

A pivot table field or item was changed while you updated the pivot table using the Refresh Data command on the pivot table shortcut menu or the Data menu.

See Also

Help

Updating data in a pivot table


A pivot table with that name already exists on the destination sheet.

That pivot table name already exists on the sheet specified in the PivotTable Starting Cell box in Step 4 of the PivotTable Wizard. Type a unique name in the PivotTable Name box.

See Also

Help

Creating a pivot table


The graphics filter is unable to convert picture file '[filename]'.
The graphics filter cannot convert the picture file '[filename]'.

You may have selected the wrong file type. Try to insert the picture again, making sure that you select the correct file type in the List Files Of Type box.

You may not have the correct graphics filters. Run the Microsoft Excel Setup program to get the correct version of the graphics filters.

Your picture file may be corrupt. Try to get another copy of the file.

See Also

Help

Picture Command (Insert Menu)


Microsoft Excel cannot graphics filter.
Microsoft Excel cannot find the necessary graphics filter.

Run the Microsoft Excel Setup program to get the correct version of the graphics filters.

See Also

Help

Picture Command (Insert Menu)


Array value is not valid.

Type an array of values using the array constant notation: "{ value, value, value ; value, value, value }", where a comma is the column separator and a semicolon is the row separator. This example yields a two-row-by-three-column array.

You can also type a single numeric value for a one-element array, or type a cell range to make an array of the same shape as the range of cells that you type.


Logical value is not valid.

The valid logical values are TRUE, FALSE, 1, and 0. If it appears that you have entered a valid logical value, try deleting the logical value completely and then reentering it.


Error value is not valid.

The following table lists the valid error values and their meaning.

Error value	Meaning

#DIV/0!	The formula is trying to divide by 0.

#N/A	No value is available. You usually enter this value directly into worksheet cells that will eventually contain data that is not yet available. Formulas referring to these cells will return #N/A! instead of calculating a value.

#NAME?	Microsoft Excel does not recognize a name used in the formula.

#NULL!	You specified an intersection of two areas that do not intersect.

#NUM!	There is a problem with a number.

#REF!	The formula refers to a cell that is not valid.

#VALUE!	An argument or operand is of the wrong type.


Type is not valid.

The type is an internal logical value.


Text is not valid.

You must enter text in this box. If it appears that you have entered valid text, try deleting the text completely and then reentering it.


Number is not valid.

Depending on the command you've chosen, you must enter either an integer or a decimal number in the box. If it appears that you have entered a valid number, try deleting the number completely and then reentering it.


Cannot use a workbook reference here.
Cannot use workbook reference here.

You can use a 3-D reference only in a defined name or in the following aggregate functions: AVERAGE, COUNT, COUNTA, MAX, MIN, PRODUCT, STDEV, STDEVP, SUM, VAR, and VARP.

See Also

Help

About Worksheet Functions

Alphabetical List of Worksheet Functions


Duplicate menu bar name.

A menu bar with that name already exists. Type another name for your custom menu bar.


Data entry range is too small for this action.

The range of unlocked cells is not large enough to hold the output of the SUM formula.

To expand the range of unlocked cells

1.	Choose the OK button to cancel the alert.

2.	Press ESC to exit from the proposed SUM formula.

3.	Press ESC to exit Data Entry mode.

4.	Unprotect the sheet or workbook using the Protection command on the Tools menu.

5.	Select a range of cells large enough to accommodate the output of the SUM formula.

6.	From the Format menu, choose Cells, and then select the Protection tab.

7.	Clear the Locked check box, and choose the OK button.

8.	Protect the sheet or workbook again using the Protection command on the Tools menu.

See Also

Help

Protect Workbook Command and Unprotect Workbook Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

Protect Sheet Command and Unprotect Sheet Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

Protection Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)


File not loaded completely.

The text file is too large to be loaded completely.

If the file has more than 16,000 lines, any lines after the 16,000th line are not loaded.

If lines in the file have more than 255 separate fields, any fields after the 255th field are not loaded.

See Also

Help

Macro Command (Tools Menu)

File Formats

Overview of Opening and Saving Documents in Different File Formats


Macro name is not valid.

You must type the name or the reference of the macro that you want to run.

See Also

Help

Macro Command (Tools Menu)


Scroll value must be between 0 and 30,000.
Scroll value must be between 0 and 30000.

The accepted range for scroll bar values is from 0 to 30,000.


The scroll value maximum cannot be less than the scroll value minimum.

The minimum value must be less than the maximum value, and both values must be in the accepted scroll bar value range (from 0 to 30,000).


This command or function is not available when multiple workbooks are selected.

The command you have chosen cannot be performed when multiple workbooks are selected. Select only one workbook at a time, and then choose the command again.


Not enough stack space to run macro.

This is usually caused by nesting custom dialog boxes. The following example shows the nested dialog box programming technique that causes the error:

1. Your macro runs Dialog1

2. Dialog1's OK button event procedure runs Dialog2

3. Dialog2's OK button event procedure runs Dialog3 ---> "Not enough stack space ..." error

This problem occurs even if the preceding dialog box is hidden using the Hide method in an event procedure. The following programming technique eliminates the problem:

1. Your macro runs Dialog1

2. Dialog1's OK button event procedure sets a public variable and returns to calling procedure

3. Calling procedure tests the variable and then runs Dialog2 if variable is True

4. Dialog2's OK button event procedure sets a public variable and returns to calling procedure

5. Calling procedure tests the variable and then runs Dialog3 if variable is True

6. And so on

In this example, the public variable is set to True if the OK button is clicked. You must use a public variable so that it is available to all event procedures and to the calling procedure. When the custom dialog box returns control to the calling procedure, Microsoft Excel frees the stack space that was used by the dialog box, and the error does not occur.

The following code fragments show this technique; the public variable is called goToNext. Notice that you must set goToNext to False in the event procedure that runs when the dialog box is displayed.

Public goToNext

Sub RunNestedDialogs()

    DialogSheets("Dialog1").Show

    If goToNext Then

        DialogSheets("Dialog2").Show

        If goToNext Then

             DialogSheets("Dialog3").Show

             If goToNext Then

                DialogSheets("Dialog4").Show

                If goToNext Then

                    MsgBox "End of nested dialogs!"

                End If

             End If

         End If

     End If

End Sub

Sub OK_Button_Click()    ' this button click event procedure

                         ' is assigned to the OK buttons

    goToNext = True

End Sub

Sub DisplayDialog()      ' this dialog frame event procedure

                         ' is assigned to the dialog frames

    goToNext = False     ' reset the public variable here

End Sub


Your changes will be lost if you update without saving. Continue to update?

OK

Updates the read-only file to the last-saved value. Any changes made to the file since it was last saved will be lost.

Cancel

The read-only file is not updated to the last value saved.

See Also

Help

Update File Button


Unable to read file.

Microsoft Excel cannot read the file due to an unrecoverable error. The file is probably corrupted. Try using the most recent backup copy of the file.


The change to the DDE or OLE link has failed.

You are changing a dynamic data exchange (DDE) link or an object linking and embedding (OLE) link, and you typed a name that does not match the required syntax or a name that conflicts with one already being used in another context.

The correct syntax is: application|topic!item

Check the syntax of the name you typed, and correct it if necessary. If the syntax is correct, make sure that you type a unique name.

See Also

Help

Redirecting links to source documents

Updating a DDE or OLE link manually


Error in dialog box at '[cell]'.

The custom dialog box you created with the DIALOG.BOX function of the Microsoft Excel version 4.0 macro language contains an error at the cell indicated.

Some common custom dialog box issues include:

Invalid item numbers. This could be caused by an option button group (item number 11) not followed by an option button (item number 12), or a linked/combination list box (item number 16, 18, or 22) not preceded by an edit box (item number 6).

More than 64 rows used in the description.

Text exceeding 1024 characters.

More than 32 items that accept and return values.

An incorrect reference to the custom dialog box description exists in the Refers To box of a name used in the DIALOG.BOX command.


Dialog box contains too many items.

There are too many items in the custom dialog box you created with the DIALOG.BOX function of the Microsoft Excel version 4.0 macro language.

A custom dialog box can contain no more than 64 items, 32 of which can be items that take or return arguments, and 4 of which can be list boxes. You can add no more than 1024 characters of text to a custom dialog box.

Remove some items from the custom dialog box, and try again.


Macro error at cell '[reference]'.
Macro error at cell: '[reference]'.

An error has occurred in the macro. Use the Macro Error dialog box to step through the macro one function at a time, go to the cell containing the error, stop the macro, or continue running the macro.


Macro interrupted at cell '[reference]'.
Macro interrupted at cell: '[reference]'.

You have interrupted a macro while it was running, or an error has occurred in the macro. Use the Macro Interrupt/Error dialog box to step through the macro one function at a time, stop the macro, or continue running the macro.


Cannot run Visual Basic maccro because of a syntax error.
Cannot run Visual Basic macro because of a syntax error.

When you run one macro from another, detailed error information cannot be displayed.

Choose the Macro command from the Tools menu, select the second-level macro in the Macro Name/Reference box, and choose the Run button. The specific line number that contains the error will be displayed.


No data was selected to parse.

Select the data you want to convert from text to columns, and choose the command again.

See Also

Help

Text To Columns Command (Data Menu)


The picture is too large and will be truncated.

Select a smaller part of the picture, and try again.

See Also

Help

Copy Picture Command (Edit Menu)


Cannot use that command on multiple selections.

The command you have chosen cannot be performed when there are nonadjacent selections. Select only one range at a time, and then choose the command again.


Search string must be specified.

Type the string you want to find in the Find What box.

See Also

Help

Find Command (Edit Menu)

Replace Command (Edit Menu)

Finding text or numbers

Finding and replacing text or numbers


Sheet name is too long.

Sheet names can contain only 30 or fewer characters.

See Also

Help

Sheet Command (Format Menu)


Embedded object data will be lost. Continue?

Microsoft Excel cannot use object linking and embedding now. All embedded object data will be lost when converting to a different Microsoft Excel file format.

You may not have enough system memory available to use object linking and embedding, or you may not have the necessary files installed.

If you do not have enough system memory available, quit unused applications or close unused documents, then try again.

If you do not have the necessary files installed, rerun the Microsoft Excel Setup program.

See Also

Help

Overview of Linking and Embedding


Cannot use object linking and embedding.

Object linking and embedding 2.0 services are not available. Therefore:

The Object command on the Insert menu will not function properly.

If a file containing embedded or linked objects is opened, those objects will be treated as simple graphic objects.

Linking between Microsoft Excel and other applications will be unavailable.

See Also

Help

Overview of Linking and Embedding


Do you want to save changes before switching file status?

Yes

Saves any changes that have been made to this file since it was last opened or saved. Then changes the file status from read-write to read-only.

No

Changes the status of the file from read-write to read-only. Any changes you have made to this file since it was last opened or saved will be lost when you close the file.

See Also

Help

Toggle Read Only Button


Some trendlines cannot be calculated from data containing negative or zero values.

Series having logarithmic trendlines must have x values greater than 0.

Series having exponential trendlines must have y values greater than 0.

Series having power trendlines must have both x and y values greater than 0.

Note  X values are limited only if the series is a scatter series.

See Also

Help

Adding a trendline to a data series


Cannot send status tracking message.

Although the workbook was successfully routed, the status-tracking message could not be sent. Some possible reasons include the following:

The mail system may have failed. Check the mail system.

The "Routing Status=" entry in your EXCEL5.INI file may be invalid. Use a text editor to correct or remove that entry.

See Also

Help

Overview of Routing a Workbook


Microsoft Excel cannot display the Network dialog box.

Some possible problems and solutions:

There is not enough memory available. Close any unneeded files or applications, restart Windows and Microsoft Excel, and try again.

The network connection has failed. Reconnect, restart Microsoft Excel, and try again.


An error occured while Microsoft Excel was attempting to use the system Network dialog box.
An error occurred while Microsoft Excel was attempting to use the system Network dialog box.

Some possible problems and solutions are:

The network connection has failed. Reconnect, restart Microsoft Excel, and try again.

There is not enough memory available. Close any unneeded files or applications, restart Windows and Microsoft Excel, and try again.


The word '[word]' is not in the dictionary.  Change anyway?

Yes

Enters the text you typed in the Change To box as the correct spelling for the selected word, even though this text is not in the dictionary file.

No

Cancels the Change operation.

See Also

Help

Checking spelling


To work with multiple chart types, use the Chart Type command on the Microsoft Excel 5.0 Format menu.
To use multiple chart types, choose the Chart Type command or the chart type group command (for example, Line Group) from the Microsoft Excel 5.0 Format menu.

You must use Microsoft Excel version 5.0 menus to format this chart.

To switch to Microsoft Excel version 5.0 menus

From the Chart menu, choose New Menus.

To change the chart type of a data series or a group of data series

From the Microsoft Excel version 5.0 Format menu, choose Chart Type.

See Also

Help

Changing the chart type of a data series


The name '[filename]' is a reserved device name.  Use a different filename.

You cannot type an MS-DOS device name (LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4, AUX, CON, or PRN) in the File Name box in this dialog box. Type or select a filename that is not an MS-DOS device name.


Names and results of formulas were converted into values.

The Scenario Values dialog box only accepts values. If you entered a name or a formula as the value for a changing cell, the name was converted to the value of the name, and the formula was converted to the result of the formula.

See Also

Help

Overview of Using Scenario Manager


References in object formulas must be external references to worksheets.

References in the formula for this object must be external references.

You must include the sheet name in the reference; for example: Sheet1!A1.

See Also

Help

Entering a reference to another sheet in a workbook


Replace existing user-defined autoformat?
Replace existing user-defined format?

OK

Replaces a previously saved user-defined autoformat with the formatting of the open chart.

Cancel

Cancels the Add operation.

If you want to save the user-defined autoformat with a unique name, type that name in the Format Name box.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list


Delete this user-defined format?

OK

Deletes the user-defined autoformat selected in the Formats list.

Cancel

Cancels the delete operation.

See Also

Help

Deleting a custom autoformat from the Formats list


No format name specified.

Type a name for the user-defined autoformat in the Format Name box.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list


Format name must not exceed 31 characters.

Type a user-defined autoformat name containing 31 characters or fewer.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list


Format description must not exceed 32 characters.

Type a user-defined autoformat description containing 32 characters or fewer.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list


Format name is not valid
Format name is not valid.

Type a name for the user-defined autoformat using only valid characters.

Valid user-defined format names cannot include the following characters:

 Colon (:).

 Slash (/).

 Backslash (\).

 Question mark (?).

 Asterisk (*).

An opening square bracket ( [ ), followed by a closing square bracket ( ] ), or at least one character and a closing square bracket.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list


Error in deleting format.

The workbook in which the user-defined autoformats are saved is read-only, or the user-defined autoformat does not exist.

See Also

Help

Deleting a custom autoformat from the Formats list


Format does not exist.

Make sure that the macro specifies an existing user-defined autoformat.

See Also

Help

Applying an autoformat to a chart


You cannot save User-defined Autoformats Workbook in the startup directory. Save it elsewhere now and move it to the startup dir
You cannot save the User-defined Autoformats Workbook in the startup directory. Save it elsewhere now and move it to the startup directory later.

No directory is currently specified as the startup directory. You can save the workbook of user-defined autoformats in another directory now, and move it to the startup directory once it has been created. These autoformats will then be available for you to use with your charts.

OK

Displays the Save As dialog box. Choose the OK button to save the user-defined autoformats in a workbook named XL5GALRY.XLS. You can specify a different directory in the Directories box.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list

Overview of Controlling What Happens When You Start Microsoft Excel


Cannot save User-defined Autoformats Workbook.

Some possible causes and solutions include the following:

The workbook (XL5GALRY.XLS) in which the user-defined autoformats are saved is read-only. Change the file status to read-write.

The directory or disk on which the user-defined autoformats workbook (XL5GALRY.XLS) is saved is read-only. Change the directory or disk status to read-write.

The disk is full. Delete any unnecessary files, and try the save operation again.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list


You can add the chart template as a user-defined autoformat and use it later by choosing Autoformat from the Format menu.  Choos
You can add the chart template as a user-defined autoformat and use it later by choosing Autoformat from the Format menu. Choose Yes to add this template as an autoformat. Choose No to continue saving the file as a workbook template.

User-defined autoformats are often easier to use than chart templates. If you save the chart formatting as a user-defined autoformat instead of as a template, you can easily view a sample of the chart formatting using the AutoFormat command on the Format menu.

Yes

Adds this chart template as a user-defined autoformat.

No

Saves this workbook as a template.

To apply a user-defined autoformat

1.	From the Format menu, choose AutoFormat.

2.	Under Formats Used, select the User-Defined option button.

3.	Select the autoformat that you want from the Formats list. A sample of the autoformat is displayed in the Format Sample box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list

Applying an autoformat to a chart


Redefine '[scenario name]' scenario based on current cell values?

Yes

Saves the current changing cell values with this scenario name, overwriting any previous values for these cells.

No

Leaves the original scenario intact. If you want to define a new scenario, you can type a unique scenario name for this set of changing cells.

See Also

Help

Creating a scenario


Some changing cells are part of an array or table and cannot be changed.

Remove the array or table before applying the scenario, or redefine the scenario to use other changing cells.

See Also

Help

Displaying a scenario

Editing a scenario


Too many changing cells.  A scenario can have no more than 32 changing cells.

You can only select up to 32 cells as the changing cells for a scenario.

To cancel the selection of the additional cells

Hold down CTRL and click the cells you want to remove.

See Also

Help

Creating a scenario

Overview of Using Scenario Manager


Scenario names must be unique.

A scenario with that name already exists. Type a unique name for the scenario.

See Also

Help

Creating a scenario


At least one of the changing cells you specified contains a formula.  Formulas in changing cells will be replaced by constant va
At least one of the changing cells you specified contains a formula.  Formulas in changing cells will be replaced by constant values when you show a scenario.

Changing cells are normally cells with values on which key formulas depend, but changing cells themselves should not normally contain formulas. The scenario will be created, but formulas in changing cells will be replaced with the current values when a scenario is shown.

See Also

Help

Creating a scenario


Too many scenarios to fit in the report.  Some were left out.

A summary report can contain up to 251 scenarios. Move any additional scenarios to another sheet.

See Also

Help

Creating a summary report


No list found.  If you select a single cell within your list, Microsoft Excel will select the list for you.
No list found. Select a single cell within your list and Microsoft Excel will select the list for you.

Select one cell within the list you want to use, and choose the command again.

See Also

Help

Filter Command (Data Menu

Form Command (Data Menu)

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Subtotals Command (Data Menu)


Cells without simple text were ignored.

Only cells containing simple text can be imported as items in a custom list. You cannot import formulas; strings returned by formulas; numbers; error values; or the logical values TRUE, FALSE, 1, and 0.

See Also

Help

Custom Lists Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Customizing AutoFill

Error Values


Database is hidden.

The database you are trying to use is on a hidden sheet in another workbook. Unhide the sheet containing the database, and try the operation again.

See Also

Help

Sheet Command

Overview of Managing Lists in Microsoft Excel

Using a List as a Database


Microsoft Excel found headers above your list or database. Expand selection to include them?

Yes

Expands the selection to include the column labels.

No

Continues the operation using only the selected cells.

Cancel

Cancels the list management operation.

See Also

Help

Filter Command (Data Menu)

Form Command (Data Menu)

Subtotals Command (Data Menu)


This removes the subtotals and sorts again.  If you want to sort the subtotaled groups, choose the Cancel button; then collapse
This removes the subtotals and sorts again. If you want to sort the subtotaled groups, choose the Cancel button; then collapse the outline and try again.

OK

Removes the automatic subtotals and sorts all rows in the list.

Cancel

Cancels the sort operation.

To sort only the subtotal groups, hide the detail rows in the outline, and choose the Sort command from the Data menu again.

See Also

Help

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Subtotals Command (Data Menu)

Hiding and showing detail data in a subtotaled list


The item name or field name cannot be changed.
Replacement creating duplicate item or field name ignored.

The item name or field name cannot be changed because an item or field with that name already exists.


Pivot table is not valid.

The data source for the pivot table is no longer valid or cannot be found.

To regain use of the pivot table, try the following :

Make additional memory available by closing any unneeded windows, files, or applications.

If you are using an external data source, make sure that the network connection still exists.

Click the PivotTable Wizard button, and specify a different data source location in Step 2 of the PivotTable Wizard.

See Also

Help

Changing source data for a pivot table

Creating a pivot table

Deleting a pivot table


Cannot pivot a data field button that does not appear in the pivot table.

The data field button you are trying to pivot does not appear in the pivot table. To display this field, make sure you include at least two data fields in the pivot table. Select a cell in the pivot table, and then click the PivotTable Wizard button on the Query And Pivot toolbar. In Step 3 of the PivotTable Wizard, add the data fields you want to display to the data area, and then choose the Finish button.

See Also

Help

Overview of Changing the Layout of a Pivot Table


Cannot paste items into a different field.

You cannot cut or copy items from one field and paste them into another field.

See Also

Help

Overview of Editing and Formatting a Pivot Table


Cannot paste items into a different group of items.

You cannot cut or copy items from one item and paste them into another set of items.

See Also

Help

Overview of Editing and Formatting a Pivot Table


Cannot edit pivot table in data entry mode.

Exit Data Entry mode before trying to change the pivot table again.

See Also

Help

Overview of Editing and Formatting a Pivot Table


Cannot enter a formula into a pivot table.

You cannot enter a formula into a pivot table, but you can customize pivot table data in other ways:

You can change the summary function for subtotals in a selected field.

You can change the summary function or use a custom calculation for a selected data field.

See Also

Help

Changing the calculation type for a pivot table data field

Changing the summary function for a pivot table data field

Changing the summary function for a pivot table subtotal

Overview of Changing How Pivot Table Data Is Calculated

PivotTable Field Command (Data Menu)


Cannot pivot data field button to a page orientation.

The data field button cannot be moved to a page orientation.

See Also

Help

Overview of Changing the Layout of a Pivot Table


Cannot move or modify part of a pivot table.

To move or insert data in a pivot table, you can:

Use the PivotTable Wizard or drag and drop field headers to change the layout of the pivot table.

Add subtotals, block totals, and grand totals.

Hide or group items in a row or column field.

Edit the source data.

See Also

Help

Cannot change this part of a pivot table.

Overview of Adding and Removing Pivot Table Data

Overview of Changing the Layout of a Pivot Table

Overview of Editing and Formatting a Pivot Table

Overview of Grouping Items in a Pivot Table

Overview of Hiding and Showing Detail Data in a Pivot Table

Overview of Working with Totals in a Pivot Table


Cannot paste a link into a pivot table.

You cannot paste link data into a pivot table. You can paste link data into the list or table that serves as the source for the pivot table. When the linked data is updated, you can update the data in the pivot table by choosing Refresh Data from the Data menu or the shortcut menu.

See Also

Help

Linking a document from another application to a Microsoft Excel worksheet

Updating data in a pivot table


Cannot edit pivot table on protected sheet.

You cannot edit a pivot table while the worksheet is protected, even if the pivot table cells are unlocked.

To unprotect the sheet

From the Tools menu, choose Protection, and then choose Unprotect Sheet.


Cannot change this part of a pivot table.

You cannot change the cells in the data area of a pivot table.

To change the data in the data area of a pivot table, you must change the data in the source list or table and then choose the Refresh Data command from the Data menu or the shortcut menu to update the pivot table.

You can also change the summary function for or apply a custom calculation to a selected data field using the PivotTable Field command on the Data menu or the shortcut menu.

If you do need to change data directly, you can copy the pivot table and then use the Paste Special command on the Edit menu to paste only the cell values into another worksheet location. You can then change the cells. The links to the original source list are not maintained, as the copied range is no longer a pivot table.

See Also

Help

Changing the calculation type for a pivot table data field

Changing the summary function for a pivot table data field

Copying only the cell value

Overview of Editing and Formatting a Pivot Table

Updating data in a pivot table


Cannot sort items in a page field.

Items in a page field cannot be sorted unless you first move the field to a row or column orientation.

To sort the page field items

1.	Drag the page field to a row or column orientation.

2.	Sort the items.

3.	Drag the field back to a page orientation.

See Also

Help

Overview of Changing the Layout of a Pivot Table

Overview of Sorting Pivot Table Items


Problems obtaining data.

The external data source has changed or cannot be accessed.

Click the PivotTable Wizard button. In Step 2 of the PivotTable Wizard, choose the Get Data button to retrieve the data again.

Make sure that Microsoft Query is available, and that the specified data still exists.

Note  You may also not have enough memory available to complete the query. Close any unneeded files and applications, and try again.

See Also

Help

Editing a query for a pivot table


Cannot use the autotemplate CHART.XLT. You can use the AutoFormat command on the Format menu to create a new custom chart autofo
Cannot use the autotemplate CHART.XLT. Use the AutoFormat Command on the Format menu to create a new custom chart autoformat.

The file CHART.XLT, saved in Microsoft Excel version 5.0 or later, cannot be used as an autotemplate.

Microsoft Excel version 5.0 uses custom (user-defined) autoformats in place of the autotemplates used in Microsoft Excel version 4.0 and earlier.

Autoformats work much like templates or styles. Each autoformat is based on a chart type. It can also specify the subtype, legend, gridlines, data labels, colors, patterns, and the placement of various chart items. When you apply an autoformat to an active chart, it changes the look of the chart but does not affect your data. You cannot modify any autoformats, but you can delete custom autoformats.

You can share custom autoformats with other Microsoft Excel users in your workgroup by making available the workbook named XL5GALRY.XLS, in which the autoformats are stored. This workbook  is located in the XLSTART directory in the directory in which you installed Microsoft Excel.

NOTE  If you want to use the CHART.XLT autotemplate to create charts, save CHART.XLT in Microsoft Excel version 4.0 or earlier.

See Also

Help

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list

User's Guide

Chapter 16, "Working With Built-in and Custom Chart Autoformats"


Cannot combine 2-D and 3-D types.  Change all series in chart to 2-D?

Only one series in the chart is selected. You cannot change individual series to 2-D type, leaving the rest 3-D.

OK

Changes all the series in the chart to 2-D type.

Cancel

Cancels the change and leaves the chart formatted as 3-D.

See Also

Help

Changing the chart type of a data series

Changing the chart type of an entire chart


Cannot open an empty Microsoft Excel version 4.0 workbook.
Cannot load an empty Microsoft Excel 4.0 workbook.

There are no documents in the Microsoft Excel version 4.0 workbook you are trying to open. Specify another file to open, or open the workbook in Microsoft Excel version 4.0 and add at least one document.

See Also

Help

Overview of Opening and Saving Documents in Different File Formats


Cannot open Microsoft Excel 5.0 add-in for editing. Edit the source document instead.
Cannot open Microsoft Excel 5.0 Add-In for editing.  Please edit the source document instead.

Microsoft Excel version 5.0 add-in macros are written and compiled using Visual Basic for Applications. If you have the source workbook for the add-in, you can open it, edit the code, and then recompile the add-in.

See Also

Help

Make Add-in Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Automatic Procedures and Add-in Applications"


Cannot pivot. Pivot table does not contain this field.

Specify an existing pivot table field.

See Also

Help

How a Pivot Table Works


A workbook must contain at least one worksheet to be saved as a WK3 file.
Cannot save as a WK3 file if there are no worksheets in the workbook.

This workbook does not contain any worksheets. To add a worksheet to this workbook, choose Worksheet from the Insert menu. You can then save this workbook as a WK3 file.

See Also

Help

Save As Command (File Menu)

Overview of Opening and Saving Documents in Different File Formats


You must specify changing cells.
Changing Cells are required.

Select the Changing Cells box in the Add Scenario dialog box or the Edit Scenario dialog box. Enter the reference of the cells that will change in the scenario.

See Also

Help

Add Scenario or Edit Scenario Dialog Box

Creating a scenario


Cannot access workbook that contains user-defined autoformats.
Error accessing User-defined AutoFormat file

Some possible problems and solutions include:

Microsoft Excel may not have enough memory to access the XL5GALRY.XLS workbook, in which the user-defined autoformats are stored. Close any unneeded windows, documents, and applications, and try again.

The workbook may be read-only. Quit Microsoft Excel, change the workbook status to read-write, and try again.

The workbook may be being used by another application. When the workbook is no longer being used, restart Microsoft Excel and try again.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list


Cannot add user-defined format.
Error in adding template

Some possible causes and solutions include the following:

The workbook in which the user-defined autoformats are stored (XL5GALRY.XLS) is read-only. Quit Microsoft Excel, change the file status to read-write, and try again.

Microsoft Excel does not have enough memory to add a user-defined autoformat. Close any unneeded windows, documents, and applications, and try again.

There is not enough disk space to add a user-defined autoformat. Delete any unneeded files from the disk, and try again.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list


Microsoft Excel has detected subtotals in your list.  Aborting Pivot....

The list you are using to create a pivot table contains automatic subtotals. Because a pivot table automatically subtotals data for you, you do not need subtotals in your source list. Remove existing automatic subtotals from your source list, and choose the PivotTable command again.

See Also

Help

Subtotals Command (Data Menu)

Overview of Working with Totals in a Pivot Table

Removing or replacing automatic subtotals


Only worksheets and charts will be saved.

When a workbook is saved as a WK3 file, only worksheets and chart sheets are saved in the new file. The other sheet types will become the last sheets in the workbook.

See Also

Help

File Formats (Windows)

Overview of Opening and Saving Documents in Different File Formats


Reference is not valid.  Reference for error bars must be a row or column.

The reference for the selected error bar is an incorrect cell range. An error bar reference must be to a cell range in a single column or a single row. References to cells in more than one row and column are not valid. Enter a reference to a valid error bar range.

See Also

Help

Overview of Adding Error Bars to a Data Series

Changing Data in a Chart


You must quit Microsoft Windows and run SHARE.EXE in order to start Microsoft Excel.
You must exit Windows and load SHARE.EXE in order to run Microsoft Excel.

1.	Quit Microsoft Windows.

2.	Open the file AUTOEXEC.BAT in a text editor program.

3.	Add a new line with the text share.exe /L:500 /F:5100

4.	Save AUTOEXEC.BAT and quit the text editor.

5.	Restart your computer, run Windows, and start Microsoft Excel again.

See Also

Help

Excel Readme Help


Some scenario values were too long and had to be truncated.

Some scenario values exceed the precision limit of Microsoft Excel. You might want to use less-precise numbers (numbers with fewer digits) in the scenario.

See Also

Help

Creating a scenario


There is already a macro assigned to that key. You can use a different keyboard shortcut. Assign to that keyboard shortcut anywa
There is already a macro assigned to that key. You can use a different keyboard shortcut. Assign to that keyboard shortcut anyway?

Another macro uses that key combination as a keyboard shortcut.

Yes

Reassigns the keyboard shortcut noted in the Record New Macro dialog box to the current macro. Closes the Record New Macro dialog box and begins recording the macro.

NOTE  You might want to assign another shortcut to the other macro.

No

Leaves the Record New Macro dialog box open. You can assign another keyboard shortcut to the new macro.

See Also

Help

Record New Macro Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Recording a macro


This command inserts automatic subtotals in a list. To display and remove subtotals in a pivot table, use the PivotTable Field c
This subtotals lists in place. To display and remove subtotals in a pivot table, use the PivotTable Field command.

The Subtotals command on the Data menu inserts automatic subtotals in a worksheet list. To display, remove, or change subtotals in a pivot table, use the PivotTable Field command on the Data menu or the shortcut menu.

See Also

Help

PivotTable Field Command for Field Labels (Data Menu)

Subtotals Command (Data Menu)

Displaying subtotals for row or column fields in a pivot table


Invalid number of arguments.

The method has the wrong number of arguments. This usually occurs when you use comma-separated positional arguments (instead of named arguments), and you have too many arguments.

To see the valid arguments for this method, choose Object Browser from the View menu, and click the question mark button in the Object Browser dialog box to display the Visual Basic Help topic for this method.


An Excel lexicon '[filename]' is missing or damaged.

A Microsoft Excel lexicon is either missing or has been damaged.

Run the Microsoft Excel Setup program to get the correct version of the Visual Basic for Applications lexicon file.

If running Setup does not correct this problem, you might need to delete the existing Visual Basic *.OLB file first, and then run Setup again. The Visual Basic *.OLB file is located in the System subdirectory of your Microsoft Windows directory, or in your Microsoft Excel 5.0 directory.


The Visual Basic for Applications Lexicon is the wrong version.
VBA Lexicon is wrong version.

The version number of the Visual Basic for Applications lexicon does not match the version number of Microsoft Excel.

Run the Microsoft Excel Setup program to get the correct version of the Visual Basic for Applications lexicon.


Cannot edit a macro on a hidden workbook. Unhide the workbook using the Unhide command.

You are trying to edit a macro in a workbook that is hidden. Use the Unhide command to display the workbook that contains the macro you want to edit. If all open windows are hidden, the Unhide command is located on the File menu; if at least one window is visible, the Unhide command is on the Window menu.


Only Visual Basic macros can be deleted using this dialog. Delete Microsoft Excel 4.0 macros by editing the macro sheets.

The Macro dialog box can be used to delete macros written in Visual Basic only. If you want to delete a macro written in the Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro language, you must edit the macro sheet. Choose the Edit button to open the macro sheet that contains the macro.


OLE Objects cannot be active while debugging. Your code may execute differently in the Debug window because the currently active
OLE Objects cannot be active while debugging.  Your code may execute differently in the debug window because the currently active OLE Object will be automatically deactivated.

Visual editing is not allowed while debugging. OLE objects are automatically deactivated when the Debug window is displayed. Your code may run differently because the active object is not the OLE object.

To debug code that requires an OLE object to be active, use the Debug.Print statement or the MsgBox statement to display messages.


Cannot set options for this macro because of an error in the macro code.

Your entire Visual Basic module must be syntactically correct before you can set options in any macro in that module. Check all macros in your module for syntax errors.


'[Object]' does not have '[property name]' property.
'[Object]' does not have '[property name]' property

The property does not exist for this object. To see a list of properties for this object, choose Object Browser from the View menu, and click the question mark button in the Object Browser dialog box to display the Visual Basic Help topic for this object.


'[Object]' does not have '[method name]' method.
'[Object]' does not have '[method name]' method

The method does not exist for this object. To see a list of methods for this object, choose Object Browser from the View menu, and click the question mark button in the Object Browser dialog box to display the Visual Basic Help topic for this object.


Missing required argument '[argument]'.
Missing required argument '[argument]'

The method expected a required argument that does not exist. Add the argument to the code. To see a list of required arguments, choose Object Browser from the View menu, and click the question mark button in the Object Browser dialog box to display the Visual Basic Help topic.


'[Method name]' method of '[object]' class failed.
'[Method name]' method of '[object]' class failed

The method cannot be used on the object. Possible reasons include:

An argument contains an value that is not valid. A common cause of this problem is trying to access an object that does not exist; for example, Workbooks(5) when there are only 3 workbooks open.

The method cannot be used in the applied context. For example, some Range object methods require that the Range contain data. If the Range contains no data, the method will fail.

An external error occurred, such as a failure to read or write from a file.


Unable to set the '[property name]' property of the '[object]' class.
Unable to set the '[property name]' property of the '[object]' class

The property cannot be changed. Possible reasons include:

The value you are using for the property is not valid; for example, setting a property to a string value when the property requires a Boolean value.

The property is read-only and cannot be written.

For more information about the property, search Visual Basic Help for the property name.


Unable to get the '[property name]' property of the '[object]' class.
Unable to get the '[property name]' property of the '[object]' class

The property cannot be changed. Possible reasons include:

The value you are using for the property is not valid; for example, setting a property to a string value when the property requires a Boolean value.

The property cannot be used in the applied context. For example, the code ActiveChart.Legend.Font.Color = RGB(255, 0, 0) will cause this error if the active chart does not contain a legend.


You cannot edit when calculating a user-defined function.
You cannot edit when calculating a user defined function.

When you are debugging a user-defined function that is being calculated from a worksheet, you cannot type in the code portion of the Debug window.


'[Object]' does not have writeable '[property name]' property.

This property is read-only. For more information, choose Object Browser from the View menu, and click the question mark button in the Object Browser dialog box to display the Visual Basic Help topic for this property.


'[Object]' does not have readable '[property name]' property.
'[Object]' does not have readable '[property name]' property

This property is write-only. For more information, choose Object Browser from the View menu, and click the question mark button in the Object Browser dialog box to display the Visual Basic Help topic for this property.


Save changes in '[filename]'? Note: The current file format is not Microsoft Excel Workbook.

You tried to close the file without saving changes. This file is not in the Microsoft Excel 5.0 workbook format.

Yes

Saves the changes to your file. Microsoft Excel might display a message asking if you want to update your file in the Microsoft Excel 5.0 format, or display the Save As dialog box. To save this file in the Microsoft Excel 5.0 workbook format, select Microsoft Excel Workbook from the Save File As Type list.

No

Closes your file without saving the changes. The file remains in its current file format.

Cancel

Cancels the Close command.

See Also

Help

Overview of Saving and Closing Workbooks


Cannot save to that file format. There are references to other sheets in this Workbook. Copy this sheet to a different Workbook
Cannot save to that file format. There are references to other sheets in this Workbook. Copy this sheet to a different Workbook first, then try again.

In order to preserve your references, use the Move Or Copy Sheet command on the Edit menu to copy the sheet you want to save into another workbook. Then, you can save the sheet in the format you want and the references will be handled as external references.

See Also

Help

Overview of Saving and Closing Workbooks


Document saved successfully. Cannot reopen the saved document due to low memory. Please close the document.

There is not enough memory available to reopen the saved document. Close any unneeded files and quit any unneeded applications, and then try again.

See Also

Help

Overview of Saving and Closing Workbooks


Cannot print file.

You cannot print Microsoft Excel add-in files or templates. Add-in files have the extension .XLA, templates have the extension .XLT.

See Also

Help

Add-Ins Included with Microsoft Excel

What Is a Template?


Too many files selected.  Microsoft Excel will open or print as many of the files as possible.

Microsoft Excel cannot open or print all the files you selected. When you choose the OK button, Microsoft Excel opens or prints as many of the files as possible.

See Also

Help

Overview of Managing Workbooks with Find File


Cannot edit chart objects while Microsoft Excel 5.0 is inplace editing.

To edit the chart

1	Press ESC to cancel the selection of the chart. (You may need to press ESC twice if you have a chart object selected.)

2	From the Microsoft Word Edit menu, choose Chart Object or SpreadSheet Object, and then choose Open.

3	Edit the chart.

4	From the Microsoft Excel File menu, choose Close.

When you close the chart in Microsoft Excel, you will be returned to the Microsoft Word document in which the chart is embedded.

See Also

Help

Guide to Formatting Chart Items


Microsoft Excel is waiting for another application to complete an OLE action.

The source application is busy and cannot respond. Switch to the source application and try to resolve the problem. For example, if a dialog box is open in the source application, you must close the dialog box before the source application can respond. Then, switch back to Microsoft Excel and try the operation again.

See Also

Help

Overview of Linking and Embedding


The object is not responding.  Continue waiting?

The source application is busy and cannot respond immediately. You can switch to the other application and try to resolve the problem, or you can continue waiting.

Yes

Tries the operation again.

No

Cancels the operation. If you want, you can switch to the other application and resolve the problem, and then try the operation again.

See Also

Help

Overview of Linking and Embedding


Cannot open Quattro Pro for Windows file.

You cannot open a Quattro Pro for Windows file in Microsoft Excel. To move the data into Microsoft Excel, you can do one of the following:

Convert the file to a file format that can be opened by Microsoft Excel, such as Quattro Pro for MS-DOS.

If you want to use only a limited amount of data, you can copy the data onto the Windows Clipboard, and then use the Paste Special command on the Microsoft Excel Edit menu to paste the data into Microsoft Excel.

See Also

Help

Copying data from another application to Microsoft Excel

File Formats


Cannot open Lotus 123 '[version]' file.

In Microsoft Excel, you cannot open a file created in this version of Lotus 1-2-3. To move the data into Microsoft Excel, you can do one of the following:

Convert the file to a file format that can be opened by Microsoft Excel, such as Lotus 1-2-3 .WK3 format.

If you want to use only a limited amount of data, you can copy the data onto the Windows Clipboard, and then use the Paste Special command on the Microsoft Excel Edit menu to paste the data into Microsoft Excel.

See Also

Help

Copying data from another application to Microsoft Excel

File Formats (Windows)


Too many items to create pivot table.

A field you selected as a row, column, or page field for your pivot table contains more than 8000 unique items. Because Microsoft Excel creates a row, column, or page for each unique item in a row, column, or page field, you should add fields that have only a limited number of unique items.

See Also

Help

How a Pivot Table Works

Overview of Adding and Removing Pivot Table Data


You must specify result cells when creating a scenario pivot table report.

You must specify at least one result cell when creating a scenario pivot table report. In the Scenario Summary dialog box, enter a cell reference in the Result Cells box.

See Also

Help

Creating a summary report

Overview of Using Scenario Manager


Too many result cells.  A report can have no more than 32 result cells.

You can select a maximum of 32 cells as result cells for a scenario summary report. Select a smaller number of cells in the Result Cells box.

See Also

Help

Creating a summary report

Overview of Using Scenario Manager


Cannot ungroup that selection.

The cell you selected is not a row or column field or item. You cannot ungroup items by selecting cells in grand total rows or columns, subtotal rows or columns, or by selecting cells in the data area or page field of the pivot table. Select the group field or item you want to ungroup, and then choose the UnGroup command or button again.

See Also

Help

Overview of grouping items in a pivot table

Ungrouping items in a pivot table


Save changes in '[filename]'?  Note: Though you already saved this workbook as an Add-In, code in an Add-In cannot be viewed or
Save changes in '[filename]'? Note: Though you already saved this workbook as an Add-In, Add-Ins cannot be viewed or edited.  This workbook is the editable version of the Add-In.

You are closing a workbook that is the source for an add-in file. Saving the changes in this workbook is your only way to edit or view the add-in file.

Yes

Saves changes to the source workbook.

No

Does not save changes to the source workbook. You will not be able to edit the add-in file.

Cancel

Cancels the close operation and returns you to the unsaved workbook.

See Also

Help

Make Add-in Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Automatic Procedures and Add-in Applications"


Macro cannot be edited inplace.

You have tried to directly edit a hidden macro sheet or Visual Basic module from within another application.

To edit a hidden module or macro sheet

1.	Press ESC to cancel in-place editing.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Worksheet Object, and then choose Open.

3.	Unhide the sheet or workbook.

To unhide your personal workbook, choose Unhide from the Window menu and then select PERSONAL.XLS.

4.	Edit the module or macro sheet.

5.	From the Microsoft Excel File menu, choose Close.

When you close the workbook in Microsoft Excel, you will be returned to the document in which the workbook is embedded.

See Also

Help

Entering and Editing Code

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Cannot create a reference to unsaved workbooks.

The workbook you are saving contains external references to workbooks that have never been saved. If you choose the OK button to save the workbook and then close it before saving the source workbooks, the external references to those workbooks may not be valid, because the names of unsaved workbooks often change when you save them.

To save source workbooks

1.	Choose the Cancel button.

2.	Save the unsaved source workbooks.

3.	Save the destination workbook.

Choose the OK button only if you are sure that you will save the unsaved source workbooks before closing the destination workbook.


Not enough stack space to perform command.

The following are some possible solutions:

Reduce the number of nested dialog boxes (close one dialog box before opening another).

Move some code from the event macros to the macro that called the dialog box.


Cannot rename a sheet to the same name as another sheet, a referenced object library or a workbook referenced by Visual Basic.

You are trying to change the name of a sheet in a workbook to a name that is already being used in this workbook, or by a reference workbook. Try the rename operation again, specifying a unique name for the sheet.

See Also

Help

References Command (Tools Menu)

Sheet Command (Format Menu)


Only macro names are valid.

Select a macro name from the list in the Macro Name/Reference box.

See Also

Help

Macro Command (Tools Menu)


Cannot move part of the filter dropdown row.

To complete the command, you must either select the entire filter row, or remove the AutoFilter arrows by canceling the AutoFilter command.

See Also

Help

Selecting an entire row or column or all cells on a sheet


Microsoft Excel 5.0 workspaces cannot contain Microsoft Excel 4.0 workbooks.  Use 'Save As' to change the file type.

You have tried to save a workspace that contains a Microsoft Excel 4.0 workbook. Change the Microsoft Excel 4.0 workbook to the Microsoft Excel 5.0 Workbook format, and then save the workspace again.

To save your workbook in the Microsoft Excel 5.0 format

1.	Switch to the Microsoft Excel 4.0 workbook.

2.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

3.	In the Save File As Type box, select Microsoft Excel Workbook.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Creating and saving a workspace file

Saving a document for use in another application

Save Workspace Command (File Menu)


Cannot edit macro on protected sheet or book.

The macro you are trying to edit is on a protected sheet or in a protected workbook.

To unprotect the sheet

From the Tools menu, choose Protection, and then choose Unprotect Sheet.

To unprotect the workbook

From the Tools menu, choose Protection, and then choose Unprotect Workbook.


Reference is not valid.

The reference you specified is not a valid reference or is not valid for the particular command you chose; or, you did not enter a reference where one was required.

To enter references with the mouse, first make sure that the status bar displays "Enter," and then click the cell or drag through the cell range you want to select. To enter references with the keyboard, use the arrow keys to select a cell, and then hold down SHIFT while using the arrow keys to extend the selection.

You can use these techniques to refer to cells on the same sheet or to cells in different sheets within the same workbook. A reference to another Microsoft Excel workbook is an external reference.

To enter external references to workbooks that are not open, use one of the following methods:

Change the current directory to the directory that contains the unopened workbook. Then, refer to the sheet as you would if it were open. For example:

=[BOOK1.XLS]SHEET1!$A$1

To refer to the workbook location including its path, enclose the path and filename in single quotation marks. Type the exclamation point after the closing single quotation mark. For example:

='C:\EXCEL\[BOOK1.XLS]SHEET1'!$A$1

See Also

Help

Overview of Using References


An error occurred initializing the VBA libraries [filename]

A Visual Basic for applications library is either missing or has been damaged.

Run the Microsoft Excel Setup program to get the correct version of the Visual Basic for applications library file.


One of your object libraries '[filename]' is missing or damaged.
One of your object libraries (|) is missing or damaged.

A Visual Basic for applications object library is either missing or has been damaged.

Run the Microsoft Excel Setup program to get the correct version of the Visual Basic for applications object library file.


VBA Lexicon is wrong type
VBA Lexicon is wrong type (ship vs debug)

The version number of the Visual Basic for applications lexicon does not match the version number of Microsoft Excel.

Run the Microsoft Excel Setup program to get the correct version of the Visual Basic for applications lexicon.


'[Name]' is not a valid directory name. Check your typing.

Make sure that the directory exists, and that you are typing it correctly.

Do not include a directory in the filename or specification.

You typed a path in the File Name box. Type only the filename or a filename with wildcard characters in the File Name box. To specify the location of the directories to search, use the Location box.

The filename, specification or location '[filename or path]' isn't valid. Check your typing.

Make sure that you have typed a valid filename, path, or wildcard characters in the File Name and Location boxes. Valid wildcard characters are the asterisk (*) and question mark (?).

The filename, specification or location '[filename or path]' isn't valid because it contains spaces or commas. Check your typing.

The document name or path that you typed is not valid.

Type a valid filename. The filename can contain up to eight characters and an extension of up to three characters; for example, FILENAME.DOC

Delete any characters that are not valid in filenames, such as spaces or commas.

If you are searching for multiple filenames or extensions, separate them with semicolons (;).

The directory '[directory name]' doesn't exist or is inaccessible. Check your typing. Do you want to skip this path during the search?

Make sure that you have typed a valid directory name in the Location box. Choose OK if you want to skip this path during the search. Choose Cancel if you want to re-type the directory name.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


There is not enough available memory. You may be able to use the File Manager to establish network connections.

Close any unneeded files or applications and try again. You might also be able to use the Windows File Manager to establish network connections, and then switch back to Find File to complete the search operation. For more information on File Manager, see your Windows documentation.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The file you've selected contains a preview, but it requires too much memory to display.

You can still use other Find File commands with this file, but the preview is too large to display.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)


The Timer driver is not installed on this system. Microsoft Excel cannot run without the Timer driver. Choose the help button fo
The Timer driver is not installed on this system. Microsoft Excel cannot run without the Timer driver. Choose the help button for more information.

Microsoft Excel cannot run without the Timer driver installed. To install the driver:

1.	Double-click the Control Panel icon to run the Microsoft Windows Control Panel. If you do not have an icon for the Control Panel, run the file CONTROL.EXE from the Program Manager.

2.	In the Control Panel window, double-click the Drivers icon.

3.	If the Timer driver is not in the list of installed drivers, choose the Add button.

4.	Select Timer from the list of drivers and then choose the OK button. If the driver does not exist on your system, the program will ask you to insert the appropriate Microsoft Windows setup disk into one of your floppy disk drives; follow the instructions in the dialog box.

5.	Choose the Close button in the Drivers dialog box.

6.	Close the Control Panel, and then restart Microsoft Windows.

7.	Restart Microsoft Excel.


Document saved as '[filname]'. Cannot rename to '[filename]'. You must close this document.
Document saved as '[filename]'. Cannot rename to '[filename]'. You must close this document.

Microsoft Excel was unable to save this file because you do not have rename or delete privileges on the file server where you tried to save it. A temporary file was created on the server. You can re-open this temporary file, and save it to another drive.

Note  You must close the current file if the file contains any Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) objects or Visual Basic for Applications module sheets.

To avoid this problem in the future, save the file to a device where you have full privileges, and move the file to the server manually; or talk to your system administrator about establishing rename and delete privileges.


Scenario information will be lost.

Caution  You are attempting to save a Microsoft Excel 5.0 workbook in Microsoft Excel 4.0 format. Your workbook includes one or more scenarios, and Microsoft Excel 4.0 has different scenario limitations. You may loose scenario data.

If your scenarios collectively contain fewer than 32 changing cells, the scenarios' changing cells will be combined into one set of changing cells, and each scenario will be saved with this common set of changing cells.

If your scenarios collectively contain 32 or more changing cells, your scenario information will be lost. You will have to recreate your scenarios in Microsoft Excel 4.0.


Microsoft Excel cannot complete this operation because the ODBC Driver Manager is not installed.

To install this component, rerun the Microsoft Excel Setup program.


Accessibility for People with Disabilities

Microsoft is committed to making its products and services easier for everyone to use. This Help file provides information about the following products and services, which make Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Excel more accessible for people with disabilities.

Note  The information in this section applies only to users who purchased Windows in the United States. If you purchased Windows outside the United States, your Windows package contains a subsidiary information card that lists Microsoft support services telephone numbers and addresses. Contact your subsidiary to find out whether the type of products and services described in this Help file are available in your area.

See Also

Help

Access Pack for Microsoft Windows

Customizing Microsoft Windows

Keyboard Layouts for Single-Handed Users of Microsoft Windows

Microsoft Excel Accessibility

Microsoft Services for People Who Are Deaf or Hard-of-Hearing

Microsoft Software Documentation on Audiocassettes and Floppy Disks

More Information About Products and Services for People with Disabilities

Products for People Who Are Blind or Have Low Vision

User's Guide

Appendix B, "Accessibility for People with Disabilities"


Microsoft Excel Accessibility

In addition to Microsoft and Microsoft Windows accessibility products and services, the following features make Microsoft Excel more accessible for people with disabilities.

Zooming to Magnify the View

You can view your document at any magnification from 10 to 400 percent. By default, Microsoft Excel displays documents at 100 percent, but you can magnify the view up to 400 percent. At 400-percent magnification, 12-point type is almost 1 inch high on the screen. You can zoom worksheets, macro sheets, and charts. From the View menu, choose the Zoom command, or select the magnification you want in the Zoom Control box on the Standard toolbar.

Enlarging Toolbar Buttons

To view enlarged toolbar buttons, choose the Toolbars command from the View menu and then select the Large Buttons check box.

Enlarging Text in Column and Row Headings and in the Formula and Status Bars

To view enlarged text in row and column headings and in the formula bar and the status bar, choose the Options command from the Tools menu. Select the General tab, and then set the font and size you want.

Customizing the Keyboard

Microsoft Excel for Windows supports Dvorak keyboard layouts, which make the most frequently typed characters more accessible.

Customizing the Toolbars

You can add, delete, and move buttons on toolbars to best suit the way you work. You can also create entirely new toolbars that contain buttons for the commands, formats, and macros that you use most frequently.

Customizing the Menus

You can add new menus, delete existing menus, and customize menus so they contain the commands, formats, and macros that you commonly use.

Automating Tasks with Macros

A macro is a series of Microsoft Excel commands that you can group together as a single command. Macros automate complex tasks and reduce the number of steps required to complete tasks you perform frequently. You can assign a macro to a toolbar button, menu command, or shortcut key, making the macro as convenient to use as any standard Microsoft Excel command.

Applying Built-in Format Combinations Using AutoFormat

The AutoFormat feature automatically changes the appearance of your worksheet or chart. You can use built-in autoformats or create your own.

See Also

Help

Applying an autoformat to a chart

Applying an autoformat to a range

Keyboard Layouts for Single-Handed Users of Microsoft Windows

Overview of Assigning a Macro to the Tools Menu, a Button, or a Graphic Object

Overview of Customizing Toolbars

Recording a macro

Running a macro

Writing a macro

Zooming in or out on a worksheet

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"

Microsoft Excel Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"

Chapter 12, "Menus and Toolbars"


Microsoft Services for People Who Are Deaf or Hard-of-Hearing

Through a text telephone (TT/TDD) service, Microsoft provides people who are deaf or hard-of-hearing with complete access to Microsoft product and customer support services.

You can contact Microsoft Sales and Service on a text telephone by dialing (800) 892-5234 between 6:30 A.M. and 5:30 P.M. Pacific time. For technical assistance, you can contact Microsoft Product Support Services on a text telephone at (206) 635-4948 between 6:00 A.M. and 6:00 P.M. Pacific time. Microsoft support services are subject to Microsoft prices, terms, and conditions in place at the time the service is used.


Access Pack for Microsoft Windows

Microsoft distributes Access Pack for Microsoft Windows, which provides people with motion or hearing disabilities better access to computers that are running Microsoft Windows. Access Pack for Microsoft Windows contains features that:

Allow single-finger typing of SHIFT, CTRL, and ALT key combinations.

Ignore accidental keystrokes.

Adjust the rate at which a character is repeated when you hold down a key, or turn off character repeating entirely.

Prevent extra characters if you unintentionally press a key more

than once.

Enable you to control the mouse pointer by using the keyboard.

Enable you to control the computer keyboard and the mouse by using an alternate input device.

Provide a visual cue when the computer beeps or makes sounds.

Access Pack for Microsoft Windows is included in the Microsoft Windows Driver Library in the file ACCESS.EXE. If you have a modem, you can download Microsoft Windows Driver Library components, including the following, from network services:

CompuServe.

GEnie.

Microsoft OnLine.

Microsoft Download Service (MSDL), which you can reach by calling (206) 936-MSDL (936-6735) any time except between 1:00 A.M. and 2:30 A.M. Pacific time. Use the following communications settings.

For this setting	Specify

Baud rate	1200, 2400, or 9600

Parity	None

Data bits	8

Stop bits	1

Various user-group bulletin boards (such as the bulletin board services on the Association of PC User Groups network).

People within the United States who do not have a modem can order the Access Pack for Microsoft Windows by calling Microsoft Product Support Services at (206) 637-7098 or (206) 635-4948 (text telephone).


Keyboard Layouts for Single-Handed Users of Microsoft Windows

Microsoft distributes Dvorak keyboard layouts that make the most frequently typed characters on a keyboard more accessible to people who have difficulty using the standard "QWERTY" layout. There are three Dvorak layouts: one for two-handed users, one for people who type with their left hand only, and one for people who type with their right hand only. The left-handed and right-handed keyboard layouts can also be used by people who type with a single finger or a wand. You do not need to purchase any special equipment to use these features.

Microsoft Windows already supports the two-handed Dvorak layout, which can be useful for coping with or avoiding certain types of repetitive-motion injuries associated with typing. To get this layout, choose International in the Windows Control Panel. The two layouts for people who type with one hand are distributed as Microsoft Application Note GA0650. They are also contained in file GA0650.ZIP on most network services or GA0650.EXE on the Microsoft Download Service. For instructions on obtaining this application note from network services, see Access Pack for Microsoft Windows.


Microsoft Software Documentation on Audiocassettes and Floppy Disks

People who have difficulty reading or handling printed documentation can obtain most Microsoft publications from Recording for the Blind, Inc. Recording for the Blind distributes these documents to registered members of their distribution service either on audiocassettes or on floppy disks. The Recording for the Blind collection contains more than 80,000 titles, including Microsoft product documentation and books from Microsoft Press. You can contact Recording for the Blind at the following address or phone numbers:

Recording for the Blind, Inc.

20 Roszel Road

Princeton, NJ  08540

Phone: (800) 221-4792

Phone outside the U.S.: (609) 452-0606

Fax: (609) 987-8116


Products for People Who Are Blind or Have Low Vision

There are numerous products available to help people who are blind or have low vision use Microsoft Windows. For people with low vision, there are screen-enlargement utilities, and for people who cannot use visual information, there are screen readers that provide alternative output by means of synthesized voice or refreshable Braille displays. In addition, people with low vision can customize the Microsoft Windows display to suit their needs.

See Also

Help

Customizing Microsoft Windows

More Information About Products and Services for People with Disabilities


Customizing Microsoft Windows

There are many ways you can adjust the appearance and behavior of Microsoft Windows to suit varying vision and motor abilities without requiring any additional hardware or software. These include ways to adjust both the appearance and behavior of the mouse and keyboard. The specific methods available depend on which operating system you are using. Application notes are available that describe the specific methods available for each operating system.

For information relating to customizing Windows version 3.0 for people with disabilities, see Application Note WW0786; for Windows version 3.1, see Application Note WW0787; for Windows NT version 3.1 for Workgroups, see Application Note WG0788; for Windows NT version 3.1, see Application Note WN0789. For information about obtaining application notes from network services, see Access Pack for Microsoft Windows.


More Information About Products and Services for People with Disabilities

For more information about Microsoft products and services for people with disabilities, contact Microsoft Sales and Service at (800) 426-9400 (voice) or (800) 892-5234 (text telephone).

The Trace R&D Center at the University of Wisconsin-Madison produces a book and a compact disc that describe products that help people with disabilities use computers. The book, titled Trace Resource Book, provides descriptions and photographs of about 2000 products. The compact disc, titled Co-Net CD, provides a database of more than 17,000 products and other information for people with disabilities. It is issued twice a year.

You can contact the Trace R&D Center at the following address or telephone numbers:

Trace R&D Center

S-151 Waisman Center

1500 Highland Avenue

Madison, WI 53705-2280

Voice telephone: (608) 263-2309

Text telephone: (608) 263-5408

Fax: (608) 262-8848

For general information and recommendations on how computers can help specific people, you should consult a trained evaluator who can best match the individual's needs with the available solutions. An assistive technology program in your area can provide referrals to programs and services that are available to you.

To locate the assistive technology program nearest you, you can contact:

National Information System

Center for Developmental Disabilities

Benson Building

University of South Carolina

Columbia, SC 29208

Voice or text telephone outside South Carolina: (800) 922-9234, ext. 301

Voice or text telephone in South Carolina: (800) 922-1107

Voice or text telephone outside the United States: (803) 777-6222

Fax: (803) 777-6058


Lotus 1-2-3 Access System Menu

1-2-3

Printgraph

Translate

Install


Starting Microsoft Excel

For information about starting Microsoft Excel, see Chapter 1, "Installing and Starting Microsoft Excel," in the Microsoft Excel User's Guide.


Printing a chart

1.	Switch to the chart you want to print.

2.	From the File menu, choose Print.

3.	Select the print options you want.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Open Command (File Menu)

Print Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Saving files so they can be read by other programs

Microsoft Excel can open documents created with Lotus 1-2-3 Releases 1, 1A, 2, 2.01, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.0, 3.1, and 3.1+, as well as Lotus 1-2-3/W, Symphony, Microsoft Multiplan (SYLK), Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh, VisiCalc, and dBASE II, III, and IV. Microsoft Excel can also read and write 2-D and 3-D sheets in the WK3 format.

To save a file in a new file format

1.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

2.	In the Save File As Type box, select the file format you want.

3.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

File Formats (Windows)

Save As Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Installing Add-in Features

Overview of Installing Add-in Features

Installing or removing an add-in

Add-ins Included with Microsoft Excel


Overview of Installing Add-in Features

Add-ins are commands or functions that add special capabilities to Microsoft Excel. To install an add-in, choose the Add-ins command from the Tools menu. Once you install an add-in, its commands or functions become an integrated part of Microsoft Excel until you remove it.

See Also

Help

Add-ins Included with Microsoft Excel

Installing or removing an add-in

User's Guide

Chapter 37, "Installing Add-in Features"


Installing or removing an add-in

Overview

To install an add-in

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Add-ins.

2.	Select the check box next to the add-in you want to install.

3.	Choose the OK button.

If the add-in you want to install is not listed in the Add-ins dialog box, choose the Browse button and locate the add-in's drive, directory, and filename, or run the Microsoft Excel Setup program to install the add-in on your hard disk. For more information, see Adding or removing Microsoft Excel program files.

The add-ins you install in Microsoft Excel are active until you remove them.

To remove an add-in

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Add-ins.

2.	Clear the check box next to the add-in you want to remove .

3.	Choose the OK button.

The add-ins you clear are removed the next time you start Microsoft Excel.

See Also

Help

Add-ins Command (Tools Menu)

Add-ins Included with Microsoft Excel

User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Installing and Starting Microsoft Excel"

Chapter 37, "Installing Add-in Features"


Add-ins Included with Microsoft Excel

The following add-ins are included with Microsoft Excel and are located in the LIBRARY directory or one of its subdirectories. If you can't locate the add-in on your hard disk or network drive, you can select the Macro Library option or other add-in option in the Microsoft Excel Setup program to install these add-ins.

Add-in	Description

Analysis ToolPak	Adds financial and engineering functions, and provides tools to perform statistical and engineering analysis.

AutoSave	Saves workbooks automatically as you work.

Microsoft ODBC Add-in	Adds worksheet and macro functions for retrieving data from external sources with Microsoft Open Database Connectivity (ODBC).

Microsoft Query Add-in	Retrieves data from external database files and tables using Microsoft Query.

Report Manager	Prints reports that consist of views and scenarios.

Slide Show	Works with the Slide Show template workbook to create a slide show from Microsoft Excel worksheets and charts.

Solver	Calculates solutions to what-if scenarios based on adjustable cells, constraint cells, and, optionally, cells that must be maximized or minimized.  You must select the Solver option during Setup if you want to use Solver.

View Manager	Saves the current window display as a view and lets you apply your saved views to see your worksheet in different formats.

See Also

Help

Add-ins Command (Tools Menu)

Installing or removing an add-in

User's Guide

Chapter 37, "Installing Add-in Features"


Using Charts to Analyze Data

Overview of Adding a Trendline to a Data Series

Adding a trendline to a data series

Modifying trendline settings

Deleting a trendline

Overview of Adding Error Bars to a Data Series

Adding error bars to a data series

Modifying error bar settings

Deleting error bars

Overview of Charting Multilevel Categories and Series

Creating a chart with multilevel categories and series

Overview of Charting Visible Worksheet Data

Creating a chart from visible worksheet data


Overview of Adding a Trendline to a Data Series

Trendlines graphically illustrate trends in data series. Trendlines are commonly used when you are charting problems of prediction, also called regression analysis. Using regression analysis, you can extend the trendline forward or backward beyond the actual data to show a trend. You can also create a moving average, which smooths out fluctuations in data, showing the pattern or trend more clearly.

Which Chart Types Can Have Trendlines?

You can add trendlines to data series that are formatted as bar, column, line, and xy (scatter) charts. You cannot add trendlines to a data series in 3-D charts, or radar, pie, or doughnut chart groups. If you change a data series to any of these chart types, you will lose any associated trendlines.

How Is a Regression Trendline Calculated?

You can choose from among five regression types: linear, polynomial, logarithmic, exponential, and power. The type you choose determines how the trendline is calculated. Based on the data you are evaluating, some regression types may prove more reliable for prediction purposes than others. Therefore, you might want to try several regressions to see which type works best for your data.

How Can You Tell How Valid a Regression Trendline Is?

You can assess the reliability of a regression trendline by eyeballing it or using tools such as the R-squared value to determine fit.

What Is a Moving Average?

You can also create a moving average based on the number of periods you specify. The moving average shows a sequence of averages that are computed from parts of the series.

See Also

Help

Adding a trendline to a data series

Deleting a trendline

Formatting a trendline

Modifying trendline settings

Overview of Using an Analysis Tool

User's Guide

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Adding a trendline to a data series

Overview

You can add one or more trendlines to each data series belonging to a bar, column, line, or xy (scatter) chart group. If you add a moving average to an xy (scatter) chart, the moving average is based on the order of the x values plotted in the chart. To get the result you want, you might need to sort the x values before adding a moving average.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Select the data series to which you want to add a trendline or moving average.

3.	From the Insert menu, choose Trendline.

4.	On the Type tab, select the type of regression trendline or moving average you want.

5.	If you selected Polynomial, in the Order box, specify the highest power for the independent variable. You can enter an integer between 2 and 6.

If you selected Moving Average, in the Period box, specify the number of periods to be used in calculating the moving average.

Tip  To make any additional modifications, name the trendline, or display trendline label text, see Modifying trendline settings.

6.	When you are finished, choose the OK button.

Note  To add another trendline to a data series, be sure to select the series before choosing the Trendline command.

See Also

Help

Deleting a trendline

Formatting a trendline

Trendline Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Modifying trendline settings

Overview

These options are available for regression trendlines, not for moving averages. You can name a trendline or change it to a different type. You can also display trendline labels, such as the R-squared value or the regression equation, or you can change the Y-intercept.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Double-click the trendline you want to modify.

3.	Select the Options tab.

4.	To give the trendline a custom name, under Trendline Name, type the name you want in the Custom box.

5.	To forecast forward, backward, or in both directions, under Forecast, click the arrows to specify the number of periods you want the trendline to include.

If your series belongs to an xy (scatter) chart group, the forecast will be in units rather than periods.

6.	To set the Y-intercept, or to display the R-squared value or regression equation, select or clear the appropriate check boxes.

7.	To change the trendline type, select the Type tab, and then select the type you want.

8.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Adding a trendline to a data series

Deleting a trendline

Formatting a trendline

Options Tab, Selected Trendline Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Deleting a trendline

Overview

1.	Select the trendline you want to delete.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Clear, and then choose Trendline.

Shortcut:	DEL

See Also

Help

Adding a trendline to a data series

Clear Command (Edit Menu for Charts)

Formatting a trendline

Modifying trendline settings

Trendline Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Overview of Adding Error Bars to a Data Series

Use error bars in charts to indicate the degree of uncertainty (that is, the "plus or minus" range) for data plotted in a data series. Error bars graphically express potential error relative to each data marker in a series. Error bars are typically used in engineering and statistical fields.

Which Chart Types Can Include Error Bars?

You can add error bars to data series formatted as area, bar, column, line, and xy (scatter) chart groups. You cannot add error bars to a data series in 3-D charts, or radar, pie, or doughnut chart groups. If you change a data series to any of these chart types, you will lose any associated error bars.

All five chart types show y error bars corresponding to the value axis. XY charts can also display x error bars for the category axis.

Which Data Is Included When Error Bars Are Calculated?

For standard deviation, Microsoft Excel uses the mean of the values of the plotted data points to calculate error. Other data in the source worksheet, which might be referred to by formulas associated with the chart data points, is not included in the calculation.

You can use the Custom option in the Error Bars dialog box to refer to other data on the worksheet if you want to use that data for the error amount.

What Happens When a Series Is Moved or Changed?

Error bars are associated with a series. If the series moves (for instance, if you change its plot order) the error bars move with it. If you change any data in a series, Microsoft Excel automatically recalculates the values and adjusts the error bars accordingly.

See Also

Help

Adding error bars to a data series

Deleting error bars

Formatting error bars

Modifying error bar settings

Overview of Using an Analysis Tool

User's Guide

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Adding error bars to a data series

Overview

You can add error bars to data series in area, bar, column, line, and xy (scatter) chart groups. For xy (scatter) charts, you can display error bars for the x values, the y values, or both.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Select the data series to which you want to add error bars.

3.	From the Insert menu, choose Error Bars.

4.	Under Display, select the type of error bar you want to display.

5.	Under Error Amount, select the method you want Microsoft Excel to use to determine the error.

You can enter a value to be used as the error amount or for calculating an error amount.

For Custom, switch to your worksheet and select the worksheet range to be used as error amount values, or enter array formulas in the plus and minus boxes.

6.	If the selected series belongs to an xy (scatter) chart group and you want to add x error bars, select the X Error Bars tab. Repeat steps 4 and 5.

7.	Choose the OK button.

Note  If you change the worksheet values or formulas associated with the data points in the series, the error bars are adjusted to reflect the change.

See Also

Help

Deleting error bars

Error Bars Command (Insert Menu)

Formatting error bars

Modifying error bar settings

User's Guide

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Modifying error bar settings

Overview

You can change how error bars are displayed, as well as the method and the error amount used to create them. When you select an error bar, any changes you make modify all of the error bars for that series.

1.	Double-click the data series whose error bars you want to modify.

2.	Select the Y Error Bars tab.

3.	To select a different type of error bar, under Display, select the type you want.

4.	To change the method used to determine the error, under Error Amount, select the method you want.

You can change the value to be used as the error amount or for calculating an error amount.

For Custom, switch to your worksheet and select the worksheet range to be used as error amount values, or enter array formulas in the plus and minus boxes.

5.	If the selected series belongs to an xy (scatter) chart group and you want to modify the x error bars, select the X Error Bars tab. Repeat steps 3 and 4.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Deleting error bars

Formatting error bars

X Error Bars Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

Y Error Bars Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Deleting error bars

Overview

Error bars can be deleted only for the entire series; you cannot delete individual error bars.

1.	Select an error bar.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Clear, and then choose Error Bars.

Shortcut:	DEL

See Also

Help

Adding error bars to a data series

Clear Command (Edit Menu for Charts)

Error Bars Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Overview of Charting Multilevel Categories and Series

Charts can display multiple (hierarchical) levels of categories, series, or both. For example, if your worksheet data is organized as products within product groups within divisions, or as months within quarters within years, the charts you create will reflect those multiple levels and their relationship to each other.

Depending on the way your data is structured in the worksheet, Microsoft Excel can evaluate and assign levels to the chart. You can also chart data from a pivot table, which already has multiple levels of categories and series assigned to it. Your chart will be updated when data changes in the source pivot table.

Tip  For an illustration of multiple levels of data in a chart, click the Example button above.

See Also

Help

Creating a chart from visible worksheet data

Creating a chart with multilevel categories and series

Creating a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"


Creating a chart with multilevel categories and series

Overview

Before you create a chart using multilevel data, be sure you have either entered the data correctly or created a pivot table.

Tip  For an illustration of multiple levels of data in a chart, click the Example button above.

1.	Select a range of data, including the multilevel categories and series cells.

2.	Click the ChartWizard button.

3.	Follow steps 1 through 3 in the ChartWizard.

4.	In step 4, make sure the number of columns and rows corresponds correctly to the headings in your data. Check the sample in the Sample Chart box.

Tip  If it's difficult to read the category labels displayed along the category axis, try rotating them. Double-click the axis. Select the Alignment tab in the Format Axis dialog box, and then change the orientation.

Important  If you need to add data to the chart, select your data and labels, then use the ChartWizard. To keep all levels intact, turn off cell drag and drop on the Edit tab (Tools menu, Options command) and don't use the Paste Special command (Edit menu) or the New Data command (Insert menu).

See Also

Help

  ChartWizard Button

  Pivot Table Wizard Button

Creating a pivot table

Creating an embedded chart

Edit Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"


Overview of Charting Visible Worksheet Data

You can create and update charts that display only visible data from your worksheet. For example, if you have hidden rows or columns, or you use outlining for list management or hiding data in a worksheet, then you can create a chart that will show only the visible data. When cells are hidden or unhidden, the chart is updated to show only visible cells.

You can also create a chart from visible data in a worksheet that does not change when rows and columns are hidden. Values that change in the worksheet will still be updated.

See Also

Help

Creating a chart from visible worksheet data

Creating an embedded chart

Creating an outline automatically

Hiding and unhiding a row or column

Selecting visible cells in an outline

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 15, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Creating a chart from visible worksheet data

Overview

When you expand or collapse levels in the outline, or hide or unhide data, Microsoft Excel updates your chart to reflect the way your worksheet is displayed. All values that change in the worksheet will be updated in your chart.

1.	In your worksheet, hide or unhide rows or columns, depending on what you want to show in the chart.

--Or--

Create an outline in your worksheet.

Expand or collapse the outline levels to display the data you want to include in the chart.

2.	Select the data.

If you don't want your chart to change every time you hide or unhide worksheet rows and columns (or expand or collapse an outline), click the Select Visible Cells button after adding it to a toolbar.

3.	To create an embedded chart, click the ChartWizard button and follow the steps.

--Or--

To create a chart sheet, choose Chart from the Insert menu, and then choose As New Sheet. Follow the steps in the ChartWizard.

Tip  To prevent your chart from changing every time you expand or collapse levels, or hide or unhide data in your worksheet, choose the Options command from the Tools menu, and then select the Chart tab. Clear the Plot Visible Cells Only check box. If you turn this option off, the cells in the original selection will be plotted in the chart.

See Also

Help

  ChartWizard Button

  Select Visible Cells Button

About Creating Charts from Nonadjacent Selections

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Chart Command (Insert Menu)

Chart Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Creating an outline automatically

Hiding and unhiding a row or column

Selecting visible cells in an outline

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Auditing Buttons Category

Attach Note Button

Displays the Cell Note dialog box so that you can attach text or audio comments to a cell.

Remove All Arrows Button

Deletes all tracer arrows from the worksheet.

Remove Dependent Arrows Button

Deletes dependents' tracer arrows from the active worksheet.

Remove Precedent Arrows Button

Deletes precedent tracer arrows from the active worksheet.

Show Info Window Button

Displays the Info window.

Trace Dependents Button

Draws arrows from the active cell to cells with formulas that use the values in the active cell (dependents).

Trace Error Button

Draws arrows from the cells that might have caused the error to the error value in the active cell.

Trace Precedents Button

Draws arrows from all cells that supply values directly to the formula in the active cell (precedents).


Charting Buttons Category

3-D Area Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a stacked area chart autoformat (with 3-D data markers) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart.

3-D Bar Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a simple bar chart autoformat (with 3-D data markers) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart.

3-D Column Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a simple column chart autoformat (with 3-D data markers) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart.

3-D Line Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a line chart autoformat (with lines shown as 3-D ribbons) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart.

3-D Perspective Column Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a 3-D column chart autoformat (with each data series plotted separately) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart.

3-D Pie Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a 3-D pie chart autoformat (with data label values expressed as percentages) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart.

3-D Surface Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a 3-D surface chart autoformat to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart.

Area Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a simple area chart autoformat to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart.

Bar Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a simple bar chart autoformat to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart.

ChartWizard Button

Starts the ChartWizard so that you can create an embedded chart on a worksheet or modify an existing chart.

Chart Type Button

Clicking the arrow next to the Chart Type button displays a palette of 14 chart types.

Column Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a simple column chart autoformat to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart.

Default Chart Button

Changes an active chart or selected embedded chart to the default chart format specified on the Chart tab (Options Command, Tools Menu).

Doughnut Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a doughnut chart autoformat (with data label values) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart.

Horizontal Gridlines Button

Controls whether major gridlines are visible on the active chart.

Legend Button

Adds a legend to the right of the plot area and resizes the plot area to accommodate the legend.

Line Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a simple line chart autoformat to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart.

Line/Column Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a column chart (overlaid by a line chart) autoformat to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart.

Pie Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a pie chart autoformat (with data label values expressed as percentages) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart.

Radar Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a radar chart autoformat (with data markers and lines) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart.

Stacked Column Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a stacked column chart autoformat to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart.

Vertical Gridlines Button

Controls whether major gridlines are visible on the active chart.

Volume/High-Low-Close Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a column chart (overlaid by a line chart with high, low, and close markers) autoformat to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart.

XY (Scatter) Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a xy (scatter) chart autoformat (with data markers and no connecting lines) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart.


Chart Type Button

Clicking the arrow next to the Chart Type button displays a palette of 14 chart types. Clicking a chart type on the palette or the Chart Type button itself creates an embedded chart, or changes a selected data series or active chart (or selected embedded chart) to that type.

The picture on the Chart Type button itself shows the last chart type selected. For example, if the Chart Type button currently shows a picture of a bar chart, and you click the column chart type on the palette, the Chart Type button will change to show a picture of a column chart.

The palette closes as soon as you click a chart type or anywhere else. To keep the palette open, drag it off the toolbar. The Chart Type button is on the Chart toolbar.

The 14 chart type buttons are:

Area Chart

Area chart type.

Bar Chart

Bar chart type.

Column Chart

Column chart type.

Doughnut Chart

Doughnut chart type.

Line Chart

Line chart type.

Pie Chart

Pie chart type.

3-D Area Chart

Stacked area chart type with 3-D markers.

3-D Bar Chart

Bar chart type with 3-D markers.

3-D Column Chart

Column chart type with 3-D markers.

3-D Line Chart

Line chart type with the lines shown as 3-D ribbons.

3-D Pie Chart

3-D Pie chart type.

XY (Scatter) Chart

XY (scatter) chart type with data points only.

3-D Surface Chart

3-D surface chart type.

Radar Chart

Radar chart type with lines and markers.

See Also

Help

Changing the chart type of a data series

Changing the chart type of an entire chart

Chart Type Command (Format Menu)

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Multiple Chart Types and a Secondary Axis

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Default Chart Button

Changes an active chart or selected embedded chart to the default chart format specified on the Chart tab (Options command, Tools menu). If worksheet data is selected, it displays the ChartWizard. The Default Chart button is located on the Chart toolbar.

See Also

Help

About the ChartWizard

Changing the default chart format

Chart Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Creating a chart sheet in a workbook

Default Charts

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


ChartWizard Button

Starts the ChartWizard so that you can create an embedded chart on a worksheet or modify an existing chart. The ChartWizard guides you through a series of dialog boxes and then creates or modifies the chart based on your answers. The ChartWizard button is located on the Standard toolbar and the Chart toolbar.

See Also

Help

About the ChartWizard

Changing the worksheet range plotted in a chart

Chart Command (Insert Menu)

Creating an embedded chart on a worksheet

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart "

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Area Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a simple area chart autoformat to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart. It creates an embedded area chart if worksheet data is selected. The Area Chart AutoFormat button is located in the Charting category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Changing the default chart format

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Bar Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a simple bar chart autoformat to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart. It creates an embedded bar chart if worksheet data is selected. The Bar Chart AutoFormat button is located in the Charting category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a chart

Arranging and spacing data markers in bar and column charts

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Changing the default chart format

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Column Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a simple column chart autoformat to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart. It creates an embedded column chart if worksheet data is selected. The Column Chart AutoFormat button is located in the Charting category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a chart

Arranging and spacing data markers in bar and column charts

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Changing the default chart format

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Stacked Column Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a stacked column chart autoformat to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart. It creates an embedded, stacked column chart if worksheet data is selected. The Stacked Column Chart AutoFormat button is located in the Charting category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Changing the default chart format

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Line Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a simple line chart autoformat to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart. It creates an embedded line chart if worksheet data is selected. The Line Chart AutoFormat button is located in the Charting category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Changing the default chart format

Formatting data markers in line, radar, and xy (scatter) charts

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Pie Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a pie chart autoformat (with data label values expressed as percentages) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart. It creates an embedded pie chart if worksheet data is selected. The Pie Chart AutoFormat button is located in the Charting category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Changing the default chart format

Formatting pie and doughnut slices

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Doughnut Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a doughnut chart autoformat (with data label values) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart. It creates an embedded doughnut chart if worksheet data is selected. The Doughnut Chart AutoFormat button is located in the Charting category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Changing the default chart format

Formatting pie and doughnut slices

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


3-D Area Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a stacked area chart autoformat (with 3-D data markers) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart. It creates an embedded 3-D area chart if worksheet data is selected. The 3-D Area Chart AutoFormat button is located in the Charting category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Changing the default chart format

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


3-D Bar Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a simple bar chart autoformat (with 3-D data markers) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart. It creates an embedded 3-D bar chart if worksheet data is selected. The 3-D Bar Chart AutoFormat button is located in the Charting category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Changing the default chart format

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Changing the 3-D Chart View

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


3-D Column Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a simple column chart autoformat (with 3-D data markers) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart. It creates an embedded 3-D column chart if worksheet data is selected. The 3-D Column Chart AutoFormat button is located in the Charting category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Changing the default chart format

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Changing the 3-D Chart View

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


3-D Perspective Column Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a 3-D column chart autoformat (with each data series plotted separately) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart. It creates an embedded 3-D perspective column chart if worksheet data is selected. The 3-D Perspective Column Chart AutoFormat button is located in the Charting category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Changing the default chart format

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Changing the 3-D Chart View

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


3-D Line Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a line chart autoformat (with lines shown as 3-D ribbons) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart. It creates an embedded 3-D line chart if worksheet data is selected. The 3-D Line Chart AutoFormat button is located in the Charting category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Changing the default chart format

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Changing the 3-D Chart View

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


3-D Pie Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a 3-D pie chart autoformat (with data label values expressed as percentages) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart. It creates an embedded 3-D pie chart if worksheet data is selected. The 3-D Pie Chart AutoFormat button is located in the Charting category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Changing the default chart format

Formatting pie and doughnut slices

Overview of Changing the 3-D Chart View

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


XY (Scatter) Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a xy (scatter) chart autoformat (with data markers and no connecting lines) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart. It creates an embedded xy (scatter) chart if worksheet data is selected. The XY (Scatter) Chart AutoFormat button is located in the Charting category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Changing the default chart format

Formatting data markers in line, radar, and xy (scatter) charts

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


3-D Surface Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a 3-D surface chart autoformat to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart. It creates an embedded 3-D surface chart if worksheet data is selected. The 3-D Surface Chart AutoFormat button is located in the Charting category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Changing the default chart format

Formatting 3-D surface chart levels

Overview of Changing the 3-D Chart View

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Radar Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a radar chart autoformat (with data markers and lines) to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart. It creates an embedded radar chart if worksheet data is selected. The Radar Chart Autoformat button is located in the Charting category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Changing the default chart format

Formatting data markers in line, radar, and xy (scatter) charts

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Line/Column Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a column chart (overlaid by a line chart) autoformat to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart. It creates an embedded line/column chart if worksheet data is selected. The Line/Column Chart AutoFormat button is located in the Charting category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Changing the default chart format

Formatting data markers in line, radar, and xy (scatter) charts

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Volume/High-Low-Close Chart AutoFormat Button

Applies a column chart (overlaid by a line chart with high, low, and close markers) autoformat to an active chart or selected embedded chart, replacing any existing formatting already in the chart. It creates an embedded volume/high-low-close chart if worksheet data is selected. The Volume/High-Low-Close Chart AutoFormat button is located in the Charting category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Changing the default chart format

Formatting data markers in line, radar, and xy (scatter) charts

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


ChartWizard

The ChartWizard is a series of dialog boxes that guides you through the steps required to create a new chart or modify settings for an existing chart.

The ChartWizard displays either five steps or two steps, depending on what is selected. If worksheet data is selected, all five steps are displayed because you're creating a new chart. If you've selected an existing chart to modify it, only two steps are displayed.

When you choose the Finish button in any of the steps, the ChartWizard finishes your chart for you.

To create a new chart

In Step 1 of 5

Specify a worksheet range.

In Step 2 of 5

Select a chart type.

In Step 3 of 5

Select a chart format for the chart type you selected in step 2.

In Step 4 of 5

The options that are displayed depend on the chart type you selected in step 2.

Specify the orientation of your chart; that is, whether the data series are in rows or columns.

Depending on whether the data series are in rows or columns, specify how data in the first rows and columns should be used: for axis labels, legend text, or (for pie and doughnut charts) the chart title. When you specify 0 (zero), the first row or column is displayed as a data series or data points.

After selecting each option, you can see how your chart will look in the Sample Chart box, which is updated after each change.

In Step 5 of 5

Indicate whether you want to add a legend.

Type a chart title, if you want one.

Type a title for each axis, if you want one.

After selecting each option, you can see how your chart will look in the Sample Chart box, which is updated after each change.

To modify an existing chart

In Step 1 of 2

Type a different worksheet range or switch to a different worksheet (with the ChartWizard still open), and then select the data you want.

In Step 2 of 2

Specify the orientation of your chart; that is, whether the data series are in rows or columns.

To make other changes in step 2, refer to step 4 of 5 above.

See Also

Help

  ChartWizard Button

About the ChartWizard

Changing the worksheet range plotted in a chart

Creating a chart sheet in a workbook

Creating an embedded chart on a worksheet

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Changing Data in a Chart

Overview of Adding and Deleting Chart Data

Adding data series or data points to an embedded chart

Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

Changing the worksheet range plotted in a chart

Deleting a data series

Overview of Changing Chart Values

Changing the value of a chart data point

Overview of Changing Chart Text

Changing data labels

Editing titles and text boxes

Changing tick-mark labels

Changing the value axis scale

Changing legend entries

Linking chart text to a worksheet cell

Checking spelling in a chart

Overview of Changing the Way Your Data Is Plotted

Plotting data series from rows or columns

Reversing the plot order of categories, values, or series

Changing the plot order of data series

How You Can Prevent Changes to a Chart


Overview of Adding and Deleting Chart Data

Once you have created a chart, you may want to update it by adding more data series or data points from the worksheet. The method you use to add data is determined by the kind of chart--embedded chart or chart sheet--you want to update.

To add data to an embedded chart on a worksheet, you can drag and drop data from that worksheet. Using copy and paste is the easiest way to add data to a chart sheet. Or you can use the New Data command for either embedded charts or chart sheets.

You can also delete data series from a chart. Adding or deleting data automatically updates any existing legend.

Using the ChartWizard, you can change the range that a chart is based on. If your chart was created from multilevel categories and series, you must use the ChartWizard to reselect your data and recreate the chart.

If your chart was created from a pivot table, the layout determines whether you can change the range. In some cases, you may need to reselect the entire pivot table when using the ChartWizard, in which case you cannot change the range.

See Also

Help

  ChartWizard Button

Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

Adding data series or data points to an embedded chart

Changing the worksheet range plotted in a chart

Creating a chart from a pivot table

Creating a chart with multilevel categories and series

Deleting a data series

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Adding data series or data points to an embedded chart

Overview

You can drag and drop data series or data points from a worksheet to an embedded chart on that sheet, or you can use the New Data command on the Insert menu. Use the New Data command when adding nonadjacent selections to a chart.

1.	Open the worksheet containing the embedded chart you want to add data to.

2.	In the worksheet, select the data, including any category and series names, you want to add.

3.	Position the pointer over the border.

4.	Drag the selection to the embedded chart you want to update.

Note  If you're unable to drag, then make sure that the Allow Cell Drag And Drop option is selected on the Edit tab (Options command, Tools menu).

Alternate Method

1.	Open the worksheet containing the embedded chart you want to add data to.

2.	Double-click the embedded chart.

3.	From the Insert menu, choose New Data.

4.	With the New Data dialog box open, select the worksheet cells you want to add as data. Include any category and series names you want to add.

--Or--

In the Range box, type the worksheet range.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Note  If Microsoft Excel cannot determine how to add your selected data to the chart, the Paste Special dialog box will be displayed so that you can specify whether you're adding data series or data points. If you don't like the way your data was plotted, use the Undo command on the Edit menu to remove the newly added data.

See Also

Help

  ChartWizard Button

Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

Changing the worksheet range plotted in a chart

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Creating a chart with multilevel categories and series

Deleting a data series

New Data Command (Insert Menu)

Paste Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

Overview

You can copy and paste data from a worksheet to a chart sheet.

1.	Open the chart sheet and the worksheet containing the data you want to add.

2.	From the worksheet, select the data, including any category and series names, you want to add to the chart.

3.	Click the Copy button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+C

4.	Activate the chart sheet.

5.	Click the Paste button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+V

Note  To exercise more control over how your data is plotted in the chart, use the Paste Special command. If you don't like the way your data was plotted, use the Undo command on the Edit menu to remove the newly added data.

See Also

Help

  Copy Button

  Paste Button

Adding data series or data points to an embedded chart

Changing the worksheet range plotted in a chart

Deleting a data series

New Data Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Changing the worksheet range plotted in a chart

Overview

1.	Open the worksheet containing the range plotted in the chart.

2.	Activate the chart.

3.	Click the ChartWizard button.

4.	In step 1 of the ChartWizard, switch to your worksheet and select the new worksheet range you want plotted in the chart.

--Or--

In the Range box, type the new range you want.

5.	In step 2 of the ChartWizard, make any changes you want.

Check the sample in the Sample Chart box to verify that it's plotted the way you want.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  ChartWizard Button

Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

Adding data series or data points to an embedded chart

Creating a chart with multilevel categories and series

Deleting a data series

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Deleting a data series

Overview

1.	Select the data series you want to delete.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Clear, and then choose Series.

You can also choose Clear from the shortcut menu.

Shortcut:	DEL

Note  Deleting a data series from a chart does not delete the source data from the worksheet.

See Also

Help

  Clear Contents Button

Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

Adding data series or data points to an embedded chart

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Clear Command (Edit Menu for Charts)

Undo and Redo Commands (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"


Overview of Changing Chart Values

Once you have created a chart, you may want to change values associated with data points--either constant values or values generated from worksheet formulas.

It is easiest to edit the values associated with the chart data points directly in the worksheet.

For most chart types, you can adjust constant values by dragging the data marker until it reaches the desired value. To change data point values generated from worksheet formulas, you drag the data marker and use goal seeking. Changing a data point value in a chart automatically updates the corresponding worksheet value.

In stacked and 100% stacked bar or column charts, you can select a data point and drag the top of the data marker to a new value. The percentages for all of the chart data points adjust proportionally.

See Also

Help

Changing the value of a chart data point

Editing cell contents

Goal Seek Command (Tools Menu)

Seeking a specific solution to a formula using the Goal Seek command

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 27, "Solving What-If Problems"


Changing the value of a chart data point

Overview

To change data point values in a worksheet cell

1.	Open the worksheet that contains the range plotted in the chart.

2.	Select the cell containing the value you want to change, and type the new value.

3.	Press ENTER.

To change data point values by dragging in the chart

1.	Open the worksheet that contains the range plotted in the chart.

2.	Activate the chart.

3.	Select a data marker.

4.	Drag the largest selection square in the direction you want to adjust the value.

To change values in bar or column charts formatted as stacked and 100% stacked, drag the selection square at the top of the selection.

While you drag, a line moves along the value axis showing the adjusting value of the data marker, and the changing value is displayed in the left side of the formula bar.

If the data marker belongs to a series formatted as an xy (scatter) chart, lines move along both axes. You can drag within the scales of both axes.

If the value of the data marker you're dragging is generated by a formula, the Goal Seek dialog box is displayed. See the following procedure.

To change data point values using goal seeking

1. With the Goal Seek dialog box still open, switch to your worksheet.

Determine which value in the formula needs to change to achieve the desired result.

2.	Select the cell.

--Or--

In the By Changing Cell box, type the cell reference.

3.	Choose the OK button.

The Goal Seek Status dialog box lists your target and current values for the selected data marker in your chart.

4.	To accept these changes, choose the OK button.

--Or--

To cancel these changes, choose the Cancel button.

See Also

Help

Editing cell contents

Goal Seek Command (Tools Menu)

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

Seeking a specific solution to a formula using the Goal Seek command

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 27, "Solving What-If Problems"


Overview of Changing Chart Text

You can change text in a chart, including data labels, titles, text boxes, tick-mark labels, and legend entries. Although most text is automatically linked to the worksheet, you can also link titles and text boxes to worksheet cells, allowing them to be updated when the worksheet cells change. You can also check and correct the spelling of text in your chart.

Text you have added to a chart, including chart titles, axis titles, and text boxes, can be edited directly in the chart.

See Also

Help

Changing data labels

Changing legend entries

Changing the font and alignment of chart text

Changing the value axis scale

Changing tick-mark labels

Checking spelling in a chart

Editing cell contents

Linking chart text to a worksheet cell

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Changing data labels

Overview

Data labels are created from and automatically linked to the cells in your worksheet selection. It's easiest to edit this text directly on the worksheet, although you can make some changes in the chart.

For an entire data series or a single data point, you can change data labels to show labels or values, depending on the assigned chart type. For pie or doughnut charts, you can show percentages, values, labels, or a combination of all three.

To edit data label values in worksheet cells

1.	Open the worksheet that contains the range plotted in the chart.

2.	Select the cell containing the value you want to change, and type the new value.

3.	Press ENTER.

To edit data label text in the chart

Important  Editing a data label breaks the link to the worksheet cell.

1.	Select the data label whose text you want to edit.

2.	Place the insertion point in the label and type the new text.

3.	Press ENTER.

To change data label options in the chart

1.	Double-click the data point or data series associated with the data labels you want to change.

2.	Select the Data Labels tab.

3.	Select the options you want.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Adding data labels

Changing the font and alignment of chart text

Editing cell contents

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Linking chart text to a worksheet cell

Moving and sizing chart items

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Editing titles and text boxes

Overview

You can edit chart titles, axis titles, and text boxes directly in the chart. You can change the whole text item or individual characters. When selected, a vertical text item rotates horizontally so that you may edit it more easily.

1.	Select the chart title, axis title, or text box you want to edit.

2.	To replace all of the text, just type the new text you want.

--Or--

To edit some characters, position the mouse pointer directly over the text item until it changes to an I-beam, and then select the characters you want to change.

Make the edits you want.

3.	To insert a line break in the text, press ENTER.

Note  To edit text linked to a worksheet cell, you must select the title or text box, and then edit the text in the formula bar.

See Also

Help

Adding a chart title and axis titles

Changing the font and alignment of chart text

Checking spelling in a chart

Creating and deleting text boxes

Editing the text in a text box

Linking chart text to a worksheet cell

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Changing tick-mark labels

Overview

Tick-mark labels are created from and automatically linked to the cells in your worksheet selection. It's easiest to edit this text directly on the worksheet, although you can make some changes in the chart. To change value tick-mark labels in the chart, see Changing the value axis scale.

To edit tick-mark labels in the worksheet

1.	Open the worksheet containing the range plotted in the chart.

2.	Select the cell containing the label name you want to change, and type the new name.

3.	Press ENTER.

To change category tick-mark labels in the chart

1.	Open the worksheet containing the range plotted in the chart.

2.	Activate the chart.

3.	Double-click the first data series.

4.	Select the X Values tab.

5.	With the dialog box open, switch to your worksheet and select the worksheet cells or cell range that contains the labels you want plotted in the chart.

--Or--

Type the cell or cell range reference.

6.	Choose the OK button.

To change series tick-mark labels in the chart

1.	Open the worksheet containing the range plotted in the chart.

2.	Activate the chart.

3.	Double-click the data series whose series name you want to change.

4.	Select the Name And Values tab.

5.	With the dialog box open, switch to your worksheet and select the worksheet cell containing the label you want plotted in the chart.

--Or--

In the Name box, type the cell reference or name you want.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Changing the category or series axis scale

Checking spelling in a chart

Displaying or hiding axes

Editing cell contents

Formatting and arranging tick-mark labels

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Linking chart text to a worksheet cell

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Changing legend entries

Overview

Legend entries are created from and automatically linked to the cells in your worksheet selection. It's easiest to edit this text directly on the worksheet, although you can make some changes in the chart.

To edit legend entries in the worksheet

1.	Open the worksheet containing the range plotted in the chart.

2.	Select the cell containing the series (or category) name you want to change, and type the new name.

3.	Press ENTER.

To change legend entries in the chart

1.	Open the worksheet containing the range plotted in the chart.

2.	Activate the chart.

3.	Double-click the data series whose legend entry you want to change.

4.	Select the Name And Values tab.

5.	With the dialog box open, switch to your worksheet and select the worksheet cell that contains the new series name you want plotted in the chart.

--Or--

In the Name box, type the cell reference.

Note  To change your legend entry to a name that is unrelated to the worksheet, type the name you want in the Name box. However, be aware that doing this breaks the automatic link to the worksheet cell.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Adding a legend

Editing cell contents

Formatting legend entries and keys

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Moving and sizing the legend

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Linking chart text to a worksheet cell

Overview

You can link the chart title, axis titles, and text boxes to worksheet cells. When the contents of the cell change, the linked chart text is automatically updated. If editing one or more data labels breaks their link to worksheet cells, you can relink them.

To link titles and text boxes

1.	Select the text on the chart.

2.	Type an equal sign (=) in the formula bar.

Any existing text is cleared from the formula bar.

3.	Switch to the worksheet and select the cell that contains the data or text you want shown in your chart.

You can also type an external reference to the worksheet cell.

4.	Press ENTER.

To relink data labels

1.	Double-click the data series or data point whose data labels you want to relink to worksheet cells.

2.	Select the Data Labels tab.

3.	Select the Automatic Text check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Changing data labels

Changing the font and alignment of chart text

Editing titles and text boxes

User's Guide

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"


Checking spelling in a chart

Overview

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Click the Spelling button.

Shortcut:	F7

3.	If Microsoft Excel selects an unknown word, select the options you want in the Spelling dialog box to make or ignore the suggested corrections.

If no correction is suggested, you can add the currently selected word to the Custom dictionary by choosing the Add button.

4.	When Microsoft Excel displays a message stating that it has checked the text in the chart, choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Spelling Button

Checking spelling

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"


Overview of Changing the Way Your Data Is Plotted

There are three ways you can change the way data is plotted within a chart type group. You can change whether the data series are plotted from worksheet rows or columns. You can reverse the plotting order of categories or values in a chart and the series plotting order in 3-D charts. And you can change the order in which series are plotted.

See Also

Help

Changing the plot order of data series

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Plotting data series from rows or columns

Reversing the plot order of categories, values, or series

Series Order Tab, [chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"


Plotting data series from rows or columns

Overview

You can change whether your data series are plotted from rows or columns in the worksheet using the ChartWizard.

1.	Open the worksheet containing the range plotted in the chart.

2.	Activate the chart.

3.	Click the ChartWizard button.

4.	Choose the Next button to skip to the next window.

5.	In step 2, under Data Series In, select either the Rows option button or the Columns option button.

Check the sample in the Sample Chart box to verify that it's plotted the way you want.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  ChartWizard Button

Changing the plot order of data series

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Reversing the plot order of categories, values, or series

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"


Reversing the plot order of categories, values, or series

Overview

You can reverse the plot order of categories or values for all charts, as well as for data series in 3-D charts with a third axis. You cannot reverse the values on a radar chart.

1.	Double-click the axis for the categories, values, or series whose plot order you want to reverse.

2.	Select the Scale tab.

3.	To reverse the plot order on the category (x) axis, select the Categories In Reverse Order check box.

To reverse the plot order on the value (y) axis, select the Values In Reverse Order check box.

To reverse the plot order on the series (z) axis for 3-D charts, select the Series In Reverse Order check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Changing the category or series axis scale

Changing the plot order of data series

Changing the value axis scale

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Plotting data series from rows or columns

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"


Changing the plot order of data series

Overview

For data series formatted as the same chart type, you can change the order in which the series are plotted.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Choose the chart type group (such as Column Chart or Line Chart) you want to change from the Format menu.

3.	Select the Series Order tab.

4.	In the Series Order box, select the series you want to move.

5.	Select the Move Up or Move Down button to place the series in the order you want.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each series you want moved.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Plotting data series from rows or columns

Reversing the plot order of categories, values, or series

Series Order Tab, [chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"


How You Can Prevent Changes to a Chart

You can protect a chart's contents and formatting from accidental or unauthorized changes using the Protection command on the Tools menu.

If the chart is embedded, you can protect it as you would any object on a worksheet. If the chart is a chart sheet, you can protect it individually or protect the entire workbook it resides in.

Note  If you are trying unsuccessfully to make changes to a chart, it may be protected.

See Also

Help

Protect Sheet Command and Unprotect Sheet Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

Protect Workbook Command and Unprotect Workbook Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

Protecting and unprotecting a sheet

User's Guide

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Lotus 1-2-3 Commands

Copy

Data

File

Graph

Lotus 1-2-3 Access System Menu

Move

Print

Quit

Range

System

Worksheet


Lotus 1-2-3 Worksheet Commands

Column

Delete

Erase

Global

Insert

Page

Status

Titles

Window


Lotus 1-2-3 Worksheet Global Commands

Column-Width

Default

Format

Label-Prefix

Protection

Recalculation

Zero


Formatting cell contents

1.	Select the cells you want to format.

To select the entire worksheet, click the square on the worksheet directly above the row numbers, or press CTRL+SHIFT+SPACEBAR.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

3.	Select the Number tab.

4.	Select a format.

Refer to the table below for Microsoft Excel equivalents to Lotus 1-2-3 formats.

You can create other fixed decimal number formats by editing the displayed format in the Code box or by typing an entirely new one.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Lotus 1-2-3	Microsoft Excel

Fixed	0.00

Scientific	0.00E+00

Currency	$#,##0_);($#,##0)

Comma	#,##0.00  or  #,##0

General	General

+/-	No equivalent

Percent	0.00%

Date	dd-mm-yy

Time	h:mm:ss AM/PM

Text	You can choose between displaying formulas or values in the entire worksheet, but not in selected ranges. To display formulas or values, choose the View tab from the Options command on the Tools menu.

Hidden	In the Code box, type ;;; to hide the contents of a cell or range. Use the Hide command on the Row submenu or Column submenu of the Format menu to hide entire rows or columns.

Reset	General

See Also

Help

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Protect Sheet Command and Unprotect Sheet Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

Protection Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Lotus 1-2-3 Worksheet Global Default Commands

Directory

Other

Printer

Quit

Status

Update


Lotus 1-2-3 Worksheet Global Default Printer Commands

Lotus 1-2-3 	Microsoft Excel

Interface	Setting up a printer and port

Auto-LF	Not necessary; handled by printer driver

Left	Page Setup command (File menu)

Right	Page Setup command (File menu)

Top	Page Setup command (File menu)

Bottom	Page Setup command (File menu)

Pg-Length	Page Setup command (File menu)

Wait	Page Setup command (File menu)

Setup	Not necessary; handled by printer driver

Name	Page Setup command (File menu)

Quit	ESC key


Setting a Lotus 1-2-3 Worksheet Global Default Directory

To set a global default directory in Microsoft Excel

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Choose the General tab.

3.	In the Default File Location box, type the path of the directory you want.

4.	Choose OK.

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Lotus 1-2-3 Worksheet Global Default Status Command

Microsoft Excel displays status information in the dialog boxes you use to carry out commands.

Printer

From the File menu, choose Page Setup. The dialog box displays printer status information such as the current port, margins, and name. Microsoft Excel does not display auto-linefeed and setup string status because they are handled automatically by the printer driver.

Add-in

You can see a list of the working set of add-in macros by using the Add-ins command on the Tools menu.

File Extensions and Path

From the File menu, choose the Open command. The dialog box displays filenames and extensions as well as current directory information.

International, Currency, Date, and Time Formats

1.	From Program Manager, start Control Panel.

2.	From the Settings menu, choose International, or double-click the International icon.

3.	In the Country list box, select the country whose settings you want to see or change.

4.	Change any settings you want.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	From the Settings menu, choose the Exit command to close the Control Panel window.

Currency, Date, and Time Formats

Determined by the format of individual cells. You can change cells by using the Number tab of the Cells command on the Format menu.

Help access method

Help remains in memory until you use the Close command from the Help window Control menu to close it.

Clock display

Not available in Microsoft Excel.

Undo

From the Edit menu, choose Undo. If it is available, Undo appears black. If it is not available, Can't Undo appears dimmed.

Warning Beep

1.	From Program Manager, start Control Panel.

2.	From the Settings menu, choose Sound, or double-click the Sound icon.

3.	To turn on the warning beep, select the Warning Beep check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

5.	From the Settings menu, choose the Exit command to close the Control Panel.

See Also

Help

Add-ins Command (Tools Menu)

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Open Command (File Menu)

Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Undo and Redo Commands (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Lotus 1-2-3 Worksheet Global Default Update Command

There is no direct equivalent in Microsoft Excel for the Lotus 1-2-3 Worksheet Global Default Update command.

Settings affecting the document, such as margins, are stored with the document. The dialog box settings reflect the setting for the active document.

Settings affecting how Microsoft Excel is configured to work with the hardware and software environment, such as printer settings and preferences, are not specific to a document, and are retained as defaults until you change them.


Lotus 1-2-3 Worksheet Global Default Other Commands

International

Except for the argument separator in functions (comma), you can change punctuation, currency, date and time formats, and other country-specific settings with the Control Panel.

To change country-specific settings

1.	From Program Manager, start Control Panel.

2.	From the Settings menu, choose International, or double-click the International icon.

3.	In the Country box, select the name of the country you want.

4.	Make any other changes you want.

5.	Choose the OK button.

These settings remain in effect for all Windows applications until you change them.

Help

Not applicable.

Clock

Not applicable.

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"


Erasing the active worksheet and starting a new one

In Microsoft Excel, you can have more than one worksheet open at once, so you can keep the active worksheet open while starting a new one. The following procedure corresponds to the Lotus 1-2-3 Worksheet Erase command, which removes the active worksheet from memory (but not from your disk), so you can start a new one.

1.	From the File menu, choose Close.

If you made unsaved changes to the active worksheet, a dialog box appears asking if you want to save your changes.

2.	To erase the active worksheet, choose the No button.

3.	From the File menu, choose New to open a new worksheet.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Close and Close All Commands (File Menu)

New Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"


Lotus 1-2-3 Worksheet Status Command

Lotus 1-2-3	Microsoft Excel

Memory used	From the Help menu, choose About Microsoft Excel.

Coprocessor	From the Help menu, choose About Microsoft Excel.

Recalculation	From the Tools menu, choose the Calculation tab of the Options command.

Circular Reference	Microsoft Excel displays a message after each recalculation if any formulas contain circular references.

Format	Select the cell and choose a command from the Format menu.

Label Prefix	From the Format menu, choose the Alignment tab of the Cells command.

Column Width	From the Format menu, choose the Width command from the Column submenu.

Zero Suppression	From the Tools menu, choose the View tab of the Options command

See Also

Help

Alignment Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Calculation Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Column Command (Format Menu)

View Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"


Lotus 1-2-3 Range Commands

Erase

Format

Input

Justify

Label-Prefix

Name

Protect

Transpose

Unprotect

Value


Lotus 1-2-3 Range Name Commands

Create

Delete

Labels

Reset

Table


Deleting one or more names in a worksheet

When you delete a name, any references to the name in formulas are replaced by the #NAME! error value. If you want to avoid this, replace all occurrences of the name with its definition by using the Replace command on the Edit menu before deleting the name from the list.

1.	From the Insert menu, Name submenu, choose the Define command.

2.	Select a name from the list.

3.	Choose the Delete button.

4.	Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each name you want to delete.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Define Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Pasting a list of names in a worksheet into a range

1.	Select the upper-left cell of the range.

2.	From the Insert menu, Name submenu, choose the Paste command.

3.	In the Paste Name dialog box, choose the Paste List button.

See Also

Help

Paste Names Button

Paste Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Pasting names

Toolbars Command (View Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Lotus 1-2-3 Range Input Command

There is no command in Microsoft Excel that is directly equivalent to the Lotus 1-2-3 Range Input command, but you can use the following features to achieve similar functionality.

Cell and Worksheet Protection

By default, all cells on a sheet are formatted as locked, but they remain unlocked until you choose the Protect Sheet command on the Protection submenu of the Tools menu. You format cells as locked or unlocked by using the Protection tab of the Cells command, Format menu. Once you turn on document protection, you can move among only unlocked cells by pressing the tab key.

The ENTER.DATA macro function

The ENTER.DATA macro function temporarily provides the same functionality as the Protect Worksheet command. When the ENTER.DATA function is encountered in a macro, Enter Data mode is activated. Any cells that have been not been formatted as unlocked with the Protection tab of the Cells command become locked. You can then use the tab key to move among only unlocked cells.

The ENTER.DATA function is a toggle and needs no arguments, although you can use TRUE or FALSE to turn Enter mode on and off. When Enter mode is turned on, the unlocked cell nearest the upper-left corner of the selection becomes the active cell. Pressing the tab key selects the next unlocked cell. You can turn Enter mode off by running a macro containing the ENTER.DATA function again. This function can only be used on macro sheets.

See Also

Help

Locking and unlocking individual cell ranges on a worksheet

Protection Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Protection Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide (Book 1)

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"

Macro Functions Help

ENTER.DATA


Lotus 1-2-3 File Commands

Combine

Directory

Drive

Erase

Import

List

Retrieve

Save

Translate

Xtract


Lotus 1-2-3 Print Commands

File

Printer


Lotus 1-2-3 Print Printer Commands

Lotus 1-2-3	Microsoft Excel

Range	Use the Set Print Area button.

Line	Use the LINE.PRINT macro function.

Page	Not applicable in Microsoft Excel.

Options

    Header	From the File menu, choose Page Setup.

    Footer	From the File menu, choose Page Setup.

    Margins	From the File menu, choose Page Setup.

    Borders	Use the Sheet tab of the Page Setup command, File menu.

    Setup	Select cells, choose the Cells command from the Format menu, and choose the Font tab.

    Pg-Length	From the File menu, choose Page Setup.

    Other	Worksheet is printed as displayed. To display values or formulas, select the View tab from the Tools menu, Options command. To add or remove headers and footers, choose Page Setup from the File menu. To add or remove page breaks, choose Set Page Break or Remove Page Break from the Insert menu.

    Quit	Press esc.

Clear

    All	Reset individual settings.

    Range	From the Insert menu, choose the Name submenu, Define command and delete Print_Area.

    Borders	From the Insert menu, choose the Name submenu, Define command and delete Print_Titles.

    Format	From the File menu, choose Page Setup to reset margins. Page Length and Setup String are handled by the printer driver.

Align	Not applicable in Microsoft Excel.

Go	From the File menu, choose Print.

Quit	Press esc.

See Also

Help

Define Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Lotus 1-2-3 Line Print Command

Page Break Command (Insert Menu)

Set Print Area Button

View Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 14, "Printing"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Lotus 1-2-3 Print File Command

There is no direct equivalent in Microsoft Excel to the Lotus 1-2-3 Print to File command.

See Also

Help

Lotus 1-2-3 Line Print Command

Lotus 1-2-3 Print Printer Commands


Lotus 1-2-3 File Combine Commands

Add

Copy

Subtract


Lotus 1-2-3 Graph Commands

Name

Options

Quit

Reset

Save

Type

View

X A B C D E F

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Lotus 1-2-3 Graph Type Commands

In Microsoft Excel, you change the chart (graph) type after you create the chart (graph). Use the Chart Type command on the Format menu when a chart window is active. It also offers additional chart types, such as 3-D charts.

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Lotus 1-2-3 Graph View Command

When you create a chart (graph), it appears in a new active window. If at any time another window covers all or part of the chart and you want to see it, choose the name of the chart from the list at the bottom of the Window menu.

See Also

Help

Displaying and closing new windows of a workbook

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Lotus 1-2-3 Graph Options Commands

B&W

Color

Data-Labels

Format

Grid

Legend

Quit

Scale

Titles

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Applying Lotus 1-2-3 Graph Format Options

Microsoft Excel and Lotus 1-2-3 take different approaches to formatting charts. The Lotus 1-2-3 Graph Options Format commands apply to line and xy (scatter) charts only.

To format a line or xy (scatter) chart

1.	Select a data series.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Selected Series.

3.	Choose the Patterns tab.

4.	Under Line, select the line style, color, and weight you want.

If you don't want any lines, select the None option button.

5.	Under Marker, select the marker style, foreground color, and background color you want.

If you don't want any markers, select the None option button.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Patterns Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Lotus 1-2-3 Graph Options Titles Commands

For a complete guide to using text in charts for titles, labels, and descriptions, see Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart," in the Microsoft Excel User's Guide.

See Also

Help

Overview of Changing Colors, Patterns, Borders, Text, and Numbers

User's Guide (Book 1)

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Applying Lotus 1-2-3 Graph Options Grid Commands

To add and delete gridlines in a chart

1.	From the Insert menu, choose Gridlines.

2.	Select the options for the types of gridlines you want.

3.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Gridlines Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Lotus 1-2-3 Graph Options Scale Commands

Skip

X-Scale

Y-Scale


Applying Lotus 1-2-3 X Scale and Y Scale Commands

Automatic

Microsoft Excel creates the scale automatically. If you designated any aspect of the scale as manual, you can return it to automatic by following these steps:

1.	Select the x (category) or y (value) axis.

2.	From the Format menu, choose the Selected Axis command.

3.	Choose the Scale tab.

The options are different for the x and y axes.

4.	Select the Auto check box for any option you want to return to automatic.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Manual, Lower, Upper

To control the scale manually:

1.	Select the x (category) or y (value) axis.

2.	From the Format menu, choose the Selected Axis command.

3.	Choose the Scale tab.

The options will be different for the x and y axes.

4.	Change any options you want.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Format

To change the number format on the scale:

1.	On the source worksheet, select the numbers you want to format.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

3.	Choose the Number tab.

Select the number format you want to use in the chart.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Indicator

To select or clear scale indicators:

1.	Select the chart.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Axes.

3.	Select the Category (X) Axis or Value (Y) Axis check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Quit

Press ESC.

See Also

Help

Axes Command (Insert Menu)

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Changing how Microsoft Excel displays labels on the x-axis

1.	Select the x-axis.

2.	From the Format menu, choose the Selected Axis command.

3.	Choose the Scale tab.

4.	Change the number in the Number Of Categories Between Tick Labels box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Lotus 1-2-3 Graph Options Color Command

There is no direct equivalent in Microsoft Excel for the Lotus 1-2-3 Graph Options Color command. However, you can change the color of individual chart items using the Patterns tab of the Selected Point command on the Format menu.

See Also

Help

Patterns Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Creating data labels

1.	From the Insert menu, choose the Data Labels command.

2.	Select the type of label you want to create.

3.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Titles Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Naming a graph and saving it on a disk

You can save Microsoft Excel charts (graphs) as separate files on disk. If you are working with a chart that is embedded in your worksheet, you have to first make it a separate chart document by double-clicking it, choosing Chart from the Insert menu, then choosing As New Sheet. Next, complete the Chart Wizard. The chart is displayed as a separate sheet in the workbook. You can save the workbook containing the chart, or drag the chart out of the current workbook to create a new workbook containing just the chart.

1.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

2.	Type a name for the file.

3.	Choose the OK button.

To open a chart (graph)

1.	From the File menu, choose Open.

2.	Select the name of the chart (graph).

3.	Choose the OK button.

To delete a chart (graph)

Because charts are stored in separate files, use the procedure for deleting a file to delete a chart.

See Also

Help

Deleting a file

Open Command (File Menu)

Save As Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Lotus 1-2-3 Data Commands

Distribution

Fill

Matrix

Parse

Query

Regression

Sort

Table


Lotus 1-2-3 Data Query Commands

Criterion

Delete

Extract

Find

Input

Output

Quit

Reset

Unique


Lotus 1-2-3 Data Distribution Command

There is no equivalent command in Microsoft Excel for the Lotus 1-2-3 Data Distribution command. Instead, Microsoft Excel provides the FREQUENCY function, which calculates a data distribution.

See Also

Help

FREQUENCY function


Lotus 1-2-3 Data Matrix Commands

The Microsoft Excel equivalents to the Data Matrix commands are array functions, rather than commands.

Lotus 1-2-3	Microsoft Excel function

Invert	MINVERSE

Multiply	MMULT

See Also

Help

MINVERSE function

MMULT function

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"


Lotus 1-2-3 Data Regression Commands

The Microsoft Excel equivalents to the Data Regression commands are array functions rather than commands and do not translate directly. Instead, Microsoft Excel includes the Analysis ToolPak, a collection of tools for performing statistical analysis of data.

See Also

Help

GROWTH function

LINEST function

LOGEST function

TREND function

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"


Lotus 1-2-3 System Command

There is no direct equivalent for the Lotus 1-2-3 System command in Microsoft Excel, but you can switch to MS-DOS using the Microsoft Windows Program Manager.

To switch to MS-DOS

1.	Press CTRL+ESC.

2.	From the Task List, select Program Manager and press ENTER.

3.	From the File menu, choose Run.

4.	Type command.

5.	Choose the OK button.

To return to Microsoft Excel

1.	At the MS-DOS prompt, type exit.

2.	Press CTRL+ESC to switch to the Task List.

3.	From the Task List, select Microsoft Excel and press ENTER.


Lotus 1-2-3 Line Print Command

There is no command in Microsoft Excel that is equivalent to the Lotus 1-2-3 Line Print command. To add the same functionality, Microsoft Excel includes a LINE.PRINT macro function that provides compatibility with Lotus 1-2-3.

The LINE.PRINT macro function has three forms:

LINE.PRINT (command, file, append)

LINE.PRINT (command, setup_text, leftmarg, rightmarg, topmarg, botmarg, pglen, formatted)

LINE.PRINT (command, setup_text, leftmarg, rightmarg, topmarg, botmarg, pglen, wait, autolf, port, update)

Arguments	Defined

command	1=Go, 2=Line, 3=Page, 4=Align, 5=Document settings (form 2 only), 6=Global settings (form 3 only), 7=Clear (revert document settings to global settings)

file	Output file
Default=currently defined port

append	TRUE to append the file, FALSE to rewrite the file
Default=FALSE

setup_text	Setup string

leftmarg	Number of characters from the left side of page
Default=4

rightmarg	Number of characters from the right side of page
Default=76

topmarg	Number of characters from the top of page
Default=2

botmarg	Number of characters from the bottom of page
Default=2

pglen	Number of lines per page
Default=66

formatted	TRUE=formatted
Default =TRUE

wait	TRUE=wait
Default=FALSE

autolf	TRUE if printer auto-linefeeds
Default=FALSE

port	1 through 8 only. See the LINE.PRINT  macro function.
Default=1

update	TRUE to update global settings to Microsoft Excel
Default=FALSE

See Also

Help

Lotus 1-2-3 Print Printer Commands

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"

Macro Functions Help

LINE.PRINT


Multiplan Commands

Alpha

Blank

Copy

Delete

Edit

Format

Goto

Help

Insert

Lock

Move

Name

Options

Print

Quit

Run

Sort

Transfer

Value

Window

Xternal

See Also

Help

Multiplan Command (Help Menu)


Multiplan Copy Commands

Right

Down

From

Transpose


Multiplan Delete Commands

Row

Column


Multiplan Format Commands

Cells

Default Cells

Default Height

Default Width

Font**

Options

Replace**

Style**

Time-Date Cells*

Time-Date Replace*

Units Currency

Width

*These commands appear only in Multiplan version 3.04 and earlier.

**These commands appear only in Multiplan version 4.0 and later.


Multiplan Format Options Command

Multiplan option	Microsoft Excel equivalent

Commas*	Number tab, Cells command (Format menu)

Decimal separator**	Changing the decimal separator

Error messages**	No equivalent

Formulas	View tab, Options command (Tools menu)

*This command appears only in Multiplan version 3.04 and earlier.

**These commands appear only in Multiplan version 4.0 and later.


Multiplan Format Time-Date Replace Command

There is no direct equivalent to the Multiplan Format Time-Date Replace command in Microsoft Excel. You can use one of the 23 built-in time or date formats or create your own custom formats.


Multiplan Goto Commands

Macro

Name

Row-col

Window


Multiplan Insert Commands

Column

Row


Multiplan Lock Commands

Cells

Formula


Multiplan Move Commands

Column

Row


Multiplan Options Command

Multiplan option	Microsoft Excel equivalent

Recalc	Calculation tab (Options command, Tools menu)

Iteration	Calculation tab (Options command, Tools menu)

Test at	Calculation tab (Options command, Tools menu)

Alpha/value	You don't need to specify alpha or value; Microsoft Excel accepts any type of valid data in the selected cell.

Learn	Select all the cells in which you want to enter data. The ENTER, TAB, and arrow keys move the active cell within the selection.

Mute	1.	From Program Manager, start Control Panel.

2.	From the Settings menu, choose the Sound command.

3.	To turn the warning beep and all sounds except for those assigned to Windows Exit and Windows Start on or off, select or clear the Enable System Sounds check box.

4.	From the Settings menu, choose Exit to close the Control Panel.

Old menus*	No equivalent

Hold Alpha*	You don't need to hold the Alpha command; Microsoft Excel is always ready to accept data in the selected cell.

*These commands appear only in Multiplan version 4.0 and later.


Multiplan Print Commands

File

Heading*

Margins

Options

Printer

*This command appears only in Multiplan version 3.0 and later.


Multiplan Print File Command

There is no procedure in Microsoft Excel Help for the Multiplan Print File command. For information about printing to a text file, see your Windows documentation.


Multiplan Print Options Command

Multiplan option	Microsoft Excel equivalent

Area	Set Print Area button

Setup*	Page Setup (File menu)

Formulas	View tab (Options command, Tools menu)

Row-col numbers	Page Setup (File menu)

Printer**	Page Setup (File menu)

Model**	Page Setup (File menu)

Draft**	Print (File menu)

Number of copies***	Print (File menu)

*This command appears only in Multiplan version 3.04 and earlier.

**These commands appear only in Multiplan version 4.0 and earlier.

***This command appears only in Multiplan version 4.2.


Multiplan Run Commands

Audit Cells

Audit Formulas

Command

Database Backward-Search**

Database Delete**

Database Extract**

Database Forward-Search**

DOS*

Report File

Report Print

*This command appears only in Multiplan version 3.04 and earlier.

**These commands appear only in Multiplan version 4.0 and later.


Multiplan Run Command Command

There is no direct equivalent to the Multiplan Run Command command in Microsoft Excel, but you can switch to DOS by using the Microsoft Windows Program Manager.

To switch to DOS

1.	Press CTRL+ESC to switch to the Task List.

2.	Select Program Manager and press ENTER.

3.	From the File menu, choose Run.

4.	Type command.

5.	Choose the OK button.

To return to Microsoft Excel

1.	Type exit.

2.	Press CTRL+ESC to switch to the Task List.

3.	Select Microsoft Excel and press ENTER.


Multiplan Run Report Print Command

Multiplan option	Microsoft Excel equivalent

Cross-ref	No direct equivalent. This command prints a report of all the cells that refer to another cell. For information about tracing formula precedents and dependents in Microsoft Excel version 5.0, see Tracing precedent data and formulas, Tracing dependent formulas, and Opening and closing the Info window.

Names	No direct equivalent. This command prints a report of all the names in a worksheet.

To get a list of the names in a worksheet

1.	Find an area in the worksheet that has a lot of empty cells.

2.	Select the upper-left cell of the area.

3.	From the Insert menu, choose Name.

4.	Choose Paste.

5.	Choose Paste List.

Summary	No direct equivalent. This command prints a report of the conditions in a worksheet that are likely to cause errors. Use the Auditing commands on the Tools menu


Multiplan Run Report File Command

Multiplan option	Microsoft Excel equivalent

Cross-ref	No direct equivalent. For information about tracing formula precedents and dependents in Microsoft Excel version 5.0, see Tracing precedent data and formulas, Tracing dependent formulas, and Opening and closing the Info window.

Names	No direct equivalent. This command prints a report of all the names in a worksheet.

To get a list of the names in a worksheet

1.	Find an area in the worksheet that has a lot of empty cells.

2.	Select the upper-left cell of the area.

3.	From the Insert menu, choose Name.

4.	Choose Paste.

5.	Choose Paste List.

Summary	No direct equivalent. This command prints a report of the conditions in a worksheet that are likely to cause errors. Use the Auditing commands on the Tools menu.


Multiplan Sort Commands

Columns

Rows


Multiplan Transfer Commands

Clear All

Clear Window

Delete

Import*

Load

Options Mode

Options Setup

Rename

Save

*This command appears only in Multiplan version 4.0 and earlier.


Clearing your work and starting a new document

1.	From the File menu, choose Close or Close All to close the active documents and their windows.

2.	From the File menu, choose New to start a new document.


Multiplan Transfer Clear Window Command

There is no direct equivalent to the Multiplan Transfer Clear Window command in Microsoft Excel.

To create a new document, choose New from the File menu.

To close the active document, choose Close from the File menu.

To clear the contents of cells from a document, see Clearing data from cells.


Multiplan Window Commands

Border

Close

Link

Split Horizontal

Split Titles

Split Vertical


Multiplan Xternal Commands

Copy

List

Renew

Total

Use


Changing the thickness of all window borders

1.	From Program Manager, start Control Panel.

2.	Double-click the Desktop icon.

3.	Adjust the Border Width by clicking the up or down arrows or by typing a number in the Border Width box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

5.	From the Control menu in the Windows Control Panel window, choose Close.


Changing the decimal separator

1.	From Program Manager, start Control Panel.

2.	Double-click the International icon or choose International from the Control Panel settings menu.

3.	In the Number format box, choose the Change button.

4.	In the Decimal Separator box, type the decimal separator you want.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	Choose the OK button to close the International dialog box.

7.	From the Control menu choose Close to close the Control Panel.


Changing window colors

1.	From Program Manager, start Control Panel.

2.	Double-click the Colors icon.

3.	Choose the color palette or custom colors you want.

4.	Choose the OK button.

5.	From the Control menu in the Windows Control Panel window, choose Close.


Auditing and Adding Comments to Documents

Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

Displaying the Auditing toolbar

Tracing dependent formulas

Tracing precedent data and formulas

Using the error tracer to find error values visually

Removing tracer arrows

Overview of Using the Info Window to Investigate Cells

Displaying or removing information in the Info window

Opening and closing the Info window

Printing Info window information for a range of cells

Viewing specific cells with the Info window

Working with the Info window displayed

Overview of Using Go To Special to Find Specific Cells

Finding cells that don't fit the pattern in a row or column

Finding cells referred to by formulas in selected cells (precedents)

Finding cells with formulas that refer to selected cells (dependents)

Selecting cells with common types of contents

Overview of Adding Comments to a Worksheet

Adding an imported sound note

Copying a text or sound note to another cell

Creating text notes

Deleting text or sound notes from a cell

Displaying a text note

Displaying or hiding cell note indicators

Erasing a sound note

Playing a sound note

Printing text notes

Recording a sound note


Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

The Tracers enable you to find precedents, dependents, and errors related to any cell on your worksheet. The Tracer commands cause Microsoft Excel to draw arrows from the active cell to its precedents, its dependents, or to the possible source of an error value in the active cell.

Here are a few tips for using the Tracers:

Double-click a tracer arrow to select the cell at the point end of the arrow. Double-click again to select the cell at the opposite end.

Tracer arrows don't appear if the Hide All option is selected on the View tab, Options dialog box. (To display the Options dialog box, choose the Options command from the Tools menu.)

Tracer arrows aren't saved when you close the workbook.

Tracer arrows are special "objects" that you or a macro can edit or manipulate in limited ways.

The tracer commands are on the Tools menu, Auditing submenu. For quicker troubleshooting, you can use the Tracer buttons on the Auditing toolbar.

See Also

Help

Auditing Toolbar

Removing tracer arrows

Tracing dependent formulas

Tracing precedent data and formulas

Using the error tracer to find error values visually

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Displaying the Auditing toolbar

Overview

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Auditing.

2.	From the submenu, choose Show Auditing toolbar.

Alternate Method

1.	Right-click anywhere on any toolbar.

2.	From the shortcut menu, choose Auditing.

See Also

Help

Auditing Toolbar

Show Auditing Toolbar Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Using the error tracer to find error values visually

Overview

Before using the error tracer, make sure that Hide All is not selected on the View tab in the Options dialog box (Tools menu).

To trace an error

1.	Select a cell containing an error value.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Auditing, and then choose Trace Error.

Shortcut:	Click the Trace Error button on the Auditing toolbar.

Red or dotted arrows show the path of the information flow though successive formulas generating error values. Blue or solid arrows show precedents of the first error-producing formula.

Double-click any arrow to select the cell at the other end of the arrow.

To remove an error tracer arrow

Correct the error. The error tracer arrow changes to a solid precedent arrow.

Click the Remove All Arrows button on the Auditing toolbar. All tracer arrows, including precedent and dependent tracers, disappear from the worksheet.

From the Tools menu, choose Auditing, and then choose Remove All Arrows.

See Also

Help

  Remove All Arrows Button

  Trace Error Button

Auditing Command (Tools Menu)

Auditing Toolbar

Trace Error Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

View Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Tracing precedent data and formulas

Overview

Before using Trace Precedents, make sure that Hide All is not selected on the View tab in the Options dialog box (Tools menu).

1.	Select a cell containing the formula you want to trace.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Auditing, and then choose Trace Precedents.

Shortcut:	Click the Trace Precedents button on the Auditing toolbar.

Blue or solid arrows show the direct precedents of the selected formula. Red or dotted arrows show formulas that refer to error values. Dashed arrows with an icon at the end refer to external worksheets.

Double-click an arrow to select the cell at the other end of the arrow.

Arrows that appear with small spreadsheet icons at one end indicate a reference to precedents on separate sheets. Double-clicking this arrow displays the Go To dialog box containing the external reference or a reference to another sheet in the same workbook. To switch to a worksheet in a workbook that is currently open, select the external reference from the list and choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Trace Precedents Button

Auditing Command (Tools Menu)

Auditing Toolbar

Displaying the Auditing toolbar

Trace Precedents Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

View Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Tracing dependent formulas

Overview

Before using Trace Dependents, make sure that Hide All is not selected on the View tab of the Options dialog box (Tools menu).

1.	Select the cell you want to trace.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Auditing, and then choose Trace Dependents.

Shortcut:	Click the Trace Dependents button on the Auditing toolbar.

Blue or solid arrows show all the dependents of the selected formula.

Double-click any arrow to select the cell at the other end of the arrow.

See Also

Help

  Trace Dependents Button

Auditing Command (Tools Menu)

Auditing Toolbar

Displaying the Auditing toolbar

Trace Dependents Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

View Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Removing tracer arrows

Overview

To remove individual tracer arrows

1.	Select the precedent or dependent cell from which you want to remove a tracer arrow.

2.	Click the Remove Precedent Arrows button or the Remove Dependent Arrows button on the Auditing toolbar.

Microsoft Excel removes the level of the arrow farthest away from the active cell.

3.	Click the button again to remove another level of tracer arrows.

Microsoft Excel beeps after all levels of tracer arrows associated with the active cell are removed.

To remove all tracer arrows

1.	Switch to the worksheet that contains the tracer arrows you want to remove.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Auditing.

3.	Choose Remove All Arrows.

All arrows, including precedent, dependent, and error tracers, are cleared from the worksheet

Alternate Method

1.	Switch to the worksheet that contains the tracer arrows you want to remove.

2.	Click the Remove All Arrows button on the Auditing toolbar.

See Also

Help

  Remove All Arrows Button

  Remove Dependent Arrows Button

  Remove Precedent Arrows Button

Auditing Toolbar

Remove All Arrows Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Overview of Using the Info Window to Investigate Cells

The Info window displays detailed information about the active cell. You can specify exactly which categories of information you want to see in the Info window, such as notes, formatting, or names. Because you can quickly see details in the Info window, it's especially useful for the following tasks:

Finding errors in a worksheet

The Info window can help you find formatting, protection, data entry, formula, or logic errors. For example, you can verify a formula used in a cell or check on the cell's protection status.

Scanning cell information quickly

Use the Go To Special dialog box to locate specific cell information, such as cell notes or cell precedents and dependents. Then use the Info window to scan the cell notes or precedents and dependents of the selected cells.

Open the Info window whenever you want to look up details about a specific cell. You can open the Info window by using the Options command on the Tools menu or by clicking the Show Info Window button on the Auditing toolbar. Keep the Info window displayed while you work, so you can monitor the underlying contents of your worksheets and macro sheets. You can also print all the information in the Info window.

When the Info window is active, Microsoft Excel lists a different set of menus on the menu bar. The Info menu contains the commands you use to display different categories of information in the Info window, as defined in the following table.

This command	Displays

Cell	The cell reference of the active cell.

Formula	The contents of the active cell, as displayed in the formula bar.

Value	The value produced by the contents of the active cell.

Format	The format settings of the active cell, including the number, alignment, font, border, and shading formats.

Protection	The protection status of the active cell. An individual cell can be locked or its formula hidden.

Names	The names of any named areas that include the active cell.

Precedents	All the cells referred to by the formula in the active cell.

Dependents	All the cells with formulas that depend on or refer to the active cell.

Note	A text or sound note attached to the active cell.

See Also

Help

Auditing Toolbar

Displaying or removing information in the Info window

Opening and closing the Info window

Printing Info window information for a range of cells

Viewing specific cells with the Info window

Working with the Info window displayed

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Opening and closing the Info window

Overview

To open the Info window

1.	Select a cell you want information about.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

3.	Select the View tab.

4.	Under View Options, select the Info Window check box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Alternate Method

Click the Show Info Window button on the Auditing toolbar.

Microsoft Excel displays the Info window and switches to it. When you first open the Info window, it displays three categories of information about the active cell: the cell reference, the formula, and any notes attached to the cell.

To close the Info window

1.	Switch to the Info window.

2.	From the File menu, choose Close.

See Also

Help

  Show Info Window Button

Auditing Toolbar

Info Menu Commands

View Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Working with the Info window displayed

Overview

1.	Open the Info window. If the Info window is open but minimized, maximize it.

2.	From the Window menu, choose Arrange.

3.	To display windows side by side, select Tiled or Vertical under Arrange in the Arrange Windows dialog box. To stack windows one above the other, select Horizontal.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel automatically arranges the Info window and any open document windows so that all open windows are visible on the workspace.

See Also

Help

  Show Info Window Button

Arrange and Arrange Icons Commands (Window Menu)

Info Menu Commands

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Displaying or removing information in the Info window

Overview

To display additional information in the Info window

1.	Switch to the Info window.

2.	From the Info menu, choose the command for the category of information you want to display.

3.	Repeat step 2 for each category of information you want to add.

Microsoft Excel places a check mark next to each command you choose.

To remove information from the Info window

1.	Switch to the Info window.

2.	From the Info menu, choose the command for the category of information you want to remove.

Microsoft Excel removes the check mark next to the command.

3.	Repeat step 2 for each category of information you want removed.

See Also

Help

  Show Info Window Button

Info Menu Command

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Printing Info window information for a range of cells

Overview

1.	Select the cells for which you want to print the Info window information.

2.	Switch to the Info window.

3.	From the Info menu, choose the commands for the categories of information you want to print.

4.	From the File menu, choose Print.

Shortcut:	Click the Print button.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel prints the Info window information for all selected cells in the worksheet window.

See Also

Help

  Show Info Window Button

Info Menu Commands

Print Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Viewing specific cells with the Info window

Overview

The Info window and a worksheet must be open for this procedure to be effective.

1.	From the Window menu, choose Arrange.

2.	To arrange windows both horizontally and vertically, select Tiled.

To stack windows one above the other, select Horizontal.

To place windows side by side, select Vertical.

3.	Choose the OK button.

4.	Switch to the worksheet window.

5.	From the Edit menu, choose Go To.

6.	Choose the Special button.

7.	Select the option button for the category of information you want to display.

8.	Choose the OK button.

9.	Press TAB to move among cells within the selection. Press SHIFT+TAB to move backward through the selection.

Microsoft Excel displays the information for each selected cell in the Info window.

See Also

Help

  Show Info Window Button

Go To Special Dialog Box

Info Menu Commands

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Overview of Using Go To Special to Find Specific Cells

The Go To Special dialog box appears when you choose Go To from the Edit menu and choose the Special button. Go To Special enables you to select all the cells with specified types of contents. Use Go To Special to select cells in a range or on the entire worksheet.

This option	Finds

Notes	Cells with text or sound annotations attached.

Constants	Cells whose values do not start with an equal sign. For example, the date, the value 210, and text are all constants. A formula, or a value resulting from a formula, is not a constant.

Formulas	Cells with formula values.

Blanks	Cells that don't contain any data at all.

Current Region	All the adjacent cells in one area of the worksheet.

Precedents	Cells that are referred to by the formula in the active cell.

Dependents	All the cells with formulas that depend on or refer to the active cell.

Current Array	All the cells in an array.

Row Differences	All the cells different from a comparison cell in the same row.

Column Differences	All the cells different from a comparison cell in the same column.

Last Cell	The last cell in the active area of the worksheet.

Visible cells only	Only the visible cells in a selection containing hidden rows or columns, such as an outlined sheet.

Objects	All the objects on a worksheet.

See Also

Help

Finding cells referred to by formulas in selected cells (precedents)

Finding cells that don't fit the pattern in a row or column

Finding cells with formulas that refer to selected cells (dependents)

Go To Special Dialog Box

Selecting cells with common types of contents

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Finding cells referred to by formulas in selected cells (precedents)

Overview

1.	Select the cell or cells containing formulas whose precedents you want to find.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Go To.

3.	Choose the Special button.

4.	Select the Precedents option button.

5.	The Direct Only option button is already selected for you. When Direct Only is turned on, Microsoft Excel selects only cells directly referred to by the formula in the active cell.

Select the All Levels option button to find all cells that are directly or indirectly related to the formula in the active cell, including precedents of precedents.

6.	Choose the OK button.

Alternate Method

Select the cells containing Formulas whose precedents you want to find. Then press CTRL+[ to find only direct precedents, or press CTRL+SHIFT+{ to find all precedents.

See Also

Help

Auditing Command (Tools Menu)

Go To Special Dialog Box

Keys for Selecting Cells with Special Characteristics

Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Finding cells with formulas that refer to selected cells (dependents)

Overview

1.	Select the cell or cells whose dependents you want to find.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Go To.

3.	Choose the Special button.

4.	Select the Dependents option button.

5.	The Direct Only option button is already selected for you. When Direct Only is turned on, Microsoft Excel selects only cells directly referred to by the formula in the active cell.

Select the All Levels option button to find all cells that are directly or indirectly related to the formula in the active cell, including dependents of dependents.

6.	Choose the OK button.

Alternative Method

Select the cells whose dependents you want to find. Then press CTRL+] to find only direct dependents, or press CTRL+SHIFT+} to find all precedents.

See Also

Help

Auditing Command (Tools Menu)

Go To Special Dialog Box

Keys for Selecting Cells with Special Characteristics

Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Finding cells that don't fit the pattern in a row or column

Overview

1.	Select the range that you want to compare for row or column differences. The active cell in your selection is the cell against which the rest of the cells are compared.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Go To.

3.	Choose the Special button.

4.	Select the Row Differences or Column Differences option, depending on whether you are comparing within a row or within a column.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Alternate Method

Select the range that you want to compare, with the active cell as the comparison cell. Press CTRL+\ to find row differences, or press CTRL+SHIFT+ [image] to find column differences.

See Also

Help

Auditing Command (Tools Menu)

Go To Special Dialog Box

Keys for Selecting Cells with Special Characteristics

Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Selecting cells with common types of contents

Overview

1.	To search the entire worksheet, select a single cell. To limit the search to a range, select the range.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Go To.

3.	Choose the Special button.

4.	Select the option you want in the dialog box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel selects all cells in the search area that have the type of contents you specified in the dialog box.

See Also

Help

Go To Special Dialog Box

Keys for Selecting Cells with Special Characteristics

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Overview of Adding Comments to a Worksheet

The Note command on the Insert menu enables you to add notes to cells on your worksheet. These notes can consist of text or audio recordings.

To record sounds, you must have recording hardware and sound driver software installed in your computer.

When a note is present in a cell, a note indicator appears in the upper-right corner of the cell.

Note  You can add a note to a cell by clicking the Attach Note Button on the Auditing toolbar.

Annotating a sheet is a good idea if:

You share your sheets with others.

The worksheet is large and complex.

The sheet contains complex formulas that will be hard to decipher later.

Particular values on the worksheet are not in line with expectations or reflect anomalies that require explanation.

See Also

Help

Adding an imported sound note

Copying a text or sound note to another cell

Creating text notes

Deleting text or sound notes from a cell

Displaying a text note

Displaying or hiding cell note indicators

Erasing a sound note

Playing a sound note

Printing text notes

Recording a sound note

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Creating text notes

Overview

To add a text note

1.	Select the cell you want to annotate.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Note.

Shortcut:	SHIFT+F2, or click the Attach Note button on the Auditing toolbar.

3.	In the Text Note box, type new text or edit existing text. The text you type automatically wraps to the next line. To insert a line or paragraph break, press ENTER.

4.	When you finish your note, choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel attaches the note to the cell.

To create multiple notes quickly

1.	Select the first cell you want to annotate.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Note.

3.	In the Text Note box, type the text of the new note or edit the text of the existing note.

4.	Choose the Add button.

5.	Select the next cell you want to annotate, or type the reference in the Cell box.

6.	In the Text Note box, delete the text from the previous note and type the text of the next note.

7.	Choose the Add button.

8.	Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each additional note you want to create.

9.	Choose the OK button when you finish adding notes.

See Also

Help

  Attach Note Button

Auditing Toolbar

Displaying the Auditing toolbar

Note Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Displaying a text note

Overview

1.	Select any cell in the worksheet.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Note.

Shortcut:	SHIFT+F2, or click the Attach Note button on the Auditing toolbar.

A list of all notes in the worksheet appears in the Notes In Sheet box. To scroll through the list, use the scroll bar.

3.	Select the note you want to view.

4.	The text of the note is displayed in the Text Note box.

5.	When you finish reviewing the notes, choose the Close button.

--Or--

Display the Info window. The active cell's text note is displayed there.

See Also

Help

  Attach Note Button

  Show Info Window Button

Auditing Toolbar

Displaying the Auditing toolbar

Note Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Printing text notes

Overview

1.	From the File menu, choose Page Setup.

2.	Select the Sheet tab.

3.	Select the Row & Column Headings check box to print notes with the cell reference before each note. Clear the Row & Column Headings check box to print notes without the cell reference before each note.

4.	Select the Notes option.

5.	Choose the Print button.

6.	Select the options you want in the Print dialog box.

7.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Note Command (Insert Menu)

Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Print Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Adding an imported sound note

Overview

1.	Select the cell you want to annotate.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Note.

Shortcut:	SHIFT+F2, or click the Attach Note button on the Auditing toolbar.

3.	Under Sound Note, choose the Import button to select a previously recorded sound file to attach to the cell.

4.	From the list, select the sound file you want to import.

5.	In the Cell Note dialog box, choose the Add button if you want to add more notes, and then repeat steps 1 through 4.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Attach Note Button

Auditing Toolbar

Displaying the Auditing toolbar

Note Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Recording a sound note

Overview

You must have the proper hardware and software installed to record or play back a sound note.

1.	Select the cell you want to annotate.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Note.

Shortcut:	SHIRT+F2, or click the Attach Note button on the Auditing toolbar.

3.	Under Sound Note, choose the Record button.

If the cell already has a sound note attached, the Record button is not available.

4.	In the Record dialog box, choose the Record button and begin recording your note. The time scale below the Record, Stop, Pause, and Play buttons shows elapsed recording time relative to the total amount available.

5.	Choose the Stop button when you finish recording. Choose the Pause button to suspend and then resume recording.

6.	Choose the Play button to review your recording.

7.	To record your sound note again, repeat steps 4 and 5.

8.	In the Cell Note dialog box, choose the Add button if you want to add more notes, and repeat steps 1 through 7.

9.	When you are satisfied with your recording, choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Attach Note Button

Auditing Toolbar

Displaying the Auditing toolbar

Note Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Playing a sound note

Overview

You must have the proper hardware and software installed to record or play back a sound note.

1.	From the Insert menu, choose Note.

Shortcut:	SHIFT+F2, or click the Attach Note button on the Auditing toolbar.

If the selected cell contains a text note as well as a sound note, the Cell Note dialog box opens, then the sound note plays.

2.	To play other sound notes on the same worksheet, select the note from the Notes in Sheet box and choose the Play button.

Cells with attached sound notes are marked with an asterisk (*) in the Notes In Sheet box.

Documents containing sound notes that are transferred to another platform (Macintosh or Windows) retain the note but cannot play it.

See Also

Help

  Attach Note Button

Auditing Toolbar

Displaying the Auditing toolbar

Note Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Erasing a sound note

Overview

1.	Select the cell from which you want to remove a sound note.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Note.

Shortcut:	SHIFT+F2, or click the Attach Note button on the Auditing toolbar.

3.	In the Sound Note box, choose the Erase button to remove the sound note from the cell.

After the sound note is erased, the Erase button changes to the Record button.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Attach Note Button

Auditing Toolbar

Displaying the Auditing toolbar

Note Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Copying a text or sound note to another cell

Overview

1.	Select the cell containing the note you want to copy.

If the selected cell contains a text note as well as a sound note, both will be copied.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Copy.

3.	Select the cell to which you want to copy the note.

4.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

5.	Under Paste, select the Notes option button.

6.	Choose the OK button.

The copied note replaces any existing notes in the destination cell.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Note Command (Insert Menu)

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Deleting text or sound notes from a cell

Overview

1.	Select the cell containing the note you want to delete.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Clear, and then choose Notes.

Alternate Method

1.	From the Insert menu, choose Note.

Shortcut:	SHIFT+F2, or click the Attach Note button on the Auditing toolbar.

2.	In the Notes In Sheet box, select the note you want to delete.

3.	Choose the Delete button. Microsoft Excel displays a message warning you that the note will be permanently deleted.

4.	To confirm the deletion, choose the OK button. To cancel the deletion and return to the Cell Note dialog box, choose the Cancel button.

5.	Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each note you want to delete.

6.	When you finish deleting notes, choose the Close button to close the dialog box.

See Also

Help

  Attach Note Button

Auditing Toolbar

Displaying the Auditing toolbar

Note Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Displaying or hiding cell note indicators

Overview

Note indicators appear in the upper-right corner of cells with attached notes.

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Select the View tab.

3.	Under Show, select the Note Indicator check box to display note indicators.

To hide note indicators, clear the Note Indicator check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Note Command (Insert Menu)

View Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Controlling What Happens When You Start Microsoft Excel

Overview of Controlling What Happens When You Start Microsoft Excel

Opening a workbook automatically

Specifying an additional startup directory

Changing the appearance and contents of the default startup workbook

Setting the working directory

Controlling how Microsoft Excel starts using startup switches


Overview of Controlling What Happens When You Start Microsoft Excel

When you start Microsoft Excel, it checks the contents of the startup directory and:

Opens all workbooks, charts, and workspace files it finds there. If you have not placed your own workbooks in the startup directory, Microsoft Excel opens a new, blank workbook.

Lists all templates it finds there in the New dialog box so you can use them to create new workbooks. For more information, see Getting quick access to your templates.

You can control how Microsoft Excel starts by:

Specifying which workbooks are opened automatically when Microsoft Excel starts.

Changing the contents and appearance of the default startup workbook.

Specifying the working directory.

Changing startup options for the current Microsoft Excel session

If you want to change the working directory or startup workbooks for the current session, you can use startup switches with the Microsoft Excel icon in your Windows Program Manager. For more information, see Controlling how Microsoft Excel starts using startup switches.

See Also

Help

Changing the appearance and contents of the default startup workbook

Opening a workbook automatically

Setting the working directory

Specifying an additional startup directory

User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Installing and Starting Microsoft Excel"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"

Chapter 35, "Controlling What Happens When You Start Microsoft Excel"

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"


Opening a workbook automatically

Overview

To open a workbook automatically

1.	Create or find the workbook you want to use.

2.	Save it in the XLSTART directory in the directory where you installed Microsoft Excel.

If you do not want to store startup workbooks in XLSTART, you can specify one additional startup directory. For more information, see Specifying an additional startup directory.

If you want to open multiple files at once, you can place a workspace file in the startup directory. For more information, see Saving custom workspaces.

You can also open a workbook automatically using a startup switch with the Microsoft Excel icon in the Windows Program Manager. For more information, see Controlling how Microsoft Excel starts using startup switches.

To remove a startup workbook

Move the file from the XLSTART directory.

See Also

Help

Overview of Starting and Quitting Microsoft Excel

User's Guide

Chapter 35, "Controlling What Happens When You Start Microsoft Excel"


Specifying an additional startup directory

Overview

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Select the General tab.

3.	In the Alternate Startup File Location box, type the full path of the alternate startup directory you want to use.

4.	Choose the OK button.

The next time you start Microsoft Excel, it will open all workbooks and workspace files in the alternate startup directory in addition to the workbooks you have placed in the XLSTART directory. For more information about the XLSTART directory, see Opening a workbook automatically.

See Also

Help

General Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Overview of Saving Workspace Files

Overview of Starting and Quitting Microsoft Excel

User's Guide

Chapter 35, "Controlling What Happens When You Start Microsoft Excel"


Changing the appearance and contents of the default startup workbook

Overview

1.	Create a workbook that contains the preferences you want to apply to the default startup workbook.

2.	Save the workbook as a template named BOOK.XLT in the XLSTART directory in the directory where you installed Microsoft Excel.

Note  If you just want to change the standard font, use the General tab in the Options dialog box. To display the Options dialog box, choose Options from the Tools menu.

See Also

Help

General Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Overview of Creating and Editing Workbook Templates

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"

Chapter 35, "Controlling What Happens When You Start Microsoft Excel"

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"


Setting the working directory

Overview

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Select the General tab.

3.	In the Default File Location box, type the full path of the directory you want to use as your Microsoft Excel working directory.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Note  This overrides any working directory setting you might have made for the Microsoft Excel icon in Program Manager. For more information, see Controlling how Microsoft Excel starts using startup switches.

See Also

Help

General Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Opening a workbook

Saving a workbook

User's Guide

Chapter 35, "Controlling What Happens When You Start Microsoft Excel"


Controlling how Microsoft Excel starts using startup switches

Overview

1.	In the Microsoft Office program group window in your Windows Program Manager, or in the program group in which you installed Microsoft Excel, select the Microsoft Excel icon.

2. From the Program Manager File menu, choose Properties.

3.	In the Command Line box, type excel.exe, followed by the startup switch or switches you want to use.

Remember to put a space between excel.exe and the switch, and between additional switches if you use more than one.

4.	Choose the OK button.

5.	Double-click the Microsoft Excel icon to start Microsoft Excel using the options you specified.

Note  You can also use startup switches with the Run command in Program Manager or File Manager. Options specified with the Run command are only in effect for the current session.

Startup Switches

Use this switch	If you want to

filename	Open a specific file
Example: c:\mybook.xls

/r filename	Open a file as read-only
Example: /r c:\mybook.xls

/p path	Set the working directory
Example: /p c:\mywork

/e	Start Microsoft Excel without a new, blank workbook.

If you are using the Properties dialog box in your Windows Program Manager, you can also set the working directory by entering the directory path in the Working Directory box.

Note  Any working directory setting you have made on the General tab in the Options dialog box will override any working directory setting you make in the Properties dialog box in your Windows Program Manager.

See Also

Help

General Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Opening a workbook automatically

Overview of Starting and Quitting Microsoft Excel

Setting the working directory

User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Installing and Starting Microsoft Excel"

Chapter 35, "Controlling What Happens When You Start Microsoft Excel"


Restore Command (Control Menu)

Restores the active workbook window or Microsoft Excel window to the size and location it had before you maximized or minimized the window. You can also click the Restore button.

To restore a minimized window, click the icon and choose the Restore command, or double-click the icon.

Restoring a window does not affect changes made to the window with the Move command or Size command on the Control menu.

Shortcut:	CTRL+F5 (workbook windows)

See Also

Help

Arranging workbook windows

Minimizing and restoring windows


Move Command (Control Menu)

Displays a four-headed arrow. Use the arrow keys to move the active workbook window, Microsoft Excel window, or a dialog box.

If the window is maximized, this command is unavailable.

You can also move a window that is not maximized, or an open dialog box, by dragging the title bar.

Shortcut:	CTRL+F7 (workbook windows)


Size Command (Control Menu)

Displays a four-headed arrow you can use to change the size of the active workbook window or Microsoft Excel window. Use the arrow keys to make the window the size you want, and then press ENTER.

If the window is maximized, this command is unavailable.

Shortcut:	CTRL+F8 (workbook windows)


Minimize Command (Control Menu)

Shrinks the active workbook window or Microsoft Excel window to an icon. You can also click the Minimize button.

Double-clicking a minimized window icon restores the window to its former size. You can also restore a minimized window by using the Restore command on the Control menu.

When you minimize the Microsoft Excel window, any open workbooks are minimized with it.

As an icon, Microsoft Excel remains in memory, but does not take up room on the desktop.

Shortcut:	CTRL+F9 (workbook windows)

See Also

Help

Arranging workbook windows

Minimizing and restoring windows


Maximize Command (Control Menu)

Enlarges the active workbook window or Microsoft Excel window to fill the available space. You can also click the Maximize button.

A maximized window fills as much of the Microsoft Excel window as possible and has no borders.

The maximized Microsoft Excel window fills the entire screen.

You can maximize the Microsoft Excel window only if it does not fill the screen, or if it has been minimized to an icon.

To restore a maximized window to its former size, choose the Restore command from the Control menu, or click the Restore button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+F10 (workbook windows)

See Also

Help

Arranging workbook windows

Minimizing and restoring windows


Close Command (Control Menu)

Closes the active window. This window may be the Microsoft Excel application window, a workbook window, or a dialog box.

Double-clicking the Control-menu box of a workbook window has the same effect as choosing the Close command from the Control menu. If the window is the only window for the workbook, double-clicking the Control-menu box has the same effect as choosing the Close command from the File menu.

Double-clicking the Microsoft Excel application window's Control-menu box is the same as choosing the Exit command from the File menu.

To close all of a workbook's windows, use the Close command on the File Menu.

To close all open windows for all workbooks, hold down the SHIFT key and choose the Close All command from the File menu.

Shortcuts:	ALT+F4 (Microsoft Excel application window or dialog box)

CTRL+F4 (workbook window)

See Also

Help

Closing a workbook

Displaying and closing new windows of a workbook

Quitting Microsoft Excel

Saving a workbook


Switch To Command (Application Control Menu)

Displays the Task List dialog box of Windows Program Manager.

For more information, see your Windows documentation.

Shortcut:	CTRL+ESC


Next Window Command (Workbook Control Menu)

Switches to the next workbook window.

Shortcut:	CTRL+TAB


Creating User-Defined Functions

Overview of Creating a User-Defined Function

Creating a user-defined function

Entering a user-defined function in a worksheet


Overview of Creating a User-Defined Function

A user-defined function works like any built-in Microsoft Excel worksheet function, such as SUM or AVERAGE. But you decide what your user-defined function is called, what its arguments are, and what value it returns.

You create a user-defined function by typing mathematical expressions or other Visual Basic code in a Visual Basic module.

You enter the function in a worksheet by typing an equal sign followed by the function name and its arguments, just as you would enter a built-in worksheet function.

You can also call a user-defined function from a macro or use it as an argument to another function.

See Also

Help

Creating a user-defined function

Entering a user-defined function in a worksheet

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 3, "Creating User-Defined Functions"


Creating a user-defined function

Overview

To create a user-defined function

1.	To switch to a Visual Basic module in the active workbook, select its tab.

-- Or --

To create a new Visual Basic module, choose Macro from the Insert menu, and then choose Module.

2.	In the module, type Function followed by your function name.

3.	Type the arguments, enclosed in parentheses, separating each argument with a comma.

4.	Press ENTER.

5.	Type your Visual Basic code.

6.	Type End Function and then press ENTER.

See Also

Help

Creating a Procedure

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 3, "Creating User-Defined Functions"


Entering a user-defined function in a worksheet

Overview

To enter a user-defined function in a worksheet

1.	Select the cell where you want to enter the function.

2.	Type an equal sign (=), followed by the function name and an open parenthesis.

3.	Type the arguments, separating each with a comma, followed by a closing parenthesis.

4.	Press ENTER.

Note  If your function is assigned to a category, you can enter it in the selected cell by choosing the Function command from the Insert menu.

See Also

Help

Function Command (Insert Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 3, "Creating User-Defined Functions"


Creating a Chart

Overview of Creating a Chart

What Is a Chart?

About the ChartWizard

Creating an embedded chart on a worksheet

Creating a chart sheet in a workbook

About Creating Charts from Nonadjacent Selections

Default Charts

Changing the default chart format

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

Activating a chart

Selecting items in a chart with the mouse

Selecting items in a chart with the keyboard

Overview of Adding Data Labels, Titles, and Other Items to a Chart

Adding data labels

Adding a chart title and axis titles

Adding a legend

Adding gridlines

Deleting data labels, titles, legends, or gridlines


Overview of Creating a Chart

Before you create a chart, you should decide how you want to use it.

If a chart is intended to supplement worksheet data and be displayed with it, create an embedded chart on the worksheet. To display a chart on a separate sheet in your workbook, create a chart sheet. Both embedded charts and chart sheets are linked to the worksheet data they were created from, and both are updated when you update the worksheet.

An embedded chart is saved on the worksheet when you save the workbook. An embedded chart is ideal for reports or other documents in which you want to show a chart within the context of the worksheet data.

A chart sheet is automatically inserted into the workbook to the left of the worksheet it is based on. A chart sheet is suitable for presentation and training purposes, such as overhead slides and handouts, or for enhancing printed materials, such as newspaper articles and advertisements.

Charts are created using commands or buttons that display the ChartWizard.

See Also

Help

About Creating Charts from Nonadjacent Selections

Changing the default chart format

Creating a chart sheet in a workbook

Creating an embedded chart on a worksheet

Default Charts

What Is a Chart?

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"


What Is a Chart?

Overview

A chart is a graphic representation of worksheet data. Charts can make data interesting, attractive, and easy to read and evaluate. They can also help you analyze and compare data.

When you create a chart based on a worksheet selection, Microsoft Excel uses the values from the worksheet and presents them in the chart as data points, which are represented by bars, lines, columns, slices, dots, and other shapes. These shapes are referred to as data markers.

Groups of data points, or data markers, originating from single worksheet rows or columns are grouped in data series. Each data series is then distinguished by a unique color or pattern, or both.

After creating a chart, you can enhance it and emphasize certain information by adding chart items, such as data labels, a legend, titles, text, trendlines, error bars, and gridlines. Most chart items can be moved and sized. You can also format these items using patterns, colors, alignment, fonts, and other formatting attributes.

See Also

Help

Changing the chart type of a data series

Creating a chart sheet in a workbook

Creating an embedded chart on a worksheet

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


About the ChartWizard

Overview

The ChartWizard is a series of dialog boxes that guides you through the steps required to create a new chart or modify settings for an existing chart. With the ChartWizard, you can quickly accomplish many tasks that would otherwise take much longer to complete.

When creating a chart with the ChartWizard, you can specify the worksheet range, select a chart type and format, and specify how you want your data to be plotted. You can also add a legend, a chart title, and a title to each axis.

When modifying an existing chart, you can specify a different worksheet range and change the orientation of your chart--that is, whether the data series are in rows or columns on the worksheet.

There are two commands and two buttons that start the ChartWizard. The command you choose or the button you click will create either an embedded chart or a chart sheet.

To create an embedded chart, use either the ChartWizard button or the On This Sheet command (Insert menu, Chart submenu).

To create a chart sheet, use the As New Sheet command (Insert menu, Chart submenu) or the Insert Chart Sheet button, once you've added it to a toolbar.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Changing the default chart format

Creating a chart sheet in a workbook

Creating an embedded chart on a worksheet

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"


Creating an embedded chart on a worksheet

Overview

The easiest way to create an embedded chart on a worksheet is with the ChartWizard button.

1.	In the worksheet, select the data you want to plot, including cells containing any category or series names that you want used in the chart.

2.	Click the ChartWizard button.

The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair.

3.	To have the ChartWizard automatically place the chart on the worksheet, click the worksheet.

To specify the chart's location and size yourself, position the cross hair on the worksheet where you want one corner of the chart and drag until the rectangle is the shape you want.

To plot the chart in a perfect square, hold down SHIFT while you drag.

4.	Follow the instructions in the ChartWizard.

5.	To move forward or backward between steps, choose the Next button or the Back button.

6.	Choose the Finish button during any of the steps, and the ChartWizard will finish the chart for you.

See Also

Help

  ChartWizard Button

About Creating Charts from Nonadjacent Selections

Chart Command (Insert Menu)

Overview of Adding Data Labels, Titles, and Other Items to a Chart

User's Guide

Chapter 15, Creating a Chart"


Creating a chart sheet in a workbook

Overview

When you create a chart sheet, Microsoft Excel places the chart on the new chart sheet, which is then inserted into your workbook to the left of the worksheet that the chart is based on. By default, chart sheet tabs are named Chart1, Chart2, and so on.

You can create a chart sheet with or without the ChartWizard.

To create a chart sheet with the ChartWizard

1.	In the worksheet, select the data you want to plot, including cells containing any category or series names that you want to use in the chart.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Chart, and then choose As New Sheet.

3.	Follow the instructions in the ChartWizard.

4.	To move between steps, choose the Next button or the Back button.

5.	Choose the Finish button during any of the steps, and the ChartWizard will finish the chart for you.

Tip  To give your chart sheet a different tab name, use the Rename command (Format menu, Sheet submenu), and type the name you want.

To create a chart sheet without the ChartWizard

1.	In the worksheet, select the data you want to plot, including cells containing any category or series names that you want to use in the chart.

2.	Press F11.

Note  If Microsoft Excel cannot determine how to create a chart using the worksheet data you selected, the ChartWizard will request more information from you.

See Also

Help

About the ChartWizard

Chart Command (Insert Menu)

Overview of Adding Data Labels, Titles, and Other Items to a Chart

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"


About Creating Charts from Nonadjacent Selections

Overview

Sometimes you'll want to create a chart by using cells or ranges of cells that are not next, or adjacent, to one another. Make nonadjacent (or "discontiguous") selections when you want to create a chart by using:

Nonadjacent rows or columns on your worksheet.

Portions of a row or column.

Blank rows and columns between rows or columns you want to plot.

The nonadjacent selections should form a rectangular shape. Once you've made your worksheet selections, use the ChartWizard to create the chart.

You can also hide rows and columns you don't want to include in your chart, or you can create an outline and collapse the levels you want to exclude.

Tip  Perhaps the easiest way to handle complex data is to create your chart using the first data series and then add additional data series or data points as needed. Use cell drag and drop to add data to embedded charts, or use the New Data command (Insert menu) to add data to chart sheets.

See Also

Help

About the ChartWizard

Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

Adding data series or data points to an embedded chart

Creating a chart from visible worksheet data

Selecting nonadjacent cells or ranges

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Default Charts

Overview

When you create a new chart, by default it is a column chart with a legend displayed and some standard formatting applied. You can change these attributes either as you're creating the chart or later, using the commands on the Format menu. You can also add items to your chart using the commands on the Insert menu.

However, if you want most or all of the charts you create to be a type other than column or to have other than standard formatting, you can change the default format. This does not affect any of your existing charts, but all charts you subsequently create will have the new characteristics you specify. The default chart format stays in effect until you change it.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list

Applying an autoformat to a chart

Changing the default chart format

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Changing the default chart format

Overview

Every chart you create is based on a default chart format. You can select a different default format before you create a chart, and you can reset the default format to the original Microsoft Excel format.

To select a different default chart format before creating a chart

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Select the Chart tab.

3.	Under Default Chart Format, select the default format you want.

To reset the default to the original Microsoft Excel format, select (Built-in).

4.	Choose the OK button.

Any charts you subsequently create will use the default format you selected.

To make your active chart the default chart format

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Select the Chart tab.

3.	Choose the Use The Active Chart button.

4.	In the Add Custom AutoFormat dialog box, type a name (up to 31 characters).

5.	Choose the OK button to close this dialog box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

To view custom chart formats

1.	Activate a chart.

2.	From the Format menu or the shortcut menu, choose AutoFormat.

3.	Under AutoFormat, select the Custom option button.

4.	Under Formats, select the custom format you want to view.

The dialog box displays a sample of that format using the data in your active chart.

5.	Choose the Cancel button.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list

Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Chart Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

To make changes to a chart, you must activate it. Once the chart is active, the chart commands are available, and you can select items within the chart and make the changes you want. For example, you can add items (such as a legend) and you can format items (such as data markers) using the commands on the Insert menu and the Format menu.

Some commands are not available until you've selected an item those commands can work on. For example, you must select a data series before you can choose Trendline or Error Bars from the Insert menu.

To move, size, or delete an embedded chart on a worksheet, you select the chart just as you would select any object on the worksheet.

See Also

Help

Activating a chart

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Selecting items in a chart with the keyboard

Selecting items in a chart with the mouse

Sizing a chart sheet with the window

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Activating a chart

Overview

When you activate a chart, the chart menu commands become available and the Chart toolbar is displayed.

To activate an embedded chart on a worksheet

Note  You must use a mouse to do this procedure.

1.	Select the tab for the worksheet containing the embedded chart.

2.	Double-click the embedded chart.

When active, the chart has a thick, patterned border.

To activate a chart sheet

Select the chart sheet tab you want.

See Also

Help

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Moving and Sizing Charts and Chart Items

Selecting a sheet or sheets

Selecting items in a chart with the keyboard

Selecting items in a chart with the mouse

Sizing a chart sheet with the window

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"


Selecting items in a chart with the mouse

Overview

When a chart is active, you can use the mouse to select the chart area, the plot area, graphic objects, and most chart items, one at a time. To confirm what you've selected, refer to the name box on the formula bar.

Many items are grouped together. For some grouped items, such as data series, you click once to select the entire group, and then you click the individual item you want to select within the group. These grouped items are marked with an asterisk (*). Other grouped items, such as gridlines and 3-D walls, you click only once to modify or format the whole group.

Chart Data

To select this item	Do this

Data series*	Click any data marker belonging to a data series.

Single data point	Select the series, and then click the data marker for the data point.

Doughnut data series*	Click any doughnut ring to select a data series.

Pie data series*	Click once anywhere in the pie.

Pie or doughnut slice	Select the pie or the doughnut ring, and then click the slice (data point).

Trendline	Click the trendline.

Error bars*	Click any error bar associated with a data series.

Y or x error bars	Select the error bars, and then click the x or y error bar.

Text Items

To select this item	Do this

Data labels*	Click any data label associated with a data series.

Single data label	Select the data labels, and then click an individual label.

Legend*	Click anywhere in the legend, or click its border.

Single legend entry	Select the legend, and then click the legend entry.

Single legend key	Select the legend, and then click the legend key.

Title or text box	Click the chart title, axis title, or text box.

Major Areas

To select this item	Do this

Plot area	Click near the data markers in an area not occupied by any other item.

Chart area	Click just outside the plot area.

Corners	Click any corner of a 3-D chart.

Walls	Click anywhere on the visible walls except on gridlines.

Floors	Click anywhere on the visible floor.

Axis	Click the axis or a tick-mark label to format or modify the axis, tick marks, or tick-mark labels.

Other Items

To select this item	Do this

Various lines and bars	Click any gridline, drop line, series line, high-low line, up bar, or down bar.

Graphic objects	Click any arrow or other graphic object.

To cancel a selection

Press ESC.

See Also

Help

Activating a chart

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Moving and Sizing Charts and Chart Items

Selecting items in a chart with the keyboard

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Selecting items in a chart with the keyboard

Overview

Once a chart is active, you can use the keyboard to cycle through the chart and select the chart, plot area, most chart items, and any graphic objects, one at a time. To confirm what you've selected, refer to the name box on the formula bar.

Some items, such as data series and data labels, are grouped together. First you select the entire group, and then you select the individual item you want within the group.

To make a selection

1.	Use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys to select the grouped items you want, such as the chart area, the plot area, data series, graphic objects, and other chart items.

2.	Use the RIGHT ARROW and LEFT ARROW keys to select individual items within that group, such as data points, pie slices, legend entries, data labels, and other chart items.

To cancel a selection

Press ESC.

See Also

Help

Activating a chart

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Moving and Sizing Charts and Chart Items

Selecting items in a chart with the mouse

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Overview of Adding Data Labels, Titles, and Other Items to a Chart

Once you've created a chart, you can enhance it by adding data labels, chart and axis titles, a legend, and gridlines. To add these items to a chart, you use the commands on the Insert menu or the shortcut menu. Some of these items can also be added when you're creating a chart with the ChartWizard.

Once an item is on a chart, you can double-click the item to display a formatting dialog box that contains various tabs. Each tab allows you to customize the chart item to your liking, adding patterns, colors, and so on. You can also use the commands on the Format menu to format chart items.

See Also

Help

Adding a chart title and axis titles

Adding a legend

Adding data labels

Adding gridlines

Deleting data labels, titles, legends, or gridlines

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Adding data labels

Overview

You can add data labels to a data series, to an individual data point, or to all data points in the chart. The chart type assigned to your selected data points determines which kind of labels you can display.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Select the data series or the single data marker you want to add labels to.

To apply labels to all data points, do not select any data markers.

3.	From the Insert menu, choose Data Labels.

You can also choose Insert Data Labels from the shortcut menu.

4.	Select the kind of labels you want displayed.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Changing data labels

Data Labels Command (Insert Menu)

Deleting data labels, titles, legends, or gridlines

Selecting items in a chart with the keyboard

Selecting items in a chart with the mouse

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Adding a chart title and axis titles

Overview

You can add a chart title or axis titles to a chart. For 3-D charts, you can also add an axis title to the series axis.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Titles.

You can also choose Insert Titles from the shortcut menu.

3.	To add a chart title, select the Chart Title check box.

To add one or more axis titles, select the check boxes you want.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Placeholder text is added in the appropriate chart location.

5.	Select the text you want to edit.

6.	Type the new text you want.

To insert a line break in the text, press ENTER.

See Also

Help

Changing the font and alignment of chart text

Deleting data labels, titles, legends, or gridlines

Editing titles and text boxes

Selecting items in a chart with the keyboard

Selecting items in a chart with the mouse

Titles Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Adding a legend

Overview

You can add a legend to your chart.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Legend.

Shortcut:	Legend button (Chart toolbar)

Microsoft Excel inserts the legend to the right of the plot area and resizes the plot area to accommodate the legend.

See Also

Help

  Legend Button

Changing legend entries

Deleting data labels, titles, legends, or gridlines

Formatting legend entries and keys

Legend Command (Insert Menu)

Moving and sizing the legend

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Adding gridlines

Overview

When axes are displayed in your chart, you can add major, minor, vertical, or horizontal gridlines to the chart, or any combination of these.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Gridlines.

You can also choose Insert Gridlines from the shortcut menu.

Shortcut:	Horizontal Gridlines button (Chart toolbar)

3.	For each axis, select the appropriate check boxes for the gridlines you want displayed.

To remove gridlines, clear the check boxes for the gridlines you don't want displayed.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Horizontal Gridlines Button

Deleting data labels, titles, legends, or gridlines

Displaying or hiding axes

Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Gridlines Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Deleting data labels, titles, legends, or gridlines

Overview

You can delete data labels for a data series, a data point, or the entire chart. You can also delete a chart title, an axis title, the entire legend, a single legend entry and its key, or any type of gridline.

1.	Select the item you want to delete.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Clear, and then choose All.

Shortcut:	DEL

Note  To add or remove the legend to or from your chart, you can also click the Legend button. To turn major horizontal gridlines on or off, click the Horizontal Gridlines button.

See Also

Help

  Horizontal Gridlines Button

  Legend Button

Clear Command (Edit Menu for Charts)

Selecting items in a chart with the keyboard

Selecting items in a chart with the mouse

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Creating a Pivot Table

Overview of Creating a Pivot Table

How a Pivot Table Works

Creating a pivot table

Updating data in a pivot table

Changing source data for a pivot table

Deleting a pivot table

Creating a chart from a pivot table

Editing a query for a pivot table

Converting a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 crosstab table to a pivot table


Overview of Creating a Pivot Table

A pivot table is an interactive worksheet table you use to summarize and analyze data from an existing list or table. You can update a pivot table whenever changes occur in the original source data. The original data remains intact, and the pivot table stays on the worksheet you created it on.

You create a pivot table by using the PivotTable Wizard, a series of interactive dialog boxes that guide you through the steps of locating and retrieving the data you want to analyze. The PivotTable Wizard also lets you define how you want to arrange the pivot table using row and column labels, and how you want to present data in the fields.

You can create a pivot table from source data that resides in:

A Microsoft Excel list or database.

An external database, such as a table or file created in an application or database management system external to Microsoft Excel.

Multiple Microsoft Excel consolidation ranges.

Another pivot table in the same workbook.

Once you create a pivot table, you can rearrange, organize, and analyze the data by dragging and dropping the fields in the pivot table. You can also include subtotals, change the summary function for a field, or select a custom calculation for your pivot table.

Note  If you want to create a pivot table using external data, install Microsoft Query and the appropriate open database connectivity (ODBC) drivers, and define the data sources you want to use.

See Also

Help

Changing source data for a pivot table

Converting a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 crosstab table to a pivot table

Creating a chart from a pivot table

Creating a pivot table

Customizing a Pivot Table

Deleting a pivot table

Editing a query for a pivot table

How a Pivot Table Works

Updating data in a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"

Microsoft Query User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Getting Started with Queries"


How a Pivot Table Works

Overview

When you create a pivot table, you specify the data to use as row fields, column fields, and page fields, then the data you want summarized in the data area of the table.

The fields and items you include from your source data determine how Microsoft Excel presents the data in a pivot table. For example, the value of the cell at the intersection of a column labeled North and a row labeled 1992 is the sum of all rows in the source data that contain North as a region and 1992 as a year.

Microsoft Excel automatically uses the Sum function for numeric data and the Count function for non-numeric data. You can modify a field to change the computation from Sum to another summary function if necessary.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Button

Changing source data for a pivot table

Converting a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 crosstab table to a pivot table

Creating a chart from a pivot table

Creating a pivot table

Deleting a pivot table

Editing a query for a pivot table

PivotTable Command (Data Menu)

Updating data in a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Creating a pivot table

Overview

1.	Choose the PivotTable command from the Data menu, or click the PivotTable button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

Step 1 of the PivotTable Wizard is displayed.

2.	Follow the instructions in the PivotTable Wizard to create the pivot table.

Note  For detailed information on using the PivotTable Wizard, choose the Help button in the PivotTable Wizard dialog box.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

How a Pivot Table Works

PivotTable Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Updating data in a pivot table

Overview

When the source data changes, refresh the data in a pivot table by following these steps.

1.	Select a cell in the pivot table.

2.	From the Data menu or shortcut menu, choose Refresh Data.

Shortcut:	Refresh Data button (Query And Pivot toolbar).

Note  If your pivot table is based on a Microsoft Excel list and you insert additional rows or columns in the list, you must run the PivotTable Wizard to modify the pivot table to include the new data. See Changing source data for a pivot table for more information.

See Also

Help

  Refresh Data Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

How a Pivot Table Works

Refresh Data Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"


Changing source data for a pivot table

Overview

If your pivot table is based on a Microsoft Excel list and you insert additional rows or columns in the list, modify the pivot table to include the new data by following these steps.

1.	Select a cell in the pivot table.

2.	From the Data menu or shortcut menu, choose PivotTable.

Shortcut:	PivotTable button (Query And Pivot toolbar).

3.	Choose the Back button.

Step 2 of the PivotTable Wizard is displayed.

4.	Respecify the source data ranges.

5.	Choose the Finish button.

Note  When the source data changes and you want the new information in the current pivot table, use the Refresh Data command to update the pivot table. See Updating data in a pivot table for more information.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

How a Pivot Table Works

PivotTable Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Deleting a pivot table

Overview

1.	Select the entire pivot table, including the page fields.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Clear, and then choose All.

Note  This procedure does not affect the source data.

See Also

Help

Clear Command (Edit Menu)

How a Pivot Table Works

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"


Creating a chart from a pivot table

Overview

Microsoft Excel evaluates the multiple levels of data in the pivot table and creates a chart that reflects those levels and their relationships. Your chart changes when you hide items, show details, or rearrange fields in the pivot table.

1.	Select the entire pivot table, including the column fields and row fields. Do not include any page fields.

2.	Click the ChartWizard button.

The pointer changes to a cross hair with a chart symbol.

3.	Click once on the worksheet or drag the cross hair to anchor the chart.

4.	Follow the instructions in the ChartWizard.

The ChartWizard guides you through the steps to create a new chart.

Tip  You can change which items are assigned to categories or series by changing the orientation of the data series in step 4 of the ChartWizard.

See Also

Help

  ChartWizard Button

Chart Command (Insert Menu)

Creating an embedded chart on a worksheet

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Editing a query for a pivot table

Overview

Use this procedure if you created a pivot table using the External Data Source option in the PivotTable Wizard, and you want to change the query you created in Microsoft Query.

1.	Select a cell in the pivot table.

2.	From the Data menu or shortcut menu, choose PivotTable.

3.	Choose the Back button.

Step 2 of the PivotTable Wizard is displayed.

4.	Choose the Get Data button.

Microsoft Query and your result set are displayed.

5.	Edit the query or result set in Microsoft Query.

6.	From the Microsoft Query File menu, choose Return Data To Microsoft Excel.

The PivotTable Wizard is displayed.

7.	Choose the Finish button.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Button

PivotTable Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Microsoft Query User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Getting Started with Queries"


Converting a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 crosstab table to a pivot table

Overview

Important  This procedure permanently converts your Microsoft Excel version 4.0 crosstab table to a Microsoft Excel version 5.0 pivot table.

1.	Open the worksheet containing the crosstab table you want to convert.

2.	From the Data menu, choose PivotTable.

Step 3 of the PivotTable Wizard is displayed.

3.	Follow the instructions in the PivotTable Wizard.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Button

PivotTable Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Customizing a Pivot Table

Overview of Adding and Removing Pivot Table Data

Adding a field to a pivot table

Removing a row, column, or page field from a pivot table

Removing a data field from a pivot table

Hiding or displaying items in a pivot table field

Overview of Changing the Layout of a Pivot Table

Moving a pivot table field

Moving a pivot table item

Overview of Working with Totals in a Pivot Table

Changing the summary function for a pivot table subtotal

Displaying subtotals for row or column fields in a pivot table

Hiding and displaying grand totals in a pivot table

Removing subtotals for a row or column field

Overview of Editing and Formatting a Pivot Table

Changing the name of a pivot table field

Changing the name of a pivot table item

Changing the number format for the data area of a pivot table

Formatting a pivot table

Overview of Changing How Pivot Table Data Is Calculated

Changing the summary function for a pivot table data field

Changing the calculation type for a pivot table data field

Overview of Working with Pivot Table Pages

Displaying pages in a pivot table

Displaying pivot table pages on separate worksheets

Showing combined data for all items in a page field

Overview of Hiding and Showing Detail Data in a Pivot Table

Hiding and showing detail for items in a pivot table

Displaying source data for a cell in the data area of a pivot table

Overview of Grouping Items in a Pivot Table

Grouping selected items in a pivot table field

Grouping items in a page field

Grouping numeric items into ranges in a pivot table

Grouping dates into ranges in a pivot table

Ungrouping items in a pivot table

Ungrouping numeric items in a pivot table

Ungrouping date items in a pivot table

Overview of Sorting Pivot Table Items

Sorting pivot table items by labels

Sorting pivot table items by values in the data area

Using a custom sort order in a pivot table


Overview of Adding and Removing Pivot Table Data

After you create a pivot table, it's easy to include additional information from the source data. Microsoft Excel automatically recalculates the pivot table to reflect the new data you insert. Once your pivot table contains all the data you want it to display, you can temporarily hide selected fields and items. Regardless of the revisions you make to a pivot table, the source data remains stable unless you change it directly.

Adding Pivot Table Data

You can quickly change what portion of the source data appears in a pivot table by adding whole fields. You can add detail to an existing pivot table, or you can display the data in small subsets.

To add detail to existing data in a pivot table, add a row, column, or data field.

To display smaller subsets of data in a pivot table, use a page field.

Removing Pivot Table Data

To exclude data temporarily from a pivot table, you can hide it, and then redisplay it whenever you want.

To remove data from a pivot table, simply drag a field out of the pivot table area.

You can also hide individual items in a pivot table field.

See Also

Help

Adding a field to a pivot table

Hiding or displaying items in a pivot table field

Removing a data field from a pivot table

Removing a row, column, or page field from a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Adding a field to a pivot table

Overview

Use these steps to add fields to an existing pivot table.

1.	Select a cell in the pivot table.

2.	From the Data menu or shortcut menu, choose PivotTable.

Shortcut:	PivotTable button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

Buttons for each field in the source data are displayed along the right side of the PivotTable Wizard Step 3 dialog box.

3.	Drag field buttons to the part of the pivot area that corresponds to the type of field you want to create.

4.	Choose the Finish button.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

How a Pivot Table Works

PivotTable Command (Data Menu)

Updating data in a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Removing a row, column, or page field from a pivot table

Overview

Removing a field also removes all of that field's associated data from the pivot table, but it does not affect the source data.

1.	Select the field you want to remove.

2.	Drag the field out of the pivot table.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the field you want to remove.

2. 	From the Edit menu, choose Delete.

You can restore a field by using the PivotTable Command on the Data menu.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Button

How a Pivot Table Works

PivotTable Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Removing a data field from a pivot table

Overview

You must have at least one data field to display data in a pivot table. If a pivot table has two or more data fields, follow these steps to remove one of them. Removing a data field from a pivot table doesn't alter the source data.

1.	Select a cell in the pivot table.

2.	From the Data menu or the shortcut menu, choose PivotTable.

Shortcut:	PivotTable button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

3.	Drag the data field out of the pivot area.

4. Choose the Finish button.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Button

PivotTable Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Hiding or displaying items in a pivot table field

Overview

Totals and subtotals in the pivot table are adjusted automatically when you hide or display an item. Hiding and displaying pivot table data has no affect on the source data.

To hide an item

1.	Select the field whose items you want to hide.

2.	From the Data menu or the shortcut menu, choose PivotTable Field.

Shortcut:	PivotTable Field button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

3.	In the Hide Items box, select the items you want to hide.

4.	Choose the OK button.

To display a hidden item

1.	Select the field containing the item you want to display.

2.	From the Data menu or the shortcut menu, choose PivotTable Field.

Shortcut:	PivotTable Field button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

3.	In the Hide Items box, clear the items you want to display.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Field Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Hiding and showing detail for items in a pivot table

PivotTable Field Command for Field Labels (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Overview of Changing the Layout of a Pivot Table

Changing the layout

If you want a new perspective on your pivot table data, shift selected row, column, page, or data fields to a new position or orientation. You can change the layout of pivot table data in two ways:

Drag and drop fields directly in the pivot table.

Use the PivotTable Wizard to rearrange the fields.

When you reorganize the data in a pivot table, it is automatically recalculated. Reorganizing the pivot table does not affect the source data.

Rearranging items in a field

You can rearrange the items within a field by dragging or sorting them. Rearranging items can be useful when you want to present the data in a specific order.

See Also

Help

Moving a pivot table field

Moving a pivot table item

Overview of Sorting Pivot Table Items

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Moving a pivot table field

Overview

Use these steps to change the orientation or order of a pivot table field and its associated items.

1.	Select the field you want to move.

Note  If your pivot table has more than one data field, you can move a data field just as you can a row, column, or page field. If your pivot table has only one data field, use the alternate method described below to move it to a new orientation.

2.	Drag the button to a new orientation.

The pointer changes shape to show the change in orientation. When you release the mouse button, the field and all the items associated with it are in the new orientation.

Alternate Method

1.	From the Data menu or the shortcut menu, choose PivotTable.

Shortcut:	PivotTable button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

2.	Drag the button for the field you want to move to the row, column, page, or data area in the pivot area.

3.	Choose the Finish button.

Note  If you move a field with text items into the data area, Microsoft Excel counts the number of source data records or rows for that field and returns the count. If you do not want this, choose the Undo Pivot command from the Edit menu, or move the field back to row, column, or page orientation.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

How a Pivot Table Works

PivotTable Command (Data Menu)

Undo and Redo Commands (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Moving a pivot table item

Overview

You can change the location of an item, and its related data, within a field in a pivot table.

1.	Select the item you want to move.

2.	Point to the cell border.

3.	When the pointer becomes an arrow, drag the border to a new position within the field.

Note  You can also sort items to rearrange the order in which they appear in the field.

See Also

Help

How a Pivot Table Works

Overview of Sorting Pivot Table Items

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Overview of Working with Totals in a Pivot Table

You can add three types of totals to a pivot table:

Grand totals for columns

Grand totals for rows

Item subtotals

Grand totals can be automatically included when a new pivot table is created. Subtotals can be automatically included for the outer rows or columns when you include two or more row or column fields in a pivot table. You can also change how a subtotal is calculated for a field.

See Also

Help

Changing the summary function for a pivot table subtotal

Displaying subtotals for row or column fields in a pivot table

Hiding and displaying grand totals in a pivot table

Removing subtotals for a row or column field

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Changing the summary function for a pivot table subtotal

Overview

Use these steps to summarize pivot table data using a type of calculation other than the summary function that Microsoft Excel automatically chooses, or to add more than one subtotal to the field. Microsoft Excel adds one subtotal line for each subtotal type you select.

1.	Double-click the field whose subtotal you want to modify.

2.	Under Subtotals, select the Custom option button, and then select one or more of the subtotal types.

Note  For a description of the subtotal types, choose the Help button in the dialog box.

3.	Choose the OK button.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the field whose subtotal you want to modify.

2.	From the Data menu or the shortcut menu, choose PivotTable Field.

Shortcut:	PivotTable Field button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

3.	Under Subtotals, select the Custom option button, and then select one or more of the subtotal types.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Field Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

PivotTable Field Command for Data Fields (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Hiding and displaying grand totals in a pivot table

Overview

The default summary function used to calculate the grand totals is the same summary function used to calculate values for the associated data field.

To display grand totals

1.	Select a cell in the pivot table.

2.	From the Data menu or the shortcut menu, choose PivotTable.

Shortcut:	PivotTable button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

3.	Choose the Next button.

4.	Select the Grand Totals For Columns check box, the Grand Totals For Rows check box, or both.

5.	Choose the Finish button.

To hide grand totals

1.	Select a cell in the pivot table.

2.	From the Data menu, choose PivotTable.

Shortcut:	PivotTable button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

3.	Choose the Next button.

4.	Clear the Grand Totals For Columns check box, the Grand Totals For Rows check box, or both.

5.	Choose the Finish button.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

How a Pivot Table Works

Overview of Changing How Pivot Table Data Is Calculated

PivotTable Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Displaying subtotals for row or column fields in a pivot table

Overview

Microsoft Excel automatically displays subtotals for the outer row or column field when you create two or more rows or columns in a new pivot table. Use these steps to display subtotals you have removed or to display additional subtotals.

To display subtotals for outer row or column fields

1.	Double-click the field for which you want to display subtotals.

2.	Under Subtotals, select the Automatic option button. To use a different summary function or to display more than one type of subtotal, select the Custom option button and then select the summary functions you want to use.

Note  For a description of the summary functions, choose the Help button in the dialog box.

3.	Choose the OK button.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the field for which you want to display subtotals.

2.	From the Data menu or the shortcut menu, choose PivotTable Field.

Shortcut:	PivotTable Field button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

3.	Under Subtotals, select the Automatic option button. To use a different summary function or to display more than one type of subtotal, select the Custom option button and then select the summary functions you want to use.

4.	Choose the OK button.

To display subtotals for inner row or column fields

Microsoft Excel does not automatically display subtotals for the innermost row or column field. To add subtotals to the innermost row or column field, insert block totals.

1.	Double-click the innermost row or column field.

2.	Under Subtotals, select the Custom option button and then select the summary functions you want to use.

Note  For a description of the summary functions, choose the Help button in the dialog box.

3.	Choose the OK button.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the innermost row or column field that contains the items for which you want to provide block totals.

2.	From the Data menu or the shortcut menu, choose PivotTable Field.

Shortcut:	PivotTable Field button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

3.	Under Subtotals, select the Custom option button and then select the summary function you want to use.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Field Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

PivotTable Field Command for Field Labels (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Removing subtotals for a row or column field

Overview

1.	Double-click the field containing the subtotals you want to remove.

2.	Under Subtotals, select the None option button to remove all subtotals from the field.

3.	Choose the OK button.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the field containing the subtotals you want to remove.

2.	From the Data menu or the shortcut menu, choose PivotTable Field.

Shortcut:	PivotTable Field button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

3.	Under Subtotals, select the None option button to remove all subtotals from the field.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Field Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

PivotTable Field Command for Field Labels (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Overview of Editing and Formatting a Pivot Table

You can perform the following editing and formatting tasks in a pivot table:

Edit the names of fields and items.

Apply an autoformat style to an entire pivot table.

Select a new number format for numeric data.

Editing fields and items in a pivot table

When you create a pivot table, the names of the fields and items are derived from the source data. You can rename the fields or the items in a field as necessary. Microsoft Excel retains the new names when you refresh the data in the pivot table.

Note  You cannot edit cells in the data area, nor can you edit grand total and subtotal names.

Formatting a pivot table

If you select the AutoFormat Table option in the PivotTable Wizard, your pivot table is formatted for you. You can apply a different format later if you like. The new format you apply will be retained if you reorganize the rows and columns in the pivot table.

Microsoft Excel reformats data in a pivot table whenever you reorganize or refresh the table. For this reason, you should avoid using the Cells command on the Format menu to format individual cells or ranges manually. Instead, select one of the autoformat styles.

Formatting numeric data in a pivot table

When you create a pivot table, the number format is taken from the source data. You can select and apply a different format by using one of the built-in numeric formats in Microsoft Excel, or you can create a custom format for the data in your pivot table. The numeric format you apply is maintained when you move fields or refresh data.

See Also

Help

Changing the name of a pivot table field

Changing the name of a pivot table item

Changing the number format for the data area of a pivot table

Formatting a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Changing the name of a pivot table field

Overview

1.	Select the field you want to rename.

The name in the active cell appears in the formula bar.

2.	Type over the name in the active cell.

The new name is retained when you refresh the data.

Note  You cannot use the name of another field.

3.	Press ENTER.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the field you want to rename.

2.	From the Data menu or the shortcut menu, choose PivotTable Field.

Shortcut:	PivotTable Field button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

3.	Change the text in the Name box.

Note  You cannot use the name of another field.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Field Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Changing the name of a pivot table item

Displaying or hiding toolbars

PivotTable Field Command for Field Labels (Data Menu)

Updating data in a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Changing the name of a pivot table item

Overview

1.	Select the item you want to rename.

The name in the active cell appears in the formula bar.

2.	Type over the name in the active cell.

The new name is retained when you refresh the data.

Note  You cannot use the name of another item in the same field.

3.	Press ENTER.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Field Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Changing the name of a pivot table field

Displaying or hiding toolbars

PivotTable Field Command for Field Labels (Data Menu)

Updating data in a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Formatting a pivot table

Overview

When you select the AutoFormat Table option in the PivotTable Wizard, Microsoft Excel formats your pivot table for you. Use these steps to select a different format after the pivot table is created.

1.	Select a cell in the pivot table.

2.	From the Format menu, choose AutoFormat.

3.	In the Table Format box, select the autoformat style you want to apply.

4.	Choose the OK button.

The autoformat style you apply will be retained when you recalculate or reorganize the pivot table.

See Also

Help

Applying an autoformat to a range

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Worksheets)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Changing the number format for the data area of a pivot table

Overview

When you create a pivot table, Microsoft Excel uses the number format for the normal style to determine how numeric data is displayed in the data area. Use these steps to select one of the built-in number formats instead, or to create your own custom formats.

Note  If your pivot table contains data from more than one data field, you have to format each set of data separately.

1.	Select a cell in the data area of the pivot table.

2.	From the Data menu or the shortcut menu, choose PivotTable Field.

Shortcut:	PivotTable Field button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

3.	Choose the Number button.

4.	In the Category box, choose the category of format you want.

5.	In the Format Codes box, select a specific format.

If there is a number, date, or time in the active cell when you select a format, Microsoft Excel shows you under Sample how the number, date, or time will look with the selected format.

Note  For a description of the format options, choose the Help button in the dialog box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel displays the PivotTable Field dialog box.

7.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel changes the number format for all cells in a data area that belong to the same data field as the selected cell.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Field Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Creating and deleting custom number formats

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Overview of Using Number Formats

PivotTable Field Command for Data Fields (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Overview of Changing How Pivot Table Data Is Calculated

The values in the data area summarize the underlying data. For example, a pivot table could have a column field labeled Year, and display the items 1990, 1991, and 1992 as columns. A row field labeled Region could display the items North, South, East, and West as rows. The value at the intersection of the 1990 column and North row is summarized from the records in the underlying data that contain 1990 and North.

A pivot table uses a summary function to summarize the values in the data area. Microsoft Excel automatically uses Sum to calculate data fields that contain numeric data, and it uses Count to calculate cells that contain text. You can choose a different summary function, such as Average, Max, Min, or StdDev, to further analyze your data.

You can also apply a custom calculation that calculates values based on other items or cells in the data area. For example, you could display values as a percentage of a specific row in the pivot table. For a description of the calculation types, choose the Help button in the PivotTable Field dialog box.

See Also

Help

Changing the calculation type for a pivot table data field

Changing the summary function for a pivot table data field

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Changing the summary function for a pivot table data field

Overview

A pivot table uses a summary function to combine the source data in the data area of the pivot table.

1.	In the data area, select a cell belonging to the data field whose summary function you want to change.

2.	From the Data menu or the shortcut menu, choose PivotTable Field.

Shortcut:	PivotTable Field button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

3.	In the Summarize By box, select the summary function you want to use.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Field Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Changing the summary function for a pivot table subtotal

Displaying or hiding toolbars

PivotTable Field Command for Field Labels (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Changing the calculation type for a pivot table data field

Overview

A pivot table uses a summary function to combine the source data in the data area of the pivot table. Use these steps to create a custom calculation to calculate the value in a data field based on some other data in the pivot table.

1.	Select a cell in the data area for the field you want to create a custom calculation for.

2.	From the Data menu or the shortcut menu, choose PivotTable Field.

Shortcut:	PivotTable Field button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

3.	Choose the Options button.

4.	In the Show Data As box, select the custom calculation you want to use.

5.	If required, in the Base Field box, select the field you want to use.

6.	If required, in the Base Item box, select the item you want to use.

Note  For more information about how the custom calculation options work, choose the Help button in the PivotTable Field dialog box.

7.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  PivotTable Field Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

PivotTable Field Command for Data Fields (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Overview of Working with Pivot Table Pages

Data in a pivot table can be displayed by using one or more page fields. The page field is positioned two rows above the other fields in the leftmost column. If the page field is dragged outside the pivot area, it is removed from the pivot table. If another field is dragged into this area, it becomes a page field.

Each page field shows only one of its items at a time. You can move between the pages of a pivot table by using the page field drop-down arrow. When you select an item in a page field, the data switches in the pivot table. For example, if Year is a page field, then 1991, 1992, and 1993 are page items. If you select 1993, only the data for that year is displayed in the pivot table.

You can place each page on a separate worksheet. This makes it easy to print or chart each segment of data independent of the other segments.

You can also combine all the data from the pages into a single pivot table. This can be useful when you want to create an overview chart or perform summary calculations on the entire range of data in a pivot table.

See Also

Help

Displaying pages in a pivot table

Displaying pivot table pages on separate worksheets

Showing combined data for all items in a page field

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Displaying pages in a pivot table

Overview

A pivot table displays only one item of a page field at a time. Use these steps to change the item or page that is displayed in your pivot table.

1.	Click the arrow next to the displayed page field item.

2.	Choose the item you want to display.

Note  You can also display each page on a separate worksheet in the current workbook by using the Show Pages command.

See Also

Help

  Show Pages Button

Moving between sheets

Show Pages Command (Shortcut Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Displaying pivot table pages on separate worksheets

Overview

A pivot table resides on one worksheet in a workbook. Use these steps to display each page, or item, of a page field of the pivot table on its own worksheet, either for printing or for separate analysis.

1.	Select a cell in the pivot table.

2.	From the shortcut menu, choose Show Pages.

Shortcut:	Show Pages button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

3.	In the dialog box, select the page field that contains the items you want to display on separate worksheets.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel displays each page of the pivot table on a new worksheet in the current workbook.

See Also

Help

  Show Pages Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Moving between sheets

Show Pages Command (Shortcut Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Showing combined data for all items in a page field

Overview

If your pivot table contains a  page field, use these steps to display a summary of all items in the page field, including hidden items.

1.	Click the drop-down arrow next to the displayed field item.

2.	From the list, choose All.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the page field you want to summarize.

2.	Drag the page field out of the pivot table.

The pivot table changes from showing data for one item in the page field to summarizing all items in that field.

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Overview of Hiding and Showing Detail Data in a Pivot Table

Hiding and showing detail items in a pivot table

If your pivot table has more than one row field or column field, you can quickly hide detail items to display summary data using the mouse. When you hide a detail item, the underlying data is combined. You can easily redisplay the hidden detail.

Showing the underlying data for a cell in the data area of a pivot table

The data in a pivot table cell comes from a combination of data in the source list or table. When you double-click a data cell in a pivot table, Microsoft Excel creates a new sheet in the current workbook showing the underlying data items that make up the selected cell.

See Also

Help

Displaying source data for a cell in the data area of a pivot table

Hiding and showing detail for items in a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Hiding and showing detail for items in a pivot table

Overview

To hide detail rows and columns

Double-click the item whose detail you want to hide.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the item whose detail you want to hide.

2. 	Click the Hide Detail button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

To hide all detail items in a field

1.	Select the field whose detail you want to hide.

2.	From the data menu or the shortcut menu, choose Group And Outline, then choose Hide Detail.

Shortcut:	Hide Detail button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

To show detail rows and columns

Double-click the item whose detail you want to show.

Tip  If the pointer is on an item that has no detail data when you double-click, Microsoft Excel enables you to add a row or column field that's not currently displayed. Choose the field you want to add from the displayed list.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the item whose detail you want to show.

2. 	Click the Show Detail button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

To show all detail items in a field

1.	Select the field whose detail you want to show

2.	From the Data menu or the shortcut menu, choose Group And Outline, then choose Show Detail.

Shortcut:	Show Detail button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

See Also

Help

  Hide Detail Button

  Show Detail Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Hide Detail Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Hiding or displaying items in a pivot table field

Show Detail Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Displaying source data for a cell in the data area of a pivot table

Overview

In the Data area, double-click a cell for which you want to display the source data.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the cell for which you want to display source data.

2.	From the Data menu or the shortcut menu, choose Group And Outline, then choose Show Detail.

Shortcut: Show Detail button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

Microsoft Excel creates a new worksheet containing a copy of the source rows or records used to calculate the cell's value.

Note  The displayed list is only a copy of the source records or rows. No changes you make to this list are reflected in the pivot table or the source list or table.

See Also

Help

Moving between sheets

Show Detail Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Overview of Grouping Items in a Pivot Table

You can group items in a pivot table to create a single item. This can be useful, for example, when you want to group months into quarters for charting or printing.

There are three other ways to group data in a pivot table:

Group two or more selected items in a field. Microsoft Excel creates a second grouped field to replace the grouped items.

Automatically group numbers into ranges. For example, a list of elements from 1 to 100 can be grouped into ranges of 10; that is, 1-10, 11-20, and so on.

Automatically group dates and times into ranges. For example, a list of months can be grouped into a range of quarters or other periods. You can also create your own ranges.

You can easily ungroup grouped items to separate them into their original components.

Tip  If you hold down the SHIFT key while clicking the Group button, it functions like the Ungroup button, and vice versa.

See Also

Help

Grouping dates into ranges in a pivot table

Grouping items in a page field

Grouping numeric items into ranges in a pivot table

Grouping selected items in a pivot table field

Ungrouping date items in a pivot table

Ungrouping items in a pivot table

Ungrouping numeric items in a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Grouping selected items in a pivot table field

Overview

Note  If the items you want to group are numeric, date, or time items, you can group them automatically. For more information, see Grouping numeric items into ranges in a pivot table and Grouping dates into ranges in a pivot table.

1.	Select the items you want to combine.

The items you select do not have to be adjacent.

2.	Click the Group button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

Microsoft Excel creates a new item that combines the selected items.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the items you want to combine.

2. 	From the Data menu or the shortcut menu, choose Group And Outline, and then choose Group.

Shortcut:	ALT+SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW

Tip  When you finish grouping items, you can name the group field and its items. You can also double-click each group to hide detail, thus displaying summary data for the group. See Changing the name of a pivot table field for more information.

See Also

Help

  Group Button

  Ungroup Button

Group Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Ungroup Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Grouping items in a page field

Overview

You cannot group items in page fields, but if you temporarily move a page field to row or column orientation, you can group the items, then move the field back to page orientation again when you want to.

1.	Select and drag the page field to row or column orientation.

2.	Select the text items you want to combine.

3.	Click the Group button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

4.	Select and drag the grouped field back to page orientation.

See Also

Help

  Group Button

  Ungroup Button

Group Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Moving a pivot table field

Ungroup Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Grouping numeric items into ranges in a pivot table

Overview

You can assign a range of numeric items to evenly incremented groups, for example, by tens or hundreds.

1.	Select a single numeric item in the field you want to group.

2.	Click the Group button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

3.	In the Starting At box, type the first item you want to group.

4.	In the Ending At box, type the last item you want to group.

5.	In the By box, type the size you want each group to be.

6.	Choose the OK button.

Tip  If a field contains integers from 1 to 100 and you want to group them into ten groups of 10, type 1 in the Starting At box, type 100 in the Ending At box, and then type 10 in the By box.

See Also

Help

  Group Button

  Ungroup Button

Group Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Ungroup Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Grouping dates into ranges in a pivot table

Overview

You can group date and time items into specified periods. The items you select must be in a valid Microsoft Excel date or time format.

1.	Select a single date or time item in the field you want to group.

2.	Click the Group button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

3.	The Starting At box displays the first item you want to group; the Ending At box displays the last item to group. Fill in these boxes as necessary.

4.	In the By box, select one or more time periods for the items in the group.

5.	If you selected Days in the By box, type the size of the group in days in the Number Of Days box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Group Button

  Ungroup Button

Group Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Ungroup Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Ungrouping items in a pivot table

Overview

You can ungroup grouped items.

To ungroup a single group

1.	Select the grouped item.

2.	Click the Ungroup button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

Note  You cannot ungroup a single group of numbers, dates, or times that you grouped automatically. For information about ungrouping these items, see Ungrouping numeric items in a pivot table and Ungrouping date items in a pivot table.

To ungroup all grouped items in a row or column field

1.	Select all the items in the group.

2.	Click the Ungroup button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

Note  When you ungroup the last item in a row or column field, the group field is removed and is no longer available in the pivot table.

See Also

Help

  Group Button

  Ungroup Button

Group Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Ungroup Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Ungrouping numeric items in a pivot table

Overview

Use this procedure to ungroup numeric items that you grouped automatically.

1.	Select a grouped item in the row or column you want to ungroup.

2.	Click the Ungroup button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

Note  You cannot ungroup a single grouped item in a numeric field; the entire group for the numeric field is always ungrouped.

Alternate Method

1.	Select a grouped item in the row or column you want to ungroup.

2. 	From the Data menu or the shortcut menu, choose Group And Outline, and then choose Ungroup.

Shortcut:	ALT+SHIFT+LEFT ARROW

See Also

Help

  Group Button

  Ungroup Button

Group Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Ungroup Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Ungrouping date items in a pivot table

Overview

Use this procedure to ungroup date and time items that you grouped automatically.

1.	Select a grouped date item in the field you want to ungroup.

2.	Click the Ungroup button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the grouped date item in the row or column you want to ungroup.

2. 	From the Data menu or the shortcut menu, choose Group And Outline, and then choose Ungroup.

Shortcut:	ALT+SHIFT+LEFT ARROW

See Also

Help

  Group Button

  Ungroup Button

Group Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Ungroup Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Overview of Sorting Pivot Table Items

You can sort a pivot table to see the rank of items in a row or column field based on data in the pivot table. You can also sort items by labels, or you can choose a custom sort order.

Note  You cannot sort items in page fields.

When you sort, you must choose:

What you want to sort.

The sort key.

A sort order.

You can change the sort key and the sort order as needed by using the Sort command on the Data menu.

Microsoft Excel determines what to sort based on the active cell. For example:

If you select a row field, Microsoft Excel sorts all items in the field in ascending order from top to bottom.

If you select a column field, Microsoft Excel sorts all items in the field in ascending order from left to right.

You can also rearrange items by dragging. For more information about dragging and dropping pivot table fields, see Changing the Layout of a Pivot Table.

See Also

Help

Sorting and Filtering Data in a List

Sorting pivot table items by labels

Sorting pivot table items by values in the data area

Using a custom sort order in a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Sorting pivot table items by labels

Overview

Field items in a pivot table are automatically sorted in ascending order, according to their labels. If you subsequently move or sort the items, you can reset them in their original order by sorting them by their labels.

1. Select the field you want to sort.

2.	Click the Sort Ascending button or the Sort Descending button on the Standard toolbar.

Microsoft Excel uses the following order for ascending sorts:

Numbers

Text

Logical values

Error values

Blank cells

Descending sorts reverse the above order, except for blank cells, which are always sorted last.

See Also

Help

  Sort Ascending Button

  Sort Descending Button

Sort Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu)

Using a custom sort order in a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Sorting pivot table items by values in the data area

Overview

Use these steps to sort items in a field by values in the data area.

1.	Select the field containing the items you want to sort.

If you select a column field, items will be sorted from left to right.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Sort.

3.	In the Sort By box, select a cell in the data area for the values you want to sort by. Make sure the Values button is selected.

Note  The text at the bottom of the dialog box describes how Microsoft Excel will sort the data.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Sort Ascending Button

  Sort Descending Button

Sort Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Using a custom sort order in a pivot table

Overview

When you use the sort buttons on the Standard toolbar, Microsoft Excel sorts items alphanumerically in ascending or descending order, depending on your selection. You can apply a special sort order, such as Jan, Feb, Mar or High, Med, Low, by specifying a custom sort order.

1.	Select the field containing the items you want to sort.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Sort.

3.	Choose the Options button.

4.	In the First Key Sort Order box, select a sort order.

Note  Microsoft Excel supplies several custom sort orders. You can create your own custom sort order, such as Low, Medium, High, by using the Custom Lists tab in the Options dialog box. To open the Options dialog box, choose Options from the Tools menu.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Sort Ascending Button

  Sort Descending Button

Creating a custom sort order

Sort Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Sort Warning

The cells you selected to sort occupy a single row or column in a larger data range. Because Microsoft Excel most commonly sorts all rows or columns in a data range, you must confirm that you want to sort only the selected cells.

Expand The Selection

If you want to sort all rows or columns in the data range, select the Expand The Selection option button, and then choose the Sort button. Microsoft Excel displays the Sort dialog box and extends the selection to include the entire data range, with the exception of any column labels you may have in the first row.

Continue With The Current Selection

If you want to sort only the selected cells, select the Continue With The Current Selection option button and then choose the Sort button. Microsoft Excel displays the Sort dialog box. Any sort options you select then apply only to the selected cells.

Sort

Displays the Sort dialog box.

Cancel

If you want to sort a different range of cells, choose the Cancel button. Then select the cells you want to sort and choose the Sort command from the Data menu again

See Also

Help

Sorting a list from top to bottom

Sorting a list from left to right


Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Use the Sort command to arrange rows in a list according to the contents of particular columns. Microsoft Excel uses the following order for ascending sorts:

Numbers

Text, and text that includes numbers (postal codes, part numbers, and so on)

Logical values

Error values

Blanks

A descending sort reverses the above order, except for blank cells, which are always sorted last.

If the sort result is not what you expected, look at the type of data you are sorting. For best results, make sure all of the cells in a column contain the same type of data. Enter the data as numbers or as text, but avoid having a number in one cell and text in the following cell. Make sure all numbers are entered either as numeric or as text. To enter a number as text, such as a postal code or part number, precede the number with an apostrophe ('98052) or format the column as text before you enter any numbers.

Sort By

Enables you to choose the column you want to sort by and to select either ascending or descending sort order.

Select the Ascending option button to put the lowest number, beginning of the alphabet, or earliest date first in the list of sorted items.

Select the Descending option button to put the highest number, end of the alphabet, or latest date first in the list of sorted items.

Then By

Two additional boxes enable you to specify the order in which to sort rows if there are duplicate items in the previous column you specified. Select the Ascending or Descending option button for each box to determine the arrangement of the data.

My List Has

Determines whether the first row of your list is excluded or included when the data is sorted. If your list has column labels, the Header Row option is selected for you, and the first row is excluded. Select the No Header Row option button to include the first row in the sort.

Options

Displays the Sort Options dialog box, from which you can:

Specify a custom sort order for the column specified in the Sort By box.

Specify a case-sensitive sort.

Change the sort orientation from top to bottom to left to right.

See Also

Help

  Sort Ascending Button

  Sort Descending Button

Default Sort Orders

Overview of Entering Numbers, Dates, and Times

Overview of Entering Text

Sort Options Dialog Box

Sorting a list from left to right

Sorting a list from top to bottom

Sorting by four or more columns

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Sort Options Dialog Box

Enables you to specify a custom sort order and change the sort orientation.

First Key Sort Order

If you are sorting a list, specifies a custom sort order for the column you specify in the Sort By box in the Sort dialog box.

If you are sorting items in a pivot table, specifies a custom sort order for the items in the selected field.

You can use a custom sort order provided by Microsoft Excel, or define a unique order for your own use using the Custom Lists Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu).

Case Sensitive

Microsoft Excel ignores capitalization when sorting duplicate items, unless you select this check box. If you select this check box, duplicate items are arranged according to case; for example, AARDVARK, Aardvark, aardvark. This option is not available when you sort pivot table items.

Orientation

To sort rows or data by a single column, select the Sort Top To Bottom option button.

To sort columns or data by a single row, select the Sort Left To Right option button.

This option is selected for you if you are sorting pivot table items.

See Also

Help

  Sort Ascending Button

  Sort Descending Button

Creating a custom sort order

Custom Lists Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Default Sort Orders

Sort Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu)

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Using a custom sort order

Using a custom sort order in a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Filter Command (Data Menu)

Advanced Filter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

AutoFilter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Custom AutoFilter Dialog Box

Show All Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)


AutoFilter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Enables you to display only those rows in a list that contain a certain value, or that meet a set of criteria.

The AutoFilter command applies drop-down arrows directly to column labels in the list, so you can select the item you want to display.  When you select an item from the drop-down list, Microsoft Excel temporarily hides the rows that do not contain that item.

You can show all the data in your list by using the Show All command, or remove the AutoFilter drop-down arrows by clearing the AutoFilter command.

See Also

Help

  AutoFilter Button

Filtering a list using AutoFilter

Removing a filter from a list

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Show All Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Displays all the rows in a filtered list.

If you filtered the list using the AutoFilter command, the AutoFilter drop-down arrows remain next to each column label so you can filter the list again.

See Also

Help

AutoFilter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Filtering a list using AutoFilter

Filtering a list using complex criteria

Removing a filter from a list

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Advanced Filter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Enables you to filter data by using a criteria range to display only the rows that meet all the criteria you specify. If you filter the list again, Microsoft Excel evaluates all rows, displayed and hidden.

Action

Filter The List, In-Place hides the rows that do not meet the criteria.

Copy To Another Location copies the filtered data to another worksheet or another location on the same worksheet.

List Range

Specifies the range containing the list you want to filter.

Criteria Range

Specifies the range of cells on your worksheet that contains your criteria. Microsoft Excel displays a reference to that range.

Copy To

Specifies a range of cells to which to copy the rows that meet the criteria you specify. This box is active only when you select the Copy To Another Location option button.

Unique Records Only

Displays unique rows that meet the criteria, and excludes rows that contain duplicate items. If you do not specify a criteria range, this option hides all duplicate rows in the list.

See Also

Help

Copying filtered data that meets complex criteria

Filtering a list using complex criteria

Setting up a criteria range

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Custom AutoFilter Dialog Box

Enables you to specify up to two comparison criteria for the same column to filter data. Microsoft Excel compares the items in your list to the values you enter and displays those rows that meet the criteria. You can also use the conditional And/Or options to combine or compare criteria for the same column.

Show Rows Where

Displays the column label of the active cell and contains two sets of two drop-down boxes.

Click the arrow next to the leftmost drop-down box, and then select a comparison operator.

In the rightmost drop-down box, type the value you want to use with the comparison operator, or click the arrow next to the drop-down box and select an item. You can use a wildcard character to find text values that share some characters but not others.

To specify two criteria, select one of the following options:

Select the And option button to combine two criteria in your filter.

Select the Or option button to use two different criteria in your filter.

Use the second set of drop-down boxes to specify a second comparison operator and the value you want to use with the operator.

See Also

Help

AutoFilter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Creating a custom AutoFilter

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Form Command (Data Menu)

Displays a data form, which is a dialog box that you can use to see, change, add, and delete records from a list or database, or to find specific records based on criteria you specify.

Field Names

The column labels of your list become the field names in the data form. Microsoft Excel automatically assigns shortcut keys to each field name. Press ALT and the underlined letter in a field label to move to that field.

Fields

Corresponds to each column in your list. Any fields you can edit appear in an edit box. Other data form fields are computed or locked fields, and can't be edited.

Scroll bar

Enables you to scroll through the records in your list and shows the approximate position of the displayed record in the list. Move forward and back through the list by using the scroll box and the up and down scroll arrows on the scroll bar.

To move to	Do this

Same field in next record	Click down scroll arrow in scroll bar
Same field in previous record	Click up scroll arrow in scroll bar
Same field 10 records forward	Click below the scroll box in scroll bar
Same field 10 records back	Click above the scroll box in scroll bar
Last record	Drag scroll box to bottom of scroll bar
First record	Drag scroll box to top of scroll bar
Record Number Indicator

Tells which record is displayed and how many records are in the list. The record number changes to New Record when you scroll past the end of the list.

New

Clears the fields in the Data Form dialog box so that you can enter data for a new record. When you choose the New button again, the data you type is added as a new record at the end of the list.

Delete

Deletes the displayed record; the other records shift up in the list. Deleted records can't be restored.

Restore

Restores edited fields in the displayed record, removing your changes. You must restore before pressing ENTER or scrolling to another record.

Find Prev

Displays the previous record in the list. If you specified criteria using the Criteria button, the Find Prev button displays the previous record that matches the criteria.

Find Next

Displays the next record in the list. If you specified criteria using the Criteria button, the Find Next button displays the next record that matches the criteria.

Criteria

Displays a dialog box in which you can enter comparison criteria with comparison operators to find a subset of records.

Close

Closes the data form.

Clear

Removes existing criteria from the dialog box. Available only after you choose the Criteria button.

Form

Returns to the default data form. Available only after you choose the Criteria button.

Moving around on the data form

Press the TAB key to move ahead one field at a time, and then through the command buttons. Press SHIFT+TAB to move back one field or button at a time.

See Also

Help

Adding a record by using a data form

Browsing through a list by using a data form

Deleting a record by using a data form

Editing a record by using a data form

Using a data form to find records that meet search criteria

Using a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 custom data form

User's Guide

Chapter 20, "Using a List to Organize Data"


Subtotals Command (Data Menu)

Calculates a subtotal for the columns you select and inserts subtotal rows in the current list. Microsoft Excel inserts a subtotal row at each change in the column you select and a Grand Total row at the bottom of the list.

Important  Sort your list using the Sort command before you use subtotals. Your list must have column labels in the first row.

At Each Change In

Specifies the column that contains the groups you want subtotals for. Click the drop-down arrow to select another column. Make sure the column you select is the column you used to sort the list.

Use Function

Calculates the subtotal using the function you select. By default, Microsoft Excel uses the Sum function for numeric values, or the Count function for text values. The computed subtotal will appear under the column you select in the Add Subtotal To box.

This function	Returns this value in the subtotal row

Sum	The sum of the items

Count	The number of nonblank values

Average	The average of the items in the subtotal group

Max	The largest numeric value in the subtotal group

Min	The smallest numeric value in the subtotal group

Product	The product of all the values in the subtotal group

Count Nums	The number of records or rows that contain numeric data in the subtotal group

StdDev	An estimate of the standard deviation for a population based on a sample, where the subtotal group is the sample

StdDevp	The standard deviation for a population, where the subtotal group is the entire population

Var	An estimate of the variance for a population based on a sample, where the subtotal group is the sample

Varp	The variance for a population where the subtotal group is the entire population

Add Subtotal To

Specifies the column in which you want the subtotal to appear. You can select more than one column.

Replace Current Subtotals

Replaces all subtotals in the list with the new subtotals you select. Clear this option to keep the current subtotals and insert new subtotals.

Page Break Between Groups

Automatically inserts a page break preceding each group of data that you subtotal.

Summary Below Data

Places the summary rows and Grand Total row below the associated data. Clear this option to insert the subtotal rows and Grand Total row above their detail data.

Remove All

Removes all the subtotals from the current list.

See Also

Help

Displaying automatic subtotals in a list

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Sorting a list from top to bottom

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"

Chapter 22, "Summarizing Data in a List"


Table Command (Data Menu)

Creates a data table based on input values and formulas you define on a worksheet.

Use this command to show the results of substituting different values in one or more formulas.

For a one-input data table, enter the reference of either the row input cell or the column input cell; for a two-input data table, enter both.

You cannot create a data table in a module or on a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 macro sheet.

Row Input Cell

Specifies the input cell reference if the input values are in a row.

Column Input Cell

Specifies the input cell reference if the input values are in a column.

See Also

Help

Filling in a one-input data table

Filling in a two-input data table

User's Guide

Chapter 27, "Solving What-If Problems"


Text To Columns Command (Data Menu)

Starts the TextWizard so you can distribute text from one column into a number of columns. The TextWizard guides you through a series of dialog boxes and then distributes the selected data into columns. The range you convert can be any number of rows high, but only one column wide.

The converted data begins in the column you are converting and then fills cells to the right, unless you enter a reference to a different location in the Destination box. If there is already data in the destination range, a message appears asking if you want the converted data to overwrite the existing data. Make sure you have enough blank cells to the right of the column you are converting to accommodate the data.

See Also

Help

Converting text to columns

Opening a document created by another application

TextWizard

User's Guide

Chapter 42, "Importing and Exporting Documents"


Consolidate Command (Data Menu)

Summarizes the data from one or more source areas and displays it in a table in a destination area.

To consolidate data, you first define a destination area where the summarized information can appear. The destination can be on the same worksheet as the source data, or it can be on another worksheet or in another workbook.

Second, you select the sources of the data you want to consolidate. The sources can be on one worksheet, on several worksheets, or in multiple workbooks.

When multiple source areas contain similar data but are arranged differently, this command can consolidate data by category, using labels.

If you consolidate by category using labels, you must include in your source area selections the labels you want to appear in the destination area.

When multiple source areas include similar categories of data arranged identically, this command can consolidate data by position, using file and cell references to guide the layout of the consolidation table.

If you consolidate by position using cell references, do not include category labels in the source areas you select.

This command can consolidate data with links to external source worksheets.

Function

Specifies the function for Microsoft Excel to use when it consolidates data.

Reference

Specifies a source area to add to the consolidation. A reference can take any of the following forms:

Use this form	When

Cell references	Sources and destination are on the same worksheet.
Sheet and cell references	Sources and destination are on different worksheets.
Book, sheet, and cell references	Sources and destination are in different workbooks.
Full path, book, sheet, and cell references	Sources and destination are in different workbooks in different locations on disk.
Name of a named area	Source area is a named area.
You can specify up to 255 source areas to consolidate. The worksheets containing the source areas do not have to be open during consolidation. Although you can use unsaved worksheets as sources of data, it is recommended that you save source worksheets before consolidation.

All References

Lists all the source area references you have chosen for the consolidation.

Use Labels In

Specifies whether to use labels from the top row of the source areas, from the left column, both, or neither. These check boxes are meaningful only when you consolidate data by category. Multiple source areas must be laid out and labeled identically for this option to work accurately.

When you consolidate data by category, be sure to include the category labels in the source areas you select for your consolidation. Microsoft Excel transfers these labels to the destination area for you.

Create Links To Source Data

Creates links from the destination area to the source areas when you consolidate data so that the destination area will be automatically updated whenever the source data changes.

Microsoft Excel creates a linking formula for every cell and inserts rows or columns into the destination area to hold the linking formulas for each piece of source data. The destination area is then grouped with linking formulas placed in hidden rows or columns subordinate to positions or categories in the destination area.

Browse

Opens a dialog box in which you can select a file containing source areas to add to the All References list. The name of the file you select is pasted into the Reference box. You add the cell or range reference.

Add

Adds the source area reference specified in the Reference box to the consolidation. The new source area appears in the All References box. Use the Add button when you want to specify more than one source area.

Delete

Deletes the source area reference shown in the Reference box.

See Also

Help

Adding a source area to an existing consolidation

Changing the reference to a source area

Consolidating data by category

Consolidating data by position

Creating links to source data

Deleting a reference to a source area

Overview of Consolidating Data

User's Guide

Chapter 26, "Consolidating Data"


Group And Outline Command (Data Menu)

Commands for Worksheets

Auto Outline Command (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Clear Outline Command (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Group Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Hide Detail Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Settings Command (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Show Detail Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Ungroup Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Commands for Pivot Tables

Group Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Hide Detail Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Show Detail Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Ungroup Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)


Group Command (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Group Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Group Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)


Ungroup Command (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Ungroup Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Ungroup Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)


Refresh Data Command (Data Menu)

Refresh Data Command for Microsoft Query (Data Menu)

Refresh Data Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu)


Hide Detail Command (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Hide Detail Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Hide Detail Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)


Show Detail Command (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Show Detail Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Show Detail Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)


Group Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Group button

Defines the selected detail rows or columns as a group. This command creates an outline from the selected data, if you have not already created one. The Group button is in the Data category.

Shortcut:	ALT+SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying a different outline level

Grouping or ungrouping rows or columns

Ungroup Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Ungroup Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Ungroup button

Removes selected rows or columns from their group. The Ungroup button is in the Data category.

Shortcut:	ALT+SHIFT+LEFT ARROW

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying a different outline level

Group Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Grouping or ungrouping rows or columns

Showing or hiding detail data

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Hide Detail Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Hide Detail button

Hides the detail rows or columns within a selected group. The Hide Detail button is in the Data category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding the outline symbols

Show Detail Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Showing or hiding detail data

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Show Detail Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Show Detail button

Shows the detail rows or columns within a selected group. The Show Detail button is in the Data category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding the outline symbols

Hide Detail Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Showing or hiding detail data

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Clear Outline Command (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Removes the outline from the selected range, or from the worksheet if all cells are selected. When the outline is removed, the outline symbols disappear.

See Also

Help

Displaying or hiding the outline symbols

Hiding and unhiding a row or column

Removing an outline

Selecting a section of an outline

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Auto Outline Command (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Automatically outlines the selected range or the entire worksheet, based on formulas and the direction of references. References in your formulas must all point in the same direction. For example, summary formulas that are always located below or to the right of detail data refer to cells above or to the left.

See Also

Help

Creating an outline automatically

Removing an outline

Settings Command (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Settings Command (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Sets the options used when creating an outline on a worksheet or in a range. You can create one outline per worksheet and assign up to eight levels per outline.

Summary Rows Below Detail

Specifies the location of summary rows in the outline.

Summary Columns To Right Of Detail

Specifies the location of summary columns in the outline.

Automatic Styles

Applies built-in cell styles for the summary rows and columns of an outline. Styles are applied to entire rows and columns.

Create

Automatically assigns outline levels based on the formulas on your worksheet. If the Automatic Styles check box is selected, Microsoft Excel applies the built-in cell styles.

Apply Styles

Applies row and column level styles to the selected portion of the outline.

See Also

Help

Applying styles to an outline

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Get External Data Command (Data Menu)

Get External Data button

Retrieves data from external database files and tables using Microsoft Query.

If the active cell is outside a result set, runs or displays Microsoft Query so that you can construct a query or open a saved query. When you return the data to Microsoft Excel, the Get External Data dialog box is displayed.

If the active cell is in a result set, displays the Get External Data dialog box before displaying Microsoft Query.

The Get External Data command appears on the Data menu and the Get External Data button appears on the Query And Pivot toolbar when you install the Microsoft Query Add-in using the Add-ins command on the Tools menu.

Keep Query Definition

Enables you to specify whether you want to save the query definition with the result set on your worksheet. If you want to update the result set later, select this check box. If you do not want to save the query and do not need to update the result set later, clear this check box.

Include Field Names

Enables you to specify whether you want to include field names with your result set. Field names appear as column headings in the first row of the result set on your Microsoft Excel worksheet.

Include Row Numbers

Enables you to specify whether you want to include row numbers with your result set. Row numbers appear as the first column in the result set. If you want the first column of your result set to contain numbers that arrange the result set records in the order in which they appeared in Microsoft Query, select this check box.

Keep Password

Saves the password for the external data source and does not require the user to reenter the password when updating the result set. Clear this check box if you want the user to reenter the password each time they connect to the external data source.

Destination

Specifies the upper-left corner of the range where you want your result set to appear. You can type or select a cell reference or name. This option appears only if you are creating a new query.

Refresh

Immediately updates the result set with any new data from the source file or table without displaying Microsoft Query. You must have saved the query definition with your result set to use this option. This option appears only if you choose the Get External Data command while the active cell is in an existing result set. Same as the Refresh Data button and the Refresh Data command on the Data menu.

Edit Query

Displays Microsoft Query so you can modify the query definition for the current result set. You must have saved the query definition with your result set to use this option. This option only appears if you choose the Get External Data command while the active cell is in an existing result set.

See also

Help

  Refresh Data Button

Editing an existing result set in a workbook

Installing or removing an add-in

Removing a query definition from a worksheet

Retrieving data from lists and external databases

Updating query results


PivotTable Command (Data Menu)

PivotTable button

Starts the PivotTable Wizard, which guides you through all the steps needed to create or modify a pivot table.

The PivotTable button is on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

Creating a new pivot table

The PivotTable Wizard proceeds through a series of dialog boxes that enable you to specify the source data and design a pivot table.

Modifying an existing pivot table

When the active cell is in a pivot table, the PivotTable Wizard enables you to change the pivot table by dragging and dropping selected fields, displaying or hiding totals, and modifying the overall table layout.

See Also

Help

Creating a Pivot Table

Customizing a Pivot Table

How a Pivot Table Works

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Refresh Data Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu)

Refresh Data button

Updates the data in a pivot table after the source data is changed. Microsoft Excel extracts the range of source data you originally specified and then replaces the pivot table data.

The Refresh Data button is on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

See Also

Help

How a Pivot Table Works

Updating data in a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25 "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Sort Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu)

When you add a field to a pivot table, the field's items are automatically sorted in ascending order, according to their labels. If you subsequently move or sort the items, you can reset them in their original order by sorting them by their labels. You can also sort items in a row field by an item in a column field, or vice versa. Corresponding data is always moved with an item when the item is sorted.

Microsoft Excel uses the following order for ascending sorts:

Numbers

Text

Logical values

Error values

Blanks

A descending sort reverses the above order, except for blank cells, which are always sorted last.

Items in columns are sorted from left to right. Items in rows are sorted from top to bottom.

Sort By

Displays the active cell reference and enables you to select either ascending or descending sort order.

Select the Ascending option button to put the lowest number, beginning of the alphabet, or earliest date first in the list of sorted items.

Select the Descending option button to put the highest number, end of the alphabet, or latest date first in the list of sorted items.

Note  A status line near the bottom of the dialog box summarizes how Microsoft Excel will sort the pivot table data.

Sort

Specifies the type of sort. When the active cell is a label for a row or column field, the Label option is automatically selected. When the active cell is an item in a row or column, the Values option is automatically selected.

Options

Displays the Sort Options Dialog Box, which you can use to specify a custom sort order.

See Also

Help

Creating a custom sort order

Default Sort Orders

Overview of Sorting Pivot Table Items

Sorting pivot table items by labels

Sorting pivot table items by values in the data area

Using a custom sort order in a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Group Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Group button

Groups items in a pivot table by category to create a single item from multiple items. This can be useful when, for example, you want to group months into quarters for analysis, charting, or printing.

The Group button is on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

Shortcut:	ALT+SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW

You can group data in a pivot table in the following ways:

Combine more than one item in a field. Microsoft Excel creates a second grouped field that contains only the grouped items.

Create a range of numeric data. For example, a list of elements from 1 to 100 can be grouped into ranges of 10; that is, 1-10, 11-20, and so on.

Create a range of dates. For example, a list of weeks can be grouped into a range of months or other periods. You can also create your own ranges.

You can easily ungroup grouped items by using the Ungroup command.

Tip  If you hold down the SHIFT key while clicking the Group button, it works like the Ungroup button, and vice versa.

See Also

Help

Grouping dates into ranges in a pivot table

Grouping items in a page field

Grouping numeric items into ranges in a pivot table

Grouping selected items in a pivot table field

How a Pivot Table Works

Overview of Grouping Items in a Pivot Table

User's Guide

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Ungroup Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Ungroup button

Separates a combined group of items. Each instance of the group is replaced by all the items it contained.

The Ungroup button is on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

Shortcut:	ALT+SHIFT+LEFT ARROW

See Also

Help

How a Pivot Table Works

Overview of Grouping Items in a Pivot Table

Ungrouping date items in a pivot table

Ungrouping items in a pivot table

Ungrouping numeric items in a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Hide Detail Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Hide Detail button

Hides detail data by collapsing an outer item in a row field or column field on a pivot table. This can be useful when you want to isolate segments of your data for more analysis, or for printing or charting.

The Hide Detail button is on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

This command is equivalent to double-clicking an item whose detail items you want to hide.

See Also

Help

Hiding and showing detail for items in a pivot table

How a Pivot Table Works

Overview of Hiding and Showing Detail Data in a Pivot Table

User's Guide

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Show Detail Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Show Detail button

Displays detail data that was hidden using the Hide Detail command by expanding a row field or column field in a pivot table. This command is equivalent to double-clicking an item whose detail is hidden.

The Show Detail button is on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

If the pointer is on an item in a row or column that contains no hidden data, Microsoft Excel displays the Show Detail dialog box. Select the field you want to add from the displayed list.

If you select a cell in the data area and then click the Show Detail button or choose the Show Detail command, Microsoft Excel displays on a separate worksheet a copy of the records or rows used to calculate data for the active cell.

See Also

Help

Displaying source data for a cell in the data area of a pivot table

Hiding and showing detail for items in a pivot table

How a Pivot Table Works

Overview of Hiding and Showing Detail Data in a Pivot Table

User's Guide

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Add Data Field Command (Shortcut Menu)

Adds another data field to an existing pivot table. Microsoft Excel displays a menu listing the fields from the source data. Select the field you want to add as a data field in your pivot table.

See Also

Help

How a Pivot Table Works

Overview of Adding and Removing Pivot Table Data

Overview of Working with Totals in a Pivot Table

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Add Row Field Command (Shortcut Menu)

Adds another row field to an existing pivot table. Microsoft Excel displays a menu listing the source data fields that are not already a row, column, or page field in the existing pivot table. Select the field you want to add as a row field in your pivot table.

See Also

Help

How a Pivot Table Works

Overview of Adding and Removing Pivot Table Data

Overview of Working with Totals in a Pivot Table

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Add Column Field Command (Shortcut Menu)

Adds another column field to an existing pivot table. Microsoft Excel displays a menu listing the source data fields that are not already a row, column, or page field in the existing pivot table. Select the field you want to add as a column field in your pivot table.

See Also

Help

How a Pivot Table Works

Overview of Adding and Removing Pivot Table Data

Overview of Working with Totals in a Pivot Table

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Add Page Field Command (Shortcut Menu)

Adds another page field to an existing pivot table. Microsoft Excel displays a menu listing the source data fields that are not already a row, column, or page field in the existing pivot table. Select the field you want to add as a page field in your pivot table.

See Also

Help

How a Pivot Table Works

Overview of Adding and Removing Pivot Table Data

Overview of Working with Totals in a Pivot Table

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Show Pages Command (Shortcut Menu)

Show Pages button

Copies each page of a page field to a new worksheet in the current workbook. You can then switch to a different worksheet to print or further analyze the data.

The Show Pages button is on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

See Also

Help

Displaying pages in a pivot table

Displaying pivot table pages on separate worksheets

How a Pivot Table Works

Overview of Working with Pivot Table Pages

Show Pages Dialog Box

Showing combined data for all items in a page field

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


PivotTable Field Command (Data Menu)

PivotTable Field Command for Data Fields (Data Menu)

PivotTable Field Command for Field Labels (Data Menu)


PivotTable Field Command for Field Labels (Data Menu)

PivotTable Field button

Inserts a subtotal for a row field or column field in an existing pivot table. You can also hide items so they don't appear in the pivot table, rename the field, or change the orientation of the field (from a row to a column, for example).

The PivotTable Field button is on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

Name

Displays the name of the pivot table field. To rename the field, type over the name shown.

Orientation

Moves the selected field to another location in the pivot table. Switching the orientation of a field reorganizes the data in a pivot table. Select the Row, Column, or Page option to move the field.

Subtotals

Specifies whether the selected field includes lines for subtotals and how subtotals are calculated. Subtotals are displayed as separate lines in a pivot table.

Automatic

Inserts a subtotal line under each item if the selected field is an outer row or column field. Microsoft Excel automatically calculates the subtotal by using the same function you chose for the data field.

If the selected field is the innermost row or column field, no subtotal row is added. Use the Custom option button to add subtotals to the innermost row or column field.

Custom

To subtotal data another way, or if you want two types of subtotals (such as Sum and Average), select the Custom option button, and then select the function you want to use. Microsoft Excel adds one subtotal line for each type you select. Select this option if you want to add block totals to the innermost row or column field. The following table lists the available functions.

For this function	Subtotal line displays

Sum	The sum of the values being subtotaled

Count	The number of records or rows in the underlying data

Average	The average of the values in the underlying data

Max	The largest value in the underlying data

Min	The smallest value in the underlying data

Product	The product of the values in the underlying data

Count Nums	The number of records or rows that contain numeric data in the underlying data

StdDev	An estimate of the standard deviation of a population, where the underlying data is the sample

StdDevp	The standard deviation of a population, where the underlying data is the entire population

Var	An estimate of the variance of a population, where the underlying data is the sample

Varp	The variance of a population, where the underlying data is the entire population

None

Hides or omits subtotals for the field.

Hide Items

Hides the items you select from the list. The box lists all items in the selected field.

Delete

Removes a field from the pivot table, but not from the underlying data. To restore a field, use the Add Field command on the shortcut menu or use the PivotTable Wizard.

See Also

Help

How a Pivot Table Works

Overview of Adding and Removing Pivot Table Data

Overview of Changing How Pivot Table Data Is Calculated

Overview of Changing the Layout of a Pivot Table

Overview of Editing and Formatting a Pivot Table

Overview of Using Functions

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


PivotTable Field Command for Data Fields (Data Menu)

PivotTable Field button

Defines the summary functions used to calculate the values in the selected data field. You can also create a custom calculation, or change the name of a data field.

The PivotTable Field button is on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

Source Field

Displays the name of the field as it appears in the source data.

Name

Displays the name of the data field as it appears in the pivot table. To rename the field, type over the name.

Summarize By

The values in the data field summarize the underlying data. For example, a pivot table could have a column field labeled Year and display the items 1990, 1991, and 1992 as columns. A row field labeled Region could display the items North, South, East, and West as rows. The value at the intersection of the 1990 column and North row is summarized from the records in the underlying data that contain 1990 and North.

Microsoft Excel can use different functions to summarize the values in the data field. The following table lists the available functions.

For this function	Data area displays

Sum	The sum of the values in the underlying data. This is the default summary function for numeric data fields.

Count	The number of records or rows in the underlying data. This is the default summary function for data fields that contain something other than numbers.

Average	The average of the values in the underlying data.

Max	The largest value in the underlying data.

Min	The smallest value in the underlying data.

Product	The product of the underlying data.

Count Nums	The number of records or rows that contain numeric data in the underlying data.

StdDev	An estimate of the standard deviation of a population, where the underlying data is the sample.

StdDevp	The standard deviation of a population, where the underlying data is the entire population.

Var	An estimate of the variance of a population, where the underlying data is the sample.

Varp	The variance of a population of data, where the underlying data is the entire population.

Number

Formats the values in the data field using one of the built-in numeric formats, or uses a custom format that you create. The format you apply is maintained even when you move the data in the pivot table.

Options

Creates a custom calculation for the data field. Custom calculations typically compare one set of data with another set of related data in the pivot table. The result can be expressed as a difference, a percentage, or some other type of function. For example, you can display all sales data as a percentage of a particular salesperson's sales.

When you create a custom calculation, select a function to express the comparison, and then select a field and an item with which the data will be compared.

Show Data As

The following table describes the functions available for custom calculations.

This function	Has this result

Difference From	Displays all the data in the data area as the difference between a Base Field and a Base Item you specify.

% Of 	Displays all the data in the data area as a percentage of a Base Field and a Base Item you specify.

% Difference From	Displays all the data in the data area using the same method as the Difference From function, but displays the differerence as a percentage of the Base data.

Running Total In	Displays the data for successive items as a running total. You must select the field whose items will be shown in a running total.

% Of Row	Displays the data in each row as a percentage of the row's total.

% Of Column	Displays all the data in each column as a percentage of the column's total.

% Of Total	Displays the data in the data area as a percentage of the grand total of all the data in the pivot table.

Index	Displays the data using the following algorithm:
((value in cell) x (Grand Total)) / ((Grand Row Total) x (Grand Column Total))

Base Field

Displays the fields that appear in the pivot table. After selecting one of the custom calculations, select a base field to serve as the base data for the custom calculation, if needed.

Base Item

Displays the items within the selected base field. After selecting a custom calculation and a base field, select an item to serve as the base item of the custom calculation, if needed.

When selecting items for a base field, you can include the previous and next items.

Select the (previous) option when you want each calculation to use the value preceding the current item in the base field.

Select the (next) option when you want each calculation to use the value following the current item in the base field.

See Also

Help

How a Pivot Table Works

Overview of Adding and Removing Pivot Table Data

Overview of Changing How Pivot Table Data Is Calculated

Overview of Editing and Formatting a Pivot Table

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Show Pages Dialog Box

Separates each item of the selected page field onto its own worksheet in the current workbook. This can be useful for printing or for separate analysis.

Show All Pages Of

Lists the fields currently displayed in a page orientation. Select the field whose items you want to display on separate sheets.

See Also

Help

How a Pivot Table Works

Overview of Working with Pivot Table Pages

Show Pages Command (Shortcut Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customing a Pivot Table"


Group Dialog Box (Number Version)

Assigns a range of numeric pivot table items to evenly incremented groups, such as by tens or hundreds. Microsoft Excel automatically selects the smallest and largest values among the items. You can select other items or create your own ranges if necessary.

Starting At

The first item you want in the group.

Ending At

The last item you want in the group.

By

The number by which you want to increment the items in the group.

See Also

Help

Grouping numeric items into ranges in a pivot table

Ungrouping numeric items in a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customing a Pivot Table"


Group Dialog Box (Date Version)

Groups date or time items in a pivot table into specified periods. Microsoft Excel automatically selects the smallest and largest values among the items. You can select other items or create your own ranges if necessary. The items you select must be in a valid Microsoft Excel date or time format.

Starting At

The first item you want in the group.

Ending At

The last item you want in the group.

By

Select one or more time periods for the items in the group.

Number Of Days

The number of days you want in a range (for example, 10-day periods). This option is only available when you select Days in the By box.

See Also

Help

Grouping dates into ranges in a pivot table

Ungrouping date items in a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customing a Pivot Table"


Refresh Data Command for Microsoft Query (Data Menu)

Refresh Data button

Immediately updates the data in the current result set by rerunning the query, and then places the results in the result set.

Use this command if the data in the source database file or table has changed and you want to reflect the changes in the current result set.

The active cell must be located within a result set when you choose this command.

To use the Refresh Data command, you must have saved the query definition with the current result set. If you did not save the query definition when you retrieved the data in the result set, you will have to execute the query again.

Tip  Updating the data in a result set in Microsoft Excel eliminates any formatting, sorting, or data changes you made since you retrieved the data with Microsoft Query. To preserve changes made in Microsoft Excel, move the data to another workbook.

See Also

Help

Moving data and the query definition to another workbook

Updating query results

User's Guide

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"


Data Buttons Category

AutoFilter Button

Displays only those rows that match the value contained in the active cell and inserts drop-down arrows next to each column label in your list.

Group Button

Groups items in a pivot table by category to create a single item from multiple items.

Defines the selected detail rows or columns as a group.

Hide Detail Button

Hides detail data by collapsing an outer item in a row field or column field on a pivot table.

Hides the detail rows or columns within a selected group.

PivotTable Button

Starts the PivotTable Wizard, which guides you through all the steps needed to create or modify a pivot table.

PivotTable Field Button

If a row field or a column field is selected, inserts a subtotal for a row field or column field in an existing pivot table.

If a cell in the data area is selected, defines the summary functions used to calculate the values in the selected data field.

Refresh Data Button

When the active cell is in a result set imported from Microsoft Query, immediately updates the data in the current result set by rerunning the query, and then places the results in the result set.

When the active cell is in a pivot table, updates the data in the pivot table after the source data is changed.

Show Detail Button

Shows the detail rows or columns within a selected group.

Displays detail data that was hidden using the Hide Detail command by expanding a row field or column field in a pivot table.

Show Pages Button

Copies each page of a page field to a new worksheet in the current workbook.

Sort Ascending Button

Sorts the rows in the current list from the lowest value in the column containing the active cell to the highest value in the column containing the active cell.

Sort Descending Button

Sorts the rows in the current list from the highest value in the column containing the active cell to the lowest value in the column containing the active cell.

Ungroup Button

Removes selected rows or columns from their group.

Separates a combined group of items. Each instance of the group is replaced by all the items it contained.


AutoFilter Button

Displays only those rows in a list that match the value in the active cell and inserts drop-down arrows next to each column label. Selecting an item from a drop-down list temporarily hides rows that do not contain that item.

You can redisplay all the data in your list by using the Show All command, or remove the AutoFilter drop-down arrows by clearing the AutoFilter command on the Filter submenu, Data menu.

See Also

Help

Filtering a list using AutoFilter

Removing a filter from a list

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Sort Ascending Button

If you are sorting a list, sorts the current list in order from lowest value to highest value, using the column that contains the active cell. Any sorting options used in a previous sort operation, including the case-sensitive option or a custom sort order, are also applied.

If you are sorting items in a pivot table, sorts items in the selected field in ascending alphabetic order (A to Z). Numbers are sorted from lowest value to highest value.

Tip  If you hold down the SHIFT key while clicking the Sort Ascending button, it works like the Sort Descending button.

See Also

Help

  Sort Descending Button

Default Sort Orders

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Sort Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu)

Sorting a list from top to bottom

Sorting pivot table items by labels

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"

Chapter 22, "Summarizing Data in a List"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Sort Descending Button

If you are sorting a list, sorts the current list from highest value to lowest value, using the column that contains the active cell. Any sorting options used in a previous sort operation, including the case-sensitive option or a custom sort order, are also applied.

If you are sorting items in a pivot table, sorts items in the selected field in descending alphabetic order (Z to A). Numbers are sorted from highest value to lowest value.

Tip  If you hold down the SHIFT key while clicking the Sort Descending button, it works like the Sort Ascending button.

See Also

Help

  Sort Ascending Button

Default Sort Orders

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Sort Command for Pivot Tables (Data Menu)

Sorting a list from top to bottom

Sorting pivot table items by labels

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"

Chapter 22, "Summarizing Data in a List"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Changing How You View Your Worksheet

Overview of Changing How You View Your Worksheet

Splitting a window into panes

Freezing and unfreezing worksheet titles and panes

Zooming in or out on a worksheet

Displaying the full screen

Hiding and unhiding a row or column

Creating or deleting a view of a worksheet

Displaying a view of a worksheet

Printing a view of a worksheet


Overview of Changing How You View Your Worksheet

You can change your view of a worksheet by:

Freezing worksheet titles so they don't scroll off the screen

Zooming in or out on your worksheet

Displaying the full screen

Hiding or unhiding specific rows or columns

You can also change a variety of display options using the Options command on the Tools menu.

Once you have changed the display of your worksheet you can save it as a view using the View Manager command on the View menu.

See Also

Help

Creating or deleting a view of a worksheet

Displaying a view of a worksheet

Displaying the full screen

Freezing and unfreezing worksheet titles and panes

Hiding and unhiding a row or column

Printing a view of a worksheet

Splitting a window into panes

Zooming in or out on a worksheet

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Freezing and unfreezing worksheet titles and panes

Overview

You can split a window into panes first or freeze worksheet titles in a single step. Freezing titles does not affect printing.

To freeze horizontal or vertical titles only

1.	To freeze horizontal titles, select the row below your titles.

To freeze vertical titles, select the column to the right of your titles.

2.	From the Window menu, choose Freeze Panes.

To freeze both horizontal and vertical titles

1.	Select the cell where you want to freeze titles.

All rows above the selected cell will be frozen. All columns to the left of the selected cell will be frozen.

2.	From the Window menu, choose Freeze Panes.

Note  If you split the window before freezing panes, the panes are frozen at their current location, not at the active cell.

To freeze a pane if the window is already split

From the Window menu, choose Freeze Panes.

To unfreeze titles and panes

From the Window menu, choose Unfreeze Panes.

Note  If you split the window before choosing the Freeze Panes command, the split remains. Otherwise, the window returns to normal.

See Also

Help

  Freeze Panes Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Freeze Panes and Unfreeze Panes Commands (Window Menu)

Printing titles on multiple pages

Splitting a window into panes

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"


Zooming in or out on a worksheet

Overview

To zoom in or out

1.	Select the sheet or sheets that you want to zoom.

2.	Type a size in the Zoom Control box.

--Or--

Click the arrow on the Zoom Control box and select a size from the list.

Note  Zooming does not affect printing of your worksheet.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the sheet or sheets you want to zoom.

2.	From the View Menu, choose Zoom.

3.	Select a magnification percentage, or type a percentage in the Custom box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

To make the worksheet selection fit the current window size

1.	Select the range of cells you want to fit in the window.

2.	Click the arrow on the Zoom Control box.

3.	Select Selection.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the range of cells you want to fit in the window.

2.	From the View Menu, choose Zoom.

3.	Select the Fit Selection option button.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Zoom Control Box

Displaying the full screen

Reducing or enlarging what you want to print

Selecting a sheet or sheets

Zoom Command (View Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"


Displaying a view of a worksheet

Overview

If the View Manager command does not appear on the View menu, you need to install the View Manager add-in.

1.	From the View menu, choose View Manager.

2.	Select the name of the view you want to see.

All views defined for the active workbook are listed.

3.	Choose the Show button.

See Also

Help

Creating or deleting a view of a worksheet

Print Report Command (File Menu)

Printing a view of a worksheet

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

View Manager Command (View Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"


Creating or deleting a view of a worksheet

Overview

If the View Manager command does not appear on the View menu, you need to install the View Manager add-in.

To create a view of a worksheet

Before creating the view, define a print area on your sheet, unless you will want to print the entire sheet.

1.	From the View menu, choose View Manager.

2.	Choose the Add button.

3.	In the Name box, type a unique name for the view.

Tip  Because all views for a workbook are listed in the Views dialog box, you may want to include the sheet name in the name of your view.

4.	Under View Includes, select the options you want to include in the view.

5.	Choose the OK button.

To delete a view of a worksheet

1.	From the View menu, choose View Manager.

2.	Select the name of the view you want to delete.

3.	Choose the Delete button.

4.	Choose the Close button.

See Also

Help

Displaying a view of a worksheet

Print Report Command (File Menu)

Printing a view of a worksheet

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

View Manager Command (View Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"


Printing a view of a worksheet

Overview

You can save the current print settings in your view when you create it. The print area, however, is always saved in your view. The default print area is the entire worksheet. Unless a different print area is defined, the whole worksheet is printed.

If the View Manager command does not appear on the View menu, you need to install the View Manager add-in.

1.	From the View menu, choose View Manager.

2.	Select the name of the view you want to print.

3.	Choose the Show button.

4.	Click the Print button on the toolbar.

Shortcut:  CTRL+P

See Also

Help

  Print Button

Creating or deleting a view of a worksheet

Displaying a view of a worksheet

Print Report Command (File Menu)

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

View Manager Command (View Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"


Splitting a window into panes

Overview

To split a window into panes

Drag the horizontal or vertical split box to the desired position.

When you position the mouse pointer on a split box, the pointer changes to a two-headed arrow. If the split box isn't on your screen, you need to have scroll bars turned on. You can do this on the View tab after choosing the Options command from the Tools menu.

Alternate Method

1.	Switch to the workbook window you want to split.

2.	For vertical panes, select a column.

For horizontal panes, select a row.

For both vertical and horizontal panes, select the cell where you want the split to occur. The window splits horizontally above the selected cell and vertically to the left of the selected cell.

3.	From the Window menu, choose Split.

You can adjust split panes by dragging the split bar to the position you want.

Tip  If you want to display another copy of your sheet in its own window, use the New Window command.

To remove splits from a window

Double-click any part of the split bar.

Alternate Method

From the Window menu, choose Remove Split.

See Also

Help

Freezing and unfreezing worksheet titles and panes

Split and Remove Split Commands (Window Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"


Hiding and unhiding a row or column

Overview

To hide rows or columns

1.	Select the rows or columns you want to hide.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Row or Column, and then choose Hide.

Alternate Method

To hide a row, drag the bottom border of the row heading above the top border of the row heading.

To hide a column, drag the right border of the column heading to the left border of the column heading.

To unhide hidden rows or columns

A thick row or column heading border and a skipped column letter or row number indicate that there are hidden rows or columns.

1.	Select the rows or columns on both sides of the hidden row or column.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Row or Column, and then choose Unhide.

Alternate Method

To unhide a row, position the mouse pointer just below a thick row border and drag down. The mouse pointer changes to a double horizontal line with vertical arrows when it is positioned correctly.

To unhide a column, position the mouse pointer just to the right of a thick column heading border and drag to the right. The mouse pointer changes to a double vertical line with horizontal arrows when it is positioned correctly.

To unhide all rows and columns

1.	Select the entire worksheet using the Select All button.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Column or Row, and then choose Unhide.

See Also

Help

Column Command (Format Menu)

Hiding and unhiding a sheet

Hiding and unhiding a workbook

Hiding data in cells

Row Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"


Drawing Buttons Category

Arc Button

Draws an arc or a circle segment.

Arrow Button

Creates an arrow on an active worksheet, macro sheet, or chart.

Bring To Front Button

Places one or more selected objects in front of all other objects.

Color Button

Changes the foreground color of a selected cell or object.

Create Button Button

Creates a button on your worksheet to which you can attach a macro or Visual Basic module.

Dark Shading Button

Applies a dark shading pattern to selected cells and graphic objects.

Drawing Button

Displays the Drawing toolbar.

Drawing Selection Button

Changes the mouse pointer to an arrow for selecting graphic objects.

Drop Shadow Button

Adds a dark border to the right side and bottom of the selected range or object.

Ellipse Button

Draws an ellipse or a circle.

Filled Arc Button

Draws a filled arc or circle segment

Filled Ellipse Button

Draws a filled ellipse or circle.

Filled Freeform Button

Draws a filled shape that is a combination of freehand and straight lines.

Filled Polygon Button

Draws a filled polygon with straight sides.

Filled Rectangle Button

Draws a filled rectangle or square.

Freeform Button

Draws a shape that is a combination of freehand and straight lines.

Freehand Button

Draws freehand lines.

Group Objects Button

Creates a single group of graphic objects from multiple objects.

Light Shading Button

Applies a light shading pattern to selected cells and graphic objects.

Line Button

Draws a straight line.

Pattern Button

Changes the pattern and pattern color of a selected cell or object.

Polygon Button

Draws a polygon with straight sides.

Rectangle Button

Draws a rectangle or a square.

Reshape Button

Changes the shape of a polygon.

Selection Button

Selects one or more graphic objects.

Send To Back Button

Places one or more selected objects behind all other objects.

Shape Button

Displays a palette of buttons for drawing shapes on sheets or charts.

Text Box Button

Draws a text box in which you can type text on a worksheet.

Ungroup Objects Button

Separates grouped objects into individual objects.


Arc Button

Filled Arc Button

Draws an arc or a circle segment, unfilled or filled. The Arc buttons appear on the Drawing toolbar. Click the Drawing button on the Standard toolbar to display the Drawing toolbar.

The circle segment is one quarter of a full circle.

When you click one of the Arc buttons, the mouse pointer changes to a cross hair.

To draw a circle segment, hold down SHIFT while you drag.

To draw multiple arcs, double-click one of the Arc buttons. The button remains selected until you click it again, click another button, press ESC, or click another part of the worksheet without dragging.

If you hold down SHIFT while clicking either the Filled Arc button or the Arc button, it functions just like the other one.

If you want the object to snap to the nearest worksheet gridlines, hold down ALT while you draw.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Button

Drawing a rectangle, an ellipse, or an arc

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Arrow Button

Creates an arrow on an active worksheet, macro sheet, or chart. The Arrow button appears on the Drawing toolbar. Click the Drawing button on the Standard toolbar to display the Drawing toolbar.

When you click the Arrow button, the mouse pointer changes to a cross hair. Drag to create an arrow.

To draw multiple arrows, double-click the Arrow button. The Arrow button remains selected until you click it again, click another button, press ESC, or click another part of the worksheet without dragging.

To draw horizontal, vertical, or 45-degree diagonal arrows, hold down the SHIFT key while you drag.

If you want the arrow that you are drawing to automatically line up with the nearest gridline, hold down ALT while you drag.

When you release the mouse button, the arrow is automatically selected.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Button

Drawing a line or an arrow

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Create Button Button

Creates a button on your worksheet to which you can attach a macro or Visual Basic module. When you use the Create Button button, Microsoft Excel displays the Assign Macro dialog box so that you can either assign an existing macro to the button, or record a new macro to assign to the button. The Create Button button is located on the Drawing toolbar.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Assigning a macro to a button on a sheet

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Drawing Button

Displays the Drawing toolbar. The Drawing button appears on the Standard toolbar.

See Also

Help

Drawing Toolbar

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Color Button

Changes the foreground color of a selected cell or object. The Color button appears on the Formatting toolbar.

If you click the arrow next to the Color button, it displays a palette of colors from which you can select. The selected color is used for the button image until you select another color. To keep the palette open, drag it off of the toolbar.

If you have not chosen a pattern for cell shading or an object fill pattern, this button assigns a solid pattern.

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Drawing Selection Button

Changes the mouse pointer to an arrow for selecting graphic objects. The Drawing Selection button appears on the Drawing toolbar. Click the Drawing button on the Standard toolbar to display the Drawing toolbar.

Click an object to select it. Clicking a cell has no effect.

Drag to draw a rectangle around the objects you want to select.

When you release the mouse button, Microsoft Excel selects all of the objects that are enclosed by the selection rectangle and displays handles around each of the objects.

To add more objects to the selection, hold down SHIFT while you click or draw a rectangle around the objects.

The Drawing Selection button remains selected until you click it again or press ESC.

To both cancel drawing selection and select a cell, double-click the cell.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Button

Grouping and ungrouping graphic objects

Selecting a graphic object

Selecting multiple graphic objects

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Drop Shadow Button

Adds a dark border to the right side and bottom of the selected range or object. The Drop Shadow button appears on the Drawing toolbar. Click the Drawing button on the Standard toolbar to display the Drawing toolbar.

The Drop Shadow button remains selected until you click it again, click another button, press ESC, or click another part of the worksheet.

To remove the drop shadow, select the range or object and then click the Drop Shadow button again.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Button

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Shape Button

Displays a palette of buttons for drawing shapes on sheets or charts. The Shape button is in the Drawing category.

The most recently selected button is used as the button image.

The palette closes when you click to select a drawing button or click anywhere else.

To keep the palette open, drag it off the toolbar.

See Also

Help

  Arc Button

  Arrow Button

  Create Button Button

  Ellipse Button

  Filled Arc Button

  Filled Ellipse Button

  Filled Freeform Button

  Filled Rectangle Button

  Freeform Button

  Freehand Button

  Line Button

  Rectangle Button

  Selection Button

  Text Box Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Freehand Button

Draws freehand lines. The Freehand button appears on the Drawing toolbar. Click the Drawing button on the Standard toolbar to display the Drawing toolbar.

When you click the Freehand button, the mouse pointer changes to a cross hair.

To draw freehand lines, hold down the mouse button and drag.

When you release the mouse button, the graphic object is automatically selected.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Button

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Freeform Button

Filled Freeform Button

Draws a filled or unfilled shape that is a combination of freehand and straight lines. The Freeform buttons appear on the Drawing toolbar. Click the Drawing button on the Standard toolbar to display the Drawing toolbar.

When you click either of the Freeform buttons, the mouse pointer changes to a cross hair.

To draw a freehand line, drag the mouse.

To draw a straight line, click the mouse button. Without pressing the mouse button, point to the place where you want the line to end. Then click the mouse button again.

The button remains selected until you close the shape or double-click the end point of the line.

If you hold down SHIFT while you click either the Filled Freeform or Freeform button, it functions just like the other one.

To draw multiple shapes, double-click one of the Freeform buttons. The button remains selected until you click it again, click another button, or press ESC.

If you want the object to snap to the nearest worksheet gridlines, hold down ALT while you draw.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Button

  Filled Polygon Button

  Polygon Button

Drawing a polygon

Editing a polygon

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Line Button

Draws a straight line. The Line button appears on the Drawing toolbar. Click the Drawing button on the Standard toolbar to display the Drawing toolbar.

When you click the Line button, the mouse pointer changes to a cross hair.

To draw multiple lines, double-click the Line button. The button remains selected until you click it again, click another button, press ESC, or click another part of the worksheet without dragging.

To draw horizontal, vertical, or 45-degree diagonal lines, hold down SHIFT while you drag.

If you want the object that you are drawing to line up with the nearest gridline, hold down ALT while you draw.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Button

Drawing a line or an arrow

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Ellipse Button

Filled Ellipse Button

Draws an ellipse or a circle, filled or unfilled. The Ellipse buttons appear on the Drawing toolbar. Click the Drawing button on the Standard toolbar to display the Drawing toolbar.

When you click either of the Ellipse buttons, the mouse pointer changes to a cross hair.

To draw a circle, hold down SHIFT while you drag.

To draw multiple ellipses or circles, double-click an Ellipse button. The button remains selected until you click it again, click another button, press ESC, or click another part of the worksheet without dragging.

If you hold down SHIFT while you click either the Filled Ellipse or Ellipse button, it functions just like the other one.

If you want the object to snap to the nearest worksheet gridlines, hold down ALT while you draw.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Button

Drawing a rectangle, an ellipse, or an arc

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Polygon Button

Filled Polygon Button

Draws a filled or unfilled polygon with straight sides. The Polygon buttons appear in the Drawing category.

When you click a Polygon button, the mouse pointer changes to a cross hair.

The button remains selected until you close the shape or double-click the end point of the line.

If you hold down SHIFT while you click either the Filled Polygon button or Polygon button, it functions just like the other one.

To draw multiple polygon shapes, double-click one of the Polygon buttons. The button remains selected until you click it again, click another button, or press ESC.

If you want the object to snap to the nearest worksheet gridlines, hold down ALT while you draw.

See Also

Help

  Filled Freeform Button

  Freeform Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Drawing a polygon

Editing a polygon

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Rectangle Button

Filled Rectangle Button

Draws a rectangle or a square, filled or unfilled. The Rectangle buttons appear on the Drawing toolbar. Click the Drawing button on the Standard toolbar to display the Drawing toolbar.

When you click a Rectangle button, the mouse pointer changes to a cross hair.

To draw a square, hold down SHIFT while you drag.

To draw multiple rectangles or squares, double-click a Rectangle button. The button remains selected until you click it again, click another button, press ESC, or click another part of the worksheet without dragging.

If you hold down SHIFT while you click either the Filled Rectangle button or the Rectangle button, it functions just like the other one.

If you want the object to snap to the nearest worksheet gridlines, hold down ALT while you draw.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Button

Drawing a rectangle, an ellipse, or an arc

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Reshape Button

Changes the shape of a polygon. The Reshape button appears on the Drawing toolbar. Click the Drawing button on the Standard toolbar to display the Drawing toolbar.

When you click the Reshape button, handles appear along the freehand line and at the beginning and end of each straight line. You can add or move vertices by dragging the handles.

The vertices remain selected until you click the Reshape button again.

The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair when you position it over a handle.

To add a vertex, hold down CTRL while you position the pointer on a line of the polygon and then drag the pointer to where you want the new vertex.

To move a vertex, drag the handle to where you want to place the vertex.

To delete a vertex, hold down CTRL and click the handle of the vertex.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Button

Editing a polygon

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Selection Button

Selects one or more graphic objects. The Selection button appears in the Drawing category.

When you click the Selection button, the mouse pointer changes to a cross hair.

Drag the mouse to draw a rectangle around the objects you want to select.

When you release the mouse button, Microsoft Excel selects all of the objects that are completely enclosed by the selection rectangle and displays handles around each of the objects.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Grouping and ungrouping graphic objects

Selecting multiple graphic objects

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Text Box Button

Draws a text box, in which you can type text on a worksheet. Also lets you add unattached or "floating" text to a chart. The Text Box button appears on the Standard toolbar.

After you draw the text box to the size and shape you want, you can type text in the box.

To start a new line, press ENTER.

When you finish typing, click outside the box.

See Also

Help

Creating and deleting text boxes

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Undo and Redo Commands (Edit Menu)

Undo button

Reverses certain commands or deletes the last entry you typed. The Undo button is on the Standard toolbar.

The command name reflects the command or action to be undone; for example, Undo Cut; Undo Typing.

Can't Undo, instead of Undo, appears on the Edit menu if you cannot undo the previous action.

Immediately after you undo an action, this command changes to Redo, allowing you to restore what you reversed.

Shortcuts:	CTRL+Z

ALT+BACKSPACE

See Also

Help

Choosing a menu bar command

Choosing a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Undoing or repeating a command

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Repeat Command (Edit Menu)

Repeat button

Repeats the last command you chose, if possible, including any dialog box settings. The Repeat button is on the Standard toolbar.

The command name reflects the command to be repeated; for example, Repeat AutoFormat.

This command is useful for applying the same formats to different groups of cells or different chart items.

Can't Repeat, instead of Repeat, appears on the Edit menu if the last command you chose is not repeatable.

Shortcut:	ALT+ENTER

See Also

Help

Choosing a menu bar command

Choosing a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Undoing or repeating a command

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Cut Command (Edit Menu)

Cut button

Removes the selection from the sheet and places it on the Clipboard. The selection can be a cell, a cell range, characters in the cell or formula bar, an embedded chart, or a graphic object. The Cut button is on the Standard toolbar.

When you cut characters in a cell or in the formula bar, the characters are deleted and placed on the Clipboard. The cut characters are then available for pasting to a new location.

When you cut cells on a worksheet, Microsoft Excel surrounds the selected cell or cell range with a moving border.

Within a worksheet, the selection to be cut must be a single, continuous rectangular area.

Within a worksheet, if Cut is followed by the Paste command on the Edit menu, the cell contents and formats are pasted into the paste area; if Cut is followed by the Cut Cells command on the Insert menu, the cell contents and formats are inserted between existing cells.

To completely remove selected cells and shift other cells to fill the space, use the Delete command on the Edit menu.

Within a workbook, use the Move Or Copy Sheet command on the Edit menu to rearrange sheets.

Shortcut:	CTRL+X

See Also

Help

  Paste Button

Copying or moving characters within a cell

Editing cell contents

Overview of Copying and Moving Cells

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Copy button

Copies the selection onto the Clipboard. The selection can be a cell, a cell range, a nonadjacent cell selection, characters in the cell or formula bar, a graphic object, a chart, or a series. The Copy button is on the Standard toolbar.

If you want to copy a sheet in a workbook, use the Move Or Copy Sheet command on the Edit menu.

To copy a picture of a cell range or chart to another Microsoft Excel workbook or to another application, use the Copy Picture command. This command appears only when you hold down SHIFT and select the Edit menu.

Shortcut:	CTRL+C

Worksheets

Choosing Copy surrounds selected cells with a moving border.

If you choose the Paste command on the Edit menu after choosing Copy, cell contents and formats are copied.

If you choose the Paste Special command on the Edit menu after choosing Copy, specified cell attributes are copied.

If you choose the Copied Cells command on the Insert menu after choosing Copy, cell contents and formats are copied and inserted between existing cells.

If your selection contains hidden rows or columns that you don't want to copy, you can select only the visible cells in the worksheet using the Go To command on the Edit menu or the Select Visible Cells button in the Utility category.

Within the Cell or Formula Bar

Characters that are copied from the cell or formula bar are placed on the Clipboard. The characters can then be pasted to a new location.

Charts

With a chart sheet or an embedded chart active, choosing Copy copies the entire chart, which you can then paste onto a worksheet or into another chart.

Choosing Copy surrounds the chart with a moving border.

Graphic Objects

You can copy an individual object or several objects together. If you copy more than one object at a time, the objects maintain the same relative positions when pasted into a new location.

See Also

Help

  Paste Button

Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

Copying or moving characters within a cell

Editing cell contents

Overview of Copying and Moving Cells

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"


Paste Command (Edit Menu)

Paste button

Pastes the contents of the Clipboard onto a sheet, or within the cell or formula bar, if it's active.

Shortcuts:	CTRL+V

ENTER

Worksheets

Choosing this command pastes the contents and formats of copied or cut cells into the selected cells.

The paste area can be a single cell, a cell range, or a graphic object.

If the paste area is a single cell, this cell is the upper-left corner of the paste area; the rest of the copied data is pasted below and to the right of this cell.

If you choose the Cut command before pasting and you are pasting into a cell range, the paste area must be the same size and shape as the cut area.

If you choose the Copy command before pasting, you can paste multiple copies, either simultaneously or sequentially.

Charts

If you copied a chart, you can use the Paste command to paste the chart into another active chart or onto a worksheet.

If you copied data from a worksheet and you want to paste it into an embedded chart, you use the Paste Special command to control how data series or data points are plotted. You cannot use the Paste Special command when copying data onto a chart sheet.

Within the Cell or Formula Bar

Choosing Paste inserts the contents of the Clipboard into the cell or formula bar at the insertion point.

If any characters in the cell or formula bar are selected, those characters are replaced with the Clipboard contents.

Workbooks

If you want to copy a sheet in a workbook, use the Move Or Copy Sheet command on the Edit menu.

Graphic Objects

If the paste area is a graphic object, choosing Paste creates a new graphic object consisting of a picture of the copied cells.

See Also

Help

Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Copying or moving characters within a cell

Cut Command (Edit Menu)

Editing cell contents

Overview of Copying and Moving Cells

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"


Paste Special Command (Edit Menu for Charts)

Controls how the data series are organized and plotted when pasted from a worksheet.

Dialog box options vary, depending on whether you are adding cells as a new data series or as points to an existing data series in the chart.

Add Cells As

New Series

Adds selected data to chart as a new data series.

New Point(s)

Adds selected data as new data points to existing data series in the chart.

Values (Y) in

The first two check boxes in the dialog box change depending on which options you select under Values (Y) in.

Rows, Columns

Uses the contents of each row or column in the copied selection to create the data series.

First Column/Row Contains Series Names

If Rows is selected under Data Series In, uses the contents of the cell in the first column of each row as the name of the data series in that row.

If Columns is selected under Data Series In, uses the contents of the cell in the first row of each column as the name of the data series in that column.

If cleared, uses the contents of the first cell as the first data point in the data series, assuming that the cell contains only data and not a series name.

This option changes to Series Names (Y Labels) In First Column/Row when a 3-D chart is active.

First Row/Column Contains Category (X) Labels

If Rows is selected under Data Series In, uses the contents of the first row of the selection as the chart categories.

If Columns is selected under Data Series In, uses the contents of the first column of the selection as the chart categories.

If cleared, uses the contents of the first row or column as the first data series in the chart.

This option changes to First Column/Row Contains Category (X) Values when an xy (scatter) chart is active.

Replace Existing Categories

Replaces the existing chart categories with the categories you are pasting.

Available only when the First Column/Row Contains Category (X) Labels check box is selected.

See Also

Help

Adding data series or data points to an embedded chart

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"


Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

Worksheets

Pastes values, formats, formulas, or notes of copied cells into the selected cells on the active sheet or in the active group. This command also combines copied data with data in the paste area, transposes data, and pastes data copied from other applications. For detailed information, see Paste Special Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets).

Charts

Pastes copied data series or data points from a worksheet into an active chart. For detailed information, see Paste Special Command (Edit Menu for Charts).


Fill Command (Edit Menu)

Copies the contents and formats of cells from one side of a selected range into the remaining cells in the selection. Copied contents and formats replace existing contents and formats.

Down Command

The Down command copies the contents and formats of the top cell or cells of a selected range into the lower cells of the range.

Right Command

The Right command copies the contents and formats of the leftmost cell or cells of a selected range into the cells to the right.

Up Command

The Up command copies the contents and formats of the bottom cell or cells of a selected range into the upper cells of the range.

Left Command

The Left command copies the contents and formats of the rightmost cell or cells of a selected range into the cells to the left.

Across Worksheets Command

Copies the contents of the range of cells selected on the active worksheet to the same range of cells in all the other sheets in a group. This command is available only if a group of sheets is selected.

All

Copies all contents and formats of the selected cells.

Contents

Copies only the contents of the selected cells. Formats are unchanged.

Formats

Copies only the formats of the selected cells. Contents are unchanged.

Series Command

The Series command fills the selected range of cells with one or more series of numbers or dates. The contents of the first cell or cells in each row or each column of the selection are used as the starting values for the series.

You can also create a series of numbers or dates directly on a worksheet using the AutoFill feature.

Justify Command

Redistributes text into even lines within a range of cells. Each line of text fills the width of the range as closely as possible. Use this command to move text in several consecutive rows into a selected range. Except for the left column, cells in the range should be blank.

See Also

Help

Creating simple forecasts and trends

Filling a range of adjacent cells

Incrementing a series of numbers or dates

Justifying text in cells

Selecting a sheet or sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Right Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Fill Right button

Copies the formats and data of the leftmost cell or cells of a selected range into the cells to the right. If you hold down SHIFT and click the Fill Right button, it fills left instead of right in the selection. The Fill Right button is in the Edit category.

Copied contents and formats replace existing contents and formats.

Shortcut:	CTRL+R

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Down Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Filling a range of adjacent cells

Left Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Up Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Down Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Fill Down button

Copies the formats and data of the top cell or cells of a selected range into the lower cells of the range. If you hold down SHIFT and click the Fill Down button, it fills up instead of down in the selection. The Fill Down button is in the Edit category.

Copied contents and formats replace existing contents and formats.

Shortcut:	CTRL+D

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Filling a range of adjacent cells

Left Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Right Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Up Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Left Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Copies the formats and data of the rightmost cell or cells of a selected range into the cells to the left. If you hold down SHIFT and click the Fill Right button, it fills left instead of right in the selection. The Fill Right button is in the Edit category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Down Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Filling a range of adjacent cells

Right Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Up Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Up Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Copies the formats and data of the bottom cell or cells of a selected range into the upper cells of the range. If you hold down SHIFT and click the Fill Down button, it fills up instead of down in the selection. The Fill Down button is in the Edit category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Down Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Filling a range of adjacent cells

Left Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Right Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Series Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Fills the selected range of cells with one or more series of numbers or dates. The contents of the first cell or cells in each row or each column of the selection are used as the starting values for the series.

You can also create a series of numbers or dates directly on a worksheet using the AutoFill feature.

Series In

Fills series across rows or down columns.

Type

Linear

Calculates a series by adding the value in the Step Value box to each cell value in turn. If the Trend check box is selected, the value in the Step Value box is ignored and a linear trend series is calculated.

Growth

Calculates a series by multiplying the value in the Step Value box by each cell value in turn. If the Trend check box is selected, the value in the Step Value box is ignored and a growth trend series is calculated.

Date

Calculates a series of dates according to the option selected under Date Unit.

AutoFill

Fills blank cells in a selection with a series based on data included in the selection. Overrides any entry in the Step Value box or any selected Date Unit option.

The following table shows samples of AutoFill operations on a selected cell or cells.

Data in selection	Series created

1, 2	3, 4, 5, 6,...

1, 3	5, 7, 9, 11,...

Mon	Tues, Wed, Thurs,...

Qtr1	Qtr2, Qtr3, Qtr4, Qtr1,...

text1, textA	text2, textA, text3, textA,...

1-Jan, 1-Mar	1-May, 1-Jul, 1-Sept,...

Date Unit

Determines whether a series of dates will increase by days, weekdays, months, or years. Used only when creating a date series.

Step Value

The amount by which a series increases or decreases. A positive number causes the series to increase; a negative number causes it to decrease.

Stop Value

The value at which you want the series to end. If the selection is filled before the series reaches the stop value, the series stops at that point. The Stop Value box can be left blank.

Trend

Calculates a step value from the existing values at the top or left of the selection to produce a best-fit line (for linear series) or exponential curve (for growth series) based on those values. Any value in the Step Value box is ignored if the Trend check box is selected. For example, if the selection is one row high, begins with the values 1, 4, 5, and you enter a step value of 2 with the Linear option selected, the resulting series will be as follows.

Linear	Resulting series

Trend check box cleared	1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11,...

Trend check box selected	1.33, 3.33, 5.33, 7.33, 9.33, 11.33,...

Using the same example with the Growth option selected, the resulting series will be as follows.

Growth	Resulting series

Trend check box cleared	1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,...

Trend check box selected	1.21, 2.71, 6.07, 13.57, 30.35, 67.86,...

See Also

Help

Creating simple forecasts and trends

Fill Command (Edit Menu)

Incrementing a series of numbers or dates

Turning AutoFill on or off

User's Guide

Chapter 9 "Entering Data"


Across Worksheets Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Copies the contents of the range of cells selected on the active worksheet to the same range of cells in all the other sheets in a group. This command is available only if a group of sheets is selected.

All

Copies all contents and formats of the selected cells.

Contents

Copies only the contents of the selected cells. Formats are unchanged.

Formats

Copies only the formats of the selected cells. Contents are unchanged.

See Also

Help

Selecting a sheet or sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Clear Command (Edit Menu)

Worksheets

Removes the selected object, or removes the contents, formats, notes, or all three from the selected cells. If the selection is in the cell or formula bar, removes the selected characters. For detailed information, see Clear Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets).

Charts

Removes either the chart item or the formats, depending on the item selected. If the selection is in the formula bar, removes the selected characters. For detailed information, see Clear Command (Edit Menu for Charts).


Clear Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets)

Removes the contents (formulas and data), formats, notes, or all three from selected cells on a worksheet. If a graphic object or embedded chart is selected, the Clear command removes the object or chart.

If a cell is cleared, its value is zero and a formula referring to that cell will return a value of zero.

The Delete command removes not only the contents of a cell, but the cell itself.

All Command

Removes contents, formats, and notes from selected cells.

Formats Command

Clear Formats button

Removes formats only; cell contents and notes are unchanged. The cells return to the General format. The Clear Formats button is in the Edit category. If a chart is active, the Clear Formats button removes the formatting from the selected chart item.

Contents Command

Clear Contents button

Removes the contents from selected cells without affecting formats or notes. The Clear Contents button is in the Edit category.

If a worksheet is active, the Contents command removes the contents (data and formulas) from selected cells.

If an object is selected, it is removed from the worksheet.

If a chart is active, the Clear Contents button removes a selected data series or any other selected chart item or graphic object from the chart.

Shortcut:	DEL

Notes Command

Removes notes from selected cells, but leaves contents and formats intact.

See Also

Help

  Format Painter Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Clear Command (Edit Menu for Charts)

Clearing cells

Clearing rows and columns

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Delete Command (Edit Menu)

Delete button

Delete Column button

Delete Row button

The Delete command completely removes selected cells, rows, or columns from a worksheet. Surrounding cells shift to fill the space. The Delete button functions the same way as the Delete command, except that it doesn't display the Delete dialog box. The Delete, Delete Column, and Delete Row buttons are in the Edit category.

If you delete an entire row or column, rows or columns are shifted to fill the space.

If you select less than an entire row or column, a dialog box appears asking whether to shift the surrounding cells up or to the left, or to delete the entire column or row.

A worksheet formula containing a reference to a deleted cell displays the #REF! value.

If you hold down SHIFT while clicking the Delete button, it functions the same as the Insert button. If you hold down SHIFT while clicking the Delete Column button, it functions the same as the Insert Column button. If you hold down SHIFT while clicking the Delete Row button, it functions the same as the Insert Row button.

To remove the contents (formulas and data), formats, notes, or all three from selected cells, but not the cells themselves, use the Clear command.

When you delete a row, column, or page field from a pivot table, you also remove all of that field's associated data from the pivot table. You do not affect the source data.

Shortcut:	CTRL+MINUS SIGN

Shift Cells Left

Shifts surrounding cells to the left.

Shift Cells Up

Shifts surrounding cells up.

Entire Row

Deletes the entire row and shifts entire rows to fill the space.

Entire Column

Deletes the entire column and shifts entire columns to fill the space.

See Also

Help

  Insert Button

  Insert Column Button

  Insert Row Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Deleting cells

Deleting rows and columns

Removing a row, column, or page field from a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Find Command (Edit Menu)

Searches selected cells or the entire worksheet for specified characters, and selects the first cell containing those characters.

Unless you select a range of cells, the Find command searches the entire worksheet.

If a group of sheets is selected, the Find command searches all of the sheets in the group except Visual Basic modules.

The Find command displays a message if no matching characters are found.

Shortcuts:	CTRL+F

SHIFT+F4 (next occurrence)

CTRL+SHIFT+F4 (previous occurrence)

Find What

Specifies what to search for. Can include any letter, number, punctuation mark, or wildcard character. Does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase characters unless the Match Case check box is selected.

Proposes the last text or value you searched for, which you can accept or change.

Search

Determines the direction of the search  that is, across rows or down columns. To reverse the search direction, hold down SHIFT while you choose the OK button. If a module is the active sheet, you can choose to search the entire module, up or down.

Look In

Searches in cell formulas, cell values, or cell notes. If a module is the active sheet, you can choose to search in a procedure, the module, all modules, or in selected text.

Match Case

Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase characters in the search text specified in the Find What box.

Find Entire Cells Only (Worksheets Only)

Searches for an exact and complete match of characters specified in the Find What box.

Find Whole Words Only (Modules Only)

Finds only whole words, not characters inside words -- for example, finds "act", but not "acting".

Use Pattern Matching (Modules Only)

Finds words with a certain pattern of letters. For example, use Act to search for "Actor", "Acting", and so on.

Find Next

Finds the next occurrence of the characters specified in the Find What box.

To find the previous occurrence, hold down SHIFT while you choose the Find Next button.

Close

Closes the dialog box.

Replace

Displays the Replace dialog box.

See Also

Help

Finding and replacing text or numbers

Finding text or numbers

Replace Command (Edit Menu)

Selecting cells with common types of contents

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Replace Command (Edit Menu)

Finds and replaces characters in selected cells or on the entire worksheet.

Unless you select a range of cells, Replace searches the entire worksheet.

If a group of sheets is selected, Replace operates on all of the sheets in the group except for Visual Basic modules.

The Replace command displays a message if nothing matches.

Searched characters and replacement characters can include text, numbers, formulas, or parts of formulas.

Shortcut:	CTRL+H

Find What

Specifies what to search for. Can include any letter, number, punctuation mark, or wildcard character. Does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase characters unless the Match Case check box is selected.

Proposes the last text or value you searched for, which you can accept or change.

Replace With

Identifies the characters that will replace the characters searched for. Proposes the characters last used for replacement.

Search

Determines the direction of the search -- that is, across rows or down columns. To reverse the search direction, hold down SHIFT while you choose the OK button. If a module is the active document, you can choose to search either up or down, or through the entire module.

Look in (Modules Only)

You can choose to search in a procedure, the module, all modules, or in selected text.

Match Case

Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase characters in the search text specified in the Find What box.

Find Entire Cells Only

Searches for an exact and complete match of characters specified in the Find What box.

Find Whole Words Only (Modules Only)

Finds only whole words, not characters inside words -- for example, "act", but not "acting".

Use Pattern Matching (Modules Only)

Finds words with a certain pattern of letters. For example, use Act to search for "Actor," "Acting" and so on.

Find Next

Finds the next occurrence of the characters specified in the Find What box.

To find the previous occurrence, hold down SHIFT while you choose the Find Next button.

Close

Closes the dialog box but does not affect replacements already made.

Replace

Replaces the searched characters in the active cell with the new characters and then finds the next occurrence of the searched characters. To find the previous occurrence, hold down SHIFT while you choose the Replace button. To replace the characters without finding the next cell, hold down CTRL while you choose the Replace button.

Replace All

Finds and replaces every occurrence of the characters in the Find What box with the characters in the Replace With box.

See Also

Help

Find Command (Edit Menu)

Finding and replacing text or numbers

Finding text or numbers

Selecting cells with common types of contents

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Go To Command (Edit Menu)

Scrolls through the worksheet and selects the cell or range you specify.

Named cells or ranges appear in the Go To box.

You can go to a reference or a named area in another open workbook by typing an external reference containing the workbook and sheet name, an exclamation point, and the reference or name you want. For example, [dept.xl5]budget!b3

You can move back and forth between two parts of a worksheet by repeating the command.

When Go To is used while you are building a formula, you can insert into the formula a reference that is listed in the Go To box.

You can make a nonadjacent selection with the Go To command by entering the cell range in the Reference box and holding down CTRL when you choose the OK button.

Shortcut:	F5

Go To

Lists all names defined in the active worksheet. It also lists the last four references from which you chose the Go To command at the top of the list, with the latest one first.

Reference

Specifies the reference or named area you want to move to. If you select a name in the Go To box and then choose the OK button, Microsoft Excel selects the cell or range defined by that name.

Special

Displays the Go To Special dialog box, which enables you to select cells with the criteria you select.

See Also

Help

Go To Special Dialog Box

Keys for Moving and Selecting in Worksheets and Workbooks

Keys for Moving Within a Selection

Selecting a cell or range of cells

Selecting named ranges or specified cells

Selecting nonadjacent cells or ranges

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Go To Special Dialog Box

Selects cells that have the type of contents specified in the dialog box, or selects all objects.

The resulting selection can contain many cells and ranges.

To search the entire worksheet, select a single cell before using Go To Special; to search only a specific range, select that range.

When searching for precedents or dependents, Microsoft Excel always searches the entire worksheet. The selection determines the cells whose precedents or dependents are searched for.

Notes

Selects all cells that contain a note.

Shortcut:	CTRL+SHIFT+?

Constants

Selects all cells whose values do not start with an equal sign.

Formulas

Selects all cells that contain formulas, based on the check boxes you select.

Numbers

Selects cells with formulas that produce numbers.

Text

Selects cells with formulas that produce text.

Logicals

Selects cells with formulas that produce the logical values TRUE and FALSE.

Errors

Selects cells with formulas that produce error values.

Blanks

Selects all blank cells.

Current Region

Selects a rectangular range of cells around the active cell. The range selected is an area bounded by any combination of blank rows and blank columns.

Shortcuts:	Select Current Region button (Utility category)

CTRL+* (asterisk on keypad)

Current Array

Selects the entire array, if any, to which the active cell belongs.

Shortcut:	CTRL+/

Row Differences

Selects cells whose contents are different from the comparison cell in each row. For each row, the comparison cell is in the same column as the active cell.

Shortcut:	CTRL+\

Column Differences

Selects cells whose contents are different from the comparison cell in each column. For each column, the comparison cell is in the same row as the active cell.

Shortcut:	CTRL+SHIFT+ [image]  (vertical bar)

Precedents

Selects cells that are referred to by the formula in the active cell.

Direct Only

Selects only cells directly referred to by formulas in the selection.

Shortcut:	CTRL+[  (left bracket)

All Levels

Selects all cells directly or indirectly referred to by cells in the selection. Useful for selecting the entire network of cells that affect a particular cell in a complex worksheet. Also useful for tracking the logic of a model one step at a time.

Shortcut:	CTRL+SHIFT+{  (left brace)

Dependents

Selects cells with formulas that refer to the active cell.

Direct Only

Selects only cells with formulas that refer directly to the active cell.

Shortcut:	CTRL+]  (right bracket)

All Levels

Selects all cells that directly or indirectly refer to the active cell. Useful for selecting the entire network of cells that depend on a particular cell in a complex worksheet.

Shortcut:	CTRL+SHIFT+}  (right brace)

Last Cell

Selects the last cell that contains data or formatting in the worksheet or macro sheet.

Visible Cells

Selects the visible cells on a worksheet so that changes you make affect only the visible cells and not the hidden rows or columns, such as on an outline sheet.

Shortcut:	Select Visible Cells button (Utility category)

Objects

Selects all graphic objects, including buttons and text boxes.

See Also

Help

Finding cells referred to by formulas in selected cells (precedents)

Finding cells that don't fit the pattern in a row or column

Finding cells with formulas that refer to selected cells (dependents)

Overview of Using Go To Special to Find Specific Cells

Selecting cells with common types of contents

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Move Or Copy Sheet Command (Edit Menu)

Moves or copies the selected sheets to another workbook or to a different location within the same workbook.

To Book

Indicates the workbook where you want to move or copy the selected sheets. Select the New Book option if you want to create a new workbook containing only the sheets you moved or copied.

Before Sheet

Shows where you want the selected sheet or sheets placed. If you have nonadjacent sheets selected, the sheets will be grouped together when they are moved or copied.

Create A Copy

Creates a copy of the sheet or sheets.

See Also

Help

Copying sheets to other workbooks

Copying sheets within a workbook

Moving sheets to other workbooks

Moving sheets within a workbook

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Delete Sheet Command (Edit Menu)

Permanently deletes the selected sheet or sheets from the workbook.

You cannot undo this command.

Before deleting, Microsoft Excel asks you to confirm the deletion.

See Also

Help

Deleting sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Change Links Dialog Box

With the Change Links dialog box you locate a file to which you want to redirect the selected link in the Links dialog box. The new document should be of a type in which the existing link specification is valid. For example, changing a link that specifies a range in a Microsoft Excel workbook to a document created by a word-processing application may produce an invalid link.

If the link you want to change is a DDE link, the link reference is displayed at the top of the Change Links dialog box. Type the reference of the new link in the Change Links To box.

File Name

Displays the default file specification and a list of files of the same type in the current directory. Type or select the name of the file to which you want to change links. This box lists files with the extension you select in the List Files Of Type box. To see a list of all files with a particular extension, for example .xla, type *.xla

Directories

Lists the current directory and any subdirectories that contain files. Double-click the directories and subdirectories to move through the list.

Drives

Lists the available drives. Select the drive that contains the file to which you want to change links.

List Files Of Type

Lists the available file formats. Select the format of the file to which you want to change links.

Find File

Closes the Change Links dialog box and displays the Find File dialog box for you to search for a file to which you want to change links.

Network

Displays a dialog box of available network servers so you can connect to a different server when your system is running on the supported network.

See Also

Help

Redirecting links to source documents

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Justify Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Redistributes text into even lines within a range of cells. Each line of text fills the width of the range as closely as possible. Use this command to move text in several consecutive rows into a selected range. Except for the left column, cells in the range should be blank.

See Also

Help

Justifying text in cells

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Object Command (Edit Menu)

Displays a submenu with commands that apply to the selected object. The commands change according to the type of object selected. Some common commands that appear on the submenu are Convert, Edit, and Open. The Open command opens a selected object so it can be edited in the program in which it was created.

See Also

Help

Editing a Microsoft Excel object embedded in another application

Editing an object embedded in a Microsoft Excel document

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Paste Picture Command (Edit Menu)

Pastes a picture of the contents of the Clipboard into a Microsoft Excel document.

This command appears on the menu when you hold down SHIFT and select the Edit menu.

You can move or size a picture just as you would any other graphic object.

See Also

Help

Copy Picture Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Paste Picture Link Command (Edit Menu)

Pastes a linked picture of the contents of the Clipboard into a Microsoft Excel document and creates a link between the picture and the document from which it came.

This command appears on the menu when you hold down SHIFT and select the Edit menu.

When the source document changes, the pasted picture reflects those changes.

You can move or size a linked picture just as you would any other graphic object.

See Also

Help

  Camera Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Copy Picture Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Picture Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Copy Picture Command (Edit Menu)

Copies a picture of the selected cell, cell range, or embedded chart onto the Clipboard. From the Clipboard, you can paste the picture into another application.

Appears on the Edit menu in place of the Copy command when you hold down SHIFT and select the Edit menu.

Appearance

Select the As Shown On Screen option button to paste the selection onto a Microsoft Excel worksheet.

Select the As Shown When Printed option button to paste the selection into another application.

Size (charts on worksheets only)

The As Shown On Screen option copies the selection and displays it the same size as it appears on the screen. The picture size varies according to the size and shape of the chart window.

The As Shown When Printed option copies the selection and displays it the same size as it would appear when printed. The picture size varies according to the size and shape of the chart window, the capabilities of your printer, and the Size option on the Chart tab in the Page Setup dialog box.

Format

Picture

Copies the picture in Windows metafile format. This format can be displayed on a screen with a different resolution from that of the screen it was copied from.

Bitmap

Copies the picture in bitmap format. The bitmap can be displayed correctly only on a screen of the same type and resolution as those of the screen it was copied from.

See Also

Help

  Camera Button

Paste Picture Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Copy Button Image Command (Edit Menu)

Copies the button image of the selected button onto the Clipboard. Using the Clipboard, you can paste the image onto another button.

This command appears on the Edit menu and the toolbar shortcut menu for a button only when the Customize dialog box is displayed. To display this dialog box, choose the Customize command from the toolbar shortcut menu.

See Also

Help

Changing the image on a toolbar button

Paste Button Image Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Paste Button Image Command (Edit Menu)

Pastes the button image from the Clipboard onto the selected button.

This command appears on the Edit menu and the toolbar shortcut menu for a button only when the Customize dialog box is displayed. To display this dialog box, choose the Customize command from the toolbar shortcut menu.

The picture can be copied from another button, or it can be an object drawn in another application.

See Also

Help

Changing the image on a toolbar button

Copy Button Image Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Links Command (Edit Menu)

Lists the source documents for the active workbook. Provides options you can use to change the links in linked documents.

Source File

Lists the names of source documents.

Item

Lists the sources of the links.

Type

Describes the linked item.

Status

Indicates whether the link is updated manually or automatically.

Open

Opens the selected source document.

Close

The Close button appears in the Links dialog box when you first open it. Choosing the Close button cancels the command and closes the Links dialog box.

Change Source

Displays the Change Links dialog box, which you can use to redirect links to the dependent worksheet.

Update Now

Updates the active dependent document with information from the selected source documents.

Automatic

Updates the linked data automatically.

Manual

Updates the linked data manually when you choose the Update Now button.

See Also

Help

Linking a document from another application to a Microsoft Excel worksheet

Linking a Microsoft Excel document to a document from another application

Overview of Linking and Embedding

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Clear Command (Edit Menu for Charts)

Removes either the chart item or its formatting, depending on the item selected. If the selection is in the formula bar, removes the selected characters.

All Command

Removes the selected chart item and its formatting.

Available for all selected chart items, except series, points, trendlines, and error bars.

If an embedded chart is selected, removes it from the worksheet.

If the chart area is selected, removes all of the chart items, leaving a blank embedded chart or chart sheet.

Shortcut:	DEL

Series/Trendline/Error Bars Command

Removes the selected data series (or points), trendline, or error bars.

The name of this command changes depending on which of these chart items is selected.

It is also available for the selected chart area, but not for any other chart items.

Shortcuts:	Clear Contents button (Edit category)

DEL

Formats Command

Removes the formatting from any selected chart item; the data is not affected.

If a data series or point is selected, restores the original default formatting provided by the built-in default chart format, which is located on the Chart tab (Tools menu, Options command).

Shortcut:	Clear Formats button (Edit category)

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Clearing formatting from data markers

Deleting a data series

Deleting a trendline

Deleting error bars

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Paste Special Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets)

Pastes the values, formats, formulas, or notes of the copy area you defined with the Copy command into the cells in the current selection. Paste Special also controls how data copied from an application other than Microsoft Excel is pasted.

Paste Special does not paste a selection defined with the Cut command.

The paste area can be a cell, cell range, or nonadjacent selection. If the paste area is a single cell, Paste Special uses this cell as the upper-left corner of the paste area and pastes the rest of the copied area below and to the right of this cell. If the paste area is a range or nonadjacent selection, it must be able to contain one or more rectangles the exact size and shape of the copied area.

If a group is active, Paste Special pastes properties of the copied area of each sheet into the corresponding paste area on each sheet in the group.

Paste Special can be used to combine the formulas or values in the copied cells with the formulas or values in the paste area cells. You specify whether the copied formulas or values are added to, subtracted from, multiplied by, or divided into the contents of the paste area cells.

Paste Special can also be used to transpose a range of values.

Dialog Box Options When Copied Data Is from Microsoft Excel

All

Pastes all cell attributes.

Formulas

Pastes only formulas as entered in the formula bar.

Values

Pastes only values as displayed in cells.

Formats

Pastes only cell formats.

Notes

Pastes only cell notes.

None

Completely replaces the cells in the paste area with the cells from the copy area.

Add

Adds copied formulas or values to those of the cells in the paste area.

Subtract

Subtracts copied formulas or values from those of the cells in the paste area.

Multiply

Multiplies copied formulas or values by those in the paste area.

Divide

Divides copied formulas or values into those of the paste area.

Skip Blanks

Does not paste blank cells from the copy area to your paste area, so copying a blank cell will not delete the existing data in the corresponding cell in your paste area.

Transpose

Switches the orientation of data when you paste it. Data from the top row of the copied area appears in the left column of the paste area; data from the left column appears in the top row.

Paste Link Button

Pastes copied data into the selected cells and establishes a link with the source of the data. When the source data changes, the pasted data reflects those changes. The source selection must be a single cell or a range of cells. If the source is more than one cell, Paste Link pastes an array. The paste area can be a single cell, a cell range, or a named range. If the paste area is a single cell, the upper-left cell of the copied area is pasted into the paste area, filling the rest of the range below and to the right of this cell.

Dialog Box Options When an Object Is Selected

As

Lists the different forms in which the data can be pasted. For example, copied text can be pasted as text into objects that accept text, such as a text box or button object. A copied object is pasted as a separate object at the upper-right corner of the selected object.

Paste

Pastes the information from the Clipboard onto the worksheet.

Paste Link

Links the pasted information to its source document. This button is unavailable if a link cannot be established.

Display As Icon

Displays the embedded object as an icon, representing the source application.

Dialog Box Options When Copied Data Is from Another Application

As

Lists the different forms in which the data can be pasted into Microsoft Excel. For example, text copied from a Microsoft Word document can be embedded in a Microsoft Excel worksheet as a Microsoft Word object or picture, or copied into cells as text.

Paste

Pastes the information from the Clipboard onto the worksheet. No link is established to the source document.

Paste Link

Links the pasted information to its source document. This button is unavailable if a link cannot be established.

Display As Icon

Displays the embedded object as an icon representing the source application.

See Also

Help

Calculating as you paste

Copying only the cell format

Copying only the cell formula

Copying only the cell value

Copying only visible or nonblank cells

Paste Picture Link Command (Edit Menu)

Transposing rows and columns as you paste

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Delete Row Command (Edit Menu)

Delete Row button

Deletes only visible rows or records in a filtered list. You can delete only whole rows in a filtered worksheet. The Delete Row button is in the Edit category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Advanced Filter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

AutoFilter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Overview of Filtering Data in a List

Show All Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Working with a Filtered List

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Select Sheet Dialog Box

Appears when you want to establish or redirect a link to a new workbook. Choose the name of the worksheet to which you want to refer in the Select The Sheet To Link To list box.

See Also

Help

Redirecting links to source documents

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Dynamic Data Exchange Dialog Box

Select Data Source

Select the data source you want to use.

See Also

Help

Overview of Linking and Embedding


Edit Buttons Category

Clear Contents Button

Removes the contents from selected cells without affecting formats or notes.

Clear Formats Button

Removes formats only; cell contents and notes are unchanged.

Copy Button

Copies the selection onto the Clipboard.

Cut Button

Removes the selection from the sheet and places it on the Clipboard.

Delete Button

Completely removes selected cells from a worksheet.

Delete Column Button

Completely removes selected columns from a worksheet.

Delete Row Button

Completely removes selected rows from a worksheet.

Fill Down Button

Copies the formats and data of the top cell or cells of a selected range into the lower cells of the range.

Fill Right Button

Copies the formats and data of the leftmost cell or cells of a selected range into the cells to the right.

Format Painter Button

Copies only the formats from the selected cells or objects.

Insert Button

Inserts a range of blank cells equivalent in size and shape to the selected cell range, or inserts a selection you defined with the Copy or Cut command.

Insert Column Button

Inserts a new blank column to the left of the selected column.

Insert Row Button

Inserts a new blank row above the selected row.

Paste Button

Pastes the contents of the Clipboard onto a sheet, or within the cell or formula bar, if it's active.

Paste Formats Button

Pastes into the selection only the cell formats from the cells that you have copied onto the Clipboard.

Paste Values Button

Pastes into the selection only the values from the cells that you have copied onto the Clipboard.

Repeat Button

Repeats the last command you chose, if possible, including any dialog box option settings.

Undo Button

Reverses the last command you chose, if possible, or deletes the last entry you typed.


Format Painter Button

Copies only the formats from the selected cells or objects. The copied formats are then pasted into the cells or objects that you select next. The Format Painter button is on the Standard Toolbar.

If you double-click this button, you can continue to paste formats to multiple locations. Click the button again once when you want to stop pasting formats.

The Format Painter button does not copy the selection to the Clipboard.

If you had a range selected before clicking the Format Painter button and you click a single cell with the Format Painter cursor, that cell is used as the upper-left corner of the paste area and a range the same size as the selected range is pasted.

If the paste area is smaller than the copied area, but not a single cell, the copied formats are applied only to the selected paste area.

The pointer changes to a paintbrush when you click this button.

See Also

Help

Copying formats using the Format Painter button

Copying only the cell format

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Paste Formats Button

Pastes into the selection only the cell formats from the cells that you have copied onto the Clipboard. Use the Format Painter button to quickly copy formats from a single cell to other ranges. The Paste Formats button is in the Edit category.

The paste area can be a cell, cell range, or nonadjacent selection.

If the paste area is a single cell, the Paste Values button uses this cell as the upper-left corner of the paste area and pastes the rest of the copied area below and to the right of this cell.

If the paste area is a range or nonadjacent selection, it must be able to contain one or more rectangles the exact size and shape of the copied area.

This button is available for worksheets and macro sheets only.

If you hold down SHIFT while clicking this button, it functions the same way as the Paste Values button.

See Also

Help

  Format Painter Button

  Paste Values Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Copying only the cell format

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets)


Paste Values Button

Pastes only the values from the cells that you have copied onto the Clipboard. The Paste Values button is in the Edit category.

The paste area can be a cell, cell range, or nonadjacent selection.

If the paste area is a single cell, the Paste Values button uses this cell as the upper-left corner of the paste area and pastes the rest of the copied area below and to the right of this cell.

If the paste area is a range or nonadjacent selection, it must be able to contain one or more rectangles the exact size and shape of the copied area.

This button is available only on worksheets and macro sheets.

If you hold down SHIFT while clicking this button, it functions the same way as the Paste Formats button.

See Also

Help

  Format Painter Button

  Paste Formats Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Copying only the cell value

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets)


Editing a Worksheet

Overview of Editing Data Within a Cell or in the Formula Bar

Copying or moving characters within a cell

Editing cell contents

Overview of Copying and Moving Cells

Copying cells

Moving cells

Inserting cut or copied cells

Pasting multiple copies

Copying and moving with the shortcut menu

Calculating as you paste

Copying only the cell format

Copying only the cell formula

Copying only the cell value

Copying only visible or nonblank cells

Transposing rows and columns as you paste

Overview of Inserting, Deleting, and Clearing Cells, Rows, and Columns

Inserting blank cells

Inserting rows and columns

Deleting cells

Deleting rows and columns

Clearing cells

Clearing rows and columns

Overview of Finding and Replacing Text, Numbers, or Cells

Finding text or numbers

Finding and replacing text or numbers

Overview of Checking Spelling

Checking spelling

Creating a custom dictionary


Overview of Editing Data Within a Cell or in the Formula Bar

You can edit a cell on your worksheet by typing a new entry over an existing one, or by editing part of the information within the cell or in the formula bar. To edit only part of the cell contents, double-click directly in a cell or click in the formula bar. Use keys or the mouse to move and select, and commands to edit the cell contents.

In cells containing text, you can also apply different font formats to individual characters or words. See Changing the font, size, and color of characters.

See Also

Help

Copying or moving characters within a cell

Editing cell contents

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Copying or moving characters within a cell

Overview

To copy or move characters within a cell

1.	Select the cell containing the data you want to copy or move.

2.	In the cell or the formula bar, select the characters you want to copy or move.

3.	To copy the selection, click the Copy button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+C

To move the selection, click the Cut button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+X

4.	Move the insertion point where you want to paste the characters.

5.	Click the Paste button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+V

To copy or move all or part of a cell entry into another cell

1.	Select the cell containing the data you want to copy or move.

2.	In the cell or the formula bar, select the characters you want to copy or move.

3.	To copy the selection, click the Copy button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+C

Then press ESC or ENTER to deactivate the cell or formula bar.

To move the selection, click the Cut button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+X

4.	Select the cell that you want to copy or move to.

5.	In the cell or the formula bar, select the characters you want to replace, or position the insertion point where you want to paste the data.

6.	Click the Paste button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+V

See Also

Help

  Copy Button

  Cut Button

  Paste Button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Editing cell contents

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Editing cell contents

Overview

To edit cell contents

1.	Double-click the cell containing the data you want to edit.

To edit in the formula bar, click in the formula bar. If the formula bar is not displayed, choose Formula Bar from the View menu.

2.	Edit the cell contents.

3.	To enter your changes into the cell, click the enter box or press ENTER.

To cancel edits, click the cancel box or press ESC.

To delete characters

To delete	Press

The character to the left	BACKSPACE

The character to the right	DEL

See Also

Help

Copying or moving characters within a cell

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Formula Bar Command (View Menu)

Overview of Formatting Characters in Cells

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Overview of Inserting, Deleting, and Clearing Cells, Rows, and Columns

You can easily insert, delete, or clear cells, rows, or columns. When you insert cells, the existing cells are shifted to make space for the new cells. When you delete cells, the surrounding cells shift to fill in the space. When you clear cells, the cell contents are removed and the empty cells remain.

See Also

Help

Clearing cells

Clearing rows and columns

Deleting cells

Deleting rows and columns

Inserting blank cells

Inserting rows and columns

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Clearing cells

Overview

Clearing a cell clears the contents (formulas and data), formats, notes, or all three from a cell. If a cell is cleared, its value is zero and a formula referring to that cell will receive a value of zero. Deleting a cell completely removes the cell from the worksheet and moves adjacent cells to close up the space.

1.	Select a cell or range of cells that you want to clear.

2.	From the Edit menu choose Clear, and then choose All, Contents, Formats, or Notes.

Shortcut:	DEL (clears contents)

To clear cells by dragging

1.	Select a cell or range of cells that you want to clear.

2.	To clear only the cell contents, drag the fill handle up until the selection is gray, and then release the mouse button.

To clear contents, formats, and notes, press CTRL and drag the fill handle up until the entire selection is gray. Release the mouse button first, and then the CTRL key.

See Also

Help

  Clear Contents Button

  Clear Formats Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Clear Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets)

Clearing rows and columns

Edit Buttons Category

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Clearing rows and columns

Overview

Clearing a row or column clears the contents (formulas and data), formats, notes, or all three from the row or column. Deleting a row or column completely removes the row or column from the worksheet and moves adjacent rows or columns to close up the space.

1.	Select a row or column.

To clear more than one row or column, extend the selection to include all the rows or columns you want to clear.

2.	From the Edit menu choose Clear, and then choose All, Contents, Formats, or Notes.

Shortcut:	DEL (clears contents)

See Also

Help

Clear Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets)

Clearing cells

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Deleting cells

Overview

Deleting a cell completely removes the cell from the worksheet and moves adjacent cells to close up the space. If a cell is deleted, it no longer exists. A formula referring to the deleted cell will not be able to find it and will return the #REF! error value. Clearing a cell clears the contents (formulas and data), formats, notes, or all three from a cell.

1.	Select a cell or range of cells that you want to delete.

2.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Delete.

Shortcut:	CTRL+MINUS SIGN

3.	Select the Shift Cells Left or Shift Cells Up option button.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Delete Command (Edit Menu)

Deleting rows and columns

Inserting blank cells

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Deleting rows and columns

Overview

Deleting a row or column completely removes the row or column from the worksheet and moves adjacent rows or columns to close up the space. Clearing a row or column clears the contents (formulas and data), formats, notes, or all three from the row or column.

1.	Select a row or column.

To delete more than one row or column, extend the selection to include all the rows or columns you want to delete.

2.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Delete.

Shortcut:	CTRL+MINUS SIGN

See Also

Help

  Delete Column Button

  Delete Row Button

Delete Command (Edit Menu)

Deleting cells

Edit Buttons Category

Inserting rows and columns

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Inserting blank cells

Overview

1.	Select a cell or range of cells.

The range of cells selected should be the same size as the range of blank cells you want to insert.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Cells.

You can also choose Insert from the shortcut menu.

Shortcut:	CTRL+SHIFT+PLUS SIGN

To insert blank cells by dragging

1.	Select a cell or range of cells above or to the left of where you want to insert new, blank cells.

2.	Position the mouse pointer over the fill handle, press SHIFT and drag the fill handle down or to the right.

See Also

Help

Deleting cells

Insert and Insert Paste Commands (Shortcut Menu)

Inserting cut or copied cells

Inserting rows and columns

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Inserting rows and columns

Overview

1.	Select a row or column.

To insert more than one row or column, extend the selection to include the number of rows or columns you want to insert.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Rows or Columns.

You can also choose Insert from the shortcut menu.

Shortcut:	CTRL+SHIFT+PLUS SIGN

See Also

Help

  Insert Column Button

  Insert Row Button

Columns Command (Insert Menu)

Deleting rows and columns

Inserting blank cells

Rows Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Overview of Copying and Moving Cells

You can change the location of cells on a worksheet by copying or moving cells to a different part of the same worksheet, to another worksheet, or to another application.

When you copy a cell, you duplicate the cell contents and paste them in a new location. When you move cells, you remove the cells and their contents from the current location, and paste them in a new location. You can insert the cells you are copying or moving between existing cells, or you can paste cells over existing cells.

There are several ways to copy or move cells. Use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands, toolbar buttons, or shortcut keys if you are copying or moving cells within a large worksheet, to a different sheet within a workbook, or to another window or application. These methods use the Clipboard.

If you are copying or moving across short distances on a worksheet, you can use the mouse to copy and move cells.

See Also

Help

Calculating as you paste

Copying and moving with the shortcut menu

Copying cells

Copying only the cell format

Copying only the cell formula

Copying only the cell value

Copying only visible or nonblank cells

Inserting cut or copied cells

Moving cells

Pasting multiple copies

Transposing rows and columns as you paste


Calculating as you paste

Overview

1.	Select the cell containing the formula or value you want to copy.

2.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Copy.

Shortcuts:	Copy button

CTRL+C

3.	Select the upper-left cell of the paste area or select the entire paste area.

Selecting a single cell is easiest, because it may be difficult to determine the size and shape of the transposed copy area. The area of the selected cells and the range where you want to paste cannot overlap.

4.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

5.	To combine the copied cells' formulas with the paste area cells, select the Formulas option button.

To combine the copied cells' values with the paste area cells, select the Values option button.

6.	Under Operation, select the operation you want used to combine each copied cell and its corresponding paste area cell.

If you select the Divide option button, Microsoft Excel divides the paste area cell value or formula by the copied cell value or formula. If you select the Subtract option button, Microsoft Excel subtracts the copied cell value or formula from the paste area cell value or formula.

7.	Choose the OK button.

Note  When combining data from more than one worksheet, you can also use the procedures for linking and consolidating data between worksheets.

Tip  If you want to increase a range of numbers by a certain percentage, multiply the value of a single cell containing the percentage and paste it to a range.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 26, "Consolidating Data"


Copying and moving with the shortcut menu

Overview

If you are moving or copying cells a short distance within a worksheet, you can use the mouse to display a shortcut menu with special copy and move commands.

1.	Select the cell or cells you want to copy or move.

2.	Position the mouse pointer over the border of the selection.

3.	Press the right mouse button while dragging the selection to where you want to paste it.

While you drag, a border appears to indicate the size and position of the selection.

If the paste area is located beyond the visible portion of the worksheet, drag the selection to the edge of the window to scroll through the worksheet.

4.	When you release the mouse button, a menu appears with several copy or move commands. Choose a command from the menu.

See Also

Help

Copying cells

Dragging data between applications

Moving cells

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Copying cells

Overview

1.	Select the cells containing the data you want to copy.

2.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Copy.

Shortcuts:	Copy button

CTRL+C

3.	Select the upper-left cell of the paste area or select the entire paste area.

Any values or formulas in the paste area will be replaced.

4.	From the Edit menu or shortcut menu, choose Paste.

Shortcuts:	Paste button

ENTER

CTRL+V

If you choose Paste from the Edit menu or click the Paste button instead of pressing ENTER, you can then repeat steps 3 and 4 to paste the data in additional locations.

To insert the copied cells and shift the existing cells to accommodate the inserted cells, choose Copied Cells from the Insert menu.

5.	If the moving border is still visible, cancel it by pressing ESC or choosing another command.

To copy cells by dragging

If you are copying cells a short distance within a worksheet, you can use the mouse.

1.	Select the cell or cells you want to copy.

2.	Position the mouse pointer over the border of the selection.

3.	Press CTRL while dragging the selection to where you want to paste it.

While you drag, a border appears to indicate the size and position of the selection.

If the paste area is located beyond the visible portion of the worksheet, drag the selection to the edge of the window to scroll through the worksheet.

4.	To copy the data to existing cells, position the border so that it surrounds the paste area, and then release the mouse button. Any existing data in the paste area is replaced.

To insert the copied data between existing cells, press CTRL+SHIFT while dragging the selection to where you want to insert it. Existing cells shift to make room for the copied cells.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Cut or Copied Cells Command (Insert Menu)

Dragging data between applications

Inserting cut or copied cells

Moving cells

Paste Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Copying only the cell format

Overview

1.	Select a cell with the format you want to copy.

2.	Click the Format Painter button.

The cursor changes to a paintbrush.

3.	Select the cell or a range of cells that you want to apply the formatting to.

Note  If you double-click the Format Painter button, you can continue to paste formats to multiple locations. Click the button once to return to the normal state.

Alternate Method

Use this method if you are pasting formats between worksheets or workbooks.

1.	Select the cells with the formats you want to copy.

2.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Copy.

3.	Select the upper-left cell of the paste area or select the entire paste area.

4.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

5.	Select the Formats option button.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Format Painter Button

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Copying only the cell formula

Overview

1.	Select the cells with the formulas you want to copy.

2.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Copy.

Shortcuts:	Copy button

CTRL+C

3.	Select the upper-left cell of the paste area or select the entire paste area.

4.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

5.	Under Paste, select the Formulas option button.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Copying only the cell value

Overview

1.	Select the cells with the values you want to copy.

2.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Copy.

Shortcuts:	Copy button

CTRL+C

3.	Select the upper-left cell of the paste area or select the entire paste area.

4.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

5.	Under Paste, select the Values option button.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Paste Values Button

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Copying only visible or nonblank cells

Overview

To copy only visible cells

Use this procedure to avoid selecting cells that are in hidden rows and columns.

1.	Select the cells you want to copy.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Go To.

3.	Choose the Special button.

4.	Select the Visible Cells Only option button.

Shortcut:	Select Visible Cells button (Utility category)

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Copy.

Shortcuts:	Copy button

CTRL+C

7.	Select the upper-left cell of the paste area or select the entire paste area.

8.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Paste.

If the paste area contains collapsed rows or columns, Microsoft Excel pastes the copy area into consecutive rows or columns even if they are not visible. You may need to expand the paste area to see all of the copied cells.

To copy only nonblank cells

When you use this procedure, copying a blank cell will not overwrite an existing cell's data in the paste area.

1.	Select the cells you want to copy.

2.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Copy.

Shortcuts:	Copy button

CTRL+C

3.	Select the upper-left cell of the paste area or select the entire paste area.

4.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

5.	Select the Skip Blanks check box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Select Visible Cells Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Go To Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)


Inserting cut or copied cells

Overview

1.	Select the cells containing the data you want to cut or copy.

2.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Cut or Copy.

Shortcuts:	Copy button

Cut button

CTRL+X (cut)

CTRL+C (copy)

3.	Select a cell where you want to place the cut or copied cells.

4.	From the Insert menu, choose Cut Cells or Copied Cells.

The Insert dialog box appears.

5.	Select the direction you want to move the surrounding cells.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Copying cells

Cut Command (Edit Menu)

Cut or Copied Cells Command (Insert Menu)

Inserting blank cells

Moving cells

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Moving cells

Overview

1.	Select the cell or cells you want to move.

2.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Cut.

Shortcuts:	Cut button

CTRL+X

If you want to move the cells to another sheet or workbook, switch to the other sheet or workbook.

3.	Select the upper-left cell of the paste area or select the entire paste area.

The cut area and paste area can overlap.

4.	To move the data to existing cells, choose Paste from the Edit menu or the shortcut menu. Any existing data in the paste area is replaced.

Shortcuts:	Paste button

ENTER

CTRL+V

To insert cells containing the moved data between existing cells, choose Cut Cells from the Insert menu. Existing cells are shifted to make room for the moved cells.

To move cells by dragging

If you are moving cells a short distance within a worksheet, you can use the mouse.

1.	Select the cell or cells you want to move.

2.	Position the mouse pointer over the border of the selection.

3.	Drag the selection to the paste area where you want to move the data.

While you drag, a border appears to indicate the size and position of the selection.

If the paste area is located beyond the visible portion of the worksheet, drag the selection to the edge of the window to scroll through the worksheet.

4.	To move the data to existing cells, position the border so that it surrounds the paste area, and then release the mouse button. Any existing data in the paste area is replaced.

To insert cells containing the moved data between existing cells, hold down SHIFT as you position the mouse pointer over the border. Drag the border to a new location and release the mouse button. Existing cells and data are shifted to make room for the new cells.

See Also

Help

Copying cells

Cut Command (Edit Menu)

Cut or Copied Cells Command (Insert Menu)

Dragging data between applications

Paste Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Pasting multiple copies

Overview

1.	Select the cell or cells you want to copy.

2.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Copy.

Shortcuts:	Copy button

CTRL+C

3.	To paste the same cells in several places on your worksheet, select the upper-left cell of each paste area.

You can select nonadjacent cells by holding down the [image] key as you select them.

You can select nonadjacent cells by holding down the CTRL key as you select them.

4.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Paste.

5.	To paste the same copy area again, repeat steps 3 and 4.

6.	To cancel the moving border after you have finished copying, press ESC or choose another command.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Copying cells

Cut or Copied Cells Command (Insert Menu)

Paste Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Transposing rows and columns as you paste

Overview

1.	Select the cells that you want to transpose.

2.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Copy.

Shortcuts:	Copy button

CTRL+C

3.	Select the upper-left cell of the paste area or select the entire paste area.

Selecting a single cell is easiest, because it may be difficult to determine the size and shape of the transposed copy area. The area of the selected cells and the range where you want to paste cannot overlap.

4.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

5.	Select the Transpose check box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Overview of Finding and Replacing Text, Numbers, or Cells

You can quickly find cells that contain specific characters on all sheets except Visual Basic modules. You can replace a sequence of characters with another sequence of characters in cells throughout a sheet, in a selection of sheets, or in the current selection on a single sheet or group of sheets. You can also find and select cells with specific types of contents.

See Also

Help

Finding and replacing text or numbers

Finding text or numbers

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Finding text or numbers

Overview

1.	Select the area of the worksheet you want to search.

If a single cell is selected, Microsoft Excel searches the entire worksheet.

If a group of sheets is selected, all sheets in the group, except Visual Basic modules, are searched.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Find.

Shortcut:	CTRL+F

3.	In the Find What box, type the characters you want to search for.

You can include any letter, number, punctuation mark, or wildcard character in your search. To search for an actual wildcard character (* or ?), precede it with a tilde (~).

4.	Select the Match Case check box if you want Microsoft Excel to use the exact combination of uppercase and lowercase characters you entered in the Find What box.

5.	Select the Find Entire Cells Only check box if you want Microsoft Excel to find only exact and complete matches of the specified characters.

6.	Under Search, select the direction in which you want Microsoft Excel to search, either across rows or down columns.

If you hold down SHIFT while choosing the Find Next button, Microsoft Excel reverses the direction, searching right to left across rows or up columns.

7.	Under Look In, select Formulas, Values, or Notes.

Microsoft Excel searches for the characters you type in only the location you specify.

8.	Choose the Find Next button.

9.	To find the next occurrence of the characters, choose the Find Next button again.

To replace the selected characters with another set of characters, choose the Replace button. The Replace dialog box is displayed.

10.	When you are finished, choose the Close button.

See Also

Help

Find Command (Edit Menu)

Finding and replacing text or numbers

Replace Command (Edit Menu)

Selecting cells with common types of contents

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Finding and replacing text or numbers

Overview

1.	Select the area of the worksheet in which you want to replace characters.

If a single cell is selected, Microsoft Excel searches the entire worksheet.

If a group of sheets is selected, all sheets in the group, except Visual Basic modules, are searched.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Replace.

Shortcut:	CTRL+H

3.	In the Find What box, type the characters you want to search for.

You can include any letter, number, punctuation mark, or wildcard character in your search. To search for an actual wildcard character (* or ?), precede it with a tilde (~).

4.	In the Replace With box, type the characters you want to use instead.

5.	Select the Match Case check box if you want Microsoft Excel to use the exact combination of uppercase and lowercase characters you entered in the Find What box.

6.	Select the Find Entire Cells Only check box if you want Microsoft Excel to find only exact and complete matches of the specified characters.

7.	Under Search, select the direction in which you want Microsoft Excel to search, either across rows or down columns.

8.	To automatically find and replace all occurrences, choose the Replace All button.

To find and replace just the next occurrence, choose the Find Next button and then choose the Replace button. After you choose the Replace button, Microsoft Excel automatically finds the next occurrence.

9.	When you are finished, choose the Close button.

See Also

Help

Find Command (Edit Menu)

Finding text or numbers

Replace Command (Edit Menu)

Selecting cells with common types of contents

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Checking spelling

Overview

1.	Select the items for which you want to check spelling.

If a single cell is selected, the entire sheet, including headers, footers, embedded charts, text boxes, cell notes, and buttons, is checked for spelling errors.

If more than one sheet is selected, the spelling on all currently selected sheets, except Visual Basic modules, is checked.

You can also select and check the spelling of single words or groups of words in an active cell or in the formula bar.

2.	Click the Spelling button.

Shortcut:	F7

3.	When Microsoft Excel selects an unknown word, select the options you want in the Spelling dialog box to make or ignore the suggested corrections.

If no correction is suggested, you can add the currently selected word to the dictionary by choosing the Add button.

4.	When Microsoft Excel displays a message stating that it has checked all of the items you have selected, choose the OK button to close the dialog box.

See Also

Help

  Spelling Button

Creating a custom dictionary

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Creating a custom dictionary

Overview

1.	Click the Spelling button.

Shortcut:	F7

2.	In the Add Words To box, type a name for the new dictionary.

3.	Choose the Add button.

Microsoft Excel displays a message asking you if you want to create a custom dictionary.

4.	Choose the Yes button to create the dictionary.

See Also

Help

  Spelling Button

Checking spelling

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Overview of Checking Spelling

You can check spelling on all types of Microsoft Excel sheets with the Spelling command on the Tools menu or the Spelling button.

See Also

Checking spelling

Creating a custom dictionary


Entering data

Overview of Entering Numbers, Dates, and Times

Data entry techniques

Canceling or undoing an entry

Entering numbers in cells

Entering numbers with fixed decimal places

Entering a date or a time

Overview of Entering Text

Entering text in cells

Overview of Using AutoFill

Filling a range of adjacent cells

Incrementing a series of numbers or dates

Creating simple forecasts and trends

Customizing AutoFill

Entering a custom AutoFill list on a worksheet

Editing or deleting a custom AutoFill list

Turning AutoFill on or off

Types of Series


Overview of Entering Numbers, Dates, and Times

You can enter two types of data in a worksheet:

Constant values  A constant value is data that you type directly into a cell; it can be a numeric value, including dates, times, currency, percentages, fractions, scientific notation, or it can be text. Values are constant and do not change unless you select the cell and edit the value yourself.

Formulas  A formula is a sequence of constant values, cell references, names, functions, or operators that produces a new value from existing values. Formulas always begin with an equal sign (=). A value that is produced as the result of a formula can change when other values in the worksheet change.

Numbers

To enter a number as a constant value, select a cell and type the number. Numbers can include numeric characters (0 through 9) and any of the following special characters:

+ - ( ) , / $ % . E e

You can include commas in numbers, such as 1,000,000.

A single period in a numeric entry is treated as a decimal point.

Plus signs entered before numbers are ignored.

Precede negative numbers with a minus sign or enclose them within parentheses.

When you create a new worksheet, all cells use the General number format. When it can, Microsoft Excel automatically assigns the correct number format to your entry. For example, when you enter a number that contains a dollar sign before the number or a percent sign after the number, Microsoft Excel automatically changes the cell's format from General format to a currency format or a percentage format, respectively. When entered, numbers in the cell align to the right.

To include a number in a formula, just type the number. In a formula, you cannot use parentheses to indicate a negative number, a comma to separate thousands, or a dollar sign ($) before the number. If you type a percent sign (%) after a number, Microsoft Excel interprets it as the percentage operator and stores it as part of the formula. The percentage operator acts on the preceding number when the formula is calculated.

Dates and Times

Microsoft Excel ignores capitalization.

If you want to display time using the 12-hour clock, type am or pm; for example, 3:00 PM. You can also type a or p instead of am or pm; you must include a space between the time and the letter. Unless you type am or pm, Microsoft Excel automatically displays time using the 24-hour clock; for example, 15:00.

You can type a date and time in the same cell. You must separate the date and time by a space.

For entering dates, you can use either a slash (/) or a hyphen (-).

Although you can display dates and times in several standard formats, Microsoft Excel stores all dates as serial numbers and all times as decimal fractions. Because dates and times are seen as numbers, they can be added, subtracted, and included in other calculations. You can view a formatted date or time as a serial number or decimal fraction by changing the cell's format to General.

Microsoft Excel supports two date systems: the 1900 and 1904 date systems. The default date system is 1900. (This is also the date system used by Lotus 1-2-3.)

You cannot enter numbers in date or time formats directly in a formula; you must enter the date or time as text enclosed in double quotation marks. Microsoft Excel converts it to the corresponding number when calculating the formula. For example, the formula ="5/12/94"-"3/5/94" would display a difference of 68.

Tip  Enter all fractions as mixed (0 1/2) to avoid entering a date format.

See Also

Help

Canceling or undoing an entry

Data entry techniques

Entering a date or a time

Entering numbers in cells

Entering numbers with fixed decimal places

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Entering numbers in cells

Overview

1.	Select the cell or cell range into which you want to enter a number or a group of numbers.

2.	Type the number.

3.	Press ENTER.

4.	To enter additional numbers in a cell range, repeat steps 2 and 3 for each number.

Note  Numbers are right-aligned in cells. Microsoft Excel automatically assigns a built-in number format if it can. You can change the format or create a custom number format of your own.

See Also

Help

Assigning a number, date, or time format

Canceling or undoing an entry

Creating and deleting custom number formats

Data entry techniques

Entering a date or a time

Formatting numbers with toolbar buttons

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Entering numbers with fixed decimal places

Overview

1.	Press NUM LOCK.

This allows you to use the numeric keypad for entering numbers.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

3.	Select the Edit tab.

4.	Select the Fixed Decimal check box, and then select the number of decimal places in the Places box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

You can now enter numbers without typing the period for the decimal place.

Tip  If you are entering currencies, you can use the Currency Style button to format the cells either before or after typing the entries.

See Also

Help

  Currency Style Button

Canceling or undoing an entry

Data entry techniques

Entering numbers in cells

Formatting numbers with toolbar buttons

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Entering a date or a time

Overview

1.	Select the cell into which you want to enter a date or a time.

2.	Type the date or time.

You can use either a slash or hyphen when you enter dates. Capitalization is ignored.

3.	Press ENTER.

Shortcuts:	CTRL+; (enters today's date)

CTRL+SHIFT+: (enters the current time)

Note  Microsoft Excel automatically assigns date and time formats. You can change the format or create a custom date or time format of your own.

See Also

Help

Assigning a number, date, or time format

Canceling or undoing an entry

Creating and deleting custom number formats

Data entry techniques

Entering numbers in cells

Formatting numbers with toolbar buttons

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Data entry techniques

Overview

To enter data in a cell or cells

1.	Select the cell or cell range into which you want to enter data.

2.	Type the data.

3.	Press ENTER.

4.	To enter additional numbers in a cell range, repeat steps 2 and 3 for each entry.

Press ENTER to move through a range from top to bottom. Press SHIFT+ENTER to move from bottom to top, TAB to move from left to right, and SHIFT+TAB to move right to left.

Tip  You can also make nonadjacent selections and then enter data into the selected cells.

To type the same entry into several cells at once

1.	Select the cells into which you want to enter data.

The selected cells can be adjacent or nonadjacent.

2.	Type the data.

3.	Press CTRL+ENTER.

The data will be entered into all of the selected cells.

Note  Numbers are automatically right-aligned; text is automatically left-aligned. Microsoft Excel automatically assigns a built-in number format if it can. You can change the format or create a custom number format of your own.

See Also

Help

Assigning a number, date, or time format

Canceling or undoing an entry

Creating and deleting custom number formats

Entering a date or a time

Entering numbers in cells

Entering text in cells

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Canceling or undoing an entry

Overview

To cancel an entry

Press ESC or click the Cancel box.

Note  Use this method to cancel an entry before you press ENTER.

To undo an entry

From the Edit menu, choose Undo Entry.

Shortcuts:	Undo button

CTRL+Z

See Also

Help

Undo and Redo Commands (Edit Menu)


Overview of Entering Text

Text is letters or any combination of numbers and letters. Any set of characters entered in a cell that Microsoft Excel does not interpret as a number, formula, date, time, logical value, or error value is interpreted as text. When you enter text, the characters align to the left in the cell.

To enter text, select a cell and type the text. A cell can hold up to 255 characters. You can format the characters within a cell individually.

You may want to enter a number as text; for example, you may want to enter a list of postal codes. You can do this by first applying the text format to the blank cells. Choose Cells from the Format menu, select the Number tab, and then select the Text category and the @ format code. Another way to enter a number as text is to precede the entry with an apostrophe.

If you want to enter an airline flight number, such as TWA395, you need only type the entry. If an entry contains characters that are not numerical, Microsoft Excel interprets it as text.

You can also enter text in formulas, charts, and text boxes. To enter text in formulas, enclose the characters in double quotation marks. For example, the formula ="Totals for  "&1994 would display the text "Totals for 1994." The labels displayed on charts are treated as text. See Overview of Changing Chart Text for procedures. Text boxes are graphic objects that contain text. See Overview of Text Boxes for procedures.

See Also

Help

Entering text in cells

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Entering text in cells

Overview

1.	Select the cell into which you want to enter text.

2.	Type the text.

3.	Press ENTER.

Microsoft Excel automatically left-aligns text in worksheet cells.

Notes  You can wrap the text inside of cells by choosing the Cells command from the Format menu, selecting the Alignment tab, and then selecting the Wrap Text check box.

To enter a number or formula as text, first format the cell as text or type an apostrophe before the entry.

See Also

Help

Canceling or undoing an entry

Creating and deleting text boxes

Data entry techniques

Formatting numbers as text

Justifying text in cells

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Overview of Using AutoFill

Use the AutoFill feature to create a series of incremental or fixed values on a worksheet by dragging the fill handle with the mouse. For example, you can copy the value from one cell into the five cells below it. In this instance, AutoFill works in the same way as the Fill commands on the Edit menu.

You can also drag the fill handle to increment a series or you can use the Series command (Edit menu, Fill submenu). For example, if you type Monday and Tuesday in consecutive columns, and then drag the fill handle to the right, Microsoft Excel fills Wednesday, Thursday and so on into the selected cells.

You can also use the AutoFill shortcut menu commands to copy formatting, formulas, or all cell contents, or to perform different types of series extensions.

Series are useful when creating table row or column headings on a worksheet, or any time you need to enter a series of incremental numbers, dates, or time periods.

Use AutoFill to create or increment a small series. Use the Series command (Edit menu, Fill submenu) to create large series or to specify a series that ends at a certain value.

Just as you can create a series that incrementally increases in value in one direction, you can create a series that decreases in value in the reverse direction. You do this by dragging the fill handle up or to the left.

You can clear data within a selection by dragging the fill handle up or to the left of the selection and stopping within the selected cells (without going past the column or the row border). The data to be cleared appears in gray as you drag the fill handle.

If you select an entire column or row, the fill handle appears at the lower-right corner of the row or column heading and not at the end of the selection.

To delete cells, hold down SHIFT while dragging the fill handle into the selection. The pointer changes to an I-beam, and the data in the rows or columns you drag over turns gray. The cells are deleted when you release the mouse button.

To shift rows or columns, hold down SHIFT while dragging the fill handle out of the selection. The pointer changes to an I-beam, and the number of rows or columns that you drag over are inserted. The surrounding rows or columns shift when you release the mouse button.

See Also

Help

Creating simple forecasts and trends

Customizing AutoFill

Editing or deleting a custom AutoFill list

Entering a custom AutoFill list on a worksheet

Filling a range of adjacent cells

Incrementing a series of numbers or dates

Turning AutoFill on or off

Types of Series

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Customizing AutoFill

Overview

To create a custom AutoFill list

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Select the Custom Lists tab.

3.	In the List Entries box, type the first term you want to use in the list.

Note  Start lists with any character except a number.

4.	Press ENTER to go to a new line.

Continue typing terms and pressing ENTER until you're done.

5.	Choose the Add button to add the current list and continue, or choose the OK button to add the current list and close the dialog box.

To create a custom AutoFill list from a list on a worksheet

1.	On a worksheet, select a list you want to use as a custom AutoFill list.

Note  Start lists with any character except a number.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

3.	Select the Custom Lists tab.

A reference to the current selection appears in the Import List From Cells box.

4.	Choose the Import button.

The list is imported into the List Entries box and the name of the list is added to the Custom Lists box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Creating simple forecasts and trends

Custom Lists Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Editing or deleting a custom AutoFill list

Entering a custom AutoFill list on a worksheet

Filling a range of adjacent cells

Turning AutoFill on or off

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Entering a custom AutoFill list on a worksheet

Overview

1.	Select the cell where you want to begin the custom list.

2.	Type an item from the custom list.

3.	Drag the fill handle across the cells you want to fill.

When you release the mouse button, the rest of the list is automatically entered. Any existing values or formulas in the cells you fill will be replaced.

See Also

Help

Customizing AutoFill

Editing or deleting a custom AutoFill list

Turning AutoFill on or off

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Incrementing a series of numbers or dates

Overview

To increment a value in a single cell

1.	Select the first cell you want in your series and enter the starting value.

2.	Hold down CTRL and drag the fill handle in the direction you want to fill.

Note  If the selected cell contains a value that Microsoft Excel would normally increment, such as a day or month name, you can prevent incrementing by holding down CTRL. This fills the contents of the selected cell into the range you drag through without incrementing the value.

To increment a series in two or more cells

1.	Select at least two cells and enter at least the first two starting values.

2.	Drag the fill handle in the direction you want to fill.

Microsoft Excel guesses at the type of series you want to create by analyzing the data type and incremental changes between cells, and fills in the rest of the selection accordingly.

To increment a series with the shortcut menu

1.	Select a cell or cells that contain numbers or dates you want to increment.

2.	Hold down the right mouse button and drag the fill handle in the direction you want to fill.

The AutoFill shortcut menu is displayed.

3.	Choose the command you want.

To increment a series using the Series command

1.	Select the first cell you want in your series.

2.	Enter the starting value of the series.

3.	Starting with the cell containing the starting value, select the cells in the row or column that you want to fill.

4.	From the Edit menu, choose Fill, and then choose Series.

5.	Under Series In, select the option you want.

6.	Under Type, select the type of series.

7.	If you selected the Date option under Type, select a unit under Date Unit.

If you choose the AutoFill option, the Date Unit will be ignored.

8.	In the Step Value box, enter a value by which you want to increment the series.

If you choose the AutoFill option, the Step Value will be ignored.

9.	To stop the series at a specific value or date, enter the value or date in the Stop Value box.

10.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Creating simple forecasts and trends

Customizing AutoFill

Filling a range of adjacent cells

Series Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Turning AutoFill on or off

Types of Series

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Filling a range of adjacent cells

Overview

To copy by dragging the fill handle

1.	Select the cell containing the data you want to copy.

2.	Drag the fill handle across the cells you want to fill and then release the mouse button.

Any existing values or formulas in the cells you fill will be replaced.

Caution  If you drag the fill handle up or to the left of a selection and stop in the selected cells without going past the first column or the top row, you will erase your data within the selection.

To copy using the Fill Right and Fill Down commands

1.	Select the cell or cells you want to copy and the adjacent cells you want to fill.

You can make a nonadjacent selection; in this case, each range in the selection is filled from the cells in the same range.

2.	To copy the selection's first column into the adjacent cells to the right, choose Fill from the Edit menu, and then choose Right.

Shortcuts:	Fill Right button (Edit category)

CTRL+R

To copy the selection's first row into the adjacent cells below, choose Fill from the Edit menu, and then choose Down.

Shortcuts:	Fill Down button (Edit category)

CTRL+D

To copy the selection's last column into the adjacent cells to the left, hold down SHIFT, choose Fill from the Edit menu, and then choose Left.

Shortcut:	SHIFT+Fill Right button (Edit category)

To copy the selection's last row into the adjacent cells above, hold down SHIFT, choose Fill from the Edit menu, and then choose Up.

Shortcut:	SHIFT+Fill Down button (Edit category)

Any existing values or formulas in the cells you fill will be replaced.

See Also

Help

Creating simple forecasts and trends

Customizing AutoFill

Down Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Edit Buttons Category

Fill Command (Edit Menu)

Incrementing a series of numbers or dates

Left Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Right Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Turning AutoFill on or off

Up Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Creating simple forecasts and trends

Overview

To create a trend series by dragging

1.	Select three or more cells containing your starting values.

2.	Drag the fill handle in the direction you want to fill.

To create a linear or growth trend series using the AutoFill shortcut menu

1.	Select the cell range containing the values on which you want to base your trend.

2.	Hold down the right mouse button and drag the fill handle the direction you want to fill.

The AutoFill shortcut menu is displayed.

3.	Choose Linear Trend or Growth Trend.

To create a linear or growth trend series using the Series command

1.	Select the cell range containing the values on which you want to base your trend.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Fill, and then choose Series.

3.	Under Series In, select the Rows option button or the Columns option button, depending on your selection.

4.	Under Type, select the Linear option button to produce a linear growth trend, or select the Growth option button to create an exponential growth trend.

5.	Select the Trend check box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Adding a trendline to a data series

GROWTH Function

Growth Trend Command (Shortcut Menu)

Incrementing a series of numbers or dates

Linear Trend Command (Shortcut Menu)

Series Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

TREND Function

Turning AutoFill on or off

Types of Series

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Editing or deleting a custom AutoFill list

Overview

Note  You can't edit or delete the built-in AutoFill lists.

To edit a custom AutoFill list

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Select the Custom Lists tab.

3.	In the Custom Lists box, select the list you want to edit.

4.	In the List Entries box, make the changes you want.

5.	When you are finished, choose the Add button.

The list you edited moves to the bottom of the Custom Lists box.

To delete a custom AutoFill list

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2	Select the Custom Lists tab.

3.	In the Custom Lists box, select the list you want to delete.

4.	Choose the Delete button.

See Also

Help

Customizing AutoFill

Editing or deleting a custom AutoFill list

Entering a custom AutoFill list on a worksheet

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Turning AutoFill on or off

Overview

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2. Select the Edit tab.

3.	Select the Allow Cell Drag And Drop check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Turning the drag and drop option on or off also turns AutoFill on or off.

See Also

Help

Edit Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Types of Series

You can create several types of series in Microsoft Excel.

Time

A time series can include increments of days, weeks, or months that you specify, or repeating sequences such as weekdays, month names, or quarters. For example, the initial time selections in the following table result in the series shown.

Initial selection	Extended series

9:00	10:00, 11:00, 12:00

Mon	Tue, Wed, Thu

Monday	Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday

Jan	Feb, Mar, Apr

Jan-92, Apr-92	Jul-92, Oct-92, Jan-93

Jan, Apr	Jul, Oct, Jan

15-Jan, 15-Apr	15-Jul, 15-Oct

1991, 1992	1993, 1994, 1995

Q2	Q3, Q4, Q1

Qtr2	Qtr3, Qtr4, Qtr1

Linear

When you create a linear series, Microsoft Excel increases or decreases values by a constant value as shown in the following table.

Initial selection	Extended series

1, 2	3, 4, 5

1, 3	5, 7, 9

100, 95	90, 85

Growth

When you create a growth series, Microsoft Excel multiplies values by a constant factor as shown in the following table.

Initial selection	Extended series

2 (step value 2)	4, 8, 16

2 (step value 3)	6, 18, 54

AutoFill

This extends several types of data. The AutoFill feature logically repeats some series, for example, Qtr3, Qtr4, Qtr1. You can use the AutoFill feature directly on your worksheet by dragging, or with the Series command (Edit menu, Fill submenu) as shown in the following table.

Initial selection	Extended series

Qtr3	Qtr4, Qtr1, Qtr2

1st Period	2nd Period, 3rd Period

Product 1	Product 2, Product 3

Product 1: On backorder	Product 2: On backorder

1, 3, 4	5.66, 7.16, 8.66

The last example in the preceding table is a best-fit trend.

Notice in the next-to-last example in the preceding table that Microsoft Excel can extend part of a range, and fill another part. Microsoft Excel identified "Product 1" as an AutoFill data type that it could increment, and "On backorder:" as a text data type that it could fill.

Note  Data plotted in a chart is referred to as a data series. Chart data series are not related to the series created using the Series command on the Data menu or the fill handle. For more information about chart data series, see Creating a Chart.

See Also

Help

Creating simple forecasts and trends

Filling a range of adjacent cells

Incrementing a series of numbers or dates

Series Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Solver Messages

Active document is not a worksheet or is protected.

Attempt to register SOLVER.DLL failed.

By Changing Cells references must be on the active sheet.

Can't find worksheet.

Cannot find Solver add-in.

Cannot guess the By Changing Cells value without a Set Target Cell.

Cell Reference box is empty or contents are not valid.

Constraint must be a number, simple reference, or formula with a numeric value.

Hardware error: Unexpected floating-point exception (probable math coprocessor fault). Please contact your hardware vendor.

Integer constraint cell reference must include only By Changing Cells.

Integer tolerance must be a number between 0 and 100.

Internal error: Can't find report information on macro sheet.

Load Model: Invalid Adjustable Cells reference.

Load Model: Invalid constraint formula.

Load Model: Invalid Set Target Cell formula.

Max Time or Iterations must be a positive number.

Model cannot be saved in this area.

No constraint to change.

No constraint to delete.

Precision value must be a number between 0 and 1.

Problem to solve not specified.

Reference not large enough to hold model; n cells required.

Replace existing scenario named (scenario name)?

Report not meaningful for problem with integer constraints.

Reports terminated at user's request.

Reset all Solver options and cell selections?

Reset previous Solver cell selections?

Set Target Cell contents must be a formula.

Set Target Cell must be a single cell on the active sheet.

Set Target Cell must have precedents containing numbers on the active sheet.

Solver interrupted; choose Tools Solver to resume.

Solver: An unexpected internal error occurred. Please verify that your model is correctly entered and all cells contain numeric values.

Too many adjustable cells.

Too many constraints.

Unequal number of cells in Cell Reference and Constraint.

You must enter a valid name for the scenario.


By Changing Cells references must be on the active sheet.

The cell references you entered in the By Changing Cells box in the Solver Parameters dialog box are not on the active worksheet. Enter references to cells on the active sheet. If the wrong sheet was active when you chose Solver from the Tools menu, choose the Close button in the Solver Parameters dialog box, switch to the correct worksheet, and try again.


Active document is not a worksheet or is protected.

You chose the Solver command from the Tools menu when the active document was a module, or a Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro sheet, or a worksheet whose contents were protected.


Cell Reference box is empty or contents are not valid.

The Cell Reference box in the Add Constraint or Change Constraint dialog box is empty or does not contain a cell reference. Select the cell you want to constrain, or choose the Cancel button if you don't want to add a constraint.


Constraint must be a number, simple reference, or formula with a numeric value.

The contents of the Constraint box in the Add Constraint or Change Constraint dialog box are something other than a number, reference, or a formula. Correct the contents and try again.


No constraint to change.

You chose the Change button before selecting a constraint in the Subject To The Constraints box. Select the constraint you want to change, and choose the Change button again.


Unequal number of cells in Cell Reference and Constraint.

You entered a range of cells such as $A$1:$A$5 in both the Cell Reference and the Constraint boxes in the Add Constraint or Change Constraint dialog box, but the number of cells in the two ranges is not the same. Edit one or both of the boxes so that the number of cells in the two ranges match. Solver will create constraints using the relation between corresponding pairs of cells in the two ranges that you enter.


Integer constraint cell reference must include only By Changing Cells.

Although you can apply general constraints to cells other than the cells you indicated in the By Changing Cells box, only changing cells can be constrained to be integers.


Replace existing scenario named scenario name?

You tried to save Solver results as a scenario, but the name you proposed already exists. Choose the OK button to overwrite the original file with the new one, or choose the Cancel button to close the error message box, and enter a new name for the results.


Attempt to register SOLVER.DLL failed.

Solver's dynamic link library (DLL) in Microsoft Excel for Windows, or its code resource in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh, cannot be found. You may have accidentally deleted it from your disk, or you may have changed the current directory before the Solver macro sheet could be properly initialized. Reinstall Solver with the Setup program, then restart Microsoft Excel and try again.


Hardware error: Unexpected floating-point exception (probable math coprocessor fault). Please contact your hardware vendor.

The Solver attempted to use SOLVER.DLL when a CALL( ) function returned a #NUM! error. This is a very rare error. You should contact your hardware vendor.


Load Model: Invalid Set Target Cell formula.

The first cell in the model cell range does not contain a valid formula such as =MAX($B$7). You might have started the selection with the wrong cell. Check the range on the worksheet and its contents, and try again.


Load Model: Invalid Adjustable Cells reference.

The second cell in the model cell range does not contain a valid formula referencing the changing cells. You might have started the selection with the wrong cell. Check the range on the worksheet and its contents, and try again.


Load Model: Invalid constraint formula.

One of the cells in the model cell range after the first two cells does not contain a valid logical formula for a constraint such as =$B$1>=0. Check that each formula starts with an equal sign (=) and that the range ends with the correct cell, and try again.


Reset previous Solver cell selections?

You chose the Load Model button in the Solver Options dialog box. Choose the OK button if you want to load a new problem and delete the previous cell selections; choose the Cancel button if you want to retain the current selections and save the model.


Solver: An unexpected internal error occurred. Please verify that your model is correctly entered and all cells contain numeric
Solver: An unexpected internal error occurred. Please verify that your model is correctly entered and all cells contain numeric values.

Solver tried to use an Excel command-equivalent that failed (eg: OPEN( ) to open a file).


Solver interrupted; choose Tools Solver to resume.

You pressed ESC in Microsoft Excel for Windows or [image] +PERIOD in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh, and interrupted Solver. Choose the OK button. If you want to start Solver again, choose the Solver command from the Tools menu.


No constraint to delete.

You chose the Delete button before selecting a constraint in the Subject To The Constraints box. Select the constraint you want to delete, and choose the Delete button again.


Cannot guess the By Changing Cells value without a Set Target Cell.

You chose the Guess button before entering anything in the Set Target Cell box. Solver guesses the By Changing Cells value based on the precedents of the formula in the target cell. Enter a cell reference in the Set Target Cell box, and choose the Guess button again.


Set Target Cell must have precedents containing numbers on the active sheet.

The target cell you specified either has no precedents (cells to which its formula refers) or has precedents on other worksheets. In order to reach the goal you specified for the Set Target Cell, Solver must be able to adjust cells on the active sheet on which the target cell depends.


Problem to solve not specified.

You chose the Solve button before specifying the problem in the Solver Parameters dialog box. Either enter information in the Solver Parameters dialog box, or choose the Load Model button to load an existing model, and then choose the Solve button again.


You must enter a valid name for the scenario.

You chose the OK button in the Save Scenario dialog box before entering anything in the Scenario Name box. Scenarios must be named so that they can be selected in Scenario Manager. Enter a name in the Scenario Name box, and then choose the OK button.


Set Target Cell must be a single cell on the active sheet.

You entered a cell range or more than one cell reference in the Set Target Cell box in the Solver Parameters dialog box, or you entered a reference to a cell that is not on the active worksheet. The Set Target Cell box must contain a reference to a single cell on the active sheet. Enter a single cell on the active sheet in the Set Target Cell box, and try again. If the wrong sheet was active when you chose Solver, choose the Close button in the Solver Parameters dialog box, change the active document, and try again. If you must refer to a cell on a different sheet from the changing cells, create a linked reference to the cell in a formula on the sheet containing the changing cells; then name that cell in the Set Target Cell box. Additional target cells can be added as constraints with the Add button. For information about linking worksheets, see Overview of Linking Microsoft Excel Workbooks.


Set Target Cell contents must be a formula.

The cell named in the Set Target Cell box in the Solver Parameters dialog box is not a changing cell and contains something other than a formula (perhaps a number or text). For the cell to be part of the problem, it must contain a formula that depends, directly or indirectly, on one or more changing cells. Either change the cell named in the Set Target Cell box or change the contents of the cell to contain the appropriate formula, and try again.


Precision value must be a number between 0 and 1.

The value entered in the Precision box in the Solver Options dialog box controls the tightness of the comparison of cell values with their corresponding constraints. It cannot be negative, nor can it be zero, because computer arithmetic always involves round-off error and is unlikely to yield a solution that satisfies all constraints perfectly. Change the value to a positive number, and try again.


Reset all Solver options and cell selections?

You chose the Reset All button in the Solver Parameters dialog box. Choose the OK button to start a new problem; choose the Cancel button if you want to retain the present settings.


Model cannot be saved in this area.

You are trying to save a model from the Solver Options dialog, and at least one piece of critical information (Objective, Changing Cells, Constraints, Options) failed to save. Make certain that you are not attempting to save the model in protected cells or in a range that contains an array.


Reference not large enough to hold model; n cells required.

The cell range you chose to contain a problem model does not include enough cells to hold all the constraints. The first two cells hold the target formula (if any) and the changing cells formula. Additional cells hold logical formulas, one for each constraint displayed in the Subject To The Constraints box in the Solver Parameters dialog box, and one containing the options specified in the Solver Options dialog box. Change the cell range to include the number of cells required, and try again. Otherwise, specify a single cell and Solver will fill the model down.


Can't find worksheet.

You closed or renamed the active worksheet containing the current Solver problem while Solver was searching for a solution or creating a report. Reopen the worksheet and select the Solve button to restart the solution process.


Max Time or Iterations must be a positive number.

You entered zero or a negative number in the Max Time or Iterations boxes. Enter a positive value less than or equal to 32,767.


Integer tolerance must be a number between 0 and 100.

The value entered in the Tolerance box in the Solver Options dialog box affects the amount of time spent searching for integer optimal solutions. It should be a value between 0 and 100 (i.e., 100 percent). A value of 5, for example, means that an integer solution that is known to be within 5 percent of the theoretical optimal solution is acceptable.


Too many adjustable cells.

You entered more changing cells than Solver allows. The maximum number of changing cells is 200. To reduce the total number of cells selected, edit the cell reference in the By Changing Cells box in the Solver Parameters dialog box.


Too many constraints.

You entered more constraints than Solver allows. The maximum number of constraints is 600, consisting of 1 upper boundary and 1 lower boundary for each of the 200 possible changing cells, plus another 200 free constraints to be applied to any of the cells in the model. You can either clear all of the cell selections with the Reset All button or remove individual constraints with the Delete button, both in the Solver Parameters dialog box.


Cannot find Solver add-in.

The file SOLVER.XLA in Microsoft Excel cannot be found. Install the Solver add-in by running the Setup program, and try again.


Internal error: Can't find report information on macro sheet.

Solver report writer can't find necessary information to create a report. Restart Microsoft Excel and run Solver again.


Reports terminated at user's request.

You pressed Cancel while Solver was creating a report. To re-create the report, run Solver again, and select the report.


Report not meaningful for problem with integer constraints.

You chose either a Sensitivity or Limits report on an integer-constrained problem. Only Answer reports are available for integer-constrained problems.


New Command (File Menu)

New Workbook button

Creates a new workbook. The New Workbook button is on the Standard toolbar.

If you save the workbook autotemplate BOOK.XLT in your startup directory or alternate startup directory, the New command will create new workbooks based on that template. If you have other templates in your startup directory, or if you have at least one non-autotemplate in your alternate startup directory, choosing the New command will display the New dialog box so you can select the template you want.

A workbook can have any number of sheets, of any type, in any order, limited only by available memory. To change the number of sheets for any new workbook, choose the Options command from the Tools menu, select the General tab, and then select the number of sheets you want in the Sheets In New Workbook box. Workbook templates take precedence over this setting.

Note  Clicking the New Workbook button opens a new workbook based on the default template. To select another template saved in the startup or alternate startup directory as the basis for your new workbook, choose the New command.

Shortcut:	CTRL+N

See Also

Help

Changing the default new workbook using an autotemplate

Creating a new workbook based on a template

General Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Inserting a new sheet based on a template

Open Command (File Menu)

Saving a workbook as a template

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"


Open Command (File Menu)

Open button

Displays the Open dialog box for you to open an existing file. You can have several workbooks open at once. The Open button is on the Standard toolbar.

In addition to opening Microsoft Excel workbooks, you can also use this command to import files in different file formats from other applications, such as Lotus 1-2-3 file formats.

If the workbook you want to open was assigned a password when it was saved with the Save As command on the File menu, you will be asked to type that password before you can open the workbook. Be sure to type the password with correct capitalization and punctuation.

If the workbook you want to open was saved with a Write Reservation Password using the Save As command on the File menu, and you do not select the Read Only check box, you will be asked to type a password to open the workbook as read-write.

If the workbook you want to open was saved with a Protection Password using the Save As command on the File menu, you will be asked to type a password to open the workbook.

To open several workbooks simultaneously, hold down CTRL while you click the names.

To reopen one of the last four workbooks you used, select that workbook's name from the bottom of the File menu.

To open any template for editing, choose the Open command and select the template you want to edit. Hold down SHIFT and choose the OK button. You can open templates saved in the startup directory or alternate startup directory using the New command on the File menu.

Shortcut:	CTRL+O (the letter O)

File Name

Displays the default file specification *.XL* and a list of the Microsoft Excel files in the current directory. Type or select the name of the file you want to open. This box lists files with the extension you select in the List Files Of Type box. To see a list of all files with a particular extension, for example .xla, type *.xla

Directories

Lists the current directory and any subdirectories that contain files. Double-click the directories and subdirectories to move through the list.

Drives

Lists the available drives. Select the drive that contains the workbook you want to open.

List Files Of Type

Lists the available file formats. Select the format of the file you want to open.

Read Only

Select this check box to open a workbook for viewing only. If you open a file as read only, you can save changes only by using the Save As command on the File menu to save the workbook with a different filename.

Find File

Closes the Open dialog box and displays the Find File dialog box for you to search for a file you want to open.

Network

Displays a dialog box of available network servers so you can connect to a different server when your system is running on the supported network.

See Also

Help

Creating a new workbook

Opening a document created by another application

Opening a workbook

Opening a workbook automatically

Opening several workbooks at one time

Requiring a password when a workbook file is opened or accessed

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"


Close and Close All Commands (File Menu)

Closes the active workbook window or an open dialog box.

To close all of a workbook's windows, use the Close command on the File menu.

To close all open windows for all workbooks, use the Close All command (hold down the SHIFT key and select the File menu).

Shortcut:	CTRL+F4 (workbook windows)

See Also

Help

Closing a workbook

Closing all workbooks

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Save Command (File Menu)

Save button

Saves changes made to the active workbook. The Save button is on the Standard toolbar.

This command replaces the previous version of the workbook with the current version.

The newly saved workbook is still displayed in the window.

If the workbook hasn't been saved yet, or if it was last saved in a file format other than Microsoft Excel Workbook format, the Save As dialog box is displayed.

Shortcut:	CTRL+S

See Also

Help

Requiring a password when a workbook file is saved

Saving a workbook

Saving a workbook using a different name or file format

Saving your work automatically

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Save As Command (File Menu)

Saves a new workbook or a new version of an existing workbook. The saved workbook remains open. You can also use this command to save files so they can be read by other applications, such as Lotus 1-2-3.

Shortcut:	F12

File Name

Saves the workbook in the current directory unless you type a full path for the workbook or select a different directory from the directory listing. Type a name for the workbook, or accept the proposed name.

Directories

Lists the current directory and any subdirectories. Double-click directories and subdirectories to move through the list.

Save File As Type

Lists the available file formats that allow you to save a workbook for use in another application. The formats available vary according to the active sheet.

Drives

Lists the available drives. Select the drive on which you want to save the workbook.

Options

Displays the Save Options dialog box, where you can choose to automatically back up your files, protect a file with a password, or make it read only.

Always Create Backup

Creates a backup copy of a workbook every time you save it.

The backup copy is the previous version of the workbook, renamed with a .BAK extension. Be sure the main part of the filename is unique. For example, if you have two workbooks, SALES.XLS and SALES.XLT, the backups for both are saved with the same backup name, SALES.BAK. This file will contain the backup for the last saved workbook.

Protection Password

Type the password required to open the selected workbook file. You are prompted to confirm the password. You can assign passwords to workbooks saved as templates and add-in macro file formats, in addition to those saved in the Microsoft Excel file format.

Write Reservation Password

Type the password required to save changes to the selected workbook under the same filename. You are prompted to confirm the password.

Read-Only Recommended

Displays a message requesting that users access the file as read-only. This message is displayed before the workbook is opened only if users have cleared the Read Only check box in the Open dialog box. The file remains read only even when it is saved under another name using the Save As command on the File menu.

Network

Displays a dialog box of available network servers so you can connect to a different server when your system is running on the supported network.

See Also

Help

Closing a workbook

Requiring a password when a workbook file is opened or accessed

Requiring a password when a workbook file is saved

Saving a document for use in another application

Saving a workbook as a template

Saving a workbook using a different name or file format

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"


Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Controls the appearance of printed sheets.

Page Setup options apply to individual sheets within a workbook.

When you are working with a group of selected sheets, any changes you make in the Page Setup dialog box apply only to the selected sheets that are of the same type as the active sheet. For example, if the active sheet were a chart sheet, changes would apply only to the chart sheets included in the group of selected sheets.

Page Tab

Controls page orientation, scaling, paper size, print quality, and starting page number.

Margins Tab

Controls the page margins, header and footer margins, and vertical and horizontal centering.

Header/Footer Tab

Select a header or footer from the built-in headers and footers. You can also customize a header and footer.

Sheet Tab

Controls print area, print titles, page order, black-and-white printing, draft quality, and printing of cell notes, cell gridlines, and row and column headings. The Sheet tab is displayed if the active sheet is a worksheet or macro sheet.

Chart Tab

Controls the size, color, and output quality of printed charts. The Chart tab is displayed if the active sheet is a chart sheet.

See Also

Help

Chart Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Header/Footer Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Margins Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Page Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Sheet Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Page Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Controls page orientation, scaling, paper size, print quality, and starting page number for the selected sheet or sheets.

Orientation

Specify the orientation for the printed image.

Portrait

Prints with the short edge of the paper horizontal.

Landscape

Prints with the long edge of the paper horizontal.

Scaling

Enlarges or reduces the printed worksheet. These options do not change the size of your sheet on the screen. Not all printer drivers support scaling, but Microsoft Excel can scale a worksheet for drivers that do not support scaling.

Adjust To

Reduces or enlarges the printed sheet. You can reduce to 10 percent of normal size, or enlarge up to 400 percent. When printing chart sheets, this option is available only when using a printer that supports scaling.

Fit To

Reduces the sheet or selection during printing so that it fits on the specified number of pages, wide or tall. You can change the number of pages wide and the number of pages tall independently of each other. The sheet or selection is scaled proportionally, preserving its relative dimensions, so it may print on fewer than the specified number of pages. Not available for chart sheets.

Paper Size

Select letter, legal, or other paper size options.

Print Quality

Select the resolution for printing your active sheet. Resolution is the number of dots per inch (DPI) that will appear on the printed page. The higher the number, the better the quality.

First Page Number

Enter the starting page number for the printed pages of this sheet.

To start the page numbering at "1" (if it is the first page in the print job), or at the next sequential number (if it is not the first page in the print job), enter AUTO.

To specify a starting page number, enter it.

Print

Displays the Print dialog box.

Print Preview

Displays the preview window.

Options

Displays the Options dialog box, in which you can choose options that are specific to your selected printer. The options available in this dialog box are specific to the printer driver that you have selected. Consult your system documentation for details.

See Also

Help

Choosing how to size a chart sheet

Previewing what will print

Reducing or enlarging what you want to print

Setting page orientation and size

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Margins Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Controls the page margins and the header and footer margins, and centers the sheet on the page vertically, horizontally, or both.

The Sample area shows which dimension you are changing.

Top

Select the distance you want between your data and the top edge of the printed page.

Bottom

Select the distance you want between your data and the bottom edge of the printed page. If your data is less than a page long, it will not expand to fill to the bottom margin.

Left

Select the distance you want between your data and the left edge of the printed page.

Right

Select the distance you want between your data and the right edge of the printed page. If your data is less than a page wide, it will not expand to fill to the right margin.

From Edge

Select the distance you want between the header and the top of the page, and between the footer and the bottom of the page. These distances should be less than your margin settings to prevent your header or footer from overlapping the data.

Center On Page

Centers the data on the page within the margins vertically, horizontally or both.

Note  To center a chart, you must first select the Chart tab in the Page Setup dialog box. Then under Printed Chart Size, choose Custom.

Print

Displays the Print dialog box.

Print Preview

Displays the preview window.

Options

Displays the Options dialog box, in which you can choose options that are specific to your selected printer. The options available in this dialog box are specific to the printer driver that you have selected. Consult your system documentation for details.

See Also

Help

Creating headers and footers

Previewing what will print

Setting margins and alignment

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Header/Footer Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Controls the headers and footers for the selected sheet. Headers and footers are descriptive text that print at the top and bottom of every page in your sheet. You can add, delete, edit, format, and position headers and footers, and view them as they will print.

Header

Select the header that you want from the list of built-in headers. The preview area above the Header box shows you what the header will look like when printed. You can create a custom header by selecting a built-in header, and then choosing the Custom Header button. The built-in header is copied to the Header dialog box, where you can format or edit the selected header. You can have only one custom header on a sheet at a time.

Footer

Select the footer that you want from the list of built-in footers. The preview area below the Footer box shows you what the footer will look like when printed. You can create a custom footer by selecting a built-in footer, and then choosing the Custom Footer button. The built-in footer is copied to the Footer dialog box, where you can format or edit the selected footer. You can have only one custom footer on a sheet at a time.

Print

Displays the Print dialog box.

Print Preview

Displays the preview window.

Custom Header

Displays the Header dialog box.

Custom Footer

Displays the Footer dialog box.

Options

Displays the Options dialog box, in which you can choose options that are specific to your selected printer. The options available in this dialog box are specific to the printer driver that you have selected. Consult your system documentation for details.

See Also

Help

Creating headers and footers

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Sheet Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Specifies which areas of the sheet you want to print, and controls the print titles, page order, and draft quality. Also controls whether gridlines, cell notes, and row and column headings print. The Sheet tab is displayed if the active sheet is a worksheet or macro sheet.

Print Area

Specify the worksheet range to print. Use this option when you will always want to print a specific range of a worksheet. If you want to print different areas each time, select the area you want to print, choose the Print command from the File menu, and then select the Selection option button.

To specify a print area, click in the Print Area box, then drag through the worksheet areas that you want to print. In the Print Area box, you can also type cell references or names corresponding to areas on the worksheet. For example, to specify the nonadjacent cells A1:B5 and D1:E5, click in the box and type a1:b5,d1:e5. These nonadjacent areas will print on separate pages.

Print Titles

Select the print titles for the selected worksheets. Titles print as titles only after the rows or columns containing them are printed. For example, if you select a row or column on the second page as print titles, the titles will print only on the third and subsequent pages.

Rows To Repeat At Top

Select the box and then, on the worksheet, select the row to use as titles, or enter a cell reference. You can select multiple adjacent rows.

Columns To Repeat At Left

Select the box and then, on the worksheet, select the column to use as titles, or enter a cell reference. You can select multiple adjacent columns.

Print

Gridlines

Prints horizontal and vertical cell gridlines on worksheets. Cell gridlines print by default. To display or hide gridlines on the screen, choose the Options command from the Tools menu, and then select the Gridlines check box on the View tab.

Black And White

Prints cells and drawing objects in black-and-white. Anything in the foreground that is not entirely white is printed as black. Anything in the background that is not entirely black is printed as white. If you formatted your data with colors but print on a black-and-white printer, select this option. If you use a color printer but want faster printing, selecting this option may reduce printing time.

Notes

Prints any cell notes on the sheet on additional pages. To print notes with their cell references, select both the Notes check box and the Row And Column Headings check box.

Row And Column Headings

Prints row numbers and column letters in the A1 reference style, or numbered rows and columns in the R1C1 reference style. This option must be selected in order to display cell references with printed cell notes or notes displayed in the Info window.

Draft Quality

Prints fewer graphics and suppresses printing of cell gridlines. This option reduces printing time.

Page Order

Controls the order in which your data is numbered and printed when it does not fit onto one page.

Down, Then Across

Numbering and printing proceed from the first page to the pages below, and then move to the right and continue printing down the sheet.

Across, Then Down

Numbering and printing proceed from the first page to the pages to the right, and then move down and continue printing across the sheet.

Print

Displays the Print dialog box.

Print Preview

Displays the preview window.

Options

Displays the Options dialog box, in which you can choose options that are specific to your selected printer. The options available in this dialog box are specific to the printer driver that you have selected. Consult your system documentation for details.

See Also

Help

Previewing what will print

Print Command (File Menu)

Printing a sheet, selected range, or entire workbook

Printing cell notes with a worksheet

Printing gridlines and row and column headings

Printing titles on multiple pages

Setting page printing order

Specifying an area of a worksheet to print

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Chart Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Controls the size and print quality of printed charts. The Chart tab is displayed if the active sheet is a chart sheet.

Printed Chart Size

Specifies how a chart will be scaled when printed.

Use Full Page

Expands the chart to fit the full width and height of the page margins. The sizes of objects relative to each other in the chart sheet may change on the printed page because the proportions of the chart are changed to fill the page.

Scale To Fit Page

Expands the chart to the nearest page margin before printing. The chart expands in both dimensions proportionally until one dimension fills the space between the margins. The sizes of objects relative to each other in the chart sheet are preserved.

Custom

Scales the chart sheet as it appears on your screen so you can adjust the chart to any size on the page.

Printing Quality

Draft Quality

For plotters, increases memory efficiency. Select this option when low memory is causing printing problems.

Print In Black And White

Prints chart data series in black and white. Patterns replace colors to distinguish the different data series. On a color printer, other areas of the chart (for example, the plot area) still print in color. By default, this check box is cleared. When cleared, colors print as grayscale on a black-and-white printer and as colors on a color printer .

Print

Displays the Print dialog box.

Print Preview

Displays the preview window.

Options

Displays the Options dialog box, in which you can choose options that are specific to your selected printer. The options available in this dialog box are specific to the printer driver that you have selected. Consult your system documentation for details.

See Also

Help

Choosing how to size a chart sheet

Previewing what will print

Print Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Print Preview Command (File Menu)

Print Preview button

Displays each page as it will look when printed. The status bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current page number and the total number of pages in the selected sheet. The Print Preview button is on the Standard toolbar.

To preview specific pages, choose the Print command, specify a print range in the From and To boxes, and then choose the Print Preview button.

How your pages appear in the preview window may vary depending on the available fonts, the resolution of the printer, and what colors are available.

If your worksheet contains an embedded chart, Print Preview displays both the worksheet and the chart. Before using Print Preview, you can move or resize the chart by dragging.

If you hold down SHIFT while clicking the Print Preview button, it functions like the Print button.

Next

Displays the next page. You can also use the scroll bars or the arrow keys to move through the previewed pages while in full page view.

Previous

Displays the previous page. You can also use the scroll bars or the arrow keys to move through the previewed pages while in full page view.

Zoom

Switches between a magnified view and a full page view. Zoom does not affect printing size. Clicking the mouse button anywhere on the sheet is equivalent to choosing the Zoom button. Use the scroll bars or the arrow keys to move around a page in magnified view, and between pages in full page view.

If you want to work with a selected sheet at a different scale of magnification, but not in the preview window, choose the Zoom command from the View menu and select a percentage. This will not affect the printed size of a page.

Print

Displays the Print dialog box. If you chose the Print Preview button from the Print dialog box, choosing this button prints the previewed pages.

Setup

Displays the tab that was last selected in the Page Setup dialog box.

Margins

Turns on or off the handles for the page margins, header and footer margins, and column widths. Dragging the handles is an easy way to adjust margins or column widths. You may not be able to move the handles to the edge of the page if the printer driver prevents printing on the edge of the page. When you drag a handle, the dimension for that item is shown in the status bar.

Close

Closes the preview window and displays the active sheet.

See Also

Help

Inserting or removing page breaks

Previewing what will print

Print Command (File Menu)

Printing a sheet, selected range, or entire workbook

Selecting a printer

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Print Command (File Menu)

Displays the Print dialog box where you can select printing options and print the selected sheet.

The active sheet is printed according to settings you have specified in the Page Setup dialog box and Print dialog box.

If you want to print an embedded chart only without the surrounding worksheet, you must first double-click the chart to display it in a chart window. You can specify the printed size of the chart using the Chart tab in the Page Setup dialog box.

If the Info window is active, information about the selected cells in the worksheet is printed.

Shortcuts:	CTRL+P

Print What

Specifies whether you want to print areas within a sheet, selected sheets, or the entire workbook.

Selection

Prints only the selected cells in the selected sheets. Nonadjacent selections are printed on separate pages. Selecting this option overrides any print areas you have defined for the selected sheets using the Print Area option on the Sheet tab of the Page Setup dialog box.

Selected Sheets

Prints the print area of each of the currently selected sheets, with each print area starting on a different page. If no print area is defined on a separate sheet, that entire sheet is printed.

Entire Workbook

Prints the entire print area of all sheets in the active workbook. If a sheet does not have a print area, that entire sheet is printed.

Copies

Specify the number of copies to print.

Page Range

Specifies which pages in the selected sheets to print.

All

Prints all the pages in the selected sheets.

Page(s)

Prints the range of pages specified in the From and To boxes. Page numbers you select in the From and To boxes affect which cells will be printed, not the numbering of the pages upon which they are printed. To change the numbering of printed pages, specify a number in the First Page Number box of the Page tab in the Page Setup dialog box.

OK

Prints the sheet.

Page Setup

Displays the tab that was last selected in the Page Setup dialog box.

Print Preview

Displays the preview window.

Printer Setup

Displays the Microsoft Windows Printer Setup dialog box, which lists available printer drivers. The Setup button displays the driver-specific settings that apply to all of your Windows applications.

See Also

Help

Displaying or removing information in the Info window

Inserting or removing page breaks

Previewing what will print

Printing a range of pages

Printing a sheet, selected range, or entire workbook

Printing cell notes with a worksheet

Selecting a printer

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Print Report Command (File Menu)

Prints a set sequence of views and scenarios.

If the Print Report command does not appear on the File menu, you need to install the Report Manager Add-in.

Reports

Select a report to print, edit, or delete.

Print

Prints the selected report.

Add

Displays the Add dialog box, in which you create reports.

Edit

Displays the Edit dialog box, in which you edit reports.

Delete

Deletes the selected report.

See Also

Help

Creating a report

Editing a report

Printing a report

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Send Command (File Menu)

Send Mail button

If your workbook does not have a routing slip, the Send command displays your electronic mail form, attaches the active workbook to an electronic mail message, and sends a copy of the workbook to the recipients you specify through your electronic mail program. The Send Mail button is on the WorkGroup toolbar.

If your workbook has a routing slip, a dialog box appears with the following options.

Route Document To <recipient>

Routes the workbook to the recipients specified on the routing slip.

Send Copy Of Workbook Without Using The Routing Slip

Mails a copy of the workbook. If the workbook has a routing slip, it will not be attached to the workbook copy that you mail.

See Also

Help

Add Routing Slip and Edit Routing Slip Commands (File Menu)

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Mailing a workbook

Routing a workbook

User's Guide

Chapter 40, "Routing Workbooks with Electronic Mail"


Add Routing Slip and Edit Routing Slip Commands (File Menu)

Routing Slip button

Displays the Routing Slip dialog box, which allows you to add routing information to the active workbook. If the workbook already has a routing slip, then the Edit Routing Slip command appears on the menu. To edit the routing slip before forwarding it to the next recipient, choose the Edit Routing Slip command. The Routing Slip button is on the WorkGroup toolbar.

From

Displays the name of the originator of the routed workbook.

To

Displays the recipients. If the workbook is routed using the One After Another option, it will follow the order shown.

Address

Adds recipients to the list in the To box.

Remove

Removes the selected recipient from the list in the To box.

Move

Reorders the selected recipient in the list in the To box.

Subject

Type the subject of the electronic mail message. The default subject is "Routing: <filename>" if the workbook's title is not specified in the workbook's Summary Info command.

Message Text

Type the message you want in the mail message.

Route To Recipients

One After Another

Routes the workbook to recipients in their order in the To box.

All At Once

Routes the workbook to all the recipients simultaneously.

Return When Done

Sends a copy of the routed workbook back to you after the last recipient closes it. When a routed workbook is returned to its originator, the recipients' names are dimmed but remain to show the route taken by the workbook.

Track Status

Sends an electronic mail notification to the originator when each recipient forwards the workbook.

Add Slip

Adds the routing slip to the workbook and closes the Routing Slip dialog box.

Route

Routes the workbook to the recipients.

Clear

Clears the list of recipients in the To box, and restores other options to their default settings. This removes the routing slip so you can fill in a new routing slip. When a workbook is returned after routing, or reaches the last recipient, the Clear button changes to the Reset button.

Reset

When a workbook is returned after routing or reaches the last recipient, the list of recipients is dimmed and the Clear button changes to the Reset button. Choose Reset to make the list in the To box available again so you can reroute the workbook without re-creating the list. After you choose the Reset button, it changes back to the Clear button.

See Also

Help

Creating and editing a routing slip

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Editing the routing slip

Opening a routed workbook

Routing a workbook

Routing a workbook to the next recipient

User's Guide

Chapter 40, "Routing Workbooks with Electronic Mail"

Reorders the selected recipient in the list in the To box.


Unhide Command (File Menu)

Lists all hidden windows. Select the one you want and choose the OK button. If the window is protected with a password, Microsoft Excel asks for the password before displaying the window.

This command appears on the File menu only when all open windows are hidden. When at least one window is visible, the Unhide command appears on the Window menu.

See Also

Help

Hide and Unhide Commands (Window Menu)

Hiding and unhiding a workbook

Protecting a Workbook

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


1, 2, 3, 4 Commands (File Menu)

Refers to the files listed at the bottom of the File menu. The names on the list are the last four files you opened. To open one of these files, select the filename you want from the list. You do not need to choose the Open command from the File menu.

See Also

Help

Opening a recently opened workbook

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Exit Command (File Menu)

Ends your Microsoft Excel work session.

If you have made changes to any open workbook, you are asked if you want to save those changes.

Shortcut:	ALT+F4

See Also

Help

Close Command (Control Menu)

Quitting Microsoft Excel

Saving a workbook

User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Installing and Starting Microsoft Excel"


Add Report and Edit Report Dialog Boxes

In the Add Report dialog box, you can create new reports. In the Edit Report dialog box, you can edit an existing report. You can name reports, create report sections, change the order of sections, and number report sections continuously.

Report Name

Type a name for the report.

Section To Add

Creates a section for this report.

Sheet

Select the sheet that you want for the section.

View

Select the view, if any, that you want for the section.

Scenario

Select the scenario, if any, that you want for the section.

Add

Choose the Add button to add the selected section to the Sections In This Report box.

Sections In This Report

Lists the sections in the current report. Sections are printed in the order listed.

Move Up

Moves the selected section earlier in the Sections In This Report box.

Move Down

Moves the selected section later in the Sections In This Report box.

Continuous Page Numbers

Numbers pages within a report consecutively. If this option is not selected, each section of the report is numbered independently.

Delete

Deletes the section selected in the Sections In This Report box.

See Also

Help

Creating a report

Editing a report

Print Report Command (File Menu)

Printing a report

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Header and Footer Dialog Boxes

In the Header dialog box or the Footer dialog box, you can customize a built-in header or footer. On the Header/Footer tab, select the header or footer you want to customize and then choose the Custom Header button or the Custom Footer button to display the Header or Footer dialog box.

Select a section of the header or footer in one of the three boxes (left, center, right) that correspond to the position of the header or footer on the page. You can click one or more of the dialog buttons to enter a header or footer code, such as the current date, and you can also type your own text in any of the three boxes.

The changes you make appear in the preview areas of the Header/Footer tab and are saved with your sheet.

You can have only one custom header and one custom footer per sheet. If you customize another header or footer, the previous custom header or footer is replaced.

Select text in the header or footer and click the Font button to display the Font tab, where you can customize your headers and footers with special fonts, font styles, and point sizes.

Delete the selected header or footer with the BACKSPACE key.

See Also

Help

Built-In Headers and Footers

Creating headers and footers

Header and Footer Codes

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


File Reservation Dialog Box

Allows you to open as read-only a file that is not now available for editing, or to be notified when the file becomes available for editing.

Read Only

Open a file for viewing only. If you open a file as read only, you can save changes only by using the Save As command on the File menu to save the workbook with a different name.

Notify

Microsoft Excel will send a notification message when the file is available for editing.

Read-Write

Open the file to edit it.

See Also

Help

Save As Command (File Menu)


Save Copy As Command (File Menu for OLE Objects)

Saves a copy of the workbook that is currently open for editing in Microsoft Excel. The active workbook resides in a document created by an OLE server application, such as Microsoft Word. The workbook remains open in Microsoft Excel and is still linked to the server application; only a copy is saved.

File Name

Saves the workbook in the current directory unless you type a full path for the workbook or select a different directory from the directory listing. Type a name for the workbook, or accept the proposed name.

Directories

Lists the current directory and any subdirectories. Double-click directories and subdirectories to move through the list.

Save File As Type

Lists the available file formats that allow you to save a workbook for use in another application. The formats available vary according to the active sheet.

Drives

Lists the available drives. Select the drive on which you want to save the workbook.

Options

Displays the Save Options dialog box, where you can choose to automatically back up your files, protect a file with a password, or make it read-only.

Always Create Backup

Creates a backup copy of a workbook every time you save it.

The backup copy is the previous version of the workbook, renamed with a .BAK extension. Be sure the main part of the filename is unique. For example, if you have two workbooks, SALES.XLS and SALES.XLT, the backups for both are saved with the same backup name, SALES.BAK. This file will contain the backup for the last saved workbook.

Protection Password

Type the password required to open the selected workbook file. You are prompted to confirm the password. You can assign passwords to workbooks saved as templates and add-in macro file formats, in addition to those saved in the Microsoft Excel file format.

Write Reservation Password

Type the password required to save changes to the selected workbook under the same filename. You are prompted to confirm the password.

Read-Only Recommended

Displays a message requesting that users access the file as read-only. This message is displayed before the workbook is opened only if users have cleared the Read Only check box in the Open dialog box. The file remains read-only even when it is saved under another name using the Save As command on the File menu.

Network

Displays a dialog box of available network servers so you can connect to a different server when your system is running on the supported network.

See Also

Help

Overview of Linking and Embedding

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Update Command (File Menu for OLE Objects)

Sends the data in the active Microsoft Excel worksheet to its OLE client application.

See Also

Help

Overview of Linking and Embedding

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Find File Command (File Menu)

  Find File button

Searches through any directory in your system or on a network to find files that meet specific criteria. Select the type of information you want Microsoft Excel to display for files found in a search. The Find File button is on the WorkGroup toolbar.

Listed Files or File Name

Displays the list of files that Microsoft Excel found in the last search. If you saved the search criteria you used with a name, that name is displayed.

View

Lists the views available in the Find File dialog box. Select the view you want.

Preview

Displays a preview of the upper-left corner of the active sheet in the workbook. Previews are available only for workbooks created by Microsoft Excel 5.0 or later.

File Info

Displays file information for a selected workbook, such as its title, its size, and the date it was last saved.

Summary

Displays summary information for the selected workbook.

Search

Displays the Search dialog box. Type or select search criteria that you want Microsoft Excel to use to search for workbooks.

Commands

Lists commands for file management operations such as copying, sorting, and printing files. Microsoft Excel carries out the command you choose on the workbooks you selected in the Find File dialog box. You can select multiple workbooks before you perform certain actions, such as printing or deleting.

Open Read Only

Opens the selected files in read-only format so that you can view but not change them. With the Update File button on the WorkGroup toolbar, you can update a read-only file to the version last saved.

Print

Select the printing options you want for the selected workbooks.

Summary

Not available in Microsoft Excel.

Delete

Deletes the selected workbooks. Microsoft Excel asks you to confirm that you want to delete the workbooks.

Copy

Displays the Copy dialog box. Specify the location to which you want the selected workbooks copied.

Sorting

Displays the Options dialog box. Determines how the files that Microsoft Excel finds in a search are to be listed.

Open

Opens the workbooks you select under Listed Files.

Close

Closes the Find File dialog box and returns you to the active workbook.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks

Overview of Managing Workbooks with Find File

Overview of Previewing Workbooks and Viewing Summary Information

Print Command (File Menu)

Summary Info Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Summary View

Displays summary information for the selected file.

Listed Files

Displays the list of files that Microsoft Excel found in the last search. If you saved the search criteria you used with a name, that name is displayed.

Summary Of [filename]

Displays summary information for the selected file. To edit the summary information, choose the Commands button, and then choose the Summary command from the menu.

Commands

Lists commands for file management operations such as copying, sorting, and printing files. Microsoft Excel carries out the command you choose on the workbooks that you selected in the Find File dialog box. You can select multiple workbooks before you perform certain actions, such as printing or deleting.

Open Read Only

Opens the selected files in read-only format so that you can view but not change them. With the Update File button on the WorkGroup toolbar, you can update a read-only file to the version last saved.

Print

Select the printing options you want for the selected workbooks.

Summary

Not available in Microsoft Excel.

Delete

Deletes the selected workbooks. Microsoft Excel asks you to confirm that you want to delete the workbooks.

Copy

Displays the Copy dialog box. Specify the location to which you want the selected workbooks copied.

Sorting

Displays the Options dialog box. Determines how the files that Microsoft Excel finds in a search are to be listed.

Open

Opens the workbooks you select under Listed Files.

Close

Closes the Find File dialog box and returns you to the active workbook.

See Also

Help

File Info View

Find File Command (File Menu)

Preview View

Search Dialog Box

Sorting a list of files found with the Find File command

Summary Info Command (File Menu)

Viewing and editing summary information for workbooks

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Preview View

Displays the contents of the selected file without opening the file.

Listed Files

Displays the list of files that Microsoft Excel found in the last search. If you saved the search criteria you used with a name, that name is displayed.

Preview Of [filename]

Displays the active sheet of the selected workbook. You cannot see the preview of a workbook that is protected by a password.

Commands

Lists commands for file management operations such as copying, sorting, and printing files. Microsoft Excel carries out the command you choose on the workbooks that you selected in the Find File dialog box. You can select multiple workbooks before you perform certain actions, such as printing or deleting.

Open Read Only

Opens the selected files in read-only format so that you can view but not change them. With the Update File button on the WorkGroup toolbar, you can update a read-only file to the version last saved.

Print

Select the printing options you want for the selected workbooks.

Summary

Not available in Microsoft Excel.

Delete

Deletes the selected workbooks. Microsoft Excel asks you to confirm that you want to delete the workbooks.

Copy

Displays the Copy dialog box. Specify the location to which you want the selected workbooks copied.

Sorting

Displays the Options dialog box. Determines how the files that Microsoft Excel finds in a search are to be listed.

Open

Opens the workbooks you select under Listed Files.

Close

Closes the Find File dialog box and returns you to the active workbook.

See Also

Help

File Info View

Find File Command (File Menu)

Print Command (File Menu)

Search Dialog Box

Sorting a list of files found with the Find File command

Summary Info Command (File Menu)

Summary View

Viewing and editing summary information for workbooks

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


File Info View

Displays information about the found files. The information displayed in the columns varies depending on how you sort the information. For example, if you sort the list of files using the Last Saved By option, the Author column changes to Last Saved By.

Filename

Displays the name of the file.

Title

Displays the title of the file as entered in the Summary Info dialog box.

Size

Displays the amount of disk space the file uses.

Author

Displays the name that is entered in the Summary Info dialog box.

Last Saved

Displays the date the file was last edited. Appears in the upper-right corner of the dialog box while Microsoft Excel is updating information in the Find File dialog box.

Commands

Lists commands for file management operations such as copying, sorting, and printing files. Microsoft Excel carries out the command you choose on the workbooks that you selected in the Find File dialog box. You can select multiple workbooks before you perform certain actions, such as printing or deleting.

Open Read Only

Opens the selected files in read-only format so that you can view but not change them. With the Update File button on the WorkGroup toolbar, you can update a read-only file to the version last saved.

Print

Select the printing options you want for the selected workbooks.

Summary

Not available in Microsoft Excel.

Delete

Deletes the selected workbooks. Microsoft Excel asks you to confirm that you want to delete the workbooks.

Copy

Displays the Copy dialog box. Specify the location to which you want the selected workbooks copied.

Sorting

Displays the Options dialog box. Determines how the files that Microsoft Excel finds in a search are to be listed.

Open

Opens the workbooks you select under Listed Files.

Close

Closes the Find File dialog box and returns you to the active workbook.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Preview View

Print Command (File Menu)

Sorting a list of files found with the Find File command

Summary Info Command (File Menu)

Summary View

Viewing and editing summary information for workbooks

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Search Dialog Box

Specify search criteria you want Microsoft Excel to use when searching for files.

Saved Searches

Displays names that you gave to saved search criteria. You can select a name and then start a search, or you can delete or modify the criteria in the selected search. Once you've selected search criteria, you can save the criteria with a name to avoid typing them again.

Save Search As

Displays the Save Search As dialog box, in which you type a name for the search criteria displayed in the Search For box. Once you've named and saved a set of search criteria, you can reuse these criteria without redefining them each time you search.

Delete Search

Removes the saved search criteria you selected in the Saved Searches box.

Search For

Select the filename or type of file you want to search for, and select the drive on which you want to search for it. To search for a file by author, date, subject, or location, choose the Advanced Search Criteria button. Microsoft Excel displays all selected search criteria in the Search For box.

File Name

Select or type the name of the file you want to find. To search for all files that have the same extension, type an asterisk (*), a period, and the three-character extension. You can also specify multiple filenames by separating each one with a semicolon. For example, type *.doc;*.mem to find all workbooks that have either of these filename extensions.

Location

Select the drive that contains the file you want to open.

Clear

Removes all selected search criteria from the Search For box.

Advanced Search

Select additional search criteria on the Location, Timestamp, and Summary tabs in the Advanced Search dialog box for a more detailed and precise search.

OK

Starts the search with the specified criteria displayed in the Search For box.

Cancel

Closes the Search dialog box.

Rebuild File List

Replaces all files previously found with a new list that meets the new set of criteria.

Include Subdirectories

Includes in your search all subdirectories of the directory or directories in the Location box.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Modifying saved searches

Saving search criteria

Searching for workbooks

Searching with advanced search criteria

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Save Search As Dialog Box

Type a name for the saved search criteria you want to use again to search for files. Once you've named and saved a set of search criteria, you can use the same criteria again without redefining them each time you search.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Modifying saved searches

Saving search criteria

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Advanced Search Dialog Box

Select the tab that contains the options you want, and then select the options you want to use to search for files.

Location Tab

On the Location tab, select the drives and directories where you want to search for the files.

Summary Tab

On the Summary tab, type search criteria that match the summary information for the files you want to find.

Timestamp Tab

On the Timestamp tab, type the dates on which the files you want to find were last saved.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Searching for workbooks

Searching with advanced search criteria

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Location Tab, Find File Command (File Menu)

Select the drives and directories where you want to search for the files.

File Name

Select or type the name of the file you want to find. You can also specify multiple filenames if you separate each one with a semicolon (;).

To search for a list of files that have a particular extension, type an asterisk (*), a period, and the three-character extension. For example, type *.doc;*.mem to find workbooks that have either of these filename extensions.

Search In

Displays the directories that you selected for Microsoft Excel to search in.

Directories

Select the directories in which you want to search.

Drives

Select the drives on which you want to search.

Add

Adds the directory that you selected in the Directories box to the list in the Search In box.

Remove

Removes the selected directory from the list in the Search In box.

Remove All

Removes all directories from the list in the Search In box.

Include Subdirectories

Includes in your search all subdirectories of the directories listed in the Search In box.

Network

Opens the Connect Network Drive dialog box so that you can connect to a network drive.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Searching for workbooks

Searching with advanced search criteria

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Summary Tab, Find File Command (File Menu)

Type search criteria that match the summary information for the files you want to find.

Title, Author, Keywords, Subject

Type search criteria. You can use special characters on the Summary tab to specify approximate criteria, instead of exact criteria.

Options

Determines how Microsoft Excel searches the existing list in the Find File dialog box.

Create New List

Replaces the list in the Find File dialog box with a new list that meets the new set of criteria. This is the default setting.

Add Matches To List

Adds files that meet the new set of search criteria to the current list of files in the Find File dialog box. This option usually increases the total number of files in the Listed Files box because it adds files that meet one set of criteria to files that meet another set of criteria.

The Add Matches To List option is especially useful if you want to search on a different drive by using the same set of search criteria you used to find files on the current drive.

Search Only In List

Adds files that meet both the former criteria and the new criteria to the list in the Find File dialog box. This option usually decreases the total number of files in the list because Microsoft Excel applies the new search criteria only to the files already listed in the Find File dialog box.

Match Case

Finds only text that exactly matches the search text in the Containing Text box.

Containing Text

Type text that is contained in the file that you want to find. You can also use special search operators in this box when you select the Use Pattern Matching check box.

Use Pattern Matching

Select this check box to use special search operators in the Containing Text box.

Special

Select the search operators that you want to use in the Containing Text box.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Searching for workbooks

Searching with advanced search criteria

Using special characters in a search

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Timestamp Tab, Find File Command (File Menu)

Type the dates on which the files you want to find were last saved.

Last Saved

Type the range of dates between which the workbooks you want to see were last saved.

From

Type the earliest date you want to include. To see all workbooks saved prior to the date in the To box, leave the From box empty.

To

Type the most recent date you want to include. To search for workbooks that were last saved on that day, type the same date as that in the From box. To search for all workbooks saved since the date in the From box, leave the To box empty.

By

Type the name of the person who last saved the workbook, as specified under Author in the Summary Info dialog box.

Created

Not available in Microsoft Excel.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Searching for workbooks

Searching with advanced search criteria

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Options Dialog Box

Determines how the files that Microsoft Excel finds in a search are to be listed.

Sort Files By

Select the order in which you want the files to be listed in the File box.

Author

Sorts files alphabetically by author.

Creation Date

Not available in Microsoft Excel.

Last Saved Date

Sorts files chronologically, listing the most recently saved file first.

Name

Sorts files alphabetically by filename or by workbook title, depending on which option you select under List Files By.

Size

Sorts files by file size, from smallest to largest.

List Files By

Select how you want to display filenames.

File Name

Uses the name you gave the file when you saved it.

Title

Uses the title that's in the Summary Info dialog box.

If no title is available for a file, or if the file was created in an application other than Microsoft Excel, the filename is listed between two hyphens.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Sorting a list of files found with the Find File command

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Summary Info Command (File Menu)

Displays summary information for the active workbook so that you can review or edit the information. This information can help you find a file more quickly.

To display the Summary Info dialog box whenever you save a workbook for the first time, choose the Options command from the Tools menu and select the General tab. Then select the Prompt For Summary Info check box.

Microsoft Excel accepts a maximum of 255 characters in each of the Title, Subject, Author, Keywords, and Comments boxes.

File Name

Displays the name of the active workbook.

Directory

Displays the location of the active workbook.

Title

Type a title for the workbook. The title can be longer and more descriptive than the filename.

Subject

Type a description of the workbook.

Author

Microsoft Excel automatically inserts the name in the User Name box on the General tab. To insert a name or to change a name, choose the Options command from the File menu, select the General tab, and then type the name in the User Name box.

Keywords

Type keywords from the workbook.

Comments

Type any remarks you want to record about the workbook.

See Also

Help

Entering and editing summary information

Find File Command (File Menu)

View Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Viewing and editing summary information for workbooks

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Create Directory Dialog Box

Creates a new directory to copy a file into.

Current Directory

Displays the directory where the file currently exists.

Name

Type the path and new directory name to which you want to copy the file.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Managing files with the Find File command

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Save Workspace Command (File Menu)

Saves the current open workbooks and their size and position on the screen.

The size and position of the application window is saved every time you quit Microsoft Excel.

Microsoft Excel suggests the filename RESUME.XLW.

To open a saved workspace file, use the Open command on the File menu.

File Name

Saves the workspace in the current directory unless you type a full path or select a different directory from the directory listing. Type a name for the workspace, or accept the proposed name.

Directories

Lists the current directory and any subdirectories. Double-click directories and subdirectories to move through the list.

Drives

Lists the available drives.

See Also

Help

Creating and saving a workspace file

Opening a workspace file

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Copy Dialog Box

Specify the location to which you want to copy a file.

Path

Type the names of the drive and directory where you want to store the copy of the file, or select the location in the Directories and Drives boxes.

Directories

Select the directory in which you want to store the copy of the file.

Drives

Select the drive on which you want to store the copy of the file.

New

Displays the Create Directory dialog box, in which you can create a new directory.

Network

If available on your system, opens the Connect Network Drive dialog box so that you can connect to a network drive.

See Also

Help

Create Directory Dialog Box

Find File Command (File Menu)

Managing files with the Find File command

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


File Buttons Category

Find File Button

Allows you to search for a specific workbook or other file by name, contents, or other options.

Insert Chart Sheet Button

Inserts a new chart sheet into the active workbook.

Insert Dialog Button

Inserts a new dialog sheet to the left of the selected sheet.

Insert MS Excel 4.0 Macro Button

Inserts a new macro sheet into the active workbook.

Insert Module Button

Inserts a new Visual Basic module into the active workbook.

Insert Worksheet Button

Inserts a new worksheet into the active workbook.

New Workbook Button

Creates a new workbook.

Open Button

Allows you to open an existing workbook or other document.

Print Button

Prints the active sheet.

Print Preview Button

Displays the active sheet in the Print Preview window.

Routing Slip Button

Adds a routing slip to the active workbook.

Save Button

Saves changes made to the active workbook.

Send Mail Button

Attaches the active workbook to an electronic mail message and sends it.

Set Print Area Button

Defines selected cells as an area to print.

Toggle Read Only Button

Switches the active workbook between read-only and read-write status.

Update File Button

Updates a read-only workbook to the version last saved.


Set Print Area Button

Defines the selected cells as the portion of the worksheet that you want to print. After setting the print area, you can print by clicking the Print button on the Standard toolbar. The Set Print Area button is in the File category.

See Also

Help

  Print Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Print Command (File Menu)

Printing a sheet, selected range, or entire workbook

User's Guide

Chapter 14 "Printing"


Print Button

Prints the active workbook according to the options you previously specified in the Page Setup dialog box. The Print button is on the Standard toolbar.

If you hold down SHIFT while clicking this button, it functions like the Print Preview button.

Before you print an embedded chart, you must display the chart in a chart window.

If the Info window is active, information is printed about the selected cells in the worksheet.

See Also

Help

Chart Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Displaying or removing information in the Info window

Previewing what will print

Print Command (File Menu)

Printing a range of pages

Sheet Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Toggle Read Only Button

Switches a file between read-only and read-write status. The Toggle Read Only button is on the WorkGroup toolbar.

See Also

Help

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 6 "Managing Workbook Files"


Update File Button

Updates a read-only file to the version last saved. The Update File button is on the WorkGroup toolbar.

See Also

Help

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 6 "Managing Workbook Files"


The file '[filename]' cannot be deleted. It may be open or saved as a read-only file.

The file cannot be deleted in its present state.

If the file is open, close it and try deleting it again.

If the file is read only, you must change the file properties before you can delete it. For information about changing file properties, see your operating system documentation.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


Not enough available memory. Quit any unneeded applications and try again.

You have run out of memory.

Depending on how much memory you have, you might have to quit one or more applications.

If you are not running other applications, try reducing the scope of your search by including fewer directories or changing  the search criteria.

If you are using the Advanced Search dialog box, there might not be enough memory available to use some of the advanced features. Try using the Search dialog box.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


You must specify a destination directory when you copy files.

To specify a directory, double-click the directory names in the Directories box until the correct directory name appears in the Path box. Otherwise, type the full path for the destination directory.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The path '[pathname]' is not a directory. Check your typing, and do not include the filename in the path.

You have selected more that one file to copy, but you have typed a filename instead of a directory name in the Path box. Type the path of the directory to which you want the files copied in the Path box.

OK

Redisplays the Create Directory dialog box, where you can type a name for the directory you want to create.

Cancel

Closes the Create Directory dialog box and displays the Copy dialog box.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The drive, directory, or filename '[name]' is invalid or inaccessible. Check your typing.

You can type either a filename or a directory name in the Path box.

To copy the file with its current name, type the path of the directory to which you want the file copied in the Path box. You do not have to include the filename.

To copy the file with a new name, type the path, including the new filename, in the Path box.

You might have selected more that one file to copy, but have typed a new filename in the Path box instead of a directory name. Type the path of the directory to which you want the files copied in the Path box.

Check your typing to see that you have typed the path correctly and that you have specified the correct drive.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


You must specify a different directory when you copy a file.

You cannot place a copy of a file in the same directory as the source file without renaming the copy. To rename the copy, type a new name for the copied file in the Path box. Type only the new filename, not the path. To specify a new location for the copied file, use the Directories box.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The file '[filename]' exists, but it is already in use, unavailable, or damaged.

The file you are trying to copy exists, but it cannot be accessed.

If this file is open, close the file and try again.

The file might be damaged. You might need to repair it using a file repair program.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


Can no longer access the file '[filename]'. It may be in use, unavailable, or damaged.

This file might have been changed recently.

The file might be open. Close the file and try again.

The file might be located on a network server that you don't have access to. Connect to the server and try again.

If the file is damaged, you might need to repair it using a file repair program.

The file might have been deleted.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


Cannot copy '[name]'. It is now the name of a directory, not a file.

The file you are trying to copy no longer exists. Instead, a directory has been created with that name.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The file '[filename]' exists, but it is already in use, unavailable, or damaged.

The file you are trying to copy exists, but it cannot be opened.

You might be out of Microsoft Windows file handles. For more information, see your operating system documentation.

The file might be damaged. You might need to repair it using a file repair program.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The file '[filename]' is read only.

The destination file or directory is read only. If you want to write to this file or directory, you must change the read-only file property. For information about changing file properties, see your operating system documentation.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


Cannot open the destination file '[filename]'.

The destination file cannot be opened.

You might be trying to copy a file to a read-only directory. For information about changing the properties for directories, see your operating system documentation.

Another application might have opened the destination file and is not allowing you to write to it.

The specified destination file might be the same as the source file.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


Cannot create the destination file '[filename]'.

The file cannot be created.

The directory to which you are trying to copy might be read only. For information about changing the properties for directories, see your operating system documentation.

You might have run out of disk space.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


Cannot copy the file '[filename]'.

The file cannot be copied for an unspecified reason.

A disk error might have occurred during reading or writing.

A network error might have occurred.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


Cannot create a new directory.

You cannot create a new directory.

You might be trying to create a new directory in a drive or directory that is read only. For information about changing the properties of a drive or directory, see your operating system documentation.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The path you typed for the new directory is not valid.

The path you typed does not exist.

Check your typing to see that you have typed the path correctly and that you have specified the correct drive.

The directory might be located on a network server that you don't have access to. Connect to the server and try again.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The specified directory already exists.

To create a new directory, you need to specify a directory name that does not already exist.

OK

Redisplays the Create Directory dialog box, where you can type a name for the directory you want to create.

Cancel

Closes the Create Directory dialog box and displays the Copy dialog box.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The specified path is the name of a file, not a directory.

To create a new directory, you need to type a new name. The directory cannot have the same name as an existing file within the current directory.

OK

Redisplays the Create Directory dialog box, where you can type a name for the directory you want to create.

Cancel

Closes the Create Directory dialog box and displays the Copy dialog box.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


You must specify a path for the new directory.

To create a new subdirectory in the current directory, type a name in the Name box. Otherwise, type the full path for the new directory you want to add.

OK

Redisplays the Create Directory dialog box, where you can type a name for the directory you want to create.

Cancel

Closes the Create Directory dialog box and displays the Copy dialog box.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


Cannot save temporary file '[filename]' to hold the results of the search. There may not be enough space on your hard disk.

Microsoft Excel is unable to save a needed temporary file.

Delete unnecessary files to create more space on your hard disk. Use the Delete command within the Find File dialog box to delete files, or see your operating system documentation for information about deleting files and directories from your hard disk.

You might also get this message if you are running Microsoft Excel from a read-only drive, or if your TEMP variable points to a an inaccessible drive. You might need to change the definition of your TEMP variable to direct temporary files to a drive that is accessible or has adequate space. For more information, see your operating system documentation.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The file '[filename]' exists, but it is already in use, unavailable, or damaged.

The file you are trying to delete cannot be deleted.

The file might be open. Close the file and try deleting it again.

The file might be damaged. You might need to repair it using a file repair program.

See Also

Help

Overview of Finding Workbooks


You cannot have accented characters in the name for the new directory.
You cannot have accented characters in the name of the new directory.

The name you specified for the new directory contains accented characters. Because the operating system cannot use directories named with accented characters, you need to type a different name.

See Also

Help

Managing files with the Find File command


Do you want to replace existing saved search '[saved search name]'?

Each search must have a unique name. You are giving this search the same name as an existing search.

Yes

Replaces the existing search with this search.

No

Preserves the existing search. You can then save the new search with a different name.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


Do you want to delete '[saved search name]'?

You have requested to delete this saved search. Once you delete a search, you cannot retrieve it; you must recreate it.

Yes

Delete this search.

No

Cancels the deletion and preserves this search.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The destination, '[directory]', is the name of a directory, not a file.

You cannot copy a file to a location that contains a directory of the same name. Rename the file or the directory; then try to copy again.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


Cannot overwrite destination file '[filename]'.

The destination file cannot be replaced.

You might be trying to write a file to a read-only directory. For information about changing the properties for directories, see your operating system documentation.

Another application might have opened the destination file and is not allowing you to write to it.

The specified destination file might be the same as the source file.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The file '[filename]' already exists. Do you want to overwrite it?

A file with this name already exists at the copy destination. The existing file will be replaced by the file you are copying.

Yes

Replaces the existing file of the same name at the copy destination.

No

Cancels the copy operation.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


You didn't enter a filename or file specification, such as "*.DOC".

In the File Name box, you must type the name of the file or files you want to search for, or specify a filename extension.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The filename, specification or location '[filename or path]' isn't valid because it contains spaces or commas. Check your typing
The filename, specification or location '[filename or path]' isn't valid because it contains spaces or commas. Check your typing.

The document name or path that you typed is not valid.

Type a valid filename. The filename can contain up to eight characters and an extension of up to three characters; for example, FILENAME.DOC

Delete any characters that are not valid in filenames, such as spaces or commas.

If you are searching for multiple filenames or extensions, separate them with semicolons (;).

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The list of directories you specified isn't valid. Separate each directory with ';'.

This search cannot be completed because the list of directories is not valid.

Reduce the number of directories to be searched to less than 200.

Reduce any single directory path and name to less than 128 characters.

Quit any unneeded applications to make more memory available.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


You have specified too many directories to search. Specify fewer directories, and then try again.

Remove one or more of the directories from the Search In box.

To remove a directory from your search

1 Select the directory in the Search In box.

2 Choose the Remove button.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


Unable to save the search.

Searches are saved in the MSFILE.INI file. Make sure that this file is not being used by someone else, and that you have enough disk space available.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


Cannot retrieve the search.

The search you selected is no longer in your MSFILE.INI file. This can happen if someone deleted the search in another instance of this application. Recreate the search, and then try the search again.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


You do not have access to one or more directories in the path '[path]'. Do you want to skip this path during the search?

You are trying to search a directory that you don't have access to. For example, the directory might be on a network drive to which you are not connected. You can either skip the drive in your search or connect to the drive before you begin the search.

OK

Skips the inaccessible directory in the search.

Cancel

Cancels the search. You can then correct the problem; for example, by connecting to a network drive that contains the directory you want to search, and then try again.

Note  If you want to search a directory that is located on a password-protected drive, choose Cancel, and then choose the Advanced Search button. Choose the Network button, and then connect to the network drive.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


One or more directories in the path '[path]' do not exist or are inaccessible. Check your typing. Do you want to skip this path
One or more directories in the path '[path]' do not exist or are inaccessible. Check your typing. Do you want to skip this path during the search?

The directory you are trying to search does not exist, or you do not have access to it. For example, the directory might be on a network drive to which you are not connected. You can either skip the drive in your search or connect to the drive before you begin the search.

OK

Skips the inaccessible directory in the search.

Cancel

Cancels the search. You can then correct the problem; for example, by connecting to a network drive that contains the directory you want to search.

Note  If you want to search a directory that is located on a password-protected drive, choose Cancel, and then choose the Advanced Search button. Choose the Network button, and then connect to the network drive.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The path you specified contains too many subdirectories. Delete one or more directories or clear the Include Subdirectories chec
The path you specified contains too many subdirectories. Delete one or more directories or clear the Include Subdirectories check box.

You can only search up to 200 subdirectories at a time. If you have selected the Include Subdirectories check box, all nested subdirectories are included in the search. Remove some directories from this search or clear the Include Subdirectories check box,, and then try again.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


Do you want to delete '[filename]'?

Confirm that you want to delete the selected file or files. After you delete a file, you can't recover it.

Yes

Deletes the selected files. Once deleted, they cannot be recovered.

No

Cancels the deletion.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The selected drive is not in use. Check to make sure that a disk is inserted.

The drive you are trying to search does not have a disk inserted.

Insert the disk you want to search into the drive, and then begin the search.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The selected drive is not in use. Check your connection to the drive, and then try again.

You are trying to search a drive that you do not have access to.

If the drive is a network drive, you must connect to it before you begin the search. Choose OK, and then choose the Advanced Search button. Choose the Network button, and then connect to the network drive.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The selected drive is not in use.

You are trying to search a drive that you do not have access to.

If the drive is a network drive, you must connect to it before you begin the search. Choose OK, and then choose the Advanced Search button. Choose the Network button, and then connect to the network drive.

If the drive is a floppy disk drive, insert the disk you want to search into the drive, and then begin the search.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


This search cannot be saved. The maximum number of saved searches has been reached.

You cannot save more than 32 searches. Delete any old, unused searches and then try again.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The date you typed is not valid. Check your typing.

Make sure that you have not typed a nonexistent date, such as January 32, 1994.

Type dates in the format that matches your system's current date format setting.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The search expression isn't valid. Check your typing.

You might have typed a character In the Containing Text box that is reserved for pattern matching.

Characters that are reserved for pattern matching include:

{ without a closing }

( without a closing )

" without a closing "

^

Delete these characters from the Containing Text box. If you want to search for one of these pattern matching characters in the text, you must precede the character with "^". For example, to search for "(" (left parenthesis), you would type: ^(

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks

Using special characters in a search


Cannot create temporary file to hold the results of the search. There may not be enough space on your hard disk.

You don't have enough disk space available to complete the search. Compress or delete some files you no longer need, and then try the search again.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


Cannot start search. There may not be enough space available to store the results of the search.

You don't have enough memory or other system resources available to complete the search. Quit any unneeded applications, and then try the search again.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


An error occurred while searching in '[directory]'. This directory might be located on an unavailable volume, or protected with
An error occurred while searching in '[directory]'. This directory might be located on an unavailable volume, or protected with a password.

You are trying to search a directory that you do not have access to.

If the directory is a network drive, you must connect to it before you begin the search. Choose OK, and then choose the Advanced Search button. Choose the Network button, and then connect to the network drive.

If the directory is on a floppy disk drive, insert the disk you want to search into the drive, and then begin the search.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


The path you've selected includes too many subdirectories. Not all subdirectories will be searched.

The specified path contains more than 15 levels of subdirectories or more than 200 total subdirectories. If you have selected the Include Subdirectories check box, all nested subdirectories are included in the search. Reduce the scope of your search, and then try again.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


You must specify at least one directory to search.

Type or select a directory in the Location box.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Overview of Finding Workbooks


Not enough memory to display completely.

To free more system resources, try closing other applications or worksheet windows. Then, to update the screen display, move the window off the screen and back again, minimize and restore the window, or close and reopen the window.


Formatting a Chart

Overview of Changing Colors, Patterns, Borders, Text, and Numbers

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Applying colors, patterns, and borders to chart items

Changing the font and alignment of chart text

Changing number formats for chart values

Custom Color Palettes for Charts in a Workbook

Overview of Moving and Sizing Charts and Chart Items

Moving and sizing chart items

Moving and sizing an embedded chart

Sizing a chart sheet with the window

Overview of Formatting Data Series and Chart Type Groups

Using special lines and bars to emphasize data

Formatting a trendline

Formatting error bars

Overview of Formatting Data Markers

Formatting data markers

Formatting pie and doughnut slices

Formatting data markers in line, radar, and xy (scatter) charts

Formatting 3-D surface chart levels

Arranging and spacing data markers in bar and column charts

Creating and formatting picture markers

Clearing formatting from data markers

Overview of Formatting the Legend

Moving and sizing the legend

Formatting legend entries and keys

Overview of Formatting Axes, Tick Marks, and Gridlines

Displaying or hiding axes

Changing the value axis scale

Changing the category or series axis scale

Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Formatting and arranging tick-mark labels

Overview of Changing the 3-D Chart View

Formatting a 3-D chart's walls and floor

Rotating and elevating a 3-D chart

Setting a 3-D chart's height and perspective

Changing a 3-D chart's depth and width

Overview of Preparing a Chart for Printing

Selecting the print size for a chart sheet

Printing charts with colors


Overview of Changing Colors, Patterns, Borders, Text, and Numbers

There are several ways to format a chart. The quickest and easiest method is to apply a built-in or custom autoformat to the chart.

You can also select the chart area or plot area, and then globally apply colors, patterns, borders, and text fonts. In fact, you can apply one type of formatting to the chart area and another to the plot area.

Finally, you can select one chart item at a time and apply any formatting you like. This third method requires more effort, but it offers the most control. You can then add your custom-designed chart to the list of custom autoformats, and later apply it to other charts.

Many formatting tasks are common to many chart items. You can change colors, patterns, and borders; align and change text fonts; and apply number formats to values in charts. You can also customize the color palette that controls all available colors for charts, sheets, and other objects in a workbook.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list

Applying colors, patterns, and borders to chart items

Changing number formats for chart values

Changing the font and alignment of chart text

Custom Color Palettes for Charts in a Workbook

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview

After creating a chart and adding chart items, you can format the entire chart area or one item at a time. To display the formatting dialog box, either double-click a chart item, or select the item and then choose the appropriate command from the Format menu or the shortcut menu.

The selected chart item defines the name of the first command on the Format menu. For example, if the legend is selected, the command reads Selected Legend. If a data series is selected, the command says Selected Data Series.

The formatting dialog box offers one or more formatting-related tabs. Like the command itself, the tabs and tab options available are contingent on the item selected. To read more about these tabs, you can select topics from the following list.

This tab topic	Relates to

Patterns Tab	All chart items, including chart area and plot area
Font Tab	Chart text items, chart area
Alignment Tab	Chart text items
Number Tab	Numeric chart items, tick-mark labels
Value (Y) Axis Scale Tab (for 2-D Charts)	2-D charts, including xy (scatter) and excluding radar charts
Value (Y) Axis Scale Tab (for Radar Charts)	Radar charts only
Value (X) Axis Scale Tab	XY (scatter) charts only
Category (X) Axis Scale Tab (for 2-D Charts)	2-D charts, excluding xy (scatter) and radar charts
Value (Z) Axis Scale Tab	3-D charts
Category (X) Axis Scale Tab (for 3-D Charts)	3-D charts
Series (Y) Axis Scale Tab	3-D charts
Name and Values Tab	Data series, data point
Axis Tab	Data series, two or more in a chart type group
X Values Tab	Data series
Placement Tab	Legend only
Data Labels Tab	Data series, data point
Y Error Bars Tab	Data series and all error bars
X Error Bars Tab	Data series and error bars for xy (scatter) charts
Type Tab	Trendlines
Options Tab	Trendlines
See Also

Help

Applying colors, patterns, and borders to chart items

Changing number formats for chart values

Changing the font and alignment of chart text

Choosing a shortcut menu command

Clearing formatting from data markers

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

Overview of Moving and Sizing Charts and Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Applying colors, patterns, and borders to chart items

Overview

Most chart items can be formatted by applying colors and patterns to the immediate area around the item. You can also add a border to some items and format it. These items include the chart area, plot area, data markers, all chart text, 3-D walls and floors, legend and legend key, up bars, and down bars.

This procedure does not apply to the levels of a surface chart. See Formatting 3-D surface chart levels.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Double-click the chart item.

3.	Select the Patterns tab.

4.	Under Border, select the style, color, and weight of the line to border the chart item.

To clear custom formatting and restore default formatting, select the Automatic option button.

5.	Under Area, select a fill color for the chart item, and a pattern and pattern color to overlay the fill color.

To clear custom formatting and restore default formatting, select the Automatic option button.

Tip  If you're formatting the chart area, you can also select the Font tab and make simultaneous font changes to all the text in the chart.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Changing number formats for chart values

Changing the font and alignment of chart text

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

Patterns Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Changing the font and alignment of chart text

Overview

You can change the font and alignment of all chart text. If the text is unlinked, you can format the whole text item or individual characters within the text. If the text is linked to worksheet cells, you can format the text as a whole, but you cannot format individual characters. For more information about formatting, moving, and aligning tick-mark labels, see Formatting and arranging tick-mark labels.

To change font and alignment for a whole text item

This procedure works for both linked and unlinked text.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Double-click the chart text you want to format.

3.	Select the Font tab.

4.	Select the font name, size, color, and other options you want.

5.	Select the Alignment tab.

6.	Select the text alignment options and the Orientation option you want.

7.	Choose the OK button to apply all your changes.

Tip  You can also change text characteristics with the font and alignment buttons and boxes on the Formatting toolbar.

To change the font for individual characters in titles, text boxes, and data labels

This procedure requires a mouse.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Select the text item and position the mouse pointer directly over the text.

The mouse pointer changes to an I-beam.

3.	Select the characters within the text that you want to format.

4.	From the Format menu, choose the Selected [chart item] command, such as Selected Data Labels.

You can also choose the Format [chart item] command, such as Format Data Labels, from the shortcut menu.

5.	Complete steps 3 and 4 in the above procedure.

6.	Choose the OK button.

For information about applying colors and patterns to the borders and areas of chart text, see Applying colors, patterns, and borders to chart items. To format numeric data, see Changing number formats for chart values.

See Also

Help

  Align Left Button

  Align Right Button

  Bold Button

  Center Button

  Font Box

  Font Size Box

  Italic Button

  Underline Button

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Changing number formats for chart values

Overview

Microsoft Excel provides a variety of built-in number formats, including currency, time, and date, that you can apply to numeric values in chart text such as tick-mark labels, data labels, and trendline labels.

By default, numbers in charts retain the format assigned to the worksheet cells if the source workbook is open. If the workbook is closed, the chart numbers default to the General format.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	To format tick-mark labels, double-click the appropriate axis.

To format data labels, select either the group or individual label, and then double-click it.

To format a trendline label, double-click it.

3.	Select the Number tab.

4.	In the Category box, choose the category most appropriate for the data selected.

5.	In the Format Codes box, select a specific format.

Check the sample of the formatted number displayed in the dialog box.

Tip  To restore a broken link between a chart value and the worksheet cell, select the Linked To Source check box. Links are sometimes broken when values are changed in the chart.

6.	Choose the OK button.

For information about applying colors and patterns to the borders and areas of data labels and trendline labels, see Applying colors, patterns, and borders to chart items. To apply formatting font characteristics and alignment to chart text, see Changing the font and alignment of chart text.

See Also

Help

Changing data labels

Changing tick-mark labels

Creating and deleting custom number formats

Formatting and arranging tick-mark labels

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Custom Color Palettes for Charts in a Workbook

Overview

The color palette allows you to create different color schemes for each workbook. A custom color palette applies to everything you color in a workbook, including worksheets, chart sheets, embedded charts, and graphic objects. Thus, you can change the available colors for a chart item's area, borders, lines, markers, and axes.

If you are using a color monitor, you can customize the shade and intensity of the 56 colors in the color palette for the active workbook. If you are using a monochrome monitor, you can customize the red, green, and blue values for the colors with the Color tab (Option command, Tools menu).

You can copy a customized color palette from one workbook to another so that you can use the same custom color scheme for another set of chart sheets.

For information about sharing color palettes between Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh, see Moving files between Windows and the Macintosh.

See Also

Help

Applying colors, patterns, and borders to chart items

Color Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Copying color palettes between workbooks.

Customizing colors in a color palette

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Printing charts with colors

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"

Chapter 35, "Controlling What Happens When You Start Microsoft Excel"


Overview of Moving and Sizing Charts and Chart Items

You can make your charts more presentable by moving and sizing many of the items in the chart. You can also move and size an embedded chart on the worksheet where it resides. And you can size a chart sheet independently of the window when you want to view the chart in different ways or see how the printed chart will look before printing it.

Dragging data markers does resize them, but it also changes their chart and worksheet values.

You can move pie and doughnut charts and their slices away from their center to create an "exploded" view.

If you're working with 3-D charts, dragging the chart enables you to rotate and elevate it, rather than move it to another location.

See Also

Help

Changing the value of a chart data point

Formatting pie and doughnut slices

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Moving and sizing an embedded chart

Moving and sizing chart items

Rotating and elevating a 3-D chart

Sizing a chart sheet with the window

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Moving and sizing chart items

Overview

Although every chart item in a chart is displayed in a default position, you can use a mouse to size and move some items within the chart area. These items include the chart area, plot area, chart text (including the legend, titles, data labels, and trendline labels), and graphic objects, such as text boxes, arrows, and so on.

Titles and labels cannot be resized by dragging. You can move and size the chart area on chart sheets when the Custom option is selected on the Chart tab, (Page Setup command, File menu).

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Select the chart item.

3.	To move a chart item, point to the item so that the mouse pointer remains an arrow, then drag.

If the pointer changes to an I-beam, you will select the text; move the pointer closer to the border of the item.

4.	To size a chart item, point to a selection square.

The mouse pointer changes to a double-headed arrow.

5.	Drag to the size you want.

See Also

Help

Moving a graphic object

Moving and sizing an embedded chart

Moving and sizing the legend

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

Resizing a graphic object

Selecting the print size for a chart sheet

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Moving and sizing an embedded chart

Overview

You can move and size an embedded chart anywhere on a worksheet. While it's being moved or sized, the chart displays a dotted border showing its shape, size, and position on the worksheet.

1.	Click anywhere on the embedded chart to select it.

2.	To size the chart, point to a selection square.

The mouse pointer changes to a double-headed arrow.

3.	Drag the chart until it has the shape and size you want.

4.	To move the chart to another location on the worksheet, click anywhere on the chart and drag.

Tip  You may want to move and resize the items in the chart to fit better. Also, for a full-page view of the chart on the worksheet, choose Print Preview from the File menu.

See Also

Help

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Moving and sizing chart items

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

Print Preview Command (File Menu)

Sizing a chart sheet with the window

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Sizing a chart sheet with the window

Overview

You can make the size of your chart sheet dependent on or independent of the window size. By default, a newly created chart sheet is independent of the window size so that you can see what the printed chart will look like relative to the size of the page. When a chart is sized with the window, it fills the entire window.

1.	Activate a chart sheet.

2.	To make the size of a chart sheet dependent on the window size, choose Sized With Window from the View menu.

To make the chart size independent of the window size, choose the command again to uncheck it.

--Or--

You can select or clear the Chart Sizes With Window Frame check box in the Chart tab (Options command, Tools menu).

Tip  When the chart sheet is sized independently, you can use the Zoom Control box or the Zoom command on the View menu to zoom in and out and view different areas of the chart sheet.

See Also

Help

  Zoom Control Box

Chart Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Moving and sizing an embedded chart

Selecting the print size for a chart sheet

Sized With Window Command (View Menu)

Zoom Command (View Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Overview of Formatting Data Series and Chart Type Groups

Depending on the chart type group you are working with, you can emphasize certain data in data series by adding special lines and bars, such as drop lines, high-low lines, up-down bars, or series lines. Once these lines or bars have been added, you can format their colors, patterns, and so on. You can also format any trendlines or error bars you add to a data series.

Use these lines or bars	To do this

Drop lines	Accent where the data point is on the horizontal axis by dropping a vertical line from it.

Error bars	Express potential error (or degree of uncertainty) relative to each data marker in a series.

High-low lines	Bring attention to the high and low points for data; useful for stock charts.

Series lines	Draw attention to the rise and fall of data points within a series by connecting them with lines.

Trendlines	Predict trends in data; methods provided include regression analysis and moving averages.

Up bars and down bars	Focus on where data has gone up and down relative to other series through the use of bars of different colors.

See Also

Help

Adding a trendline to a data series

Adding error bars to a data series

[chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Formatting a trendline

Formatting error bars

Using special lines and bars to emphasize data

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Using special lines and bars to emphasize data

Overview

You may find it helpful to add special lines or bars to certain chart types to show relationships among data series in a chart type group.

To add lines or bars to a chart type group

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	From the Format menu, choose the command for the chart type group (such as Area Group or Line Group) to which you want to add bars or lines.

3.	Select the Options tab.

4.	Select the type of lines or bars you want.

This line or bar	May be added to this chart type group

Drop Lines	Area, 3-D area, line, and 3-D line chart. Drop lines may be added to chart type groups with only one series.

Series Lines	Stacked and 100% stacked bar and column charts.

High-Low Lines	Line chart only.

Up Bars and Down Bars	Line chart with at least two data series. Up bars and down bars are added at the same time.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Tip  Up bars and down bars are added to a line chart at the same time; however, they must be selected and formatted separately. To format up bars or down bars, see Applying colors, patterns, and borders to chart items.

To format drop lines, series lines, or high-low lines

All of these lines are selected and formatted as a group.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Double-click a line to format the group.

3.	Select the Patterns tab.

4.	Under Line, select the style, color, and weight of the line.

To clear custom formatting and restore default formatting, select the Automatic option button.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

[chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Options Tab, [chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

Patterns Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Formatting a trendline

Overview

You can format a trendline with color, style, and weight. If you display an optional trendline label, you can change the number format, font color, and other characteristics of the label.

Formatting a trendline

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Double-click the trendline.

3.	Select the Patterns tab.

4.	Under Line, select the style, color, and weight of the line.

To clear custom formatting and restore default formatting, select the Automatic option button.

Check the sample of the formatted trendline in the dialog box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Formatting a trendline label

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Double-click the trendline label.

3.	Select the Number tab.

4.	Select the number format you want.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Tip  For information about applying color and patterns to the borders and areas of trendline labels, see Applying colors, patterns, and borders to chart items. To change text characteristics, see Changing the font and alignment of chart text.

See Also

Help

Adding a trendline to a data series

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Modifying trendline settings

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Formatting error bars

Overview

You can change the line style of the error bar.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Double-click an error bar to format all of the error bars for that data series.

3.	Select the Patterns tab.

4.	Under Line, select the style, color, and weight of the line.

To clear custom formatting and restore default formatting, select the Automatic option button.

5.	Under Marker, select the style for the end marker, either open-ended or crossed.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Adding error bars to a data series

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Modifying error bar settings

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

Patterns Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Overview of Formatting Data Markers

You can format one or more data markers in a chart with colors, patterns, and borders. For information about formatting data labels displayed for data markers, see Changing the font and alignment of chart text.

You can also apply the following formatting to data markers:

Select shapes for line, xy (scatter), and radar chart data markers.

Smooth angular curves in line and xy charts.

"Explode" one or more slices in a pie chart.

Change the hole size of a doughnut chart.

Set the angle of the first slice in pie and doughnut charts.

Change the data marker spacing in column and bar charts.

Create picture markers in bar, column, line, xy, and radar charts.

Vary colors by data point or slice for single-series charts.

Note  Any time you format a legend key, the corresponding data marker is also updated to reflect the same formatting. In fact, this is the only way to format the levels of a 3-D surface chart.

See Also

Help

Arranging and spacing data markers in bar and column charts

Clearing formatting from data markers

Creating and formatting picture markers

Formatting 3-D surface chart levels

Formatting data markers

Formatting data markers in line, radar, and xy (scatter) charts

Formatting pie and doughnut slices

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Formatting data markers

Overview

For all charts except 3-D surface charts, you can apply colors, patterns, and borders directly to the data markers representing a single data point or an entire data series.

For some charts created with a single data series, you can also vary the colors by data point or slice. You cannot do this for 2-D area, 3-D area, 3-D line, or 3-D surface charts.

To apply colors, patterns, and borders to data markers

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	To format a data series, double-click any marker belonging to the series to display the Format Data Series dialog box.

To format a single data marker, click it once to select the series, again to select the individual marker, and then double-click it to display the Format Data Point dialog box.

3.	Select the Patterns tab.

4.	Under Border, select the style, color, and weight of the line to border the chart item.

To clear custom formatting and restore default formatting, select the Automatic option button.

5.	Under Area, select a fill color for the chart item, and a pattern and pattern color to overlay the fill color.

To clear custom formatting and restore default formatting, select the Automatic option button.

6.	Choose the OK button.

To vary colors for data markers in single-series charts

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	From the Format menu, choose the chart type group (such as Column Group or Pie Group) that you want to change.

3.	Select the Options tab.

4.	Select the Vary Colors By Point/Slice check box.

For pie charts, Vary Color By Slice is turned on by default; you can turn it off.

Check the sample to see if you like the way the colors look.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Arranging and spacing data markers in bar and column charts

[chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Clearing formatting from data markers

Formatting 3-D surface chart levels

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Formatting pie and doughnut slices

Overview

You can pull out, or "explode," one or more slices from a pie or doughnut chart group, manipulate the size of a doughnut ring, or set the angle of the first slice in all pie and doughnut charts.

To explode pie or doughnut slices

You must have a mouse to do this procedure.

1.	Activate a pie or doughnut chart.

2.	To explode all slices, click once to select the whole chart and drag.

To explode a single pie slice, click the slice once, click it again, and then drag.

To explode a single doughnut slice, it must be part of the outer ring. Click once to select the ring, and then again to select the slice.

3.	With the cursor positioned anywhere on the slice, drag it away from the center to the position you want.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move additional slices or to reposition already exploded slices.

To change the doughnut hole size

1.	Activate a doughnut chart.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Doughnut Group.

3.	Select the Options tab.

4.	Type a value between 10 and 90 to specify the diameter of the hole.

The higher the percentage, the larger the hole and the smaller the width of the doughnut rings.

Check the sample to see if you like the effect.

5.	Choose the OK button.

To set the angle of the first slice

1.	Activate a pie or doughnut chart.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Pie Group or Doughnut Group.

3.	Select the Options tab.

4.	Type a value between 0 and 360 to specify the angle at which the first slice appears.

The higher the value, the more rotated the first slice becomes.

Check the sample to see if you like the position of the first slice.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

[chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Clearing formatting from data markers

Formatting data markers

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Options Tab, [chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Formatting data markers in line, radar, and xy (scatter) charts

Overview

For line, radar, or xy (scatter) chart groups, you can change the marker shapes to squares, circles, diamonds, triangles, and bars, and you can format the line as you would any other line in a chart. You can also smooth out the lines in line and xy charts.

1.	Activate a chart containing a line, radar, or xy chart type group.

2.	Double-click a data series.

3.	Select the Patterns tab.

4.	Under Line, select the style, color, and weight of the line.

To clear custom formatting and restore default formatting, select the Automatic option button.

5.	Under Marker, select the style and the foreground and background colors.

6.	To smooth out the angularity of lines in line or xy charts, select the Smoothed Line check box.

7.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Clearing formatting from data markers

Creating and formatting picture markers

Formatting data markers

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Formatting 3-D surface chart levels

Overview

Any formatting you apply to a legend key applies to the corresponding data markers. In fact, formatting legend keys is the only way to format the levels of a 3-D surface chart.

1.	Activate a 3-D surface chart.

If it doesn't have a legend, click the Legend button to add one.

2.	Select the legend key corresponding to the surface level that you want to format.

3.	Double-click the legend key to display the Format Legend Key dialog box.

4.	Under Border, select the style, color, and weight of the line to border both the legend key and the surface level.

To clear custom formatting and restore default formatting, select the Automatic option button.

5.	Under Area, select a fill color for both the legend key and the surface level, and a pattern and pattern color to overlay the fill color.

To clear custom formatting and restore default formatting, select the Automatic option button.

6.	Choose the OK button.

Repeat steps 2 through 6 to format each level of the surface chart.

See Also

Help

  Legend Button

Setting a 3-D chart's height and perspective

Rotating and elevating a 3-D chart

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Changing a 3-D chart's depth and width

User's Guide

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Arranging and spacing data markers in bar and column charts

Overview

You can overlap 2-D bars or column markers to create a less cluttered chart. Or if your chart has clusters of many data markers, you can increase the gap width, which determines the spacing between those clusters. It also defines the thickness of the bars or columns. Thus, the greater the gap, the thinner the columns.

1.	Activate a chart containing a bar or column chart type group.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Bar Group or Column Group.

3.	Select the Options tab.

4.	To change the overlap within a data marker cluster, type a value between -100 and 100 in the Overlap box or click the arrows to select a value.

The higher the value, the greater the overlap within the cluster.

Check the sample in the dialog box.

5.	To change spacing between clusters of data markers, type a value between 0 and 500 in the Gap Width box or click the arrows to select a value.

The higher the value, the greater the distance between clusters.

Check the sample continuously until you achieve all the effects you want.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

[chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Changing a 3-D chart's depth and width

Formatting data markers

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Options Tab, [chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Creating and formatting picture markers

Overview

You can replace data markers in 2-D bar, 2-D column, line, radar, and xy (scatter) chart type groups with a picture created in another application or with the drawing buttons on the Drawing toolbar.

Picture markers in bar and column charts can be formatted by stacking, stretching, or stacking and scaling them.

Replacing data markers with pictures

1.	Switch to the application and the document containing the picture you want to use as a data marker.

2.	Copy the picture using the application's procedure for copying.

If you are copying a graphic object from another Microsoft Excel document, select the object, and then click the Copy button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+C

3.	Activate the chart in which you want to use the picture.

4.	Select the data series or individual marker you want to replace with the picture.

5.	Click the Paste button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+V

Formatting picture markers in bar and column charts

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Double-click the data series or individual picture marker you want to format.

3.	Select the option you want.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Tip  To format a picture that was created using the drawing buttons on the Drawing toolbar, see Formatting an object's border and fill pattern.

See Also

Help

  Copy Button

  Paste Button

Clearing formatting from data markers

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Patterns Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

Selecting a graphic object

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Clearing formatting from data markers

Overview

You can clear all the formatting that you apply to data markers, including pictures used to replace the data markers. To clear formatting from the levels of a 3-D surface chart, see Formatting 3-D surface chart levels.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Select the data series or single data marker you want to clear.

You cannot clear a single picture marker if all the data markers for a series are formatted as picture markers; you must select the series to clear all the picture markers.

If you select a single data marker whose formatting differs from the other markers in its series, the marker will be formatted to look the same as the other markers.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Clear, and then choose Formats.

See Also

Help

Clear Command (Edit Menu for Charts)

Creating and formatting picture markers

Formatting data markers

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Overview of Formatting the Legend

You can change the general appearance of a chart legend by moving it, resizing it, adding a border to it, and formatting it with fill colors and patterns. To apply general formatting changes to the legend as a whole, see Applying colors, patterns, and borders to chart items.

You can also change the way legend entries look by changing their font, point size, and other text characteristics all at once or individually. Legend keys must be changed one at a time, and changes apply to the corresponding data markers.

See Also

Help

Adding a legend

Changing legend entries

Formatting legend entries and keys

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Moving and sizing the legend

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Moving and sizing the legend

Overview

Legends can be moved and sized using the mouse. Or you can use the Placement tab in the Format Legend dialog box to place the legend in a specific chart location. The plot area resizes to make room for the legend. It also changes the horizontal or vertical arrangement of the entries in the legend, if needed, to make the legend fit better in the chart.

To move and size the legend using the mouse

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Select the legend.

3.	To move the legend, drag the dotted border to the position you want.

The dotted border shows the shape and size as you drag.

4.	To resize the legend, point to a selection square.

The mouse pointer changes to a double-headed arrow.

5.	Drag to the size you want.

A dotted border shows the shape and size as you drag.

To move the legend using the Placement tab

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Double-click the legend to display the Format Legend dialog box.

3.	Select the Placement tab.

4.	Under Type, select the legend position you want.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Note  When you use the Placement tab, the legend loses any custom sizing you may have already applied. You can resize it.

See Also

Help

Adding a legend

Formatting legend entries and keys

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

Placement Tab, Selected Legend Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Formatting legend entries and keys

Overview

You can format the text in legends (legend entries) and the legend key appearing next to the entry. Legend entries can be formatted as a group or individually. Legend keys must be formatted individually.

To format one or more legend entries

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	To format all legend entries at once, double-click the legend itself.

To format a single legend entry, select the entry and then double-click it.

3.	Select the Font tab.

4.	Select the options you want.

5.	Choose the OK button.

To format a single legend key

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Double-click the legend key.

3.	Select the Patterns tab.

4.	Under Border, select the style, color, and weight of the line to border the key.

To clear custom formatting and restore default formatting, select the Automatic option button.

5.	Under Area, select a fill color for the key, and a pattern and pattern color to overlay the fill color.

To clear custom formatting and restore default formatting, select the Automatic option button.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Changing legend entries

Changing the font and alignment of chart text

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Moving and sizing the legend

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Overview of Formatting Axes, Tick Marks, and Gridlines

Axes, tick marks, and gridlines are related chart items. When you create a chart, the axes are displayed, but you can turn off the display. With axes displayed, you can change their patterns and colors, and you can format the tick marks and tick-mark labels that appear along the axes.

Gridlines are extensions of the tick marks; they make it easier to see the values associated with data markers. Like axes, gridlines can also be turned on or off, and can be formatted like other lines.

You can change the scale of an axis, the range of values displayed, and the intervals in between values.

See Also

Help

Changing the category or series axis scale

Changing the value axis scale

Displaying or hiding axes

Formatting and arranging tick-mark labels

Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Reversing the plot order of categories, values, or series

User's Guide

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Displaying or hiding axes

Overview

You can turn axes on and off depending on how you want your chart to look. Hiding an axis also hides the tick-mark labels but does not affect the data in your chart.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Axes.

You can also choose Insert Axes from the shortcut menu.

3.	Select the check boxes for the axes you want to display. Clear the check boxes for the axes you don't want to display.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Axes Command (Insert Menu)

Changing the category or series axis scale

Changing the value axis scale

Clear Command (Edit Menu for Charts)

Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Changing the value axis scale

Overview

The scale determines what value tick-mark labels are displayed on an axis, at what intervals the values occur, and where one axis crosses another. To make changes to an axis, it must be displayed. For xy (scatter) charts, which are plotted along two value axes, you can set one or both value axes to cross the other.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Double-click a value axis.

3.	Select the Scale tab.

4.	To change the low (minimum), high (maximum) values, or in-between intervals (major and minor units) on the axis, type values in the boxes to the right of the options; the Auto check boxes are cleared when you type custom values.

To restore the original default values, select the appropriate Auto check boxes.

5.	For all charts except radar charts, type a value to indicate where you want the category axis (or floor in 3-D charts) to cross the value axis; the Auto check box is cleared when you type a custom value.

To restore the original default value, select the Auto check box.

--Or--

To have the category axis on a 2-D chart cross at the highest value on the value axis, select the Category (X) Crosses At Maximum Value check box.

For a 3-D chart, the option changes to Floor (XY Plane) Crosses At Minimum Value.

6.	Select or clear the Logarithmic Scale check box to specify whether you want the scale values calculated and displayed to the power of 10.

7.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Changing the category or series axis scale

Displaying or hiding axes

Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

Reversing the plot order of categories, values, or series

User's Guide

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Changing the category or series axis scale

Overview

Each category on the category axis is usually identified by a single tick-mark label and separated by a single tick mark. You can change these settings to display more than one set of categories between tick-mark labels and tick marks.

For 2-D charts, you can also set the value (y) axis to cross the category (x) axis at the first or last category, or in between.

To change the category axis on a 2-D chart

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Double-click a category axis.

3.	Select the Scale tab.

4.	To change the number of categories between tick-mark labels and tick marks on the axis, type values in the boxes to the right of the options.

To restore the original default values, type 1 in the appropriate check boxes.

5.	To change where the value axis crosses the category axis, type a number to indicate at which category you want the value axis to cross.

For example, type 2 to display the value axis before the second category.

--Or--

To have the value axis cross after the last category, select the Value (Y) Crosses At Maximum Category check box.

6.	To display the value axis through the middle of the category, clear the Value (Y) Axis Crosses Between Categories check box.

7.	Choose the OK button.

To change the category or series axis on a 3-D chart

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Double-click a category or series axis.

3.	Select the Scale tab.

4.	To change the number of category or series clusters between tick-mark labels and tick marks on the axis, type values in the boxes to the right of the options.

To restore the original default values, type 1 in the appropriate check boxes.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Changing the value axis scale

Displaying or hiding axes

Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

Reversing the plot order of categories, values, or series

User's Guide

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Overview

You can customize the style, color, and weight of axes, tick marks, and gridlines. Any colors or patterns you apply to an axis are also applied to the tick marks. Gridlines are formatted independently of the axis. To format axes and gridlines, they must be displayed.

To format axes and tick marks

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Double-click the axis you want to format.

3.	Select the Patterns tab.

4.	Under Axis, select the style, color, and weight for the axis and tick-mark lines.

To clear custom formatting and restore default formatting, select the Automatic option button.

Check the sample of the formatted axis to see if you like the way it looks.

5.	Under Tick Mark Type, indicate how tick marks should appear on the axis line by selecting the appropriate option button for both major and minor tick marks.

To hide major, minor, or both types of tick marks, select the None option button.

6.	Choose the OK button.

To format gridlines

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	To format all major gridlines for an axis, double-click a major gridline for that axis.

To format all minor gridlines for an axis, double-click a minor gridline for that axis.

3.	Select the Patterns tab.

4.	Under Line, select the style, color, and weight for the gridlines.

To clear custom formatting and restore default formatting, select the Automatic option button.

Check the sample of the formatted axis to see if you like the way it looks.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Adding gridlines

Changing tick-mark labels

Displaying or hiding axes

Formatting and arranging tick-mark labels

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Formatting and arranging tick-mark labels

Overview

You can change the font, location, orientation, and number format of tick-mark labels.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Double-click the axis whose tick-mark labels you want to format.

3.	Select the Patterns tab.

4.	Under Tick-Mark Labels, select the position on the chart where you want the tick-mark labels to appear.

If you changed where this axis crosses another axis and you want to keep the tick-mark labels near the axis, select the Next To Axis option button.

5.	Select the Alignment tab.

6.	Under Orientation, select the text orientation you want.

7.	Select the Font tab.

8.	Select the font options you want.

9.	Select the Number tab.

10.	Select the number format options you want.

11.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Changing the font and alignment of chart text

Changing tick-mark labels

Displaying or hiding axes

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Overview of Changing the 3-D Chart View

3-D charts offer a more flexible way to present data. In addition to formatting data markers, you can also format the walls and floor of most 3-D charts.

You use the 3-D View command on the Format menu to control a 3-D chart's elevation, rotation, perspective, and height, and to turn right-angle axes on or off. Using the mouse, you can also rotate and elevate a 3-D chart. The look of a 3-D chart can be further adjusted with the [chart type] Group command (such as 3-D Column Group) on the Format menu by changing the depth and width, depending on the chart type.

There are essentially three kinds of 3-D charts. One has 3-D markers arranged along the category axis. The second is a 3-D perspective chart with a third (series) axis and 3-D markers arranged in layers (series) from front to back. The 3-D pie chart is the last kind; it has no axes, walls, or floor. You can format its data markers and change its rotation, elevation, and height.

Once you have formatted and adjusted a 3-D chart to your needs, you may want to save it as an autoformat. For more information, see Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list.

See Also

Help

3-D View Command (Format Menu)

Changing a 3-D chart's depth and width

Formatting a 3-D chart's walls and floor

Formatting data markers

Rotating and elevating a 3-D chart

Setting a 3-D chart's height and perspective

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Formatting a 3-D chart's walls and floor

Overview

You can format the walls and floors of most 3-D charts, except pie charts, by applying patterns, colors, and borders.

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Double-click a wall or floor.

3.	Select the Patterns tab.

4.	Under Border, select the style, color, and weight of the line to border the walls or floor.

To clear custom formatting and restore default formatting, select the Automatic option button.

5.	Under Area, select a fill color for the walls or floor, and a pattern and pattern color to overlay the fill color.

To clear custom formatting and restore default formatting, select the Automatic option button.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Formatting data markers

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

Patterns Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Rotating and elevating a 3-D chart

Overview

You can adjust the rotation and elevation of a 3-D chart by dragging with the mouse or using the 3-D View command on the Format menu.

1.	Activate a 3-D chart.

2.	Click the intersection of any two axes to select the corners of the chart.

Handles appear at all the corners. To verify that you've selected the corners and not the plot area, be sure that the Name box on the formula bar says "Corners."

3.	Drag any corner to adjust the elevation and rotation of the chart.

To view the data markers, hold down CTRL as you drag.

Alternate Method

1.	Activate a 3-D chart.

2.	From the Format menu or the shortcut menu, choose 3-D View.

3.	Type the values you want in the Elevation (-90 to 90) and Rotation (0 to 360) boxes.

You can also click the arrows to increase or decrease these values.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Tip  If you like the way your 3-D chart is displayed, you can save it as a custom autoformat and apply it to other 3-D charts that you create.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list.

Changing a 3-D chart's depth and width

Formatting a 3-D chart's walls and floor

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

Setting a 3-D chart's height and perspective

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Setting a 3-D chart's height and perspective

Overview

Depending on the chart type and the options you select, you can change the height and perspective, and turn right angles on or off.

With right-angle axes turned off (check box cleared), you can adjust perspective and height.

With right-angle axes turned on, you can either adjust the height or turn on auto scaling.

With both right angle axes and auto scaling turned on, you can't adjust perspective or height.

1.	Activate a 3-D chart.

2.	From the Format menu or the shortcut menu, choose 3-D View.

3.	To show axes at right angles to each other, select the Right Angle Axes check box.

To show the axes in perspective, clear the Right Angle Axes check box.

Note  The Right Angle Axes option is not available for 3-D pie charts, which do not have axes.

4.	If you turned on right-angle axes, you can select the Auto Scaling check box to automatically rescale the chart. However, to specify a height, auto scaling must be turned off.

If you turned off right-angle axes, type a value from 0 to 100 in the Perspective box.

Note  The Perspective option is not available for 3-D bar charts, which always have the Right Angle Axes check box selected.

5.	With auto scaling turned off, type the height of the chart in the Height box.

Height is measured as a percentage of the length of the x-axis.

6.	To apply your changes and close the dialog box, choose the OK button.

To apply your changes and continue adjusting the chart, choose the Apply button.

To restore the original 3-D view settings, choose the Default button.

Tip  If you like the way your 3-D chart is displayed, you can save it as a custom autoformat and apply it to other 3-D charts that you create.

See Also

Help

3-D View Command (Format Menu)

Changing a 3-D chart's depth and width

Formatting a 3-D chart's walls and floor

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Rotating and elevating a 3-D chart

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Changing a 3-D chart's depth and width

Overview

You can change the chart depth in 3-D charts that have axes, the gap depth in 3-D perspective charts, and the gap width in bar or column charts.

1.	Activate a 3-D chart.

2.	From the Format menu, choose the chart type group (such as 3-D Column Group) that you want to change.

3.	Select the Options tab.

4.	Select the options you want.

Option	Effect

Chart Depth	Determines the shape of the base (or floor).

Gap Depth	Changes spacing between data markers in all 3-D perspective charts, except surface charts.

Gap Width	Changes spacing between clusters of 3-D category data markers in 3-D bar or column charts.

Check the sample to see if you've achieved the effects you want.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

[chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Formatting a 3-D chart's walls and floor

Gridlines Command (Insert Menu)

Rotating and elevating a 3-D chart

Setting a 3-D chart's height and perspective

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Overview of Preparing a Chart for Printing

Once your chart is formatted, you can see how the printed version will look even before you print it.

If your chart is embedded on a worksheet, you can size it and move it elsewhere on the worksheet, and then view the worksheet and embedded chart together using the Print Preview command on the File menu. For information about resizing and moving an embedded chart, see Moving and sizing an embedded chart.

If you're working with a chart sheet, you can size and scale the chart area the way you want, specify how it should be placed on the paper you'll be printing on, and view it in the preview window to see how it will look before you send it to a printer.

See Also

Help

Chart Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Previewing what will print

Print Preview Command (File Menu)

Printing charts with colors

Selecting the print size for a chart sheet

Sizing a chart sheet with the window

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Selecting the print size for a chart sheet

Overview

By default, a chart sheet prints in landscape orientation, sized to fit the full page. However, you can change the orientation and the printing option to achieve the look you want for your printed chart.

1.	Activate a chart sheet.

2.	From the File menu, choose Page Setup.

3.	Select the Chart tab.

4.	Select the printing option you want. Refer to the pictures for assistance.

Page Size Option	Effect

Use Full Page	Changes the proportions of the chart as necessary to fill an entire printed page. You cannot move or size the chart area when this option is selected.

Scale To Fit Page	Maintains the chart's proportions, printing it as large as the printed page size allows.

Custom	Prints the chart using the same size and proportions as displayed on the screen.

Tip  To print without headers or footers, select the Header/Footer tab in the Page Setup dialog box. Select (None) under Header, and again under Footer.

5.	To close the Page Setup dialog box and not print, choose the OK button.

To print, choose the Print button.

See Also

Help

Chart Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Header/Footer Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Moving and sizing chart items

Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Printing charts with colors

Sizing a chart sheet with the window

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Printing charts with colors

Overview

If you have a color printer, you can print a chart sheet with colors. The results depend on the printer you are using.

1.	Activate a chart sheet.

2.	From the File menu, choose Page Setup.

3.	Select the Chart tab.

4.	Clear the Print In Black And White check box if it isn't already cleared.

Tip  If printing to a black-and-white printer, choose the Print Preview button to see how the colors of your data series will change to different grayscales. Your chart will be displayed in the preview window.

5.	To close the Page Setup dialog box and not print, choose the OK button.

To print, choose the Print button.

See Also

Help

Chart Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Previewing what will print

Selecting the print size for a chart sheet

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Object Command (Format Menu)

Patterns Tab, Object Command (Format Menu)

Protection Tab, Object Command (Format Menu)

Properties Tab, Object Command (Format Menu)

Font Tab, Object Command (Format Menu)

Alignment Tab, Object Command (Format Menu)

Alignment Tab, Selected Object Command (Format Menu)

Control Tab, Object Command (Format Menu)


Selected Object Command (Format Menu)

Patterns Tab, Selected Object Command (Format Menu)

Protection Tab, Selected Object Command (Format Menu)

Properties Tab, Selected Object Command (Format Menu)

Font Tab, Selected Object Command (Format Menu)

Alignment Tab, Selected Object Command (Format Menu)

Control Tab, Object Command (Format Menu)


Chart Type Command (Format Menu)

Changes the chart type of an entire chart, a chart type group, or an individual data series.

Apply To

Selected Data Series

Must be selected to change the chart type for a data series, in effect creating a kind of overlay or combination chart.

Group

Must be selected to change the chart type for a chart type group, such as a column group or line group. When this option is selected, you can then select the chart types you want to change from the list appearing below this option.

Entire Chart

Must be selected to change the chart type of the entire chart. All data series then belong to a single group.

Chart Dimension

You cannot combine 3-D charts with any other chart type.

2-D

Indicates that only 2-D charts can be selected. Once this option button is selected, you can then select from the picture box the 2-D chart type you want to apply.

3-D

Changes the chart type of the entire chart. Once this option button is selected, you can then select from the picture box the 3-D chart type you want to apply. 3-D charts cannot be combined with any other chart types.

Options

Choosing this button closes the Chart Type dialog box and displays the Format [chart type] Group dialog box for the active chart type group. You can then change the series order, subtype, and other options for the chart.

To return to this Chart Type dialog box, choose the Chart Type button in the Format [chart type] Group dialog box.

See Also

Help

   Chart Type Button

Changing the chart type of a data series

Multiple Chart Types and a Secondary Axis

Plotting data along a secondary axis

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Applies built-in or custom (user-defined) autoformats to an active chart. Also adds a new custom autoformat to or deletes an existing custom autoformat from the Formats list. Depending on the task you want to accomplish and the options selected, you may see one or a series of dialog boxes.

AutoFormat dialog box

To apply a built-in autoformat

Built-in

Appears under Formats Used. Must be selected to apply a built-in autoformat.

Galleries

Displays a list of available built-in chart types, as well as a combination autoformat, when the Built-in option button is selected.

Formats

Displays pictures of all built-in autoformats for the chart type (or combination autoformat) selected under Galleries.

To apply a custom autoformat, or add or delete a custom autoformat

User-Defined

Appears under Formats Used. Must be selected if you want to apply a custom autoformat, or add a custom autoformat to or delete a custom autoformat from the Formats list.

Formats

Displays a list of available custom autoformats, when the User-Defined option button is selected.

Customize

Choose this button to begin adding or deleting a custom autoformat.

User-Defined AutoFormats dialog box

If you choose the Customize button, the Customize User-Defined AutoFormats dialog box is displayed.

Add

Choose this button to add a custom autoformat to the Formats list.

Delete

Choose this button to delete a custom autoformat from the Formats list.

Add Custom AutoFormat dialog box

If you choose the Add button, the Add Custom AutoFormat dialog box is displayed.

Format Name

Type a name (up to 31 characters long) for the custom format you are adding.

Description

Type a description (up to 32 characters long) that further explains the custom format you are adding.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list

Applying an autoformat to a chart

Changing the default chart format

Deleting a custom autoformat from the Formats list

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


3-D View Command (Format Menu)

Controls the angles at which you view data in 3-D charts. A sample chart in the dialog box shows the current settings.

Elevation

Controls the height at which you view the data. Elevation is measured in degrees. For all charts except pie charts and 3-D bar charts, ranges from -90 (view from directly below the plot area) to 90 degrees (view from directly above the plot area). For pie charts, ranges from 10 to 80 degrees. For 3-D bar charts, ranges from 0 to 44 degrees.

Perspective

Controls the amount of perspective. A greater degree of perspective provides a greater sense of depth when viewing the chart. The perspective value specifies the ratio of the front of the chart to the back of the chart and can range from 0 to 100. Unavailable for 3-D bar charts or when right-angle axes are turned on.

Rotation

Controls the rotation of the plot area around the z-axis (vertical axis). The rotation is measured in degrees from 0 to 360. For 3-D bar charts, the rotation ranges from 0 to 44 degrees.

Right Angle Axes

Sets the axes at right angles independent of chart rotation or elevation. To see axes in perspective, turn off this option. For 3-D bar charts, this option is always turned on.

Auto Scaling

Available only if right-angle axes are turned on. When you change a 2-D chart into a 3-D chart, it is sometimes drawn smaller. For charts with right-angle axes and a rotation of less than 45 degrees, this option scales the 3-D chart so that it is closer in size to the 2-D version.

Height % Of Base

Controls the height of the z-axis and walls relative to the length of the x-axis or the width of the base of the chart. The height is measured as a percentage of the x-axis length. For example, a value of 200% makes the chart height twice the x-axis length.

Apply

Applies the current settings to the active chart without closing the dialog box so that you can see the effects of your changes.

Default

Resets all the settings in the dialog box to the original default settings.

See Also

Help

Changing a 3-D chart's depth and width

Rotating and elevating a 3-D chart

Setting a 3-D chart's height and perspective

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

The name of this first command on the Format menu depends on which chart item is selected. For example, if a legend is selected, the command reads Selected Legend. If a data series is selected, the command says Selected Data Series.

The formatting dialog box offers one or more formatting-related tabs. Like the command itself, the tabs and options available are contingent on the item selected. To read more about these tabs, you can select topics from the following list.

This tab topic	Relates to

Patterns Tab	All chart items, including chart area and plot area
Font Tab	Chart text items, chart area
Alignment Tab	Chart text items
Number Tab	Numeric chart items, tick-mark labels
Value (Y) Axis Scale Tab (for 2-D Charts)	2-D charts, including xy (scatter) and excluding radar charts
Value (Y) Axis Scale Tab (for Radar Charts)	Radar charts only
Value (X) Axis Scale Tab	XY (scatter) charts only
Category (X) Axis Scale Tab (for 2-D Charts)	2-D charts, excluding xy (scatter) and radar charts
Value (Z) Axis Scale Tab	3-D charts
Category (X) Axis Scale Tab (for 3-D Charts)	3-D charts
Series (Y) Axis Scale Tab	3-D charts
Name and Values Tab	Data series, data point
Axis Tab	Data series and the axes they are assigned to
X Values Tab	Data series
Placement Tab	Legend only
Data Labels Tab	Data series, data point
Y Error Bars Tab	Data series and all error bars
X Error Bars Tab	Data series and error bars for xy charts
Type Tab	Trendlines
Options Tab	Trendlines
See Also

Help

Applying colors, patterns, and borders to chart items

Changing number formats for chart values

Changing the font and alignment of chart text

Moving and sizing chart items

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Alignment Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

Controls the text alignment and orientation of chart and axis titles, data labels, trendline labels, and text boxes; and only the orientation of tick-mark labels. Options available depend on the type of text that is selected.

Alignment is especially useful for several lines of text. There are no visual effects from changing the alignment of a single line of text.

Text Alignment

Controls the horizontal and vertical alignment of selected chart text within its text border. These options are not available for tick-mark labels.

Horizontal

Left, Right, Center

Aligns chart text to the left or the right, or centers it within the text border.

Justify

Aligns wrapped chart text within its text border to the right and left.

Vertical

Top, Bottom, Center

Aligns chart text along the top, bottom, or middle of its text border.

Justify

Justifies the chart text up and down within the width of its text border.

Orientation

Controls the orientation of selected chart text. If there is too much text to format into a single line, Microsoft Excel wraps the text into lines. If a chart axis is selected, controls the orientation of the tick-mark labels.

Automatic Size

When checked, sizes the border of a text box to fit the text within.

See Also

Help

Adding a chart title and axis titles

Adding data labels

Changing the font and alignment of chart text

Formatting and arranging tick-mark labels

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Font Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

Changes the font, style, size, color, underlines, and effects of selected chart text.

Font

Lists available screen and printer fonts. You can select a font from the list.

Printer fonts are indicated by a printer graphic next to the font name. TrueType fonts are indicated by a TrueType logo next to the font name.

Font Style

Lists the available font styles. You can select one of the styles in the list.

Shortcuts:	Bold button

Italic button

CTRL+B (Bold)

CTRL+I (Italic)

Size

Lists the available sizes for the font selected in Font box. You can select a font size or type the size you want in the box above the list of sizes.

Underline

Controls the style of underline: none, single, or double.

Shortcuts:	Underline button

CTRL+U

Color

Controls the text color. Select a color from the list, or select Automatic to set the color to the window text color defined in the Windows Control Panel. Unless you have changed the window text color, Automatic sets the text color to black.

Background

Automatic

Applies the default background.

Transparent

Leaves the area behind the chart text transparent.

Opaque

Removes any pattern but leaves the fill color behind the chart text.

Effects

Strikethrough

Formats selected characters with a horizontal line through the middle.

Shortcut:	CTRL+5

Superscript, Subscript

Formats selected characters higher or lower on the line.

Preview

Shows a sample of the text with the current font formatting choices applied.

See Also

Help

Changing the font and alignment of chart text

Customizing colors in a color palette

Formatting and arranging tick-mark labels

Formatting legend entries and keys

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Number Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

Determines how information is displayed for chart values, such as value axis tick-mark labels, data labels that express value or percentage, and trendline labels. You can use one of the built-in number formats, or you can create your own custom formats.

Category

Lists a variety of number, date, and time formats. When you select a category, the corresponding built-in and custom formats appear in the Format Codes box.

Format Codes

Lists all available formats for a selected category. If the source workbook is open, all chart values retain the format assigned to the worksheet cells. This format can be changed.

Shortcuts:	CTRL+SHIFT+ ~ (General format)

CTRL+SHIFT+ ! (0.00)

CTRL+SHIFT+ @ (h:mm)

CTRL+SHIFT+ # (d-mmm-yy)

CTRL+SHIFT+ $ [($#,##0.00);($#,##.00)]

CTRL+SHIFT+ % (0%)

CTRL+SHIFT+ ^ (0.00E+00)

Code

Displays the format selected in the Format Codes box.

To add a custom format, edit the format shown in the Format box or type a new one. The custom format is added to the appropriate categories.

Sample

Displays a sample of the format selected. The format is applied to the selected chart data.

Linked To Source

When this check box is selected, chart values are linked to the worksheet data used to create the chart. Changing data labels breaks the link. To restore a broken link, recheck this box for the selected chart item.

Delete

Deletes a selected custom format displayed in the Code box. You cannot delete built-in number formats.

See Also

Help

Changing data labels

Changing number formats for chart values

Formatting and arranging tick-mark labels

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Patterns Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

Applies a variety of formatting to selected chart items. Options vary depending on the chart item selected.

Area/Border/Line/Axis/Marker

For Area, options apply fill colors, patterns, and pattern colors to the area within selected chart items, including plot area, chart area, most data markers, 3-D walls and floors, and so on. Border and Area appear as a pair in the dialog box.

For Border, options apply style, color, and weight to the lines that form borders around many chart items. Border and Area are paired in the dialog box.

For Line, options apply style, color, and weight to lines, including line charts, xy (scatter) charts, radar charts, trendlines, gridlines, series lines, and so on.

For Axis, options apply style, color, and weight to the axis line and its tick marks.

For Marker, options apply style, foreground, and background to error bars, and data markers in line, radar, and xy charts.

Automatic

Applies the default patterns to a border, line, axis, or area.

None

Makes the selected chart item, area, border, or marker invisible. Gridlines cannot be made invisible. Use the Gridlines command on the Insert menu to turn off gridlines.

Custom

Removes default settings so that you can customize the style, color, and weight of a border or line; or the background color, or pattern and pattern color of a chart item area.

Style

Controls the style of a line; data marker shape for xy (scatter), line, or radar charts; or marker end shape of error bars.

Color

Controls the color of a line, border, or axis. Under Area, displays a palette of colors that fill the area around the chart item.

Weight

Controls the weight (thickness) of a line or axis.

Pattern

Displays a palette of patterns and pattern colors. Controls the pattern and pattern color displayed over the area of a chart item. Overlays the fill color.

Foreground

Controls the foreground color of the fill pattern. A solid pattern is the foreground color. A pattern other than solid is a combination of the foreground and background colors. Applies to markers only.

Background

Controls the background color of the fill pattern. A solid pattern is the foreground color. A pattern other than solid is a combination of the foreground and background colors. Applies to markers only.

Shadow

Adds a shadow to the bottom and right side of the chart area, title, legend, data labels, trendline label, or text box.

Invert If Negative

Reverses the foreground and background colors for the data series marker in a bar, column, area, or pie chart when the value it represents is negative.

Smoothed Lines

Smoothes out the angularity in the lines of a line chart or an xy (scatter) chart.

Tick Mark Type

Displays major or minor tick marks (hashes) on the chart side of axes, on the other side of axes, or across the axes; or hides tick marks altogether.

Tick-Mark Labels

Displays tick-mark labels at the low end of the axis, high end of the axis, or next to the axis; or hides tick-mark labels altogether.

Sample

Shows the current line or pattern format.

Picture Format

These options apply to picture markers only.

Stretch, Stack, Stack And Scale

Stretches the picture, stacks it at normal size, or stacks a scaled picture.

Units/Picture

Indicates the number of value units per picture. Valid for the Stack And Scale option only.

See Also

Help

Applying colors, patterns, and borders to chart items

Creating and formatting picture markers

Formatting a 3-D chart's walls and floor

Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Formatting data markers

Formatting legend entries and keys

Gridlines Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Axis Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

Assigns a primary or secondary axis to a data series or to all data series of one chart type.

Primary Axis

Plots the selected data series or chart type group along the primary axis.

Secondary Axis

Plots the selected data series or chart type group along the secondary axis.

Displays a second axis if it hasn't already been added to the chart.

See Also

Help

Axes Command (Insert Menu)

Displaying or hiding axes

Multiple Chart Types and a Secondary Axis

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"


Category (X) Axis Scale Tab (for 2-D Charts)

Controls the scale settings (that is, the spacing between tick marks, tick-mark labels, and gridlines) for the category (x) axis for most 2-D charts except xy (scatter), radar, pie, and doughnut charts.

Value (Y) Axis Crosses At Category Number

Specifies the number of the category where the value axis will cross the category axis.

Number Of Categories Between Tick-Mark Labels

Specifies which categories are labeled.

In the box, type 1 to label every category, 2 to label every other category, 3 to label every third category, and so on.

Number Of Categories Between Tick Marks

Specifies the number of categories between each pair of tick marks.

Value (Y) Axis Crosses Between Categories

Displays the value axis at the edge of the category indicated in the Value (Y) Axis Crosses At Category Number box; otherwise, the value axis crosses through the center of the category.

If this option is selected, data points are plotted between tick marks; if this option is cleared, they are plotted at the tick-mark positions.

Categories In Reverse Order

Reverses the displayed order of the categories.

Value (Y) Axis Crosses at Maximum Category

Displays the value axis after the last category. This option overrides the Value (Y) Axis Crosses At Category Number value.

See Also

Help

Changing the category or series axis scale

Changing the value axis scale

Displaying or hiding axes

Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Reversing the plot order of categories, values, or series

User's Guide

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Category (X) Axis Scale Tab (for 3-D Charts)

Controls the scale settings (that is, the spacing between tick marks, tick-mark labels, and gridlines) for the category (x) axis on 3-D charts.

Number Of Categories Between Tick-Mark Labels

Specifies which categories are labeled.

In the box, type 1 to label every category, 2 to label every other category, 3 to label every third category, and so on.

Number Of Categories Between Tick Marks

Specifies the number of categories between each pair of tick marks.

Categories In Reverse Order

Reverses the displayed order of the categories.

Value (Z) Axis Crosses Between Categories

Displays the value axis at the edge of the category indicated in the Value (Y) Axis Crosses At Category Number box; otherwise, the value axis crosses through the center of the category.

Available for 3-D line and 3-D area charts only .

See Also

Help

Changing the category or series axis scale

Displaying or hiding axes

Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Reversing the plot order of categories, values, or series

User's Guide

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Series (Y) Axis Scale Tab (for 3-D Charts)

Controls the scale settings (that is, the spacing between tick marks, tick-mark labels, and gridlines) for the series (y) axis on 3-D charts.

Number Of Series Between Tick-Mark Labels

Specifies which series are labeled.

In the box, type 1 to label every series, 2 to label every other series, 3 to label every third series, and so on.

Number Of Series Between Tick Marks

Specifies the number of series between each pair of tick marks.

Series In Reverse Order

Reverses the displayed order of the series.

See Also

Help

Changing the category or series axis scale

Displaying or hiding axes

Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Reversing the plot order of categories, values, or series

User's Guide

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Value (Y) Axis Scale Tab (for 2-D Charts)

Controls the scale settings for the value (y) axis on all 2-D charts except radar charts.

Minimum

Specifies the smallest data value to appear on the value axis. If the Auto check box is selected, displays the lowest value (rounded) from all data series.

Maximum

Specifies the highest data value to appear on the value axis. If the Auto check box is selected, displays the highest value (rounded) from all data series.

Major Unit

Specifies the increment between major tick marks and major gridlines if displayed on the value axis. If the Auto check box is selected, automatically calculates the increment.

Minor Unit

Specifies the increment between minor tick marks and minor gridlines if displayed on the value axis. If the Auto check box is selected, automatically calculates the increment.

Category (X) Axis Crosses At

Specifies the value at which the category axis crosses the value axis. If the Auto check box is selected, the category axis crosses at zero or at the number in the value axis range closest to zero. This option changes to Value (X) Axis Crosses At for an xy (scatter) chart.

Logarithmic Scale

Recalculates the Minimum, Maximum, Major Unit, and Minor Unit values as powers of 10, based on the range of data plotted in the chart. No zero or negative data values are permitted on logarithmic charts. The Major Unit and Minor Unit must both be at least 10. If you type a value that is not a power of 10 in the Maximum or Minimum box, it will be rounded up or down to the next power of 10.

Values In Reverse Order

Inverts the chart and displays the lowest scale value at the chart top and the highest scale value at the chart bottom.

Category (X) Axis Crosses At Maximum Value

Makes the category axis cross the value axis at the highest value. This option overrides the Category (X) Axis Crosses At value. This option changes to Value (X) Axis Crosses At Maximum Value for an xy (scatter) chart.

See Also

Help

Changing the category or series axis scale

Displaying or hiding axes

Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Reversing the plot order of categories, values, or series

User's Guide

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Value (Y) Axis Scale Tab (for Radar Charts)

Controls the scale settings for the value axes on a radar chart, which has no category axis.

Minimum

Specifies the smallest data value to appear on the value axis. If the Auto check box is selected, displays the lowest value (rounded) from all data series.

Maximum

Specifies the highest data value to appear on the value axis. If the Auto check box is selected, displays the highest value (rounded) from all data series.

Major Unit

Specifies the increment between major tick marks and major gridlines if displayed on the value axis. If the Auto check box is selected, automatically calculates the increment.

Minor Unit

Specifies the increment between minor tick marks and minor gridlines if displayed on the value axis. If the Auto check box is selected, automatically calculates the increment.

Logarithmic Scale

Recalculates the Minimum, Maximum, Major Unit, and Minor Unit values as powers of 10, based on the range of data plotted in the chart. No zero or negative data values are permitted on logarithmic charts. The Major Unit and Minor Unit must both be at least 10. If you type a value that is not a power of 10 in the Maximum or Minimum box, it will be rounded up or down to the next power of 10.

See Also

Help

Changing the category or series axis scale

Displaying or hiding axes

Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Value (X) Axis Scale Tab (for XY (Scatter) Charts)

Controls the scale settings for the second value axis, which is the horizontal axis, on an xy (scatter) chart.

Minimum

Specifies the smallest data value to appear on the value axis. If the Auto check box is selected, displays the lowest value (rounded) from all data series.

Maximum

Specifies the highest data value to appear on the value axis. If the Auto check box is selected, displays the highest value (rounded) from all data series.

Major Unit

Specifies the increment between major tick marks and major gridlines if displayed on the value axis. If the Auto check box is selected, automatically calculates the increment.

Minor Unit

Specifies the increment between minor tick marks and minor gridlines if displayed on the value axis. If the Auto check box is selected, automatically calculates the increment.

Value (Y) Axis Crosses At

Specifies the value at which the value (y) axis crosses the value (x) axis.

Logarithmic Scale

Recalculates the Minimum, Maximum, Major Unit, and Minor Unit values as powers of 10, based on the range of data plotted in the chart. No zero or negative data values are permitted on logarithmic charts. The Major Unit and Minor Unit must both be at least 10. If you type a value that is not a power of 10 in the Maximum or Minimum box, it will be rounded up or down to the next power of 10.

Values In Reverse Order

Inverts the chart and displays the lowest scale value at the chart top and the highest scale value at the chart bottom.

Value (Y) Axis Crosses At Maximum Value

Makes the value (y) axis cross the value (x) axis at the highest value. This option overrides the Value (Y) Axis Crosses At value.

See Also

Help

Changing the value axis scale

Displaying or hiding axes

Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Reversing the plot order of categories, values, or series

User's Guide

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Value (Z) Axis Scale Tab (for 3-D Charts)

Controls the scale settings for the value axis on 3-D charts.

Minimum

Specifies the smallest data value to appear on the value axis. If the Auto check box is selected, displays the lowest value (rounded) from all data series.

Maximum

Specifies the highest data value to appear on the value axis. If the Auto check box is selected, displays the highest value (rounded) from all data series.

Major Unit

Specifies the increment between major tick marks and major gridlines if displayed on the value axis. If the Auto check box is selected, automatically calculates the increment.

Minor Unit

Specifies the increment between minor tick marks and minor gridlines if displayed on the value axis. If the Auto check box is selected, automatically calculates the increment.

Floor (XY Plane) Crosses At

Specifies the value at which the floor of a 3-D plotted chart crosses the value (z) axis.

Logarithmic Scale

Recalculates the Minimum, Maximum, Major Unit, and Minor Unit values as powers of 10, based on the range of data plotted in the chart. No zero or negative data values are permitted on logarithmic charts. The Major Unit and Minor Unit must both be at least 10. If you type a value that is not a power of 10 in the Maximum or Minimum box, it will be rounded up or down to the next power of 10.

Values In Reverse Order

Inverts the chart and displays the lowest scale value at the chart top and the highest scale value at the chart bottom.

Floor (XY Plane) Crosses At Minimum Value

Displays the floor of a 3-D plotted chart at the lowest value on the chart. This option overrides the Floor (XY Plane) Crosses At value.

See Also

Help

Changing the value axis scale

Displaying or hiding axes

Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Reversing the plot order of categories, values, or series

User's Guide

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Name and Values Tab, Selected Data Series Command (Format Menu)

Identifies the cell reference for the data series and the name of the data series.

Name

Displays the name of the selected data series. The name can be an external absolute reference to a single cell or a name defined to be a single cell. It can also be text. The name appears in the legend.

Y Values

Contains the values reference for the selected data series. The reference can be an external reference to the worksheet and cells that contain the values, a reference to a named range, or an array constant.

See Also

Help

Changing legend entries

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"


X Values Tab, Selected Data Series Command (Format Menu)

Contains the cell reference for the category tick-mark labels for all charts, except xy (scatter), pie, and doughnut. For xy charts, it contains the cell reference for the x values, which create the data point when paired with their respective y values.

The reference can be an external reference to the worksheet and cells that contain the values, a reference to a named range, or an array constant.

See Also

Help

Changing tick-mark labels

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"


Placement Tab, Selected Legend Command (Format Menu)

Repositions the selected legend on a chart. You can move a legend using the mouse or the Placement tab. As the legend is dragged, a dotted border shows its current shape and size.

Top, Bottom

Centers the legend above or below the chart.

Corner

Places the legend in the upper-right corner of the chart.

Right, Left

Centers the legend vertically to the right or left of the chart.

See Also

Help

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Moving and sizing the legend

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

Selecting items in a chart with the keyboard

User's Guide

Chapter 15. "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Data Labels Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

Adds or changes data labels in a data series, an individual data point, or all the data points in the chart.

The chart type assigned to the selected data points determines which kinds of labels can be displayed.

Data displayed in data labels is taken directly from the worksheet data.

You can edit the labels after adding them to the chart, in which case the text will no longer come from the worksheet data, and the link will be broken.

Data Labels

None

No data labels are displayed for the selected data points. If this option is selected when labels are already displayed in a chart, they are cleared from the selected data points.

Show Value

Displays the value of the data point.

Show Percent

Displays percentages of the whole for pie and doughnut charts.

Show Label

Displays the category assigned to the data point.

For area charts, shows series names.

Show Label and Percent

Displays percentages of the whole, and category or series names for pie and doughnut charts.

Show Legend Key Next To Label

Places the legend key (with the assigned format and color) next to the data label.

See Also

Help

Adding data labels

Changing data labels

Changing number formats for chart values

Changing the font and alignment of chart text

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Y Error Bars Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

Adds or modifies error bars that are associated with data series in area, bar, column, line, and xy (scatter) chart groups. Cannot add error bars to 3-D, radar, pie, or doughnut charts.

Display

Displays both plus and minus error bars (the default), plus bars only, minus bars only, or no error bars at all.

Error Amount

Fixed Value

A constant value used as the error amount for all data points.

Percentage

A percentage value, to be calculated from each data point to be used as the error amount.

Standard Deviations

A number of standard deviations from the mean of plotted values to be used as the error amount.

Standard Error

Uses the standard error of the plotted values as the error amount for each data point.

Custom

A worksheet range containing the same number of values as there are data points in the series. Each value is a custom amount for the corresponding data point. An array notation (for example, {4, 3.75, 3.25, 2.5}) may be used. Enter values for both plus and minus, or under Display, select the Both check box to apply your entry to both the plus and minus error bars.

See Also

Help

Adding error bars to a data series

Deleting error bars

Formatting error bars

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Modifying error bar settings

X Error Bars Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


X Error Bars Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

Adds and modifies X error bars for data series in an xy (scatter) chart group.

Display

Displays both plus and minus error bars (the default), plus bars only, minus bars only, or no error bars at all.

Error Amount

Fixed Value

A constant value used as the error amount for all data points.

Percentage

A percentage value to be calculated from each data point to be used as the error amount.

Standard Deviations

A number of standard deviations from the mean of plotted values to be used as the error amount.

Standard Error

Uses the standard error of the plotted values as the error amount for each data point.

Custom

A worksheet range containing the same number of values as there are data points in the series. Each value is a custom amount for the corresponding data point. An array notation (for example, {4, 3.75, 3.25, 2.5}) may be used. Enter values for both plus and minus, or under Display, select the Both check box to apply your entry to both the plus and minus error bars.

See Also

Help

Adding error bars to a data series

Deleting error bars

Formatting error bars

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Modifying error bar settings

Y Error Bars Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Type Tab, Selected Trendline Command (Format Menu)

Changes the trendline type associated with data series in area, bar, column, line, and xy (scatter) chart groups.

Cannot add trendlines to 3-D, radar, pie, or doughnut charts.

Trend or Regression Type

Specifies the type of trendline:

Linear

Polynomial Order. The highest order, expressed as an integer between 2 and 6.

Logarithmic

Exponential

Power

Moving Average Period. The number of periods used to calculate the moving average.

See Also

Help

Adding a trendline to a data series

Deleting a trendline

Formatting a trendline

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Modifying trendline settings

Options Tab, Selected Trendline Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Options Tab, Selected Trendline Command (Format Menu)

Displays the various options available to modify trendlines.

Trendline Name

Provides a name for the trendline; it appears in the legend.

Automatic

The trendline name is based on the type selected and the series it is associated with. For example, if a linear trendline is added to the third data series in a chart type group, the name Linear (Series 3) is displayed.

Custom

Type a name of your choice, up to 256 characters.

Forecast

Available only for regression types (not for moving average).

Forward

The number of periods (units for xy charts) the trendline projects into the future or away from the y-axis.

Backward

The number of periods (units for xy charts) the trendline projects into the past or toward the y-axis.

Set Intercept

The point at which the trendline meets the y-axis. Available only for some regression types.

Display Equation On Chart

Displays the trendline's regression equation in the trendline label on the chart.

Display R-Squared On Chart

Displays the trendline's R-squared value in the trendline label on the chart.

See Also

Help

Adding a trendline to a data series

Deleting a trendline

Formatting a trendline

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Modifying trendline settings

Type Tab, Selected Trendline Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


[chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

The name of the command (or commands) appearing at the bottom of the Format menu depends on the chart type groups in the active chart. For example, if the active chart contains a single column chart type, the command at the bottom of the Format menu reads Column Group. If you change a data series to a line chart type, the Format menu would then list two commands, Column Group and Line Group.

When you choose this command, the following four tabs appear in the dialog box:

Subtype

Options

Series Order

Axis

These tabs enable you to select a different subtype; add special lines and bars, and change other options; change the plot order of the data series in a chart type group; and plot data along a secondary axis for the selected chart type group.

There are limitations to the number of chart type groups you can combine in any one chart. For more information, see Multiple Chart Types and a Secondary Axis.

See Also

Help

Axis Tab, [chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Options Tab, [chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Series Order Tab, [chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Subtype Tab, [chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Options Tab, [chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

The options that appear in this tab vary according to the [chart type] Group command you selected from the Format Menu.

Overlap

Determines how much the markers within a cluster overlap each other. A value of -100 to 100 is the percentage of the bar or column width. A negative value sets a gap between markers. The higher the value, the greater the overlap; the lower the value, the greater the gap, or spacing. A value of 100 would show only one data marker, completely obscuring any others in the cluster.

Available for 2-D bar and column chart groups.

Gap Width

Determines the width of the space between clusters. A value of 0 to 500 is a percentage of the bar or column width. The higher the value, the greater the distance between clusters.

Available for bar, column, line, 3-D bar, and 3-D column chart groups.

Series Lines

Connects the tops of the data markers for each series with lines. Applies only to stacked bar and stacked column chart groups.

Vary Colors By Point/Slice

For chart type groups with only one data series, assigns a different color or marker to each data marker. Does not apply to a chart with more than one series.

Available for bar, column, line, pie, doughnut, radar, xy (scatter), 3-D bar, 3-D column, and 3-D pie chart groups.

Drop Lines

Extends drop lines from each marker to the x-axis. Available for any area or line chart group.

High-Low Lines

Extends high-low lines from the highest to the lowest value in each category. High-low lines are primarily used for stock charts. Available for 2-D line chart groups only.

Up-Down Bars

This option is for open-high-low-close charts that track stock prices. Up bars and down bars are rectangles extending from the opening price to the closing price on a given day. These are useful for comparing the relationship between two data series. Available for line chart groups only.

Radar Axis Labels

Displays labels for category axes on radar chart groups.

Angle Of First Slice

Determines the angle at which the first pie or doughnut slice starts. The angle is measured in degrees with a value between 0 and 360 clockwise from vertical.

Hole Size

Determines the size of the hole in doughnut charts, allowing for a value of 10 to 90. The higher the value, the larger the hole and the narrower the doughnut rings.

Chart Type

Choosing this button closes this dialog box and displays the Chart Type dialog box. You can then change the chart type of an entire chart or a chart type group. To return to the Format [chart type] Group dialog box, choose the Options button in the Chart Type dialog box.

These options apply to 3-D charts only:

Gap Depth

Determines the distance between the data markers in all 3-D perspective charts except surface charts. A value of 0 to 500 is a percentage of the marker width. For column charts, the value range is 20 to 2000.

Chart Depth

Determines the depth of a 3-D chart relative to its width, thus changing the spacing between clusters of 3-D category data markers in 3-D bar or column charts. A value of 0 to 500 is a percentage of the chart width.

See Also

Help

Arranging and spacing data markers in bar and column charts

Changing a 3-D chart's depth and width

[chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Formatting data markers

Formatting pie and doughnut slices

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Using special lines and bars to emphasize data

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Series Order Tab, [chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Changes the order in which data series are displayed for a chart type group. Check the sample to see if you like the new order.

Series Order

Lists all data series for the selected chart type group. Each data series contains an integer (1, 2, 3 . . .) that identifies the order in which it is plotted in the chart type group. The values, and any data labels, trendlines, error bars, lines, bars, or other options associated with the series remain with the series if its plot order is changed.

Move Up/Move Down

Reorders the series selected in the Series Order box to the preferred plot order in the chart.

Chart Type

Choosing this button closes this dialog box and displays the Chart Type dialog box. You can then change the chart type of an entire chart or a chart type group. To return to the Format [chart type] Group dialog box, choose the Options button in the Chart Type dialog box.

See Also

Help

Changing the plot order of data series

[chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Axis Tab, [chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Assigns a primary or secondary axis to a data series or to all data series of one chart type.

Primary Axis

Plots the selected data series or chart type group along the primary axis.

Secondary Axis

Plots the selected data series or chart type group along the secondary axis.

Displays a second axis if it hasn't already been added to the chart.

Chart Type

Choosing this button closes this dialog box and displays the Chart Type dialog box. You can then change the chart type of an entire chart or a chart type group. To return to the Format [chart type] Group dialog box, choose the Options button in the Chart Type dialog box.

See Also

Help

Axes Command (Insert Menu)

[chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Multiple Chart Types and a Secondary Axis

Plotting data along a secondary axis

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Subtype Tab, [chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Changes the chart subtype of an entire chart or a chart type group. Subtypes are variations of the 14 chart types, for example, stacked and 100% stacked column and bar charts.

The Subtype tab is available in the Format [chart type] Group dialog box when you choose a chart type group (such as Column Chart or Line Chart) from the bottom of the Format menu.

Shows pictures of subtypes available for the selected chart type. When a picture is selected, displays an example, using the data in your active chart.

Chart Type

Choosing this button closes this dialog box and displays the Chart Type dialog box. You can then change the chart type of an entire chart or a chart type group. To return to the Format [chart type] Group dialog box, choose the Options button in the Chart Type dialog box.

See Also

Help

Changing the chart type of a data series

[chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Multiple Chart Types and a Secondary Axis

Plotting data along a secondary axis

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Patterns Tab, Selected Object Command (Format Menu)

Controls the appearance and other aspects of the selected graphic object.

The options available depend on the object selected.

If you select multiple objects and choose the Selected Object command, the options selected apply only to the objects that have those characteristics. For example, if a line and a rectangle are selected, the Fill option on the Patterns tab applies only to the rectangle.

Double-clicking an object displays the Format Object dialog box unless the object is a chart or a linked picture. For a text box, you must double-click the border (double-clicking within the text box selects text).

Automatic

Applies the default patterns for an object's border, an object's fill, or a line's style.

None

Makes the entire selected object or part of the selected object invisible.

Custom

Removes default settings so that you can customize the style, color, and weight of a selected object border or line, or the fill pattern and background and foreground color of an object.

Style

Controls the style (for example, solid or dashed) of a line or an object border.

Color

Controls the color of a line or an object border.

Weight

Controls the weight of a line or an object border.

Pattern

Controls the fill pattern and the pattern color for the selected cells or objects. Select None if you don't want any pattern in the selected object.

Shadow

Adds a shadow to the bottom and right side of a rectangle, an oval, a chart, or a text box.

Round Corners

Rounds the corners of a rectangle, a chart, or a text box.

Arrow Head

Controls the style, width, and length of the arrowhead for a line. An arrowhead style must be selected for the width and length options to apply.

Sample

Displays the formats selected for the object.

See Also

Help

Overview of Formatting a Graphic Object

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Protection Tab, Selected Object Command (Format Menu)

Determines whether graphic objects will be locked or whether text in a textbox object will be locked when you choose the Protect Sheet command from the Protection submenu of the Tools menu.

Locked objects can't be edited, moved, sized or deleted if the document is protected.

Note Locking objects has no effect unless the sheet is protected. To protect a sheet, choose Protection from the Tools Menu, and then choose Protect Sheet.

Locked

Prevents selected objects from being changed, moved, resized or deleted when a document is protected.

Lock Text

Prevents changes to text in a textbox.

See Also

Help

Locking and unlocking graphic objects on a worksheet or chart sheet

Protect Sheet Command and Unprotect Sheet Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Properties Tab, Selected Object Command (Format Menu)

Determines whether objects change size with the chart or not. Also determines whether or not the object prints.

Graphic objects are initially formatted to change size when you change the size of the chart.

Custom buttons do not print by default; other objects do.

Size With Chart

The object changes its size along with the chart.

Don't Size With Chart

The object remains the size it was when originally created.

Print Object

Prints the object when you print the chart.

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Font Tab, Selected Object Command (Format Menu)

Changes the font, style, size, and color of the text in selected buttons or text boxes.

Font

Lists available screen and printer fonts. You can select a font from the list or type the name of the font you want in the box.

Font Style

Lists the available font styles. You can select one of the styles from the list.

Shortcut:	Bold button

Italic button

CTRL+B (bold)

CTRL+I (italic)

Size

Lists the available sizes for the font selected in Font box. You can select a font size from the list or type the size you want in the box.

Underline

Lists the available styles of underline.

Shortcut:	Underline button

Double Underline button

CTRL+U

Effects

Strikes out, raises (superscript), or lowers (subscript) the selected characters.

Shortcut:	Strikethrough button

CTRL+5 (strikethrough)

Color

Controls the text color. Select a color from the list, or select Automatic to set the color to the window text color defined in the Windows Control Panel. Unless you have changed the window text color, selecting Automatic sets the text color to black.

Preview

Shows a sample of text with the current font formatting choices applied.

See Also

Help

  Bold Button

  Double Underline Button

  Font Color Button

  Italic Button

  Strikethrough Button

  Underline Button

Font Box

Font Size Box

Formatting the text in a text box

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Alignment Tab, Selected Object Command (Format Menu)

Aligns the text in selected text boxes.

Horizontal

Aligns text to the left, center, or right of the text box, or to both the left and right (justified).

Vertical

Aligns text with the top, center, or bottom of the text box, or to both the top and bottom (justified).

Orientation

Rotates the text.

Automatic Size

Adjusts the size of the text box to accommodate the text.

See Also

Help

  Align Left Button

  Align Right Button

  Center Button

  Justify Align Button

  Rotate Text Down Button

  Rotate Text Up Button

  Vertical Text Button

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Control Tab, Object Command (Format Menu)

Changes the properties of the selected control. The options available depend on the control selected and on whether the control is on a worksheet or a dialog sheet.

3D Shading

Determines whether the control will have a three dimensional appearance. Applies only to objects on worksheets.

Accelerator Key

Sets an accelerator key for the control. Applies only to objects on dialog sheets.

Value

Sets the default state of the selected check box or option button to Unchecked, Checked, or Mixed.

Cell Link

Links the value of the selected check box, option button, list box, scroll bar, or spinner control to a cell on the worksheet. When the value is changed in either location, it changes in the other location as well.

Input Range

If the contents of the selected list box drop-down are to be taken from cells on a worksheet, this option specifies the worksheet and range.

Selection Type

Determines the type of selection allowed in the selected list control: Single, Multi, or Extend.

Current Value

For the selected scroll bar or spinner control, this option determines the default position of the scroll box within the range defined by Minimum Value and Maximum Value.

Minimum Value, Maximum Value

Defines the range of values represented by the scroll bar or spinner control.

Incremental Change

The number of units scrolled when the user clicks the arrows at either end of the selected scroll bar or spinner control.

Page Change

The number of units scrolled when the user clicks inside the scrollbar.

Default

Determines whether the selected button is the default button for the dialog box.

Cancel

Determines whether the selected button is activated when the dialog box is cancelled.

Dismiss

Determines whether the selected button closes the dialog box when clicked.

Help

Determines whether the selected button is activated when the user presses F1 in the dialog box.

Edit Validation

Determines how the contents of the selected edit box will be validated when the dialog box is closed: Text, Integer, Number, Reference, Formula.

Multiline Edit

Determines whether the edit box displays more than one line.

Vertical Scrollbar

Determines whether the edit box displays a vertical scrollbar.

Drop Down Lines

Determines the number of lines displayed when the selected drop down control is activated by the user.

See Also

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Cells Command (Format Menu)

Brings up the Format Cells dialog box. For information about the tabs, see:

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Alignment Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Font Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Border Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Patterns Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Protection Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Shortcut: CTRL+1


Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Determines how information is displayed in the selected cells. You can use one of the built-in number formats, or you can create your own custom formats.

Category

Lists the categories into which number formats are grouped. When you select a category, the built-in and custom formats for that category are displayed in the Format Codes box.

Format Codes

Lists all available formats for a selected category. In a new worksheet, the default number format for all cells is the General format. When you type a number in a cell that has the General format, Microsoft Excel assigns the number a built-in format based on what you typed.

Shortcuts:	CTRL+SHIFT+ ~	(General format)

CTRL+SHIFT+ !	(0.00 format)

CTRL+SHIFT+ @	(h:mm format)

CTRL+SHIFT+ #	(d-mmm-yy format)

CTRL+SHIFT+ $	[($#,##0.00);($#,##.00) format]

CTRL+SHIFT+ %	(0%format)

CTRL+SHIFT+ ^	(0.00E+00 format)

Code

Displays the format selected in the Format Codes box.

To add a custom format, edit the format shown in the Code box or type a new one. The custom format is added to the appropriate categories. The built-in formats always remain available. Modifying a built-in format to create a new custom format does not eliminate the built-in format.

Sample

Displays a sample of the format selected. The format is applied to the data in the active cell. If the active cell is blank, you will not see a sample.

Delete

Deletes the custom format that is selected in the Format Codes box. You cannot delete built-in number formats.

See Also

Help

  Comma Style Button

  Currency Style Button

  Percent Style Button

Assigning a number, date, or time format

Creating and deleting custom number formats

Creating international currency formats

Formatting numbers as text

Formatting numbers with toolbar buttons

Hiding data in cells

Number Format Codes

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Alignment Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Aligns the contents of selected cells.

Horizontal

General

Aligns text to the left, numbers to the right, and centers logical and error values. This is the default alignment.

Left

Aligns cell contents to the left.

Center

Centers cell contents.

Right

Aligns cell contents to the right.

Fill

Repeats the contents of the selected cell until the cell is full. If blank cells to the right also have the Fill alignment, they are filled as well.

Justify

Aligns wrapped text within a cell to the right and left. You must have more than one line of wrapped text to see the justification.

Center Across Selection

Centers a cell entry across the selected cells.

Vertical

Top

Aligns cell contents along the top of the cell.

Center

Centers cell contents in the middle of the cell.

Bottom

Aligns cell contents along the bottom of the cell.

Justify

Justifies the cell contents up and down within the width of the cell.

Orientation

Rotates selected cell entries.

Wrap Text

Displays long strings of text on multiple lines within a cell. Wrapped text may be left-aligned, right-aligned, centered, or justified in a cell.

See Also

Help

  Align Left Button

  Align Right Button

  Center Across Columns Button

  Center Button

  Justify Align Button

  Rotate Text Down Button

  Rotate Text Up Button

  Vertical Text Button

Aligning data within cells

Centering cell entries across columns

Justifying text in cells

Wrapping text in cells

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Font Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Changes the font, style, size, color, underline, and effects of the text in selected cells.

Font

Select the font you want, or type the name of the font in the box above the list. Check the message at the bottom of the Font tab for information about the selected font.

Font Style

Lists the available font styles.

Shortcuts:	CTRL+B (bold)

CTRL+I (italic)

Bold button

Italic button

Size

Lists the available sizes for the font selected in the Font box. Select a font size, or type the size you want in the box above the list of sizes.

Shortcuts:	Font Size box

Increase Font Size button (Text Formatting category)

Decrease Font Size button (Text Formatting category)

Underline

Lists the available underline formats.

Shortcuts:	CTRL+U (single underline)

Underline button

Double Underline button (Text Formatting category)

Color

Lists the available colors. Select a color from the list or select Automatic to set the color to the window text color defined in the Windows Control Panel. Unless you have changed the window text color, selecting Automatic sets the text color to black.

Shortcut:	Font Color button

Normal Font

Sets the font, font style, size, and effects to the Normal style.

Effects

Strikethrough

Formats selected characters with a line through the middle.

Shortcuts:	CTRL+5

Strikethrough button (Text Formatting category)

Superscript

Formats selected characters higher on the line and changes the font size.

Subscript

Formats selected characters lower on the line and changes the font size.

Sample

Shows a sample of text with the current font formatting choices applied.

See Also

Help

  Bold Button

  Decrease Font Size Button

  Double Underline Button

  Font Color Button

  Font Box

  Font Size Box

  Increase Font Size Button

  Italic Button

  Strikethrough Button

  Underline Button

Applying an autoformat to a range

Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Copying formats using the Format Painter button

Overview of Using Styles to Save and Apply Format Combinations

Underlining cell contents

Using superscripts and subscripts

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Border Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Adds or removes border lines in selected cells.

Border

Outline

Puts a border around the outer edges of the selection.

Shortcuts:	Border button

CTRL+SHIFT+MINUS SIGN (removes all borders)

Left, Right, Top, Bottom

Puts a border along the specified edges of each cell in the selection.

Style

Sets the line style to apply to a border.

Color

Sets the border color to one of 56 colors. The Automatic option applies the default border color and style.

See Also

Help

  Borders Button

Adding borders

Shading cells with patterns and colors

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Patterns Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Controls the shading of selected cells.

Cell Shading

Color

Controls the color for the selected cell or cells.

Pattern

Controls the pattern and pattern color for the selected cell or cells.

Sample

Displays the formats selected for the cell or cells.

See Also

Help

  Borders Button

  Color Button

  Pattern Button

Formatting a line or an arrow

Formatting an object's border and fill pattern

Shading cells with patterns and colors

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Protection Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Determines whether cells will be locked and whether their formulas will be hidden when you choose the Sheet command from the Tools menu, Protection submenu.

Locked cells can't be edited if the document is protected.

Hidden cells display their values, but no formula appears in the formula bar.

Note  Locking cells has no effect unless the sheet is protected. To protect a sheet, choose Protection from the Tools Menu, then choose Protect Sheet.

Locked

Prevents selected cells from being changed when a document is protected.

Hidden

Prevents a cell's formula from being displayed in the formula bar when a document is protected.

See Also

Help

  Lock Cell Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Locking and unlocking individual cell ranges on a worksheet

Protect Sheet Command and Unprotect Sheet Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Protection Tab, Object Command (Format Menu)

Determines whether graphic objects will be locked or whether text in a text box object will be locked when you choose the Sheet command from the Tools menu, Protection submenu.

Locked objects can't be edited, moved, sized or deleted if the document is protected.

Note  Locking objects has no effect unless the sheet is protected. To protect a sheet, choose Protection from the Tools Menu, then choose Protect Sheet.

Locked

Prevents selected objects from being changed, moved, resized or deleted when a document is protected.

Lock Text

Prevents changes to text in a text box.

See Also

Help

  Lock Cell Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Locking and unlocking graphic objects on a worksheet or chart sheet

Protect Sheet Command and Unprotect Sheet Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Row Command (Format Menu)

Adjusts row height, and hides or unhides rows.

You need to select only one cell in a row to change the height for the entire row.

To change the height of all rows in a worksheet, select the entire worksheet.

Double-click the bottom border of the row heading to adjust the row height for the best fit.

The commands on the submenu are not available if the sheet is protected.

Height Command

Displays the Row Height dialog box. In the Row Height box, you can enter a number from 0 to 409 representing the row height in points. If set to 0, the row is hidden.

AutoFit Command

Returns each row in the selection to the standard height within the row. The standard height for a row varies according to font size.

Hide Command

Hides the selected rows.

Shortcut:	CTRL+9

Unhide Command

Unhides hidden rows within the selection. To select hidden rows, select cells in the rows immediately above and below the hidden one.

Shortcut:	CTRL+SHIFT+9

See Also

Help

Adjusting column width

Adjusting row height

Hiding and unhiding a row or column

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Column Command (Format Menu)

Adjusts column width, and hides or unhides columns.

You need to select only one cell in a column to change the width for the entire column.

To change the width of all columns in a worksheet, select the entire worksheet.

Double-click the right border of the column heading to quickly adjust the column width for the best fit.

The commands on the submenu are not available if the sheet is protected.

Width Command

Displays the Column Width dialog box. You can enter a number from 0 through 255 in the Column Width box. This number represents the number of characters that can be displayed in a cell using the standard font.

AutoFit Selection Command

Sets the column to the minimum width necessary to display the contents of the selected cells. If you change the cell contents later, you must fit the selection again.

Shortcut:	Double-click the right border of the column heading.

Hide Command

Hides the selected columns.

Shortcut:	CTRL+0 (zero)

Unhide Command

Unhides hidden columns within the selection. To select hidden columns, select cells in the columns immediately to the left and right of the hidden one.

Shortcut:	CTRL+SHIFT+ 0    (zero)

Standard Width Command

Displays the Standard Width dialog box.

To return the selected columns to the standard width, choose the OK button.

To change the width for all columns that you have not previously adjusted in the active worksheet, enter an integer or decimal fraction from 0 through 255 in the Standard Width box. This number represents the number of characters that can be displayed in a cell in the standard font.

See Also

Help

Adjusting column width

Adjusting row height

Hiding and unhiding a row or column

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Sheet Command (Format Menu)

Enables you to rename, hide, or unhide sheets in a workbook. This command is found in the Edit menu when a Module is active.

Rename

Renames the selected sheet. Type the new name for the selected sheet in the New box. The new name can have up to 31 characters, including spaces. The name can't be enclosed in square brackets, nor can it include the following characters: colon, slash mark, backslash, question mark, asterisk.

Hide

Hides the active sheet.

Unhide

Displays a list of hidden sheets. Select the sheet you want to unhide and choose the OK button. You can unhide only one sheet at a time.

See Also

Help

Hiding and unhiding a sheet

Renaming a sheet

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Worksheets)

Automatically applies a built-in combination of formats, called an autoformat, to a range of cells or a pivot table on a worksheet. Microsoft Excel provides a variety of autoformats that apply formats for numbers, alignments, fonts, borders, patterns and shading, column width, and row height.

You can clear an autoformat immediately after choosing it, by choosing Undo AutoFormat from the Edit menu.

You can retain any formatting you have already applied to a worksheet by selecting the autoformat you want to apply, choosing the Options button, and then clearing the check box for the format you want to retain.

If you have a single cell selected, Microsoft Excel automatically selects the range bounded by blank cells, and applies the autoformat to that range.

If the current selection is part of a pivot table, the entire table is selected, except for the page fields, and formatted.

Shortcut:	AutoFormat button (Formatting category). Applies the last autoformat used.

Table Format

Lists the available autoformats. To remove an autoformat from a range, select the None option.

Sample

Displays an example of the format selected in the Table Format list.

Options

Displays a list of formats to apply.

Formats To Apply

Lists the format categories. Clear the check boxes for the types of formats you don't want to change. Changes are reflected in the Sample box.

See Also

Help

  AutoFormat Button

Applying an autoformat to a range

Applying only some of the formats of an autoformat

Clearing an autoformat

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Style Command (Format Menu)

You can define a cell style by choosing the combination of formats you want and assigning them a name. You can also apply the defined style to any worksheet in the workbook.

You can create styles in two ways: by example and by definition.

You can copy styles from another workbook.

You can redefine a style by changing its formatting characteristics. Cells formatted with the style are automatically updated to reflect the new formats.

You can also use the Style box to apply a style.

Style Name

Displays the name of the style applied to the selected cells and lists the existing styles.

Modify

Displays the Format Cells dialog box where you can select the formats you want to use in a style.

Add

After defining a style in the Format Cells dialog box, choose the Add button to add the style.

Delete

Deletes the style selected in the Style Name box.

Merge

Choose the Merge button to copy styles from one open workbook to another.

Merge Styles From

Select the workbook from which you want to copy styles.

Style Includes

Lists the types of formats you can include in a style: number, font, alignment, border, patterns, and protection. Select a check box to change that format when the style is applied. Clear a check box to leave that format unchanged in the current selection when the style is applied.

See Also

Help

  Comma Style Button

  Currency Style Button

  Percent Style Button

Applying a style

Copying styles from another workbook

Creating and deleting a style

Redefining a style

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Placement Command (Format Menu)

Determines the placement of the selected object relative to other objects.

Bring To Front Command

Bring To Front button

Places one or more selected objects in front of all other objects. The Bring To Front button appears on the Drawing toolbar.

Has no effect if the selected object is already in front.

If you hold down SHIFT while you click the Bring To Front button, it functions just like the Send To Back button.

Send To Back Command

Send To Back button

Places one or more selected objects behind all other objects. The Send To Back button appears on the Drawing toolbar.

Has no effect if the selected object is already in back.

If you hold down SHIFT while you click the Send To Back button, it functions just like the Bring To Front button.

Group Command

Group Objects button

Creates a single group of graphic objects from multiple objects. On a chart, you can group graphic objects that have been added to the chart with buttons from the Drawing toolbar. You cannot group chart items such as the legend or the data marker. The Group Objects button appears on the Drawing toolbar.

Available when more than one object is selected.

If you hold down SHIFT while you click the Group Objects button, it functions just like the Ungroup Objects button.

Ungroup Command

Ungroup Objects button

Separates grouped objects into individual objects. The Ungroup Objects button appears on the Drawing toolbar.

Available when grouped objects are selected.

If you hold down SHIFT while you click the Ungroup Objects button, it functions like the Group Objects button.

See Also

Help

Grouping and ungrouping graphic objects

Properties Tab, Object Command (Format Menu)

Reordering overlapped graphic objects

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Font Tab, Object Command (Format Menu)

Changes the font, style, size, and color of the text in selected buttons or text boxes.

Font

Lists available screen and printer fonts. You can select a font from the list or type the name of the font you want in the box.

Font Style

Lists the available font styles. You can select one of the styles from the list.

Shortcut:	Bold button

Italic button

CTRL+B (bold)

CTRL+I (italic)

Size

Lists the available sizes for the font selected in Font box. You can select a font size from the list or type the size you want in the box.

Underline

Lists the available styles of underline: none, single, double, single accounting, and double accounting.

Shortcut:	Underline button

Double Underline button

CTRL+U

Effects

Strikes out, raises (superscript), or lowers (subscript) the selected characters.

Shortcut:	Strikethrough button

CTRL+5 (strikethrough)

Color

Controls the text color. Select a color from the list, or select Automatic to set the color to the window text color defined in the Windows Control Panel. Unless you have changed the window text color, selecting Automatic sets the text color to black.

Sample

Shows a sample of text with the current font formatting choices applied.

Normal Font

Sets the font, font style, font size, and effects to the Normal style.

See Also

Help

  Bold Button

  Double Underline Button

  Font Color Button

  Italic Button

  Strikethrough Button

  Underline Button

Font Box

Font Size Box

Formatting the text in a text box

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Alignment Tab, Object Command (Format Menu)

Aligns the text in selected text boxes.

Horizontal

Aligns text to the left, center, or right of the text box, or to both the left and right (justified).

Vertical

Aligns text with the top, center, or bottom of the text box, or to both the top and bottom (justified).

Orientation

Rotates the text.

Automatic Size

Adjusts the size of the text box to accommodate the text.

See Also

Help

  Align Left Button

  Align Right Button

  Center Button

  Justify Align Button

  Rotate Text Down Button

  Rotate Text Up Button

  Vertical Text Button

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Patterns Tab, Object Command (Format Menu)

Controls the appearance and other aspects of the selected graphic object.

The options available depend on the object selected.

If you select multiple objects and choose the Object command, the options selected apply only to the objects that have those characteristics. For example, if a line and a rectangle are selected, the Fill option on the Patterns tab applies only to the rectangle.

Double-clicking an object displays the Format Object dialog box unless the object is a chart or a linked picture. For a text box, you must double-click the border (double-clicking within the text box selects text).

Automatic

Applies the default patterns for an object's border, an object's fill, or a line's style.

None

Makes the entire selected object or part of the selected object invisible.

Custom

Removes default settings so that you can customize the style, color, and weight of a selected object border or line, or the fill pattern and background and foreground color of an object.

Style

Controls the style (for example, solid or dashed) of a line or an object border.

Color

Controls the color of a line or an object border.

Weight

Controls the weight of a line or an object border.

Pattern

Controls the fill pattern and the pattern color for the selected cells or objects. Select None if you don't want any pattern in the selected object.

Shadow

Adds a shadow to the bottom and right side of a rectangle, an ellipse, a chart, or a text box.

Round Corners

Rounds the corners of a rectangle, a chart, or a text box.

Arrowhead

Controls the style, width, and length of the arrowhead for a line. An arrowhead style must be selected for the width and length options to apply.

Sample

Displays the formats selected for the object.

See Also

Help

Overview of Formatting a Graphic Object

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Properties Tab, Object Command (Format Menu)

Determines how graphic objects are attached to cells. Positions graphic objects by attaching them to cells and specifying how they move and size relative to the underlying cells. Also determines whether or not the object prints.

Graphic objects are initially formatted to move and size with the underlying cells.

Pictures are initially formatted to move but not size with the underlying cells.

Graphic objects that are not attached to cells stay in the same position regardless of changes to the underlying cells.

Unattached graphic objects must be repositioned manually if cells move or change size.

Custom buttons do not print by default; other objects do.

Move And Size With Cells

The object changes its position and size along with the cells under its upper-left and lower-right corners.

Move But Don't Size With Cells

The object moves with the cells under its upper-left corner but does not change size.

Don't Move Or Size With Cells

The object is detached from the cell grid so that it maintains its position and size regardless of changes to the underlying cells.

Print Object

Prints the object when you print the worksheet.

See Also

Help

Detaching a graphic object from underlying cells

Including graphic objects when sorting

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Formatting Buttons Category

AutoFormat Button

Automatically formats a range of cells by recognizing summary rows and columns, text, values, formulas, and other elements in the range.

Borders Button

Displays a palette of border styles you can use to apply borders to selected cells.

Bottom Border Button

Adds or removes a border along the lower edge of each selected cell.

Bottom Double Border Button

Adds or removes a double border along the bottom of the selected cells.

Comma Style Button

Applies the currently defined Comma style to selected cells.

Currency Style Button

Applies the currently defined Currency style to selected cells.

Dark Shading Button

Applies a dark shading pattern to selected cells and graphic objects.

Decrease Decimal Button

Removes one decimal place from the number format each time you click the button.

Increase Decimal Button

Adds one decimal place to the number format each time you click the button.

Left Border Button

Adds or removes a border along the left edge of each selected cell.

Light Shading Button

Applies a light shading pattern to selected cells and graphic objects.

Outline Border Button

Adds a border around the outermost edges of the selected cells.

Percent Style Button

Applies the currently defined Percent style to selected cells.

Right Border Button

Adds or removes a border along the right edge of each selected cell.

Style Box

Applies a cell style to the selection, or lets you define a style based on the current selection.

Top Border Button

Adds or removes a border along the upper edge of each selected cell.


AutoFormat Button

Automatically formats a range of cells by recognizing summary rows and columns, text, values, and formulas, and other elements in the range. The AutoFormat button is in the Formatting category.

The AutoFormat button applies the last autoformat you applied with the AutoFormat command, excluding any formats you excluded when you last used the command.

By holding down SHIFT while clicking the button, you can apply the next autoformat (as listed in the AutoFormat dialog box) until you return to the autoformat you started with.

If you have a single cell selected, Microsoft Excel automatically selects the range bounded by blank cells, and applies the formats to that range.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying an autoformat to a range

Applying only some of the formats of an autoformat

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Worksheets)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Borders Button

Displays a palette of border styles you can use to apply borders to selected cells. The Borders button is on the Formatting toolbar.

Click the arrow next to the Borders button to display the palette. You can drag the palette off the toolbar to keep it open.

The border style you last selected is used as the button image; you can apply that border style by selecting cells and clicking the button.

See Also

Help

Adding borders

Border Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Bottom Border Button

Adds or removes a border along the lower edge of each selected cell. The Bottom Border button is in the Formatting category.

To remove the border, select the cells and click the Bottom Border button again.

This button is available only on worksheets and macro sheets.

See Also

Help

  Borders Button

Adding borders

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Border Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Bottom Double Border Button

Adds or removes a double border along the bottom of the selected cells. The Bottom Double Border button is in the Formatting category.

To remove the border, select the cells and click the Bottom Double Border button again.

This button is available only on worksheets and macro sheets.

See Also

Help

  Borders Button

Adding borders

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Border Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Comma Style Button

Applies the currently defined Comma style to selected cells. The Comma Style button is on the Formatting toolbar.

This button applies the default Comma style unless you change it. The default Comma style applies commas and two decimal places to numbers.

To change the Comma style use the Style command on the Format menu.

See Also

Help

Assigning a number, date, or time format

Formatting numbers with toolbar buttons

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Redefining a style

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Currency Style Button

Applies the currently defined Currency style to selected cells. The Currency Style button is on the Formatting toolbar.

Might appear instead of the dollar sign symbol, depending on the country selected in the International dialog box, accessed from the Windows Control Panel prior to starting Microsoft Excel.

This button applies the default Currency style unless you change it. To change the Currency style use the Style command on the Format menu.

For information about changing the international settings, see your operating system documentation.

See Also

Help

Assigning a number, date, or time format

Creating international currency formats

Formatting numbers with toolbar buttons

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Redefining a style

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Dark Shading Button

Applies a dark shading pattern to selected cells and graphic objects. The Dark Shading button is in the Formatting category.

This button applies the pattern to cells and graphic objects, not to their borders.

See Also

Help

  Pattern Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Patterns Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Shading cells with patterns and colors

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Decrease Decimal Button

Removes one decimal place from the number format each time you click the button. The Decrease Decimal button is on the Formatting toolbar.

You can continue to remove decimal places until the integer is reached.

If you hold down SHIFT while clicking this button, it functions like the Increase Decimal button.

See Also

Help

Assigning a number, date, or time format

Formatting numbers with toolbar buttons

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Increase Decimal Button

Adds one decimal place to the number format each time you click the button. The Increase Decimal button is on the Formatting toolbar.

If you hold down SHIFT while clicking this button, it functions like the Decrease Decimal button.

See Also

Help

Assigning a number, date, or time format

Formatting numbers with toolbar buttons

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Left Border Button

Adds or removes a border along the left edge of each selected cell. The Left Border button is in the Formatting category.

To remove the border, select the cells and click the Left Border button again.

This button is available only on worksheets and macro sheets.

See Also

Help

  Borders Button

Adding borders

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Border Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Light Shading Button

Applies a light shading pattern to selected cells and graphic objects. The Light Shading button is in the Formatting category.

This button applies the pattern to cells and graphic objects, not to their borders.

See Also

Help

  Pattern Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Patterns Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Shading cells with patterns and colors

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Outline Border Button

Adds a border around the outermost edges of the selected cells. The Outline Border button is in the Formatting category.

See Also

Help

  Borders Button

Adding borders

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Border Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Pattern Button

Changes the pattern and pattern color of a selected cell, graphic object, or chart item. The Pattern button is on the Drawing toolbar.

Click the arrow next to the Pattern button to display a palette of patterns and colors. You can drag the palette off the toolbar to keep it open.

The pattern and color you last selected is used as the button image; you can apply that pattern and color by selecting cells, objects, or chart items and clicking the button.

See Also

Help

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Patterns Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Shading cells with patterns and colors

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Percent Style Button

Applies the currently defined Percent style to selected cells. The Percent Style button is on the Formatting toolbar.

This button applies the default Percent style unless you change it. To change the Percent style, use the Style command on the Format menu.

See Also

Help

Assigning a number, date, or time format

Formatting numbers with toolbar buttons

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Redefining a style

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Right Border Button

Adds or removes a border along the right edge of each selected cell. The Right Border button is in the Formatting category.

To remove the border, select the cells, and click the Right Border button again.

This button is available only on worksheets and macro sheets.

See Also

Help

  Borders Button

Adding borders

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Border Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Style Box

Applies a cell style to the selection, or lets you define a style based on the current selection. The Style box is in the Formatting category.

You can apply a different style by selecting the style you want from the list in the Style box.

You can also use the Style box to define a new style by selecting a cell that has the formats you want, typing a new name in the Style box, and pressing ENTER.

Shortcut:	ALT+APOSTROPHE (activates Style box)

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Applying a style

Creating and deleting a style

Redefining a style

Style Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Top Border Button

Adds or removes a border along the upper edge of each selected cell. The Top Border button is in the Formatting category.

To remove the border, select the cells and click the Top Border button again.

This button is available only on worksheets and macro sheets.

See Also

Help

  Borders Button

Adding borders

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Border Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Font Color Button

Displays a palette of colors you can use to change the font color of selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text. The Font Color button is on the Formatting toolbar.

Click the arrow next to the Font Color button to display a palette of colors. You can drag the palette off the toolbar to keep it open.

The color you last selected is used as the button image; you can apply that color by selecting cells or text and clicking the button.

See Also

Help

  Cycle Font Color Button

  Font Box

  Font Size Box

Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Font Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Formatting the text in a text box

Overview of Changing Chart Text

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Formatting a Worksheet

Overview of Changing Column Widths and Row Heights

Adjusting column width

Adjusting row height

Overview of Aligning Worksheet Data

Aligning data within cells

Centering cell entries across columns

Justifying text in cells

Wrapping text in cells

Overview of Formatting Characters in Cells

Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Using superscripts and subscripts

Underlining cell contents

Overview of Formatting Cells with Borders, Patterns, and Color

Adding borders

Shading cells with patterns and colors

Overview of Using Number Formats

Assigning a number, date, or time format

Formatting numbers as text

Creating and deleting custom number formats

Creating international currency formats

Formatting numbers with toolbar buttons

Hiding data in cells

Number Format Codes

Overview of Using Styles to Save and Apply Format Combinations

Applying a style

Copying styles from another workbook

Creating and deleting a style

Redefining a style

Overview of Applying Formats Automatically

Applying an autoformat to a range

Applying only some of the formats of an autoformat

Clearing an autoformat

Copying formats using the Format Painter button


Overview of Changing Column Widths and Row Heights

In a new worksheet in a workbook, all the columns are set to the standard width. Row height automatically adjusts itself to accommodate the largest font entered into the row. Column width does not adjust unless you change it. You can change the standard column width for individual worksheets in a workbook.

See Also

Help

Adjusting column width

Adjusting row height

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Adjusting column width

Overview

To change column width

1.	Select the column or columns.

If you want to change width for all columns on the worksheet, click the Select All button.

2.	Drag the border to the right of a column heading until the column is the width you want.

The width measurement is displayed at the left end of the formula bar.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the column or columns.

You can also select a cell or cells.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Column, and then choose Width.

You can also choose Column Width from the shortcut menu if a column was selected.

3.	Type a number in the Column Width box.

This number represents the number of characters that can be displayed in a cell for the standard font.

4.	Choose the OK button.

To adjust column width to fit the selection

1.	Select the column or columns.

If you want to change width for all columns on the worksheet, click the Select All button.

2.	Double-click the border to the right of a column heading.

The column width adjusts to accommodate the longest cell entry in the column.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the column or columns.

You can also select a cell or cells.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Column, and then choose AutoFit Selection.

To reset a column's width to the standard width

1.	Select the column or columns.

If you want to reset all columns on the worksheet to the standard width, click the Select All button.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Column, and then choose Standard Width.

3.	Choose the OK button.

To change the standard column width on a worksheet

If you want to change the standard column width on all worksheets in a workbook, first select all worksheets.

1.	From the Format menu, choose Column, and then choose Standard Width.

2.	In the Standard Width box, type a new number.

This number represents the number of characters that can be displayed in a cell for the standard font.

3.	Choose the OK button.

Note  Only columns that have not been adjusted will accept the new standard width.

See Also

Help

Adjusting row height

Column Command (Format Menu)

Hiding and unhiding a row or column

Selecting a sheet or sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Adjusting row height

Overview

To change row height

1.	Select the row or rows.

If you want to change height for all rows on the worksheet, click the Select All button.

2.	Drag the border below a row heading until the row is the height you want.

The height measurement is displayed at the left end of the formula bar.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the row or rows.

You can also select a cell or cells.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Row, and then choose Height.

You can also choose Row Height from the shortcut menu if a row was selected.

3.	Type a number in the Row Height box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

To adjust row height for the best fit

1.	Select the row or rows.

If you want to change height for all rows on the worksheet, click the Select All button.

2.	Double-click the border below a row heading.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the row or rows.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Row, and then choose AutoFit.

See Also

Help

Adjusting column width

Hiding and unhiding a row or column

Row Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Overview of Aligning Worksheet Data

You can change the alignment of numbers and characters in a cell. The contents of cells can be aligned left, right, or centered. In a new worksheet, all cells have the General format, which automatically aligns numbers to the right, text to the left, and logical and error values centered.

You can also center an entry across a selection of cells. For tall cells, you can specify a vertical alignment (top, center, or bottom). Alignment also includes the orientation of the characters sideways.

For text, you can also wrap the text and justify it (align the text both right and left) within the cell.

Text can also be entered into text boxes and then manipulated as a graphic object.

See Also

Help

Aligning data within cells

Centering cell entries across columns

Justifying text in cells

Wrapping text in cells

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Aligning data within cells

Overview

1.	Select the cells you want to format.

2.	Click the Align Left, Center, or Align Right button.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the cells you want to format.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

3.	Select the Alignment tab.

4.	Select the alignment options you want.

If you have a long cell entry that you want displayed on multiple lines in a single cell, select the Wrap Text check box. Microsoft Excel will automatically increase the row height to accommodate all of the text in the cell.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Align Right Button

  Align Left Button

  Center Button

  Justify Align Button

  Rotate Text Down Button

  Rotate Text Up Button

  Vertical Text Button

Alignment Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Centering cell entries across columns

Justifying text in cells

Wrapping text in cells

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Centering cell entries across columns

Overview

1.	Select the cell that contains the data you want centered across a range of cells.

2.	Extend your selection to include only adjacent blank cells to the right.

3.	Click the Center Across Columns button.

The text is displayed centered across all the selected blank cells and will change with any column width adjustments.

Note  The data is still within the leftmost cell.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the cell that contains the data you want centered across a range of cells.

2.	Extend your selection to include only adjacent blank cells to the right.

3.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

4.	Select the Alignment tab.

5.	Under Horizontal, select the Center Across Selection option button.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Center Across Columns Button

Aligning data within cells

Alignment Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Justifying text in cells

Overview

To justify text both right and left within a cell

1.	Select the cell or cells you want to justify.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

Shortcut:	Justify Align button (Text Formatting category)

3.	Select the Alignment tab.

4.	Under Horizontal, select the Justify option button.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Justifying automatically wraps the text. You must have more than one line of wrapped text to see the justification.

To justify text to fill a selected range

Use this procedure to redistribute text evenly over the cells in the selected range.

1.	Select the cells containing the text you want to distribute. Include the entire range in which you want the text to appear.

Except for the left column, cells in the range should be blank.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Fill, and then choose Justify.

Text will be entered into the cells in the left column, but will flow over into the empty cells to the right.

See Also

Help

  Justify Align Button

Alignment Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Fill Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Wrapping text in cells

Overview

1.	Select the cells in which you want the text to wrap.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

3.	Select the Alignment tab.

4.	Select the Wrap Text box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Tip  If you adjust the column width after wrapping text, you can quickly adjust the row height by double-clicking the line below the row heading.

See Also

Help

Alignment Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Justifying text in cells

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Overview of Using Number Formats

When you create a new worksheet, all cells use the General number format.

When it can, Microsoft Excel automatically assigns the correct number format to your entry. For example, when you enter a number that contains a dollar sign before the number or a percent sign after the number, Microsoft Excel automatically changes the cell's format from General format to a currency format or a percentage format, respectively. You can change the format to one of the built-in number formats, or create your own number format.

Number format codes can have up to four sections separated by semicolons. These sections define the format for positive numbers, negative numbers, zero values, and text. Formats that include [Red] display negative numbers in red on color monitors.

Custom Number Formats

Follow these guidelines when creating number formats:

Microsoft Excel uses the 0 and the # as digit placeholders. If you use the 0, then the digit is always displayed, even if it is a zero. The # suppresses the display of non-significant zeros.

An underscore followed by any character creates a space the width of that character. For example, an underscore followed by a right parenthesis allows positive numbers to line up correctly with negative numbers that are enclosed in parentheses.

To set the color for a section of the format, type the name of the color in square brackets in the section.

To display commas, add them to your format. Commas not surrounded by digit placeholders can be used to scale numbers by thousands. For example the format   #,   would display the number 120000 as 120.

You can also create custom conditional number formats.

Custom Date and Time Formats

Microsoft Excel stores all dates as serial numbers and all times as decimal fractions. Because dates and times are seen as numbers, they can be added, subtracted, and included in other calculations. Always use a built-in format or create a custom format when using dates or times in calculations.

Follow these guidelines when creating custom date and time formats:

To create time formats that allow for hours that are greater than 24, or minutes or seconds greater than 60, use square brackets around the first code letters in the time format.

You can create time codes that display fractions of a second.

To view a date or time as a serial number or decimal fraction, change the cell's format to General.

For a detailed description of Microsoft Excel number format codes, see Number Format Codes.

See Also

Help

Assigning a number, date, or time format

Creating and deleting custom number formats

Creating international currency formats

Formatting numbers as text

Formatting numbers with toolbar buttons

Hiding data in cells

Overview of Entering Numbers, Dates, and Times

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Assigning a number, date, or time format

Overview

1.	Select the cells you want to format

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

You can also choose Format Cells from the shortcut menu.

3.	Select the Number tab.

4.	In the Category box, choose the category of formats most appropriate for the data selected.

5.	In the Format Codes box, select a format.

If there is a number, date, or time in the active cell when you select a format, Microsoft Excel shows you a sample of how the selected data will look.

6.	Choose the OK button.

Shortcuts:	Comma Style button

Currency Style button

Percent Style button

See Also

Help

  Comma Style Button

  Currency Style Button

  Percent Style Button

Creating and deleting custom number formats

Formatting numbers as text

Formatting numbers with toolbar buttons

Number Format Codes

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Formatting numbers as text

Overview

You must format the cells as text before entering the numbers.

1.	Select the cells you want to format.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

You can also choose Format Cells from the shortcut menu.

3.	Select the Number tab.

4.	In the Category box, select Text.

5.	In the Format Codes box, select the @ format.

6.	Choose the OK button.

7.	Enter numbers into the formatted cells.

Numbers formatted as text align to the left of the cell.

Tip  You can quickly enter a number as text by preceding it with an apostrophe.

See Also

Help

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Creating and deleting custom number formats

Overview

To create a custom number format

1.	Select the cells you want to format.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

You can also choose Format Cells from the shortcut menu.

3.	Select the Number tab.

4.	Select a format from the list.

5.	In the Code box, modify the code to create a new format.

For information about the meaning of the format codes, see Number Format Codes.

6.	Choose the OK button.

Your custom format now appears in the appropriate categories and is saved with the workbook.

Note  The built-in number formats always remain available, along with the custom formats you create. Modifying a built-in format to create a new custom format does not eliminate the built-in format.

To delete a custom number format

1.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

You can also choose Format Cells from the shortcut menu.

2.	Select the Number tab.

3.	In the Category box, select Custom.

4.	Select the number format you want to delete.

5.	Choose the Delete button.

6.	Choose the OK button.

Note  You cannot delete built-in formats.

See Also

Help

Creating international currency formats

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Creating international currency formats

Overview

If you want Microsoft Excel to always display a foreign currency, choose International in the Microsoft Windows Control Panel and change the settings.

1.	Select the cells you want to format.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

You can also choose Format Cells from the shortcut menu.

3.	Select the Number tab.

4.	If you're editing a built-in format, select the format from the list.

5.	In the Code box, edit the built-in format or type a new format.

For information about the meaning of the format codes, see Number Format Codes.

Enter special characters to display currency symbols by turning on NUM LOCK and holding down ALT while typing the ANSI character for the currency symbol on the numeric keypad.

To enter	Press ALT and type

£	0163

¥	0165

To include text characters in your format, enclose them in double quotation marks.

6.	Choose the OK button.

Your new format now appears in the appropriate categories and is saved with the workbook.

See Also

Help

Creating and deleting custom number formats

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Formatting numbers with toolbar buttons

Overview

1.	Select the cells you want to format.

2.	Click the button that corresponds to the type of format you want.

Click	To

Apply the Currency style

Apply the Percent style

Apply the Comma style

Increase decimal places

Decrease decimal places

Note  You can change the number format that is applied by redefining the Currency, Percent, or Comma style.

See Also

Help

  Comma Style Button

  Currency Style Button

  Decrease Decimal Button

  Increase Decimal Button

  Percent Style Button

Assigning a number, date, or time format

Creating and deleting custom number formats

Redefining a style

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Hiding data in cells

Overview

To hide data in cells

1.	Select the cells that contain the data you want to hide.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

You can also choose Format Cells from the shortcut menu.

3.	Select the Number tab.

4.	In the Code box, type   ;;;   (three semicolons).

5.	Choose the OK button.

The data contained in the cell will appear in the formula bar, or in the cell if you are editing within the cell. The data in the cell will not be printed.

To hide the display of zeros

1.	Select the cells that you want to format.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

You can also choose Format Cells from the shortcut menu.

3.	Select the Number tab.

4.	In the Code box, type  0;0;

5.	Choose the OK button.

Cells with a value of zero will not display the zero.

Note  To turn off the display of zero values for an entire sheet, you can choose the Options command from the Tools menu and clear the Zero Values option on the View tab.

See Also

Help

Number Format Codes

Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)


Overview of Formatting Cells with Borders, Patterns, and Color

You can put borders around cells and format the cells with patterns and colors. Cell borders can be any combination of horizontal and vertical lines on the left, right, top, or bottom of a cell.

Cells appear to share their borders. Putting a bottom border on one cell produces the same effect as putting a top border on the cell below it. However, a border prints only with the cell it is applied to.

By hiding the gridlines on a worksheet, you can make formats such as borders, double underlining, and patterns stand out. To hide gridlines when you display or print a worksheet, choose Options from the Tools menu, select the View tab, and clear the Gridlines check box. To hide gridlines only when you print a worksheet, choose Page Setup from the File menu, and clear the Gridlines check box in the Sheet tab.

If you want to place a single or double underline beneath characters in a cell, see Underlining cell contents.

See Also

Help

Adding borders

Overview of Formatting a Graphic Object

Shading cells with patterns and colors

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Adding borders

Overview

1.	Select the cells you want to format.

2.	Click the arrow next to the Borders button.

3.	Select a border style on the palette.

You can apply the selected border style to other cells by making a selection and then clicking the style on the Borders button.

Tip  If you want to keep the palette displayed so you can apply different border styles to several selections, drag the palette off the toolbar.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the cells you want to format.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

You can also choose Format Cells from the shortcut menu.

3.	Select the Border tab.

4.	Select the border options you want.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Borders Button

Border Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Shading cells with patterns and colors

Underlining cell contents

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Shading cells with patterns and colors

Overview

To format cells with solid colors

1.	Select the cells you want to format.

2.	Click the arrow next to the Color button.

3.	Select a color on the palette.

You can apply the selected color to other cells by making a selection and then clicking the color on the Color button.

Tip  If you want to keep the palette displayed so you can apply different colors to other selections, drag the palette off the toolbar.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the cells you want to format.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

You can also choose Format Cells from the shortcut menu.

3.	Select the Patterns tab.

4.	Select the color you want.

5.	Choose the OK button.

To format cells with a pattern

1.	Select the cells you want to format.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

You can also choose Format Cells from the shortcut menu.

3.	Select the Patterns tab.

4.	In the Pattern box, select a pattern.

5.	In the Pattern box, select a color for the pattern.

6.	If you want a color for the cell, select a color under Color.

7.	Choose the OK button.

Shortcut:	Pattern Button (Drawing toolbar)

See Also

Help

  Color Button

  Font Color Button

  Pattern Button

Adding borders

Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Patterns Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Overview of Using Styles to Save and Apply Format Combinations

By defining a cell style, you can save a named combination of formats and apply the format combination to a cell or range. Then, if you redefine the style to have a different combination of formats, all the cells to which you applied the style automatically change to reflect the new formats.

There are six types of formats that you can include in a cell style definition: number, font, alignment, borders, patterns, and protection. You can exclude any of these six formats.

With the Style command on the Format menu, you can define a style by using a formatted cell on the worksheet as an example, or you can specify the formats you want to include in the style definition.

Microsoft Excel comes with several built-in styles. Initially, all cells have the Normal style. You can redefine any style, whether it is a built-in style or one you created.

Styles you define are available for all sheets in a workbook. You can copy styles from one workbook to another.

See Also

Help

Applying a style

Copying styles from another workbook

Creating and deleting a style

Redefining a style

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Applying a style

Overview

To apply a style using the menu

1.	Select the cells you want to format.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Style.

3.	Select or type the name of the style you want.

4.	Choose the OK button.

To apply a style using the Style box

To do this procedure, the Style box must be displayed on a toolbar. See Adding or deleting a toolbar button.

1.	Select the cells you want to format.

2.	In the Style box, select or type the name of the style.

3.	If you typed the name of the style, press ENTER.

To apply the Comma, Currency, or Percent style

1.	Select the cells you want to format.

2.	Click the Comma Style, Currency Style, or Percent Style button.

See Also

Help

  Comma Style Button

  Currency Style Button

  Percent Style Button

Copying styles from another workbook

Creating and deleting a style

Redefining a style

Style Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Copying styles from another workbook

Overview

To do this procedure, you must have both workbooks open: the workbook you are copying to and the workbook you are copying from.

1.	Switch to the workbook to which you want to copy the styles.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Style.

3.	Choose the Merge button.

Microsoft Excel displays a list of the open workbooks.

4.	In the Merge Styles From box, select the name of the workbook that contains the styles you want to copy.

5.	Choose the OK button to copy the styles from the workbook you selected to the active workbook.

Caution  If the active workbook contains any styles that have the same name as styles you are copying, Microsoft Excel asks if you want to merge the styles that have the same names. You can choose to replace the existing styles in the active workbook with the styles you are merging, keep the existing styles in the workbook, or cancel the procedure. You receive this warning only once, regardless of the number of conflicting style names.

6.	Choose the OK button to close the Style dialog box.

See Also

Help

Applying a style

Creating and deleting a style

Redefining a style

Style Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Creating and deleting a style

Overview

To create a style by example using the Style command

1.	Select a cell that has the combination of formats you want to include in your style.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Style.

3.	In the Style Name box, type a name for the new style.

A description of the new style appears in the Style Includes box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

To create a style by specifying the formats you want

1.	From the Format menu, choose Style.

2.	In the Style Name box, type a name for the style.

3.	Choose the Modify button.

The Format Cells dialog box appears.

4.	Select the formats you want on any of the tabs in the dialog box.

5.	Choose the OK button to confirm your selections.

6.	Clear the check box for any of the six format types that you don't want to include in the style definition.

7.	To define and apply the style, choose the OK button.

To define the style without applying it, choose the Add button, and then choose the Close button.

To delete a style

1.	From the Format menu, choose Style.

2.	In the Style Name box, select the style you want to delete.

You cannot delete the Normal style.

3.	Choose the Delete button.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Applying a style

Copying styles from another workbook

Redefining a style

Style Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Redefining a style

Overview

You can redefine any style you created, or any built-in style including the Normal style.

To redefine a style by example

1.	Select a cell that contains the formats you want.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Style.

3.	In the Style Name box, type the name of the style you want to redefine.

Do not select the style name from the list. You must type it in the Style Name box.

4.	Choose the Add button.

5.	Choose the OK button to close the dialog box.

To redefine a style by specifying the formats you want

1.	From the Format menu, choose Style.

2.	In the Style Name box, select or type the name of the existing style you want to change.

If you select the existing style name, the formats of the style serve as your starting point for making changes to the style.

If you type an existing style name, the formats of the active cell serve as your starting point for the style.

3.	Choose the Modify button.

The Format Cells dialog box appears.

4.	On any of the tabs in the dialog box, select the formats you want.

5.	Choose the OK button to confirm your selections.

6.	Clear the check box for any of the six format types that you don't want to include in the style definition.

7.	Choose the OK button to accept the changes, apply the new style to the selected cells, and close the dialog box.

Choose the Add button to accept the changes and keep the Style dialog box open so you can create or redefine other styles. When you are finished, choose the OK button to apply the currently selected style.

See Also

Help

Copying styles from another workbook

Creating and deleting a style

Style Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Overview of Formatting Characters in Cells

You can select cells and then apply formats to all of the text in those cells. You can also format individual characters within cells containing text. For example, you can make the first character in a word larger and add bold formatting to create an initial cap.

See Also

Help

Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Underlining cell contents

Using superscripts and subscripts

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Overview

To change the font

1.	Select the cells or characters you want to format.

2.	Click the arrow on the Font box.

3.	Select a new font.

Note  If you want to change the standard font for all workbooks, use the General tab in the Options dialog box. To display the Options dialog box, choose Options from the Tools menu.

To change the font size

1.	Select the cells or characters you want to format.

2.	In the Font Size box, type a font size or select one from the list.

To change the font style to bold, italic, or underline

1.	Select the cells or characters you want to format.

2.	Click the Bold, Italic, or Underline button.

If you click these buttons again, the formatting is removed.

To change the font color

1.	Select the cells or characters you want to format.

2.	Click the arrow next to the Font Color button.

3.	Select a font color on the palette.

You can apply the selected color to other cells by making a selection and then clicking the colored square on the Font Color button.

Tip  If you want to keep the palette displayed so you can apply different font colors to several selections, drag the palette off the toolbar.

To change font characteristics using the Cells command

1.	Select the cells or characters you want to format.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

If you are formatting cells, you can also choose Format Cells from the shortcut menu.

3.	If you are formatting cells, select the Font tab.

4.	Select the options you want.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Tip  You can copy formatting from one cell to another by selecting the formatted cell and then clicking the Format Painter button. The next cell or cells you select will adopt the new format.

See Also

Help

  Bold Button

  Double Underline Button

  Font Box

  Font Size Box

  Format Painter Button

  Italic Button

  Underline Button

Applying an autoformat to a range

Copying formats using the Format Painter button

Font Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Overview of Using Styles to Save and Apply Format Combinations

Underlining cell contents

Using superscripts and subscripts

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Using superscripts and subscripts

Overview

1.	Select the characters you want to format.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

3.	Select the Superscript or Subscript check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Font Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Underlining cell contents

Overview

To use a single underline

1.	Select the cells or characters you want to underline.

2.	Click the Underline button.

To use a double underline

1.	Select the cells or characters you want to underline.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

Shortcut:	Double Underline button (Text Formatting category)

3.	Select the Font tab.

4.	In the Underline box, select Double.

5.	Choose the OK button.

To use accounting underlining

1.	Select the cells you want to underline.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

3.	Select the Number tab.

4.	In the Category box, select Accounting.

5.	In the Format Codes box, select an accounting format.

6.	Select the Font tab.

7.	In the Underline box, select Single Accounting or Double Accounting.

8.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Currency Style Button

  Double Underline Button

  Underline Button

Font Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Overview of Applying Formats Automatically

Microsoft Excel has built-in range formats, called autoformats, that you can automatically apply to selected ranges of data. These formats help give a sheet a more professional appearance and make the presentation of data clearer and more readable.

The autoformats are combinations of number formats, alignments, fonts, borders, patterns, colors, column widths, and row heights. When you select a range and apply an autoformat, Microsoft Excel determines the levels of summary and detail in the selected range and applies the formats accordingly. For any of the autoformats, you can apply the entire combination of formats, or you can select only those formats you want to apply so that you can retain formats you have already applied to the range.

If you just want to copy formats from one cell or range to another cell or range, you can use the Format Painter button to do so.

See Also

Help

Applying an autoformat to a range

Applying only some of the formats of an autoformat

Clearing an autoformat

Copying formats using the Format Painter button

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Applying an autoformat to a range

Overview

1.	Select the range of data you want to format.

The range must be one contiguous range. If you select a single cell within the current range, Microsoft Excel will select the range for you when you choose the AutoFormat command.

2.	From the Format menu, choose AutoFormat.

3.	In the Table Format box, select the format you want.

The Sample box displays an example of what the selected format looks like.

4.	Choose the OK button.

You can delete the autoformat by choosing the Undo AutoFormat command from the Edit menu immediately after you finish formatting with the AutoFormat command.

Tip  You can quickly apply the most recent autoformat you applied with the AutoFormat command by selecting a range, or a cell within a range, and clicking the AutoFormat button.

See Also

Help

Applying only some of the formats of an autoformat

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Worksheets)

Clearing an autoformat

Copying formats using the Format Painter button

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Applying only some of the formats of an autoformat

Overview

1.	Select the range you want to format.

2.	From the Format menu, choose AutoFormat.

3.	In the Table Format box, select the autoformat you want.

4.	Choose the Options button.

5.	Under Formats To Apply, clear the check boxes for the formats that you don't want to apply.

If you clear a check box for a format, that format will remain unchanged in the selected range when the autoformat is applied.

The sample is modified in the Sample box to reflect the changes.

If a certain format, such as borders, does not appear in the Sample box, and the check box for that format is selected, that format is removed from the cell range when you apply the autoformat.

6.	Choose the OK button to apply the autoformat and close the dialog box.

See Also

Help

Applying an autoformat to a range

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Worksheets)

Clearing an autoformat

Copying formats using the Format Painter button

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Clearing an autoformat

Overview

To clear an autoformat immediately after you apply it

From the Edit menu, choose Undo AutoFormat.

To clear an autoformat at a later time

1.	Select the range that has the autoformat you want to clear.

2.	From the Format menu, choose AutoFormat.

3.	In the Table Format box, select None.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Applying an autoformat to a range

Applying only some of the formats of an autoformat

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Worksheets)

Copying formats using the Format Painter button

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Copying formats using the Format Painter button

Overview

1.	Select a cell or range whose formats you want to copy.

2.	Click the Format Painter button.

If you want to copy formats to more than one range, double-click the Format Painter button.

3.	Click a cell, or drag through the range where you want to apply the formatting.

4.	If you are copying formats to more than one range, continue dragging through the ranges where you want to copy the formats.

If you double-clicked the Format Painter button, the Format Painter cursor stays active until you click the Format Painter button again.

See Also

Help

  Format Painter Button

Applying a style

Applying an autoformat to a range

Applying only some of the formats of an autoformat

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets)

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Number Format Codes

Overview

Microsoft Excel uses the following symbols in its built-in formats. You can use these symbols to create your own custom number formats.

Format symbol	Meaning

General	Displays the number in General format.

#	Digit placeholder. If the number has more digits to the right of the decimal point than there are #'s to the right in the format, Microsoft Excel rounds the number to as many decimal places as there are #'s to the right. If the number has more digits to the left of the decimal point than there are #'s to the left in the format, Microsoft Excel displays the extra digits.

0 (zero)	Digit placeholder. Follows the same rules as the # placeholder, except that if the number has fewer digits than there are zeros in the format, Microsoft Excel displays the extra zeros. For example, if you want the number 8.9 to appear as 8.90, type #.00 for the format.

?	Digit placeholder. Follows the same rules as for 0 preceding, except that Microsoft Excel places a space for insignificant zeros on either side of the decimal point so that decimal points align. You can also use this symbol for fractions that have varying numbers of digits.

period	Decimal point. This symbol determines how many digits (0's or #'s) Microsoft Excel displays to the right and left of the decimal point. If the format contains only #'s to the left of this symbol, Microsoft Excel begins numbers less than 1 with a decimal point. To avoid this, use 0 as the first digit placeholder to the left of the decimal point instead of #. You can also use the decimal point to create time formats that display fractions of a second.

%	Percentage. Microsoft Excel multiplies by 100 and adds the % character.

comma	Thousands separator. Microsoft Excel separates thousands by commas if the format contains a comma surrounded by #'s or 0's. A comma following a placeholder scales the number by a thousand. For example, the format   #,   would scale the number by a thousand and the format   #,,   would scale the number by a million. The format   0.0,,   would display the number 12,200,000 as 12.2.

E- E+ e- e+	Scientific format. If a format contains a 0 or # to the right of an E-, E+, e-, or e+, Microsoft Excel displays the number in scientific format and inserts an E or e. The number of 0's or #'s to the right determines the exponent's number of digits. E- or e- places a minus sign by negative exponents. E+ or e+ places a minus sign by negative exponents and a plus sign by positive exponents.

$ - + / ( ) : space	Displays this character. To display a character other than one of these, precede the character with a backslash (\) or enclose the character in double quotation marks (" "). You can also use the slash (/) character for fraction formats.

\	Displays the next character in the format. Microsoft Excel does not display the backslash. This is the same as enclosing the next character in double quotation marks. If you enter any of the following symbols, Microsoft Excel provides the backslash for you: ! ^ & ` (left single quotation mark) ' (right single quotation mark) ~ { } = < >

*	Repeats the next character in the format enough times to fill the column width. You cannot have more than one asterisk in one section of a format.

underline	Skips the width of the next character. For example, in a format section for positive numbers, you could type _) at the end of a format section for positive numbers to have Microsoft Excel skip the width of the parenthesis characters, so positive numbers align with negative numbers that contain parentheses.

"text"	Displays whatever text is inside the double quotation marks.

@	Text placeholder. If there is text entered in the cell, the text from the cell is placed in the format where the @ character appears.

m 	Displays the month as a number without leading zeros (1-12). If you use m immediately after the h or hh symbol, Microsoft Excel displays the minute rather than the month.

mm 	Displays the month as a number with leading zeros (01-12). If you use mm immediately after the h or hh symbol, Microsoft Excel displays the minute rather than the month.

mmm 	Displays the month as an abbreviation (Jan-Dec).

mmmm	Displays the month as a full name (January-December).

d 	Displays the day as a number without leading zeros (1-31).

dd 	Displays the day as a number with leading zeros (01-31).

ddd 	Displays the day as an abbreviation (Sun-Sat).

dddd	Displays the day as a full name (Sunday-Saturday).

yy or yyyy	Displays the year as a two-digit number (00-99), or as a four-digit number (1900-2078).

h or hh	Displays the hour as a number without leading zeros (0-23), or as a number with leading zeros (00-23). If the format contains an AM or PM, the hour is based on the 12-hour clock. Otherwise, the hour is based on the 24-hour clock.

m or mm	Displays the minute as a number without leading zeros (0-59), or as a number with leading zeros (00-59). The m or mm must appear immediately after the h or hh symbol, or Microsoft Excel displays the month rather than the minute.

s or ss	Displays the second as a number without leading zeros (0-59), or as a number with leading zeros (00-59).

[ ]	Displays hours greater than 24, or minutes or seconds greater than 60. Place the brackets around the leftmost part of the time code; for example, the time code [h]:mm:ss would allow the display of hours greater than 24.

AM/am/A/a

PM/pm/P/p	Displays the hour using a 12-hour clock. Microsoft Excel displays AM, am, A, or a for times from midnight until noon, and PM, pm, P, or p for times from noon until midnight. If no AM/PM indicator is used, the hour is based on the 24-hour clock.

[BLACK]	Displays the characters in the cell in black.

[BLUE]	Displays the characters in the cell in blue.

[CYAN]	Displays the characters in the cell in cyan.

[GREEN]	Displays the characters in the cell in green.

[MAGENTA]	Displays the characters in the cell in magenta.

[RED]	Displays the characters in the cell in red.

[WHITE]	Displays the characters in the cell in white.

[YELLOW]	Displays the characters in the cell in yellow.

[COLOR n]	Displays the corresponding color in the color palette, where n is a number from 0 to 56. For more information about the color palette, see Customizing colors in a color palette.

[condition value]	Where condition may be <, >, =, >=, <=, <>, and value may be any number. With the [condition value] symbol, you can set your own criteria for each section of a number format.


Form Buttons Category

Check Box Button

Creates a check box on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

Combination Drop-Down Edit Button

Creates a combination drop-down list box and edit box on your dialog sheet.

Combination List-Edit Button

Creates a combination list box and edit box on your dialog sheet.

Control Properties Button

Opens the Control tab in the Format Object dialog box so that you can view or change the properties of the controls on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

Drop-Down Button

Creates a drop-down list box on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

Edit Box Button

Creates an edit box for entering text on a dialog sheet.

Edit Code Button

Edits or creates code for the selected object.

Group Box Button

Creates a group box on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

Label Button

Creates a text label on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

List Box Button

Creates a list box on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

Option Button Button

Creates an option button on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet, either as one of a group of option buttons inside a group box or an individual option button.

Run Dialog Button

Runs the custom dialog box currently being edited on the dialog sheet.

Scroll Bar Button

Creates a scroll bar on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

Spinner Button

Creates a spinner control on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

Tab Order Button

Sets the tab order of controls on a worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

Toggle Grid Button

Shows or hides the grid used to align objects on a worksheet or dialog sheet.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Assigning a macro to a button on a sheet

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Check Box Button

Creates a check box on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet. The Check Box button is located on the Forms toolbar.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Combination Drop-Down Edit Button

Creates a combination drop-down list box and edit box on your dialog sheet. The Combination Drop-Down Edit button is located on the Forms toolbar.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Combination List-Edit Button

Creates a combination list box and edit box on your dialog sheet. The Combination List-Edit button is located on the Forms toolbar.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Control Properties Button

Opens the Control tab in the Format Object dialog box so you can view or change the properties of the selected control on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet. The Control Properties button is located on the Forms toolbar.

See Also

Help

Properties Tab, Object Command (Format Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Drop-Down Button

Creates a drop-down list box on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet. The Drop-Down button is located on the Forms toolbar.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Changing the width of a drop-down list box on a toolbar

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Edit Code Button

Edits or creates code for the selected object. If the object currently has code assigned to it, clicking this button opens the Visual Basic module or Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro sheet containing the code. If the object does not have code assigned to it, clicking this button opens a new Visual Basic module and creates an empty procedure that is automatically assigned to the object. The Edit Code button is located on the Forms toolbar.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Edit Box Button

Creates an edit box for entering text on a dialog sheet. The Edit Box button is located on the Forms toolbar.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Group Box Button

Creates a group box on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet. You can then use the Option Button button to put option buttons in the group box. The Group Box button is located on the Forms toolbar.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Option Button Button

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Label Button

Creates a text label on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet. The Label button is located on the Forms toolbar.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


List Box Button

Creates a list box on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet. The List Box button is located on the Forms toolbar.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Option Button Button

Creates an option button on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet, either one of a group of option buttons inside a group box or an individual option button. The Option Button button is located on the Forms toolbar.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Group Box Button

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Scroll Bar Button

Creates a scroll bar on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet. The Scroll Bar button is located on the Forms toolbar.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Spinner Button

Creates a spinner control on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet. The Spinner button is located on the Forms toolbar.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Tab Order Button

Sets the order in which controls in a dialog box are activated when you press the TAB key. The Tab Order button is in the Forms category.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Toggle Grid Button

Shows or hides the grid used to align objects on a worksheet or dialog sheet. The Toggle Grid button is located on the Forms toolbar.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Formula Buttons Category

AutoSum Button

Automatically invokes the SUM function and suggests the range of cells to be added.

Colon Button

Adds a colon ( : ) at the insertion point in the formula bar.

Comma Button

Adds a comma ( , ) at the insertion point in the formula bar.

Constrain Numeric Button

Limits pen recognition to digits and punctuation.

Division Sign Button

Adds a division sign ( / ) at the insertion point in the formula bar.

Dollar Sign Button

Adds a dollar sign ( $ ) at the insertion point in the formula bar.

Equal Sign Button

Adds an equal sign ( = ) at the insertion point in the formula bar.

Exponentiation Sign Button

Adds a caret ( ^ ) at the insertion point in the formula bar.

Function Wizard Button

Opens the Function Wizard dialog box and inserts the selected function in to the formula bar or active cell.

Left Parenthesis Button

Adds an opening parenthesis ( ( ) at the insertion point in the formula bar.

Minus Sign Button

Adds a minus sign ( - ) at the insertion point in the formula bar.

Multiplication Sign Button

Adds an asterisk ( * ) at the insertion point in the formula bar.

Paste Names Button

Displays the Paste Names dialog box so that you can insert a selected name into the formula bar.

Percent Sign Button

Adds a percent sign ( % ) at the insertion point in the formula bar or cell.

Plus Sign Button

Adds a plus sign (+) at the insertion point in the formula bar.

Right Parenthesis Button

Adds a closing parenthesis ( ) ) at the insertion point in the formula bar.


AutoSum Button

Automatically invokes the SUM function and suggests the range of cells to be added. To use the AutoSum button, select a cell adjacent to a row or column of numbers you want to add, and click the AutoSum button on the Standard toolbar.

Shortcut:	ALT+ =

If Microsoft Excel suggests an incorrect range, drag through the range you want, and press ENTER to accept the completed formula.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Entering a single sum formula with the AutoSum button

Selecting a cell or range of cells

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Colon Button

Adds a colon ( : ) at the insertion point in the formula bar or cell. This button is in the Formula category.

If a cell is active, clicking this button replaces the contents of the cell with a colon.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Entering formulas

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Comma Button

Adds a comma ( , ) at the insertion point in the formula bar or cell. This button is in the Formula category.

If a cell is active, clicking this button replaces the contents of the cell with a comma.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Entering formulas

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Constrain Numeric Button

Limits pen recognition to digits and punctuation. This button is in the Formula category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Entering formulas

Using the Pen with Microsoft Excel

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Division Sign Button

Adds a division sign ( / ) at the insertion point in the formula bar or cell. This button is in the Formula category.

If a cell is active, clicking this button replaces the contents of the cell with a division sign.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Entering formulas

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Dollar Sign Button

Adds a dollar sign ( $ ) at the insertion point in the formula bar or cell. This button is in the Formula category.

If a cell is active, clicking this button replaces the contents of the cell with a dollar sign.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Entering formulas

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Equal Sign Button

Adds an equal sign ( = ) at the insertion point in the formula bar or cell. This button is in the Formula category.

If a cell is active, clicking this button replaces the contents of the cell with an equal sign.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Entering formulas

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Exponentiation Sign Button

Adds a caret ( ^ ) at the insertion point in the formula bar or cell. This button is in the Formula category.

If a cell is active, clicking this button replaces the contents of the cell with an exponentiation sign.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Entering formulas

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Left Parenthesis Button

Adds an opening parenthesis ( ( ) at the insertion point in the formula bar or cell. This button is in the Formula category.

If a cell is active, clicking this button replaces the contents of the cell with a left parenthesis.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Entering formulas

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Minus Sign Button

Adds a minus sign ( - ) at the insertion point in the formula bar or cell. This button is in the Formula category.

If a cell is active, clicking this button replaces the contents of the cell with a minus sign.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Entering formulas

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Multiplication Sign Button

Adds an asterisk ( * ) at the insertion point in the formula bar or cell. This button is in the Formula category.

If a cell is active, clicking this button replaces the contents of the cell with a multiplication sign.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Entering formulas

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Paste Names Button

Displays the Paste Names dialog box so that you can insert a selected name into the formula bar. This button is in the Formula category.

Shortcut:	Select the name from the name box on the formula bar.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Pasting a name into a formula

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Percent Sign Button

Adds a percent sign ( % ) at the insertion point in the formula bar or cell. This button is in the Formula category.

If a cell is active, clicking this button replaces the contents of the cell with a percent sign.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Entering formulas

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Plus Sign Button

Adds a plus sign (+) at the insertion point in the formula bar or cell. This button is in the Formula category.

If a cell is active, clicking this button replaces the contents of the cell with a plus sign.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Entering formulas

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Right Parenthesis Button

Adds a closing parenthesis ( ) ) at the insertion point in the formula bar or cell. This button is in the Formula category.

If a cell is active, clicking this button replaces the contents of the cell with a right parenthesis.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Entering formulas

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Using Formulas to Calculate Values

Overview of Entering a Formula

Entering formulas

Overview of Using References

Changing a cell's reference type

Entering a reference to another sheet in a workbook

Entering a reference to a range of sheets in a workbook

Referring to intersecting cell ranges

Overview of Using Functions

Inserting a worksheet function into a formula with Function Wizard

Editing formulas containing functions with Function Wizard

Entering a single sum formula with the AutoSum button

Entering multiple sum formulas with the AutoSum button

Entering grand totals with the AutoSum button

Overview of Working with Names

Changing a name

Checking the reference of a name

Creating names based on row and column titles

Displaying names in the Info window

Editing a name's reference or formula

Naming a cell, range, or formula

Pasting a list of all defined names

Pasting a name into a formula

Replacing cell references with a defined name

Defining a name with a 3-D reference

Overview of Working with Arrays

Entering an array formula

Editing an array formula

Clearing an array range

Converting an array range to constant values

Selecting an array range

Overview of Controlling Calculation

Calculating a portion of a formula

Calculating all open documents when calculation is set to manual

Calculating only the active worksheet

Calculating with precision as displayed

Freezing the values in a range of cells

Replacing an entire formula with its calculated value

Switching between manual and automatic calculation

Turning off calculation before saving

Date system differences for Microsoft Windows and Macintosh

Overview of Solving Circular Reference Formulas Using Iteration

Controlling iteration

Overview of Linking Microsoft Excel Workbooks

Renaming a stand-alone or a dependent workbook

Creating links between workbooks

Entering an external reference in a formula

Saving unnamed linked workbooks

Redirecting links for source workbooks

Replacing a source workbook with another workbook

Opening source workbooks

Updating data from a source workbook

Viewing a list of source documents for a dependent workbook

Viewing the source data for a link

Removing links between workbooks

Overview of Error Values

#DIV/0!

#N/A

#NAME?

#NULL!

#NUM!

#REF!

#VALUE!


Overview of Entering a Formula

Using a formula can help you analyze data on a worksheet. With a formula you can perform operations, such as addition, multiplication, and comparison on worksheet values. Use a formula when you want to enter calculated values on a worksheet.

A formula can include any of the following elements: operators, cell references, values, worksheet functions, and names. To enter a formula in a worksheet cell, you type a combination of these elements in the formula bar.

See Also

Help

Entering formulas

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Entering formulas

Overview

1.	Select the cell in which you want to enter the formula.

2.	Type an equal sign (=) to activate the formula bar.

If you begin a formula by pasting a name or function, Microsoft Excel automatically inserts the equal sign.

3.	Type the formula or use any of the following techniques to enter a formula into the formula bar:

Insert references into your formula by selecting cells on your worksheet. When you select cells, Microsoft Excel inserts relative references in your formula.

--Or--

From the Edit menu, choose Paste to paste characters that you previously copied from another formula or application.

--Or--

Choose the Function Wizard button on the Standard toolbar or on the formula bar to open the Function Wizard. Choose the function you want to paste into the formula from the Function Wizard dialog box.

4.	After you have completed the formula, press ENTER.

Note  To enter a formula as text, type a single quotation mark before the entry.

See Also

Help

  Function Wizard Button

Editing cell contents

Inserting a worksheet function into a formula with Function Wizard

Paste Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Overview of Using References

A reference identifies a cell or a group of cells on a worksheet. References tell Microsoft Excel which cells to look in to find the values you want used in a formula. With references, you can use data contained in different parts of a worksheet in one formula and use the value of one cell in several formulas.

You can also refer to cells in other sheets in a workbook, to other workbooks, and to data in other applications. References to cells in other workbooks are called external references. References to data in other applications are called remote references.

Cell references are based on the column and row headings on a worksheet. When you first start Microsoft Excel, columns are labeled with letters (A, B, C, ... Z; AA, AB, AC, ... AZ; BA, BB, BC, and so on) and rows are numbered. This is known as A1 reference style. You can also change the column headings to be numbers instead of letters. This is known as R1C1 reference style. The reference of the active cell is displayed in the reference area to the far left of the formula bar.

See Also

Help

Changing a cell's reference type

Entering a reference to a range of sheets in a workbook

Entering a reference to another sheet in a workbook

Referring to intersecting cell ranges

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Entering a reference to another sheet in a workbook

Overview

1.	Select the cell in which you want to enter a reference.

2.	Start the formula by typing an equal sign. If you are not starting the formula with a reference, type the operator that you want to precede the reference.

3.	Switch to the sheet containing the cells you want to refer to in the reference, and select the cell or cell range you want.

Microsoft Excel enters the reference of the selected cell or range into the formula.

You can also type the reference or name instead of selecting the cells. If you type in the reference, it must take the form Sheet4!B6:B7.

4.	When you finish entering the formula, press ENTER.

Microsoft Excel changes the cell's reference type to the last type you had selected.

See Also

Help

Changing a cell's reference type

Entering a reference to a range of sheets in a workbook

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Entering a reference to a range of sheets in a workbook

Overview

You can enter references to a range of sheets in a workbook. This is sometimes referred to as 3-D referencing.

1.	Select the cell in which you want to enter the reference.

2.	Start the formula by typing an equal sign. If you are not starting the formula with the reference, type the operator that you want to precede the reference.

3.	Type the reference or name of the cells.

3-D references take the form 'Sheet2:Sheet6'!A2:A5. This reference refers to the range A2:A5 in each of the sheets between and including Sheet2 and Sheet6.

Shortcut:	Type an equal sign to begin the formula, and click the worksheet tab that begins the reference. Then select the range you want to enter. Then press SHIFT, and click the worksheet tab that will end the reference.

4.	When you finish entering the formula, press ENTER.

See Also

Help

Entering a reference to another sheet in a workbook

Referring to intersecting cell ranges

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Referring to intersecting cell ranges

Overview

The intersection operator, a space, is used to refer to a cell that two intersecting cell ranges share in common. For example, in row 3, the range B3:M3 contains sales figures, and in column C, the range C2:C8 contains various data for February. The formula =B3:M3 C2:C8 uses the intersection operator to refer to the value at the intersection of the two ranges, cell C3.

Names make intersection easier to use. For example, if you define the name Sales as the range B3:M3 and the name February as the range C2:C8, the formula =February Sales produces the same result as the previous example, cell C3.

Implicit Intersection

In a formula, if you specify a reference to a row or column of cells that should be a reference to a single cell, Microsoft Excel chooses just one cell from that reference on which to perform the operation. For example, if you enter the formula =Sales*15% in cell C10, Microsoft Excel looks for a cell in the same row or column that fits the description given in the formula. In this case, the named range Sales (B3:M3) includes a cell in column C, the same column as the formula. Therefore, the cell used in the formula is C3. Moreover, the complete intersection statement is not necessary. If you copy the formula to the right, each new formula uses a cell in the range Sales that is in the same column as the copied formula.

See Also

Help

Entering a reference to a range of sheets in a workbook

Naming a cell, range, or formula

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Changing a cell's reference type

Overview

1.	Select the cell that contains a reference type you want to change.

2.	Select the cell reference in the formula bar.

3.	Press F4 to cycle through the relative, mixed, and absolute reference types until you find the one you want.

Each time you press F4, Microsoft Excel changes the reference to the next type in the cycle.

4.	Press ENTER.

See Also

Help

Entering a reference to a range of sheets in a workbook

Entering a reference to another sheet in a workbook

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Overview of Using Functions

You use the Microsoft Excel built-in functions to perform standard worksheet and macro sheet calculations. The values that you give a function to perform operations on are called arguments. The values that the functions return are called results.

You use functions by entering them into formulas on your worksheet. The sequence of characters you use in a function is called the syntax. All functions have the same basic syntax. If you do not follow this syntax, Microsoft Excel displays a message indicating that there is an error in the formula. If a function appears at the beginning of a formula, precede it with an equal sign, as with any formula.

Parentheses tell Microsoft Excel where the arguments begin and end. Remember to include both parentheses, with no spaces preceding or following. You specify arguments within these parentheses. Arguments can be numbers, text, logical values, arrays, error values, or references. The argument you designate must produce a valid value for that argument. Some functions accept optional arguments that are not required for the function to perform its calculations.

Arguments can also be constants or formulas. The formulas themselves can contain other functions. When an argument to a function is itself a function, it is said to be nested. In Microsoft Excel, you can nest up to seven levels of functions in a formula.

See Also

Help

  Function Wizard Button

Alphabetical List of Worksheet Functions

Editing formulas containing functions with Function Wizard

Entering a single sum formula with the AutoSum button

Entering grand totals with the AutoSum button

Entering multiple sum formulas with the AutoSum button

Inserting a worksheet function into a formula with Function Wizard

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Inserting a worksheet function into a formula with Function Wizard

Overview

The Function Wizard allows you to automate formula creation. You choose from a list of built-in functions and any custom functions you might have created.

1.	To paste a function at the beginning of a formula, select the cell where you want to enter the formula.

To paste a function elsewhere in the formula, position the insertion point where you want to insert the function.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Function.

Shortcuts:	Function Wizard button (Standard toolbar)

SHIFT+F3

Microsoft Excel displays the Function Wizard dialog box, listing function types or logical groupings and the available worksheet functions for each, including custom functions.

3.	Select the function category. The All category includes all worksheet functions.

4.	Select the function name.

5.	Choose the Next button.

The next Function Wizard dialog box appears. The arguments for the function appear next to boxes you use to fill in the arguments.

If the function has several forms (such as the macro function SELECT), you can choose the format you need.

6.	Enter values for the arguments.

You can enter values, references, names, formulas, and other functions into the argument edit boxes. However, your entries must produce valid values for that argument. When you activate an argument box, a description of the argument appears in the display area. If an argument is required for the function to be entered successfully, "required" appears next to the argument name in the display area.

Between each argument and its argument box is a Function Wizard button. Clicking this button opens another instance of the Function Wizard, allowing you to nest functions within the argument. You can nest up to seven levels of functions.

7.	Choose the Finish button.

Function Wizard enters the completed function into your formula.

See Also

Help

  Function Wizard Button

Alphabetical List of Worksheet Functions

Function Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Editing formulas containing functions with Function Wizard

Overview

In addition to creating formulas with Function Wizard, you can use it to edit existing formulas that contain functions.

1.	Select a cell containing an existing formula that includes functions.

2.	Choose the Function Wizard button.

Shortcut:	SHIFT+F3

The first function in the formula is opened in the Function Wizard's Editing mode, allowing you to modify the arguments.

3.	Make any necessary changes to your arguments.

4.	Click Next to enter your changes and display the next function in the formula for editing. Click the Finish button to enter your changes and close the Function Wizard dialog box.

See Also

Help

  Function Wizard Button

Alphabetical List of Worksheet Functions

Function Command (Insert Menu)

Inserting a worksheet function into a formula with Function Wizard

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Entering a single sum formula with the AutoSum button

Overview

The SUM function is the most frequently used worksheet function. With it, you can transform a complex formula such as =A2+A3+A4+A5+A6 into the more concise form =SUM(A2:A6). Even more convenient is the AutoSum button on the Standard toolbar. Using the AutoSum button, Microsoft Excel types the function for you and even suggests the range of cells you want to sum.

1.	Select a cell adjacent to a row or column of numbers you want to add, and choose the AutoSum button.

Shortcut:	ALT+ =

Microsoft Excel enters an equal sign and a SUM function. It will look up and to the left for the largest contiguous range of numbers to add. It enters this range in the formula and highlights the reference on the formula bar.

2.	If the suggested range is incorrect, drag through the correct range.

3.	Press ENTER to accept the completed formula.

See Also

Help

  AutoSum Button

Entering grand totals with the AutoSum button

Entering multiple sum formulas with the AutoSum button

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Entering multiple sum formulas with the AutoSum button

Overview

1.	Select a range of cells adjacent to rows or columns of values.

2.	Choose the AutoSum button.

Sum formulas are inserted into all the selected cells simultaneously. You can also select the values you want to sum before clicking the AutoSum button. Microsoft Excel then adds sum formulas to the first empty row below the selected range.

To add sum formulas to both rows and columns at the same time, select a range of cells including the values you want to sum and a blank row and column for the sum formulas.

See Also

Help

  AutoSum Button

Entering a single sum formula with the AutoSum button

Entering grand totals with the AutoSum button

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Entering grand totals with the AutoSum button

Overview

You can use the AutoSum button to add sum formulas for a selected range containing values along with rows or columns of subtotals.

1.	Select a range of cells, including subtotals, and a blank row or column (or both) adjacent to the range.

2.	Choose the AutoSum button on the Standard toolbar.

Shortcut:	ALT+ =

Excel adds subtotals together for a grand total.

See Also

Help

  AutoSum Button

Entering a single sum formula with the AutoSum button

Entering multiple sum formulas with the AutoSum button

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Overview of Working with Names

A name is an easy-to-remember identifier you create to refer to a cell, a group of cells, a value, or a formula. Using names has the following advantages:

Formulas that use names are easier to read and remember than formulas using cell references. For example, the formula =Assets-Liabilities is easier to read than the formula =F6-D6.

If you change the structure of your worksheet, you can update the reference in one place, and all formulas using the name are automatically updated.

Once defined, names normally have book-level scope, meaning that they can be used anywhere in the workbook. These names are available in the name box on the formula bar from any sheet in the workbook.

You can also define special names that have sheet-level scope, meaning that they can be used only on the sheet where they are defined. These names are not visible in the name box on the formula bar or the Define Name dialog box from any other sheet in the workbook.

You can have Microsoft Excel automatically create names for cells based on row or column titles on your worksheet, or you can enter names for cells or formulas yourself. You can quickly create names using the name box on the formula bar.

After you define a name, you can:

Replace references with that name in all or part of your worksheet by applying the name. For example, if you define the name Margin as =$F$12, you can replace all references to cell $F$12 with the name Margin.

Jump quickly to a named reference, replace references, or paste a reference in a formula using the name box on the formula bar.

Paste that name into a formula. Redefine a name by editing its reference or formula. Delete an unused name from the worksheet.

You can also name a formula without putting that formula into a cell. This helps reduce the size of your worksheets because Microsoft Excel stores the formula once, instead of in each cell. Define a name for a formula when you use the same formula in many places throughout a worksheet. Naming formulas is especially useful in formulas using relative references. Whenever you change the definition of the formula, all cells using the name are automatically updated.

See Also

Help

Changing a name

Checking the reference of a name

Creating names based on row and column titles

Defining a name with a 3-D reference

Displaying names in the Info window

Editing a name's reference or formula

Naming a cell, range, or formula

Pasting a list of all defined names

Pasting a name into a formula

Replacing cell references with a defined name

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Changing a name

Overview

Use the Define Name dialog box to change cell, range, and formula names.

1.	From the Insert menu, choose Name, and then choose Define.

The Define Name dialog box appears.

2.	Select the name you want to change from the Names In Workbook list.

3.	Select the name in the edit box, and type a new name.

4.	Choose the Add button.

Microsoft Excel puts the new name in the Names In Workbook box.

5.	Select the old name in the list, and choose the Delete button.

Microsoft Excel removes the old name from the Names In Workbook box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

To delete a name

1.	From the Insert menu, choose Name, and then choose Define.

The Define Name dialog box appears.

2.	Select the name you want to delete in the Names In Workbook box.

3.	Choose the Delete button.

Microsoft Excel removes the name from the Names In Workbook box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Creating names based on row and column titles

Define Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Editing a name's reference or formula

Naming a cell, range, or formula

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Checking the reference of a name

Overview

1.	From the Insert menu, choose Name, and then choose Define.

2.	In the Names In Workbook box, select the name whose reference you want to check.

The reference of the selected name is displayed in the Refers To box.

3.	Choose the Close button.

See Also

Help

Changing a name

Define Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Editing a name's reference or formula

Naming a cell, range, or formula

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Creating names based on row and column titles

Overview

1.	Select the range you want to name, including the row or column titles you want to use for names.

The selected range should include text labels at the top, bottom, left, or right of the selection. These labels become the range names. Date labels are automatically converted to text values. Cells containing the text used as names are not included in the named area.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Name, and then choose Create.

Shortcut:	CTRL+SHIFT+F3

3.	In the Create Names In box, select the Top Row, Left Column, Bottom Row, or Right Column check box, depending on the location of the labels from which you want to create names.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Note  If any cells contain numbers formatted as dates, Microsoft Excel creates a name using the formatted appearance of the number.

See Also

Help

Changing a name

Create Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Defining a name with a 3-D reference

Naming a cell, range, or formula

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Displaying names in the Info window

Overview

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Select the View tab.

3.	In the Show box, select the Info Window check box, and choose the OK button.

4.	From the Window menu, choose Arrange to arrange the windows so you can see both the workbook and the Info window at the same time.

To arrange windows both horizontally and vertically, select the Tiled option button.

To stack windows one above the other, select the Horizontal option button.

To place windows side by side, select the Vertical option button.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	Switch to the Info window.

7.	From the Info menu, choose Names.

Names are displayed in the Info window.

8.	Switch to the workbook window, and select cells to look for names.

See Also

Help

Checking the reference of a name

Info Menu Commands

Naming a cell, range, or formula

View Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Editing a name's reference or formula

Overview

1.	From the Insert menu, choose Name, and then choose Define.

2.	In the Names In Workbook box, select the name whose reference or formula you want to edit.

3.	In the Refers To box, type a new reference or formula, or edit the reference or formula.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Changing a name

Define Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Naming a cell, range, or formula

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Naming a cell, range, or formula

Overview

To name formulas

1.	From the Insert menu, choose Name, and then choose Define.

2.	In the Names In Workbook edit box, type a name for the formula.

3.	Type the formula in the Refers To box. It must begin with an equal sign (=).

4.	Choose the OK button.

To name a cell or a range

Although you can define a name for a cell or a range using the steps for defining a name for a formula, there is a much easier method.

1.	Select the cell, cell range, or nonadjacent selections you want to name.

2.	Click the name box at the left end of the formula bar to activate it.

3.	Type the name for the cell or range.

4.	Press ENTER.

When you click the arrow next to the name box to view the list of names, you see the new cell or range name. If you select the name, Microsoft Excel selects the cell or range.

To name a cell or a range that applies only to the active sheet

Normally, once you define a name on any sheet in a workbook, you can use that name on any other sheet in the workbook. You can also create sheet-level names that can be useful if you want to use a common name on several sheets in the same workbook. If you use the same name to define both a sheet-level name and a book-level name, the sheet-level name takes precedence on the sheet where it is defined.

1.	From the Insert menu, choose Name, and then choose Define.

2.	In the Names In Worksheet edit box, type the name of the sheet, followed by an exclamation point, then type the name you want to use, for example, Sheet1!Sales.

3.	Type the formula or reference in the Refers To box. It must begin with an equal sign (=).

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Changing a name

Define Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Editing a name's reference or formula

Replacing cell references with a defined name

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Pasting a list of all defined names

Overview

1.	Select a cell that will become the upper-left corner of the list.

Because the pasted list overwrites any existing data, be sure to allow enough room for the list on your worksheet.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Name, and then choose Paste.

3.	Choose the Paste List button.

All names defined on your workbook are pasted, starting at the active cell. The list of names is two columns wide. The left column lists names; the right column lists cell references that the names refer to.

Note  Make sure there's sufficient room for all the names and references to be pasted without pasting over existing information on your worksheet.

See Also

Help

Naming a cell, range, or formula

Paste Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Pasting a name into a formula

Replacing cell references with a defined name

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Pasting a name into a formula

Overview

You must have defined names in your workbook before using this procedure.

1.	In the formula bar, position the insertion point where you want to paste the name.

If the formula bar is blank, type an equal sign (=) to start the formula.

2.	Select the name you want to paste from the name box at the left end of the formula bar.

Alternate Method

1.	In the formula bar, position the insertion point where you want to paste the name.

If the formula bar is blank, type an equal sign (=) to start the formula.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Name, and then choose Paste.

Shortcut:	F3

3.	Select the name you want to paste from the list.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Note  You can also paste a name into a cell without first activating the formula bar. This is useful for pasting a named formula into a cell. If the cell already contains a formula or other data, the pasted name replaces the contents of the cell.

See Also

Help

Naming a cell, range, or formula

Paste Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Pasting a list of all defined names

Replacing cell references with a defined name

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Replacing cell references with a defined name

Overview

1.	Select the range in which you want references replaced with names.

To apply names to the entire worksheet, select a single cell.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Name, and then choose Apply.

3.	In the Apply Names box, select one or more names to be applied.

To scroll through the list quickly, type the first letter of the name you want to select.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel replaces cell references with the selected names.

See Also

Help

Apply Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Changing a name

Creating names based on row and column titles

Editing a name's reference or formula

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Defining a name with a 3-D reference

Overview

1.	From the Insert Menu, choose Name, then choose Define.

2.	In the Names In Worksheet edit box, type the name you want to use.

3.	Press the TAB key until the contents of the Refers To box is highlighted.

4.	Type an equal sign (=), then type the reference of the 3-D range you want to use, or select the 3-D range in the workbook.

5.	Choose OK to define the name, or choose Add to define the name and keep the dialog box open.

For more information about selecting 3-D ranges, see Entering a reference to a range of sheets in a workbook.

See Also

Help

Creating names based on row and column titles

Naming a cell, range, or formula

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Overview of Working with Arrays

Array formulas can take the place of several single-value formulas, reducing the amount of time you spend entering repetitive formulas. You can use array formulas to perform an operation that produces multiple results or to operate on a group of arguments arranged in rows and columns.

See Also

Help

Clearing an array range

Converting an array range to constant values

Editing an array formula

Entering an array formula

Selecting an array range

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Entering an array formula

Overview

1.	Select the cell or range of cells in which you want to enter the formula.

2.	Enter the formula.

Make sure that each argument or operand includes the entire cell, range, or set of values you want used for the operation or function. Microsoft Excel adds the braces when you enter the formula as an array; do not type the braces around the formula. If you do, Microsoft Excel interprets the entry as text.

3.	Press CTRL+SHIFT+ENTER.

You must hold down both the CTRL and SHIFT keys when you press ENTER. If you hold down only the SHIFT key, the formula is entered as an ordinary formula in the active cell. If you hold down only the CTRL key, the formula is entered as an ordinary formula in all the selected cells.

See Also

Help

Converting an array range to constant values

Selecting an array range

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Editing an array formula

Overview

1.	Select any cell in the array range.

2.	Activate the formula bar.

The array formula braces disappear when the formula bar is active.

3.	Edit the formula.

4.	Press CTRL+SHIFT+ENTER.

See Also

Help

Clearing an array range

Entering an array formula

Selecting an array range

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Clearing an array range

Overview

1.	Select the array range.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Clear, and then choose Contents.

Shortcut:	DEL

See Also

Help

Clear Command (Edit Menu)

Editing an array formula

Entering an array formula

Selecting an array range

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Converting an array range to constant values

Overview

If you convert the results of an array formula into a range of constant values, you can edit the array range by inserting or deleting cells, rows, or columns. This can help to create a more effective presentation.

1.	Select the array range.

2.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Copy.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

4.	Under Paste, select the Values option button.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Editing an array formula

Entering an array formula

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

Selecting an array range

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Selecting an array range

Overview

1.	Select any cell in the array range.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Go To.

Shortcut:	F5

3.	Choose the Special button.

4.	Select the Current Array option button.

5.	Choose the OK button.

You can also select the array range by selecting any cell in the array range and pressing CTRL+ /.

See Also

Help

Clearing an array range

Editing an array formula

Entering an array formula

Go To Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Overview of Controlling Calculation

Calculation is the process of computing formulas and then displaying the results as values in the cells containing the formulas. You can control when calculation occurs, and you can use calculation options to control other aspects of calculation.

Whenever possible, Microsoft Excel updates only those cells affected by values you change, thus avoiding unnecessary calculations.

Microsoft Excel uses the underlying stored values in cells for calculation, rather than the values as you have formatted them to be displayed. This means that you can change the appearance of a value on a worksheet without affecting the value itself.

As calculation proceeds, you can choose commands or perform actions such as entering numbers or formulas. Microsoft Excel temporarily interrupts calculation to carry out the other commands or actions and then resumes calculation.

See Also

Help

Calculating a portion of a formula

Calculating all open documents when calculation is set to manual

Calculating only the active worksheet

Calculating with precision as displayed

Date system differences for Microsoft Windows and Macintosh

Freezing the values in a range of cells

Replacing an entire formula with its calculated value

Switching between manual and automatic calculation

Turning off calculation before saving

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Calculating a portion of a formula

Overview

1.	Select the cell containing the formula or type the formula in the formula bar.

2.	In the formula bar, select the portion of the formula you want to calculate.

3.	Press F9.

4.	Press ENTER to accept the calculated portion, or press ESC to restore the formula.

See Also

Help

Calculating with precision as displayed

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Calculating all open documents when calculation is set to manual

Overview

Use this procedure to calculate data tables when calculation is set to Automatic Except Tables.

Press F9.

Note  If you calculate manually while the formula bar is active, the command performs a different function. It replaces the formula or the selected part of the formula in the active cell with the calculated result of the formula or partial formula.

See Also

Help

Calculating a portion of a formula

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Calculating only the active worksheet

Overview

When calculation is set to manual, use this procedure to calculate only the active worksheet, update only the charts on the worksheet, and open charts linked to the worksheet.

1.	Select the worksheet you want to calculate.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

3.	Select the Calculation tab.

4.	Choose the Calc Document button.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Calculating a portion of a formula

Calculating all open documents when calculation is set to manual

Calculating with precision as displayed

Calculation Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Calculating with precision as displayed

Overview

Calculating with precision as displayed affects only the active workbook. It does not affect numbers in the General format, which are always calculated with full precision. Calculating with precision as displayed slows calculation because Microsoft Excel must round off the numbers as it calculates.

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Select the Calculation tab.

3.	Select the Precision As Displayed check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel displays a message asking for confirmation.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Note  Calculating with precision as displayed permanently changes constant values stored on the worksheet to their displayed values. If you later choose to calculate with full precision, the original full-precision values are not restored. Because you lose accuracy with precision as displayed, Microsoft Excel asks you to confirm the change.

See Also

Help

Calculation Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Replacing an entire formula with its calculated value

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Freezing the values in a range of cells

Overview

1.	Select the cells containing the formulas you want to replace with their resulting values.

2.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Copy.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

4.	Under Paste, select the Values option button.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

Turning off calculation before saving

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Replacing an entire formula with its calculated value

Overview

Your worksheet can contain formulas whose values you want to freeze. For example, if you close out your worksheet at the end of the month, you may want to make certain values permanent. You can do so by replacing the underlying formulas with the calculated values. Replacing formulas with their resulting values speeds up worksheet calculation. This is particularly useful if you create new sets of worksheets that always depend on existing worksheets for certain values. For example, if your worksheet for the current month always starts with the closing values from the previous month's worksheet, replacing the formulas in the previous month's worksheet with values reduces calculation time when you open both worksheets.

Also, if you want to use a constant in a formula, but you need to perform one or more mathematical operations, such as multiplying two values, to determine the constant, you don't have to use your calculator or enter a separate formula. Instead, you can type the entire formula in the formula bar, including the portion that calculates the constant, select the portion of the formula that calculates the constant, and calculate it before entering the entire formula.

1.	Select the cell containing the formula you want to replace with the resulting value.

2.	Switch to the formula bar.

3.	Press F9.

4.	Press ENTER.

Note  Replacing a formula with its value permanently removes the formula. If you inadvertently replace a formula with a value and want to restore the formula, choose the Undo Entry command from the Edit menu immediately after entering or pasting the value.

See Also

Help

Calculating a portion of a formula

Calculating with precision as displayed

Undo and Redo Commands (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Switching between manual and automatic calculation

Overview

When you start Microsoft Excel for the first time, calculation is automatic. This means that immediately after you make changes in a document, Microsoft Excel calculates any formulas affected. After you start calculation, you can switch to another application, such as a word processor, while Microsoft Excel completes the calculation.

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Select the Calculation tab.

3.	Select either the Manual or Automatic option button.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Calculation Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Turning off calculation before saving

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Turning off calculation before saving

Overview

Normally, Microsoft Excel calculates a worksheet before saving it. However, if you are working with a worksheet that is very large and takes a while to calculate, you can save it without calculating first. To turn off calculation before saving:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Select the Calculation tab.

3.	Select the Manual option button.

4.	Clear the Recalculate Before Save check box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel now saves your worksheets without first calculating them.

When you want to calculate your worksheets, press F9.

Note  If a worksheet contains a formula that is linked to an unrecalculated worksheet and you update that link, Microsoft Excel displays a message telling you that the source worksheet is not completely calculated. Choose the OK button to update the link with the current value stored on the source worksheet, even though the value can be incorrect. Choose the Cancel button to cancel the link update and use the previous value obtained from the source worksheet.

See Also

Help

Calculating only the active worksheet

Calculating with precision as displayed

Calculation Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Freezing the values in a range of cells

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Date system differences for Microsoft Windows and Macintosh

Microsoft Excel stores dates as serial numbers. The serial number that corresponds to a date differs depending on the date system that was in effect when you entered the dates. Microsoft Excel offers two date systemsthe 1900 date system and the 1904 date system. The 1900 date system is the default date system used by Microsoft Excel for Windows and Lotus 1-2-3. In the 1900 date system, the serial number 1 corresponds to the date January 1, 1900, the serial number 2 corresponds to January 2, 1900, and so on. The 1904 date system is the default date system used by Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh. In the 1904 date system, the date serial number 1 corresponds to the date January 2, 1904, the date serial number 2 corresponds to January 3, 1904, and so on. You can change the date system for a workbook using the Options command on the Tools menu and selecting the Calculation tab.

If you create a file in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh using the 1904 date system and then open it in Microsoft Excel for Windows, Microsoft Excel recognizes the file format and changes to the 1900 date system for you. Similarly, if you create a file in Microsoft Excel for Windows using the 1900 date system and then open it in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh, Microsoft Excel recognizes the file format and changes to the 1904 date system for you.

When entering dates that you want to be compatible with Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh version 1.5 or earlier, use the 1904 date system. Also use the 1904 date system for a worksheet if the other worksheets you will be using with that worksheet use the 1904 date system.

To switch between the 1904 and 1900 date systems

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Select the Calculation tab.

3.	To use the 1904 date system, select the 1904 Date System check box.

To use the 1900 date system, clear the 1904 Date System check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Note  Changing the date system affects only the active workbook and only the new dates that are entered. Dates that have already been entered are not converted when you change date systems; the date serial numbers for already entered dates remain the same, but those date serial numbers produce different dates after you change date systems. Therefore, you should always choose the date system you want to use for a workbook before entering any dates.

See Also

Help

Calculating only the active worksheet

Calculation Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Overview of Solving Circular Reference Formulas Using Iteration

The Microsoft Excel Solver solution process involves successive trials, or iterations. During each iteration, a new set of changing cell values is used to recalculate the worksheet, and the constraints and optimum cell values are examined. The process stops when a solution is found with acceptable precision, when no further progress is possible, or when the maximum time allowed or the maximum number of iterations is reached.

When a formula refers to its own cell, either directly or indirectly, it is called a circular reference. To solve such a formula, Microsoft Excel must use iteration. When you use iteration to calculate formulas, Microsoft Excel calculates each cell involved in the circular reference once using the results of the previous iteration.

Using the Default Settings for Iteration

Unless you change the default settings for iteration, Microsoft Excel stops calculating after 100 iterations or after all values in the model change by less than 0.001 between iterations.

Iteration and the Order of Calculation

Because Microsoft Excel calculates worksheets based on formula dependencies, the order of calculation is not by row or column. Therefore, do not build an iteration model that depends on the order of calculation.

Microsoft Excel Cannot Resolve Circular References

Microsoft Excel cannot resolve formulas with circular references using normal calculation. When you make a circular reference, Microsoft Excel displays a message, and the status bar indicates a cell involved in the circular reference. If the circular reference is accidental, you need to redesign the formulas or logic to break the circular reference. If you are using a circular reference intentionally, use the Options command on the Tools menu. Then on the Calculation tab, select the Iteration check box.

If Iteration Cannot Reach a Solution

During iteration, values usually move closer to the correct solution with each iteration. This is called convergence. Occasionally, however, values move farther away from the correct solution with each iteration. This is called divergence. If your equations diverge during iteration, try varying the initial values used in the equations by some constant amount. If you do get a convergent answer, you can multiply or divide all the values to return to your original initial values. Some sets of equations diverge because they have no solution.

See Also

Help

Calculation Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Controlling iteration

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Controlling iteration

Overview

When a formula refers to its own cell, either directly or indirectly, it is called a circular reference. To solve such a formula, Microsoft Excel must use iteration, which is the repeated calculation of the worksheet until a specific numeric condition is met.

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Select the Calculation tab.

3.	In the Maximum Iterations box, type the maximum number of iterations you want Microsoft Excel to perform.

The more iterations you specify, the longer your worksheet takes to calculate. For large worksheets, this number should not be more than 100.

4.	In the Maximum Change box, type the maximum change between iterations.

The smaller the number you specify, the longer your worksheet takes to calculate and the more accurate your answer is.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel displays the progress of iteration in the left side of the formula bar.

To stop calculation, press ESC.

Note  When Microsoft Excel calculates the worksheet, it calculates circular references either until it reaches the number of times set in the Maximum Iterations box or until all cells change by less than the amount in the Maximum Change box, whichever happens first.

See Also

Help

Calculation Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Max Time or Iterations must be a positive number

Using the error tracer to find error values visually

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Overview of Linking Microsoft Excel Workbooks

You can dynamically link a workbook to source data in another workbook so that any changes you make in one workbook are immediately reflected in the other workbook. When you create a chart, the data in the chart is automatically linked to the workbook containing the data from which the chart was created.

The following terms apply to linking workbooks.

External reference	A reference to another Microsoft Excel workbook cell, cell range, or defined name. A formula containing an external reference is called an external reference formula.

Dependent workbook	A workbook that contains a link to another workbook. In other words, a workbook that relies on information in another workbook.

Source workbook	A workbook that is the source of the information referred to in an external reference formula; source workbooks are referred to by dependent workbooks.

For information about	See

Linking workbook data to a chart or embedding a chart on a workbook	Creating a Chart
Linking chart text to a workbook	Overview of Changing Chart Text
Linking to documents in other applications	Exchanging Data with Other Applications
Linking and embedding are two ways to exchange data between Microsoft Excel documents and between Microsoft Excel documents and documents created in other applications. Use linking when you want the data updated dynamically as it changes in the source document. Use embedding when you want to edit or format the data in another document.

See Also

Help

  Calculate Now Button

Creating links between workbooks

Entering an external reference in a formula

Opening source workbooks

Recalculating linked workbooks

Redirecting links for source workbooks

Removing links between workbooks

Renaming a stand-alone or a dependent workbook

Replacing a source workbook with another workbook

Saving unnamed linked workbooks

Updating data from a source workbook

Viewing a list of source documents for a dependent workbook

Viewing the source data for a link

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Recalculating linked workbooks

Overview

When the Manual calculation option is specified on the Calculation tab in the Options dialog box, use the following procedure to recalculate links.

1.	Open the source and dependent workbooks.

2.	Press F9.

Shortcut:	CTRL+=

See Also

Help

  Calculate Now Button

Calculation Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Creating links between workbooks

Redirecting links for source workbooks

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Renaming a stand-alone or a dependent workbook

Overview

1.	Switch to the workbook to be renamed.

2.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

3.	In the File Name box, type the new filename.

4.	Choose the OK button.

The previous version of the workbook still remains under its earlier name.

See Also

Help

Creating links between workbooks

Save As Command (File Menu)

Saving unnamed linked workbooks

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Creating links between workbooks

Overview

1.	In the source workbook, select the cells to which you want to refer.

2.	Click the Copy button, or choose Copy from the Edit menu or the shortcut menu.

A moving border appears around the selected cell or range.

3.	Switch to the workbook into which you want to paste the linked data.

4.	Select the cell or the upper-left corner of the range in which you want the linked data to appear.

5.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

6.	To paste the link into the selected cells, choose the Paste Link button.

To paste the data as a linked picture at the active cell location, hold down SHIFT and choose Paste Picture Link from the Edit menu. To edit the data in the picture, you must edit the source cells in the source workbook.

Microsoft Excel creates an external reference formula that links the workbooks. This formula appears in the formula bar. Microsoft Excel uses absolute references in the external reference formula. If you copy the formula to another location in the dependent workbook, it still refers to the same cells in the source workbook. If you copy more than one cell from the source workbook, Microsoft Excel enters a single array formula in the range of cells into which you paste the linked data. For information about working with array formulas, see Entering an array formula.

See Also

Help

  Copy Button

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Picture Link Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

Removing links between workbooks

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Entering an external reference in a formula

Overview

1.	Select the cell in which you want to enter the external reference.

2.	Start the formula by typing an equal sign. If you are not starting the formula with the external reference, type the operator that you want to precede the external reference.

3.	Switch to the workbook containing the cells you want to refer to in the external reference, and select the cell or cell range you want.

Microsoft Excel enters the reference of the selected cell or range into the formula.

You can also type the external reference or name instead of selecting the cells.

4.	When you finish entering the formula, press ENTER.

Note  You can perform functions on the values linked from another workbook to create reports that show various results from the same data. To perform functions on linked data, enter the external reference as the argument to the function.

See Also

Help

Creating links between workbooks

Overview of Using References

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Saving unnamed linked workbooks

Overview

1.	Switch to the source document.

2.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

3.	In the File Name box, type a name for the document or accept the proposed name.

4.	Choose the OK button.

5.	Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each additional source document.

6.	Switch to the dependent document.

7.	Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each dependent document.

If you save linked workbooks in different directories, be sure to use the Save As command on the File menu to save all source documents before you save the dependent documents so that the link references in the dependent documents are correct.

See Also

Help

Creating links between workbooks

Save As Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Redirecting links for source workbooks

Overview

If you change the name of a source document or move the source document to a different directory, you must redirect the links in the dependent document to include the new name or path of the source document.

1.	Switch to the dependent workbook.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Links.

3.	In the Source File list box, select the name of the source document for which you want to redirect links.

4.	Choose the Change Source button.

5.	In the File Name box, type a new name for the source document, including the path, or select a name from the list.

The File Name box displays the documents in the current directory. If the new source document is not in the current directory, select the appropriate directory in the Directories box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

7.	Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each link you want to change.

See Also

Help

Creating links between workbooks

Links Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Replacing a source workbook with another workbook

Overview

1.	Switch to the dependent workbook.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Links.

3.	In the Source File list box, select the name of the source document you want to replace.

4.	Choose the Change Source button.

5.	In the File Name box, type a new source document name or select one from the list.

The File Name box displays the documents in the current directory. If the new source document is not in the current directory, use the Directories box to change to the appropriate directory.

6.	Choose the OK button.

7.	Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each link you want to change.

See Also

Help

Creating links between workbooks

Links Command (Edit Menu)

Redirecting links for source workbooks

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Opening source workbooks

Overview

1.	Switch to the dependent workbook.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Links.

In the Links box, Microsoft Excel displays a list of all source documents for the dependent workbook.

3.	In the Source File box, select the name of the source document you want to open.

4.	To open the document, choose the Open button.

See Also

Help

Links Command (Edit Menu)

Replacing a source workbook with another workbook

Viewing a list of source documents for a dependent workbook

Viewing the source data for a link

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Updating data from a source workbook

Overview

1.	Switch to the dependent workbook.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Links.

Microsoft Excel displays a list of all source workbooks for the dependent workbook.

3.	In the Source File box, select the name of the document you want to update.

4.	Choose the Update Now button to update values in the selected documents.

See Also

Help

Creating links between workbooks

Links Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Viewing a list of source documents for a dependent workbook

Overview

1.	Switch to the dependent workbook.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Links.

Microsoft Excel displays a list of all source documents for the dependent workbook.

3.	When you have finished viewing the list, choose the Close button.

See Also

Help

Creating links between workbooks

Links Command (Edit Menu)

Replacing a source workbook with another workbook

Viewing the source data for a link

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Viewing the source data for a link

Overview

Microsoft Excel switches to the source document and displays the source data. If the source document or application is not open, Microsoft Excel opens it.

1.	From the Edit Menu, choose Links.

2.	Select the link in the Source File box.

3.	Choose the Open button.

See Also

Help

Creating links between workbooks

Go To Command (Edit Menu)

Note Command (Insert Menu)

Opening source workbooks

Replacing a source workbook with another workbook

Viewing a list of source documents for a dependent workbook

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Removing links between workbooks

Overview

If an external reference consists of an entire formula, you can replace the formula with its current value. If an external reference is part of a larger formula, you can calculate only the reference to change it to a value and preserve the rest of the formula as a formula. This is called freezing the value of an external reference.

To replace an entire external reference formula with its value

1.	Switch to the dependent workbook.

2.	Select the cell or cells containing the external reference formulas you want to replace with values.

3.	Click the Copy button, or choose Copy from the Edit menu or the shortcut menu.

4.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

5.	Under Paste, select the Values option button.

6.	Choose the OK button.

To freeze only the external reference portion of a formula

1.	Switch to the dependent worksheet.

2.	Select the cell containing the external reference you want to freeze.

3.	In the formula bar, select the external reference part of the formula.

4.	Press F9.

Shortcut:	CTRL+=

5.	Press ENTER.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Creating links between workbooks

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

Redirecting links for source workbooks

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Overview of Error Values

Microsoft Excel displays an error value in a cell when the formula for that cell cannot be calculated properly. If a formula includes a reference to a cell that contains an error value, that formula also produces an error value (unless you are using the special worksheet functions ISERR, ISERROR, or ISNA, which look for error values). You may have to trace the references back through a series of cells to discover the source of the error.

Error value	Meaning

#DIV/0!	The formula is trying to divide by zero.

#N/A	No value is available. Usually, you enter this value directly into worksheet cells that will eventually contain data that is not yet available. Formulas referring to those cells will return #N/A instead of calculating a value.

#NAME?	Microsoft Excel does not recognize a name used in the formula.

#NULL!	You specified an intersection of two areas that do not intersect.

#NUM!	There is a problem with a number.

#REF!	The formula refers to a cell that is not valid.

#VALUE!	An argument or operand is of the wrong type.

See Also

Help

Alphabetical List of Worksheet Functions

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


#DIV/0!

Overview

The #DIV/0! error value means that a formula is trying to divide by zero.

Possible cause	Suggested action

Using a reference to a blank cell or a cell containing zero as a divisor. (If an operand should be a number but is blank, Microsoft Excel interprets that blank as zero.)	Change the reference or enter a nonzero value in the cell used as a divisor.
Entering a formula that contains explicit division by 0 (for example, =5/0).	Correct the formula.
Writing a macro using a macro function that returns #DIV/0! in certain situations.	Look up the functions you are using in the Alphabetical List of Worksheet Functions to see if one or more of your functions returns #DIV/0! in certain situations.
See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


#N/A

Overview

The #N/A error value stands for "No value is available." This error value can help you make sure you don't accidentally refer to a blank cell. If there are cells on your worksheet that should contain data, but the data is not yet available, enter #N/A in those cells. Formulas that refer to those cells return #N/A instead of calculating a value.

Possible cause	Suggested action

Giving an inappropriate argument for lookup_value in the HLOOKUP, LOOKUP, MATCH, or VLOOKUP functions.	Adjust the lookup_value argument.
Using an array argument that was expanded.	Change the array argument so that it can be expanded without #N/A or so that it is the same size as other array arguments.
Omitting one or more arguments to a built-in or custom worksheet function. For example, if the custom function "Deduct" on the macro sheet CALC.XLM uses three numbers as arguments, the following formula returns #N/A: =CALC.XLM!Deduct(10,D14).	Enter all arguments in the function.
Using a custom worksheet function that did not run successfully. For example, if the function "Deduct" contains an error that prevents it from running, any formula using Deduct returns #N/A.	Correct the custom function, or don't use it.
Writing a macro using a macro function that returns #N/A in certain situations.	Look up the functions you are using in Alphabetical List of Worksheet Functions to see if one or more of your functions returns #N/A in certain situations.
See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


#NAME?

Overview

The #NAME? error value occurs when you use a name that Microsoft Excel doesn't recognize.

Possible cause	Suggested action

Deleting or failing to define the name.	Define the name.
Misspelling the name.	Correct the spelling. Highlight the name in the formula bar, and then select the name from the name box at the left end of the formula bar.
Misspelling the name of a function.	Correct the spelling. Use the Function Wizard to insert the correct function name into the formula.
Entering text without double quotation marks in the formula. Microsoft Excel interprets your entry as a name even though you intended it as text.	Enclose the text in the formula in double quotation marks.
Omitting a colon in a range reference. For example, if you enter the formula =SUM(A1D10), Microsoft Excel interprets A1D10 as a name.	Correct the formula, for example, =SUM(A1:D10).
See Also

Help

Alphabetical List of Worksheet Functions

Editing formulas containing functions with Function Wizard

Inserting a worksheet function into a formula with Function Wizard

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


#NULL!

Overview

The #NULL! error value occurs if you specify an intersection of two areas that do not intersect.

Possible cause	Suggested action

Using an incorrect range operator or incorrect cell reference.	Use the union operator, the comma (,) if you want to refer to two areas that don't intersect. Check for typing errors in the range specification.
See Also

Help

Alphabetical List of Worksheet Functions

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


#NUM!

Overview

The #NUM! error value indicates a problem with a number.

Possible cause	Suggested action

Using an unacceptable argument in a function that requires a numeric argument. For example, using a negative number as an argument in functions that require positive numbers, such as SQRT(-1).	Correct the argument.
Using a worksheet function that iterates, such as IRR or RATE, and the function is unable to find a result that works.	Try using a different starting value for the function.
Entering a formula that produces a number that is too large or too small to be represented in Microsoft Excel.	Change the formula so that the result is within the allowed range of numbers.
See Also

Help

Alphabetical List of Worksheet Functions

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


#REF!

Overview

The #REF! error value occurs when you refer to a cell that is not valid.

Possible cause	Suggested action

Deleting cells that other formulas refer to or pasting moved cells over cells that other formulas refer to.	Change the formulas. Or reinstate the cells on the worksheet by using the Undo command on the Edit menu immediately after deleting or pasting.
Writing a macro using a macro function that returns #REF! in certain situations.	Look up the functions you are using in Alphabetical List of Worksheet Functions to see if one or more of your functions returns #REF! in certain situations.
Using a remote reference to an application that is not running or to a topic that is unavailable. For information about remote references, see What's New in Microsoft Excel Version 5.0.	Start the application; make sure you've used the correct topic.
See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


#VALUE!

Overview

The #VALUE! error value occurs when you use the wrong type of argument or operand.

Possible cause	Suggested action

Entering text where a number or logical value is required, and the text can't be translated into the correct data type.	Check the formula or function for the required operand or argument. Check referenced cells for valid values.
Supplying a range to an operator or a function that requires a single value when no cell in the range is in the same row or column as the cell containing the formula or function.	Change the range to a single value.
Using an invalid matrix in one of the matrix worksheet functions.	Correct the matrix.
Writing a macro using a macro function that returns #VALUE! in certain situations.	Look up the functions you are using in Alphabetical List of Worksheet Functions to see if one or more of your functions returns #VALUE! in certain situations.
See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Hidden Function

This function is available for compatibility with another language version of Microsoft Excel.

See Also

Help

Microsoft Excel Worksheet Functions Contents


Getting Information While You Work

Where Do I Find It?

Overview of Using Help to Find the Information You Need

Searching Help for a particular topic

Getting help on the command or screen element you choose

Using the TipWizard

Using Help for Lotus 1-2-3 users

Using Help for Multiplan users


Where Do I Find It?

The documentation for Microsoft Excel is designed for the way you work. Some information is included in the books that come with Microsoft Excel, other information is online. All of the printed and online documentation is designed to work together to help you to get your job done quickly and efficiently.

Online Information

Online Help

Detailed step-by-step instructions and reference information for all tasks and features, including commands, toolbar buttons, functions, and the Visual Basic language.

Open Help using commands on the Help menu.

Sample Files

Examples you can open in Microsoft Excel and use to create and enhance your own work. Most sample files are in the EXAMPLES subdirectory of the directory where Microsoft Excel is installed. Sample files for Microsoft Query are in the MSAPPS\MSQUERY subdirectory of the directory where Windows is installed.

Worksheet Functions

Descriptions of all worksheet functions and their arguments appear in the Function Wizard. Click the Function Wizard button on the standard toolbar to select a function, assemble the argument correctly, and insert the function into your formula. Detailed descriptions and examples of worksheet functions are included in online Help.

Printed Information

Microsoft Excel User's Guide

Explains how to do tasks, often with examples and graphics. Includes cross-references to the comprehensive information in Help.

Microsoft Excel Visual Basic User's Guide

Complete guide to automating, customizing, and programming Microsoft Excel.

Microsoft Query User's Guide

Guide to accessing and retrieving data from databases.

Microsoft Excel Visual Basic Reference

A complete reference to the Visual Basic language is available in online Help. This reference is also available in book form and can be purchased in book and software stores or ordered directly from Microsoft Press. To place a credit card order, call 615-793-5090, or toll-free 1-800-MS-PRESS. Be sure to have your reference code FXL ready for faster order processing.

See Also

Help

Overview of Using Help to Find the Information You Need


Overview of Using Help to Find the Information You Need

Microsoft Excel Help provides several ways to find the information you need. You can also display the TipWizard for tips about quicker and more efficient ways to perform tasks.

Table of Contents

Choose the Contents command from the Help menu; you can also choose the Contents button in the Help window.

Index

Choose the Index command from the Help menu; you can also choose the Index button in the Help window.

Search

Double-click the Help button on the Standard toolbar to find topics related to a word or phrase you type. You can also choose the Search For Help On command from the Help menu or the Search button in the Help window.

Help Button in Dialog Boxes and Alert Boxes

Choose the Help button for help about the dialog box or alert message that is open.

  Help Button on the Standard Toolbar

Click to specify a command or screen element you want help on.

  TipWizard Button

Click for suggestions about working more efficiently and for information about new features.

You can also view a Quick Preview of Microsoft Excel that includes four short lessons: Getting Started, What's New?, Getting Information While You Work, and Switching to Microsoft Excel. To view the Quick Preview lessons, choose the Quick Preview command from the Help menu.

See Also

Help

Getting help on the command or screen element you choose

Searching Help for a particular topic

Using Help for Lotus 1-2-3 users

Using Help for Multiplan users

Using the TipWizard


Searching Help for a particular topic

Overview

1.	Double-click the Help button on the Standard toolbar or click the Search button in the Help window.

2.	In the box at the top of the dialog box, type the first few letters of the subject you want to search for.

As you type, the keywords in the list change.

3.	Double-click a keyword related to your subject.

You can also select a keyword and choose the Show Topics button.

Help displays the names of topics related to that keyword.

4.	In the box at the bottom of the dialog box, double-click a topic.

You can also select a topic and choose the Go To button.

Note  If you want to return to a topic you have previously viewed, you can use either the Back or the History button in the Help window. The Back button steps you back through the topics in reverse order. The History button displays a list of the topics you've seen. Double-click the topic you want.

See Also

Help

  Help Button

Search For Help On Command


Getting help on the command or screen element you choose

Overview

1.	Click the Help button on the Standard toolbar.

Shortcut:	SHIFT+F1

2.	Choose a command or click a screen element (such as the scroll bar).

Help displays a topic about the command or screen element you choose.

To cancel Help without choosing a command or screen element, press ESC.

See Also

Help

  Help Button


Using Help for Lotus 1-2-3 users

Overview

1.	From the Help menu, choose Lotus 1-2-3.

2.	Under Help Options, select Instructions if you want Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users to paste instructions into a text box in your workbook.

Select Demo if you want Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users to show you how to do the command in Microsoft Excel. The Faster and Slower buttons allow you to regulate the speed of the demo.

3.	Select a Lotus 1-2-3 command and press ENTER.

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You're Switching from Another Spreadsheet"


Using Help for Multiplan users

Overview

1.	From the Help menu, choose Multiplan.

2.	Type a Multiplan command sequence.

3.	Press ENTER.

Help displays a topic equivalent to the Microsoft Multiplan command or an explanation of which Microsoft Excel commands to use to accomplish the most similar task.

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You're Switching from Another Spreadsheet"


Using the TipWizard

Overview

While you are working, the TipWizard gives you tips about more efficient ways to accomplish the tasks you are doing and suggests related and new features. It also gives you a tip of the day each time you start Microsoft Excel.

Click the TipWizard button to display the TipWizard.

Tips appear here. If the tip suggests that you use a toolbar button, the button appears directly to the right of the TipWizard box. If you want to add the button to a toolbar, choose Toolbars from the View menu and then drag the button from the TipWizard to a toolbar.

Use the up and down arrows to the right of the tip to scroll through the tips that apply to the work you've done during this Microsoft Excel session.

If you need more information, click the Tip Help button at the right of the TipWizard. Help will display a related topic.

The TipWizard gives you a particular tip once during a Microsoft Excel session. During following sessions, it gives you that same tip only if you perform the associated action three times. If you want to clear the memory of the TipWizard (for instance, when you are setting up a new user), choose the Options command from the Tools menu, select the General tab, and then select the Reset TipWizard check box.

Shortcut:	You can also reset the TipWizard by holding down CTRL while you click the TipWizard button.

To switch between displaying and hiding the TipWizard, click the TipWizard button.

To prevent the TipWizard from generating tips, hold down SHIFT while you click the TipWizard button. To start generating tips again, hold down SHIFT and click the TipWizard button again.

See Also

  TipWizard Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

General Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)


Active Sheet

The sheet that you are working on in a workbook. The name on the tab of the active sheet is always bold.


Array

Used to build single formulas that produce multiple results or that operate on a group of arguments arranged in rows and columns. There are two types of arrays in Microsoft Excel: array ranges and array constants. An array range is a rectangular area of cells that share a common formula; an array constant is a specially arranged group of constants that is used as an argument in a formula.


Paste Area

The target destination for data that has been cut or copied using the Clipboard.


Clipboard

A temporary holding area for data that you cut or copy. If you cut or copy worksheet cells, the Clipboard shows the size of the area you cut or copy. The data remains on the Clipboard until you cut or copy other data or quit Microsoft Excel. From the Clipboard, you can paste cut or copied data to another location on a sheet, to another sheet in a workbook, to a different Microsoft Excel workbook, or to a document in another application.


Pane

Panes allow you to view different areas of a large worksheet simultaneously. You can horizontally or vertically split a window into two panes. With a vertical split, the panes scroll together vertically, but they scroll independently horizontally. With a horizontal split, the panes scroll together horizontally, and they scroll independently vertically. If you split the window both vertically and horizontally, you can display four panes.


View

You can save different display and print settings of a worksheet as a named view. You can create several different views of the same worksheet without having to save separate versions.


Window Sizing Border

The border around a window. You can drag a border with the mouse to change the window's shape and size. Drag the top, bottom, or side border to size the window in one direction only. Drag a corner of the border to size the window in two directions at once.


Table

Data about a specific topic that is stored in records (rows) and fields (columns).


Constraints

Limitations placed on a Solver problem. Constraints can be applied to changing cells, the target cell, or other cells directly or indirectly related to your problem. You can define two constraints for each changing cell you specify, and up to 200 additional constraints per Solver problem. The following operators are available to apply to each constraint.

Operator	Meaning

<=	Less than or equal to

>=	Greater than or equal to

=	Equal to

int	Integer


Changing Cells

Cells that Solver adjusts in order to arrive at an optimal solution to the problem. Changing cells are also called decision variables.


Target Cell

The cell that you want Solver to set to a minimum, maximum, or specific value by adjusting the changing cells defined in the problem. The target cell should contain a formula that depends directly or indirectly on the changing cells. The target cell is also called the objective or the objective function.


Regression Analysis

A form of statistical analysis used for forecasting. Regression analysis estimates the relation between variables so that one variable can be predicted from the other or others.


Moving Average

A sequence of averages computed from parts of a data series. In a chart, a moving average smoothes the fluctuations in data, thus showing the pattern or trend more clearly.


R-Squared Value

You can use the R-squared value to evaluate the reliability of a trendline. Note that the R-squared value you can display is not an adjusted R-squared value. For logarithmic, power, and exponential trendlines, Microsoft Excel uses a transformed regression model, in which the R-squared value refers to estimated rather than actual values.


Fill Handle

The small black square in the corner of the selection. When you position the pointer over the fill handle, the pointer changes to a black cross. Drag the fill handle to copy contents to adjacent cells or to create a series. Dragging the fill handle with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu.


Y-Intercept

The point at which the trendline meets the y axis. Setting the Y-intercept enables you to change the way data appears in the chart without actually changing the scale of the axis.


Constant

A cell value that does not start with an equal sign. For example, the date, the value 210, and text are all constants. A formula, or a value resulting from a formula, is not a constant.


Graphic Object

A line or shape (button, text box, ellipsis, rectangle, arc, picture) that you draw using the buttons on the toolbar, or a picture you paste into Microsoft Excel.


Worksheet

Also called a spreadsheet. The worksheet is the primary document you use in Microsoft Excel to store and manipulate data. A worksheet consists of cells organized into columns and rows and is always part of a workbook.


Macro Sheet

A document similar to a worksheet that contains sets of instructions (macros) for accomplishing specific tasks.


Chart

A graphic representation of worksheet data. You can create and save a chart on a worksheet; this is called an embedded chart. Or you can create a chart sheet, which is a separate sheet in a workbook. Both kinds of charts are linked to the worksheet they were created from, and are updated when you update the worksheet.


Formula

A sequence of values, cell references, names, functions, or operators that is contained in a cell and produces a new value from existing values. A formula always begins with an equal sign (=).


Startup Directory

A directory named XLSTART in which you save workbooks or other files that you want to open when you start Microsoft Excel. XLSTART is located in the directory in which you installed Microsoft Excel. Workbooks placed in this directory are opened automatically. Templates placed in this directory are added to the New dialog box, which is displayed when you choose the New command from the File menu.


Default Startup Workbook

The new, unsaved workbook that is displayed when you start Microsoft Excel. The default startup workbook is displayed only if you have not included other workbooks in the XLSTART directory, which is in the directory in which you installed Microsoft Excel.


Startup Switch

An option you add to the command line in the Properties dialog box for the Microsoft Excel icon that changes how Microsoft Excel starts. For example, you can use a startup switch to open a workbook automatically or to set the working directory. You can also use startup switches with the Run command in your Windows File Manager or Program Manager.


Alternate Startup Directory

A directory you specify in addition to XLSTART that contains workbooks or other files you want to open automatically when you start Microsoft Excel. Templates placed in this directory are added to the New dialog box, which is displayed when you choose the New command from the File menu.


Template

A workbook that you create and then use as the basis for other similar workbooks. You can create templates for workbooks, worksheets, chart sheets, macro sheets, modules, and dialog sheets.


Autotemplate

Workbooks that you save as templates in your XLSTART startup or alternate startup directory using specific filenames (BOOK.XLT, SHEET.XLT, DIALOG.XLT, MACRO.XLT). You can use autotemplates as the basis for all new workbooks and all new sheets that you insert into your workbooks.


Working Directory

The directory that Microsoft Excel first makes available to you when you choose the Save As command or the Open command from the Microsoft Excel File menu.


Add-in

Add-ins are files that can be installed to add commands and functions to Microsoft Excel.


Standard Font

The default text font for worksheets. The standard font determines the default font for the Normal cell style.


Iteration

The repeated calculation of a worksheet until a specific numeric condition is met.


Data Table

A table consisting of formulas with results created by varying the value of one or two input cells.


Input Cell

A cell into which input values from a data table are substituted.


Cell Reference

The set of coordinates that a cell occupies on a worksheet. For example, the reference of the cell that appears at the intersection of column B and row 3 is B3.


Range

Two or more cells on a sheet. Ranges can be adjacent or nonadjacent.


Select

To highlight a cell or range of cells on a worksheet. The selected cells will be affected by the next command or action.


Dialog Box

A dialog box appears when you choose a command that requires additional information. It may include areas in which you type text or numbers, and view or change settings for options related to the command. Every dialog box has a Help button, which you can choose when you do not understand a dialog box option.


Tab Dialog Box

A dialog box that is divided into sections that have the appearance of file-folder tabs.

To display another tab, click the tab name, or press CTRL+TAB.


Scroll Lock

With Scroll Lock on, the arrow keys move the active sheet rather than making a different cell active.


Data Region

A range of cells containing data and bounded by empty cells.


End Mode

An alternate method of navigating within and between adjacent blocks of values on a worksheet. To navigate in End mode, press END and then press an arrow key.


Add Mode

Used with Extend mode as an alternate method of selecting nonadjacent cells on a worksheet.

Press F8, and then use the arrow keys to select the first range of cells that you want. Then press SHIFT+F8 (Add mode) and use the arrow keys to move to the start of the range of cells that you want to add to the selection. To select that range, press F8 and then press the arrow keys. Continue using F8 and SHIFT+F8 until you have selected the cells and ranges you want.


Extend Mode

An alternate method of selecting adjacent cells on a sheet. Press F8, and then press an arrow key to select a range of adjacent cells.


Activate

To activate a chart sheet, worksheet, or other sheet, select the tab for the sheet in the workbook. Only one workbook sheet can be active at a time. When a sheet is active, its tab changes to differentiate it from other sheets in the workbook. The sheet you activate determines which menu bar and toolbars are displayed.

To activate an embedded chart, double-click it.


Data Marker

A bar, area, dot, slice, or other symbol in a chart that represents a single data point or value originating from a worksheet cell. Related data markers in a chart comprise a data series.


Data Label

A label that provides additional information about a data marker. Data labels can be applied to a single data marker, an entire data series, or all data markers in a chart. Depending on the chart type, data labels can show values, names of data series (or categories), percentages, or a combination of these. They may be formatted and moved, but not sized.


Data Series

A group of related data points plotted in a chart that originate from single worksheet rows or columns. Each data series in a chart is distinguished by a unique color or pattern. You can plot one or more data series in a chart. Pie charts have only one data series.


Data Points

Individual values plotted in a chart that originate from single cells in a worksheet. Data points are represented by bars, columns, lines, pie or doughnut slices, dots, and various other shapes. These shapes are called data markers. Data markers of the same color constitute a data series.


Embedded Chart

A chart object that has been placed on a worksheet and that is saved on that worksheet when the workbook is saved. When it is selected, you can move and size it. When it is activated, you can select items and add data, and format, move, and size items in the chart, depending on the item. Embedded charts are linked to worksheet data and are updated when the worksheet data changes.


Chart Sheet

A sheet in a workbook containing a chart. When a chart sheet is created, it is automatically inserted into the workbook to the left of the worksheet it is based on. When a chart sheet is activated, you can select items and add data, and format, move, and size items in the chart, depending on the item. Chart sheets are linked to worksheet data and are updated when the worksheet data changes.


3-D Walls and Floor

The areas surrounding many 3-D chart types that give dimension and boundaries to the chart. Two walls and one floor are displayed within the plot area. They can be selected and formatted. When you select any corner of the walls or floor, the charts can also be rotated by dragging, and displayed with a different view.


Chart Area

The entire region surrounding the chart, just outside the plot area. When the chart area is selected, it can be formatted with colors, patterns, and a border, and uniform font characteristics can be applied to all text in the chart.


Plot Area

The area of a chart in which your data is plotted. The plot area can be selected, formatted, moved, and sized.

In 2-D charts, it is bounded by the axes and encompasses all the data markers, gridlines, data labels, trendlines, and any optional chart items you add to the chart and place within the plot area.

In 3-D charts, the plot area includes all of the items in a 2-D chart, plus the chart's walls and floor, axes, and tick-mark labels.


Trendline

A graphical representation of trends in data series. Trendlines are used to study problems of prediction, also called regression analysis. You can add trendlines to data series in 2-D area, bar, column, line, and xy (scatter) chart type groups. Trendlines can be formatted.


Trendline Label

Optional text for a trendline, including either the regression equation or the R-squared value, or both. A trendline label may be formatted and moved; it cannot be sized.


Chart Text

Text in a chart is either linked to worksheet data or unlinked.

Unlinked text, including axis and chart titles, text boxes, and trendline labels, can be added after creating a chart, and then edited and moved. You can also format either the whole text or individual characters. Only text boxes can be resized.

Linked text, including legend entries, tick-mark labels, and data labels, is based on text or values in your worksheet selection. You can move linked text and format the whole text; you can also format individual characters in data labels. Editing linked text can break the link, which then allows individual character formatting.


Error Bars

Graphical bars that express potential error (or degree of uncertainty) relative to each data marker in a series. You can add y error bars to data series in 2-D area, bar, column, line, and xy (scatter) chart type groups. XY charts can also display x error bars. Error bars can be selected and formatted as a group.


Legend

A box containing legend entries and keys that help to identify the data series (or categories) in a chart. The legend keys, to the left of each entry, show the patterns and colors assigned to the data series (or categories) in the chart.


Gridlines

Lines you may add to your chart that extend from the tick marks on an axis across the plot area. Gridlines come in various forms: horizontal, vertical, major, minor, and combinations of these. They make it easier to view and evaluate data in a chart.


Tick Marks and Tick-Mark Labels

Small lines that intersect an axis like divisions on a ruler. Tick marks are part of and can be formatted with the axis. Tick-mark labels identify the categories, values, or series in the chart. They come from and are automatically linked to cells in your worksheet selection. They can be formatted like other chart text.


Chart Type

A chart type is a specific kind of chart. All Microsoft Excel charts are based on the following 14 chart types: area, bar, column, line, pie, doughnut, radar, xy (scatter), 3-D area, 3-D bar, 3-D column, 3-D line, 3-D pie, and 3-D surface. Each chart type has at least one subtype that is a variation of the original chart type.


Chart Type Group

A group of data series that are formatted as one chart type and displayed on the same axis. For example, a chart showing columns overlaid by lines contains two groups of data series: a column chart group and a line chart group. Every chart type group included in an active chart appears as a command at the bottom of the Format menu.


Axis

Lines bordering the plot area that provide a frame of reference for measurement or comparison on a chart. Generally, a 2-D chart has two axes and a 3-D chart has two or three axes, depending on the data view selected. For most charts, data values are plotted along the value (y) axis, which is usually vertical, and categories are plotted along the category (x) axis, which is usually horizontal. Exceptions: pie and doughnut charts have no axes; bar charts reverse the axes; radar charts plot each category along its own value axis; and xy (scatter) charts plot values along two value axes.

In 3-D perspective charts with three axes, the value (z) axis is still vertical; however, the category (x) axis and series (y) axis form the horizontal surface, or floor, of the chart.


Autoformat (for Charts)

A combination of chart type, subtype, and other formatting characteristics, such as patterns and font, that you can quickly apply to a chart to change its appearance. In addition to having access to built-in autoformats, you can also create your own formatted charts and add them as custom (user-defined) autoformats.


Text Box

A rectangular object on a sheet in which you can type text.


Mailing

Attaching a copy of a workbook to an electronic mail message.


Routing

Attaching a copy of a workbook to an electronic mail message sent to multiple recipients, one after another or all at once. With routing, you can track the status of the routed workbook as it moves from one recipient to the next, and have the workbook returned to you after it has been routed.


Routing Slip

Workbook routing information such as subject, recipients, and message text. The routing slip is saved with the workbook file.


Dependent Worksheet

A worksheet that contains an external reference formula or a remote reference formula. When you link two Microsoft Excel worksheets, the dependent worksheet relies on another worksheet for the value in the external reference formula. When you link a Microsoft Excel worksheet to a document in a different application, the worksheet is dependent on that document for the value in the remote reference formula.


Source Document

A Microsoft Excel workbook referred to by an external reference formula or a remote reference formula. The source document is the source of the value contained in the external reference formula; it provides "support data" to the dependent workbook.


Group

In an outline or pivot table, one or more detail rows or columns that are adjacent and subordinate to a summary row or column.


Ungroup

To remove detail rows or columns from a defined group in an outline or a pivot table.


Level

One of eight nested layers in a worksheet outline. Both groups of rows and groups of columns are organized into outline levels.


Detail Data

For automatic subtotals and worksheet outlines, the subtotal rows or columns that are totaled by summary data. Detail data is normally adjacent to and above or to the left of the summary data.


Visual Basic Module

A sheet in a Microsoft Excel workbook in which you store Visual Basic macros and user-defined functions.


File Format

The way data is stored in a file. Different programs use different file formats. You can save documents in a variety of file formats using the Save As command on the File menu.


Print Titles

Print titles are rows or columns that you select to print at the top or left of every page in the selected worksheets. If you select a row for a title, it repeats at the top of every page. If you select a column for a title, it repeats at the left of every page. Titles are part of the sheet, not in the margins like headers and footers.


Definitions

3-D Walls and Floor

Absolute Cell Reference

Activate

Active Sheet

Add Mode

Add-in

Address

Alternate Startup Directory

Array

Autoformat (for charts)

Autotemplate

Axis

Cell Reference

Changing Cells

Chart

Chart Area

Chart Sheet

Chart Text

Chart Toolbar

Chart Type

Chart Type Group

Check Box

Clipboard

Combination Drop Down-Edit Box

Combination List-Edit Box

Comparison Criteria

Comparison Operator

Computed Criteria

Constant

Constraints

Create Button

Criteria Range

Custom Calculation

Custom Sort Order

Data Label

Data Marker

Data Points

Data Region

Data Series

Data Source

Data Table

Database Management System (DBMS)

Default Startup Workbook

Dependent Worksheet

Dependents

Destination Area

Detail Data

Dialog Box

Drop-Down List Box

Edit Box

Embedded Chart

End Mode

Error Bars

Extend Mode

External Reference

File Format

Fill Handle

Floating Toolbar

Formula Bar

Formula

General Number Format

Graphic Object

Gridlines

Group

Group Box

Input Cell

Iteration

Label

Legend

Level

List

List Box

Macro Sheet

Mailing

Mixed Cell Reference

Moving Average

Nonadjacent Selections

Normal Style

ODBC Administrator

ODBC Control Panel Option

Open Database Connectivity (ODBC)

Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) Drivers

Option Button

Pane

Password

Paste Area

Pivot Area

Pivot Table

Pivot Table Block Totals

Pivot Table Column Field

Pivot Table Data

Pivot Table Data Area

Pivot Table Data Area Label

Pivot Table Data Field

Pivot Table Detail Item

Pivot Table Field

Pivot Table Grand Totals

Pivot Table Item

Pivot Table Page Field

Pivot Table Row Field

Pivot Table Subtotal

Plot Area

Precedents

Print Titles

Query

Query Definition

R-Squared Value

Range

Regression Analysis

Relative Cell Reference

Result Set

Routing

Routing Slip

Scenario

Scroll Bars

Scroll Lock

Select

Sheet Tab Shortcut Menu

Shortcut Menu

Sort Order

Source Areas

Source Data for Pivot Tables

Source Document

Spinner

Standard Font

Startup Directory

Startup Switch

Status Bar

Structured Query Language (SQL)

Subtotal Row

Summary Data

Summary Function

Tab Dialog Box

Table

Target Cell

Template

Text Box

Tick Marks and Tick-Mark Labels

Toolbar Button

Toolbar Dock

Trendline

Trendline Label

Unattached Text

Ungroup

View

Visual Basic Module

Wildcard Character

Window Sizing Border

Working Directory

Worksheet

Y-Intercept


 Absolute Cell Reference

In a formula, specifies the exact address of a cell, regardless of the position of the cell containing the formula. An absolute reference takes the form $A$1, $B$1, and so on.


Relative Cell Reference

In a formula, specifies the address of another cell in relation to the cell containing the formula. A relative reference takes the form A1, B1, and so on.


Mixed Cell Reference

In a formula, a combination of a relative reference and an absolute reference. A mixed reference takes the form $A1 or A$1, where A is the column cell address and 1 is the row cell address. For example, the cell reference $A1 always refers to column A, regardless of the position of the cell containing the formula. The row address 1 refers to the row in relation to the cell containing the formula. If the cell containing the formula is moved down one row, the mixed reference $A1 changes to $A2.


Address

The location of a cell on a sheet. The cell address consists of a row address and a column address, such as C14, where C is the third column on the sheet and 14 is the fourteenth row on the sheet.


ODBC Control Panel Option

The utility you use with Microsoft Windows version 3.1 to install Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) drivers and add, modify, and delete data sources. (If you are using Windows version 3.0, you start the utility by double-clicking the ODBC Administrator icon in the ODBC group.)


Password

A secret word or expression known only to authorized users of a sheet, workbook, directory, file, or application. A password prevents access by unauthorized users to the protected item.

A password can include spaces, symbols, and numbers, as well as letters. As you type the password, Microsoft Excel displays an asterisk (*) for each character entered. Passwords are case sensitive.


List

A labeled series of worksheet rows that contain similar sets of data, such as an invoice database or a set of client names and phone numbers. A list can be used as a database, where rows are records and columns are fields.


Open Database Connectivity (ODBC)

A Driver Manager and a set of ODBC drivers that enable applications to use Structure Query Language (SQL) as a standard language to access data created and stored in another format.


Query Definition

Information that Microsoft Query uses to connect to and determine which data to retrieve from a data source. A query definition can include table names, field names, and criteria. A query definition is sent to a data source for execution in the form of a Structured Query Language (SQL) statement.


Structured Query Language (SQL)

A language used for retrieving, updating, and managing data.


ODBC Administrator

The utility you use with Microsoft Windows 3.0 to install Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) drivers and add, modify, and delete data sources. (If you are using Windows version 3.1, start the utility by clicking the ODBC icon in the Control Panel window.)


Custom Sort Order

A non-alpha, non-numeric sort order, such as Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, or Low, Medium, High. You can use one of the built-in custom sort orders or create your own using the Custom Lists tab in the Options dialog box (Tools menu).


Computed Criteria

Search criteria that is the result of a formula. Use computed criteria with the Advanced Filter command (Date menu, Filter submenu) to find a subset of data in a list.


Comparison Criteria

A set of search conditions used to find data by querying by example. Comparison criteria can be a series of characters you want matched, such as "Northwind Traders," or an expression, such as ">300."


Comparison Operator

A sign used in comparison criteria to compare two values. The six standard comparison operators are shown in the following table.

Operator	Meaning

=	Equal to

>	Greater than

<	Less than

>=	Greater than or equal to

<=	Less than or equal to

<>	Not equal to


Criteria Range

A cell range containing a set of search conditions that you use with the Advanced Filter command (Data menu, Filter submenu) to filter data in a list. A criteria range consists of one row of criteria labels and at least one row that defines the search conditions.


Sort Order

A way to arrange data based on value or data type. An ascending sort order sorts text from A to Z, numbers from the smallest negative number to the largest positive number, and dates and times from the earliest to the latest. A descending sort order is the opposite of an ascending order, except for blanks, which are always sorted last. If you choose a custom sort order, an ascending sort order is the order in which the items appear in the Sort Options dialog box.


Subtotal Row

A row that displays one or more subtotals for columns in a Microsoft Excel list. A list can contain multiple, nested subtotal rows.


Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) Drivers

Dynamic-link libraries (DLLs) that an open database connectivity (ODBC)-enabled application such as Microsoft Excel can use to gain access to a particular data source. Each database management system (DBMS), such as SQL Server and FoxPro, requires a different driver.


Summary Data

For automatic subtotals and worksheet outlines, the total rows or columns that summarize detail data. Summary data is usually adjacent to and below the detail data.


Query

In Microsoft Query, a means of finding the records that answer a particular question you ask about the data stored in a data source.


Pivot Area

The worksheet area into which you drag pivot table fields to change them from one field orientation to another. For example, you can change a row field to a column orientation by dragging it with the mouse to the pivot area for columns.

The term pivot area also applies to the graphic representation of a pivot table in Step 3 of the PivotTable Wizard.


Pivot Table Data Area Label

In a pivot table, the cell that identifies the source field for the data area and the function used to calculate the values of cells. For example, a data label for a data area calculated using the default summary function in the Sales field reads "Sum of Sales."


Pivot Table Row Field

A field that is assigned a row orientation in a pivot table. Items associated with a row field are displayed as row labels.


Pivot Table Column Field

A field that is assigned a column orientation in a pivot table. Items associated with a column field are displayed as column labels.


Custom Calculation

A method of summarizing the values in selected cells in the data area of a pivot table by using the values in other cells in the data area. For example, a % Of Row custom calculation displays the value of each cell as a percentage of the row grand total.


Summary Function

A type of calculation that you direct Microsoft Excel to use when combining source data in a pivot table or a consolidation table, or when inserting automatic subtotals in a list or database. Examples of summary functions include Sum, Count, and Average.


Nonadjacent Selections

A selection of two or more cells or ranges that do not touch each other. When plotting nonadjacent selections in a chart, be sure the selections form a rectangular shape.


Status Bar

The bar at the bottom of the screen that displays information about a selected command or an operation in progress. Use the Status Bar command on the View menu to display or hide the status bar.


Toolbar Button

A button that you click to perform an action quickly. Toolbar buttons that perform related actions are grouped on toolbars. You can change any toolbar or create new toolbars by adding, deleting, and rearranging buttons.


Toolbar Dock

The region above the formula bar and below the menu bar, or the regions on the left, right, and bottom sides of the application window, where toolbars can reside. You cannot dock toolbars that contain drop-down list boxes or buttons that display tear-off palettes to the left or right sides of the application window.


Pivot Table Data

In a pivot table, the summarized data calculated from the data fields of a source list or table.


Pivot Table Page Field

A field that is assigned to a page orientation in a pivot table. Items in a page field are displayed one at a time in a pivot table.


Pivot Table

An interactive worksheet table that enables you to summarize and analyze data from existing lists and tables. Use the PivotTable Wizard to specify the list or table you want to use and to define how you want to arrange the data in the pivot table. Once you create a pivot table, you can reorganize the data by dragging the fields and items.


Source Areas

The cell ranges from which the Consolidate command draws data to summarize in a specified destination area. Source areas can be on the active worksheet, on other worksheets in the same workbook, in inactive or closed workbooks, or on Lotus 1-2-3 worksheets.


External Reference

In a formula, a reference to a cell, range, or named area on a worksheet other than the worksheet that contains the reference.


Destination Area

The range of cells you select to hold the summarized data when using the Consolidate command. The destination area can be on the same worksheet as the source data, or it can be on a different worksheet.


Formula Bar

A bar at the top of the Microsoft Excel window that you use to enter or edit values or formulas in cells or charts. Displays the constant value or formula used in the active cell. Use the Formula Bar command on the View menu to display or hide the formula bar.


Floating Toolbar

A toolbar that is not docked at the edges of the application window. A floating toolbar stays on top of other windows within the application window.


Wildcard Character

A character (? or *) that stands for one or more other characters in search criteria. Used to find or filter data on a worksheet. An asterisk (*) represents any number of characters. A question mark (?) represents any single character in the same position as the question mark. To search for a literal question mark or asterisk, precede it with a tilde (~).


Dependents

Cells containing formulas that refer to the active cell.


Precedents

Cells that are referred to by the formula in the active cell.


Data Source

A data source includes the data a user wants to access and the information needed to get to that data. Examples of data sources are:

A directory containing a set of dBASE files you want to access.

A SQL Server database, the server on which it resides, and the network used to access that server.


Shortcut Menu

A menu that shows a list of commands relevant to a particular item. You can display a shortcut menu for rows, columns, cells, worksheet buttons and text boxes, toolbars, charts and chart items, objects, pivot tables, and workbook tabs.

Click the right mouse button to display a shortcut menu, or press SHIFT+F10.


Scenario

A named set of input values that you can substitute in a worksheet model.


Sheet Tab Shortcut Menu

A shortcut menu containing commands relevant to Microsoft Excel sheets.

Using the right mouse button, click a sheet tab to display a shortcut menu.


Database Management System (DBMS)

The software used to organize, analyze, search for, update, and retrieve data.


Source Data for Pivot Tables

The list or table used to create a pivot table. Source data can be a Microsoft Excel list or database, an external data source such as a dBASE or Microsoft Access file, Microsoft Excel worksheet ranges with labeled rows and columns, or another pivot table.


Pivot Table Data Area

The part of a pivot table that contains summary data. Values in each cell of the data area represent a summary of data from the source records or rows.


Pivot Table Detail Item

An item associated with an inner row or column field in a pivot table.


Pivot Table Subtotal

A row or column that displays the total of detail items in a pivot table field, using a summary function you choose.


Pivot Table Data Field

A field in a source list or table that contains data you want summarized in a pivot table. A data field usually contains numeric data, such as statistics or sales amounts, but it can also contain text. Data from a data field is summarized in the data area of a pivot table.


Pivot Table Item

A subcategory of a pivot table field. Items in a pivot table are derived from unique items in a database field or from unique cells in a list column. In a pivot table, items appear as row, column, or page labels.


Pivot Table Grand Totals

Total values for all cells in a row or all cells in a column of a pivot table. Values in a grand total row or column are calculated using the same summary function used in the data area of the pivot table.


Pivot Table Block Totals

Custom subtotals for the innermost column or row items in a pivot table. Block totals are inserted above the grand totals for columns or to the left of the grand totals for rows.


Result Set

The set of records that results from running a query. Microsoft Query displays the result set in row-and-column format in the Data pane.


Unattached Text

Text that is not linked to a chart object and can be moved anywhere on the chart. A text box is an example of unattached text.


Chart Toolbar

Contains the Chart Type button, Default Chart button, ChartWizard button, Horizontal Gridlines button, and Legend button. Clicking the Chart Type button displays a palette of chart types that you can choose from to change the chart type of a selected data series or an entire chart.


General Number Format

General is the default number format for all cells on a new worksheet. In the General format, Microsoft Excel displays numbers using integer format (789), decimal fraction format (7.89), or scientific notation (7.89E+08) if the number is longer than the width of the cell. The General format displays up to 11 digits. With the General format, numbers are right-aligned, text is left-aligned, and logical and error values are centered. When you type data in a cell formatted as General, Microsoft Excel will, if it can, assign another built-in format based on what you type.


Normal Style

The style used by all cells on sheets until another style is applied.


Pivot Table Field

A category of data that is derived from a field in a source list or table. For example, the Year field in a source list or database becomes the Year field in a pivot table. Items from the source list or table, such as 1992, 1993, and so on, become subcategories in the pivot table.


Check Box

A box that indicates with a check mark whether an option is set, regardless of the state of other options in the dialog box.


Label

Text you provide for the user, including names, instructions, and cautions.


Edit Box

A box in which the user can enter text, numbers, or cell references.


Group Box

A bordered area containing a group of buttons or other controls, only one of which can be selected at a time.


Create Button

A button that creates a command button such as the OK or Cancel button.


Option Button

A button for selecting one of a group of mutually exclusive options. Place a series of option buttons in a frame to group them.


List Box

A box that contains a list of text strings from which you can select.


Drop-Down List Box

A single box with uneditable text and an arrow, paired with a drop-down list that appears when the user selects the arrow.


Combination List-Edit Box

A single box with editable text and an arrow, paired with a drop-down list that appears when the user selects the arrow.


Combination Drop Down-Edit Box

An empty edit box and an arrow, paired with a drop-down list that appears when the user selects the arrow.


Scroll Bars

The shaded bars along the right side and bottom of the Microsoft Excel window. With the scroll bars, you can move through all the rows of a long sheet, or you can see the far-right and far-left columns of a wide one.


Spinner

A pair of buttons for increasing or decreasing a displayed value.


Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts

About Graphic Objects

Overview of Drawing Lines, Arrows, and Shapes

Drawing a rectangle, an ellipse, or an arc

Drawing a line or an arrow

Drawing multiple arrows, lines, or shapes

Drawing a polygon

Editing a polygon

Overview of Text Boxes

Creating and deleting text boxes

Editing the text in a text box

Formatting the text in a text box

Overview of Selecting a Graphic Object

Selecting a graphic object

Selecting multiple graphic objects

Selecting all graphic objects on a worksheet

Overview of Grouping and Overlapping Graphic Objects

Grouping and ungrouping graphic objects

Reordering overlapped graphic objects

Overview of Sizing, Moving, and Copying Graphic Objects

Resizing a graphic object

Moving a graphic object

Copying a graphic object

Overview of Controlling the Way a Graphic Object Is Moved or Sized

Detaching a graphic object from underlying cells

Including graphic objects when sorting

Aligning objects with gridlines

Overview of Formatting a Graphic Object

Formatting an object's border and fill pattern

Formatting a line or an arrow

Overview of Hiding and Printing Graphic Objects

Hiding and unhiding graphic objects

Printing graphic objects

Overview of Creating Pictures of Charts and Worksheets

Copying a chart, cells, or a graphic object as a picture

Updating a linked cell picture


About Graphic Objects

Using the buttons on the Drawing toolbar, you can draw graphic objects, including lines, arcs, and transparent or filled ellipses, rectangles, and polygons on worksheets, charts, and dialog sheets. To display the Drawing toolbar, click the Drawing button on the Standard toolbar.

You can also import graphics, as pictures, from other applications to enhance the appearance of your worksheets and charts.

Once you have added a graphic object, you can change its position, shape, or size; group it with other graphic objects; make copies of it; and format its color, border, or pattern.

On worksheets and charts, you can assign a macro to a graphic object so that the macro will run whenever you click the object.

With the Camera button, you can create pictures of charts, worksheet cells, or macro sheet cells. You can then place the pictures on other parts of the sheet, on another sheet, or in another application.

You can lock graphic objects, just as you can lock cells, so that they cannot be deleted or changed. You can format individual graphic objects so that they do not appear when you print your document, and you can hide graphic objects.

Information about how to work with graphic objects also applies to another kind of object called a control. You can use controls to make your worksheet or chart interactive without writing macros or programs. For information about using controls and graphics objects on dialog sheets, see Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes," in the Visual Basic User's Guide.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Button

  Shape Button

Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Overview of Drawing Lines, Arrows, and Shapes

You can draw lines, arrows, ellipses, rectangles, arcs, and polygons on a worksheet or chart to highlight important data or add visual interest. Ellipses, rectangles, arcs, and polygons may have either a filled (opaque) or an unfilled (transparent) background.

You create lines, arrows, and shapes by choosing a button from the Drawing toolbar and then dragging the mouse. To display the Drawing toolbar, click the Drawing button on the Standard toolbar.

To delete an object, select it and then press the DEL key, or choose Cut from the Edit menu. When you use the Cut command, the object is placed on the Clipboard so that you can paste it elsewhere. If you use the DEL key or the Clear command on the Edit menu, the object is not placed on the Clipboard and cannot be pasted elsewhere.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Button

  Drawing Selection Button

Drawing a line or an arrow

Drawing a polygon

Drawing a rectangle, an ellipse, or an arc

Drawing multiple arrows, lines, or shapes

Editing a polygon

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Drawing a rectangle, an ellipse, or an arc

Overview

Before you do this procedure, you must have the Drawing toolbar displayed. Click the Drawing button to display it.

1.	Click the Rectangle, Ellipse, or Arc button on the Drawing toolbar.

The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair.

2.	Position the cross-hair pointer where you want to start drawing.

3.	Drag until the object is the size and shape you want.

When you release the mouse button, the graphic object is displayed and selected.

To delete an object, select it and then press the DEL key.

To restrict ovals and arcs to circles, or rectangles to squares, hold down SHIFT while you draw.

If you want the object to snap to the nearest worksheet gridlines, hold down ALT while you draw.

See Also

Help

  Arc Button

  Drawing Button

  Drawing Selection Button

  Ellipse Button

  Filled Arc Button

  Filled Ellipse Button

  Filled Rectangle Button

  Rectangle Button

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Drawing a line or an arrow

Overview

Before you do this procedure, you must have the Drawing toolbar displayed. Click the Drawing button to display it.

1.	Click the Arrow or Line button on the Drawing toolbar.

The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair.

2.	Position the cross-hair pointer where you want to start drawing.

3.	Drag until the object is the size and shape you want.

When you release the mouse button, the graphic object is displayed and selected.

To delete an object, select it and then press the DEL key.

To restrict lines to horizontal, vertical, or 45-degree angles, hold down SHIFT while you draw.

If you want the object to snap to the nearest worksheet gridlines, hold down ALT while you draw.

If you want to draw a freehand line, use the Freehand button.

See Also

Help

  Arrow Button

  Drawing Button

  Drawing Selection Button

  Freehand Button

  Line Button

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Drawing multiple arrows, lines, or shapes

Overview

Before you do this procedure, you must have the Drawing toolbar displayed. Click the Drawing button to display it.

1.	Double-click the drawing button you want.

2.	Draw as many objects as you want.

3.	Cancel the drawing button by clicking it again.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Button

  Drawing Selection Button

Drawing a line or an arrow

Drawing a polygon

Drawing a rectangle, an ellipse, or an arc

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Drawing a polygon

Overview

Before you do this procedure, you must have the Drawing toolbar displayed. Click the Drawing button to display it.

1.	Click the Freeform or Filled Freeform button on the Drawing toolbar.

2.	Click where you want to start drawing.

3.	To draw a straight side, move the pointer without pressing the mouse button.

To draw a freehand side, drag the pointer.

4.	Click to form a vertex (the end of one side and the beginning of another).

5.	Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the polygon is complete.

6.	Click the same point where you began drawing to close the polygon, or double-click to stop drawing anywhere.

To delete an object, select it and then press the DEL key.

If you want the straight sides of the polygon to snap to the nearest worksheet gridlines, hold down ALT while you draw.

Note  The Freeform buttons draw polygons with any mixture of straight and curved sides. If you want to restrict polygons to straight sides only, you can use the Polygon buttons instead.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Button

  Drawing Selection Button

  Freeform Button

  Filled Freeform Button

  Filled Polygon Button

  Polygon Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Editing a polygon

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Editing a polygon

Overview

Before you do this procedure, you must have the Drawing toolbar displayed. Click the Drawing button to display it.

1.	Click the Reshape button.

2.	Select the polygon.

Selection handles appear at each vertex (intersection of two sides).

3.	To move a vertex, drag it.

To delete a vertex, hold down CTRL while you click the vertex.

To add a vertex, hold down CTRL while you drag a line of the polygon to where you want the new vertex.

4.	Repeat step 3 as needed.

5.	Click the Reshape button to stop editing.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Button

  Drawing Selection Button

  Reshape Button

Drawing a polygon

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Overview of Text Boxes

A text box is a rectangle with text in it. Text boxes are useful in highlighting specific data on a worksheet or chart, especially when they're used with lines or arrows. The text wraps within the text box. You can format the border and fill pattern just like any other graphic object, and you can rotate text with the Object command on the Format menu (on a worksheet) or the Selected Object command on the Format menu (on a chart). It's also possible to paste text copied from the formula bar into a text box.

You create a text box by using the Text Box button, which appears on both the Standard toolbar and the Drawing toolbar.

For information about changing the text in chart and axis titles, data and tick-mark labels, and the legend, see Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart."

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Creating and deleting text boxes

Editing the text in a text box

Formatting an object's border and fill pattern

Formatting the text in a text box

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Creating and deleting text boxes

Overview

1.	Click the Text Box button.

2.	Position the cross hair where you want one corner of the text box.

3.	Drag until the box is the size and shape you want.

4.	Type the text you want in the box.

The text will wrap inside the box. If you want to start a new line, press ENTER.

To delete a text box, select it and then press the DEL key. If you select text within the box rather than the box itself, only the selected text will be deleted.

If you want the object to snap to the nearest worksheet gridlines, hold down ALT while you draw.

If you want the text box to be exactly square, hold down SHIFT while you draw.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Selection Button

  Text Box Button

Editing the text in a text box

Formatting the text in a text box

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Editing the text in a text box

Overview

If the text box has a macro assigned to it, be sure to click the Drawing Selection button before you select the text box to avoid running the macro.

1.	Click the text box to select it.

2.	Position the insertion point, and then use the same techniques you use in cells for inserting and deleting characters.

If you start typing without first positioning the insertion point, all of the text in the text box is replaced by the new text.

To edit text linked to a worksheet cell, you must select the title or the text box, and then edit the text in the formula bar.

Note  If the text is rotated vertically, selecting it rotates it horizontally for editing. When you finish editing, click outside the text box or press the ESC key to return the text to its original orientation.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Selection Button

Editing cell contents

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Formatting the text in a text box

Overview

If the text box has a macro assigned to it, be sure to click the Drawing Selection button before you select the text box to avoid running the macro.

1.	Select the text box.

2.	If you want to format only some of the characters in the text box, select them now.

3.	From the Format menu, choose Object (on a worksheet) or Selected Object (on a chart).

You can also choose Format Object from the shortcut menu.

4.	Select the options you want.

The options available will differ depending on whether you have selected the text box as a whole or only some of the characters within it.

5.	Choose the OK button to apply your changes.

Note  If the text box is linked to a cell on a worksheet, you can format the text as a whole, but you cannot format individual characters.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Selection Button

  Font Color Button

  Rotate Text Down Button

  Rotate Text Up Button

  Text Box Button

  Vertical Text Button

Formatting an object's border and fill pattern

Object Command (Format Menu)

Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Overview of Selecting a Graphic Object

To change the format, size, or position of an object, or to copy or delete an object, you must first select it.

You can select an object just by clicking any visible part of it. However, it is often better to first click the Drawing Selection button. This changes the mouse pointer to an arrow, which means that:

Only objects can be selected, not cells.

If there is a macro assigned to an object, clicking it will select the object without running the macro.

You can select a group of graphic objects by dragging to draw a rectangle that completely surrounds the objects you want to select. This is also the way to select invisible objects.

You can select an object only when the pointer is over a visible part of the object. When selected, the object is surrounded by selection handles.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Selection Button

Selecting a graphic object

Selecting all graphic objects on a worksheet

Selecting multiple graphic objects

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"

"Selecting Items in a Chart" in Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"


Selecting a graphic object

Overview

Before you do this procedure, you must have the Drawing toolbar displayed. Click the Drawing button to display it.

1. Click the Drawing Selection button on the Drawing toolbar.

2.	Click any visible part of the object.

Selection handles appear around the object.

3.	When you finish working with objects, click the Drawing Selection button again.

Note  It is possible to select a graphic object simply by clicking (without first clicking the Drawing Selection button). However, if a macro is assigned to an object, clicking the object will run the macro. To avoid running the macro, use the Drawing Selection button.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Button

  Drawing Selection Button

Selecting multiple graphic objects

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Selecting multiple graphic objects

Overview

Before you do this procedure, you must have the Drawing toolbar displayed. Click the Drawing button to display it.

1.	Click the Drawing Selection button on the Drawing toolbar.

2.	Drag to draw a rectangle that completely surrounds the objects you want to select.

When you release the mouse button, all objects that are entirely within the rectangle are selected.

3.	To add more objects to the selection, hold down SHIFT while you click the objects you want to add.

4.	When you finish working with objects, click the Drawing Selection button again.

To remove an object from the selection, hold down SHIFT and click the object you want to remove.

You can also select multiple objects by holding down SHIFT as you click the objects one at a time.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Button

  Drawing Selection Button

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Selecting all graphic objects on a worksheet

Overview

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Go To.

2.	In the dialog box, choose the Special button.

3.	Select the Objects option button.

4.	Choose the OK button.

All graphic objects on the worksheet are selected, including drawn objects, buttons, controls, and text boxes.

See Also

Help

Go To Command (Edit Menu)

Selecting a graphic object

Selecting multiple graphic objects

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Overview of Grouping and Overlapping Graphic Objects

You can group several graphic objects so that they can be moved and sized as one object. Objects in the group cannot be edited, formatted, moved, or sized individually until you ungroup them. For overlapped objects, you can control which one is on top.

See Also

Help

Grouping and ungrouping graphic objects

Reordering overlapped graphic objects

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Grouping and ungrouping graphic objects

Overview

Before you do this procedure, you must have the Drawing toolbar displayed. Click the Drawing button to display it.

To group graphic objects

1.	Select the graphic objects you want to group together.

2.	Click the Group Objects button on the Drawing toolbar.

To ungroup graphic objects

1.	Select the grouped graphic objects.

2.	Click the Ungroup Objects button on the Drawing toolbar.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Button

  Drawing Selection Button

  Group Objects Button

  Ungroup Objects Button

Selecting multiple graphic objects

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Reordering overlapped graphic objects

Overview

Before you do this procedure, you must have the Drawing toolbar displayed. Click the Drawing button to display it.

1.	Select the object you want to bring to the front or send to the back.

2.	To place the selected object in front of the other objects, click the Bring To Front button.

To place the selected object behind the other objects, click the Send To Back button.

See Also

Help

  Bring To Front Button

  Drawing Button

  Drawing Selection Button

  Send To Back Button

Placement Command (Format Menu)

Selecting a graphic object

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Overview of Sizing, Moving, and Copying Graphic Objects

You can size a graphic object by dragging its selection handles. You can move or copy a graphic object by dragging it. If the object is unfilled, you must drag its border.

See Also

Help

Copying a graphic object

Moving a graphic object

Resizing a graphic object

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Resizing a graphic object

Overview

1.	Select the object or objects you want to size.

2.	Drag a selection handle until the object is the size you want.

To size an object proportionally, hold down SHIFT while you drag a corner.

If you want the object to snap to the nearest worksheet gridlines, hold down ALT while you draw.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Selection Button

Selecting a graphic object

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Moving a graphic object

Overview

1.	Select the object.

2.	Drag the object to the new position.

If the object is not filled or if it is a text box, you must drag the border or line of the object.

If you want the object to snap to the nearest worksheet gridlines, hold down ALT while you drag.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Selection Button

Selecting a graphic object

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Copying a graphic object

Overview

1.	Select the object.

2.	Hold down CTRL while you drag to where you want the copy.

If the object is not filled or if it is a text box, you must drag the border or line of the object.

If you want the object to snap to the nearest worksheet gridlines, hold down ALT while you drag.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Selection Button

Selecting a graphic object

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Overview of Controlling the Way a Graphic Object Is Moved or Sized

Graphic objects on worksheets are initially formatted to move or change size when the width or height of the cells under the objects changes, when those cells are moved with the mouse, or when the move is the result of inserting cells into and deleting cells from the worksheet.

You can change this behavior for an individual object by selecting the object, choosing Object from the Format menu, and then changing the Object Positioning option on the Properties tab. You can change this for all objects in all Microsoft Excel documents by choosing Options from the Tools menu and then clearing the Cut, Copy, And Sort Objects With Cells check box on the Edit tab.

For information about how objects move and size on charts, see Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart," in the Microsoft Excel User's Guide.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Selection Button

Aligning objects with gridlines

Detaching a graphic object from underlying cells

Edit Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Including graphic objects when sorting

Object Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Detaching a graphic object from underlying cells

Overview

1.	Select the graphic object you want to detach.

2.	From the Format menu or the shortcut menu, choose Object.

3.	On the Properties tab, select Don't Move Or Size With Cells to detach the object from the cell grid.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Selection Button

Aligning objects with gridlines

Object Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Including graphic objects when sorting

Overview

1.	Make the object no taller than a single row.

2.	Select all columns underneath the object.

3.	Sort the rows.

If you are sorting by columns instead of rows, make the object no wider than a single column.

Tip  If you do not want an object to sort with surrounding cells, choose Object from the Format menu, and then select the Don't Move Or Size With Cells check box on the Properties tab. If you don't want objects ever to be sorted with surrounding cells, choose Options from the Tools menu and then clear the Cut, Copy, And Sort Objects With Cells check box on the Edit tab.

See Also

Help

Object Command (Format Menu)

Options Command (Tools Menu)

Sorting a list from left to right

Sorting a list from top to bottom

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Aligning objects with gridlines

Overview

Hold down ALT as you draw, move, or size a graphic object.

The object will snap to the nearest gridlines.

This does not affect whether the object will be moved or sized when cells are moved or when their width or height changes.

See Also

Help

Detaching a graphic object from underlying cells


Overview of Formatting a Graphic Object

Formatting a graphic object changes its looks: its color, pattern, border, and so on. You format an object by selecting it and then choosing Object from the Format menu for a worksheet or choosing Selected Object from the Format menu for a chart. The dialog box displays the tabs and options relevant to that object. You can also double-click any object other than a text box to format it.

See Also

Help

Formatting a line or an arrow

Formatting an object's border and fill pattern

Formatting the text in a text box

Object Command (Format Menu)

Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Formatting an object's border and fill pattern

Overview

1.	Select the object.

2.	On a worksheet, choose Object from the Format menu.

In a chart, choose Selected Object from the Format menu.

3.	Select the options you want on the Patterns tab.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Shortcuts:	Color button (Formatting toolbar)

Pattern button (Drawing toolbar)

See Also

Help

  Color Button

  Drawing Selection Button

  Pattern Button

Object Command (Format Menu)

Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

Selecting a graphic object

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Formatting a line or an arrow

Overview

1.	Double-click the line or arrow.

2.	Select the formats you want on the Patterns tab.

3.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Drawing a line or an arrow

Selecting a graphic object

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Overview of Hiding and Printing Graphic Objects

You can hide all graphic objects or display placeholders for embedded charts and pictures to speed up scrolling.

On a worksheet, you can set each object so that it will print or not print when you print your document. All objects in a chart print with the chart.

See Also

Help

Hiding and unhiding graphic objects

Printing graphic objects

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Hiding and unhiding graphic objects

Overview

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Under Objects on the View tab, select the Show All, Hide All, or Show Placeholders option button (for embedded charts and pictures).

3.	Choose the OK button.

Tip  CTRL+6 cycles through all three options without opening the dialog box.

See Also

Help

View Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Printing graphic objects

Overview

When objects are created, they are formatted to print. Use the following procedure to prevent an object from printing.

1.	Select the objects you want to prevent from printing.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Object.

3.	On the Properties tab, clear the Print Object check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

If an object that you want to print does not print, follow the above procedure, but select the Print Object check box rather than clear it.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Selection Button

Object Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Overview of Creating Pictures of Charts and Worksheets

You can make a picture of a chart or a range of cells and paste it into a different part of the worksheet or onto another worksheet or macro sheet. You can also copy graphics into Microsoft Excel from a graphics program. Both pictures and graphics copied from other programs can be formatted, moved, or sized just like graphic objects created in Microsoft Excel.

You can create pictures of charts and cells by using the Copy Picture command on the Edit menu. These pictures are not linked to their source data.

You can link pictures of cells to their source data by using the Camera button. Linked pictures are updated automatically when you update the formats, data, or gridlines in the source document. To switch to the source document, double-click a linked picture.

See Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications," in the Microsoft Excel User's Guide for information about inserting graphics directly from files on your disk.

Note  Pictures of charts cannot be linked to their source data; use an embedded chart instead.

See Also

Help

Copying a chart, cells, or a graphic object as a picture

Updating a linked cell picture

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Copying a chart, cells, or a graphic object as a picture

Overview

1.	Select the chart, cells, or object that you want to copy.

If you select a chart, you can copy an unlinked picture of either an embedded chart or a chart sheet.

2.	Hold down SHIFT and choose Copy Picture from the Edit menu.

3.	To copy exactly what you see on the screen, select the As Shown On Screen check box.

To copy what you would see if you printed the chart, select the As Shown When Printed check box.

To create the picture in the format you want, select either the Picture or Bitmap option button.

4.	Choose the OK button.

5.	Switch to the sheet you want to paste the picture onto.

6.	Select a cell or object where you want to paste the picture.

7.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Paste.

Note  If you select the Picture option button, the picture is copied in Windows metafile format. This format can be displayed on a screen with a different resolution than the screen it was copied from. If you select the Bitmap option button, the picture is copied in bitmap format. This format can be displayed correctly only on a screen of the same type and resolution as the screen it was copied from.

See Also

Help

  Drawing Selection Button

Copy Picture Command (Edit Menu)

Options Command (Tools Menu)

Updating a linked cell picture

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Updating a linked cell picture

Overview

1.	Double-click the linked picture.

If the source document is not open, Microsoft Excel opens it and selects the source cell range.

2.	Make changes in the source document.

The linked cell picture is automatically updated.

When you select a linked cell picture, the link formula appears in the formla bar--for example, =SHEET1!$A$1:$B$12. You can edit the formula to link the picture to a different source document. If you do this, the picture is not updated unless the new source document is open. Double-click the picture to open the source document.

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Importing an entire graphics file

You can import an entire graphics file into a Microsoft Excel document without leaving Microsoft Excel. To import an entire graphics file, you must have the appropriate graphics filter installed on your computer. A graphics filter is a software program that enables Microsoft Excel to interpret and display a file created in another application. The Microsoft Excel Setup program installs graphics filters when you install Microsoft Excel.

If you chose not to install a particular graphics filter when you installed Microsoft Excel, you can add the filter any time by running the Microsoft Excel Setup program again.  For more information, see Installing components of Microsft Excel.

To import an entire graphics file

1.	Select the cell in the upper left corner of the area of your sheet where you want to insert the graphic.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Picture.

3.	In the File Name box, type or select the name of the file you want.

If you do not see the file you want to import, select a different drive or directory, or choose the Find File button to search for the file you want.

To see what the selected file will look like, select the Preview Picture check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Troubleshooting

If the filter cannot convert a graphic that you want to insert, you may see a message saying that the file is empty or does not contain a graphic, or that the graphic filter could not convert the file. Check the list of procedures and considerations below for suggestions about how to correct the problem.

If you have trouble importing a graphic into Microsoft Excel, it may not have been saved properly by the application in which you created it. Try reloading the graphic into the original application. If the image does not appear as it did when originally created, or if the application can not read the file, try exporting the file in a different format.

If the source is a Windows application, try copying the picture to the Clipboard and then paste the picture directly into Microsoft Excel.

If the file format of the graphic is a version not supported by one of the import filters, try opening the graphic in the original application and saving it in another format.

See Also

Help

Picture Command (Insert Menu)

Inserting a picture created by another application


Contents Command (Help Menu)

Displays the Microsoft Excel Help Contents.

Click the name of the topic you want.

--Or--

Press TAB to move to the topic you want, and then press ENTER.

Shortcut:	F1

See Also

Help

Index Command (Help Menu)

Search For Help On Command


Index Command (Help Menu)

Displays the Microsoft Excel Help index. You can click a letter at the top of the index to scroll to the terms beginning with that letter.

Click the index term you want information on.

--Or--

Press TAB to move to the index term, and then press ENTER.

See Also

Help

Contents Command (Help Menu)

Search For Help On Command


Search For Help On Command

Displays the Search dialog box, which allows you to search for Help topics by typing or selecting a keyword.

Keyword

Type an entry or select one from the list, and then choose the Show Topics button.

Topics

Select a Help topic from the list and then choose the Go To button.

Microsoft Excel displays the selected Help topic.

Shortcut:	Double-click a Help topic in the list.

See Also

Help

Searching Help for a particular topic

Quick Preview

"Getting Information While You Work"

User's Guide

Chapter 5, "Getting Information While You Work"


Technical Support Command (Help Menu)

Displays a list of topics from which you can get answers to common questions, an explanation of where to get technical support, worldwide technical support phone numbers, and information about how to gather the information the technician will need to answer your question.

See Also

Help

Technical Support!IFJ(hwndApp,qchPath,"xltocPSSMain>Main@xlpss.hlp")


Lotus 1-2-3 Command (Help Menu)

Displays a dialog box that helps you learn Microsoft Excel equivalents to Lotus 1-2-3 menu items. You can display the instructions for the equivalent command on your worksheet, or you can view a demonstration showing the Microsoft Excel steps.

Menu

Select Lotus 1-2-3 menus and commands here. The box to the right of the list gives information on the currently selected command.

Help Options

Instructions

Adds the instructions for performing the equivalent action in Microsoft Excel to a text box on your worksheet.

Demo

Shows a demonstration of how to do the equivalent actions in Microsoft Excel. If necessary, you will be prompted for additional information.

Faster

Makes the demo run faster.

Slower

Makes the demo run slower.

Help

Opens the Help window to give more information on the equivalent actions in Microsoft Excel.

See Also

Help

Transition Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Using Help for Lotus 1-2-3 users

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You're Switching from Another Spreadsheet"


Multiplan Command (Help Menu)

Displays a dialog box that provides online Help about equivalents to Multiplan commands.

Command

Specify the Multiplan command for which you want the Microsoft Excel equivalent.

See Also

Help

Using Help for Multiplan users

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You're Switching from Another Spreadsheet"


About Microsoft Excel Command

Displays the version number of Microsoft Excel you are using, how much memory is available, and whether a math coprocessor is installed. Also shows the user name, organization name, software serial number, and other information.


Importing and Exporting Documents

TextWizard

Overview of Opening and Saving Documents in Different File Formats

Opening a document created by another application

Saving a document for use in another application

Converting text to columns

File Formats

Overview of Moving Microsoft Excel Files Between Windows and the Macintosh

Moving files between Windows and the Macintosh


TextWizard

The TextWizard is a series of dialog boxes that guide you through the steps required to specify how you want text to be distributed across columns. This wizard appears when you open a text file with the Open button, or the Open command (File menu), or when you choose the Text To Columns command (Data menu).

Step 1

The TextWizard shows your data at the bottom of the dialog box. At the top, you specify what format your data is in: delimited or fixed width. Delimited means that the items in each line that should go in separate columns are separated by specific characters such as commas, semicolons, or spaces. The items in different rows might not line up with each other. Fixed Width means that each column has a set number of characters, regardless of what characters are there.

Step 2

If you selected Fixed Width in Step 1, the preview box shows the suggested placement for column breaks. You can readjust them here by dragging the break lines.

If you selected Delimited in Step 1, you can change which characters are regarded as delimiters. You can select more than one delimiter, and you can type a custom delimiter.

Treat Consecutive Delimiters As One

If you select this option, two delimiters with nothing between them will be interpreted as a single column break.

For example, if this option is selected and the specified delimiter is a comma (,), "Jones,,Tom" will have two columns, one containing "Jones" and the other, "Tom". If this option is cleared, then "Jones,,Tom" will have three columns: "Jones", a blank column, and "Tom".

Text Qualifier

In some data, single or double quotation marks are used to indicate that the characters they enclose should all be treated as text, even characters that might otherwise be treated as delimiters. For example, if you select comma as the delimiter and double quotation mark as the text qualifier, the following sample will have two columns. If you select "None" as the text qualifier, the data will have three.

Johnson,"Manager, Sales"

Johnson	Manager, Sales

Johnson	Manager	Sales

Step 3

Here you can change how Microsoft Excel interprets the data in each column: as numbers, text, and dates; as text only (useful for long identification numbers, such as credit card numbers, which should be treated as text); or as dates only. Under Column Data Format, you can select the Do Not Import Column (Skip) option button to prevent the data in the currently selected column from being included on the worksheet. If you use the Text To Columns command, you can enter a reference to a different part of the worksheet where you want the converted data placed.

See Also

Help

  Open Button

Converting text to columns

Open Command (File Menu)

Opening a document created by another application

Text To Columns Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 42, "Importing and Exporting Documents"


Overview of Opening and Saving Documents in Different File Formats

You can open documents created by many different applications in Microsoft Excel with the Open button or the Open command on the File menu. You can also save Microsoft Excel documents in the file formats used by many other applications with the Save As command on the File menu. You can also open and save text files.

When you open a text file, the TextWizard opens so you can specify how the text is distributed in columns.

If you copy data to Microsoft Excel from another application, several columns of data might be condensed into a single column. You can use the Text To Columns command on the Data menu to distribute the fields of each record into separate columns. The range you convert can be any number of rows high, but only one column of data can be converted at a time.

See Also

Help

Converting text to columns

File Formats

Opening a document created by another application

Saving a document for use in another application

User's Guide

Chapter 42, "Importing and Exporting Documents"


Opening a document created by another application

Overview

1.	Click the Open button or choose Open from the File menu.

2.	Select the name of the file you want to open.

You can change which file types are listed in the File Name box by selecting a different file type in the List Files Of Type box. If the file type you want to display is not listed, select All Files. You can also type the complete filename in the File Name box.

3.	Choose the OK button.

If the file is a text file, the TextWizard opens so you can specify how the text is distributed in columns.

See Also

Help

  Open Button

Copying data from another application to Microsoft Excel

Dragging data between applications

File Formats

Open Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 42, "Importing and Exporting Documents"


Saving a document for use in another application

Overview

1.	Switch to the workbook and sheet you want to save.

2.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

3.	In the Save File As Type box, select the file format you want.

4.	In the File Name box, type a new filename for the document or select the current filename.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Note  For some formats, Microsoft Excel saves only the active sheet. A message appears to let you know when this will happen. You can save each sheet as a separate document by switching to each sheet in turn and following the steps above.

See Also

Help

Copying data from Microsoft Excel to another application

Dragging data between applications

File Formats

Save As Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 42, "Importing and Exporting Documents"


Converting text to columns

Overview

1.	Select the range of cells you want to convert.

The range can be many rows tall, but no more than one column wide.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Text To Columns.

The TextWizard opens so you can specify how the text is distributed across columns.

The converted data begins in the column you are converting and then fills cells to the right, unless you enter a reference to a different location in the Destination box. If there is already data in the destination range, a message appears asking if you want the converted data to overwrite the existing data. Make sure you have enough blank cells to the right of the column you are converting to accommodate the data.

See Also

Help

Copying data from another application to Microsoft Excel

Text To Columns Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"

Chapter 42, "Importing and Exporting Documents"


File Formats (Windows)

File formats determine the way information in a workbook is stored in a file. Different programs use different file formats. Microsoft Excel enables you to open and save files in the following formats, using the Open and Save As commands on the File menu. Microsoft Excel can both open and save the formats in the following list (exceptions noted). The list of formats that appears in the Save As dialog box varies depending on what kind of sheet is active. For most file formats, only the active sheet is saved. To save the other sheets, switch to each in turn and save it separately.

Formats that save the entire workbook

Microsoft Excel version 5.0 Workbook	XLS
Microsoft Excel Template	XLT
Microsoft Excel version 4.0 Workbook (saves worksheets, chart sheets, and Microsoft Excel version 4.0 macro sheets only)	XLW
Lotus 1-2-3 (saves worksheets and chart sheets only)	WK3, (FM3)
Formats that save the active sheet only

Formatted Text (space delimited Lotus PRN format)	PRN
Text (Windows, tab delimited)	TXT
CSV (Windows, comma delimited)	CSV
Microsoft Excel Worksheet (Microsoft Excel versions 2.1, 3.0, 4.0)	XLS
Microsoft Excel Chart (Microsoft Excel versions 2.1, 3.0, 4.0)	XLC
Microsoft Excel Macro or International Macro (Microsoft Excel version 4.0)	XLM
Lotus 1-2-3	WKS, WK1, (ALL, FMT)
Quattro/Pro (DOS)	WQ1
dBASE II, III, IV	DBF
Text (text file for Macintosh, OS/2, or MS-DOS; tab delimited)	TXT
CSV (text file for Macintosh, OS/2, or MS-DOS; comma delimited)	CSV
DIF (data interchange format)	DIF
SYLK (SYMBOLIC LINK)	SLK
Formats that Microsoft Excel can open but not save

Microsoft Works (MS-DOS and Windows only)	WKS
Microsoft Multiplan (if you have selected the Multiplan file converter when you set up Microsoft Excel)	*.*
Lotus 1-2-3 PIC (when included in an ALL file)
See Also

Help

Opening a document created by another application

Overview of Saving Workspace Files

Saving a document for use in another application

User's Guide

Chapter 42, "Importing and Exporting Documents"


Overview of Moving Microsoft Excel Files Between Windows and the Macintosh

All versions of Microsoft Excel can read files created by earlier versions of Microsoft Excel, but not files created by a later version unless you first save the file in the format for the earlier version. For example, to read a Microsoft Excel version 5.0 for Windows file in Microsoft Excel version 4.0 for the Macintosh, use the Save As command on the File menu in Microsoft Excel for Windows to save the file in Microsoft Excel version 4.0 format before moving the file.

Versions of Microsoft Excel version 1.5 and earlier use a different file format. Save files created with these versions in the SYLK file format before moving them.

The file formats of Microsoft Excel version 2.0 and later for Windows and for the Macintosh are the same for each version. There are several tools for reading files directly from one platform to the other, including sending the files by an electronic mail system or placing the files on a network server accessible by both Macintosh and Windows-based computers. To move files between computers that are not connected by a network or electronic mail system, copy the file onto a floppy disk and use a program such as Apple File Exchange, which comes with every Apple Macintosh computer. You also need an Apple 3.5 inch floppy disk high density drive (FDHD), which can read disks in these formats:

MS-DOS (720 kilobytes and 1.44 megabytes)

Apple (400K, 800K, and 1.44 MB)

See Also

Help

Moving files between Windows and the Macintosh

User's Guide

Chapter 42, "Importing and Exporting Documents"


Moving files between Windows and the Macintosh

Overview

If your Macintosh and Windows-based computers are connected by a network, you can move the file by copying it to a network server or sending it by electronic mail. If your computers are not connected by a network, follow the steps below.

This task requires the Apple File Exchange program, which is on the Utilities 2 disk in Macintosh System 6, and the Tidbits disk in Macintosh System 7.

1.	Save the file in one of the Microsoft Excel formats on a 3.5 inch disk or on the hard disk of a Macintosh.

Note  If the file is being transferred to or from Microsoft Excel version 1.5 or earlier, save it in SYLK format.

2.	Start Apple File Exchange on the Macintosh.

3.	Insert the MS-DOS disk in the floppy disk drive.

Two menus appear in the menu bar: Mac To MS-DOS and MS-DOS To Mac.

4.	Select the documents to be translated from the list of files on the source disk.

5.	Select the appropriate drive and folder on the destination disk.

6.	Choose Default Translation from either the Mac To MS-DOS menu or the MS-DOS To Mac menu, depending on which way you are transferring the file. Make sure that no other translation options are checked.

7.	Choose the Translate button.

8.	Choose Quit from the File menu in Apple File Exchange.

The names of Macintosh files might be truncated in Windows. This can cause filename conflicts. If this occurs, Apple File Exchange enables you to edit the filenames before translation. For easiest translation, make sure that the files you transfer to Windows have names that follow the MS-DOS file-naming convention: up to eight characters followed by a period (.) and the characters XLS (for Microsoft Excel workbooks).

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 42, "Importing and Exporting Documents"


Info Menu Commands

The Info menu appears on the menu bar when you select the Info Window check box in the View tab of the Options dialog box. Use the Options command on the Tools menu to open this dialog box. The Info menu controls allow you to choose the information about the active cell that is to be displayed in the Info window.

To return to the worksheet, choose Show Document from the Window Menu.

Cell

Displays the cell's reference.

Formula

Displays the contents of the cell.

Value

Displays the value in the cell in General format.

Format

Displays the style, number format, alignment, font, borders, and shading of the cell.

Protection

Displays the protection status of the cell.

Names

Displays the names that include references to the cell.

Precedents

Displays a dialog box containing two option buttons. Selecting Direct Only displays only the direct precedents that the cell refers to. Selecting All Levels displays both direct and indirect precedents that the cell refers to.

Dependents

Displays a dialog box containing two option buttons. Selecting Direct Only displays only the direct dependents that refer to the cell. Selecting All Levels displays both direct and indirect dependents that refer to the cell.

Note

Displays the cell note, or indicates if a sound note has been attached to a cell.

See Also

Help

Show Document Command (Window Menu)

View Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Worksheet"


Cells Command (Insert Menu)

Inserts a range of blank cells equivalent in size and shape to the selected cell range. The selected cells are shifted to accommodate the insertion.

Shortcut:	CTRL+PLUS SIGN

Shift Cells Right

Shifts the existing cells to the right when inserting.

Shift Cells Down

Shifts the existing cells down when inserting.

Entire Row

Inserts an entire row above the selection.

Shortcut:	Insert Row button (Edit category)

Entire Column

Inserts an entire column to the left of the selection.

Shortcut:	Insert Column button (Edit category)

See Also

Help

  Insert Button

  Insert Column Button

  Insert Row Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Cut or Copied Cells Command (Insert Menu)

Edit Buttons Category

Inserting blank cells

Inserting rows and columns


Rows Command (Insert Menu)

Insert Row button

Inserts a new blank row above the selected row. The Insert Row button is in the Edit category.

You can select several rows and the corresponding number of rows will be inserted.

This command also works if you only select a cell or cells.

If you hold down SHIFT while clicking the Insert Row button, it functions the same as the Delete Row button.

See Also

Help

  Delete Row Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Inserting blank cells

Inserting rows and columns


Columns Command (Insert Menu)

Insert Column button

Inserts a new blank column to the left of the selected column. The Insert Column button is in the Edit category.

You can select several columns and the corresponding number of columns will be inserted.

This command also works if you only select a cell or cells.

If you hold down SHIFT while clicking the Insert Column button, it functions like the Delete Column button.

See Also

Help

  Delete Column Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Inserting blank cells

Inserting rows and columns


Cut or Copied Cells Command (Insert Menu)

Inserts the contents of the Clipboard between existing cells. The existing cells shift to accommodate the inserted cells.

Shortcut:	CTRL+PLUS SIGN

Shift Cells Right

Shifts the existing cells to the right when inserting.

Shift Cells Down

Shifts the existing cells down when inserting.

See Also

Help

  Insert Button

  Insert Column Button

  Insert Row Button

Cells Command (Insert Menu)

Inserting blank cells

Inserting rows and columns


Page Break and Remove Page Break Commands (Insert Menu)

Inserts and removes manual page breaks. Manual page breaks you set override the page breaks that Microsoft Excel automatically sets.

Page breaks can be inserted above or to the left of the active cell.

The command changes to Remove Page Break when the active cell is directly below or to the right of a manual page break.

Manual page breaks appear on the screen as bold dashed lines and are darker than automatic page breaks.

Selecting the entire worksheet before choosing the Remove Page Break command removes all manual page breaks from the active sheet.

See Also

Help

Inserting or removing page breaks

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Function Command (Insert Menu)

Function Wizard button

Opens the Function Wizard dialog box. Inserts the selected function into the formula bar. The Function Wizard button is located on the Standard toolbar or on the formula bar if it is active.

If the formula bar is active and you began the formula by typing an equal sign (=), the Function Wizard pastes the selected function at the insertion point but does not enter the function into the selected cell.

If the formula bar is not active, the Function Wizard activates it, pastes an equal sign (=) followed by the selected function, and automatically enters the function into the selected cell.

Shortcut:	SHIFT+F3

Step 1 of 2

Allows you to select the function you want to enter.

Function Category

Allows you to select subsets of all available functions. If you select All in the Function Category box, all available functions are listed. If you select any other category, only those functions that belong to that category are listed. Custom functions that you define are included under their assigned categories or in the User Defined category if no other categories are assigned. Macro function categories are available only when a macro sheet is active.

Function Name

Lists all built-in and custom functions that are available in the selected category. Also lists built-in and custom macro functions if a macro sheet is active. The display area describes the selected function.

Back

Moves from the current Function Wizard dialog box to the preceding one. This button is unavailable in the Step 1 dialog box.

Next

This button moves to the following screen of the Function Wizard. Choose Next after you've selected the function you want to insert into the formula bar or the selected cell.

Finish

Inserts the function into the formula bar. If no arguments are entered, Microsoft Excel inserts the argument names as placeholders in the formula.

Cancel

Closes the Function Wizard dialog box without entering anything into the formula bar or into the selected cell.

Step 1a of 2

This dialog box appears if the function you select has several syntax formats. As in the Step 1 dialog box, the function is described, and its arguments are listed. Select the format you want from the Arguments list, and choose the Next or Finish button. The buttons function identically to those in the first dialog box.

Step 2 of 2

This dialog box changes according to the function you select in the Step 1 dialog box. The arguments for the function appear next to boxes you use to fill in the arguments. You can enter values, references, names, formulas, and other functions into the argument edit boxes. However, your entries must produce valid values for that argument. If an argument is required for the function to be entered successfully, the word "required" appears in brackets next to the argument name in the display area.

Between each argument and its argument box is a Function Wizard button. Clicking this button opens another instance of the Function Wizard, allowing you to nest functions within the argument. You can nest up to seven levels of functions in a formula.

Value

After you have entered values for each of the required arguments, the calculated value for the function appears in the Value box at the top of the Step 2 dialog box.

Finish

Enters the completed function in the workbook.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Inserting a worksheet function into a formula with Function Wizard

Toolbars Command (View Menu)

Worksheet Functions Listed by Category

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Name Command (Insert Menu)

Displays the Name submenu. Four commands appear on the Name submenu: Apply, Create, Define, and Paste.

See Also

Help

Apply Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Create Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Define Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Paste Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Define Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Creates a name for a cell, range, or constant or computed value. You can then use this name to refer to the cell, range, or value. Names make formulas easier to read, understand, and maintain. You can change or delete names that have been defined previously and define constant or computed values that you intend to use later. Names appear in the reference area of the formula bar when you select a named cell or an entire named range.

Shortcut:	CTRL+F3

Names In Workbook

Lists all names currently defined in the workbook.

When you select a name from the list, the name appears in the edit box above the list box and its reference appears in the Refers To box.

If the active cell contains text, that text appears in the edit box  as the proposed name. Otherwise, any text in the cell to the left or above the active cell appears in the edit box.

You can accept or edit the proposed name, type a new name, or select a name from the Names In Workbook box. If you use a name you have already defined, the new definition replaces the old definition.

The name can be as long as 255 characters and can contain letters, numbers, underscores ( _ ), backslashes (\), periods (.), and question marks (?). However, the first character must be a letter, an underscore ( _ ), or a backslash (\).

Names that resemble numbers or cell references are not permitted.

Refers To

Displays the reference for the selected cell or range. Can be a cell range, a constant value, or a formula.

If you select a previously defined name in the list, proposes the range, value, or formula that name currently refers to. If you type a previously defined name, the range, value, or formula is not displayed.

You can edit a reference. While doing so, you can also make worksheet selections, choose formula editing commands, and switch to and move windows.

Category

Appears in the dialog box only when a macro sheet is active. You insert a macro sheet into a workbook by choosing Macro and then MS Excel 4.0 Macro Sheet from the Insert menu.

The Category list is available only when the Command or Function option button is selected in the Macro box. A list of available categories is displayed for command or function macros that you create. You can assign a macro to an existing category, or you can create your own category. The default category is User Defined. After you assign a macro to a category, the macro appears in the Function Wizard dialog box under that category.

Macro

Appears in the dialog box only when a macro sheet is active. You insert a macro sheet into a workbook by choosing Macro and then MS Excel 4.0 Macro Sheet from the Insert menu.

The Function and Command options indicate which type of macro you are naming. If you're defining a command macro, you can assign any letter as a shortcut key using the Ctrl+ box.

OK

Adds the current entry in the Name and Refers To boxes to the list of names defined for the workbook, and then closes the Define Name dialog box.

Close

Closes the Define Name dialog box without adding the current entry in the Name and Refers To boxes to the list of names defined for the workbook. However, any names previously entered using the Add button remain.

Add

Adds the current entry in the Name and Refers To boxes to the list of names defined for the workbook without closing the Define Name dialog box, thus allowing you to define more names.

Delete

Deletes the name selected in the Names In Workbook box.

See Also

Help

Apply Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Create Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Paste Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Replacing cell references with a defined name

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Paste Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Inserts the selected name into the formula bar.

If the formula bar is active and you begin a formula by typing an equal sign (=), choosing the Paste command pastes the selected name at the insertion point. If the formula bar is not active, choosing Paste Name activates it and pastes an equal sign (=) followed by the selected name.

Shortcut:	F3

Paste Name

Lists all names defined on the active worksheet or macro sheet.

Paste List

Pastes all names defined in your workbook, starting at the active cell. On a worksheet, the list of names is an area two columns wide. The left column lists names; the right column lists cell references that the names refer to. On a macro sheet, the list of names is five columns wide and includes a name column, a reference column, a column for the type of macro (0=none, 1=function, 2=command), a column for assigned shortcut keys, and a column for the category.

See Also

Help

Apply Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Create Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Define Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Replacing cell references with a defined name

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Create Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Creates names using labels in a selected range.

Uses text in the top or bottom row, the left or right column, or any combination of a selected range to name the other cells in the range.

Text in	Names cells in

Top row	Rows below

Left column	Columns to the right

Bottom row	Rows above

Right column	Columns to the left

If the cell at the edge of the selection contains a number formatted as a date, Microsoft Excel converts the date to text to create a name. For example, a date formatted as "February 1, 1994" becomes "February_1_1994."

If a name is already defined on the worksheet, Microsoft Excel asks if you want to replace the existing definition. From the Insert menu, choose Name and then choose Define to see a list of the names you've created and their references.

Shortcut:	CTRL+SHIFT+F3

See Also

Help

Apply Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Define Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Paste Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Replacing cell references with a defined name

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Apply Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Searches formulas in the selected cells and replaces references with names defined for them, if they exist. You can name cells and ranges using the Name command on the Insert menu, and then choosing Define or Create.

Apply Names

Lists all names defined in a workbook. Select the name or names you want to use in place of references.

Ignore Relative/Absolute

Replaces references with names regardless of the reference types of either the names or references.

If you clear this check box, replaces absolute references with absolute names, relative references with relative names, and mixed references with mixed names.

Use Row And Column Names

Uses the names of row and column ranges containing the cells referred to if names for the exact cells can't be found.

Options

Displays the following additional options:

Omit Column Name If Same Column

If the referenced cell is in the same column as the formula and within a row-oriented named range, replaces the reference with the row-oriented name without including a column-oriented name.

Omit Row Name If Same Row

If the referenced cell is in the same row as the formula within a column-oriented named range, replaces reference with the column-oriented name without including a row-oriented name.

Name Order

Determines which range name is listed first when a cell reference is replaced by both a row-oriented and a column-oriented range name.

See Also

Help

Create Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Define Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Paste Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Replacing cell references with a defined name

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Note Command (Insert Menu)

Attaches text or audio comments to a cell.

A cell note indicator appears in the upper right corner of the cell when a note is attached.

You can print notes using the Page Setup and Print commands on the File menu while the worksheet or the Show Info window is active.

Shortcuts:	  Attach Note button

SHIFT+F2

Cell

Displays the reference of the active cell or the cell selected in the Notes In Sheet box.

Notes In Sheet

Lists the cell reference and partial note text for each note on the worksheet. If a cell contains a sound note, an asterisk (*) appears next to the cell reference.

Text Note

Shows the text of the note selected in the Notes In Sheet box. Type, edit, or view text notes here. Pressing ENTER starts a new line.

Sound Note

Attaches sounds to the cell referenced in the Cell box. Available only if you have the necessary hardware and software to record and/or play sounds.

Record/Erase

Displays the Record dialog box containing Record, Stop, Pause, and Play buttons, as well as a time scale showing elapsed recording time relative to the total time available.

If a selected cell has a sound note attached, the Record button in the Cell Note dialog box changes to an Erase button, enabling you to remove the sound note from the cell.

Play

Plays a sound note in a selected cell.

Import

Displays the Open dialog box, which lists available sound files.

OK

Attaches the new or changed text or sound note to the cell referenced in the Cell box and then closes the Cell Note dialog box.

Close

Closes the Cell Note dialog box, but does not cancel your actions. Any notes you have added, edited, or deleted remain as you changed them.

Add

Attaches the current text note or sound note to the cell referenced in the Cell box. The Cell Note dialog box remains open so you can continue adding, editing, or deleting other notes.

Delete

Deletes the note selected in the Notes In Sheet box and removes the cell note indicator. Does not otherwise affect the cell to which the note was attached.

See Also

Help

  Attach Note Button

Adding an imported sound note

Copying a text or sound note to another cell

Creating text notes

Deleting text or sound notes from a cell

Displaying a text note

Displaying or hiding cell note indicators

Erasing a sound note

Overview of Adding Comments to a Worksheet

Playing a sound note

Printing text notes

Recording a sound note

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Titles Command (Insert Menu)

Adds placeholder titles to the chart and axes, depending on which options you select in the dialog box.

You can select and edit this text at any time.

Titles can be formatted and moved, but not sized.

You can also link titles to cells on your worksheet.

Chart

Adds the word "Title" to the chart, centering it at the top of the chart.

For 2-D charts:

Value (Y) Axis/Second Value (Y) Axis

Adds "Y" or "Y2" next to the appropriate value axis.

Category (X) Axis/Second Category (X) Axis

Adds "X" or "X2" next to the appropriate category axis.

For 3-D charts:

Value (Z) Axis

Adds "Z" next to the appropriate value axis.

Category (X) Axis

Adds "X" next to the appropriate category axis.

Series (Y) Axis

Adds "Y" next to the series axis.

See Also

Help

Adding a chart title and axis titles

Changing the font and alignment of chart text

Deleting data labels, titles, legends, or gridlines

Editing titles and text boxes

Linking chart text to a worksheet cell

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Data Labels Command (Insert Menu)

Adds data labels to a data series, to an individual data point, or to all of the data points in the chart.

The chart type group to which the selected data points belong determines which kinds of labels can be displayed.

Data in data labels comes directly from the worksheet.

You can edit the labels after adding them to the chart, in which case the text will no longer come from the worksheet data and the link will be broken.

Data labels can be formatted and moved, but not sized.

Labels Contents

None

No data labels are displayed for the selected data points. If you select None when labels are already displayed in a chart, they are cleared from the selected data points.

Show Value

Displays the value of a data point.

Show Percent

Displays percentages of the whole for pie and doughnut charts.

Show Label

Displays the category assigned to a data point. For area charts, shows series names.

Show Label and Percent

Displays percentages of the whole, and category or series names for pie and doughnut charts.

Automatic Text

If this option is selected, data displayed in data labels is taken directly from the worksheet. Select this check box to relink data labels to their source data after they have been edited.

Show Legend Key Next To Label

Places the legend key (with the assigned format and color) next to the data label.

See Also

Help

Adding data labels

Changing data labels

Changing number formats for chart values

Changing the font and alignment of chart text

Deleting data labels, titles, legends, or gridlines

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Legend Command (Insert Menu)

Legend button

Adds a legend to the right of the plot area and resizes the plot area to accommodate the legend. The Legend button is on the Chart toolbar. If the chart already has a legend, clicking the Legend button removes it.

See Also

Help

Adding a legend

Deleting data labels, titles, legends, or gridlines

Formatting legend entries and keys

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Moving and sizing the legend

Placement Tab, Selected Legend Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Gridlines Command (Insert Menu)

Horizontal Gridlines button

Vertical Gridlines button

Controls whether major and minor gridlines are visible on the active chart. The Horizontal Gridlines button is on the Chart toolbar; the Vertical Gridlines button is in the Charting category. Both buttons toggle only major gridlines on and off.

Gridlines extend from a chart axis across the plot area.

Major gridlines are aligned with major tick-mark intervals.

Minor gridlines are aligned with minor tick-mark intervals.

To control spacing of gridlines, double-click the gridlines, select the Scale tab, and then make the changes you want.

Major Gridlines

Displays or removes major gridlines from the appropriate axis.

Minor Gridlines

Displays or removes minor gridlines from the appropriate axis.

2-D Walls And Gridlines

For 3-D bar charts and 3-D column charts, changes walls and gridlines so that they appear two dimensional.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Changing a 3-D chart's depth and width

Deleting data labels, titles, legends, or gridlines

Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart


Trendline Command (Insert Menu)

Displays two tabs in the dialog box: Type tab and Options tab. Both tabs are documented below.

These options appear on the Type tab

Adds trendlines to or changes trendline type associated with data series in area, bar, column, line, and xy (scatter) chart type group.

Cannot add trendlines to 3-D, radar, pie, or doughnut charts.

Trend/Regression Type

Specifies the type of trendline.

Linear

Polynomial Order. The highest order, expressed as an integer between 2 and 6.

Logarithmic

Exponential

Power

Moving Average Period. The number of periods used to calculate the moving average.

These options appear on the Options tab

Displays the various options with which trendlines can be modified.

Trendline Name

Provides a name for the trendline; it is displayed in the legend.

Automatic

Microsoft Excel names the trendline based on the type selected and the series it is associated with. For example, if a linear trendline is added to the third data series in a chart type group, it displays the name Linear (Series 3).

Custom

Type a name of your choice, up to 256 characters.

Forecast

Available only for regression types (not for moving average).

Forward

The number of periods (units for xy charts) the trendline projects into the future or away from the y-axis.

Backward

The number of periods (units for xy charts) the trendline projects into the past or toward the y-axis.

Set Intercept

Available only for some regression types. The point at which the trendline meets the y-axis.

Display Equation On Chart

Displays the trendline's regression equation in the trendline label on the chart.

Display R-Squared On Chart

Displays the trendline's R-squared value in the trendline label on the chart.

See Also

Help

Adding a trendline to a data series

Deleting a trendline

Formatting a trendline

Modifying trendline settings

Overview of Using an Analysis Tool

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


New Data Command (Insert Menu)

Adds selected data series or data points to a chart.

Range

Adds the range of cells you select in the worksheet, including any row or column labels, to your selected chart. You can either type the range you want or, with the New Data dialog box open, switch to your worksheet and select the data you want. Microsoft Excel places that data in the Range box.

See Also

Help

Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

Adding data series or data points to an embedded chart

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu for Charts)

User's Guide

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"


Name Conflict Dialog Box

Appears if you try to use a name that resembles a reference, or when a name contained in a formula copied from another workbook conflicts with an existing name. For example, if a sheet is set to display A1 reference style, "A13" is not a valid name; if a sheet is set to display R1C1 reference style, "R3C5" is not a valid name.

Old Name

Displays the conflicting name.

Refers To

Displays the definition of the conflicting name.

New Name

Type a valid name. The new name cannot resemble a reference or an existing name.

See Also

Help

Define Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Changing general Microsoft Excel settings

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Picture Command (Insert Menu)

Opens the Picture dialog box, in which you can insert a picture from a graphics file. In the Picture dialog box, you can search for a variety of graphics file formats on your computer or on a network.

Network

Opens the Connect Network Drive dialog box, in which you can search network drives for graphics.

Find File

Opens the Find File dialog box, in which you can search for graphics files using criteria you specify.

Preview Picture

Shows you what a picture looks like before you insert it.

See Also

Help

About Graphic Objects

Importing an entire graphics file

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Macro Command (Insert Menu)

Inserts a new Visual Basic module, dialog sheet, or Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro sheet into your workbook.

Module Command

Insert Module button

Inserts a new module to the left of the selected sheet. Clicking the Insert Module button inserts a module into the active workbook; if no workbook exists, clicking the button creates one. The Insert Module button is in the File category.

Dialog Command

Insert Dialog Button

Inserts a new dialog sheet to the left of the selected sheet.

MS Excel 4.0 Macro Command

Insert MS Excel 4.0 Macro button

Inserts a new macro sheet to the left of the selected sheet in the active workbook. Clicking the Insert Microsoft Excel 4.0 Macro button creates one.

Shortcut:	CTRL+F11

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Inserting a new sheet based on an autotemplate

Inserting sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Object Command (Insert Menu)

Opens the Object dialog box, which has two tabs: Create New and Create From File. Create New allows you to insert an object from another application. Create From File inserts the contents of a file into your document so you can edit the material later using the application in which it was created.

See Also

Help

Create From File Tab, Object Command (Insert Menu)

Create New Tab, Object Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Create New Tab, Object Command (Insert Menu)

Use the Create New tab to insert an object from another application into a worksheet.

Object Type

Lists the types of objects you can insert into a worksheet.

Result

Describes the object selected in the Object Type box and displays the icon that appears on the worksheet when the object is inserted.

Display As Icon

When selected, displays inserted objects as icons.

Change Icon

Changes the icon that appears on the worksheet when an object is inserted. Appears only when Display As Icon is selected.

See Also

Help

Create From File Tab, Object Command (Insert Menu)

Object Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Create From File Tab, Object Command (Insert Menu)

Use the Create From File tab to insert the contents of a file into your document so you can edit the material later using the application in which it was created.

Network

Opens the Connect Network Drive dialog box, in which you can search network drives for files to insert.

Find File

Opens the Find File dialog box, in which you can search for files using criteria you specify.

Result

Describes the file selected in the File Name box and displays the icon that appears on the worksheet when an object is inserted.

Link To File

When selected, creates a link to the file. When the data in the source file changes, the inserted object reflects those changes.

Display As Icon

When selected, displays inserted objects as icons.

Change Icon

Changes the icon that appears on the worksheet when an object is inserted. Appears only when Display As Icon is selected.

See Also

Help

Create New Tab, Object Command (Insert Menu)

Object Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Axes Command (Insert Menu)

Controls whether axes are visible on the active chart for the primary and secondary axis.

You can display or hide any available axis.

If a 3-D chart is active, the displayed options include Category (X) Axis, Series (Y) Axis, and Value (Z) Axis under Primary Axis.

If you plotted data for a chart type group along a secondary axis, additional options are included under Secondary Axis.

See Also

Help

Changing the category or series axis scale

Changing the value axis scale

Displaying or hiding axes

Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

User's Guide

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 17, "Changing Data in a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart


Error Bars Command (Insert Menu)

Adds error bars to and modifies those associated with data series in area, bar, column, line, and xy (scatter) chart groups. Cannot add error bars to 3-D, radar, pie, or doughnut charts.

Category

For area, bar, column, and line charts, only y error bars are available.

For xy charts, both x error bars and y error bars are available. Displays error bars for either one or both axes.

Display

Displays both plus and minus error bars (the default), plus bars only, minus bars only, or no error bars at all.

Error Amount

Fixed Value

A constant value used as the error amount for all data points.

Percentage

A percentage value, to be calculated from each data point to be used as the error amount.

Standard Deviations

A number of standard deviations from the mean of plotted values to be used as the error amount.

Standard Error

Uses the standard error of the plotted values as the error amount for each data point.

Custom

A worksheet range containing the same number of values as there are data points in the series. Each value is a custom amount for the corresponding data point. An array notation (for example, {4, 3.75, 3.25, 2.5}) may be used. Enter values for both plus and minus, or under Display, select the Both check box to apply your entry to both the plus and minus error bar.

See Also

Help

Adding error bars to a data series

Deleting error bars

Formatting error bars

Modifying error bar settings

Overview of Using an Analysis Tool

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Worksheet Command (Insert Menu)

Insert Worksheet button

Inserts a new worksheet to the left of the selected sheet tab. The Insert Worksheet button is in the File category.

If there is a sheet autotemplate in your startup directory or alternate startup directory, then it is inserted into the workbook. If there is no sheet autotemplate in your startup or alternate startup directory, then you can insert more than one new worksheet by selecting several adjacent sheets and choosing the Worksheet command.

Shortcut:	SHIFT+F11

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Inserting a new sheet based on an autotemplate

Inserting sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"


Chart Command (Insert Menu)

Creates either an embedded chart on a worksheet or a chart sheet in the workbook.

On This Sheet Command

Starts the ChartWizard, which guides you through the steps required to create a new chart.

When you choose the Finish button in the ChartWizard, Microsoft Excel finishes the chart for you and places an embedded chart on the active worksheet in your workbook.

Shortcut:	ChartWizard button

As New Sheet Command

Insert Chart Sheet button

Starts the ChartWizard, which guides you through the steps required to create a new chart. The Insert Chart Sheet button is in the File category.

When you choose the Finish button in the ChartWizard, Microsoft Excel finishes the chart for you and places the new chart sheet in the active workbook to the left of the worksheet it is based on.

As a shortcut, you can also press F11, which creates a chart sheet for you. However, if Microsoft Excel cannot determine how to create the chart based on the selected worksheet data, the ChartWizard is displayed.

See Also

Help

  ChartWizard Button

About the ChartWizard

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Creating a chart sheet in a workbook

Creating an embedded chart on a worksheet

Inserting a new sheet based on an autotemplate

What Is a Chart?

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"


File Command (Insert Menu for Modules)

Inserts a previously written text file containing Visual Basic code into the active module. The text file selected in the File Open dialog box will be inserted at the cursor. If code in the active module is selected when this command is chosen, the selected text is replaced with the inserted text.

See Also

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Testing and Debugging Your Code"


Custom Dialog Box

This is a custom dialog box. A Help topic can be written to go with it, but none has been provided for this dialog box. Please contact the provider of this Microsoft Excel custom application.

See Also

Help

Programming with Visual Basic


Keyboard Guide

For keyboards with only 10 function keys, use:

ALT+F1 for F11

ALT+F2 for F12

Microsoft Excel 4.0 and Microsoft Excel 5.0 Key Differences

Entering and Editing

Entering Data

Inserting, Deleting, Copying, and Moving

Working in Cells or the Formula Bar

Moving and Selecting

Moving and Selecting in Worksheets and Workbooks

Moving Within a Selection

Scrolling in a Workbook Window

Selecting Cells with Special Characteristics

Switching Windows

Working in Dialog Boxes

Formatting Data

Formatting Data

Displaying and Printing

Outlining

Printing and Print Previewing

Working with Charts

Selecting Chart Items

Working with Lists and Databases

Using a Data Form

Using AutoFilter

Using Pivot Tables

Using the PivotTable Wizard

Working with Page Fields in a Pivot Table

Grouping and Ungrouping Pivot Table Items

Choosing Menu Commands

Keys for Working in Menus

File Menu Command Keys

Edit Menu Command Keys

View Menu Command Keys

Insert Menu Command Keys

Format Menu Command Keys

Tools Menu Command Keys

Data Menu Command Keys

Window Menu Command Keys

Help Menu Command Keys

Special-Purpose Keys

Function Keys

Transition Navigation Keys

Accountant's Keypad


Microsoft Excel 4.0 and Microsoft Excel 5.0 Key Differences

New keyboard shortcuts have been added to Excel 5.0 for consistency with Microsoft Word. The following represents changes between Excel 4.0 and Excel 5.0.

F4	Repeat last action

F7	Check spelling

CTRL+F	Find

CTRL+H	Replace

SHIFT+F4	Find next

CTRL+SHIFT+F4	Find previous

CTRL+N	Open new workbook

CTRL+O	Open

CTRL+S	Save

CTRL+P	Print

CTRL+TAB	Next window

CTRL+SHIFT+TAB	Previous window

CTRL+PAGE DOWN	Moves to the next sheet in a workbook

CTRL+PAGE UP	Moves to the previous sheet in a workbook

CTRL+A	Select all


Keys for Entering Data

F2	Activates the cell and formula bar

ENTER	Carries out an action

ESC	Cancels an action

F4	Repeats the last action

CTRL+Z	Undoes the last action

CTRL+SHIFT+PLUS SIGN	Inserts blank cells

CTRL+MINUS SIGN	Deletes the selection

DEL	Clears the selection of formulas and data

CTRL+X	Cuts the selection

CTRL+C	Copies the selection

CTRL+V	Pastes the selection

BACKSPACE	Activates and clears the formula bar when a cell is selected, or deletes the preceding character in the cell or formula bar

SHIFT+F2	Edits a cell note

F3	Pastes a name into a formula

SHIFT+F3 	Displays the Function Wizard

CTRL+A	After typing a valid function name in a formula, displays step 2 of the Function Wizard

CTRL+SHIFT+A	After typing a valid function name in a formula, inserts the argument names and parentheses for the function

CTRL+F3	Defines a name

CTRL+SHIFT+F3	Creates names from cell text

F9 or CTRL+=	Calculates all sheets in all open workbooks

SHIFT+F9	Calculates the active sheet

ALT+=	Inserts the AutoSum formula

CTRL+SEMICOLON	Enters the date

CTRL+SHIFT+COLON	Enters the time

CTRL+D	Fills down

CTRL+R	Fills right

ENTER	Moves down through a selection

SHIFT+ENTER	Moves up through a selection

TAB	Moves right through a selection

SHIFT+TAB	Moves left through a selection

See Also

Help

Edit Menu Command Keys

Keys for Inserting, Deleting, Copying, and Moving

Keys for Moving Within a Selection

Keys for Working in Cells or the Formula Bar


Keys for Inserting, Deleting, Copying, and Moving

CTRL+X	Cuts the selection

CTRL+C	Copies the selection

CTRL+V	Pastes the selection

DEL	Clears the selection of formulas and data

CTRL+SHIFT+PLUS SIGN	Inserts blank cells

CTRL+MINUS SIGN	Deletes the selection

CTRL+Z	Undoes the last action

See Also

Help

Edit Menu Command Keys

Keys for Entering Data

Keys for Moving Within a Selection

Keys for Working in Cells or the Formula Bar


Keys for Working in Cells or the Formula Bar

F2	Activates the cell and formula bar

=	Starts a formula

DEL	Deletes the character to the right of the insertion point, or deletes the selection

BACKSPACE	Deletes the character to the left of the insertion point, or deletes the selection

CTRL+DEL	Deletes text to the end of the line

ESC	Cancels an entry in the cell or formula bar

ENTER	Completes the cell entry

ALT+ENTER	Inserts a carriage return

TAB	Completes the cell entry and moves to the next cell in the row or range

SHIFT+TAB	Completes the cell entry and moves to the previous cell in the row or range

CTRL+ALT+TAB	Inserts a tab

ARROW keys	Moves one character up, down, left, or right

HOME	Moves to the start of the line

CTRL+SEMICOLON	Inserts the date

CTRL+SHIFT+COLON	Inserts the time

CTRL+SHIFT+"	Copies the value from the cell above the active cell into the cell or formula bar

CTRL+`	Alternates between displaying values or formulas in cells

(single left quotation mark)

CTRL+' (apostrophe)	Copies the formula from the cell above the active cell into the cell or formula bar

CTRL+ENTER	Fills a selection of cells with the current entry

CTRL+SHIFT+ENTER	Enters the formula as an array formula

F4	Converts selected references from relative to absolute, from absolute to mixed, or from mixed back to relative

CTRL+A	After typing a valid function name in a formula, displays step 2 of the Function Wizard

CTRL+SHIFT+A	After typing a valid function name in a formula, inserts the argument names and parentheses for the function

See Also

Help

Edit Menu Command Keys

Keys for Entering Data

Keys for Inserting, Deleting, Copying, and Moving

Keys for Moving Within a Selection


Keys for Moving and Selecting in Worksheets and Workbooks

Arrow key	Moves by one cell in the direction of the arrow

SHIFT+ARROW key	Extends the selection by one cell

CTRL+UP ARROW or	Moves up or down to the edge of the current data region

CTRL+DOWN ARROW

CTRL+LEFT ARROW or	Moves left or right to the edge of the current data region

CTRL+RIGHT ARROW

CTRL+SHIFT+ARROW key	Extends the selection to the edge of the current data region in the direction of the arrow

TAB	Moves among the unlocked cells in a protected worksheet

HOME	Moves to the beginning of the row

SHIFT+HOME	Extends the selection to the beginning of the row.

CTRL+HOME	Moves to the beginning of the worksheet

CTRL+SHIFT+HOME	Extends the selection to the beginning of the worksheet

CTRL+END	Moves to the last cell in your worksheet (lower-right corner)

CTRL+SHIFT+END	Extends the selection to the last cell in your worksheet (lower-right corner)

CTRL+SPACEBAR	Selects the entire column

SHIFT+SPACEBAR	Selects the entire row

CTRL+A	Selects the entire worksheet

SHIFT+BACKSPACE	Collapses the selection to the active cell

PAGE DOWN	Moves down one screen

PAGE UP	Moves up one screen

ALT+PAGE DOWN	Moves right one screen

ALT+PAGE UP	Moves left one screen

CTRL+PAGE DOWN	Moves to the next sheet in the workbook

CTRL+PAGE UP	Moves to the previous sheet in the workbook

SHIFT+PAGE DOWN	Extends the selection down one screen

SHIFT+PAGE UP	Extends the selection up one screen

CTRL+SHIFT+*	Selects the current region

CTRL+SHIFT+SPACEBAR	With an object selected, selects all objects on a sheet

CTRL+6	Alternates between hiding objects, displaying objects, and displaying placeholders for objects

CTRL+7	Shows or hides the Standard toolbar

SCROLL LOCK	Turns scroll lock on or off

End Mode

END	Turns End mode on or off

END, ARROW key	Moves by one block of data within a row or column

END, SHIFT+ARROW key	Extends the selection to the end of the data block in the direction of the arrow

END, HOME	Moves to the last cell in your worksheet (lower-right corner)

END, SHIFT+HOME	Extends the selection to the last cell in your worksheet (lower-right corner)

END, ENTER *	Moves to the last cell in the current row

END, SHIFT+ENTER *	Extends the selection to the last cell in the current row

* Unavailable when you have selected the Transition Navigation Keys check box on the Transition tab in the Options dialog box (Tools menu).

With Scroll Lock On

UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW	Scrolls the screen up or down one row

LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW	Scrolls the screen left or right one column

HOME	Moves to the upper-left cell in the window

END	Moves to the lower-right cell in the window

SHIFT+HOME	Extends the selection to the upper-left cell in the window

SHIFT+END	Extends the selection to the lower-right cell in the window

See Also

Help

Keys for Scrolling in a Workbook Window

Selecting a cell or range of cells

Selecting an entire row or column or all cells on a sheet

Selecting nonadjacent cells or ranges

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Keys for Moving Within a Selection

ENTER *	Moves from top to bottom within the selection

SHIFT+ENTER *	Moves from bottom to top within the selection

TAB **	Moves from left to right within the selection

SHIFT+TAB **	Moves from right to left within the selection

CTRL+PERIOD	Moves clockwise to the next corner of the selection

* If the selection consists of a single row, then pressing ENTER or SHIFT+ENTER moves the active cell right one cell or left one cell, respectively.

** If the selection consists of a single column, then pressing TAB or SHIFT+TAB moves the active cell down one cell or up one cell, respectively.

Within Nonadjacent Selections

CTRL+ALT+RIGHT ARROW	Moves right between nonadjacent selections

CTRL+ALT+LEFT ARROW	Moves left between nonadjacent selections

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Keys for Scrolling in a Workbook Window

PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN	Moves up or down one screen

ALT+PAGE DOWN	Moves right one screen

ALT+PAGE UP	Moves left one screen

CTRL+PAGE UP	Moves to the previous sheet in the workbook

CTRL+PAGE DOWN	Moves to the next sheet in the workbook

CTRL+F6 or CTRL+TAB	Displays the next window

CTRL+SHIFT+F6 or	Displays the previous window

CTRL+SHIFT+TAB

CTRL+BACKSPACE	Scrolls to display the active cell

SCROLL LOCK	Turns scroll lock on or off

With Scroll Lock On

UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW	Scrolls the screen up or down one row

LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW	Scrolls the screen left or right one column


Keys for Selecting Cells with Special Characteristics

CTRL+SHIFT+?	Selects all cells that contain a note.

CTRL+SHIFT+*	Selects a rectangular range of cells around the active cell. The range selected is an area enclosed by any combination of blank rows and blank columns.

CTRL+/	Selects the entire array, if any, to which the active cell belongs.

CTRL+\	Selects cells whose contents are different from the comparison cell in each row. For each row, the comparison cell is in the same column as the active cell.

CTRL+SHIFT+	Selects cells whose contents are different from the comparison cell in each column. For each column, the comparison cell is in the same row as the active cell.

CTRL+[	Selects only cells directly referred to by formulas in the selection.

CTRL+SHIFT+{	Selects all cells directly or indirectly referred to by formulas in the selection.

CTRL+]	Selects only cells with formulas that refer directly to the active cell.

CTRL+SHIFT+}	Selects all cells within formulas that directly or indirectly refer to the active cell.

ALT+SEMICOLON	Selects only visible cells in the current selection

See Also

Help

Finding cells referred to by formulas in selected cells (precedents)

Finding cells that don't fit the pattern in a row or column

Finding cells with formulas that refer to selected cells (dependents)

Overview of Using Go To Special to Find Specific Cells

Selecting cells with common types of contents

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Keys for Switching Windows

For Applications

ALT+ESC	Next application

ALT+SHIFT+ESC	Previous application

ALT+TAB	Next Windows application

ALT+SHIFT+TAB	Previous Windows application

CTRL+ESC	Task List dialog box

For Workbooks

CTRL+F4	Closes window

CTRL+F5	Restores window size

CTRL+F6 or CTRL+TAB	Next window

CTRL+SHIFT+F6 or	Previous window

CTRL+SHIFT+TAB

CTRL+F7	Move command (Control menu)

CTRL+F8	Size command (Control menu)

CTRL+F9	Minimizes window

CTRL+F10	Maximizes window

CTRL+PAGE DOWN	Moves to the next sheet in the workbook

CTRL+PAGE UP	Moves to the previous sheet in the workbook


Keys for Working in Dialog Boxes

CTRL+TAB or	Selects the tab to the right in a tab dialog boxCTRL+PAGE DOWN

CTRL+SHIFT+TAB or 	Selects the tab to the left in a tab dialog box

CTRL+PAGE UP

TAB	Moves to the next list box, text box, check box, command button, or group of option buttons

SHIFT+TAB	Moves to the previous list box, text box, check box, command button, or group of option buttons

ARROW key	Moves within the active list box or group of option buttons

SPACEBAR	Selects the active command button or checkbox

Letter key	Moves to the next item beginning with that letter in an active list box

ALT+letter key	Selects the item with that underlined letter

ALT+DOWN ARROW	Expands a dropdown list box

ESC	Collapses an expanded dropdown list box

ENTER	Chooses the default command button

ESC	Cancels the command and closes the dialog box

Within an Edit Box

HOME or END	Moves to the beginning or end of the entry

LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW	Moves one character left or one character right

SHIFT+HOME	Selects from the cursor to the beginning of the entry

SHIFT+END	Selects from the cursor to the end of the entry

SHIFT+LEFT ARROW	Selects the character to the left of the cursor

SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW	Selects the character to the right of the cursor

See Also

Help

Choosing dialog box options

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Keys for Formatting Data

ALT+' (apostrophe)	Display the style dialog box

CTRL+SHIFT+~	Apply the general number format

CTRL+SHIFT+$	Apply the currency format with two decimal places (negative numbers appear in parentheses)

CTRL+SHIFT+%	Apply the percentage format with no decimal places

CTRL+SHIFT+^	Apply the exponential number format with two decimal places

CTRL+SHIFT+#	Apply the date format with day, month, and year

CTRL+SHIFT+@	Apply the time format with the hour and minute, and indicate A.M. or P.M.

CTRL+SHIFT+!	Apply the two-decimal-place format with commas

CTRL+SHIFT+&	Apply the outline border

CTRL+SHIFT+_	Remove all borders

CTRL+B	Apply or remove bold

CTRL+I	Apply or remove italic

CTRL+U	Apply or remove underline

CTRL+5	Apply or remove strikethrough

CTRL+9	Hide rows

CTRL+SHIFT+(	Unhide rows

CTRL+0 (zero)	Hide columns

CTRL+SHIFT+) 	Unhide columns

See Also

Help

  Bold Button

  Borders Button

Adding borders

Assigning a number, date, or time format

Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Hiding and unhiding a row or column

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Keys for Outlining

ALT+SHIFT+LEFT ARROW	Ungroups a row or a column

ALT+SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW	Groups a row or a column

CTRL+8	Displays or hides the outline symbols

CTRL+9	Hides selected rows

CTRL+SHIFT+(	Unhides selected rows

CTRL+0 (zero)	Hides selected columns

CTRL+SHIFT+)	Unhides selected columns

See Also

Help

Group Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Outline Symbols

Ungroup Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Keys for Printing and Print Previewing

CTRL+P	Displays the Print dialog box

While In Print Preview

ARROW keys	Moves around page when zoomed in

UP ARROW, DOWN ARROW	Moves by one page when zoomed out

PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN	Moves by one page when zoomed out

Moves around page when zoomed in

CTRL+UP ARROW or	Moves to first page when zoomed out

CTRL+LEFT ARROW

CTRL+DOWN ARROW or	Moves to last page when zoomed out

CTRL+RIGHT ARROW


Keys for Selecting Chart Items

Some items, such as data series and data labels, are grouped together. First select the entire group, and then select the individual item within the group.

DOWN ARROW	Selects the previous group of items

UP ARROW	Selects the next group of items

RIGHT ARROW	Selects the next item within the group

LEFT ARROW	Selects the previous item within the group

See Also

Help

Activating a chart

Creating a Chart Sheet in a Workbook

Selecting items in a chart with the keyboard

Selecting items in a chart with the mouse

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"


Keys for Using a Data Form

ALT+letter key	Selects the field or command button that contains the underlined letter

DOWN ARROW	Moves to the same field in the next record

UP ARROW	Moves to the same field in the previous record

TAB	Moves to the next field that you can edit in the record

SHIFT+TAB 	Moves to the previous field that you can edit in the record

ENTER	Moves to the first field in the next record

SHIFT+ENTER	Moves to the first field in the previous record

PAGE DOWN	Moves to the same field 10 records forward

PAGE UP	Moves to the same field 10 records back

CTRL+PAGE DOWN	Moves to the new record

CTRL+PAGE UP	Moves to the first record

HOME or END	Moves to the beginning or end of a field

LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW	Moves one character left or one character right within a field

SHIFT+HOME	Selects from the cursor to the beginning of a field

SHIFT+END	Selects from the cursor to the end of a field

SHIFT+LEFT ARROW	Selects the character to the left of the cursor

SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW	Selects the character to the right of the cursor

See Also

Help

Adding a record by using a data form

Browsing through a list by using a data form

Deleting a record by using a data form

Editing a record by using a data form

Form Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 20, "Using a List to Organize Data"


Keys for Using AutoFilter

ALT+DOWN ARROW	Displays the drop-down list for the selected column label

ALT+UP ARROW	Closes the drop-down list for the selected column label

UP ARROW	Selects the previous item in the list

DOWN ARROW	Selects the next item in the list

HOME	Selects the first item in the list (All)

END	Selects the last item in the list (NonBlanks)

ENTER	Filters the worksheet list using the selected item

See Also

Help

AutoFilter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Filtering a list using AutoFilter

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Keys for Using the PivotTable Wizard

UP or	In Step 3 of the PivotTable Wizard, selects the next or previous field button in the list

DOWN ARROW

LEFT or	In Step 3 of the PivotTable Wizard, selects the field button to the right or the field button to the left in a multicolumn field button list

RIGHT ARROW

ALT+P	In Step 3 of the PivotTable Wizard, moves selected field into the Page area

ALT+R	In Step 3 of the PivotTable Wizard, moves the selected field into the Row area

ALT+C	In Step 3 of the PivotTable Wizard, moves the selected field into the Column area

ALT+D	In Step 3 of the PivotTable Wizard, moves the selected field into the Data area

ALT+L	In Step 3 of the PivotTable Wizard, displays the PivotTable Field dialog box

See Also

Help

Adding a field to a pivot table

Creating a pivot table

PivotTable Command (Data Menu)

Removing a data field from a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Keys for Working with Page Fields in a Pivot Table

ALT+DOWN ARROW	Displays the page field drop-down list

ALT+UP ARROW	Closes the page field drop-down list

UP ARROW	Selects the previous item in the list

DOWN ARROW	Selects the next item in the list

HOME	Moves the focus to the first visible item in the list

END	Moves the focus to the last visible item in the list

ENTER	Displays the selected item

See Also

Help

Displaying pages in a pivot table

Showing combined data for all items in a page field

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Keys for Grouping and Ungrouping Pivot Table Items

ALT+SHIFT+LEFT ARROW	Ungroups selected pivot table items

ALT+SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW	Groups selected pivot table items

See Also

Help

Grouping dates into ranges in a pivot table

Grouping items in a page field

Grouping numeric items into ranges in a pivot table

Grouping selected items in a pivot table field

Ungrouping date items in a pivot table

Ungrouping items in a pivot table

Ungrouping numeric items in a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Keys for Working in Menus

ALT or F10	Activates the menu bar

SHIFT+F10	Activates the shortcut menu

ESC	Cancels the shortcut menu

ALT+BACKSPACE or	Undoes the last command

CTRL+Z

F4	Repeats the last command, if applicable

When Menu Bar Is Active

ESC	Cancels the menu

SPACEBAR	Displays the Microsoft Excel Control menu

HYPHEN	Displays the workbook Control menu

Letter key	Selects the menu that contains the underlined letter

LEFT or RIGHT ARROW	Selects the menu to the left or right

DOWN or UP ARROW	Selects the next or previous command on the menu

With Menu Displayed

Letter key	Chooses the menu command that contains the underlined letter

ENTER	Chooses the selected command

DOWN or UP ARROW	Selects the next or previous command on the menu

LEFT or RIGHT ARROW	With a submenu displayed, toggles selection between main menu and submenu

See Also

Help

Choosing a menu bar command

Choosing a shortcut menu command

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


File Menu Command Keys

CTRL+N	New workbook

CTRL+O	Open

CTRL+S	Save

F12	Save As

CTRL+P	Print

ALT+F4	Closes Microsoft Excel

Note  To choose any File menu command with the keyboard, press ALT+F and the underlined letter key.

See Also

Help

Choosing a menu bar command

Choosing a shortcut menu command


Edit Menu Command Keys

CTRL+Z	Undo

F4	Repeat

CTRL+X	Cut

CTRL+C	Copy

CTRL+V	Paste

CTRL+D	Fill Down

CTRL+R	Fill Right

DEL	Clear Contents (in worksheets)

DEL	Clears the selected item in a chart

CTRL+MINUS SIGN	Deletes the selection

CTRL+F	Displays the Find dialog box

CTRL+H	Displays the Replace dialog box

SHIFT+F4	Find Next

CTRL+SHIFT+F4	Find Previous

F5	Go To

Note  To choose any Edit menu command with the keyboard, press ALT+E and the underlined letter key.

See Also

Help

Choosing a menu bar command

Choosing a shortcut menu command


View Menu Command Keys

To choose any View menu command with the keyboard, press ALT+V and the underlined letter key.

See Also

Help

Choosing a menu bar command

Choosing a shortcut menu command


Insert Menu Command Keys

CTRL+SHIFT+PLUS SIGN	Displays Insert dialog box

SHIFT+F11	Inserts new worksheet

F11	Inserts new chart sheet

CTRL+F11	Inserts new Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro sheet

CTRL+F3	Displays Define Name dialog box

F3	Displays the Paste Name dialog box if there are names defined

SHIFT+CTRL+F3	Displays Create Names dialog box

Note  To choose any Insert menu command with the keyboard, press ALT+I and the underlined letter key.

See Also

Help

Choosing a menu bar command

Choosing a shortcut menu command


Format Menu Command Keys

CTRL+1	Format Cells tabbed dialog box

CTRL+9	Hide rows

CTRL+SHIFT+(	Unhide rows

CTRL+0 (zero)	Hide columns

CTRL+SHIFT+) 	Unhide columns

ALT+' (apostrophe)	Display the style dialog box

Note  To choose any Format menu command with the keyboard, press ALT+O and the underlined letter key.

See Also

Help

Choosing a menu bar command

Choosing a shortcut menu command


Tools Menu Command Keys

F7	Checks spelling

Note  To choose any Tools menu command with the keyboard, press ALT+T and the underlined letter key.

See Also

Help

Choosing a menu bar command

Choosing a shortcut menu command


Data Menu Command Keys

ALT+SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW	Groups a row or a column

ALT+SHIFT+LEFT ARROW	Ungroups a row or a column

Note  To choose any Data menu command with the keyboard, press ALT+D and the underlined letter key.

See Also

Help

Choosing a menu bar command

Choosing a shortcut menu command


Window Menu Command Keys

CTRL+F6	Next window

CTRL+SHIFT+F6	Previous window

F6	Next pane

SHIFT+F6	Previous pane

Note  To choose any Window menu command with the keyboard, press ALT+W and the underlined letter key.

See Also

Help

Choosing a menu bar command

Choosing a shortcut menu command


Help Menu Command Keys

F1	Help Contents screen

Note  To choose any Help menu command with the keyboard, press ALT+H and the underlined letter key.

See Also

Help

Choosing a menu bar command


Function Keys

F1	Help

SHIFT+F1	Context-sensitive Help

F2	Activates the formula bar

SHIFT+F2	Note command (Insert menu)

CTRL+F2	Displays the Info window

F3	Displays the Paste Name dialog box if there are names defined

SHIFT+F3	Displays the Function Wizard

CTRL+F3	Define command (Insert menu, Name submenu)

CTRL+SHIFT+F3	Create command (Insert menu, Name submenu)

F4	When you are editing a formula, converts a reference from relative to absolute, from absolute to mixed, or from mixed back to relative

F4	Repeats the last action

CTRL+F4	Closes the window

ALT+F4	Closes Microsoft Excel

F5	Go To command (Edit menu)

CTRL+F5	Restores window size

F6	Next pane

SHIFT+F6	Previous pane

CTRL+F6	Next window

CTRL+SHIFT+F6	Previous window

F7	Checks spelling

CTRL+F7	Move command (document Control menu)

F8	Turns Extend mode on or off

SHIFT+F8	Turns Add mode on or off

CTRL+F8	Size command (document Control menu)

F9	Calculates all sheets in all open workbooks

SHIFT+F9	Calculates the active sheet

CTRL+F9	Minimizes the workbook

F10 *	Activates the menu bar

SHIFT+F10	Activates the shortcut menu

CTRL+F10	Maximizes the workbook

F11	Inserts new chart sheet

SHIFT+F11	Inserts new worksheet

CTRL+F11	Inserts new Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro sheet

F12	Save As command (File menu)

SHIFT+F12	Save command (File menu)

CTRL+F12	Open command (File menu)

CTRL+SHIFT+F12	Print command (File menu)

* Unavailable when you have selected the Transition Navigation Keys check box on the Transition tab, which you access by choosing the Options command from the Tools menu.


Transition Navigation Keys

When you choose the Options command from the Tools menu and select the Transition Navigation Keys check box on the Transition tab, the following keyboard shortcuts are in effect.

Navigation Keys

CTRL+LEFT ARROW	Left one page

CTRL+RIGHT ARROW	Right one page

CTRL+PAGE UP	In a workbook, next sheet

CTRL+PAGE DOWN	In a workbook, previous sheet

TAB	Right one page

SHIFT+TAB	Left one page

HOME	Selects cell in the upper-left corner of the sheet

Function Keys

F5	Go To Command (Edit Menu)

F6	Next window of the same workbook

SHIFT+F6	Previous pane of the same window

In Data Find Mode

LEFT ARROW	Moves to the previous field of the current record

RIGHT ARROW	Moves to the next field of the current record

HOME	Moves to the first record

END	Moves to the last record

Text-Alignment Prefix Characters

When the Transition Navigation Keys check box is selected, use the following text-alignment prefix characters to assign alignment formats as you enter data into cells.

' (apostrophe)	Aligns data in the cell to the left

" (double quotation mark)	Aligns data in the cell to the right

^ (caret)	Centers data in the cell

\ (backslash)	Repeats characters across the cell

When in Point mode, hidden columns unhide themselves temporarily.


Accountant's Keypad

When you enter monetary figures on a worksheet, you usually have to type decimal points to indicate dollars and cents. In Fixed Decimal mode, Microsoft Excel automatically enters the decimal places for you. For example, if you have specified two decimal places and you type 732, Microsoft Excel enters the number as 7.32. You can override the automatic decimal by including a decimal point when you type a number. To turn on Fix mode, choose the Options command from the Tools menu and select the Edit tab. Select the Fixed Decimal check box. The word "FIX" appears at the far right in the status bar.

See Also

Help

Entering numbers with fixed decimal places


Consolidating Data

Overview of Consolidating Data

Adding a source area to an existing consolidation

Changing the reference to a source area

Consolidating data by category

Consolidating data by position

Creating links to source data

Deleting a reference to a source area


Overview of Consolidating Data

You can summarize the data from one or more source areas by consolidating it. Microsoft Excel gives you two methods for consolidating data:

By position, when your source areas are identical in layout

By category, when your source areas are laid out differently

To consolidate data, first you define a destination area for the summarized information. The destination can be on the same worksheet as the source data, or it can be on another worksheet.

Data labels in the source areas are not copied to the destination area when you consolidate by position. If you want labels to appear on the destination worksheet, type them. Then select a destination area below the column labels and to the right of the row labels that you typed on the destination worksheet.

Second, you define the sources of the data you want to summarize. A source area definition can take any of the following forms.

Use this form	When

Cell references	Sources and destination are on the same worksheet.
Sheet and cell references	Sources and destination are on different worksheets.
Book, sheet, and cell references	Sources and destination are in different workbooks.
Full path, book, sheet, and cell references	Sources and destination are in different workbooks in different locations on disk.
Name of a named area	Source area is a named area.
Once you consolidate data, you can name the cell range reference of a source area so that you can continue to consolidate the same data even if the source data moves to a different location. You can also expand the consolidation to include additional source areas or reduce the scope of the consolidation by deleting source areas.

See Also

Help

Adding a source area to an existing consolidation

Changing the reference to a source area

Consolidate Command (Data Menu)

Consolidating data by category

Consolidating data by position

Creating links to source data

Deleting a reference to a source area

Naming a cell, range, or formula

User's Guide

Chapter 26, "Consolidating Data"


Consolidating data by category

Overview

1.	Select the destination area for the consolidated data. The destination area can be on the same worksheet as the source data, or it can be on a separate worksheet.

If you typed category labels (in the form of row or column headings) in the destination area, include these cells when you select the destination area.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Consolidate.

3.	In the Function box, select the summary function you want Microsoft Excel to use to consolidate the data. The SUM function is the default.

4.	In the Reference box, define the source areas you want to consolidate.

To enter a source definition without typing, select the Reference box and then select the source area on the worksheet, including the category labels you want to use. Cell references for the range appear in the Reference box.

If the worksheet is not open, choose the Browse button and select the worksheet that contains the source area. When you choose the OK button, Microsoft Excel inserts the filename and an exclamation point (!) in the Reference box. Type the cell reference or name for the source area.

You can also type the complete path, workbook name, and sheet name for the source area. Then type an exclamation point (!) following the sheet name, and type the cell reference or name of the source area.

5.	Choose the Add button.

6.	Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all the source areas you want to consolidate.

7.	If there are category labels in the top row of the source areas, select the Top Row check box under Use Labels In.

If there are category labels in the left column of the source areas, select the Left Column check box under Use Labels In.

You can select both check boxes for a single consolidation. If only one of the check boxes is selected, Microsoft Excel consolidates by category for the check box that is selected and by position for the check box that is cleared.

8.	Select the Create Links To Source Data check box if you want Microsoft Excel to update your consolidation table automatically when your source data changes. Otherwise, you must choose the Consolidate command each time you update the source data.

Note  You cannot create links when source and destination areas are on the same sheet.

9.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Consolidate Command (Data Menu)

Consolidating data by position

User's Guide

Chapter 26, "Consolidating Data"


Consolidating data by position

Overview

Make sure the data in all source areas is arranged identically. The values you want to consolidate from each source area must be in the same relative position within the selected source area.

1.	Select the destination area for the consolidated data.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Consolidate.

3.	In the Function box, select the summary function you want Microsoft Excel to use to consolidate the data. The SUM function is the default.

4.	In the Reference box, enter definitions of the source areas you want to consolidate.

To enter a source definition without typing, select the Reference box and then select the source area on the worksheet. Cell references for the range appear in the Reference box.

If the worksheet is not open, choose the Browse button and select the worksheet that contains the source area. When you choose the OK button, Microsoft Excel inserts the filename and an exclamation point (!) in the Reference box. Type the cell reference or name for the source area.

You can also type the complete path, workbook name, and sheet name for the source area. Then type an exclamation point (!) following the sheet name, and type the cell reference or name of the source area.

5.	Choose the Add button.

6.	Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all the source areas you want to consolidate.

7.	Select the Create Links To Source Data check box if you want Microsoft Excel to update your consolidation table automatically when your source data changes. Otherwise, you must choose the Consolidate command each time you update the source data.

Note  You cannot create links when source and destination areas are on the same sheet.

8.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Consolidate Command (Data Menu)

Consolidating data by category

User's Guide

Chapter 26, "Consolidating Data"


Creating links to source data

Overview

You can create links to source data for an existing consolidation table, or you can create links when you create a consolidation table.

The following procedure assumes a consolidation table exists.

Important  If the worksheet containing your destination area also contains an outline or has been used previously for a linked consolidation, do not create a new linked consolidation without first removing the outline and consolidation linking formulas. If you do not remove the existing outline and linking formulas, your destination worksheet can be disrupted. To check the consolidation before creating the links, perform an unlinked consolidation first, and then perform the linked consolidation. You cannot use the Undo command on a consolidation in which you create links.

1.	From the Data menu, choose Consolidate.

2.	Select the Create Links To Source Data check box.

3.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel consolidates data from the source areas and adds outline rows and columns as necessary.

See Also

Help

Consolidate Command (Data Menu)

Removing an outline

User's Guide

Chapter 26, "Consolidating Data"


Changing the reference to a source area

Overview

You can adjust source areas and reconsolidate data in a destination area only if you did not create links to the source areas. If you created links to the source areas and you want to adjust the consolidation, delete the results of the consolidation and remove the outline before performing the following procedure.

1.	Select an existing destination area.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Consolidate.

3.	In the All References box, select the source area you want to change.

You can also select cells on an open worksheet or use the Browse button to select the reference.

4.	In the Reference box, edit the reference.

5.	Choose the Add button.

If you don't want to keep the old reference, choose the Delete button.

6.	To reconsolidate using the new source area, choose the OK button.

To accept your changes and close the dialog box without reconsolidating the data, choose the Close button.

See Also

Help

Consolidate Command (Data Menu)

Creating links to source data

Removing an outline

User's Guide

Chapter 26, "Consolidating Data"


Adding a source area to an existing consolidation

Overview

You can adjust source areas and reconsolidate data in a destination area only if you did not create links to the source areas. If you created links to the source areas and you want to adjust the consolidation, delete the results of the consolidation and remove the outline before performing these procedures.

1.	Select an existing destination area.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Consolidate.

3.	Select the Reference box.

4.	If the worksheet containing the new source area is open, select the source area.

If the worksheet is not open, choose the Browse button and select the worksheet that contains the source area. When you choose the OK button, Microsoft Excel inserts the filename and an exclamation point (!) in the Reference box. Type the cell reference or name for the source area.

You can also type the complete path, workbook name, and sheet name for the source area. Then type an exclamation point (!) following the sheet name, and type the cell reference or name of the source area.

5.	Choose the Add button.

6.	To reconsolidate using the new source area, choose the OK button.

To accept your changes and close the dialog box without reconsolidating the data, choose the Close button.

See Also

Help

Consolidate Command (Data Menu)

Creating links to source data

Removing an outline

User's Guide

Chapter 26, "Consolidating Data"


Deleting a reference to a source area

Overview

You can adjust source areas and reconsolidate data in a destination area only if you did not create links to the source areas. If you created links to the source areas and you want to adjust the consolidation, delete the data and remove the outline before performing the following procedures.

1.	Select an existing destination area.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Consolidate.

3.	In the All References box, select the source area reference you want to delete.

4.	Choose the Delete button.

5.	To reconsolidate without the deleted source area, choose the OK button.

To accept your changes and close the dialog box without reconsolidating the data, choose the Close button.

See Also

Help

Consolidate Command (Data Menu)

Creating links to source data

Removing an outline

User's Guide

Chapter 26, "Consolidating Data"


Macro Interpreter for Lotus 1-2-3 Users

You can run the macros contained on your Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet by holding down CTRL and pressing the letter of the macro name. While your macro is running, the status bar displays MI (macro interpreter). If your macro contains a {?} command, the status bar displays MI Pause until you press ENTER.

Microsoft Excel recognizes all 1-2-3 file formats, but only fully runs macros that contain menu commands, @ functions, keywords, and advanced macro commands that are supported by Lotus 1-2-3 Release 2.01. Lotus 1-2-3 add-ins are not supported; remove any keystrokes or command names that attach or start a Lotus 1-2-3 add-in. Also, macros cannot end in a menu.

See Also

Help

Guidelines for Running Existing 1-2-3 Macros in Microsoft Excel

Running a 1-2-3 macro in Microsoft Excel

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"


Lotus 1-2-3 Prompt Dialog Box

The Lotus 1-2-3 macro you are running requires more information.

To continue

1.	Type the information in the box.

2.	Press ENTER.

If more than one box appears, you can move back through the boxes by pressing ESC. You cannot backtrack into the menu from which the prompt dialog box was displayed.

To stop the macro now

Press CTRL+BREAK.

You can move the dialog box by dragging its title bar with the mouse.


Lotus 1-2-3 Menu Dialog Box

The Lotus 1-2-3 macro you are running requires you to choose a menu item.

To choose a menu item

Double-click the item you want.

-or-

Press the first letter of the item you want.

To stop the macro now

Press CTRL+BREAK.

You can move the dialog box by dragging its title bar with the mouse.

Clicking the Cancel button has the same effect as pressing ESC.


Running a 1-2-3 macro in Microsoft Excel

1.	From the File menu, choose Open (ALT+F, O).

2.	In the List Files Of Type box, select Lotus 1-2-3 files.

3.	In the File Name box, select the 1-2-3 worksheet you want to open (ALT+N, TAB, DOWN ARROW), or type the complete filename.

4.	Click the OK button or press ENTER.

5.	Press CTRL and type the letter of the macro name.

Microsoft Excel runs your macro. While your macro is running, MI (Macro Interpreter) appears in the status bar. If your macro contains a {?} command, MI Pause appears in the status bar until you press ENTER. The macro then continues to run.

See Also

Help

Guidelines for Running Existing 1-2-3 Macros in Microsoft Excel


Guidelines for Running Existing 1-2-3 Macros in Microsoft Excel

Converting Lotus 1-2-3 Release 2.2 Macro Library Files

If you have 1-2-3 macros in 1-2-3 macro libraries (macros in 1-2-3 Release 2.2 MLB file format), convert the macro library files to a 1-2-3 WK1 format. Then open the worksheet in Microsoft Excel to run the macro.

Running Autoexec Macros

If you have a 1-2-3 autoexec macro (named \0) on your worksheet, the macro runs automatically when you open the worksheet in Microsoft Excel. To open a worksheet without running the autoexec macro, click the Open button or choose Open from the File menu, select the filename, and then hold down SHIFT and choose the OK button. If you have both a Microsoft Excel name Auto_Open that refers to a macro sheet and a \0 macro on the same worksheet, the Auto_Open macro runs first, and then the \0 macro runs.

1-2-3 Add-ins Are Not Supported

Be sure to remove any occurrence of keystrokes or command names that attach, start, or use a 1-2-3 add-in, such as the Allways add-in and its menu structure. You should therefore remove statements such as /a and {app1}.

1-2-3 Macros Cannot End in a Menu

When you run a 1-2-3 macro in Microsoft Excel, the 1-2-3 macro cannot end in a menu, such as the keystrokes /pp. If a macro does end in a menu, a message appears stating that macros cannot end in a menu. Then the macro terminates. The macro can, however, end in a prompt for more information, such as the keystrokes /ppr, so that you can specify the print range.

Getting Help Within Macro Prompts

When you run a 1-2-3 macro that contains a command for user input, such as /XN, /XL, {GETLABEL}, or {GETNUMBER}, Microsoft Excel displays a dialog box requesting the user input. Enter the information and then choose the OK button.

If a 1-2-3 macro contains custom menu commands, such as /XM, {MENUBRANCH}, or {MENUCALL}, a Menu dialog box appears displaying your menu choices.

To get Help with macro prompt dialog boxes, press F1.

Verifying Options Before Running 1-2-3 Macros

When you run a 1-2-3 macro, transition formula entry and transition navigation keys are temporarily turned on, and the Move Selection after Enter checkbox feature is temporarily cleared. Transition expression evaluation is not automatically turned on for you when you run a 1-2-3 macro. Although you should not have to do so, be sure that transition expression evaluation is turned on in the Transition tab in the Options dialog box, which appears by choosing Options from the Tools menu.

Adjusting Screen Size Before Running 1-2-3 Macros

For best visual results, you can maximize the Microsoft Excel window, as well as the active document window. Note that the {PGUP}, {PGDN}, {BIGRIGHT}, and {BIGLEFT} commands work with the current page size, not with the 20-row page size that is standard in 1-2-3. For example, if your macros depend on a 20-row page height, adjust the window size as needed before running the macro.

See Also

Help

Running a 1-2-3 macro in Microsoft Excel

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"


Macro Buttons Category

Insert MS Excel 4.0 Macro Button

Inserts a new Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro sheet to the left of the selected sheet in the active workbook. If no workbook exists, clicking the button creates one.

Insert Module Button

Inserts a Visual Basic module in the active workbook. If no workbook exists, clicking the button creates one.

Instant Watch Button

Displays the value of the selected Visual Basic expression.

Menu Editor Button

Displays the Menu Editor, so you can edit menus used with Visual Basic add-ins and procedures.

Object Browser Button

Displays the Object Browser dialog box, so you can browse all procedures, methods, properties, and objects available in the current workbook.

Paste Names Button

Displays the Paste Names dialog box so that you can insert a selected name into the formula bar.

Record Macro Button

Starts recording a new macro.

Resume Macro Button

Resumes running a macro when you click the button.

Run Macro Button

Runs a macro when you click the button.

Step Into Button

Runs the next line of code in the current Visual Basic procedure, stepping into other Visual Basic procedures when called.

Step Macro Button

Steps through the currently selected macro one line of code at a time. When a module sheet is active, opens the Debug window and steps through the currently active procedure. When a worksheet is active, displays the Macro dialog box with the list of available macros to step through using the Step button, and then steps through the selected macro in the Debug window. When a Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro is selected, displays the Single Step dialog box to step through the macro.

Step Over Button

Runs the next line of code in the current Visual Basic procedure, running other Visual Basic procedures when called without stepping into them.

Stop Macro Button

Stops a macro, if one is running. If the Macro Recorder is running, clicking this button stops the Macro Recorder.

Toggle Breakpoint Button

Sets or removes a breakpoint from a line of code in a Visual Basic procedure.

See Also

Help

Running a macro


Resume Macro Button

Causes a paused macro to resume. The button appears selected when Visual Basic is in break mode, or when a Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro is paused. Clicking the button resumes the macro.

The Resume Macro button is on the Visual Basic toolbar, which appears whenever you switch to a Visual Basic module.

See Also

Help

Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Testing and Debugging Your Code"


Step Macro Button

For Microsoft Excel 4.0 macros, clicking this button displays the Single Step dialog box so that you can step through the currently selected macro one cell at a time, starting at the active cell.

For Visual Basic procedures, clicking this button puts Visual Basic into break mode. The Debug window appears, so you can take advantage of the debugging tools.

The Step Macro button is in the Macro category.

See Also

Help

Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Testing and Debugging Your Code"


Stop Macro Button

Stops a macro, if one is running. If the Macro Recorder is running, clicking this button stops the Macro Recorder.

The Stop Macro button is on the Visual Basic toolbar, which appears whenever you switch to a Visual Basic module.

See Also

Help

Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"


Automating Repeated Tasks with Macros

Overview of Recording and Running a Macro

Recording a macro

Running a macro

Overview of Assigning a Macro to the Tools Menu, a Button, or a Graphic Object

Adding a macro to the Tools menu

Assigning a macro to a button on a sheet

Assigning a macro to an existing button on a toolbar

Assigning a macro to a custom button on a toolbar

Assigning a macro to a graphic object

Changing the macro assigned to a button or graphic object

Overview of Writing and Editing a Macro

Writing a macro

Editing a macro

Recording code into an existing macro


Overview of Recording and Running a Macro

With Microsoft Excel, you can record a macro, and then run it (play it back) -- a technique that can reduce many keyboard and mouse actions to a single command.  Consider recording a macro anytime you find yourself regularly typing the same keystrokes, choosing the same commands, or going through the same sequence of actions.

See Also

Help

Recording a macro

Running a macro

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"


Recording a macro

Overview

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Record Macro, and then choose Record New Macro.

2.	In the Macro Name box, type a name for the macro.

3.	In the Description box, type a description of the macro.

4.	To set options for the macro, choose the Options button, and then set any of the options.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	Carry out the actions that you want to record.

7.	Click the Stop Macro button.

You can also choose Record Macro from the Tools menu, and then choose Stop Recording.

See Also

Help

  Stop Macro Button

Record New Macro Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"


Running a macro

Overview

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Macro.

2.	In the Macro Name/Reference box, type or select a macro name.

3.	Choose the Run button.

See Also

Help

Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"


Overview of Assigning a Macro to the Tools Menu, a Button, or a Graphic Object

Once you record a macro, you can attach it to a menu item, a button, or a graphic object, making it as accessible and convenient as the built-in menu commands and buttons in Microsoft Excel.

A macro assigned to the Tools menu is always available. A macro assigned to a button on a sheet is available when you switch to the sheet. A macro assigned to a toolbar button is available when the toolbar is displayed.

When you assign your macro to a toolbar button, you usually use one of the unused buttons found in the Custom category. If you assign your macro to a built-in button that Microsoft Excel already uses, you override the button's normal function with that of your macro.

See Also

Help

Adding a macro to the Tools menu

Assigning a macro to a button on a sheet

Assigning a macro to a custom button on a toolbar

Assigning a macro to a graphic object

Assigning a macro to an existing button on a toolbar

Changing the macro assigned to a button or graphic object

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"


Adding a macro to the Tools menu

Overview

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Macro.

2.	In the Macro Name/Reference box, type or select a macro name.

3.	Choose the Options button.

4.	Under Assign To, select the Menu Item On Tools Menu check box, and then type the command name as you want it to appear on the Tools menu.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	Choose the Close button.

See Also

Help

Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"

Chapter 12, "Menus and Toolbars"


Assigning a macro to a button on a sheet

Overview

1.	Click the Create Button button on the Drawing toolbar.

2.	Point to where you want one corner of the button.

3.	Drag until the button is the size and shape you want.

When you release the mouse button, Microsoft Excel displays the Assign Macro dialog box.

4.	To assign an existing macro to the button, type or select the name of the macro in the Macro Name/Reference box, and then choose the OK button.

 - Or -

To assign a new macro to the button, choose the Record button, and then follow the steps for recording a macro.

See Also

Help

  Create Button Button

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Record Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Recording a macro

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"


Assigning a macro to an existing button on a toolbar

Overview

1.	From the View menu, choose Toolbars.

2.	Choose the Customize button.

The Customize dialog box appears, and the normal function of the built-in toolbar button is suspended.

3.	If the built-in button is currently displayed on a toolbar, click the button.

- Or -

If the built-in button is not displayed, select the category you want in the Categories box, and then drag the button to any visible toolbar.

4.	From the Tools menu, choose Assign Macro.

5.	To assign an existing macro to the built-in toolbar button, type or select the name of the macro in the Macro/Name Reference box , and then choose the OK button.

- Or -

To assign a new macro to the built-in toolbar button, choose the Record button, and then follow the steps for recording a macro.

6.	If necessary, choose the Close button to close the Customize dialog box.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Record Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Recording a macro

Toolbars Command (View Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"


Assigning a macro to a custom button on a toolbar

Overview

1.	From the View menu, choose Toolbars.

2.	To add the custom button to a new toolbar, select the text in the Toolbar Name box, type the name of the new toolbar, and then choose the New button.

- Or -

To add the custom button to an existing toolbar, choose the Customize button.

3.	In the Categories box, select Custom.

4.	Drag the custom button from the box to any visible toolbar.

The button is added wherever you position it on the toolbar, and the Assign Macro dialog box appears.

5.	To assign an existing macro to the custom toolbar button, select the name of the macro in the Macro/Name Reference box, and then choose the OK button.

- Or -

To assign a new macro to the custom toolbar button, choose the Record button, and then follow the steps for recording a macro.

6.	If necessary, choose the Close button to close the Customize dialog box.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Record Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Recording a macro

Toolbars Command (View Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"


Assigning a macro to a graphic object

Overview

1.	Click the graphic object to select it.

If the object is a worksheet button or already has a macro assigned to it, hold down CTRL and then click the object.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Assign Macro.

3.	To assign an existing macro to the graphic object, type or select the name of the macro in the Macro Name/Reference box, and then choose the OK button.

 - Or -

To assign a new macro to the graphic object, choose the Record button, and then follow the steps for recording a macro.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Record Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Recording a macro

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"


Changing the macro assigned to a button or graphic object

Overview

Note  The following procedure changes the macro assigned to a button or graphic object on a sheet. To change the macro assigned to a custom button on a toolbar, first choose the Toolbars command from the View menu and then choose the Customize button and then complete the following procedure.

1.	Hold down CTRL, and then select the button or graphic object.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Assign Macro.

3.	To assign an existing macro to the button or graphic object, type or select the name of the macro in the Macro Name/Reference box, and then choose the OK button.

 - Or -

To clear a macro assigned to the button or graphic object, delete the macro name from the Macro/Name Reference box, and then choose the OK button.

 - Or -

To assign a new macro to the button or graphic object, choose the Record button, and then follow the steps for recording a macro.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Record Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Recording a macro

Toolbars Command (View Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"


Macro

A series of commands that Microsoft Excel executes automatically. You create macros by recording them (you can also write them yourself).  When you play back a macro, it repeats the actions you performed while the Macro Recorder was on. A macro is also called a Sub procedure in Visual Basic.


Overview of Writing and Editing a Macro

The Macro Recorder creates a macro for you by observing your actions, converting those actions into Visual Basic code, and storing the code in a Visual Basic module in your workbook. However, you will often need to customize a recorded macro or create a new one yourself, since the Macro Recorder doesn't always record exactly what you want.

The steps you follow to edit an existing macro or write a new one are similar to those for creating a user-defined function. You can also use the Macro Recorder to record new code into an existing macro.

See Also

Help

Creating a user-defined function

Editing a macro

Recording code into an existing macro

Writing a macro

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 2, "Editing Recorded Macros"


Writing a macro

Overview

1.	To switch to a Visual Basic module in the active workbook, select its tab.

-- Or --

To create a new Visual Basic module, choose Macro from the Insert menu, and then choose Module.

2.	In the module, type Sub, followed by the macro name.

3.	Type the arguments, if any, enclosed in parentheses, separating arguments with a comma.

4.	Press ENTER.

5.	Type your Visual Basic code.

6.	Type End Sub, and then press ENTER.

See Also

Help

Creating a Procedure

Entering and Editing Code

Overview of Creating a User-Defined Function

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 4, "Introducing Visual Basic Procedures"


Editing a macro

Overview

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Macro.

2.	In the Macro Name/Reference box, type or select the name of the macro you want to display.

3.	Choose the Edit button.

4.	Move the insertion point and then type new code or delete existing code as necessary.

See Also

Help

Creating a Procedure

Entering and Editing Code

Overview of Creating a User-Defined Function

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 2, "Editing Recorded Macros"


Recording code into an existing macro

Overview

1.	Switch to the Visual Basic module containing your macro.

2.	Place the insertion point in the macro where you want to add code.

3.	From the Tools menu, choose Record Macro, and then choose Mark Position For Recording.

4.	Switch to the sheet from which you want to record the new tasks.

5.	From the Tools menu, choose Record Macro, and then choose Record At Mark.

6.	Perform the tasks you want to record.

7.	From the Tools menu, choose Record Macro, and then choose Stop Recording.

See Also

Help

Mark Position For Recording Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Overview of Recording and Running a Macro

Record At Mark Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 2, "Editing Recorded Macros"


Working in Workbooks

Overview of Managing Workbook Sheets

Inserting sheets

Copying sheets to other workbooks

Copying sheets within a workbook

Deleting sheets

Moving sheets to other workbooks

Moving sheets within a workbook

Renaming a sheet

Overview of Moving Around on Worksheets

Moving between sheets

Going to specific cells or ranges

Overview of Managing Workbook Windows

Displaying and closing new windows of a workbook

Arranging workbook windows

Minimizing and restoring windows

Arranging icons


Overview of Managing Workbook Sheets

The default workbook opens with 16 worksheets, named Sheet1 through Sheet16. The sheet names appear on tabs at the bottom of the workbook window. By clicking on the tabs you can move from sheet to sheet within a workbook. The tab of the active sheet is always bold.

A workbook can contain one sheet or as many as 255 sheets. You can:

Insert and delete sheets

Rename the sheets with names up to 31 characters in length

Copy or move sheets within the workbook, or to another workbook

Hide sheets within the workbook

If you point to a sheet tab and click the right mouse button, a shortcut menu of commands for sheets appears.

A workbook can have six different types of sheets:

Worksheet

Chart sheet

Visual Basic module

Dialog

Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro sheet

Microsoft Excel 4.0 international macro sheet

See Also

Help

Copying sheets to other workbooks

Copying sheets within a workbook

Deleting sheets

Inserting sheets

Moving sheets to other workbooks

Moving sheets within a workbook

Renaming a sheet

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Inserting sheets

Overview

To insert worksheets

1.	Select a sheet or sheets in the workbook.

The new sheet or sheets will be inserted to the left of the sheet tab you select.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Worksheet.

Shortcuts:	SHIFT+F11

Insert Worksheet button (File category)

To insert a chart sheet

1.	Select the range of data you want for your chart.

The new chart sheet will be inserted to the left of the active worksheet.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Chart, and then choose As New Sheet.

The ChartWizard appears. Follow the instructions on the screen.

Shortcuts:	F11

Insert Chart Sheet button (File category)

To insert a module or dialog

1.	Select a sheet in the workbook.

The module or dialog will be inserted to the left of the sheet you select.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Macro, and then choose Module or Dialog.

Shortcuts:	Insert Module button (File category)

Insert Dialog button (File category)

To insert a Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro sheet

1.	Select a sheet in the workbook.

The macro sheet will be inserted to the left of the sheet you select.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Macro, and then choose MS Excel 4.0 Macro.

Shortcuts:	CTRL+F11

Insert MS Excel 4.0 Macro button (File category)

To insert a Microsoft Excel 4.0 international macro sheet

1.	Select a sheet in the workbook.

The macro sheet will be inserted to the left of the sheet you select.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Macro, and then choose MS Excel 4.0 Macro.

3.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

4.	In the Save File As Type box, select Microsoft Excel 4.0 Int'l Macro.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Note  You can use the sheet tab shortcut menu to insert additional international macro sheets if the active sheet is a Microsoft Excel 4.0 international macro sheet.

See Also

Help

About the ChartWizard

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Chart Command (Insert Menu)

Macro Command (Insert Menu)

Selecting a sheet or sheets

Worksheet Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Copying sheets to other workbooks

Overview

To copy sheets to another workbook

1.	Open the workbooks you want to copy to and from.

2.	Select the sheet or sheets you want to copy.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Move Or Copy Sheet.

4.	In the To Book box, select the destination workbook.

5.	In the Before Sheet box, select where you want the copied sheet inserted.

6.	Select the Create A Copy check box.

7.	Choose the OK button.

To copy sheets to a new workbook

1.	Select the sheet or sheets you want to copy.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Move Or Copy Sheet.

4.	In the To Book box, select New Book.

5.	Select the Create A Copy check box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

A new workbook is created containing only the sheet or sheets you copied.

See Also

Help

Copying sheets within a workbook

Move Or Copy Sheet Command (Edit Menu)

Selecting a sheet or sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Copying sheets within a workbook

Overview

1.	Select the sheet or sheets you want to copy.

2.	Hold down the CTRL key, and then drag the selected sheet tab along the row of tabs.

A black triangle indicates the place where the copied sheet will be inserted.

3.	Release the mouse button and then the key.

Microsoft Excel renames the copy of your sheet. For example, a copy of Sheet1 becomes Sheet1 (2). If you selected more than one sheet, they will be inserted together.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the sheet or sheets you want to copy.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Move Or Copy Sheet.

3.	In the Before Sheet box, select where you want the copied sheet inserted.

4.	Select the Create A Copy check box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Copying sheets to other workbooks

Move Or Copy Sheet Command (Edit Menu)

Selecting a sheet or sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Deleting sheets

Overview

1.	Select the sheet or sheets you want to delete.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Delete Sheet.

See Also

Help

Delete Sheet Command (Edit Menu)

Hiding and unhiding a sheet

Selecting a sheet or sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Moving sheets to other workbooks

Overview

To move sheets to another workbook

1.	Open the workbooks you want to move sheets to and from.

2.	Select the sheet or sheets you want to move.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Move Or Copy Sheet.

4.	In the To Book box, select the destination workbook.

5.	In the Before Sheet box, select where you want the sheet or sheets inserted.

6.	Choose the OK button.

To move sheets to a new workbook

1.	Select the sheet or sheets you want to move.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Move Or Copy Sheet.

3.	In the To Book box, select New Book.

4.	Choose the OK button.

A new workbook is created containing only the sheet or sheets you moved.

See Also

Help

Move Or Copy Sheet Command (Edit Menu)

Moving sheets within a workbook

Selecting a sheet or sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Moving sheets within a workbook

Overview

1.	Select the sheet or sheets you want to move.

2.	Drag the selected sheet tab along the row of tabs.

A black triangle indicates the place where the sheets will be inserted. All selected sheets will be inserted together.

3.	Release the mouse button.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the sheet or sheets you want to move.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Move Or Copy Sheet.

3.	In the Before Sheet box, select where you want the sheets inserted.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Move Or Copy Sheet Command (Edit Menu)

Moving sheets to other workbooks

Selecting a sheet or sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Renaming a sheet

Overview

1.	Select a sheet in the workbook.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Sheet, and then choose Rename.

Shortcut:	Double-click the sheet tab

3.	In the Name box, type a new sheet name up to 31 characters long, including spaces.

The name cannot be enclosed in square brackets nor can it include the following characters: colon, slash mark, backslash, question mark, asterisk.

4.	Choose the OK button.

The new name appears on the sheet tab.

See Also

Help

Sheet Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Overview of Moving Around on Worksheets

You can move between sheets in a workbook by clicking the tabs.

Use the scroll arrows and scroll bars to move horizontally and vertically through a sheet. You can also use key combinations to move around.

Use the Name box to the left of the formula bar to go to specific cells or cell ranges quickly.

See Also

Help

Going to specific cells or ranges

Keys for Moving and Selecting in Worksheets and Workbooks

Keys for Scrolling in a Workbook Window

Moving between sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Moving between sheets

Overview

To switch to another sheet in a workbook

Click the tab for the sheet you want to see.

To scroll workbook tabs

Use the tab scrolling buttons or the following key combinations to display different tabs.

To display	Click	Or press

Previous tab	CTRL+PAGE UP

Next tab	CTRL+PAGE DOWN

First tab

Last tab

Tip  You can drag the tab split box to the right to see more worksheet tabs. To reset to the default setting, double-click the tab split box.

See Also

Help

Going to specific cells or ranges

Keys for Switching Windows

Selecting a sheet or sheets

Tab Scrolling Buttons

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Going to specific cells or ranges

Overview

To move to a named range

In the Name box, select the name you want to go to.

To move to specified cells

1.	In the Name box, type the reference you want to go to.

2.	Press ENTER.

Note  If you type a name that isn't already defined as a reference, the name that you type is defined as the current cell or range selection.

To scroll to and select specified cells or a named range

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Go To.

2.	In the Go To box, select a name.

--Or--

In the Reference box, type a name or reference.

3.	Choose the OK button.

4.	To return to where you last chose the Go To command, choose the Go To command again. The previous location is already selected in the Reference box. The last four Go To destinations are listed at the top of the Go To box, with the latest one first.

See Also

Help

Finding text or numbers

Go To Command (Edit Menu)

Keys for Moving and Selecting in Worksheets and Workbooks

Moving between sheets

Naming a cell, range, or formula

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Overview of Managing Workbook Windows

To see more than one section of a sheet, more than one sheet, or more than one workbook at a time, you can create and arrange new windows to see all windows at once.

You can also minimize windows and display them as icons in the Microsoft Excel workspace.

See Also

Help

Arranging icons

Arranging workbook windows

Displaying and closing new windows of a workbook

Keys for Switching Windows

Minimizing and restoring windows

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Displaying and closing new windows of a workbook

Overview

To display a new window of a workbook

From the Window menu, choose New Window.

New windows are listed at the bottom of the Window menu. For example SALES.XLS:1, SALES.XLS:2, SALES.XLS:3. The title bar of the new windows changes in the same fashion.

To close a workbook window

Double-click the Control-menu box in the upper-left corner of the workbook window.

If the window is the only window of the workbook, the workbook will be closed when you close the window.

Alternate Method

From the workbook Control Menu, choose Close.

See Also

Help

Arranging workbook windows

Close Command (Control Menu)

Hiding and unhiding a sheet

New Window Command (Window Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Arranging workbook windows

Overview

To arrange workbook windows

1.	From the Window menu, choose Arrange.

2.	Under Arrange, select the option you want.

3.	Choose the OK button.

To arrange windows for the active workbook only

1.	Switch to the workbook that contains the windows you want to arrange.

2.	From the Window menu, choose Arrange.

3.	Under Arrange, select the option you want.

4.	Select the Windows Of Active Workbook check box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Only the windows of the active workbook will be arranged.

See Also

Help

Arrange and Arrange Icons Commands (Window Menu)

Displaying and closing new windows of a workbook

Minimizing and restoring windows

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Minimizing and restoring windows

Overview

To minimize a window to an icon

Click the Minimize button to shrink the active workbook window to an icon at the bottom of the screen.

Alternate Method

From the workbook Control menu, choose Minimize.

To restore a window to its previous size

Double-click the workbook icon.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the minimized workbook icon.

2.	From the workbook Control menu, choose Restore.

See Also

Help

Arranging icons

Arranging workbook windows

Displaying and closing new windows of a workbook

Minimize Button

Minimize Command (Control Menu)

Restore Command (Control Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Arranging icons

Overview

To do this procedure, a minimized icon must be active.

From the Window menu, choose Arrange Icons.

All icons are arranged horizontally from left to right at the bottom of the Microsoft Excel workspace.

See Also

Help

Arrange and Arrange Icons Commands (Window Menu)

Displaying and closing new windows of a workbook

Minimizing and restoring windows

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Alert Messages

'[Name]' is not a valid directory name. Check your typing.

'[Filename]' contains incomplete calculation.  Continue reporting each error?

'[Filename or formula]' contains incomplete calculation.

'[Filename]' is currently in use. Open as Read-Only?

'[Add-in name]' is not a valid add-in.

'[Name]' is not a valid name.

'[Text]' is not an item of this field.

'[Filename]' is read-only.

'[Document]' should be opened as read-only unless you need to save changes to it. Open as read-only?

'[Filename]' was created in a previous version of Microsoft Excel. Do you want to update it to Microsoft Excel 5.0 format?

'[Document]' is being modified by '[user]'. Open as read-only?

'[Name]' on '[Filename]' is not defined or is too complex.

'[Copy or cut]' and paste areas are different shapes.

'[Incorrect number of]' arguments.

'[External Copy or SYLK]' file format is not valid.

'[Filename]' is already open.  Reopening will cause your changes to be discarded.  Do you want to reopen?

'[Entry]' is not valid.

'[Formula or text]' is too long.

'[Object]' does not have '[method name]' method.

'[Object]' does not have '[property name]' property.

'[Object]' does not have readable '[property name]' property.

'[Object]' does not have writeable '[property name]' property.

'[Method name]' method of '[object]' class failed.

'[Document]' has a routing slip. Route now to '[name]'?

A document with the name '[filename]' is already open.

A group must contain two or more sheets.

A high-low-close stock chart must contain three series.

A pivot table with that name already exists on the destination sheet.

A surface chart must contain at least two series.

A volume-high-low-close stock chart must contain four series.

A volume-open-high-low-close stock chart must contain five series.

Ambiguous recipient name found in the recipient list.  Use a valid name and try again.

An error occurred initializing the VBA libraries

An error occurred while Microsoft Excel was attempting to use the system Network dialog box.

An error occurred while searching in '[directory]'. This directory might be located on an unavailable volume, or protected with a password.

An Excel lexicon '[filename]' is missing or damaged.

An open-high-low-close stock chart must contain four series.

Array value is not valid.

At least one item must be showing. Choose the Delete button to hide the field.

At least one of the changing cells you specified contains a formula.  Formulas in changing cells will be replaced by constant values when you show a scenario.

AutoFormat cannot detect a table around the active cell. Select the range you want to format and choose the command again.

Calculation is incomplete. Recalculate before saving?

Can no longer access the file '[filename]'. It may be in use, unavailable, or damaged.

Cannot access '[filename]'.

Cannot access '[filename]'.

Cannot access file '[filename]'.

Cannot access directory '[directory name]'.

Cannot add another menu bar.

Cannot add any more custom formats.

Cannot add duplicate source reference.

Cannot change linked data '[message]'.

Cannot change part of a table.

Cannot change part of an array.

Cannot change this cell while a macro is paused.

Cannot change this part of a pivot table.

Cannot combine 2-D and 3-D types.  Change all series in chart to 3-D?

Cannot combine 2-D and 3-D types.  Change all series in chart to 2-D?

Cannot convert 3-D reference '[reference]'.

Cannot copy '[name]'. It is now the name of a directory, not a file.

Cannot copy the file '[filename]'.

Cannot create '[dictionary name]'.

Cannot create a new directory.

Cannot create a pivot table on a hidden sheet.

Cannot create a pivot table on a macro sheet.

Cannot create a reference to unsaved workbooks.

Cannot create an outline.

Cannot create backup file.  Save '[filename]' without backup?

Cannot create data form for a database in which all columns are hidden.

Cannot create links to consolidation sheet.

Cannot create Personal Macro Workbook.

Cannot create the destination file '[filename]'.

Cannot create the temporary file to hold the results of the search. You may not have enough space on your hard disk.

Cannot delete '[filename]'.

Cannot delete built-in format.

Cannot delete built-in or active menu bars.

Cannot delete every item of '[field name]' field from the pivot table.

Cannot delete last entry in legend.

Cannot delete the last item in a page field.

Cannot delete this selection from the pivot table.

Cannot demo with custom menus.

Cannot determine which pivot table field to sort by.

Cannot do that command on nonadjacent selections.

Cannot edit a macro on a hidden workbook. Unhide the workbook using the Unhide command.

Cannot edit a pivot table in group edit mode.

Cannot edit chart objects while Microsoft Excel 5.0 is inplace editing.

Cannot edit macro on protected sheet or book.

Cannot edit pivot table in data entry mode..

Cannot edit pivot table on protected sheet..

Cannot edit subtotal, block total, or grand total names.

Cannot empty the Clipboard.

Cannot enable built-in commands..

Cannot end macro in a menu.

Cannot enter a formula in a data form.

Cannot enter a formula into a pivot table..

Cannot enter a null value as an item or field name in a pivot table.

Cannot enter an array formula into a range of cells which are not all locked or all unlocked.

Cannot enter an external reference to a chart.

Cannot enter an external reference to a workbook.

Cannot extend list or database.

Cannot extract to an open file

Cannot find '[linked document]'.

Cannot find '[filename]'.

Cannot find '[macro]' which has been assigned to run each time '[document]' is closed. Continuing could cause errors. Cancel closing '[document]'?

Cannot find '[macro]', which has been assigned to run each time '[document]' is opened. Continuing could cause errors. Cancel opening '[document]'?

Cannot find '[name]'.

Cannot find add-in '[add-in]'. Delete from list?

Cannot find data source.

Cannot find macro '[name]'.

Cannot find matching data to delete.

Cannot find matching data to replace.

Cannot find matching data.

Cannot find that sheet in workbook.

Cannot find the source application for this embedded object.

Cannot group that selection.

Cannot hide the (all) item of a page field.

Cannot import from an open file

Cannot initialize spelling checker.

Cannot insert object.

Cannot justify cells containing numbers or formulas.

Cannot link to a chart.

Cannot load an empty Microsoft Excel 4.0 workbook.

Cannot load the mail service. Check your mail installation.

Cannot load wave file.

Cannot move a pivot table to a macro sheet.

Cannot move or modify part of a pivot table.

Cannot move part of the filter dropdown row.

Cannot move subtotals or block totals.

Cannot open '[dictionary name]'.

Cannot open a copy while the template '[template]' is already open.

Cannot open a dependent document that contains references to different sheets with the same name.

Cannot open chart created in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh version 1.X.

Cannot open consolidation source file '[filename]'.

Cannot open files from later versions of Microsoft Excel.

Cannot open files with FM? or ALL format directly. Open the corresponding WK? file.

Cannot open Lotus 123 '[version]' file.

Cannot open Microsoft Excel 5.0 Add-In for editing.  Please edit the source document instead.

Cannot open normal document created in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh.

Cannot open normal Multiplan document.

Cannot open or save any more documents.

Cannot open pivot table source file '[filename]'.

Cannot open printer driver.

Cannot open protected file.

Cannot open Quattro Pro for Windows file.

Cannot open the Clipboard.

Cannot open the destination file '[filename]'.

Cannot open waveform input device.

Cannot open waveform output device.

Cannot overwrite destination file '[filename]'.

Cannot paste a link into a pivot table.

Cannot paste a table onto a macro sheet.

Cannot paste data.

Cannot paste items into a different field.

Cannot paste items into a different group of items.

Cannot paste that macro formula onto a worksheet.

Cannot pivot a data field button that does not appear in the pivot table.

Cannot pivot data field button to a page orientation.

Cannot pivot. Pivot table does not contain this field.

Cannot play Macintosh sounds with Windows.

Cannot post instructions because a worksheet is not active.

Cannot post instructions because worksheet is protected.

Cannot post instructions because worksheet objects are currently hidden or protected.

Cannot print chart in draft quality.

Cannot print chart with the current scale and paper size. Select a larger scale percentage or a smaller paper size.

Cannot print file.

Cannot quit Microsoft Excel.

Cannot read '[dictionary name]'.

Cannot read record '[cell or name]'.

Cannot read this binary file. If the file was created in a version of Microsoft Excel later than 5.0, use that version to save it as a Microsoft Excel 5.0 file. Open file as text?

Cannot rename a sheet to the same name as another sheet, a referenced object library or a workbook referenced by Visual Basic.

Cannot rename a sheet with the same name as another sheet.

Cannot resolve circular references.

Cannot revert a file that is currently running a macro.

Cannot run '[program]'. The program or one of its components is damaged or missing.

Cannot run Visual Basic macro because of a syntax error.

Cannot save '[filename]' because the volume is locked.

Cannot save as a WK3 file if there are no worksheets in the workbook.

Cannot save as that name. Document was opened as read-only.

Cannot save temporary file '[filename]' to hold the results of the search. There may not be enough space on your hard disk.

Cannot save this file with the same name as an open document.

Cannot save to that file format. There are references to other sheets in this Workbook. Copy this sheet to a different Workbook first, then try again.

Cannot save to that name.  Another document is linked to a document with that name.

Cannot save User-defined Autoformats Workbook.

Cannot send status tracking message.

Cannot set options for this macro because of an error in the macro code.

Cannot share '[dictionary name]'.

Cannot shift nonblank cells off sheet.

Cannot shift objects off sheet.

Cannot show or hide detail for the data area.

Cannot show or hide detail for this selection.

Cannot show outline symbols because no outline exists on the active worksheet. Create an outline?

Cannot sort items in a page field.

Cannot split when windows are locked.

Cannot start search. There may not be enough space available to store the results of the search.

Cannot start the source application for this object.

Cannot ungroup that selection.

Cannot ungroup.  To start an outline, select the detail rows or columns and group them.

Cannot use a name that refers to nonadjacent cells.

Cannot use name that is a noncontiguous reference.

Cannot use object linking and embedding.

Cannot use that command in data entry mode.

Cannot use that command on a protected sheet.

Cannot use that command on multiple selections.

Cannot use the autotemplate CHART.XLT. Use the AutoFormat Command on the Format menu to create a new custom chart autoformat.

Cannot use workbook reference here.

Cannot write '[dictionary name]'.

Cannot write record '[cell or name]'.

Category range contains nonnumeric data.

Cell in source worksheet contains nonnumeric data

Cell in source worksheet is locked

Cell must contain a formula.

Cell must contain a value.

Cell with block IF function should not contain anything else.

Cell with looping function should not contain anything else.

Cells without simple text were ignored..

Changing Cells are required.

Charts cannot be source sheets.

Column width must be between 0 and 255 characters.

Command not available at cell:

Command or menu does not exist.

Confirmation password is not identical.

Consolidate_Area reference is not valid.

Consolidation reference is not valid.

Continue checking at beginning of sheet?

Copy '[add-in]' to Microsoft Excel Add-in library?

Criteria range is not defined.

Criteria range is not valid.

Current printer is unavailable. Select another printer.

Custom dictionary '[name]' does not exist. Do you want to create it?

Custom dictionary is full.

Data entry range is too small for this action.

Data on the Clipboard is not the same size and shape as the selected area.  Paste anyway?

Data point corresponds to a formula on a macro sheet

Data will be saved with other pivot tables using the same source data as this pivot table.

Data will not be saved with other pivot tables using the same source data as this pivot table.

Data will permanently lose accuracy.

Data_Form is not correct.

Database is hidden.

Database or list range is not valid.

Database range is not defined.

Delete entire row?

Delete file '[filename]'?

Delete the '[name]' toolbar?

Delete this user-defined format?

Destination reference is not valid.

Dialog box contains too many items.

Dictionary is too large.

Directory does not exist.

Disk is full.

Displayed record will be deleted permanently.

Do you want to delete '[filename]'?

Do you want to replace existing saved search '[saved search name]'?

Do you want to save changes before switching file status?

Document is not completely saved.

Document not saved. Any previously saved copy has been deleted.

Document not saved.

Document saved successfully. Cannot reopen the saved document due to low memory. Please close the document.

Duplicate menu bar name.

Embedded object data will be lost. Continue?

Ending value must be greater than starting value.

Entire subtotal row will be deleted.

Error accessing User-defined AutoFormat file

Error in adding template

Error in deleting format.

Error in dialog box at '[cell]'.

Error in formula.

Error in formula: missing operand.

Error in parse line.

Error printing on '[printer]'.

Error value is not valid.

Existing categories will be permanently deleted.

Existing remote links will be terminated.

External reference is not valid.

Extract range is not defined.

Extract range is not valid.

File error. Some number formats may have been lost.

File error: data may have been lost.

File format is not valid.

File is not a valid wave file.

File may contain nondisplayable text and formats from the Far East.

File not loaded completely.

Filename is not valid.

Finished checking spelling '[document]'.

Fixed objects will move.

Font name is too long.

Font size must be between 1 and 409.

Format description must not exceed 32 characters.

Format does not exist.

Format name is not valid.

Format name must not exceed 31 characters.

Formula in cell must result in a number.

Formula is not valid.

Formula is too complex to be assigned to object.

Formula is too long.

Formula must refer to a single cell or result in a text string.

Function is not valid.

General mail failure. Quit Microsoft Excel, restart the mail system, and try again..

Help reference is not valid.

Illegal reference argument at:

Incompatible version of spelling checker.

Incorrect password.

Input and output ranges overlap.

Input cell reference is not valid.

Insert new page into printer.

Integer is not valid.

Invalid '[dictionary name]'.

Invalid number of arguments.

Invalid register id, or function not registered yet.

Invalid sheet for consolidation.

List will be permanently deleted.

Locked cells cannot be changed.

Logical value is not valid.

Lotus 1-2-3 Help demonstrations cannot be recorded.  Stop recording and continue?

Macro cannot be edited inplace.

Macro error at cell:

Macro error at cell:

Macro interrupted at cell:

Macro interrupted at cell:

Macro name is not valid.

Macro with name '[name]' already exists.  Overwrite?

Mail system failure. Check your mail installation.

Margins do not fit page size.

Matching records will be permanently deleted.

Matrices are incompatible for multiplication.

Matrix must be square.

Maximum axis value must be greater than minimum axis value.

Maximum number of data points in a data series is 4000.

Maximum number of data series per chart is 255.

Merge styles that have the same names?

Message too long for your mail system. Shorten the message and try again.

Microsoft Excel 5.0 menus are required when using Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users.

Microsoft Excel 5.0 workspaces cannot contain Microsoft Excel 4.0 workbooks.  Use 'Save As' to change the file type.

Microsoft Excel cannot display the Network dialog box.

Microsoft Excel cannot find the necessary graphics filter.

Microsoft Excel found headers above your list or database. Expand selection to include them?

Microsoft Excel has detected subtotals in your list.  Aborting Pivot....

Microsoft Excel is waiting for another application to complete an OLE action.

Minor unit must be less than major unit.

Missing an END.IF function.

Missing IF.

Missing loop.

Missing NEXT function for loop.

Missing required argument '[argument]'.

Modify existing outline?

Moving Average must have a period that is greater than one and less than the number of points in the source data series.

Multiple selection usage is not valid.

Name already exists on destination sheet.

Name cannot be the same as a built-in name.

Name cannot resemble a reference.

Name conflict.  Rename the document you want to open.

Name in formula is unclear.

Name is not defined.

Names and results of formulas were converted into values.

Names are not valid in complex references.

Names cannot look like references.

Negative or zero values cannot be plotted correctly on log charts.

No cells found.

No data source specified.

No data was consolidated.

No data was selected to parse.

No format name specified.

No headers detected. Assume top row of selection is header row?

No item of this name exists in the pivot table. Rename '[current item name]' to '[proposed item name]'?

No link to paste.

No list found. Select a single cell within your list and Microsoft Excel will select the list for you.

No list found. Select a single cell within your list and Microsoft Excel will select the list for you.

No match in active cell.

No match.

No objects found.

No point number is specified.

No references found.

No RETURN() or HALT() function found on macro sheet.

No series number is specified.

No source references specified for consolidation.

No spelling errors found in '[selected text]'.

Not a workbook.

Not all source records have been copied.

Not enough available memory. Quit any unneeded applications and try again.

Not enough data for Graph demonstration.

Not enough memory to completely display pivot table.

Not enough memory to display completely.

Not enough stack space to perform command.

Not enough stack space to run macro..

Note will be permanently deleted.

Number format is not valid.

Number format is too long.

Number is not valid.

Number is not valid.

Number must be between '[number]' and '[number]'.

Number must be greater than or equal to zero.

Number must be greater than zero.

OLE Objects cannot be active while debugging.  Your code may execute differently in the debug window because the currently active OLE Object will be automatically deactivated.

One of your object libraries '[filename]' is missing or damaged.

One or more directories in the path '[path]' do not exist or are inaccessible. Check your typing. Do you want to skip this path during the search?

Only macro names are valid.

Only Visual Basic macros can be deleted using this dialog. Delete Microsoft Excel 4.0 macros by editing the macro sheets.

Only worksheets and charts will be saved.

Operation failed. '[Filename]' is write reserved.

Operation failed. '[Filename]' is reserved by '[user]'.

Output range extends beyond edge of worksheet.

Parentheses do not match.

Password contains accented characters or certain punctuation marks which will not transfer correctly to Microsoft Excel for Windows or OS/2.

Personal Macro Workbook in the startup directory must stay open for recording.

Pivot table cannot overlap another pivot table.

Pivot table field name already exists.

Pivot table field name is not valid.

Pivot table is not valid.

Pivot table name is not valid.

Pivot table saved without underlying data. Use the Refresh Data command to update the pivot table.

Pivot table was changed during Refresh Data operation.

Pivot table will not fit on sheet. Show as much as possible?

Polynomial order must be an integer from 2 through 6.

Print titles must be contiguous and complete rows or columns.

Problems obtaining data..

Problems obtaining Microsoft Query data.

Cannot access read-only document '[filename]'.

Recorder range is full.

Recorder range is not valid.

Recording buffer is full.

Recording failed.

Redefine '[style]' based on selection?

Redefine '[scenario name]' scenario based on current cell values?

Reference cannot be to a closed sheet.

Reference is not valid.  Reference for error bars must be a row or column.

Reference is not valid.  Reference must be a simple external reference to a worksheet.

Reference is not valid.  Reference must be to an open worksheet.

Reference is not valid. Reference for categories or values must be a single row or column.

Reference is not valid. Reference must be to a single cell.

Reference is not valid.

Reference is not valid.

Reference is too complex.

Reference must be on the active sheet.

Reference must be to a macro sheet.

Reference must be to a single cell on the active sheet.

Reference must be to a single cell.

References in object formulas must be external references to worksheets.

References in series formulas must be external references to worksheets.

Remote data not accessible. Start application '[application]'?

Replace contents of destination cells?

Replace crosstab table with pivot table, ignoring criteria range?

Replace crosstab table with pivot table?

Replace existing '[filename]'?

Replace existing definition of '[name]'?

Replace existing user-defined format?

Replacement creating duplicate item or field name ignored.

Row height must be between 0 and 409.

Save '[filename]' with references to unsaved documents?

Save changes in '[filename]'? Note: The current file format is not Microsoft Excel Workbook.

Save changes in '[filename]'? Note: Though you already saved this workbook as an Add-In, Add-Ins cannot be viewed or edited.  This workbook is the editable version of the Add-In.

Save changes in '[filename]'?

Save changes to Personal Macro Workbook?

Save changes to selected series?

Save large Clipboard from '[filename]'?

Saving to an old file format; data may be lost.

Scenario names must be unique.

Scroll value must be between 0 and 30000.

Search string must be specified.

Select a font name.

Select cells in one column only.

Selected file type will save only the active sheet.

Selected sheets will be permanently deleted. Continue?

Selection is not valid.

Selection is too large.

Selection too large. Continue without Undo?

Series definition must include a '[Y or Z]' reference.

Series formula is too long.

Series must contain at least one value.

Series order must be an integer between 0 and 255.

Sheet is already protected.

Sheet is protected with password and formulas are displayed.  File format cannot be used.

Sheet is protected with password.  File format cannot be used.

Sheet name is not valid.

Sheet name is too long.

Shortcut key must be a letter.

Some changing cells are part of an array or table and cannot be changed.

Some custom formats will not fit on the destination sheet.

Some scenario values were too long and had to be truncated.

Some trendlines cannot be calculated from data containing negative or zero values.

Sort reference is not valid.

Source reference overlaps destination area.

Source worksheet is closed

Specify a data field.

Specify sheet to copy from workbook.

Style '[name]' not found.

Style name is not valid.

Text extends beyond worksheet.  Some text will be lost.

Text in your macro may need to be translated manually.

Text is not valid.

Text is too long.

Text will extend below range.

That name already exists.

That name is not valid.

That user-defined autoformat option does not exist.

The change to the DDE or OLE link has failed.

The date and time separators specified by the system are identical.  Substituting ':' for the time separator.

The date you typed is not valid. Check your typing.

The destination, '[directory]', is the name of a directory.

The destination range is not large enough to accommodate all copied rows. Data below the destination range will be lost. Continue copying anyway?

The drive, directory, or filename '[name]' is invalid or inaccessible. Check your typing.

The Error Tracer encountered existing arrows or a circular reference. Delete all tracer arrows or resolve the circular reference, and then choose Trace Error again.

The Error Tracer has encountered a branch point. Double-click the branch you want to follow and choose Trace Error again.

The file '[filename]' already exists. Do you want to replace it?

The file '[filename]' cannot be deleted. It might be open or saved as a read-only file.

The file '[filename]' exists, but it is already in use, unavailable, or damaged.

The file '[filename]' exists, but it is already in use, unavailable, or damaged.

The file '[filename]' exists, but it is already in use, unavailable, or damaged.

The file '[filename]' is read only.

The file you've selected contains a preview, but it requires too much memory to display.

The filename, specification or location '[filename or path]' isn't valid because it contains spaces or commas. Check your typing.

The graphics filter cannot convert the picture file '[filename]'.

The header or footer cannot be longer than 255 characters. Delete some text, or make the formatting less complex.

The list and decimal separators specified by the system are identical.  Substituting '[punctuation mark]' for the list separator.

The list of directories you specified isn't valid. Separate each directory with ';'.

The name '[filename]' is a reserved device name.  Use a different filename.

The name '[name]' is unknown. Specify a valid name.

The object is not responding.  Continue waiting?

The path '[pathname]' is not a directory. Check your typing, and do not include the filename in the path.

The path you specified contains too many subdirectories. Delete one or more directories or clear the Include Subdirectories check box.

The path you typed for the new directory is not valid.

The path you've selected includes too many subdirectories. Not all subdirectories will be searched.

The picture is too large and will be truncated.

The Remove All Arrows command found no tracer arrows to remove.

The scroll value maximum cannot be less than the scroll value minimum.

The search expression isn't valid. Check your typing.

The selected drive is not in use. Check to make sure that a disk is inserted.

The selected drive is not in use. Check your connection to the drive, and then try again.

The selected drive is not in use.

The selection already contains only visible cells.

The source database must have at least one record.

The specified directory already exists.

The specified path is the name of a file, not a directory.

The Trace Dependents command found no formulas that refer to the active cell.

The Trace Error command requires that the active cell contain an error value.

The Trace Precedents command requires that the active cell contain a formula.

The version of XLINTL.DLL is incorrect. Continuing can cause severe errors. Quit Microsoft Excel?

The word '[word]' is not in the dictionary.  Change anyway?

There are more new points than series in the chart. Add new points to only the existing series?

There are no printers installed. Use the Printers option in Control Panel to install a printer.

There is already a macro assigned to that key. You can use a different keyboard shortcut. Assign to that keyboard shortcut anyway?

There is not enough available memory. You may be able to use the File Manager to establish network connections.

There is nothing to print in the specified pages.

This button can be used only with Microsoft Windows for Pen Computing.

This chart plots constant data.  Double-click the series you want to change, and then select the Name And Values tab to change the series' plot data.

This chart plots data from a closed worksheet. Use the Links command on the Edit menu to open the source workbook.

This chart plots data from more than one worksheet.  Double-click the series you want to change, and then select the Name and Values tab to change the series' plot data.

This command or function is not available when multiple workbooks are selected.

This document contains links. Re-establish links?

This font style name does not exist.

This list is outlined. Only the summary data will be sorted.

This removes the subtotals and sorts again. If you want to sort the subtotaled groups, choose the Cancel button; then collapse the outline and try again.

This search cannot be saved. The maximum number of saved searches has been reached.

This subtotals lists in place. To display and remove subtotals in a pivot table, use the PivotTable Field command.

Tick mark intervals must be greater than 0.

To use multiple chart types, choose the Chart Type command or the chart type group command (for example, Line Group) from the Microsoft Excel 5.0 Format menu.

Too complex to record.

Too many changing cells.  A scenario can have no more than 32 changing cells.

Too many different cell formats.

Too many fields in the data form.

Too many files selected.  Microsoft Excel will open or print as many of the files as possible.

Too many files to mail.

Too many items are hidden. Unhide some items to continue.

Too many items to create pivot table.

Too many mail sessions. Quit other mail sessions and try again.

Too many recipients specified.  Route the document several times to smaller groups of recipients.

Too many recipients specified. Send the document several times to smaller groups of recipients.

Too many result cells.  A report can have no more than 32 result cells.

Too many scenarios to fit in the report.  Some were left out.

Total number of file errors: '[number]'.

Type is not valid.

Unable to combine file

Unable to copy add-in to library.

Unable to extract file

Unable to get the '[property name]' property of the '[object]' class.

Unable to import file

Unable to obtain PivotTable data from disk.

Unable to paste link.

Unable to read file.

Unable to retrieve the search.

Unable to save external link values.

Unable to save the search.

Unable to set the '[property name]' property of the '[object]' class.

Unit of log scale must be at least 10.

Unknown recipient name found in the recipient list.  Use a valid name and try again.

Update '[filename]'?

Update embedded objects?

Use existing definition of '[name]'?

Value is too large

Value is too small

Value must be a number.

Value must be between zero and 0.5.

Value must be greater than or equal to zero.

Value must be greater than zero.

VBA Lexicon is wrong type (ship vs debug)

VBA Lexicon is wrong version.

Workbook has no bound sheets.

Workbook is already protected.

Workbook is protected and cannot be changed.

Workbook must contain at least one visible sheet.

You can add the chart template as a user-defined autoformat and use it later by choosing Autoformat from the Format menu. Choose Yes to add this template as an autoformat. Choose No to continue saving the file as a workbook template.

You can only copy filtered data to the active sheet.

You cannot edit when calculating a user defined function.

You cannot save the Personal Macro Workbook in the startup directory. Save it elsewhere now and move it to the startup directory later.

You cannot save the User-defined Autoformats Workbook in the startup directory. Save it elsewhere now and move it to the startup directory later.

You cannot use Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users while in group edit mode.

You do not have access to one or more directories in the path '[path]'. Do you want to skip this path during the search?

You have entered an invalid source range for your pivot table. Enter a valid range in the Ranges box and then choose Add.

You have not specified any source ranges for your pivot table. Type or select at least one range in the Ranges box before choosing Next or Finish.

You have specified too many directories to search. Specify fewer directories, and then try again.

You must enter a valid reference you want to go to, or type a valid name for the selection.

You must exit Windows and load SHARE.EXE in order to run Microsoft Excel.

You must quit and then restart Microsoft Excel before your changes to the standard font will take effect.

You must specify a destination directory when you copy files.

You must specify a different directory when you copy a file.

You must specify a path for the new directory.

You must specify at least one directory to search.

You must specify result cells when creating a scenario pivot table report.

You must type a filename or file specification, such as "*.DOC".

Your changes will be lost if you update without saving. Continue to update?

Your mail system does not support certain services needed for document routing.


Using Solver to Analyze Multiple-Variable Problems

Overview of Working with Microsoft Excel Solver

About Solver

Defining a problem using Solver

Solving a problem using Solver

Creating a report using Solver

Adding, changing, or deleting constraints in Solver

Saving and loading a problem model using Solver

The Difference Between Linear and Nonlinear Problems

Adjusting the Solver settings


Overview of Working with Microsoft Excel Solver

Microsoft Excel Solver is a powerful optimization and resource allocation tool. It can help you to uncover the best uses of scarce resources so that desired goals such as profit can be maximized, or undesired goals such as cost can be minimized. Microsoft Excel Solver answers questions such as:

What product price or promotion mix will maximize profit?

How can I live within the budget?

How fast can we grow without running out of cash?

Instead of guessing over and over, you can use Microsoft Excel Solver to find the best answer.

When you solve a problem using Solver, you:

Specify the target cell that you want to minimize, maximize, or set to a certain value.

Specify the changing cells that you want to be adjusted until a solution is found. You can specify up to 200 changing cells.

Specify constraint cells that must fall within certain limits or satisfy target values. You can specify up to 500 constraints, 2 for each changing cell plus 100 additional constraints, representing a total of no more than 1000 cells in a problem.

After solving the problem, you can create three types of reports that summarize the results of a successful solution process.

When you save a workbook, the last selections made in the Solver Parameters dialog box are retained for each worksheet on which you have defined a Solver problem. However, you can define more than one problem for a worksheet by saving them individually using the Save Model button in the Solver Options dialog box. You can then use the Load Model button to open a saved problem model.

You can also save the Solver settings for the problem as a scenario using the Scenario Manager.

See Also

Help

Adding, changing, or deleting constraints in Solver

Adjusting the Solver settings

Creating a report using Solver

Defining a problem using Solver

Saving and loading a problem model using Solver

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

Solver Command (Tools Menu)

Solving a problem using Solver

The Difference Between Linear and Nonlinear Problems

User's Guide

Chapter 29, "Using Solver to Analyze Multiple-Variable Problems"


About Solver

(c) 1993 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.

Portions of the Microsoft Excel Solver program code are copyright 1990, 1991, and 1992 by Frontline Systems, Inc. Portions are copyright 1989 by Optimal Methods, Inc.

The Microsoft Excel Solver uses the GRG2 nonlinear optimization code developed by Leon Lasdon, University of Texas at Austin, and Allan Waren, Cleveland State University.

Linear and integer problems use the simplex method with bounds on the variables and the branch and bound method, implemented by John Watson and Dan Fylstra, Frontline Systems, Inc.

For more information, contact:

Frontline Systems, Inc.

P.O. Box 4288

Incline Village, Nevada  89450-4288

(702) 831-0300


Defining a problem using Solver

Overview

If the Solver command does not appear on the Tools menu, you need to install the Solver add-in.

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Solver.

2.	In the Set Target Cell box, enter a cell reference or name for the target cell.

3.	If you want the target cell's value to be as large as possible, select the Max option button.

If you want the target cell's value to be as small as possible, select the Min option button.

If you want the target cell to have a certain value, select the Value Of option button, and then type that value in the Value Of box.

4.	In the By Changing Cells box, enter a name or reference for each changing cell.

If you enter more than one reference, separate the references with commas. If you want Solver to propose the changing cells based on the target cell, choose the Guess button. You can specify up to 200 changing cells.

5.	In the Subject To The Constraints box, add any constraints you want to apply.

You can apply constraints to the target cell, the changing cells, or any other cells that are directly or indirectly related to the problem. For each problem, you can specify two constraints for each changing cell (one upper-limit and one lower-limit constraint), plus up to 100 additional constraints. In a constraint, you can specify individual cells or cell ranges, however you can apply constraints to no more than 1000 cells in a problem.

When you are finished defining the problem, you can have Microsoft Excel solve the problem, or you can save the problem definition using the Save Model button in the Solver Options dialog box.

See Also

Help

Adding, changing, or deleting constraints in Solver

Saving and loading a problem model using Solver

Solver Command (Tools Menu)

Solving a problem using Solver

User's Guide

Chapter 29, "Using Solver to Analyze Multiple-Variable Problems"


Solving a problem using Solver

Overview

If the Solver command does not appear on the Tools menu, you need to install the Solver add-in.

To solve a problem

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Solver.

2.	If you have not already done so, define the problem.

3.	Choose the Solve button.

To interrupt the solution process

Press ESC.

The worksheet is recalculated with the last values found for the changing cells.

To keep the solution values on the worksheet

1.	In the Solver Results dialog box, select the Keep Solver Solution option button.

2.	Choose the OK button.

To restore the original data

1.	In the Solver Results dialog box, select the Restore Original Values option button.

2.	Choose the OK button.

To save changing cell values as a scenario

1.	In the Solver Results dialog box, choose the Save Scenario button.

2.	In the Scenario Name dialog box, enter a name for the scenario.

3.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel saves the values for the changing cells as a named scenario.

See Also

Help

Creating a report using Solver

Defining a problem using Solver

Saving and loading a problem model using Solver

Show Trial Solution Dialog Box

Solver Command (Tools Menu)

Solver Completion Messages

Solver Results Dialog Box

User's Guide

Chapter 29, "Using Solver to Analyze Multiple-Variable Problems"


Creating a report using Solver

Overview

If the Solver command does not appear on the Tools menu, you need to install the Solver add-in.

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Solver.

2.	Define a problem and choose the Solve button.

3.	In the Solver Results dialog box, select whether you want to keep the Solver solution values on the worksheet, or restore the values you started with.

To replace the original worksheet values with the new solution values, select the Keep Solver Solution option button.

To restore the original worksheet values, select the Restore Original Values option button.

4.	In the Reports box, select Answer, Limits, or Sensitivity.

You can select more than one report by selecting the first report and then pressing CTRL as you select any of the others

5.	Choose the OK button.

If you chose the Keep Solver Solution option button and you selected a report, Microsoft Excel replaces the original worksheet values with the new solution values and then generates the selected report on a separate sheet in the workbook. If you chose the Restore Original Values option button and you selected a report, Microsoft Excel generates a report using the displayed trial solution and then restores the original worksheet values.

See Also

Help

Defining a problem using Solver

Solver Command (Tools Menu)

Solver Results Dialog Box

User's Guide

Chapter 29, "Using Solver to Analyze Multiple-Variable Problems"


Adding, changing, or deleting constraints in Solver

Overview

In Solver, a constraint is a condition that needs to be satisfied by the solution; for example, Sales > 0. A constraint is listed as a cell or cell range, usually containing a formula, that depends on one or more adjustable cells. The constraint requires the value of the adjustable cells to fall within certain bounds or to satisfy a target.

For each problem, you can specify two constraints for each changing cell (one upper-limit and one lower-limit constraint), plus up to 100 additional constraints. In a constraint, you can specify individual cells or cell ranges, however you can apply constraints to no more than 1000 cells in a problem.

If the Solver command does not appear on the Tools menu, you need to install the Solver add-in.

To add constraints to a problem

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Solver.

2.	Choose the Add button.

3.	In the Cell Reference box, enter the reference or name for the cell or cell range whose value or values you want to constrain.

4.	In the first part of the Constraint option, select the relationship (=, <=, >=, or Int) that you want between the referenced cell and the constraint that you will enter.

If you don't select a relationship, <= (less than or equal to) is used. If you select Int, "Integer" appears in the Constraint box.

5.	In the second part of the Constraint option, enter a number, a cell reference or name, or a formula.

6.	To accept the constraint and add another, choose the Add button.

To accept the constraint and return to the Solver Parameters dialog box, choose the OK button.

If you decide you don't want the constraint, choose the Cancel button.

To delete a constraint

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Solver.

2.	In the Subject To The Constraints box, select the constraint that you want to delete.

3.	Choose the Delete button.

To change a constraint

You can change the cell reference, the relationship between the cells and the constraint, or the constraint itself.

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Solver.

2.	In the Subject To The Constraints box, select the constraint that you want to change.

3.	Choose the Change button.

The Change Constraint dialog box is displayed.

4.	Make the changes you want.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Add Constraint and Change Constraint Dialog Boxes

Defining a problem using Solver

Solver Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 29, "Using Solver to Analyze Multiple-Variable Problems"


Saving and loading a problem model using Solver

Overview

If the Solver command does not appear on the Tools menu, you need to install the Solver add-in.

To save a problem model

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Solver.

2.	Choose the Options button.

3.	Choose the Save Model button.

4.	In the Select Model Area box, accept the proposed range, or enter the reference for the cell where you want Solver to place the problem specifications.

Note  Make certain that the proposed range or the column below the cell that you specify contains no data. The problem specifications will be entered into the proposed range, or into a vertical range of cells starting from the cell you specify and extending down as many cells as necessary.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel enters the problem specifications on the worksheet.

To load a problem model

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Solver.

2.	Choose the Options button.

3.	Choose the Load Model button.

If you have changed any of the settings in the Solver Parameters dialog box, a message asks you if you want to clear the existing settings.

4.	In the Select Model Area box, enter the reference to the range of cells containing the problem specifications.

Note  You must enter the reference for the entire range that contains the saved model on the worksheet. You cannot enter just the reference of the first cell of the range.

5.	Choose the OK button.

The settings for the problem model you loaded are displayed in the Solver Parameters dialog box and the Solver Options dialog box.

See Also

Help

Solver Command (Tools Menu)

Solver Options Dialog Box

Solver Results Dialog Box

User's Guide

Chapter 29, "Using Solver to Analyze Multiple-Variable Problems"


Adjusting the Solver settings

Overview

If the Solver command does not appear on the Tools menu, you need to install the Solver add-in.

To set the solution time and iterations

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Solver.

2.	Choose the Options button.

3.	In the Max Time box, type the number of seconds that you want as the limit for Solver's solution time.

4.	In the Iterations box, type the maximum number of iterations that you want Solver to make.

5.	Choose the OK button.

If the maximum time or maximum number of iterations is reached during the solution process, Solver stops and the Show Trial Solution dialog box appears. To continue the solution process, choose the Continue button. To stop the solution process, choose the Stop button. If you stop the solution process, Microsoft Excel displays the best values from the trial solution, recalculates the worksheet based on these values, and displays the Solver Results dialog box.

To set the precision

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Solver.

2.	Choose the Options button.

3.	In the Precision box, type the degree of precision that you want.

The smaller the number you type, the higher the precision will be.

4.	Choose the OK button.

To set the integer tolerance

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Solver.

2.	Choose the Options button.

3.	In the Tolerance box, type the tolerance that you want.

4.	Choose the OK button.

To reset Solver settings

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Solver.

2.	Choose the Reset All button.

The settings in the Solver Parameters dialog box and the Solver Options dialog box are reset to their default values.

To step through trial solutions

You can have Solver pause at each trial solution so that you can examine the intermediate worksheet values

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Solver.

2.	If you have not already done so, define the problem.

3.	Choose the Options button.

4.	Select the Show Iteration Results check box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	Choose the Solve button.

When the first trial solution is reached, Microsoft Excel enters the trial values on the worksheet and displays the Show Trial Solution dialog box.

7.	To stop the solution process and display the Solver Results dialog box, choose the Stop button. You can then choose to keep the solution, restore the original worksheet values, save the values of the trial solution as a scenario, or produce reports for the trial solution.

To continue the solution process and display the next trial solution, choose the Continue button. Microsoft Excel resumes calculating the worksheet until the next trial solution is reached.

Note  If you are trying to solve a linear optimization problem, or a linear approximation to a nonlinear problem, select the Assume Linear Model check box in the Solver Options dialog box.

See Also

Help

Defining a problem using Solver

Solver Options Dialog Box

The Difference Between Linear and Nonlinear Problems

User's Guide

Chapter 29, "Using Solver to Analyze Multiple-Variable Problems"


The Difference Between Linear and Nonlinear Problems

Overview

A majority of optimization problems involve linear relationships between variables. A linear problem would be represented by a straight line on a graph. These include problems using simple arithmetic operations such as:

Addition and subtraction

Built-in functions such as SUM(), TREND(), FORECAST()

A problem becomes nonlinear when one or more elements share a disproportional relationship to one another. A nonlinear problem would be represented by a curved line on a graph. This can happen when:

Pairs of changing cells are divided or multiplied by one another.

Exponentiation is used in the problem.

Built-in functions such as GROWTH(), SQRT(), or any logarithmic functions, are used.

See Also

Help

Defining a problem using Solver

Solver Command (Tools Menu)


Solver Completion Messages

Solver will display one of the following messages if it is successful in reaching an optimal solution:

Solver found a solution. All constraints and optimality conditions are satisfied.

All constraints are satisfied within the precision setting and, if appropriate, a maximum or minimum value has been found for the cell in the Set Target Cell box.

Solver has converged to the current solution. All constraints are satisfied.

The value in the target cell specified in the Set Target Cell box is virtually unchanged for the last five trial solutions. A solution may have been found, but it is also possible that the iterative solution process is making very slow progress.

Solver will display one of the following messages if it is unable to reach an optimal solution:

Solver cannot improve the current solution. All constraints are satisfied.

Although a successful solution has not been found, the iterative solution process cannot find a better set of changing cell values than the values being displayed. An approximate solution has been found, but either further accuracy is not achievable or the precision setting (set with the Precision box in the Solver Options dialog box) is too low. Change the number in the Precision box to a larger number and run the problem again.

Stop chosen when the maximum time limit was reached.

The maximum amount of time allowed for the solution process (set with the Max Time box in the Solver Options dialog box) has been reached without finding a satisfactory solution. To save future recalculation time, you may want to select the Keep Solver Solution option button or the Save Scenario button to save the changing cell values found so far.

Stop chosen when the maximum iteration limit was reached.

The maximum number of iterations (set with the Iterations box in the Solver Options dialog box) has been reached without finding a satisfactory solution. Increasing the maximum number of iterations may help, but you should examine the final values for insights into the problem. To save future recalculation time, you may want to select the Keep Solver Solution option button or the Save Scenario button to save the changing cell values found so far.

The Set Target Cell values do not converge.

The value in the cell named in the Set Target Cell box is increasing (or decreasing) without bound, even though all of the constraints are satisfied. The current worksheet values probably indicate how the solution is diverging. You may have omitted one or more constraints in setting up the problem. In certain scientific applications, this message may appear for functions that have finite asymptotes. Check the constraints and run the problem again.

Solver could not find a feasible solution.

Solver was unable to find a trial solution that satisfies all the constraints to within the precision setting. It is likely that the constraints are inconsistent. Examine the worksheet for a possible mistake in the constraint formulas or the choice of constraints.

Solver stopped at user's request.

You chose the Stop button in the Show Trial Solution dialog box after interrupting the solution process, or when stepping through trial solutions after selecting the Show Iteration Results check box in the Solver Options dialog box.

The conditions for Assume Linear Model are not satisfied.

You selected the Assume Linear Model check box in the Solver Options dialog box, but the final worksheet recalculation yields values for the constraints or the cell in the Set Target Cell box that don't agree with the linear model. This means that the solution is not valid for the actual worksheet formulas. Clear the Assume Linear Model check box and run the problem again.

Solver encountered an error value in a target or constraint cell.

One or more of the formulas in the constraint cells or the cell named in the Set Target Cell box yielded an error value on the latest calculation. Solver cannot find new trial points under these conditions. Find the cell containing the error, and modify its formula to yield an appropriate numeric value.

There is not enough memory available to solve the problem.

Microsoft Excel couldn't allocate the memory needed by Solver. Close some files or applications, and try again.

Another Excel instance is using SOLVER.DLL.

More than one Microsoft Excel session is running, with one session using SOLVER.DLL.

See Also

Help

Show Trial Solution Dialog Box

Solver Command (Tools Menu)

Solver Options Dialog Box

Solver Results Dialog Box


What's New in Microsoft Excel Version 5.0

What Happens When I Open My Old Microsoft Excel Files in Version 5.0?

Menu Command Changes in Version 5.0

Overview of Switching Between Version 4.0 and Version 5.0 Menus

Switching to the version 4.0 menus

Switching to the version 5.0 menus

New Features for Everyday Tasks

New Features for Creating and Formatting Charts

New Features for Organizing and Managing Data in a List

New Features for Retrieving and Analyzing Data from Lists and Tables

New Features for Solving Problems by Analyzing Data

New Features for Customizing Microsoft Excel

New Features for Reviewing and Sharing Workbooks

New Features for Exchanging Data with Other Applications

New Features for Programming with Microsoft Excel

New Function Wizard and Help for Worksheet Functions


What Happens When I Open My Old Microsoft Excel Files in Version 5.0?

When you open a file in Microsoft Excel version 5.0 that was created in Microsoft Excel version 4.0 or earlier, it is converted to a new file format. After working in the file in version 5.0, you can save the file in the file format for version 4.0 or earlier, or you can save it in version 5.0 format.

Once you save your work in version 5.0 format, you cannot open it in earlier versions of Microsoft Excel. If you work in version 5.0 and then save the file in version 4.0 or earlier format, portions of your work may not be retained in the version 4.0 format.

Version 4.0 or earlier file type	Converted to version 5.0 file type	For more information, see
Add-in	Add-in.	Installing Add-in Features
Chart	Workbook with a single chart sheet.	Overview of Creating a Chart
Macro sheet	Workbook with a single Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro sheet.	Visual Basic Equivalents for Macro Functions
Template	Workbook template.	Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks
Workbook	Workbook. Bound sheets remain sheets in a new workbook. Unbound sheets become new workbooks, each with one sheet.	Managing Workbook Files  Working in Workbooks
Worksheet	Workbook with a single worksheet.	Overview of Managing Workbook Sheets
Workspace	Workspace.	Customizing Your Workspace


Menu Command Changes in Version 5.0

To make Microsoft Excel simpler to use and more consistent with other applications, such as Microsoft Word, the menu and command structure has been reorganized.

Worksheet Command Changes in Version 5.0

Chart Command Changes in Version 5.0


Worksheet Command Changes in Version 5.0

This list shows version 4.0 commands that have changed name or location, or whose functionality has moved to other commands in version 5.0.

File Menu

In version 4.0	In version 5.0

Links	Links Command (Edit Menu)

Save Workbook	Save Command (File Menu)

Delete	Find File Command (File Menu)

Send Mail	Send Command (File Menu)

Add Routing Slip and Edit Routing Slip Commands (File Menu)

Edit Menu

In version 4.0	In version 5.0

Paste Link	Paste Special Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets)

Insert	Cells Command (Insert Menu)

Rows Command (Insert Menu)

Columns Command (Insert Menu)

Insert Paste	Cut or Copied Cells Command (Insert Menu)

Insert Object	Object Command (Insert Menu)

Fill Right	Right Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Fill Down	Down Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Formula Menu

In version 4.0 	In version 5.0

Paste Name	Paste Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Paste Function	Function Command (Insert Menu)

Define Name	Name Box

Define Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Create Names	Create Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Apply Names	Apply Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Note	Note Command (Insert Menu)

Go To	Go To Command (Edit Menu)

Find	Find Command (Edit Menu)

Replace	Replace Command (Edit Menu)

Select Special	Go To Special Dialog Box

Go To Command (Edit Menu)

Show Active Cell	Scrolling in a Workbook Window

Outline	Group And Outline Command (Data Menu)

Goal Seek	Goal Seek Command (Tools Menu)

Scenario Manager	Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

Solver	Solver Command (Tools Menu)

Format Menu

In version 4.0	In version 5.0

Number	Number Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Alignment	Alignment Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Font	Font Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Border	Border Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Patterns	Patterns Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Cell Protection	Protection Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Row Height	Row Command (Format Menu)

Column Width	Column Command (Format Menu)

Justify	Justify Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Bring To Front	Placement Command (Format Menu)

Send To Back	Placement Command (Format Menu)

Group	Placement Command (Format Menu)

Object Properties	Object Command (Format Menu)

Data Menu

In version 4.0	In version 5.0

Find	Filter Command (Data Menu)

AutoFilter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Advanced Filter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Extract	Advanced Filter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Delete	Delete Row Command (Edit Menu)

Set Database	No longer necessary

Set Criteria	Advanced Filter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Set Extract	Advanced Filter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Series	Series Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Parse	Text To Columns Command (Data Menu)

Crosstab	PivotTable Command (Data Menu)

Options Menu

In version 4.0	In version 5.0

Set Print Area	Sheet Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Set Print Titles	Sheet Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Set Page Break	Page Break and Remove Page Break Commands (Insert Menu)

Display	View Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Toolbars	Toolbars Command (View Menu)

Color Palette	Color Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Protect Document	Protect Workbook Command and Unprotect Workbook Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

Protect Sheet Command and Unprotect Sheet Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

Calculation	Calculation Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Workspace	Options Command (Tools Menu)

Add-ins	Add-Ins Command (Tools Menu)

Spelling	Spelling Command (Tools Menu)

Group Edit	Overview of Selecting Sheets in a Workbook

Analysis Tools	Data Analysis Command (Tools Menu)

Macro Menu

In version 4.0	In version 5.0

Run	Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Record	Record New Macro Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Start Recorder	Record At Mark Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Set Recorder	Mark Position For Recording Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Relative Record	Use Relative References Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Assign To Object	Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Resume	Continue Command (Run Menu)

Resume Macro Button

Window Menu

In version 4.0	In version 5.0

View	View Manager Command (View Menu)

Zoom	Zoom Command (View Menu)

Help Menu

In version 4.0	In version 5.0

Search	Search For Help On Command (Help Menu)

Product Support	Technical Support


Chart Command Changes in Version 5.0

This list shows version 4.0 comands that have changed name or location, or whose functionality has moved to other commands in version 5.0.

File Menu

In version 4.0	In version 5.0

Links	Links Command (Edit Menu)

Save Workbook	Save Command (File Menu)

Delete	Find File Command (File Menu)

Gallery Menu

All commands on the Gallery menu in version 4.0 have been replaced with the AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts) in version 5.0. For information about changing only the chart type, see Chart Type Command (Format Menu).

Chart

In version 4.0	In version 5.0

Attach Text	Titles Command (Insert Menu)

Data Labels Command (Insert Menu)

Add Arrow	Overview of Drawing Lines, Arrows, and Shapes

Add Legend	Legend Command (Insert Menu)

Axes	Axes Command (Insert Menu)

Gridlines	Gridlines Command (Insert Menu)

Add Overlay	Chart Type Command (Format Menu)

Edit Series	X Values Tab, Selected Data Series Command (Format Menu)

Name And Values Tab, Selected Data Series Command (Format Menu)

Series Order Tab, [chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Select Chart	Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

Select Plot Area	Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items

Protect Document	Protect Workbook Command and Unprotect Workbook Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

Protect Sheet Command and Unprotect Sheet Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

Color Palette	Color Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Calculate Now	Calculate Now Button

Spelling	Spelling Command (Tools Menu)

Format Menu

In version 4.0	In version 5.0

Patterns	Patterns Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

Font	Font Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

Text	Alignment Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

Scale	Category (X) Axis Scale Tab (for 2-D Charts)

Category (X) Axis Scale Tab (for 3-D Charts)

Value (Y) Axis Scale Tab (for 2-D Charts)

Value (Y) Axis Scale Tab (for Radar Charts)

Value (X) Axis Scale Tab (for XY (Scatter) Charts)

Value (Z) Axis Scale Tab (for 3-D Charts)

Series (Y) Axis Scale Tab (for 3-D Charts)

Legend	Placement Tab, Selected Legend Command (Format Menu)

Main Chart and Overlay	Chart Type Command (Format Menu)

Options Tab, [chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Subtype Tab, [chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Move	Moving and Sizing Chart Items

Size	Overview of Sizing, Moving, and Copying Graphic Objects

Moving and Sizing Chart Items

Macro Menu

In version 4.0	In version 5.0

Run	Start Command (Run Menu)

Record	Record New Macro Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Start Recorder	Record At Mark Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Set Recorder	Mark Position For Recording Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Relative Record	Use Relative References Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Assign To Object	Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Resume	Continue Command (Run Menu)

Resume Macro Button

Help Menu

In version 4.0	In version 5.0

Search	Search For Help On Command (Help Menu)

Product Support	Technical Support

Application Control Menu

In version 4.0	In version 5.0

Run	Removed

Document Control Menu

In version 4.0	In version 5.0

Split	Split and Remove Split Commands (Window Menu)


Overview of Switching Between Version 4.0 and Version 5.0 Menus

To ease your transition to Microsoft Excel version 5.0, you can switch Microsoft Excel to the version 4.0 menus. You can then switch back to the version 5.0 menus at any time.

When you select a version 4.0 menu command, Microsoft Excel performs the equivalent version 5.0 functionality. Not all of the functionality of version 5.0 is available when you use the version 4.0 menus.

See Also

Help

Switching to the version 4.0 menus

Switching to the version 5.0 menus

User's Guide

Chapter 4, "What's New in Microsoft Excel Version 5.0"


Switching to the version 4.0 menus

Overview

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Select the General tab.

3.	Select the Microsoft Excel 4.0 Menus check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

General Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Switching to the version 5.0 menus


Switching to the version 5.0 menus

Overview

From the Options menu, choose New Menus.

See Also

Help

Switching to the version 4.0 menus


New Features for Everyday Tasks

New feature	For more information, see

Use the TipWizard to learn shortcuts for the way you work.	Overview of Using Help to Find the Information You Need
Display ToolTips to see button names.	Overview of Choosing Commands
All files are now workbooks for simpler data management.	Overview of Creating or Opening Workbooks
Use the Find File command on the File menu to search for a workbook, even if you don't know its name.	Overview of Finding Workbooks
Create custom AutoFill series.	Overview of Using AutoFill
Enter and edit data directly in cells or in the formula bar.	Overview of Editing Data Within a Cell or in the Formula Bar
Create named ranges in the Name box on the formula bar.	Overview of Working with Names
Use the interactive Function Wizard to create formulas with worksheet functions.	Overview of Using Functions
Create 3-D formulas and 3-D names for powerful workbook models.	Overview of Using References Overview of Working with Names
Automatically create grand totals with AutoSum.	Overview of Using Functions
Use one spelling dictionary for both Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Word.	Overview of Checking Spelling
Use single and double underline formats.	Overview of Formatting Characters in Cells
Format individual characters in cells containing text.	Overview of Formatting Characters in Cells
Use the Format Painter button to quickly copy formats between cells and between objects.	Overview of Formatting Automatically
Select from a larger group of built-in headers and footers.	Overview of Setting Up What You Want to Print
Easily change the standard font and font size.	Overview of Changing Defaults and Settings
Enlarge the working area on your screen with the Full Screen command on the View menu.	Overview of Changing How You View Your Worksheet


New Features for Creating and Formatting Charts

New feature	For more information, see

Draw graphic objects directly on charts.	Overview of Drawing Lines, Arrows, and Shapes Overview of Sizing, Moving, and Copying Graphic Objects
Use chart autoformats to instantly change chart type and formatting options, and create your own autoformats.	Overview of Working with Chart Autoformats
Drag data directly onto a chart to add a data series or data points.	Overview of Adding and Deleting Chart Data
Get better scaling of charts on chart sheets.	Overview of Preparing a Chart for Printing
Position chart items, such as titles, anywhere you want them.	Overview of Moving and Sizing Charts and Chart Items
Add trendlines and error bars to your data series.	Overview of Adding a Trendline to a Data Series Overview of Adding Error Bars to a Data Series


New Features for Organizing and Managing Data in a List

New feature	For more information, see

Use AutoFilter to temporarily hide data and display only rows that meet your criteria.	Overview of Filtering Data in a List Overview of Summarizing Data in a List
Sort by using column labels from your list.	Overview of Sorting a List
Create custom sort orders, such as High, Med, and Low.	Overview of Sorting Pivot Table Items
Automatically add subtotals and grand totals.	Overview of Summarizing Data in a List


New Features for Retrieving and Analyzing Data from Lists and Tables

New feature	For more information, see

Add trendlines and error bars to your data series when charting.	Overview of Adding a Trendline to a Data Chart Series Overview of Adding Error Bars to a Data Chart Series
Access external databases with Microsoft Query.	Overview of Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query
Use the interactive PivotTable Wizard to cross-tabulate and summarize data from an existing list or table, and then rearrange and instantly recalculate the result.	Overview of Creating a Pivot Table


New Features for Solving Problems by Analyzing Data

New feature	For more information, see

Use the new Scenario Manager to quickly create and manage scenarios, protect or merge scenarios, and track changes to scenarios.	Overview of Using Scenario Manager


New Features for Customizing Microsoft Excel

New feature	For more information, see

Save your list of open workbooks as a workspace file.	Overview of Saving Workspace Files
Use or customize any of the 17 built-in toolbars, or create your own.	Overview of Customizing Toolbars
Change the images on toolbar buttons.	Overview of Customizing Toolbars
Use autotemplates to create new default workbooks and sheets.	Overview of Creating and Editing Workbook Templates Overview of Inserting Sheets from Templates into Workbooks
Use the new Visual Basic Programming System, Applications Edition, to create custom solutions in Microsoft Excel.	Programming with Visual Basic


New Features for Reviewing and Sharing Workbooks

New feature	For more information, see

Use the Find File command on the File menu to search for a workbook, even if you dont know its name.	Overview of Finding Workbooks
Click the Toggle Read Only button to toggle file status between read-write and read-only.	Toggle Read Only Button
Display the precedent, dependent, and error tracers directly on your worksheet to locate problems in formulas.	Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets
Mail and route workbooks within a workgroup.	Overview of Routing a Workbook Overview of Mailing a Workbook


New Features for Exchanging Data with Other Applications

New feature	For more information, see

Microsoft Excel supports OLE 2.0: activate and edit embedded objects without leaving Microsoft Excel; drag and drop data between applications to cut, copy, and paste.	Overview of Linking and Embedding
Use the TextWizard to parse data files when you import them.	TextWizard
Open files in Multiplan and Microsoft Works format.	Overview of Opening and Saving Documents in Different File Formats


New Features for Programming with Microsoft Excel

New feature	For more information, see

Use the new Visual Basic Programming System, Applications Edition.	Programming with Visual Basic
Create custom dialog boxes on a dialog sheet.	Programming with Visual Basic


New Function Wizard and Help for Worksheet Functions

Microsoft Excel version 5.0 includes two ways to learn about and use worksheet functions:

The Function Wizard includes descriptions of all worksheet functions. Use it to select a function, assemble the arguments correctly, and insert the function into your formula. To see more information about a function, select it in the Function Wizard and choose the Help button.

Online Help includes complete worksheet function descriptions.

See Also

Help

Alphabetical List of Worksheet Functions

New and Changed Worksheet Functions

Overview of Using Functions

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Using a List to Organize Data

Overview of Managing Lists in Microsoft Excel

Using a List as a Database

Overview of Maintaining a List by Using a Data Form

Adding a record by using a data form

Browsing through a list by using a data form

Using a data form to find records that meet search criteria

Editing a record by using a data form

Deleting a record by using a data form

Using a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 custom data form


Overview of Managing Lists in Microsoft Excel

Microsoft Excel provides a powerful set of commands to make it easy to manage a list or a database.

Sorting

You can use the Sort command on the Data menu to arrange rows in a list according to the contents of selected columns. You select the data and the sort order you want, or you create and use a custom sort order.

Filtering

You can use the Filter command on the Data menu to find and work with a subset of the data in your list. A filtered list displays only the rows that contain a certain value or rows that meet a set of criteria, while temporarily hiding the other rows. On the Filter submenu, Microsoft Excel provides both the AutoFilter and Advanced Filter commands to filter your data. AutoFilter meets most needs. However, when you need to use complex criteria to filter a list, use Advanced Filter.

Data Form

A data form provides a simple way to see, change, add, and delete records from a list or database, or to find specific records based on criteria you specify. When you choose the Form command from the Data menu, Microsoft Excel reads your data and creates a data form dialog box. When you enter or edit data in these fields, Microsoft Excel changes the corresponding cells in your list.

Automatic Subtotals

You can use the Subtotals command on the Data menu to insert subtotal rows in a list, summarizing the data any way you choose. When you insert subtotals, Microsoft Excel automatically inserts a Grand Total row at the bottom of the list.

Pivot Tables

A pivot table is an interactive worksheet table you use to summarize and analyze data from an existing list or table. Using a pivot table, you can rearrange, organize, and analyze data by dragging and dropping the fields in the pivot table. You can also include subtotals, change the summary function for a field, or create custom calculations for your pivot table. You can update a pivot table whenever changes occur in the original source data.

To use the list management features in Microsoft Excel, just create a list on a worksheet. When you select a cell in your list and choose one of the list management commands from the Data menu, Microsoft Excel automatically identifies and selects your entire list. Data arranged in columns and rows is then treated as a set of fields and records.

See Also

Help

Advanced Filter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

AutoFilter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Form Command (Data Menu)

Overview of Creating a Pivot Table

Overview of Filtering Data in a List

Overview of Maintaining a List by Using a Data Form

Overview of Sorting a List

Overview of Summarizing Data in a List

PivotTable Command (Data Menu)

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Subtotals Command (Data Menu)

Using a List as a Database

User's Guide

Chapter 20, "Using a List to Organize Data"

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"

Chapter 22, "Summarizing Data in a List"

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"


Using a List as a Database

Overview

In Microsoft Excel, you don't need to do anything special to your list to make it a database. When you perform database tasks, such as finding, sorting, or subtotaling data, Microsoft Excel automatically recognizes your list as a database.

The columns in the list are the fields in the database.

The column labels in the list are the field names in the database.

Each row in the list is a record in the database.

See Also

Help

Overview of Managing Lists in Microsoft Excel

User's Guide

Chapter 20, "Using a List to Organize Data"


Overview of Maintaining a List by Using a Data Form

A data form provides a simple way to see, change, add, and delete individual records from a list or database, or to find specific records based on criteria you specify. When you choose the Form command from the Data menu, Microsoft Excel reads your data and displays a data form dialog box. A data form displays one complete record at a time. When you enter or edit data on the data form, Microsoft Excel changes the corresponding cells in the list.

To use a data form, your list has to have column labels. The data form dialog box automatically expands to display all the fields in your list, up to 32 fields.

Note  You don't have to use a data form to edit or find data in a list. You can edit directly in the cells in the list if you want to.

See Also

Help

Adding a record by using a data form

Browsing through a list by using a data form

Deleting a record by using a data form

Editing a record by using a data form

Form Command (Data Menu)

Using a data form to find records that meet search criteria

Using a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 custom data form

User's Guide

Chapter 20, "Using a List to Organize Data"


Adding a record by using a data form

Overview

1.	Select a cell in the list you want to add records to.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Form.

3.	Choose the New button.

4.	Type the fields for the new record.

To move to the next field, press TAB.

5.	When you finish entering data, press ENTER to add the record.

6.	Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add more records.

7.	When you finish adding records, choose the Close button.

Microsoft Excel inserts the new records at the bottom of the list.

See Also

Help

Form Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 20, "Using a List to Organize Data"


Browsing through a list by using a data form

Overview

Use these steps to browse through records in a list. You can also use the Criteria button to locate specific records.

1.	Select a cell in the list.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Form.

3.	To move forward through the list, choose the Find Next button.

To move backward through the list, choose the Find Prev button.

4.	When you finish, choose the Close button.

Alternate Method

Use the scroll box and the up and down arrows on the scroll bar to move through the list.

See Also

Help

Form Command (Data Menu)

Using a data form to find records that meet search criteria

User's Guide

Chapter 20, "Using a List to Organize Data"


Using a data form to find records that meet search criteria

Overview

To locate records in a list by using comparison criteria

Your list needs to have column labels.

1.	Select a cell in the list.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Form.

3.	Choose the Criteria button.

4.	In the edit boxes, type the criteria you want to use to search the list. You can also enter comparison operators with the criteria.

5.	To search forward through the list and display the first record that meets the criteria, choose the Find Next button.

To search backward through the list and display the previous record that meets the criteria, choose the Find Prev button.

To locate other records in the list, choose the Clear button to remove the current criteria, and then enter new criteria.

6.	When you finish, choose the Close button.

Note  To display an entire subset of records at a time, use the AutoFilter command on the Data menu, Filter submenu.

To regain access to the entire list

1.	Choose the Criteria button.

2.	Choose the Clear button.

3.	Choose the Form button.

See Also

Help

Filtering a list using AutoFilter

Filtering a list using complex criteria

Form Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 20, "Using a List to Organize Data"


Editing a record by using a data form

Overview

1.	Select a cell in your list.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Form.

3.	Locate and display the record you want to edit.

You can browse through the list by using the scroll bar or the Find Next and Find Prev buttons. You can also choose the Criteria button to locate specific records.

4.	Edit the contents of the record.

5.	Choose the Close button.

Important  Changes to a record are made when you choose the Close button or when you press ENTER in Microsoft Excel for Windows, or RETURN in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh. You can restore the record to its original contents by choosing the Restore button, as long as you do it before moving to a different record or choosing the Close button.

See Also

Help

Form Command (Data Menu)

Using a data form to find records that meet search criteria

User's Guide

Chapter 20, "Using a List to Organize Data"


Deleting a record by using a data form

Overview

Caution  When you delete data using a data form, it cannot be restored with the Restore button or the Undo command.

1.	Select a cell in the list.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Form.

3.	Locate and display the record you want to delete.

You can browse through the list by using the scroll bar or the Find Next and Find Prev buttons. You can also choose the Criteria button to locate a specific record or set of records.

4.	Choose the Delete button.

5.	Confirm the deletion.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Form Command (Data Menu)

Using a data form to find records that meet search criteria

User's Guide

Chapter 20, "Using a List to Organize Data"


Using a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 custom data form

Overview

A common reason to customize a data form is to fit more fields in the dialog box. With Microsoft Excel version 5.0, you don't need to customize a data form to meet this need, because the data form dialog box automatically expands to display all the fields in your list, up to 32 fields.

Follow these steps to use data forms customized in Microsoft Excel version 4.0 in version 5.0.

1.	Double-click the Dialog Editor icon in the Microsoft Excel version 4.0 group window in your Windows Program Manager.

2.	Create the data form dialog box definition.

For information about using the Dialog Editor, see your Microsoft Excel version 4.0 documentation.

3.	Copy and paste the dialog box definition into a Microsoft Excel version 5.0 macro sheet.

4.	Name the dialog box definition range Data_Form.

Note  If you do need to create a custom data form, you can use Visual Basic in Microsoft Excel. For more information, see the Visual Basic Reference.

See Also

Help

Form Command (Data Menu)

Naming a cell, range, or formula

User's Guide

Chapter 20, "Using a List to Organize Data"


Outlining a Worksheet

Overview of Creating and Removing an Outline

Creating an outline automatically

Creating an outline manually

Removing an outline

Overview of Showing or Hiding Details in an Outline

Showing or hiding detail data

Displaying a different outline level

Overview of Changing an Outline's Organization

Displaying or hiding the outline symbols

Grouping or ungrouping rows or columns

Applying styles to an outline

Selecting visible cells in an outline

Selecting a section of an outline


Overview of Creating and Removing an Outline

Outline worksheet data to create summary reports. You can create an outline automatically or manually. You can outline a range of worksheet data or an entire worksheet. Once an outline exists, you can show or hide levels of the outlined data to show more or less data.

You can remove an outline from a range of data or from the entire worksheet. Removing an outline does not change the data on your worksheet.

When automatically outlining worksheet data, Microsoft Excel examines the formulas and directions of references to determine how to group data within the outline.

In addition to outlining your worksheet data, you can also summarize and subtotal your data. For more information, see Adding subtotals to a list.

See Also

Help

Creating an outline automatically

Creating an outline manually

Removing an outline

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Creating an outline automatically

Overview

1.	Select the range you want to outline.

To outline the entire worksheet, select any cell on the worksheet.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Group And Outline, and then choose Auto Outline.

Microsoft Excel creates an outline on your worksheet and displays the outline symbols on your screen.

See Also

Help

Creating an outline manually

Removing an outline

Ungroup Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Creating an outline manually

Overview

1.	Select the detail rows or columns that are subordinate to the summary row or column. These are the rows or columns you want to group together.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Group And Outline, and then choose Group.

Shortcut:	Group button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

If you did not select an entire row or column, Microsoft Excel displays a dialog box asking whether you want to group rows or columns. Select the Rows option button or the Columns option button, and then choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel creates an outline on your worksheet and displays the outline symbols on your screen.

3.	Continue selecting detail rows or columns and choosing the Group command until you have created all of the outline levels you want.

See Also

Help

  Group Button

Creating an outline automatically

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Removing an outline

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Removing an outline

Overview

1.	To remove one or more groups from an outline, select the detail rows or columns that contain the groups.

To remove the entire outline, select all of the cells on the worksheet.

Shortcut:	Select any cell within the outlined range, and then press CTRL+SHIFT+*.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Group And Outline, and then choose Clear Outline.

See Also

Help

Clear Outline Command (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Creating an outline automatically

Selecting an entire row or column or all cells on a sheet

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Overview of Showing or Hiding Details in an Outline

You can change how outlined data is displayed without changing the outline structure itself. You can show the detail data related to the summary data, or you can hide the detail data.

See Also

Help

Displaying a different outline level

Showing or hiding detail data

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Showing or hiding detail data

Overview

To show detail data

1.	Select any cell within the summary level you want to expand.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Group And Outline, and then choose Show Detail.

Alternate Method

1.	Display the outline symbols.

2.	Click the show detail symbol ( [image]) for the level you want to expand.

To hide detail data

1.	Select any summary data cell adjacent to the detail range you want to hide.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Group And Outline, and then choose Hide Detail.

Alternate Method

1.	Display the outline symbols.

2.	Click the hide detail symbol ( [image]) for the level you want to hide.

See Also

Help

Displaying a different outline level

Displaying or hiding the outline symbols

Hide Detail Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Show Detail Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Displaying a different outline level

Overview

To display a specific level of an outline

1.	Display the outline symbols.

2.	Click the row or column level symbol for the lowest level you want to display.

Microsoft Excel hides all rows or columns below that level. For example, to display levels 1 through 3, click the level 3 symbol ( [image]).

To display all rows or columns

Click the row or column level symbol for the outline's lowest level.

See Also

Help

Displaying or hiding the outline symbols

Outline Symbols

Showing or hiding detail data

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Overview of Changing an Outline's Organization

After you've created an outline, you can change its structure by grouping or ungrouping rows or columns.

Microsoft Excel includes built-in cell styles for the levels of an outline. These are named RowLevel_1, ColLevel_1, and so forth. You can automatically apply these styles to rows and columns in your outline. Then, if you want to change the formatting for a level in an outline, you can change the style for that level, and all the cells that have that style assigned will be reformatted.

See Also

Help

Applying styles to an outline

Displaying or hiding the outline symbols

Grouping or ungrouping rows or columns

Selecting a section of an outline

Selecting visible cells in an outline

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Displaying or hiding the outline symbols

Overview

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Select the View tab, and then select the Outline Symbols check box.

3.	Choose the OK button.

Shortcut:	Show Outline Symbols button (Utility category)

See Also

Help

  Show Outline Symbols Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Grouping or ungrouping rows or columns

Overview

To group rows or columns

1.	Select the rows or columns you want to group.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Group And Outline, and then choose Group.

Shortcut:	Group button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

If you did not select an entire row or column, Microsoft Excel displays a dialog box asking whether you want to group rows or columns. Select the Rows option button or the Columns option button, and then choose the OK button.

To ungroup rows or columns

1.	Select the rows or columns you want to ungroup.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Group And Outline, and then choose Ungroup.

Shortcut:	Ungroup button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

If you did not select an entire row or column, Microsoft Excel displays a dialog box asking whether you want to ungroup rows or columns. Select the Rows option button or the Columns option button, and then choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Group Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Ungroup Command for Worksheets (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Applying styles to an outline

Overview

1.	Select the entire outline or a level within the outline to which you want to apply the styles. If you select a level that includes subordinate levels, they will be styled as well.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Group And Outline, and then choose Settings.

3.	Choose the Apply Styles button.

See Also

Help

Settings Command (Data Menu, Group And Outline Submenu)

Style Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Selecting visible cells in an outline

Overview

1.	Select the outlined range.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Go To.

3.	Choose the Special button, and then select the Visible Cells Only option button.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Shortcut:	Select Visible Cells button (Utility category)

See Also

Help

  Select Visible Cells Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Go To Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Selecting a section of an outline

Overview

1.	Display the outline symbols.

2.	Hold down SHIFT and click either the show detail symbol ( [image]), the hide detail symbol ( [image]), or the level bar of the level you want to select.

See Also

Help

Displaying a different outline level

Displaying or hiding the outline symbols

Outline Symbols

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


Using the Pen with Microsoft Excel

To use a pen with Microsoft Excel, you must be running Microsoft Windows for Pen Computing. This topic contains information on some specific ways you can use the pen with Microsoft Excel. For basic information on using the pen, see Microsoft Windows for Pen Computing Help.

If you are running Microsoft Windows for Pen Computing, the Microsoft Excel formula bar is larger than normal to make entering text and numbers with the pen easier.

To display a shortcut menu

Press the Barrel button, and then tap the item for which you want to see a shortcut menu.

To copy objects or cells

Press the Barrel button, and then tap and drag the object or the border of the selection.

Without the Barrel button, this moves the objects or cells.

To copy data to a range of adjacent cells

Press the Barrel button, and then tap and drag the fill handle.

Without the Barrel button, this extends a series of numbers or dates.

See Also

Help

Constrain Numeric Button

Copying cells

Creating simple forecasts and trends

Filling a range of adjacent cells


What Is a Pivot Table?

A pivot table is an interactive worksheet table that can summarize large amounts of existing data using the format and calculation methods you choose. In this example, a pivot table uses detailed worksheet data to summarize grocery sales by region, by product, by year, and by salesperson.

For more information about the parts of a pivot table, click the areas in the illustration.

You can create a pivot table from data in:

A Microsoft Excel list or database

An external data source

Multiple consolidation ranges

Another pivot table

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"


Using a Microsoft Excel list or database

A Microsoft Excel list or database is a range of worksheet cells made up of two or more rows and two or more labeled columns. The first row must contain a label for each column.

When you create a pivot table from a list, column labels become row, column, and page fields, and cells in the selected columns become items in the pivot table.

See Also

Help

Using an external data source

Using data from another pivot table

Using multiple consolidation ranges

What Is a Pivot Table?

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"


Using an external data source

You can use data created in an application or database management system external to Microsoft Excel to build a pivot table. This option starts Microsoft Query so you can query your data source.

See Also

Help

Using a Microsoft Excel list or database

Using data from another pivot table

Using multiple consolidation ranges

What Is a Pivot Table?

User's Guide

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Microsoft Query User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Getting Started with Queries"


Using multiple consolidation ranges

You can consolidate the data from multiple Microsoft Excel worksheet ranges in one pivot table. Use worksheet ranges that have both row and column labels. When you create a pivot table from multiple consolidation ranges, the labels become items in the row and column fields of the pivot table. You can create your own page fields and items, or you can let Microsoft Excel create a single page field for you.

See Also

Help

Using a Microsoft Excel list or database

Using an external data source

Using data from another pivot table

What Is a Pivot Table?

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"


Using data from another pivot table

You can use the data from one pivot table to create another pivot table on the same worksheet.

When you create a pivot table from another pivot table in the same workbook, both pivot tables are linked to their common underlying source data. If you refresh one pivot table using the Refresh Data command or button, the other pivot table is refreshed, too.

To use data from a pivot table in another workbook, copy the pivot table from the other workbook using the Copy command on the Edit menu. Then paste it directly onto your worksheet using the Paste command.

See Also

Help

Using a Microsoft Excel list or database

Using an external data source

Using multiple consolidation ranges

What Is a Pivot Table?

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"


PivotTable Wizard, Step 2

This step enables you to specify the Microsoft Excel list or database range you want to use.

Note  Remove all subtotals and filters from the list before creating a pivot table.

Range

Enables you to type the sheet name and range of cells or to select the range on the worksheet. If the source list is in another workbook, type the workbook name using the following syntax:

[workbook]sheetname!range

where workbook is the filename of the workbook and sheetname is the name of the sheet in the workbook.

If the range you want to use has a name, you can just type that name. You can also choose the Browse button to find the workbook containing the list you want to use.

Note  If you select a cell in the list before you choose the PivotTable command, Microsoft Excel enters the range for you.

Browse

Displays the Browse dialog box so you can select the workbook that contains the list you want to use. After selecting the workbook, type the sheet name and range.

See Also

Help

What Is a Pivot Table?

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"


PivotTable Wizard, Step 2

This step enables you to start Microsoft Query so you can retrieve data from external data sources. To use this option, Microsoft Query and the required Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) drivers must be installed. You must also specify the data sources you want to use.

Get Data

If you are creating a new pivot table, this button starts Microsoft Query and displays the Select Data Source dialog box so you can specify a data source.

If you are editing the query for an existing pivot table, this button starts Microsoft Query and displays the original query.

When you finish using Microsoft Query, choose the Return Data To Microsoft Excel command from the Microsoft Query File menu to return to the PivotTable Wizard.

See Also

Help

What Is a Pivot Table?

User's Guide

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Microsoft Query User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Getting Started with Queries"


PivotTable Wizard, Step 2a

This step enables you to select a method for combining the data from multiple Microsoft Excel consolidation ranges in a new pivot table. There are two methods for combining data from multiple worksheet ranges:

Select the I Will Create The Page Fields option button for the PivotTable Wizard to assign your ranges to item names in up to four page fields.

Select the Create A Single Page Field For Me option button for Microsoft Excel to create only one page field.

.

See Also

Help

What Is a Pivot Table?

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"


PivotTable Wizard, Step 2

This step enables you to create a new pivot table using the data in another pivot table in the active workbook.

Choose a pivot table name from the list. To find out the name of a pivot table, select a cell in the source pivot table and choose the PivotTable command. Then choose the Next button to display the final step of the PivotTable Wizard. The pivot table's name appears in the PivotTable Name box.

Tip  This option only provides access to pivot table data in the active workbook. To use data from a pivot table in another workbook, copy the pivot table from the other workbook using the Copy command on the Edit menu. Then paste the table directly onto your target worksheet using the Paste command.

See Also

Help

What Is a Pivot Table?

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"


PivotTable Wizard, Step 2b

This step enables you to specify the location of the worksheet ranges you want to combine in the pivot table.

If you chose the Create A Single Page Field For Me option button in Step 2, Microsoft Excel assigns the ranges you specify to a single page field for you.

If you chose the I Will Create The Page Fields option button in Step 2, you can assign the ranges you specify to page field items you create.

Range

Specifies the reference to the range containing the data you want consolidated. When you choose the Add button, the reference you type is added to the All Rnages box. Enter the sheet name and the range reference or select the range on the worksheet. If the source range is in another workbook, type the workbook name using the following syntax:

[workbook]sheetname!range

where workbook is the filename of the workbook and sheetname is the name of the sheet in the workbook.

If the range you want to use has a name, you can just type that name. You can also choose the Browse button to locate and select the workbook.

Repeat for each range you want consolidated in the pivot table.

Browse

Displays the Browse dialog box so you can select the workbook that contains the data you want to use. After selecting the workbook, type the sheet name and the range reference.

Add

Moves the worksheet range reference you type in the Range box to the All Ranges box.

Delete

Removes the selected worksheet range reference from the All Ranges box.

All Ranges

Lists all the worksheet ranges that will be combined in the pivot table.

Number Of Page Fields

Specifies the total number of page fields you want to appear in the pivot table. The option button you select determines how many Field boxes are available. This option is only available if you chose the I Will Create The Page Fields option button in Step 2.

Field Boxes

Creates an item label and assigns to that item the worksheet range selected in the All Ranges box. Select a range in the All Ranges box, and then type an item name in each available field box. Data from the ranges assigned to the same item is combined in the pivot table. These options are only available if you chose the I Will Create The Page Fields option button in Step 2.

See Also

Help

What Is a Pivot Table?

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"


PivotTable Wizard, Step 3

This step enables you to design the pivot table layout. The right side of the dialog box contains buttons that represent the fields in the source list or table. The picture in the dialog box represents the pivot area, with sections for the row fields, column fields, and page fields, as well as a data area for the summarized data.

Note  If you selected the Multiple Consolidation Ranges option in the first step, the field names are generic.

To add a field

1.	Select a field.

If your source data contains more than six fields, the PivotTable Wizard displays only the first six. To see the other fields, use the horizontal scroll bar that is located in the lower right corner of the PivotTable Wizard dialog box.

2.	Drag the field to the Row, Column, or Page area.

3.	Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each field you want displayed as a row, column, or page field.

4.	Drag one or more data fields into the Data area. Be sure to include at least one data field.

To move a field

Drag the field to a new location in the pivot area.

To delete a field

Drag the field out of the pivot area.

To customize a field

Double-click the field to display and change field options.

See Also

Help

What Is a Pivot Table?

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"


PivotTable Wizard, Step 4

This step enables you to specify where to put the new pivot table and to select options for totaling and formatting the data.

PivotTable Starting Cell

Specifies the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the pivot table to appear.

Type the cell reference or select the cell on the worksheet. Specify the sheet name and cell reference using the following syntax:

'sheetname'!reference

where sheetname is the name of the sheet in the workbook, and reference is the reference for the cell.

To create the pivot table on a new worksheet, leave the PivotTable Starting Cell box blank.

PivotTable Name

Displays the name of the pivot table.

PivotTable Options

Specifies general display and data storage options for the pivot table.

Grand Totals For Columns

Displays grand totals for columns.

Grand Totals For Rows

Displays grand totals for rows.

Save Data With Table Layout

Saves a duplicate of the source data on which the pivot table data is based. If you clear this check box, hidden source data is discarded when you close the workbook containing the pivot table. Data is also discarded from other pivot tables in the workbook that use this pivot table as a data source.

To refresh a pivot table whose data has been discarded, use the Refresh Data command on the shortcut menu.

AutoFormat Table

Applies an autoformat to the pivot table. You can apply a different autoformat to an existing pivot table by using the AutoFormat command on the Format menu.

See Also

Help

What Is a Pivot Table?

User's Guide

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"


Printing

Overview of Setting Up What You Want to Print

Selecting a printer

Setting page orientation and size

Setting margins and alignment

Creating headers and footers

Printing gridlines and row and column headings

Printing cell notes with a worksheet

Specifying an area of a worksheet to print

Printing titles on multiple pages

Overview of Printing Your Work

Previewing what will print

Printing a sheet, selected range, or entire workbook

Printing a range of pages

Setting page printing order

Inserting or removing page breaks

Reducing or enlarging what you want to print

Choosing how to size a chart sheet

Overview of Creating and Printing Custom Reports

Creating a report

Editing a report

Printing a report


Overview of Setting Up What You Want to Print

Before you print your work, you can select a printer, set up the page, and choose what elements to print. For any options you do not choose, Microsoft Excel uses default settings.

See Also

Help

Creating headers and footers

Printing cell notes with a worksheet

Printing gridlines and row and column headings

Printing titles on multiple pages

Selecting a printer

Setting margins and alignment

Setting page orientation and size

Specifying an area of a worksheet to print

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Selecting a printer

Overview

1.	From the File menu, choose Print.

2.	Choose the Printer Setup button.

3.	Select the printer you want.

4.	Choose the OK button to save your selection and close the Printer Setup dialog box.

5.	To close the Print dialog box, choose the Cancel button.

To print now, choose the OK button.

Note  The printer you choose will become the default printer for all your Windows applications until you choose another printer.

If no printer is available, you must install one. For more information, see your Windows system documentation.

See Also

Help

Print Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Setting page orientation and size

Overview

To set page orientation

1.	Select the sheet or sheets for which you want this action to apply.

2.	From the File Menu, choose Page Setup.

3.	Select the Page tab.

4.	To set the page orientation to portrait (vertical), select the Portrait option button under Orientation.

To set the page orientation to landscape (horizontal), select the Landscape option button.

5.	To close the Page Setup dialog box, choose the OK button.

To print now, choose the Print button.

To set paper size

1.	Select the sheet or sheets for which you want this action to apply.

2.	From the File Menu, choose Page Setup.

3.	Select the Page tab.

4.	In the Paper Size box, select the paper size you want.

5.	To close the Page Setup dialog box, choose the OK button.

To print now, choose the Print button.

See Also

Help

Page Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Selecting a sheet or sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Setting margins and alignment

Overview

To set page margins

1.	Select the sheet or sheets for which you want this action to apply.

2.	From the File Menu, choose Page Setup.

3.	Select the Margins tab.

4.	In the Top, Bottom, Left and Right boxes, type or select the margin size you want.

This setting should not be less than the minimum margins of your printer.

5.	To close the Page Setup dialog box, choose the OK button.

To print now, choose the Print button.

To set header and footer margins

1.	Select the sheet or sheets for which you want this action to apply.

2.	From the File Menu, choose Page Setup.

3.	Select the Margins tab.

4.	Under From Edge, type or select the header and footer margin sizes you want.

This setting should be less than your top and bottom margin settings.

5.	To close the Page Setup dialog box, choose the OK button.

To print now, choose the Print button.

To set vertical and horizontal alignment on the page

1.	Select the sheet or sheets for which you want this action to apply.

2.	From the File Menu, choose Page Setup.

3.	Select the Margins tab.

4.	To center the worksheet data horizontally on the page between the left and right margins, select the Horizontally check box under Center On Page.

To center the worksheet data vertically on the page between the top and bottom margins, select the Vertically check box.

5.	To close the Page Setup dialog box, choose the OK button.

To print now, choose the Print button.

See Also

Help

Margins Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Selecting a sheet or sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Creating headers and footers

Overview

To select a built-in header or footer

1.	Select the sheet or sheets for which you want this action to apply.

2.	From the File menu, choose Page Setup.

3.	Select the Header/Footer tab.

4.	In the Header and Footer boxes, select the header and footer text you want. The sample output areas show you the results of your selections.

5.	To close the Page Setup dialog box, choose the OK button.

To print now, choose the Print button.

To create a custom header or footer

1.	Select the sheet or sheets for which you want this action to apply.

2.	From the File menu, choose Page Setup.

3.	Select the Header/Footer tab.

4.	Select the Header box or the Footer box. If you want to base your custom header or footer on a specific built-in header or footer, select it.

5.	Choose the Custom Header button or the Custom Footer button.

6.	In the Header or Footer dialog box, select a section, and then click the buttons to insert the header or footer codes you want in that section. You can also type the header or footer codes you want to insert. To enter text in addition to the header or footer codes, type the text directly in the section.

Note  You can have only one custom header or footer at a time. If you create a new custom header or footer, it will replace your old one.

7.	If you want to format the text, select the text, choose the Font button in the dialog box, select the formatting you want, and choose the OK button.

8.	If needed, repeat steps 6 and 7 for the other sections of the header or footer.

9.	Choose the OK button to close the Header or Footer dialog box.

10.	To close the Page Setup dialog box, choose the OK button.

To print now, choose the Print button.

See Also

Help

Built-In Headers and Footers

Header and Footer Codes

Header/Footer Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Selecting a sheet or sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Printing gridlines and row and column headings

Overview

1.	Select the sheet or sheets for which you want this action to apply.

2.	From the File menu, choose Page Setup.

3.	Select the Sheet tab.

4.	To print gridlines, select the Gridlines check box under Print.

To print row and column headings, select the Row And Column Headings check box.

5.	To close the Page Setup dialog box, choose the OK button.

To print now, choose the Print button.

See Also

Help

Printing cell notes with a worksheet

Selecting a sheet or sheets

Sheet Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Printing cell notes with a worksheet

Overview

1.	Select the sheet or sheets for which you want this action to apply.

2.	From the File menu, choose Page Setup.

3.	Select the Sheet tab.

4.	Under Print, select the Notes check box.

Tip  To print the cell reference for each note, select both the Notes check box and the Row And Column Headings check box.

5.	To close the Page Setup dialog box, choose the OK button.

To print now, choose the Print button.

See Also

Help

Printing gridlines and row and column headings

Sheet Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Specifying an area of a worksheet to print

Overview

1.	Select the sheet for which you want this action to apply.

2.	From the File menu, choose Page Setup.

3.	Select the Sheet tab.

4.	Select the Print Area box.

5.	On the worksheet, select the range or ranges you want to print. If needed, drag the Page Setup dialog box out of your way while you select the range to print.

You can also type cell references or defined names in the Print Area box.

6.	To close the Page Setup dialog box, choose the OK button.

To print now, choose the Print button.

See Also

Help

Naming a cell, range, or formula

Selecting a cell or range of cells

Selecting a sheet or sheets

Sheet Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Printing titles on multiple pages

Overview

1.	Select the sheet for which you want this action to apply.

2.	From the File menu, choose Page Setup.

3.	Select the Sheet tab.

4.	If you want to print titles at the top of every page, select the Rows To Repeat At Top box.

If you want to print titles at the left of every page, select the Columns To Repeat At Left box.

5.	On the worksheet, select the rows or columns you want to print on every page as titles. If needed, drag the Page Setup dialog box out of your way while you select the row or column headings.

You can also type a cell reference or defined name in the Rows To Repeat At Top box or the Columns To Repeat At Left box.

6.	To close the Page Setup dialog box, choose the OK button.

To print now, choose the Print button.

Note  Titles print only after the rows or columns containing them are printed.

See Also

Help

Naming a cell, range, or formula

Selecting a sheet or sheets

Selecting an entire row or column or all cells on a sheet

Selecting nonadjacent cells or ranges

Sheet Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Overview of Printing Your Work

Once you're ready to print your data, you can see a preview of your work just as it will print, and adjust page settings to get the printed output you want. You can determine the order in which Microsoft Excel creates pages from your worksheet, control page breaks and page numbers, scale your work to fit on a specified number of pages, and scale chart sheets.

See Also

Help

Choosing how to size a chart sheet

Inserting or removing page breaks

Previewing what will print

Printing a range of pages

Printing a sheet, selected range, or entire workbook

Reducing or enlarging what you want to print

Setting page printing order

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Previewing what will print

Overview

1.	Select the sheet or sheets you want to preview.

2.	Click the Print Preview button.

Microsoft Excel displays a full page view of the active sheet in the preview window.

To display the page in magnified view in the preview window (with only a portion of the page showing), choose the Zoom button, or click the area of the page you want to see. Choose the Zoom button or click again to display the full page.

3.	To print from the preview window, choose the Print button.

To close the preview window without printing, choose the Close button.

See Also

Help

Print Preview Command (File Menu)

Printing a range of pages

Printing a sheet, selected range, or entire workbook

Selecting a sheet or sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Printing a sheet, selected range, or entire workbook

Overview

To print a selected range

1.	Select the sheet or group of sheets you want to print.

2.	From the File menu, choose Print.

3.	Under Print What, select the Selection option button.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel prints the cells that are selected on the active sheet or sheets, ignoring any print areas you created.

To print a single sheet or group of sheets

1.	Select the sheet or group of sheets you want to print.

2.	From the File menu, choose Print.

3.	Under Print What, select the Selected Sheets option button.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Shortcut:	Print button (uses current settings in Page Setup and Print dialog boxes)

Microsoft Excel prints the active sheet or sheets. If any of those sheets include print areas, only the print areas are printed.

To print the entire workbook

1.	From the File menu, choose Print.

2.	Under Print What, select the Entire Workbook option button.

3.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel prints all workbook sheets that contain any data. If any of those sheets include print areas, only the print areas are printed.

See Also

Help

  Print Button

Previewing what will print

Print Command (File Menu)

Printing a range of pages

Selecting a sheet or sheets

Specifying an area of a worksheet to print

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Printing a range of pages

Overview

1.	Select the sheet or sheets you want to print.

2.	From the File menu, choose Print.

3.	Under Page Range, select the Page(s) option button and then enter the page range you want to print.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Previewing what will print

Print Command (File Menu)

Printing a sheet, selected range, or entire workbook

Selecting a sheet or sheets

Specifying an area of a worksheet to print

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Setting page printing order

Overview

1.	Select the sheet or sheets for which you want this action to apply.

2.	From the File menu, choose Page Setup.

3.	Select the Sheet tab.

4.	To print from the first page to the pages below, and then move to the right and continue printing down the worksheet, select the Down, Then Across option button under Page Order.

To print from the first page to the pages to the right, and then move down and continue printing across the worksheet, select the Across, Then Down option button.

5.	To close the Page Setup dialog box, choose the OK button.

To print now, choose the Print button.

See Also

Help

Previewing what will print

Printing a sheet, selected range, or entire workbook

Selecting a sheet or sheets

Sheet Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Specifying an area of a worksheet to print

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Inserting or removing page breaks

Overview

To insert a vertical and horizontal page break

1.	Select the cell where you want to start a new page.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Page Break.

Microsoft Excel inserts a page break above and to the left of the selected cell.

To insert a horizontal page break only

1.	Select the row where you want to start a new page.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Page Break.

Microsoft Excel inserts a page break above the selected row.

To insert a vertical page break only

1.	Select the column where you want to start a new page.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Page Break.

Microsoft Excel inserts a page break to the left of the selected column.

To remove a manual page break

1.	Select any cell directly below a horizontal page break or to the right of a vertical page break.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Remove Page Break.

To remove all manual page breaks

1.	Select all cells in the worksheet.

2.	From the Insert menu, choose Remove Page Break.

See Also

Help

Page Break and Remove Page Break Commands (Insert Menu)

Previewing what will print

Selecting an entire row or column or all cells on a sheet

Specifying an area of a worksheet to print

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Reducing or enlarging what you want to print

Overview

To scale the sheet to a specific percentage

1.	Select the sheet or sheets for which you want this action to apply.

2.	From the File menu, choose Page Setup.

3.	Select the Page tab.

4.	Under Scaling, select the Adjust To option button.

5.	Select or type the percentage by which you want the sheet enlarged or reduced.

100 percent is normal scaling. You can enlarge the sheet up to 400 percent of normal size, or reduce it to 10 percent.

6.	To close the Page Setup dialog box, choose the OK button.

To print now, choose the Print button.

To fit the sheet on a specific number of pages

1.	Select the sheet or sheets for which you want this action to apply.

2.	From the File menu, choose Page Setup.

3.	Select the Page tab.

4.	Under Scaling, select the Fit To option button.

5.	Type or select the number of pages you want the sheet printed on.

The printed data will not exceed this number of pages. Microsoft Excel will not enlarge the data to fill the pages.

6.	To close the Page Setup dialog box, choose the OK button.

To print now, choose the Print button.

Note  Microsoft Excel ignores manual page breaks when you fit the sheet on a specific number of pages.

See Also

Help

Inserting or removing page breaks

Page Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Previewing what will print

Printing a sheet, selected range, or entire workbook

Selecting a sheet or sheets

Specifying an area of a worksheet to print

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Choosing how to size a chart sheet

Overview

This procedure applies only to charts on chart sheets. Charts embedded on worksheets print as displayed on the worksheet.

1.	Select the chart sheet or sheets for which you want this action to apply.

2.	From the File menu, choose Page Setup.

3.	Select the Chart tab.

4.	Under Printed Chart Size, select the sizing you want applied to the chart.

5.	To close the Page Setup dialog box, choose the OK button.

To print now, choose the Print button.

See Also

Help

Chart Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Moving and sizing chart items

Previewing what will print

Printing a sheet, selected range, or entire workbook

Selecting a sheet or sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Overview of Creating and Printing Custom Reports

A report is a combination of sheets, views and scenarios. You can create multiple reports per workbook, and the reports are saved with the workbook file.

See Also

Help

Creating a report

Editing a report

Printing a report

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Creating a report

Overview

1.	From the File menu, choose Print Report.

If the Print Report command does not appear on the File menu, you need to install the Report Manager add-in.

2.	If you have previously created a report in this workbook, and the Print Report dialog box is displayed, choose the Add button to display the Add Report dialog box.

3.	In the Report Name box, type a name for the report.

4.	In the Sheet box, select the sheet you want for the first section.

5.	In the View box, select the view, if any, that you want for the first section.

6.	In the Scenario box, select the scenario, if any, that you want for the first section.

7.	Choose the Add button to add the section to the Sections In This Report box.

8.	Repeat steps 4 through 7 until you have created all of the sections you want in the report.

9.	If you want a section to appear in a different order in the Sections In This Report box, select the section that you want to move, and choose the Move Up or Move Down button.

The sections of the report print in the order in which they are listed.

10.	If you want to remove a section, select the section that you want to remove, and choose the Delete button.

11.	If you want the pages in the report to be numbered consecutively, select the Use Continuous Page Numbers check box.

12.	Choose the OK button to close the Add Report dialog box.

13.	To print the report now, choose the Print button.

To close the dialog box without printing, choose the Close button.

See Also

Help

Add Report and Edit Report Dialog Boxes

Creating a scenario

Creating or deleting a view of a worksheet

Print Report Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Editing a report

Overview

1.	From the File menu, choose Print Report.

If the Print Report command does not appear on the File menu, you need to install the Report Manager add-in.

2.	In the Reports box, select the report you want to edit.

3.	Choose the Edit button.

To add a new section, select the sheet, view, and/or scenario you want under Section To Add, and then choose the Add button.

To delete a section, select it in the Sections In This Report box, and then choose the Delete button.

4.	Repeat step 3 to add or delete any additional sections.

5.	If you want a section to appear in a different order in the list, select the section that you want to move, and then choose the Move Up or Move Down button.

The sections of the report print in the order in which they are listed.

6.	If you want pages in the report to be numbered consecutively, select the Use Continuous Page Numbers check box.

7.	Choose the OK button to close the Edit Report dialog box.

8.	To print the report now, choose the Print button.

To close the dialog box without printing, choose the Close button.

See Also

Help

Add Report and Edit Report Dialog Boxes

Creating a scenario

Creating or deleting a view of a worksheet

Print Report Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Printing a report

Overview

1.	From the File menu, choose Print Report.

If the Print Report command does not appear on the File menu, you need to install the Report Manager add-in.

2.	In the Reports box, select the report you want to print.

3.	Choose the Print button.

4.	In the Copies box, type the number of copies you want to print.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Print Report Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Header and Footer Codes

You can customize the built-in headers and footers with special font, size, or text style, or enter your own text. To display the Header or Footer dialog box, choose the Page Setup command from the File menu, and then select the Header/Footer tab. Select the header or footer you want to customize, and then choose the Custom Header or Custom Footer button.

Select one of the three boxes (left, center, right), and then type text or click a button to enter a header or footer code. Depending on which box you selected, the information will be left justified, centered, or right justified in the header or the footer.

Use the Font button to change the font, size, and text style of the selected header or footer.

If you want to start a new line, press ALT+ENTER.

If you want to delete a header or footer, select it and press BACKSPACE.

Font button

Action:	Displays the Font dialog box

Page Number button

Code:	&[Page]

Action:	Inserts the page number

Total Pages button

Code:	&[Pages]

Action:	Inserts the total number of pages

Date button

Code:	&[Date]

Action:	Inserts the current date

Time button

Code:	&[Time]

Action:	Inserts the current time

Filename button

Code:	&[File]

Action:	Inserts the filename of the active workbook

Sheet Name button

Code:	&[Tab]

Action:	Inserts the sheet name of the active sheet

To print an ampersand (&)

Code:	&&

Action:	Print a single ampersand (&)

See Also

Help

Built-In Headers and Footers

Creating headers and footers

Header/Footer Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Previewing what will print

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Built-In Headers and Footers

In the Header and Footer boxes on the Header/Footer tab, you can select a built-in header or footer for your sheet. If you need to customize a header or footer, select a built-in header or footer and choose the Custom Header or Custom Footer button to display the Header Dialog Box, or the Footer Dialog Box.

The built-in headers and footers in the Header and Footer boxes are separated by commas to indicate their position (left, center, right) when printed, or when viewed in the preview window. For example, Microsoft Confidential, Sheet1, Page 1 prints "Microsoft Confidential" on the left of the page, "Sheet1" in the center of the page, and "Page 1" on the right of the page.

See Also

Help

Creating headers and footers

Header/Footer Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Previewing what will print

User's Guide

Chapter 14, "Printing"


Protecting a Workbook

Overview of Preventing Workbook Files from Being Opened or Saved

Requiring a password when a workbook file is opened or accessed

Requiring a password when a workbook file is saved

Making a workbook file read-only recommended

Removing password protection for a workbook file

Overview of Controlling Changes to Workbooks That Are Open

Protecting and unprotecting workbook windows or structure

Protecting and unprotecting a sheet

Locking and unlocking individual cell ranges on a worksheet

Locking and unlocking graphic objects on a worksheet or chart sheet

Hiding formulas

Overview of Hiding and Unhiding Workbooks and Sheets

Hiding and unhiding a workbook

Hiding and unhiding a sheet


Overview of Preventing Workbook Files from Being Opened or Saved

You can assign protection to a whole workbook in order to prevent unauthorized people from opening it, accessing it, or saving changes to it. Microsoft Excel provides three levels of workbook protection:

Password protection prevents people who don't know the password from opening the workbook.

Write-reservation protection enables people to open the workbook, but they can't save changes to it without knowing the password.

Read-only recommended protection enables people to choose whether to open the workbook as a read-only file or to open it as a read-write file.

You assign any of these levels of protection by using the Save As command on the File menu. To assign one of the three levels of protection to a workbook:

Open the workbook you want to protect.

From the File menu, choose SaveAs, and then choose the Options button.

Choose the level of protection you want.

Close the workbook file to activate protection.

Caution  If you assign password protection to a workbook and then forget the protection password, you can't open the workbook, remove protection from the workbook, or recover data from the workbook. It's a good idea to keep a list of your passwords and their corresponding workbook and sheet names in a safe place. (Passwords are case sensitive.)

See Also

Help

Making a workbook file read-only recommended

Removing password protection for a workbook file

Requiring a password when a workbook file is opened or accessed

Requiring a password when a workbook file is saved


Requiring a password when a workbook file is opened or accessed

Overview

Caution  If you forget the Protection Password, you can't open the workbook, remove protection from the workbook, or recover data from the workbook. It's a good idea to keep a list of your passwords and their corresponding workbook and sheet names in a safe place. (Remember that passwords are case sensitive.)

1.	Open the workbook you want to protect.

2.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

3.	Choose the Options button.

4.	In the Protection Password box, type a password.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	In the Reenter Protection Password box, type the password again.

7.	Choose the OK button.

8.	In the Save As dialog box, choose the OK button to save the protected workbook.

9.	In the message box, choose the OK button to replace the saved workbook with the open workbook. To cancel the save operation so you can rename the workbook, choose the Cancel button.

10.	Close the workbook to activate password protection.

When someone tries to open the workbook, the Password dialog box appears. The person needs to type the password you chose and then choose the OK button to open the file.

See Also

Help

Save As Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Requiring a password when a workbook file is saved

Overview

1.	Open the workbook you want to protect.

2.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

3.	Choose the Options button.

4.	In the Write Reservation Password box, type a password.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	In the Reenter Write Reservation Password box, type the password again.

7.	Choose the OK button.

8.	In the Save As dialog box, choose the OK button to save the protected workbook.

9.	In the message box, choose the OK button to replace the saved workbook with the open workbook. To cancel the save operation so you can rename the workbook, choose the Cancel button.

10.	Close the workbook to activate Write Reservation protection.

When someone tries to open the workbook, the Password dialog box appears. The person needs to type the password you chose, or choose the Read Only button, to open the workbook.

If the workbook is opened as a read-only file, it can't be saved under its original name. If someone makes a change to the workbook and then tries to save it, the Save As dialog box appears. The person can either cancel the save operation or save the workbook under a different name.

See Also

Help

Save As Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Making a workbook file read-only recommended

Overview

1.	Open the workbook you want to protect.

2.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

3.	Choose the Options button.

4.	Select the Read-Only Recommended check box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	In the Save As dialog box, choose the OK button to save the protected workbook.

7.	In the message box, choose the OK button to replace the saved workbook with the open workbook. To cancel the save operation so you can rename the workbook, choose the Cancel button.

8.	Close the workbook to activate Read-Only Recommended protection.

When someone tries to open the workbook, a message box appears. The person can choose the Yes button to open the workbook as a read-only file or choose the No button to open it as a read-write file.

If the workbook is opened as a read-only file, it can't be saved under its original name. If a person makes a change to the read-only file and then tries to save it, the Save As dialog box appears. The person can either cancel the save operation or save the workbook under a different name.

If the workbook is opened as a read-write file, the person can change the file and then save it under its original name.

See Also

Help

Save As Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Removing password protection for a workbook file

Overview

1.	Open the workbook from which you want to remove password protection.

2.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

3.	Choose the Options button.

4.	In the Protection Password box or in the Write Reservation Password box, select the password.

5.	Press the DELETE key to remove the password.

6.	In the Save As dialog box, choose the OK button to save the protected workbook.

7.	In the message box, choose the OK button to replace the saved workbook with the open workbook. To cancel the save operation so you can rename the workbook, choose the Cancel button.

See Also

Help

Save As Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Overview of Controlling Changes to Workbooks That Are Open

Microsoft Excel provides several ways you can limit the ability of unauthorized people to see and change a workbook after it is opened. You can:

Protect a workbook's windows so they can't be moved or resized.

Protect a workbook's structure so sheets in the workbook can't be moved, deleted, hidden, unhidden, or renamed, and new sheets can't be inserted.

Protect a sheet to prevent people from changing its contents. For example, you can prevent changes to cells on worksheets, items on a chart sheet, graphic objects on worksheets and chart sheets, code in a Visual Basic module, or items on a dialog sheet.

Hide worksheet formulas so they don't appear in the formula bar.

See Also

Help

Hiding formulas

Locking and unlocking graphic objects on a worksheet or chart sheet

Locking and unlocking individual cell ranges on a worksheet

Protecting and unprotecting a sheet

Protecting and unprotecting workbook windows or structure

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Protecting and unprotecting workbook windows or structure

Overview

To protect a workbook's windows or structure

1.	Open the workbook you want to protect.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Protection, and then choose Protect Workbook.

3.	Select the Windows check box to protect windows, or select the Structure check box to protect structure. You can select both check boxes.

4.	To prevent others from removing workbook protection, you can type a password in the Password box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	If you typed a password, retype it in the Confirm Password dialog box.

7.	Choose the OK button.

To unprotect a workbook's windows or structure

1.	Open the workbook you want to unprotect.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Protection, and then choose Unprotect Workbook.

3.	If a password was used to protect the workbook, type the password, and then choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Protect Workbook Command and Unprotect Workbook Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Protecting and unprotecting a sheet

Overview

To protect a sheet

1.	Activate the sheet you want to protect.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Protection, and then choose Protect Sheet.

3.	Select the check boxes for the items you want to protect.

Select the Contents check box to protect cells on worksheets or items in charts.

Select the Objects check box to prevent people from deleting, moving, editing, or resizing graphic objects on a worksheet or chart sheet.

Select the Scenarios check box to prevent changes to the definitions of scenarios on a worksheet.

4.	To prevent others from removing sheet protection, you can type a password in the Password box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	If you typed a password, retype it in the Confirm Password dialog box and then choose the OK button.

To move among unlocked cells on a protected sheet, press TAB.

To unprotect a sheet

1.	Activate the sheet you want to unprotect.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Protection, and then choose Unprotect Sheet.

3.	If a password was used to protect the sheet, type the password and then choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Protect Sheet Command and Unprotect Sheet Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Locking and unlocking graphic objects on a worksheet or chart sheet

Overview

1.	Select a graphic object.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Object.

3.	Select the Protection tab.

4.	Select the check box labeled Locked.

To lock text in a text box, select the text box and then select the Lock Text check box in the dialog box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	Protect the sheet that contains the object by using the Protect Sheet command.

See Also

Help

  Lock Cell Button

Protect Sheet Command and Unprotect Sheet Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

Protecting and unprotecting a sheet

Protection Tab, Object Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Locking and unlocking individual cell ranges on a worksheet

Overview

To lock a cell range

1.	Select the cell range you want to lock.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

3.	Select the Protection tab.

4.	Select the check box labeled Locked.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	Protect the sheet using the Protect Sheet command.

Alternate method

1.	Select a cell range.

2.	Choose the Lock Cell button.

3.	Protect the sheet using the Protect Sheet command.

To unlock a cell range

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Protection, then choose Unprotect Sheet.

2.	Select the cell range you want to unlock.

3.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

4.	Select the Protection tab.

5.	Clear the Locked check box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

7.	Protect the sheet again using the Protect Sheet command.

See Also

Help

  Lock Cell Button

Protect Sheet Command and Unprotect Sheet Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

Protecting and unprotecting a sheet

Protection Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Hiding formulas

Overview

You can hide a cell's formula so it doesn't appear in the formula bar when the cell is selected.

1.	Select the range of cells for which you want to hide formulas.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Cells.

3.	Select the Protection tab.

4.	Select the check box labeled Hidden.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	Protect the sheet by using the Protect Sheet command.

To unhide a formula, clear the check box labeled Hidden.

See Also

Help

Protect Sheet Command and Unprotect Sheet Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

Protecting and unprotecting a sheet

Protection Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Overview of Hiding and Unhiding Workbooks and Sheets

Hiding workbooks and sheets within workbooks reduces the number of windows and sheets on your screen and helps prevent unwanted changes to hidden sheets. Sheets containing macros or critical data can be open and available to other sheets, but not readily available for editing.

See Also

Help

Hiding and unhiding a sheet

Hiding and unhiding a workbook

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Hiding and unhiding a workbook

Overview

To hide a workbook

1.	Open the workbook you want to hide.

2.	From the Window menu, choose Hide.

To unhide a workbook

1.	From the Window menu, choose Unhide.

2.	From the list of hidden workbooks, choose the workbook you want to unhide.

You can unhide only one workbook at a time.

3.	Choose the OK button.

If the workbook's windows are protected with a password, type the password.

See Also

Help

Hide and Unhide Commands (Window Menu)

Hiding and unhiding a sheet

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Hiding and unhiding a sheet

Overview

To hide a sheet

To hide a sheet, the sheet's workbook must contain more than one sheet.

1.	Activate the sheet you want to hide.

2.	From the Format menu, choose Sheet, and then choose Hide.

Tip  By using a Visual Basic statement, you can hide a sheet so that people can't use the Unhide command to display it. Once a sheet has been hidden in this way, the only way it can be displayed is by using a Visual Basic statement to unhide it.  For more information, search the online Visual Basic Reference for "Visible Property."

To unhide a sheet

1.	From the Format menu, choose Sheet, and then choose Unhide.

2.	From the list of hidden sheets, choose the sheet you want to unhide.

You can unhide only one sheet at a time.

3.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Hide and Unhide Commands (Window Menu)

Hiding and unhiding a workbook

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Microsoft Query Add-in Messages

Cannot execute MSQUERY.EXE

Delete this query definition? (The actual data will remain.)

External reference is not valid.

Locked cells cannot be changed.

Opening query failed.

Operation canceled.

The active cell must be part of a Microsoft Query definition or a pivot table.

The destination reference is in a data range. Do you want to replace the query definition?

The range in which the data will be placed contains a part of an array or locked cells.

The selection is invalid.

Use PivotTable Wizard to get external data for a pivot table.


Opening query failed.

You cannot edit or refresh a query if the query is not accessible or the name has been changed.

If 	Then

The query was deleted	Re-create the query.
The name of the query was changed	Rename the query to the original name or re-create the query.
The location of the query changed	Move the query to the original location or re-create the query.
The query access privileges changed	Change the privileges to allow access.
The data source file access changed	Adjust the data source details and then re-create the query.


Operation canceled.

You pressed ESC while Microsoft Query was returning query results to Microsoft Excel.

Choose the OK button to cancel the DDE communication and then rerun the query.


Delete this query definition? (The actual data will remain.)

You cleared the Keep Query Definition check box.

OK

Deletes the query definition and retains the result set.

You will no longer be able to update your data with the Refresh Data command or Refresh Data button unless you create a new query.

Cancel

Cancels your action and returns to the Get External Data dialog box. Select the Keep Query Definition check box and choose the OK button.


The selection is invalid.

You selected a picture or object and then tried to retrieve or update data.

1.	Select a cell on a worksheet or macro sheet.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Get External Data or Refresh Data.

You can also use the Get External Data button or Refresh Data button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.


Locked cells cannot be changed.

Your Microsoft Excel worksheet is protected.

To unprotect your worksheet

From the Tools menu, choose Protection, and then choose Unprotect Sheet.


The range in which the data will be placed contains a part of an array or locked cells.

Your destination range contains:

Part of an array. Move or delete the array from the destination range, or change the destination range so that it is outside of the array.

Locked cells. Unlock the cells in the destination range, or change the destination range so that it is outside of the locked cells.


Cannot execute MSQUERY.EXE.

MSQUERY.EXE is either not installed properly or not on your path.

Run the Microsoft Excel Setup program to install Microsoft Query. The default settings install Microsoft Query in the \\MSAPPS\MSQUERY subdirectory of the directory in which Microsoft Windows is installed. If you do not want to install Microsoft Query in this directory, include MSQUERY on the path in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.


The destination reference is in a data range. Do you want to replace the query definition?

You have specified a destination reference that is within an existing query definition.

OK

Changes the current query definition.

Cancel

Cancels the action and displays the Get External Data dialog box so that you can change the destination.


Use PivotTable Wizard to get external data for a pivot table.

Your selection is in a pivot table and you chose the Get External Data command from the Data menu or clicked the Get External Data button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

You can either:

Select a cell or range that is not in a pivot table and then use the Get External Data command or button.

--Or--

Use the PivotTable Wizard to get data from an external data source for an existing pivot table.


External reference is not valid.

The destination reference you specified is either:

An external reference that does not exist

--Or--

A chart sheet

Change the destination reference to an existing worksheet or macro sheet.


The active cell must be part of a Microsoft Query definition or a pivot table.

The active cell must be in the result set or pivot table in Microsoft Excel before you can use the Refresh Data command or button to update the data.

1.	Select a cell in a Microsoft Query result set or in a pivot table in Microsoft Excel.

2.	Choose the Refresh Data command from the Data menu or click the Refresh Data button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.


File Formats for Lotus 1-2-3

You can open Lotus 1-2-3 files in Microsoft Excel, and you can save Microsoft Excel files as Lotus 1-2-3 files. Microsoft Excel can read files in the following Lotus 1-2-3 file formats:

Lotus 1-2-3 file format	Release number

WKS 	Releases 1 and 1A

WK1, associated FMT files	Release 2.0 or later

WK3, associated FMT files	Releases 3.0, 3.1+, and 1-2-3/W

Allways (ALL)

Note  In WK3 format, Microsoft Excel can read and write both 2-D and 3-D worksheets.

See Also

Help

File Formats (Windows)

Guidelines for Moving Workbooks Between Lotus 1-2-3 and Microsoft Excel

Linking Lotus 1-2-3 Worksheets and Microsoft Excel Worksheets


Microsoft Excel Equivalents for Frequently Used Lotus 1-2-3 Commands

The following table lists Lotus 1-2-3 commands and the equivalent commands in Microsoft Excel.

Note  In Microsoft Excel you select the range you want to work with before you choose a command. Many common commands can be carried out by clicking a button on a toolbar.

Lotus 1-2-3 command	Microsoft Excel command

/c	Copy and Paste(Edit menu)

/fd	Open (File menu)

/few	Find File (File menu)

/fr	Open (File menu)

/fs	Save As (File menu)

/gv	Open (File menu)  Used when chart is in a separate file.

/m	Cut and Paste (Edit menu)

/ppg	Print (File menu)

/ppr	Set Print Area button

/qy	Exit (File menu)

/re	Clear (Edit menu)

/rf,	Number tab, Cells command (Format menu)

/rfc	Number tab, Cells command (Format menu)

/rfp	Number tab, Cells command (Format menu)

/rnl	Create command, Name submenu (Insert menu)

/rnc	Define command, Name submenu (Insert menu)

/wcs	Width command, Column submenu (Format menu)

/wdc	Delete (Edit menu)

/wdr	Delete (Edit menu)

/wey	Close and New (File menu)

/wic	Columns (Insert menu)

/wir	Rows (Insert menu)

/wtc	Unfreeze Panes (Window menu)

/wth	Freeze Panes (Window menu)

/wtv	Freeze Panes (Window menu)

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"


Lotus 1-2-3 Functions

Most Lotus 1-2-3 functions have an equivalent in Microsoft Excel. When Transition Formula Entry is activated, you can type most Lotus 1-2-3 functions directly into the formula bar, where they are automatically converted to their Microsoft Excel equivalents. The functions you can't enter in this way are specific to Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3 and later. To turn on Transition Formula Entry, select the Transition tab of the Options command on the Tools menu. Then select the Transition Formula Entry check box under Sheet Options.

Microsoft Excel uses different rules than Lotus 1-2-3 does when evaluating text in formulas, certain database criteria, and the value of certain logical operators. When Transition Formula Evaluation is activated, some of the following functions are interpreted as they would be in Lotus 1-2-3. To turn on Transition Formula Evaluation, select the Transition tab in the Options dialog box. The affected functions are noted in the following table. See  also Entering Lotus 1-2-3 Formulas.

The following table is an alphabetic list of Lotus 1-2-3 functions that have Microsoft Excel equivalents. There are also a number of Microsoft Excel functions without Lotus 1-2-3 equivalents.

Lotus function	Microsoft Excel equivalent

@@	INDIRECT

@ABS	ABS

@ACOS	ACOS

@ASIN	ASIN

@ATAN	ATAN

@ATAN2	ATAN2

@AVG	AVERAGE

@CELL	CELL

@CELLPOINTER	CELL  When used without a second argument, returns information about the current selection.

@CHAR	CHAR

@CHOOSE	CHOOSE

@CLEAN	CLEAN

@CODE	CODE

@COLS	COLUMNS

@COS	COS

@COUNT	COUNTA

@CTERM	NPER  Requires periodic payment instead of future value.

@DATE	DATE

@DATEVALUE	DATEVALUE

@DAVG	DAVERAGE

@DAY	DAY

@D360	DAYS360  Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3 and later.

@DCOUNT	DCOUNTA

@DDB	DDB

@DGET	DGET

@DMAX	DMAX

@DMIN	DMIN

@DSTD	DSTDEVP

@DSTDS	DSTDEV  Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3 and later.

@DSUM	DSUM

@DVAR	DVARP

@DVARS	DVAR  Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3 and later.

@ERR	No equivalent is necessary, because Microsoft Excel lets you type error values directly into cells and formulas.

@EXACT	EXACT

@EXP	EXP

@FALSE	FALSE

@FIND	FIND

@FV	FV

@HLOOKUP	HLOOKUP  Turn on Transition Formula Evaluation to use Lotus 1-2-3's evaluation rules.

@HOUR	HOUR

@IF	IF  Last two arguments can be any value, not just numbers or strings, as in @IF.

@INDEX	INDEX  Also has form for selecting values from an array.

@INT	TRUNC

@IRR	IRR  Arguments are given in reverse order.

@ISERR	ISERR  Detects any of six Microsoft Excel error values.

@ISNA	ISNA

@ISNUMBER	ISNONTEXT

@ISRANGE	ISREF  Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3 and later.

@ISSTRING	ISTEXT

@LEFT	LEFT

@LENGTH	LEN

@LN	LN

@LOWER	LOWER

@LOG	LOG

@MAX	MAX

@MID	MID

@MIN	MIN

@MINUTE	MINUTE

@MOD	MOD  Turn on Transition Formula Evaluation to use Lotus 1-2-3's evaluation rules.

@MONTH	MONTH

@N	N

@NA	NA

@NOW	NOW

@NPV	NPV

@PI	PI

@PMT	PMT  Arguments are in different order than in @PMT.

@PROPER	PROPER

@PV	PV  Arguments are in different order than in @PV.

@RAND	RAND  Calculates values randomly each time it is recalculated (@RAND calculates the same values in each work session).

@RATE	RATE  Arguments are in different order than in @RATE.

@REPEAT	REPT

@REPLACE	REPLACE

@RIGHT	RIGHT

@ROUND	ROUND

@ROWS	ROWS

@S	T

@SECOND	SECOND

@SIN	SIN

@SLN	SLN

@SQRT	SQRT

@STD	STDEVP

@STDS	STDEV  Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3 and later.

@STRING	FIXED

@SUM	SUM

@SYD	SYD

@TAN	TAN

@TERM	NPER  Arguments are in different order than in @TERM.

@TIME	TIME

@TIMEVALUE	TIMEVALUE

@TODAY	TODAY

@TRIM	TRIM

@TRUE	TRUE

@UPPER	UPPER

@VALUE	VALUE

@VAR	VARP

@VARS	VAR  Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3 and later.

@VDB	VDB

@VLOOKUP	VLOOKUP  Turn on Transition Formula Evaluation to use Lotus 1-2-3's evaluation rules.

@YEAR	YEAR


Entering Lotus 1-2-3 Formulas and Names

In Microsoft Excel, you can enter formulas and work with range names as you would in Lotus 1-2-3.

With the Transition tab of the Options command on the Tools menu, you can select the Transition Formula Entry check box to enter any formula or function or range name according to Lotus 1-2-3 syntax. Microsoft Excel does not automatically turn on Transition Formula Entry for Microsoft Excel worksheets and Lotus 1-2-3 worksheets.

When Transition Formula Entry is turned on, you can:

Enter any formula or function as you would in Lotus 1-2-3. Microsoft Excel automatically translates the formula into a Microsoft Excel formula when you click the enter box (the checked box) in the formula bar or press ENTER. For example, if you enter the formula @AVG(A1..A5), Microsoft Excel changes it to =AVERAGE(A1:A5).

Enter a reference that corresponds to a defined range name. The range name appears in the formula after you click the enter box (the checked box) or press ENTER.

Edit the reference of a range name in the formula bar by clicking the formula bar, which automatically displays the reference. The range name reappears when you click the enter box (the checked box) or press ENTER.

Delete a range name. All formulas that contain that range name change to display the reference instead of the range name.

Use a dollar sign ($) before a range name to make the range name absolute.

When you turn Transition Formula Entry on or off, formulas don't automatically reapply names or revert names to references. Therefore, decide whether you want to turn Transition Formula Entry on or off before you begin working on a worksheet.

Transition formula entry affects only range names that are simple and absolute. Transition formula entry does not affect range names that refer to nonadjacent selections. All Lotus 1-2-3 range names created in Lotus 1-2-3 are affected by Transition Formula Entry.

Once you turn on Transition Formula Entry, it remains turned on for that worksheet until you turn it off, even if you save the Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet as a Microsoft Excel worksheet.

To turn Transition Formula Entry on or off

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options (ALT, T, O).

2.	Select the Transition tab.

3.	Under Sheet Options, select or clear the Transition Formula Entry check box (ALT+F).

4.	Choose the OK button or press ENTER.

See Also

Help

Calculating Lotus 1-2-3 Formulas

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"


Calculating Lotus 1-2-3 Formulas

Microsoft Excel and Lotus 1-2-3 evaluate certain formulas and expressions differently. To calculate formulas and database criteria according to Lotus 1-2-3 rules, use Transition Formula Evaluation.

The following types of expressions are evaluated differently:

Cells that contain text in Lotus 1-2-3 are considered to have a value of zero (0) when the cell is used in a formula. In Microsoft Excel, you can't combine text and numeric entries in the same formula.

Boolean expressions in Lotus 1-2-3 are evaluated to 0 or 1 and display 0 or 1 in the cell. For example, 2<3 shows a 1 in the cell to represent true. Microsoft Excel displays TRUE or FALSE in the cell.

Database criteria ranges are evaluated differently when you are extracting data, finding data, and using database functions. For example, computed criteria can use existing field names.

Certain functions, including @MOD, @VLOOKUP, and @HLOOKUP, are evaluated differently. For example, @VLOOKUP performs literal matches on text.

When you open a Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet in Microsoft Excel, Transition Formula Evaluation is turned on for that sheet. This ensures that the formulas are calculated according to the preceding Lotus 1-2-3 rules.

If you save the Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet as a Microsoft Excel worksheet, Transition Formula Evaluation remains turned on until you turn it off. Transition Formula Evaluation is not turned on automatically for Microsoft Excel worksheets.

To turn Transition Formula Evaluation on or off

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Select the Transition tab.

3.	Under Sheet Options, select or clear the Transition Formula Evaluation check box.

4.	Choose the OK button or press ENTER.

Caution  Avoid turning Transition Formula Evaluation on and off; otherwise, the values calculated on your worksheet might change. If you leave Transition Formula Evaluation turned off, your worksheet will adhere to Microsoft Excel rules; if you leave the option turned on, your worksheet will adhere to Lotus 1-2-3 rules.

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"


Functions Without Lotus 1-2-3 Equivalents

Many Microsoft Excel functions are equivalent to Lotus 1-2-3 functions. The following Microsoft Excel functions, however, have no equivalents in Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3.1 or earlier, or Lotus 1-2-3/W Release 1.0. Microsoft Excel also provides many add-in functions and statistical functions that don't have Lotus 1-2-3 equivalents; these are not included in this list.

AREAS

DOLLAR

DPRODUCT

FACT

FREQUENCY

GROWTH

INT

IPMT

ISBLANK

ISERROR

ISLOGICAL

LINEST

LOGEST

LOOKUP

MATCH

MDETERM

MINVERSE

MIRR

MMULT

PPMT

PRODUCT

SEARCH

SUBSTITUTE

TEXT

TRANSPOSE

TREND

TYPE

WEEKDAY

See Also

Help

Statistical Functions


Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users

With Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users, you can type Lotus 1-2-3 compatible keystrokes to display instructions for completing the same task in Microsoft Excel, or watch as Microsoft Excel demonstrates equivalents to familiar Lotus 1-2-3 commands. There are two ways to open the Help For Lotus 1-2-3 Users dialog box:

From the Help menu, choose Lotus 1-2-3.

From the Tools menu, choose the Options command and then the Transition tab. In the Excel Menu Or Help Key box, type / (slash) and select the Lotus 1-2-3 Help option button. With these settings, pressing / displays the Help For Lotus 1-2-3 Users dialog box.

Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users Dialog Box Options

Menu

Displays a list of Lotus 1-2-3 menu items. Type the Lotus 1-2-3 keystrokes you would use to choose a command. The result depends on the type of help you select in Help Options, as described below.

For multilevel Lotus 1-2-3 menus, Microsoft Excel displays the next submenu on a status line at the bottom of the dialog box. To move down to a lower menu level, select the menu item and press ENTER or type the first letter of the menu item.

Using Lotus 1-2-3 Help/To Perform Command in Microsoft Excel

Initially displays instructions for using Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users. If you select a Lotus 1-2-3 command, this box displays instructions for performing the equivalent command in Microsoft Excel. The title of this box changes depending on the menu item currently selected.

If you select the Instructions option under Help Options and then press ENTER when the command is selected and the procedure is visible, the dialog box disappears but the procedure remains posted on your sheet for reference as you carry out the command. To remove the text box, press ESC.

Help Options

Enables you to display the Microsoft Excel equivalent procedure for carrying out a Lotus 1-2-3 command or to watch Microsoft Excel demonstrate the equivalent steps.

If you select Instructions, Microsoft Excel displays the procedure that is equivalent to the selected Lotus 1-2-3 command. To select this option with the mouse, click the Instructions option button. To select this option with the keyboard, press ALT+I.

If you select Demo, Microsoft Excel demonstrates how to carry out the equivalent Microsoft Excel command step by step. To select this option with the mouse, click the Demo button. To select this option with the keyboard, press ALT+D.

For commands requiring additional information, such as cell references, you are prompted for the necessary information at the top of the Microsoft Excel window before the demonstration starts.

The Faster and Slower buttons enable you to choose from among five demonstration speeds, with 5 being the fastest and 1 being the slowest. The current speed is displayed in the box to the right of the two buttons. To select faster speeds, press ALT+F. To select slower speeds, press ALT+S.

Help

Displays information about how to use the dialog box.

OK

Carries out the selected options. If the Demo option is selected, begins performing the equivalent Microsoft Excel actions on the screen. If the Instructions option is selected, places on the worksheet a text box containing the equivalent Microsoft Excel procedure.

Close

Closes the dialog box without applying the selected options.


Commands Requiring More Information

When a Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users demonstration requires additional information, such as ranges, number of decimal places, or filenames, a new dialog box is displayed at the top of the window. The dialog box prompts you for the necessary information.

In most cases, you enter data into one or more text boxes, depending on the type of data required to carry out the command. A default value might be displayed in the text box.

After making an entry, press ENTER to move to the next entry field. On the last field, pressing ENTER causes the demonstration to proceed.

To back up to a previous entry field, press ESC. From the first field, pressing ESC displays the main Help For Lotus 1-2-3 Users dialog box.

You can use the arrow keys to highlight and select a range. You can use the PERIOD key to anchor a range to be selected.

A text box might include a list box that displays one or more alternatives. You can enter the required data or select from the list.

Esc

Displays the previous Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users dialog box or step.

Cancel

Closes the Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users dialog box.

OK

Applies selected options and performs the demonstration.


Using Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users

You can use your knowledge of Lotus 1-2-3 to learn Microsoft Excel. With Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users, you can select a Lotus 1-2-3 command from a menu and then watch as Microsoft Excel gives instructions or an interactive demonstration of the equivalent Microsoft Excel commands. Once you turn on Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users, just press the SLASH (/) key to display Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users.

With Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users, you can use your knowledge of 1-2-3 to learn Microsoft Excel by typing the exact 1-2-3 command. You can then view instructions for the equivalent Microsoft Excel procedure, or you can watch a demonstration of the procedure. For example, to learn how to set a column width to 12 characters in Microsoft Excel, you would type /wcs12 and then press ENTER. Microsoft Excel demonstrates the use of the Width command on the Column submenu of the Format menu.

You can choose from three types of help from Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users:

Instructions

The instructions for carrying out the equivalent Microsoft Excel procedure are displayed in a text box on your worksheet. You can delete the instructions when you finish the procedure. For example, if you choose the /Copy command, a text box containing instructions for copying appears on your worksheet.

Demonstration

Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users uses the data on your worksheet to demonstrate how to carry out the 1-2-3 command in Microsoft Excel.

The demonstration follows the steps listed in the instructions. If Microsoft Excel needs data or cell references to carry out a demonstration, you are prompted for the information before the command is demonstrated.


Linking Lotus 1-2-3 Worksheets and Microsoft Excel Worksheets

You can use values from a Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet without exporting the worksheet to Microsoft Excel by linking cells. Then, when you change the data in the Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet, the Microsoft Excel worksheet is automatically updated. For example, you can link sales figures from various Lotus 1-2-3 worksheets to a single Microsoft Excel worksheet and then use the formatting and printing features of Microsoft Excel to create a summary report of sales.

To link from a Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet to a Microsoft Excel worksheet

1.	In Microsoft Excel, open both the Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet and the Microsoft Excel worksheet you want to link.

2.	Switch to the Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet (ALT, W, worksheet number).

3.	Select the cell or range containing the data you want to link to the Microsoft Excel worksheet (SHIFT+arrow keys).

4.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Copy (ALT, E, C or CTRL+C).

A moving border appears around the selected cell or range.

5.	Switch to the Microsoft Excel worksheet (ALT, W, worksheet number).

6.	Select the cell or the upper-left corner of the range that you want linked to the Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet (arrow keys).

7.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special (ALT, E, S).

8.	Select the Paste Link button (ALT+L).

Microsoft Excel enters a formula in each cell that links the worksheets.

Note  If the linked data from Lotus 1-2-3 is pasted into more than one cell, Microsoft Excel enters the formula that links the worksheets as an array formula. You can't clear, delete, or move individual cells that contain an array formula. If you want to clear, delete, or move individual cells, link each cell individually.

You can link Microsoft Excel worksheets to the following types of Lotus 1-2-3 files: WKS, WK1, and WK3. You can also link to any files created using another application and saved in one of these Lotus 1-2-3 formats.

If you use Lotus 1-2-3 to edit a 1-2-3 worksheet linked to a Microsoft Excel worksheet, the linked cells are updated when you open the Microsoft Excel worksheet.

You can use the Links command on the Edit menu to open the Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet that contains the source data for the Microsoft Excel worksheet you're editing. You can also redirect links to refer to another worksheet.

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You Are Switching From Another Spreadsheet"


Specifying Settings When Working with Lotus 1-2-3 Files in Microsoft Excel

You can enter statements in your EXCEL5.INI file to customize some of the startup settings used by Microsoft Excel. These statements perform functions similar to those found in the 123.CNF file used by Lotus 1-2-3.

The EXCEL5.INI file is a text file that you can edit with a text editor or word processor; however, you must save the file as a text file without any formatting when you finish editing it. You don't need to edit this file to use Microsoft Excel. If you make changes to the EXCEL5.INI file, you must restart Microsoft Excel for the changes to be carried out. When you install Microsoft Excel, the Setup program creates the EXCEL5.INI file in the same directory as your WIN.INI file. For more information about other elements in the EXCEL5.INI file, see the EXCELINI.TXT file in the Microsoft Excel directory.

By changing statements in the EXCEL5.INI file, you can change how Microsoft Excel opens and saves Lotus 1-2-3 files. You set the defaults by specifying different values for the statements listed in the EXCEL5.INI file.

See Also

Help

Overview of Using the EXCEL5.INI File to Customize Microsoft Excel

Specifying Lotus 1-2-3 Global Settings

Specifying Lotus 1-2-3 Print Settings

Specifying Lotus 1-2-3 Worksheet Settings


Specifying Lotus 1-2-3 Worksheet Settings

The following statements and default values are in the [WK? Settings] section of the EXCEL5.INI file when you install Microsoft Excel.

Load_Chart_Wnd

Specifies how Lotus 1-2-3 charts are created when an associated 1-2-3 chart is opened in Microsoft Excel. By default, Microsoft Excel automatically creates charts; therefore, Load_Chart_Wnd=1. To not create associated charts when you open a Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet in Microsoft Excel, change the Load_Chart_Wnd statement to Load_Chart_Wnd=0.

AFE

Specifies how Lotus 1-2-3 range names are imported when a 1-2-3 worksheet is opened in Microsoft Excel. By default, Microsoft Excel turns on alternate formula entry only if a macro name exists on the Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet that you open in Microsoft Excel; therefore, AFE=2. To specify that alternate formula entry should always be turned on, change the AFE statement to AFE=1. To specify that alternate formula entry should never be automatically turned on, change the AFE statement to AFE=0.

Monospace

Specifies whether or not you use 10-point Courier, which is the default for Lotus 1-2-3 worksheets, or the normal font, as defined in the EXCEL5.INI file; therefore, Monospace=1 is 10-point Courier. If you want your Lotus 1-2-3 worksheets to appear in the normal font, which is usually MS® Arial 10, change the Monospace statement to Monospace=0.

Gridlines

Specifies whether or not gridlines are displayed when you open a Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet in Microsoft Excel. By default, Microsoft Excel does not display gridlines; therefore, Gridlines=0. If you do want gridlines displayed, change the Gridlines statement to Gridlines=1.

See Also

Help

Adding 123.CNF settings to the EXCEL5.INI settings


Specifying Lotus 1-2-3 Print Settings

The EXCEL5.INI file contains a [Line Print] section that specifies the print settings you made in Lotus 1-2-3 with the /Worksheet Global Default Printer commands. This section is modified only if you change your print settings in a macro or with the commands listed in Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users.


Specifying Lotus 1-2-3 Global Settings

If you want to run a Lotus 1-2-3 macro that depends on a global setting that has been changed from the default, such as a setup string or a default directory in Microsoft Excel, you need to specify these settings for Microsoft Excel. In Lotus 1-2-3, global settings are specified in a 123.CNF file. Microsoft Excel provides you with an MS-DOS utility to write this information to the EXCEL5.INI file. The name of the utility is CNF2INI.EXE. This utility can be found in the directory that contains EXCEL.EXE. CNF2INI can add your Lotus 1-2-3 global settings to the EXCEL5.INI file so that you can successfully run 1-2-3 macros that depend on any global settings.

See Also

Help

Adding 123.CNF settings to the EXCEL5.INI settings


Adding 123.CNF settings to the EXCEL5.INI settings

1.	Switch to the Program Manager in Microsoft Windows (ALT+ESC).

2.	Switch to the Main group.

3.	Double-click the DOS Prompt icon.

4.	At the MS-DOS prompt, change to the directory that contains EXCEL.EXE.

To change directories, type cd\ followed by the name of the Microsoft Excel directory, and then press ENTER. For example, type cd\excel and press ENTER.

5.	At the MS-DOS prompt, type cnf2ini 123.cnf >> EXCEL5.ini and press ENTER. The utility CNF2INI appends all global settings from the 123.CNF file to the EXCEL5.INI file.

Make sure that you type two arrow brackets (>>). Two arrow brackets append the information to the EXCEL5.INI file, whereas one arrow bracket (>) overwrites the entire EXCEL5.INI file.

If 123.CNF and EXCEL5.INI are located in other directories, you have to also type the full path of the files. For example, to specify the Lotus 1-2-3 and Windows directories, type cnf2ini c:\123\123.cnf >> c:\Windows\EXCEL5.ini and press ENTER.

6.	You have to replace the existing sections in the EXCEL5.INI file with the appended default values, using any text editor. Be sure to save EXCEL5.INI as a text file without any formatting.

See Also

Help

Getting Help using CNF2INI


Getting Help using CNF2INI

1.	Switch to the Program Manager in Microsoft Windows (ALT+ESC).

2.	Switch to the Main group.

3.	Double-click the DOS Prompt icon.

4.	At the DOS prompt, change to the directory that contains EXCEL.EXE.

You can change directories by typing cd\ and the name of the Microsoft Excel directory. For example, type cd\excel and press ENTER.

5.	At the MS-DOS prompt, type: cnf2ini -? and press ENTER.

Instructions for using CNF2INI appear on the screen.

6.	To return to Microsoft Excel, switch to the Task List (CTRL+ESC).

7.	Select Microsoft Excel (SHIFT+DOWN ARROW).

8.	Press ENTER.


Lotus 1-2-3 Keyboard Equivalents

Microsoft Excel default keyboard equivalents to Lotus 1-2-3 keys are listed in the following tables. If you have not activated the Transition Navigation Keys option, these equivalents will be in effect.

Function Keys

Lotus 1-2-3	Microsoft Excel	Meaning

F1	F1	Help

F2	F2	Edit

F3	F3	Name

F4	F4	Absolute/Relative

F5	F5	Goto

F6	CTRL+F6	Next window

F7	ALT, D, F	Query (first time)

DOWN ARROW	Query (thereafter)

F8	Automatic	Table

F9	F9	Calculate

F10	F11 or ALT+F1	Graph

Navigation Keys

The default Microsoft Excel navigation keys are listed below. You can also turn on Microsoft Excel's transition navigation keys, which are equivalent to many of the Lotus 1-2-3 navigation keys.

Lotus 1-2-3	Microsoft Excel

Up, Down	UP ARROW , DOWN ARROW

Left, Right	LEFT ARROW, RIGHT ARROW

End, Up	CTRL+UP  or  end+up

End, Down	CTRL+DOWN  or  end+down

End, Left	CTRL+LEFT  or  end+left

End, Right	CTRL+RIGHT  or  end+right

Home	CTRL+HOME

Tab	CTRL+PAGE DOWN

Shift+Tab	CTRL+PAGE UP

PgUp, PgDn	PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN

See Also

Help

Keyboard Guide

Transition Navigation Keys


Entering Lotus 1-2-3 formulas

You can enter any formula or function exactly as you would in Lotus 1-2-3 by selecting the Transition Formula Entry option.

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Select the Transition tab.

3.	Select the Transition Formula Entry check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

For example, you might use the following formula in Lotus 1-2-3:

@AVG(A1..A5)

With the Transition Formula Entry option selected, the preceding formula is translated into the equivalent Microsoft Excel formula:

=AVERAGE(A1:A5)

See Also

Help

Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users

Commands Requiring More Information

Keyboard Guide

Lotus 1-2-3 Functions

Transition Navigation Keys


Starting Macro Translation Assistant--Lotus 1-2-3

To translate a Lotus 1-2-3 macro, you start Microsoft Excel and open the Lotus 1-2-3 file containing the macros to translate. Then, start the Macro Translation Assistant and specify which macros you want to translate.

The Macro Translation Assistant translates the Lotus 1-2-3 macro into a Microsoft Excel macro, and writes the translated macro on a new macro sheet. The original Lotus 1-2-3 macros are displayed on the new macro sheet with the translated macro, unless you clear the Verbose check box.

Translating Lotus 1-2-3 Macros

1.	Start Microsoft Excel.

2.	Open the Lotus 1-2-3 file containing the macros you want to translate.

By default, only files whose extensions begin with XL are listed in the dialog box which is displayed when you choose Open from the File menu. Lotus 1-2-3 files typically have extensions that start with WK. To list those files, type *.WK* in the File Name box.

Before starting this procedure, make sure that you have the files TRANS.EXE and TRAN123.XLM installed in your Microsoft Excel directory. If these files are not in your directory, contact Microsoft Product Support Services.

3.	In File Manager, double-click TRANS.EXE in your Microsoft Excel directory.

4.	From the Translate menu, select Lotus 1-2-3.

5.	Select the sheets containing the macros you want to translate.

6.	Choose the OK button.

7.	Select the macros you want translated. You can select multiple macros.

If you want the Macro Translation Assistant to enter the Multiplan macro commands being translated above the Microsoft Excel result on the target macro sheet, select the Verbose check box. The original Multiplan macro commands are printed in italic.

8.	Choose the OK button.

The Macro Translation Assistant opens a new macro sheet (the target macro sheet) and begins translating. While it translates, it displays messages in the Macro Translation Assistant window. If an error occurs, an alert message is displayed in an alert box.

The target macro sheet is hidden during translation. After translation is complete, or if you stop translation by pressing ESC, the target macro sheet is unhidden.

If the Macro Translation Assistant finds something that it can't translate, or can only translate roughly, it enters a translation comment in bold characters directly above or below the problem on the target macro sheet.

After the macro is translated, the Macro Translation Assistant tells you that translation is complete and asks if you want to close the Macro Translation Assistant. Choose the Yes button if you have finished translating; choose the No button if you would like to translate more macros. If you choose the Yes button, another message asks if you want to open TRANS123.XLM (unless TRANS123.XLM is already open). If you plan to run the translated macro now, choose the Yes button to open TRANS123.XLM.

To stop translation at any time

Press ESC.


Terms You Need to Know

The following table lists Lotus 1-2-3 terms and their Microsoft Excel counterparts. The Microsoft Excel term is not necessarily an exact equivalent of the Lotus 1-2-3 term, but rather a term you can look up in the indexes of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide for information. You dont need to understand all of these terms before you start using Microsoft Excel.

Lotus 1-2-3 term	Microsoft Excel term

@Function	Function

Address	Reference

Anchor cell	Selecting a range of cells

Border	Row and column headings

CALC indicator	Status bar

Cell pointer	Active cell

Column labels	Column headings

Command prompt	Dialog box

Control panel	Menu bar, formula bar, status bar

Copy 	Copy, and then paste

Crosshatching	Chart patterns

Current cell	Active cell

Current worksheet	Active worksheet, chart, or macro sheet

Cursor	Insertion point

Data labels	Data marker labels

Data range	Data series

Data table 1 	One-input table

Data table 2 	Two-input table

Date format	Number format

Erase 	Clear

Formula criteria	Computed criteria

Global	Workspace

Graph	Chart

Graph labels	Chart text

Graph titles	Chart titles

Highlight	Select or selection

Indicator	Status bar

Input range 	Database range

Label	Text

Label-prefix	Alignment

Label/matching criteria 	Comparison criteria

Logical 0	FALSE

Logical 1	TRUE

Menu pointer	Menu selection

Mode indicator	Status bar

Move 	Cut, and then paste

Number/matching criteria 	Comparison criteria

Numeric format	Number format

Output range	Extract range

Picture file	Chart document

Pointer movement keys	Arrow keys

Print range	Print area

PrintGraph	Printing a chart

Prompt	Dialog box

Protected cell 	Locked/protected cell

Range highlight	Selected range

Repeating label	Fill alignment

Retrieve a file	Open a file

Row numbers	Row headings

Stacked bar graph	Column chart, bar chart

Status indicator, status line	Status bar

String	Text

Target cell	Dependent cell

Target file	Dependent document

Time format	Number format

Titles	Split worksheet window with frozen panes

Translate utility	Open and Save As commands on the File menu

Value	Number

Window	Multiple windows, pane


Opening Microsoft Works Files in Microsoft Excel

Microsoft Excel opens worksheet files from Microsoft Works.

1.	From the File menu, choose Open.

2.	In the List Files Of Type box, select Works.

3.	In the File Name box, select the Works worksheet you want to open or type the complete filename.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel opens the worksheet. If for some reason Microsoft Excel can't read a formula in the worksheet, it substitutes the value of the formula for the formula itself.


Opening Quattro Pro for MS-DOS Files in Microsoft Excel

Microsoft Excel opens worksheet files from Quattro Pro for MS-DOS.

1.	From the File menu, choose Open.

2.	In the List Files Of Type box, select Quattro Pro.

3.	In the File Name box, select the Quattro Pro worksheet you want to open or type the complete filename.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel opens the worksheet. If for some reason Microsoft Excel can't read a formula in the worksheet, it substitutes the value of the formula for the formula itself.


Running Quattro Pro for MS-DOS Macros in Microsoft Excel

Microsoft Excel for Windows runs Lotus 123 macros that are compatible with Lotus 123 Release 2.01. If your Quattro Pro for MS-DOS macro is compatible with Lotus 123 Release 2.01, then you can run it in Microsoft Excel. Also, Microsoft Excel supports some macro functionality from Lotus 123 Release 2.2 .

1.	From the File menu, choose Open.

2.	In the List Files Of Type box, select Quattro Pro.

3.	In the File Name box, select the Quattro Pro worksheet you want to open or type the complete filename.

4.	Choose the OK button.

5.	From the Tools menu, choose Macro.

6.	In the Macro Name/Reference box, type or select the name of the Quattro Pro macro you want to run.

7.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Guidelines for Running Existing 1-2-3 Macros in Microsoft Excel

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You're Switching from Another Spreadsheet"


Guidelines for Moving Workbooks Between Lotus 1-2-3 and Microsoft Excel

Microsoft Excel imports and exports the Lotus 1-2-3 file formats shown in the following table.

Lotus 1-2-3 Release	File format

1A	WKS

2.0, 2.01, 2.2	WK1

2.3, 2.4	WK1, FMT

3.0	WK3

3.1, 3.1+, 1-2-3 /W	WK3, FM3

When you open a Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet in Microsoft Excel,  Microsoft Excel automatically opens the corresponding FMT or FM3 file. Drop shadows and objects drawn on top of charts are not imported to Microsoft Excel. Also, double underlines and wide underlines appear as a single underline in Microsoft Excel. When you save a Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet in Microsoft Excel, an FMT or FM3 file is automatically saved.

However, because of Impress limitations, you can save only the first eight styles you create and the first eight fonts you use.

Importing Text Files

If you want to open a text file in Microsoft Excel, click the Open button or choose Open from the File menu, select the filename, and choose the OK button. The file is loaded and the Text Import Wizard appears. The Text Import Wizard guides you through the steps you need to import the text file and distribute the text across columns.

Importing and Exporting References

Microsoft Excel cannot export formulas containing references to nonadjacent selections. Functions that produce references as a result are not exported to WKS. The Microsoft Excel intersection (space) and union (,) operators are not exported to Lotus 1-2-3. In these cases, Microsoft Excel substitutes the value of the formula for the formula itself.

When you save a document in a Lotus 1-2-3 file format, any references in a Microsoft Excel worksheet to rows beyond 2048 (for WKS file format) or 8192 (for WK1 and WK3 file formats) wrap around the edges of the worksheet. For example, when you save a reference to cell A8193 in WK1 format, the reference changes to A1 in Microsoft Excel.

Importing and Exporting External References

Lotus 1-2-3 Releases 1A and 2.01 don't support external references (file linking) to other worksheets, so any Microsoft Excel formulas containing external references are not exported to WKS or WK1 file formats. In these cases, Microsoft Excel substitutes the value of the formula for the formula itself.

See Also

Help

Importing and Exporting Documents


Mathematical Operator Evaluation in Lotus 1-2-3 and Microsoft Excel

The following table shows the mathematical operators used by Microsoft Excel and Lotus 1-2-3, in descending order of evaluation.

Lotus 1-2-3 order of operators 	Microsoft Excel order of operators

AND, OR, NOT functions

^ 	+ or - (unary)

+ or - (unary) 	^

* or / 	* or /

+ or - 	+ or -

= < > <= >= <>	&

#not#(unary)	= < > <= >= <>

#and# #or#

& (Release 2.0 OR later only)

In Lotus 1-2-3, the exponentiation operator (^) is evaluated before the negation operator (-); in Microsoft Excel, negation is evaluated first. Thus, the formula =-2^4 produces the value -16 in Lotus 1-2-3, and 16 in Microsoft Excel. To fix this, use parentheses to force the correct order of evaluation.


Macro Translation Assistant

A utility that helps translate Lotus 1-2-3 and Multiplan macros in Microsoft Excel 4.0-style macros.


Target Macro Sheet

A Microsoft Excel macro sheet on which the Macro Translation Assistant enters a translated macro.


Multiplan Files and Microsoft Excel

Multiplan version 4.0 and later can open and save files in a Microsoft Excel file format.

To open a Multiplan worksheet in Microsoft Excel

Microsoft Excel includes file converters that let you open worksheets created with Multiplan version 3.0 or Multiplan version 4.2. For these converters to work properly, you have to install them using Microsoft Excel Setup.

Follow these steps to open a worksheet in Microsoft Excel that was created with Multiplan version 3.04 and earlier.

1.	From the File menu, choose Open.

2.	In the File Name box, type *.*

3.	Choose the OK button.

4.	In the list box, select the Multiplan worksheet.

5.	Choose the OK button.

To save a Microsoft Excel workbook so you can use it in Multiplan

You can save your Microsoft Excel workbooks so that you can open them in Multiplan. When you do this, Microsoft Excel saves only the first worksheet in the workbook.

Follow these steps to save a Microsoft Excel workbook so you can open it in Multiplan version 3.04 and earlier.

1.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

2.	In the Save File as Type box, select SYLK.

3.	Choose the OK button.

4.	In the Save Worksheet As box, type a name for the Multiplan worksheet.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Follow these steps to save a Microsoft Excel workbook so you can open it in Multiplan version 4.0 and later.

1.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

2.	In the Save File as Type box, select Excel 2.1.

3.	Choose the OK button.

4.	In the Save Worksheet As box, type a name for the Multiplan worksheet.

5.	Choose the OK button.


Multiplan Function and Special Keys

Selecting and Carrying Out Commands

Multiplan key	Microsoft Excel command or action

F1, SEMICOLON (;) or CTRL+W	1,2,3,...9 (Window menu)

F2 or CTRL+F	With worksheet protection turned on, press TAB

SHIFT+F2 or CTRL+R, CTRL+F	With worksheet protection turned on, press SHIFT+TAB

F4 or EXCLAMATION MARK (!)	F9 or Calc Now button in the Calculation tab in the Options dialog box (Tools menu)

F6 or COLON (:)	Extend the selection

ALT+H or QUESTION MARK (?)	Help

Editing Cells and Commands

Multiplan key	Microsoft Excel command or action

F3 or AT SIGN (@)	Reference key

F5 or CTRL+V	Edit cells on macro sheet

SHIFT+F1, SHIFT+F6	1,2,3,...9 (Windows menu)

SHIFT+F3, arrow key or

AT SIGN (@), AT SIGN (@),

arrow key	Function (Insert menu)

F3, arrow key 	Paste (Insert menu, Name submenu)

or @, arrow key

SHIFT+F5 or CTRL+T	Step Macro button

SHIFT+F6 or CTRL+R, CTRL+U	Recalculate links

SHIFT+F8 or CTRL+R, CTRL+O	Edit home

SHIFT+F9 or SHIFT+F7

or CTRL+R, CTRL+R	Record New Macro and Stop Recording (Tools menu, Record Macro submenu)

SHIFT+F10 or CTRL+R, CTRL+P	Edit end

F7 or CTRL+O	Word left

F8 or CTRL+P	Word right

F9 or CTRL+K	Character left

F10 or CTRL+L	Character right


Macro Translation Assistant--Multiplan

To translate a Multiplan macro, start Microsoft Excel and open the Multiplan file containing the macros you want to translate. Then, start the Macro Translation Assistant and specify which macros you want to translate.

The Macro Translation Assistant translates the Multiplan macro into a Microsoft Excel macro, and writes the translated macro on a new macro sheet. The original Multiplan commands are displayed on the new macro sheet with the translated macro, unless you clear the Verbose check box.

Note  Microsoft Excel version 5.0 contains two programming languages: Visual Basic, new for this version, and Microsoft Excel 4.0 Macro Language, included for compatibility with previous versions of Microsoft Excel. Macro Translation Assistant translates Multiplan macros into Microsoft Excel 4.0-style macros, not Visual Basic. If you are switching from Multiplan to Microsoft Excel version 5.0, you should rewrite your Multiplan macros in Visual Basic. For information about programming in Visual Basic, see the Microsoft Excel Visual Basic User''s Guide.

To translate Multiplan macros

Before starting this procedure, make sure that you have the files TRANS.EXE and TRANSMP.XLM installed in your Microsoft Excel directory.

1.	Start Microsoft Excel.

2.	Open the Multiplan file containing the macros you want to translate.

To open Multiplan worksheets in Microsoft Excel, you have to save those worksheets in the SYLK format. To list those files, type *.SLK in the File Name box.

3.	In File Manager, double-click TRANS.EXE in your Microsoft Excel directory. If this file is not in your directory, contact Microsoft Product Support Services.

4.	From the Translate menu, select Multiplan.

5.	Select the sheet(s) containing the macros you want to translate.

6.	Choose OK.

7.	Select the macros you want translated. You can select multiple macros.

If you want the Macro Translation Assistant to enter the Multiplan macro commands being translated above the Microsoft Excel result on the Target Macro sheet, select the Verbose check box. The original Multiplan macro commands are printed in italic.

8.	Choose OK.

The Macro Translation Assistant opens a new macro sheet (the target macro sheet) and begins translating. While it translates, it displays messages in the Macro Translation Assistant window. If an error occurs, a message is displayed in a box.

To stop translation at any time

Press ESC.

The target macro sheet is hidden during translation. After translation is complete, or if you stop translation by pressing ESC, the target macro sheet is unhidden.

If the Macro Translation Assistant finds something it cannot translate, or can only translate roughly, it enters a translation comment in bold characters directly above or below the problem on the target macro sheet.

After the macro is translated, the Macro Translation Assistant tells you that translation is complete and asks if you want to close the Macro Translation Assistant. Choose the Yes button if you have finished translating; choose the No button if you would like to translate more macros. If you choose Yes, another message asks if you want to open TRANSMP.XLM (unless TRANSMP.XLM is already open). If you plan to run the translated macro now, choose Yes to open TRANSMP.XLM.


Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query

Overview of Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query

The Setup You Need to Retrieve Data with Microsoft Query

The Setup You Need to Write Macros to Retrieve Data

Microsoft Query Add-in

Retrieving data from lists and external databases

Updating query results

Editing an existing result set in a workbook

Moving data and the query definition to another workbook

Removing a query definition from a worksheet

Installing additional ODBC drivers

Adding data sources

ODBC Driver Reference

Microsoft ODBC Add-in for Microsoft Excel


Overview of Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query

Microsoft Query is a self-contained data access application that accesses remote database files and tables by using Open Database Connectivity (ODBC). You can use Microsoft Query alone or within Microsoft Excel using commands and tools provided by the Microsoft Query Add-in macro.

Use Microsoft Query with Microsoft Excel to bring data from remote database files and tables onto your worksheet for analysis, reporting, and charting. To retrieve data in Microsoft Query, first specify a data source and the tables you want to use. Then retrieve the data by building a query.

While building a query, you can:

Return records from multiple tables by using search criteria you specify.

Select the fields you want to display.

Display, edit, and organize the results before you return the data to Microsoft Excel.

Compute totals for records within the result set.

To use Microsoft Query, you must install Microsoft Query, the Microsoft Query add-in, and the ODBC drivers you want. For more information, see The Setup You Need to Retrieve Data with Microsoft Query.

See Also

Help

Adding data sources

Editing an existing result set in a workbook

Installing additional ODBC drivers

Installing or removing an add-in

Moving data and the query definition to another workbook

Removing a query definition from a worksheet

Retrieving data from lists and external databases

Updating query results

User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Installing and Starting Microsoft Excel"

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"


The Setup You Need to Retrieve Data with Microsoft Query

Overview

To use Microsoft Query with Microsoft Excel to retrieve data, you need to:

Install the necessary files on your hard disk using Microsoft Excel Setup.

Make the Microsoft Query add-in available to Microsoft Excel.

Installing the Necessary Files

When you select the Data Access check box in the Complete/Custom option during Setup, Microsoft Excel copies Microsoft Query, the Microsoft Query Add-in, the ODBC drivers, and the necessary ODBC files to your hard disk. If you do not want to install all of the drivers provided with Microsoft Excel, choose the Change Option button, and then clear the check boxes for the drivers you do not need. However, you need to install at least one driver to use Microsoft Query. With these files you can:

Use Microsoft Query alone or from Microsoft Excel.

Write macros enable you to retrieve data with Microsoft Query.

If you did not install Microsoft Query or the drivers you need during your initial installation of Microsoft Excel, run the Setup program again.

Note  You need to have one ODBC driver for each DBMS you want to access. To obtain additional ODBC drivers, contact your database vendor.

Making the Microsoft Query Add-in File Available After Installation

In addition to installing the Microsoft Query Add-in macro file, you need to make it available to Microsoft Excel.

To do this, use the Add-ins command on the Tools menu or the Open command on the File menu.

See also

Help

  Open Button

Adding data sources

Get External Data Command (Data Menu)

Installing additional ODBC drivers

Installing or removing an add-in

Open Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Installing and Starting Microsoft Excel"

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"

Microsoft Query User's Guide

Appendix B, "ODBC Drivers: Requirements, Installation, and Adding Data Sources"


The Setup You Need to Write Macros to Retrieve Data

To write macros that access data directly through ODBC, you need to install the Microsoft ODBC Add-in. If you selected the Data Access check box in the Complete/Custom option when you ran Microsoft Excel Setup, you have installed all the files you need.

You do not need to install Microsoft Query to install the Microsoft ODBC Add-in. Just install at least one driver provided in the Microsoft Excel Setup to obtain the Microsoft ODBC Add-in and the other ODBC files. If you plan to use a driver that is not provided in Setup, you must select the Microsoft Query check box in Setup to install the Microsoft ODBC Add-in and required ODBC files.

If you want to write macros that use Microsoft Query to access a data source, install Microsoft Query and the drivers you need. This automatically installs the Microsoft Query Add-in, which contains the command-equivalent Microsoft Excel version 4.0 macro functions and Visual Basic functions that you need.

To change what you install, run the Microsoft Excel Setup program, select the Data Access check box in the Complete/Custom option, choose the Change Option button, and then, clear the check boxes for the items that you do not need.

Note  You need to have one ODBC driver for each DBMS you want to access. To obtain additional ODBC drivers, contact your database vendor.

Writing Macros After Installation

To write macros that directly access a database, you need to make the Microsoft Excel ODBC Language Extensions available to Microsoft Excel.

Use the Add-ins command on the Tools menu or the Open command on the File menu to open the Microsoft ODBC Add-in (XLODBC.XLA).

With the Microsoft Excel ODBC Language Extensions available, you have access to the SQLREQUEST function in the Function Wizard, and you can write macros by using the ODBC macro language extensions or the ODBC Visual Basic language extensions for Microsoft Excel.

For information about making the Microsoft Query Add-in available to Microsoft Excel, see The Setup You Need to Retrieve Data with Microsoft Query.

See also

Help

  Open Button

Add-ins Command (Tools Menu)

Installing additional ODBC drivers

Installing or removing an add-in

Open Command (File Menu)

SQLREQUEST

User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Installing and Starting Microsoft Excel"

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"

Microsoft Query User's Guide,

Appendix B, "ODBC Drivers: Requirements, Installation, and Adding Data Sources"


Retrieving data from lists and external databases

Overview

1.	From the Microsoft Excel Data menu, choose Get External Data to start Microsoft Query.

Shortcut:	Get External Data button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

If the Get External Data command does not appear on the Data menu, you need to install the Microsoft Query Add-in or make it available to Microsoft Excel by using the Add-ins command on the Tools menu or the Open command on the File menu.

2.	Create a query definition.

For more information about using Microsoft Query, see Microsoft Query online Help.

3.	From the Microsoft Query File menu, choose Return Data To Microsoft Excel.

4.	In the Destination box, type or select the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the result set to appear.

If you want to save the query definition with the result set, make sure the Keep Query Definition check box is selected.

For a description of the other options, choose the Help button in the dialog box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See also

Help

  Get External Data Button

  Open Button

Add-ins Command (Tools Menu)

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Get External Data Command (Data Menu)

Installing or removing an add-in

Open Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Installing and Starting Microsoft Excel"

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"

Microsoft Query User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Getting Started with Queries"

Chapter 4, "Retrieving the Records You Want"


Updating query results

Overview

1.	Select a cell in the result set you want to update.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Get External Data.

Shortcut:	Get External Data button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

3.	Choose the Refresh button.

If an additional dialog box requests more information, supply it.

Note  You can update results only if you saved the query definition when you returned the result set to Microsoft Excel.

Alternate Method

1.	Select a cell in the result set you want to update.

2.	From the Data menu, choose the Refresh Data command, or click the Refresh Data button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

See also

Help

  Get External Data Button

  Refresh Data Button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Get External Data Command (Data Menu)

Refresh Data Command for Microsoft Query (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"


Editing an existing result set in a workbook

Overview

1.	Select a cell in the result set you want to edit.

2.	Double-click the cell.

3.	Edit the query in Microsoft Query.

4.	From the Microsoft Query File menu, choose Return Data To Microsoft Excel.

Microsoft Query returns your result set to Microsoft Excel without displaying the Get External Data dialog box.

Alternate Method

1.	Select a cell in the result set you want to edit.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Get External Data.

Shortcut:	Get External Data button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

3.	Choose the Edit Query button.

4.	Edit the query in Microsoft Query.

5.	From the Microsoft Query File menu, choose Return Data To Microsoft Excel.

6.	In the Get External Data dialog box, select the options you want.

For a description of the options, choose the Help button in the dialog box.

7.	Choose the OK button.

See also

Help

  Get External Data Button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Get External Data Command (Data Menu)

Retrieving data from lists and external databases

User's Guide

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"


Moving data and the query definition to another workbook

Overview

1.	Open a query or build a new query definition in Microsoft Query.

2.	Save the query and return the result set to Microsoft Excel.

3.	Switch to Microsoft Query.

4.	From the File menu, choose Exit.

5.	Switch to Microsoft Excel.

6.	Open the workbook where you want to place the result set.

7.	From the Data menu, choose Get External Data.

Shortcut:	Get External Data button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

8.	Choose the Cancel button to close the Select Data Source dialog box.

9.	From the File menu in Microsoft Query, choose Open Query to open the saved query you want to return to Microsoft Excel.

10.	From the Microsoft Query File menu, choose Return Data To Microsoft Excel.

11.	From the Get External Data dialog box in Microsoft Excel, select the options you want.

For a description of the options, choose the Help button in the dialog box.

12.	Choose the OK button.

See also

Help

  Get External Data Button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Get External Data Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"


Removing a query definition from a worksheet

Overview

Use this procedure if you want to keep your result set but you don't want to update the result set with new data from the external source file or table. The procedure removes only the hidden query definition, not your worksheet contents.

Important  You cannot use the Undo command to restore a query definition after you remove it. If you remove a query definition, you can't refresh data in the result set unless you rebuild the query.

1.	Select a cell in the result set.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Get External Data.

Shortcut:	Get External Data button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

3.	Clear the Keep Query Definition check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

5.	In the message box that appears, choose the OK button to remove the query definition.

To cancel the deletion and return to the Get External Data dialog box, choose the Cancel button.

See also

Help

  Get External Data Button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Get External Data Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"


Microsoft Query Add-in

With this add-in, you can use Microsoft Query to retrieve data from external database files or tables and return the results to Microsoft Excel.

Adds the Get External Data command to the Data menu and adds the Get External Data button to the Pivot And Query toolbar.

Changes the functionality of the Refresh Data command (Data menu) and the Refresh Data button (Query And Pivot toolbar) so that when the active cell is in the result set, the result set is updated without running or displaying Microsoft Query.

Adds the Microsoft Query Add-in command equivalents to Microsoft Excel, so you can write macros to retrieve data from external data sources using Microsoft Query.

Use Microsoft Excel Setup to install the Microsoft Query Add-in, Microsoft Query, and the ODBC drivers you want.

Use the Add-ins command on the Tools menu or the Open command on the File menu to make the add-in available.

See also

Help

  Get External Data Button

  Open Button

  Refresh Data Button

Customizing Microsoft Excel

Get External Data Command (Data Menu)

Open Command (File Menu)

Refresh Data Command for Microsoft Query (Data Menu)

The Setup You Need to Retrieve Data with Microsoft Query

User's Guide

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"


Installing additional ODBC drivers

Overview

1.	Switch to the Control Panel.

2.	Double-click the ODBC icon.

3.	In the Data Sources dialog box, choose the Drivers button.

4.	In the Drivers dialog box, choose the Add button.

5.	Provide the information requested.

Each ODBC driver has a specific setup dialog box. Choose the Help button for information about the driver setup.

Note  If the driver you want is not available on your hard disk, use Microsoft Excel Setup.

See Also

Help

Displaying or hiding toolbars

ODBC Driver Reference

The Setup You Need to Retrieve Data with Microsoft Query

User's Guide

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"

Microsoft Query User's Guide

Appendix B, "ODBC Drivers: Requirements, Installation, and Adding Data Source"


Adding data sources

Overview

1.	In Microsoft Excel, choose Get External Data from the Data menu.

Shortcut:	Get External Data button (Query And Pivot toolbar)

If you are in Microsoft Query, choose New Query from the File menu.

2.	In the Microsoft Query Select Data Source dialog box, choose the button labeled Other.

3.	In the ODBC Data Sources dialog box, either select the data source you want to add or click the New button to define a new data source.

4.	In the Add Data Source dialog box, select the driver you want to use for the data source.

5.	 Choose the OK button.

6.	Provide the information requested.

Each ODBC driver has a specific setup dialog box. Choose the Help button for information about the driver setup.

See Also

Help

  Get External Data Button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Get External Data Command (Data Menu)

Installing additional ODBC drivers

ODBC Driver Reference

The Setup You Need to Retrieve Data with Microsoft Query

Microsoft Query Help

New Query Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"

Microsoft Query User's Guide

Appendix B, "ODBC Drivers: Requirements, Installation, and Adding Data Sources"


ODBC Driver Reference

The types of data you can retrieve depend on the ODBC drivers you install.

Microsoft Excel has the following drivers you can install during setup:

dBASE

Microsoft FoxPro

Microsoft Access

Paradox

SQL Server

The Microsoft Excel package also contains a fulfillment coupon you can use to obtain the following ODBC drivers:

Btrieve

Microsoft Excel (XLS)

ODBC ODS Gateway

ORACLE Server

Text

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"


Microsoft ODBC Functions Add-in for Microsoft Excel
Microsoft ODBC Add-in for Microsoft Excel

You can use this add-in to write macros to access and retrieve data from remote data sources directly, without using Microsoft Query. The Microsoft ODBC Add-in provides access to the ODBC Visual Basic Language Extensions and ODBC macro Language Extensions for MicrosoftExcel.

If you selected the Data Access check box in the Complete/Custom option when you ran Microsoft Excel Setup, you have all the files you need. For more information about installing the Microsoft ODBC Add-in, see The Setup You Need to Write Macros to Retrieve Data.

The Microsoft ODBC Add-in contains the following extensions:

ODBC Visual Basic  	Microsoft Excel ODBC macro language

SQLBind	SQL.BIND

SQLClose	SQL.CLOSE

SQLError	SQL.ERROR

SQLExec	SQL.EXEC.QUERY

SQLGetSchema	SQL.GET.SCHEMA

SQLOpen	SQL.OPEN

SQLRetrieve	SQL.RETRIEVE

SQLRetrieveToFile	SQL.RETRIEVE.TO.FILE

SQLRequest	SQL.REQUEST

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Installing and Starting Microsoft Excel"


Start Command (Run Menu)

Run Macro button

Runs a macro or opens the Macro dialog box at the insertion point in your Visual Basic module. If the procedure has arguments, or if it is a function, this command opens the Macro dialog box and selects the first procedure in the list of available procedures. The Run Macro button is on the Visual Basic toolbar, which appears whenever you switch to a Visual Basic module.

When Visual Basic is in Break mode, this is the Continue command, which continues to run the macro from the current line of your code.

See Also

Help

  Record Macro Button

Running a macro

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Testing and Debugging Your Code"


End Command (Run Menu)

Stop Macro button

Stops a macro, if one is running. Variables in the current workbook do not lose their current values when you choose this command. You can use the End command when Break mode is turned on. If the Macro Recorder is running, clicking the Stop Macro button stops the Macro Recorder. This button is on the Visual Basic toolbar, which appears whenever you switch to a Visual Basic module.

See Also

Help

  Stop Macro Button

Running a macro

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Testing and Debugging Your Code"


Reset Command (Run Menu)

Stops running Visual Basic code. All variables in the current workbook lose their current values and are reset. You can use the Reset command whether or not Break mode is turned on.

See Also

Help

Running a macro

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Testing and Debugging Your Code"


Step Into Command (Run Menu)

Step Into button

Runs the next line of code in the active Visual Basic procedure, stepping into other Visual Basic procedures when they are called. If the called procedure is in a hidden module, the Step Into command acts similarly to the Step Over command. The Step Into button is on the Visual Basic toolbar, which appears whenever you switch to a Visual Basic module.

See Also

Help

  Step Macro Button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Step Over Command (Run Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Testing and Debugging Your Code"


Step Over Command (Run Menu)

Step Over button

Runs the next line of code in the active Visual Basic procedure, running other Visual Basic procedures when they are called without stepping into them. The Step Over button is on the Visual Basic toolbar, which appears whenever you switch to a Visual Basic module.

See Also

Help

  Step Macro Button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Step Into Command (Run Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Testing and Debugging Your Code"


Toggle Breakpoint Command (Run Menu)

Toggle Breakpoint button

Sets or removes a breakpoint from a line of code in a Visual Basic procedure. Breakpoints put the code into Break mode when Visual Basic encounters them. The Toggle Breakpoint button is on the Visual Basic toolbar, which appears whenever you switch to a Visual Basic module.

See Also

Help

Clear All Breakpoints Command (Run Menu)

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Testing and Debugging Your Code"


Clear All Breakpoints Command (Run Menu)

Removes all breakpoints in all Visual Basic modules in the active workbook. When you finish debugging a Visual Basic module, you can use this command to easily remove all the breakpoints.

See Also

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Testing and Debugging Your Code"


Continue Command (Run Menu)

Resume Macro button

Resumes running a macro after it has been interrupted.

A Visual Basic macro can be interrupted when it encounters:

An untrapped error.

A previously set breakpoint.

A watch expression that has been set to break when the expression changes, or is true.

A Stop or End statement.

A CTRL+BREAK command while the macro is running.

The Resume Macro button is on the Visual Basic toolbar, which appears whenever you switch to a Visual Basic module.

See Also

Help

Add Watch Command (Tools Menu)

Toggle Breakpoint Command (Run Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Testing and Debugging Your Code"


Parts of the Microsoft Excel Screen

Chart Sheet

Column Heading

Embedded Chart

Formula Bar

Maximize Button

Minimize Button

Name Box

Outline Symbols

Restore Button

Row Heading

Scroll Bars

Select All Button

Sheet Tab

Split Box

Status Bar

Tab Scrolling Buttons

Tab Split Box

Window Sizing Border


Row Heading

The numbered gray area to the left of each row. When you click the row headings, you select the rows. When you click with the right mouse button, a shortcut menu is displayed. You can drag the line below row headings to widen or hide rows, and you can drag it back to shorten and unhide rows.

See Also

Help

Adjusting row height

Hiding and unhiding a row or column

Selecting an entire row or column or all cells on a sheet


Column Heading

The lettered gray area at the top of each column. When you click the column headings, you select the columns. When you click with the right mouse button, a shortcut menu is displayed. You can drag the line to the right of column headings to widen or hide columns, and you can drag it back to shorten and unhide columns. You can also double-click the line to the right of column headings to adjust column width to best fit the longest cell entry in the column.

Note  If you are using R1C1 reference style, the column headings are numbers instead of letters.

See Also

Help

Adjusting column width

Changing a cell's reference type

Hiding and unhiding a row or column

Selecting an entire row or column or all cells on a sheet


Split Box

The split box can be dragged to divide a window into separate panes.

Panes on either side of a vertical split scroll together vertically. Panes above and below a horizontal split scroll together horizontally.

If you drag the split box into the worksheet, the split will snap to the grid of the worksheet. If you drag the split box along the scroll bar, the split can occur between the grid.

Once a split is in place, you can change its position by dragging either the split box or the split bar (the horizontal or vertical line dividing the worksheet).

You can also split a window by using the Split command on the Window menu.

To remove a split, double-click the split box or split bar, or choose Remove Split from the Window menu.

See Also

Help

Freezing and unfreezing worksheet titles and panes

Split and Remove Split Commands (Window Menu)

Splitting a window into panes

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"


Select All Button

The gray rectangle in the upper-left corner of a worksheet, at the intersection of the row and column headings. When you click on the Select All button, you select all cells in the worksheet.

See Also

Help

Selecting an entire row or column or all cells on a sheet

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Maximize Button

Click the Maximize button to enlarge a window to its maximum size.

A maximized workbook window fills as much of the Microsoft Excel window as possible and has no borders.

You can maximize the Microsoft Excel window only if it does not fill the screen, or if it has been minimized to an icon.

Clicking the Maximize button has the same effect as choosing the Maximize command from the Control menu.

To restore a maximized window to its former size, choose the Restore command from the Control menu, or click the Restore button.

See Also

Help

Arranging workbook windows

Minimize Button

Minimizing and restoring windows


Minimize Button

Click the Minimize button to shrink the Microsoft Excel window to an icon.

As an icon, Microsoft Excel remains in memory but does not take up room on your desktop.

When you minimize the Microsoft Excel window, any open workbooks are minimized with it.

Clicking the Minimize button has the same effect as choosing the Minimize command from the Control menu.

To restore the Microsoft Excel window and any workbooks that were open when you minimized it, you can double-click the icon, or click the icon and choose the Restore command from the Control menu.

See Also

Help

Arranging workbook windows

Maximize Button

Minimizing and restoring windows

Restore Button


Restore Button

Click the Restore button to return a window to its previous size and location.

Clicking the Restore button has the same effect as choosing the Restore command from the Control menu.

The Restore button does not affect changes made to a window with the Move command or Size command on the Control menu.

See Also

Help

Arranging workbook windows

Maximize Button

Minimize Button

Minimizing and restoring windows


Window Sizing Border

The border around a window. You can drag a border with the mouse to change the window's shape and size.

Drag the top, bottom, or side border to size in one direction only.

Drag a corner of the border to size in two directions at once.

You can also size a window by using the Size command on the Control menu.


Chart Sheet

The entire area of a workbook sheet that contains a chart and all of the items in the chart, such as the plot area, axes, labels, and data markers.

To activate a chart sheet, select its tab in the workbook.

Once the chart is active, you can format, move, or size items in the chart, depending on the type of item you select.

See Also

Help

Activating a chart

Creating a chart sheet in a workbook

What Is a Chart?

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Embedded Chart

The entire area inside a chart object on a worksheet, including all parts of the chart, such as the plot area, axes, labels, and data markers.

To select an embedded chart, click it.

To activate an embedded chart, double-click it.

To move an embedded chart, select the chart, and then drag it to another location on the worksheet.

To resize an embedded chart, select the chart, and then point to a selection square and drag until the chart is the size and shape you want.

Once the chart has been activated, you can format, move, or size items in the chart, depending on the type of item.

See Also

Help

Activating a chart

Creating an embedded chart on a worksheet

What Is a Chart?

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Sheet Tab

The tabs located at the bottom of a workbook window.

When you click a sheet tab, that sheet becomes the active sheet. The name on the active sheet tab is always bold.

To scroll through the sheet tabs, use the tab scrolling buttons to the left of the tabs.

To add more sheets to a selection, hold down the CTRL key as you click the sheet tabs.

To extend a selection, click a sheet tab, hold down the SHIFT key and click another sheet tab. All the sheets between the two sheets will be selected.

To end a group selection, click on a tab that is not part of the group, or use the Ungroup Sheets command on the sheet tab shortcut menu.

See Also

Help

Moving between sheets

Selecting a sheet or sheets

Selecting all sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Tab Split Box

A box between the sheet tabs and the horizontal scroll bar that allows you to display more sheet tabs or more of the horizontal scroll bar.

Drag the tab split box left to display more of the horizontal scroll bar.

Drag the tab split box right to display more of the workbook tabs.

Double-click the tab split box to return to the default display of sheet tabs.

See Also

Help

Moving between sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Name Box

Box on the left side of the formula bar that allows you to quickly define a name for the selected cell or range, or move to and select a previously defined name. You can also type into the name box a cell or range reference that you want to move to.

For charts, the name box identifies the selected chart item. For example, if the legend is selected, the word "Legend" is displayed. If the code S1P3 is displayed, it means that the third point of the first data series is selected.

See Also

Help

Go To Command (Edit Menu)

Going to specific cells or ranges

Naming a cell, range, or formula

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Tab Scrolling Buttons

Scroll between workbook tabs. Tab scrolling buttons do not select tabs. Click on a tab to select it.

Scrolls to the first tab in the workbook.

Scrolls to the last tab in the workbook.

Scrolls to the previous tab in the workbook. To scroll by several tabs at a time, hold down SHIFT and click the button.

Scrolls to the next tab in the workbook. To scroll by several tabs at a time, hold down SHIFT and click the button.

See Also

Help

Moving between sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Scroll Bars

The shaded bars along the right and bottom sides of a window.

With the scroll bars, you can move through a long worksheet or Help topic.

The position of the scroll box in the scroll bar indicates the part of the worksheet or topic currently displayed in the window. To scroll quickly to another part of the worksheet or topic, drag the box.

To scroll one row or column in a given direction, click the arrow at that end of the bar.

To scroll one window in a given direction, click the bar on that side of the scroll box.

To quickly scroll to the last row used in your worksheet, hold down CTRL while you drag the scroll box to the bottom of the scroll bar.


Outline Symbols

Outline symbols can be displayed on any worksheet that contains an outline. They include the show detail symbols, the hide detail symbols, the outline level symbols, and the outline level bars.

To show or hide the outline symbols, choose Options from the Tools menu. Select the View tab, and then select or clear the Outline Symbols check box. You can also click the Show Outline Symbols button in the Utility category.

The show detail symbol ( [image]) indicates a summary row or column with hidden detail. Click it to display the detail data.

The hide detail symbol ( [image]) indicates a summary row or column with detail rows or columns displayed. Click it to hide the detail data indicated by the column or row level bar.

Row and column level symbols ( [image], [image], [image], and so forth) indicate the number of row and column levels in an outline. Click these symbols to display specific levels of data in an outline.

Row and column level bars indicate that the detail rows and columns are displayed. Click the hide detail symbol, or click anywhere on the level bar to hide the detail rows or columns.

See Also

Help

  Show Outline Symbols Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding the outline symbols

Removing an outline

Showing or hiding detail data

View Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)


Status Bar

The bar at the bottom of the screen that displays information about a selected command or an operation in progress. Use the Status Bar command on the View menu to display or hide the status bar.

When a command is selected, the left side of the status bar briefly describes the command.

The left side of the status bar also indicates operations in progress, such as opening or saving a file, copying cells, or recording a macro.

The right side of the status bar shows whether keys such as CAPS LOCK, SCROLL LOCK, or NUM LOCK are turned on.


Formula Bar

A bar at the top of your Microsoft Excel window that you use to enter or edit values or formulas in cells or charts. Displays the constant value or formula used in the active cell. Use the Formula Bar command on the View menu to display or hide the formula bar.

To enter data, select a cell, type the data, and click the enter box [image] on the formula bar or press ENTER. The data appears in the formula bar as you type.

To enter a formula, click the Function Wizard button.

To edit data, click the formula bar with the mouse or press F2. Then type your changes and click the enter box [image] or press ENTER. You can also double-click a cell to edit data directly in a cell.

To cancel your changes, click the cancel box [image] on the formula bar or press ESC.

The name box is on the left end of the formula bar. Use the name box to define names and to go to areas of the sheet.


Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands

Overview of Selecting Cells and Moving Within a Worksheet

Selecting a cell or range of cells

Selecting nonadjacent cells or ranges

Selecting an entire row or column or all cells on a sheet

Selecting named ranges or specified cells

Selecting visible cells only

Extending the selection through the current data region

Changing the size of a selection

Overview of Selecting Sheets in a Workbook

Selecting a sheet or sheets

Selecting all sheets

Canceling a group selection

Overview of Choosing Commands

Choosing a menu bar command

Choosing a toolbar button

Choosing a shortcut menu command

Undoing or repeating a command

Choosing dialog box options


Overview of Selecting Cells and Moving Within a Worksheet

Before you can carry out most commands or tasks in Microsoft Excel, you must select the cells you want to work with. You can select a single cell, or a range of cells that are adjacent or nonadjacent to each other. You can also easily move from cell to cell within a selection. If you select a single cell, it is surrounded by a heavy border. If you select a range of cells, the range is highlighted.

See Also

Help

Changing the size of a selection

Extending the selection through the current data region

Keys for Moving and Selecting in Worksheets and Workbooks

Keys for Moving Within a Selection

Selecting a cell or range of cells

Selecting an entire row or column or all cells on a sheet

Selecting named ranges or specified cells

Selecting nonadjacent cells or ranges

Selecting visible cells only

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Selecting a cell or range of cells

Overview

To select a cell

Click the cell you want to select.

Alternate Method

Press the arrow keys to move to the cell you want to select.

To select a range of cells

Point to the first cell of the range and drag to the last.

Alternate Method

1.	Select the first cell of the range.

2.	Hold down SHIFT.

3.	Use the arrow keys to extend the selection through the cells you want.

See Also

Help

Keys for Moving and Selecting in Worksheets and Workbooks

Keys for Moving Within a Selection

Selecting an entire row or column or all cells on a sheet

Selecting named ranges or specified cells

Selecting nonadjacent cells or ranges

Selecting visible cells only

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Selecting nonadjacent cells or ranges

Overview

1.	Select the first cell or range.

2.	Hold down CTRL and click or drag to add cells or ranges to the selection.

After you make a nonadjacent selection, the fill handle and the border around the selections disappear.

Alternate Method

1.	From the Edit menu choose the Go To command.

2.	In the Reference box, type the full cell reference. For example, to select the nonadjacent ranges A1:B5 and D1:E5, click in the Reference box and type a1:b5,d1:e5

3.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Go To Command (Edit Menu)

Keys for Moving and Selecting in Worksheets and Workbooks

Keys for Moving Within a Selection

Selecting a cell or range of cells

Selecting named ranges or specified cells

Selecting visible cells only

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Selecting an entire row or column or all cells on a sheet

Overview

To select a row or column

Click the row or column heading.

Alternate Method

1.	Select a cell in the row or column.

2.	To select an entire row, press SHIFT+SPACEBAR.

To select an entire column, press CTRL+SPACEBAR.

To select all cells on a sheet

Click the Select All button (the rectangle in the upper-left corner of the worksheet where the row and column headings intersect).

Alternate Method

Press CTRL+A.

See Also

Help

Keys for Moving and Selecting in Worksheets and Workbooks

Keys for Moving Within a Selection

Selecting a cell or range of cells

Selecting nonadjacent cells or ranges

Selecting visible cells only

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Extending the selection through the current data region

Overview

Follow this procedure if you must select a range of contiguous data values before selecting a command. Note that some commands such as the AutoFormat command on the Format menu for worksheets and the Subtotals command on the Data menu automatically select the current data region.

1.	Select a cell in the range of data.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Go To.

3.	Choose the Special button.

4.	Select the Current Region option button.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Shortcuts:	CTRL+SHIFT+*

Select Current Region button (Utility category)

See Also

Help

  Select Current Region Button

Go To Command (Edit Menu)

Keys for Moving and Selecting in Worksheets and Workbooks

Keys for Moving Within a Selection

Selecting a cell or range of cells

Selecting named ranges or specified cells

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Selecting named ranges or specified cells

Overview

1.	From the Name box at the left of the formula bar, select a name or type in a cell reference.

2.	Press ENTER.

Alternate Method

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Go To.

2.	In the Go To box, select the name of a cell or range of cells.

You can also type a name or cell reference in the Reference box.

3.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Formula Bar Command (View Menu)

Go To Command (Edit Menu)

Keys for Moving and Selecting in Worksheets and Workbooks

Keys for Moving Within a Selection

Selecting a cell or range of cells

Selecting nonadjacent cells or ranges

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Selecting visible cells only

Overview

Do this procedure when you want to make a selection that crosses hidden rows or columns on the worksheet, but do not want to include the hidden cells in the selection.

1.	Select the cells.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Go To.

3.	Choose the Special button.

4.	Under Select, choose Visible Cells Only.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Shortcut:	Select Visible Cells button (Utility category)

See Also

Help

  Select Visible Cells Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Go To Command (Edit Menu)

Selecting a cell or range of cells

Selecting an entire row or column or all cells on a sheet

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Changing the size of a selection

Overview

Hold down the SHIFT key and click a cell.

The cell range between the active cell and the cell you click becomes the new selection.

Alternate Method

Hold down SHIFT and use the arrow keys to extend the selection through the cells you want.

See Also

Help

Keys for Moving and Selecting in Worksheets and Workbooks

Keys for Moving Within a Selection

Selecting a cell or range of cells

Selecting an entire row or column or all cells on a sheet

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Overview of Selecting Sheets in a Workbook

You can enter data on, edit, and format a single worksheet or multiple worksheets in a workbook. Normally you work with one active sheet at a time. The active sheet is the sheet currently displayed in the workbook. The tab of the active sheet is white with bold type.

You can also work with multiple sheets in a workbook simultaneously by making them part of a group selection. For example you can enter common column headings and formulas in several worksheets, or hide several sheets at one time.

Note  You must have a mouse to select a group of sheets.

See Also

Help

Canceling a group selection

Selecting a sheet or sheets

Selecting all sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Selecting a sheet or sheets

Overview

To select a single sheet

Click the sheet tab.

To select two or more sheets

1.	Click the tab for the first sheet you want to select.

2.	If the sheets you want to select are adjacent, hold down the SHIFT key and click the tab for the last sheet you want to select.

If the sheets you want to select are nonadjacent, hold down CTRL and click the other tabs.

See Also

Help

Canceling a group selection

Selecting all sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Selecting all sheets

Overview

From the sheet tab shortcut menu, choose the Select All Sheets command.

See Also

Help

Canceling a group selection

Choosing a shortcut menu command

Select All Sheets Command (Shortcut Menu)

Selecting a sheet or sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Canceling a group selection

Overview

Select Ungroup Sheets from the sheet tab shortcut menu.

See Also

Help

Selecting a sheet or sheets

Selecting all sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Overview of Choosing Commands

Microsoft Excel commands are grouped on menus. Menu names appear on the menu bar displayed across the top of the application window. Different types of sheets have different menu bars. For example, if you are working with a chart, you will see the chart menu bar.

Some commands display a submenu. Submenus are indicated by a black triangle following the command name. Submenus contain additional, related commands.

When you choose a command name that is followed by an ellipsis (...), Microsoft Excel displays a dialog box so you can enter more information or select options before carrying out the command.

In addition to choosing commands from menus, you can also choose commands from shortcut menus, and by clicking toolbar buttons.

See Also

Help

Choosing a menu bar command

Choosing a shortcut menu command

Choosing a toolbar button

Choosing dialog box options

Undoing or repeating a command

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Choosing a menu bar command

Overview

To choose a command

1.	If needed, select the cells or objects to which you want the command to apply.

2.	In the menu bar, click the menu name to display the menu.

3.	Click the command you want to choose.

4.	If the command displays a submenu, click a command on the submenu.

5.	If the command displays a dialog box, select the options you want and then choose the OK button.

Alternate Method

1.	If needed, select the cells or objects to which you want the command to apply.

2.	Press ALT to select the menu bar.

3.	Press the key for the underlined letter in the name of the menu you want.

4.	Press the key for the underlined letter in the name of the command you want to choose.

For example, press ALT, E, C to choose Copy from the Edit menu.

5.	If the command displays a dialog box, select the options you want and then press ENTER.

Once the menu bar is active you can also use the arrow keys to browse through the menu and select the command you want. Press ENTER to carry out the command.

If the command name ends with an ellipsis (...), a dialog box is displayed which contains options associated with this command.

Note  A few alternate commands become available when you hold down the SHIFT key and select a menu. For example, the Close command on the File menu becomes the Close All command.

To cancel a command selection

Press ESC to cancel the selection and deactivate the menu bar.

See Also

Help

Choosing a shortcut menu command

Choosing a toolbar button

Choosing dialog box options

Keyboard Guide

Keys for Working in Menus

Menu Commands

Undoing or repeating a command

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Choosing a toolbar button

Overview

1.	If needed, select the cells or objects you want the command to apply to.

2.	Click the button you want.

Holding down SHIFT and clicking a button will in some cases change what the button does. For example, you can hold down SHIFT and click the Increase Font Size button to decrease the font size.

Note  To see the name of the button in a ToolTip, leave the mouse pointer over a button for a moment. To see a longer description of the button, move the mouse pointer over the button and look at the status bar.

See Also

Help

Choosing a menu bar command

Toolbar Summary

Tools Menu Command Keys

Undoing or repeating a command

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Choosing a shortcut menu command

Overview

1.	If needed, select the cells or objects you want the command to apply to.

2.	Click the right mouse button.

3.	Choose the command you want.

Alternate Method

1.	If needed, select the cells or objects to which you want the command to apply.

2.	Press SHIFT+F10.

3.	Choose the command you want.

See Also

Help

Choosing a menu bar command

Keys for Working in Menus

Undoing or repeating a command

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Undoing or repeating a command

Overview

To undo your last command

Click the Undo button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+Z

Alternate Method

From the Edit menu, choose Undo.

You can undo the Undo command by choosing Redo from the Edit menu.

To repeat your last command

Click the Repeat button.

Shortcut:	F4

Alternate Method

From the Edit menu, choose Repeat.

See Also

Help

  Repeat Button

  Undo Button

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Choosing dialog box options

Overview

Guidelines

When you choose the OK button or the Cancel button in a tab dialog box, Microsoft Excel applies or cancels all settings made on any tab in the dialog box, not just the settings of the currently active tab.

If you undo, redo, or repeat a command that has dialog box options, Microsoft Excel applies or cancels all options you set in the dialog box.

All dialog boxes include a Help button. Choose it for help with the dialog box options.

See Also

Help

Keys for Working in Dialog Boxes

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Routing Workbooks with Electronic Mail

Overview of Mailing a Workbook

Mailing a workbook

Overview of Routing a Workbook

Creating and editing a routing slip

Routing a workbook

Overview of Routing a Workbook to the Next Recipient

Opening a routed workbook

Editing the routing slip

Routing a workbook to the next recipient


Overview of Mailing a Workbook

You can mail a workbook when you want to send it to one or more recipients simultaneously. If you want to send a workbook to recipients sequentially, or want to automatically receive the workbook back, route the workbook instead.

Caution  When you mail or route a workbook, you send only a copy of the workbook. The original remains open in Microsoft Excel. Microsoft Excel does not link the original workbook and its copy in any way. You can protect portions of the workbook copies that you do not want recipients to change.

What You Need to Use Workbook Mailing and Routing

Workbook mailing and routing require Microsoft Mail (or other mail system compliant with Messaging Application Programming Interface [MAPI]), or Lotus cc:Mail (or other mail system compliant with Vendor Independent Messaging [VIM]).

Workbook mailing and routing may not work across electronic mail gateways.

See Also

Help

Mailing a workbook

Overview of Preventing Workbook Files from Being Opened or Saved

User's Guide

Chapter 40, "Routing Workbooks with Electronic Mail"


Mailing a workbook

Overview

1.	From the File menu, choose Send.

Shortcut:	Send Mail button (WorkGroup toolbar)

Note  If the workbook has a routing slip attached, a dialog appears where you can choose to mail the workbook independent of the routing slip. To do so, select the Send Copy Of Workbook Without Using The Routing Slip option button.

2.	Complete the message information in your mail system, and then send the message.

See Also

Help

Send Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 40, "Routing Workbooks with Electronic Mail"


Overview of Routing a Workbook

You can route a workbook when you want to send it to recipients in sequence, or you want to automatically receive the workbook back. With routing you can:

Send the workbook to recipients one after another, or all at once.

Automatically receive a routing status electronic mail message as each recipient sends the workbook to the next person on the routing list.

Ensure that each recipient will be automatically reminded that they should send the workbook on to the next recipient.

Automatically receive the workbook after all recipients have had it.

You can create one routing slip per workbook.

Caution  When you mail or route a workbook, you send only a copy of the workbook. The original remains open in Microsoft Excel. Microsoft Excel does not link the original workbook and its copy in any way. You can protect portions of the workbook copies that you do not want recipients to change.

What You Need to Use Workbook Mailing and Routing

Workbook mailing and routing require Microsoft Mail (or other mail system compliant with Messaging Application Programming Interface [MAPI]), or Lotus cc:Mail (or other mail system compliant with Vendor Independent Messaging [VIM]).

Workbook mailing and routing may not work across electronic mail gateways.

See Also

Help

Creating and editing a routing slip

Overview of Preventing Workbook Files from Being Opened or Saved

Routing a workbook

User's Guide

Chapter 40, "Routing Workbooks with Electronic Mail"


Creating and editing a routing slip

Overview

To create a routing slip

1.	From the File menu, choose Add Routing Slip.

Shortcut:	Routing Slip button (WorkGroup toolbar)

2.	In the Routing Slip dialog box, select the recipients and other routing options you want.

If you chose to route the workbook to one recipient after another, you can reorder the recipient list. Select the recipient you want to move in the To box, and then click one of the Move arrows to move the recipient up or down in the list.

Note  You can select a group alias as a recipient. However, all members of the group alias will be considered one recipient. To route the workbook to members of a group alias one after another, send it to the individual members, not to the entire alias.

3.	To route the workbook now, choose the Route button.

To close the dialog box without routing the workbook, choose the Add Slip button.

To edit a routing slip

1.	From the File menu, choose Edit Routing Slip.

Shortcut:	Routing Slip button (WorkGroup toolbar)

2.	Edit the recipient list or other routing options.

3.	To route the workbook now, choose the Route button.

To close the dialog box without routing the workbook, choose the Add Slip button.

See Also

Help

Add Routing Slip and Edit Routing Slip Commands (File Menu)

Routing a workbook

User's Guide

Chapter 40, "Routing Workbooks with Electronic Mail"


Routing a workbook

Overview

1.	From the File menu, choose Send.

Shortcut:	Send Mail button (WorkGroup toolbar)

2.	Select the Route Workbook To (recipient) option button.

3.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Creating and editing a routing slip

Send Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 40, "Routing Workbooks with Electronic Mail"


Overview of Routing a Workbook to the Next Recipient

If you are a recipient on a routed workbook, you will receive a workbook attached to an electronic mail message. Follow the instructions of your electronic mail program to open the attached workbook in Microsoft Excel.

Any recipient of a routed workbook can edit the subject, message text, and recipient list on the routing slip. You can change the recipients subsequent to yourself, but not the prior recipients.

See Also

Help

Editing the routing slip

Opening a routed workbook

Routing a workbook to the next recipient

User's Guide

Chapter 40, "Routing Workbooks with Electronic Mail"


Opening a routed workbook

Overview

A routed workbook is an attachment to an electronic mail message. Follow the instructions of your electronic mail program to open the attached workbook in Microsoft Excel.

See Also

Help

Editing the routing slip

Routing a workbook to the next recipient

User's Guide

Chapter 40, "Routing Workbooks with Electronic Mail"


Editing the routing slip

Overview

If you are a recipient of a routed workbook, you can edit the subject, message text, and recipient list on the routing slip. You can change the recipients subsequent to yourself, but not the prior recipients.

1.	From the File menu, choose Edit Routing Slip.

Shortcut:	Routing Slip button (WorkGroup toolbar)

2.	Edit the recipient list or other routing options.

If you chose to route the workbook to one recipient after another, you can reorder the recipient list. Select the recipient you want to move in the To box, and then click one of the Move arrows to move the recipient up or down in the list.

3.	Choose the Add Slip button.

See Also

Help

Add Routing Slip and Edit Routing Slip Commands (File Menu)

Routing a workbook to the next recipient

User's Guide

Chapter 40, "Routing Workbooks with Electronic Mail"


Routing a workbook to the next recipient

Overview

1.	From the File menu, choose Send.

Shortcut:	Send Mail button (WorkGroup toolbar)

2.	Select the Route Workbook To (recipient) option button.

3.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Add Routing Slip and Edit Routing Slip Commands (File Menu)

Editing the routing slip

Opening a routed workbook

Send Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 40, "Routing Workbooks with Electronic Mail"


Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications

Overview of Exchanging Data Using the Clipboard

Copying data from another application to Microsoft Excel

Copying data from Microsoft Excel to another application

Overview of Dragging Data Between Applications

Dragging data between applications

Overview of Linking and Embedding

Controlling remote requests

Controlling whether a DDE or OLE link is updated automatically

Converting an embedded object to a different format

Deleting an embedded object from Microsoft Excel

Disabling updating of all links to other applications on a worksheet

Editing a Microsoft Excel object embedded in another application

Editing an object embedded in a Microsoft Excel document

Embedding a Microsoft Excel object in another application

Embedding existing information in a Microsoft Excel document

Embedding new information in a Microsoft Excel document

Inserting a picture created by another application

Freezing the remote reference portion of a larger formula

Linking a document from another application to a Microsoft Excel worksheet

Linking a Microsoft Excel document to a document from another application

Opening and updating data from a list of source documents

Redirecting links to source documents

Replacing an entire remote reference with its value

Suppressing the updating of all remote references in a worksheet

Updating a DDE or OLE link manually

Overview of Tools for Switching to Other Applications

Overview of Copying Cells, Objects, or Charts as Pictures

Copying a linked picture of cells

Copying a picture of a chart, cells, or an object

Copying a picture to another application


Overview of Exchanging Data Using the Clipboard

With the Clipboard, you can copy data, charts, or objects from Microsoft Excel to another application. You can also paste data, graphic objects, or pictures into your Microsoft Excel worksheets from documents created in other applications, such as Microsoft Word.

When you cut or copy data, Microsoft Excel temporarily stores the data on the Clipboard. You can then paste the data into another location in the same document, into another document created in the same application, or into a document created in another application.

See Also

Help

Copying data from another application to Microsoft Excel

Copying data from Microsoft Excel to another application

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Copying data from another application to Microsoft Excel

Overview

1.	Switch to the document containing the data you want to copy.

2.	Select the information you want to copy to Microsoft Excel.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Copy.

Copying procedures can vary depending on the application. For more information about copying, see that application's documentation.

4.	Switch to the Microsoft Excel document you want to paste the copied data into.

5.	Select the upper-left cell of the area where you want to paste the data.

6.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Paste Special.

7.	Choose the format in which you want to paste the data.

For example, you can paste text copied from a Microsoft Word document in three different formats: as a Word document object, as a picture, or as text.

8.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Copying data from Microsoft Excel to another application

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Copying data from Microsoft Excel to another application

Overview

1.	In Microsoft Excel, select the cells you want to copy.

2.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Copy.

Shortcut:	Copy button

3.	Switch to the document you want to paste the copied cells into.

4.	Select the location where you want the copied cells to appear.

5.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste.

Pasting procedures can vary, depending on the application. For more information about copying and pasting, see the application's documentation.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Copying data from another application to Microsoft Excel

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Overview of Dragging Data Between Applications

In addition to being able to cut and copy cells within a worksheet by dragging, you can also move data between Microsoft Excel and certain other applications by dragging the data. The other application must also support object linking and embedding (OLE).

Note  Dragging data between applications is different from using the Copy and Cut commands on the Edit menu because the data you cut or copy is not placed on the Clipboard. Once you've dragged data to another application, you can't use the Paste command to paste another copy of the data.

See Also

Help

Dragging data between applications

Embedding a Microsoft Excel object in another application

Embedding existing information in a Microsoft Excel document

Embedding new information in a Microsoft Excel document

Linking a document from another application to a Microsoft Excel worksheet

Linking a Microsoft Excel document to a document from another application

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Dragging data between applications

Overview

To copy, insert, or cut data from Microsoft Excel into another application

1.	Arrange both application windows so that you can see the source Microsoft Excel document and the destination document.

Note  For the following procedure to work, you must select the Allow Cell Drag And Drop check box on the Edit tab in the Options dialog box.

2.	In Microsoft Excel, select the cells or objects you want to cut or copy.

3.	Select the data to drag, click its border, and drag the data to the destination. Then release it at the spot where you want to insert it.

To cut data and insert it into the destination document, hold down SHIFT as you drag. (Inserting moves document sections down from the insertion point.)

To copy data from Microsoft Excel and paste it into the destination document, hold down CTRL as you drag.

The data appears in the destination document.

To copy, insert, or cut data from another application into Microsoft Excel

1.	Arrange both application windows so that you can see the source document and the destination Microsoft Excel document.

2.	In the source document, select the data you want to cut or copy.

3.	Drag the data to the destination, and release it at the spot where you want to insert it.

The data appears in the Microsoft Excel document.

Note  Instructions for cutting data as opposed to copying it can differ depending on the application. For more information, see the source application's documentation.

See Also

Help

Linking a document from another application to a Microsoft Excel worksheet

Linking a Microsoft Excel document to a document from another application

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Overview of Linking and Embedding

About Linking and Embedding

Linking and embedding are two ways to exchange data between Microsoft Excel documents and documents created in other applications. Use linking when you want the data to be updated dynamically as the data in the source document changes. Use embedding when you want to edit or format the data within another document.

Linking a Microsoft Excel document to a document from another application

You can link data from a document in another application to a Microsoft Excel document, or from a Microsoft Excel document to a document in another application.

For example, you can link a Microsoft Excel chart to a Microsoft Word document. Whenever you edit the chart in Microsoft Excel, your changes are displayed in the chart in the Microsoft Word document if it is open. If the Microsoft Word document is not open, the chart is updated the next time you open the document.

To create a link between a Microsoft Excel document and a document in another application, that application must be running with Windows, and it must support dynamic data exchange (DDE) or object linking and embedding (OLE).

Use the Links command on the Edit menu to edit or change existing links and to open source documents.

Embedding data from one document into another document

You can embed a Microsoft Excel cell, cell range, or chart into another document. You can also embed information (such as text, a table, a chart, or a graphic) from another document into Microsoft Excel. Information that you embed is called an embedded object.

For example, you can embed a Microsoft Excel chart as an object in a report created in another application. All the information that was used to create the object is encapsulated in the embedded object in the report.

To use embedding with Microsoft Excel and another application, both applications must be running with Microsoft Windows and must support object linking and embedding (OLE).

See Also

Help

Embedding a Microsoft Excel object in another application

Embedding existing information in a Microsoft Excel document

Embedding new information in a Microsoft Excel document

Linking a document from another application to a Microsoft Excel worksheet

Linking a Microsoft Excel document to a document from another application

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Converting an embedded object to a different format

Overview

Use this procedure to edit an embedded object whose source application you don't have. For example, if your Microsoft Excel document has an embedded Microsoft Word object and you don't have Word, follow these steps to convert the document to a format your word-processing application can use.

1.	Select the object you want to convert.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Object, which is displayed with the name of the selected object (for example, Microsoft Word Object).

3.	From the submenu, choose Convert.

4.	When the Convert dialog box appears, do one of the following:

To convert the embedded object to the file format you specify in the Object Type box, select the Convert To option button.

To open embedded objects in the file format you specify in the Object Type box, select the Activate As option button.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Editing an object embedded in a Microsoft Excel document

Embedding existing information in a Microsoft Excel document

Embedding new information in a Microsoft Excel document

Object Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Controlling remote requests

Overview

When Microsoft Excel is running, it responds to dynamic data exchange (DDE) and object linking and embedding (OLE) requests from other applications unless you have disabled remote requests.

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	In the Calculation tab, select or clear the Update Remote References check box.

3.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Controlling whether a DDE or OLE link is updated automatically

Embedding a Microsoft Excel object in another application

Embedding existing information in a Microsoft Excel document

Embedding new information in a Microsoft Excel document

Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Controlling whether a DDE or OLE link is updated automatically

Overview

1.	Switch to the dependent worksheet containing the remote references you want to change.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Links.

3.	In the Links dialog box, select the DDE or OLE links you want to change.

To select several links, hold down CTRL and click the name of each link.

4.	To make the link manual, select the Manual option button. To make the link automatic, select the Automatic option button.

Note  Microsoft Excel links are always automatic.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	When you finish changing links, choose the Close button.

If the Update Remote References check box is selected on the Calculation tab in the Options dialog box, all automatic links are updated.

See Also

Help

Controlling remote requests

Embedding existing information in a Microsoft Excel document

Embedding new information in a Microsoft Excel document

Links Command (Edit Menu)

Updating a DDE or OLE link manually

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Deleting an embedded object from Microsoft Excel

Overview

1.	Select the embedded object.

2.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Clear.

See Also

Help

Clear Command (Edit Menu)

Embedding existing information in a Microsoft Excel document

Embedding new information in a Microsoft Excel document

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Disabling updating of all links to other applications on a worksheet

Overview

This procedure affects the active dependent worksheet only.

1.	Switch to the dependent worksheet containing the remote references.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

3.	On the Calculation tab, clear the Update Remote References check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

When the Update Remote References check box is cleared, Microsoft Excel uses the last value from the source documents for the remote references.

To disable updating of a single link

This procedure affects the active dependent worksheet only.

1.	Switch to the dependent worksheet containing the remote reference.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Links.

3.	In the Links dialog box, select the link you want to disable.

4.	Choose the Manual button.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Controlling whether a DDE or OLE link is updated automatically

Linking a document from another application to a Microsoft Excel worksheet

Links Command (Edit Menu)

Options Command (Tools Menu)

Updating a DDE or OLE link manually

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Editing a Microsoft Excel object embedded in another application

Overview

1.	Double-click the embedded object.

In some applications, an embedded object is activated in place when you double-click it. The Microsoft Excel menus and toolbars appear, but the container document remains visible around the Microsoft Excel object.

Double-clicking embedded objects in applications that do not support in-place activation starts Microsoft Excel and displays the data or chart in a Microsoft Excel document.

2.	Edit the workbook using Microsoft Excel commands.

For example, to edit chart data or update it from the source worksheet, choose Links from the Edit menu and then choose the Open button or the Update Now button. The chart data is automatically updated from the source worksheet as long as the source workbook is open.

3.	To close the Microsoft Excel document and update the object in the other application, choose Close from the File menu.

To quit Microsoft Excel, choose Exit from the File menu. Microsoft Excel asks you if you want to update the object in the other application. Choose the Yes button to update the embedded object. Choose the No button to cancel your changes. Choose the Cancel button to cancel quitting Microsoft Excel.

To return the changes to the other application but leave the Microsoft Excel document on the screen, choose Update from the File menu.

See Also

Help

Editing an object embedded in a Microsoft Excel document

Embedding a Microsoft Excel object in another application

Links Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Editing an object embedded in a Microsoft Excel document

Overview

1.	Select the object to be edited.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Object, and then choose Edit.

3.	Use the commands in the source application to edit or format the object.

4.	Follow the procedure in the other application for returning the changes to Microsoft Excel.

For example, in Microsoft Word, choose Close, Exit, or Update from the File menu.

See Also

Help

Converting an embedded object to a different format

Editing a Microsoft Excel object embedded in another application

Embedding existing information in a Microsoft Excel document

Embedding new information in a Microsoft Excel document

Object Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Embedding a Microsoft Excel object in another application

Overview

To use this procedure, the destination document must have been created in an application that supports object linking and embedding (OLE).

1.	In Microsoft Excel, select the cell, cell range, graphic object, or chart you want to embed in the destination document.

2.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Copy.

3.	Switch to the document in the other application.

4.	Position the insertion point where you want to embed the cells or the chart.

5.	Follow the procedure in the other application for embedding an object.

For example, in Microsoft Word, choose Paste Special from the Edit menu, select the object data type, and then choose the Paste button.

Note  Other applications can provide different commands for embedding objects. For example, in Microsoft Word version 2.0 for Windows, you can also insert a new object using Object on the Insert menu.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Editing a Microsoft Excel object embedded in another application

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Embedding existing information in a Microsoft Excel document

Overview

To embed a portion of an existing document

1.	Open the document that contains the information you want to embed in a Microsoft Excel document.

2.	Follow the procedure for selecting and copying the object in the other application.

For example, in Microsoft Word, choose Copy from the Edit menu.

3.	Switch to the Microsoft Excel document.

4.	Select either a cell or a graphic object that is located where you want to embed the new object.

5.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

6.	Select the Paste option.

7.	In the As box, select the object data type.

8.	Choose the OK button.

To embed an entire existing document

1.	In Microsoft Excel, choose Object from the Insert menu.

2.	Choose the Create From File tab.

3.	Select the file you want to embed.

If the file does not appear in the current file list, select the correct directory, or use the Network button or the Find File button to locate it.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel embeds the file in your worksheet.

Note  When you select the embedded object in Microsoft Excel, you see the EMBED formula in the formula bar.

See Also

Help

Create From File Tab, Object Command (Insert Menu)

Embedding a Microsoft Excel object in another application

Linking a Microsoft Excel document to a document from another application

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Embedding new information in a Microsoft Excel document

Overview

Use this procedure if the information you want to embed in Microsoft Excel has not yet been created.

1.	In Microsoft Excel, choose Object from the Insert menu.

Microsoft Excel displays a list of object types you can embed. This list is determined by the applications you have installed.

2.	In the Create New tab, select the type of object you want to embed.

3.	Choose the OK button.

4.	In the new document, create the information you want to embed in Microsoft Excel.

5.	In the application you are creating the object in, choose Close, Exit, or Exit And Return from the File menu.

The object appears in the Microsoft Excel document.

Note  Embedding and updating commands can vary, depending on the application. For more information about embedding in an application, see the application's documentation.

See Also

Help

Create New Tab, Object Command (Insert Menu)

Editing an object embedded in a Microsoft Excel document

Embedding existing information in a Microsoft Excel document

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Freezing the remote reference portion of a larger formula

Overview

1.	Select the cell containing the remote reference you want to freeze.

2.	In the formula bar, select the remote reference part of the formula.

3.	Press F9.

4.	Press ENTER.

See Also

Help

Controlling remote requests

Suppressing the updating of all remote references in a worksheet

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Linking a document from another application to a Microsoft Excel worksheet

Overview

To do this procedure, both applications must be running with Microsoft Windows.

1.	Open the dependent worksheet in Microsoft Excel and the source document in the other application.

2.	Switch to the source document in the other application.

3.	Follow the other application's procedure for selecting and copying data.

4.	Switch to the dependent Microsoft Excel worksheet.

5.	Select the cell or the upper-left corner of the range that is to contain the linked data.

6.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

7.	Select the Paste Link option button.

Note  If the Paste Link option button is not available, the other application does not support linking or cannot supply the data in a format that Microsoft Excel can use.

8.	In the As box, select the type of object you are linking.

9.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel creates the remote reference formula that links the documents.

See Also

Help

Linking a Microsoft Excel document to a document from another application

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Linking a Microsoft Excel document to a document from another application

Overview

To do this procedure, both applications must be running with Microsoft Windows.

1.	Open the source worksheet in Microsoft Excel and the dependent document in the other application.

2.	Switch to the source worksheet in Microsoft Excel.

3.	Select the worksheet data, chart, or graphic object you want to link to the dependent document in the other application.

4.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Copy.

Shortcuts:	Copy button

CTRL+C

5.	Switch to the dependent document window in the other application.

6.	Place the insertion point where you want to insert the linked data.

7.	Follow the procedure for pasting linked data into the other application.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Linking a document from another application to a Microsoft Excel worksheet

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Opening and updating data from a list of source documents

Overview

To open source documents for the active worksheet

1.	Switch to the dependent worksheet.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Links.

Microsoft Excel displays a list of all the source documents for the dependent worksheet.

3.	Select the name of the source document you want to open.

4.	Choose the Open button.

To update information in a Microsoft Excel document linked to another application

When you open a worksheet containing links to other applications, Microsoft Excel displays a message asking if you want to reestablish those links.

Choose the OK button to reestablish the links and update the references.

Choose the Cancel button to freeze the linked references and use the worksheet's existing values.

Note  If you don't want Microsoft Excel to display this message, clear the Ask To Update Automatic Links check box on the Edit tab in the Options dialog box.

See Also

Help

Edit Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Linking a document from another application to a Microsoft Excel worksheet

Linking a Microsoft Excel document to a document from another application

Links Command (Edit Menu)

Updating a DDE or OLE link manually

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Redirecting links to source documents

Overview

If you change the name of a source document or move the source document to a different directory, you must redirect the links in the dependent document to include the new name or path of the source document.

To change a link to a Microsoft Excel document

1.	Switch to the dependent worksheet.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Links.

Microsoft Excel displays a list of all the source documents for the dependent worksheet.

3.	Select the name of the source document for which you want to redirect links.

To select several links, hold down CTRL and click the name of each link.

4.	Choose the Change Source button.

5.	In the File Name box, type the complete new name of the source document, including its path, or select a file to be the new source document.

The File Name box displays a list of the documents in the current directory. If the new source document is not in the current directory, select the appropriate directory in the Directories box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

7.	Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each document you select.

To change a DDE link

1.	Switch to the dependent worksheet.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Links.

Microsoft Excel displays a list of all the source documents for the dependent worksheet.

3.	Select the name of the source document for which you want to redirect links.

4.	Choose the Change Source button.

5.	Type the reference of the new link in the Change Links To box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Linking a document from another application to a Microsoft Excel worksheet

Linking a Microsoft Excel document to a document from another application

Links Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Replacing an entire remote reference with its value

Overview

1.	Select the cell or cells containing the remote reference formulas you want to replace with values.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Copy.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

4.	Under Paste, select the Values option button.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Freezing the remote reference portion of a larger formula

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

Suppressing the updating of all remote references in a worksheet

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Suppressing the updating of all remote references in a worksheet

Overview

1.	Switch to the dependent worksheet whose automatic DDE or OLE links you want to suppress.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

3.	In the Calculation tab, clear the Update Remote References check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel uses the last values received from the source documents.

Note  Use the Update Now button in the Links dialog box to update an individual link. When you want to reestablish all automatic links, select the Update Remote References check box on the Calculation tab in the Options dialog box again.

See Also

Help

Calculation Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Freezing the remote reference portion of a larger formula

Links Command (Edit Menu)

Replacing an entire remote reference with its value

Updating a DDE or OLE link manually

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Updating a DDE or OLE link manually

Overview

1.	Switch to the dependent worksheet containing the remote references.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Links.

3.	In the Links dialog box, select the DDE or OLE links you want to update.

4.	Choose the Update Now button.

See Also

Help

Linking a Microsoft Excel document to a document from another application

Links Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Overview of Tools for Switching to Other Applications

Microsoft Excel includes seven tools on the Microsoft toolbar that you can use to switch to other applications. The following table lists the switching tools.

Tool	Description

Microsoft Access button	Switches to Microsoft Access.

Microsoft FoxPro button	Switches to Microsoft FoxPro.

Microsoft Mail button	Switches to Microsoft Mail.

Microsoft PowerPoint button	Switches to Microsoft PowerPoint.

Microsoft Project button	Switches to Microsoft Project.

Microsoft Schedule+ button	Switches to Microsoft Schedule+.

Microsoft Word button	Switches to Microsoft Word.

See Also

Help

  Microsoft Access Button

  Microsoft FoxPro Button

  Microsoft Mail Button

  Microsoft PowerPoint Button

  Microsoft Project Button

  Microsoft Schedule+ Button

  Microsoft Word Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


 Overview of Copying Cells, Objects, or Charts as Pictures

You can create pictures of charts, cells, and graphic objects. Once you've created a picture, you can place the picture on a different part of a sheet, on another sheet or in another workbook, or in another application.

Pictures of Charts  Pictures of charts are not linked to their source data. Use the Copy Picture command on the Edit menu to create a picture of a chart. You can create a picture of either an embedded chart or a chart that is open in its own window. When you create a picture of a chart that is open in its own window, you can specify whether the appearance and size of the chart are as they appear on the screen or as they appear when the chart is printed.

Pictures of Cells  Pictures of cells can be linked or unlinked. You can link a picture of cells so that the picture is updated automatically whenever you update the source sheet. Microsoft Excel updates both data and formats, including gridlines, whenever the source sheet is changed. To create a linked picture of cells, use the Camera button or the Paste Picture Link command on the Edit menu. Use the Paste Picture command on the Edit menu to create an unlinked picture of cells.

Pictures of Graphic Objects  Graphic objects can be drawings you have created in Microsoft Excel, clip art, or pictures from other applications that you have pasted into Microsoft Excel. Use the Copy Picture command on the Edit menu to create a picture of a graphic object that you can paste onto a sheet or into a document in another application.

When you create a picture in Microsoft Excel for Windows, it can have either a bitmap format or a picture format. A picture in bitmap format is made up of differently colored pixels; a picture in picture format is a drawing that is scaled proportionately when you size the picture. When you create a picture, you can make the chart, cells, or object appear either as shown on the screen or as shown when printed.

Note  When you create a picture as it appears when printed, Microsoft Excel changes the color and patterns of the chart, cells, or object, depending on the printer you are using. For example, if you are using a black-and-white printer and copy a chart as it appears when printed, Microsoft Excel changes the colors in the markers to a black-and-white pattern when you paste the picture.

Once you have pasted a picture, you can move or size the picture just as you would any other graphic object on a sheet.

See Also

Help

  Camera Button

Copy Picture Command (Edit Menu)

Copying a linked picture of cells

Copying a picture of a chart, cells, or an object

Copying a picture to another application

Paste Picture Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Picture Link Command (Edit Menu)

Updating a linked cell picture

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Copying a linked picture of cells

Overview

1.	On a worksheet, select the cells you want to copy.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Copy.

3.	Switch to the worksheet you want to paste the picture onto.

4.	Select a cell or object where you want to paste the picture.

5.	Hold down the SHIFT and choose Paste Picture Link from the Edit menu.

Microsoft Excel pastes in a linked picture of the cells you choose.

See Also

Help

  Camera Button

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Copying a picture of a chart, cells, or an object

Copying a picture to another application

Paste Picture Link Command (Edit Menu)

Updating a linked cell picture

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Copying a picture of a chart, cells, or an object

Overview

When you copy an unlinked picture of cells, Microsoft Excel also copies the row and column headings and the gridlines if they are currently displayed on the screen. To avoid copying the headings, choose Options from the Tools menu. On the View tab, clear the Row & Column Headers and Gridlines check boxes before you start this procedure.

1.	Select the chart, cells, or object you want to copy.

If you select a chart, you can copy an unlinked picture of either an embedded chart or a separate chart document.

2.	Hold down SHIFT and choose Copy Picture from the Edit menu.

3.	To copy exactly what appears on the screen, select the As Shown On Screen option button.

To copy what appears if you print the selection, select the As Shown When Printed option button.

To copy the picture in a specific format, select either the Picture or Bitmap option button.

4.	Choose the OK button.

5.	Switch to the worksheet you want to paste the picture onto.

6.	Select a cell or object where you want to paste the picture.

7.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Paste.

See Also

Help

Copy Picture Command (Edit Menu)

Copying a linked picture of cells

Copying a picture to another application

Paste Command (Edit Menu)

Updating a linked cell picture

View Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Copying a picture to another application

Overview

1.	In Microsoft Excel, select the cells, chart, or graphic object you want to copy.

2.	Hold down SHIFT and choose Copy Picture from the Edit menu.

3.	To copy exactly what appears on the screen, along with row and column headings and the gridlines if they are currently displayed, select the As Shown On Screen option button.

To copy what appears if you print the selection, select the As Shown When Printed option button. To copy the picture in a specific format, select either the Picture or Bitmap option button.

4.	Choose the OK button.

5.	Activate the application you want to paste the selection into, and then position the insertion point in the area where the selection is to appear.

6.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste.

Pasting procedures can vary depending on the application. For more information about copying and pasting, see the application's documentation.

See Also

Help

Copy Picture Command (Edit Menu)

Copying a linked picture of cells

Copying a picture of a chart, cells, or an object

Paste Command (Edit Menu)

Updating a linked cell picture

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Inserting a picture created by another application

Overview

Use this procedure if you want to add graphics to your workbooks without first opening the graphic in its own application to copy it. The Picture command recognizes many different types of graphics files, including those created in applications that are not installed on your computer.

1.	From the Insert menu, choose Picture.

The File Name box displays a list of all the graphics files in the current directory that Microsoft Excel can recognize.

To see a list of graphics files in another directory, select the directory from the Directories box, or type the name of the directory in the File Name box.

To see a list of all files of a specific type, select from the List Files Of Type box.

To see a list of files on another drive, select the drive from the Drives box. If you cannot find the file, select the Find File button to search for the file.

If the file is on a network drive that you do not have access to, select the Network button to connect to that network drive.

2.	In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open, or select it from the list.

3.	Choose the OK button.

The graphic appears in the workbook.

See Also

Help

Editing an object embedded in a Microsoft Excel document

Picture Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


More Sheets Command (Shortcut Menu)

Displays a list of all the sheets in the workbook.

Activate

To display a sheet, double-click the sheet name, or select the sheet name and choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Moving between sheets

Selecting all sheets


Sheet Commands (Shortcut Menu)

Refers to the sheets listed in the shortcut menu. The names in the list are the first several sheets in the workbook. To go to a sheet, choose the sheet name you want from the list. In workbooks with more sheets, choose the More Sheets command to see a list of all sheets in the workbook.

See Also

Help

Moving between sheets

Selecting all sheets


Insert Paste Row Command (Shortcut Menu)

Inserts copied data in complete rows in a filtered list. You can insert only whole rows in a filtered worksheet.

See Also

Help

Advanced Filter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

AutoFilter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Overview of Filtering Data in a List

Show All Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Working with a Filtered List

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Reset Button Image Command (Shortcut Menu)

Restores the original appearance of a button.

This command appears on the toolbar shortcut menu only when the Customize dialog box is displayed. To display this dialog box, choose the Customize command from the toolbar shortcut menu.

See Also

Help

Changing the image on a toolbar button

Edit Button Image Command (Shortcut Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Edit Button Image Command (Shortcut Menu)

Displays the Button Editor dialog box.

This command appears on the toolbar shortcut menu only when the Customize dialog box is displayed. To display this dialog box, choose the Customize command from the toolbar shortcut menu.

Picture

Initially displays the image on the selected button. Edit the button image by clicking or dragging through the individual pixels with the mouse.

Colors

Select the color you want to paint with from the palette.

You can also quickly select any existing color in the picture area by clicking a pixel that is the color you want with the right mouse button.

Erase

Select Erase to paint with the background color. The background color lightens when the button is active.

Move

Click any of the four direction buttons to move the button image up, down, left, or right one column or row at a time in the picture area. These buttons are not available if the image extends to the edge of the picture.

Preview

Shows what the image will look like on the toolbar.

Clear

Clears the button image, leaving only the background color.

See Also

Help

Changing the image on a toolbar button

Reset Button Image Command (Shortcut Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Insert and Insert Cut or Copied Cells Commands (Shortcut Menu)

Insert button

Inserts a row, column, or range of blank cells equivalent in size and shape to the selected cell range, or inserts a selection you defined with the Copy or Cut command. The selected rows, columns, or cells are shifted to accommodate the insertion. The Insert button is in the Edit Category. The Insert button functions the same way as the Insert command, except that it doesn't display the Insert dialog box. If you hold down SHIFT while clicking the Insert button, it functions the same way as the Delete button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+SHIFT+PLUS SIGN

Shift Cells Right

Shifts the existing cells to the right when you insert cells.

Shift Cells Down

Shifts the existing cells down when you insert cells.

Entire Row

Inserts an entire row above the selection.

Shortcut:	Insert Row button (Edit category)

Entire Column

Inserts an entire column to the left of the selection.

Shortcut:	Insert Column button (Edit category)

See Also

Help

  Insert Column Button

  Insert Row Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Edit Buttons Category

Inserting blank cells

Inserting cut or copied cells

Inserting rows and columns


Insert Command (Sheet Tab Shortcut Menu)

Inserts a new sheet before the selected sheet tab. You can access this command only from the sheet tab shortcut menu.

You can insert more than one new worksheet by selecting several adjacent sheets.

Shortcuts:	SHIFT+F11 (inserts worksheet)

F11 (inserts chart sheet)

CTRL+F11 (inserts Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro sheet)

New

Select the type of sheet you want to insert. Any custom templates you have created are also listed in this box.

See Also

Help

Inserting sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 7, "Working in Workbooks"


Select All Sheets Command (Shortcut Menu)

Selects all sheets in a workbook.

See Also

Help

Canceling a group selection

Choosing a shortcut menu command

Selecting a sheet or sheets

Selecting all sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Ungroup Sheets Command (Shortcut Menu)

Cancels the current group selection of sheets.

See Also

Help

Canceling a group selection

Choosing a shortcut menu command

Selecting a sheet or sheets

Selecting all sheets

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Copy Cells Command (Shortcut Menu)

Fills the contents of the selected cells.

See Also

Help

Fill Command (Edit Menu)

Filling a range of adjacent cells

Incrementing a series of numbers or dates

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

Users' Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Fill Formats Command (Shortcut Menu)

Fills only the formats as displayed in the selected cells.

See Also

Help

Fill Command (Edit Menu)

Filling a range of adjacent cells

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

Users' Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Fill Values Command (Shortcut Menu)

Fills only the values as displayed in the selected cells.

See Also

Help

Fill Command (Edit Menu)

Filling a range of adjacent cells

Incrementing a series of numbers or dates

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

Users' Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Fill Days Command (Shortcut Menu)

Fills the selection by incrementing days.

See Also

Help

Fill Months Command (Shortcut Menu)

Fill Weekdays Command (Shortcut Menu)

Fill Years Command (Shortcut Menu)

Filling a range of adjacent cells

Incrementing a series of numbers or dates

Series Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Users' Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Fill Weekdays Command (Shortcut Menu)

Fills the selection by incrementing weekdays.

See Also

Help

Fill Days Command (Shortcut Menu)

Fill Months Command (Shortcut Menu)

Fill Years Command (Shortcut Menu)

Filling a range of adjacent cells

Incrementing a series of numbers or dates

Series Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Users' Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Fill Months Command (Shortcut Menu)

Fills the selection by incrementing months.

See Also

Help

Fill Days Command (Shortcut Menu)

Fill Weekdays Command (Shortcut Menu)

Fill Years Command (Shortcut Menu)

Filling a range of adjacent cells

Incrementing a series of numbers or dates

Series Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Users' Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Fill Years Command (Shortcut Menu)

Fills the selection by incrementing years.

See Also

Help

Fill Days Command (Shortcut Menu)

Fill Months Command (Shortcut Menu)

Fill Weekdays Command (Shortcut Menu)

Filling a range of adjacent cells

Incrementing a series of numbers or dates

Series Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Users' Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Linear Trend Command (Shortcut Menu)

Creates a linear trend by adding a step value to each cell value in turn.

See Also

Help

Creating simple forecasts and trends

Filling a range of adjacent cells

Growth Trend Command (Shortcut Menu)

Incrementing a series of numbers or dates

Series Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

TREND Function

Users' Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Growth Trend Command (Shortcut Menu)

Creates a growth trend by multiplying the value of each cell in turn.

See Also

Help

Creating simple forecasts and trends

Filling a range of adjacent cells

GROWTH Function

Incrementing a series of numbers or dates

Linear Trend Command (Shortcut Menu)

Series Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Users' Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Fill Series Command
Fill Series Command (Shortcut Menu)

Increments the values in the selected cell or cells.

See Also

Help

Creating simple forecasts and trends

Filling a range of adjacent cells

GROWTH Function

Incrementing a series of numbers or dates

Linear Trend Command (Shortcut Menu)

Series Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)

Types of Series

Users' Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"


Copy Command (Shortcut Menu)

Copies the selection to the new location.

See Also

Help

Copying and moving with the shortcut menu

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Move Command (Shortcut Menu)

Moves the selection to the new location.

See Also

Help

Copying and moving with the shortcut menu

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Copy Formats Command (Shortcut Menu)

Copies only the formats from the selection to the new location.

See Also

Help

Copying and moving with the shortcut menu

Copying only the cell format

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Copy Values Command (Shortcut Menu)

Copies only the values from the selection to the new location.

See Also

Help

Copying and moving with the shortcut menu

Copying only the cell value

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Shift Down and Copy Command (Shortcut Menu)

Moves the selection to the new location, shifting the existing cells down.

See Also

Help

Copying and moving with the shortcut menu

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Shift Right and Copy Command (Shortcut Menu)

Copies the selection to the new location, shifting the existing cells to the right.

See Also

Help

Copying and moving with the shortcut menu

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Shift Down and Move Command (Shortcut Menu)

Moves the selection to the new location, shifting the existing cells down.

See Also

Help

Copying and moving with the shortcut menu

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Shift Right and Move Command (Shortcut Menu)

Moves the selection to the new location, shifting the existing cells to the right.

See Also

Help

Copying and moving with the shortcut menu

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Producing a Slide Show

Slide Show Template

Overview of Creating a Slide Show with Microsoft Excel

Creating a new slide show

Activating an existing slide show

Overview of Preparing Slides to Use in a Slide Show

Creating a slide from a range of cells

Creating a slide from an embedded chart or graphic on a worksheet

Creating a slide from a graphic object from another application

Changing a slide show's defaults

Overview of Editing a Slide Show

Editing a slide

Moving a slide

Copying a slide

Deleting a slide

Overview of Running, Stopping, and Saving a Slide Show

Running a slide show

Interrupting a slide show

Saving a slide show

Running a slide show on another computer


Slide Show Template

You can use data, charts, and graphics from Microsoft Excel or other applications as slides in Microsoft Excel Slide shows.

To create and display slide shows, the Slide Show add-in must be installed.

Slide shows can be displayed only on a computer screen. They cannot be printed.

Graphics created in Microsoft Excel, such as worksheet objects and charts, should not be saved on the slide show template. Save them on another worksheet.

The slide show template looks like a worksheet with two rows of buttons at the top. Using these buttons, you can create and edit a slide show and apply a variety of video and audio transition effects between slides. The slide show template buttons perform the following tasks.

Paste Slide

Copies the contents of the Clipboard to the slide show template as a slide and displays the Edit Slide dialog box.

Edit Slide

Enables you to change the display settings of the current slide.

Start Show

Enables you to repeat a slide show and to specify the slide at which the show begins.

Set Defaults

Enables you to change the default settings for new slides.

Cut Row

Deletes the selected rows and copies them to the Clipboard.

Copy Row

Copies the selected rows to the Clipboard.

Paste Row

Inserts rows from the Clipboard to the row above the selected row.

Delete Row

Deletes the selected rows.

See Also

Help

Copying a slide

Creating a slide from a range of cells

Creating a slide from an embedded chart or graphic on a worksheet

Deleting a slide

Editing a slide

Moving a slide

Producing a Slide Show

Running a slide show


Overview of Creating a Slide Show with Microsoft Excel

With Microsoft Excel, you can create a slide show to present worksheet data, charts, and graphics created in Microsoft Excel or imported from other applications. Slide shows are created by using a special template included with Microsoft Excel. You can include a variety of graphics in a slide show and apply a number of video and audio transition effects between slides.

Slide shows can be run only on a computer screen or another display device attached to a computer; they cannot be printed.

Important  To create and display slide shows, the Slide Show add-in must be installed.

See Also

Help

Activating an existing slide show

Creating a new slide show


Creating a new slide show

Overview

You create a new slide show by using a special template included with Microsoft Excel.

Important  To create and display slide shows, the Slide Show add-in must be installed.

1.	From the File menu, choose New.

2.	Choose Slides.

If the File New dialog box does not appear, or if "Slides" does not appear in the list in the File New dialog box, you need to install the Slide Show add-in.

The template for creating slide shows is opened.

See Also

Help

Installing or removing an add-in

New Command (File Menu)

Slide Show Template

Saving a slide show


Activating an existing slide show

Overview

1.	Open the workbook that contains the slide show.

2.	Select the worksheet tab for the slide show.

See Also

Help

  Open Button

Open Command (File Menu)

Slide Show Template


Overview of Preparing Slides to Use in a Slide Show

Microsoft Excel uses data on the Clipboard to create the images you use in slide shows. You can use worksheet data, charts, and graphics to create images for a slide. After you choose the Paste Slide button, a reduced version of the image on the Clipboard is copied to the next available row in column A of the slide show template, and the Edit Slide dialog box appears. Images pasted from Microsoft Excel are linked to the original image you copied. When you add a slide to a slide show, you can specify:

Transition effect.

Speed of the transition effect.

Method of slide advance.

Sound.

Important  To create and display slide shows, the Slide Show add-in must be installed.

Note  Sounds in a slide show created in the Macintosh environment do not work in the Windows environment.

See Also

Help

Changing a slide show's defaults

Creating a slide from a graphic object from another application

Creating a slide from a range of cells

Creating a slide from an embedded chart or graphic on a worksheet


Creating a slide from a range of cells

Overview

1.	Select the range of worksheet cells containing the data you want in the slide.

2.	Click the Copy button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+C

3.	Activate the slide show template.

4.	Choose the Paste Slide button.

A picture of the selected range of cells is copied to column A as a slide, and the Edit Slide dialog box appears.

5.	Select the options you want.

For a description of the options, choose the Help button in the dialog box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Copy Button

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Creating a new slide show

New Command (File Menu)

Slide Show Template


Creating a slide from an embedded chart or graphic on a worksheet

Overview

1.	Select the range of cells under the graphic you want in the slide.

2.	Click the Copy button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+C

3.	Activate the slide show template.

4.	Choose the Paste Slide button.

A picture of the graphic or chart and the selected range of cells under it is copied to column A as a slide, and the Edit Slide dialog box appears.

5.	Select the options you want.

For a description of the options, choose the Help button in the dialog box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

Note  Do not use the Cut command on the Edit menu or the shortcut menu to copy the image to the Clipboard before choosing the Paste Slide button. The graphic you use in the slide show must remain in its original position on the worksheet. The reduced image of the graphic in column A of the slide template is linked to the worksheet range under the graphic.

See Also

Help

  Copy Button

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Creating a new slide show

New Command (File Menu)

Slide Show Template


Creating a slide from a graphic object from another application

Overview

1.	Switch to the application from which you want to copy the graphic.

2.	Copy the graphic to the Clipboard.

3.	Switch to Microsoft Excel.

4.	Activate the slide show template.

5.	Choose the Paste Slide button.

A copy of the graphic is copied to column A as a slide, and the Edit Slide dialog box appears.

6.	Select the options you want.

For a description of the options, choose the Help button in the dialog box.

7.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Copy Button

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Creating a new slide show

New Command (File Menu)

Slide Show Template


Changing a slide show's defaults

Overview

1.	Open the workbook that contains the slide show.

2.	In the slide show template, choose the Set Defaults button.

In the Set Defaults dialog box, you can change the default effect, effect speed, advance type, and sound assigned to each new slide you create. The next time you choose Paste Slide, the Edit Slide dialog box appears with the defaults you chose.

See Also

Help

Activating an existing slide show

Slide Show Template


Overview of Editing a Slide Show

After creating a series of slides for a slide show, you can delete slides, copy or move slides to change their display order, or change the display and sound attributes of any single slide or group of slides.

Important  To create and display slide shows, the Slide Show add-in must be installed.

See Also

Help

Copying a slide

Deleting a slide

Editing a slide

Moving a slide


Editing a slide

Overview

You can change the display options, such as the type and speed of the transition effect, the method of slide advancement, and the sound, if any, assigned to a slide.

1.	Open the workbook that contains the slide show.

2.	On the slide show template, select any cell in the row that contains the slide information you want to edit.

3.	Choose the Edit Slide button.

4.	Select the options you want.

For a description of the options, choose the Help button in the dialog box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Open Button

Activating an existing slide show

Open Command (File Menu)

Slide Show Template


Moving a slide

Overview

1.	Open the workbook that contains the slide show.

2.	On the slide show template, select any cell in the row that contains the slide information you want to move.

3.	Choose the Cut Row button.

4.	Select a cell in the row above which you want to insert the slide.

5.	Choose the Paste Row button.

The slide is pasted above the selected row.

See Also

Help

  Open Button

Activating an existing slide show

Open Command (File Menu)

Slide Show Template


Copying a slide

Overview

1.	Open the workbook that contains the slide show.

2.	On the slide show template, select any cell in the row that contains the slide information you want to copy.

3.	Choose the Copy Row button.

4.	Select a cell in the row above which you want to insert the slide.

5.	Choose the Paste Row button.

The slide is pasted above the selected row.

See Also

Help

  Open Button

Activating an existing slide show

Open Command (File Menu)

Slide Show Template


Deleting a slide

Overview

1.	Open the workbook that contains the slide show.

2.	On the slide show template, select any cell in the row that contains the slide information you want to delete.

3.	Choose the Delete Row button.

The slide in the selected row is deleted.

See Also

Help

  Open Button

Activating an existing slide show

Open Command (File Menu)

Slide Show Template


Overview of Running, Stopping, and Saving a Slide Show

When you run a slide show, the images you selected are sized to fit the screen. You can run the slide show a single time, in a continuous loop, or starting from any of the slides.

In order for fonts in your slides to be displayed smoothly when enlarged to a full screen during the slide show, use TrueType fonts.

Important  To create and display slide shows, the Slide Show add-in must be installed.

See Also

Help

Interrupting a slide show

Running a slide show on another computer

Running a slide show

Saving a slide show


Running a slide show

Overview

1.	Open the workbook that contains the slide show.

2.	On the slide show template, choose the Start Show button.

3.	Choose the OK button.

Important  To run slide shows, the Slide Show add-in must be installed.

See Also

Help

  Open Button

Activating an existing slide show

Installing or removing an add-in

Open Command (File Menu)

Slide Show Template


Interrupting a slide show

Overview

Press ESC.


Saving a slide show

Overview

You save a slide show by saving its workbook.

See Also

Help

  Save Button

Activating an existing slide show

Creating a new slide show

Save Command (File Menu)

Slide Show Template


Running a slide show on another computer

Overview

The template on which you create a slide show is linked to the SLIDES.XLA file. To run a slide show on another computer, change the links from the slide show template to the SLIDES.XLA file on the new computer.

To change links to the slide show template

1.	On the second computer, open the workbook that contains the slide show.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Protection, and then choose Unprotect Sheet.

3. From the Edit menu, choose Links.

4. In the Links box, select SLIDES.XLA.

5. Choose the Change button.

6. In the dialog box, select the SLIDES.XLA file.

7. To save the new links, choose the Save File button.

See Also

Help

  Open Button

  Save Button

Activating an existing slide show

Links Command (Edit Menu)

Open Command (File Menu)

Protect Workbook Command and Unprotect Workbook Command (Tools menu, Protection Submenu)

Save Command (File Menu)

Saving a slide show

Slide Show Template


Slide Show alert messages

This is not a valid slide show document. Switch to a slide show document and try again.

Out of memory or system resources. Quit Microsoft Excel and any unnecessary applications, and try again.

The slide show sheet is full.

The contents of the Clipboard cannot be pasted as a slide.

Cannot locate the slide show add-in code. Run the Setup program to get the correct version of the add-in code.

This slide contains an invalid parameter.

Cannot paste a slide because the Clipboard is empty. Select the data you want as a slide, copy it, and then choose the Paste Slide button.

Cannot do that command when a graphic object is selected. Select the underlying sheet row.

Cannot unprotect the slide show sheet.

The slide show image cannot be displayed because the image source link has been misplaced or deleted. Try deleting the selected slide show row and pasting the slide again.

Select a single row to mark where the slide rows should be inserted.

There is no slide information on the selected row.

There are no slides to paste. Choose the Cut Row button or Copy Row button to select the rows to paste.

Not enough memory. Continue without undo?


This is not a valid slide show document. Switch to a slide show document and try again.

You tried to use a command or run a macro that requires a slide show document to be active, when a slide show document was not active. Switch to the slide show that you want to operate on and try the command again.

See Also

Help

Activating an existing slide show


Out of memory or system resources. Quit Microsoft Excel and any unnecessary applications, and try again.

Microsoft Excel was unable to perform a command because there was not enough available memory. Try closing other documents or quitting applications that you are not using, or quitting and restarting Microsoft Excel.


The slide show sheet is full.

The active slide show sheet is full. If you want to add more slides, delete some existing slides or create a new slide show sheet.

See Also

Help

Creating a new slide show

Deleting a slide


The contents of the Clipboard cannot be pasted as a slide.

The data that you have copied to the Clipboard cannot be used as a slide in Microsoft Excel. Note that Microsoft Excel graphic objects cannot be used directly as slides. Try selecting the cells underneath the object, copying those cells, and then pasting them as a slide.

See Also

Help

Creating a slide from an embedded chart or graphic on a worksheet


Cannot locate the slide show add-in code. Run the Setup program to get the correct version of the add-in code.

Microsoft Excel cannot locate a file which is required to run the slide show add-in. To fix this problem, run the Setup program again to re-install the slide show add-in.

See Also

Help

Installing components of Microsoft Excel


This slide contains an invalid parameter.

The slide show you are working with contains an invalid parameter. Choose the Edit Slide button to select new properties.

See Also

Help

Editing a slide


Cannot paste a slide because the Clipboard is empty. Select the data you want as a slide, copy it, and then choose the Paste Sli
Cannot paste a slide because the Clipboard is empty. Select the data you want as a slide, copy it, and then choose the Paste Slide button.

Microsoft Excel cannot paste a slide before data has been copied to the Clipboard. To create a slide, select the cells you want to paste as a slide, switch to the slide show sheet, and choose the Paste Slide button.

See Also

Help

Creating a slide from a range of cells

Creating a slide from an embedded chart or graphic on a worksheet


Cannot do that command when a graphic object is selected. Select the underlying sheet row.

Microsoft Excel cannot perform the desired action when a graphic object is selected. Select a cell in the same row as the graphic object you want to operate on, and try the command again.

See Also

Help

Creating a slide from an embedded chart or graphic on a worksheet


Cannot unprotect the slide show sheet.

Microsoft Excel was unable to unprotect the active slide show sheet because it has been protected with a password. Normally, when you edit a slide show, it should be protected, but without a password. To protect the slide show sheet without a password, first unprotect it by using the Unprotect Sheet command from the Tools menu, Protection submenu. Then protect it without a password by using the Protect Sheet command (leaving the password field blank). Then, edit your slide show. You can then turn on password protection.

See Also

Help

Editing a slide

Protecting and unprotecting a sheet


The slide show image cannot be displayed because the image source link has been misplaced or deleted. Try deleting the selected
The slide show image cannot be displayed because the image source link has been misplaced or deleted. Try deleting the selected slide show row and pasting the slide again.

Either the slide show picture or the picture's formula has been corrupted. Select the row and use the Delete Row button to remove the slide. Then create the slide again.

See Also

Help

Deleting a slide


Select a single row to mark where the slide rows should be inserted.

You chose the Paste Row button when more than one row was selected. Choose a single row in front of which you want Microsoft Excel to paste the slides.

See Also

Help

Copying a slide

Moving a slide


There is no slide information on the selected row.

The currently selected row does not contain any slide information, or the entire slide show sheet is empty. Select a cell on a row with slide information, and try again.


There are no slides to paste. Choose the Cut Row button or Copy Row button to select the rows to paste.

You chose the Paste Row button when there was no slide information on the Clipboard to paste. Choose the Cut Row or Copy Row button first to select the rows to paste, and then choose the Paste Row button.

See Also

Help

Copying a slide

Moving a slide


Not enough memory. Continue without undo?

Microsoft Excel will not be able to undo changes made to that many slides. You may be able to complete the operation, but you will not be able to undo it with the Undo command on the Edit menu.

OK

Proceeds with the operation; you will not be able to undo it.

Cancel

Cancels the operation, leaving the document as it was before the operation began. Close any unneeded windows, files, and applications, and try again.


Sorting and Filtering Data in a List

Overview of Sorting a List

Default Sort Orders

Sorting a list from top to bottom

Sorting a list from left to right

Sorting by four or more columns

Creating a custom sort order

Using a custom sort order

Overview of Filtering Data in a List

Working with a Filtered List

Filtering a list using AutoFilter

Creating a custom AutoFilter

Copying filtered data

Removing a filter from a list

Setting up a criteria range

Filtering a list using complex criteria

Copying filtered data that meets complex criteria


Overview of Sorting a List

By sorting, you can arrange rows in a list according to the contents of particular columns. For example, suppose a list containing sales data has columns for salesperson, number of units, order date, and so on. You can use the Sort command to arrange the list by salesperson, organize the number of units from highest to lowest, or sequence the order date from earliest to latest.

To sort your entire list, just select a single cell in the list and choose the Sort command from the Data menu. Microsoft Excel automatically selects the whole list for you. Microsoft Excel detects your column labels, even when they occupy double rows, and excludes them from the sort. You can use the column labels to identify the columns you want to sort by.

When you choose the Sort command, Microsoft Excel rearranges rows, columns, or individual cells using the column and sort order you specify, or using a custom sort order. Unless you specify otherwise, Microsoft Excel sorts the rows in ascending order (lowest to highest), based on the contents of the Sort By column you choose.

Microsoft Excel uses the following guidelines when sorting data:

If you sort by one column, rows with duplicate items in that column remain in their original order.

Rows with blank cells in the sort column are placed last in the sorted list.

Hidden rows are not moved, unless they are part of an outline.

The sort options--selected column, order (ascending or descending), and orientation (top to bottom or left to right)--are saved from the last time you sorted until you change them or change the selection or column labels.

If you sort by more than one column, rows with duplicate items in the primary column are sorted according to the second column you specify. Rows with duplicate items in the second column are sorted according to the third column you specify.

Microsoft Excel also makes it possible to sort only selected rows or columns or the data in a single row or column.

Tip  To make it easy to restore a list to a particular order, insert a column, and then sequentially number each row using AutoFill or the Series command. Later, you can sort the list by that column to restore its original order.

See Also

Help

Creating a custom sort order

Default Sort Orders

Sorting a list from left to right

Sorting a list from top to bottom

Sorting by four or more columns

Using a custom sort order


Default Sort Orders

Microsoft Excel uses specific sort orders to arrange data according to the underlying value, not the format, of the data. In an ascending sort, Microsoft Excel uses this order:

Numbers from the smallest negative number to the largest positive number. Dates and times are sorted based on their underlying value.

Text and text that includes numbers are sorted in this order:

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (space) ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Note  This sort order is based on the Microsoft Windows Control Panel settings for the United States. Microsoft Excel versions previous to version 3.0a used a different sort order. To force Microsoft Excel to revert to the previous order, add the line SORT=2 to the EXCEL5.INI file. For more information, see Editing the EXCEL5.INI File.

Logical values FALSE before TRUE.

Error values All error values are equal.

Blanks Always sorted last.

In a descending sort, Microsoft Excel reverses the order of everything except blank cells, which are always sorted last.

Note  Microsoft Excel sorts the data according to the sorting rules of the country selected in the International dialog box in the Microsoft Windows Control Panel. For information about changing the country setting, see your Microsoft Windows documentation.

If the sort result is not what you expected, look at the type of data you are sorting. For best results, make sure all of the cells in a column contain the same type of data. Enter the data as numbers or as text, but avoid having a number in one cell and text in the following cell. If you need to combine numbers and text in a column, precede numbers with an apostrophe so they will be treated as text.

See Also

Help

  Sort Ascending Button

  Sort Descending Button

Creating a custom sort order

Overview of Entering Numbers, Dates, and Times

Overview of Entering Text

Overview of Sorting a List

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Sort Options Dialog Box

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Sorting a list from top to bottom

Overview

For best results, your list should have column labels.

1.	Select a cell in the list you want to sort.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Sort.

If you selected a single cell, Microsoft Excel selects the entire list. Column labels are detected and excluded from the data to be sorted.

3.	In the Sort By box, select the primary column by which you want to arrange the list. Select the Ascending or Descending option button to specify a sort order for the values in that column.

4.	To sort by more than one column, select the additional columns you want to sort by in one or both of the Then By boxes. Select the Ascending or Descending option button for each.

5.	If the first row in your list contains column labels, in the My List Has box select the Header Row option button to exclude the row from the sort, or select No Header Row to include the row in the sort.

6.	Choose the OK button.

If you don't like the way the data is sorted, undo it by immediately choosing the Undo Sort command from the Edit menu.

Note  If your list is outlined, only the highest level (level 1) of the outline is sorted. Rows that are grouped together stay together. If the outline has automatic subtotals, you need to hide detail rows before sorting.

See Also

Help

Hiding and showing detail data in a subtotaled list

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Sorting a list from left to right

Overview

1.	Select a cell in the list you want to sort.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Sort.

3.	Choose the Options button.

4.	Under Orientation, select the Sort Left To Right option button.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	In the Sort By box, select the row you want to sort by, and then select the Ascending or Descending option button to specify a sort order for the values in that row.

7.	To sort by more than one row, select the rows you want to sort by in one or both of the Then By boxes. Select the Ascending or Descending option button for each.

8.	Choose the OK button.

If you don't like the way the data is sorted, undo it by immediately choosing the Undo Sort command from the Edit menu.

Note  If your list is outlined, only the highest level (level 1) of the outline is sorted. Columns that are grouped together stay together.

See Also

Help

Creating a custom sort order

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Sort Options Dialog Box

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Sorting by four or more columns

Overview

While a Microsoft Excel list can contain up to 256 columns, the Sort command sorts by only three columns at a time. To sort a list by four or more columns, perform repeated sorts.

First sort by the three least significant columns, then continue with the three most significant columns. For example, to sort a list by columns A, B, C, D, and E in that order, sort first by columns C, D, and E, then sort again by columns A and B.

1.	Select a cell or range in the list you want to sort.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Sort.

3.	In the Sort By and Then By boxes, select the three least significant columns.

4.	Specify a sort order for each column you select.

5.	Select the Header Row option button, or select the No Header Row option button, as appropriate for your list.

6.	Choose the OK button.

7.	Repeat steps 2 through 6 using the next most significant columns.

If you want to sort by additional columns, continue in this manner until you finish sorting the data.

See Also

Help

  Sort Ascending Button

  Sort Descending Button

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Sort Options Dialog Box

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Creating a custom sort order

Overview

To arrange data using a sort order other than the default ascending or descending sort order, define a unique order for your own use.

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options, and then select the Custom Lists tab.

2.	In the Custom Lists box, select New List.

3.	In the List Entries box, type the first item in the sort order you want to create. Enter the items in ascending order.

4.	Press the ENTER key.

5.	Type the rest of the items in the sort order you want to create. Press the ENTER key to separate each entry in your list.

6.	Choose the Add button to save the new list.

Microsoft Excel displays the list in the Custom Lists box.

7.	To create another custom sort order, repeat steps 2 through 6.

8.	Choose the OK button.

Custom sort orders that you create can later be selected in the First Key Sort Order box in the Sort Options dialog box.

See Also

Help

Custom Lists Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Sort Options Dialog Box

Using a custom sort order

Using a custom sort order in a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Using a custom sort order

Overview

To arrange data using a sort order other than the default ascending or descending sort order, use a custom sort order provided by Microsoft Excel, or define a unique order for your own use.

1.	Select a cell or range in the list you want to sort.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Sort.

3.	Choose the Options button.

4.	In the First Key Sort Order box, select the custom sort order you want to use.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	In the Sort By box, select the primary column by which you want to arrange the data.

7.	Select the Ascending or Descending option button to specify a sort order for the values in that column.

8.	If your list does not contain column labels, select the No Header Row option button.

9.	Choose the OK button.

If you don't like the way the data is sorted, undo it by immediately choosing the Undo Sort command from the Edit menu.

Note  A custom sort order applies only to the column you specify in the Sort By box. To use a custom sort order when sorting multiple columns, you need to perform a separate sort operation for each column.

For example, to sort by columns A, B, and C in that order, sort the list by column C in the Sort By box, and specify the custom sort order using the Sort Options dialog box. Next, sort the list again by column B, specifying the custom sort order. Finally, sort the list by column A, specifying the custom sort order.

See Also

Help

Creating a custom sort order

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Sort Options Dialog Box

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Overview of Filtering Data in a List

Filtering a list enables you to find and work with a subset of the data in your list. Filtering displays only the rows that contain a certain value or that meet a set of criteria, while hiding the other rows. Microsoft Excel provides both the AutoFilter and the Advanced Filter commands to filter your data. AutoFilter meets most needs. However, when you need to use complex criteria to filter a list, use Advanced Filter.

Note  For best results, your list should have column labels.

Using AutoFilter

The AutoFilter command applies drop-down arrows directly to column labels in the list, so you can select the item you want to display. For example, you can display all the rows containing a specified unique value in a column, such as "all rows that contain Buchanan in the Salesperson column." You can also use custom comparison criteria to filter the data in your list.

Using Advanced Filter

The Advanced Filter command enables you to find rows by using more complex criteria, such as "sales by Buchanan for more than $5000 or sales by Davolio for more than $4000."

Using Criteria to Filter Lists

You can use two kinds of criteria in a criteria range.

Use multiple comparison criteria to specify more than two comparison criteria for a single column; for example, to display account numbers 2110, 2120, or 2130.

Use computed criteria when your criteria are the result of calculation or require a comparison. For example, to display only rows where the sales value is greater than the quarterly average in cell H2, type =Sales>$H$2. (The dollar signs designate the cell reference as an absolute reference.)

Working with the Filtered Data

When you hide rows using the AutoFilter or Advanced Filter command, your worksheet is in Filter mode. In Filter mode, many Microsoft Excel commands operate only on visible cells.

After you filter a list to display the rows you want, you can copy the subset of your data to another location for further analysis.

Use AutoFilter to filter the data in place, then use the Copy command and the Paste command to place the filtered data wherever you want it, even on another worksheet.

Use Advanced Filter to apply complex criteria to filter your list, then automatically copy the filtered data to a location you specify.

To copy the filtered data to another worksheet, it is easiest to filter the list by using AutoFilter. Then cut and paste the filtered data where you want it. If you need to apply complex criteria to filter the list, you have to switch to the new worksheet and choose the Advanced Filter command from the new worksheet.

See Also

Help

AutoFilter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Advanced Filter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Copying filtered data

Copying filtered data that meets complex criteria

Creating a custom AutoFilter

Filtering a list using AutoFilter

Filtering a list using complex criteria

Removing a filter from a list

Setting up a criteria range

Show All Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Working with a Filtered List

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Working with a Filtered List

Overview

When you filter a list, the message "Filter Mode" appears in the status bar and the row labels change color. When you use AutoFilter to filter a list, the drop-down arrows next to the columns also change color.

Some Microsoft Excel commands work differently in Filter mode. These commands are described in the following paragraphs.

AutoFill feature

Enters the value of the active cell in visible cells only. You cannot fill series using the AutoFill feature when the worksheet is in Filter mode.

AutoSum button

Calculates the sum of visible cells only. When you change the filter or choose the Show All command, Microsoft Excel adjusts the total accordingly.

Cells command (Format menu)

Formats only visible cells in the selection.

ChartWizard button

Creates a chart from visible cells only.

Clear command (Edit menu)

Clears only visible cells in the selection.

Copy command (Edit menu)

Copies only visible cells in the selection.

Delete command (Edit menu)

Becomes Delete Row command. Deletes only visible rows. You can delete only whole rows in a filtered worksheet.

Insert command (Shortcut menu)

Becomes Insert Row command. Inserts whole rows.

Insert Copied Cells (Shortcut menu)

Becomes Insert Paste Row command. Pastes copied data in complete rows.

Print command (File menu)

Prints only visible cells.

Sort command (Data menu)

Sorts only visible cells in the list.

Subtotals command (Data menu)

Calculates subtotals for visible cells only.

See Also

Help

Advanced Filter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

AutoFilter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Copying filtered data that meets complex criteria

Copying filtered data

Creating a custom AutoFilter

Filtering a list using AutoFilter

Filtering a list using complex criteria

Removing a filter from a list

Setting up a criteria range

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Filtering a list using AutoFilter

Overview

For this procedure to work, your list has to have column labels.

1.	Select a cell in the list you want to filter.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Filter, and then choose AutoFilter.

Microsoft Excel inserts drop-down arrows next to each column label in your list.

3.	Click the arrow in the column that contains the data you want to display.

Shortcut:	Select the column label, then press ALT+DOWN ARROW.

4.	Select the item you want to display.

Shortcuts:	HOME to go to the top of the list

END to go to the bottom of the list

PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN to move through the list

First letter of the item to move through the alphabetical list

You can select Blanks to display empty cells or NonBlanks to display cells that have any value, including empty text ("").

5.	Repeat steps 3 and 4 to filter the list again using other items.

See Also

Help

AutoFilter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Removing a filter from a list

Working with a Filtered List

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Creating a custom AutoFilter

Overview

These steps filter a list using one or two comparison criteria for the same column. For this procedure to work, your list has to have column labels.

To match one criterion

1.	Select a cell in the list you want to filter.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Filter, and then choose AutoFilter.

3.	Click the arrow in the column that contains the data you want to display.

4.	Select Custom from the list.

5.	Click the arrow next to the first box, then select the comparison operator you want to use.

6.	In the second box, type the value you want to use with the comparison operator.

Shortcut:	Click the arrow next to the second box, then select the item.

7.	Choose the OK button.

To match two criteria

1.	Select a cell in the list you want to filter.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Filter, and then choose AutoFilter.

3.	Click the arrow in the column that contains the data you want to display.

4.	Select Custom from the list.

5.	Click the arrow next to the first box, then select the comparison operator you want to use.

6.	In the second box, type the value you want to use with the comparison operator.

7.	Select either the And option button or the Or option button.

To display rows that meet both criteria, select the And option button.

To display rows that meet either one or the other criterion, select the Or option button.

8.	Repeat steps 5 and 6 to specify the second criterion in the next two boxes.

9.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

AutoFilter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Copying filtered data

Overview

1.	Filter your list using AutoFilter.

2.	Select the cells you want to copy from the filtered list.

3.	To copy the selection, click the Copy button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+C

4.	Select the upper-left cell of the range where you want to paste the filtered data.

5.	Click the Paste button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+V

Note  If you need to apply complex criteria to filter your list, use the Advanced Filter command first. The Advanced Filter command can automatically copy the filtered data to a location you specify.

See Also

Help

  Copy Button

  Paste Button

Advanced Filter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

AutoFilter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Copying cells

Copying filtered data that meets complex criteria

Filtering a list using AutoFilter

Paste Command (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Removing a filter from a list

Overview

To remove a filter from a column

Click the arrow next to the column, then select All from the drop-down list.

To redisplay all rows in a filtered list

From the Data menu, choose Filter, and then choose Show All.

To remove AutoFilter arrows from a list

From the Data menu, choose Filter, and then clear AutoFilter.

See Also

Help

AutoFilter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Show All Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Setting up a criteria range

Overview

To create a criteria range

Use a criteria range with the Advanced Filter command to display rows that meet a condition you define. You can also define several conditions (called multiple criteria) to select rows that meet all conditions, or to display rows that meet either one or another set of conditions.

The basic steps for setting up a criteria range are the same whether you enter multiple comparison criteria or use computed criteria. Use the following steps to create criteria ranges like the examples shown later in this topic.

1.	Insert several rows at the top of your worksheet.

2.	In one blank row, type the column labels you want to use to filter the list.

When using comparison criteria, criteria labels have to be identical to the labels of the columns you want to evaluate.

3.	In the rows below the column labels, type the criteria you want to match.

4.	Use the Advanced Filter command on the Data menu, Filter submenu, to display the rows that meet the conditions you specify. For more information, see Filtering a list using complex criteria.

To display rows that meet all criteria

To specify multiple criteria for different columns, enter all the criteria in the same row of the criteria range. For example, the criteria range

Type	Salesperson	Sales
Produce	Davolio	>1000
displays all rows that contain Produce in the Type column and Davolio in the Salesperson column and sales values greater than $1000.

To specify more than one criterion for the same column, or a range of values in the same column, enter the column label more than once. For example, the criteria range

Type	Sales	Sales
Produce	>1000	<5000
displays all rows that contain Produce in the Type column and sales values greater than $1000 and less than $5000.

To display rows that meet one or another criterion

To specify a series of different criteria for different columns, enter the criteria in different rows. For example, the criteria range

Type	Salesperson	Sales
Produce
	Davolio
		>1000
displays all rows that contain Produce in the Type column or Davolio in the Salesperson column or whose sales value is greater than $1000.

To combine "and" and "or" relationships

To specify "and/or" relationships in the same criteria range, type the criteria in separate rows. For example, the criteria range

Salesperson	Sales
Davolio	>1500
Buchanan	>1500
displays the rows that contain Davolio in the Salesperson column and sales values greater than $1500, or the rows for salesperson Buchanan with sales values greater than $1500.

To enter computed criteria

You can also use a criteria range to specify a criterion that is the result of a formula. For example, the criteria range

Feb Sales

=E5>AVERAGE($E$5:$E$14)

displays rows that have a value in column E greater than the average of cells E5:E14.

When using computed criteria, follow these guidelines:

The formula has to produce the logical value TRUE or FALSE. Only rows containing values that produce TRUE are displayed when the list is filtered.

The formula has to refer to at least one column in the list. Enter a relative cell reference for the cell in the first row of the column, or enter the column label.

Important  If you use a column label instead of a relative cell reference or a range name, Microsoft Excel displays the error #NAME? in the cell that contains the computed criterion formula. You can ignore this error, as it does not affect how the list is filtered.

Enter a label for each criterion, but don't use an existing column label as a criterion label.

See Also

Help

Advanced Filter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

AutoFilter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Create Command (Insert Menu, Name Submenu)

Filtering a list using complex criteria

Inserting rows and columns

Name Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Filtering a list using complex criteria

Overview

To do this procedure, your list has to have column labels.

1.	Create a criteria range on the worksheet, away from the list you want to filter.

2.	Select a cell in your list.

3.	From the Data menu, choose Filter, and then choose Advanced Filter.

4.	In the Action box, select the Filter The List, In-Place option button.

5.	In the Criteria Range box, specify the criteria range, including the criteria labels.

6.	To exclude duplicate rows from the results, select the Unique Records Only check box.

7.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Advanced Filter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Copying filtered data that meets complex criteria

Setting up a criteria range

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"


Copying filtered data that meets complex criteria

Overview

For this procedure, your list has to have column labels.

1.	Create a criteria range, then select a cell in your list.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Filter, and then choose Advanced Filter.

3.	In the Action box, select the Copy To Another Location option button.

4.	In the List Range box, specify the range of cells for the list you want to filter.

5.	In the Criteria Range box, specify the criteria range you created, including the criteria labels.

6.	In the Copy To box, specify where you want to copy the filtered rows.

Shortcuts:	Click a cell in the upper-left corner of the destination range.

Type the name of the destination range.

7.	Choose the OK button.

Note  Using this method, you can only copy the filtered data to the current worksheet. If you want to paste the filtered data to a different worksheet, you have to switch to the new worksheet and then select the Advanced Filter command from there. Type the list range and criteria range as in steps 4 and 5.

See Also

Help

Advanced Filter Command (Data Menu, Filter Submenu)

Filtering a list using complex criteria

Setting up a criteria range

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering a List"


Microsoft Excel Specifications

This topic lists the specifications for the major areas of functionality in Microsoft Excel.

Application Workspace Specifications

Worksheet and Workbook Specifications

Charting Specifications

Data Exchange Specifications

Application Development Specifications


Application Workspace Specifications

Toolbars, buttons, and documents

Number of built-in toolbars	13
Number of built-in buttons	209
Maximum number of custom toolbars	Limited only by available memory
Maximum number of custom buttons	Limited only by available memory
Maximum number of open documents	Limited only by available memory


Worksheet and Workbook Specifications

Sheet dimensions

Maximum sheet size	16,384 rows by 256 columns
Column width	0 to 255 characters
Row height	0 to 409 points
Maximum length of cell contents (text)	255 characters
Maximum length of formula contents	1024 characters
Document limits

Maximum number of sheets in a single workbook	Limited only by available memory (maximum sheets in default workbook is 255)
Maximum number of scenarios	Limited only by available memory, although a summary report shows the first 251 scenarios only
Maximum number of views	Limited only by available memory, although the View Manager dialog box lists the first 256 views only
Numbers and calculation

Number precision	15 digits
Largest allowed positive number	9.99999999999999E307
Smallest allowed negative number	-9.99999999999999E307
Smallest allowed positive number	1E-307
Largest allowed negative number	-1E-307
Maximum number of iterations	32,767
Maximum number of data tables per worksheet (not available on macro sheets)	Limited only by available memory
Maximum size of worksheet arrays	6553 elements
Pivot tables

Maximum number of pivot tables per sheet	Limited only by available memory
Maximum number of pivot tables per workbook	Limited only by available memory
Maximum number of items per pivot table	256
Maximum number of pages per pivot table	8000
Formatting

Maximum number of colors per workbook	56
Maximum number of colors available	Number of colors supported by your monitor or printer
Maximum number of fonts per workbook	256
Maximum number of cell styles per workbook	4000
Number of built-in number formats	31
Maximum number of custom number formats	Limited by available memory
General

Maximum number of selected ranges	2048
Maximum number of names per workbook	Limited only by available memory
Maximum number of arguments per function	30
Maximum number of nested levels of functions	7
Number of worksheet functions included	320
Number of Microsoft Excel 4.0-style macro functions included	504
Maximum number of custom functions	Limited only by available memory
Maximum number of windows per workbook	Limited only by system resources
Maximum number of panes per window	4
Maximum number of linked sheets	Limited by available memory
Zoom range	10% to 400%
Maximum number of named views	Limited only by available memory
Maximum number of reports	Limited only by available memory
Maximum number of scenarios	Limited only by available memory
Database and list management

Maximum number of records	16,383
Maximum number of fields	256
Maximum length of a field	255 characters
Maximum number of sort references	3 in a single sort; unlimited using sequential sorts
Maximum number of fields in a data form	32


Charting Specifications

General

Maximum number of charts linked to a worksheet	Limited only by available memory
Maximum number of worksheets referred to by a chart	255
Maximum number of data series in one chart	255
Maximum number of data points per data series	4000
Maximum number of data points for all data series in one chart	32,000
Formatting

Maximum number of fonts in a chart	255
Maximum number of line styles	8
Maximum number of line weights	4
Maximum number of area patterns (screen display)	18
Maximum number of pattern colors (color display)	56 out of 16 million
Maximum number of object colors (color display)	56 out of 16 million
Total area pattern and color combinations (color display)	56,448
Maximum number of area patterns (printer)*	18
Maximum number of pattern colors (color printer)*	56
Maximum number of object colors (color printer)*	56
Maximum number of pattern and color combinations (color printer)*	56,448
*  Actual number depends on your printer and its software.


Data Exchange Specifications

File formats for opening or saving	Filename extension (Windows only)

Microsoft Excel version 5.0 formats (normal)	.XLS, .XLT (template)
Microsoft Excel version 4.0 formats	.XLS, .XLC, .XLM, .XLW, .XLA, .XLT (template), .XLB, .XLL
Microsoft Excel version 3.0 formats	.XLS, .XLC, .XLM, .XLW, .XLA, .XLT
Microsoft Excel version 2.x formats	.XLS, .XLC, .XLM, .XLW
Symbolic link format	.SLK
Text format	.TXT, Text (Macintosh), Text (OS/2 or MS-DOS)
Comma-separated values format	.CSV (Macintosh), .CSV (OS/2 or MS-DOS)
Lotus 1-2-3 Release 1A, Microsoft Works	.WKS
Lotus 1-2-3 Release 2.x format	.WK1, .FMT
Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3.x and Lotus 1-2-3 for Windows formats	.WK3, .FM3, .PRN
Allways	.ALL
Data interchange format	.DIF
dBASE II format	.DBF 2
dBASE III format	.DBF 3
dBASE IV format	.DBF 4
Quattro Pro for MS-DOS	.WQ1, .WQS
You can paste the following Clipboard formats in Microsoft Excel with the Paste or Paste Special command. Unless otherwise stated, formats apply to both Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh.

Format	Clipboard type identifier

Picture	Picture (also known as Windows metafile) for Windows; PICT for the Macintosh
Bitmap	Bitmap for Windows
Microsoft Excel file formats	BIFF, BIFF3, BIFF4
Symbolic link format	SYLK
Lotus 1-2-3 Release 2.x format	WK1
Data interchange format	DIF
Text (tab delimited) format	Text
Comma-separated values format	CSV
Formatted text*	Rich Text Format for Windows; RTF for the Macintosh
Embedded object	Native, OwnerLink, and Picture for Windows; NATV, OLNK, and PICT for the Macintosh; or other presentation format
Linked object	OwnerLink, ObjectLink, Link, and Picture for Windows; OLNK, OJLK, LINK, and PICT for the Macintosh; or other format
Text	Display Text, OEM Text
Values	VALU for the Macintosh
*  From Microsoft Excel only


Application Development Specifications

General

Maximum number of files that can be simultaneously accessed by a macro	Limited only by operating system
Maximum number of custom menu bars that can be defined at one time	15
Microsoft Excel 4.0 Macro Language

Maximum number of files that can be opened at one time with FOPEN	8
Maximum number of custom menu items	255
Maximum number of dialog items	64; 30 of these can take or return arguments
Maximum number of list boxes in a dialog box	8
Maximum length of item in a custom list	80 characters
Maximum number of characters in a custom list	2000 characters
Maximum number of custom lists	Limited only by available memory
Visual Basic

Maximum length of text string in Microsoft Windows	64K
Maximum length of text string in Macintosh and Microsoft Windows NT	Limited only by available memory
Maximum lines of code per module	Approximately 4000
Maximum size of static and global variables	64K per workbook
Maximum number of dialog boxes per workbook	256


Installing and Starting Microsoft Excel

Overview of Installing Components of Microsoft Excel

Installing components of Microsoft Excel

Overview of Starting and Quitting Microsoft Excel

Starting Microsoft Excel

Quitting Microsoft Excel


Overview of Installing Components of Microsoft Excel

Once you've installed Microsoft Excel, you can run Setup again at any time to add or remove supplementary applications or files, such as the add-in files, or other options. Installing a component of Microsoft Excel is generally much quicker than the initial installation.

You can also run Setup to remove most of the Microsoft Excel files. Setup cannot remove all of the files it installed, because some of them may be required by other applications.

Note  Instructions for installing and administering Microsoft Excel on a network are located on Setup Disk 1 in the file NETWORK.TXT.

See Also

Help

Installing components of Microsoft Excel

User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Installing and Starting Microsoft Excel"


Installing components of Microsoft Excel

Overview

If you set up Microsoft Excel from a network, you may need to connect to the network drive or shared directory from which you ran Setup -- using the same drive letter you used originally -- before you can perform this procedure.

1.	Double-click the Microsoft Excel Setup icon in the Microsoft Office program group, or the program group in which you installed Microsoft Excel.

Microsoft Excel displays the groups of items that are currently installed.

If you originally set up Microsoft Excel from a network file server or a shared directory, run that copy of Setup. If you are not running Setup from a network file server or a shared directory and you cannot find Setup in the Microsoft Excel program directory on your computer, use the Setup disk that came with Microsoft Excel.

2.	Choose the Add/Remove button.

3.	If you want to install an additional group of items, select its check box.

If you want to remove a group of items, clear its check box.

If you don't want to remove a group that is already installed, leave its check box selected. Setup will not reinstall a selected group of items that has already been installed.

4.	To add or remove specific items in a group, select the group and then choose the Change Option button. Repeat this procedure for the specific items, and then choose the OK button.

5.	Choose the Continue button in the Custom Options dialog box.

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Installing and Starting Microsoft Excel"


Overview of Starting and Quitting Microsoft Excel

When you start Microsoft Excel, a new workbook is created.

When you quit Microsoft Excel, you are asked whether you want to save any unsaved work.

See Also

Help

Quitting Microsoft Excel

Starting Microsoft Excel

User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Installing and Starting Microsoft Excel"


Starting Microsoft Excel

Overview

1.	In Program Manager, double-click the Microsoft Excel 5.0 group icon or the group icon that contains Microsoft Excel.

2.	Double-click the Microsoft Excel icon.

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Installing and Starting Microsoft Excel"


Quitting Microsoft Excel

Overview

1.	From the File menu, choose Exit.

Shortcut:	ALT+F4

If you have made changes to any open workbooks but have not saved them, Microsoft Excel asks whether you want to save changes before you close the workbooks.

2.	Choose the Yes button to save changes, choose the No button to discard changes, or choose the Cancel button to cancel the command.

If you choose to save changes, and if you have set calculation to manual with the Recalculate Before Save check box selected, Microsoft Excel recalculates your workbook before saving it. To interrupt recalculation, press ESC.

See Also

Help

Close Command (Control Menu)

Exit Command (File Menu)

Saving a workbook

User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Installing and Starting Microsoft Excel"


Statistical Analysis of Data

Overview of Using an Analysis Tool

Anova: Single-Factor

Anova: Two-Factor with Replication

Anova: Two-Factor Without Replication

Correlation

Covariance

Descriptive Statistics

Exponential Smoothing

F-Test: Two-Sample for Variances

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Equal Variances

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Unequal Variances

t-Test: Paired Two-Sample for Means

z-Test: Two-Sample for Means

Histogram

Moving Average

Random Number Generation

Rank and Percentile

Regression

Fourier Analysis

Sampling


Overview of Using an Analysis Tool

Before you use an analysis tool, you must organize the data you want to analyze into columns or rows on your worksheet. This is your input range. You can also include a text label in the first cell of a row or column to identify your variables.

When you use an analysis tool to analyze data in an input range, Microsoft Excel creates an output table of the results. The contents of the output table depend on the analysis tool you are using. If you included labels in the input range, Microsoft Excel uses them to label data in the output table. If you did not include labels in the input range, Microsoft Excel automatically generates data labels for the results in the output table.

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Data Analysis.

If the Data Analysis command does not appear on the Tools menu, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak.

2.	In the Analysis Tools box, select the tool you want to use.

3.	Choose the OK button.

4.	Type the input range, the output range, and any other options you want.

You can enter cell ranges in the Input Range and Output Range boxes by typing a cell reference in the box or by selecting the contents of each box and then selecting the cell range on the worksheet.

You can also enter references to other worksheets in the Input Range and Output Range boxes.

5.	Choose the OK button.

The results of the analysis appear in the cell range you designate as the output range.

See Also

Help

Alphabetical List of Worksheet Functions

Data Analysis Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Anova: Single-Factor

Overview

Performs simple analysis of variance, which tests the hypothesis that means from several samples are equal. Generally, analysis of variance, or anova, is a statistical procedure used to determine whether means from two or more samples are drawn from populations with the same mean. This technique expands on the tests for two means, such as the t-test.

Input Range

Type the reference for the range of worksheet data you want to analyze. The input range should contain two or more adjacent ranges of data arranged in columns or rows. If your input range includes row or column labels, you must select the Labels In First Column or Labels In First Row check box, or Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the output table to appear. If existing data is about to be overwritten in the output range, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the text box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Grouped By

Select either the Rows or Columns option button to indicate whether the data in the input range is arranged in rows or in columns.

Labels In First Row/Labels In First Column

If you selected the Columns option button under Grouped By and the first row of your input range contains labels, select the Labels In First Row check box.

If you selected the Rows options button under Grouped By and the first column of your input range contains labels, select the Labels In First Columns check box.

If your input range does not include labels, clear the Labels In First Row or Labels In First Column check box. Microsoft Excel then generates the appropriate data labels for the output table (Row 1, Row 2, Row 3, and so on; or Column 1, Column 2, Column 3, and so on).

Alpha

Type the significance level at which you want to evaluate critical values for the F statistic. The default alpha value is 0.05. This critical value appears in the output table.

See Also

Help

Anova: Two-Factor with Replication

Anova: Two-Factor Without Replication

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Anova: Two-Factor with Replication

Overview

Performs an extension of the single-factor anova that includes more than one sample for each group of data. Analysis of variance, or anova, is a statistical procedure that you use to determine whether means from two or more samples are drawn from populations with the same mean. This technique expands on the tests for two means, such as the t-test.

Input Range

Type the reference for the range of worksheet data you want to analyze. The input range should contain two or more blocks of data arranged in columns. Type column labels in the first row and one row label in the first column for each group of data in the input range; Microsoft Excel assumes that the first row and column of the input range contain labels.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the output table to appear.

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Rows Per Sample

Type the number of rows contained in each sample. Each row represents a replication of the data. Each sample must contain the same number of rows.

Alpha

Type the significance level at which you want to evaluate critical values for the F statistic. The default alpha value is 0.05. This critical value appears in the output table.

See Also

Help

Anova: Single-Factor

Anova: Two-Factor Without Replication

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Anova: Two-Factor Without Replication

Overview

Performs two-factor anova that does not include more than one sampling per group. In general, analysis of variance, or anova, is a statistical procedure you use to determine whether means from two or more samples are drawn from populations with the same mean. This technique expands on the tests for two means, such as the t-test.

Input Range

Type the reference for the range of worksheet data you want to analyze. The input range should contain two or more blocks of data arranged in columns or rows. If your input range includes row or column labels, you must select the Labels check box, or Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the output table to appear.

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Labels

If the first row and column of your input range contain labels, select the Labels check box.

If your input range does not contain labels, clear the Labels check box. Microsoft Excel then generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.

Alpha

Type the significance level at which you want to evaluate critical values for the F statistic. The default alpha value is 0.05. This critical value appears in the output table.

See Also

Help

Anova: Single-Factor

Anova: Two-Factor with Replication

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Correlation

Overview

Measures the relationship between two data sets that are scaled to be independent of the unit of measurement. The population correlation calculation returns the covariance of two data sets divided by the product of their standard deviations.

You can use the Correlation tool to determine whether two data sets move together; that is, whether large values of one set are associated with large values of the other (positive correlation), whether small values of one set are associated with large values of the other (negative correlation), or whether values in both sets are unrelated (correlation near zero).

Input Range

Type the reference for the range of worksheet data you want to analyze. The input range should contain two or more blocks of data arranged in columns or rows. If your input range includes row or column labels, you must select the Labels In First Column or Labels In First Row check box, or Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. Only half of the table is complete because correlation between two data sets is independent of the order in which the data sets are processed. Cells in the output table with matching row and column coordinates contain the value 1 because each data set correlates perfectly with itself. The output table is a square whose width and height are one larger than the number of cell ranges of data. If existing data is about to be overwritten in the output range, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the text box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Grouped By

Select either the Rows or Columns option button to indicate whether the data in the input range is arranged in rows or in columns.

Labels In First Row/Labels In First Column

If you select the Columns option button under Grouped By and the first row of your input range contains labels, select the Labels In First Row check box.

If you select the Rows options button under Grouped By and the first column of your input range contains labels, select the Labels In First Columns check box.

If your input range does not include labels, clear the Labels In First Row or Labels In First Column check box. Microsoft Excel then generates the appropriate data labels for the output table (Row 1, Row 2, Row 3, and so on; or Column 1, Column 2, Column 3, and so on).

See Also

Help

CORREL

COVAR

Covariance

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Covariance

Overview

Returns the average of the product of deviations of data points from their respective means. Covariance is a measure of the relationship between two ranges of data. Covariance is sensitive to the unit of measure for X and Y. Two pairs of similarly related ranges of data yield different covariance values if the magnitude of the data points varies. Use the Covariance tool to determine whether two ranges of data move together; that is, whether large values of one set are associated with large values of the other (positive covariance), whether small values of one set are associated with large values of the other (negative covariance), or whether values in both sets are unrelated (covariance near zero).

Input Range

Type the reference for the range of worksheet data you want to analyze. The input range should contain two or more blocks of data arranged in columns or rows. If your input range includes row or column labels, you must select the Labels In First Column or Labels In First Row check box, or Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the output to appear. Microsoft Excel populates only half of the table because covariance between two ranges of data is independent of the order in which the ranges of data are processed. The output table is a square whose width and height are one larger than the number of cell ranges of data. The table's diagonal contains the variance of each range

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Grouped By

Select either the Row or Column option button to indicate whether the data in the input range is arranged in rows or in columns.

Labels In First Row/Labels In First Column

If you select the Columns option button under Grouped By and the first row of your input range contains labels, select the Labels In First Row check box.

If you select the Rows options button under Grouped By and the first column of your input range contains labels, select the Labels In First Columns check box.

If your input range does not include labels, clear the Labels In First Row or Labels In First Column check box. Microsoft Excel then generates the appropriate data labels for the output table (Row 1, Row 2, Row 3, and so on; or Column 1, Column 2, Column 3, and so on).

See Also

Help

CORREL

Correlation

COVAR

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Descriptive Statistics

Overview

Generates a report of univariate statistics for data in the input range. This procedure provides information about the central tendency and variability of your data. The statistics in this table are a common starting point for further analysis and can indicate which tests are appropriate to explore next.

Input Range

Type the reference for the range of worksheet data you want to analyze. If your input range includes labels, you must select the Labels In First Column or Labels In First Row check box, or Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the output to appear. The Descriptive Statistics tool produces two columns of information for each data set. The left column contains the statistics labels (see the Summary Statistics option below); the right column contains the statistics.

If the Columns option button is selected under Grouped By, Microsoft Excel writes a two-column table of statistics for each column in the input range.

If the Rows option button is selected under Grouped By, Microsoft Excel writes a two-column table of statistics for each row in the input range.

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Grouped By

Select either the Rows or Columns option button to indicate whether the data in the input range is arranged in rows or in columns.

Labels In First Row/Labels In First Column

If you select the Columns option button under Grouped By and the first row of your input range contains labels, select the Labels In First Row check box.

If you select the Rows options button under Grouped By and the first column of your input range contains labels, select the Labels In First Columns check box.

If your input range does not include labels, clear the Labels In First Row or Labels In First Column check box. Microsoft Excel then generates the appropriate data labels for the output table (Row 1, Row 2, Row 3, and so on; or Column 1, Column 2, Column 3, and so on).

Summary Statistics

Select the Summary Statistics check box if you want Microsoft Excel to produce one field for each of the following statistics in the output table:

Mean

Standard Error (of the mean)

Median

Mode

Standard Deviation

Variance

Kurtosis

Skewness

Range

Minimum

Maximum

Sum

Count

Largest (#)

Smallest (#)

Confidence Level

Kth Largest

Select the Kth Largest check box if you want to include a row in the output table for the kth largest value for each range of data. In the Kth Largest box, type the number to use for k. If k is 1, this row contains the maximum of the data set.

Kth Smallest

Select the Kth Smallest check box if you want to include a row in the output table for the kth smallest value for each range of data. In the Kth Smallest box, type the number to use for k. If k is 1, this row contains the minimum of the data set.

Confidence Level For Mean

Select the Confidence Level For Mean check box if you want to include a row for the confidence level of the mean in the output table. In the Confidence Level For Mean box, type the confidence level that you want. For example, a value of 95% calculates the confidence level of the mean at a significance of 0.05.

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Exponential Smoothing

Overview

Predicts a value based on the forecast for the prior period, adjusted for the error in that prior forecast. Uses a smoothing constant, a, the magnitude of which determines how strongly forecasts respond to errors in the prior forecast. You can use exponential smoothing to forecast sales, inventory, or other trends. Another method, regression, also predicts values based on relationships in existing data.

Input Range

Type the reference for the range of worksheet data you want to analyze. The input range must consist of a single column or row containing four or more cells of data. If data in the Input Range is nonnumeric, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the output table to appear.

If the Standard Errors check box is selected, Microsoft Excel generates a two-column output table with standard error values in the right column.

If there are insufficient historical values to project a forecast or calculate a standard error, Microsoft Excel returns the #N/A error value.

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Damping Factor

Type the damping factor you want to use as the exponential smoothing constant. Microsoft Excel uses 0.3 as the default value for the damping factor.

Standard Errors

Select the Standard Errors check box if you want to include a column that contains standard error values in the output table.

If the Standard Errors check box is selected, Microsoft Excel generates a two-column output table with standard error values in the right column.

If the Standard Errors check box is cleared, Microsoft Excel generates a single-column output table without standard error values.

Chart Output

Select the Chart Output check box if you want Microsoft Excel to automatically generate a chart for the actual and forecast values with the output table. The chart that is generated is embedded in the same sheet as the output.

If the Chart Output check box is cleared, Microsoft Excel does not generate the chart.

Labels

If the first row and column of your input range contain labels, select the Labels check box.

If your input range does not contain labels, clear the Labels check box. Microsoft Excel then generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.

See Also

Help

Creating a Chart

FORECAST

GROWTH

Moving Average

Patterns Tab, Selected [chart item] Command (Format Menu)

Regression

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


F-Test: Two-Sample for Variances

Overview

Performs a two-sample F-test. An F-test is a method for comparing two population variances. For example, you can use an F-test to determine whether the time scores in a swimming meet have a difference in variance for samples from two teams.

Variable 1 Range

Type the reference for the first column or row of data you want to analyze. If any data point in the range of data is nonnumeric, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Variable 2 Range

Type the reference for the second column or row of data you want to analyze. If any data point in the range of data is nonnumeric, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the output table to appear.

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the text box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Labels

If the first row or column of your input range contains labels, select the Labels check box.

If your input range does not contain labels, clear the Labels check box. Microsoft Excel then generates the appropriate data labels for the output table (Variable 1 and Variable 2).

Alpha

Type the confidence level for the test. The default alpha value is 0.05. If the alpha value is nonnumeric or outside the range 0...1, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

See Also

Help

FDIST

FINV

FTEST

t-Test: Paired Two-Sample for Means

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Equal Variances

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Unequal Variances

z-Test: Two-Sample for Means

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Equal Variances

Overview

Performs a two-sample student's t-test. This form of the t-test assumes that the means of both data sets are equal and is referred to as a homoscedastic t-test. You use t-tests to determine whether the two samples' means are equal.

Variable 1 Range

Type the reference for the first range of data you want to analyze. The data must occupy a single column or row on the worksheet. If any data point in the range of data is nonnumeric, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Variable 2 Range

Type the reference for the second range of data you want to analyze. The data must occupy a single column or row on the worksheet. If any data point in the range of data is nonnumeric, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the output table to appear.

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Labels

If the first row or column of your input range contains labels, select the Labels check box.

If your input range does not contain labels, clear the Labels check box. Microsoft Excel then generates the appropriate data labels for the output table (Variable 1 and Variable 2).

Alpha

Type the confidence level for the test. The default alpha value is 0.05. If the alpha value is nonnumeric or outside the range 0...1, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Hypothesized Mean Difference

Type the number that you want for the shift in sample means. A value of 0 indicates that the sample means are hypothesized to be equal.

See Also

Help

F-Test: Two-Sample for Variances

t-Test: Paired Two-Sample for Means

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Equal Variances

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Unequal Variances

TDIST

TTEST

z-Test: Two-Sample for Means

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Unequal Variances

Overview

Performs a two-sample student's t-test. This form of the test assumes that the variances of both ranges of data are unequal and is referred to as a heteroscedastic t-test. Use a t-test to determine whether two sample means are equal and when the groups under study are distinct. Use a paired test when there is one group before and after a treatment.

Variable 1 Range

Type the reference for the first range of data you want to analyze. The data must occupy a single column or row on the worksheet. If any data point in the range of data is nonnumeric, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Variable 2 Range

Type the reference for the second range of data you want to analyze. The data must occupy a single column or row on the worksheet. If any data point in the range of data is nonnumeric, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the output table to appear.

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Labels

If the first row or column of your input range contains labels, select the Labels check box.

If your input range does not contain labels, clear the Labels check box. Microsoft Excel then generates the appropriate data labels for the output table (Variable 1 and Variable 2).

Alpha

Type the confidence level for the test. The default alpha value is 0.05. If the alpha value is nonnumeric or outside the range 0...1, inclusive, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Hypothesized Mean Difference

Type the number that you want for the shift in sample means. A value of 0 indicates that the sample means are hypothesized to be equal.

See Also

Help

F-Test: Two-Sample for Variances

t-Test: Paired Two-Sample for Means

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Equal Variances

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Unequal Variances

TDIST

TTEST

z-Test: Two-Sample for Means

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


t-Test: Paired Two-Sample for Means

Overview

Performs a two-sample paired student's t-Test. This form of the t-test tests whether a sample's means are distinct. It does not assume the variances of both populations from which the data sets are drawn are equal. A paired test is appropriate whenever there is a natural pairing of observations in the samples, such as when a sample group is tested twice, before and after an experiment. The two input ranges of data must contain the same number of data points.

Variable 1 Range

Type the reference for the first range of data you want to analyze. The data must occupy a single column or row on the worksheet. If any data points in the range of data are nonnumeric, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Variable 2 Range

Type the reference for the second range of data you want to analyze. The data must occupy a single column or row on the worksheet. If any data points in the range of data are nonnumeric, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the output table to appear.

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Labels

If the first row or column of your input range contains labels, select the Labels check box.

If your input range does not contain labels, clear the Labels check box. Microsoft Excel then generates the appropriate data labels for the output table (Variable 1 and Variable 2).

Alpha

Type the confidence level for the test. The default alpha value is 0.05. If the alpha value is nonnumeric or outside the range 0...1, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Hypothesized Mean Difference

Type the number that you want for the shift in sample means. A value of 0 indicates that the sample means are hypothesized to be equal.

See Also

Help

F-Test: Two-Sample for Variances

t-Test: Paired Two-Sample for Means

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Equal Variances

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Unequal Variances

TDIST

TTEST

z-Test: Two-Sample for Means

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


z-Test: Two-Sample for Means

Overview

Performs a two-sample z-test for means with known variances. This procedure is commonly used to test hypotheses about the difference between two population means. For example, you can use this test to determine differences between the performance of two car models.

Variable 1 Range

Type the reference for the first range of data you want to analyze. The data must occupy a single column or row on the worksheet. If any data point in the range of data is nonnumeric, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Variable 2 Range

Type the reference for the second range of data you want to analyze. The data must occupy a single column or row on the worksheet. If any data point in the range of data is nonnumeric, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the output table to appear.

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Labels

If the first row or column of your input range contains labels, select the Labels check box.

If your input range does not contain labels, clear the Labels check box. Microsoft Excel then generates the appropriate data labels for the output table (Variable 1 and Variable 2).

Alpha

Type the confidence level for the test. The default alpha value is 0.05. If the alpha value is nonnumeric or outside the range 0...1, inclusive, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Variable 1 Variance (Known)

Type the known population variance for the Variable 1 input range. If the variance is nonnumeric, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Variable 2 Variance (Known)

Type the known population variance for the Variable 2 input range. If the variance is nonnumeric, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

See Also

Help

F-Test: Two-Sample for Variances

NORMDIST

NORMINV

NORMSDIST

NORMSINV

STANDARDIZE

t-Test: Paired Two-Sample for Means

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Equal Variances

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Unequal Variances

z-Test: Two-Sample for Means

ZTEST

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Histogram

Overview

Calculates individual and cumulative frequencies for a cell range of data and data bins. Generates data for the number of occurrences of a value in a data set. For example, in a class of 20 students, you might be interested in the distribution of scores in letter grade categories. A histogram table presents the letter-grade boundaries and the number of scores between the lowest bound and the current bound. The single most frequent score is the mode of the cell range of data.

Input Range

Type the reference for the range of worksheet data you want to analyze. You can type either a column, a row, or a block of numeric data for frequency generation. The maximum size of the range is 6400 cells. Data must be numeric; otherwise, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Bin Range (optional)

Type a cell range with an optional set of boundary values that define bin ranges. These values should be in ascending order.

Microsoft Excel counts the number of data points between the current bin number and the adjoining higher bin, if any. Microsoft Excel includes the values at the lower bin boundary and excludes the values at the upper bin boundary. For example, bins might equal 2 and less, more than 2 up to 3, more than 3 up to 4, more than 4 up to 5, and more than 5.

If you omit the bin range, Microsoft Excel creates a set of evenly distributed bins between the data's minimum and maximum values.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. If existing data is about to be overwritten in the output range, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Pareto (sorted histogram)

Select the Pareto check box to present the data in order of descending frequency.

If the Pareto check box is selected, Microsoft Excel presents data in descending frequency order in the output table.

If the Pareto check box is cleared, Microsoft Excel presents data in ascending bin order in the output table and omits the three rightmost columns containing the sorted data.

Cumulative Percentage

Select the Cumulative Percentage check box to generate cumulative percentages.

If the Cumulative Percentage check box is selected, Microsoft Excel generates an output table column for cumulative percentages and includes a cumulative percentage line in the histogram chart. For more information about generating a histogram chart, see the Chart Output option, which follows.

If the Cumulative Percentage check box is cleared, Microsoft Excel omits the cumulative percentage column in the output table and the cumulative percentage line in the charts.

Chart Output

Select the Chart Output check box if you want Microsoft Excel to automatically generate a histogram chart with the output table. The chart that is generated is embedded in the same sheet as the output.

Labels

If the first row or column of your input range contains labels, select the Labels check box. If your input range does not contain labels, clear the Labels check box. Microsoft Excel then generates the appropriate data labels for the output table (Variable 1 and Variable 2).

See Also

Help

Creating a Chart

FREQUENCY

MODE

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Moving Average

Overview

Projects values in the forecast period, based on the average value of the variable over a specific number of preceding periods. You can use this procedure to forecast sales, inventory, or other trends.

Input Range

Type the reference for the range of worksheet data you want to analyze. The input range must consist of a single column or row containing four or more cells of data. If any data in the input range is nonnumeric, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the output table to appear. If there are insufficient historical values to project a forecast, Microsoft Excel returns the #NUM! error value.

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the text box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Interval

Type the number of values you want to include in the moving average. The default interval is 3. If the interval is nonnumeric, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Standard Errors

Select the Standard Errors check box if you want to include a column that contains standard errors in the output table.

If the Standard Errors check box is selected, Microsoft Excel generates a two-column output table, with standard error values in the right column.

If the Standard Errors check box is cleared, Microsoft Excel generates a single-column output table without standard error values.

Chart Output

Select the Chart Output check box if you want Microsoft Excel to automatically generate a histogram chart with the output table. The chart that is generated is embedded in the same sheet as the output.

Labels

If the first row or column of your input range contains labels, select the Labels check box. If your input range does not contain labels, clear the Labels check box. Microsoft Excel then generates the appropriate data labels for the output table (Variable 1 and Variable 2).

See Also

Help

Creating a Chart

EXPONDIST

Exponential Smoothing

FORECAST

GROWTH

Regression

SUMPRODUCT

TREND

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Random Number Generation

Overview

Fills a range with independent random numbers drawn from one of several distributions. Random variables have a variety of applications in statistical simulations. One application of this procedure characterizes subjects in a population with a probability distribution. For example, you might use a normal distribution to characterize the population of individuals' heights, or you might use a Bernoulli distribution of two possible outcomes to characterize the population of coin-flip results.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the output table to appear.

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Number Of Variables

Type the number of columns of values you want Microsoft Excel to place in the output table. If you do not type the number of variables, Microsoft Excel fills all output table columns.

Number Of Random Numbers

Type the number of data points you want generated for each variable. Each data point is placed in a row of the output table. If you do not enter the number of data points, Microsoft Excel fills all output table rows.

Distribution

Select the distribution you want to use to create random variables.

Parameters

Type the parameters you want to use to characterize a distribution.

Uniform

Characterized by lower and upper bounds. Variables are drawn with equal probability from all values in the range. A common application uses a uniform distribution in the range 0...1.

Normal

Characterized by a mean and a standard deviation. A common application uses a mean of 0 and a standard deviation of 1 for the standard normal distribution.

Bernoulli

Characterized by a probability of success on a given trial. Bernoulli random variables have the value 0 or 1. For example, you can draw a uniform random variable in the range 0...1. If the variable is less than or equal to the probability of success, the Bernoulli random variable is assigned the value 1; otherwise, it is assigned the value 0.

Binomial

Characterized by a probability of success for a number of trials. For example, you can generate number-of-trials Bernoulli random variables, the sum of which is a binomial random variable.

Poisson

Characterized by a value lambda, equal to 1/mean. The Poisson distribution is often used to characterize the number of events that occur per unit of time; for example, the average rate at which cars arrive at a toll plaza.

Patterned

Characterized by a lower and upper bound, a step, repetition rate for values, and a repetition rate for the sequence.

Discrete

Characterized by a value and the associated probability range. The range must contain two columns: the left column must contain values, and the right column must contain probabilities associated with the value in that row. The sum of the probabilities must be 1.

Random Seed

Type an optional value from which to generate random numbers. You can reuse this value to produce the same random numbers at a later time.

See Also

Help

RAND

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Rank and Percentile

Overview

Produces a table that contains the ordinal and percentage rank of each value in a data set. You can use this procedure to analyze the relative standing of values in a data set.

Input Range

Type the reference for the range of worksheet data you want to analyze. If your input range includes row or column labels, you must select the Labels In First Row or Labels In First Column check box, or Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the output table to appear. Microsoft Excel generates one output table for each data set in the input range. Each output table contains four columns: the data point number, the data point value, the data point rank, and the data point percentage rank. Microsoft Excel sorts each output table in ascending rank order.

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Grouped By

Select either the Rows or Columns option button to indicate whether the data in the input range is arranged in rows or in columns.

Labels In First Row/Labels In First Column

If you select the Columns option button under Grouped By and the first row of your input range contains labels, select the Labels In First Row check box.

If you select the Rows option button under Grouped By and the first column of your input range contains labels, select the Labels In First Column check box.

If your input range does not include labels, clear the Labels In First Row or Labels In First Column check box. Microsoft Excel then generates the appropriate row and column labels for the output table (Column 1, Column 2, Column 3, and so on; or Row 1, Row 2, Row 3, and so on).

See Also

Help

PERCENTILE

PERCENTRANK

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Regression

Overview

Performs linear regression analysis. Regression fits a line through a set of observations using the "least squares" method. Regression is used in a wide variety of applications that seek to analyze how a single dependent variable is affected by the values of one or more independent variables. For example, several factors affect an athlete's performance, including age, sex, height, and weight. Regression apportions shares in the performance measure to each of these four factors based on a set of performance data. You can then use the regression results to predict the performance of a new, untested athlete.

Input Y Range

Type the reference for the range of dependent data you want to analyze. The dependent data should be typed in a single column. If you include a report label in the first row of the input y range, you must select the Labels check box, or Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Input X Range

Type the reference for the range of independent data you want to analyze. Microsoft Excel orders independent variables in ascending order from left to right, using 1, 2, 3, and so on for the variable names in the summary output table. The maximum number of input ranges is 16.

Constant Is Zero

Select the Constant Is Zero check box to force the regression line to pass through the origin.

Labels

If the first row in the input range includes report labels, select the Labels check box.

If your input range does not contain labels, clear the Labels check box. Microsoft Excel then generates the appropriate data labels for the summary output table.

Confidence Level

Select the Confidence Level check box if you want an additional level included in the summary output table. In the Confidence Level box, type an additional confidence level that you want Microsoft Excel to apply to the regression in addition to the default 95% confidence level.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the summary output table to appear. Allow at least seven columns for the summary output table.

The summary output table includes the following:

Anova table

Coefficients

Standard error of y estimate

r2 values

Number of observations

Standard error of coefficients

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Residuals

Select the Residuals check box if you want to include residuals in the residuals output table.

Standardized Residuals

Select the Standardized Residuals check box if you want to include standardized residuals in the output table.

Residual Plots

Select the Residual Plots check box if you want Microsoft Excel to generate a chart for each independent variable versus the residual.

Line Fit Plot

Select the Line Fit Plot check box if you want Microsoft Excel to generate a chart for predicted values versus the observed values.

Normal Probability Plot

Select the Normal Probability Plot check box if you want Microsoft Excel to generate a chart plotting normal probability plots.

See Also

Help

Exponential Smoothing

FORECAST

GROWTH

LINEST

LOGEST

Moving Average

Trendline Command (Insert Menu)

TREND

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Fourier Analysis

Overview

Fourier analysis is a technique for solving problems in linear systems and analyzing periodic data. The Fourier Analysis tool transforms data using the Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) method. The procedure also supports inverse transformations, in which the inverse of transformed data returns the original data.

Input Range

Type the reference for the range of real or complex data you want to transform. Complex data must be in either the x+yi or x+yj format. The number of input range values must be an even power of 2. If x is a negative number, it must be preceded by an apostrophe ( ' ), or Microsoft Excel displays a message.

The maximum number of values is 1024.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the output table to appear.

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Inverse

Clear or select the Inverse check box to perform or undo a transform. If the Inverse check box is selected, the data in the input range is considered transformed and is returned to its original state in the output table. If the Inverse check box is cleared, the data in the input range is transformed in the output table.

Labels

If the first row or column of your input range contains labels, select the Labels check box. If your input range does not contain labels, clear the Labels check box. Microsoft Excel then generates the appropriate data labels for the output table (Variable 1 and Variable 2).

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Sampling

Overview

Creates a sample from a population by treating the input range as a population. When the population is too large to process or chart, you can use a representative sample. In addition, if you believe the input data is periodic, you can create a sample that contains only values from a particular part of a cycle. For example, if the input range contains quarterly sales figures, sampling with a periodic rate of 4 places values from the same quarter in the output range.

Input Range

Type the references for the block of data on the worksheet that contains the population of values from which you want Microsoft Excel to draw a sample. Microsoft Excel draws samples from the first column, then the second column, and so on.

Output Range

Type the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the output table to appear. Data is written in a single column below the output range.

If you select the Periodic option button, the number of values in the output table is equal to the number of values in the input range divided by the sampling rate.

If you select the Random option button, the number of values in the output table is equal to the number of samples.

New Worksheet Ply

This option inserts a new ply into the workbook the current ply resides in and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply. Use the box next to New Worksheet Ply to optionally name the new ply.

New Workbook

This option creates a new workbook, adds a new workbook ply in the new workbook, and pastes the results into cell A1 of the new ply.

Sampling

Select either the Periodic or Random option button for the interval at which you want to sample values from the input range.

If you select the Periodic option button, type a number in the Period box.

If you select the Random option button, type a number in the Number Of Samples box.

Period

Type the periodic interval at which you want sampling to take place. The period-th value in the input range and every period-th value thereafter is copied to the output column. Sampling stops when the end of the input range is reached. When you select the Periodic option button, if period is not numeric, is less than or equal to 0, or is greater than the number of values in the input range, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Number Of Samples

Type the number of random values you want Microsoft Excel to place in the output column. Each value is drawn from a random position in the input range. Values are drawn with replacement; that is, the sample position can be selected more than once. If you select the Random option button under Period and the number of the sample is nonnumeric or less than or equal to 0, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

Labels

If the first row and column of your input range contain labels, select the Labels check box.

If your input range does not contain labels, clear the Labels check box. Microsoft Excel then generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.

See Also

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Summarizing Data in a List

Overview of Summarizing Data in a List

Displaying automatic subtotals in a list

Displaying automatic subtotals for more than one column

Displaying nested automatic subtotals

Hiding and showing detail data in a subtotaled list

Removing or replacing automatic subtotals


Overview of Summarizing Data in a List

One way to analyze the data in a list is to subtotal the data. Using the Subtotals command on the Data menu, you can insert subtotal rows in a list, summarizing the data any way you choose. When you insert subtotals, Microsoft Excel automatically inserts a Grand Total row at the bottom of the list.

For example, let's say a list contains hundreds of records of sales, organized in labeled columns by year, by salesperson, and by product. Automatic subtotals can summarize sales by all three groups, separately or in combination.

The Subtotal dialog box asks you to make three basic decisions:

1.	Choose one or more groups to define the automatic subtotals. For example, to display sales by year, choose the column labeled Year.

2.	Choose a subtotal function. For example, to compute the total sales for a year, choose the Sum function.

3.	Choose the data you want to subtotal. For example, to display the total sales by year, choose the column labeled Sales.

Important  Sort your list before you use automatic subtotals. You must have column labels in the first row of your list.

In addition to displaying subtotals for one column, with automatic subtotals you can:

Display one subtotal row with subtotals for several columns.

Display multiple, nested subtotal rows for several columns.

Display multiple subtotal rows with different calculations for each subtotal row.

Hide or show detail data in your list.

See Also

Help

Displaying automatic subtotals for more than one column

Displaying automatic subtotals in a list

Displaying nested automatic subtotals

Hiding and showing detail data in a subtotaled list

Removing or replacing automatic subtotals

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Subtotals Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"

Chapter 22, "Summarizing Data in a List"


Displaying automatic subtotals in a list

Overview

1.	Sort your list by the column for which you want a subtotal.

2.	Select a cell in the list you want to subtotal.

3.	From the Data menu, choose Subtotals.

4.	In the At Each Change In box, select the column containing the groups you want subtotals for, or accept the default selection.

5.	In the Use Function box, select the function you want to use to summarize the data, or accept the default selection.

For a description of the subtotal functions, choose the Help button.

6.	In the Add Subtotal To box, select the column containing the values you want to summarize, or accept the default selection.

7.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Sorting a list from top to bottom

Subtotals Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 22, "Summarizing Data in a List"


Displaying automatic subtotals for more than one column

Overview

1.	Sort your list by the columns you want subtotals for.

2.	Select a cell in the list you want to subtotal.

3.	From the Data menu, choose Subtotals.

4.	In the At Each Change In box, select the columns containing the groups you want subtotals for, or accept the default selection.

5.	In the Use Function box, select the function you want to use to summarize the data, or accept the default selection.

For a description of the subtotal functions, choose the Help button.

6.	In the Add Subtotal To box, select the columns you want to summarize, or accept the default selection.

Important  To retain existing automatic subtotals in your list, clear the Replace Current Subtotals check box.

7.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Sorting a list from top to bottom

Subtotals Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 22, "Summarizing Data in a List"


Displaying nested automatic subtotals

Overview

1.	Sort your list by the columns you want subtotals for.

For example, to display subtotals for each salesperson, and for each product per salesperson, sort by the Salesperson column, then by the Product column.

2.	Select a cell in the list you want to subtotal.

3.	From the Data menu, choose Subtotals.

4.	In the At Each Change In box, select the first column you want subtotals for, or accept the default selection.

5.	In the Use Function box, select the function you want to use to summarize the data, or accept the default selection.

For a description of the subtotal functions, choose the Help button.

6.	In the Add Subtotal To box, select the column containing the data you want to summarize, or accept the default selection.

7.	Choose the OK button.

8.	From the Data menu, choose Subtotals.

9.	In the At Each Change In box, select the next column you want subtotals for.

10.	Clear the Replace Current Subtotals check box.

11.	Choose the OK button.

12.	Repeat steps 8 through 11 for every column you want subtotals for.

See Also

Help

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Sorting a list from top to bottom

Subtotals Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 22, "Summarizing Data in a List"


Hiding and showing detail data in a subtotaled list

Overview

To use these procedures, the outline symbols must be displayed.

To hide detail data for all subtotal groups

Click the row level symbol for the level of subtotal groups whose detail data you want to hide. For example, if your list has three levels, and you want to see only the second level, click the row level 2 symbol ( [image]).

To hide detail data for one subtotal group

Click the hide detail symbol ( [image]) for the subtotal whose detail data you want to hide.

You can also use the Hide Detail command (Data menu, Outline submenu).

To show detail data for all subtotal groups

Click the row level symbol for the lowest level of the subtotaled list. For example, if your list has three levels, click the row level 3 symbol ( [image]).

To show detail data for one subtotal group

Click the show detail symbol ( [image]) for the subtotal group whose detail you want to display.

You can also use the Show Detail command (Data menu, Outline submenu).

See Also

Help

Displaying a different outline level

Displaying or hiding the outline symbols

Outline Symbols

Showing or hiding detail data

User's Guide

Chapter 22, "Summarizing Data in a List"


Removing or replacing automatic subtotals

Overview

To remove all automatic subtotals

1.	Select a cell in the subtotaled list.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Subtotals.

3.	Choose the Remove All button.

To replace current subtotals with new subtotals

Caution  These steps remove all existing subtotals.

1.	Select a cell in the subtotaled list.

2.	From the Data menu, choose Subtotals.

3.	Select the options you want in the At Each Change In box, the Use Function box, and the Add Subtotal To box.

4.	Select the Replace Current Subtotals check box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Displaying automatic subtotals in a list

Subtotals Command (Data Menu)

Undo and Redo Commands (Edit Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 22, "Summarizing Data in a List"


Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks

What Is a Template?

Overview of Creating and Editing Workbook Templates

Saving a workbook as a template

Opening and editing the original template

Overview of Creating New Workbooks from Templates

Creating a new workbook based on a template

Getting quick access to your templates

Changing the default new workbook using an autotemplate

Overview of Inserting New Sheets from Templates into Workbooks

Inserting a new sheet based on a template

Creating an autotemplate for new sheets

Inserting a new sheet based on an autotemplate


What Is a Template?

A template is a special workbook you can use as a pattern to create other workbooks of the same type. For example, you can create a sales report workbook, save it as a template, and then create weekly sales reports based on the template. In addition to creating new workbooks based on templates, you can insert sheets from templates into your workbooks.

Templates can contain:

Text and graphics, such as a company name and logo.

Formatting and page layout, such as styles and custom headers and footers.

Formulas and macros.

When you open a template, Microsoft Excel creates a copy of the template for you to work with. This leaves the original template intact for the next time you need it.

Create New Workbooks and Insert New Sheets with Autotemplates

You can create special templates, called autotemplates, in your startup or alternate startup directory. You can then use autotemplates as the basis for all new workbooks and all new sheets you insert into your workbooks. Autotemplates are just templates saved with a specific name, in a specific location.

See Also

Help

Overview of Creating and Editing Workbook Templates

Overview of Creating New Workbooks from Templates

Overview of Inserting New Sheets from Templates into Workbooks

User's Guide

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"


Overview of Creating and Editing Workbook Templates

You can save any workbook as a template. Once you do, you can create new workbooks based on that template. You can also open the original template to edit it.

You can also create autotemplates in your startup directory or alternate startup directory to change the default workbook. When you create autotemplates, you can use them as the basis for all new workbooks you create and all new sheets you insert into workbooks. For information about creating autotemplates, see Overview of Creating New Workbooks from Templates and Overview of Inserting New Sheets from Templates into Workbooks.

See Also

Help

Opening and editing the original template

Saving a workbook as a template

What Is a Template?

User's Guide

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"


Saving a workbook as a template

Overview

1.	Create a workbook with all the styles, formatting, text, and formulas you want. You can also open an existing workbook that you want to use as a template.

2.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

3.	In the File Name box, type the name you want for the template.

4.	Select the directory and drive where you want to save the template.

5.	In the Save File As Type box, select Template.

Microsoft Excel adds the extension .XLT to the filename.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Creating a new workbook based on a template

Getting quick access to your templates

Inserting a new sheet based on a template

Opening and editing the original template

Save As Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"


Opening and editing the original template

Overview

1.	Click the Open button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+O

2.	Select the template you want to open.

3.	Hold down SHIFT and choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel opens the original template for editing.

4.	Edit the template as needed.

5.	Click the Save button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+S

See Also

Help

Open Button

Save Button

Getting quick access to your templates

Saving a workbook as a template

User's Guide

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"


Overview of Creating New Workbooks from Templates

To create a new workbook based on a template, just open the template. Microsoft Excel creates a copy of the template for you to work on, leaving the original template intact.

You can save templates in your startup directory or alternate startup directory, so you can select them when you choose the New command from the File menu. You can also create autotemplates in your startup or alternate startup directory that become the basis for new sheets you insert into workbooks.

Caution  When linking workbooks, do not use the original template as a source workbook. Because you always work with a copy created from a template, you will break the links from the original template. However, you can create formulas that reference other sheets in the same template.

See Also

Help

Changing the default new workbook using an autotemplate

Creating a new workbook based on a template

Getting quick access to your templates

What Is a Template?

User's Guide

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"


Creating a new workbook based on a template

Overview

To use a template in your startup directory

1.	From the File menu, choose New.

Shortcut:	CTRL+N

2.	Select the template on which you want to base a new workbook.

Microsoft Excel creates a copy of the template for you to use, and gives it a temporary name.

To use a template in any directory

1.	Click the Open button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+O

2.	Select the directory, drive, and filename of the template you want to use.

3.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel creates a copy of the template for you to use, and gives it a temporary name.

Note  When you create a new chart from a chart template, the data series that was used to create the chart on the template is not used for the new chart. Instead, the selection on the active worksheet is used to supply the data series for the new chart. Only the formatting characteristics of the template chart are used.

See Also

Help

Open Button

Getting quick access to your templates

Inserting a new sheet based on a template

New Command (File Menu)

Opening and editing the original template

Saving a workbook as a template

User's Guide

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"


Getting quick access to your templates

Overview

1.	Create the workbook you want, or open an existing workbook.

2.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

3.	In the File Name box, type the name you want.

4.	In the Save File As Type box, select Template.

5.	In the Directories box, select your XLSTART startup or alternate startup directory.

6.	Choose the OK button.

The next time you choose the New command from the File menu, your template will be listed in the dialog box.

See Also

Help

New Command (File Menu)

Save As Command (File Menu)

Saving a workbook as a template

User's Guide

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"


Changing the default new workbook using an autotemplate

Overview

1.	Create the workbook you want, or open an existing workbook.

2.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

3.	In the File Name box, type book

4.	In the Save File As Type box, select Template.

5.	In the Directories box, select your XLSTART startup or alternate startup directory.

6.	Choose the OK button.

7.	From the File menu, choose Close.

The next time you click the New Workbook button, Microsoft Excel will create a new workbook based on this template. When you choose the New command from the File menu, select Workbook to create a new workbook based on this template.

See Also

Help

Creating an autotemplate for new sheets

New Command (File Menu)

Save As Command (File Menu)

Saving a workbook as a template

User's Guide

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"


Overview of Inserting New Sheets from Templates into Workbooks

You can insert sheets from a template into your existing workbook. You can also create sheet autotemplates in your startup directory or alternate startup directory that become the basis of new sheets you insert into your workbooks.

See Also

Help

Creating an autotemplate for new sheets

Inserting a new sheet based on a template

Inserting a new sheet based on an autotemplate

What Is a Template?

User's Guide

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"


Creating an autotemplate for new sheets

Overview

1.	Create or open a workbook you want to use as a template. Your finished workbook should contain only a single sheet.

2.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

3.	In the File Name box, type the following name for the type of sheet in the workbook:

For a worksheet, name the file SHEET.XLT

For a dialog, name the file DIALOG.XLT

For a Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro sheet, name the file MACRO.XLT

4.	In the Directories box, select the XLSTART directory or your alternate startup directory.

5.	In the Save File As Type box, select Template.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Changing the default new workbook using an autotemplate

Inserting a new sheet based on an autotemplate

Opening a workbook automatically

Save As Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"


Inserting a new sheet based on a template

Overview

Note  To do this procedure, the template must be in your startup directory or alternate startup directory.

1.	Select the sheet to the right of where you want to insert the new sheet.

2.	From the sheet tab shortcut menu, choose Insert.

3.	Select the template whose sheet you want to insert.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Choosing a shortcut menu command

Creating an autotemplate for new sheets

Opening a workbook automatically

Saving a workbook as a template

User's Guide

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"


Inserting a new sheet based on an autotemplate

Overview

Note  To do this procedure, the autotemplate must be in your startup directory or alternate startup directory. Since you want to insert only a single sheet, the workbook template you saved should contain only a single sheet.

From the Insert menu, choose the command that corresponds to the type of sheet you want to insert:

To insert a worksheet, choose Worksheet.

To insert a dialog, choose Macro, and then choose Dialog.

To insert a Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro sheet, choose Macro, and then choose MS Excel 4.0 Macro.

See Also

Help

Changing the default new workbook using an autotemplate

Creating an autotemplate for new sheets

Macro Command (Insert Menu)

Opening a workbook automatically

Worksheet Command (Insert Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 36, "Using Templates to Create Your Own Default Workbooks"


Text Formatting Buttons Category

Align Left Button

Aligns the contents of selected cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text to the left.

Align Right Button

Aligns the contents of selected cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text to the right.

Bold Button

Applies bold formatting to selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text.

Center Across Columns Button

Centers the text from one cell horizontally across the selected cells.

Center Button

Centers the contents of selected cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text.

Cycle Font Color Button

Changes the color of the selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text.

Decrease Font Size Button

Decreases the font size of the selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text to the next smaller size in the Font Size box each time you click the button.

Double Underline Button

Applies a double underline to the selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text.

Font Color Button

Displays a palette of colors you can use to change the font color of selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text.

Font Box

Lists the available fonts.

Font Size Box

Lists available sizes for the font selected in the Font box.

Increase Font Size Button

Increases the font size of the selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text to the next larger size in the Font Size box each time you click the button.

Italic Button

Applies italic formatting to selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text.

Justify Align Button

Evenly redistributes the contents of selected cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text.

Rotate Text Down Button

Turns the selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text on their sides so that you read them from top to bottom.

Rotate Text Up Button

Turns the selected characters in cells, buttons, text boxes, or chart text on their sides so that you read them from bottom to top.

Strikethrough Button

Draws a line through selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text.

Style Box

Applies a cell style to the selection, or lets you define a style based on the current selection.

Underline Button

Applies a single underline to selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text.

Vertical Text Button

Aligns characters in selected cells, buttons, text boxes, or chart text vertically, with each letter below the previous one so that you read them from top to bottom.


Bold Button

Applies bold formatting to selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text. The Bold button is on the Formatting toolbar.

Clicking this button again removes the bold formatting.

Shortcut:	CTRL+B

See Also

Help

Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Font Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Formatting the text in a text box

Overview of Changing Chart Text

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Center Across Columns Button

Centers the text from one cell horizontally across the selected cells. The Center Across Columns button is on the Formatting toolbar.

This button centers the text from the leftmost cell across all selected blank cells to the right.

The data will be centered over the columns even if you readjust column widths.

After centering, the data is still attached to the leftmost cell.

Clicking this button again returns the cell alignment to General.

See Also

Help

Aligning data within cells

Alignment Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Centering cell entries across columns

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Center Button

Centers the contents of selected cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text. The Center button is on the Formatting toolbar.

Clicking this button again returns the alignment to General.

See Also

Help

Aligning data within cells

Alignment Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Centering cell entries across columns

Formatting the text in a text box

Overview of Changing Chart Text

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Decrease Font Size Button

Decreases the font size of the selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text to the next smaller size in the Font Size box each time you click the button. The Decrease Font Size button is in the Text Formatting category.

When the smallest available font size is applied to the text, clicking this button causes a beep.

If you hold down SHIFT while clicking this button, it functions like the Increase Font Size button.

See Also

Help

  Font Size Box

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Font Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Formatting the text in a text box

Overview of Changing Chart Text

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Font Box

Lists the available fonts. The Font box is on the Formatting toolbar.

The available fonts can be applied to selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text.

You can change the font name by selecting the name you want from the list or by typing the name of the font in the Font box.

You can have as many as 256 different fonts in one workbook.

See Also

Help

  Font Size Box

Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Font Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Formatting the text in a text box

Overview of Changing Chart Text

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Font Size Box

Lists available sizes for the font selected in the Font box. The Font Size box is on the Formatting toolbar.

The available font sizes can be applied to selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text.

You can change the font size by selecting the size you want from the list or by typing it in the Font Size box.

See Also

Help

  Font Box

Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Font Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Formatting the text in a text box

Overview of Changing Chart Text

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Increase Font Size Button

Increases the font size of the selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text to the next larger size in the Font Size box each time you click the button. The Increase Font Size button is in the Text Formatting category.

When the largest available font size is applied to the text, clicking this button causes a beep.

If you hold down SHIFT while clicking this button, it functions like the Decrease Font Size button.

See Also

Help

  Font Size Box

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Font Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Formatting the text in a text box

Overview of Changing Chart Text

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Italic Button

Applies italic formatting to selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text. The Italic button is on the Formatting toolbar.

Clicking this button again removes the italic formatting.

Shortcut:	CTRL+I

See Also

Help

Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Font Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Formatting the text in a text box

Overview of Changing Chart Text

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Justify Align Button

Evenly redistributes the contents of selected cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text. The Justify Align button is in the Text Formatting category.

Clicking this button automatically wraps text within a cell.

You must have more than one line of wrapped text to see the justification.

Clicking this button again returns the alignment to General.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Aligning data within cells

Alignment Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Formatting the text in a text box

Justifying text in cells

Overview of Changing Chart Text

Wrapping text in cells

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"


Align Left Button

Aligns the contents of selected cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text to the left. The Align Left button is on the Formatting toolbar.

Clicking this button again returns the alignment to General.

See Also

Help

Aligning data within cells

Alignment Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Formatting the text in a text box

Overview of Changing Chart Text

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Align Right Button

Aligns the contents of selected cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text to the right. The Align Right button is on the Formatting toolbar.

Clicking this button again returns the alignment to General.

See Also

Help

Aligning data within cells

Alignment Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Formatting the text in a text box

Overview of Changing Chart Text

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Rotate Text Down Button

Turns the selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text on their side so that you read them from top to bottom. The Rotate Text Down button is in the Text Formatting category.

You can rotate and wrap text at the same time.

Clicking this button again changes the text alignment to horizontal.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Aligning data within cells

Alignment Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Formatting the text in a text box

Overview of Changing Chart Text

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Rotate Text Up Button

Turns the selected characters in cells, buttons, text boxes, or chart text on their side so that you read them from bottom to top. The Rotate Text Up button is in the Text Formatting category.

You can rotate and wrap text at the same time.

Clicking this button again changes the text alignment to horizontal.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Aligning data within cells

Alignment Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Formatting the text in a text box

Overview of Changing Chart Text

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Strikethrough Button

Draws a line through selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text. The Strikethrough button is in the Text Formatting category.

Clicking this button again removes the strikethrough formatting.

Shortcut:	CTRL+5

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Font Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Formatting the text in a text box

Overview of Changing Chart Text

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Cycle Font Color Button

Changes the color of the selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons or chart text. The Cycle Font Color button is in the Text Formatting category.

The font color changes each time you click the tool.

Holding down SHIFT while clicking the tool reverses the direction of the color changes.

See Also

Help

  Font Color Button

  Font Size Box

Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Font Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Formatting the text in a text box

Overview of Changing Chart Text

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"


Underline Button

Applies a single underline to selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text. The Underline button is on the Formatting toolbar.

Clicking this button again removes the underlining.

Use the Single Accounting or Double Accounting option in the Underline box on the Font tab to apply accounting underlining.

Shortcut:	CTRL+U

See Also

Help

  Double Underline Button

Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Font Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Formatting the text in a text box

Overview of Changing Chart Text

Underlining cell contents

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Double Underline Button

Applies a double underline to selected characters in cells, chart text, text boxes, and buttons. The Double Underline button is in the Text Formatting category.

Clicking this button again removes the double underlining.

Use the Single Accounting or Double Accounting option in the Underline box on the Font tab to apply accounting underlining.

See Also

Help

  Underline Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Font Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Formatting the text in a text box

Overview of Changing Chart Text

Underlining cell contents

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Vertical Text Button

Aligns characters in selected cells, buttons, text boxes, or chart text vertically, with each character below the previous one so that you read from top to bottom. The Vertical Text button is in the Text Formatting category.

Clicking this button again changes the text alignment to horizontal.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Aligning data within cells

Alignment Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Formatting the text in a text box

Overview of Changing Chart Text

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


TipWizard Buttons Category

Tip Help Button

Opens Help to give you more information about the displayed tip.

TipWizard Box

Tips appear here.

TipWizard Button

Opens the TipWizard, which displays tips based on the actions you perform.


TipWizard Box

Tips appear here.

If the tip suggests that you use a toolbar button, the button appears directly to the right of the TipWizard box. If you want to add the button to a toolbar, choose the Toolbars command from the View menu and then drag the button from the TipWizard to a toolbar.

Use the up and down arrows to the right of the tip to scroll through the tips that apply to the work you've done during your Microsoft Excel session.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Using the TipWizard


Tip Help Button

If you need more information, click the Tip Help button to the right of the TipWizard box. This opens the Help window and displays a topic related to the tip.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Using the TipWizard


Tips

Working with Charts

Customizing Microsoft Excel

Working with Graphic Objects

Editing Data

Entering Data

Working with Files and Documents

Formatting Data

Working with Formulas

Getting Information While You Work

Working with Macros

Moving and Sizing

Working with Pivot Tables

Printing

Protecting, Auditing, and Annotating

Analyzing Data and Solving Problems

Selecting and Choosing

Importing, Exporting, and Sharing Data

Sorting, Filtering, Linking, and Outlining


Information on Controls

For information about controls, see Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes," in the Microsoft Excel Visual Basic User's Guide.


Information on Number Formatting for Formulas

The value that results from a formula is displayed in the number format of the cell containing the formula. If no number format has been applied to that cell, the value is displayed in the number format of the first cell referred to by the formula. For example, if the cell that contains the formula =A1+A2 has no number format applied, then the value produced by the formula is displayed in the same number format as cell A1.


Information on How References Are Adjusted

For information about how references are adjusted when they are copied or moved, see "Moving and Copying Formulas and References" in Chapter 10 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide.


Information on Text Operators

For information about operators for manipulating text in formulas, see "Use Formulas to Analyze Your Data" in Chapter 10 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide.


Information on Microsoft Windows

For information about printing files directly from the File Manager or for information about TrueType fonts, see your Microsoft Windows documentation.


Information on Switching from Lotus 1-2-3

For information about running Lotus 1-2-3 macros, see "Microsoft Excel for Windows runs 1-2-3 Macros" in Chapter 3 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide.


Information on Getting a Registration Card

If you cannot find the registration card in your Microsoft Excel package, call 1-800-426-9400 to get a registration card.


No Topic Available

There is no further information about this tip in Help.


Tips for Working with Charts

You can click a corner of a 3-D chart to select it; then you can drag the selection handles to rotate the chart.

You can double-click an embedded chart to activate it.

In most charts, you can format an individual data marker. Click the marker until it is the only one selected, and then choose Selected Series from the Format menu.

To check the spelling of text on a chart, use the Spelling button or the Spelling command on the Tools menu. All text that is not linked to the worksheet will be checked.

To change the chart type without losing custom formatting you have applied, use the Chart Type command on the Format menu.

To select a single data marker, click once to select the series, and then click again to select the data marker.

To make a chart template into a custom autoformat which you can apply to any chart, choose AutoFormat from the Format menu, select User-Defined, and then choose the Customize button.

To add labels to all points in a series, select the series and choose the Data Labels command from the Insert menu.

For line charts only, you can choose Options from the Tools menu, and then specify on the Charting tab whether you want blanks and errors omitted, treated as zeros, or interpolated into the chart.

To create your own combination chart, select a series on the chart, choose Chart Type from the Format menu, and then select a different chart type for the series.

To change the number of colored regions on a 3-D surface chart, select the value axis, choose Selected Axis from the Format menu, then change the Major Unit on the Scale tab.

You can change the pattern of a region by double-clicking the marker for that region in the legend.

To change the amount that bars or columns overlap, choose Bar Group or Column Group from the Format menu. Then change the percentage in the Overlap box on the Options tab.

You can use the Page Setup command on the File menu to specify the size of the chart when printed. Select Full Page, Scale to Fit Page, or Custom on the Chart tab.

Double-clicking an object or a part of a chart is a shortcut for opening the dialog box for formatting that object.

You can add gridlines to a chart by choosing Gridlines from the Insert menu.

You can use custom graphics as markers in a bar, column, line, or radar chart. With the markers selected, paste a picture from the Clipboard.

To print several charts on one page, embed the charts in a worksheet and print the sheet.

Tip of the Day: To create a chart sheet based on your selection, press F11.

Tip of the Day: To add data to a chart embedded in a worksheet, drag the selected cells onto the chart.

Tip of the Day: You can convert a chart sheet into an embedded chart. Select the entire chart, copy it, and then paste it onto another sheet.

Tip of the Day: To change the chart template on which new charts are based, choose Options from the Tools menu, and then select the Chart tab.

Tip of the Day: To include more than one chart type in a chart (for example, Column and Area), select a data series and change its chart type by choosing Chart Type from the Format menu.

Tip of the Day: You can copy a chart's data and formats to another chart. Select the chart, copy it, select the other chart, and then paste.

Tip of the Day: To copy a chart's formats to another chart, select the chart, copy it, select the other chart, and then choose Paste Special from the Edit menu.

Use the ChartWizard button on the Standard toolbar to create a chart.

As a shortcut for creating an area chart, click the Area Chart AutoFormat button.

As a shortcut for creating an bar chart, click the Bar Chart AutoFormat button.

As a shortcut for creating an column chart, click the Column Chart AutoFormat button.

As a shortcut for creating a stacked column chart, click the Stacked Column Chart AutoFormat button.

As a shortcut for creating a line chart, click the Line Chart AutoFormat button.

As a shortcut for creating a pie chart, click the Pie Chart AutoFormat button.

As a shortcut for creating an xy (scatter) chart, click the XY (Scatter) Chart AutoFormat button.

As a shortcut for creating a 3-D area chart, click the 3-D Area Chart AutoFormat button.

As a shortcut for creating a 3-D bar chart, click the 3-D Bar Chart AutoFormat button.

As a shortcut for creating a 3-D column chart, click the 3-D Column Chart AutoFormat button.

As a shortcut for creating a 3-D perspective column chart, click the 3-D Perspective Column Chart AutoFormat button.

As a shortcut for creating a 3-D line chart, click the 3-D Line Chart AutoFormat button.

As a shortcut for creating a 3-D pie chart, click the 3-D Pie Chart AutoFormat button.

As a shortcut for creating a 3-D surface chart, click the 3-D Surface Chart AutoFormat button.

As a shortcut for creating a radar chart with markers, click the Radar Chart AutoFormat button.

As a shortcut for creating a combination chart with columns overlaid by lines, click the Line/Column Chart AutoFormat button.

As a shortcut for creating a volume/hi-lo-close chart, click the Volume/Hi-Lo-Close Chart AutoFormat button.

As a shortcut for adding or deleting major gridlines for the value axis of a chart, click the Horizontal Gridlines button on the Chart toolbar.

You can add or delete a legend by clicking the Legend button on the Chart toolbar.

You can also click the New Chart button as a shortcut for creating a new chart.

As a shortcut for adding or deleting major gridlines for the category axis, click the Vertical Gridlines button.

To display the value of a cell in a text box, select the text box and type an equal sign (=) followed by a cell reference in the formula bar.

To turn off the gridlines, choose Options from the Tools menu and select the View tab.

To add data to a chart embedded on a worksheet, select the data, and then drag it onto the chart.

To modify the chart you've created, click the ChartWizard button while the chart is selected.

To make a doughnut chart, use the Doughnut Chart button on the Chart AutoFormat toolbar.

To link the chart title or axis title to a worksheet cell, select the title and then type an equal sign (=) followed by the cell reference.

You can change the chart type for a series by selecting the series and choosing Chart Type from the Format Menu.

On a chart sheet, you can size and move the entire chart area. Choose Page Setup from the File menu, and then select the Custom option on the Chart tab.

You can make each marker a different color by choosing Column Group from the Format menu, selecting the Options tab and selecting the Vary Colors By Point option.

You can make each marker a different color by choosing Bar Group from the Format menu, selecting the Options tab and selecting the Vary Colors By Point option.

To change the point at which the category and value axes cross, double-click the value axis, select the Scale tab, and change the value in the 'Category (X) Axis Crosses At' box.

To change the point at which the category and value axes cross, double-click the category axis, select the Scale tab, and change the number in the 'Value (Y) Axis Crosses At Category Number' box.

If data labels overlap, click one data label and drag it to an empty area.

You can move chart titles anywhere on the chart by selecting a title and dragging it.

You can now move or size the legend. Drag to move it, or drag a sizing handle to change the size.

Tip of the Day: To use the layout of the current chart for all new charts, choose Options from the Tools menu and click 'Use the Current Chart' on the Chart tab.

You can move or size the plot area on a chart. Drag to move it, or drag a selection handle to change the size.

To make the active chart into a custom template, choose AutoFormat from the Format menu, select User Defined, and then click the Custom button. In the next dialog box, click the Add button.

You can delete the legend by selecting it and pressing DEL.

You can move data labels anywhere on the chart by dragging them with the mouse.

You can use the Chart Type button on the Chart toolbar to quickly change the chart type.


Tips for Customizing Microsoft Excel

Tip of the Day: You can view two parts of the same document at once. From the Window menu, choose Split to see both parts in one window, or choose New Window to see each part in a separate window.

To change the default font for workbooks created in future sessions, choose Options from the Tools menu; then change the Standard Font and Size options on the General tab.

To see more of a worksheet at once, change the percentage in the Zoom Control box on the Standard toolbar to less than 100. Or choose Full Screen from the View menu.

You have created several toolbars each containing a single button. If you put these buttons onto a single toolbar, you can show and hide them all at once.

Dragging a button outside the Customize dialog box automatically creates a new toolbar.

If you want to restore a built-in toolbar to its original state, choose Toolbars from the View menu, select the toolbar, and then choose the Reset button.

To restore all toolbars to the configurations they had when you started this session, open the file EXCEL.XLB in the directory containing Microsoft Windows.

You can use the Add-Ins command on the Tools menu to specify the add-ins you want to open each time you start Microsoft Excel.

You can also press CTRL+9 to hide rows.

As a shortcut for unhiding rows, you can press CTRL+SHIFT+( .

You can also press CTRL+0 (zero) to hide columns.

As a shortcut for unhiding columns, you can press CTRL+SHIFT+).

As a shortcut for alternating between the display of values and formulas, press CTRL+` (single left quotation mark).

To quickly show or hide the Standard toolbar, press CTRL+7.

To move a docked toolbar to the last floating position it occupied, double-click the toolbar background. Double-click again to return it to the last docked position.

To split a window, either drag the split box located above the vertical scroll bar or drag the split box to the right of the horizontal scroll bar.

Tip of the Day: You can customize the default workbook that opens each time you start Microsoft Excel. Customize a new workbook, and then save it as BOOK.XLT in the XLSTART directory.

Tip of the Day: To view your sheets at different levels of magnification, choose Zoom from the View menu or use the Zoom Control box on the Standard toolbar.

Tip of the Day: If you have installed the Slide Show add-in, you can create on-screen presentations of Microsoft Excel documents. Choose New from the File menu, and then choose Slides.

Tip of the Day: To customize a built-in toolbar or to create your own, choose the Customize button in the Toolbars dialog box (View menu).

Tip of the Day: If you want a workbook to be opened whenever you start Microsoft Excel, save it in the XLSTART subdirectory of the directory where Microsoft Excel is installed.

Tip of the Day: If you want to freeze a row at the top of the window, select the row below it, and then choose Freeze Panes from the Window menu.

You can use the Zoom Control box on the Standard toolbar as a shortcut for zooming in or out.

As a shortcut for freezing panes, click the Freeze Panes button.

To zoom out, hold down SHIFT while you click the Zoom In button.

To zoom in, hold down SHIFT while you click the Zoom Out button.

Click any toolbar with the right mouse button to display a shortcut menu for showing, hiding, and customizing toolbars.

To customize a toolbar, click a toolbar with the right mouse button and then choose Customize from the shortcut menu.

While the Customize dialog box is displayed, you can click any toolbar button (not in the dialog box) to display a shortcut menu that includes the Copy Button Image command.

With the Customize dialog box displayed, you can click any toolbar button with the right mouse button to display a shortcut menu that includes the Assign Macro To Button command.

You can add buttons you use often to the Standard toolbar. Click the toolbar with the right mouse button, choose Customize, and drag the buttons you want onto the toolbar.

You can unhide rows or columns by selecting a visible range that includes the hidden cells and then choosing Unhide.

To zoom the window to exactly fit a certain area, select the area, choose Zoom from the View menu, and then select the Fit Selection option.

To remove a split bar, double-click it.

Tip of the Day: To change the image on a button, choose Toolbars from the View menu, click a toolbar button with the right mouse button, and then choose Edit Button Image.

Tip of the Day: To change a toolbar button image, copy the new button image, choose Toolbars from the View menu, click the button with the right mouse button, then choose Paste Button Image.

Tip of the Day: You can display your toolbar buttons in color or in black and white. Choose Toolbars from the View menu and then select or clear the Color Toolbars check box.

You don't have to close the default workbook manually. Opening another workbook at the start of a session closes the default workbook automatically.

Instead of hiding the horizontal scroll bar, you can make it smaller by dragging the handle at its left. To restore the scroll bar to its original size, double-click the handle.

You do not need to use the Toolbars command to move or reshape a toolbar. You can reshape a floating toolbar by dragging its borders at any time.

Tip of the Day: If you save a workbook as a template, you can create a new workbook containing the same formatting and styles simply by opening the template.

You can use the Zoom Out button to magnify the sheet.


Tips for Working with Graphic Objects

To display formatted text on your worksheet, use a text box. Text boxes are easy to size, format, and move.

To speed up scrolling for embedded charts and bitmaps, choose Options from the Tools menu, select the View tab, and then select Show Placeholders under Objects.

You can link the text in a text box to a worksheet cell. Select the text box and type an equal sign followed by the cell reference (for example, =Sheet1!A2).

If you want to change the appearance of the shaft or head of an arrow, double-click on the arrow.

To group several graphic objects so that you can move or size them at once, select all the objects, choose Placement from the Format menu, and then choose Group.

To draw an arrow or line that is exactly horizontal, vertical, or at a 45-degree angle, hold down SHIFT as you draw.

To draw an exact square, hold down SHIFT while you draw a rectangle.

To draw perfect circles or segments of circles, hold down SHIFT while you draw ovals and arcs.

To align an object to the gridlines, hold down ALT while you draw the object.

To draw multiple objects in succession, double-click a drawing button. When you're finished, press ESC.

To keep the proportions of an object constant, hold down SHIFT while dragging a corner.

To copy an object, hold down CTRL while you drag the object.

You can hold down CTRL while you drag an object to make a copy of it, SHIFT to restrict movement to vertical or horizontal, and ALT to align the object to the grid.

You can change the cells to which a picture is linked. Select the picture, and then type an equal sign (=) in the formula bar, followed by a cell reference.

To print different areas on separate pages, choose Page Setup from the File menu, and then select more than one range in the Print Area box on the Sheet tab.

You can print multiple areas on a single page. Use the Camera button to take pictures of the ranges, then place them in an empty sheet and print it.

As a shortcut for alternating among hiding objects, displaying objects, and displaying placeholders for objects, press CTRL+6.

Tip of the Day: Microsoft Excel 5.0 now sorts objects along with data, as long as each object is contained within a single row or column.

Tip of the Day: To draw lines, rectangles, arcs and polygons on a worksheet or chart, use the buttons on the Drawing toolbar. You can also use the Shape button.

Tip of the Day: To paste a picture of a cell, chart, or graphic object into another application, select the object; then hold down SHIFT while choosing Copy Picture from the Edit menu.

To select all the objects on a sheet, select an object, and then press CTRL+A.

You can quickly select multiple graphic objects using the Drawing Selection button.

You can click the Group Objects button on the Drawing toolbar as a shortcut for grouping graphic objects.

You can ungroup graphic objects by using the Ungroup Objects button on Drawing toolbar.

As a shortcut for placing an object in front of all other objects, select the object, and then click the Bring To Front button on the Formatting toolbar.

As a shortcut for placing an object in behind all other objects, select the object, and then click the Send To Back button on the Formatting toolbar.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Arc button to draw a filled arc.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Filled Arc button to draw an unfilled arc.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Bring To Front button to send the selected object to the back.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Send To Back button to bring the selected object to the front.

You can hold down SHIFT as you click the Filled Freeform button to draw an unfilled freeform.

You can hold down SHIFT as you click the Freeform button to draw a filled freeform.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Filled Ellipse button to draw an unfilled ellipse.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Ellipse button to draw a filled ellipse.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Filled Polygon button to draw an unfilled polygon.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Polygon button to draw a filled polygon.

You can hold down SHIFT as you click the Filled Rectangle button to draw an unfilled rectangle.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Rectangle button to draw a filled rectangle.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Group Objects button to ungroup objects.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Ungroup Objects button to group objects.

You can double-click an object to change its border, fill pattern, or other properties.

If you want to select an object that has a macro assigned to it without running the macro, hold down CTRL while you click the object.

To display long text, click the Text Box button to create a text box. You can also embed a Microsoft Word 6.0 document in your workbook.

Press the DEL key to delete all selected objects.

To change the way an object is sized when the underlying cells are resized, select the object, choose Object from the Format menu, and then select the option you want on the Properties tab.

To change the way an object moves when the underlying cells are edited, select the object, choose Object from the Format menu, and select the option you want on the Properties tab.

To prevent an object from being printed on a sheet, select the object, choose Object from the Format menu, and then clear the Print Object check box on the Properties tab.

You can add the Shape button to a toolbar. This button has an downward-pointing arrow that displays a palette of drawing buttons for easy access.

You can also ungroup rows or columns by holding down SHIFT while you click the Group button.

You can also group rows or columns by holding down SHIFT while you click the Ungroup button.

You can also draw dialog box controls on a worksheet or a chart sheet and use them to change underlying cell values.

When you select a graphic object, the name of the object appears to the left of the formula bar.

If you don't want to paste objects along with cells, choose Options from the Tools menu, and then clear the 'Cut, Copy, and Sort Objects with Cells' check box on the Edit tab.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Check Box button to draw a filled check box instead of a transparent one.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Option Button on the Forms toolbar to draw a filled option button instead of a transparent one.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Label button to draw a filled label instead of a transparent one.


Tips for Editing Data

Instead of editing the contents of a cell in the formula bar, you can edit directly in the cell by double-clicking it.

If you want to check the spelling of your document before printing, choose Spelling from the Tools menu.

You can type an asterisk (*) in the Find What box to match any number of characters or a question mark (?) to match any single character.

You can add words to a custom dictionary by using the Add Words To option in the Spelling dialog box. These words will be treated as correct.

After you've copied cells, you can press ENTER as a shortcut for pasting them (this works one time only).

As a shortcut for finding the next occurrence of a number or text, press SHIFT+F4. To find the previous occurrence, press CTRL+SHIFT+F4.

To activate the formula bar for editing, press F2.

To insert cells, you can press CTRL+SHIFT+PLUS SIGN (+).

To delete the selection, you can press CTRL+MINUS SIGN (-).

As a shortcut for clearing objects or the contents of selected cells, press the DEL key.

To move cell contents, drag the border of the selected cells to another location. To copy cell contents, hold down CTRL while you drag.

When you drag the cell border with the right mouse button, a shortcut menu is displayed. From the shortcut menu, you can choose options for copying, moving, or pasting.

To insert a range of cells, hold down SHIFT while you drag the fill handle at the corner of the selection.

To delete a range of cells, hold down SHIFT while you drag the fill handle up and to the left. The fill handle is located at the corner of the selection.

To clear a range of cells, drag the fill handle up and to the left. The fill handle is located at the corner of the selection.

Tip of the Day: To check the spelling of text in the active worksheet or chart, choose Spelling from the Tools menu or click the Spelling button.

Tip of the Day: You can transpose rows and columns in a selected range. Copy the range, select a single cell, choose Paste Special from the Edit menu, and then select the Transpose check box.

To check spelling, click the Spelling button on the Standard toolbar.

To cut cells or graphic objects, click the Cut button on the Standard toolbar.

To copy cells or graphic objects, click the Copy button on the Standard toolbar.

To paste cells or graphic objects, click the Paste button on the Standard toolbar.

To insert cells, click the Insert button.

To delete cells, click the Delete button.

If you want to search your entire worksheet for a specific value, select just a single cell before choosing Find.

If you want to search only within a certain range of cells for a specific value, select the range before you choose Find.

To paste only cell values, click the Paste Values button.

To clear formulas, you can also use the Clear Contents button.

You can also click the Clear Formats button as a shortcut for clearing formats.

To delete entire rows, click the Delete Row button.

You can also use the Delete Column button as a shortcut for deleting entire columns.

To insert entire rows, click the Insert Row button.

To insert entire columns, click the Insert Column button.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Delete button to insert cells.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Insert button to delete cells.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Delete Column button to insert columns.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Insert Column button to delete columns.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Delete Row button to insert rows.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Insert Row button to delete rows.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Paste Formats button to paste values.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Paste Values button to paste formats.

You only need to select the upper-left cell of the range in which you want to paste data.

Tip of the Day: To decrease all the values in a range by 10 percent, type .9 in a cell. Copy the cell and select the range. Choose Paste Special from the Edit menu and select Multiply.

To specify how to fill data, drag the fill handle at the corner of the selection with the right mouse button. A shortcut menu will appear from which you can choose various fill options.

To avoid being asked if you want to overwrite nonblank cells, choose Options from the Tools menu; then clear the 'Alert before Overwriting Cells' check box on the Edit tab.

You have copied cells which are not visible. To copy only visible cells, choose Go To from the Edit menu, click the Special button, and then select the Visible Cells Only option before copying.

F7 is now the keyboard shortcut for checking spelling. SHIFT+F4 is the shortcut for Find Next and CTRL+SHIFT+F4 is the shortcut for Find Previous.

To copy text into a text box, copy the text in the formula bar, position the insertion point in the text box, and then paste it.

You can hold down CTRL while you drag to copy the data instead of moving it.

If you don't want to edit directly in cells, choose Options from the Tools menu and then clear the 'Edit Directly in Cell' check box on the Edit tab.


Tips for Entering Data

Your data includes both numbers and text. Type ' (apostrophe) at the beginning of each number to change it to text. Your list will then be sorted correctly.

To enter information down a column without having to use the Down Arrow key, choose Options from the Tools menu and select 'Move Selection after Enter' on the Edit tab.

To insert the current date into the formula bar, press CTRL+; (semicolon). To insert the current time, press CTRL+SHIFT+; (semicolon).

To copy the formula in the active cell to all cells in the selected range, press F2, and then press CTRL+ENTER.

To increment a single number, hold down CTRL while you drag the fill handle at the corner of the selection.

To copy without incrementing (for most selections), hold down CTRL while you drag the fill handle at the corner of the selection.

Tip of the Day: You can enter tabs and carriage returns in a cell to make the text easier to read. To enter a tab, press CTRL+ALT+TAB. To enter a carriage return, press ALT+ENTER.

You can also use the Fill Right button to fill cells to the right.

You can also click the Fill Down button to fill cells down.

AutoFill can increment both the quarter and the year at the same time. For example: 1Q93, Q193, 1st Qtr 93, 1st Quarter 1993.

To create a custom AutoFill list, choose Options from the Tools menu, and then select the Custom Lists tab.

To increment months, weekdays, quarters, or other series, select the first item in the series, and then drag the fill handle at the corner of the selection.

To enter a fraction, type 0, a space, and then the fraction.

To enter a value in currency format, type a dollar sign before the value.

To enter a value in percent format, type a percent sign after the value.

While you are editing a cell, you can insert a tab by pressing CTRL+ALT+TAB.


Tips for Working with Files and Documents

To open more than one workbook at a time, hold down CTRL while you click the workbook names in the Open dialog box. Then choose OK.

The names of the four most recently opened files appear at the bottom of the File menu. You can choose one of these names to reopen that file.

You can type a network path such as \\netserver\user\sales.xls directly into the File Name box in the Open dialog box, without using the Network button.

To search for a specific file, use the Find File command on the File menu.

To print several documents at once, choose Find from the File menu, select all the documents you want to print, and then choose Print.

To save a workbook without displaying a dialog box, choose Save from the File menu (rather than Save As).

To close all workbooks at once, hold down SHIFT while you choose the Close All command from the File menu.

You can save a file under a new name by pressing F12 or ALT+F2.

You can close the active document window by pressing CTRL+F4.

Tip of the Day: To set the starting page number for the active sheet, choose Page Setup from the File menu; then type the number in the 'First Page Number' box on the Page tab.

Tip of the Day: To back up the previous version of a workbook each time you save a new version, choose Save As from File menu, then choose Options and select Always Create Backup.

Tip of the Day: If colored areas on your worksheet do not print well, choose Page Setup from the File menu, and then select the Black And White option on the Sheet tab.

To quickly create a new workbook, click the New Workbook button on the Standard toolbar.

To open a file, click the Open button on the Standard toolbar.

As a shortcut for saving files, click the Save button on the Standard toolbar.

To print more than one copy of a sheet, type the number of copies you want in the Copies box in the Print dialog box (File menu).

If you'd like all new workbooks to be based on the template you just opened, save the template with the name BOOK.XLT in the XLSTART directory.

To print colored cells more clearly on a black and white printer, choose Page Setup from the File menu; then select the Black and White option on the Sheet tab.

On some black and white printers, the printed copy may look better if you choose Page Setup from the File menu, and then select the 'Black and White' check box on the Sheet tab.

Tip of the Day: To open a workbook, drag the document icon from File Manager into the Microsoft Excel window or onto the minimized Microsoft Excel icon.

You can double-click a workbook icon in the File Manager to start Microsoft Excel and open the workbook at the same time.

You can also press CTRL+N to open a new document.

You can specify how many sheets you want in each new workbook. Choose Options from the Tools menu, select the General tab, and type a number in the 'Sheets in New Workbook' box.

If you want to be asked each time you open a workbook whether to open it as read-only, choose Save As from the File menu, choose the Options button, and then select Read Only Recommended.

If you don't want to be prompted for summary information when you save a new workbook, choose Options from the Tools menu, and then clear the Prompt For Summary Info check box on the General tab.


Tips for Formatting Data

As a shortcut for adding a bottom border to selected cells, click the Borders button on the Formatting toolbar.

As a shortcut for adding a shadow border to selected cells or objects, click the Drop Shadow button on the Drawing toolbar.

As a shortcut for changing the color of the selected object, cell, or chart, click the Color button on the Formatting toolbar.

As a shortcut for adding a bottom double border to selected cells, click the Borders button on the Formatting toolbar.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Decrease Decimal button to increase decimals.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Increase Decimal button to decrease decimals.

If you want the text box to automatically resize to fit the text, choose Object from the Format menu, and then select the Automatic Size option on the Alignment tab.

If you want to keep a palette displayed so that you can use it many times, drag the palette off the toolbar.

Just click the button itself (not the arrow next to it) to apply the format or use the tool shown on the button.

To change the default formats for the entire workbook, choose Style from the Format menu, and then change the format of the Normal style.

To change the width of a column to accommodate the widest data in that column, double-click the right boundary of the column heading.

To change the height of a row to accommodate the tallest character in that row, double-click the bottom boundary of the row heading.

To adjust column widths for best fit for many columns at once, select all the columns and then double-click the right border of any selected column header.

When you choose Column from the Format menu and then choose AutoFit Selection, the column width will be adjusted to fit the longest entry in the selection.

To underline currency figures, choose Cells from the Format menu, select the Font tab, and select the Single Accounting or Double Accounting underline.

To format the data in a cell with single or double underlining, choose Cells from the Format menu, select the Font tab, and then select Single Accounting or Double Accounting under Underline.

You can press CTRL+SHIFT+~ as a shortcut for applying the General number format.

As a shortcut for applying the currency format with two decimal places, press CTRL+SHIFT+$.

To apply the percent format with no decimal places, press CTRL+SHIFT+%.

As a shortcut for applying the exponential format with two decimal places, press CTRL+SHIFT+^.

To apply the day-month-year date format, press CTRL+SHIFT+#.

To apply the hours:minutes AM/PM format, press CTRL+SHIFT+@.

As a shortcut for applying the number format with two decimal places and commas, press CTRL+SHIFT+!.

To apply an outline border, you can also press CTRL+SHIFT+&.

You can also press CTRL+SHIFT+_ (underscore) to remove borders.

You can also press CTRL+B as a shortcut for applying or removing bold.

You can also press CTRL+i as a shortcut for applying or removing italics.

You can also press CTRL+U as a shortcut for applying or removing underline.

To quickly apply or remove strike-through format to characters, press CTRL+5.

Tip of the Day: When you see #### in a cell, the number is too wide to be displayed. To widen the column to display the number, double-click the right boundary of the column heading.

Tip of the Day: To center text horizontally within the selected cells, use the Center Across Columns button on the Formatting toolbar.

Tip of the Day: To apply one of more than 15 built-in table formats to a range of cells, choose AutoFormat from the Format menu.

Tip of the Day: You can suppress the display of positive, negative or zero values by creating a custom number format in which the appropriate section is left blank.

Tip of the Day: The borders of adjoining cells overlap. If you delete the top border of a cell and it remains, delete the bottom border of the cell above it.

To apply a style, choose a style from the Style box.

To create a style by example, select a cell you have formatted and then type a style name into the Style box.

You can use the Format Painter button on the Standard toolbar to copy formats between cells or objects.

If you'd like to apply this same autoformat again, use the AutoFormat button. It remembers the last AutoFormat you applied.

To change the font, select a font from the Font box on the Formatting toolbar.

To change the font size, select a size from the Font Size box on the Formatting toolbar.

As a shortcut for making text or numbers bold, click the Bold button on the Standard toolbar. To remove the bold format, click the button again.

To make text or numbers italic, you can click the Italic button on the Standard toolbar. To remove the italic format, click the button again.

To underline text or numbers, click the Underline button on the Formatting toolbar. To remove underlining, click the button again.

To double-underline the selected cells or characters, click the Double-underline button.

To make the contents of the selected cells align to the left, click the Align Left button on the Formatting toolbar.

To center the contents of a cell, click the Center button on the Formatting toolbar.

To make the contents of selected cells align to the right, click the Align Right button on the Formatting toolbar.

To add or change cell borders, use the Borders button on the Formatting toolbar.

To change patterns, use the Pattern button.

To increase font size, click the Increase Font Size button.

As a shortcut for centering text within a selected range, click the Center Across Selection button on the Formatting toolbar.

As a shortcut for adding an outline border to selected cells, click the Borders button on the Formatting toolbar.

You can also click the Strikeout button as a shortcut for striking through text.

To justify the text in a cell, text box, or button, use the Justify Align button.

As a shortcut for applying the currency style, click the Currency Style button on the Formatting toolbar.

As a shortcut for applying the percent style, click the Percent Style button on the Formatting toolbar.

As a shortcut for applying the comma style, click the Comma Style button on the Formatting toolbar.

As a shortcut for adding decimal places, click the Increase Decimal button on the Formatting toolbar.

As a shortcut for decreasing decimal places, click the Decrease Decimal button on the Formatting toolbar.

As a shortcut for adding a left border to selected cells, click the Borders button on the Formatting toolbar.

As a shortcut for adding a right border to selected cells, click the Borders button on the Formatting toolbar.

As a shortcut for adding a top border to selected cells, click the Borders button on the Formatting toolbar.

To change the color of the font in the selected text or cell, use the Font Color button.

As a shortcut for changing the orientation of the selected text to vertical, click the Vertical Text button.

As a shortcut for changing the orientation of the selected text to rotated and facing up, click the Rotate Text Up button.

As a shortcut for changing the orientation of the selected text to rotated and facing down, click the Rotate Text Down button.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Decrease Font Size button to increase font size.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Increase Font Size button to decrease the font size.

To see how your table will look with different autoformats, hold down SHIFT while you click the AutoFormat button to see the next autoformat.

Tip of the Day: To display numbers in thousands or millions, create a number format that ends with one or two commas. For example, the format '0,' will display '2000' as '2'.

As an alternative to creating a text box, you can apply different fonts to individual characters within a cell.

You can display more than one line of text in a cell. Choose Cells from the Format menu, and then select Wrap Text on the Alignment tab.

To change the height of a row, drag the bottom boundary of the row heading.

To change the width of a column, drag the right boundary of the column heading.

You have changed the standard font for all future sessions. To change the standard font for this workbook only, choose Style from the Format menu; then modify the font of the Normal style.

An easy way to copy individual styles from another workbook: copy the cells formatted with the styles you want from that workbook.

To format numbers so that negative values are red, you can use one of the built-in number formats. Choose Cells from the Format menu and select a format on the Number tab.

To put an outline border around a range of cells, choose Cells from the Format menu, and then select Outline on the Border tab.

You can choose the AutoFormat command from the Format menu to format your subtotaled list so that it is easier to read and more attractive.

You can paint a range larger than the original selection. The format will repeat as many times as necessary to fill the larger range.

If you double-click the Format Painter button it will stay selected so that you can paint multiple areas with the same formats.

To adjust row heights for best fit for many rows at once, select all the rows and then double-click the bottom border of any selected row header.

If you want cells to always appear with a certain formatting even after they have been cut or cleared, change the Normal style.

You can format a cell so that a number is treated as text. Choose Cells from the Format menu, and then select Text on the Number tab.

As a shortcut for selecting the Style box, press ALT+' (apostrophe).

As a shortcut for selecting the Font Name box, press CTRL+SHIFT+F.

As a shortcut for selecting the Font Size box, press CTRL+SHIFT+P.

If you want cells to always appear with a certain formatting even after they have been cut or cleared, change the Normal style.


Tips for Working with Formulas

#N/A means that no value is available. The formula may contain a function that has a missing or inappropriate argument or has a reference to a blank cell.

To speed up your work: choose Options from the Tools menu, select the Calculation tab, select Manual, and choose OK. To recalculate the workbook, press SHIFT+F9.

To save time by limiting calculation to the active sheet, choose Options from the Tools menu, then choose the Calc Sheet button on the Calculation tab. Shortcut: SHIFT+F9

You can use the name box to the left of the formula bar to select from a list of names already defined on the sheet. This ensures that the name you enter in your formula is valid.

Choose the Add button in the Define Name dialog box to define a name without closing the dialog box. You can add any number of names before closing the dialog box.

Tip of the Day: When you copy and paste formulas containing relative references, the references are adjusted. When you cut and paste formulas, relative references are not adjusted.

You can also press SHIFT+F2 as a shortcut for editing a cell note.

You can press SHIFT+F3 as a shortcut for starting the Function Wizard.

You can press CTRL+F3 as a shortcut for defining a name.

To create names from text in cells, press CTRL+SHIFT+F3.

As a shortcut for calculating the active worksheet, press SHIFT+F9.

Instead of clicking the AutoSum button, you can also press ALT+= (equal sign).

You can press CTRL+/ as a shortcut for selecting the current array.

Tip of the Day: When you create a formula that refers to other cells, it will have the same number format as the first cell it refers to.

Tip of the Day: If you need help choosing a function and entering its arguments, click the Function Wizard button on the Standard toolbar.

Tip of the Day: When you enter formulas, type function names in lowercase letters. When you press ENTER, valid function names are converted to uppercase, verifying that you typed them correctly.

Tip of the Day: To review the names defined in a workbook, choose Name from the Insert menu, choose Paste, and then choose the Paste List button.

Use the AutoSum button on the Standard toolbar to quickly sum a row or column of numbers. You can also use the AutoSum button to calculate grand totals from subtotals.

You can click the Calculate Now button as a shortcut for recalculating all open documents.

For help in choosing the right function and filling in its arguments, click the Function Wizard button.

You can use a caret (^) to raise a base to an exponent. For example, if you type =2^3 in a cell, its value will be 8.

As a shortcut for inserting a function into a formula, click the Function Wizard button on the Standard toolbar.

You can use the Insert Name button as a shortcut for inserting a name into a formula.

To have the Trend, Growth, Linest, or Regress function return multiple values, select a range for the values, and then press CTRL+SHIFT+ENTER to enter the formula as an array.

To help eliminate circular references, use the Auditing command on the Tools menu to trace references on your sheet.

The #DIV/0! error value means that a formula is trying to divide by zero.

The #NAME? error value occurs when you use a name that Microsoft Excel doesn't recognize.

#NULL! means that you specified an intersection of two ranges that do not intersect.

The #NUM! error value indicates a problem with a number, such as a negative number where a positive number is required or a number that is out of range.

The #REF! error value occurs when you refer to a cell that is not valid. This can happen if the cell has been deleted from the worksheet.

#VALUE! means that the formula includes an argument or operand of the wrong type.

To quickly insert a name into the formula you are editing, choose the name from the name box at the left side of the formula bar.

You can use the Name box to define or go to a name. To delete a name, choose Name from the Insert menu, choose Define, select the name, and then choose the Delete button.

You can use the arrow keys to move around within a formula. First press F2 until you see the word 'Edit' at the left of the status bar, then use the arrow keys.

To enter a reference to an entire row or column, type the row number or column letter twice, separated by a colon (for example, A:A or 2:2).

For a quicker way to name a range, first select the range, and then type the name into the box to the left of the formula bar.

You can press F3 as a shortcut for pasting a name into a formula.


Tips for Getting Information While You Work

Tip of the Day: To get Help on the selected menu item or active dialog box, press F1.

You can use the Help button on the Standard toolbar to get help on the next command you choose or the next button you click with the mouse.

Tip of the Day: Mail your registration card to get notification of product upgrades and other useful information. Call 1-800-426-9400 if you cannot find your registration card.

To switch back to Microsoft Excel 5 menus, choose New Menus from the Options menu or the Chart menu.

You can double-click the Help button to search for Help information.

Before calling Microsoft Product Support Services, choose About Microsoft Excel from the Help menu, and then click the System Info button. The technician will ask for the information displayed.

Hello. I'm the TipWizard, here to suggest ways to make your work easier. You can click the TipWizard button to show me or hide me.

Click the TipWizard button (the light bulb) on the Standard toolbar to display the TipWizard.

You have reset the TipWizard. The TipWizard may display tips you have already seen.

The TipWizard is turned off. To turn it back on, hold down SHIFT while you click the TipWizard button.


Tips for Working with Macros

Tip of the Day: When you record a macro, choose Options in the Record Macro dialog box, and then select Personal Macro Workbook. Your macro will be available each time you start Microsoft Excel.

Tip of the Day: To run macros in an open Lotus 1-2-3 document, hold down CTRL while you press the letter of the macro name.

You can use an ampersand (&) to concatenate text strings in a formula. For example, if A1 contains 'week' and A2 contains 'day', the formula =A1&A2 produces the value 'weekday'.

As a shortcut for running a macro, click the Run Macro button on the Visual Basic toolbar.

As a shortcut for stepping through a macro, click the Step Macro button on the Visual Basic toolbar.

As a shortcut for recording a macro, click the Record Macro button on the Visual Basic toolbar.

As a shortcut for toggling a breakpoint, click the Toggle Breakpoint button on the Visual Basic toolbar.

As a shortcut for instant watching while debugging a macro, click the Instant Watch button on the Visual Basic toolbar.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Run Macro button to step through a macro.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Step Macro button to run a macro.

To display and edit the default macro for the selected object, choose the Edit Code button on the Forms toolbar.

Microsoft Excel 5.0 includes Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications. To begin programming in this language, choose Macro from the Insert menu, and then choose Module.

To edit the macro you just recorded, choose Macro from the Tools menu, select the macro, and then choose the Edit button.

Tip of the Day: Choose Record Macro from the Tools menu to record your actions in Visual Basic for Applications. You can then examine the recorded macro to learn about Visual Basic syntax.


Tips for Moving and Sizing

To arrange windows in an orderly manner, use the Arrange command on the Window menu.

To make a copy of a sheet, hold down CTRL while you drag the sheet tab.

To move a sheet to a different position in the workbook or to another workbook, drag the sheet tab.

To rename a sheet, double-click the sheet tab.

You can insert more than one worksheet at a time. Hold down SHIFT while you click the number of tabs you want to insert, and then choose Worksheet from the Insert menu.

To move a sheet to a different workbook, drag the sheet tab to the other workbook window.

To copy a sheet to its own workbook, hold down CTRL while you drag the sheet tab outside of the active workbook.

To copy a sheet to a different workbook, hold down CTRL while you drag the sheet tab to the other workbook window.

To quickly create a new worksheet, press SHIFT+F11 or ALT+SHIFT+F1.

As a shortcut for creating a new chart, press F11 or ALT+F1.

To quickly create a macro sheet, press CTRL+F11 or ALT+CTRL+F1.

Shortcuts for switching windows: CTRL+TAB to next open workbook window; CTRL+SHIFT+TAB to previous open workbook window.

Shortcuts for switching sheets: CTRL+PAGE DOWN to next sheet; CTRL+PAGE UP to previous sheet.

To select the last cell in the sheet, press CTRL+END.

Tip of the Day: To delete a sheet, click the sheet tab with the right mouse button and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

Tip of the Day: To go to a specific location on the worksheet, click the arrow to the left of the formula bar and select one of the available named ranges.

Tip of the Day: To add a sheet to a workbook, choose Worksheet, Chart, or Macro from the Insert menu.

Tip of the Day: If you want to move a sheet to another workbook, drag its tab to the other workbook's window. To copy the sheet, hold down CTRL while you drag it.

Tip of the Day: To rename a sheet, double-click the sheet tab and type the new name in the dialog box.

To go to a cell reference or a named area, type the reference in the Name box to the left of the formula bar, or click its arrow to select a name from the list.

If you want an open window out of your way, but you don't want to hide it, you can minimize the window.

To quickly insert a worksheet, click the Insert New Worksheet button.

To delete a sheet, click the sheet tab with the right mouse button and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

To insert a sheet, click the sheet tab with the right mouse button and choose Insert from the shortcut menu.

You can delete more than one sheet at a time. Hold down CTRL while you click the sheet tabs, and then delete them.

Tip of the Day: You can move a sheet into its own workbook. Drag the sheet tab into an area of the Microsoft Excel window that does not already contain a workbook.


Tips for Working with Pivot Tables

Tip of the Day: To create interactive tables that automatically total data, easily hide or show details, and pivot to change perspective on your data, choose PivotTable from the Data menu.

To open the PivotTable Field dialog box, double-click a field header in a pivot table.

To switch between showing and hiding detail data for an item in a pivot table, double-click the item in the table.

If you want to change the orientation of a pivot table field, drag the field header.

To create an interactive pivot table, you can use the PivotTable Wizard button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

To customize a pivot table, you can use the Pivot Field button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

You can use the Group button on the Query And Pivot toolbar as a shortcut for the Group command.

You can use the Ungroup button on the Query And Pivot toolbar as a shortcut for the Ungroup command.

You can use the Show Detail button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

You can use the Hide Detail button on the Query And Pivot toolbar.

You can use the Refresh Data button on the Query and Pivot toolbar as a shortcut for the Refresh Data command.

You can use the Show Pages button on the Query And Pivot toolbar as a shortcut for the Show Pages command.

To update a Microsoft Excel 4 crosstab table to a Microsoft Excel 5 pivot table, choose Pivot Table from the Data menu.

To change the name of a pivot table field, select the field header and type the new name.

To reduce the amount of space needed for the pivot table, change some of the row and column fields to page fields.

To hide items in a pivot table, select the items, choose PivotTable Field from the Data menu, and then select the items in the Hide Items box.

To format a pivot table so that rearranging the table will not change the formatting, select the AutoFormat Table option in the last screen of the PivotTable Wizard.

You can rearrange an item within its field by dragging it.

To hide multiple items in a pivot table, select one of the items, choose PivotTable Field from the Data menu, and then select the items in the Hide Items box.

To pivot fields directly on the sheet without starting the PivotTable Wizard, you can drag the gray field headers.

If you want to reapply your number format when data is pivoted or refreshed, select the data in the pivot table, choose PivotTable Field from the Data menu, and select the Number option.


Tips for Printing

To print a group of sheets, hold down SHIFT or CTRL while you click the sheet tabs; then choose Print from the File menu.

Tip of the Day: To print only part of the worksheet, choose Page Setup from the File menu, select the Print Area box on the Sheet tab, and then select the area you want to print.

Tip of the Day: To print column titles on each page, choose Page Setup from the File menu, select the Sheet tab, select 'Rows to Repeat at Top', and then select the rows in the worksheet.

Tip of the Day: To print a sheet on a fixed number of pages, choose Page Setup from the File menu, select the Page tab, and then type the dimensions you want under Fit To.

Tip of the Day: You can control the order in which your pages are printed. Choose Page Setup from the File menu; then select one of the Page Order options on the Sheet tab.

As a shortcut for printing, click the Print button on Standard toolbar. This prints with current settings and does not display the Print dialog box.

As a shortcut for defining the selected cells as the print area, click the Set Print Area button.

To display print preview, click the Print Preview button on the Standard toolbar.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Print button to preview before printing. If you use this shortcut, you can remove the Print Preview button from the Standard toolbar.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Print Preview button to print without previewing. If you use this shortcut, you can remove the Print button from the Standard toolbar.

Your worksheet is only slightly larger than one page. To print it on one page, choose Page Setup from the File menu; then select Fit To 1 By 1 on the Page tab.

If you want to print the worksheet without gridlines, choose Page Setup from the File menu and clear Gridlines on the Sheet tab.

If you want to print the worksheet with gridlines, choose Page Setup from the File menu and select Gridlines on the Sheet tab.

To remove all the page breaks on a sheet, select the entire sheet and then choose Remove Page Break from the Insert menu.

To fit your sheet in one dimension only, leave one of the Fit To Page boxes blank. You can use this to make your printed output one page wide and as long as necessary.

If you want the lines in your text box to break in the same place on the screen as when printed, use a TrueType font in the text box. True Type fonts are marked TT in the list.

To print without gridlines, choose Page Setup from the File menu, and then clear the Gridlines check box on the Sheet tab.

To print your sheet at a different scale without changing its appearance on the screen, choose Page Setup from the File menu and change the Scaling options on the Page tab.

To ensure that only a particular range is printed whenever you print this sheet, choose Page Setup from the File menu, select the Sheet tab, and enter the range reference in the Print Area box.

To prevent the header from overlapping worksheet data, choose Page Setup from the File menu, select the Margins tab, and type a smaller number in the Header box than that in the Top box.

To prevent the footer from overlapping worksheet data, choose Page Setup from the File menu, select the Margins tab, and type a smaller number in the Footer box than that in the Bottom box.

When you select an option under Center On Page (Margins tab, Page Setup command on the File menu), your data is centered between the margins. This might not be the center of the page.

You can specify rows or columns to be repeated on every printed page. Choose Page Setup from the File menu, and then specify the rows and columns to use under Print Titles on the Sheet tab.


Tips for Protecting, Auditing, and Annotating

Press TAB to move among unlocked cells on a protected document.

To view the relationships among formulas in a graphical way, use one of the Trace buttons on the Auditing toolbar.

To allow others to view but not to change a workbook, choose Save As from the File menu, choose the Options button, and type a password in the Write Reservation Password box.

You can hide more than one sheet at a time. First select the sheets by holding down CTRL while you click the sheet tabs, and then hide them.

You can also press SHIFT+F2 as a shortcut for editing a cell note.

Press CTRL+SHIFT+? to select cells that contain notes.

To select row differences, you can also press CTRL+\.

To select column differences, press CTRL+SHIFT+|.

As a shortcut for selecting direct precedents, press CTRL+[.

As a shortcut for selecting all precedents, press CTRL+SHIFT+{.

As a shortcut for selecting direct dependents, press CTRL+].

As a shortcut for selecting all dependents, press CTRL+SHIFT+}.

Tip of the Day: If you want to add a comment to a cell, choose Note from the Insert menu.

Tip of the Day: To hide a workbook window, choose Hide from the Window menu.

Tip of the Day: To hide the selected sheet, choose Sheet from the Format menu, and then choose Hide. To display a hidden sheet, choose Unhide.

Tip of the Day: If you have a sound card installed in your computer, you can attach a sound note to a cell with the Note command from the Insert menu.

Tip of the Day: To protect a workbook so that a password is required to open it or save changes to it, choose the Options button in the Save As dialog box (File menu).

Tip of the Day: To prevent others from modifying a particular sheet, choose Protection from the Tools menu, and then choose Protect Sheet.

You can also click the Lock Cell button as a shortcut for locking selected cells.

Tip of the Day: If you have a sound card installed in your computer, you can add a sound note to a cell. Choose Note from the Insert menu.

To control who can change a workbook, choose Save As from the File menu, choose the Options button, and type a password in the Write Reservation Password box.

To prevent others from opening your workbook, choose Save As from the File menu, choose the Options button, and type a protection password.

You can add a note directly on a sheet. Click the Text Box button on the Standard toolbar, drag to draw a box, and type your note.

As a shortcut, you can use the Trace Precedents button on the Auditing toolbar.

As a shortcut, you can use the Trace Dependents button on the Auditing toolbar.

As a shortcut, you can use the Trace Error button on the Auditing toolbar.

As a shortcut, you can use the Remove All Arrows button on the Auditing toolbar.

You can double-click an arrow to go to the cells the arrow points to.


Tips for Analyzing Data and Solving Problems

Tip of the Day: To create different sets of assumptions about the variables in your sheet, and switch between these sets, choose Scenarios from the Tools menu.

Tip of the Day: If you know the result that you want a formula to produce, use Goal Seek on the Tools menu to try different values until the goal is reached.

Tip of the Day: If you have installed the Solver add-in, you can use the Solver command on the Tools menu to optimize a formula based on constraints of its precedent cells.

You can use the Goal Seek command on the Tools menu to reach a target value for one cell by changing the value in another cell.

You can store different values for the same worksheet cells without making multiple copies of the file. Choose Scenarios from the Tools menu.

You can use the Scenarios command (Tools menu) to change the values in a set of cells and see the effect on the rest of your model.

You can use the Scenarios box on the WorkGroup toolbar to define or view scenarios.


Tips for Selecting and Choosing

To select all sheets, click any sheet tab with the right mouse button, and then choose Select All Sheets from the shortcut menu.

When you choose the Go To command from the Edit menu, Microsoft Excel adds a reference to your current location in the dialog box so you can go back easily.

To move to the beginning of the sheet, press CTRL+HOME.

Press SHIFT+SPACEBAR to select the entire rows containing the selected cells.

To repeat the previous action, press F4.

To select the current region, press CTRL+SHIFT+*.

As a shortcut for selecting only the visible cells in the current selection, press ALT+; (semicolon).

Tip of the Day: To select the same range on more than one sheet, first select the range on one sheet; then hold down CTRL while you click the tabs of the other sheets.

Tip of the Day: To select nonadjacent sheets, hold down CTRL while you click the tabs for the sheets you want to select.

Tip of the Day: Click any object with the right mouse button to display a shortcut menu of commands that apply to that object.

Tip of the Day: You can usually undo the last action you performed by choosing Undo from the Edit menu.

Tip of the Day: To edit the contents of more than one sheet at a time, hold down CTRL while you click the tabs of the sheets you want to edit.

Tip of the Day: To select nonadjacent cells or ranges, hold down CTRL while you select with the mouse.

Tip of the Day: You can extend the selection from the active cell to another cell on the sheet by holding down SHIFT while clicking that cell.

Tip of the Day: To select only the blank cells in a region, select the region, choose Go To from the Edit menu, choose the Special button, and then select the Blanks option.

To undo your last action, click the Undo button on the Standard toolbar. Click it again to redo the action you have just undone.

As a shortcut for selecting only visible cells, click the Select Visible Cells button.

As a shortcut for selecting the current region, click the Select Current Region button.

To perform the same action on nonadjacent ranges, select the first range, and then hold down CTRL while you select the other ranges.

To find the blank cells within a range, select that range. Then, choose Go To from the Edit menu, choose the Special button, and select Blanks.

Tip of the Day: You can click the title bar of a workbook with the right mouse button to display a menu of commands that apply to workbooks.

To scroll long distances, hold down SHIFT while you drag the scroll box.

To repeat the last action you performed, click the Repeat button on the Standard toolbar.

You can zoom a group of sheets at once by holding down CTRL while you click the sheet tabs, and then choosing Zoom from the View menu.

To set up a group of sheets for printing, hold down CTRL while you click the sheet tabs, and then choose Page Setup from the File menu.

You can check the spelling on a group of sheets at one time. Hold down CTRL while you click the tabs of the sheets, and then choose Spelling from the Tools menu.

You can format the same area on a group of sheets. Hold down CTRL while you click the tabs of the sheets, and then apply the formats.

To more easily select a large range, select one corner of the range, scroll to the other corner, and then hold down SHIFT while you click it.

Press CTRL+SPACEBAR to select the entire columns containing the selected cells.

You can also select the entire sheet by pressing CTRL+SHIFT+SPACEBAR.

You can select several rows and then hide or unhide them all at once.

You can select several columns and then hide or unhide them all at once.

You can ungroup sheets by holding down SHIFT while you click the tab of the active sheet.

Clicking a cell or object with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Cut command.

Clicking a cell or object with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Copy command.

Clicking a cell or object with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Paste command.

Clicking a cell with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Paste Special command.

Clicking a cell with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Insert command.

Clicking a cell with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Delete command.

Clicking a cell, object, or chart item with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Clear command.

Clicking a cell, object, or chart item with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing formatting commands.

Clicking a column header with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Column Width command.

Clicking a row header with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Row Height command.

Clicking a row or column header with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Hide command.

Clicking a row or column header with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Unhide command.

Clicking an embedded object with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Edit Object command.

Clicking selected objects with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Group command.

Clicking grouped objects with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Ungroup command.

Clicking an object with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Bring To Front command.

Clicking an object with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Send To Back command.

Clicking a data series with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Insert Data Labels command.

Clicking a chart with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Chart Type command.

Clicking a chart with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the AutoFormat command.

Clicking the chart or plot area with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Insert Titles command.

Clicking the chart or plot area with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Insert Axes command.

Clicking the chart or plot area with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu containing the Insert Gridlines command.

Tip of the Day: To move to the top of a block of data, double-click the top border of the selected cell. You can double-click the other borders to move in other directions.


Tips for Importing, Exporting, and Sharing Data

Tip of the Day: To copy data into another application that supports object linking and embedding, drag the data from Microsoft Excel to the other application's window.

To send a document to several people in turn, use the Add Routing Slip command on the File menu.

Tip of the Day: To distribute text from one column into many columns, choose 'Text to Columns' from the Data menu.

Tip of the Day: If Microsoft Mail is installed on this machine, you can send your workbook by electronic mail. Choose Send Mail from the File menu.

Tip of the Day: Microsoft Excel can open and save the following Lotus file formats: WKS, WK1, FMT, WK3, FM3, and ALL.

Tip of the Day: You can share files with users of older versions of Microsoft Excel by using the Save As command on the File menu to save the file as the correct file type.

Tip of the Day: Any number of users on a network can open a workbook, but only the first user who opens it without selecting the Read Only check box can save changes.

To copy a picture of the selected range onto a worksheet click the Camera button, then click where you want to paste the copy.

Tip of the Day: If you have Microsoft Mail installed, you can route a workbook to a series of people one after the other. Choose Mail from the File menu, and then choose Add Routing Slip.

Your workbook was saved in Microsoft Excel version 5.0 format. To save it in another format, choose Save As from the File menu and select a format under Save File As Type.

To update links without being prompted, choose Options from the Tools menu, and then clear the 'Ask to Update Automatic Links' check box on the Edit tab.

If you want to permanently change the source file of a link, choose Links from the Edit menu, select the link in the list, and then choose the Change Source button.

To copy data to another application that supports object linking and embedding, drag the data into the application's window.

Tip of the Day: To switch to another Microsoft application, use one of the buttons on the Microsoft toolbar. Choose Toolbars from the View menu to display the Microsoft toolbar.

To prevent a column from being imported, use the Do Not Import Column option on the last step of the TextWizard.

If you need more complex text editing than a text box can provide, you can embed a Microsoft Word document in a worksheet. Choose Object from the Insert menu.

Tip of the Day: To switch to another Microsoft application, use one of the buttons on the Microsoft toolbar. Choose Toolbars from the View menu to display the Microsoft toolbar.

You can use the Send Mail button on the Workgroup toolbar to send a workbook via electronic mail.

You can use the Routing Slip button on the Workgroup toolbar to add a routing slip.


Tips for Sorting, Filtering, Linking, and Outlining

If you want to define your own custom sort order, choose Options from the Tools menu, and then select the Custom Lists tab.

If the name 'Sheet_Title' is defined in the supporting sheet, the cell it refers to is used to name the data in the consolidated range.

You can select sections of an outline by holding down SHIFT while you click the hide detail or show detail symbol.

You don't need to select the entire list first. These commands act on the list containing the selected cell: Sort, Filter, Subtotals (all on the Data Menu), or AutoFormat (Format menu).

To insert subtotals into your list, use the Subtotals command on the Data menu.

As a shortcut for grouping data, press ALT+SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW.

To ungroup rows or columns, you can press ALT+SHIFT+LEFT ARROW.

If you want to quickly hide or display outline symbols, press CTRL+8.

Tip of the Day: If you often hide and unhide rows and columns to see different views of your data, use an outline to hide or show levels of detail. Choose 'Group and Outline' from the Data menu.

Tip of the Day: To filter your list to show important subsets of the data, select a cell in the list, choose Filter from the Data menu, and then choose AutoFilter.

Tip of the Day: You can sort data based on a custom sort order that you define. To define one, choose Options from the Tools menu, and then select the Custom Lists tab.

Tip of the Day: You can now perform case-sensitive sorts. Choose the Options button in the Sort dialog box (Data menu) and then select the Case Sensitive option.

Tip of the Day: You can combine data from different sheets onto one worksheet, when the data is named or positioned identically. Use the Consolidate command on the Data menu.

Tip of the Day: To have subtotals inserted into your list automatically, select any cell in the list and then choose Subtotals from the Data menu.

As a shortcut for sorting the list containing the selected cells in ascending order, click the Sort Ascending button.

As a shortcut for sorting the list containing the selected cells in descending order, click the Sort Descending button.

You can quickly group data using the Group button.

You can quickly ungroup data using the Ungroup button.

As a shortcut for showing or hiding outlining symbols, click the Show Outline Symbols button.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Sort Ascending button to sort in descending order. Then you can remove the Sort Descending button from the Standard toolbar.

You can hold down SHIFT while you click the Sort Descending button to sort in ascending order. Then you can delete the Sort Ascending button from the Standard toolbar.

To outline rows or columns so that they can be easily shown or hidden, select the rows or columns, choose the 'Group and Outline' command from the Data menu, and then choose Group.

You can filter your database to show a subset of the records. Choose Filter from the Data menu; then choose AutoFilter. Click the arrows that appear to select filters.

To remove an outline, choose 'Group and Outline' from the Data menu, and then choose Clear Outline.

To hide all rows that match specific criteria, choose Filter from the Data menu, and then choose AutoFilter.

The Sort command will sort the entire list containing the selected cells as long as the list is surrounded by blank cells.

If you surround your list with blank rows and columns, the Subtotals command (Data menu) will select the correct data to subtotal.

Tip of the Day: You can use the Consolidate command from the Data menu to combine corresponding values in different sheets onto a summary sheet.

You can use the outlining buttons to the left of the worksheet to collapse and expand subtotaled data.


Using Toolbar Buttons

There are 13 toolbars in Microsoft Excel that contain buttons that help you do your work more quickly and easily.

When you first run Microsoft Excel, the Standard toolbar and the Formatting toolbar are displayed directly below the menu bar.

Display or hide toolbars by using the toolbar shortcut menu, or the Toolbars command on the View menu.

Create custom toolbars, or customize existing toolbars by using the Customize dialog box. To display the Customize dialog box, choose Customize from the toolbar shortcut menu, or choose Toolbars from the View menu, and then choose the Customize button. For a list of button categories, see the Button Category Summary.

Create custom buttons that perform the actions you want by assigning a macro or procedure to a button. You can also edit the image that appears on a button.

Move toolbars anywhere you want in the application window, or dock them along the edges of the Microsoft Excel workspace.

Microsoft Excel automatically saves your toolbar changes. When you customize a toolbar, it will be available whenever you start Microsoft Excel.

You can also save customized toolbars in a workbook so that the toolbar is available whenever that workbook is opened in Microsoft Excel version 5.0.

At any time, you can restore a built-in button or toolbar to its original state.

See Also

Help

Button Category Summary

Overview of Customizing Toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Toolbar Summary

Auditing Toolbar

Chart Toolbar

Drawing Toolbar

Formatting Toolbar

Forms Toolbar

Full Screen Toolbar

Microsoft Toolbar

Query And Pivot Toolbar

Standard Toolbar

Stop Recording Toolbar

TipWizard Toolbar

Visual Basic Toolbar

WorkGroup Toolbar

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Button Category Summary

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Chart Toolbar

The Chart toolbar contains buttons that help you create and format charts.

Chart Type Button

Displays a palette of 14 chart types when you click the arrow next to the Chart Type button. Clicking a chart type on the palette or clicking the Chart Type button itself creates an embedded chart or changes a selected data series or active chart to that type.

Default Chart Button

Changes an active chart or selected embedded chart to the default chart format specified on the Chart tab (Options command, Tools menu). If worksheet data is selected, this button displays the ChartWizard.

ChartWizard Button

Starts the ChartWizard so that you can create an embedded chart on a worksheet or modify any existing chart.

Horizontal Gridlines Button

Controls whether major horizontal gridlines are visible on the active chart. This button toggles major gridlines on and off.

Legend Button

Adds a legend to the right of the plot area and resizes the plot area to accommodate the legend. If the chart already has a legend, clicking the Legend button removes it.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Drawing Toolbar

The Drawing toolbar contains buttons that help you create and format graphic objects.

Line Button

Draws a straight line.

Rectangle Button

Draws unfilled rectangles or squares.

Ellipse Button

Draws unfilled ellipses or circles.

Arc Button

Draws unfilled arcs or circle segments.

Freeform Button

Draws shapes that are a combination of freehand and straight lines.

Text Box Button

Draws a text box in which you can type text on a worksheet; lets you add unattached or "floating" text to a chart.

Arrow Button

Creates an arrow on an active worksheet, macro sheet, or chart.

Freehand Button

Draws freehand lines.

Filled Rectangle Button

Draws filled rectangles or squares.

Filled Ellipse Button

Draws filled ellipses or circles.

Filled Arc Button

Draws filled arcs or circle segments.

Filled Freeform Button

Draws filled shapes that are a combination of freehand and straight lines.

Create Button Button

Creates a button to which you can assign a macro or Visual Basic module.

Drawing Selection Button

Changes the mouse pointer to an arrow for selecting graphic objects.

Bring To Front Button

Places one or more selected objects in front of all other objects.

Send To Back Button

Places one or more selected objects behind all other objects.

Group Objects Button

Creates a single group of graphic objects from multiple objects.

Ungroup Objects Button

Separates grouped objects into individual objects.

Reshape Button

Changes the shape of a polygon.

Drop Shadow Button

Adds a dark border to the right side and bottom of the selected range or object.

Pattern Button

Changes the pattern and pattern color of a selected cell, graphic, object, or chart item.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Graphic Objects on Worksheets and Charts"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Formatting Toolbar

The Formatting toolbar contains buttons that help you format objects, cells, and cell contents. You can also format chart objects, such as text and gridlines.

Font Box

Lists the available fonts.

Font Size Box

Lists available sizes for the font selected in the Font box.

Bold Button

Applies bold formatting to selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text.

Italic Button

Applies italic formatting to selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text.

Underline Button

Applies a single underline to selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text.

Align Left Button

Aligns the contents of selected cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text to the left.

Center Button

Centers the contents of selected cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text.

Align Right Button

Aligns the contents of selected cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text to the right.

Center Across Columns Button

Centers the text from one cell horizontally across the selected cells.

Currency Style Button

Applies the currently defined Currency style to selected cells.

Percent Style Button

Applies the currently defined Percent style to selected cells.

Comma Style Button

Applies the currently defined Comma style to selected cells.

Increase Decimal Button

Adds one decimal place to the number format each time you click the button.

Decrease Decimal Button

Removes one decimal place from the number format each time you click the button.

Borders Button

Displays a palette of border styles you can use to apply borders to selected cells.

Color Button

Changes the color of a selected cell or object.

Font Color Button

Displays a palette of colors you can use to change the font color of selected characters in cells, text boxes, buttons, or chart text.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Query And Pivot Toolbar

The Query And Pivot toolbar contains buttons to help you retrieve and analyze data from lists and tables created using Microsoft Excel or created in an application or database management system external to Microsoft Excel.

PivotTable Button

Starts the PivotTable Wizard.

PivotTable Field Button

Depending on your selection, changes subtotal and item options for a field, or modifies properties of the data area in a pivot table.

Ungroup Button

Separates a previously combined group of items.

Group Button

Groups items in a pivot table into categories you choose.

Hide Detail Button

Hides subordinate data by collapsing an outer item in a row field or column field in a pivot table.

Show Detail Button

Displays hidden subordinate data by expanding an item in a row field or column field in a pivot table.

Show Pages Button

Displays each page of a pivot table on a separate worksheet for printing or for separate analysis.

Refresh Data Button

If the active cell is within a result set you created by using Microsoft Query, reruns the original query and updates the result set. If the active cell is within a pivot table, updates the pivot table with changes to the source data.

Get External Data Button

Retrieves data from external database files and tables using Microsoft Query. The Get External Data button only appears when you install the Microsoft Query Add-in using the Add-ins command on the Tools menu.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query"

Chapter 24, "Creating a Pivot Table"

Chapter 25, "Customizing a Pivot Table"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Standard Toolbar

The Standard toolbar appears when you start Microsoft Excel. This toolbar contains buttons that help you complete your most frequent actions in Microsoft Excel.

New Workbook Button

Creates a new workbook.

Open Button

Displays the Open dialog box so that you can open an existing workbook.

Save Button

Saves changes made to the active workbook.

Print Button

Prints the active workbook according to the options you previously specified in the Print dialog box and the tabs of the Page Setup command on the File Menu.

Print Preview Button

Displays each page as it will look when printed. The status bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current page number and the total number of pages in the selected sheet.

Spelling Button

Checks the spelling of text in worksheets and charts, including text in text boxes, buttons, headers and footers, cell notes, and the formula bar.

Cut Button

Removes the selection and places it onto the Clipboard.

Copy Button

Copies the selection and places it onto the Clipboard.

Paste Button

Pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the selection.

Format Painter Button

Copies only the formats from the selected cells or objects.

Undo Button

Reverses the last command you chose, if possible, or deletes the last entry you typed.

Repeat Button

Repeats the last command you chose, if possible, including any dialog box option settings.

AutoSum Button

Automatically invokes the SUM function and suggests the range of cells to be added.

Function Wizard Button

Opens the Function Wizard dialog box and inserts the selected function into the formula bar or active cell.

Sort Ascending Button

Sorts the current list in order from lowest value to highest value, using the column that contains the active cell.

Sort Descending Button

Sorts the current list in order from highest value to lowest value, using the column that contains the active cell.

ChartWizard Button

Starts the ChartWizard, which guides you through the steps required to create a new chart.

Text Box Button

Draws a text box in which you can type text on a worksheet; lets you add unattached or "floating" text to a chart.

Drawing Button

Displays the Drawing toolbar.

Zoom Control Box

Allows you to see more or less detail by changing the scale of the sheet.

TipWizard Button

Opens the TipWizard, which displays tips based on the actions you perform.

Help Button

Adds a question mark (?) to the mouse pointer. When you place this pointer over a command name or screen element and click the mouse button, you get information about that command or screen element.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Stop Recording Toolbar

This toolbar contains the Stop Macro button, with which you stop recording a Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro. It is automatically displayed when you begin recording a Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro.

Stop Macro Button

When you click the Stop Macro button, you stop recording a Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro and the button and toolbar disappear; they are displayed automatically the next time you pause a Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro.

If you close the toolbar using the Control-menu box, the toolbar does not appear again until you display it.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Button Category Summary

Auditing Buttons Category

Charting Buttons Category

Custom Buttons Category

Data Buttons Category

Drawing Buttons Category

Edit Buttons Category

File Buttons Category

Formatting Buttons Category

Forms Buttons Category

Formula Buttons Category

Macro Buttons Category

Text Formatting Buttons Category

TipWizard Buttons Category

Utility Buttons Category

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Visual Basic Toolbar

The Visual Basic toolbar contains buttons that help you work with the Visual Basic code in your modules.

Insert Module Button

Inserts a new Visual Basic module in the active workbook.

Menu Editor Button

Displays the Menu Editor dialog box so you can create and edit Microsoft Excel menus.

Object Browser Button

Displays the Object Browser dialog box so you can browse all the procedures, methods, properties, and objects available in the current workbook.

Run Macro Button

Displays the Macro dialog box so you can select and run a macro.

Step Macro Button

Displays the Macro dialog box so you can select and step through a macro one line of code at a time.

Resume Macro Button

Resumes operation of a macro after the macro has been paused.

Stop Macro Button

Stops a macro from running. Also stops recording of a macro.

Record Macro Button

Displays the Record New Macro dialog box so you can record your actions to create a macro.

Toggle Breakpoint Button

Sets or removes a breakpoint from a line of code in a Visual Basic procedure.

Instant Watch Button

Displays in the Instant Watch dialog box the value of the selected Visual Basic expression.

Step Into Button

Runs the next line of code in a Visual Basic procedure and then returns to break mode. If other procedures are called, Visual Basic steps through them one line at a time.

Step Over Button

Runs the next line of code in a Visual Basic procedure and then returns to break mode. If other procedures are called, Visual Basic runs them in their entirety.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"

Chapter 8, "Testing and Debugging Your Code"


WorkGroup Toolbar

The WorkGroup toolbar contains buttons that help you share files with other users of Microsoft Excel, work with scenarios, and locate and update files.

Find File Button

Displays the Find File dialog box.

Routing Slip Button

Displays the Routing Slip dialog box, which allows you to add routing information to the active workbook.

Send Mail Button

Mails or routes a workbook.

Update File Button

Updates a read-only file to the version last saved.

Toggle Read Only Button

Switches a file between read-only and read-write status.

Scenarios Box

Adds, displays, and edits scenarios.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"

Chapter 40, "Routing Workbooks with Electronic Mail"


Auditing Toolbar

The Auditing toolbar contains buttons that help you find errors on your worksheets, attach notes to cells, and track the dependents and precedents of worksheet formulas.

Trace Precedents Button

Draws arrows from all cells that supply values directly to the formula in the active cell (precedents).

Remove Precedent Arrows Button

Deletes a level of precedent tracer arrows from the active worksheet.

Trace Dependents Button

Draws arrows from the active cell to cells with formulas that use the values in the active cell (dependents).

Remove Dependent Arrows Button

Deletes a level of dependent tracer arrows from the active worksheet.

Remove All Arrows Button

Deletes all tracer arrows from the active worksheet.

Trace Error Button

Draws arrows from the cells that might have caused the error to the error value in the active cell.

Attach Note Button

Displays the Cell Note dialog box so that you can attach text or audio comments to a cell.

Show Info Window Button

Displays the Info window.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Full Screen Toolbar

The Full Screen toolbar is displayed only after you choose the Full Screen command from the View menu.

Full Screen Button

Displays the formula bar, the status bar, and any toolbars that were hidden when you chose the Full Screen command from the View menu.

See Also

Help

Displaying the full screen

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Microsoft Toolbar

The buttons on the Microsoft toolbar allow you to quickly switch from Microsoft Excel to other Microsoft applications.

Microsoft Word Button

Switches to Microsoft Word.

Microsoft PowerPoint Button

Switches to Microsoft PowerPoint.

Microsoft Access Button

Switches to Microsoft Access.

Microsoft FoxPro Button

Switches to Microsoft FoxPro.

Microsoft Project Button

Switches to Microsoft Project.

Microsoft Mail Button

Switches to Microsoft Mail.

Microsoft Schedule+ Button

Switches to Microsoft Schedule+.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Forms Toolbar

The Forms toolbar contains buttons you can use to create custom forms on worksheets, charts, and dialog sheets.

Label Button

Creates a text label on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

Edit Box Button

Creates an edit box for entering text on a dialog sheet.

Group Box Button

Creates a group box on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

Create Button Button

Creates a button on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet to which you can assign a Visual Basic procedure.

Check Box Button

Creates a check box on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

Option Button Button

Creates an option button on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

List Box Button

Creates a list box on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

Drop-Down Button

Creates a drop-down list box on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

Combination List-Edit Button

Creates a combination list box and edit box on your dialog sheet.

Combination Drop-Down Edit Button

Creates a combination drop-down list box and edit box on your dialog sheet.

Scroll Bar Button

Creates a scroll bar on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

Spinner Button

Creates a spinner control on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

Control Properties Button

Opens the Control tab of the Format Object dialog box so you can change the properties of the controls on your worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

Edit Code Button

Edits or creates code for the selected object.

Toggle Grid Button

Shows or hides the grid used to align objects on a worksheet or dialog sheet.

Run Dialog Button

Runs the custom dialog box currently being edited on the dialog sheet.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Custom Buttons Category

This category contains unassigned buttons with a variety of faces. You can use these buttons to change the appearance of buttons or to make custom buttons. To customize a button, you assign a macro or module to it.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Assigning a macro to a custom button on a toolbar

Changing the image on a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


TipWizard Toolbar

The TipWizard toolbar contains the TipWizard box, which displays tips, and the Tip Help button, which you can use to get additional information about a tip.

TipWizard Box

Tips appear here.

Tip Help Button

If you need more information about a tip, click the Tip Help button on the right side of the TipWizard box.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 5, "Getting Information While You Work"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Add Watch Command (Tools Menu)

Use the Add Watch command to add a watch expression to code in a Visual Basic module. You can use watch expressions to:

Observe the value of a variable, property, or other expression.

Put the code in break mode when an expression becomes true.

Put the code in break mode when an expression changes in value.

Expression

Specifies the expression you want to watch. This can be a variable, the name of a property, or any logical expression.

Procedure

Specifies the name of the procedure in which the watch expression is valid. Visual Basic does not watch the expression when the specified procedure is not running.

Module

Specifies the name of the module in which the watch expression is valid. Visual Basic does not watch the expression when the specified module is not running.

Watch Type

Specifies whether the watch expression simply observes the value of the expression, or puts the code in break mode when the expression is true or when it changes.

After you add a watch expression, you can observe it in the Watch pane of the Debug window.

See Also

Help

Adding a watch expression

Deleting a watch expression

Editing a watch expression

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Testing and Debugging Your Code"


Edit Watch Command (Tools Menu)

Use the Edit Watch command to edit or delete watch expressions in a Visual Basic module.

See Also

Help

Adding a watch expression

Deleting a watch expression

Editing a watch expression

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Testing and Debugging Your Code"


Instant Watch Command (Tools Menu)

Instant Watch button

Displays the value of the selected Visual Basic expression in the Instant Watch dialog box. From the Instant Watch dialog box, you can also add this expression to the list of current watch expressions. The Instant Watch button is on the Visual Basic toolbar.

Current Context

Shows the workbook, Visual Basic module, and procedure that contain the selected expression.

Expression

Shows the expression you selected.

Value

Shows the current value of the selected expression.

Add

Adds the selected expression to the list of current watch expressions.

See Also

Help

Adding a watch expression

Deleting a watch expression

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Editing a watch expression

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Testing and Debugging Your Code"


Auditing Command (Tools Menu)

Displays the Auditing submenu.

For an easier way to use the commands on the Auditing submenu, display the Auditing toolbar.

See Also

Help

  Attach Note Button

  Remove Dependent Arrows Button

  Remove Precedent Arrows Button

  Remove All Arrows Button

  Show Info Window Button

  Trace Dependents Button

  Trace Precedents Button

  Trace Error Button

Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

Remove All Arrows Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Show Auditing Toolbar Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Trace Dependents Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Trace Error Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Trace Precedents Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Tracing dependent formulas

Tracing precedent data and formulas

Using the error tracer to find error values visually

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Trace Precedents Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Draws arrows from all cells that supply values directly to the formula in the active cell (precedents).

Choose the command repeatedly to draw arrows to additional levels of precedents.

If the active cell contains no formula, this command has no effect.

See Also

Help

  Trace Precedents Button

Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

Tracing precedent data and formulas

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Trace Dependents Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Draws arrows from the active cell to cells with formulas that use the values in the active cell (dependents).

Choose the command repeatedly to draw arrows to additional levels of dependents related to the active cell.

If the active cell is not referred to by any formula in any open workbook, this command has no effect.

If dependents of the active cell are in an external workbook that is currently closed, this command has no effect.

See Also

Help

  Trace Dependents Button

Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

Tracing dependent formulas

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Trace Error Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Draws arrows from the error value in the active cell to cells that might have caused the error.

The active cell must contain an error value, or this command has no effect.

Red or dotted arrows point to the first precedent formula containing an error.

Blue or solid arrows point to the cells containing precedent values from the first formula containing an error.

See Also

Help

  Trace Error Button

Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

Using the error tracer to find error values visually

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Remove All Arrows Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Deletes all tracer arrows from the worksheet.

See Also

Help

  Remove All Arrows Button

Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Show Auditing Toolbar Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Displays the Auditing toolbar.

See Also

Help

Displaying the Auditing toolbar

Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Goal Seek Command (Tools Menu)

Adjusts the value in a specified cell until a formula dependent on that cell reaches the result you specify.

Set Cell

Specifies the cell containing the formula for which you want to find a solution. You can enter a cell reference or a name in this box.

To Value

Specifies the new value you want to reach.

By Changing Cell

Specifies the cell whose value you want Microsoft Excel to change to achieve the desired result. The cell must be referred to directly or indirectly by the formula for which you want to find a solution. You can enter a cell reference or a name in this box.

OK

Displays the Goal Seek Status dialog box, in which you will find the following options:

Cancel

Stops the calculation and preserves the original value.

Step

Proceeds through the goal-seeking calculation one step at a time.

Pause

Interrupts the calculation. When you choose the Pause button, it changes to the Continue button.

Continue

Continues the calculation after a pause. When you choose the Continue button, it changes back to the Pause button.

OK

Replaces the value in the cell specified in the By Changing Cell box with the new value.

See Also

Help

Changing the value of a chart data point

Seeking a specific solution to a formula using the Goal Seek command

User's Guide

Chapter 27, "Solving What-If Problems"


Solver Command (Tools Menu)

Displays the Solver Parameters dialog box, in which you define the problem you want to solve. With Microsoft Excel Solver, you can solve complex problems by creating a worksheet model with multiple changing cells. You can set constraints on your problem that must be satisfied before a solution is reached.

Set Target Cell

Specifies the target cell that you want to set to a certain value, or that you want to maximize or minimize.

Equal To

Specifies whether you want the target cell to be maximized, minimized, or set to a certain value.

By Changing Cells

Specifies the adjustable cells. An adjustable cell is one that can be changed by Solver until the constraints in the problem are satisfied and the cell in the Set Target Cell box reaches its target.

Guess

Guesses all nonformula cells directly or indirectly referred to by the formula in the Set Target Cell box, and places their references in the By Changing Cells box.

Subject To The Constraints

Lists the current constraints on the problem. A constraint is a condition that needs to be satisfied by the solution; for example, Sales >= 0. A constraint is listed as a cell or cell range, usually containing a formula that depends on one or more adjustable cells, whose value is required to fall within certain bounds or satisfy a target.

Add

Displays the Add Constraint dialog box, where you can add constraints to the current problem.

Change

Displays the Change Constraint dialog box, where you can modify the existing constraints.

Delete

Removes the selected constraint.

Solve

Starts the problem-solving process for a problem you've defined.

Close

Closes the dialog box without solving the problem. Retains only those changes made with the Options, Add, Change, or Delete button. Does not retain any setting changes you may have made since using any of these buttons.

Options

Displays the Solver Options dialog box, where you can control advanced features of the solution process and load or save the specifications, such as cell selections and constraints, for a particular problem on the worksheet.

Reset All

Clears the current Solver problem settings and resets all options to their defaults.

See Also

Help

Adding, changing, or deleting constraints in Solver

Adjusting the Solver settings

Defining a problem using Solver

Solving a problem using Solver

Solver Messages

User's Guide

Chapter 29, "Using Solver to Analyze Multiple-Variable Problems"


Add Constraint and Change Constraint Dialog Boxes

Allows you to add, change, or modify constraints to the problem currently defined in the Solver Parameters dialog box.

Cell Reference

Specifies the cell or range of cells whose values you want to constrain.

Constraint

Specifies a restriction you want placed on the contents of the Cell Reference box. From the list, select the relationship you want between the referenced cell or cell range and the constraint, which you type in the box to the right. You can select <=, =, >=, or int. If you select int to specify that a variable must be an integer, "Integer" appears in the box to the right.

The constraint can be a number, a cell reference, a range reference, or a formula. If you specify a range of cells, the range must be the same size as the range of cells in the Cell Reference box.

Add

In the Add Constraint dialog box, allows you to add another constraint without returning to the Solver Parameters dialog box.

See Also

Help

Adding, changing, or deleting constraints in Solver

Solver Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 29, "Using Solver to Analyze Multiple-Variable Problems"


Solver Options Dialog Box

Allows you to control advanced features of the solution process and to load or save the specifications, such as the cell reference and constraints, for a particular problem on the worksheet. You can define parameters for both linear and nonlinear problems. Each of the options in this dialog box has a default setting that is appropriate for most problems.

Max Time

Limits the time taken by the solution process. The value must be a positive integer. The default value of 100 (seconds) is adequate for most small problems, though you can enter a value as high as 32,767.

Iterations

Limits the time taken by the solution process by limiting the number of interim calculations. The value must be a positive integer. The default value of 100 is adequate for most small problems, though you can enter a value as high as 32,767.

Precision

Controls the precision of the answers that Solver finds. The number you enter in the Precision box:

Is used to determine whether a constraint cell value meets a target or satisfies a lower or upper bound you've specified.

Must be a fractional number between (but not including) 0 and 1.

Defaults to 0.000001.

Indicates lower precision if entered with fewer decimal places; for example, 0.0001.

In general, the higher the precision you specify (a smaller number), the more time Solver will take to reach solutions. The methods used by Solver are able to improve the precision rapidly if you specify a trial value that is close to the solution.

Tolerance

Problems involving changing cells that are restricted to integer values may take a great deal of time to solve because they require the solution of many subproblems, each one a Solver problem without the integer restrictions. You can adjust the Tolerance figure, which represents a percentage of error allowed in the optimal solution when an integer constraint is used on any element of the problem. A higher tolerance (allowable percentage of error) would tend to speed up the solution process. The Tolerance setting has no effect when there are no integer constraints.

Assume Linear Model

Speeds the solution process. Can be used only if all the relationships in the model are linear.

Show Iteration Results

Interrupts Solver and shows the results after each iteration.

Use Automatic Scaling

Turns on automatic scaling. This is useful when the inputs (By Changing Cells) and outputs (Set Target Cell and Constraints) have large differences in magnitude; for example, maximizing percent profit based on million-dollar investments.

Estimates

The Estimates options specify the approach used to obtain initial estimates of the basic variables in each one-dimensional search.

Tangent

Uses linear extrapolation from a tangent vector.

Quadratic

Uses quadratic extrapolation; this may improve the results on highly nonlinear problems.

Derivatives

The Derivatives options specify forward differencing or central differencing for estimates of partial derivatives of the objective and constraint functions. One difference between these two options is how they behave with functions whose graphical representations are not smooth and continuous. With these functions, you should use the Central differencing option.

Forward

Forward differencing is the default method.

Central

Central differencing requires more worksheet recalculations, but it may help on problems when you get a message saying that Solver could not improve the solution.

Search

The Search options determine what search algorithm is used at each iteration to decide which direction to search. You specify either a Newton or Conjugate gradient method of searching.

Newton

This is the default search method, and it uses a quasi-Newton method. This method typically requires more memory than the Conjugate search method, but requires fewer iterations.

Conjugate

Conjugate gradient searching requires less memory than the Newton search method, but it typically requires more iterations to reach a particular level of accuracy. You can try this method if you have a large problem and memory usage is a concern. Conjugate searching is especially useful if stepping through the iterations reveals slow progress between successive trial points.

Load Model

Displays the Load Model dialog box, where you can specify the reference for the model you want to load.

Save Model

Displays the Save Model dialog box, where you can specify the reference where you want to save the model. Choose the Save Model button only when you want to save more than one Solver model with your worksheet. The first Solver model is automatically saved with your worksheet.

See Also

Help

Adjusting the Solver settings

Saving and loading a problem model using Solver

Solver Command (Tools Menu)

The Difference Between Linear and Nonlinear Problems

User's Guide

Chapter 29, "Using Solver to Analyze Multiple-Variable Problems"


Solver Results Dialog Box

Displays the results of the last calculation, using the adjustable cell values that are closest to the solution you want.

When Solver finishes trying to find a solution, it displays a completion message at the top of the Solver Results dialog box.

Keep Solver Solution

Accepts the solution Solver found and puts these values in the adjustable cells.

Restore Original Values

Restores the original values in the adjustable cells.

Save Scenario

Opens the Save Scenario dialog box, where you can save your problem for use with the Microsoft Excel Scenario Manager.

Reports

Creates the type of report you specify. Each report appears in its own sheet in the workbook.

Answer

Lists the cell named in the Set Target Cell box and the adjustable cells, with both their original and final values. Also shows the constraints and information about the constraints.

Sensitivity

Provides information about how sensitive the solution is to small changes in the Set Target Cell formula or the constraints. For nonlinear models, the report provides dual values (reduced gradients and Lagrange multipliers). For linear models, the report includes reduced costs, shadow prices, objective coefficient (with allowable increase and decrease), and constraint right-hand side ranges.

Limits

Lists the cell named in the Set Target Cell box, and the adjustable cells with their respective values, upper and lower limits, and target values. The lower limit is the smallest value that the adjustable cell can take while holding all other adjustable cells fixed and still satisfying the constraints. The upper limit is the greatest value. The target result is the value of the cell in the Set Target Cell box when the adjustable cell is at its lower or upper limit.

OK

Sets the adjustable cells as specified and generates any requested reports.

Cancel

Closes the Solver Results dialog box and restores the original values to the adjustable cells.

See Also

Help

Creating a report using Solver

User's Guide

Chapter 29, "Using Solver to Analyze Multiple-Variable Problems"


Save Scenario Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to save your problem for use with the Microsoft Excel Scenario Manager. If you have not previously defined a scenario, the reference in Solver's By Changing Cells box is used in Scenario Manager's Changing Cells box.

Scenario Name

Enter a name for the scenario.

See Also

Help

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 29, "Using Solver to Analyze Multiple-Variable Problems"


Show Trial Solution Dialog Box

If you select the Show Iteration Results check box in the Solver Options dialog box and then choose the Solve button, Solver stops and displays each iteration's results.

Save Scenario

Allows you to save your problem for use with the Microsoft Excel Scenario Manager. If you have not previously defined a scenario, the reference in Solver's By Changing Cells box is used in Scenario Manager's Changing Cells box. The Save Scenario dialog box appears and you are asked to enter a scenario name.

Continue

Continues the solution process.

Stop

Displays the Solver Results dialog box without completing the solution.

See Also

Help

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 29, "Using Solver to Analyze Multiple-Variable Problems"


Load Model and Save Model Dialog Boxes

Use the Load Model dialog box to open a previously saved model. The last model you worked with on the active worksheet is automatically opened by default when you choose the Solver command.

Use the Save Model dialog box when you want to save more than one Solver model with your worksheet. The current Solver model is automatically saved with your worksheet.

Select Model Area

To open an alternate model you've previously saved, type its reference in this box or select the range containing the model.

To save a model, accept the range that Solver proposes, which begins with the active cell, or select another cell. The model is entered into a vertical range of cells starting at the selected cell and extending down as many cells as necessary.

See Also

Help

Saving and loading a problem model using Solver

Solver Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 29, "Using Solver to Analyze Multiple-Variable Problems"


Add-ins Command (Tools Menu)

Use the Add-ins command to specify the add-ins that are automatically available and ready to use when you start Microsoft Excel. With the Add-ins command, you can install or remove add-ins that come with Microsoft Excel or that you have created yourself.

Add-ins Available

Lists the available add-ins. You can select or clear the add-in check boxes to install or remove add-ins in Microsoft Excel.

Browse

Lists the available drives and directories from which you can select an add-in to install in Microsoft Excel.

See Also

Help

Add-ins Included with Microsoft Excel

Installing or removing an add-in

User's Guide

Chapter 37, "Installing Add-in Features"


Macro Interrupt/Error Dialog Box

You have interrupted a macro while it was running, or an error has occurred in the macro. This dialog box allows you to step through the macro one function at a time, stop the macro, or continue running the macro.

Halt

Stops the macro.

Step

Starts the single-stepping process.

Continue

Carries out the rest of the macro as if the error or interruption had not occurred.

Goto

Goes to the cell where the error or interruption occurred.

See Also

Help

Overview of Recording and Running a Macro


Single Step Dialog Box

You can display the Single Step dialog box when you want to run a macro one step at a time. This technique is often used for debugging a macro.

This dialog box shows which cell in the macro is about to be calculated and what formula is in that cell.

Step Into

Carries out the next instruction in the macro, including user-defined function calls.

Step Over

Carries out the next instruction in the macro. Carries out, but does not step through, user-defined function calls.

Evaluate

Evaluates each part of the formula in the active cell. If chosen repeatedly, this button will Step Into the macro, not Step Over.

Pause

Closes the dialog box and suspends the macro, allowing you to perform other tasks. To return to the Single Step dialog box, click the Resume Macro button on the Visual Basic toolbar.

Halt

Stops the macro.

Continue

Runs the rest of the macro without single-stepping.

Goto

Stops the macro and selects the cell currently being evaluated on the macro sheet.

See Also

Help

  Resume Macro Button

  Run Macro Button

  Step Macro Button

Overview of Recording and Running a Macro

Toolbars Command (View Menu)

Visual Basic Toolbar


Spelling Command (Tools Menu)

Spelling button

Checks the spelling of text in worksheets and charts, including text in text boxes, buttons, headers and footers, cell notes, or the formula bar. When Microsoft Excel encounters a word that is not in its dictionary, a dialog box appears to help you correct the possible misspelling. The Spelling button is on the Standard toolbar.

If a cell or the formula bar is active, this command checks the spelling of selected words. If the formula bar is active and no words are selected, the spelling of the entire contents of the formula bar is checked.

If a single cell of a worksheet is selected, then the headers and footers, all cells, cell notes, text boxes, and buttons in the sheet are checked for spelling errors.

If more than one cell is selected, or if one or more objects are selected, then only the contents of the selection are checked for spelling errors.

If more than one sheet is selected, then the contents of all the sheets in the selection, except Visual Basic modules, are checked for spelling errors.

Hidden cells and all cells in collapsed outlines are also checked for spelling errors.

Cells containing formulas are not checked for spelling errors.

For graphic objects, only the text in text boxes and buttons is checked for spelling errors.

You can check the spelling of text in both embedded charts and chart sheets, including the chart title, text boxes, data labels, and other text items.

Shortcut:	F7

Change To/Suggestions

Type or select a replacement for the word not found in the dictionary.

Add Words To

Select the dictionary to which you want to add words that are correctly spelled but not found in the main dictionary. The first time you use the Spelling command, the dictionary CUSTOM.DIC appears in the Add Words To list. This dictionary is empty until you add words to it.

Ignore

Leaves the selected word unchanged.

Ignore All

Leaves the selected word unchanged throughout the sheet.

Change

Changes the selected word to the word in the Change To box.

Change All

Changes the selected word throughout the selected sheets to the word in the Change To box.

Add

Adds the selected word to the dictionary in the Add Words To box.

Suggest

Displays a list of proposed suggestions. This button is dimmed if the Always Suggest box is selected.

Always Suggest

Displays a list of proposed suggestions whenever Microsoft Excel encounters a word that is not in the dictionary.

Ignore UPPERCASE

Skips words that contain only capital letters.

Undo Last

Undoes the last spelling change.

Cancel/Close

Closes the dialog box. The Cancel button changes to Close when you change a misspelled word or add a new word to the dictionary.

See Also

Help

Checking spelling

Creating a custom dictionary

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Data Analysis Command (Tools Menu)

Displays the Analysis Tools dialog box with a list of the statistical and engineering Analysis ToolPak tools. The Microsoft Excel Analysis ToolPak was developed by GreyMatter International, Inc., 173 Otis Street, P.O. Box 388, Cambridge, MA 02141 and enhanced by KRISTECH Co., 620 Pinot Blanc Way, Fremont, CA 94539.

If the Data Analysis command does not appear on the Tools menu, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak.

Analysis Tools

Lists the available Analysis ToolPak tools.

See Also

Help

Alphabetical List of Worksheet Functions

Statistical Analysis of Data

Worksheet Functions Listed by Category

User's Guide

Chapter 31, "Statistical Analysis of Data"


Protection Command (Tools Menu)

Displays the Protection submenu. When the active sheet is unprotected, the Protection submenu displays the Protect Sheet command; when the active sheet is protected, the submenu displays the Unprotect Sheet command. When the workbook is unprotected, the Protection submenu displays the Protect Workbook command; when the active workbook is protected, the submenu displays the Unprotect Workbook command.

See Also

Help

Protect Sheet Command and Unprotect Sheet Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

Protect Workbook Command and Unprotect Workbook Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Protect Workbook Command and Unprotect Workbook Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

Protect Workbook Command

Prevents changes to the way a workbook is displayed and arranged.

Password

Enables you to assign a password so that users have to know the password in order to remove workbook protection.

Windows

Protects windows from being moved or resized.

The minimize and maximize icons, Control-menu box, and window sizing borders are hidden.

Structure

Prevents changes to the structure of a workbook so sheets can't be deleted, moved, hidden, unhidden, or renamed, and so new sheets can't be inserted.

Note  This level of protection prevents several types of operations that could result in the insertion of a new sheet in a workbook.

Unprotect Workbook Command

Removes protection from the active workbook.

Password

If you assigned a password when you protected the workbook, you have to type the same password to remove protection.

See Also

Help

Protecting and unprotecting workbook windows or structure

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Protect Sheet Command and Unprotect Sheet Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

Protect Sheet Command

Prevents changes to cells on worksheets and Microsoft Excel version 4.0 macro sheets, items in a chart, graphic objects on a worksheet or chart sheet, code in a Visual Basic module, or items on a dialog sheet.

Before you use this command to lock a sheet, you can specify locked and unlocked status for individual cell ranges and graphic objects.

Password

Enables you to assign a password so that users have to know the password in order to remove sheet protection.

Contents

Protects cells on worksheets and Microsoft Excel version 4.0 macro sheets, and protects items in charts. This check box doesn't appear if the active sheet is a dialog sheet or a Visual Basic module.

Objects

Protects graphic objects on worksheets and charts from being moved, edited, resized, or deleted. This check box doesn't appear if the active sheet is a dialog sheet or a Visual Basic module.

Scenarios

Prevents changes to the definitions of scenarios on a worksheet.

Unprotect Sheet Command

Removes protection from the active sheet.

Password

If you assigned a password when you protected the sheet, you have to type the same password to remove protection.

See Also

Help

Protecting and unprotecting a sheet

Protection Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Protection Tab, Object Command (Format Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Run Macro button

Runs, modifies, or deletes the selected macro.

Macro Name/Reference

Lists all Microsoft Excel version 4.0 macros on open macro sheets and all procedures in open Visual Basic modules.

Run

Runs the selected macro or procedure.

Step

Runs the macro or procedure one line of code at a time.

Edit

Opens the selected macro or procedure in a Visual Basic module.

Delete

Deletes the selected macro or procedure.

Options

Opens the Macro Options dialog box.

This dialog box assigns additional options to the macro.

Description

Provides details about the macro's author, date recorded, or any other information about the macro.

Assign To

Assigns the macro to a command on the Tools menu and assigns a shortcut key to the macro.

Help Information

Provides text for the macro in the status bar, assigns a Help context ID to the macro, and places the macro in a function category when listed in the Function Wizard.

The Run Macro button is on the Visual Basic toolbar, which appears whenever you switch to a Visual Basic module.

See Also

Help

Recording a macro

Running a macro

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"

Chapter 2, "Editing Recorded Macros"


Record Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Record Macro button

Displays the Record Macro submenu. Four commands appear on the Record Macro submenu: Record New Macro, Use Relative References, Mark Position For Recording, and Record At Mark. The Record Macro button is on the Visual Basic toolbar, which appears whenever you switch to a Visual Basic module.

See Also

Help

Mark Position For Recording Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Record At Mark Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Record New Macro Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Use Relative References Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"

Chapter 2, "Editing Recorded Macros"


Record New Macro Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Record Macro button

Displays the Record New Macro dialog box so you can prepare to record a macro. The Macro Recorder displays the Stop Recording toolbar while recording. When you have finished recording your macro, choose the Stop Macro button from the Stop Recording toolbar. The Record Macro button is on the Visual Basic toolbar, which appears whenever you switch to a Visual Basic module.

See Also

Help

Recording a macro

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"

Chapter 2, "Editing Recorded Macros"


Mark Position For Recording Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

For Microsoft Excel version 4.0 macro sheets, this command sets the range of the Macro Recorder.

For Visual Basic modules, this command sets the recorder mark to begin recording at the current insertion point in a module.

See Also

Help

Record At Mark Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Recording a macro

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 2, "Editing Recorded Macros"


Use Relative References Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Turns relative references on or off. Unless this command is turned off, the Macro Recorder uses relative, not absolute, references to cells on a worksheet.

See Also

Help

Recording a macro

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"


Record At Mark Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Starts the Macro Recorder at the location previously specified by the Mark Position For Recording command.

See Also

Help

Mark Position For Recording Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Recording a macro

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 2, "Editing Recorded Macros"


Options Command (Tools Menu)

Displays the Options dialog box. For information about the tabs, see:

Calculation Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Chart Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Color Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Custom Lists Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Edit Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

General Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Module Format Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Module General Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Transition Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

View Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)


Custom Lists Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Creates custom lists from series of data, such as product lists or names. You can also use a custom list as a custom sort order when you are sorting a list or pivot table.

Use the Custom Lists tab to enter, import, edit, and delete custom lists. The built-in lists and custom lists you create are available for use with all workbooks.

Use the AutoFill feature to enter a custom list on your worksheet. Type an item from the list on your worksheet and then drag the fill handle. The rest of the list is automatically entered.

Use the First Key Sort Order box in the Sort Options dialog box to apply a custom sort order. To open the Sort Options dialog box, choose the Sort command from the Data menu, and then choose the Options button.

Custom Lists

Displays the first several items of the built-in custom lists and any custom lists you have defined. To create a new list, select NEW LIST and type the list, or select one of the displayed lists to edit its contents. You cannot edit or delete the built-in custom lists.

List Entries

Displays the individual list items that make up the custom list selected in the Custom Lists box. Use this box to type and edit the entries you want in your custom list. Start list entries with any character except a number. Press ENTER to separate list entries.

If you intend to use the custom list as a custom sort order, make sure you enter the items in the order you want them to sort when you select an ascending sort order in the Sort dialog box.

Import List From Cells

Displays the reference of the currently selected range on your worksheet. You can also enter a reference to a range from which you want to import a list. Create a custom list from the text items in the specified range by choosing the Import button. A reference to the selected cells must be displayed in this box before you can choose the Import button.

Add

Saves the list entered or edited in the List Entries box, and adds the list to the Custom Lists box.

Delete

Deletes the selected custom list. The built-in custom lists cannot be deleted.

Import

Creates a custom list from the text in the range shown in the Import List From Cells box.

Import Custom Lists

Allows you to import a list from rows or columns.

See Also

Help

Creating a custom sort order

Customizing AutoFill

Default Sort Orders

Editing or deleting a custom AutoFill list

Entering a custom AutoFill list on a worksheet

Sort Command for Worksheets (Data Menu)

Using a custom sort order

Using a custom sort order in a pivot table

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Transition Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Contains options that help you switch from another spreadsheet.

Settings

Excel Menu or Help Key

Displays the key you press to activate the Microsoft Excel menu bar or Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users. Accept the default key or type a new key symbol in the box.

If you select Microsoft Excel Menus, pressing the Alternate Menu or Help key activates the Microsoft Excel menu bar. If you select Lotus 1-2-3 Help, pressing the Alternate Menu or Help key activates Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users.

Transition Navigation Keys

Provides an alternate set of keys for worksheet navigation, formula entry, label entry, and other actions.

Sheet Options

Transition Formula Evaluation

Evaluates text strings to 0, Boolean expressions to 0 or 1, and database criteria according to the rules used in Lotus 1-2-3. This allows you to open Lotus 1-2-3 files without losing or changing information.

Transition Formula Entry

Converts formulas entered with Lotus 1-2-3 release 2.2 syntax into Microsoft Excel syntax and makes names defined in Microsoft Excel behave like names defined in Lotus 1-2-3.

See Also

Help

Macro Interpreter for Lotus 1-2-3 Users

Transition Navigation Keys

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You're Switching from Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Chart Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Defines defaults for the active chart. You can designate the active chart as the default chart format for future charts that you create, or you can select an existing chart format from the list.

Active Chart

Options determine how worksheet cells are plotted in the active charts.

To set any of these options as the default for newly created charts, create a custom autoformat chart with these settings and set it as the default chart.

Empty Cells Plotted As

Controls how empty worksheet cells are plotted as data points in line charts only. By default, blank worksheet cells are never plotted in other chart types.

Not Plotted (Leave Gaps)

Leaves gaps in the line for the empty cells, making the line disconnected.

Zero

Treats the blank cells as zeros so that the line plunges to zero for those zero-value data points.

Interpolated

Fills in for the empty cells with connecting lines, even though there are blank cells.

Plot Visible Cells Only

With this check box selected, your chart is automatically updated to reflect the way your worksheet is displayed if you expand or collapse levels in an outline, or hide or unhide data.

With this check box cleared, your chart displays the original worksheet range used to plot the chart.

Chart Sizes With Window Frame

Applies to chart sheets only.

This check box option is equivalent to the Sized With Window command on the View menu.

With this check box selected, this option sizes only chart sheets with the window, filling the entire window with the chart.

With this check box cleared, the chart sheet remains independent of the window size, and you can preview different printing size options.

With this check box cleared, you can zoom in and out of the chart sheet to view the chart sheet as you like.

Default Chart Format

Charts are created based on the selected default chart format. The original default chart format is a column chart; it is called (Built-In). If you want your charts to use the default format from Microsoft Excel version 4.0, select MS Excel 4.0.

Use The Active Chart

Choose this button if you want to make your active chart the default chart. The Add Custom AutoFormat dialog box is displayed; you can name the chart (using up to 31 characters) and add it as an autoformat to the Formats list. Your chart then becomes the default chart format for any charts you later create, and it is listed under Default Chart Format, described above.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list

Changing the default chart format

Creating a chart from visible worksheet data

Sized With Window Command (View Menu)

Sizing a chart sheet with the window

Zoom Command (View Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 19, "Using Charts to Analyze Data"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Color Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Customizes the colors on the Microsoft Excel color palette and copies color palettes between workbooks.

When you copy an object with a custom color from one workbook to another, the color is copied along with the object.

You can change the color by choosing the Modify button to open the color editing dialog box. You can use the color box and the brightness bar, or change the values in the boxes.

The boxes at the bottom of the color editing dialog box provide alternative systems for precisely setting the color. One system uses hue, saturation, and luminosity. The other uses the three primary colors used by color monitors: red, green, and blue. These systems work independently.

Standard Colors

Displays the color palette.

Chart Lines

The eight colors Microsoft Excel uses for chart lines. These colors can be used to format anything you can apply color to, but are also the first eight colors used for chart lines.

Chart Fills

The eight colors Microsoft Excel uses for chart fills. These colors can be used to format anything you can apply color to, but are also the first eight colors used for chart fills.

Other Colors

24 colors you can use throughout a workbook.

Copy Colors From

Contains the list of open workbooks from which you can copy a color palette. Selecting a workbook copies its palette to the active workbook.

Reset

Resets the color palette to its original 56 colors.

Modify

Displays the color editing dialog box. You can edit any of the original 56 colors on the color palette to create custom colors.

Color box

The large colored box where you can click or drag to change the current color. The current color is reflected in the Color|Solid box; in the Hue, Sat (saturation), and Lum (luminosity) boxes; and in the Red, Green, and Blue boxes.

Brightness bar

The colored bar to the right of the color box. Dragging the arrow along this bar changes the amount of white and black in the current color. This has the same effect as changing the value in the Lum (luminosity) box.

Color|Solid

The left side of this box displays the current color. The right side shows the nearest solid color. To use the nearest solid color to the one you have created, double-click the solid color.

Hue

Displays the hue value of the current color. You can change the hue by typing a value from 0 to 239 or by clicking the arrows. Changing this value has the same effect as dragging horizontally in the color box.

Sat (saturation)

Indicates how pure the color is; in other words, how different it is from gray. You can change the saturation by typing a value from 0 to 240 or by clicking the arrows. Changing this value has the same effect as dragging vertically in the color box.

Lum (luminosity)

Indicates the lightness (amount of white) or darkness (amount of black) in the current color. You can change the luminosity by typing a value from 0 to 240 or by clicking the arrows. Changing this value has the same effect as dragging the arrow along the brightness bar.

Red, Green, Blue

Changes the overall color by changing the amounts of red, green, and blue. You can change these values by typing values from 0 to 255 for each, or by clicking the arrows.

Changing the red, green, and blue values is an alternative to changing the hue, saturation, and luminosity.

See Also

Help

  Color Button

  Font Color Button

Copying color palettes between workbooks

Custom Color Palettes for Charts in a Workbook

Customizing colors in a color palette

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


View Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Controls what elements of Microsoft Excel are displayed. The options in the Show grouping are not saved with the workbook. All other options in this dialog box are saved with the workbook.

Show

Formula Bar

Displays the formula bar. Cell contents and formulas are visible in the formula bar.

Status Bar

Displays the status bar at the bottom of the Microsoft Excel window.

Note Indicator

Displays a small red dot in the upper-right corner of the cell when a note is attached.

Info Window

Displays the Info window for the active worksheet or macro sheet.

Objects

Show All

Displays all graphic objects, buttons, text boxes, drawn objects, and pictures.

Show Placeholders

Displays selected pictures and charts as gray rectangles. Other graphic objects, buttons, and text boxes are displayed normally. Displaying object placeholders can significantly increase the speed of scrolling through a sheet.

Hide All

Hides all graphic objects, buttons, text boxes, drawn objects, and pictures. Hidden objects are not printed.

Shortcut:	CTRL+6 (Switches among displaying all objects, displaying placeholders, and hiding all objects.)

Window Options

The following options are saved with the window, except Automatic Page Breaks. For example, you can display two windows for the same workbook, one of them displaying formulas, the other values. When you save the workbook, the value or formula display property of each window is saved.

Automatic Page Breaks

Displays page breaks that have been set automatically by Microsoft Excel.

Formulas

Displays the formulas in cells instead of the values produced. Also doubles the width of all columns and left-aligns cell contents.

Shortcut:	CTRL+` (left single quotation mark)

Gridlines

Displays or hides cell gridlines.

Gridline Color

Sets the color for gridlines and column and row headings.

If Automatic is selected, the color is based on the text color defined in the Control Panel.

Row & Column Headers

Displays row and column headings.

Outline Symbols

Displays outlining symbols.

Shortcut:	CTRL+8

Zero Values

Displays all zero values. If cleared, displays cells that have zero values as blank cells.

Does not affect cells you've formatted to display zeros by using the Number tab in the Format Cells dialog box.

Horizontal Scroll Bar

Displays the horizontal scroll bar.

Vertical Scroll Bar

Displays the vertical scroll bar.

Sheet Tabs

Displays sheet tabs. Sheet tabs are used to navigate among and select workbook sheets.

See Also

Help

Displaying the full screen

Hiding and unhiding graphic objects

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


General Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Controls options such as the number of sheets in a new workbook, the standard font, and the worksheet reference style.

Reference Style

A1

Changes the reference style of row and column headings and cell references to A1 style: columns are labeled alphabetically, and rows are labeled numerically.

R1C1

Changes the reference style of row and column headings and cell references to R1C1 style: both columns and rows are labeled numerically.

Menus

Recently Used File List

Displays the recently used file list on the File menu.

Microsoft Excel 4.0 Menus

Displays the Microsoft Excel 4.0 menus.

Ignore Other Applications

Ignores requests made from other applications using Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE).

Prompt For Summary Info

Displays the Summary Info dialog box when you save a new workbook.

Reset TipWizard

Restores the TipWizard's ability to display tips you may have already seen.

Sheets In New Workbook

Specifies the default number of worksheets in a new workbook.

Standard Font

Specifies the standard font for new sheets and workbooks. The new standard font is used the next time you start Microsoft Excel.

Size

Specifies the standard font size for new sheets and workbooks. The new standard font size is used the next time you start Microsoft Excel.

Default File Location

Specifies the default working directory. Type the full path.

Note:  This option overrides any working directory settings you may have made in the Windows Program Manager Properties dialog box for the Microsoft Excel icon. For more information, see Controlling how Microsoft Excel starts using startup switches.

Alternate Startup File Location

Specifies the path to an alternate startup directory. Type the full path.

User Name

The name you want displayed in scenarios, views, file sharing, and summary information. The new name is used the next time you start Microsoft Excel. The name you enter here doesn't affect the name displayed in the Microsoft Excel startup screen.

See Also

Help

  TipWizard Button

Specifying an additional startup directory

Setting the working directory

Open Command (File Menu)

Save Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"

Chapter 35, "Controlling What Happens When You Start Microsoft Excel"


Edit Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Controls how you enter, edit, copy, and move data.

Settings

Editing Directly in Cell

Allows you to edit directly inside a cell by double-clicking the cell.

Allow Cell Drag And Drop

Allows you to move and copy cells and data by dragging.

Alert Before Overwriting Cells

Displays an alert message before dropping cells over other cells that contain data.

Move Selection After Enter

Automatically moves the active cell down one row after you press ENTER to enter a formula or constant in a cell. Press SHIFT+ENTER to move the active cell up one row.

Fixed Decimal

Determines where Microsoft Excel will automatically put the decimal point in the numbers you enter as constants on a worksheet. A positive number moves the decimal to the left; a negative number moves the decimal to the right. If the option is left blank or set at 0 (zero), the decimal point must be entered manually. To override this option when entering a number, type a decimal point as you enter the number.

Cut, Copy, And Sort Objects With Cells

Keeps objects with cells that you cut, copy, filter, or sort.

Ask To Update Automatic Links

Displays a dialog box asking whether or not you want to update links to other documents or applications.

See Also

Help

  Decrease Decimal Button

  Increase Decimal Button

Copying cells

Editing cell contents

Entering numbers in cells

Moving cells

Sorting a list from top to bottom

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 21, "Sorting and Filtering Data in a List"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Calculation Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Controls when and how formulas in open documents are calculated.

Automatic

Calculates all dependent formulas every time you make a change to a value, formula, or name. This is the default calculation setting.

Automatic Except Tables

Calculates all dependent formulas except data tables. You can calculate data tables by choosing the Calc Now button in this dialog box.

Manual

Calculates open workbooks only when you choose the Calc Now button.

When you choose Manual calculation, the Recalculate Before Save check box is automatically selected.

Iteration

Limits iteration for goal seeking or for resolving circular references. Unless you specify otherwise, stops after 100 iterations or when all values change by less than 0.001. You can limit iteration by changing Maximum Iterations, Maximum Change, or both.

Calc Now

Calculates all open worksheets, including data tables, and updates all open chart documents.

Shortcuts:	CTRL+ =

F9

Calc Sheet

Calculates only the active worksheet, and updates only the charts on the worksheet and open charts linked to the worksheet.

Shortcut:	SHIFT+F9

Update Remote References

Calculates formulas that include references to other applications. When cleared, formulas use the last value received from the other application.

Precision As Displayed

Changes stored values in cells from full precision (15 digits) to whatever format is displayed. The displayed values are then used for calculations.

1904 Date System

Changes the starting date from which all dates are calculated from January 1, 1900 to January 2, 1904.

Save External Link Values

Saves copies of values contained in an external document linked to your Microsoft Excel worksheet. If a worksheet with links to large ranges on an external document requires an unusually large amount of disk space or takes a very long time to open, clearing this check box can reduce the disk space and time needed to open the worksheet.

See Also

Help

  Calculate Now Button

Overview of Controlling Calculation

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


AutoSave Command (Tools Menu)

Automatically saves your Microsoft Excel work at the time interval you specify.

If the AutoSave command does not appear on the Tools menu, you need to install the AutoSave add-in.

Automatic Save Every

Turns on AutoSave. Enter the time interval (minutes) for automatically saving your workbook.

Save Active Workbook Only

Saves only the active workbook.

Save All Open Workbooks

Saves all open workbooks.

Prompt Before Saving?

If you check this box, then AutoSave prompts you with a dialog box to confirm the automatic save.

Save

Saves the active workbooks.

Skip

Does not save the active workbooks.

See Also

Help

Saving your work automatically

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

Creates and saves different sets of data as separate scenarios. You can use these scenarios to view multiple outcomes based on different assumptions. You can also create reports that show the changing cell values and the resulting cell values for each scenario.

You can use any cell with data as a changing cell for a scenario. If you define or create names for the changing cells using the Name command on the Insert menu, the names appear in the Add Scenario dialog box next to the data contained in the cell.

Scenarios

Lists the existing scenarios on the active sheet.

Changing Cells

Displays the cells containing the data that is to change in each scenario.

Comment

Displays the date a scenario was created or edited, the name of the user who created or modified the scenario, and any text you enter.

Show

Displays on the worksheet the changing cell values for the scenario selected in the Scenarios box. The worksheet is recalculated to reflect the new values.

Add

Displays the Add Scenario dialog box, where you can specify the values for each changing cell. The current values on your worksheet are suggested.

Delete

Deletes the scenario you have selected in the Scenarios box.

Edit

Displays the Edit Scenario dialog box, which lists the scenario name, the changing cell references, and any scenario comments.

Merge

Displays the Merge Scenarios dialog box, which allows you to merge scenarios from any sheet in any open workbook.

Summary

Brings up the Scenario Summary dialog box, which allows you to create summary or pivot table reports.

Close

Closes the Scenario Manager dialog box.

See Also

Help

Add Scenario or Edit Scenario Dialog Box

Merge Scenarios Dialog Box

Name Command (Insert Menu)

Overview of Using Scenario Manager

Scenario Summary Dialog Box

Scenario Values Dialog Box

User's Guide

Chapter 28, "Managing What-If Scenarios"


Add Scenario or Edit Scenario Dialog Box

Scenario Name

Use this box to enter a name (up to 255 characters) for the scenario you are adding or editing.

Changing Cells

Use this box to enter the reference for the changing cells in the scenario.

Comment

Displays the date a scenario was created or edited and the name of the user who created or modified the scenario. You can also add your own comments (up to 255 characters) and edit text in the Comment box.

Protection

When sheet protection is activated, allows you to prevent others from editing a scenario and also allows you to hide a scenario.

Prevent Changes

Prevents other users from making changes to your scenario.

Hide

Prevents the selected scenario name from appearing in the Scenario Manager dialog box.

OK

Accepts the changes or adds the scenario to the list in the Scenarios box in the Scenario Manager dialog box, closes the dialog box, and opens the Scenario Values dialog box.

See Also

Help

Creating a scenario

Protecting scenarios

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 28, "Managing What-If Scenarios"


Merge Scenarios Dialog Box

Merge Scenarios From

Allows you to select scenarios to merge from any open workbook.

Book

Lists all open workbooks.

Sheet

Lists the sheets in the selected workbook. A message at the bottom of the dialog box indicates how many scenarios are on the selected sheet.

OK

Closes the Merge Scenarios dialog box, merges the selected scenarios, and returns you to the Scenario Manager dialog box.

See Also

Help

Merging scenarios

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 28, "Managing What-If Scenarios"


Scenario Summary Dialog Box

Creates a summary report or a pivot table of the selected scenario.

Report Type

Use to create either a summary report or a pivot table.

Summary

Select to create a summary report on a separate sheet in the current workbook.

PivotTable

Select to create a pivot table on a separate worksheet.

Result Cells

To include cells containing formulas that depend on the changing cells, select those cells, or type the cell references or names. If you enter more than one reference, separate each reference with a comma. The report then includes the results of the formulas for each scenario. Specifying result cells is optional for summary tables but is required for pivot tables.

OK

Closes the Scenario Summary dialog box and creates either a summary report or a pivot table on a separate worksheet.

See Also

Help

Creating a summary report

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 28, "Managing What-If Scenarios"


Scenario Values Dialog Box

Allows you to enter values for each of the changing cells in a scenario.

OK

Accepts the changes and returns you to the Scenario Manager dialog box.

Add

Returns you to the Add Scenario dialog box, allowing you to add additional scenarios.

Cancel

Cancels any changes and returns you to the Scenario Manager dialog box.

See Also

Help

Creating a scenario

Editing a scenario

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 28, "Managing What-If Scenarios"


References Command (Tools Menu)

Adds, deletes, or makes available for editing Visual Basic references to libraries or other workbooks that are specified for the active workbook. You must be in a Visual Basic module to use this command.

See Also

Help

Use Relative References Command (Tools Menu, Record Macro Submenu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Automatic Procedures and Add-in Applications"


Menu Editor Command (Tools Menu)

Menu Editor button

Makes menus used with Visual Basic add-ins and procedures available for editing. From the Menu Editor dialog box, you can:

Add new commands to existing menus.

Replace existing menu commands with your own commands.

Create new menus and menu bars.

Change or delete existing menus and menu bars.

The Menu Editor button is on the Visual Basic toolbar, which appears whenever you switch to a Visual Basic module.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Menus and Toolbars"


Attach Toolbars Command (Tools Menu)

Attaches a copy of a custom toolbar to your workbook. You can attach as many as 15 custom toolbars to each workbook.

Custom Toolbars

Lists all the custom toolbars in the current workspace.

Toolbars In Workbook

Lists all the toolbars stored in the active workbook.

Copy

Copies a custom toolbar to the active workbook.

See Also

Help

Creating and deleting a custom toolbar

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Menus and Toolbars"


Make Add-in Command (Tools Menu)

Converts the currently open workbook to an add-in application.

The Make Add-In command displays the Make Add-In dialog box, which saves a copy of the workbook as an add-in.

The default filename extension for an add-in is .XLA in Microsoft Excel for Windows. In Microsoft Excel for the Apple Macintosh, the default name of the add-in is the same as the current filename, followed by "Add-In."

An add-in file cannot be opened for viewing. The source workbook for an add-in should not be overwritten, or you will not be able to recover your code for editing.

See Also

Help

Installing or removing an add-in

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 13, "Creating Automatic Procedures and Add-in Applications"


Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Assigns a macro to the selected object, to a button on a toolbar, or to a command on the Tools menu.

Macro Name/Reference

Displays a list of saved macros in the current workbook, from which you can select one to assign to the object.

New

Opens a Visual Basic module so that you can write a macro that runs when the selected object is clicked. If the object already has a macro assigned to it, this button is called Edit, and it displays the code that corresponds to the macro.

Record

Records a new macro using the Macro Recorder and assigns it to the selected object.

See Also

Help

Overview of Assigning a Macro to the Tools Menu, a Button, or a Graphic Object

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"

Chapter 2, "Editing Recorded Macros"


Module Format Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Customizes the formatting of Visual Basic modules.

Font

Sets the Visual Basic code font in modules.

Size

Sets the font size.

Code Colors

Sets foreground (text) and background (screen) colors for different elements of Visual Basic code.

See Also

Help

Cells Command (Format Menu)

Color Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 2, "Editing Recorded Macros"


Tab Order Command (Tools Menu)

Tab Order button

Sets the tab order of controls on a worksheet, chart, or dialog sheet.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Run Dialog Command (Tools Menu)

Run Dialog button

Runs the custom dialog box currently being edited on the dialog sheet. The Run Dialog button is on the Forms toolbar.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Module General Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Specifies various options for running and displaying Visual Basic procedures.

Auto Indent

Automatically indents lines of Visual Basic code.

Display Syntax Errors

Alerts the writer to syntax errors.

Break On All Errors

Interrupts the procedure when an error is encountered.

Require Variable Declaration

Requires that all variables be declared before the procedure is run.

Tab Width

Sets tab width for indentation of code.

International

Specifies international settings for procedures. Selecting a language and country in the Language/Country box sets the default formats for numbers, currency, date and time, and list separator characters.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 2, "Editing Recorded Macros"

Chapter 6, "Working with Visual Basic Code in Procedures"

Appendix A, "Writing Code for International Use"


Working with Chart Types and Autoformats

Overview of Working with Chart Types

Multiple Chart Types and a Secondary Axis

Changing the chart type of an entire chart

Changing the chart type of a data series

Plotting data along a secondary axis

Overview of Working with Chart Autoformats

Applying an autoformat to a chart

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list

Deleting a custom autoformat from the Formats list


Overview of Working with Chart Types

You can change the chart type for an entire chart, a data series, or a chart type group. Microsoft Excel offers14 different major chart types, each of which has at least one subtype, or variation. You can change the chart type to present your data most clearly and effectively. Additionally, you can display more than one chart type in a 2-D chart to show data in different ways in the same chart.

When displaying multiple chart types in a chart, you might want to plot a data series or chart type group along a different value axis. For example, when the average values for different data series vary widely, or when you have mixed types of data such as price and volume, you can plot one or more data series along the secondary value axis instead of along the primary axis.

See Also

Help

Changing the chart type of a data series

Changing the chart type of an entire chart

Plotting data along a secondary axis

Multiple Chart Types and a Secondary Axis

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Multiple Chart Types and a Secondary Axis

Overview

You can display multiple chart types in a single chart, and you can show a single data series or a chart type group plotted against another value axis.

Displaying Multiple Chart Types in a Chart

Sometimes you want to display data in different ways in the same chart. For example, you might want to format two data series as columns, and format another data series as a line to show contrast and comparison more clearly. By combining different chart types, you can create an overlay effect.

When you format one or more data series as one chart type, you create a chart type group, which is then listed at the bottom of the Format menu. You can select the group from the Format menu and make changes such as changing the chart subtype or plotting the group along a secondary axis. The changes you make apply to all data series included in the group.

Tip  You can quickly combine chart types by selecting an autoformat. For more information about using autoformats, see Applying an autoformat to a chart.

Guidelines for Combining Chart Types and Using a Secondary Axis

Because different chart types use axes differently, there are some limitations on how you combine 2-D chart types:

You can create any combination of area, column, line, and xy (scatter) charts.

You can have one group formatted as a bar, pie, doughnut, or radar chart, along with any combination of area, column, line, and xy (scatter) charts. A bar chart group must be plotted against a secondary axis because its axes are rotated; that is, the category axis is vertical and the value axis is horizontal.

Note  You cannot combine chart types when using 3-D charts.

See Also

Help

Axis Tab, [chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Changing the chart type of a data series

Changing the chart type of an entire chart

Plotting data along a secondary axis

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Changing the chart type of an entire chart

Overview

You can change the chart type of an entire chart to which you have already applied an autoformat or individual formatting. You can also change a chart type by applying an autoformat, but be aware that the autoformat will replace all of your original formatting.

1.	Activate the chart whose type you want to change.

2.	From the Format menu or the shortcut menu, choose Chart Type.

3.	Under Apply To, select the Entire Chart option button.

4.	Under Chart Dimension, select either the 2-D or 3-D option button.

Depending on the option selected, either 2-D or 3-D chart types are displayed.

5.	Select the chart type you want.

Note  To specify more options, such as subtype or series order, choose the Options button to close this dialog box and display the Format [chart type] Group dialog box for the active chart type group. To return to the Chart Type dialog box, choose the Chart Type button in the Format [chart type] Group dialog box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Chart Type Button

Changing the chart type of a data series

Chart Type Command (Format Menu)

Plotting data along a secondary axis

Multiple Chart Types and a Secondary Axis

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Changing the chart type of a data series

Overview

You can change the chart type for one selected data series, or for one or more chart type groups.

To change the chart type of a data series

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Select the data series whose chart type you want to change.

3.	From the Format menu or the shortcut menu, choose Chart Type.

The Selected Series option button is selected.

4.	Under Chart Dimension, select the 2-D option button.

Important  You cannot combine 3-D charts. Selecting a 3-D chart for one data series will cause the entire chart to change to that 3-D chart type.

5.	Select the chart type you want.

6.	Choose the OK button.

To change the chart type for a chart type group

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	From the Format menu or the shortcut menu, choose Chart Type.

3.	Under Apply To, select the Group option button.

The box below displays a list of all chart types associated with each data series (such as Column Group or Line Group) in your active chart.

4.	Select the chart group you want to change.

5.	Under Chart Dimension, select the 2-D option button.

Important  You cannot combine 3-D charts. Selecting a 3-D chart for one chart type group will cause the entire chart to change to that 3-D chart type.

6.	Select the chart type you want.

Note  To specify more options, such as subtype or series order, choose the Options button to close this dialog box and display the Format [chart type] Group dialog box for the active chart group. To return to the Chart Type dialog box, choose the Chart Type button in the Format [chart type] Group dialog box.

7.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Chart Type Button

Changing the chart type of an entire chart

Chart Type Command (Format Menu)

Plotting data along a secondary axis

Multiple Chart Types and a Secondary Axis

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Plotting data along a secondary axis

Overview

In a 2-D chart, you can plot a single data series or a chart type group along a secondary value axis. The scale of the secondary axis reflects the values for the associated series. To plot a chart type group along a secondary axis, you must have multiple chart types in the chart.

To plot one data series on a second value axis

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	Double-click the data series whose axis you want to change.

3.	Select the Axis tab.

4.	Select either the Primary Axis or Secondary Axis option button.

Check the sample chart in the box to see if you like the changed effect.

5.	Choose the OK button.

To plot a chart group on another axis

1.	Activate the chart.

2.	 From the Format menu, choose the chart type group (such as Column Group or Line Group) that you want to change.

3.	Select the Axis tab.

4.	Select either the Primary Axis or Secondary Axis option button.

Check the sample chart in the box to see if you like the changed effect.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Axis Tab, [chart type] Group Command (Format Menu)

Changing the chart type of a data series

Changing the chart type of an entire chart

Multiple Chart Types and a Secondary Axis

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Overview of Working with Chart Autoformats

Once you create a chart and add chart items such as data labels or titles, you can then format, move, and size many of the items in the chart. There is an easy alternative to selecting and formatting individual chart items: you can apply a built-in chart autoformat. Or you can create your own custom (user-defined) autoformats, which you can apply to charts.

Autoformats work much like templates or styles. Each autoformat is based on a chart type. It can also include subtype, legend, gridlines, data labels, colors, patterns, and the placement of various chart items. When you apply an autoformat to an active chart, it changes the entire look of the chart but does not affect your data. You cannot modify any autoformats, but you can delete custom autoformats.

If you've applied custom formatting that you don't want to lose, but you want to use a different chart type, do not apply an autoformat. You should change the chart type using the Chart Type command on the Format menu or the Chart Type button.

Sharing Autoformats with Other Microsoft Excel Users

You can share custom autoformats with other Microsoft Excel users in your workgroup by making available the workbook in which the autoformats are stored. The workbook filename is XL5GALRY.XLS in the XLSTART directory in the directory where you installed Microsoft Excel.

Autoformats can also be shared between Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh. For more information, see Moving files between Windows and the Macintosh. For information about storing startup workbooks, see Opening a workbook automatically.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list

Applying an autoformat to a chart

Changing the chart type of an entire chart

Changing the default chart format

Deleting a custom autoformat from the Formats list

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Applying an autoformat to a chart

Overview

You can apply a built-in or custom (user-defined) autoformat to an active chart.

To apply a built-in autoformat

1.	Activate the chart to which you want to apply a built-in autoformat.

2.	From the Format menu or the shortcut menu, choose AutoFormat.

3.	Under Formats Used, select the Built-in option button.

4.	Under Galleries, select the chart type you want.

The Formats box shows pictures of the available built-in autoformats for that chart type.

5.	In the Formats box, select the autoformat you want to apply to your active chart.

6.	Choose the OK button.

Tip  If you don't like the last autoformat you applied, you can use the Undo command on the Edit menu to clear the autoformat.

To apply a custom autoformat

1.	Activate the chart to which you want to apply a custom autoformat.

2.	From the Format menu or the shortcut menu, choose AutoFormat.

3.	Under Formats Used, select the User-Defined option button.

4.	Under Formats, select the custom autoformat you want to apply to your active chart.

A sample of the autoformat you selected is shown.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Tip  If you don't like the last autoformat you applied, you can use the Undo command on the Edit menu to clear the autoformat.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Deleting a custom autoformat from the Formats list

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list

Overview

Using the AutoFormat command, you can add a custom (user-defined) formatted chart to the Formats list. You can then select this custom autoformat from the list anytime and apply it to other charts.

1.	Activate a formatted chart whose format you want to add to the Formats list.

2.	From the Format menu or the shortcut menu, choose AutoFormat.

3.	Under Formats Used, select the User-Defined option button.

The AutoFormat dialog box changes, listing any existing custom autoformats under Formats.

4.	Choose the Customize button.

5.	In the User-Defined AutoFormats dialog box, choose the Add button.

6.	In the Add Custom AutoFormat dialog box, type a name (up to 31 characters) and a description (up to 32 characters).

7.	Choose the OK button to close this dialog box.

The newly named autoformat is added to the Formats list.

8.	Choose the Close button to close the User-Defined AutoFormats dialog box.

See Also

Help

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Applying an autoformat to a chart

Changing the default chart format

Deleting a custom autoformat from the Formats list

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Deleting a custom autoformat from the Formats list

Overview

You can delete a custom autoformat from the list; built-in autoformats cannot be deleted.

1.	From the Format menu or the shortcut menu, choose AutoFormat.

2.	Under Formats Used, select the User-Defined option button.

3.	Choose the Customize button.

4.	Under Formats, select the chart autoformat you want to delete.

5.	Choose the Delete button.

Important  A message is displayed asking you to confirm that you want to delete this autoformat. Once you choose the OK button, you cannot restore (undo) the deleted autoformat.

6.	Choose the OK button to confirm the message.

7.	Choose the Close button.

See Also

Help

Adding a custom autoformat to the Formats list

Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 16, "Working with Chart Types and Autoformats"

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"


Utility Buttons Category

AutoSum Button

Automatically invokes the SUM function and suggests the range of cells to be added.

Calculate Now Button

Fixes a formula or a selected portion of a formula at its current value.

Camera Button

Creates a picture of a selected range of cells and pastes the picture onto a worksheet as a linked object.

Create Button Button

Creates a button to which you can assign a macro or Visual Basic procedure.

Freeze Panes Button

Freezes the top pane, the left pane, or both, on the active sheet.

Full Screen Button

Use the Full Screen button to display the Standard and Formatting toolbars, the status bar and the formula bar after choosing the Full Screen command from the View menu.

Function Wizard Button

Opens the Function Wizard dialog box and inserts the selected function into the formula bar or active cell.

Help Button

Adds a question mark (?) to the mouse pointer so that you can get information about commands or screen elements.

Lock Cell Button

Enables you to specify which cells and graphic objects will be locked and which will be unlocked after you protect a sheet using the Protect Sheet command (Tools menu, Protection submenu).

Microsoft Access Button

Starts Microsoft Access if it is not already running.

Microsoft FoxPro Button

Starts Microsoft FoxPro if it is not already running.

Microsoft Mail Button

Starts Microsoft Mail if it is not already running, and displays documents sent to you by other users.

Microsoft PowerPoint Button

Starts Microsoft PowerPoint if it is not already running.

Microsoft Project Button

Starts Microsoft Project if it is not already running.

Microsoft Schedule+ Button

Starts Microsoft Schedule+ if it is not already running.

Microsoft Word Button

Starts Microsoft Word if it is not already running.

Paste Names Button

Displays the Paste Names dialog box so that you can insert a selected name into the formula bar.

Scenarios Box

Use the Scenarios box on the WorkGroup toolbar to add, display, and edit scenarios in Microsoft Excel.

Select Current Region Button

Selects a rectangular range of cells around the active cell.

Select Visible Cells Button

Selects only cells that are visible within the currently selected range; cells in hidden rows or columns are not selected.

Show Outline Symbols Button

Creates an outline, if one does not already exist, and displays or hides the outline symbols on your worksheet.

Sort Ascending Button

Sorts the current list in order from lowest value to highest value, using the column that contains the active cell.

Sort Descending Button

Sorts the current list in order from hightest value to lowest value, using the column that contains the active cell.

Spelling Button

Checks the spelling of text in worksheets and charts, including text in text boxes, buttons, headers and footers, cell notes, or the formula bar.

Text Box Button

Draws a text box in which you can type text on a worksheet; lets you add unattached or "floating" text to a chart.

Zoom Control Box

Allows you to see more or less detail by changing the scale of the sheet.

Zoom In Button

Allows you to see more detail by changing the scale of the sheet to the next higher magnification.

Zoom Out Button

Allows you to see more of the sheet by changing the scale to the next lower magnification.


Calculate Now Button

Fixes a formula or a selected portion of a formula at its current value. Calculates the formulas in all the open documents or the formula in the formula bar.

Shortcut:	F9

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"


Camera Button

Creates a picture of a selected range of cells and pastes the picture onto a worksheet as a linked object. This button is in the Utility button category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Copying a linked picture of cells

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Create Button Button

Creates a button to which you can assign a macro or Visual Basic procedure. When you use the Create Button button, Microsoft Excel displays the Assign Macro dialog box so that you can either assign an existing macro to the button or record a new macro to assign to the button. When you click the button, the macro or procedure runs.

To draw multiple buttons, double-click the Create Button button. The button remains selected until you click it again, click another button, press ESC, or click another part of the worksheet without dragging.

The Create Button button is on the Drawing toolbar and the Forms toolbar.

See Also

Help

Assign Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Macro Command (Insert Menu)

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 1, "Automating Repeated Tasks"

Chapter 11, "Controls and Dialog Boxes"


Help Button

Adds a question mark (?) to the mouse pointer. When you place the new pointer over a command name or screen element and click the mouse button, you get information about that command or screen element.

As you drag the mouse pointer over the toolbar buttons, the function of each button appears in the status bar.  Only the name of the chart appears for the charting tools.

The Help button remains selected until you choose a command, click a screen element, or press ESC.

If you double-click the Help button, the Search dialog box appears.

Shortcut:	SHIFT+F1

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Searching Help for a particular topic

User's Guide

Chapter 5, "Getting Information While You Work"


Lock Cell Button

Enables you to specify which cells and graphic objects will be locked and which will be unlocked after you protect a sheet using the Protect Sheet command (Tools menu, Protection submenu).

All cells in a new sheet and all newly created graphic objects are assigned a locked status by default. However, cells and objects aren't really locked until the sheet is protected using the Protect Sheet command.

Use the Lock Cell button before protecting a sheet when you want to specify that certain objects or cell ranges remain unlocked after the sheet is protected. For example, if you use a worksheet as a form, you can leave cells containing labels and instructions locked, and then use the Lock Cell button to specify that entry fields be unlocked. Then, protect the sheet using the Protect Sheet command.

To unlock a cell or object before protecting the sheet, select the cell, the range, or the object, and then click the Lock Cell button.

You can't use the Lock Cell button after a sheet is protected. To unlock a cell, a range, or an object after a sheet is protected, you have to unprotect the sheet first.

Note To use the Lock Cell button, you must first add it to a toolbar by using the Toolbars command on the View menu. The Lock Cell button is in the Utility button category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Locking and unlocking graphic objects on a worksheet or chart sheet

Locking and unlocking individual cell ranges on a worksheet

Protect Sheet Command and Unprotect Sheet Command (Tools Menu, Protection Submenu)

Protecting and unprotecting a sheet

Protection Tab, Cells Command (Format Menu)

Protection Tab, Object Command (Format Menu)

Toolbars Command (View Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Microsoft Mail Button

Starts Microsoft Mail if it is not already running, and displays documents sent to you by other users. This button appears on the Microsoft toolbar.

This button functions similarly to the Switch To command on the Microsoft Excel Control menu.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Microsoft PowerPoint Button

Starts Microsoft PowerPoint if it is not already running. This button appears on the Microsoft toolbar.

This button functions similarly to the Switch To command on the Microsoft Excel Control menu.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Microsoft FoxPro Button

Starts Microsoft FoxPro if it is not already running. This button appears on the Microsoft toolbar.

This button functions similarly to the Switch To command on the Microsoft Excel Control menu.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Microsoft Access Button

Starts Microsoft Access if it is not already running. This button appears on the Microsoft toolbar.

This button functions similarly to the Switch To command on the Microsoft Excel Control menu.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Microsoft Schedule+ Button

Starts Microsoft Schedule+ if it is not already running. This button appears on the Microsoft toolbar.

This button functions similarly to the Switch To command on the Microsoft Excel Control menu.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Microsoft Project Button

Starts Microsoft Project if it is not already running. This button appears on the Microsoft toolbar.

This button functions similarly to the Switch To command on the Microsoft Excel Control menu.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Microsoft Word Button

Starts Microsoft Word if it is not already running. This button appears on the Microsoft toolbar.

This button functions similarly to the Switch To command on the Microsoft Excel Control menu.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

User's Guide

Chapter 41, "Sharing Data and Graphics with Other Applications"


Select Current Region Button

Selects a rectangular range of cells around the active cell. The range selected is a block of data bounded by any combination of blank rows or blank columns. The Select Current Region button is in the Utility button category.

Shortcut:	CTRL+SHIFT+*

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Go To Special Dialog Box

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Select Visible Cells Button

Selects only cells that are visible within the currently selected range; cells in hidden rows or columns are not selected. With only the visible cells selected, changes you make to the selection do not affect the hidden cells. The Select Visible Cells button is in the Utility button category.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Go To Special Dialog Box

User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Selecting Cells and Choosing Commands"


Show Outline Symbols Button

Creates an outline, if one does not already exist, and displays or hides the outline symbols on your worksheet. The Show Outline Symbols button is in the Utility button category.

If you have not yet created an outline, the Show Outline Symbols button creates one and then displays the outline symbols.

If the outline symbols are already displayed, the Show Outline Symbols button hides them.

Shortcut:	CRTL+8

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Outline Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 33, "Outlining a Worksheet"


TipWizard Button

Opens the TipWizard which displays tips based on the actions you perform.

Turns yellow whenever the TipWizard has a tip for you.

The TipWizard gives you a particular tip once during a Microsoft Excel session. During subsequent sessions, it gives you the same tip only if you perform the associated action three times. To clear the TipWizard memory (for example, when you are setting up a new user), choose the Options command from the Tools menu, select the General tab, and then select the Reset TipWizard check box.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

General Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Using the TipWizard


Zoom Control Box

Allows you to see more or less detail by changing the scale of the sheet. The Zoom Control box is on the Standard toolbar.

To use the Zoom Control box, click the arrow and select a magnification.

Selection fits the selected range to the current window size.

You can also type any magnification from 10 to 400 percent in the Zoom Control box.

Note  Zooming does not affect printing.

See Also

Help

Reducing or enlarging what you want to print

Zoom Command (View Menu)

Zooming in or out on a worksheet

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"


Zoom In Button

Allows you to see more detail by changing the scale of the sheet to the next higher magnification. The Zoom In button is in the Utility button category.

When the sheet is displayed at the maximum magnification, clicking the Zoom In button produces a beep.

If you hold down SHIFT while clicking this button, it functions like the Zoom Out button.

Note  Zooming does not affect printing.

See Also

Help

  Zoom Control Box

  Zoom Out Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Reducing or enlarging what you want to print

Zoom Command (View Menu)

Zooming in or out on a worksheet

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"


Zoom Out Button

Allows you to see more of the sheet by changing the scale to the next lower magnification. The Zoom Out button is in the Utility button category

When the sheet is displayed at the minimum magnification, clicking the Zoom Out button produces a beep.

If you hold down SHIFT while clicking this button, it functions like the Zoom In button.

Note  Zooming does not affect printing.

See Also

Help

  Zoom Control Box

  Zoom In Button

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Reducing or enlarging what you want to print

Zoom Command (View Menu)

Zooming in or out on a worksheet

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"


Trace Precedents Button

Draws arrows from all cells that supply values directly to the formula in the active cell (precedents).

This button is on the Auditing toolbar.

Additional clicks draw arrows to additional levels of precedents.

If the active cell contains no formula, selecting this button has no effect.

See Also

Help

Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

Trace Precedents Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Tracing precedent data and formulas

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Trace Dependents Button

Draws arrows from the active cell to cells with formulas that use the values in the active cell (dependents).

This button is on the Auditing toolbar.

Additional clicks draw arrows to additional levels of dependents related to the active cell.

If the active cell is not referred to by any formula in any open workbook, this button has no effect.

If dependents of the active cell are in an external workbook that is currently closed, this button has no effect.

See Also

Help

Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

Trace Dependents Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Tracing dependent formulas

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Trace Error Button

Draws arrows from the error value in the active cell to cells that might have caused the error.

This button is on the Auditing toolbar.

The active cell must contain an error value, or this button has no effect.

Red or dotted arrows point to the first precedent formula containing an error.

Blue or solid arrows point to the cells containing precedent values from the first formula containing an error.

See Also

Help

Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

Trace Error Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Using the error tracer to find error values visually

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Remove All Arrows Button

Deletes all tracer arrows from the worksheet.

This button is on the Auditing toolbar.

See Also

Help

Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

Remove All Arrows Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Remove Precedent Arrows Button

Deletes precedent tracer arrows from the active worksheet.

This button is on the Auditing toolbar.

One click removes the level of arrows farthest away from the active cell.

Additional clicks remove arrows from the next closest level of precedent cells.

If no precedent tracer arrows are visible, selecting this button has no effect.

If the active cell contains no formula, selecting this button has no effect.

See Also

Help

Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

Remove All Arrows Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Remove Dependent Arrows Button

Deletes dependent tracer arrows from the active worksheet.

This button is on the Auditing toolbar.

One click removes the level of arrows farthest away from the active cell.

Additional clicks remove arrows from the next closest level of dependent cells.

If no dependent tracer arrows exist, this button has no effect.

See Also

Help

Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

Remove All Arrows Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Attach Note Button

Displays the Cell Note dialog box so that you can attach text or audio comments to a cell.

This button is on the Auditing Toolbar.

See Also

Help

Adding an imported sound note

Copying a text or sound note to another cell

Creating text notes

Deleting text or sound notes from a cell

Displaying a text note

Displaying or hiding cell note indicators

Erasing a sound note

Overview of Adding Comments to a Worksheet

Playing a sound note

Printing text notes

Recording a sound note

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Show Info Window Button

Displays the Info window.

This button is on the Auditing toolbar.

See Also

Help

Displaying or removing information in the Info window

Info Menu Commands

Opening and closing the Info window

Overview of Using the Info Window to Investigate Cells

Printing Info window information for a range of cells

Viewing specific cells with the Info window

Working with the Info window displayed

User's Guide

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Scenarios Box

Use the Scenarios box on the WorkGroup toolbar to add, display, and edit scenarios in Microsoft Excel. When you first display the WorkGroup toolbar, the Scenarios box is empty.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Creating a scenario

Displaying a scenario

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Editing a scenario

User's Guide

Chapter 28, "Managing What-If Scenarios"


Full Screen Button

Use the Full Screen button to display the Standard and Formating toolbars, status bar and formula bar after choosing the Full Screen command from the View menu.

See Also

Help

Full Screen Command (View Menu)

Displaying the full screen

Zooming in or out on a worksheet

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Formula Bar Command (View Menu)

Displays or hides the formula bar.

See Also

Help

Editing cell contents

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Status Bar Command (View Menu)

Displays or hides the status bar.

See Also

Help

Changing what Microsoft Excel displays

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Toolbars Command (View Menu)

Allows you to add, create, edit, hide, and customize the toolbars.

Toolbars

Lists built-in toolbars followed by custom toolbars in alphabetic order. Checked toolbars are displayed in Microsoft Excel.

Shortcut:	CTRL+7 (shows or hides Standard toolbar)

Toolbar Name

Displays the name of the selected toolbar. Typing a new name creates a new toolbar. You cannot rename a customized or built-in toolbar.

New

Adds a new blank toolbar with the title you typed in the Toolbar Name box, and then displays the Customize dialog box so you can add buttons to the new toolbar.

Reset

Returns to the built-in version of the selected toolbar. Changes to Delete if you select a custom toolbar. You cannot reset a custom toolbar.

Delete

Deletes the selected custom toolbar. Changes to Reset if you select a built-in toolbar. You cannot delete a built-in toolbar.

Customize

Displays the Customize dialog box so that you can add buttons to toolbars and customize both buttons and toolbars.

Categories

Lists all of the button categories.

Buttons

Shows the buttons that are in the selected button category.

Description

Describes the selected button.

Color Toolbars

Displays colored buttons. Clear this check box if you are using a black-and-white monitor and want to display the buttons with more contrast.

Large Buttons

Displays larger toolbar buttons. If your monitor has a higher resolution, you may want to display larger buttons.

Show ToolTips

Shows the name of the button when the pointer is placed over any button on a toolbar.

See Also

Help

Creating and deleting a custom toolbar

Overview of Customizing Toolbars

Using Toolbar Buttons

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Full Screen Command (View Menu)

Maximizes the Microsoft Excel window and hides the Standard toolbar, Formatting toolbar, and status bar. After you choose the Full Screen command, the Full Screen button automatically appears in a toolbar.

Click the Full Screen button to return to normal view.

See Also

Help

Displaying the full screen

Full Screen Button

Zooming in or out on a worksheet

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


View Manager Command (View Menu)

Creates different views of a worksheet. A view provides an easy way to see your data with different display options. You can display, print, and store different views without saving them as separate sheets.

If the View Manager command does not appear on the View menu, you need to install the View Manager add-in.

Use this command to show a view you created earlier, create a new view, or delete a view.

When you create a view, you name the view and choose whether to save the current print settings with your view. You can also save hidden rows and columns with your view.

A view you create always includes window size and position, frozen panes or titles, outlining, zoom percentage, the active cell, print area, and many of the settings in the Options dialog box, which you open from the Tools menu.

Views

Lists all the views defined for the active worksheet.

Show

Shows the view selected in the Views box.

Close

Closes the Views dialog box.

Add

Displays the Add View dialog box.

Name

Type a unique name to create a view. All views for a worksheet appear in the View dialog box.

View Includes

To save the currently selected print options, leave the Print Settings check box selected; otherwise, clear the check box.

If you want hidden columns and rows to be saved as part of your view, leave the Hidden Rows & Columns check box selected; otherwise, clear the check box.

Note  Any previously defined print area is always saved with your view. If no print area is defined, the whole worksheet will be printed.

Delete

Deletes the view selected in the Views box.

See Also

Help

Creating or deleting a view of a worksheet

Displaying a view of a worksheet

Print Report Command (File Menu)

Printing a view of a worksheet

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Zoom Command (View Menu)

Displays a worksheet or chart sheet at different scales for navigating, positioning objects, or viewing your worksheet.

This command allows you to enlarge a worksheet or chart sheet to see it in greater detail, or reduce the sheet to view more of it on your screen.

You can select a built-in zoom setting, or type a zoom percentage between 10 and 400 percent.

When you select the Fit Selection option button, Microsoft Excel calculates a zoom percentage so that the selected cells or chart sheet fit in the current window size.

You can also use the Zoom Control box on the toolbar.

To zoom on chart sheets, the Sized With Window command must be unchecked on the View menu.

See Also

Help

  Zoom Control Box

Displaying the full screen

Reducing or enlarging what you want to print

Sized With Window Command (View Menu)

Sizing a chart sheet with the window

Zooming in or out on a worksheet

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 32 "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"


Procedure Definition Command (View Menu)

Jumps to the code that defines the procedure selected in the active Visual Basic module. If the procedure is in a different module, this command opens a new window to define that module; if the procedure is in the active module, the module scrolls to the location of the procedure.

See Also

Help

Recording code into an existing macro

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 4, "Introducing Visual Basic Procedures"

Chapter 8, "Testing and Debugging Your Code"


Object Browser Command (View Menu)

Object Browser Button

Displays the Object Browser dialog box, which lists all procedures, objects, methods, and properties that are available for use in the active workbook or that are currently loaded in Excel.

Libraries/Workbooks

Specifies whether you are browsing objects referenced in the current workbook, or in referenced type libraries such as Microsoft Excel and Visual Basic for Applications.

Objects/Modules

Displays a list of objects and Visual Basic modules.

Methods/Properties

Displays a list of methods and properties.

Show

Displays the selected objects and their named arguments.

Paste

Pastes the selected objects into the active Visual Basic module.

Options

Opens the Macro Options dialog box so that you can set options for the selected module.

Help On Procedure Or Property

Click this button to get Help on the selected item.

See Also

Help

Recording code into an existing macro

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 5, "Working with Objects in Visual Basic"


Sized With Window Command (View Menu)

Controls whether the size of a chart sheet is dependent on or independent of the window size.

By default, a newly created chart sheet is independent of the window size, and the command is unchecked on the View menu.

When a chart is sized independently, you can use the Zoom command on the View menu.

When a chart sheet is sized with the window (dependent), it fills the entire window, the command is checked on the View menu, and you cannot zoom. This is a convenient way to view all of your chart, but it does not indicate how it will be printed.

This command is equivalent to selecting or clearing the Chart Sizes With Window Frame check box in the Chart tab (Tools menu, Options command).

See Also

Help

Chart Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Selecting the print size for a chart sheet

Sizing a chart sheet with the window

Zoom Command (View Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 18, "Formatting a Chart"

Chapter 32 "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"


Debug Window Command (View Menu)

Displays the Debug window, in which you view or enter debugging information. The Debug window is active in Break mode, and the Debug Window command is therefore unavailable.

Watch Pane

Lists items to watch that have been set by the user, including the watch expressions, values, and context strings.

Immediate Pane

Allows you to enter and execute code or display the contents of variables. Code entered here is not saved.

Code Pane

Shows code and highlights the current line.

Calls

Lists the calls in the active Visual Basic module.

See Also

Help

Add Watch Command (Tools Menu)

Recording code into an existing macro

Visual Basic User's Guide

Chapter 8, "Testing and Debugging Your Code"


View Procedures Dialog Box

There are two or more procedures in this workbook that have the same name (the procedures can have the same name because they are in different modules). Select the procedure from the list and then choose Show.


Basic Help Dialog Box

You asked for help on a Visual Basic keyword that is defined in more than one context. For example, the Application keyword is both a property and an object in Microsoft Excel; the InputBox keyword is a method in Microsoft Excel, but it is a function in the Visual Basic core language.

Select the keyword for which you want help and then choose the OK button. For example, to get help on the InputBox method, choose Excel: InputBox and then choose the OK button.


ABS

Returns the absolute value of a number. The absolute value of a number is the number without its sign.

Syntax

ABS(number)

Number    is the real number of which you want the absolute value.

Examples

ABS(2) equals 2

ABS(-2) equals 2

If A1 contains -16, then:

SQRT(ABS(A1)) equals 4

Related Functions

IMABS	Returns the absolute value (modulus) of a complex number

SIGN	Returns the sign of a number

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


ACOS

Returns the arccosine of a number. The arccosine is the angle whose cosine is number. The returned angle is given in radians in the range 0 to π.

Syntax

ACOS(number)

Number    is the cosine of the angle you want and must be from -1 to 1.

If you want to convert the result from radians to degrees, multiply it by 180/PI().

Examples

ACOS(-0.5) equals 2.094395 (2π/3 radians)

ACOS(-0.5)*180/PI() equals 120 (degrees)

Related Functions

COS	Returns the cosine of a number

PI	Returns the value π

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


ACOSH

Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number. Number must be greater than or equal to 1. The inverse hyperbolic cosine is the value whose hyperbolic cosine is number, so ACOSH(COSH(number)) equals number.

Syntax

ACOSH(number)

Number    is any real number equal to or greater than 1.

Examples

ACOSH(1) equals 0

ACOSH(10) equals 2.993223

Related Functions

ASINH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number

ATANH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number

COSH	Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


AND

Returns TRUE if all its arguments are TRUE; returns FALSE if one or more arguments is FALSE.

Syntax

AND(logical1, logical2, ...)

Logical1, logical2,...    are 1 to 30 conditions you want to test that can be either TRUE or FALSE.

The arguments should be logical values or arrays or references that contain logical values.

If an array or reference argument contains text or empty cells, those values are ignored.

If the specified range contains no logical values, AND returns the #VALUE! error value.

Examples

AND(TRUE, TRUE) equals TRUE

AND(TRUE, FALSE) equals FALSE

AND(2+2=4, 2+3=5) equals TRUE

If B1:B3 contains the values TRUE, FALSE, and TRUE, then:

AND(B1:B3) equals FALSE

If B4 contains a number between 1 and 100, then:

AND(1<B4, B4<100) equals TRUE

Suppose you want to display B4 if it contains a number strictly between 1 and 100, and you want to display a message if it is not. If B4 contains 104, then:

IF(AND(1<B4, B4<100), B4, "The value is out of range.") equals "The value is out of range."

If B4 contains 50, then:

IF(AND(1<B4, B4<100), B4, "The value is out of range.") equals 50

Related Functions

NOT	Reverses the logic of its argument

OR	Returns TRUE if any argument is TRUE

List of Logical Functions


ASIN

Returns the arcsine of a number. The arcsine is the angle whose sine is number. The returned angle is given in radians in the range -π/2 to π/2.

Syntax

ASIN(number)

Number    is the sine of the angle you want and must be from -1 to 1.

Remarks

To express the arcsine in degrees, multiply the result by 180/PI( ).

Examples

ASIN(-0.5) equals -0.5236 (-π/6 radians)

ASIN(-0.5)*180/PI() equals -30 (degrees)

Related Functions

ASINH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number

PI	Returns the value π

SIN	Returns the sine of the given angle

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


ASINH

Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number. The inverse hyperbolic sine is the value whose hyperbolic sine is number, so ASINH(SINH(number)) equals number.

Syntax

ASINH(number)

Number    is any real number.

Examples

ASINH(-2.5) equals -1.64723

ASINH(10) equals 2.998223

Related Functions

ACOSH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number

ATANH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number

SINH	Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


ATAN

Returns the arctangent of a number. The arctangent is the angle whose tangent is number. The returned angle is given in radians in the range -π/2 to π/2.

Syntax

ATAN(number)

Number    is the tangent of the angle you want.

Remarks

To express the arctangent in degrees, multiply the result by 180/PI( ).

Examples

ATAN(1) equals 0.785398 (π/4 radians)

ATAN(1)*180/PI() equals 45 (degrees)

Related Functions

ATAN2	Returns the arctangent from x- and y- coordinates

ATANH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number

PI	Returns the value π

TAN	Returns the tangent of a number

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


ATAN2

Returns the arctangent of the specified x- and y- coordinates. The arctangent is the angle from the x-axis to a line containing the origin (0, 0) and a point with coordinates (x_num, y_num). The angle is given in radians between -π and π, excluding -π.

Syntax

ATAN2(x_num, y_num)

X_num    is the x-coordinate of the point.

Y_num    is the y-coordinate of the point.

Remarks

A positive result represents a counterclockwise angle from the x-axis; a negative result represents a clockwise angle.

ATAN2(a,b) equals ATAN(b/a), except that a can equal 0 in ATAN2.

If both x_num and y_num are 0, ATAN2 returns the #DIV/0! error value.

To express the arctangent in degrees, multiply the result by 180/PI( ).

Examples

ATAN2(1, 1) equals 0.785398 (π/4 radians)

ATAN2(-1, -1) equals -2.35619 (-3π/4 radians)

ATAN2(-1, -1)*180/PI() equals -135 (degrees)

Related Functions

ATAN	Returns the arctangent of a number

ATANH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number

PI	Returns the value π

TAN	Returns the tangent of a number

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


ATANH

Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number. Number must be between -1 and 1 (excluding -1 and 1). The inverse hyperbolic tangent is the value whose hyperbolic tangent is number, so ATANH(TANH(number)) equals number.

Syntax

ATANH(number)

Number    is any real number between 1 and -1.

Examples

ATANH(0.76159416) equals 1, approximately

ATANH(-0.1) equals -0.10034

Related Functions

ACOSH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number

ASINH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number

TANH	Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


AVEDEV

Returns the average of the absolute deviations of data points from their mean. AVEDEV is a measure of the variability in a data set.

Syntax

AVEDEV(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want the average of the absolute deviations. You can also use a single array or a reference to an array instead of arguments separated by commas.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

The equation for average deviation is:

AVEDEV is influenced by the unit of measurement in the input data.

Example

AVEDEV(4, 5, 6, 7, 5, 4, 3) equals 1.020408

Related Functions

DEVSQ	Returns the sum of squares of deviations

STDEV	Estimates standard deviation based on a sample

STDEVP	Calculates standard deviation based on the entire population

VAR	Estimates variance based on a sample

VARP	Calculates variance based on the entire population

List of Statistical Functions


AVERAGE

Returns the average (arithmetic mean) of the arguments.

Syntax

AVERAGE(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 numeric arguments for which you want the average.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

Tip	When averaging cells, keep in mind the difference between empty cells and those containing the value zero, especially if you have cleared the Zero Values check box in the View tab of the Options dialog box. Empty cells are not counted, but zero values are. To see the Options dialog box, choose the Options command from the Tools menu.

Examples

If A1:A5 is named Scores and contains the numbers 10, 7, 9, 27, and 2, then:

AVERAGE(A1:A5) equals 11

AVERAGE(Scores) equals 11

AVERAGE(A1:A5, 5) equals 10

AVERAGE(A1:A5) equals SUM(A1:A5)/COUNT(A1:A5) equals 11

If C1:C3 is named OtherScores and contains the numbers 4, 18, and 7, then:

AVERAGE(Scores, OtherScores) equals 10.5

Related Functions

DAVERAGE	Returns the average of selected database entries

GEOMEAN	Returns the geometric mean

HARMEAN	Returns the harmonic mean

MEDIAN	Returns the median of the given numbers

MODE	Returns the most common value in a data set

TRIMMEAN	Returns the mean of the interior of a data set

List of Statistical Functions


BESSELI

Returns the modified Bessel function, which is equivalent to the Bessel function evaluated for purely imaginary arguments.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

BESSELI(x, n)

X    is the value at which to evaluate the function.

N    is the order of the Bessel function. If n is not an integer, it is truncated.

Remarks

If x is non-numeric, BESSELI returns the #VALUE! error value.

If n is non-numeric, BESSELI returns the #VALUE! error value.

If n < 0, BESSELI returns the #NUM! error value.

The n-th order modified Bessel function of the variable x is:

Example

BESSELI(1.5, 1) equals 0.981666

Related Functions

BESSELJ	Returns the Bessel function

BESSELK	Returns the modified Bessel function

BESSELY	Returns the Bessel function

List of Engineering Functions


BESSELJ

Returns the Bessel function.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

BESSELJ(x, n)

X    is the value at which to evaluate the function.

N    is the order of the Bessel function. If n is not an integer, it is truncated.

Remarks

If x is non-numeric, BESSELJ returns the #VALUE! error value.

If n is non-numeric, BESSELJ returns the #VALUE! error value.

If n < 0, BESSELJ returns the #NUM! error value.

The n-th order Bessel function of the variable x is:

where:

is the Gamma function.

Example

BESSELJ(1.9, 2) equals 0.329926

Related Functions

BESSELI	Returns the modified Bessel function

BESSELK	Returns the modified Bessel function

BESSELY	Returns the Bessel function

List of Engineering Functions


BESSELK

Returns the modified Bessel function, which is equivalent to the Bessel functions evaluated for purely imaginary arguments.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

BESSELK(x, n)

X    is the value at which to evaluate the function.

N    is the order of the function. If n is not an integer, it is truncated.

Remarks

If x is non-numeric, BESSELK returns the #VALUE! error value.

If n is non-numeric, BESSELK returns the #VALUE! error value.

If n < 0, BESSELK returns the #NUM! error value.

The n-th order modified Bessel function of the variable x is:

where Jn and Yn  are the J and Y Bessel functions, respectively.

Example

BESSELK(1.5, 1) equals 0.277388

Related Functions

BESSELI	Returns the modified Bessel function

BESSELJ	Returns the Bessel function

BESSELY	Returns the Bessel function

List of Engineering Functions


BESSELY

Returns the Bessel function, which is also called the Weber function or the Neumann function.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

BESSELY(x, n)

X    is the value at which to evaluate the function.

N    is the order of the function. If n is not an integer, it is truncated.

Remarks

If x is non-numeric, BESSELY returns the #VALUE! error value.

If n is non-numeric, BESSELY returns the #VALUE! error value.

If n < 0, BESSELY returns the #NUM! error value.

The n-th order Bessel function of the variable x is:

where:

Example

BESSELY(2.5, 1) equals 0.145918

Related Functions

BESSELI	Returns the modified Bessel function

BESSELJ	Returns the Bessel function

BESSELK	Returns the modified Bessel function

List of Engineering Functions


BIN2DEC

Converts a binary number to decimal.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

BIN2DEC(number)

Number    is the binary number you want to convert. Number may not contain more than 10 characters (10 bits). The most significant bit of number is the sign bit. The remaining 9 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Remarks

If number is not a valid binary number, or if number contains more than 10 characters (10 bits), BIN2DEC returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

BIN2DEC(1100100) equals 100

BIN2DEC(1111111111) equals -1

Related Functions

DEC2BIN	Converts a decimal number to binary

HEX2BIN	Converts a hexadecimal number to binary

OCT2BIN	Converts an octal number to binary

List of Engineering Functions


BIN2HEX

Converts a binary number to hexadecimal.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

BIN2HEX(number, places)

Number    is the binary number you want to convert. Number may not contain more than 10 characters (10 bits). The most significant bit of number is the sign bit. The remaining 9 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Places    is the number of characters to use. If places is omitted, BIN2HEX uses the minimum number of characters necessary. Places is useful for padding the return value with leading 0s (zeros).

Remarks

If number is not a valid binary number, or if number contains more than 10 characters (10 bits), BIN2HEX returns the #NUM! error value.

If number is negative, BIN2HEX ignores places and returns a 10-character hexadecimal number.

If BIN2HEX requires more than places characters, it returns the #NUM! error value.

If places is not an integer, it is truncated.

If places is non-numeric, BIN2HEX returns the #VALUE! error value.

If places is negative, BIN2HEX returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

BIN2HEX(11111011, 4) equals 00FB

BIN2HEX(1110) equals E

BIN2HEX(1111111111) equals FFFFFFFFFF

Related Functions

DEC2BIN	Converts a decimal number to binary

HEX2BIN	Converts a hexadecimal number to binary

OCT2BIN	Converts an octal number to binary

List of Engineering Functions


BIN2OCT

Converts a binary number to octal.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

BIN2OCT(number, places)

Number    is the binary number you want to convert. Number may not contain more than 10 characters (10 bits). The most significant bit of number is the sign bit. The remaining 9 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Places    is the number of characters to use. If places is omitted, BIN2OCT uses the minimum number of characters necessary. Places is useful for padding the return value with leading 0s (zeros).

Remarks

If number is not a valid binary number, or if number contains more than 10 characters (10 bits), BIN2OCT returns the #NUM! error value.

If number is negative, BIN2OCT ignores places and returns a 10-character octal number.

If BIN2OCT requires more than places characters, it returns the #NUM! error value.

If places is not an integer, it is truncated.

If places is non-numeric, BIN2OCT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If places is negative, BIN2OCT returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

BIN2OCT(1001, 3) equals 011

BIN2OCT(01100100) equals 144

BIN2OCT(1111111111) equals 7777777777

Related Functions

DEC2BIN	Converts a decimal number to binary

HEX2BIN	Converts a hexadecimal number to binary

OCT2BIN	Converts an octal number to binary

List of Engineering Functions


CEILING

Returns number rounded up, away from zero, to the nearest multiple of significance. For example, if you want to avoid using pennies in your prices and your product is priced at $4.42, use the formula =CEILING(4.42,0.05) to round prices up to the nearest nickel.

Syntax

CEILING(number, significance)

Number    is the value you want to round.

Significance    is the multiple to which you want to round.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, CEILING returns the #VALUE! error value.

Regardless of the sign of number, a value is rounded up when adjusted away from zero. If number is an exact multiple of significance, no rounding occurs.

If number and significance have different signs, CEILING returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

CEILING(2.5, 1) equals 3

CEILING(-2.5, -2) equals -4

CEILING(-2.5, 2) equals #NUM!

CEILING(1.5, 0.1) equals 1.5

CEILING(0.234, 0.01) equals 0.24

Related Functions

EVEN	Rounds a number up to the nearest even integer

FLOOR	Rounds a number down, toward zero

INT	Rounds a number down to the nearest integer

ODD	Rounds a number up to the nearest odd integer

ROUND	Rounds a number to a specified number of digits

ROUNDDOWN	Rounds a number down, toward zero

ROUNDUP	Rounds a number up, away from zero

TRUNC	Truncates a number to an integer

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


CHAR

Returns the character specified by the code number. Use CHAR to translate code numbers you might get from files on other types of computers into characters.

Syntax

CHAR(number)

Number    is a number between 1 and 255 specifying which character you want. The character is from the character set used by your computer.

Operating environment	Character set

Macintosh	Macintosh character set

Windows	ANSI

Examples

CHAR(65) equals "A"

CHAR(33) equals "!"

Related Functions

CODE	Returns a numeric code for the first character in a text string

List of Text Functions


CLEAN

Removes all nonprintable characters from text. Use CLEAN on text imported from other applications which contains characters that may not print with your operating system. For example, you can use CLEAN to remove some low-level computer code that is frequently at the beginning and end of data files and cannot be printed.

Syntax

CLEAN(text)

Text    is any worksheet information from which you want to remove nonprintable characters.

Example

Since CHAR(7) returns a nonprintable character:

CLEAN(CHAR(7)&"text"&CHAR(7)) equals "text"

Related Functions

CHAR	Returns the character specified by the code number

TRIM	Removes spaces from text

List of Text Functions


COMBIN

Returns the number of combinations for a given number of objects. Use COMBIN to determine the total possible number of groups for a given number of objects.

Syntax

COMBIN(number, number_chosen)

Number    is the number of objects.

Number_chosen    is the number of objects in each combination.

Remarks

Numeric arguments are truncated to integers.

If either argument is non-numeric, COMBIN returns the #NAME? error value.

If number < 0, number_chosen < 0, or number < number_chosen, COMBIN returns the #NUM! error value.

A combination is any set or subset of objects, regardless of their internal order. Combinations are distinct from permutations, for which the internal order is significant.

The number of combinations is as follows, where number = n and number_chosen = k:

where:

Example

Suppose you want to form a two-person team from eight candidates and you want to know how many possible teams can be formed. COMBIN(8, 2) equals 28 teams.

Related Functions

BINOMDIST	Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability

CRITBINOM	Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is less than or equal to a criterion value

FACT	Returns the factorial of a number

HYPGEOMDIST	Returns the hypergeometric distribution

NEGBINOMDIST	Returns the negative binomial distribution

PERMUT	Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


COS

Returns the cosine of the given angle.

Syntax

COS(number)

Number    is the angle in radians for which you want the cosine. If the angle is in degrees, multiply it by PI()/180 to convert it to radians.

Examples

COS(1.047) equals 0.500171

COS(60*PI()/180) equals 0.5, the cosine of 60 degrees

Related Functions

ACOS	Returns the arccosine of a number

COSH	Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number

PI	Returns the value π

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


COSH

Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number.

Syntax

COSH(number)

The formula for the hyperbolic cosine is:

Examples

COSH(4) equals 27.30823

COSH(EXP(1)) equals 7.610125, where EXP(1) is e, the base of the natural logarithm.

Related Functions

ACOSH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number

SINH	Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number

TANH	Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


COUNT

Counts how many numbers are in the list of arguments. Use COUNT to get the number of entries in a number field in a range or array of numbers.

Syntax

COUNT(value1, value2, ...)

Value1, value2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments that can contain or refer to a variety of data types, but only numbers are counted.

Arguments that are numbers, null, logical values, dates, or text representations of numbers are counted; arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers are ignored.

If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are counted. Empty cells, logical values, text, or error values in the array or reference are ignored.

Examples

If A3 contains "Sales," A4 contains "12/8/90," A6 contains "19," A7 contains "22.24," and A9 contains "#DIV/0!", then:

COUNT(A6:A7) equals 2

COUNT(A4:A7) equals 3

COUNT(A2, A6:A9, "Twelve", 5) equals 3

COUNT(A1:A9, , "2"), where "2" is a text representation of a number, equals 5

COUNT(0.1, TRUE, "three", 4, , 6.6666, 700, , 9, #DIV/0!) equals 8

Related Functions

AVERAGE	Returns the average of its arguments

COUNTA	Counts how many values are in the list of arguments

DCOUNT	Counts the cells containing numbers from a specified database and criteria

DCOUNTA	Counts nonblank cells from a specified database and criteria

SUM	Adds its arguments

List of Statistical Functions


COUNTA

Counts the number of nonblank values in the list of arguments. Use COUNTA to count the number of cells with data in a range or array.

Syntax

COUNTA(value1, value2, ...)

Value1, value2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments representing the values you want to count. In this case, a value is any type of information, including empty text ("") but not including empty cells. If an argument is an array or reference, empty cells within the array or reference are ignored.

Examples

If A3 contains "Sales," A4 contains "12/8/90," A6 contains "19," A7 contains "22.24," and A9 contains "#DIV/0!", then:

COUNTA(A6:A7) equals 2

COUNTA(A4:A7) equals 3

COUNTA(A3, A6:A9) equals 4

COUNTA(A1:A9) equals 5

COUNTA(1, , 1) equals 3

COUNTA(A4:A7, 10) equals 4

Related Functions

AVERAGE	Returns the average of its arguments

COUNT	Counts how many numbers are in the list of arguments

DCOUNT	Counts the cells containing numbers from a specified database and criteria

DCOUNTA	Counts nonblank cells from a specified database and criteria

PRODUCT	Multiplies its arguments

SUM	Adds its arguments

List of Statistical Functions


COVAR

Returns covariance, the average of the products of deviations for each data point pair. Use covariance to determine the relationship between two data sets. For example, you can examine whether greater income accompanies greater levels of education.

Syntax

COVAR(array1, array2)

Array1    is the first cell range of integers.

Array2    is the second cell range of integers.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If array1 and array2 have a different number of data points, COVAR returns the #N/A error value.

If either array1 or array2 are empty, COVAR returns the #DIV/0! error value.

The covariance is:

Example

COVAR({3, 2, 4, 5, 6}, {9, 7, 12, 15, 17}) equals 5.2

Related Functions

CORREL	Returns the correlation coefficient between two data sets

FISHER	Returns the Fisher transformation

FISHERINV	Returns the inverse of the Fisher transformation

List of Statistical Functions


DATE

Returns the serial number of a particular date. For more information about serial numbers, see NOW.

Syntax

DATE(year, month, day)

Year    is a number from 1900 to 2078 in Microsoft Excel for Windows or 1904 to 2078 in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh.

Month    is a number representing the month of the year. If month is greater than 12, then month adds that number of months to the first month in the year specified. For example, DATE(90,14,2) returns the serial number representing February 2, 1991.

Day    is a number representing the day of the month. If day is greater than the number of days in the month specified, then day adds that number of days to the first day in the month. For example, DATE(91,1,35) returns the serial number representing February 4, 1991.

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information, see NOW.

The DATE function is most useful in formulas where year, month, and day are formulas, not constants.

Examples

Using the 1900 Date System (the default in Microsoft Excel for Windows), DATE(91, 1, 1) equals 33239, the serial number corresponding to January 1, 1991.

Using the 1904 Date System (the default in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh), DATE(91, 1, 1) equals 31777, the serial number corresponding to January 1, 1991.

Related Functions

DATEVALUE	Converts a date in the form of text to a serial number

DAY	Converts serial numbers to days

MONTH	Converts serial numbers to months

YEAR	Convert serial numbers years

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

TIMEVALUE	Converts a time in the form of text to a serial number

TODAY	Returns the serial number of today's date

List of Date & Time Functions


DATEVALUE

Returns the serial number of the date represented by date_text. Use DATEVALUE to convert a date represented by text to a serial number.

Syntax

DATEVALUE(date_text)

Date_text    is text that returns a date in a Microsoft Excel date format. Using the default date system in Microsoft Excel for Windows, date_text must represent a date from January 1, 1900 to December 31, 2078. Using the default date system in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh, date_text must represent a date from January 1, 1904 to December 31, 2078. DATEVALUE returns the #VALUE! error value if date_text is out of this range.

If the year portion of date_text is omitted, DATEVALUE uses the current year from your computer's built-in clock. Time information in date_text is ignored.

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information, see NOW.

Most functions automatically convert date values to serial numbers.

Examples

The following examples use the 1900 Date System:

DATEVALUE("8/22/55") equals 20323

DATEVALUE("22-AUG-55") equals 20323

Assuming your computer's built-in clock is set to 1993 and you are using the 1900 Date System:

DATEVALUE("5-JUL") equals 34155

Related Functions

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

TIMEVALUE	Converts a time in the form of text to a serial number

TODAY	Returns the serial number of today's date

List of Date & Time Functions


DAY

Returns the day of the month corresponding to serial_number. The day is given as an integer ranging from 1 to 31.

Syntax

DAY(serial_number)

Serial_number    is the date-time code used by Microsoft Excel for date and time calculations. You can give serial_number as text, such as "4-15-93" or "15-Apr-1993", instead of as a number. The text is automatically converted to a serial number. For more information about serial_number, see NOW.

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information, see NOW.

Examples

DAY("4-Jan") equals 4

DAY("15-Apr-1993") equals 15

DAY("8/11/93") equals 11

Related Functions

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

TODAY	Returns the serial number of today's date

YEAR, MONTH, WEEKDAY, HOUR, MINUTE, and SECOND
Convert serial numbers into years, months, days of the week, hours, minutes, and seconds

List of Date & Time Functions


DAYS360

Returns the number of days between two dates based on a 360-day year (twelve 30-day months). Use this function to help compute payments if your accounting system is based on twelve 30-day months.

Syntax

DAYS360(start_date, end_date, method)

Start_date    and end_date    are the two dates between which you want to know the number of days.

The arguments can be either text strings using numbers to represent the month, day, and year (for example, "1/30/93" or "1-30-93"), or they can be serial numbers representing the dates.

If start_date occurs after end_date, DAYS360 returns a negative number.

Method    is a logical value that specifies whether the European or US method should be used in the calculation

Method	Defined

FALSE  or omitted	US (NASD). If the starting date is the 31st of a month, it becomes equal to the 30th of the same month.  If the ending date is the 31st of a month and the starting date is less than the 30th of a month, the ending date becomes equal to the 1st of the next month, otherwise the ending date becomes equal to the 30th of the same month.

TRUE	European method. Starting dates or ending dates which occur on the 31st of a month become equal to the 30th of the same month.

Tip	To determine the number of days between two dates in a normal year, you can use normal subtraction--for example, "12/31/93"-"1/1/93" equals 364.

Example

DAYS360("1/30/93", "2/1/93") equals 1

Related Function

DAY	Converts a serial number to a day of the month

List of Date & Time Functions


DEC2BIN

Converts a decimal number to binary.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

DEC2BIN(number, places)

Number    is the decimal integer you want to convert. If number is negative, places is ignored and DEC2BIN returns a 10-character (10-bit) binary number in which the most significant bit is the sign bit. The remaining 9 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Places    is the number of characters to use. If places is omitted, DEC2BIN uses the minimum number of characters necessary. Places is useful for padding the return value with leading 0s (zeros).

Remarks

If number < -512 or if number > 511, DEC2BIN returns the #NUM! error value.

If number is non-numeric, DEC2BIN returns the #VALUE! error value.

If DEC2BIN requires more than places characters, it returns the #NUM! error value.

If places is not an integer, it is truncated.

If places is non-numeric, DEC2BIN returns the #VALUE! error value.

If places is negative, DEC2BIN returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

DEC2BIN(9, 4) equals 1001

DEC2BIN(-100) equals 1110011100

Related Functions

BIN2DEC	Converts a binary number to decimal

HEX2DEC	Converts a hexadecimal number to decimal

OCT2DEC	Converts an octal number to decimal

List of Engineering Functions


DEC2HEX

Converts a decimal number to hexadecimal.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

DEC2HEX(number, places)

Number    is the decimal integer you want to convert. If number is negative, places is ignored and DEC2HEX returns a 10-character (40-bit) hexadecimal number in which the most significant bit is the sign bit. The remaining 39 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Places    is the number of characters to use. If places is omitted, DEC2HEX uses the minimum number of characters necessary. Places is useful for padding the return value with leading 0s (zeros).

Remarks

If number < -549,755,813,888 or if number > 549,755,813,887, DEC2HEX returns the #NUM! error value.

If number is non-numeric, DEC2HEX returns the #VALUE! error value.

If DEC2HEX requires more than places characters, it returns the #NUM! error value.

If places is not an integer, it is truncated.

If places is non-numeric, DEC2HEX returns the #VALUE! error value.

If places is negative, DEC2HEX returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

DEC2HEX(100, 4) equals 0064

DEC2HEX(-54) equals FFFFFFFFCA

Related Functions

BIN2DEC	Converts a binary number to decimal

HEX2DEC	Converts a hexadecimal number to decimal

OCT2DEC	Converts an octal number to decimal

List of Engineering Functions


DEC2OCT

Converts a decimal number to octal.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

DEC2OCT(number, places)

Number    is the decimal integer you want to convert. If number is negative, places is ignored and DEC2OCT returns a 10-character (30-bit) octal number in which the most significant bit is the sign bit. The remaining 29 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Places    is the number of characters to use. If places is omitted, DEC2OCT uses the minimum number of characters necessary. Places is useful for padding the return value with leading 0s (zeros).

Remarks

If number < -536,870,912 or if number > 536,870,911, DEC2OCT returns the #NUM! error value.

If number is non-numeric, DEC2OCT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If DEC2OCT requires more than places characters, it returns the #NUM! error value.

If places is not an integer, it is truncated.

If places is non-numeric, DEC2OCT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If places is negative, DEC2OCT returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

DEC2OCT(58, 3) equals 072

DEC2OCT(-100) equals 7777777634

Related Functions

BIN2DEC	Converts a binary number to decimal

HEX2DEC	Converts a hexadecimal number to decimal

OCT2DEC	Converts an octal number to decimal

List of Engineering Functions


DELTA

Tests whether two values are equal. Returns 1 if number1 = number2; returns 0 otherwise. Use this function to filter a set of values. For example, by summing several DELTA functions you calculate the count of equal pairs. This function is also known as the Kronecker Delta function.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

DELTA(number1, number2)

Number1    is the first number.

Number2    is the second number. If omitted, number2 is assumed to be zero.

Remarks

If number1 is non-numeric, DELTA returns the #VALUE! error value.

If number2 is non-numeric, DELTA returns the #VALUE! error value.

Examples

DELTA(5, 4) equals 0

DELTA(5, 5) equals 1

DELTA(0.5, 0) equals 0

Related Function

EXACT	Checks to see if two text values are identical

GESTEP	Tests whether a number is greater than a threshold value

List of Engineering Functions


DOLLAR

Converts a number to text using currency format, with the decimals rounded to the specified place. The format used is $#,##0.00_);($#,##0.00).

Syntax

DOLLAR(number, decimals)

Number    is a number, a reference to a cell containing a number, or a formula that evaluates to a number.

Decimals    is the number of digits to the right of the decimal point. If decimals is negative, number is rounded to the left of the decimal point. If you omit decimals, it is assumed to be 2.

Remarks

The major difference between formatting a cell containing a number with the Cell command from the Format menu and formatting a number directly with the DOLLAR function is that DOLLAR converts its result to text. A number formatted with the Cell command is still a number. You can continue to use numbers formatted with DOLLAR in formulas, because Microsoft Excel converts numbers entered as text values to numbers when it calculates.

Examples

DOLLAR(1234.567, 2) equals "$1234.57"

DOLLAR(1234.567, -2) equals "$1200"

DOLLAR(-1234.567, -2) equals "($1200)"

DOLLAR(-0.123, 4) equals "($0.1230)"

DOLLAR(99.888) equals "$99.89"

Related Functions

FIXED	Formats a number as text with a fixed number of decimals

TEXT	Formats a number and converts it to text

VALUE	Converts a text argument to a number

List of Text Functions


EOMONTH

Returns the serial number date for the last day of the month that is the indicated number of months before or after start_date. Use EOMONTH to calculate maturity dates or due dates that fall on the last day of the month.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

EOMONTH(start_date, months)

Start_date    is a serial date number that represents the start date.

Months    is the number of months before or after start_date. A positive value for months yields a future date; a negative value yields a past date.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, EOMONTH returns the #VALUE! error value.

If start_date is not a valid serial date number, EOMONTH returns the #NUM! error value.

If months is not an integer, it is truncated.

If start_date plus months yields an invalid serial date number, EOMONTH returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

EOMONTH(DATEVALUE("01/01/93"), 1) equals 34028 or 2/28/93

EOMONTH(DATEVALUE("01/01/93"), -1) equals 33969 or 12/31/92

Related Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

EDATE	Returns the serial number of the date that is the indicated number of months before or after the start date

NETWORKDAYS	Returns the number of whole workdays between two dates

WORKDAY	Returns the serial number of the date before or after a specified number of workdays

List of Date & Time Functions


ERF

Returns the error function integrated between lower_limit and upper_limit.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

ERF(lower_limit, upper_limit)

Lower_limit    is the lower bound for integrating ERF.

Upper_limit    is the upper bound for integrating ERF. If omitted, ERF integrates between zero and lower_limit.

Remarks

If lower_limit is non-numeric, ERF returns the #VALUE! error value.

If lower_limit is negative, ERF returns the #NUM! error value.

If upper_limit is non-numeric, ERF returns the #VALUE! error value.

If upper_limit is negative, ERF returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

ERF(0.74500) equals 0.70793

ERF(1) equals 0.84270

Related Function

ERFC	Returns the complementary error function

List of Engineering Functions


ERFC

Returns the complementary ERF function integrated between x and  (infinity)

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

ERFC(x)

X    is the lower bound for integrating ERF.

Remarks

If x is non-numeric, ERFC returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x is negative, ERFC returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

ERFC(1) equals 0.1573

Related Function

ERF	Returns the error function

List of Engineering Functions


EVEN

Returns number rounded up to the nearest even integer. You can use this function for processing items that come in twos. For example, a packing crate accepts rows of one or two items. The crate is full when the number of items, rounded up to the nearest two, matches the crate's capacity.

Syntax

EVEN(number)

Number    is the value to round.

Remarks

If number is non-numeric, EVEN returns the #VALUE! error value.

Regardless of the sign of number, a value is rounded up when adjusted away from zero. If number is an even integer, no rounding occurs.

Examples

EVEN(1.5) equals 2

EVEN(3) equals 4

EVEN(2) equals 2

EVEN(-1) equals -2

Related Functions

CEILING	Returns the number rounded up to the nearest multiple of significance

FLOOR	Rounds a number down, toward zero

INT	Rounds a number down to the nearest integer

ISEVEN	Returns TRUE if the number is even

ISODD	Returns TRUE if the number is odd

ODD	Rounds a number up to the nearest odd integer

ROUND	Rounds a number to a specified number of digits

TRUNC	Truncates a number to an integer

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


EXACT

Compares two text strings and returns TRUE if they are exactly the same, FALSE otherwise. EXACT is case-sensitive but ignores formatting differences. Use EXACT to test text being entered onto a document.

Syntax

EXACT(text1, text2)

Text1    is the first text string.

Text2    is the second text string.

Examples

EXACT("word", "word") equals TRUE

EXACT("Word", "word") equals FALSE

EXACT("w ord", "word") equals FALSE

To make sure that a user-entered value matches a value in a range, enter the following formula as an array in a cell. To enter a formula as an array in a single cell, press CTRL+SHIFT+ENTER (in Microsoft Excel for Windows) or COMMAND+ENTER (in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh). The name TestValue refers to a cell containing a user-entered value; the name CompareRange refers to a list of text values to be checked.

{=OR(EXACT(TestValue, CompareRange))}

Related Functions

DELTA	Tests whether two values are equal

LEN	Returns the number of characters in a text string

SEARCH	Finds one text value within another (not case-sensitive)

List of Text Functions


EXP

Returns e raised to the power of number. The constant e equals 2.71828182845904, the base of the natural logarithm.

Syntax

EXP(number)

Number    is the exponent applied to the base e.

Remarks

To calculate powers of other bases, use the exponentiation operator (^).

EXP is the inverse of LN, the natural logarithm of number.

Examples

EXP(1) equals 2.718282 (the approximate value of e)

EXP(2) equals e2, or 7.389056

EXP(LN(3)) equals 3

Related Functions

IMEXP	Returns the exponential of a complex number

LN	Returns the natural logarithm of a number

LOG	Returns the logarithm of a number to a specified base

POWER	Returns the result of number raised to power

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


FACT

Returns the factorial of a number. The factorial of a number is equal to 1*2*3*...* number.

Syntax

FACT(number)

Number    is the nonnegative number you want the factorial of. If number is not an integer, it is truncated.

Examples

FACT(1) equals 1

FACT(1.9) equals FACT(1) equals 1

FACT(0) equals 1

FACT(-1) equals #NUM!

FACT(5) equals 1*2*3*4*5 equals 120

Related Functions

DPRODUCT	Multiplies the values in a particular field of records that match the criteria in a database

FACTDOUBLE	Returns the double factorial of a number

PRODUCT	Multiplies its arguments

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


FACTDOUBLE

Returns the double factorial of a number.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

FACTDOUBLE(number)

Number    is the value for which to return the double factorial. If number is not an integer, it is truncated.

Remarks

If number is non-numeric, FACTDOUBLE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If number is negative, FACTDOUBLE returns the #NUM! error value.

If number is even:

If number is odd:

Examples

FACTDOUBLE(6) equals 48

FACTDOUBLE(7) equals 105

Related Functions

FACT	Returns the factorial of a number

MULTINOMIAL	Returns the multinomial of a set of numbers

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


FALSE

Returns the logical value FALSE.

Syntax

FALSE( )

Remarks

You can also type the word FALSE directly into the worksheet or formula, and Microsoft Excel interprets it as the logical value FALSE.

Related Functions

List of Logical Functions


FIXED

Rounds a number to the specified number of decimals, formats the number in decimal format using a period and commas, and returns the result as text.

Syntax

FIXED(number, decimals, no_commas)

Number    is the number you want to round and convert to text.

Decimals    is the number of digits to the right of the decimal point.

No_commas    is a logical value that, if TRUE, prevents FIXED from including commas in the returned text. If no_commas is FALSE or omitted, then the returned text includes commas as usual.

Numbers in Microsoft Excel can never have more than 15 significant digits, but decimals can be as large as 127.

If decimals is negative, number is rounded to the left of the decimal point.

If you omit decimals, it is assumed to be 2.

Remarks

The major difference between formatting a cell containing a number with the Cell command from the Format menu and formatting a number directly with the FIXED function is that FIXED converts its result to text. A number formatted with the Cell command is still a number.

Examples

FIXED(1234.567, 1) equals "1234.6"

FIXED(1234.567, -1) equals "1230"

FIXED(-1234.567, -1) equals "-1230"

FIXED(44.332) equals "44.33"

Related Functions

DOLLAR	Converts a number to text, using currency format

ROUND	Rounds a number to a specified number of digits

TEXT	Formats a number and converts it to text

VALUE	Converts a text argument to a number

List of Text Functions


FLOOR

Rounds number down, toward zero, to the nearest multiple of significance.

Syntax

FLOOR(number, significance)

Number    is the numeric value you want to round.

Significance    is the multiple to which you want to round.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, FLOOR returns the #VALUE! error value.

If number and significance have different signs, FLOOR returns the #NUM! error value.

Regardless of the sign of number, a value is rounded down when adjusted away from zero. If number is an exact multiple of significance, no rounding occurs.

Examples

FLOOR(2.5, 1) equals 2

FLOOR(-2.5, -2) equals -2

FLOOR(-2.5, 2) equals #NUM!

FLOOR(1.5, 0.1) equals 1.5

FLOOR(0.234, 0.01) equals 0.23

Related Functions

CEILING	Returns the number rounded up to the nearest multiple of significance

EVEN	Rounds a number up to the nearest even integer

INT	Rounds a number down to the nearest integer

ODD	Rounds a number up to the nearest odd integer

ROUND	Rounds a number to a specified number of digits

ROUNDDOWN	Rounds a number down, towards zero

ROUNDUP	Rounds a number up, away from zero

TRUNC	Truncates a number to an integer

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


FV

Returns the future value of an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate.

Syntax

FV(rate, nper, pmt, pv, type)

For a more complete description of the arguments in FV and for more information on annuity functions, see PV.

Rate    is the interest rate per period.

Nper    is the total number of payment periods in an annuity.

Pmt    is the payment made each period; it cannot change over the life of the annuity. Typically, pmt contains principal and interest but no other fees or taxes.

Pv    is the present value, or the lump-sum amount that a series of future payments is worth right now. If pv is omitted, it is assumed to be 0.

Type    is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due. If type is omitted, it is assumed to be 0.

Set type equal to	If payments are due

0	At the end of the period

1	At the beginning of the period

Remarks

Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying rate and nper. If you make monthly payments on a four-year loan at 12 percent annual interest, use 12%/12 for rate and 4*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 12% for rate and 4 for nper.

For all the arguments, cash you pay out, such as deposits to savings, is represented by negative numbers; cash you receive, such as dividend checks, is represented by positive numbers.

Examples

FV(0.5%, 10, -200, -500, 1) equals $2581.40

FV(1%, 12, -1000) equals $12,682.50

FV(11%/12, 35, -2000, , 1) equals $82,846.25

Suppose you want to save money for a special project occurring a year from now. You deposit $1000 into a savings account that earns 6 percent annual interest compounded monthly (monthly interest of 6%/12, or 0.5%). You plan to deposit $100 at the beginning of every month for the next 12 months. How much money will be in the account at the end of 12 months?

FV(0.5%, 12, -100, -1000, 1) equals $2301.40

Related Functions

FVSCHEDULE	Returns the future value of an initial principal after applying a series of compound interest rates

IPMT	Returns the interest payment for an investment for a given period

NPER	Returns the number of periods for an investment

PMT	Returns the periodic payment for an annuity

PPMT	Returns the payment on the principal for an investment for a given period

PV	Returns the present value of an investment

RATE	Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity

List of Financial Functions


GCD

Returns the greatest common divisor of two or more integers. The greatest common divisor is the largest integer that divides both number1 and number2 without a remainder.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

GCD(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 29 values. If any value is not an integer, it is truncated.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, GCD returns the #VALUE! error value.

If any argument is less than zero, GCD returns the #NUM! error value.

One divides any value evenly.

A prime number has only itself and one as even divisors.

Examples

GCD(5, 2) equals 1

GCD(24, 36) equals 12

GCD(7, 1) equals 1

GCD(5, 0) equals 5

Related Function

LCM	Returns the least common multiple

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


GESTEP

Returns 1 if number ≥ step; returns 0 otherwise. Use this function to filter a set of values. For example, by summing several GESTEP functions you calculate the count of values that exceed a threshold.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

GESTEP(number, step)

Number    is the value to test against step.

Step    is the threshold value. If you omit a value for step, GESTEP uses zero.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, GESTEP returns the #VALUE! error value.

Examples

GESTEP(5, 4) equals 1

GESTEP(5, 5) equals 1

GESTEP(-4, -5) equals 1

GESTEP(-1, 0) equals 0

Related Function

DELTA	Tests whether two values are equal

List of Engineering Functions


HEX2BIN

Converts a hexadecimal number to binary.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

HEX2BIN(number, places)

Number    is the hexadecimal number you want to convert. Number may not contain more than 10 characters. The most significant bit of number is the sign bit (40th bit from the right). The remaining 9 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Places    is the number of characters to use. If places is omitted, HEX2BIN uses the minimum number of characters necessary. Places is useful for padding the return value with leading 0s (zeros).

Remarks

If number is negative, HEX2BIN ignores places and returns a 10-character binary number.

If number is negative, it cannot be less than FFFFFFFE00, and if number is positive, it cannot be greater than 1FF.

If number is not a valid hexadecimal number, HEX2BIN returns the #NUM! error value.

If HEX2BIN requires more than places characters, it returns the #NUM! error value.

If places is not an integer, it is truncated.

If places is non-numeric, HEX2BIN returns the #VALUE! error value.

If places is negative, HEX2BIN returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

HEX2BIN("F", 8) equals 00001111

HEX2BIN("B7") equals 10110111

HEX2BIN("FFFFFFFFFF") equals 1111111111

Related Functions

BIN2HEX	Converts a binary number to hexadecimal

DEC2HEX	Converts a decimal number to hexadecimal

OCT2HEX	Converts an octal number to hexadecimal

List of Engineering Functions


HEX2DEC

Converts a hexadecimal number to decimal.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

HEX2DEC(number)

Number    is the hexadecimal number you want to convert. Number may not contain more than 10 characters (40 bits). The most significant bit of number is the sign bit. The remaining 39 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Remarks

If number is not a valid hexadecimal number, HEX2DEC returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

HEX2DEC("A5") equals 165

HEX2DEC("FFFFFFFF5B") equals -165

HEX2DEC("3DA408B9") equals 1034160313

Related Functions

BIN2HEX	Converts a binary number to hexadecimal

DEC2HEX	Converts a decimal number to hexadecimal

OCT2HEX	Converts an octal number to hexadecimal

List of Engineering Functions


HEX2OCT

Converts a hexadecimal number to octal.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

HEX2OCT(number, places)

Number    is the hexadecimal number you want to convert. Number may not contain more than 10 characters. The most significant bit of number is the sign bit. The remaining 39 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Places    is the number of characters to use. If places is omitted, HEX2OCT uses the minimum number of characters necessary. Places is useful for padding the return value with leading 0s (zeros).

Remarks

If number is negative, HEX2OCT ignores places and returns a 10-character octal number.

If number is negative, it cannot be less than FFE0000000, and if number is positive, it cannot be greater than 1FFFFFFF.

If number is not a valid hexadecimal number, HEX2OCT returns the #NUM! error value.

If HEX2OCT requires more than places characters, it returns the #NUM! error value.

If places is not an integer, it is truncated.

If places is non-numeric, HEX2OCT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If places is negative, HEX2OCT returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

HEX2OCT("F", 3) equals 017

HEX2OCT("3B4E") equals 35516

HEX2OCT("FFFFFFFF00") equals 7777777400

Related Functions

BIN2HEX	Converts a binary number to hexadecimal

DEC2HEX	Converts a decimal number to hexadecimal

OCT2HEX	Converts an octal number to hexadecimal

List of Engineering Functions


HOUR

Returns the hour corresponding to serial_number. The hour is given as an integer, ranging from 0 (12:00 A.M.) to 23 (11:00 P.M.).

Syntax

HOUR(serial_number)

Serial_number    is the date-time code used by Microsoft Excel for date and time calculations. You can give serial_number as text, such as "16:48:00" or "4:48:00 PM", instead of as a number. The text is automatically converted to a serial number. For more information about serial numbers, see NOW.

Note	Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information, see NOW.

Examples

HOUR(0.7) equals 16

HOUR(29747.7) equals 16

HOUR("3:30:30 PM") equals 15

Related Functions

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

YEAR, MONTH, DAY, WEEKDAY, HOUR, and MINUTE	Convert serial numbers into years, months, days, days of the week, hours, and minutes

List of Date & Time Functions


INT

Rounds a number down to the nearest integer.

Syntax

INT(number)

Number    is the real number you want to round down to an integer.

Examples

INT(8.9) equals 8

INT(-8.9) equals -9

The following formula returns the decimal part of a positive real number in cell A1:

A1-INT(A1)

Related Functions

CEILING	Rounds a number to the nearest integer or to the nearest multiple of significance

FLOOR	Rounds a number down, toward zero

MOD	Returns the remainder from division

MROUND	Returns a number rounded to the desired multiple

ROUND	Rounds a number to a specified number of digits

TRUNC	Truncates a number to an integer

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


INTERCEPT

Returns the intercept of the linear regression line through data points in known_x's and known_y's. The intercept is the point at which the regression line through the values in known_x's and known_y's intersects the y-axis. Use the intercept when you want to determine the value of the dependent variable when the independent variable is zero. For example, you can use INTERCEPT to predict a metal's electrical resistance at 0°C when your data points were taken at room temperature and higher.

Syntax

INTERCEPT(known_y's, known_x's)

Known_y's    is the dependent set of observations or data.

Known_x's    is the independent set of observations or data.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If known_y's and known_x's contain a different number of data points, or contain no data points, INTERCEPT returns the #N/A error value.

The equation for the intercept of the regression line is:

where the slope is calculated as:

Example

INTERCEPT({2, 3, 9, 1, 8}, {6, 5, 11, 7, 5}) equals 0.0483871

Related Functions

FORECAST	Returns a value along a linear trend

GROWTH	Returns values along an exponential trend

LINEST	Returns the parameters of a linear trend

LOGEST	Returns the parameters of an exponential trend

PEARSON	Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient

RSQ	Returns the square of the Pearson product moment correlatin coefficient

SLOPE	Returns the slope of the linear regression line

STEYX	Returns the standard error of the predicted y-value for each x in the regression

TREND	Returns values along a linear trend

List of Statistical Functions


IPMT

Returns the interest payment for a given period for an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate. For a more complete description of the arguments in IPMT and for more information on annuity functions, see PV.

Syntax

IPMT(rate, per, nper, pv, fv, type)

Rate    is the interest rate per period.

Per    is the period for which you want to find the interest, and must be in the range 1 to nper.

Nper    is the total number of payment periods in an annuity.

Pv    is the present value, or the lump-sum amount that a series of future payments is worth right now.

Fv    is the future value, or a cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made. If fv is omitted, it is assumed to be 0 (the future value of a loan, for example, is 0).

Type    is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due. If type is omitted, it is assumed to be 0.

Set type equal to	If payments are due

0 	At the end of the period

1 	At the beginning of the period

Remarks

Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying rate and nper. If you make monthly payments on a four-year loan at 12 percent annual interest, use 12%/12 for rate and 4*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 12% for rate and 4 for nper.

For all the arguments, cash you pay out, such as deposits to savings, is represented by negative numbers; cash you receive, such as dividend checks, is represented by positive numbers.

Examples

The following formula calculates the interest due in the first month of a three-year $8000 loan at 10 percent annual interest:

IPMT(0.1/12, 1, 36, 8000) equals -$66.67

The following formula calculates the interest due in the last year of a three-year $8000 loan at 10 percent annual interest, where payments are made yearly:

IPMT(0.1, 3, 3, 8000) equals -$292.45

Related Functions

ACCRINT	Returns the accrued interest for a security that pays periodic interest

ACCRINTM	Returns the accrued interest for a security that pays interest at maturity

CUMIPMT	Returns the cumulative interest paid between two periods

INTRATE	Returns the interest rate for a fully invested security

PMT	Returns the periodic payment for an annuity

PPMT	Returns the payment on the principal for an investment for a given period

PV	Returns the present value of an investment

RATE	Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity

List of Financial Functions


ISEVEN

Returns TRUE if number is even, or FALSE if number is odd.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features"in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

ISEVEN(number)

Number    is the value to test. If number is not an integer, it is truncated.

Remarks

If number is non-numeric, ISEVEN returns the #VALUE! error value.

Examples

ISEVEN(-1) equals FALSE

ISEVEN(2.5) equals TRUE

ISEVEN(5) equals FALSE

Related Function

EVEN	Rounds a number up to the nearest even integer

ISODD	Returns TRUE if the number is odd

ODD	Rounds a number up to the nearest odd integer

List of Information Functions


ISODD

Returns TRUE if number is odd, or FALSE if number is even.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features"in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

ISODD(number)

Number    is the value to test. If number is not an integer, it is truncated.

Remarks

If number is non-numeric, ISODD returns the #VALUE! error value.

Examples

ISODD(-1) equals TRUE

ISODD(2.5) equals FALSE

ISODD(5) equals TRUE

Related Function

EVEN	Rounds a number up to the nearest even integer

ISEVEN	Returns TRUE if the number is even

ODD	Rounds a number up to the nearest odd integer

List of Information Functions


LCM

Returns the least common multiple of integers. The least common multiple is the smallest positive integer that is a multiple of all integer arguments number1, number2, and so on. Use LCM to add fractions with different denominators.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features"in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

LCM(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 29 values for which you want the least common multiple. If value is not an integer, it is truncated.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, LCM returns the #VALUE! error value.

If any argument is less than one, LCM returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

LCM(5, 2) equals 10

LCM(24, 36) equals 72

Related Function

GCD	Returns the greatest common divisor

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


LEFT

Returns the first (or leftmost) character or characters in a text string.

Syntax

LEFT(text, num_chars)

Text    is the text string containing the characters you want to extract.

Num_chars    specifies how many characters you want LEFT to return.

Num_chars must be greater than or equal to zero.

If num_chars is greater than the length of text, LEFT returns all of text.

If num_chars is omitted, it is assumed to be 1.

Examples

LEFT("Sale Price", 4) equals "Sale"

If A1 contains "Sweden", then:

LEFT(A1) equals "S"

Suppose a hardware store assigns stock numbers to its products. The first three characters of the stock number identify the product vendor. On a worksheet, assume that Stock refers to a cell containing a stock number and that VendorTable is a sorted two-column table containing all the vendor numbers in the first column and the corresponding vendor names in the second.

You can use the LEFT function to obtain the first three characters of the stock number (a vendor number) and the VLOOKUP function to return the vendor's name as shown in the following formula:

VLOOKUP(VALUE(LEFT(Stock, 3)), VendorTable, 2)

Related Functions

MID	Returns a specific number of characters from a text string

RIGHT	Returns the rightmost characters from a text value

List of Text Functions


LEN

Returns the number of characters in a text string.

Syntax

LEN(text)

Text    is the text whose length you want to find. Spaces count as characters.

Examples

LEN("Phoenix, AZ") equals 11

LEN("") equals 0

The following macro formula starts a FOR-NEXT loop on a macro sheet. The number of iterations is equal to the length of a string named CheckText:

FOR("Counter", 1, LEN(CheckText))

Related Functions

EXACT	Checks to see if two text values are identical

SEARCH	Finds one text value within another (not case-sensitive)

List of Text Functions


LN

Returns the natural logarithm of a number. Natural logarithms are based on the constant e (2.71828182845904).

Syntax

LN(number)

Number    is the positive real number for which you want the natural logarithm.

Remarks

LN is the inverse of the EXP function.

Examples

LN(86) equals 4.454347

LN(2.7182818) equals 1

LN(EXP(3)) equals 3

EXP(LN(4)) equals 4

Related Functions

EXP	Returns e raised to the power of a given number

IMLN	Returns the natural logarithm of a complex number

IMLOG10	Returns the base-10 logarithm of a complex number

IMLOG2	Returns the base-2 logarithm of a complex number

LOG	Returns the logarithm of a number to a specified base

LOG10	Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


LOG

Returns the logarithm of a number to the base you specify.

Syntax

LOG(number, base)

Number    is the positive real number for which you want the logarithm.

Base    is the base of the logarithm. If base is omitted, it is assumed to be 10.

Examples

LOG(10) equals 1

LOG(8, 2) equals 3

LOG(86, 2.7182818) equals 4.454347

Related Functions

EXP	Returns e raised to the power of a given number

IMLN	Returns the natural logarithm of a complex number

IMLOG10	Returns the base-10 logarithm of a complex number

IMLOG2	Returns the base-2 logarithm of a complex number

LN	Returns the natural logarithm of a number

LOG10	Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


LOG10

Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number.

Syntax

LOG10(number)

Number    is the positive real number for which you want the base-10 logarithm.

Examples

LOG10(86) equals 1.934498451

LOG10(10) equals 1

LOG10(1E5) equals 5

LOG10(10^5) equals 5

Related Functions

EXP	Returns e raised to the power of a given number

IMLN	Returns the natural logarithm of a complex number

IMLOG10	Returns the base-10 logarithm of a complex number

IMLOG2	Returns the base-2 logarithm of a complex number

LN	Returns the natural logarithm of a number

LOG	Returns the logarithm of a number to a specified base

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


LOGEST

Calculates an exponential curve that fits your data and returns an array that describes the curve. The equation for the curve is

y = (b*(m1^x1)*(m2^x2)*_) or y = b*m^x

where the dependent y-value is a function of the independent x-values. The m-values are bases corresponding to each exponent x-value, and b is a constant value. Note that y, x, and m can be vectors. The array that LOGEST returns is {mn,mn-1,...,m1,b}.

Syntax

LOGEST(known_y's, known_x's, const, stats)

Known_y's    is the set of y-values you already know in the relationship y = b*m^x.

If the array known_y's is in a single column, then each column of known_x's is interpreted as a separate variable.

If the array known_y's is in a single row, then each row of known_x's is interpreted as a separate variable.

Known_x's    is an optional set of x-values that you may already know in the relationship y = b*m^x.

The array known_x's can include one or more sets of variables. If only one variable is used, known_y's and known_x's can be ranges of any shape, as long as they have equal dimensions. If more than one variable is used, known_y's must be a vector (that is, a range with a height of one row or width of one column).

If known_x's is omitted, it is assumed to be the array {1,2,3,...} that is the same size as known_y's.

Const    is a logical value specifying whether to force the constant b to equal 1.

If const is TRUE or omitted, b is calculated normally.

If const is FALSE, b is set equal to 1, and the m-values are fitted to y = m^x.

Stats    is a logical value specifying whether to return additional regression statistics.

If stats is TRUE, LOGEST returns the additional regression statistics, so the returned array is {mn,mn-1,...,m1,b;sen,sen-1,...,se1,seb;r 2,sey;
F,df;ssreg,ssresid}.

If stats is FALSE or omitted, LOGEST returns only the m-coefficients and the constant b.

For more information about the additional regression statistics, see LINEST.

Remarks

The more a plot of your data resembles an exponential curve, the better the calculated line will fit your data. Like LINEST, LOGEST returns an array of values that describes a relationship among the values, but LINEST fits a straight line to your data; LOGEST fits an exponential curve. For more information, see LINEST.

When you have only one independent x-variable, you can obtain the m and b values directly by using the following formulas:

m:
INDEX(LOGEST(known_y's,known_x's),1)

b:
INDEX(LOGEST(known_y's,known_x's),2)

You can use the y = b*m^x equation to predict future values of y, but Microsoft Excel provides the GROWTH function to do this for you. For more information, see GROWTH.

Formulas that return arrays must be entered as array formulas.

When entering an array constant such as known_x's as an argument, use commas to separate values in the same row and semicolons to separate rows. Separator characters may be different depending on your country setting.

You should note that the y-values predicted by the regression equation may not be valid if they are outside the range of y-values you used to determine the equation.

Example

After 10 months of sluggish sales, a company experiences exponential growth in sales after putting a new product on the market. In the subsequent 6 months, sales increased to 33,100, 47,300, 69,000, 102,000, 150,000, and 220,000 units per month. Assume that these values are entered into six cells named UnitsSold. When entered as a formula:

LOGEST(UnitsSold, {11;12;13;14;15;16}, TRUE, TRUE)

generates the following output in, for example, cells D1:E5:

{1.46327563, 495.30477; 0.0026334, 0.03583428; 0.99980862, 0.01101631; 20896.8011, 4; 2.53601883, 0.00048544}

y = b*m1^x1 or using the values from the array:

y = 495.3 * 1.4633x

You can estimate sales for future months by substituting the month number for x in this equation, or you can use the GROWTH function. For more information, see GROWTH.

You can use the additional regression statistics (cells D2:E5 in the above output array) to determine how useful the equation is for predicting future values.

Important	The methods you use to test an equation using LOGEST are similar to the methods for LINEST. However, the additional statistics LOGEST returns are based on the following linear model:

ln y = x1 ln m1 + ... + xn ln mn + ln b

You should keep this in mind when you evaluate the additional statistics, especially the sei and seb values, which should be compared to ln mi and ln b, not to mi and b. For more information, consult an advanced statistics manual.

Related Functions

GROWTH	Also calculates an exponential curve, but returns an array of predicted y-values instead of the parameters of the curve

LINEST 	Similar to LOGEST but fits a straight line instead of an exponential curve to your data

TREND	Similar to GROWTH but fits a straight line instead of an exponential curve to your data

List of Statistical Functions


LOGINV

Returns the inverse of the lognormal cumulative distribution function of x, where ln(x) is normally distributed with parameters mean and standard_dev. If p = LOGNORMDIST(x,...) then LOGINV(p,...) = x.

Use the lognormal distribution to analyze logarithmically transformed data.

Syntax

LOGINV(probability, mean, standard_dev)

Probability    is a probability associated with the lognormal distribution.

Mean    is the mean of ln(x).

Standard_dev    is the standard deviation of ln(x).

The inverse of the lognormal distribution function is:

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, LOGINV returns the #VALUE! error value.

If probability < 0 or probability > 1, LOGINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If standard_dev  0, LOGINV returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

LOGINV(0.039084, 3.5, 1.2) equals 4.000014

Related Functions

EXP	Returns e raised to the power of a given number

LN	Returns the natural logarithm of a number

LOG	Returns the logarithm of a number to a specified base

LOG10	Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number

LOGNORMDIST	Returns the cumulative lognormal distribution

List of Statistical Functions


LOWER

Converts all uppercase letters in a text string to lowercase.

Syntax

LOWER(text)

Text    is the text you want to convert to lowercase. LOWER does not change characters in text that are not letters.

Examples

LOWER("E. E. Cummings") equals "e. e. cummings"

LOWER("Apt. 2B") equals "apt. 2b"

LOWER is similar to PROPER and UPPER. Also see examples for PROPER.

Related Functions

PROPER	Capitalizes the first letter in each word of a text value

UPPER	Converts text to uppercase

List of Text Functions


MDETERM

Returns the matrix determinant of an array.

Syntax

MDETERM(array)

Array    is a numeric array with an equal number of rows and columns.

Array can be given as a cell range, for example, A1:C3; as an array constant, such as {1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9}; or as a name to either of these.

If any cells in array are empty or contain text, MDETERM returns the #VALUE! error value.

MDETERM also returns #VALUE! if array does not have an equal number of rows and columns.

Remarks

The matrix determinant is a number derived from the values in array. For a three-row, three-column array, A1:C3, the determinant is defined as:

MDETERM(A1:C3) equals
A1*(B2*C3-B3*C2) + A2*(B3*C1-B1*C3) + A3*(B1*C2-B2*C1)

Matrix determinants are generally used for solving systems of mathematical equations that involve several variables.

MDETERM is calculated with an accuracy of approximately 16 digits, which may lead to a small numeric error when the calculation is not complete. For example, the determinant of a singular matrix may differ from zero by 1E-16.

Examples

MDETERM({1,3,8,5;1,3,6,1;1,1,1,0;7,3,10,2}) equals 88

MDETERM({3,6,1;1,1,0;3,10,2}) equals 1

MDETERM({3,6;1,1}) equals -3

MDETERM({1,3,8,5;1,3,6,1}) equals #VALUE! because the array does not have an equal number of rows and columns.

Related Functions

MINVERSE	Returns the matrix inverse of an array

MMULT	Returns the matrix product of two arrays

TRANSPOSE	Returns the transpose of an array

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


MEDIAN

Returns the median of the given numbers. The median is the number in the middle of a set of numbers; that is, half the numbers have values that are greater than the median and half have values that are less.

Syntax

MEDIAN(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 numbers for which you want the median.

The arguments should be numbers or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers. Microsoft Excel examines all the numbers in each reference or array argument.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

Remarks

If there is an even number of numbers in the set, then MEDIAN calculates the average of the two numbers in the middle. See the second example following.

Examples

MEDIAN(1, 2, 3, 4, 5) equals 3

MEDIAN(1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) equals 3.5, the average of 3 and 4

Related Functions

AVERAGE	Returns the average of its arguments

COUNT	Counts how many numbers are in the list of arguments

COUNTA	Counts how many values are in the list of arguments

DAVERAGE	Returns the average of selected database entries

MODE	Returns the most common value in a data set

SUM	Adds its arguments

List of Statistical Functions


MID

Returns a specific number of characters from a text string, starting at the position you specify.

Syntax

MID(text, start_num, num_chars)

Text    is the text string containing the characters you want to extract.

Start_num    is the position of the first character you want to extract in text. The first character in text has start_num 1, and so on.

If start_num is greater than the length of text, MID returns "" (empty text).

If start_num is less than the length of text, but start_num plus num_chars exceeds the length of text, MID returns the characters up to the end of text.

If start_num is less than 1, MID returns the #VALUE! error value.

Num_chars    specifies how many characters to return from text. If num_chars is negative, MID returns the #VALUE! error value.

Examples

MID("Fluid Flow", 1, 5) equals "Fluid"

MID("Fluid Flow", 7, 20) equals "Flow"

MID("1234", 5, 5) equals "" (empty text)

Also see the examples for CODE and FIND.

Related Functions

CODE	Returns a numeric code for the first character in a text string

FIND	Finds one text value within another (case-sensitive)

LEFT	Returns the leftmost characters from a text value

RIGHT	Returns the rightmost characters from a text value

SEARCH	Finds one text value within another (not case-sensitive)

List of Text Functions


MIN

Returns the smallest number in the list of arguments.

Syntax

MIN(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 numbers for which you want to find the minimum value.

You can specify arguments that are numbers, empty cells, logical values, or text representations of numbers. Arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers cause errors.

If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are used. Empty cells, logical values, text, or error values in the array or reference are ignored.

If the arguments contain no numbers, MIN returns 0.

Examples

If A1:A5 contains the numbers 10, 7, 9, 27, and 2, then:

MIN(A1:A5) equals 2

MIN(A1:A5, 0) equals 0

MIN is similar to MAX. Also see the examples for MAX.

Related Functions

DMIN	Returns the minimum value from selected database entries

MAX	Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments

List of Statistical Functions


MINUTE

Returns the minute corresponding to serial_number. The minute is given as an integer, ranging from 0 to 59.

Syntax

MINUTE(serial_number)

Serial_number    is the date-time code used by Microsoft Excel for date and time calculations. You can give serial_number as text, such as "16:48:00" or "4:48:00 PM", instead of as a number. The text is automatically converted to a serial number. For more information about serial_number, see NOW.

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information, see NOW.

Examples

MINUTE("4:48:00 PM") equals 48

MINUTE(0.01) equals 14

MINUTE(4.02) equals 28

Related Functions

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

YEAR, MONTH, DAY, WEEKDAY, HOUR, and SECOND
Convert serial numbers into years, months, days, days of the week, hours, and seconds, respectively

List of Date & Time Functions


MINVERSE

Returns the inverse matrix for the matrix stored in an array.

Syntax

MINVERSE(array)

Array    is a numeric array with an equal number of rows and columns.

Array can be given as a cell range, such as A1:C3; as an array constant, such as {1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9}; or as a name for either of these.

If any cells in array are empty or contain text, MINVERSE returns the #VALUE! error value.

MINVERSE also returns the #VALUE! error value if array does not have an equal number of rows and columns.

Remarks

Formulas that return arrays must be entered as array formulas. For information about arrays, see "Working With Arrays" in Chapter 10 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Overview of Working With Arrays in online Help.

Inverse matrices, like determinants, are generally used for solving systems of mathematical equations involving several variables. The product of a matrix and its inverse is the identity matrixthe square array in which the diagonal values equal 1 and all other values equal 0.

As an example of how a two-row, two-column matrix is calculated, suppose that the range A1:B2 contains the letters a, b, c, and d that represent any four numbers. The following table shows the inverse of the matrix A1:B2:

Column A	Column B

Row 1	d/(a*d-b*c)	b/(b*c-a*d)

Row 2	c/(b*c-a*d)	a/(a*d-b*c)

MINVERSE is calculated with an accuracy of approximately 16 digits, which may lead to a small numeric error when the cancellation is not complete.

Some square matrices cannot be inverted, and will return the #NUM! error value with MINVERSE. The determinant for a noninvertable matrix is 0.

Examples

MINVERSE({4,-1;2,0}) equals {0,0.5;-1,2}

MINVERSE({1,2,1;3,4,-1;0,2,0}) equals {0.25,0.25,-0.75;0,0,0.5;0.75,-0.25,-0.25}

Tip	Use the INDEX function to access individual elements from the inverse matrix.

Related Functions

INDEX	Uses an index to choose a value from a reference or array

MMULT	Returns the matrix product of two arrays

TRANSPOSE	Returns the transpose of an array

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


MIRR

Returns the modified internal rate of return for a series of periodic cash flows. MIRR considers both the cost of the investment and the interest received on reinvestment of cash.

Syntax

MIRR(values, finance_rate, reinvest_rate)

Values    is an array or a reference to cells that contain numbers. These numbers represent a series of payments (negative values) and income (positive values) occurring at regular periods.

Values must contain at least one positive value and one negative value to calculate the modified internal rate of return. Otherwise, MIRR returns the #DIV/0! error value.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

Finance_rate    is the interest rate you pay on the money used in the cash flows.

Reinvest_rate    is the interest rate you receive on the cash flows as you reinvest them.

Remarks

MIRR uses the order of values to interpret the order of cash flows. Be sure to enter your payment and income values in the sequence you want and with the correct signs (positive values for cash received, negative values for cash paid).

If n is the number of cash flows in values, frate is the finance_rate, and rrate is the reinvest_rate, then the formula for MIRR is:

Examples

Suppose you're a commercial fisherman just completing your fifth year of operation. Five years ago, you borrowed $120,000 at 10 percent annual interest to purchase a boat. Your catches have yielded $39,000, $30,000, $21,000, $37,000, and $46,000. During these years you reinvested your profits, earning 12% annually. In a worksheet, your loan amount is entered as -$120,000 in B1, and your five annual profits are entered in B2:B6.

To calculate the investment's modified rate of return after five years:

MIRR(B1:B6, 10%, 12%) equals 12.61%

To calculate the modified rate of return after three years:

MIRR(B1:B4, 10%, 12%) equals -4.80%

To calculate the five-year modified rate of return based on a reinvest_rate of 14%

MIRR(B1:B6, 10%, 14%) equals 13.48%

Related Functions

RATE	Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity

XIRR	Returns the internal rate of return for a schedule of cash flows that is not necessarily periodic

XNPV	Returns the net present value for a schedule of cash flows that is not necessarily periodic

List of Financial Functions


MMULT

Returns the matrix product of two arrays. The result is an array with the same number of rows as array1 and the same number of columns as array2.

Syntax

MMULT(array1, array2)

Array1, array2    are the arrays you want to multiply.

The number of columns in array1 must be the same as the number of rows in array2, and both arrays must contain only numbers.

Array1 and array2 can be given as cell ranges, array constants, or references.

If any cells are empty or contain text, or if the number of columns in array1 is different from the number of rows in array2, MMULT returns the #VALUE! error value.

Remarks

The matrix product array a of two arrays b and c is:

where i is the row number and j is the column number.

Formulas that return arrays must be entered as array formulas. For information about arrays, see "Working With Arrays" in Chapter 10 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Overview of Working With Arrays in online Help.

Examples

MMULT({1,3;7,2}, {2,0;0,2}) equals {2,6;14,4}

MMULT({3,0;2,0}, {2,0;0,2}) equals {6,0;4,0}

MMULT({1,3,0;7,2,0;1,0,0}, {2,0;0,2}) equals #VALUE!, because the first array has three columns and the second array has only two rows.

Related Functions

MDETERM	Returns the matrix determinant of an array

MINVERSE	Returns the matrix inverse of an array

TRANSPOSE	Returns the transpose of an array

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


MOD

Returns the remainder after number is divided by divisor. The result has the same sign as divisor.

Syntax

MOD(number, divisor)

Number    is the number for which you want to find the remainder.

Divisor    is the number by which you want to divide number. If divisor is 0, MOD returns the #DIV/0! error value.

Remarks

The MOD function can be expressed in terms of the INT function:

MOD(n, d) = n - d*INT(n/d)

Examples

MOD(3, 2) equals 1

MOD(-3, 2) equals 1

MOD(3, -2) equals -1

MOD(-3, -2) equals -1

Related Functions

INT	Rounds a number down to the nearest integer

ROUND	Rounds a number to a specified number of digits

ROUNDDOWN	Rounds a number down, toward zero

ROUNDUP	Rounds a number up, away from zero

TRUNC	Truncates a number to an integer

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


MODE

Returns the most frequently occurring value in an array or range of data. Like MEDIAN, MODE is a location measure

Syntax

MODE(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want to calculate the mode. You can also use a single array or a reference to an array instead of arguments separated by commas.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If the data set contains no duplicate data points, MODE returns the #N/A error value.

The mode is the most frequently occurring value; the median is the middle value; and the mean is the average value. No single measure of central tendency provides a complete picture of the data. Suppose data is clustered in three areas, half around a single low value, and half around two large values. Both AVERAGE and MEDIAN may return a value in the relatively empty middle, while MODE may return the dominant low value.

Example

MODE({5.6, 4, 4, 3, 2, 4}) equals 4

Related Functions

AVERAGE	Returns the average of its arguments

GEOMEAN	Returns the geometric mean

HARMEAN	Returns the harmonic mean

MEDIAN	Returns the median of the given numbers

TRIMMEAN	Returns the mean of the interior of a data set

List of Statistical Functions


MONTH

Returns the month corresponding to serial_number. The month is given as an integer, ranging from 1 (January) to 12 (December).

Syntax

MONTH(serial_number)

Serial_number    is the date-time code used by Microsoft Excel for date and time calculations. You can give serial_number as text, such as "4-15-1993" or "15-Apr-1993", instead of as a number. The text is automatically converted to a serial number. For more information about serial_number, see NOW.

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information, see NOW.

Examples

MONTH("6-May") equals 5

MONTH(366) equals 12

MONTH(367) equals 1

Related Functions

NOW	Returns the serial number for the current date and time

YEAR, MONTH, DAY, WEEKDAY, HOUR, and MINUTE
Convert serial numbers into years, months, days, days of the week, hours, and minutes

List of Date & Time Functions


MROUND

Returns a number rounded to the desired multiple.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

MROUND(number, multiple)

Number    is the value to round.

Multiple    is the multiple to which you want to round number.

Remarks

MROUND rounds up, away from zero, if the remainder of dividing number by multiple is greater than or equal to half the value of multiple.

Examples

MROUND(10, 3) equals 9

MROUND(-10, -3) equals -9

MROUND(1.3, 0.2) equals 1.4

MROUND(5, -2) equals #NUM!

Related Functions

CEILING	Returns the number rounded up to the nearest multiple of significance

EVEN	Rounds a number up to the nearest even integer

FLOOR	Rounds a number down, toward zero

ODD	Rounds a number up to the nearest odd integer

ROUND	Rounds a number to a specified number of digits

ROUNDDOWN	Rounds a number down, toward zero

ROUNDUP	Rounds a number up, away from zero

TRUNC	Truncates a number to an integer

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


MULTINOMIAL

Returns the ratio of the factorial of a sum of values to the product of factorials.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

MULTINOMIAL(number1, number2, ...)

Number1,number2,...    are 1 to 29 values for which you want the multinomial.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, MULTINOMIAL returns the #VALUE! error value.

If any argument is less than one, MULTINOMIAL returns the #NUM! error value.

The multinomial is:

Example

MULTINOMIAL(2, 3, 4) equals 1260

Related Functions

FACT	Returns the factorial of a number

FACTDOUBLE	Returns the double factorial of a number

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


N

Returns a value converted to a number.

Syntax

N(value)

Value    is the value you want converted. N converts values listed in the following table.

If value is or refers to	N returns

A number	That number

A date, in one of Microsoft Excel's	The serial number of that date

    built-in date formats

TRUE	1

Anything else	0

Remarks

It is not generally necessary to use the N function in a formula, since Microsoft Excel automatically converts values as necessary. This function is provided for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.

Examples

If A1 contains "7", A2 contains "Even", and A3 contains "TRUE", then:

N(A1) equals 7

N(A2) equals 0, because A2 contains text

N(A3) equals 1, because A3 contains TRUE

N("7") equals 0, because "7" is text

N("4/17/91") equals 0, because "4/17/91" is text

Related Functions

T	Converts its arguments to text

List of Information Functions


NA

Returns the error value #N/A. #N/A is the error value that means "no value is available." Use NA to mark empty cells. By entering #N/A in cells where you are missing information, you can avoid the problem of unintentionally including empty cells in your calculations. (When a formula refers to a cell containing #N/A, the formula returns the #N/A error value.)

Syntax

NA( )

Remarks

You must include the empty parentheses with the function name. Otherwise, Microsoft Excel will not recognize it as a function.

You can also type the value #N/A directly into a cell. The NA function is provided for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.

Related Function

ISNA	Returns TRUE if a value is the #N/A error value

List of Information Functions


NETWORKDAYS

Returns the number of whole working days between start_date and end_date. Working days exclude weekends and any dates identified in holidays. Use NETWORKDAYS to calculate employee benefits that accrue based on the number of days worked during a specific term.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

NETWORKDAYS(start_date, end_date, holidays)

Start_date    is a serial date number that represents the start date.

End_date    is a serial date number that represents the end date.

Holidays    is an optional set of one or more serial date numbers to exclude from the working calendar, such as state and federal holidays and floating holidays.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, NETWORKDAYS returns the #VALUE! error value.

If any argument is not a valid serial date number, NETWORKDAYS returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

NETWORKDAYS(DATEVALUE("10/01/91"), DATEVALUE("12/01/91"),
DATEVALUE("11/28/91")) equals 43

Related Functions

EDATE	Returns the serial number of the date that is the indicated number of months before or after the start date

EOMONTH	Returns the serial number of the last day of the month before or after a specified number of months

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

WORKDAY	Returns the serial number of the date before or after a specified number of workdays

List of Date & Time Functions


NOT

Reverses the value of its argument. Use NOT when you want to make sure a value is not equal to one particular value.

Syntax

NOT(logical)

Logical    is a value or expression that can be evaluated to TRUE or FALSE. If logical is FALSE, NOT returns TRUE; if logical is TRUE, NOT returns FALSE.

Examples

NOT(FALSE) equals TRUE

NOT(1+1=2) equals FALSE

Related Functions

AND	Returns TRUE if all its arguments are TRUE

OR	Returns TRUE if any argument is TRUE

List of Logical Functions


NOW

Returns the serial number of the current date and time.

Syntax

NOW( )

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different default date systems. Microsoft Excel for Windows uses the 1900 Date System, in which serial numbers range from 1 to 65,380, corresponding to the dates January 1, 1900, through December 31, 2078. Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh uses the 1904 Date System, in which serial numbers range from 0 to 63,918, corresponding to the dates January 1, 1904, through December 31, 2078.

Numbers to the right of the decimal point in the serial number represent the time; numbers to the left represent the date. For example, in the 1900 Date System, the serial number 367.5 represents the date-time combination 12:00 P.M., January 1, 1901.

You can change the date system by selecting or clearing the 1904 Date System check box in the Calculation dialog box, which appears when you choose the Calculation command from the Options menu.

The date system is changed automatically when you open a document from another platform. For example, if you are working in Microsoft Excel for Windows and you open a document created in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh, the 1904 Date System check box is selected automatically.

The NOW function changes only when the worksheet is calculated or when the macro containing the function is run. It is not updated continuously.

Examples

If you are using the 1900 Date System and your computer's built-in clock is set to 12:30:00 P.M., 1-Jan-1987, then:

NOW() equals 31778.52083

Ten minutes later:

NOW() equals 31778.52778

Related Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

YEAR, MONTH, DAY, WEEKDAY, HOUR, and MINUTE
Convert serial numbers into years, months, days, days of the week, hours, and minutes

List of Date & Time Functions


NPER

Returns the number of periods for an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate.

Syntax

NPER(rate, pmt, pv, fv, type)

For a more complete description of the arguments in NPER and for more information about annuity functions, see PV.

Rate    is the interest rate per period.

Pmt    is the payment made each period; it cannot change over the life of the annuity. Typically, pmt contains principal and interest but no other fees or taxes.

Pv    is the present value, or the lump-sum amount that a series of future payments is worth right now.

Fv    is the future value, or a cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made. If fv is omitted, it is assumed to be 0 (the future value of a loan, for example, is 0).

Type    is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due.

Set type equal to	If payments are due

0 or omitted	At the end of the period

1	At the beginning of the period

Examples

NPER(12%/12, -100, -1000, 10000, 1) equals 60

NPER(1%, -100, -1000, 10000) equals 60

NPER(1%, -100, 1000) equals 11

Related Functions

FV	Returns the future value of an investment

IPMT	Returns the interest payment for an investment for a given period

PMT	Returns the periodic payment for an annuity

PPMT	Returns the payment on the principal for an investment for a given period

PV	Returns the present value of an investment

RATE	Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity

List of Financial Functions


NPV

Returns the net present value of an investment based on a series of periodic cash flows and a discount rate. The net present value of an investment is today's value of a series of future payments (negative values) and income (positive values).

Syntax

NPV(rate, value1, value2, ...)

Rate    is the rate of discount over the length of one period.

Value1, value2,...    are 1 to 29 arguments representing the payments and income.

Value1, value2,... must be equally spaced in time and occur at the end of each period.

NPV uses the order of value1, value2,... to interpret the order of cash flows. Be sure to enter your payment and income values in the correct sequence.

Arguments that are numbers, empty cells, logical values, or text representations of numbers are counted; arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers are ignored.

If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are counted. Empty cells, logical values, text, or error values in the array or reference are ignored.

Remarks

The NPV investment begins one period before the date of the value1 cash flow and ends with the last cash flow in the list. The NPV calculation is based on future cash flows. If your first cash flow occurs at the beginning of the first period, the first value must be added to the NPV result, not included in the values arguments. For more information, see the examples below.

If n is the number of cash flows in the list of values, the formula for NPV is:

NPV is similar to the PV function (present value). The primary difference between PV and NPV is that PV allows cash flows to begin either at the end or at the beginning of the period. Unlike the variable NPV cash flow values, PV cash flows must be constant throughout the investment. For information about annuities and financial functions, see PV.

NPV is also related to the IRR function (internal rate of return). IRR is the rate for which NPV equals zero: NPV(IRR(...), ...)=0.

Examples

Suppose you're considering an investment in which you pay $10,000 one year from today and receive an annual income of $3000, $4200, and $6800 in the three years that follow. Assuming an annual discount rate of 10 percent, the net present value of this investment is:

NPV(10%, -10000, 3000, 4200, 6800) equals $1188.44

In the preceding example, you include the initial $10,000 cost as one of the values, because the payment occurs at the end of the first period.

Consider an investment that starts at the beginning of the first period. Suppose you're interested in buying a shoe store. The cost of the business is $40,000, and you expect to receive the following income for the first five years of operation: $8000, $9200, $10,000, $12,000, and $14,500. The annual discount rate is 8%. This might represent the rate of inflation or the interest rate of a competing investment.

If the cost and income figures from the shoe store are entered in B1 through B6 respectively, then net present value of the shoe store investment is given by:

NPV(8%, B2:B6)+B1 equals $1922.06

In the preceding example, you don't include the initial $40,000 cost as one of the values, because the payment occurs at the beginning of the first period.

Suppose your shoe store's roof collapses during the sixth year and you assume a loss of $9000 for that year. The net present value of the shoe store investment after six years is given by:

NPV(8%, B2:B6, -9000)+B1 equals -$3749.47

Related Functions

FV	Returns the future value of an investment

IRR	Returns the internal rate of return for a series of cash flows

PV	Returns the present value of an investment

XNPV	Returns the net present value for a schedule of cash flows that is not necessarily periodic

List of Financial Functions


OCT2BIN

Converts an octal number to binary.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

OCT2BIN(number, places)

Number    is the octal number you want to convert. Number may not contain more than 10 characters. The most significant bit of number is the sign bit. The remaining 29 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Places    is the number of characters to use. If places is omitted, OCT2BIN uses the minimum number of characters necessary. Places is useful for padding the return value with leading 0s (zeros).

Remarks

If number is negative, OCT2BIN ignores places and returns a 10-character binary number.

If number is negative, it cannot be less than equal to 7777777000, and if number is positive, it cannot be greater than 777.

If number is not a valid octal number, OCT2BIN returns the #NUM! error value.

If OCT2BIN requires more than places characters, it returns the #NUM! error value.

If places is not an integer, it is truncated.

If places is non-numeric, OCT2BIN returns the #VALUE! error value.

If places is negative, OCT2BIN returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

OCT2BIN(3, 3) equals 011

OCT2BIN(7777777000) equals 1000000000

Related Functions

BIN2OCT	Converts a binary number to octal

DEC2OCT	Converts a decimal number to octal

HEX2OCT	Converts a hexadecimal number to octal

List of Engineering Functions


OCT2DEC

Converts an octal number to decimal.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see " Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

OCT2DEC(number)

Number    is the octal number you want to convert. Number may not contain more than 10 octal characters (30 bits). The most significant bit of number is the sign bit. The remaining 29 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Remarks

If number is not a valid octal number, OCT2DEC returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

OCT2DEC(54) equals 44

OCT2DEC(7777777533) equals -165

Related Functions

BIN2OCT	Converts a binary number to octal

DEC2OCT	Converts a decimal number to octal

HEX2OCT	Converts a hexadecimal number to octal

List of Engineering Functions


OCT2HEX

Converts an octal number to hexadecimal.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

OCT2HEX(number, places)

Number    is the octal number you want to convert. Number may not contain more than 10 octal characters (30 bits). The most significant bit of number is the sign bit. The remaining 29 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Places    is the number of characters to use. If places is omitted, OCT2HEX uses the minimum number of characters necessary. Places is useful for padding the return value with leading 0s (zeros).

Remarks

If number is negative, OCT2HEX ignores places and returns a 10-character hexadecimal number.

If number is not a valid octal number, OCT2HEX returns the #NUM! error value.

If OCT2HEX requires more than places characters, it returns the #NUM! error value.

If places is not an integer, it is truncated.

If places is non-numeric, OCT2HEX returns the #VALUE! error value.

If places is negative, OCT2HEX returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

OCT2HEX(100, 4) equals 0040

OCT2HEX(7777777533) equals FFFFFFFF5B

Related Functions

BIN2OCT	Converts a binary number to octal

DEC2OCT	Converts a decimal number to octal

HEX2OCT	Converts a hexadecimal number to octal

List of Engineering Functions


ODD

Returns number rounded up to the nearest odd integer.

Syntax

ODD(number)

Number    is the value to round.

Remarks

If number is non-numeric, ODD returns the #VALUE! error value.

Regardless of the sign of number, a value is rounded up when adjusted away from zero. If number is an odd integer, no rounding occurs.

Examples

ODD(1.5) equals 3

ODD(3) equals 3

ODD(2) equals 3

ODD(-1) equals -1

ODD(-2) equals -3

Related Functions

CEILING	Returns the number rounded up to the nearest multiple of significance

EVEN	Rounds a number up to the nearest even integer

FLOOR	Rounds a number down, toward zero

INT	Rounds a number down to the nearest integer

ISEVEN	Returns TRUE if the number is even

ISODD	Returns TRUE if the number is odd

ROUND	Rounds a number to a specified number of digits

TRUNC	Truncates a number to an integer

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


PI

Returns the number 3.14159265358979, the mathematical constant π, accurate to 15 digits.

Syntax

PI( )

Examples

PI()/2 equals 1.57079...

SIN(PI()/2) equals 1

If the radius of a circle is stored in a cell named Radius, the following macro formula calculates the area of the circle:

PI()*(Radius^2)

Related Functions

COS	Returns the cosine of a number

SIN	Returns the sine of the given angle

TAN	Returns the tangent of a number

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


PMT

Returns the periodic payment for an annuity based on constant payments and a constant interest rate.

Syntax

PMT(rate, nper, pv, fv, type)

For a more complete description of the arguments in PMT, see PV.

Rate    is the interest rate per period.

Nper    is the total number of payment periods in an annuity.

Pv    is the present valuethe total amount that a series of future payments is worth now.

Fv    is the future value, or a cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made. If fv is omitted, it is assumed to be 0 (the future value of a loan, for example, is 0).

Type    is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due.

Set type equal to	If payments are due

0 or omitted	At the end of the period

1	At the beginning of the period

Remarks

The payment returned by PMT includes principal and interest but no taxes, reserve payments, or fees sometimes associated with annuities.

Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying rate and nper. If you make monthly payments on a four-year loan at 12 percent annual interest, use 12%/12 for rate and 4*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 12% for rate and 4 for nper.

Tip	To find the total amount paid over the duration of the annuity, multiply the returned PMT value by nper.

Examples

The following macro formula returns the monthly payment on a $10,000 loan at an annual rate of 8% that you must pay off in 10 months:

PMT(8%/12, 10, 10000) equals -$1037.03

For the same loan, if payments are due at the beginning of the period, the payment is:

PMT(8%/12, 10, 10000, 0, 1) equals -$1030.16

The following macro formula returns the amount someone must pay to you each month if you loan that person $5000 at 12% and want to be paid back in five months:

PMT(12%/12, 5, -5000) equals $1030.20

Suppose you want to save $50,000 in 18 years by saving a constant amount each month. If you assume you'll be able to earn 6% interest on your savings, you can use PMT to determine how much to save each month:

PMT(6%/12, 18*12, 0, 50000) equals -$129.08

If you pay $129.08 into a 6% savings account every month for 18 years, you will have $50,000.

Related Functions

FV	Returns the future value of an investment

IPMT	Returns the interest payment for an investment for a given period

NPER	Returns the number of periods for an investment

PPMT	Returns the payment on the principal for an investment for a given period

PV	Returns the present value of an investment

RATE	Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity

List of Financial Functions


PPMT

Returns the payment on the principal for a given period for an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate.

Syntax

PPMT(rate, per, nper, pv, fv, type)

For a more complete description of the arguments in PPMT, see PV.

Rate    is the interest rate per period.

Per    specifies the period and must be in the range 1 to nper.

Nper    is the total number of payment periods in an annuity.

Pv    is the present valuethe total amount that a series of future payments is worth now.

Fv    is the future value, or a cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made. If fv is omitted, it is assumed to be 0 (the future value of a loan, for example, is 0).

Type    is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due.

Set type equal to	If payments are due

0 or omitted	At the end of the period

1	At the beginning of the period

Remarks

Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying rate and nper. If you make monthly payments on a four-year loan at 12 percent annual interest, use 12%/12 for rate and 4*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 12% for rate and 4 for nper.

Examples

The following formula returns the principal payment for the first month of a two-year $2000 loan at 10% annual interest:

PPMT(10%/12, 1, 24, 2000) equals -$75.62

The following function returns the principal payment for the last year of a 10-year $200,000 loan at 8% annual interest:

PPMT(8%, 10, 10, 200000) equals -$27,598.05

Related Functions

FV	Returns the future value of an investment

IPMT	Returns the interest payment for an investment for a given period

NPER	Returns the number of periods for an investment

PMT	Returns the periodic payment for an annuity

PV	Returns the present value of an investment

RATE	Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity

List of Financial Functions


PRODUCT

Multiplies all the numbers given as arguments and returns the product.

Syntax

PRODUCT(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 numbers that you want to multiply.

Remarks

Arguments that are numbers, logical values, or text representations of numbers are counted; arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers cause errors.

If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in the array or reference are counted. Empty cells, logical values, text, or error values in the array or reference are ignored.

Examples

If cells A2:C2 contain 5, 15, and 30:

PRODUCT(A2:C2) equals 2250

PRODUCT(A2:C2, 2) equals 4500

Related Functions

FACT	Returns the factorial of a number

SUM	Adds its arguments

SUMPRODUCT	Returns the sum of the products of corresponding array components

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


PV

Returns the present value of an investment. The present value is the total amount that a series of future payments is worth now. For example, when you borrow money, the loan amount is the present value to the lender.

Syntax

PV(rate, nper, pmt, fv, type)

Rate    is the interest rate per period. For example, if you obtain an automobile loan at a 10% annual interest rate and make monthly payments, your interest rate per month is 10%/12, or 0.83%. You would enter 10%/12, or 0.83%, or 0.0083, into the formula as the rate.

Nper    is the total number of payment periods in an annuity. For example, if you get a four-year car loan and make monthly payments, your loan has 4*12 (or 48) periods. You would enter 48 into the formula for nper.

Pmt    is the payment made each period and cannot change over the life of the annuity. Typically, pmt includes principal and interest but no other fees or taxes. For example, the monthly payments on a $10,000, four-year car loan at 12% are $263.33. You would enter -263.33 into the formula as the pmt.

Fv    is the future value, or a cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made. If fv is omitted, it is assumed to be 0 (the future value of a loan, for example, is 0). For example, if you want to save $50,000 to pay for a special project in 18 years, then $50,000 is the future value. You could then make a conservative guess at an interest rate and determine how much you must save each month.

Type    is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due.

Set type equal to	If payments are due

0 or omitted	At the end of the period

1	At the beginning of the period

Remarks

Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying rate and nper. If you make monthly payments on a four-year loan at 12% annual interest, use 12%/12 for rate and 4*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 12% for rate and 4 for nper.

The following functions apply to annuities:

CUMIPMT	PPMT

CUMPRINC	PV

FV	RATE

FVSCHEDULE	XIRR

IPMT	XNPV

PMT

An annuity is a series of constant cash payments made over a continuous period. For example, a car loan or a mortgage is an annuity. For more information, see the description for each annuity function.

In annuity functions, cash you pay out, such as a deposit to savings, is represented by a negative number; cash you receive, such as a dividend check, is represented by a positive number. For example, a $1000 deposit to the bank would be represented by the argument -1000 if you are the depositor and by the argument 1000 if you are the bank.

Microsoft Excel solves for one financial argument in terms of the others. If rate is not 0, then:

If rate is 0, then:

(pmt * nper) + pv + fv = 0

Example

Suppose you're thinking of buying an insurance annuity that pays $500 at the end of every month for the next 20 years. The cost of the annuity is $60,000 and the money paid out will earn 8%. You want to determine whether this would be a good investment. Using the PV function you find that the present value of the annuity is:

PV(0.08/12, 12*20, 500, , 0) equals -$59,777.15

The result is negative because it represents money that you would pay, an outgoing cash flow. The present value of the annuity ($59,777.15) is less than what you are asked to pay ($60,000). Therefore, you determine this would not be a good investment.

Related Functions

FV	Returns the future value of an investment

IPMT	Returns the interest payment for an investment for a given period

NPER	Returns the number of periods for an investment

PMT	Returns the periodic payment for an annuity

PPMT	Returns the payment on the principal for an investment for a given period

RATE	Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity

List of Financial Functions


QUOTIENT

Returns the integer portion of a division. Use this function when you want to discard the remainder of a division.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

QUOTIENT(numerator, denominator)

Numerator    is the dividend.

Denominator    is the divisor.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, QUOTIENT returns the #VALUE! error value.

Examples

QUOTIENT(5, 2) equals 2

QUOTIENT(4.5, 3.1) equals 1

QUOTIENT(-10, 3) equals -3

Related Function

MOD	Returns the remainder from division

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


RAND

Returns an evenly distributed random number greater than or equal to 0 and less than 1. A new random number is returned every time the worksheet is calculated.

Syntax

RAND( )

Remarks

To generate a random real number between a and b, use:

RAND()*(b-a)+a

If you want to use RAND to generate a random number but don't want the numbers to change every time the cell is calculated, you can enter =RAND() in the formula bar and press F9 (or COMMAND + = in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh) to change the formula to a random number.

Examples

To generate a random number greater than or equal to 0 but less than 100:

RAND()*100

Related Functions

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


RATE

Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity. RATE is calculated by iteration and can have zero or more solutions. If the successive results of RATE do not converge to within 0.0000001 after 20 iterations, RATE returns the #NUM! error value.

Syntax

RATE(nper, pmt, pv, fv, type, guess)

See PV for a complete description of the arguments nper, pmt, pv, fv, and type.

Nper    is the total number of payment periods in an annuity.

Pmt    is the payment made each period and cannot change over the life of the annuity. Typically, pmt includes principal and interest but no other fees or taxes.

Pv    is the present valuethe total amount that a series of future payments is worth now.

Fv    is the future value, or a cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made. If fv is omitted, it is assumed to be 0 (the future value of a loan, for example, is 0).

Type    is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due.

Set type equal to	If payments are due

0 or omitted	At the end of the period

1	At the beginning of the period

Guess    is your guess for what the rate will be.

If you omit guess, it is assumed to be 10%.

If RATE does not converge, try different values for guess. RATE usually converges if guess is between 0 and 1.

Remarks

Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying guess and nper. If you make monthly payments on a four-year loan at 12% annual interest, use 12%/12 for guess and 4*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 12% for guess and 4 for nper.

Example

To calculate the rate of a four-year $8000 loan with monthly payments of $200:

RATE(48, -200, 8000) equals 0.77%

This is the monthly rate, because the period is monthly. The annual rate is 0.77%*12, which equals 9.24%.

Related Functions

FV	Returns the future value of an investment

IPMT	Returns the interest payment for an investment for a given period

NPER	Returns the number of periods for an investment

PMT	Returns the periodic payment for an annuity

PPMT	Returns the payment on the principal for an investment for a given period

PV	Returns the present value of an investment

List of Financial Functions


REPLACE

Replaces part of a text string with a different text string.

Syntax

REPLACE(old_text, start_num, num_chars, new_text)

Old_text    is text in which you want to replace some characters.

Start_num    is the position of the character in old_text that you want to replace with new_text.

Num_chars    is the number of characters in old_text that you want to replace with new_text.

New_text    is the text that will replace characters in old_text.

Examples

The following formula replaces five characters with new_text, starting with the sixth character in old_text:

REPLACE("abcdefghijk", 6, 5, "*") equals "abcde*k"

The sixth through tenth characters are all replaced by "*".

The following formula replaces the last two digits of 1990 with 91:

REPLACE("1990", 3, 2, "91") equals "1991"

If cell A2 contains "123456", then:

REPLACE(A2, 1, 3, "@") equals "@456"

If the RIGHT function returns "ABCDEF", then:

REPLACE(RIGHT(A3, 6), 1, 6, "*") equals "*"

Related Functions

MID	Returns a specific number of characters from a text string

SEARCH	Finds one text value within another (not case-sensitive)

SUBSTITUTE	Substitutes new text for old text in a text string

TRIM	Removes spaces from text

List of Text Functions


REPT

Repeats text a given number of times. Use REPT to fill a cell with a number of instances of a text string.

Syntax

REPT(text, number_times)

Text    is the text you want to repeat.

Number_times    is a positive number specifying the number of times to repeat text. If number_times is 0, REPT returns "" (empty text). If number_times is not an integer, it is truncated. The result of the REPT function cannot be longer than 255 characters.

Tip	You can use this function to create a simple histogram on your worksheet.

Examples

REPT("*-", 3) equals "*-*-*-"

If A3 contains "Sales", then:

REPT($A$3, 2.9) equals "SalesSales"

Related Functions

List of Text Functions


RIGHT

Returns the last (or rightmost) character or characters in a text string.

Syntax

RIGHT(text, num_chars)

Text    is the text string containing the characters you want to extract.

Num_chars    specifies how many characters you want to extract.

Num_chars must be greater than or equal to zero.

If num_chars is greater than the length of text, RIGHT returns all of text.

If num_chars is omitted, it is assumed to be 1.

Examples

RIGHT("Sale Price", 5) equals "Price"

RIGHT("Stock Number") equals "r"

RIGHT is similar to LEFT; for more examples, see LEFT.

Related Functions

LEFT	Returns the leftmost characters from a text value

MID	Returns a specific number of characters from a text string

List of Text Functions


ROUND

Rounds a number to a specified number of digits.

Syntax

ROUND(number, num_digits)

Number    is the number you want to round.

Num_digits    specifies the number of digits to which you want to round number.

If num_digits is greater than 0, then number is rounded to the specified number of decimal places.

If num_digits is 0, then number is rounded to the nearest integer.

If num_digits is less than 0, then number is rounded to the left of the decimal point.

Examples

ROUND(2.15, 1) equals 2.2

ROUND(2.149, 1) equals 2.1

ROUND(-1.475, 2) equals -1.48

ROUND(21.5, -1) equals 20

Related Functions

CEILING	Rounds a number to the nearest integer or to the nearest multiple of significance

FLOOR	Rounds a number down, toward zero

INT	Rounds a number down to the nearest integer

MOD	Returns the remainder from division

MROUND	Returns a number rounded to the desired multiple

ROUNDDOWN	Rounds a number down, toward zero

ROUNDUP	Rounds a number up, away from zero

TRUNC	Truncates a number to an integer

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


SECOND

Returns the second corresponding to serial_number. The second is given as an integer in the range 0 to 59. Use SECOND to get the time in seconds indicated by a serial number.

Syntax

SECOND(serial_number)

Serial_number    is the date-time code used by Microsoft Excel for date and time calculations. You can give serial_number as text, such as "16:48:23" or "4:48:47 PM", instead of as a number. The text is automatically converted to a serial number. For more information on serial_number, see NOW.

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information, see NOW.

Examples

SECOND("4:48:18 PM") equals 18

SECOND(0.01) equals 24

SECOND(4.02) equals 48

Related Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

YEAR, MONTH, DAY, WEEKDAY, HOUR, and MINUTE
Convert serial numbers into years, months, days, days of the week, hours, and minutes

List of Date & Time Functions


SIGN

Determines the sign of a number. Returns 1 if number is positive, 0 if number is 0, and -1 if number is negative.

Syntax

SIGN(number)

Number    is any real number.

Examples

SIGN(10) equals 1

SIGN(4-4) equals 0

SIGN(-0.00001) equals -1

Related Function

ABS	Returns the absolute value of a number

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


SIN

Returns the sine of the given angle.

Syntax

SIN(number)

Number    is the angle in radians for which you want the sine. If your argument is in degrees, multiply it by PI()/180 to convert it to radians.

Examples

SIN(PI()) equals 1.22E-16, which is approximately zero. The sine of π is zero.

SIN(PI()/2) equals 1

SIN(30*PI()/180) equals 0.5, the sine of 30 degrees

Related Functions

ASIN	Returns the arcsine of a number

PI	Returns the value π

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


SINH

Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number.

Syntax

SINH(number)

Number    is any real number.

The formula for the hyperbolic sine is:

Examples

SINH(1) equals 1.175201194

SINH(-1) equals -1.175201194

You can use the hyperbolic sine function to approximate a cumulative probability distribution. Suppose a laboratory test value varies between 0 and 10 seconds. An empirical analysis of the collected history of experiments shows that the probability of obtaining a result, x, of less than t seconds is approximated by the following equation:

P(x<t) = 2.868 * SINH(0.0342 * t), where 0<t<10

To calculate the probability of obtaining a result of less than 1.03 seconds, substitute 1.03 for t:

2.868*SINH(0.0342*1.03) equals 0.101049063

You can expect this result to occur about 101 times for every 1000 experiments.

Related Functions

ASINH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number

COSH	Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number

TANH	Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


SLN

Returns the straight-line depreciation of an asset for one period.

Syntax

SLN(cost, salvage, life)

Cost    is the initial cost of the asset.

Salvage    is the value at the end of the depreciation (sometimes called the salvage value of the asset).

Life    is the number of periods over which the asset is being depreciated (sometimes called the useful life of the asset).

Example

Suppose you've bought a truck for $30,000 that has a useful life of 10 years and a salvage value of $7500. The depreciation allowance for each year is:

SLN(30000, 7500, 10) equals $2250

Related Functions

DDB	Returns the depreciation of an asset for a spcified period using the double-declining balance method or some other method you specify

SYD	Returns the sum-of-years' digits depreciation of an asset for a specified period

VDB	Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified or partial period using a declining balance method

List of Financial Functions


SQRT

Returns a positive square root.

Syntax

SQRT(number)

Number    is the number for which you want the square root. If number is negative, SQRT returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

SQRT(16) equals 4

SQRT(-16) equals #NUM!

SQRT(ABS(-16)) equals 4


SQRTPI

Returns the square root of (number * π).

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

SQRTPI(number)

Number    is the number by which pi is multiplied.

Remark

If number < 0, SQRTPI returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

SQRTPI(1) equals 1.772454

SQRTPI(2) equals 2.506628

Related Functions

PI	Returns the value π

SQRT	Returns a positive square root

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


SUBSTITUTE

Substitutes new_text for old_text in a text string. Use SUBSTITUTE when you want to replace specific text in a text string; use REPLACE when you want to replace any text that occurs in a specific location in a text string.

Syntax

SUBSTITUTE(text, old_text, new_text, instance_num)

Text    is the text or the reference to a cell containing text for which you want to substitute characters.

Old_text    is the text you want to replace.

New_text    is the text you want to replace old_text with.

Instance_num    specifies which occurrence of old_text you want to replace with new_text. If you specify instance_num, only that instance of old_text is replaced. Otherwise, every occurrence of old_text in text is changed to new_text.

Examples

SUBSTITUTE("Sales Data", "Sales", "Cost") equals "Cost Data"

SUBSTITUTE("Quarter 1, 1991", "1", "2", 1) equals "Quarter 2, 1991"

SUBSTITUTE("Quarter 1, 1991", "1", "2", 3) equals "Quarter 1, 1992"

To replace every occurrence of the text constant named Separator in the cell named CellCont2 with square brackets:

SUBSTITUTE(CellCont2, Separator, "] [")

Related Functions

REPLACE	Replaces characters within text

TRIM	Removes spaces from text

List of Text Functions


SUM

Returns the sum of all the numbers in the list of arguments.

Syntax

SUM(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want the sum.

Numbers, logical values, and text representations of numbers that you type directly into the list of arguments are counted. See the first and second examples following.

If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are counted. Empty cells, logical values, text, or error values in the array or reference are ignored. See the third example following.

Arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers cause errors.

Examples

SUM(3, 2) equals 5

SUM("3", 2, TRUE) equals 6 because the text values are translated into numbers, and the logical value TRUE is translated into the number 1.

Unlike the previous example, if A1 contains "3" and B1 contains TRUE, then:

SUM(A1, B1, 2) equals 2 because references to non-number values in references are not translated.

If cells A2:E2 contain 5, 15, 30, 40, and 50:

SUM(A2:C2) equals 50

SUM(B2:E2, 15) equals 150

Related Functions

AVERAGE	Returns the average of its arguments

COUNT or COUNTA	Count how many numbers or values are in a list of arguments

PRODUCT	Multiplies its arguments

SUMPRODUCT	Returns the sum of the products of corresponding array components

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


SUMPRODUCT

Multiplies corresponding components in the given arrays and returns the sum of those products.

Syntax

SUMPRODUCT(array1, array2, array3, ...)

Array1, array2, array3,...    are 2 to 30 arrays whose components you want to multiply and then add.

The array arguments must have the same dimensions. If they do not, SUMPRODUCT returns the #VALUE! error value.

SUMPRODUCT treats array entries that are not numeric as if they were zeros.

Example

The following formula multiplies all the components of the two arrays in the preceding worksheet and then adds the productsthat is, 3*2 + 4*7 + 8*6 + 6*7 + 1*5 + 9*3.

SUMPRODUCT({3,4;8,6;1,9}, {2,7;6,7;5,3}) equals 156

Remarks

The preceding example returns the same result as the formula SUM(A1:B3*D1:E3) entered as an array. Using arrays provides a more general solution for doing operations similar to SUMPRODUCT. For example, you can calculate the sum of the squares of the elements in A1:B3 by using the formula SUM(A1:B3^2) entered as an array.

Related Functions

MMULT	Returns the matrix product of two arrays

PRODUCT	Multiplies its arguments

SUM	Adds its arguments

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


SUMSQ

Returns the sum of the squares of the arguments.

Syntax

SUMSQ(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want the sum of the squares. You can also use a single array or a reference to an array instead of arguments separated by commas.

Example

SUMSQ(3, 4) equals 25

Related Functions

SUM	Adds its arguments

SUMPRODUCT	Returns the sum of the products of corresponding array components

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


SUMX2MY2

Returns the sum of the difference of squares of corresponding values in two arrays.

Syntax

SUMX2MY2(array_x, array_y)

Array_x    is the first array or range of values.

Array_y    is the second array or range of values.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If array_x and array_y have a different number of values, SUMX2MY2 returns the #N/A error value.

The equation for the sum of the difference of squares is:

Example

SUMX2MY2({2, 3, 9, 1, 8, 7, 5}, {6, 5, 11, 7, 5, 4, 4}) equals -55

Related Functions

SUMPRODUCT	Returns the sum of the products of corresponding array components

SUMX2PY2	Returns the sum of the sum of squares of corresponding values in two arrays

SUMXMY2	Returns the sum of squares of differences of corresponding values in two arrays

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


SUMX2PY2

Returns the sum of the sum of squares of corresponding values in two arrays. The sum of the sum of squares is a common term in many statistical calculations.

Syntax

SUMX2PY2(array_x, array_y)

Array_x    is the first array or range of values.

Array_y    is the second array or range of values.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If array_x and array_y have a different number of values, SUMX2PY2 returns the #N/A error value.

The equation for the sum of the sum of squares is:

Example

SUMX2PY2({2, 3, 9, 1, 8, 7, 5}, {6, 5, 11, 7, 5, 4, 4}) equals 521

Related Functions

SUMPRODUCT	Returns the sum of the products of corresponding array components

SUMX2MY2	Returns the sum of the difference of squares of corresponding values in two arrays

SUMXMY2	Returns the sum of squares of differences of corresponding values in two arrays

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


SUMXMY2

Returns the sum of squares of differences of corresponding values in two arrays.

Syntax

SUMXMY2(array_x, array_y)

Array_x    is the first array or range of values.

Array_y    is the second array or range of values.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If array_x and array_y have a different number of values, SUMXMY2 returns the #N/A error value.

The equation for the sum of squared differences is:

Example

SUMXMY2({2, 3, 9, 1, 8, 7, 5}, {6, 5, 11, 7, 5, 4, 4}) equals 79

Related Functions

SUMPRODUCT	Returns the sum of the products of corresponding array components

SUMX2MY2	Returns the sum of the difference of squares of corresponding values in two arrays

SUMX2PY2	Returns the sum of the sum of squares of corresponding values in two arrays

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


T

Returns the text referred to by value.

Syntax

T(value)

Value    is the value you want to test. If value is or refers to text, T returns value. If value does not refer to text, T returns "" (empty text).

Remarks

You do not generally need to use the T function in a formula since Microsoft Excel automatically converts values as necessary. This function is provided for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.

Examples

If B1 contains the text "Rainfall":

T(B1) equals "Rainfall"

If B2 contains the number 19:

T(B2) equals ""

T("True") equals "True"

T(TRUE) equals ""

Related Functions

CELL	Returns information about the formatting, location, or contents of a cell

N	Returns a value converted to a number

VALUE	Converts a text argument to a number

List of Text Functions


TAN

Returns the tangent of the given angle.

Syntax

TAN(number)

Number    is the angle in radians for which you want the tangent. If your argument is in degrees, multiply it by PI()/180 to convert it to radians.

Examples

TAN(0.785) equals 0.99920

TAN(45*PI()/180) equals 1

Related Functions

ATAN	Returns the arctangent of a number

ATAN2	Returns the arctangent from x- and y- coordinates

PI	Returns the value π

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


TANH

Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number.

Syntax

TANH(number)

Number    is any real number

The formula for the hyperbolic tangent is:

Examples

TANH(-2) equals -0.96403

TANH(0) equals 0

TANH(0.5) equals 0.462117

Related Functions

ATANH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number

COSH	Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number

SINH	Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


TEXT

Converts a value to text in a specific number format.

Syntax

TEXT(value, format_text)

Value    is a numeric value, a formula that evaluates to a numeric value, or a reference to a cell containing a numeric value.

Format_text    is a number format in text form from the Number tab in the Cell Properties dialog box. Format_text cannot contain an asterisk (*) and cannot be "General". For information about formatting numbers, see "Number Format Codes" in Chapter 12 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Overview of using number formats in online Help.

Remarks

Formatting a cell with the command on the number tab from the format cells dialog box changes only the format, not the value. Using the TEXT function converts a value to formatted text, and the result is no longer calculated as a number.

Examples

TEXT(2.715, "$0.00") equals "$2.72"

TEXT("4/15/91", "mmmm dd, yyyy") equals "April 15, 1991"

Related Functions

DOLLAR	Converts a number to text, using currency format

FIXED	Formats a number as text with a fixed number of decimals

T	Converts its arguments to text

VALUE	Converts a text argument to a number

List of Text Functions


TIME

Returns the serial number of a particular time. The serial number returned by TIME is a decimal fraction ranging from 0 to 0.99999999, representing the times from 0:00:00 (12:00:00 A.M.) to 23:59:59 (11:59:59 P.M.).

Syntax

TIME(hour, minute, second)

Hour    is a number from 0 to 23 representing the hour.

Minute    is a number from 0 to 59 representing the minute.

Second    is a number from 0 to 59 representing the second.

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information about date systems and serial numbers, see NOW.

Examples

TIME(12, 0, 0) equals the serial number 0.5, which is equivalent to 12:00:00 P.M.

TIME(16, 48, 10) equals the serial number 0.700115741, which is equivalent to 4:48:10 P.M.

TEXT(TIME(23, 18, 14), "h:mm:ss AM/PM") equals "11:18:14 PM"

Related Functions

HOUR, MINUTE, and SECOND	Convert serial numbers into hours, minutes, and seconds

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

List of Date & Time Functions


TIMEVALUE

Returns the serial number of the time represented by time_text. The serial number is a decimal fraction ranging from 0 to 0.99999999, representing the times from 0:00:00 (12:00:00 A.M.) to 23:59:59 (11:59:59 P.M.). Use TIMEVALUE to convert a time represented as text into a serial number.

Syntax

TIMEVALUE(time_text)

Time_text    is a text string that gives a time in any one of the Microsoft Excel time formats. Date information in time_text is ignored.

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information on date systems and serial numbers, see NOW.

Examples

TIMEVALUE("2:24 AM") equals 0.1

TIMEVALUE("22-Aug-55 6:35 AM") equals 0.274305556

Related Functions

DATEVALUE	Converts a date in the form of text to a serial number

HOUR, MINUTE, and SECOND	Convert serial numbers into hours, minutes, and seconds

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

TIME	Returns the serial number of a particular time

List of Date & Time Functions


TODAY

Returns the serial number of the current date. The serial number is the date-time code used by Microsoft Excel for date and time calculations. For more information about serial numbers, see NOW.

Syntax

TODAY( )

Related Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

DAY	Converts a serial number to a day of the month

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

List of Date & Time Functions


TRIM

Removes all spaces from text except for single spaces between words. Use TRIM on text that you have received from another application that may have irregular spacing.

Syntax

TRIM(text)

Text    is the text from which you want spaces removed.

Example

TRIM(" First   Quarter    Earnings   ") equals "First Quarter Earnings"

Related Functions

CLEAN	Removes all nonprintable characters from text

MID	Returns a specific number of characters from a text string

REPLACE	Replaces characters within text

SUBSTITUTE	Substitutes new text for old text in a text string

List of Text Functions


TRUE

Returns the logical value TRUE.

Syntax

TRUE( )

Remarks

You can enter the value TRUE directly into cells and formulas without using this function. The TRUE function is provided primarily for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.

Related Functions

List of Logical Functions


TRUNC

Truncates a number to an integer by removing the fractional part of the number.

Syntax

TRUNC(number, num_digits)

Number    is the number you want to truncate.

Num_digits    is a number specifying the precision of the truncation. The default value for num_digits is zero.

Remarks

TRUNC and INT are similar in that both return integers. TRUNC removes the fractional part of the number. INT rounds numbers down to the nearest integer based on the value of the fractional part of the number. INT and TRUNC are different only when using negative numbers: TRUNC(-4.3) returns -4, but INT(-4.3) returns -5, because -5 is the lower number.

Examples

TRUNC(8.9) equals 8

TRUNC(-8.9) equals -8

TRUNC(PI()) equals 3

Related Functions

CEILING	Rounds a number to the nearest integer or to the nearest multiple of significance

FLOOR	Rounds a number down, toward zero

INT	Rounds a number down to the nearest integer

MOD	Returns the remainder from division

ROUND	Rounds a number to a specified number of digits

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


VALUE

Converts text to a number.

Syntax

VALUE(text)

Text    is the text enclosed in quotation marks or a reference to a cell containing the text you want to convert. Text can be in any of the constant number, date, or time formats recognized by Microsoft Excel. If text is not in one of these formats, VALUE returns the #VALUE! error value.

Remarks

You do not generally need to use the VALUE function in a formula since Microsoft Excel automatically converts text to numbers as necessary. This function is provided for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.

Examples

VALUE("$1, 000") equals 1,000

VALUE("16:48:00")-VALUE("12:00:00") equals "16:48:00"-"12:00:00" equals 0.2, the serial number equivalent to 4 hours and 48 minutes.

Related Functions

DOLLAR	Converts a number to text, using currency format

FIXED	Formats a number as text with a fixed number of decimals

TEXT	Formats a number and converts it to text

List of Text Functions


VDB

Returns the depreciation of an asset for any period you specify, including partial periods, using the double-declining balance method or some other method you specify. VDB stands for variable declining balance.

Syntax

VDB(cost, salvage, life, start_period, end_period, factor, no_switch)

Cost    is the initial cost of the asset.

Salvage    is the value at the end of the depreciation (sometimes called the salvage value of the asset).

Life    is the number of periods over which the asset is being depreciated (sometimes called the useful life of the asset).

Start_period    is the starting period for which you want to calculate the depreciation. Start_period must use the same units as life.

End_period    is the ending period for which you want to calculate the depreciation. End_period must use the same units as life.

Factor    is the rate at which the balance declines. If factor is omitted, it is assumed to be 2 (the double-declining balance method). Change factor if you do not want to use the double-declining balance method. For a description of the double-declining balance method, see DDB.

No_switch    is a logical value specifying whether to switch to straight-line depreciation when depreciation is greater than the declining balance calculation.

If no_switch is TRUE, Microsoft Excel does not switch to straight-line depreciation even when the depreciation is greater than the declining balance calculation.

If no_switch is FALSE or omitted, Microsoft Excel switches to straight-line depreciation when depreciation is greater than the declining balance calculation.

All arguments except no_switch must be positive numbers.

Examples

Suppose a factory purchases a new machine. The machine costs $2400 and has a lifetime of 10 years. The salvage value of the machine is $300. The following examples show depreciation over several periods. The results are rounded to two decimal places.

VDB(2400, 300, 3650, 0, 1) equals $1.32, the first day's depreciation. Microsoft Excel automatically assumes that  factor is 2.

VDB(2400, 300, 120, 0, 1) equals $40.00, the first month's depreciation.

VDB(2400, 300, 10, 0, 1) equals $480.00, the first year's depreciation.

VDB(2400, 300, 120, 6, 18) equals $396.31, the depreciation between the 6th month and the 18th month.

VDB(2400, 300, 120, 6, 18, 1.5) equals $311.81, the depreciation between the 6th month and the 18th month using a factor of 1.5 instead of the double-declining balance method.

Suppose instead that the $2400 machine is purchased in the middle of the first quarter of the fiscal year. The following macro formula determines the amount of depreciation for the first fiscal year that you own the asset, assuming that tax laws limit you to 150% depreciation of the declining balance:

VDB(2400, 300, 10, 0, 0.875, 1.5) equals $315.00

Related Functions

DDB	Returns the depreciation of an asset for a spcified period using the double-declining balance method or some other method you specify

SLN	Returns the straight-line depreciation of an asset for one period

SYD	Returns the sum-of-years' digits depreciation of an asset for a specified period

List of Financial Functions


WEEKDAY

Returns the day of the week corresponding to serial_number. The day is given as an integer, ranging from 1 (Sunday) to 7 (Saturday).

Syntax

WEEKDAY(serial_number, return_type)

Serial_number    is the date-time code used by Microsoft Excel for date and time calculations. You can give serial_number as text, such as "15-Apr-1993" or "4-15-93", instead of as a number. The text is automatically converted to a serial number. For more information about serial_number, see NOW.

Return_type    is a number that determines the type of return value.

Return_type	Number returned

1 or omitted	Numbers 1 (Sunday) through 7 (Saturday). Behaves like previous versions of Microsoft Excel.

2	Numbers 1 (Monday) through 7 (Sunday)

3	Numbers 0 (Monday) through 6 (Sunday)

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information, see NOW.

You can also use the TEXT function to convert a value to a specified number format when using the 1900 Date System:

TEXT("4/16/90", "dddd") equals Monday

Examples

WEEKDAY("2/14/90") equals 4 (Wednesday)

If you are using the 1900 Date System (the default in Microsoft Excel for Windows), then:

WEEKDAY(29747.007) equals 4 (Wednesday)

If you are using the 1904 Date System (the default in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh), then:

WEEKDAY(29747.007) equals 3 (Tuesday)

Related Functions

DAY	Converts a serial number to a day of the month

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

TEXT	Formats a number and converts it to text

TODAY	Returns the serial number of today's date

List of Date & Time Functions


WORKDAY

Returns the serial number date that is the indicated number of working days before or after start_date. Working days exclude weekends and any dates identified in holidays. Use WORKDAY to exclude weekends or holidays when you calculate invoice due dates, expected delivery times, or the number of days of work performed.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

WORKDAY(start_date, days, holidays)

Start_date    is a serial date number that represents the start date.

Days    is the number of nonweekend and non-holiday days before or after start_date. A positive value for days yields a future date; a negative value yields a past date.

Holidays    is an optional array of one or more serial date numbers to exclude from the working calendar, such as state and federal holidays and floating holidays.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, WORKDAY returns the #VALUE! error value.

If start_date is not a valid serial date number, WORKDAY returns the #NUM! error value.

If start_date plus days yields an invalid serial date number, WORKDAY returns the #NUM! error value.

If days is not an integer, it is truncated.

Examples

WORKDAY(DATEVALUE("01/03/91"), 5) equals 33248 or 01/10/91

If January 7, 1991 and January 8, 1991 are holidays, then:
WORKDAY(DATEVALUE("01/03/91"), 5, {33245, 33246}) equals 33252
or 01/14/91

Related Functions

EDATE	Returns the serial number of the date that is the indicated number of months before or after the start date

EOMONTH	Returns the serial number of the last day of the month before or after a specified number of months

NETWORKDAYS	Returns the number of whole workdays between two dates

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

List of Date & Time Functions


YEAR

Returns the year corresponding to serial_number. The year is given as an integer in the range 1900-2078.

Syntax

YEAR(serial_number)

Serial_number    is the date-time code used by Microsoft Excel for date and time calculations. You can give serial_number as text, such as "15-Apr-1993" or "4-15-93", instead of as a number. The text is automatically converted to a serial number. For more information about serial_number, see NOW.

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information, see NOW.

Examples

YEAR("7/5/90") equals 1990

If you are using the 1900 Date System (the default in Microsoft Excel for Windows), then:

YEAR(0.007) equals 1900

YEAR(29747.007) equals 1981

If you are using the 1904 Date System (the default in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh), then:

YEAR(0.007) equals 1904

YEAR(29747.007) equals 1985

Related Functions

MONTH, DAY, WEEKDAY, HOUR, MINUTE, and SECOND
Convert serial numbers into months, days, days of the week, hours, minutes, and seconds

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

TODAY	Returns the serial number of today's date

List of Date & Time Functions


ACCRINT

Returns the accrued interest for a security that pays periodic interest.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

ACCRINT(issue, first_interest, settlement, rate, par, frequency, basis)

Issue    is the security's issue date, expressed as a serial date number.

First_interest    is the security's first interest date, expressed as a serial date number.

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's annual coupon rate.

Par    is the security's par value. If you omit par, ACCRINT uses $1000.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, ACCRINT returns the #VALUE! error value.

Issue, first_interest, settlement, frequency, and basis are truncated to integers.

If issue, first_interest, or settlement is not a valid serial date number, ACCRINT returns the #NUM! error value.

If coupon ≤ 0 or if par ≤ 0, ACCRINT returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, ACCRINT returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, ACCRINT returns the #NUM! error value.

If issue ≥ settlement, ACCRINT returns the #NUM! error value.

ACCRINT is calculated as follows:

where:

Ai=number of accrued days for the ith quasi-coupon period within odd period.

NC=number of quasi-coupon periods that fit in odd period.  If this number contains a fraction, raise it to the next whole number.

NLi=normal length in days of the ith quasi-coupon period within odd period.

Example

A Treasury bond has the following terms:

February 28, 1993 issue date
May 1, 1993 settlement date
August 31, 1993 first interest date
10.0% coupon
$1000 par value
Frequency is semiannual
30/360 basis

The accrued interest (in the 1900 Date System) is:

ACCRINT(34028,34212,34090,0.1,1000,2,0) equals 16.85083.

Related Functions

ACCRINTM	Returns the accrued interest for a security that pays interest at maturity

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

List of Financial Functions


ACCRINTM

Returns the accrued interest for a security that pays interest at maturity.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

ACCRINTM(issue, maturity, rate, par, basis)

Issue    is the security's issue date, expressed as a serial date number.

Settlement    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's annual coupon rate.

Par    is the security's par value. If you omit par, ACCRINTM uses $1000.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Issue, settlement, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, ACCRINTM returns the #VALUE! error value.

If issue or settlement is not a valid serial date number, ACCRINTM returns the #NUM! error value.

If rate ≤ 0 or if par ≤ 0, ACCRINTM returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, ACCRINTM returns the #NUM! error value.

If issue ≥ settlement, ACCRINTM returns the #NUM! error value.

ACCRINTM is calculated as follows:

where:

A=Number of accrued days counted according to a monthly basis. For interest at maturity items, the number of days from the issue date to the maturity date is used.

D=Annual Year Basis.

Example

A note has the following terms:

April 1, 1993 issue date
June 15, 1993 maturity date
10.0% coupon
$1000 par value
Actual/365 basis

The accrued interest (in the 1900 Date System) is:

ACCRINTM(34060,34135,0.1,1000,3) equals 20.54795

Related Functions

ACCRINT	Returns the accrued interest for a security

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

List of Financial Functions


COMPLEX

Converts real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number of the form x + yi or x + yj.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

COMPLEX(real_num, i_num, suffix)

Real_num    is the real coefficient of the complex number.

I_num    is the imaginary coefficient of the complex number.

Suffix    is the suffix for the imaginary component of the complex number. If omitted, suffix is assumed to be "i".

Note  All complex number functions accept "i" and "j" for suffix, but neither "I" nor "J". Using uppercase results in the #VALUE! error value. All functions that accept two or more complex numbers require that all suffixes match.

Remarks

If real_num is non-numeric, COMPLEX returns the #VALUE! error value.

If i_num is non-numeric, COMPLEX returns the #VALUE! error value.

If suffix is neither "i" nor "j", COMPLEX returns the #VALUE! error value.

Examples

COMPLEX(3,4) equals 3 + 4i

COMPLEX(3,4,"j") equals 3 + 4j

COMPLEX(0,1) equals i

COMPLEX(1,0) equals 1

Related Functions

Related functions include other complex number functions such as IMABS, IMAGINARY, IMREAL, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


COUPDAYBS

Returns the number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the settlement date.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

COUPDAYBS(settlement, maturity, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

All arguments are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, COUPDAYBS returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, COUPDAYBS returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, COUPDAYBS returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, COUPDAYBS returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, COUPDAYBS returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

January 25, 1993 settlement date
November 15, 1994 maturity date
Semiannual coupon
Actual/actual basis

The number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the settlement date (in the 1900 Date System) is:

COUPDAYBS(33994,34653,2,1) equals 71

Related Functions

COUPDAYS	Returns the number of days in the coupon period that contains the settlement date

COUPDAYSNC	Returns the number of days from the settlement date to the next coupon date

COUPNCD	Returns the next coupon date after the settlement date

COUPNUM	Returns the number of coupons payable between the settlement date and maturity date

COUPPCD	Returns the previous coupon date before the settlement date

Dates	Returns the serial number of a particular date

List of Financial Functions


COUPDAYS

Returns the number of days in the coupon period that contains the settlement date.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

COUPDAYS(settlement, maturity, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

All arguments are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, COUPDAYS returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, COUPDAYS returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, COUPDAYS returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, COUPDAYS returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, COUPDAYS returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

January 25, 1993 settlement date
November 15, 1994 maturity date
Semiannual coupon
Actual/actual basis

The number of days in the coupon period that contains the settlement date (in the 1900 Date System) is:

COUPDAYS(33994,34653,2,1) equals 181

Related Functions

COUPDAYBS	Returns the number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the settlement date

COUPDAYSNC	Returns the number of days from the settlement date to the next coupon date

COUPNCD	Returns the next coupon date after the settlement date

COUPNUM	Returns the number of coupons payable between the settlement date and maturity date

COUPPCD	Returns the previous coupon date before the settlement date

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

List of Financial Functions


COUPDAYSNC

Returns the number of days from the settlement date to the next coupon date.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

COUPDAYSNC(settlement, maturity, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

All arguments are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, COUPDAYSNC returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, COUPDAYSNC returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, COUPDAYSNC returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, COUPDAYSNC returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, COUPDAYSNC returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

January 25, 1993 settlement date
November 15, 1994 maturity date
Semiannual coupon
Actual/actual basis

The number of days from the settlement date to the next coupon date (in the 1900 Date System) is:

COUPDAYSNC(33994,34653,2,1) equals 110

Related Functions

COUPDAYBS	Returns the number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the settlement date

COUPDAYS	Returns the number of days in the coupon period that contains the settlement date

COUPNCD	Returns the next coupon date after the settlement date

COUPNUM	Returns the number of coupons payable between the settlement date and maturity date

COUPPCD	Returns the previous coupon date before the settlement date

Dates	Returns the serial number of a particular date

List of Financial Functions


COUPNCD

Returns the next coupon date after the settlement date.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

COUPNCD(settlement, maturity, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

All arguments are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, COUPNCD returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, COUPNCD returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, COUPNCD returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, COUPNCD returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, COUPNCD returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

January 25, 1993 settlement date
November 15, 1994 maturity date
Semiannual coupon
Actual/actual basis

The next coupon date after the settlement date (in the 1900 Date System) is:

COUPNCD(33994,34653,2,1) equals 34104 or May 15, 1993

Related Functions

COUPDAYBS	Returns the number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the settlement date

COUPDAYS	Returns the number of days in the coupon period that contains the settlement date

COUPDAYSNC	Returns the number of days from the settlement date to the next coupon date

COUPNUM	Returns the number of coupons payable between the settlement date and maturity date

COUPPCD	Returns the previous coupon date before the settlement date

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

List of Financial Functions


COUPNUM

Returns the number of coupons payable between the settlement date and maturity date, rounded up to the nearest whole coupon.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

COUPNUM(settlement, maturity, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

All arguments are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, COUPNUM returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, COUPNUM returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, COUPNUM returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, COUPNUM returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, COUPNUM returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

January 25, 1993 settlement date
November 15, 1994 maturity date
Semiannual coupon
Actual/actual basis

The number of coupon payments (in the 1900 Date System) is:

COUPNUM(33994,34653,2,1) equals 4

Related Functions

COUPDAYBS	Returns the number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the settlement date

COUPDAYS	Returns the number of days in the coupon period that contains the settlement date

COUPDAYSNC	Returns the number of days from the settlement date to the next coupon date

COUPNCD	Returns the next coupon date after the settlement date

COUPPCD	Returns the previous coupon date before the settlement date

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

List of Financial Functions


COUPPCD

Returns the previous coupon date before the settlement date.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

COUPPCD(settlement, maturity, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

All arguments are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, COUPPCD returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, COUPPCD returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, COUPPCD returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, COUPPCD returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, COUPPCD returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

January 25, 1993 settlement date
November 15, 1994 maturity date
Semiannual coupon
Actual/actual basis

The previous coupon date before the settlement date (in the 1900 Date System) is:

COUPPCD(33994,34653,2,1) equals 33923 or November 15, 1992

Related Functions

COUPDAYBS	Returns the number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the settlement date

COUPDAYS	Returns the number of days in the coupon period that contains the settlement date

COUPDAYSNC	Returns the number of days from the settlement date to the next coupon date

COUPNCD	Returns the next coupon date after the settlement date

COUPNUM	Returns the number of coupons payable between the settlement date and maturity date

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

List of Financial Functions


CUMIPMT

Returns the cumulative interest paid on a loan between start_period and end_period.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

CUMIPMT(rate, nper, pv, start_period, end_period, type)

Rate    is the interest rate.

Nper    is the total number of payment periods.

Pv    is the present value.

Start_period    is the first period in the calculation. Payment periods are numbered beginning with 1.

End_period    is the last period in the calculation.

Type    is the timing of the payment.

Type	Timing

0	Payment at the end of the period

1	Payment at the beginning of the period

Remarks

Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying rate and nper. If you make monthly payments on a four-year loan at 12% annual interest, use 12%/12 for rate and 4*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 12% for rate and 4 for nper.

Nper, start_period, end_period, and type are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, CUMIPMT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If rate ≤ 0, nper ≤ 0, or pv ≤ 0, CUMIPMT returns the #NUM! error value.

If start_period < 1, end_period < 1, or start_period > end_period, CUMIPMT returns the #NUM! error value.

If type is any number other than 0 or 1, CUMIPMT returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A home mortgage loan has the following terms:

Interest rate, 9.00% per annum (rate = 9.00%  12 = 0.0075)
Term, 30 years (nper = 30  12 = 360)
Present value, $125,000

The total interest paid in the second year of payments (periods 13 through 24) is:

CUMIPMT(0.0075,360,125000,13,24,0) equals -11135.23

The interest paid in a single payment, in the first month, is:

CUMIPMT(0.0075,360,125000,1,1,0) equals -937.50

Related Function

CUMPRINC	Returns the cumulative principal paid on a loan between two periods

List of Financial Functions


CUMPRINC

Returns the cumulative principal paid on a loan between start_period and end_period.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

CUMPRINC(rate, nper, pv, start_period, end_period, type)

Rate    is the interest rate.

Nper    is the total number of payment periods.

Pv    is the present value.

Start_period    is the first period in the calculation. Payment periods are numbered beginning with 1.

End_period    is the last period in the calculation.

Type    is the timing of the payment.

Type	Timing

0	Payment at the end of the period

1	Payment at the beginning of the period

Remarks

Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying rate and nper. If you make monthly payments on a four-year loan at 12% annual interest, use 12%/12 for rate and 4*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 12% for rate and 4 for nper.

Nper, start_period, end_period, and type are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, CUMPRINC returns the #VALUE! error value.

If rate ≤ 0, nper ≤ 0, or pv ≤ 0, CUMPRINC returns the #NUM! error value.

If start_period < 1, end_period < 1, or start_period > end_period, CUMPRINC returns the #NUM! error value.

If type is any number other than 0 or 1, CUMPRINC returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A home mortgage loan has the following terms:

Interest rate, 9.00% per annum (rate = 9.00%  12 = 0.0075)
Term, 30 years (nper = 30  12 = 360)
Present value, $125,000

The total principal paid in the second year of payments (periods 13 through 24) is:

CUMPRINC(0.0075,360,125000,13,24,0) equals -934.1071

The principal paid in a single payment, in the first month, is:

CUMPRINC(0.0075,360,125000,1,1,0) equals -68.27827

Related Function

CUMIPMT	Returns the cumulative interest paid on a loan between two periods

List of Financial Functions


DEGREES

Converts radians into degrees.

Syntax

DEGREES(angle)

Angle    is the angle in radians that you want to convert.

Example

DEGREES(PI()) equals 180

Related Function

RADIANS	Converts degrees to radians

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


DISC

Returns the discount rate for a security.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

DISC(settlement, maturity, pr, redemption, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Pr    is the security's price per $100 face value.

Redemption    is the security's redemption value per $100 face value.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, DISC returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, DISC returns the #NUM! error value.

If pr ≤ 0 or if redemption ≤ 0, DISC returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, DISC returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, DISC returns the #NUM! error value.

DISC is calculated as follows:

Where:

B=number of days in a year, depending on the year basis.

DSM=number of days detween settlement and maturity.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

February 15, 1993 settlement date
June 10, 1993 maturity date
$97.975 price
$100 redemption value
Actual/360 basis

The bond discount rate (in the 1900 Date System) is:

DISC(34015,34130,97.975,100,2) equals 0.063391 or 6.3391%

Related Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

PRICEDISC	Returns the price per $100 face value of a discounted security

YIELDDISC	Returns the annual yield for a discounted security

List of Financial Functions


DOLLARDE

Converts a dollar price expressed as a fraction into a dollar price expressed as a decimal number. Use DOLLARDE to convert fractional dollar numbers, such as securities prices, to decimal numbers.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

DOLLARDE(fractional_dollar, fraction)

Fractional_dollar    is a number expressed as a fraction.

Fraction    is the integer to use in the denominator of the fraction.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, DOLLARDE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If fraction is not an integer, it is truncated.

If fraction ≤ 0, DOLLARDE returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

DOLLARDE(1.02,16) equals 1.125

DOLLARDE(1.1,8) equals 1.125

Related Functions

DOLLAR	Converts a number to text, using currency format

DOLLARFR	Converts a dollar price, expressed as a decimal number, into a dollar price, expressed as a fraction

List of Financial Functions


DOLLARFR

Converts a dollar price expressed as a decimal number into a dollar price expressed as a fraction. Use DOLLARFR to convert decimal numbers to fractional dollar numbers, such as securities prices.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

DOLLARFR(decimal_dollar, fraction)

Decimal_dollar    is a decimal number.

Fraction    is the integer to use in the denominator of a fraction.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, DOLLARFR returns the #VALUE! error value.

If fraction is not an integer, it is truncated.

If fraction ≤ 0, DOLLARFR returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

DOLLARFR(1.125,16) equals 1.02

DOLLARFR(1.125,8) equals 1.1

Related Functions

DOLLAR	Converts a number to text, using currency format

DOLLARDE	Converts a dollar price, expressed as a fraction, into a dollar price, expressed as a decimal number

List of Financial Functions


DURATION

Returns the annual duration of a security with periodic interest payments. Duration is defined as the weighted average of the present value of the cash flows, and is used as a measure of a bond price's response to changes in yield.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

DURATION(settlement, maturity, coupon, yld, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Coupon    is the security's annual coupon rate.

Yld    is the security's annual yield.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, frequency, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, DURATION returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, DURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

If coupon < 0 or if yld < 0, DURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, DURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, DURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, DURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

January 1, 1986 settlement date
January 1, 1994 maturity date
8% coupon
9.0% yield
Frequency is semiannual
Actual/actual basis

The duration (in the 1900 Date System) is:

DURATION(31413,34335,0.08,0.09,2,1) equals 5.993775

Related Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

MDURATION	Returns the Macauley modified duration for a security with an assumed par value of $100

List of Financial Functions


EDATE

Returns the serial number date that is the indicated number of months before or after start_date. Use EDATE to calculate maturity dates or due dates that fall on the same day of the month as the date of issue.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

EDATE(start_date, months)

Start_date    is a serial date number that represents the start date.

Months    is the number of months before or after start_date. A positive value for months yields a future date; a negative value yields a past date.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, EDATE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If start_date is not a valid serial date number, EDATE returns the #NUM! error value.

If months is not an integer, it is truncated.

Examples

EDATE(DATEVALUE("01/15/91"),1) equals 33284 or 02/15/91

EDATE(DATEVALUE("03/31/91"),-1) equals 33297 or 02/28/91

Related Functions

Dates	Returns the serial number of a particular date

EOMONTH	Returns the serial number date for the last day of the month before or after a specified number of months

NETWORKDAYS	Returns the number of whole workdays between two dates

WORKDAY	Returns the serial number of the date before or after a specified number of workdays

List of Date & Time Functions


EFFECT

Returns the effective annual interest rate, given the nominal annual interest rate and the number of compounding periods per year.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

EFFECT(nominal_rate, npery)

Nominal_rate    is the nominal interest rate.

Npery    is the number of compounding periods per year.

Remarks

Npery is truncated to an integer.

If either argument is non-numeric, EFFECT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If nominal_rate ≤ 0 or if npery < 1, EFFECT returns the #NUM! error value.

EFFECT is calculated as follows:

Example

EFFECT(5.25%,4) equals 0.053543 or 5.3543%

Related Function

NOMINAL	Returns the annual nominal interest rate

List of Financial Functions


FVSCHEDULE

Returns the future value of an initial principal after applying a series of compound interest rates. Use FVSCHEDULE to calculate future value of an investment with a variable or adjustable rate.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

FVSCHEDULE(principal, schedule)

Principal    is the present value.

Schedule    is an array of interest rates to apply.

Remarks

If principal is non-numeric, FVSCHEDULE returns the #VALUE! error value.

The values in schedule can be numbers or blank cells; any other value produces the #VALUE! error value for FVSCHEDULE. Blank cells are taken as zeros (no interest).

Example

FVSCHEDULE(1,{0.09,0.11,0.1}) equals 1.33089

Related Function

FV	Returns the future value of an investment

List of Financial Functions


IMABS

Returns the absolute value (modulus) of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

IMABS(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the absolute value.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMABS returns the #NUM! error value.

The absolute value of a complex number is:

where:

z = x + yi

Example

IMABS("5+12i") equals 13

Related Functions

Related functions include other complex number functions such as IMSUM, IMAGINARY, IMREAL, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


IMAGINARY

Returns the imaginary coefficient of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

IMAGINARY(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the imaginary coefficient.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMAGINARY returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

IMAGINARY("3+4i") equals 4

IMAGINARY("0-j") equals -1

IMAGINARY(4) equals 0

Related Functions

Related functions include other complex number functions such as IMABS, IMSUM, IMREAL, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


IMARGUMENT

Returns the argument , an angle expressed in radians, such that:

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

IMARGUMENT(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the argument .

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMARGUMENT returns the #NUM! error value.

IMARGUMENT is calculated as follows:

where:

and

z = x + yi

Example

IMARGUMENT("3+4i") equals 0.927295

Related Functions

Related functions include other complex number functions such as IMSUM, IMAGINARY, IMREAL, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


IMCONJUGATE

Returns the complex conjugate of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

IMCONJUGATE(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the conjugate.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMCONJUGATE returns the #NUM! error value.

The conjugate of a complex number is:

Example

IMCONJUGATE("3+4i") equals 3 - 4i

Related Functions

Related functions include other complex number functions such as IMSUM, IMAGINARY, IMREAL, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


IMCOS

Returns the cosine of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Adding or Removing an Add-in From the Working Set in online Help.

Syntax

IMCOS(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the cosine.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not text, IMCOS returns the #VALUE! error value.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMCOS returns the #NUM! error value.

The cosine of a complex number is:

Example

IMCOS("1+i") equals 0.83373 - 0.988898i

Related Functions

Related functions include other complex number functions such as IMSUM, IMAGINARY, IMREAL, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


IMDIV

Returns the quotient of two complex numbers in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

IMDIV(inumber1, inumber2)

Inumber1    is the complex numerator or dividend.

Inumber2    is the complex denominator or divisor.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber1 or inumber2 is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMDIV returns the #NUM! error value.

The quotient of two complex numbers is:

Example

IMDIV("-238+240i","10+24i") equals 5 + 12i

Related Functions

Related functions include other complex number functions such as IMSUM, IMAGINARY, IMREAL, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


IMEXP

Returns the exponential of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

IMEXP(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the exponential.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMEXP returns the #NUM! error value.

The exponential of a complex number is:

Example

IMEXP("1+i") equals 1.468694 + 2.287355i

Related Functions

Related functions include other complex number functions such as IMSUM, IMAGINARY, IMREAL, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


IMLN

Returns the natural logarithm of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

IMLN(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the natural logarithm.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMLN returns the #NUM! error value.

The natural logarithm of a complex number is:

where:

Example

IMLN("3+4i") equals 1.609438 + 0.927295i

Related Functions

Related functions include other complex number functions such as IMSUM, IMAGINARY, IMREAL, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


IMLOG10

Returns the common logarithm (base 10) of a complex number in x + yi or
x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

IMLOG10(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the common logarithm.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMLOG10 returns the #NUM! error value.

The common logarithm of a complex number can be calculated from the natural logarithm as follows:

Example

IMLOG10("3+4i") equals 0.69897 + 0.402719i

Related Functions

Related functions include other complex number functions such as IMSUM, IMAGINARY, IMREAL, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


IMLOG2

Returns the base-2 logarithm of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

IMLOG2(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the base-2 logarithm.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMLOG2 returns the #NUM! error value.

The base-2 logarithm of a complex number can be calculated from the natural logarithm as follows:

Example

IMLOG2("3+4i") equals 2.321928 + 1.337804i

Related Functions

Related functions include other complex number functions such as IMSUM, IMAGINARY, IMREAL, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


IMPOWER

Returns a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format raised to a power.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

IMPOWER(inumber, number)

Inumber    is a complex number you want to raise to a power.

Number    is the power to which you want to raise the complex number.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMPOWER returns the #NUM! error value.

If number is non-numeric, IMPOWER returns the #VALUE! error value.

Number can be either an integer, fractional or negative.

A complex number raised to a power is calculated as follows:

where:

and:

and:

Example

IMPOWER("2+3i", 3) equals -46 + 9i

Related Functions

Related functions include other complex number functions such as IMSUM, IMAGINARY, IMREAL, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


IMPRODUCT

Returns the product of 2 to 29 complex numbers in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

IMPRODUCT(inumber1, inumber2,...)

Inumber1, inumber2    are 1 to 29 complex numbers to multiply.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber1 or inumber2 is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMPRODUCT returns the #NUM! error value.

The product of two complex numbers is:

Examples

IMPRODUCT("3+4i","5-3i") equals 27 + 11i

IMPRODUCT("1+2i",30) equals 30 + 60i

Related Functions

Related functions include other complex number functions such as IMSUM, IMAGINARY, IMREAL, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


IMREAL

Returns the real coefficient of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

IMREAL(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the real coefficient.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMREAL returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

IMREAL("6-9i") equals 6

Related Functions

Related functions include other complex number functions such as IMSUM, IMAGINARY, IMABS, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


IMSIN

Returns the sine of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

IMSIN(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the sine.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMSIN returns the #NUM! error value.

The sine of a complex number is:

Example

IMSIN("3+4i") equals 3.853738 - 27.016813i

Related Functions

Related functions include other complex number functions such as IMSUM, IMAGINARY, IMREAL, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


IMSQRT

Returns the square root of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

IMSQRT(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the square root.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMSQRT returns the #NUM! error value.

The square root of a complex number is:

where:

and:

and:

Example

IMSQRT("1+i") equals 1.098684 + 0.45509i

Related Functions

Related functions include other complex number functions such as IMSUM, IMAGINARY, IMREAL, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


IMSUB

Returns the difference of two complex numbers in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

IMSUB(inumber1, inumber2)

Inumber1    is the complex number from which to subtract inumber2.

Inumber2    is the complex number to subtract from inumber1.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If either number is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMSUB returns the #NUM! error value.

The difference of two complex numbers is:

Example

IMSUB("13+4i","5+3i") equals 8 + i

Related Functions

Related functions include other complex number functions such as IMSUM, IMAGINARY, IMREAL, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


IMSUM

Returns the sum of two or more complex numbers in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

IMSUM(inumber1, inumber2,...)

Inumber1,inumber2,...    are 1 to 29 complex numbers to add.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If any argument is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMSUM returns the #NUM! error value.

The sum of two complex numbers is:

Example

IMSUM("3+4i","5-3i") equals 8 + i

Related Functions

Related functions include other complex number functions such as IMABS, IMAGINARY, IMREAL, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


INTRATE

Returns the interest rate for a fully invested security.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

INTRATE(settlement, maturity, investment, redemption, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Investment    is the amount invested in the security.

Redemption    is the amount to be received at maturity.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, INTRATE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, INTRATE returns the #NUM! error value.

If investment ≤ 0 or if redemption ≤ 0, INTRATE returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, INTRATE returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, INTRATE returns the #NUM! error value.

INTRATE is calculated as follows:

Where:

B=number of days in a year, depending on the year basis.

DIM=number of days from settlement to maturity.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

February 15, 1993 settlement (issue) date
May 15, 1993 maturity date
1,000,000 investment
1,014,420 redemption value
Actual/360 basis

The bond discount rate (in the 1900 Date System) is:

INTRATE(34015,34104,1000000,1014420,2) equals 0.058328 or 5.8328%

Related Functions

RECEIVED	Returns the amount received at maturity for a fully invested security

List of Financial Functions


MDURATION

Returns the modified Macauley duration for a security with an assumed par value of $100.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

MDURATION(settlement, maturity, coupon, yld, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Coupon    is the security's annual coupon rate.

Yld    is the security's annual yield.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, frequency, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, MDURATION returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, MDURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

If yld < 0 or if coupon < 0, MDURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, MDURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, MDURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, MDURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

Modified duration is defined as follows:

Example

A bond has the following terms:

January 1, 1986 settlement date
January 1, 1994 maturity date
8.0% coupon
9.0% yield
Frequency is semiannual
Actual/actual basis

The modified duration (in the 1900 Date System) is:

MDURATION(31413,34335,0.08,0.09,2,1) equals 5.73567

Related Functions

DURATION	Returns the annual duration of a security with periodic interest payments

List of Financial Functions


NOMINAL

Returns the nominal annual interest rate given the effective rate and the number of compounding periods per year.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

NOMINAL(effect_rate, npery)

Effect_rate    is the effective interest rate.

Npery    is the number of compounding periods per year.

Remarks

Npery is truncated to an integer.

If either argument is non-numeric, NOMINAL returns the #VALUE! error value.

If effect_rate ≤ 0 or if npery < 1, NOMINAL returns the #NUM! error value.

NOMINAL is related to EFFECT as shown in the following equation:

Example

NOMINAL(5.3543%,4) equals 0.0525 or 5.25%

Related Function

EFFECT	Returns the effective annual interest rate

List of Financial Functions


ODDFPRICE

Returns the price per $100 face value of a security having an odd (short or long) first period.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

ODDFPRICE(settlement, maturity, issue, first_coupon, rate, yld, redemption, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Issue    is the security's issue date, expressed as a serial date number.

First_coupon    is the security's first coupon date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's interest rate.

Yld    is the security's annual yield.

Redemption    is the security's redemption value per $100 face value.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, issue, first_coupon, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, ODDFPRICE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement, maturity, issue, or first_coupon is not a valid serial date number, ODDFPRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If rate < 0 or if yld < 0, ODDFPRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, ODDFPRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

The following date condition must be satisfied; otherwise, ODDFPRICE returns the #NUM! error value:

maturity > first_coupon > settlement > issue

ODDFPRICE is calculated as follows:

Odd short first coupon:

Where:

A = number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the settlement date (accrued days).

DSC = number of days from the settlement to the next coupon date.

DFC = number of days from the the beginnning of the odd first coupon to the first coupon date.

E = number of days in the coupon period.

N = number of coupon payable between the settlement date and the redemption date. (If this number contains a fraction, it is raised to the next whole number).

Odd long first coupon:

Where:

Ai = number of days from begining of the ith quasi-coupon period within odd period.

DCi = number of days from dated date (or issue date) to first quasi-coupon (i=1) or number of days in quasi-coupon (i=2,..., i=NC).

DSC = number of days from settlement to next coupon date.

E = number of days in coupon period.

N = number of coupons payable between the first real coupon date and redemption date. (If this number contains a fraction, it is raised to the next whole number).

NC = number of quasi-coupon periods that fit in odd period. (if this number contains a fraction it will be raised to the next whole number).

NLi = normal length in days of the full ith quasi-coupon period within odd period.

Nq = number of whole quasi-coupon periods between settlement date and first coupon.

Example

A treasury bond has the following terms:

November 11, 1986 settlement date
March 1, 1999 maturity date
October 15, 1986 issue date
March 1, 1987 first coupon date
7.85% coupon
6.25% yield
$100 redemptive value
Frequency is semiannual
Actual/actual basis

the price per $100 face value of a security having an odd (short or long) first period (in the 1900 date system) is:

ODDFPRICE(31727,36220,31700,31837,0.0785,0.0625,100,2,1) equals 113.597717

Related Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

ODDFYIELD	Returns the yield of a security with an odd first period

ODDLPRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security with an odd last period

ODDLYIELD	Returns the yield of a security with an odd last period

List of Financial Functions


ODDFYIELD

Returns the yield of a security that has an odd (short or long) first period.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

ODDFYIELD(settlement, maturity, issue, first_coupon, rate, pr, redemption, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date expressed as a serial date number.

Issue    is the security's issue date, expressed as a serial date number.

First_coupon    is the security's first coupon date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's interest rate.

Pr    is the security's price.

Redemption    is the security's redemption value per $100 face value.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, issue, first_coupon, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, ODDFYIELD returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement, maturity, issue, or first_coupon is not a valid serial date number, ODDFYIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If rate < 0 or if pr ≤ 0, ODDFYIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, ODDFYIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

The following date condition must be satisfied; otherwise, ODDFYIELD returns the #NUM! error value:

maturity > first_coupon > settlement > issue

Microsoft Excel uses an interative technique to calculate ODDFYIELD. This funcition uses the Newton method based on the formula used for the function ODDFPRICE. The yield is changed through 100 iterations until the estimated price with the given yield is close to the price.  See ODDFPRICE for the formula that ODDFYIELD uses.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

January 25, 1991 settlement date
January 1, 1996 maturity date
January 18, 1991 issue date
July 15, 1991 first coupon date
5.75% coupon
$84.50  price
$100 redemptive value
Frequency is semiannual
30/360 basis

The yield of a security that has an odd (short or long) first period is:

ODDFYIELD(33263,35065,33256,33434,0.0575,084.50,100,2,0) equals .09758 or 9.76%

Related Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

ODDFPRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security with an odd first period

ODDLPRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security with an odd last period

ODDLYIELD	Returns the yield of a security with an odd last period

List of Financial Functions


ODDLPRICE

Returns the price per $100 face value of a security having an odd (short or long) last coupon period.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

ODDLPRICE(settlement, maturity, last_interest, rate, yld, redemption, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Last_interest    is the security's last coupon date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's interest rate.

Yld    is the security's annual yield.

Redemption    is the security's redemption value per $100 face value.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, last_interest, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, ODDLPRICE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement, maturity, or last_interest is not a valid serial date number, ODDLPRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If rate < 0 or if yld < 0, ODDLPRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, ODDLPRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

The following date condition must be satisfied; otherwise, ODDLPRICE returns the #NUM! error value:

maturity > settlement > last_interest

Example

A bond has the following terms:

February, 7, 1987 settlement date
June 15, 1987 maturity date
October 15, 1986 last interest date
3.75% coupon
4.05% yield
$100 redemptive value
Frequency is semiannual
30/360 basis

The price per $100 of a security having an odd (short or long) last coupon period is:

ODDLPRICE(31815,31943,31700,0.0375,0.0405,100,2,0) equals 99.87829

Related Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

ODDFPRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security with an odd first period

ODDFYIELD	Returns the yield of a security with an odd first period

ODDLYIELD	Returns the yield of a security with an odd last period

List of Financial Functions


ODDLYIELD

Returns the yield of a security that has an odd (short or long) last period.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

ODDLYIELD(settlement, maturity, last_interest, rate, pr, redemption, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Last_interest    is the security's last coupon date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's interest rate.

Pr    is the security's price.

Redemption    is the security's redemption value per $100 face value.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, last_interest, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, ODDLYIELD returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement, maturity, or last_interest is not a valid serial date number, ODDLYIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If rate < 0 or if pr ≤ 0, ODDLYIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, ODDLYIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

The following date condition must be satisfied; otherwise, ODDLYIELD returns the #NUM! error value:

maturity > settlement > last_interest

ODDLYIELD is calculated as follows:

Where:

Ai = number of accrued days for the ith quasi-coupon period within odd period counting forward from last interest date before redemption.

DCi = number of days counted in each ith quasi-coupon period as delimited by the length of the actual coupon period.

NC = number of quasi-coupon periods that fit in odd period; if this number contains a fraction it will be raised to the next whole number.

NLi = normal length in days of the ith quasi-coupon period within odd coupon period.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

April 20, 1987 settlement date
June 15, 1987 maturity date
December 24, 1986 last interest date
3.75% coupon
$99.875 price
$100 redemptive value
Frequency is semiannual
30/360 basis

The yield of a security that has an odd (short or long) first period is:

ODDLYIELD(31887,31943,31770,0.0375,99.875,100,2,0) equals 0.045192.

Related Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

ODDFPRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security with an odd first period

ODDLPRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security with an odd last period

ODDFYIELD	Returns the yield of a security with an odd first period

List of Financial Functions


PRICE

Returns the price per $100 face value of a security that pays periodic interest.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

PRICE(settlement, maturity, rate, yld, redemption, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's annual coupon rate.

Yld    is the security's annual yield.

Redemption    is the security's redemption value per $100 face value.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, frequency, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, PRICE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, PRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If yld < 0 or if rate < 0, PRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If redemption ≤ 0, PRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, PRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, PRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, PRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

PRICE is calculated as follows:

Where:

DSC = number of days from settlement to next coupon date.

E = number of days in coupon period in which the settlement date falls.

N = number of coupons payable between settlement date and redemption date.

A = number of days from beginning of coupon period to settlement date.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

February 15, 1991 settlement date
November 15, 1999 maturity date
5.75% semiannual coupon
6.50% yield
$100 redemption value
Frequency in semiannual
30/360 basis

The bond price (in the 1900 Date System) is:

PRICE(33284,36479,0.0575,0.065,100,2,0) equals 95.04287

Related Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

YIELD	Returns the yield on a security that pays periodic interest

List of Financial Functions


PRICEDISC

Returns the price per $100 face value of a discounted security.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

PRICEDISC(settlement, maturity, discount, redemption, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Discount    is the security's discount rate.

Redemption    is the security's redemption value per $100 face value.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, PRICEDISC returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, PRICEDISC returns the #NUM! error value.

If discount ≤ 0 or if redemption ≤ 0, PRICEDISC returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, PRICEDISC returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, PRICEDISC returns the #NUM! error value.

PRICEDISC is calculated as follows:

Where:

B = number of days in year, depending on year basis.

DSM = number of days from settlement to maturity.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

February 15, 1993 settlement date
March 1, 1993 maturity date
5.25% discount rate
$100 redemption value
Actual/360 basis

The bond price (in the 1900 Date System) is:

PRICEDISC(34015,34029,0.0525,100,2) equals 99.79583

Related Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

DISC	Returns the discount rate for a security

YIELDDISC	Returns the annual yield for a discounted security

List of Financial Functions


PRICEMAT

Returns the price per $100 face value of a security that pays interest at maturity.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

PRICEMAT(settlement, maturity, issue, rate, yld, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Issue    is the security's issue date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's interest rate at date of issue.

Yld    is the security's annual yield.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US )NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, issue, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, PRICEMAT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement, maturity, or issue is not a valid serial date number, PRICEMAT returns the #NUM! error value.

If rate < 0 or if yld < 0, PRICEMAT returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, PRICEMAT returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, PRICEMAT returns the #NUM! error value.

PRICEMAT is calculated as follows:

Where:

B = number of days in year, depending on year basis.

DSM = number of days from settlement to maturity.

DIM = number of days from issue to maturity.

A = number of days from issue to settlement.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

February 15, 1993 settlement date
April 13, 1993 maturity date
November 11, 1992 issue date
6.1% semiannual coupon
6.1% yield
30/360 basis

The price (in the 1900 Date System) is:

PRICEMAT(34015,34072,33919,0.061,0.061,0) equals 99.98449888

Related Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

YIELDMAT	Returns the annual yield of a security that pays interest at maturity

List of Financial Functions


RADIANS

Converts degrees to radians.

Syntax

RADIANS(angle)

Angle    is an angle in degrees that you want to convert.

Example

RADIANS(270) equals 4.712389 (3π/2 radians)

Related Function

DEGREES	Converts radians to degrees

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


RANDBETWEEN

Returns a random number between the numbers you specify. A new random number is returned every time the worksheet is calculated.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

RANDBETWEEN(bottom, top)

Bottom    is the smallest integer RANDBETWEEN will return.

Top    is the largest integer RANDBETWEEN will return.

Related Functions

RAND	Returns a random number between 0 and 1

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


RECEIVED

Returns the amount received at maturity for a fully invested security.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

RECEIVED(settlement, maturity, investment, discount, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Investment    is the amount invested in the security.

Discount    is the security's discount rate.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, RECEIVED returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, RECEIVED returns the #NUM! error value.

If investment ≤ 0 or if discount ≤ 0, RECEIVED returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, RECEIVED returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, RECEIVED returns the #NUM! error value.

RECEIVED is calculated as follows:

Where:

B = number of days in a year, depending on the year basis.

DIM = number of days from issue to maturity.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

February 15, 1993 settlement (issue) date
May 15, 1993 maturity date
1,000,000 investment
5.75% discount rate
Actual/360 basis

The total amount to be receivedat maturity(in the 1900 Date System) is:

RECEIVED(34015,34104,1000000,0.0575,2) equals 1,014,420.266

Related Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

INTRATE	Returns the interest rate for a fully invested security

List of Financial Functions


SERIESSUM

Returns the sum of a power series based on the formula:

Many functions can be approximated by a power series expansion.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

SERIESSUM(x, n, m, coefficients)

X    is the input value to the power series.

N    is the initial power to which you want to raise x.

M    is the step by which to increase n for each term in the series.

Coefficients    is a set of coefficients by which each successive power of x is multiplied. The number of values in coefficients determines the number of terms in the power series. For example, if there are three values in coefficients, then there will be three terms in the power series.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, SERIESSUM returns the #VALUE! error value.

Example

Given that cell A1 contains the formula =PI()/4, and cells E1:E4 contain the following set of values for coefficients (calculated using the FACT function):

The following macro formula returns an approximation to the cosine of π/4 radians (45 degrees):

SERIESSUM(A1,0,2,E1:E4) equals .707103

Related Functions

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


TBILLEQ

Returns the bond-equivalent yield for a Treasury bill.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

TBILLEQ(settlement, maturity, discount)

Settlement    is the Treasury bill's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the Treasury bill's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Discount    is the Treasury bill's discount rate.

Remarks

Settlement and maturity are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, TBILLEQ returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, TBILLEQ returns the #NUM! error value.

If discount ≤ 0, TBILLEQ returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement > maturity, or if maturity is more than one year after settlement, TBILLEQ returns the #NUM! error value.

TBILLEQ is calucated as TBILLEQ = (365 x rate)/360-(rate x DSM), where DSM is the number of days between settlement and maturity computed according to the 360 days per year basis.

Example

A Treasury bill has the following terms:

March 31, 1993 settlement date
June 1, 1993 maturity date
9.14% discount rate

The bond equivalent yield for a treasury bill (in the 1900 Date System) is:

TBILLEQ(34059,34121,0.0914) equals 0.094151 or 9.4151%

Related Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

TBILLPRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value for a Treasury bill

TBILLYIELD	Returns the yield for a Treasury bill

List of Financial Functions


TBILLPRICE

Returns the price per $100 face value for a Treasury bill.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

TBILLPRICE(settlement, maturity, discount)

Settlement    is the Treasury bill's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the Treasury bill's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Discount    is the Treasury bill's discount rate.

Remarks

Settlement and maturity are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, TBILLPRICE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, TBILLPRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If discount ≤ 0, TBILLPRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement > maturity, or if maturity is more than one year after settlement, TBILLPRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

TBILLPRICE is calculated as follows:

Where:

DSM = number of days from settlement to maturity, excluding any maturity date that is more than one calendar year after the settlement date.

Example

A Treasury bill has the following terms:

March 31, 1993 settlement date
June 1, 1993 maturity date
9% discount rate

The Treasury bill price (in the 1900 Date System) is:

TBILLPRICE(34059,34121,0.09) equals 98.45

Related Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

TBILLEQ	Returns the bond-equivalent yield for a Treasury bill

TBILLYIELD	Returns the yield for a Treasury bill

List of Financial Functions


TBILLYIELD

Returns the yield for a Treasury bill.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

TBILLYIELD(settlement, maturity, pr)

Settlement    is the Treasury bill's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the Treasury bill's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Pr    is the Treasury bill's price per $100 face value.

Remarks

Settlement and maturity are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, TBILLYIELD returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, TBILLYIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If pr ≤ 0, TBILLYIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, or if maturity is more than one year after settlement, TBILLYIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

TBILLYIELD is calculated as follows:

Where:

DSM = number of days from settlement to maturity, excluding any maturity date that is more than one calendar year after the settlement date.

Example

A Treasury bill has the following terms:

March 31, 1993 settlement date
June 1, 1993 maturity date
98.45 price per $100 face value

The Treasury bill yield (in the 1900 Date System) is:

TBILLYIELD(34059,34121,98.45) equals 9.1417%

Related Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

TBILLEQ	Returns the bond-equivalent yield for a Treasury bill

TBILLPRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value for a Treasury bill

List of Financial Functions


XIRR

Returns the internal rate of return for a schedule of cash flows that is not necessarily periodic.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

XIRR(values, dates, guess)

Values    is a series of cash flows that correspond to a schedule of payments in dates. The first payment is optional, and corresponds to a cost or payment that occurs at the beginning of the investment. All succeeding payments are discounted based on a 365-day year.

Dates    is a schedule of payment dates that corresponds to the cash flow payments. The first payment date indicates the beginning of the schedule of payments. All other dates must be later than this date, but they may occur in any order.

Guess    is a number that you guess is close to the result of XIRR.

Remarks

Numbers in dates are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, XIRR returns the #VALUE! error value.

XIRR expects at least one positive cash flow and one negative cash flow; otherwise, XIRR returns the #NUM! error value.

If any number in dates is not a valid serial date number, XIRR returns the #NUM! error value.

If any number in dates precedes the starting date, XIRR returns the #NUM! error value.

If values and dates contain a different number of values, XIRR returns the #NUM! error value.

In most cases you do not need to provide guess for the XIRR calculation. If omitted, guess is assumed to be 0.1 (10%).

XIRR is closely related to XNPV, the net present value function. The rate of return calculated by XIRR is the interest rate corresponding to XNPV = 0.

Microsoft Excel uses an iterative technique for calculating XIRR. Using a changing rate (starting with guess), XIRR cycles through the calculation until the result is accurate within 0.000001%. If XIRR can't find a result that works after 100 tries, the #NUM! error value is returned.  The rate is changed until:

Where:

di = the ith payment date.

d1 = the 0th payment date.

Pi = the ith payment.

Example

Consider an investment that requires a $10,000 cash payment on January 1, 1992, and returns $2750 on March 1, 1992, $4250 on October 30, 1992, $3250 on February 15, 1993, and $2750 on April 1, 1993. The internal rate of return (in the 1900 Date System) is:

XIRR({-10000,2750,4250,3250,2750},
{33604,33664,33907,34015,34060},0.1) equals 0.373363 or 37.3363%

Related Functions

IRR	Returns the internal rate of return for a series of cash flows

MIRR	Returns the internal rate of return where positive and negative cash flows are financed at different rates

NPV	Returns the net present value of an investment based on a series of periodic cash flows and a discount rate

Rate	Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity

XNPV	Returns the net present value for a schedule of cash flows that is not necessarily periodic

List of Financial Functions


XNPV

Returns the net present value for a schedule of cash flows that is not necessarily periodic.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

XNPV(rate, values, dates)

Rate    is the discount rate to apply to the cash flows.

Values    is a series of cash flows that correspond to a schedule of payments in dates. The first payment is optional, and corresponds to a cost or payment that occurs at the beginning of the investment. All succeeding payments are discounted based on a 365-day year.

Dates    is a schedule of payment dates that corresponds to the cash flow payments. The first payment date indicates the beginning of the schedule of payments. All other dates must be later than this date, but they may occur in any order.

Remarks

Numbers in dates are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, XNPV returns the #VALUE! error value.

If any number in dates is not a valid serial date number, XNPV returns the #NUM! error value.

If any number in dates precedes the starting date, XNPV returns the #NUM! error value.

If values and dates contain a different number of values, XNPV returns the #NUM! error value.

XNPV is calculated as follows:

Where:

di = the ith payment date.

d1 = the 0th payment date.

Pi = the ith payment.

Example

Consider an investment that requires a $10,000 cash payment on January 1, 1992, and returns $2750 on March 1, 1992, $4250 on October 30, 1992, $3250 on February 15, 1993, and $2750 on April 1, 1993. Assume that the cash flows are discounted at 9%. The net present value is:

XNPV(0.09,{-10000,2750,4250,3250,2750},{33604,33664,33907,34015,34060}) equals 2086.647602

Related Functions

IRR	Returns the internal rate of return for a series of cash flows

MIRR	Returns the internal rate of return where positive and negative cash flows are financed at different rates

NPV	Returns the net present value of an investment based on a series of periodic cash flows and a discount rate

RATE	Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity

XIRR	Returns the internal rate of return for a schedule of cash flows that is not necessarily periodic

List of Financial Functions


YEARFRAC

Returns the year fraction representing the number of whole days between start_date and end_date. Use YEARFRAC to identify the proportion of a whole year's benefits or obligations to assign to a specific term.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

YEARFRAC(start_date, end_date, basis)

Start_date    is a serial date number that represents the start date.

End_date    is a serial date number that represents the end date.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

All arguments are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, YEARFRAC returns the #VALUE! error value.

If start_date or end_date are not valid serial date numbers, YEARFRAC returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, YEARFRAC returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

YEARFRAC(DATEVALUE("01/01/93"),DATEVALUE("06/30/93"),0) equals 0.5

YEARFRAC(DATEVALUE("01/01/93"),DATEVALUE("07/01/93"),3) equals 0.49863

Related Functions

EDATE	Returns the serial number of the date that is the indicated number of months before or after the start date

EOMONTH	Returns the serial number of the last day of the month before or after a specified number of months

NETWORKDAYS	Returns the number of whole workdays between two dates

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

WORKDAY	Returns the serial number of the date before or after a specified number of workdays

List of Date & Time Functions


YIELD

Returns the yield on a security that pays periodic interest. Use YIELD to calculate bond yield.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

YIELD(settlement, maturity, rate, pr, redemption, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's annual coupon rate.

Pr    is the security's price per $100 face value.

Redemption    is the security's redemption value per $100 face value.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, frequency, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, YIELD returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, YIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If rate < 0, YIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If pr ≤ 0 or if redemption ≤ 0, YIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, YIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, YIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, YIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If there is one coupon period or less until redemption, YIELD is calculated as follows:

Where:

A = number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the settlement date (accrued days).

DSR = number of days from the settlement date to the redemption date.

E = number of days in the coupon period.

If there is more than one coupon period until redemption, YIELD is calculated through a hundred iterations. The resolution uses the Newton method based on the formula used for the function PRICE. The yield is changed until the estimated price given the yield is close to price.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

February 15, 1991 settlement date
November 15, 1999 maturity date
5.75% coupon
95.04287 price
$100 redemption value
Frequency is semiannual
30/360 basis

The bond yield (in the 1900 Date System) is:

YIELD(33284,36479,0.0575,95.04287,100,2,0) equals 0.065 or 6.5%

Related Functions

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

PRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security that pays periodic interest

List of Financial Functions


YIELDDISC

Returns the annual yield for a discounted security.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

YIELDDISC(settlement, maturity, pr, redemption, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Pr    is the security's price per $100 face value.

Redemption    is the security's redemption value per $100 face value.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, YIELDDISC returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, YIELDDISC returns the #NUM! error value.

If pr ≤ 0 or if redemption ≤ 0, YIELDDISC returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, YIELDDISC returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, YIELDDISC returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

February 15, 1993 settlement date
March 1, 1993 maturity date
99.795 price
$100 redemption value
Actual/360 basis

The bond yield (in the 1900 Date System) is:

YIELDDISC(34015,34029,99.795,100,2) equals 5.2823%

Related Functions

DISC	Returns the discount rate for a security

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

PRICEDISC	Returns the price per $100 face value of a discounted security

List of Financial Functions


YIELDMAT

Returns the annual yield of a security that pays interest at maturity.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

YIELDMAT(settlement, maturity, issue, rate, pr, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Issue    is the security's issue date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's interest rate at date of issue.

Pr    is the security's price per $100 face value.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, issue, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, YIELDMAT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement, maturity, or issue is not a valid serial date number, YIELDMAT returns the #NUM! error value.

If rate < 0 or if pr ≤ 0, YIELDMAT returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, YIELDMAT returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, YIELDMAT returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

March 15, 1993 settlement date
November 3, 1993 maturity date
November 8, 1992 issue date
6.25% semiannual coupon
100.0123 price
30/360 basis

The yield (in the 1900 Date System) is:

YIELDMAT(34043,34276,33916,0.0625,100.0123,0) equals 0.060954 or 6.0954%

Related Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

PRICEMAT	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security that pays interest at maturity

List of Financial Functions


BETADIST

Returns the cumulative beta probability density function. The cumulative beta probability density function is commonly used to study variation in the percentage of something across samples, such as the fraction of the day people spend watching television.

Syntax

BETADIST(x, alpha, beta, A, B)

X    is the value between A and B at which to evaluate the function.

Alpha    is a parameter to the distribution.

Beta    is a parameter to the distribution.

A    is an optional lower bound to the interval of x.

B    is an optional upper bound to the interval of x.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, BETADIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If alpha ≤ 0 or beta ≤ 0, BETADIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If x < A, x > B, or A = B, BETADIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If you omit values for A and B, BETADIST uses the standard cumulative beta distribution, so that A = 0 and B = 1.

Example

BETADIST(2,8,10,1,3) equals 0.685470581

Related Function

BETAINV	Returns the inverse of the cumulative beta probability density function

List of Statistical Functions


BETAINV

Returns the inverse of the cumulative beta probability density function. That is, if probability = BETADIST(x,...), then BETAINV(probability,...) = x. The cumulative beta distribution can be used in project planning to model probable completion times given an expected completion time and variability.

Syntax

BETAINV(probability, alpha, beta, A, B)

Probability    is a probability associated with the beta distribution.

Alpha    is a parameter to the distribution.

Beta    is a parameter to the distribution.

A    is an optional lower bound to the interval of x.

B    is an optional upper bound to the interval of x.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, BETAINV returns the #VALUE! error value.

If alpha ≤ 0 or beta ≤ 0, BETAINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If probability ≤ 0 or probability > 1, BETAINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If you omit values for A and B, BETAINV uses the standard cumulative beta distribution, so that A = 0 and B = 1.

BETAINV uses an iterative technique for calculating the function. Given a probability value, BETAINV iterates until the result is accurate to within ±3x10-7. If BETAINV does not converge after 100 iterations, the function returns the #N/A error value.

Example

BETAINV(0.685470581,8,10,1,3) equals 2

Related Function

BETADIST	Returns the cumulative beta probability density function

List of Statistical Functions


BINOMDIST

Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability. Use BINOMDIST in problems with a fixed number of tests or trials, when the outcomes of any trial are only success or failure, when trials are independent, and when the probability of success is constant throughout the experiment. For example, BINOMDIST can calculate the probability that two of the next three babies born are male.

Syntax

BINOMDIST(number_s, trials, probability_s, cumulative)

Number_s    is the number of successes in trials.

Trials    is the number of independent trials.

Probability_s    is the probability of success on each trial.

Cumulative    is a logical value that determines the form of the function. If cumulative is TRUE, then BINOMDIST returns the cumulative distribution function, which is the probability that there are at most number_s successes; if FALSE, it returns the probability mass function, which is the probability that there are number_s successes.

Remarks

Number_s and trials are truncated to integers.

If number_s, trials, or probability_s is non-numeric, BINOMDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If number_s < 0 or number_s > trials, BINOMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If probability_s < 0 or probability_s > 1, BINOMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

The binomial probability mass function is:

where:

is COMBIN(n,x).

The cumulative binomial distribution is:

Example

The flip of a coin can only result in heads or tails. The probability of the first flip being heads is 0.5, and the probability of exactly 6 of 10 flips being heads is:

BINOMDIST(6,10,0.5,FALSE) equals 0.205078

Related Functions

COMBIN	Returns the number of combinations for a given number of objects

CRITBINOM	Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is less than or equal to a criterion value

FACT	Returns the factorial of a number

HYPGEOMDIST	Returns the hypergeometric distribution

NEGBINOMDIST	Returns the negative binomial distribution

PERMUT	Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects

PROB	Returns the probability that values in a range are between two limits

List of Statistical Functions


CHIDIST

Returns the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution. The χ2 distribution is associated with a χ2 test. Use the χ2 test to compare observed and expected values. For example, a genetic experiment might hypothesize that the next generation of plants will exhibit a certain set of colors. By comparing the observed results with the expected ones, you can decide if your original hypothesis is valid.

Syntax

CHIDIST(x, degrees_freedom)

X    is the value at which you want to evaluate the distribution.

Degrees_freedom    is the number of degrees of freedom.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, CHIDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x is negative, CHIDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If degrees_freedom is not an integer, it is truncated.

If degrees_freedom < 1 or degrees_freedom ≥ 1010, CHIDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

CHIDIST is calculated as cHIDIST = P(X>x), where X is a χ2  random variable.

Example

CHIDIST(18.307,10) equals 0.050001

Related Functions

CHIINV	Returns the inverse of the chi-squared distribution

CHITEST	Returns the test for independence

List of Statistical Functions


CHIINV

Returns the inverse of the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution. If probability = CHIDIST(x,…), then CHIINV(probability,…) = x. Use this funciton to compare observed results with expected ones to decide if your original hypothesis is valid.

Syntax

CHIINV(probability, degrees_freedom)

Probability    is a probability associated with thechi-squared distribution.

Degrees_freedom    is the number of degrees of freedom.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, CHIINV returns the #VALUE! error value.

If probability < 0 or probability > 1, CHIINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If degrees_freedom is not an integer, it is truncated.

If degrees_freedom < 1 or degrees_freedom ≥ 10^10, CHIINV returns the #NUM! error value.

CHIINV uses an iterative technique for calculating the function. Given a probability value, CHIINV iterates until the result is accurate to within ± 3x10^-7. If CHIINV does not converge after 100 iterations, the function returns the #N/A error value.

Example

CHIINV(0.05,10) equals 18.30703

Related Functions

CHIDIST	Returns the one-tailed probability of the  chi-squared distribution

CHITEST	Returns the test for independence

List of Statistical Functions


CHITEST

Returns the test for independence. CHITEST returns the value from the chi-squared (χ2) distribution for the statistic and the appropriate degrees of freedom. You can use χ2 tests to determine if hypothesized results are verified by an experiment.

Syntax

CHITEST(actual_range, expected_range)

Actual_range    is the range of data that contains observations to test against expected values.

Expected_range    is the range of data that contains the ratio of the product of row totals and column totals to the grand total.

Remarks

If actual_range and expected_range have a different number of data points, CHITEST returns the #N/A error value.

The χ2 test first calculates a χ2 statistic and then sums the differences of actual values from the expected values.  The equation for this function is CHITEST=p( X>χ2 ), where:

and where:

Aij = actual frequency in the i-th row, j-th column

Eij = expected frequency in the i-th row, j-th column

r = number or rows

c = number of columns

CHITEST returns the probability for a χ2 statistic and degrees of freedom, df, where df = (r - 1)(c - 1).

Example

The χ2 statistic for the data above is 16.16957 with 2 degrees of freedom.

CHITEST(B3:C5,B9:C11) equals 0.000308

Related Functions

CHIDIST	Returns the one-tailed probability of the χ2 distribution

CHIINV	Returns the inverse of the χ2 distribution

List of Statistical Functions


CONFIDENCE

Returns the confidence interval for a population mean. The confidence interval is a range on either side of a sample mean. For example, if you order a product through the mail, you can determine, with a particular level of confidence, the earliest and latest the product should arrive.

Syntax

CONFIDENCE(alpha, standard_dev, size)

Alpha    is the significance level used to compute the confidence level. The confidence level equals 100(1 - alpha)%, or in other words, an alpha of 0.05 indicates a 95% confidence level.

Standard_dev    is the population standard deviation for the data range, and is assumed to be known.

Size    is the sample size.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, CONFIDENCE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If alpha ≤ 0 or alpha ≥ 1, CONFIDENCE returns the #NUM! error value.

If standard_dev ≤ 0, CONFIDENCE returns the #NUM! error value.

If size is not an integer, it is truncated.

If size < 1, CONFIDENCE returns the #NUM! error value.

If we assume alpha equals 0.05, we need to calculate the area under the standard normal curve that equals (1 - alpha), or 95%. This value is ± 1.96. The confidence interval is therefore:

Example

Suppose we observe that, in our sample of 50 commuters, the average length of travel to work is 30 minutes with a population standard deviation of 2.5. We can be 95 percent confident that the population mean is in the interval:

or:

CONFIDENCE(0.05,2.5,50) equals 0.692951.

= 30 ± 0.692951 minutes,

= 29.3 to 30.7 minutes.

Related Function

ZTEST	Returns the two-tailed P-value of a z-test

List of Statistical Functions


CORREL

Returns the correlation coefficient of the array1 and array2 cell ranges. Use the correlation coefficient to determine the relationship between two properties. For example, you can examine the relationship between a location's average temperature and the use of air conditioners.

Syntax

CORREL(array1, array2)

Array1    is a cell range of values.

Array2    is a second cell range of values.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If array1 and array2 have a different number of data points, CORREL returns the #N/A error value.

If either array1 or array2 are empty, or if s (the standard deviation) of their values equals zero, CORREL returns the #DIV/0! error value.

The equation for the correlation coefficient is:

where:

and:

Example

CORREL({3,2,4,5,6},{9,7,12,15,17}) equals 0.997054

Related Functions

COVAR	Returns covariance, the average of the products of paired deviations

FISHER	Returns the Fisher transformation

FISHERINV	Returns the inverse of the Fisher transformation

List of Statistical Functions


CRITBINOM

Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is greater than or equal to a criterion value. Use this function for quality assurance applications. For example, use CRITBINOM to determine the greatest number of defective parts that are allowed to come off an assembly line run without rejecting the entire lot.

Syntax

CRITBINOM(trials, probability_s, alpha)

Trials    is the number of Bernoulli trials.

Probability_s    is the probability of a success on each trial.

Alpha    is the criterion value.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, CRITBINOM returns the #VALUE! error value.

If trials is not an integer, it is truncated.

If trials < 0, CRITBINOM returns the #NUM! error value.

If probability_s is < 0 or probability_s > 1, CRITBINOM returns the #NUM! error value.

If alpha < 0 or alpha > 1, CRITBINOM returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

CRITBINOM(6,0.5,0.75) equals 4

Related Functions

BINOMDIST	Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability

COMBIN	Returns the number of combinations for a given number of objects

FACT	Returns the factorial of a number

HYPGEOMDIST	Returns the hypergeometric distribution

NEGBINOMDIST	Returns the negative binomial distribution

PERMUT	Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects

PROB	Returns the probability that values in a range are between two limits

List of Statistical Functions


Database Functions

This section describes the 12 worksheet functions used for Microsoft Excel database (or list) calculations. For information about list/database structure and criteria, see "Filtering Data in a List" in Chapter 21 in the Microsoft Excel User's Guide or Filtering and Extracting Data from a List in online help. Each of these functions, referred to collectively as Dfunction, uses three arguments: database, field, and criteria. These arguments refer to the worksheet ranges that are used in the database function.

Syntax

Dfunction(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

In all database functions, if the database reference is to a cell inside a pivot table, then the calculation is done on only the pivot table data.

A Microsoft Excel database is a contiguous range of cells organized into records (rows) and fields (columns). The database reference can be entered as a cell range, or as a name assigned to a range.

Tips

You can use any range that includes field headings at the top of each row of data as the database argument. This is useful if you want to perform Dfunction calculations on more than one range of data on a worksheet.

When you use a field heading, you must use double quotation marks.

If all you want to do is generate subtotals within your list, use SUBTOTAL instead of these database functions.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function. Database fields are columns of data with an identifying field name in the first row. The field argument can be given as text, such as "Age" or "Yield" in the example database table below or as a field number: 1 for the first field (Tree), in the example below), 2 for the second (Height), and so on.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria. The criteria reference can be entered as a cell range, such as A9:F10 in the example database table below, or as a name assigned to a range.

Tips

You can use any range for the criteria argument, as long as it includes at least one field name and at least one cell below the field name for specifying a criteria comparison value.

For example, if the range G1:G2 contains the field heading Income in G1 and the amount 10,000 in G2, you could define the range as MatchIncome and use that name as the criteria argument in your database functions.

To perform an operation on an entire column in a database, enter a blank line below the field names in the criteria range.

Examples

The following illustration shows a database for a small orchard. Each record contains information about one tree. The database is defined as A1:E7, and the criteria are defined as A9:F11.

DCOUNT(Database,"Age",A9:F10) equals 1. This function looks at the records of apple trees between a height of 10 and 16 and counts how many of the Age fields in those records contain numbers.

DCOUNTA(Database,"Profit",A9:F10) equals 1.  This function looks at the records of apple trees between a height of 10 and 16 and counts how many of the Profit fields in those records are not blank.

DMAX(Database,"Profit",A9:A11) equals $105.00, the maximum profit of apple and pear trees.

DMIN(Database,"Profit",A9:B10) equals $75.00, the minimum profit of apple trees over 10.

DSUM(Database,"Profit",A9:A10) equals $225.00, the total profit from apple trees.

DSUM(Database,"Profit",A9:F10) equals $75.00, the total profit from apple trees with a height between 10 and 16.

DPRODUCT(Database,"Yield",A9:F10) equals 10, the product of the yields from apple trees with a height between 10 and 16.

DAVERAGE(Database,"Yield",A9:B10) equals 12, the average yield of apple trees over 10 feet in height.

DAVERAGE(Database,3,Database) equals 13, the average age of all trees in the database.

DSTDEV(Database,"Yield",A9:A11) equals 2.97, the estimated standard deviation in the yield of apple and pear trees if the data in the database is only a sample of the total orchard population.

DSTDEVP(Database,"Yield",A9:A11) equals 2.65, the true standard deviation in the yield of apple and pear trees if the data in the database is the entire population.

DVAR(Database,"Yield",A9:A11) equals 8.8, the estimated variance in the yield of apple and pear trees if the data in the database is only a sample of the total orchard population.

DVARP(Database,"Yield",A9:A11) equals 7.04, the true variance in the yield of apple and pear trees if the data in the database is the entire orchard population.

DGET(Database,"Yield",Criteria) returns the #NUM! error value because more than one record meets the criteria.

Related Functions

AVERAGE, COUNT, COUNTA, COUNTBLANK, COUNTIF, MAX, MIN, PRODUCT, STDEV, STDEVP, SUM, SUMIF, VAR, and VARP perform the same operations as the corresponding database functions. However, they operate on their lists of arguments instead of on selected database entries.

List of Database & List Management Functions


DAVERAGE

Averages the values in the field column of records in the database which match the criteria. For more information about Microsoft Excel database functions, see "Database Functions" in Microsoft Excel Worksheet Function Reference or Database Functions in online Help.

Syntax

DAVERAGE(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.

Related Functions

List of Database & List Management Functions


DB

Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the fixed-declining balance method.

Syntax

DB(cost, salvage, life, period, month)

Cost    is the initial cost of the asset.

Salvage    is the value at the end of the depreciation (sometimes called the salvage value of the asset).

Life    is the number of periods over which the asset is being depreciated (sometimes called the useful life of the asset).

Period    is the period for which you want to calculate the depreciation. Period must use the same units as life.

Month    is the number of months in the first year. If month is omitted, it is assumed to be 12.

Remarks

The fixed-declining balance method computes depreciation at a fixed rate. DB uses the following formulas to calculate depreciation for a period:

(cost - total depreciation from prior periods) * rate

where:

rate = 1 - ((salvage / cost) ^ (1 / life)), rounded to three decimal places

Depreciation for the first and last periods are special cases. For the first period, DB uses this formula:

cost * rate * month / 12

For the last period, DB uses this formula:

((cost - total depreciation from prior periods) * rate * (12 - month)) / 12

Examples

Suppose a factory purchases a new machine. The machine costs $1,000,000 and has a lifetime of six years. The salvage value of the machine is $100,000. The following examples show depreciation over the life of the machine. The results are rounded to whole numbers.

DB(1000000,100000,6,1,7) equals $186,083
DB(1000000,100000,6,2,7) equals $259,639
DB(1000000,100000,6,3,7) equals $176,814
DB(1000000,100000,6,4,7) equals $120,411
DB(1000000,100000,6,5,7) equals $82,000
DB(1000000,100000,6,6,7) equals $55,842
DB(1000000,100000,6,7,7) equals $15,845

Related Functions

DDB	Returns the depreciation of an asset for a spcified period using the double-declining balance method or some other method you specify

SLN	Returns the straight-line depreciation of an asset for one period

SYD	Returns the sum-of-years' digits depreciation of an asset for a specified period

VDB	Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified or partial period using a declining balance method

List of Financial Functions


DCOUNT

Counts the cells that contain numbers that match the criteria in the field column of records in the database.

The field argument is optional. If field is omitted, DCOUNT counts all records in the database which match the criteria. For more information about Microsoft Excel database functions, see "Database Functions" in Microsoft Excel Worksheet Function Reference or Database Functions in online help.

Syntax

DCOUNT(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.

Related Functions

COUNTBLANK and  COUNTIF,  perform similar operations; however, they operate on their lists of arguments instead of on selected database entries.

List of Database & List Management Functions


DCOUNTA

Counts the cells that are not blank and that satisfy the criteria in the field column of records in the database. For more information about Microsoft Excel database functions, see "Database Functions" in Microsoft Excel Worksheet Function Reference or Database Functions in online help.

Syntax

DCOUNTA(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.

Related Functions

COUNTBLANK and  COUNTIF,  perform similar operations; however, they operate on their lists of arguments instead of on selected database entries.

List of Database & List Management Functions


DDB

Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the double-declining balance method or some other method you specify.

Syntax

DDB(cost, salvage, life, period, factor)

Cost    is the initial cost of the asset.

Salvage    is the value at the end of the depreciation (sometimes called the salvage value of the asset).

Life    is the number of periods over which the asset is being depreciated (sometimes called the useful life of the asset).

Period    is the period for which you want to calculate the depreciation. Period must use the same units as life.

Factor    is the rate at which the balance declines. If factor is omitted, it is assumed to be 2 (the double-declining balance method).

All five arguments must be positive numbers.

Remarks

The double-declining balance method computes depreciation at an accelerated rate. Depreciation is highest in the first period and decreases in successive periods. DDB uses the following formula to calculate depreciation for a period:

cost - salvage(total depreciation from prior periods) * factor / life

Change factor if you do not want to use the double-declining balance method.

Examples

Suppose a factory purchases a new machine. The machine costs $2400 and has a lifetime of 10 years. The salvage value of the machine is $300. The following examples show depreciation over several periods. The results are rounded to two decimal places.

DDB(2400,300,3650,1) equals $1.32, the first day's depreciation. Microsoft Excel automatically assumes that  factor is 2.

DDB(2400,300,120,1,2) equals $40.00, the first month's depreciation.

DDB(2400,300,10,1,2) equals $480.00, the first year's depreciation.

DDB(2400,300,10,2,1.5) equals $306.00, the second year's depreciation using a factor of 1.5 instead of the double-declining balance method.

DDB(2400,300,10,10) equals $22.12, the 10th year's depreciation. Microsoft Excel automatically assumes that  factor is 2.

Related Functions

SLN	Returns the straight-line depreciation of an asset for one period

SYD	Returns the sum-of-years' digits depreciation of an asset for a specified period

VDB	Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified or partial period using a declining balance method

List of Financial Functions


DEVSQ

Returns the sum of squares of deviations of data points from their sample mean.

Syntax

DEVSQ(number1, number2, ...)

Number1,number2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want to calculate the sum of squared deviations. You can also use a single array or a reference to an array instead of arguments separated by commas.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

The equation for the sum of squared deviations is:

Example

DEVSQ(4,5,8,7,11,4,3) equals 48

Related Functions

AVEDEV	Returns the average of the absolute deviations of data points from their mean

STDEV	Estimates standard deviation based on a sample

STDEVP	Calculates standard deviation based on the entire population

VAR	Estimates variance based on a sample

VARP	Calculates variance based on the entire population

List of Statistical Functions


DGET

Extracts single values from a database. Use DGET to extract a single field that matches the criteria from a database. For more information about Microsoft Excel database functions, see "Database Functions" in Microsoft Excel Worksheet Function Reference or Database Functions in online help.

Syntax

DGET(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.

Remarks

If no record matches the criteria, DGET returns the #VALUE! error value.

If more than one record matches the criteria, DGET returns the #NUM! error value.

Related Functions

List of Database & List Management Functions


DPRODUCT

Multiplies the values in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria. For more information about Microsoft Excel database functions, see "Database Functions" in Microsoft Excel Worksheet Function Reference or Database Functions in online help.

Syntax

DPRODUCT(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.

Related Functions

List of Database & List Management Functions


DMAX

Returns the largest number in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria. For more information about Microsoft Excel database functions, see "Database Functions" in Microsoft Excel Worksheet Function Reference or Database Functions in online help.

Syntax

DMAX(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.

Related Functions

List of Database & List Management Functions


DSTDEV

Estimates the standard deviation of a population based on a sample, using the numbers in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria. For more information about Microsoft Excel database functions, see "Database Functions" in Microsoft Excel Worksheet Function Reference or Database Functions in online help.

Syntax

DSTDEV(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.

Related Functions

List of Database & List Management Functions


DSTDEVP

Calculates the standard deviation of a population based on the entire population, using the numbers in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria. For more information about Microsoft Excel database functions, see "Database Functions" in Microsoft Excel Worksheet Function Reference or Database Functions in online help.

Syntax

DSTDEVP(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.

Related Functions

List of Database & List Management Functions


DSUM

Adds the numbers in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria. For more information about Microsoft Excel database functions, see "Database Functions" in Microsoft Excel Worksheet Function Reference or Database Functions in online help.

Syntax

DSUM(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.

Related Functions

SUMIF	Adds the cells specified by a given criteria

List of Database & List Management Functions


DMIN

Returns the smallest number in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria. For more information about Microsoft Excel database functions, see "Database Functions" in Microsoft Excel Worksheet Function Reference or Database Functions in online help.

Syntax

DMIN(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.

Related Functions

List of Database & List Management Functions


DVAR

Estimates the variance of a population based on a sample, using the numbers in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria. For more information about Microsoft Excel database functions, see "Database Functions" in Microsoft Excel Worksheet Function Reference or Database Functions in online help.

Syntax

DVAR(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.

Related Functions

List of Database & List Management Functions


DVARP

Calculates the variance of a population based on the entire population, using the numbers in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria. For more information about Microsoft Excel database functions, see "Database Functions" in Microsoft Excel Worksheet Function Reference or Database Functions in online help.

Syntax

DVARP(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.

Related Functions

List of Database & List Management Functions


EXPONDIST

Returns the exponential distribution. Use EXPONDIST to model the time between events, such as how long an automated bank teller takes to deliver cash. For example, you can use EXPONDIST to determine the probability that the process takes at most one minute.

Syntax

EXPONDIST(x, lambda, cumulative)

X    is the value of the function.

Lambda    is the parameter value.

Cumulative    is a logical value that indicates which form of the exponential function to provide. If cumulative is TRUE, EXPONDIST returns the cumulative distribution function; if FALSE, it returns the probability density function.

Remarks

If x or lambda is non-numeric, EXPONDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x < 0, EXPONDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If lambda ≤ 0, EXPONDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the probability density function is:

The equation for the cumulative distribution function is:

Examples

EXPONDIST(0.2,10,TRUE) equals 0.864665

EXPONDIST(0.2,10,FALSE) equals 1.353353

Related Functions

GAMMADIST	Returns the gamma distribution

POISSON	Returns the Poisson probability distribution

List of Statistical Functions


FDIST

Returns the F probability distribution. You can use this function to determine whether two data sets have different degrees of diversity. For example, you can examine test scores given to men and women entering high school and determine if the variability in the females is different from that found in the males.

Syntax

FDIST(x, degrees_freedom1, degrees_freedom2)

X    is the value at which to evaluate the function.

Degrees_freedom1    is the numerator degrees of freedom.

Degrees_freedom2    is the denominator degrees of freedom.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, FDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x is negative, FDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If degrees_freedom1 or degrees_freedom2 is not an integer, it is truncated.

If degrees_freedom1 < 1 or degrees_freedom1 ≥ 1010, FDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If degrees_freedom2 < 1 or degrees_freedom2 ≥ 1010, FDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

FDIST is calculated as FDIST=P( F<x ), where F is a random variable that has an F distribution.

Example

FDIST(15.20675,6,4) equals 0.01

Related Functions

FINV	Returns the inverse of the F probability distribution

FTEST	Returns the results of an F-test

List of Statistical Functions


FINV

Returns the inverse of the F probability distribution. If p = FDIST(x,...), then FINV(p,...) = x.

The F distribution can be used in an F-test that compares the degree of variability in two data sets. For example, you can analyze income distributions in the United States and Canada to determine whether the two countries have a similar degree of diversity.

Syntax

FINV(probability, degrees_freedom1, degrees_freedom2)

Probability    is a probability associated with the F cumulative distribution.

Degrees_freedom1    is the numerator degrees of freedom.

Degrees_freedom2    is the denominator degrees of freedom.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, FINV returns the #VALUE! error value.

If probability < 0 or probability > 1, FINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If degrees_freedom1 or degrees_freedom2 is not an integer, it is truncated.

If degrees_freedom1 < 1 or degrees_freedom1 ≥ 10^10, FINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If degrees_freedom2 < 1 or degrees_freedom2 ≥ 10^10, FINV returns the #NUM! error value.

FINV can be used to return critical values from the F distribution. For example, the output of an ANOVA calculation often includes data for the F statistic, F probability, and F critical value at the 0.05 significance level. To return the critical value of F, use the significance level as the probability argument to FINV.

FINV uses an iterative technique for calculating the function. Given a probability value, FINV iterates until the result is accurate to within ± 3x10^-7. If FINV does not converge after 100 iterations, the function returns the #N/A error value.

Example

FINV(0.01,6,4) equals 15.20675

Related Functions

FDIST	Returns the F probability distribution

FTEST	Returns the result of an F-test

List of Statistical Functions


FISHER

Returns the Fisher transformation at x. This transformation produces a function that is approximately normally distributed rather than skewed. Use this function to perform hypothesis testing on the correlation coefficient.

Syntax

FISHER(x)

X    is a numeric value for which you want the transformation.

Remarks

If x is non-numeric, FISHER returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x ≤ -1 or if x ≥ 1, FISHER returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the Fisher transformation is:

Example

FISHER(0.75) equals 0.972955

Related Functions

CORREL	Returns the correlation coefficient between two data sets

COVAR	Returns covariance, the average of the products of paired deviations

FISHERINV	Returns the inverse of the Fisher transformation

List of Statistical Functions


FISHERINV

Returns the inverse of the Fisher transformation. Use this transformation when analyzing correlations between ranges or arrays of data. If y = FISHER(x), then FISHERINV(y) = x.

Syntax

FISHERINV(y)

Y    is the value for which you want to perform the inverse of the transformation.

Remarks

If y is non-numeric, FISHERINV returns the #VALUE! error value.

The equation for the inverse of the Fisher transformation is:

Example

FISHERINV(0.972955) equals 0.75

Related Functions

CORREL	Returns the correlation coefficient between two data sets

COVAR	Returns covariance, the average of the products of paired deviations

FISHER	Returns the Fisher transformation

List of Statistical Functions


FORECAST

Returns a predicted value for x based on a linear regression of known x- and y-arrays or ranges of data. You can use this function to predict future sales, inventory requirements, or consumer trends.

Syntax

FORECAST(x, known_y's, known_x's)

X    is the data point for which you want to predict a value.

Known_y's    is the dependent array or range of data.

Known_x's    is the independent array or range of data.

Remarks

If x is non-numeric, FORECAST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If known_y's and known_x's are empty or contain a different number of data points, FORECAST returns the #N/A error value.

If the variance of known_x's equals zero, then FORECAST returns the #DIV/0! error value.

The equation for FORECAST  is a+bx, where:

and:

Example

FORECAST(30,{6,7,9,15,21},{20,28,31,38,40}) equals 10.60725

Related Functions

GROWTH	Returns values along an exponential trend

LINEST	Returns the parameters of a linear trend

LOGEST	Returns the parameters of an exponential trend

TREND	Returns values along a linear trend

List of Statistical Functions


FREQUENCY

Returns a frequency distribution as a vertical array. For a given set of values and a given set of bins (or intervals), a frequency distribution counts how many of the values occur in each interval.

Syntax

FREQUENCY(data_array, bins_array)

Data_array    is an array of or reference to a set of values for which you want to count frequencies. If data_array contains no values, FREQUENCY returns an array of zeros.

Bins_array    is an array of or reference to intervals into which you want to group the values in data_array. If bins_array contains no values, FREQUENCY returns the number of elements in data_array.

Remarks

FREQUENCY is entered as an array formula after selecting a range of adjacent cells into which you want the returned distribution to appear.

The number of elements in the returned array is one more than the number of elements in bins_array.

FREQUENCY ignores blank cells and text.

Formulas that return arrays must be entered as array formulas.

Example

Suppose a worksheet lists scores for a test.  The scores are 79, 85, 78, 85, 83, 81, 95, 88, 97, and are entered into A1:A9, respectively. The data_array would contain a column of these test scores. The Bins_array would be another column of intervals by which the test scores are grouped.  In this example, Bins_array would be C4:C6 and would contain the values 70, 79, 89. When entered as an array, you could use FREQUENCY to count the number of scores corresponding to the letter grade ranges 0-70, 71-79, 80-89, and 90-100.This example assumes all test scores are integers.  The following formula is entered as an array formula after selecting four vertical cells adjacent to your data.

FREQUENCY(A1:A9,C4:C6) equals {0;2;5;2}

Related Functions

COUNT	Counts how many numbers are in the list of arguments

DCOUNT	Counts the cells containing numbers from a specified database and criteria

List of Statistical Functions


FTEST

Returns the result of an F-test. An F-test returns the one-tailed probability that the variances in array1 and array2 are not significantly different. Use this function to determine if two samples have different variances. For example, given test scores from public and private schools, you can test if these schools have different levels of diversity.

Syntax

FTEST(array1, array2)

Array1    is the first array or range of data.

Array2    is the second array or range of data.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If the number of data points in array1 or array2 is less than 2, or if the variance of array1 or array2 is zero, FTEST returns the #DIV/0! error value.

Example

FTEST({6,7,9,15,21},{20,28,31,38,40}) equals 0.648318

Related Functions

FDIST	Returns the F probability distribution

FINV	Returns the inverse of the F probability distribution

List of Statistical Functions


GAMMADIST

Returns the gamma distribution. You can use this function to study variables that may have a skewed distribution. The gamma distribution is commonly used in queuing analysis.

Syntax

GAMMADIST(x, alpha, beta, cumulative)

X    is the value at which you want to evaluate the distribution.

Alpha    is a parameter to the distribution.

Beta    is a parameter to the distribution. If beta = 1, GAMMADIST returns the standard gamma distribution.

Cumulative    is a logical value that determines the form of the function. If cumulative is TRUE, GAMMADIST returns the cumulative distribution function; if FALSE, it returns the probability mass function.

Remarks

If x, alpha, or beta is non-numeric, GAMMADIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x < 0, GAMMADIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If alpha ≤ 0 or if beta ≤ 0, GAMMADIST returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the gamma distribution is:

The standard gamma distribution is:

When alpha = 1, GAMMADIST returns the exponential distribution with:

For a positive integer n, when alpha = n/2, beta = 2, and cumulative = TRUE, GAMMADIST returns (1 - CHIDIST(x)) with n degrees of freedom.

When alpha is a positive integer, GAMMADIST is also known as the Erlang distribution.

Examples

GAMMADIST(10,9,2,FALSE) equals 0.032639

GAMMADIST(10,9,2,TRUE) equals 0.068094

Related Functions

CHIDIST	Returns the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution

EXPONDIST	Returns the exponential distribution

GAMMAINV	Returns the inverse of the gamma cumulative distribution

List of Statistical Functions


GAMMAINV

Returns the inverse of the gamma cumulative distribution. If p = GAMMADIST(x,...), then GAMMAINV(p,...) = x

You can use this function to study a variable whose distribution may be skewed.

Syntax

GAMMAINV(probability, alpha, beta)

Probability    is the probability associated with the gamma distribution.

Alpha    is a parameter to the distribution.

Beta    is a parameter to the distribution. If beta = 1, GAMMAINV returns the standard gamma distribution.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, GAMMAINV returns the #VALUE! error value.

If probability < 0 or probability > 1, GAMMAINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If alpha ≤ 0 or if beta ≤ 0, GAMMAINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If beta ≤ 0, GAMMAINV returns the #NUM! error value.

GAMMAINV uses an iterative technique for calculating the function. Given a probability value, GAMMAINV iterates until the result is accurate to within ±3x10^-7. If GAMMAINV does not converge after 100 iterations, the function returns the #N/A error value.

Example

GAMMAINV(0.068094,9,2) equals 10

Related Function

GAMMADIST	Returns the gamma distribution

List of Statistical Functions


GAMMALN

Returns the natural logarithm of the gamma function, Γ(x).

Syntax

GAMMALN(x)

X    is the value for which you want to calculate GAMMALN.

Remarks

If x is non-numeric, GAMMALN returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x ≤ 0, GAMMALN returns the #NUM! error value.

The number e raised to the GAMMALN(i) power, where i is an integer, returns the same result as (i - 1)!.

GAMMALN is calculated as follows:

where:

Examples

GAMMALN(4) equals 1.791759

EXP(GAMMALN(4)) equals 6 or (4 - 1)!

Related Function

FACT	Returns the factorial of a number

List of Statistical Functions


GEOMEAN

Returns the geometric mean of an array or range of positive data. For example, you can use GEOMEAN to calculate average growth rate given compound interest with variable rates.

Syntax

GEOMEAN(number1, number2, ...)

Number1,number2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want to calculate the mean. You can also use a single array or a reference to an array instead of arguments separated by commas.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If any data point ≤ 0, GEOMEAN returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the geometric mean is:

Example

GEOMEAN(4,5,8,7,11,4,3) equals 5.476987

Related Functions

AVERAGE	Returns the average of its arguments

HARMEAN	Returns the harmonic mean

MEDIAN	Returns the median of the given numbers

MODE	Returns the most common value in a data set

TRIMMEAN	Returns the mean of the interior of a data set

List of Statistical Functions


GROWTH

Fits an exponential curve to the data known_y's and known_x's, and returns the y-values along that curve for the array of new_x's that you specify.

Syntax

GROWTH(known_y's, known_x's, new_x's, const)

Known_y's    is the set of y-values you already know in the relationship y = b*m^x.

If the array known_y's is in a single column, then each column of known_x's is interpreted as a separate variable.

If the array known_y's is in a single row, then each row of known_x's is interpreted as a separate variable.

If any of the numbers in known_y's is 0 or negative, GROWTH returns the #NUM! error value.

Known_x's    is an optional set of x-values that you may already know in the relationship y = b*m^x.

The array known_x's can include one or more sets of variables. If only one variable is used, known_y's and known_x's can be ranges of any shape, as long as they have equal dimensions. If more than one variable is used, known_y's must be a vector (that is, a range with a height of one row or a width of one column).

If known_x's is omitted, it is assumed to be the array {1,2,3,...} that is the same size as known_y's.

New_x's    are new x-values for which you want GROWTH to return corresponding y-values.

New_x's must include a column (or row) for each independent variable, just as known_x's does. So, if known_y's is in a single column, known_x's and new_x's should have the same number of columns. If known_y's is in a single row, known_x's and new_x's should have the same number of rows.

If new_x's is omitted, it is assumed to be the same as known_x's.

If both known_x's and new_x's are omitted, they are assumed to be the array {1,2,3,...} that is the same size as known_y's.

Const    is a logical value specifying whether to force the constant b to equal 1.

If const is TRUE or omitted, b is calculated normally.

If const is FALSE, b is set equal to 1 and the m-values are adjusted so that y = m^x.

Remarks

Formulas that return arrays must be entered as array formulas after selecting the correct number of cells.

When entering an array constant for an argument such as known_x's, use commas to separate values in the same row and semicolons to separate rows.

Examples

This example uses the same data as the LOGEST example. The sales for the 11th through the 16th months are 33,100, 47,300, 69,000, 102,000, 150,000, and 220,000 units, respectively. Assume that these values are entered into six cells named UnitsSold.

When entered as an array formula, the following macro formula predicts sales for months 17 and 18 based on sales for the previous six months:

GROWTH(UnitsSold,{11;12;13;14;15;16},{17;18}) equals {320,197;468,536}

If the exponential trend continues, sales for months 17 and 18 will be 320197 and 468536 units, respectively.

You could use other sequential numbers for the x-value arguments, and the predicted sales would be the same. For example, you could use the default value for known_x's, {1;2;3;4;5;6}:

GROWTH(UnitsSold,,{7;8},) equals {320197;468536}

Related Functions

LOGEST	Also calculates a regression curve, but returns the parameters of that curve instead of an array of y-values along the curve

TREND	Similar to GROWTH and LOGEST, but fits your data to a straight line

LINEST	Similar to GROWTH and LOGEST, but fits your data to a straight line

List of Statistical Functions


HARMEAN

Returns the harmonic mean of a data set. The harmonic mean is the reciprocal of the arithmetic mean of reciprocals.

Syntax

HARMEAN(number1, number2, ...)

Number1,number2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want to calculate the mean. You can also use a single array or a reference to an array instead of arguments separated by commas.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If any data point ≤ 0, HARMEAN returns the #NUM! error value.

The harmonic mean is always less than the geometric mean, which is always less than the arithmetic mean.

The equation for the harmonic mean is:

Example

HARMEAN(4,5,8,7,11,4,3) equals 5.028376

Related Functions

AVERAGE	Returns the average of its arguments

GEOMEAN	Returns the geometric mean

MEDIAN	Returns the median of the given numbers

MODE	Returns the most common value in a data set

TRIMMEAN	Returns the mean of the interior of a data set

List of Statistical Functions


HYPGEOMDIST

Returns the hypergeometric distribution. HYPGEOMDIST returns the probability of a given number of sample successes, given the sample size, population successes, and population size. Use HYPGEOMDIST for problems with a finite population, where each observation is either a success or a failure, and where each subset of a given size is chosen with equal likelihood.

Syntax

HYPGEOMDIST(sample_s, number_sample, population_s, number_population)

Sample_s    is the number of successes in the sample.

Number_sample    is the size of the sample.

Population_s    is the number of successes in the population.

Number_population    is the population size.

Remarks

All arguments are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, HYPGEOMDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If sample_s < 0 or sample_s is greater than the lesser of number_sample or population_s, HYPGEOMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If sample_s is less than the larger of 0 or (number_sample - number_population + population_s), HYPGEOMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If number_sample < 0 or number_sample > number_population, HYPGEOMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If population_s < 0 or population_s > number_population, HYPGEOMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If number_population < 0, HYPGEOMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the hypergeometric distribution is:

where:

x = sample_s

n = number_sample

M = population_s

N = number_population

HYPGEOMDIST is used in sampling without replacement from a finite population.

Example

A sampler of chocolates contains 20 pieces. Eight pieces are caramels, and the remaining 12 are nuts. If a person selects 4 pieces at random, the following function returns the probability that exactly 1 piece is a caramel.

HYPGEOMDIST(1,4,8,20) equals 0.363261

Related Functions

BINOMDIST	Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability

COMBIN	Returns the number of combinations for a given number of objects

FACT	Returns the factorial of a number

NEGBINOMDIST	Returns the negative binomial distribution

PERMUT	Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects

List of Statistical Functions


KURT

Returns the kurtosis of a data set. Kurtosis characterizes the relative peakedness or flatness of a distribution compared to the normal distribution. Positive kurtosis indicates a relatively peaked distribution. Negative kurtosis indicates a relatively flat distribution.

Syntax

KURT(number1, number2, ...)

Number1,number2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want to calculate kurtosis. You can also use a single array or a reference to an array instead of arguments separated by commas.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If there are less than four data points, or if the standard deviation of the sample equals zero, KURT returns the #DIV/0! error value.

Kurtosis is defined as:

where:

s is the sample standard deviation.

Example

KURT(3,4,5,2,3,4,5,6,4,7) returns -0.1518

Related Functions

SKEW	Returns the skewness of a distribution

STDEV	Estimates standard deviation based on a sample

STDEVP	Calculates standard deviation based on the entire population

VAR	Estimates variance based on a sample

VARP	Calculates variance based on the entire population

List of Statistical Functions


LARGE

Returns the k-th largest value in a data set. You can use this function to select a value based on its relative standing. For example, you can use LARGE to return the highest, runner-up, or third-place score.

Syntax

LARGE(array, k)

Array    is the array or range of data for which you want to determine the k-th largest value.

K    is the position (from the largest) in the array or cell range of data to return.

Remarks

If array is empty, LARGE returns the #NUM! error value.

If k ≤ 0 or if k is greater than the number of data points, LARGE returns the #NUM! error value.

If n is the number of data points in a range, then LARGE(array,1) returns the largest value and LARGE(array,n) returns the smallest value.

Examples

LARGE({3,4,5,2,3,4,5,6,4,7},3) equals 5

LARGE({3,4,5,2,3,4,5,6,4,7},7) equals 4

Related Functions

PERCENTILE	Returns the k-th percentile of values in a range

PERCENTRANK	Returns the percentage rank of a value in a data set

QUARTILE	Returns the quartile of a data set

SMALL	Returns the k-th smallest value in a data set

List of Statistical Functions


LINEST

Uses the "least squares" method to calculate a straight line that best fits your data and returns an array that describes the line. The equation for the line is:

y = m1x1 + m2x2 + ... + b or y = mx + b

where the dependent y-value is a function of the independent x-values. The m-values are coefficients corresponding to each x-value, and b is a constant value. Note that y, x, and m can be vectors. The array that LINEST returns is {mn,mn-1,...,m1,b}. LINEST can also return additional regression statistics.

Syntax

LINEST(known_y's, known_x's, const, stats)

Known_y's    is the set of y-values you already know in the relationship y = mx + b.

If the array known_y's is in a single column, then each column of known_x's is interpreted as a separate variable.

If the array known_y's is in a single row, then each row of known_x's is interpreted as a separate variable.

Known_x's    is an optional set of x-values that you may already know in the relationship y = mx + b.

The array known_x's can include one or more sets of variables. If only one variable is used, known_y's and known_x's can be ranges of any shape, as long as they have equal dimensions. If more than one variable is used, known_y's must be a vector (that is, a range with a height of one row or a width of one column).

If known_x's is omitted, it is assumed to be the array {1,2,3,...} that is the same size as known_y's.

Const    is a logical value specifying whether to force the constant b to equal 0.

If const is TRUE or omitted, b is calculated normally.

If const is FALSE, b is set equal to 0 and the m-values are adjusted to fit y = mx.

Stats    is a logical value specifying whether to return additional regression statistics.

If stats is TRUE, LINEST returns the additional regression statistics, so the returned array is {mn,mn-1,...,m1,b;sen,sen-1,...,se1,seb;r2,sey;F,df;ssreg,ssresid}.

If stats is FALSE or omitted, LINEST returns only the m-coefficients and the constant b.

The additional regression statistics are:

Statistic	Description

se1,se2,...,sen	The standard error values for the coefficients m1,m2,...,mn.

seb	The standard error value for the constant b (seb = #N/A when const is FALSE).

r2	The coefficient of determination. Compares estimated and actual y-values and ranges in value from 0 to 1. If it is 1, there is a perfect correlation in the samplethere is no difference between the estimated y-value and the actual y-value. At the other extreme, if the coefficient of determination is 0, the regression equation is not helpful in predicting a y-value. For information about how r2 is calculated, see "Remarks" later in this topic.

sey	The standard error for the y estimate.

F	The F statistic, or the F-observed value. Use the F statistic to determine whether the observed relationship between the dependent and independent variables occurs by chance.

df	The degrees of freedom. Use the degrees of freedom to help you find F-critical values in a statistical table. Compare the values you find in the table to the F statistic returned by LINEST to determine a confidence level for the model.

ssreg	The regression sum of squares.

ssresid	The residual sum of squares.

The following illustration shows the order in which the additional regression statistics are returned.

Remarks

You can describe any straight line with the slope and the y-intercept:

Slope (m):
To find the slope of a line, often written as m, take two points on the line, (x1,y1) and (x2,y2); the slope is equal to (y2 - y1)/(x2 - x1).

Y-intercept (b):
The y-intercept of a line, often written as b, is the value of y at the point where the line crosses the y-axis.

The equation of a straight line is y = mx + b. Once you know the values of m and b, you can calculate any point on the line by plugging the y- or x-value into that equation. You can also use the TREND function. For more information, see TREND.

When you have only one independent x-variable, you can obtain the slope and y-intercept values directly by using the following formulas:

Slope:
INDEX(LINEST(known_y's,known_x's),1)

Y-intercept:
INDEX(LINEST(known_y's,known_x's),2)

The accuracy of the line calculated by LINEST depends on the degree of scatter in your data. The more linear the data, the more accurate the LINEST model. LINEST uses the method of least squares for determining the best fit for the data. When you have only one independent x-variable, the calculations for m and b are based on the following formulas:

The line- and curve-fitting functions LINEST and LOGEST can calculate the best straight line or exponential curve that fits your data. However, you have to decide which of the two results best fits your data. You can calculate TREND(known_y's,known_x's) for a straight line, or GROWTH(known_y's, known_x's) for an exponential curve. These functions, without the new_x's argument, return an array of y-values predicted along that line or curve at your actual data points. You can then compare the predicted values with the actual values. You may want to chart them both for a visual comparison.

In regression analysis, Microsoft Excel calculates for each point the squared difference between the y-value estimated for that point and its actual y-value. The sum of these squared differences is called the residual sum of squares. Microsoft Excel then calculates the sum of the squared differences between the actual y-values and the average of the y-values, which is called the total sum of squares (regression sum of squares + residual sum of squares). The smaller the residual sum of squares is compared with the total sum of squares, the larger the value of the coefficient of determination, r2, which is an indicator of how well the equation resulting from the regression analysis explains the relationship among the variables.

Formulas that return arrays must be entered as array formulas.

When entering an array constant such as known_x's as an argument, use commas to separate values in the same row and semicolons to separate rows. Separator characters may be different depending on your country settings.

You should note that the y-values predicted by the regression equation may not be valid if they are outside the range of the y-values you used to determine the equation.

Example 1    Slope and Y-intercept

LINEST({1,9,5,7},{0,4,2,3}) equals {2,1}, the slope = 2 and y-intercept = 1.

Example 2    Simple Linear Regression

Suppose a small business has sales of $3100, $4500, $4400, $5400, $7500, and $8100 during the first six months of the fiscal year. Assuming that the values are entered in the range B2:B7,respectively, you can use the following simple linear regression model to estimate sales for the ninth month.

SUM(LINEST(B2:B7)*{9,1}) equals SUM({1000,2000}*{9,1}) equals $11,000

In general, SUM({m,b}*{x,1}) equals mx + b, the estimated y-value for a given x-value. You can also use the TREND function.

Example 3    Multiple Linear Regression

Suppose a commercial developer is considering purchasing a group of small office buildings in an established business district.

The developer can use multiple linear regression analysis to estimate the value of an office building in a given area based on the following variables.

Variable	Refers to the

y	Assessed value of the office building

x1	Floor space in square feet

x2	Number of offices

x3	Number of entrances

x4	Age of the office building in years

This example assumes that a straight-line relationship exists between each of the independent variables (x1, x2, x3, and x4) and the dependent variable (y), the value of office buildings in the area.

The developer randomly chooses a sample of 11 office buildings from a possible 1500 office buildings and obtains the following data.

"Half an entrance" means an entrance for deliveries only. When entered as an array, the following formula:

LINEST(E2:E12,A2:D12,TRUE,TRUE)

returns the following output.

The multiple regression equation, y = m1*x1 + m2*x2 + m3*x3 + m4*x4 + b, can now be obtained using the values from row 14:

y = 27.64*x1 + 12,530*x2 + 2,553*x3+ 234.24*x4 + 52,318

The developer can now estimate the assessed value of an office building in the same area which has 2500 square feet, three offices, and two entrances, and which is 25 years old, by using the following equation:

y = 27.64*2500 + 12530*3 + 2553*2 - 234.24*25 + 52318 = $158,261

You can also use the TREND function to calculate this value. For more information, see TREND.

Example 4    Using the F and R2 Statistics

In the previous example, the coefficient of determination, or r2, is 0.99675 (see cell A16 in the output for LINEST), which would indicate a strong relationship between the independent variables and the sale price. You can use the F statistic to determine whether these results, with such a high r2 value, occurred by chance.

Assume for the moment that in fact there is no relationship among the variables, but that you have drawn a rare sample of 11 office buildings which causes the statistical analysis to demonstrate a strong relationship. The term "Alpha" is used for the probability of erroneously concluding that there is a relationship.

There is a relationship among the variables if the F-observed statistic is greater than the F-critical value. The F-critical value can be obtained by referring to a table of F-critical values in many statistics textbooks. To read the table, assume a single-tailed test, use an Alpha value of 0.05, and for the degrees of freedom (abbreviated in most tables as v1 and v2), use v1 = k = 4 and v2 = n - (k + 1) = 11 - (4 + 1) = 6, where k is the number of variables in the regression analysis and n is the number of data points. The F-critical value is 4.53.

The F-observed value is 459.753674 (cell A17), which is substantially greater than the F-critical value of 4.53. Therefore, the regression equation is useful in predicting the assessed value of office buildings in this area.

Example 5    Calculating the t-Statistics

Another hypothesis test will determine whether each slope coefficient is useful in estimating the assessed value of an office building in example 3. For example, to test the age coefficient for statistical significance, divide -234.24 (age slope coefficient) by 13.268 (the estimated standard error of age coefficients in cell A15). The following is the t-observed value:

t = m4 ÷ se4 = -234.24 ÷ 13.268 = -17.7

If you consult a table in a statistics manual, you will find that t-critical, single tail, with 6 degrees of freedom and Alpha = 0.05 is 1.94 . Since the absolute value of t, 17.7, is greater than 1.94, age is an important variable when estimating the assessed value of an office building. Each of the other independent variables can be tested for statistical significance in a similar manner. The following are the t-observed values for each of the independent variables:

Variable	t-observed value

Floor space	5.1

Number of offices	31.3

Number of entrances	4.8

Age	17.7

These values all have an absolute value greater than 1.94; therefore, all the variables used in the regression equation are useful in predicting the assessed value of office buildings in this area.

Related Functions

GROWTH	Similar to TREND and LINEST, but fits an exponential curve to your data instead of a straight line

LOGEST	Similar to TREND and LINEST, but fits an exponential curve to your data instead of a straight line

TREND	Calculates a straight line, but returns an array of predicted y-values instead of the parameters of the line

List of Statistical Functions


LOGNORMDIST

Returns the cumulative lognormal distribution of x, where ln(x) is normally distributed with parameters mean and standard_dev. Use this function to analyze data that has been logarithmically transformed.

Syntax

LOGNORMDIST(x, mean, standard_dev)

X    is the value at which to evaluate the function.

Mean    is the mean of ln(x).

Standard_dev    is the standard deviation of ln(x).

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, LOGNORMDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x ≤ 0 or if standard_dev ≤ 0, LOGNORMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the lognormal cumulative distribution function is:

Example

LOGNORMDIST(4,3.5,1.2) equals 0.039084

Related Functions

EXP	Returns e raised to the power of a given number

LN	Returns the natural logarithm of a number

LOG	Returns the logarithm of a number to a specified base

LOG10	Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number

LOGINV	Returns the inverse of the lognormal distribution

List of Statistical Functions


NEGBINOMDIST

Returns the negative binomial distribution. NEGBINOMDIST returns the probability that there will be number_f failures before the number_s-th success, when the constant probability of a success is probability_s. This function is similar to the binomial distribution, except that the number of successes is fixed and the number of trials is variable. Like the binomial, trials are assumed to be independent.

For example, you need to find 10 people with excellent reflexes, and you know the probability that a candidate has these qualifications is 0.3. NEGBINOMDIST calculates the probability that you will interview a certain number of unqualified candidates before finding all 10 qualified candidates.

Syntax

NEGBINOMDIST(number_f, number_s, probability_s)

Number_f    is the number of failures.

Number_s    is the threshold number of successes.

Probability_s    is the probability of a success.

Remarks

Number_f and number_s are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, NEGBINOMDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If probability_s < 0 or if probability > 1, NEGBINOMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If (number_f + number_s - 1) ≤ 0, NEGBINOMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the negative binomial distribution is:

where:

 x is number_f, r is number_s, and p is probability_s.

Example

NEGBINOMDIST(10,5,0.25) equals 0.055049

Related Functions

BINOMDIST	Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability

COMBIN	Returns the number of combinations for a given number of objects

FACT	Returns the factorial of a number

HYPGEOMDIST	Returns the hypergeometric distribution

PERMUT	Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects

List of Statistical Functions


NORMDIST

Returns the normal cumulative distribution for the specified mean and standard deviation. This function has a very wide range of applications in statistics, including hypothesis testing.

Syntax

NORMDIST(x, mean, standard_dev, cumulative)

X    is the value for which you want the distribution.

Mean    is the arithmetic mean of the distribution.

Standard_dev    is the standard deviation of the distribution.

Cumulative    is a logical value that determines the form of the function. If cumulative is TRUE, NORMDIST returns the cumulative distribution function; if FALSE, it returns the probability mass function.

Remarks

If mean or standard_dev is non-numeric, NORMDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If standard_dev ≤ 0, NORMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If mean = 0 and standard_dev = 1, NORMDIST returns the standard normal distribution, NORMSDIST.

The equation for the normal density function is:

Example

NORMDIST(42,40,1.5,TRUE) equals 0.908789

Related Functions

NORMINV	Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution

NORMSDIST	Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution

NORMSINV	Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution

STANDARDIZE	Returns a normalized value

ZTEST	Returns the two-tailed P-value of a z-test

List of Statistical Functions


NORMINV

Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution for the specified mean and standard deviation.

Syntax

NORMINV(probability, mean, standard_dev)

Probability    is a probability corresponding to the normal distribution.

Mean    is the arithmetic mean of the distribution.

Standard_dev    is the standard deviation of the distribution.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, NORMINV returns the #VALUE! error value.

If probability < 0 or if probability > 1, NORMINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If standard_dev ≤ 0, NORMINV returns the #NUM! error value.

NORMINV uses the standard normal distribution if mean = 0 and standard_dev = 1 (see NORMSINV).

NORMINV uses an iterative technique for calculating the function. Given a probability value, NORMINV iterates until the result is accurate to within ± 3x10^-7. If NORMINV does not converge after 100 iterations, the function returns the #N/A error value.

Example

NORMINV(0.908789,40,1.5) equals 42

Related Functions

NORMDIST	Returns the normal cumulative distribution

NORMSDIST	Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution

NORMSINV	Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution

STANDARDIZE	Returns a normalized value

ZTEST	Returns the two-tailed P-value of a z-test

List of Statistical Functions


NORMSDIST

Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution function. The distribution has a mean of zero and a standard deviation of one. Use this function in place of a table of standard normal curve areas.

Syntax

NORMSDIST(z)

Z    is the value for which you want the distribution.

Remarks

If z is non-numeric, NORMSDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

The equation for the standard normal density function is:

Example

NORMSDIST(1.333333) equals 0.908789

Related Functions

NORMDIST	Returns the normal cumulative distribution

NORMINV	Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution

NORMSINV	Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution

STANDARDIZE	Returns a normalized value

ZTEST	Returns the two-tailed P-value of a z-test

List of Statistical Functions


NORMSINV

Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution. The distribution has a mean of zero and a standard deviation of one.

Syntax

NORMSINV(probability)

Probability    is a probability corresponding to the normal distribution.

Remarks

If probability is non-numeric, NORMSINV returns the #VALUE! error value.

If probability < 0 or if probability > 1, NORMINV returns the #NUM! error value.

NORMSINV uses an iterative technique for calculating the function. Given a probability value, NORMSINV iterates until the result is accurate to within ± 3x10^-7. If NORMSINV does not converge after 100 iterations, the function returns the #N/A error value.

Example

NORMSINV(0.908789) equals 1.3333

Related Functions

NORMDIST	Returns the normal cumulative distribution

NORMSDIST	Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution

NORMINV	Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution

STANDARDIZE	Returns a normalized value

ZTEST	Returns the two-tailed P-value of a z-test

List of Statistical Functions


PEARSON

Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient, r, a dimensionless index that ranges from -1.0 to 1.0 inclusive, and reflects the extent of a linear relationship between two data sets.

Syntax

PEARSON(array1, array2)

Array1    is a set of independent values.

Array2    is a set of dependent values.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, array constants, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If array1 and array2 are empty or have a different number of data points, PEARSON returns the #N/A error value.

The r value of the regression line is:

Example

PEARSON({9,7,5,3,1},{10,6,1,5,3}) equals 0.699379

Related Functions

INTERCEPT	Returns the intercept of the linear regression line

LINEST	Returns the parameters of a linear trend

RSQ	Returns the square of the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient

SLOPE	Returns the slope of the linear regression line

STEYX	Returns the standard error of the predicted y-value for each x in the regression

List of Statistical Functions


PERCENTILE

Returns the k-th percentile of values in a range. You can use this function to establish a threshold of acceptance. For example, you can decide to examine candidates that score above the 90th percentile.

Syntax

PERCENTILE(array, k)

Array    is the array or range of data that defines relative standing.

K    is the percentile value in the range 0..1, inclusive.

Remarks

If array is empty or contains more than 8191 data points, PERCENTILE returns the #NUM! error value.

If k is non-numeric, PERCENTILE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If k is < 0 or if k > 1, PERCENTILE returns the #NUM! error value.

If k is not a multiple of 1/(n - 1), PERCENTILE interpolates to determine the value at the kth percentile.

Example

PERCENTILE({1,2,3,4},0.3) equals 1.9

Related Functions

LARGE	Returns the k-th largest value in a data set

Max	Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments

MEDIAN	Returns the median of the given numbers

Min	Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments

PERCENTRANK	Returns the percentage rank of a value in a data set

QUARTILE	Returns the quartile of a data set

SMALL	Returns the k-th smallest value in a data set

List of Statistical Functions


PERCENTRANK

Returns the percentage rank of a value in a data set. This function can be used to evaluate the relative standing of an observation in a data set. For example, you can use PERCENTRANK to evaluate the standing of an aptitude test score among the population of scores for the test.

Syntax

PERCENTRANK(array, x, significance)

Array    is the array or range of data with numeric values that defines relative standing.

X    is the value for which you want to know the rank.

Significance    is an optional value that identifies the number of significant digits for the returned percentage value. If omitted, PERCENTRANK uses three digits (0.xxx%).

Remarks

If array is empty, PERCENTRANK returns the #NUM! error value.

If significance < 1, PERCENTRANK returns the #NUM! error value.

If x does not match one of the values in array, PERCENTRANK interpolates to return the correct percentage rank.

Example

PERCENTRANK({1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10},4) equals 0.333

Related Functions

LARGE	Returns the k-th largest value in a data set

Max	Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments

MEDIAN	Returns the median of the given numbers

Min	Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments

PERCENTILE	Returns the k-th percentile of values in a range

QUARTILE	Returns the quartile of a data set

SMALL	Returns the k-th smallest value in a data set

List of Statistical Functions


PERMUT

Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects that can be selected from number objects. A permutation is any set or subset of objects or events where internal order is significant. Permutations are different than combinations, for which the internal order is not significant. Use this function for lottery-style probability calculations.

Syntax

PERMUT(number, number_chosen)

Number    is an integer that describes the number of objects.

Number_chosen    is an integer that describes the number of objects in each permutation.

Remarks

Both arguments are truncated to integers.

If number or number_chosen is non-numeric, PERMUT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If number ≤ 0 or if number_chosen < 0, PERMUT returns the #NUM! error value.

If number < number_chosen, PERMUT returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the number of permutations is:

Example

Suppose you want to calculate the odds of selecting a winning lottery number. Each lottery number contains three numbers, each of which can be between 0 and 99, inclusive. The following function calculates the number of possible permutations.

PERMUT(100,3) equals 970,200

Related Functions

BINOMDIST	Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability

COMBIN	Returns the number of combinations for a given number of objects

CRITBINOM	Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is less than or equal to a criterion value

FACT	Returns the factorial of a number

HYPGEOMDIST	Returns the hypergeometric distribution

NEGBINOMDIST	Returns the negative binomial distribution

List of Statistical Functions


POISSON

Returns the Poisson distribution. A common application of the Poisson distribution is predicting the number of events over a specific time, such as the number of cars arriving at a toll plaza in one minute.

Syntax

POISSON(x, mean, cumulative)

X    is the number of events.

Mean    is the expected numeric value.

Cumulative    is a logical value that determines the form of the probability distribution returned. If cumulative is TRUE, POISSON returns the cumulative Poisson probability that the number of random events occurring will be between zero and x inclusive; if FALSE, it returns the Poisson probability mass function that the number of events occurring will be exactly x.

Remarks

If x is not an integer, it is truncated.

If x or mean is non-numeric, POISSON returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x ≤ 0, POISSON returns the #NUM! error value.

If mean ≤ 0, POISSON returns the #NUM! error value.

POISSON is calculated as follows.

For cumulative = FALSE:

For cumulative =TRUE:

Examples

POISSON(2,5,FALSE) equals 0.084224

POISSON(2,5,TRUE) equals 0.124652

Related Function

EXPONDIST	Returns the exponential distribution

List of Statistical Functions


PROB

Returns the probability that values in a range are between two limits. If upper_limit is not supplied, returns the probability that values in x_range are equal to lower_limit.

Syntax

PROB(x_range, prob_range, lower_limit, upper_limit)

X_range    is the range of numeric values of x with which there are associated probabilities.

Prob_range    is a set of probabilities associated with values in x_range.

Lower_limit    is the lower bound on the value for which you want a probability.

Upper_limit    is the optional upper bound on the value for which you want a probability.

Remarks

If any value in prob_range ≤ 0 or if any value in prob_range > 1, PROB returns the #NUM! error value.

If the sum of the values in prob_range ≠ 1, PROB returns the #NUM! error value.

If upper_limit is omitted, PROB returns the probability of being equal to lower_limit.

If x_range and prob_range contain a different number of data points, PROB returns the #N/A error value.

Examples

PROB({0,1,2,3},{0.2,0.3,0.1,0.4},2) equals 0.1

PROB({0,1,2,3},{0.2,0.3,0.1,0.4},1,3) equals 0.8

Related Functions

BINOMDIST	Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability

CRITBINOM	Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is less than or equal to a criterion value

List of Statistical Functions


QUARTILE

Returns the quartile of a data set. Quartiles often are used in sales and survey data to divide populations into groups. For example, you can use QUARTILE to find the top 25% of incomes in a population.

Syntax

QUARTILE(array, quart)

Array    is the array or cell range of numeric values for which you want the quartile value.

Quart    indicates which value to return.

If quart equals	QUARTILE returns

0	Minimum value

1	First quartile (25th percentile)

2	Median value (50th percentile)

3	Third quartile (75th percentile)

4	Maximum value

Remarks

If array is empty or contains more than 8191 data points, QUARTILE returns the #NUM! error value.

If quart is not an integer, it is truncated.

If quart < 0 or if quart > 4, QUARTILE returns the #NUM! error value.

MIN, MEDIAN, and MAX return the same value as QUARTILE when quart is equal to 0, 2, and 4, respectively.

Example

QUARTILE({1,2,4,7,8,9,10,12},1) equals 3.5

Related Functions

LARGE	Returns the k-th largest value in a data set

MAX	Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments

MEDIAN	Returns the median of the given numbers

Min	Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments

PERCENTILE	Returns the k-th percentile of values in a range

PERCENTRANK	Returns the percentage rank of a value in a data set

SMALL	Returns the k-th smallest value in a data set

List of Statistical Functions


RANK

Returns the rank of a number in a list of numbers. The rank of a number is its size relative to other values in a list. (If you were to sort the list, the rank of the number would be its position.)

Syntax

RANK(number, ref, order)

Number    is the number whose rank you want to find.

Ref    is an array of, or a reference to, a list of numbers. Non-numeric values in ref are ignored.

Order    is a number specifying how to rank number.

If order is 0 or omitted, Microsoft Excel ranks number as if ref were a list sorted in descending order.

If order is any non-zero value, Microsoft Excel ranks number as if ref were a list sorted in ascending order.

Remarks

RANK gives duplicate numbers the same rank. However, the presence of duplicate numbers affects the ranks of subsequent numbers. For example, in a list of integers, if the number 10 appears twice and has a rank of 5, then 11 would have a rank of 7 (no number would have a rank of 6).

Examples

If A1:A5 contain the numbers 7, 3.5, 3.5, 1, and 2, respectively, then:

RANK(A2,A1:A5,1) equals 3
RANK(A1,A1:A5,1) equals 5

Related Functions

List of Statistical Functions


RSQ

Returns the square of the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient through data points in known_y's and known_x's. For more information, see PEARSON. The  r-squared value can be interpreted as the proportion of the variance in y attributable to the variance in x.

Syntax

RSQ(known_y's, known_x's)

Known_y's    is an array or range of data points.

Known_x's    is an array or range of data points.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If known_y's and known_x's are empty or have a different number of data points, RSQ returns the #N/A error value.

The equation for the r value of the regression line is:

Example

RSQ({2,3,9,1,8,7,5},{6,5,11,7,5,4,4}) equals 0.05795

Related Functions

CORREL	Returns the correlation coefficient between two data sets

COVAR	Returns covariance, the average of the products of paired deviations

Intercept	Returns the intercept of the linear regression line

LINEST	Returns the parameters of a linear trend

LOGEST	Returns the parameters of an exponential trend

PEARSON	Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient

SLOPE	Returns the slope of the linear regression line

STEYX	Returns the standard error of the predicted y-value for each x in the regression

TREND	Returns values along a linear trend

List of Statistical Functions


SKEW

Returns the skewness of a distribution. Skewness characterizes the degree of asymmetry of a distribution around its mean. Positive skewness indicates a distribution with an asymmetric tail extending towards more positive values. Negative skewness indicates a distribution with an asymmetric tail extending towards more negative values.

Syntax

SKEW(number1, number2, ...)

Number1,number2...    are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want to calculate skewness. You can also use a single array or a reference to an aray instead of arguments separated by commas.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If there are less than three data points, or the sample standard deviation is zero, SKEW returns the #DIV/0! error value.

The equation for skewness is defined as:

Example

SKEW(3,4,5,2,3,4,5,6,4,7) equals 0.359543

Related Functions

KURT	Returns the kurtosis of a data set

STDEV	Estimates standard deviation based on a sample

STDEVP	Calculates standard deviation based on the entire population

VAR	Estimates variance based on a sample

VARP	Calculates variance based on the entire population

List of Statistical Functions


SLOPE

Returns the slope of the linear regression line through data points in known_y's and known_x's. The slope is the vertical distance divided by the horizontal distance between any two points on the line, which is the rate of change along the regression line.

Syntax

SLOPE(known_y's, known_x's)

Known_y's    is an array or cell range of numeric dependent data points.

Known_x's    is the set of independent data points.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If known_y's and known_x's are empty or have a different number of data points, SLOPE returns the #N/A error value.

The equation for the slope of the regression line is:

Example

SLOPE({2,3,9,1,8,7,5},{6,5,11,7,5,4,4}) equals 0.305556

Related Functions

Intercept	Returns the intercept of the linear regression line

LINEST	Returns the parameters of a linear trend

LOGEST	Returns the parameters of an exponential trend

PEARSON	Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient

RSQ	Returns the square of the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient

STEYX	Returns the standard error of the predicted y-value for each x in the regression

TREND	Returns values along a linear trend

List of Statistical Functions


SMALL

Returns the k-th smallest value in a data set. Use this function to return values with a particular relative standing in a data set.

Syntax

SMALL(array, k)

Array    is an array or range of numerical data for which you want to determine the k-th smallest value.

K    is the position (from the smallest) in the array or range of data to return.

Remarks

If array is empty, SMALL returns the #NUM! error value.

If k ≤ 0 or if k exceeds the number of data points, SMALL returns the #NUM! error value.

If n is the number of data points in array, SMALL(array,1) equals the smallest value, and SMALL(array,n) equals the largest value.

Example

SMALL({3,4,5,2,3,4,5,6,4,7},4) equals 4

SMALL({1,4,8,3,7,12,54,8,23},2) equals 3

Related Functions

LARGE	Returns the k-th largest value in a data set

Max	Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments

MEDIAN	Returns the median of the given numbers

Min	Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments

PERCENTILE	Returns the k-th percentile of values in a range

PERCENTRANK	Returns the percentage rank of a value in a data set

QUARTILE	Returns the quartile of a data set

List of Statistical Functions


STANDARDIZE

Returns a normalized value from a distribution characterized by mean and standard_dev.

Syntax

STANDARDIZE(x, mean, standard_dev)

X    is the value you want to normalize.

Mean    is the arithmetic mean of the distribution.

Standard_dev    is the standard deviation of the distribution.

Remarks

If standard_dev ≤ 0, STANDARDIZE returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the normalized value is:

Example

STANDARDIZE(42,40,1.5) equals 1.333333

Related Functions

NORMDIST	Returns the normal cumulative distribution

NORMINV	Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution

NORMSDIST	Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution

NORMSINV	Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution

ZTEST	Returns the two-tailed P-value of a z-test

List of Statistical Functions


STDEV

Estimates standard deviation based on a sample. The standard deviation is a measure of how widely values are dispersed from the average value (the mean).

Syntax

STDEV(number1,number2,...)

Number1,number2,...    are 1 to 30 number arguments corresponding to a sample of a population. You can also use a single array or a reference to an aray instead of arguments separated by commas.

Remarks

STDEV assumes that its arguments are a sample of the population. If your data represents the entire population, you should compute the standard deviation using STDEVP.

The standard deviation is calculated using the "nonbiased" or "n-1" method.

STDEV uses the following formula:

Example

Suppose 10 tools stamped from the same machine during a production run are collected as a random sample and measured for breaking strength. The sample values (1345, 1301, 1368, 1322, 1310, 1370, 1318, 1350, 1303, 1299) are stored in A2:E3, respectively. STDEV estimates the standard deviation of breaking strengths for all the tools.

STDEV(A2:E3) equals 27.46

Related Functions

List of Statistical Functions


STDEVP

Calculates standard deviation based on the entire population given as arguments. The standard deviation is a measure of how widely values are dispersed from the average value (the mean).

Syntax

STDEVP(number1,number2],...

Number1,number2,...    are 1 to 30 number arguments corresponding to a population. You can also use a single array or a reference to an aray instead of arguments separated by commas.

Remarks

STDEVP assumes that its arguments are the entire population. If your data represents a sample of the population, you should compute the standard deviation using STDEV.

For large sample sizes, STDEV and STDEVP return approximately equal values.

The standard deviation is calculated using the "biased" or "n" method.

STDEVP uses the following formula:

Example

Using the same data from the STDEV example and assuming that only 10 tools are produced during the production run, STDEVP measures the standard deviation of breaking strengths for all the tools.

STDEVP(A2:E3) equals 26.05

Related Functions

List of Statistical Functions


STEYX

Returns the standard error of the predicted y-value for each x in the regression. The standard error is a measure of the amount of error in the prediction of y for an individual x.

Syntax

STEYX(known_y's, known_x's)

Known_y's    is an array or range of dependent data points.

Known_x's    is an array or range of independent data points.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If known_y's and known_x's are empty or have a different number of data points, STEYX returns the #N/A error value.

The equation for the standard error of the predicted y is:

Example

STEYX({2,3,9,1,8,7,5},{6,5,11,7,5,4,4}) equals 3.305719

Related Functions

INTERCEPT	Returns the intercept of the linear regression line

LINEST	Returns the parameters of a linear trend

LOGEST	Returns the parameters of an exponential trend

PEARSON	Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient

RSQ	Returns the square of the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient

SLOPE	Returns the slope of the linear regression line

List of Statistical Functions


SYD

Returns the sum-of-years' digits depreciation of an asset for a specified period.

Syntax

SYD(cost, salvage, life, per)

Cost    is the initial cost of the asset.

Salvage    is the value at the end of the depreciation (sometimes called the salvage value of the asset).

Life    is the number of periods over which the asset is being depreciated (sometimes called the useful life of the asset).

Per    is the period and must use the same units as life.

Remark

SYD is calculated as follows:

Examples

If you've bought a truck for $30,000 that has a useful life of 10 years and a salvage value of $7500, the yearly depreciation allowance for the first year is:

SYD(30000,7500,10,1) equals $4090.91

The yearly depreciation allowance for the 10th year is:

SYD(30000,7500,10,10) equals $409.09

Related Functions

DDB	Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the double-declining balance method or some other method you specify

SLN	Returns the straight-line depreciation of an asset for one period

VDB	Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified or partial period using a declining balance method

List of Financial Functions


TDIST

Returns the Student's t-distribution. The t-distribution is used in the hypothesis testing of small sample data sets. Use this function in place of a table of critical values for the t-distribution.

Syntax

TDIST(x, degrees_freedom, tails)

X    is the numeric value at which to evaluate the distribution.

Degrees_freedom    is an integer indicating the number of degrees of freedom.

Tails    specifies the number of distribution tails to return. If tails = 1, TDIST returns the one-tailed distribution. If tails = 2, TDIST returns the two-tailed distribution.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, TDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If degrees_freedom < 1, TDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

The degrees_freedom and tails arguments are truncated to integers.

If tails is any value other than 1 or 2, TDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

TDIST is calculated as TDIST=p( x<X ), where X is a random variable that follows the t-distribution.

Example

TDIST(1.96,60,2) equals 0.054645

Related Functions

TINV	Returns the inverse of the Student's t-distribution

TTEST	Returns the probability associated with a Student's t-Test

List of Statistical Functions


TINV

Returns the inverse of the Student's t-distribution for the specified degrees of freedom.

Syntax

TINV(probability, degrees_freedom)

Probability    is the probability associated with the two- tailed Student's t-distribution.

Degrees_freedom    is the number of degrees of freedom to characterize the distribution.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, TINV returns the #VALUE! error value.

If probability < 0 or if probability > 1, TINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If degrees_freedom is not an integer, it is truncated.

If degrees_freedom < 1, TINV returns the #NUM! error value.

TINV is calculated as TINV=p( t<X ), where X is a random variable that follows the tdistribution.

TINV uses an iterative technique for calculating the function. Given a probability value, TINV iterates until the result is accurate to within ± 3x10^-7. If TINV does not converge after 100 iterations, the function returns the #N/A error value.

Example

TINV(0.054645,60) equals 1.96

Related Functions

TDIST	Returns the Student's t-distribution

TTEST	Returns the probability associated with a Student's t-Test

List of Statistical Functions


TREND

Returns values along a linear trend. Fits a straight line (using the method of least squares) to the arrays known_y's and known_x's. Returns the y-values along that line for the array of new_x's that you specify.

Syntax

TREND(known_y's, known_x's, new_x's, const)

Known_y's    is the set of y-values you already know in the relationship y = mx + b.

If the array known_y's is in a single column, then each column of known_x's is interpreted as a separate variable.

If the array known_y's is in a single row, then each row of known_x's is interpreted as a separate variable.

Known_x's    is an optional set of x-values that you may already know in the relationship y = mx + b.

The array known_x's can include one or more sets of variables. If only one variable is used, known_y's and known_x's can be ranges of any shape, as long as they have equal dimensions. If more than one variable is used, known_y's must be a vector (that is, a range with a height of one row or a width of one column).

If known_x's is omitted, it is assumed to be the array {1,2,3,...} that is the same size as known_y's.

New_x's    are new x-values for which you want TREND to return corresponding y-values.

New_x's must include a column (or row) for each independent variable, just as known_x's does. So, if known_y's is in a single column, known_x's and new_x's should have the same number of columns. If known_y's is in a single row, known_x's and new_x's should have the same number of rows.

If you omit new_x's, it is assumed to be the same as known_x's.

If you omit both known_x's and new_x's, they are assumed to be the array {1,2,3,...} that is the same size as known_y's.

Const    is a logical value specifying whether to force the constant b to equal 0.

If const is TRUE or omitted, b is calculated normally.

If const is FALSE, b is set equal to 0 and the m-values are adjusted so that y = mx.

Remarks

For information on how Microsoft Excel fits a line to data, see LINEST.

You can use TREND for polynomial curve fitting by regressing against the same variable raised to different powers. For example, suppose column A contained y-values and column B contained x-values. You could enter x^2 in column C, x^3 in column D, and so on, and then regress columns B through D against column A.

Formulas that return arrays must be entered as array formulas.

When entering an array constant for an argument such as known_x's, use commas to separate values in the same row and semicolons to separate rows.

Example

Suppose a business wants to purchase a tract of land in July, the start of the next fiscal year. The business collected cost information that covers the most recent 12 months for a typical tract in the desired area. known_y's contains the set of known values ($133,890, $135,000, $135,790, $137,300, $138,130, $139,100, $139900, $141,120, $141,890, $143,230, $144,000, $145,290), and are stored in B2:B13, respectively.

When entered as a vertical array in the range C2:C6, the following formula returns the predicted prices for March, April, May, June, and July:

TREND(B2:B13,,{13;14;15;16;17}) equals {146172;147190;148208;149226;150244}

The company can expect a typical tract of land to cost about $150,244 if it waits until July. The preceding formula uses the default array {1;2;3;4;5;6;7;8;9;10;11;12} for the known_x's argument, corresponding to the 12 months of sales data. The array {13;14;15;16;17} corresponds to the next five months.

Related Functions

GROWTH	Similar to TREND and LINEST, but fit your data to an exponential curve

LOGEST	Similar to TREND and LINEST, but fit your data to an exponential curve

LINEST	Also calculates a line, but returns the parameters of the line instead of an array of y-values

List of Statistical Functions


TRIMMEAN

Returns the mean of the interior of a data set.  TRIMMEAN calculates the mean taken by excluding a percentage of data points from the top and bottom tails of a data set. You can use this function when you wish to exclude outlying data from your analysis.

Syntax

TRIMMEAN(array, percent)

Array    is the array or range of values to trim and average.

Percent    is the fractional number of data points to exclude from the calculation. For example, if percent = 0.2, 4 points are trimmed from a data set of 20 points (20 x 0.2), 2 from the top and 2 from the bottom of the set.

Remarks

If percent < 0 or percent > 1, TRIMMEAN returns the #NUM! error value.

TRIMMEAN rounds the number of excluded data points down to the nearest multiple of 2. If percent = 0.1, 10% of 30 data points equals 3 points. For symmetry, TRIMMEAN excludes a single value from the top and bottom of the data set.

Example

TRIMMEAN({4,5,6,7,2,3,4,5,1,2,3},0.2) equals 3.777778

Related Functions

AVERAGE	Returns the average of its arguments

GEOMEAN	Returns the geometric mean

HARMEAN	Returns the harmonic mean

MEDIAN	Returns the median of the given numbers

MODE	Returns the most common value in a data set

List of Statistical Functions


TTEST

Returns the probability associated with a Student's t-Test. Use TTEST to determine whether two samples are likely to have come from the same two underlying populations that have the same mean.

Syntax

TTEST(array1, array2, tails, type)

Array1    is the first data set.

Array2    is the second data set.

Tails    specifies the number of distribution tails. If tails = 1, TTEST uses the one-tailed distribution. If tails = 2, TTEST uses the two-tailed distribution.

Type    is the kind of t-test to perform.

If type equals	This test is performed

1	Paired

2	Two-sample equal variance (homoscedastic)

3	Two-sample unequal variance (heteroscedastic)

Remarks

If array1 and array2 have a different number of data points, and type = 1 (paired), TTEST returns the #N/A error value.

The tails and type arguments are truncated to integers.

If tails or type is non-numeric, TTEST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If tails is any value other than 1 or 2, TTEST returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

TTEST({3,4,5,8,9,1,2,4,5},{6,19,3,2,14,4,5,17,1},2,1)
equals 0.196016

Related Functions

TDIST	Returns the Student's t-distribution

TINV	Returns the inverse of the Student's t-distribution

List of Statistical Functions


VAR

Estimates variance based on a sample.

Syntax

VAR(number1, number2, ...)

Number1,number2,...    are 1 to 30 number arguments corresponding to a sample of a population.

Remarks

VAR assumes that its arguments are a sample of the population. If your data represents the entire population, you should compute the variance using VARP.

VAR uses the following formula:

Example

Suppose 10 tools stamped from the same machine during a production run are collected as a random sample and measured for breaking strength. The sample values (1345, 1301, 1368, 1322, 1310, 1370, 1318, 1350, 1303, 1299) are stored in A2:E3, respectively. VAR estimates the variance for the breaking strength of the tools.

VAR(A2:E3) equals 754.3

Related Functions

List of Statistical Functions


VARP

Calculates variance based on the entire population.

Syntax

VARP(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 number arguments corresponding to a population.

Remarks

VARP assumes that its arguments are the entire population. If your data represents a sample of the population, you should compute the variance using VAR.

The equation for VARP is :

Example

Using the data from the VAR example and assuming that only 10 tools are produced during the production run, VARP measures the variance of breaking strengths for all the tools.

VARP(A2:E3) equals 678.8

Related Functions

List of Statistical Functions


WEIBULL

Returns the Weibull distribution. Use this distribution in reliability analysis, such as calculating a device's mean time to failure.

Syntax

WEIBULL(x, alpha, beta, cumulative)

X    is the value at which to evaluate the function.

Alpha    is a parameter to the distribution.

Beta    is a parameter to the distribution.

Cumulative    determines the form of the function.

Remarks

If x, alpha, or beta is non-numeric, WEIBULL returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x < 0, WEIBULL returns the #NUM! error value.

If alpha ≤ 0 or if beta ≤ 0, WEIBULL returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the Weibull cumulative distribution function is:

The equation for the Weibull probability density function is:

When alpha = 1, WEIBULL returns the exponential distribution with:

Examples

WEIBULL(105,20,100,TRUE) equals 0.929581

WEIBULL(105,20,100,FALSE) equals 0.035589

Related Function

EXPONDIST	Returns the exponential distribution

List of Statistical Functions


ZTEST

Returns the two-tailed P-value of a z-test. The z-test generates a standard score for x with respect to the data set, array, and returns the two-tailed probability for the normal distribution. You can use this function to assess the likelihood that a particular observation is drawn from a particular population.

Syntax

ZTEST(array, x, sigma)

Array    is the array or range of data against which to test x.

X    is the value to test.

Sigma    is the population (known) standard deviation. If omitted, the sample standard deviation is used.

Remarks

If array is empty, ZTEST returns the #N/A error value.

ZTEST is calculated as follows:

Example

ZTEST({3,6,7,8,6,5,4,2,1,9},4) equals 0.090574

Related Functions

CONFIDENCE	Returns the confidence interval for a population mean

NORMDIST	Returns the normal cumulative distribution

NORMINV	Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution

NORMSDIST	Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution

NORMSINV	Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution

STANDARDIZE	Returns a normalized value

List of Statistical Functions


CODE

Returns a numeric code for the first character in a text string. The returned code corresponds to the character set used by your computer.

Syntax

CODE(text)

Operating environment	Character set

Macintosh	Macintosh character set

Windows	ANSI

Text    is the text for which you want the code of the first character.

Examples

CODE("A") equals 65

CODE("Alphabet") equals 65

Related Function

CHAR	Returns the character specified by the code number

List of Text Functions


CONVERT

Converts a number from one measurement system to another. For example, CONVERT can translate a table of distances in miles to a table of distances in kilometers.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

CONVERT(number, from_unit, to_unit)

Number    is the value in from_units to convert.

From_unit    is the units for number.

To_unit    is the units for the result.

CONVERT accepts the following text values for from_unit and to_unit:

Weight and mass	From_unit or to_unit

Gram	"g"

Slug	"sg"

Pound mass (avoirdupois)	"lbm"

U (atomic mass unit)	"u"

Ounce mass (avoirdupois)	"ozm"

Distance	From_unit or to_unit

Meter	"m"

Statute mile	"mi"

Nautical mile	"Nmi"

Inch	"in"

Foot	"ft"

Yard	"yd"

Angstrom	"ang"

Pica (1/72 in.)	"Pica"

Time	From_unit or to_unit

Year	"yr"

Day	"day"

Hour	"hr"

Minute	"mn"

Second	"sec"

Pressure	From_unit or to_unit

Pascal	"Pa"

Atmosphere	"atm"

mm of Mercury	"mmHg"

Force	From_unit or to_unit

Newton	"N"

Dyne	"dyn"

Pound force	"lbf"

Energy	From_unit or to_unit

Joule	"J"

Erg	"e"

Thermodynamic calorie	"c"

IT calorie	"cal"

Electron volt	"eV"

Horsepower-hour	"HPh"

Watt-hour	"Wh"

Foot-pound	"flb"

BTU	"BTU"

Power	From_unit or to_unit

Horsepower	"HP"

Watt	"W"

Magnetism	From_unit or to_unit

Tesla	"T"

Gauss	"ga"

Temperature	From_unit or to_unit

Degree Celsius	"C"

Degree Fahrenheit	"F"

Degree Kelvin	"K"

Liquid measure	From_unit or to_unit

Teaspoon	"tsp"

Tablespoon	"tbs"

Fluid ounce	"oz"

Cup	"cup"

Pint	"pt"

Quart	"qt"

Gallon	"gal"

Liter	"l"

The following abbreviated unit prefixes can be prepended to any metric from_unit or to_unit.

Prefix	Multiplier	Abbreviation
exa	1E+18	"E"
peta	1E+15	"P"
tera	1E+12	"T"
giga	1E+09	"G"
mega	1E+06	"M"
kilo	1E+03	"k"
hecto	1E+02	"h"
dekao	1E+01	"e"
deci	1E-01	"d"
centi	1E-02	"c"
milli	1E-03	"m"
micro	1E-06	"u"
nano	1E-09	"n"
pico	1E-12	"p"
femto	1E-15	"f"
atto	1E-18	"a"
Remarks

If the input data types are incorrect, CONVERT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If the unit does not exist, CONVERT returns the #N/A error value.

If the unit does not support an abbreviated unit prefix, CONVERT returns the #N/A error value.

If the units are in different groups, CONVERT returns the #N/A error value.

Unit names and prefixes are case-sensitive.

Examples

CONVERT(1.0, "lbm", "kg") equals 0.453592

CONVERT(68, "F", "C") equals 20

CONVERT(2.5, "ft", "sec") equals #N/A

Related Functions

Related functions include all base conversion functions such as BIN2DEC, BIN2HEX, BIN2OCT, HEX2BIN, OCT2BIN, and so on.

List of Engineering Functions


IRR

Returns the internal rate of return for a series of cash flows represented by the numbers in values. These cash flows do not have to be even, as they would be for an annuity. The internal rate of return is the interest rate received for an investment consisting of payments (negative values) and income (positive values) that occur at regular periods.

Syntax

IRR(values, guess)

Values    is an array or a reference to cells that contain numbers for which you want to calculate the internal rate of return.

Values must contain at least one positive value and one negative value to calculate the internal rate of return.

IRR uses the order of values to interpret the order of cash flows. Be sure to enter your payment and income values in the sequence you want.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored.

Guess    is a number that you guess is close to the result of IRR.

Microsoft Excel uses an iterative technique for calculating IRR. Starting with guess, IRR cycles through the calculation until the result is accurate within 0.00001 percent. If IRR can't find a result that works after 20 tries, the #NUM! error value is returned.

In most cases you do not need to provide guess for the IRR calculation. If guess is omitted, it is assumed to be 0.1 (10 percent).

If IRR gives the #NUM! error value, or if the result is not close to what you expected, try again with a different value for guess.

Examples

Suppose you want to start a restaurant business. You estimate it will cost $70,000 to start the business and expect to net the following income in the first five years: $12,000, $15,000, $18,000, $21,000, and $26,000. B1:B6 contain the following values: $-70,000, $12,000, $15,000, $18,000, $21,000 and $26,000, respectively.

To calculate the investment's internal rate of return after four years:

IRR(B1:B5) equals -2.12%

To calculate the internal rate of return after five years:

IRR(B1:B6) equals 8.66%

To calculate the internal rate of return after two years, you need to include a guess:

IRR(B1:B3,-10%) equals -44.35%

Remarks

IRR is closely related to NPV, the net present value function. The rate of return calculated by IRR is the interest rate corresponding to a zero net present value. The following macro formula demonstrates how NPV and IRR are related:

NPV(IRR(B1:B6),B1:B6) equals 3.60E-08 (Within the accuracy of the IRR calculation, the value 3.60E-08 is effectively 0.)

Related Functions

MIRR	Returns the internal rate of return where positive and negative cash flows are financed at different rates

NPV	Returns the net present value of an investment based on a series of periodic cash flows and a discount rate

RATE	Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity

XIRR	Returns the internal rate of return for a schedule of cash flows that is not necessarily periodic

XNPV	Returns the net present value for a schedule of cash flows that is not necessarily periodic

List of Financial Functions


IS Functions

This section describes the nine worksheet functions used for testing the type of a value or reference.

Each of these functions, referred to collectively as the IS functions, checks the type of value and returns TRUE or FALSE depending on the outcome. For example, the ISBLANK function returns the logical value TRUE if value is a reference to an empty cell; otherwise it returns FALSE.

Syntax

ISBLANK(value)
ISERR(value)
ISERROR(value)
ISLOGICAL(value)
ISNA(value)
ISNONTEXT(value)
ISNUMBER(value)
ISREF(value)
ISTEXT(value)

Value    is the value you want tested. Value can be a blank (empty cell), error, logical, text, number, or reference value, or name referring to any of these, that you want to test.

Function	Returns TRUE if

ISBLANK	Value refers to an empty cell.

ISERR	Value refers to any error value except #N/A.

ISERROR	Value refers to any error value (#N/A, #VALUE!, #REF!, #DIV/0!, #NUM!, #NAME?, or #NULL!).

ISLOGICAL	Value refers to a logical value.

ISNA	Value refers to the #N/A (value not available) error value.

ISNONTEXT	Value refers to any item that is not text. (Note that this function returns TRUE if value refers to a blank cell.)

ISNUMBER	Value refers to a number.

ISREF	Value refers to a reference.

ISTEXT	Value refers to text.

Remarks

The value arguments to the IS functions are not converted. For example, in most other functions where a number is required, the text value "19" is converted to the number 19. However, in the formula ISNUMBER("19"), "19" is not converted from a text value, and the ISNUMBER function returns FALSE.

The IS functions are useful in formulas and macros for testing the outcome of a calculation. When combined with the IF function, they provide a method for locating errors in formulas (see the following examples).

Examples

ISLOGICAL(TRUE) equals TRUE

ISLOGICAL("TRUE") equals FALSE

ISNUMBER(4) equals TRUE

Suppose C1:C5 in a worksheet of Gold prices in different regions shows the following text values, number values and error values:  "Gold", "Region1", #REF!, , $330.92, #N/A, respectivly.

ISBLANK(C1) equals FALSE

ISERROR(C3) equals TRUE

ISNA(C3) equals FALSE

ISNA(C5) equals TRUE

ISERR(C5) equals FALSE

ISNUMBER(C4) equals TRUE (if the $330.92 was entered as a number and not as text)

ISREF(Region1) equals TRUE (if Region1 is defined as a range name)

ISTEXT(C2) equals TRUE (if Region1 is formatted as text)

On another worksheet, suppose you want to calculate the average of the range A1:A4, but you can't be sure that the cells contain numbers. The formula AVERAGE(A1:A4) returns the #DIV/0! error value if A1:A4 does not contain any numbers. To allow for this case, you could use the following formula to locate potential errors:

IF(ISERROR(AVERAGE(A1:A4)),"No Numbers",AVERAGE(A1:A4))

Related Functions

ERROR.TYPE	Returns a number corresponding to an error type.

ISEVEN	Returns TRUE if the number is even

ISODD	Returns TRUE if the number is odd

TYPE	Returns a number indicating the data type of a value

List of Information Functions


MAX

Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments.

Syntax

MAX(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 numbers for which you want to find the maximum value.

You can specify arguments that are numbers, empty cells, logical values, or text representations of numbers. Arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers cause errors.

If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are used. Empty cells, logical values, text, or error values in the array or reference are ignored.

If the arguments contain no numbers, MAX returns 0.

Examples

If A1:A5 contains the numbers 10, 7, 9, 27, and 2, then:

MAX(A1:A5) equals 27

MAX(A1:A5,30) equals 30

Related Functions

DMAX	Returns the maximum value from selected database entries

MIN	Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments

List of Statistical Functions


OR

Returns TRUE if any argument is TRUE; returns FALSE if all arguments are FALSE.

Syntax

OR(logical1, logical2, ...)

Logical1, logical2,...    are 1 to 30 conditions you want to test that can be either TRUE or FALSE.

The arguments should be logical values or arrays or references that contain logical values.

If an array or reference argument contains text, numbers, or empty cells, those values are ignored.

If the specified range contains no logical values, OR returns the #VALUE! error value.

You can use an OR array formula to see if a value occurs in an array. To enter the OR formula as an array, press CTRL+SHIFT (in Microsoft Excel for Windows) or COMMAND+SHIFT (in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh).

Examples

OR(TRUE) equals TRUE

OR(1+1=1,2+2=5) equals FALSE

If A1:A3 contains the values TRUE, FALSE, and TRUE, then:

OR(A1:A3) equals TRUE

The following macro formula checks the contents of the active cell. If the cell contains the single character "c" or "s", the OR formula returns TRUE and the macro branches to an area named FinishRefresh:

IF(OR(ACTIVE.CELL()="c",ACTIVE.CELL()="s"),GOTO(FinishRefresh))

The preceding example shows how to use the worksheet form of the IF function on a macro sheet. You could also use the macro sheet form. For more information, see IF.

Also see the example for EXACT.

Related Functions

AND	Returns TRUE if all its arguments are TRUE

NOT	Reverses the logic of its argument

List of Logical Functions


PROPER

Capitalizes the first letter in text and any other letters in text that follow any character other than a letter. Converts all other letters to lowercase.

Syntax

PROPER(text)

Text    is text enclosed in quotation marks, a formula that returns text, or a reference to a cell containing the text you want to partially capitalize.

Examples

PROPER("this is a TITLE") equals "This Is A Title"

PROPER("2-cent's worth") equals "2-Cent'S Worth"

PROPER("76BudGet") equals "76Budget"

Related Functions

LOWER	Converts text to lowercase

UPPER	Converts text to uppercase

List of Text Functions


TYPE

Returns the type of value. Use TYPE when the behavior of another function depends on the type of value in a particular cell.

Syntax

TYPE(value)

Value    can be any Microsoft Excel value, such as a number, text, logical value, and so on.

If value is	TYPE returns

Number	1

Text	2

Logical value	4

Formula	8

Error value	16

Array	64

Remarks

TYPE is most useful when you are using functions that can accept a variety of different types of data, such as ARGUMENT and INPUT. Use TYPE to find out what type of data was returned by the function.

Examples

If A1 contains the text "Smith", then:

TYPE(A1) equals TYPE("Smith") equals 2

TYPE("MR. "&A1) equals 2

TYPE(2+A1) equals TYPE(#VALUE!) equals 16

TYPE({1,2;3,4}) equals 64

Related Functions

IS functions	Return information about the type of information in a cell

List of Information Functions


UPPER

Converts text to uppercase.

Syntax

UPPER(text)

Text    is the text you want converted to uppercase.  Text can be a reference or text string.

Examples

UPPER("total") equals "TOTAL"

If E5 contains "yield", then

UPPER(E5) equals "YIELD"

The following macro formula converts the contents of the active cell to uppercase:

FORMULA(UPPER(ACTIVE.CELL()),ACTIVE.CELL())

Related Functions

LOWER	Converts text to lowercase

PROPER	Capitalizes the first letter in each word of a text value

List of Text Functions


ADDRESS

Creates a cell address as text, given specified row and column numbers.

Syntax

ADDRESS(row_num, column_num, abs_num, a1, sheet_text)

Row_num    is the row number to use in the cell reference.

Column_num    is the column number to use in the cell reference.

Abs_num    specifies the type of reference to return.

Abs_num	Returns this type of reference

1 or omitted	Absolute

2	Absolute row; relative column

3	Relative row; absolute column

4	Relative

A1    is a logical value that specifies the A1 or R1C1 reference style. If a1 is TRUE or omitted, ADDRESS returns an A1-style reference; if FALSE, ADDRESS returns an R1C1-style reference.

Sheet_text    is text specifying the name of the worksheet or macro sheet to be used as the external reference. If sheet_text is omitted, no sheet name is used.

Examples

ADDRESS(2,3) equals "$C$2"

ADDRESS(2,3,2) equals "C$2"

ADDRESS(2,3,2,FALSE) equals "R2C[3]"

ADDRESS(2,3,1,FALSE,"[Book1]Sheet1") equals "[Book1]Sheet1!R2C3"

ADDRESS(2,3,1,FALSE,"EXCEL SHEET") equals "'EXCEL SHEET'!R2C3"

Related Functions

COLUMN	Returns the column number of a reference

OFFSET	Returns a reference offset from a given reference

ROW	Returns the row number of a reference

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


AREAS

Returns the number of areas in a reference. An area is a range of contiguous cells or a single cell.

Syntax

AREAS(reference)

Reference    is a reference to a cell or range of cells and can refer to multiple areas. If you want to specify several references as a single argument, then you must include extra sets of parentheses so that Microsoft Excel will not interpret the comma as a field separator. See the second example following.

Tip   This function is useful in a macro for testing whether or not a reference is a nonadjacent selection. See the fourth example following.

Examples

AREAS(B2:D4) equals 1

AREAS((B2:D4,E5,F6:I9)) equals 3

If the name Prices refers to the areas B1:D4, B2, and E1:E10, then:

AREAS(Prices) equals 3

The following macro formula branches to an error routine if the current selection is not contiguous:

IF(AREAS(SELECTION())>1,GOTO(Error))

Related Functions

ADDRESS	Returns a reference as text to a single cell in a worksheet

CELL	Returns information about the formatting, location, or contents of a cell

COLUMN	Returns the column number of a reference

COLUMNS	Returns the number of columns in a reference

INDEX	Uses an index to choose a value from a reference or array

ROW	Returns the row number of a reference

ROWS	Returns the number of rows in a reference

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


CELL

Returns information about the formatting, location, or contents of the upper-left cell in a reference.

Syntax

CELL(info_type, reference)

Info_type    is a text value that specifies what type of cell information you want. The following list shows the possible values of info_type and the corresponding results.

Info_type	Returns

"address"	Reference of the first cell in reference, as text.

"col"	Column number of the cell in reference.

"color"	1 if the cell is formatted in color for negative values; otherwise returns 0.

"contents"	Contents of the upper-left cell in reference.

"filename"	Filename (including full path) of the file that contains reference, as text. Returns empty text ("") if the worksheet that contains reference has not yet been saved.

"format"	Text value corresponding to the number format of the cell. The text values for the various formats are shown in the following table. Returns "-" at the end of the text value if the cell is formatted in color for negative values. Returns "()" at the end of the text value if the cell is formatted with parentheses for positive or all values.

"parentheses"	1 if the cell is formatted with parentheses for positive or all values; otherwise returns 0.

"prefix"	Text value corresponding to the "label prefix" of the cell. Returns single quotation mark (') if the cell contains left-aligned text, double quotation mark (") if the cell contains right-aligned text, caret (^) if the cell contains centered text, backslash (\) if the cell contains fill-aligned text, and empty text ("") if the cell contains anything else.

"protect"	0 if the cell is not locked, and 1 if the cell is locked.

"row"	Row number of the cell in reference. .

"type"	Text value corresponding to the type of data in the cell. Returns "b" for blank if the cell is empty, "l" for label if the cell contains a text constant, and "v" for value if the cell contains anything else.

"width"	Column width of the cell rounded off to an integer. Each unit of column width is equal to the width of one character in the default font size.

Reference    is the cell that you want information about.

The following list describes the text values CELL returns when info_type is "format" and reference is a cell formatted with a built-in number format.

If the Microsoft Excel format is	CELL returns

General 	"G"

0	"F0"

#,##0 	",0"

0.00	"F2"

#,##0.00 	",2"

$#,##0_);($#,##0) 	"C0'

$#,##0_);[Red]($#,##0) 	"C0-"

$#,##0.00_);($#,##0.00)	"C2"

$#,##0.00_);[Red]($#,##0.00) 	"C2-"

0% 	"P0"

0.00% 	"P2"

0.00E+00 	"S2"

# ?/? or # ??/??	"G"

m/d/yy or m/d/yy h:mm or mm/dd/yy.	"D4"

d-mmm-yy or dd-mmm-yy	"D1"

d-mmm or dd-mmm	"D2"

mmm-yy 	"D3"

mm/dd	"D5"

h:mm AM/PM 	"D7"

h:mm:ss AM/PM 	"D6"

h:mm 	"D9"

h:mm:ss 	"D8"

If the info_type argument in the CELL formula is "format", and if the cell is formatted later with a custom format, then you must recalculate the worksheet to update the CELL formula. For more information about formats, see "Formatting a Worksheet" In Chapter 12 of Microsoft Excel User's Guide or Overview of using number formats in online Help.

Remarks

The CELL function is provided for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs. If you need to use cell information in a macro, GET.CELL provides a broader set of attributes.

Examples

CELL("row",A20) equals 20

If B12 has the format "d-mmm", then:

CELL("format",B12) equals "D2"

If A3 contains TOTAL, then:

CELL("contents", A3) equals "TOTAL"

Related Functions

List of Information Functions


CHOOSE

Uses index_num to return a value from the list of value arguments. Use CHOOSE to select one of up to 29 values based on the index number. For example, if value1 through value7 are the days of the week, CHOOSE returns one of the days when a number between 1 and 7 is used as index_num.

Syntax

CHOOSE(index_num, value1, value2, …)

Index_num    specifies which value argument is selected. Index_num must be a number between 1 and 29, or a formula or reference to a cell containing a number between 1 and 29.

If index_num is 1, CHOOSE returns value1; if it is 2, CHOOSE returns value2; and so on.

If index_num is less than 1 or greater than the number of the last value in the list, CHOOSE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If index_num is a fraction, it is truncated to the lowest integer before being used.

Value1, value2,…    are 1 to 29 value arguments from which CHOOSE selects a value or an action to perform based on index_num. The arguments can be numbers, cell references, defined names, formulas, macro functions, or text.

Remarks

If you are using CHOOSE in a macro, the value arguments can be GOTO functions or action-taking functions. For example, the following formulas are allowed in a macro, where Level is a name referring to a value or a cell containing a value between 1 and 3:

CHOOSE(Level,GOTO(Begin),GOTO(Intermed),GOTO(Adv))

CHOOSE(Level,ACTIVATE.NEXT(),ACTIVATE.PREV())

If index_num is an array, every value is evaluated when CHOOSE is executed. If some of those value arguments are action-taking functions, all the actions are taken. For example, the following formula opens both a new worksheet and a new chart:

CHOOSE({1,2},NEW(1),NEW(2))

The value arguments to CHOOSE can be range references as well as single values. For example, the formula:

SUM(CHOOSE(2,A1:A10,B1:B10,C1:C10))

evaluates to:

SUM(B1:B10)

which then returns a value based on the values in the range B1:B10.

The CHOOSE function is evaluated first, returning the reference B1:B10. The SUM function is then evaluated using B1:B10, the result of the CHOOSE function, as its argument.

Examples

CHOOSE(2,"1st","2nd","3rd","Finished") equals "2nd"

SUM(A1:CHOOSE(3,A10,A20,A30)) equals SUM(A1:A30)

If A10 contains 4, then:

CHOOSE(A10,"Nails","Screws","Nuts","Bolts") equals "Bolts"

If A10-3 equals 3, then:

CHOOSE(A10-3,"1st","2nd","3rd","Finished") equals "3rd"

If SalesOld is a name defined to refer to the value 10,000, then:

CHOOSE(2,SalesNew,SalesOld,SalesBudget) equals 10,000

Related Function

INDEX	Uses an index to choose a value from a reference or array

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


COLUMN

Returns the column number of the given reference.

Syntax

COLUMN(reference)

Reference    is the cell or range of cells for which you want the column number.

If reference is omitted, it is assumed to be the reference of the cell in which the COLUMN function appears.

If reference is a range of cells and if COLUMN is entered as a horizontal array, COLUMN returns the column numbers of reference as a horizontal array.

Reference cannot refer to multiple areas.

Examples

COLUMN(A3) equals 1

When entered as an array in any three horizontally contiguous cells:

COLUMN(A3:C5) equals {1,2,3}

If COLUMN is entered in C5, then:

COLUMN() equals COLUMN(C5) equals 3

Related Functions

COLUMNS	Returns the number of columns in a reference

ROW	Returns the row number of a reference

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


COLUMNS

Returns the number of columns in an array or reference.

Syntax

COLUMNS(array)

Array    is an array or array formula, or a reference to a range of cells for which you want the number of columns.

Examples

COLUMNS(A1:C4) equals 3

COLUMNS({1,2,3;4,5,6}) equals 3

The following macro formula returns the number of columns in a contiguous selection:

COLUMNS(SELECTION())

If the selection is not contiguous, the following macro formula returns the number of columns in a particular area (specified by AreaNum) of the selection. An "area" is a contiguous region within a nonadjacent selection, so a nonadjacent selection consists of multiple areas.

COLUMNS(INDEX(SELECTION(),,,AreaNum))

Related Functions

COLUMN	Returns the column number of a reference

ROWS	Returns the number of rows in a reference

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


ERROR.TYPE

Returns a number corresponding to one of Microsoft Excel's error values. Use ERROR.TYPE to determine what type of error occurred so that your macro can run an appropriate error-handling subroutine. ERROR.TYPE can also be used on a worksheet.

Syntax

ERROR.TYPE(error_val)

Error_val    is the error value whose identifying number you want to find. Although error_val can be the actual error value, it will usually be a reference to a cell containing a formula that you want to test.

If error_val is	ERROR.TYPE returns

#NULL!	1

#DIV/0!	2

#VALUE!	3

#REF!	4

#NAME?	5

#NUM!	6

#N/A	7

Anything else	#N/A

Example

The following macro formula checks the cell named Ratio to see if it contains a #DIV/0! error value. If it does, a subroutine named DivisionByZero is run.

IF(ERROR.TYPE(Ratio)=2,DivisionByZero())

Related Functions

ISERR	Returns TRUE if the value is any error value except #N/A

ISERROR	Returns TRUE if the value is any error value

List of Information Functions


FIND

Finds one string of text within another string of text and returns the number of the character at which find_text first occurs. You can also use SEARCH to find one string of text within another, but unlike SEARCH, FIND is case-sensitive and doesn't allow wildcard characters.

Syntax

FIND(find_text, within_text, start_num)

Find_text    is the text you want to find.

If find_text is "" (empty text), FIND matches the first character in the search string (that is, the character numbered start_num or 1).

Find_text cannot contain any wildcard characters.

Within_text    is the text containing the text you want to find.

Start_num    specifies the character at which to start the search. The first character in within_text is character number 1. If you omit start_num, it is assumed to be 1.

Remarks

If find_text does not appear in within_text, FIND returns the #VALUE! error value.

If start_num is not greater than zero, FIND returns the #VALUE! error value.

If start_num is greater than the length of within_text, FIND returns the #VALUE! error value.

Examples

FIND("M","Miriam McGovern") equals 1

FIND("m","Miriam McGovern") equals 6

FIND("M","Miriam McGovern",3) equals 8

Suppose you have a list of parts and serial numbers in a worksheet, and you want to extract the names of the parts, but not the serial numbers, from each cell. You can use the FIND function to find the # symbol, and the MID function to omit the serial number. A2:A4 contain the following parts with serial numbers, respectively: "Ceramic Insulators #124-TD45-87", "Copper Coils #12-671-6772", "Variable Resistors #116010".

MID(A2,1,FIND(" #",A2,1)-1) returns "Ceramic Insulators"

MID(A3,1,FIND(" #",A3,1)-1) returns "Copper Coils"

MID(A4,1,FIND(" #",A4,1)-1) returns "Variable Resistors"

Related Functions

EXACT	Checks to see if two text values are identical

LEN	Returns the number of characters in a text string

MID	Returns a specific number of characters from a text string

SEARCH	Finds one text value within another (not case-sensitive)

List of Text Functions


HLOOKUP

Searches the top row of an array for a particular value, and returns the value in the indicated cell. Use HLOOKUP when your comparison values are located in a row across the top of a table of data and you want to look down a specified number of rows. Use VLOOKUP when your comparison values are located in a column to the left or right of the data you want to find.

Syntax

HLOOKUP(lookup_value, table_array, row_index_num, range_lookup)

Lookup_value    is the value to be found in the first row of the table. Lookup_value can be a value, a reference, or a text string

Table_array    is a table of information in which data is looked up. Use a reference to a range or a range name.

The values in the first row of table_array can be text, numbers, or logical values.

If range_lookup is TRUE, the values in the first row of table_array must be placed in ascending order: ...-2, -1, 0, 1, 2,... , A-Z, FALSE, TRUE; otherwise, HLOOKUP may not give the correct value. If range_lookup is FALSE, table_array does not need to be sorted.

Uppercase and lowercase text are equivalent.

You can put values in ascending order by selecting the values, choosing the Sort command from the Data menu, and selecting Sort By Columns and Ascending.

Row_index_num    is the row number in table_array from which the matching value should be returned. A row_index_num of 1 returns the first row value in table_array, a row_index_num of 2 returns the second row value in table_array, and so on. If row_index_num is less than 1, HLOOKUP returns the #VALUE! error value; if row_index_num is greater than the number of rows on table_array, HLOOKUP returns the #REF! error value.

Range_lookup    Is a logical value that specifies whether you want HLOOKUP to find an exact match or an approximate match.  If TRUE or omitted, an approximate match is returned; in other words, if an exact match is not found, the next largest value that is less than lookup_value is returned. If FALSE, HLOOKUP will find an exact match.  If one is not found, the error value #N/A is returned.

Remarks

If HLOOKUP can't find lookup_value, and range_lookup is TRUE, it uses the largest value that is less than lookup_value.

If lookup_value is smaller than the smallest value in the first row of table_array, HLOOKUP returns the #N/A error value.

Examples

Suppose you have an inventory worksheet of auto parts. A1:A4 contain "Axles", 4, 5, 6. B1:B4 contain "Bearings", 4, 7, 8. C1:C4 contain "Bolts", 9, 10, 11.

HLOOKUP("Axles", A1:C4,2,TRUE) equals 4

HLOOKUP("Bearings",A1:C4,3,FALSE) equals 7

HLOOKUP("Bearings",A1:C4,3,TRUE) equals 7

HLOOKUP("Bolts",A1:C4,4,) equals 11

Table_array can also be an array constant:

HLOOKUP(3,{1,2,3;"a","b","c";"d","e","f"},2,TRUE) equals "c"

Related Functions

INDEX	Uses an index to choose a value from a reference or array

LOOKUP 	Looks up values in either a vector or an array

MATCH	Looks up values in a reference or array

VLOOKUP	Looks in the first column of an array and moves across the row to return the value of a cell

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


IF

Returns one value if logical_test evaluates to TRUE and another value if it evaluates to FALSE.

There are two syntax forms of the IF function. Syntax 1 can be used on worksheets and macro sheets. Syntax 2 can only be used on macro sheets in conjunction with the ELSE, ELSE.IF, and END.IF functions.

Use IF to conduct conditional tests on values and formulas and to branch based on the result of that test. The outcome of the test determines the value returned by the IF function.

Syntax 1

Worksheets and macro sheets

IF(logical_test, value_if_true, value_if_false)

Logical_test    is any value or expression that can be evaluated to TRUE or FALSE.

Value_if_true    is the value that is returned if logical_test is TRUE. If logical_test is TRUE and value_if_true is omitted, TRUE is returned.

Value_if_false    is the value that is returned if logical_test is FALSE. If logical_test is FALSE and value_if_false is omitted, FALSE is returned.

Remarks

Up to seven IF functions can be nested as value_if_true and value_if_false arguments to construct more elaborate tests. See the following last example.

If you are using IF in a macro, value_if_true and value_if_false can also be GOTO functions, other macros, or action-taking functions.

For example, the following formula is allowed in a macro:

IF(Number>10,GOTO(Large),GOTO(Small))

In the preceding example, if Number is greater than 10, then logical_test is TRUE, the value_if_true statement is evaluated, and the macro function GOTO(Large) is run. If Number is less than or equal to 10, then logical_test is FALSE, value_if_false is evaluated, and the macro function GOTO(Small) is run.

When the value_if_true and value_if_false arguments are evaluated, IF returns the value returned by those statements. In the preceding example, if the number is not greater than 10, TRUE is still returned if the second GOTO statement is successful.

If any of the arguments to IF are arrays, every element of the array is evaluated when the IF statement is carried out. If some of the value_if_true and value_if_false arguments are action-taking functions, all of the actions are taken. For example, the following macro formula runs both ALERT functions:

IF({TRUE,FALSE},ALERT("One",2),ALERT("Two",2))

Examples

In the following example, if the value referred to by the name File is equal to "Chart", logical_test is TRUE and the macro function NEW(2) is carried out, otherwise, logical_test is FALSE and NEW(1) is carried out:

IF(File="Chart",NEW(2),NEW(1))

Suppose an expense worksheet contains in B2:B4 the following data for "Actual Expenses" for January, February, and March: 1500, 500, 500. C2:C4 contains the following data for "Predicted Expenses" for the same periods: 900, 900, 925.

You could write a macro to check whether you are over budget for a particular month, generating text for a message with the following formulas:

IF(B2>C2,"Over Budget","OK") equals "Over Budget"

IF(B3>C3,"Over Budget","OK") equals "OK"

Suppose you want to assign letter grades to numbers referenced by the name Average. See the following table.

If Average is	Then return

Greater than 89	A

From 80 to 89	B

From 70 to 79	C

From 60 to 69	D

Less than 60	F

You could use the following nested IF function:

IF(Average>89,"A",IF(Average>79,"B",
IF(Average>69,"C",IF(Average>59,"D","F"))))

In the preceding example, the second IF statement is also the value_if_false argument to the first IF statement. Similarly, the third IF statement is the value_if_false argument to the second IF statement. For example, if the first logical_test (Average>89) is TRUE, "A" is returned. If the first logical_test is FALSE, the second IF statement is evaluated, and so on.

Related Functions

AND	Returns TRUE if all its arguments are TRUE

FALSE	Returns the logical value FALSE

NOT	Reverses the logic of its argument

OR	Returns TRUE if any argument is TRUE

TRUE	Returns the logical value TRUE

List of Logical Functions


INDEX

There are two forms of the INDEX() function: reference and array.  The reference form always returns a reference; the array form always returns a value or an array of values.

INDEX(reference,row_num,column_num,area_num) returns a reference to a specified cell or cells within reference.

INDEX(array,row_num,column_num) returns the value of a specified cell or array of cells within array.

Syntax 1 (array)

Syntax 2 (reference)

Related Functions

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


   INDEX

Returns the reference of the cell at the intersection of a particular row and column. If the reference is made up of nonadjacent selections, you can pick the selection to look in.

The INDEX function has two syntax forms: reference and array. The reference form always returns a reference; the array form always returns a value or an array of values.

Syntax 1

Reference form

INDEX(reference, row_num, column_num, area_num)

Reference    is a reference to one or more cell ranges.

If you are entering a nonadjacent selection for reference, enclose reference in parentheses. For an example of using INDEX with a nonadjacent selection, see the fifth example following.

If each area in reference contains only one row or column, the row_num or column_num argument, respectively, is optional. For example, for a single row reference, use INDEX(reference,,column_num).

Row_num    is the number of the row in reference from which to return a reference.

Column_num    is the number of the column in reference from which to return a reference.

Area_num    selects a range in reference from which to return the intersection of row_num and column_num. The first area selected or entered is numbered 1, the second is 2, and so on. If area_num is omitted, INDEX uses area 1.

For example, if reference describes the cells (A1:B4,D1:E4,G1:H4), then area_num 1 is the range A1:B4, area_num 2 is the range D1:E4, and area_num 3 is the range G1:H4.

After reference and area_num have selected a particular range, row_num and column_num select a particular cell: row_num 1 is the first row in the range, column_num 1 is the first column, and so on. The reference returned by INDEX is the intersection of row_num and column_num.

If you set row_num or column_num to 0, INDEX returns the reference for the entire column or row, respectively.

Remarks

Row_num, column_num, and area_num must point to a cell within reference; otherwise, INDEX returns the #REF! error value. If row_num and column_num are omitted, INDEX returns the area in reference specified by area_num.

The result of the INDEX function is a reference and is interpreted as such by other formulas. Depending on the formula, the return value of INDEX may be used as a reference or as a value. For example, the macro formula CELL("width",INDEX(A1:B2,1,2)) is equivalent to CELL("width",B1). The CELL function uses the return value of INDEX as a cell reference. On the other hand, a formula such as 2*INDEX(A1:B2,1,2) translates the return value of INDEX into the number in cell B1.

Examples

In the following worksheet, the range A2:C6 is named Fruit, the range A8:C11 is named Nuts, and the range A1:C11 is named Stock.

INDEX(Fruit,2,3) equals the reference C3, containing 38

INDEX(Nuts,1,1) equals the reference A8, containing "Almonds"

INDEX(Fruit,2,4) equals the #REF! error value, because the column_num argument (4) is out of range

INDEX(Stock,1,2) equals the reference B2, containing "Price"

INDEX((A1:C6,A8:C11),2,2,2) equals the reference B9, containing $3.55

SUM(INDEX(Stock,0,3,1)) equals SUM(C1:C11) equals 216

SUM(B2:INDEX(Fruit,5,2)) equals SUM(B2:B6) equals 2.42

Related Functions

CHOOSE	Chooses a value from a list of values

HLOOKUP	Looks in the top row of an array and returns the value of the indicated cell

LOOKUP 	Looks up values in a reference or array

MATCH	Looks up values in a reference or array

VLOOKUP	Looks in the first column of an array and moves across the row to return the value of a cell

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


  INDEX

Returns the value of an element in an array, selected by the row and column number indexes.

The INDEX function has two syntax forms: reference and array. The reference form always returns a reference; the array form always returns a value or array of values. Use the array form when the first argument to INDEX is an array constant.

Syntax 2

INDEX(array, row_num, column_num)

Array form

Array    is a range of cells entered as an array.

Row_num    selects the row in array from which to return a value. If row_num is omitted, column_num is required.

Column_num    selects the column in array from which to return a value. If column_num is omitted, row_num is required.

If both the row_num  and column_num arguments are used, INDEX returns the value in the cell at the intersection of row_num and column_num.

If array contains only one row or column, the corresponding row_num or column_num argument is optional.

If array has more than one row and more than one column, and only row_num or column_num is used, INDEX returns an array of the entire row or column in array.

If you set row_num or column_num to 0, INDEX returns the array of values for the entire column or row, respectively. To use values returned as an array, enter the INDEX function as an array in a horizontal array of cells. Arrays are entered by pressing CTRL+SHIFT+ENTER (in Microsoft Excel for Windows) or COMMAND+RETURN (in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh).

Remarks

Row_num and column_num must point to a cell within array; otherwise, INDEX returns the #REF! error value.

Examples

INDEX({1,2;3,4},2,2) equals 4

If entered as an array formula, then:

INDEX({1,2;3,4},0,2) equals {2;4}

Related Functions

CHOOSE	Chooses a value from a list of values

HLOOKUP	Looks in the top row of an array and returns the value of the indicated cell

LOOKUP	Looks up values in a reference or array

MATCH	Looks up values in a reference or array

VLOOKUP	Looks in the first column of an array and moves across the row to return the value of a cell

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


INDIRECT

Returns the reference specified by ref_text. References are immediately evaluated to display their contents. Use INDIRECT to get the value stored in a cell indicated by a reference in another cell.

Syntax

INDIRECT(ref_text, a1)

Ref_text    is a reference to a cell that contains an A1- style reference, an R1C1-style reference, or a name defined as a reference. If ref_text is not a valid cell reference, INDIRECT returns the #REF! error value.

A1    is a logical value that specifies what type of reference is contained in the cell ref_text.

If a1 is TRUE or omitted, ref_text is interpreted as an A1-style reference.

If a1 is FALSE, ref_text is interpreted as an R1C1-style reference.

Examples

If cell A1 contains the text "B2", and cell B2 contains the value 1.333, then:

INDIRECT($A$1) equals 1.333

If the workspace is set to display R1C1-style references, cell R1C1 contains R2C2, and cell R2C2 contains the value 1.333, then:

INT(INDIRECT(R1C1,FALSE)) equals 1

If B3 contains the text "George", and a cell defined as George contains the value 10, then:

INDIRECT($B$3) equals 10

Related Functions

OFFSET	Returns a reference offset from a given reference

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


INFO

Returns information about the current operating environment.

Syntax

INFO(type_text)

Type_text    is text specifying what type of information you want returned.

Type_text	Returns

"directory"	Path of the current directory or folder

"memavail"	Amount of memory available, in bytes

"memused"	Amount of memory being used for data

"numfile"	Number of active worksheets

"origin"	Absolute A1-style reference, as text, prepended with "$A:" for Lotus 1-2-3 release 3.x compatibility. Returns the cell reference of the top and left most cell visible in the window based on the current scrolling position.

"osversion"	Current operating system version, as text

"recalc"	Current recalculation mode; returns "Automatic" or "Manual"

"release"	Version of Microsoft Excel, as text

"system"	Name of the operating environment:
Macintosh = "mac"
Windows = "pcdos"

"totmem"	Total memory available, including memory already in use, in bytes

Examples

The following formula returns 2 if two worksheets are currently open:

INFO("numfile")

Related Functions

CELL	Returns information about the formatting, location, or contents of a cell

List of Information Functions


CALL

Calls a procedure in a dynamic link library or code resource. There are two syntax forms of this function. Use syntax 1 only with a previously registered code resource, which uses arguments from the REGISTER function. Use syntax 2a or 2b to simultaneously register and call a code resource.

For more information about DLLs and code resources, see the "Using the CALL and REGISTER Functions" in the Appendix for the Worksheet Function Reference, or Using the CALL and REGISTER Functions in online Help.

Important   This function is provided for advanced users only. If you use the CALL function incorrectly, you could cause errors that will require you to restart your computer.

Syntax 1

Used with REGISTER

CALL(register_id, argument1, ...)

Syntax 2a

Used alone (in Microsoft Excel for Windows)

CALL(module_text, procedure, type_text, argument1, ...)

Syntax 2b

Used alone (in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh)

CALL(file_text, resource, type_text, argument1, ...)

Register_id    is the value returned by a previously executed REGISTER or REGISTER.ID function.

Argument1,...    are the arguments to be passed to the procedure.

Module_text    is quoted text specifying the name of the dynamic link library (DLL) that contains the procedure in Microsoft Excel for Windows.

File_text     is the name of the file that contains the code resource in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh.

Procedure    is text specifying the name of the function in the DLL in Microsoft Excel for Windows. You can also use the ordinal value of the function from the EXPORTS statement in the module-definition file (.DEF). The ordinal value should not be in the form of text.

Resource    is the name of the code resource in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh. You can also use the resource ID number. The resource ID number should not be in the form of text.

Type_text    is text specifying the data type of the return value and the data types of all arguments to the DLL or code resource. The first letter of type_text specifies the return value. The codes you use for type_text are described in detail in, "Using the CALL and REGISTER Functions" in the Appendix for Microsoft Excel Function Reference or in or Using the CALL and REGISTER Functions in online Help. For stand-alone DLLs or code resources (XLLs), you can omit this argument.

Example

Syntax 1

In Microsoft Excel for Windows, the following macro formula registers the GetTickCount function from Microsoft Windows. GetTickCount returns the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since Microsoft Windows was started.

REGISTER("User","GetTickCount","J")

Assuming that this REGISTER function is in cell A5, after your macro registers GetTickCount, you can use the CALL function to return the number of milliseconds that have elapsed:

CALL(A5)

Example

Syntax 2a

On a worksheet, you can use the following CALL formula (syntax 2a) to call the GetTickCount function:

CALL("User","GetTickCount","J!")

The ! in the type_text argument forces Microsoft Excel to recalculate the CALL function every time the worksheet recalculates. This updates the elapsed time whenever the worksheet recalculates.

Tip   You can use optional arguments to the REGISTER function to assign a custom name to a function. This name will appear in the Paste Function dialog box, and you can call the function by using its custom name in a formula. For more information, see REGISTER.

Related Functions

REGISTER.ID	Returns the register ID of the resource

List of DDE & External Functions


LOOKUP

Looks up values in a vector or array. The LOOKUP function has two syntax forms, vector and array. The vector form of LOOKUP looks in a vector a value, moves to the correspondint position in a second vector, and returns this value. The array form of LOOKUP looks in the first row or column of an array for the specified value, moves down or across to the last cell, and returns the value of the cell.

Syntax 1 (vector)

Syntax 2 (array)


LOOKUP Syntax 1
LOOKUP

The LOOKUP function has two syntax forms, vector and array.

A vector is an array that contains only one row or one column. The vector form of LOOKUP looks in a vector for a value, moves to the corresponding position in a second vector, and returns this value. Use this form of the LOOKUP function when you want to be able to specify the range that contains the values you want to match. The other form of LOOKUP automatically looks in the first column or row.

Syntax 1

Vector form

LOOKUP(lookup_value, lookup_vector, result_vector)

Lookup_value    is a value that LOOKUP searches for in the first vector. Lookup_value can be a number, text, a logical value, or a name or reference that refers to a value.

Lookup_vector    is a range that contains only one row or one column. The values in lookup_vector can be text, numbers, or logical values.

Important   The values in lookup_vector must be placed in ascending order: ...,-2, -1, 0, 1, 2, ..., A-Z, FALSE, TRUE; otherwise, LOOKUP may not give the correct value. Uppercase and lowercase text are equivalent.

Result_vector    is a range that contains only one row or column. It should be the same size as lookup_vector.

If LOOKUP can't find the lookup_value, it matches the largest value in lookup_vector that is less than or equal to lookup_value.

If lookup_value is smaller than the smallest value in lookup_vector, LOOKUP gives the #N/A error value.

Examples

In the preceding worksheet:

LOOKUP(4.91,A2:A7,B2:B7) equals "orange"

LOOKUP(5.00,A2:A7,B2:B7) equals "orange"

LOOKUP(7.66,A2:A7,B2:B7) equals "violet"

LOOKUP(7.66E-14,A2:A7,B2:B7) equals #N/A, because 7.66E-14 is less than the smallest value in the lookup_vector A2:A7

Related Functions

LOOKUP (array )	Looks up values in an array

HLOOKUP	Looks in the top row of an array and returns the value of the indicated cell

INDEX	Uses an index to choose a value from a reference or array

VLOOKUP	Looks in the first column of an array and moves across the row to return the value of a cell

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


LOOKUP Syntax 2
LOOKUP

The LOOKUP function has two syntax forms, vector and array.

The array form of LOOKUP looks in the first row or column of an array for the specified value, moves down or across to the last cell, and returns the value of the cell. Use this form of LOOKUP when the values you want to match are in the first row or column of the array. Use the other form of LOOKUP when you want to be able to specify the location of the column or row.

Tip   In general, it's best to use the HLOOKUP or VLOOKUP function instead of the array form of LOOKUP. This form of LOOKUP is provided for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.

Syntax 2

Array form

LOOKUP(lookup_value, array)

Lookup_value    is a value that LOOKUP searches for in an array. Lookup_value can be a number, text, a logical value, or a name or reference that refers to a value.

If LOOKUP can't find the lookup_value, it uses the largest value in the array that is less than or equal to lookup_value.

If lookup_value is smaller than the smallest value in the first row or column (depending on the array dimensions), LOOKUP returns the #N/A error value.

Array    is a range of cells that contains text, numbers, or logical values that you want to compare with lookup_value.

The array form of LOOKUP is very similar to the HLOOKUP and VLOOKUP functions. The difference is that HLOOKUP searches for lookup_value in the first row, VLOOKUP searches in the first column, and LOOKUP searches according to the dimensions of array.

If array is square, or covers an area that is wider than it is tall (more columns than rows), LOOKUP searches for lookup_value in the first row.

If array is taller than it is wide (more rows than columns), LOOKUP searches in the first column.

HLOOKUP and VLOOKUP allow you to index down or across, but LOOKUP always selects the last value in the row or column.

Important   The values must be placed in ascending order: ...,-2, -1, 0, 1, 2, ..., A-Z, FALSE, TRUE; otherwise, LOOKUP may not give the correct value. Uppercase and lowercase text are equivalent.

Examples

LOOKUP("C",{"a","b","c","d";1,2,3,4}) equals 3

LOOKUP("bump",{"a",1;"b",2;"c",3}) equals 2

Related Functions

LOOKUP (vector)	Looks up values in a vector

HLOOKUP	Looks in the top row of an array and returns the value of the indicated cell

INDEX	Uses an index to choose a value from a reference or array

MATCH	Looks up values in a reference or array

VLOOKUP	Looks in the first column of an array and moves across the row to return the value of a cell

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


MATCH

Returns the relative position of an element in an array that matches a specified value in a specified way. Use MATCH instead of one of the LOOKUP functions when you need the position of a matched item instead of the item itself.

Syntax

MATCH(lookup_value, lookup_array, match_type)

Lookup_value    is the value you use to find the value you want in a table.

Lookup_value is the value you want to match in lookup_array. For example, when you look up someone's number in a telephone book, you are using the person's name as the lookup value, but the telephone number is the value you want.

Lookup_value can be a value (number, text, or logical value) or a cell reference to a number, text, or logical value.

Lookup_array    is a contiguous range of cells containing possible lookup values. Lookup_array can be an array or an array reference.

Match_type    is the number -1, 0, or 1. Match_type specifies how Microsoft Excel matches lookup_value with values in lookup_array.

If match_type is 1, MATCH finds the largest value that is less than or equal to lookup_value. Lookup_array must be placed in ascending order: ...-2, -1, 0, 1, 2,...A-Z, FALSE, TRUE.

If match_type is 0, MATCH finds the first value that is exactly equal to lookup_value. Lookup_array can be in any order.

If match_type is -1, MATCH finds the smallest value that is greater than or equal to lookup_value. Lookup_array must be placed in descending order: TRUE, FALSE, Z-A,...2, 1, 0, -1, -2,..., and so on.

If match_type is omitted, it is assumed to be 1.

Remarks

MATCH returns the position of the matched value within lookup_array, not the value itself. For example: MATCH("b",{"a","b","c"},0) returns 2, the relative position of "b" within the array {"a","b","c"}.

MATCH does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase letters when matching text values.

If MATCH is unsuccessful in finding a match, it returns the #N/A error value.

If match_type is 0 and lookup_value is text, lookup_value can contain the wildcard characters, asterisk (*) and question mark (?). An asterisk matches any sequence of characters; a question mark matches any single character.

Examples

Note that C2:C8 contains text formatted as percent numbers.

In the preceding worksheet:

MATCH(39000,B2:B8,1) equals 3

MATCH(38000,B2:B8,0) equals 2

MATCH(39000,B2:B8,-1) equals the #N/A error value because the range B2:B8 is ordered incorrectly for match_type -1 matching (the order must be descending to be correct).

Suppose Yen refers to A2:A8, YenDollar to A2:C8, and MyIncome to a cell containing the number ¥6,301,126.33. This formula:

"Your tax rate is "&LOOKUP(MyIncome,YenDollar)&", which places you in tax bracket number "&MATCH(MyIncome,Yen)&"."

produces this result:

"Your tax rate is 22.41%, which places you in tax bracket number 7."

Related Functions

HLOOKUP	Looks in the top row of an array and returns the value of the indicated cell

VLOOKUP	Looks in the first column of an array and moves across the row to return the value of a cell

INDEX	Uses an index to choose a value from a reference or array

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


OFFSET

Returns a reference of a specified height and width, offset from another reference by a specified number of rows and columns.

Syntax

OFFSET(reference, rows, cols, height, width)

Reference    is the reference from which you want to base the offset. If reference is a multiple selection, OFFSET returns the #VALUE! error value.

Rows    is the number of rows, up or down, that you want the upper-left cell to refer to. Using 5 as the rows argument specifies that the upper-left cell in the reference is five rows below reference. Rows can be positive or negative.

Cols    is the number of columns, to the left or right, that you want the upper-left cell of the result to refer to. Using 5 as the cols argument specifies that the upper-left cell in the reference is five columns to the right of reference. Cols can be positive or negative.

If rows and cols offset reference over the edge of the worksheet, OFFSET returns the #REF! error value.

Height    is the height, in number of rows, that you want the returned reference to be. Height must be a positive number.

Width    is the width, in number of columns, that you want the returned reference to be. Width must be a positive number.

If height or width is omitted, it is assumed to be the same height or width as reference.

Remarks

OFFSET doesn't actually move any cells or change the selection; it just returns a reference. OFFSET can be used with any function expecting a reference argument. For example, to select a range offset from the current selection, use OFFSET with the SELECT and SELECTION functions. You can also select a cell offset from the current selection by using a relative reference with the SELECT function, for example, SELECT("R[1]C").

Examples

OFFSET(C3,2,3,1,1) equals F5. If you enter this formula on a worksheet, Microsoft Excel displays the value contained in cell F5.

OFFSET(C3:E5,-1,0,3,3) equals C2:E4

OFFSET(C3:E5,0,-3,3,3) equals #REF!

The following macro formula selects a range of the same size as the current selection one row down:

SELECT(OFFSET(SELECTION(),1,0))

The following macro formula puts the result of the DOCUMENTS function into a range with a height of one row and a width corresponding to the number of columns returned by the COLUMNS function, and offset from the active cell by one row and one column:

FORMULA.ARRAY(DOCUMENTS(),OFFSET(ACTIVE.CELL(),1,1,1,
COLUMNS(DOCUMENTS())))

Related Functions

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


ROW

Returns the row number of a reference.

Syntax

ROW(reference)

Reference    is the cell or range of cells for which you want the row number.

If reference is omitted, it is assumed to be the reference of the cell in which the ROW function appears.

If reference is a range of cells and if ROW is entered as a vertical array, ROW returns the row numbers of reference as a vertical array.

Reference cannot refer to multiple areas.

Examples

ROW(A3) equals 3

When entered as an array formula in three vertical cells:

ROW(A3:B5) equals {3;4;5}

If ROW is entered in C5, then:

ROW() equals ROW(C5) equals 5

The following macro formula tells you which row the active cell is in:

ROW(ACTIVE.CELL())

Related Functions

COLUMN	Returns the column number of a reference

ROWS	Returns the number of rows in a reference

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


ROWS

Returns the number of rows in a reference or array.

Syntax

ROWS(array)

Array    is an array, an array formula, or a reference to a range of cells for which you want the number of rows.

Examples

ROWS(A1:C4) equals 4

ROWS({1,2,3;4,5,6}) equals 2

The following macro formula calculates the number of rows in the current selection:

ROWS(SELECTION())

The following macro formula calculates the number of rows in the third area in a discontinuous selection (specified by the area_num argument to INDEX) of the current multiple selection:

ROWS(INDEX(SELECTION(),,,3))

Related Functions

COLUMNS	Returns the number of columns in a reference

ROW	Returns the row number of a reference

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


SEARCH

Returns the number of the character at which a specific character or text string is first found, reading from left to right. Use SEARCH to discover the location of a character or text string within another text string, so that you can use the MID or REPLACE functions to change the text.

Syntax

SEARCH(find_text, within_text, start_num)

Find_text    is the text you want to find. You can use the wildcard characters, question mark (?) and asterisk (*), in find_text. A question mark matches any single character; an asterisk matches any sequence of characters. If you want to find an actual question mark or asterisk, type a tilde (~) before the character. If find_text is not found, the #VALUE! error value is returned.

Within_text    is the text in which you want to search for find_text.

Start_num    is the character number in within_text, counting from the left, at which you want to start searching.

If start_num is omitted, it is assumed to be 1.

If start_num is not greater than 0 or is greater than the length of within_text, the #VALUE! error value is returned.

Tip   Use start_num to skip a specified number of characters from the left of the text. For example, suppose you are working with a text string such as "AYF0093.YoungMensApparel". To find the number of the first "Y" in the descriptive part of the text string, set start_num equal to 8 so that the serial-number portion of the text is not searched. SEARCH begins with character 8, finds find_text at the next character, and returns the number 9. SEARCH always returns the number of characters from the left of the text string, not from start_num.

Remarks

SEARCH does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase letters when searching text.

SEARCH is similar to FIND, except that FIND is case-sensitive.

Examples

SEARCH("e","Statements",6) equals 7

If cell B17 contains the word "margin" and cell A14 contains "Profit Margin", then:

SEARCH($B$17,$A$14) equals 8

Use SEARCH with the REPLACE function to provide REPLACE with the correct start_num at which to begin inserting new text. Using the same cell references as the previous example:

REPLACE($A$14,SEARCH($B$17,$A$14),6,"Amount") returns the text "Profit Amount".

Related Functions

FIND	Finds one text value within another (case-sensitive)

MID	Returns a specific number of characters from a text string

REPLACE	Replaces characters within text

SUBSTITUTE	Substitutes new text for old text in a text string

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


TRANSPOSE

Returns the transpose of an array. TRANSPOSE must be entered as an array formula in a range that has the same number of rows and columns, respectively, as array has columns and rows. Use TRANSPOSE to shift the vertical and horizontal orientation of an array on a worksheet or macro sheet. For example, some functions, such as DOCUMENTS, return horizontal arrays. The following formula would return a vertical array from DOCUMENTS:

TRANSPOSE(DOCUMENTS())

Syntax

TRANSPOSE(array)

Array    is an array on a worksheet or macro sheet that you want to transpose. Array can also be a range of cells.

The transpose of an array is created by using the first row of the array as the first column of the new array, the second row of the array as the second column of the new array, and so on.

Tip   In a macro, you can transpose an array and paste only the values contained in the array, using the PASTE.SPECIAL macro function with 3 (values) as the paste_num argument and TRUE as the transpose argument.

Example

Suppose A1:C1 contain 1, 2, 3, respectively. When the following formula is entered as an array into cells A3:A5:

TRANSPOSE($A$1:$C$1) equals the same respective values in A3:A5

Related Functions

MDETERM	Returns the matrix determinant of an array

MINVERSE	Returns the matrix inverse of an array

MMULT	Returns the matrix product of two arrays

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


VLOOKUP

Searches the leftmost column of an array for a particular value, and returns the value in the cell indicated. Use VLOOKUP instead of HLOOKUP when your comparison values are located in a column to the left or right of the data you want to find.

Syntax

VLOOKUP(lookup_value, table_array, col_index_num, range_lookup)

Lookup_value    is the value to be found in the first column of the array. Lookup_value can be a value, a reference, or a text string.

Table_array    is the table of information in which data is looked up. Use a reference to a range or a range name, such as Database or List.

If range_lookup is TRUE, the values in the first column of table_array must be placed in ascending order: ..., -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, ... , A-Z, FALSE, TRUE; otherwise VLOOKUP may not give the correct value. If range_lookup is FALSE, table_array does not need to be sorted.

You can put the values in ascending order by choosing the Sort command from the Data menu and selecting Ascending.

The values in the first column of table_array can be text, numbers, or logical values.

Uppercase and lowercase text are equivalent.

Col_index_num    is the column number in table_array from which the matching value should be returned. A col_index_num of 1 returns the value in the first column in table_array; a col_index_num of 2 returns the value in the second column in table_array, and so on. If col_index_num is less than 1, VLOOKUP returns the #VALUE! error value; if col_index_num is greater than the number of columns in table_array, VLOOKUP returns the #REF! error value.

Range_lookup    is a logical value that specifies whether you want VLOOKUP to find an exact match or an approximate match.  If TRUE or omitted, an approximate match is returned; in other words, if an exact match is not found, the next largest value that is less than lookup_value is returned. If FALSE, VLOOKUP will find an exact match.  If one is not found, the error value #N/A is returned.

Remarks

If VLOOKUP can't find lookup_value, and range_lookup is TRUE, it uses the largest value that is less than or equal to lookup_value.

If lookup_value is smaller than the smallest value in the first column of table_array, VLOOKUP returns the #N/A error value.

if VLOOKUP can't find lookup_value and range_lookup is FALSE, VLOOKUP returns the #N/A value.

Examples

In the preceding worksheet, where the range A4:C12 is named Range:

VLOOKUP(1,Range,1,TRUE) equals 0.946

VLOOKUP(1,Range,2) equals 2.17

VLOOKUP(1,Range,3,TRUE) equals 100

VLOOKUP(.746,Range,3,FALSE) equals 200

VLOOKUP(0.1,Range,2,TRUE) equals #N/A, because 0.1 is less than the smallest value in column A

VLOOKUP(2,Range,2,TRUE) equals 1.71

Related Functions

HLOOKUP	Looks in the top row of an array and returns the value of the indicated cell

INDEX	Uses an index to choose a value from a reference or array

LOOKUP (array )	Looks up values in an array

LOOKUP (vector )	Looks up values in a vector

MATCH	Looks up values in a reference or array

List of Lookup & Reference Functions


CONCATENATE

Joins several text items into one text item.

Syntax

CONCATENATE (text1, text2, ...)

Text1, text2,...    are 1 to 30 text items to be joined into a single text item.  The text items can be text strings, numbers, or single-cell references.

Remarks

The "&" operator can be used instead of CONCATENATE to join text items.

Examples

CONCATENATE("Total ", "Value") equals "Total Value".  This is equivalent to typing
 "Total"&" "&"Value" .

Suppose in a stream survey worksheet, C2 contains "species", C5 contains " brook trout", and C8 contains the total 32.

CONCATENATE("Stream population for ",C5," ",C2," is ",C8,"/mile") equals "Stream population for brook trout species is 32/mile"

Related Functions

List of Text Functions


COUNTBLANK

Counts blank cells in the specified range.

Syntax

COUNTBLANK(range)

Range    is the range from which you want to count the blank cells.

Remarks

Cells with formulas that return "" (or empty text) are also counted.  Cells with zero values are not counted.

Example

Suppose in the above worksheet, B3 contains the following formula: IF(C3<30,"",C3), which returns "" (empty text).

COUNTBLANK(B2:C5) equals 2

Related Functions

COUNTIF	Counts the number of non-blank cells within a range which meet the given criteria

List of Information Functions


COUNTIF

Counts the number of cells within a range which meet the given criteria.

Syntax

COUNTIF(range, criteria)

Range    is the range of cells from which you want to count cells.

Criteria    is the criteria in the form of a number, expression, or text that defines which cells will be counted.  For example, criteria can be expressed as 32, "32", ">32", "apples".

Examples

Suppose A3:A6 contains "apples", "oranges", "peaches", "apples", respectively.

COUNTIF(A3:A6,"apples") equals 2

Suppose B3:B6 contains 32, 54, 75, 86, respectively.

COUNTIF(B3:B6,">55") equals 2

Related Functions

SUMIF	Adds the cells specified by a given criteria

COUNTBLANK	Counts blank cells in the specified range

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


POWER

Returns the result of a number raised to a power.

Syntax

POWER(number, power)

Number    is the base number.  It can be any real number.

Power    is the exponent, to which the base number is raised.

Remark

The "^" operator can be used instead of POWER to indicate to what power the base number is to be raised, such as in 5^2

Examples

POWER(5,2) equals 25

POWER(98.6,3.2) equals 2401077

POWER(4,5/4) equals 5.656854

Related Functions

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


ROUNDUP

Rounds a number up, away from zero.

Syntax

ROUNDUP(number, num_digits)

Number    is any real number that you want rounded up.

Num_digits    is the number of digits to which you want to round number.

Remarks

ROUNDUP behaves like ROUND, except that it always rounds a number up.

If num_digits is greater than 0, then number is rounded up to the specified number of decimal places.

If num_digits is 0 or omitted, then number is rounded up to the nearest integer.

If num_digits is less than 0, then number is rounded up to the left of the decimal point.

Examples

ROUNDUP(3.2,0) equals 4

ROUNDUP(76.9,0) equals 77

ROUNDUP(3.14159, 3) equals 3.142

ROUNDUP(-3.14159, 1) equals -3.2

ROUNDUP(31415.92654, -2) equals 31500

Related Functions

CEILING	Rounds a number to the nearest integer or to the nearest multiple of significance

FLOOR	Rounds a number down, toward zero

INT	Rounds a number down to the nearest integer

MOD	Returns the remainder from division

MROUND	Returns a number rounded to the desired multiple

TRUNC	Truncates a number to an integer

ROUND	Rounds a number to a specified number of digits

ROUNDDOWN	Rounds a number down, toward zero

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


ROUNDDOWN

Rounds a number down, toward zero.

Syntax

ROUNDDOWN(number, num_digits)

Number    is any real number that you want rounded down.

Num_digits    is the number of digits to which you want to round number.

Remark

ROUNDDOWN behaves like ROUND, except that it always rounds a number down.

If num_digits is greater than 0, then number is rounded down to the specified number of decimal places.

If num_digits is 0 or omitted, then number is rounded down to the nearest integer.

If num_digits is less than 0, then number is rounded down to the left of the decimal point.

Examples

ROUNDDOWN(3.2, 0) equals 3

ROUNDDOWN(76.9,0) equals 76

ROUNDDOWN(3.14159, 3) equals 3.141

ROUNDDOWN(-3.14159, 1) equals -3.1

ROUNDDOWN(31415.92654, -2) equals 31400

Related Functions

CEILING	Rounds a number to the nearest integer or to the nearest multiple of significance

FLOOR	Rounds a number down, toward zero

INT	Rounds a number down to the nearest integer

MOD	Returns the remainder from division

MROUND	Returns a number rounded to the desired multiple

TRUNC	Truncates a number to an integer

ROUND	Rounds a number to a specified number of digits

ROUNDUP	Rounds a number up, away from zero

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


SQL.REQUEST

Connects with an external data source and runs a query from a worksheet. SQL.REQUEST then returns the result as an array without the need for macro programming. If this function is not available, you must install the Microsoft Excel ODBC add-in (XLODBC.XLA). For more information, see "Installing Add-ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help. For more information on using external data sources, see Chapter 23, "Retrieving Data with Microsoft Query", in Microsoft Excel User's Guide.

Syntax

SQL.REQUEST(connection_string, output_ref, driver_prompt, query_text, col_names_logical)

Connection_string    supplies information, such as the data source name, user ID, and passwords, required by the driver being used to connect to a data source and must follow the driver's format. The following table provides three example connection strings for three drivers.

Driver	connection_string

dBASE	DSN=NWind;PWD=test

SQL Server	DSN=MyServer;UID=dbayer;PWD=123;Database=Pubs

ORACLE	DNS=My Oracle Data Source;DBQ=MYSER VER;
UID=JohnS;PWD=Sesame

You must define the data source name (DSN) used in connection_string before you try to connect to it.

You can enter connection_string as an array or a string.  If connection_string exceeds 250 characters, you must enter it as an array.

If SQL.REQUEST is unable to access the data source using connection_string, it returns the #N/A error value.

Output_ref    is a cell reference where you want the completed connection string placed. If you enter SQL.REQUEST on a worksheet, then Output_ref is ignored.

Use output_ref when you want SQL.REQUEST to return the completed connection string (you must enter SQL.REQUEST on a macro sheet in this case).

If you omit the output_ref, SQL.REQUEST does not return a completed connection string.

Driver_prompt     specifies when the driver dialog box is displayed and which options are available.  Use one of the numbers described in the following table.  If driver_prompt is omitted, SQL.REQUEST uses 2 as the default.

Driver_prompt	Description

1	Driver dialog box is always displayed.

2	Driver dialog box is displayed only if information provided by the connection string and the data source specification is not sufficient to complete the connection.  All dialog box options are available.

3	Driver dialog box is displayed only if information provided by the connection string and the data source specification is not sufficient to complete the connection.  Dialog box options are dimmed and unavailable if they are not required.

4	Dialog box is not displayed.  If the connection is not successful, it returns an error.

Query_text     is the SQL statement that you want to execute on the data source.

If SQL.REQUEST is unable to execute query_text on the specified data source, it returns the #N/A error value.

You can update a query by concatenating references into query_text.  In the following example, every time $A$3 changes, SQL.REQUEST uses the new value to update the query.

"SELECT Name FROM Customers WHERE Balance > "'&$A$3'.

Microsoft Excel limits strings to a length of 255 characters.  If query_text exceeds that length, enter the query in a vertical range of cells and use the entire range as the query_text.  The values of the cells are concatenated to form the complete SQL statement.

Column_names_logical    indicates whether column names are returned as the first row of the results.  Set this argument to TRUE if you want the column names to be returned as the first row of the results.  Use FALSE if you do not want the column names returned.  If column_names_logical is omitted, SQL.REQUEST does not return column names.

Return Value

If this function completes all of its actions, it returns an array of query results or the number of rows affected by the query.

If SQL.REQUEST is unable to access the data source using connection_string, it returns the #N/A error value.

Remarks

SQL.REQUEST can be entered as an array.  When you enter SQL.REQUEST as an array, it returns an array to fit that range.

If the range of cells is larger than the result set, SQL.REQUEST adds empty cells to the returned array to increase it to the necessary size.

If the result set is larger than the range entered as an array, SQL.REQUEST returns the whole array.

The arguments to SQL.REQUEST are in a different order than the arguments to the SQLRequest function in Visual Basic.

Examples

Suppose you want to make a query of a dBASE database named DBASE4.  When you enter the following formula in a cell, an array of query results is returned, with the first row being the column names.

SQL.REQUEST("DSN=NWind;DBQ=c:\msquery;FIL=dBASE4", c15, 2,
"Select Custmr_ID, Due_Date from Orders WHERE order_Amt>100", TRUE)

Related Functions

Microsoft ODBC Programmer's Reference version 1.0

List of DDE and External functions


SUBTOTAL

Returns a subtotal in a list or database.  It is generally easier to create a list with subtotals using the SUBTOTAL command on the Data menu.  Once the subtotal list is created, you can modify it by editing the SUBTOTAL formula.  For more information on subtotaling within a list, see "Summarizing Data in a List" in Chapter 22 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide or Subtotal Commands in online Help.

Syntax

SUBTOTAL(function_num, ref)

Function_num    is the number 1 to 11 that specifies which function to use in calculating subtotals within a list.

Function_Num	Function

1	AVERAGE

2	COUNT

3	COUNTA

4	MAX

5	MIN

6	PRODUCT

7	STDEV

8	STDEVP

9	SUM

10	VAR

11	VARP

Ref    is range or reference for which you want the subtotal.

Remarks

If there are other subtotals within ref (or nested subtotals), these nested subtotals are ignored to avoid double counting.

SUBTOTAL will ignore any hidden rows that result from a list being filtered.  This is important when you want to subtotal only the visible data that results from a list that you have filtered.

Example

SUBTOTAL(9,C3:C5) will generate a subtotal of the cells C3:C5 using the SUM function

Related Functions

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


SUMIF

Adds the cells specified by a given criteria.

Syntax

SUMIF(range, criteria, sum_range)

Range    is the range of cells you want evaluated.

Criteria    is the criteria in the form of a number, expression, or text that defines which cells will be added.  For example, Criteria can be expressed as 32, "32", ">32", "apples".

Sum_range    are the actual cells to sum.  The cells in sum_range are summed only if their corresponding cells in range match the criteria.  If Sum_range is omitted, the cells in range are summed.

Example

Suppose A1:A4 contains the following property values for four homes: $100000, $200000, $300000, $400000, respectively.  B1:B4 contains the following sales commissions on each of the corresponding property values: $7000, $14000, $21000, $28000.

SUMIF(A1:A4,">160000",B1:B4) equals $63000

Related Functions

SUM	Adds its arguments

COUNTIF	Counts the number of non-blank cells within a range which meet the given criteria

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


Using the CALL and REGISTER Functions

The following describes the argument and return value data types used by the CALL, REGISTER, and REGISTER.ID functions. Arguments and return values differ slightly depending on your operating environment, and these differences are noted in the data type table.

The Microsoft Excel Development Kit for Microsoft Excel 5.0 contains detailed information about dynamic link libraries (DLLs) and code resources, the Microsoft Excel application programming interface (API), file formats, and many other technical aspects of Microsoft Excel. It also contains code samples and programming tools that you can use to develop custom applications. To obtain a copy of the Microsoft Excel Development Kit, contact your software supplier or Microsoft Corporation. In the United States, contact the Microsoft Developer Services Team at (800) 227-4679 for more information.

Data Types

In the CALL, REGISTER, and REGISTER.ID functions, the type_text argument specifies the data type of the return value and the data types of all arguments to the DLL function or code resource. The first character of type_text specifies the data type of the return value. The remaining characters indicate the data types of all the arguments. For example, a DLL function that returns a floating-point number and takes an integer and a floating-point number as arguments would require "BIB" for the type_text argument.

The following table contains a complete list of the data type codes that Microsoft Excel recognizes, a description of each data type, how the argument or return value is passed, and a typical declaration for the data type in the C programming language.

Code	Description	Pass by	C Declaration

A	Logical  (FALSE = 0), TRUE = 1)	Value	short int
B	IEEE 8-byte floating-point number	Value (Windows) Reference (Macintosh)	double  (Windows) double * (Macintosh)
C	Null-terminated string (maximum string length = 255)	Reference	char *
D	Byte-counted string (first byte contains length of string, maximum string length = 255 characters)	Reference	Unsigned char *
E	IEEE 8-byte floating-point number	Reference	double *
F	Null-terminated string (maximum string length = 255 characters)	Reference (modify in place)	char *
G	Byte-counted string (first byte contains length of string, maximum string length = 255 characters)	Reference (modify in place)	unsigned char *
H	Unsigned 2-byte integer	Value	unsigned short int
I	Signed 2-byte integer	Value	short int
J	Signed 4-byte integer	Value	long int
K	Array	Reference	FP *
L	Logical  (FALSE =  0, TRUE = 1)	Reference	short int *
M	Signed 2-byte integer	Reference	short int *
N	Signed 4-byte integer	Reference	long int *
O	Array	Reference	Three arguments are passed: unsigned short int * unsigned short int * double [ ]
P	Microsoft Excel OPER data structure	Reference	OPER *
R	Microsoft Excel XLOPER data structure	Reference	XLOPER *
Remarks

The C-language declarations are based on the assumption that your compiler defaults to 8-byte doubles, 2-byte short integers, and 4-byte long integers.

In the Microsoft Windows programming environment, all pointers are far pointers. For example, you should declare the D data type code as unsigned char far * in Microsoft Windows.

All functions in DLLs and code resources are called using the Pascal calling convention. Most C compilers allow you to use the Pascal calling convention by adding the pascal keyword to the function declaration, as shown in the following example:

pascal void main (rows,columns,a)

If a function uses a pass-by-reference data type for its return value, you can pass a null pointer as the return value. Microsoft Excel will interpret the null pointer as the #NUM! error value.

Additional Data Type Information

This section contains detailed information about the F, G, K, O, P, and R data types, and other information about the type_text argument.

F and G Data Types

With the F and G data types, a function can modify a string buffer that is allocated by Microsoft Excel. If the return value type code is F or G, then Microsoft Excel ignores the value returned by the function. Instead, Microsoft Excel searches the list of function arguments for the first corresponding data type (F or G) and then takes the current contents of the allocated string buffer as the return value. Microsoft Excel allocates 256 bytes for the argument, so the function may return a larger string than it received.

K Data Type

The K data type uses a pointer to a variable-size FP structure. You should define this structure in the DLL or code resource as follows:

typedef struct _FP

{

unsigned short int rows;

unsigned short int columns;

double array[1];	/* Actually, array[rows][columns] */

} FP;

The declaration double array[1] allocates storage for only a single-element array. The number of elements in the actual array equals the number of rows multiplied by the number of columns.

O Data Type

The O data type can be used only as an argument, not as a return value. It passes three items: a pointer to the number of rows in an array, a pointer to the number of columns in an array, and a pointer to a two-dimensional array of floating-point numbers.

Instead of returning a value, a function can modify an array passed by the O data type. To do this, you could use ">O" as the type_text argument. For more information, see "Modifying in Place--Functions Declared as Void" below.

The O data type was created for direct compatibility with FORTRAN DLLs, which pass arguments by reference.

P Data Type

The P data type is a pointer to an OPER structure. The OPER structure contains eight bytes of data, followed by a two-byte identifier that specifies the type of data. With the P data type, a DLL function or code resource can take and return any Microsoft Excel data type.

The OPER structure is defined as follows:

typedef struct _oper

{

union

{

double num;

unsigned char *str;

unsigned short int bool;

unsigned short int err;

struct

{

struct _oper *lparray;

unsigned short int rows;

unsigned short int columns;

} array;

} val;

unsigned short int type;

} OPER;

The type field contains one of these values:

Type	Description	Val field to use

1	Numeric	num
2	String (first byte contains length of string)	str
4	Boolean (logical)	bool
16	Error: the error values are:   0 #NULL!   7 #DIV/0!   15 #Value!   23 #REF!   29 #NAME?   36 #NUM!   42 #N/A	err
64	Array	array
128	Missing argument
256	Empty cell
The last two values can be used only as arguments, not return values. The missing argument value (128) is passed when the caller omits an argument. The empty cell value (256) is passed when the caller passes a reference to an empty cell.

R Data TypeCalling Microsoft Excel Functions from DLLs

The R data type is a pointer to an XLOPER structure, which is an enhanced version of the OPER structure. In Microsoft Excel version 4.0 and later, you can use the R data type to write DLLs and code resources that call Microsoft Excel functions. With the XLOPER structure, a DLL function can pass sheet references and implement flow control, in addition to passing data. A complete description of the R data type and the Microsoft Excel application programming interface (API) is beyond the scope of this topic. The Microsoft Excel Development Kit for Excel 4.0 and later contains detailed information about the R data type, the Microsoft Excel API, and many other technical aspects of Microsoft Excel.

Volatile Functions and Recalculation

Microsoft Excel usually calculates a DLL function (or a code resource) only when it is entered into a cell, when one of its precedents changes, or when the cell is calculated during a macro. On a worksheet, you can make a DLL function or code resource volatile, which means that it recalculates every time the worksheet recalculates. To make a function volatile, add an exclamation point (!) as the last character in the type_text argument.

For example, in Microsoft Excel for Windows, the following worksheet formula recalculates every time the worksheet recalculates:

CALL("User","GetTickCount","J!")

Modifying in PlaceFunctions Declared as Void

You can use a single digit n for the return type code in type_text, where n is a number from 1 to 9. This tells Microsoft Excel to modify the variable in the location pointed to by the nth argument in type_text, instead of returning a value. This is also known as modifying in place. The nth argument must be a pass-by-reference data type (C, D, E, F, G, K, L, M, N, O, P, or R). The DLL function or code resource must also be declared with the void keyword in the C language (or the procedure keyword in the Pascal language).

For example, a DLL function that takes a null-terminated string and two pointers to integers as arguments can modify the string in place. Use "1FMM" as the type_text argument, and declare the function as void.

Versions prior to Microsoft Excel 4.0 used the > character to modify the first argument in place--there was no way to modify any argument other than the first. The > character is equivalent to n = 1 in Microsoft Excel version 4.0 and later.


REGISTER.ID

Returns the register ID of the specified dynamic link library (DLL) or code resource that has been previously registered.  If the DLL or code resource has not been registered, this function registers the DLL or code resource, and then returns the register ID.

REGISTER.ID can be used on worksheets (unlike REGISTER), but you cannot specify a function name and argument names with REGISTER.ID.

For more information about DLLs and code resources and data types, see the "Using the CALL and REGISTER Functions" in the Appendix for the Microsoft Excel Function Reference, or Using the CALL and REGISTER Functions in online Help.

Note    Because Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different types of code resources, REGISTER.ID has a slightly different syntax for each operating environment.

Syntax 1

For Microsoft Excel for Windows

REGISTER.ID(module_text, procedure, type_text)

Syntax 2

For Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh

REGISTER.ID(file_text, resource, type_text)

Module_text    is text specifying the name of the DLL that contains the function in Microsoft Excel for Windows.

Procedure    is text specifying the name of the function in the DLL in Microsoft Excel for Windows. You can also use the ordinal value of the function from the EXPORTS statement in the module-definition file (.DEF). The ordinal value or resource ID number should not be in text form.

Type_text    is text specifying the data type of the return value and the data types of all arguments to the DLL. The first letter of type_text specifies the return value.  If the function or code resource is already registered, you can omit this argument

File_text    is text specifying the name of the file that contains the code resource in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh.

Resource    is text specifying the name of the function in the code resource in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh. You can also use the resource ID number.  The ordinal value or resource ID number should not be in text form.

Examples

The following formula registers the GetTickCount function from Microsoft Windows, and returns the register ID:

REGISTER.ID("User", "GetTickCount", "J!")

Assuming that GetTickCount was already registered on another sheet using the preceding formula, the following formula returns the register ID for GetTickCount;

REGISTER.ID("User", "GetTickCount")

Related Functions

CALL	Calls a procedure in a dynamic link library or code resource

List of DDE/EXTERNAL Functions


WEEKNUM

Returns a number that indicates where the week falls numerically within a year.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

WEEKNUM(serial_num, return_type)

Serial_num    is the date expressed as a serial date number.

Return_type    is a number that determines on what day the week begins.  The default is one.

Serial num	Week Begins

1	Week begins on Sunday. Weekdays are numbered 1 through 7.

2	Week begins on Monday. Weekdays are numbered 1 through 7.

Examples

If date is Sunday, January 9, 1994, then

WEEKNUM(34343, 1) equals 3

WEEKNUM(34343, 2) equals 2

Related Functions

DAYS360	Returns the number of days between two dates based on a 360-day year (twelve 30-day months)

WEEKDAY	Returns the day of the week corresponding to serial_number.


AMORLINC

Returns the depreciation for each accounting period. This function is provided for the French accounting system. If an asset is purchased in the middle of the accounting period, then the prorated depreciation is taken into account.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

AMORLINC(cost, date_purchased, first_period, salvage, period, rate, basis)

Cost    is the cost of the asset.

Date_purchased     is the date of the purchase of the asset.

First_period    is the date of the end of the first period

Salvage    is the salvage value at the end of the life of the asset.

Period    is the period.

Rate    is the rate of depreciation.

Basis    is the year_basis to be used.

Basis	Date System

0	360 days (NASD method).

1	Actual

3	365 days in a year

4	360 days in a year (European method)

Example

Suppose a machine bought on August 19, 1993 costs $2400 and has a salvage value of $300, with a 15% depreciation rate. December 31, 1993 is the end of the first period.

AMORLINC(2400,34199,34334,300,1,0.15,1) equals a first period depreciation of $360.

Related Functions

AMORDEGRC	Returns the depreciation for each accounting period

DAYS360	Returns the number of days between two dates based on a 360-day year (twelve 30-day months)

List of Financial Functions


AMORDEGRC

Returns the depreciation for each accounting period. This function is provide for the French accounting system. If an asset is purchased in the middle of the accounting period, then the prorated depreciation is taken into account. The function is similar to AMORLINC, except that a depreciation coefficient is applied in the calculation depending on the life of the assets.

If this function is not available, you must install the Analysis ToolPak add-in macro. For more information, see "Installing Add-in Features" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

Syntax

AMORDEGRC(cost, date_purchased, first_period, salvage, period, rate, basis)

Cost    is the cost of the asset.

Date_purchased     is the date of the purchase of the asset.

First_period    is the date of the end of the first period

Salvage    is the salvage value at the end of the life of the asset.

Period    is the period.

Rate    is the rate of depreciation.

Basis    is the year_basis to be used.

Basis	Date System

0	360 days (NASD method).

1	Actual

3	365 days in a year

4	360 days in a year (European method)

Remarks

This function will return the depreciation until the last period of the life of the assets or until the cumulated value of depreciation is greater than the cost of the assets minus the salvage value.

The depreciation coefficients are:

Life of Assets (1/rate)	Depreciation Coefficient

Between 3 and 4 years	1.5

Between 5 and 6 years	2

More than 6 years	2.5

The depreciation rate will grow to 50 percent for the period preceding the last period, and will grow to 100 percent for the last period.

If the Life of Assets is between 0 and 1, 1 and 2, or 2 and 3, or 4 and 5, the #NUM! error value is returned.

Example

Suppose a machine bought on August 19, 1993 costs $2400 and has a salvage value of $300, with a 15% depreciation rate. December 31, 1993 is the end of the first period.

AMORDEGRC(2400,34199,34334,300,1,0.15,1) equals a first period depreciation of $775.

Related Functions

AMORLINC	Returns the depreciation for each accounting period

DAYS360	Returns the number of days between two dates based on a 360-day year (twelve 30-day months)

List of Financial Functions


ROMAN

Converts an Arabic numeral to Roman, as text.

Syntax

ROMAN(number, form)

Number    is the Arabic numeral you want converted.

Form    is a number specifying the type of Roman numeral you want. The Roman numeral style ranges from Classic to Simplified, becoming more concise as the value of form increases. See the example following ROMAN(499,0) below.

Form	Type

0 or omitted	Classic

1	More concise. See example below

2	More concise. See example below

3	More concise. See example below

4	Simplified

TRUE	Classic

FALSE	Simplified

Remarks

If number is negative the #value! error value is returned.

If number is greater than 3999, the #value error value is returned.

Examples

ROMAN(499,0) equals "CDXCIX"

ROMAN(499,1) equals "LDVLIV"

ROMAN(499,2) equals "XDIX"

ROMAN(499,3) equals "VDIV"

ROMAN(499,4) equals "ID"

ROMAN(1993,0) equals "MCMXCIII"

Related Functions

List of Math & Trigonometry Functions


For More Information

The following books provide detailed information on financial, statistical, and engineering methods.  For a list of these functions by category, see Worksheet Functions Listed by Category in online Help, or "Functions Listed by Category" in Microsoft Excel's Worksheet Function Reference.

Milton Abramowitz and Irene A. Stegun, Handbook of Mathematical Functions with Formulas, Graphs, and Mathematical Tables, Tenth Edition. Washington, D. C.: United States Government Printing Office, 1972.

Jay L. Devore, Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences, Third Edition. Pacific Grove, California: Brooks/Cole Publishing Company, 1991.

Frank J. Fabozzi and Irving M. Pollack, The Handbook of Fixed Income Securities. Homewood Illinois: Business 1 Irwin, 1986.

Hewlett-Packard Company, HP-12C Owner's Handbook and Problem-Solving Guide, 1981.

John J. Lynch, Jr. and Jan H. Mayle, Standard Securities Calculation methods, Fixed Income Securities Formulas. New York, New York: Securities Industry Association, 1986.

Robert B. McCall, Fundamental Statistics for the Behavioral Sciences, Fifth Edition. New York, New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, Inc., 1990.

W. H. Press, B. P. Flannery, S. A. Teukolsky, and W. T. Vetterling, Numerical Recipes in C: The Art of Scientific computing. New York, New York: Cambridge University Press, 1988.

Robert R. Sokal and F. James Rohlf, Biometry: The Principles and Practice of Statistics in Biological Research, Second Edition. New York, New York: W. H. Freeman and Company, 1981.

Marcia Stigum and John Mann, Money Market Calculations: Yields, Break-Evens, and Arbitrage. Homewood, Illinois: Business 1 Irwin, 1989.

Joseph G. Monks, Operations Management: Theory and Problems. New York, New York: McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987.


About Worksheet Functions

In Microsoft Excel, worksheet functions are calculation tools that can be used on worksheets to perform decision-making, action-taking, and value-returning operations automatically. Microsoft Excel provides a wide variety of functions that perform many different types of calculations.

Some functions may require you to install its corresponding add-in before you can use them.  For more information, see "Installing Add-Ins" in Chapter 37 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide, or Installing or removing an add-in in online Help.

To learn more about worksheet functions see Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links", in the Microsoft Excel User's Guide or Inserting a worksheet function into a formula with Function Wizard in online Help.

The Function Wizard

The Function Wizard simplifies the entering of formulas in the formula bar. To start the Function Wizard, from the Insert Menu, choose Function. The functions are listed by category, such as "Financial", "Math & Trig", or "Statistical". When you select a function from the list box, the definition of the function and of its arguments will automatically appear for you, as well as the correct placement of commas and parentheses. To learn more about the Function Wizard see "Using the Function Wizard" in chapter 10 of the Microsoft User's Guide or Inserting a worksheet function into a formula with Function Wizard in online Help.

Conventions

In the syntax line, required arguments are bold and optional arguments are in plain text (not bold).

In the text where functions and arguments are defined, all arguments are in plain text (not bold), whether they are required or optional. Use the format in the syntax line to determine whether an argument is required or optional. For more information about required and optional arguments, see "Syntax of Functions" later in this section.

Argument names usually use underline characters between words; for example, num_chars is an argument name.

Macro and cell names use no punctuation between words; for example, SalesTotals is a cell name.

Functions are shown without the equal sign (=). Remember to type an equal sign at the beginning of every formula, but not before functions in nested formulas. For example, PRODUCT is a nested function in =SUM(3,(PRODUCT(2,4))).

Syntax of Functions

Every function description includes a syntax line. For example, the syntax line for the CELL function looks like this:

CELL(info_type, reference)

In the syntax line, the required arguments are bold; optional arguments are not bold. If you do not provide required arguments to a function, you will not be able to enter the function in a cell. In the preceding example, the argument info_type is bold, and therefore it is required. Reference is not bold and therefore is optional, so either of the following is allowed:

CELL("format", B12)

CELL("format")

CELL() is not allowed, because info_type is a required argument.

When an argument is followed by an ellipsis (...), you can have more than one argument of that data type. You can have up to 30 arguments for some functions, as long as the total number of characters in the formula does not exceed 1024. Also, no individual string can be larger than 255 characters. For example, here is the syntax for the MAX function:

MAX(number1,number2,...)

Any of the following formulas would be allowed:

MAX(26)

MAX(26,31)

MAX(26,31,29)

Functions with an empty set of parentheses after the name take no arguments, although you must include the parentheses in order for Microsoft Excel to recognize the function.

Tip   If you are typing a function and you cannot remember the argument list, press CTRL+A (in Microsoft Excel for Windows) or CONTROL+A (in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh) after you have typed the equal sign, function name, and opening parenthesis. This will bring up the Function Wizard with the function already selected for you.

Argument Names

Many argument names tell you what kind of information to use as the argument. If the abbreviation num, ref, or logical appears in the name of the argument, that argument must be a number, a reference, or a logical value, respectively. For example, in the function ROUND(number, num_digits), the first argument must be a number, and the second argument must be a number.

Similarly, the words number, reference, logical, text, and array in the name of an argument specify that the argument must be of that data type. Value means that the argument can be anything that results in a single value. That value can be a number, text, logical, or error value.

Using Arguments

Arguments are the information that a function uses to produce a new value or perform an action. Arguments are always located to the right of the function name and are enclosed in parentheses. Most arguments are expected to be of a certain data type. The argument you give should be either the appropriate type or another type that Microsoft Excel can convert to the appropriate type.

An argument can be anything that produces a desired data type. For example, the SUM function, which adds its arguments, can take from 1 to 30 arguments. You can give the SUM function any of the following four kinds of arguments, which produce a number or numbers:

A value that is a number, such as:

SUM(1,10,100)

A formula that results in a number, such as:

SUM(0.5+0.5,AVERAGE(5,5),10^2)

Using a function as an argument to a function, as in the preceding example, is called nesting functions. In this example, the AVERAGE function is an argument to the SUM function. You can nest up to seven levels of functions in a formula.

A reference to a cell or range of cells that contains a number or a formula that results in a number, such as:

SUM(A1,A2)

SUM(A1:A5)

The second example above is equivalent to the formula SUM(A1,A2,A3,A4,A5). An advantage of using the range form is that the argument A1:A5 counts as only one argument, while the other form counts as five arguments. If you wanted to add more than 30 numbers, you would have to use the range form, because you can only use 30 arguments with this function.

A name that refers to a value, a formula, or a cell or range containing a value or formula, such as:

SUM(AdjustingValue,Inflation)

Types of Arguments

Arguments to a function can be any of the following:

Numbers

Text

Logical values

Error values

References

Arrays

You can also use the reference and array types of arguments to provide numbers, text, logical values, and error values to a function.

Numbers   examples of numbers are 5.003, 0, 150.286, and -30.05. Numbers without decimals are called integers. Examples of integers are 5, 0, 150, and -30. Numbers are accurate to 15 digits.

Text   Examples of text are "a", "Word", "w/punc.", or "". Text values used in formulas must be enclosed in double quotation marks. If the text itself contains quotation marks, use two double quotation marks for each double quotation mark in the text. For example, to find the length in characters for "in the "good" old days", enter the formula:

LEN("in the ""good"" old days")

Text values can be a maximum of 255 characters long including quotation marks. A text constant that contains no characters is written as "" and is called "empty text."

Note   If text used as an argument is not enclosed in quotation marks, Microsoft Excel assumes it is a name and tries to replace it with the value that the name refers to. If the unquoted text is not a name, and therefore has no associated value, Microsoft Excel returns the #NAME? error value.

Logical values   The logical values are TRUE and FALSE. Logical arguments can also be statements, such as B10>20, that evaluate to TRUE or FALSE.

Error values   Examples of error values are #DIV/0!, #N/A, #NAME?, #NULL!, #NUM!, #REF!, and #VALUE!.

References   Examples of references are $A$10, A10, $A10, A$10, R1C1, or R[10]C[-10]. References can refer to single cells, ranges, or multiple selections, and can be relative, absolute, or mixed. When you use a reference as an argument that is supposed to be a number, text, error value, or logical value, the contents of the cells specified by the reference are used as the argument. For information about references in worksheet functions, see Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links", in the Microsoft Excel User's Guide or Overview of Using References in online Help.

Functions that return references display the value contained in the reference instead of the reference.

To supply a multiple selection as a single reference argument, enclose the reference in a second set of parentheses, for example:

SUM((E5:E8,E10:E18), AVERAGE(A1:A5))

Arrays   Arrays allow you to customize how arguments and functions are entered in cells.  Arrays can be used as arguments, and formulas can be entered as array formulas, as in ={SUM(B2:D2*B3:d3)}. Using arrays can simplify the design of some worksheet formulas, and it can save memory. To learn more about arrays, see "Working with Arrays" in Chapter 10 of the Microsoft Excel User's Guide or Entering an Array Formula in online Help.

Using Commas in a List of Arguments

You must separate individual arguments with commas, but be careful not to type extra commas. If you use a comma to hold a place for an argument, but you don't enter the argument, Microsoft Excel substitutes the default value for that argument, unless the argument is required. For example, if you enter (,arg2,arg3) as the arguments for a worksheet function that takes three arguments, Microsoft Excel substitutes an appropriate value for arg1. If you enter (arg1,,), it substitutes appropriate values for arg2 and arg3.

In worksheet functions, particularly in functions that count the number of arguments before calculating, extra commas will affect the count of arguments and therefore the way the function is calculated. For example, AVERAGE(1,2,3,4,5) returns 3, but AVERAGE(,,1,2,3,4,5) returns 2.14.

For most arguments, the value substituted for an omitted argument is 0, FALSE, or "" (empty text), depending on what the data type of the argument should be. For omitted reference arguments, the default value is usually the active cell or selection.

For example, in the CELL function  if you omit the second argument and specify "format" for the first, the cell that is currently selected will be entered as the default reference. If an omitted argument is assumed to be some other value, the description of the argument will tell you so.

Note   If you are using a reference as an argument and that reference uses a comma as a union operator, enclose the reference in parentheses. The AREAS function, for example, takes one argument: a reference. If you try to enter the formula AREAS(A1,C1), Microsoft Excel interprets A1 and C1 as two separate arguments and displays the "Too many arguments" message. The correct form would be AREAS((A1,C1)).


Solving What-If Problems

Overview of Projecting Figures Using a Data Table

Filling in a one-input data table

Adding a formula to an existing data table

Filling in a two-input data table

Adding input values to a data table

Clearing the resulting values from a data table

Clearing an entire data table

Converting resulting data table values to constant values

Seeking a specific solution to a formula using the Goal Seek command


Overview of Projecting Figures Using a Data Table

Once you have entered formulas on your worksheet, you can perform a "what-if" analysis to see how changing certain values in your formulas affects the results of the formulas. Data tables provide a shortcut for calculating all the variations in one operation. A data table is a range of cells that shows the results of substituting different values in one or more formulas. There are two types of data tables: one-input tables and two-input tables. With a one-input data table, you type different values for one variable and see the effect on one or more formulas. With a two-input data table, you enter different values for two variables and see the effect on one formula.

Note  You cannot create a data table in a module or on a Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro sheet.

See Also

Help

Adding a formula to an existing data table

Adding input values to a data table

Clearing an entire data table

Converting resulting data table values to constant values

Filling in a one-input data table

Filling in a two-input data table

User's Guide

Chapter 27, "Solving What-If Problems"


Filling in a one-input data table

Overview

This procedure produces a data table that displays results when you substitute different values for one variable in a formula. You can use either a column-oriented table or a row-oriented table.

To fill in a column-oriented table

1.	In a single column, enter a list of values you want Microsoft Excel to substitute in the input cell.

The input cell can be any single cell on your worksheet.

2.	In the row above the first value and one cell to the right of the column of values, enter the formula that refers to the input cell.

Enter additional formulas to the right of the first formula in the same row.

3.	Select the rectangular range containing the formula or formulas and the list of values to substitute.

4.	From the Data menu, choose Table.

5.	In the Column Input Cell box, enter the cell reference of the input cell.

You can click the input cell to enter the reference into the Column Input Cell box. If the Table dialog box is covering the input cell, click the title bar and drag it out of the way.

6.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel substitutes each value in the input cell and displays the result to the right of each input value.

Note  You can supply new values to replace those you originally entered on the worksheet. Microsoft Excel recalculates the information using the new values.

To fill in a row-oriented table

1.	In a single row, enter a list of values you want Microsoft Excel to substitute in the input cell.

The input cell can be any single cell on your worksheet.

2.	In the column to the left of the first value and one cell below the row of values, enter the formula that refers to the input cell.

Enter additional formulas below the first formula in the same column.

3.	Select the rectangular range containing the formula or formulas and the values to substitute.

4.	From the Data menu, choose Table.

5.	In the Row Input Cell box, enter the cell reference of the input cell.

You can click the input cell to enter the reference into the Row Input Cell box. If the Table dialog box is covering the input cell, click the title bar and drag it out of the way.

6.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel substitutes each value in the input cell and displays the result beneath each input value.

Note  You can supply new values for those you originally entered on the worksheet. Microsoft Excel recalculates the information using the new values.

See Also

Help

Goal Seek Command (Tools Menu)

Table Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 27, "Solving What-If Problems"


Adding a formula to an existing data table

Overview

To see the effect of changing an input value in more than one formula, you can add one or more formulas to an existing one-input data table.

1.	Enter the new formulas in the row or column containing the existing formulas.

The new formulas should be adjacent to the existing formulas.

2.	Select the range containing the formulas and input values.

Be sure to include the new formulas you just added.

3.	From the Data menu, choose Table.

4.	If the input values are in a column, enter the reference to the input cell in the Column Input Cell box. If the input values are in a row, enter the reference in the Row Input Cell box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel calculates all the formulas in the table using the input values.

See Also

Help

Goal Seek Command (Tools Menu)

Table Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 27, "Solving What-If Problems"


Filling in a two-input data table

Overview

This procedure produces a data table that displays results when you substitute different values for two variables in a formula.

1.	In a cell, enter the formula that will refer to the substituted values.

The formula should refer to two input cells, either directly or by referring to other cells that refer to the input cells. The input cells are the cells for which values will be substituted.

2.	Starting in the cell below the formula, enter the values that you want to substitute in one input cell in the same column as the formula.

3.	Starting in the cell to the right of the formula, enter the values that you want to substitute in the other input cell in the same row as the formula.

4.	Select the range of cells containing the formula and the row and column of values.

5.	From the Data menu, choose Table.

6.	In the Column Input Cell box, enter the reference to the input cell (from step 2) for which you want the column of values to be substituted.

You can click the input cell to enter the reference in either box. If the Table dialog box is covering the input cell, click the title bar and drag it out of the way.

7.	In the Row Input Cell box, enter the reference to the input cell (from step 3) for which you want the row of values to be substituted.

8.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel substitutes the values and displays the results in the corresponding intersections of rows and columns.

Note  You can supply new values for those you originally entered on the worksheet. Microsoft Excel recalculates the information using the new values.

See Also

Help

Goal Seek Command (Tools Menu)

Table Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 27, "Solving What-If Problems"


Adding input values to a data table

Overview

1.	Enter the new values in the blank cells adjacent to the original values in the data table, either at the bottom of the left column or at the right end of the top row.

2.	Select the entire table, including all formulas, input values, and resulting values.

3.	From the Data menu, choose Table.

4.	For a one-input table, enter the reference for the input cell in the Row Input Cell box if you added the new input values at the right end of the top row. If you added the new values at the bottom of the left column, enter the reference in the Column Input Cell box.

For a two-input table, enter the references for both the row and column input cells.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel calculates the table with the additional values.

See Also

Help

Goal Seek Command (Tools Menu)

Table Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 27, "Solving What-If Problems"


Clearing the resulting values from a data table

Overview

1.	Select all the resulting values in the data table.

Because the resulting values are in an array, you cannot clear individual values; you must clear all the values.

Make sure not to select the formulas and input values. If you do select these, Microsoft Excel clears the entire table, including the formulas and input values.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Clear, and then choose Contents.

- Or -

From the shortcut menu, choose Clear Contents.

See Also

Help

Clear Command (Edit Menu)

Goal Seek Command (Tools Menu)

Table Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 27, "Solving What-If Problems"


Clearing an entire data table

Overview

1.	Select the entire data table, including all formulas, input values, and resulting values.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Clear, and then choose Contents.

- Or -

From the shortcut menu, choose Clear Contents.

See Also

Help

Clear Command (Edit Menu)

Goal Seek Command (Tools Menu)

Table Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 27, "Solving What-If Problems"


Converting resulting data table values to constant values

Overview

1.	Select all the resulting values in the data table.

Because the resulting values are in an array, you cannot convert individual values to constant values; you must convert all the values.

2.	From the Edit menu or the shortcut menu, choose Copy.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Special.

4.	Under Paste, select the Values option button.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Goal Seek Command (Tools Menu)

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

Table Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 27, "Solving What-If Problems"


Seeking a specific solution to a formula using the Goal Seek command

Overview

Often you know the result you want a formula to return but not the input values the formula needs to reach that result. To solve such a formula, you can use goal seeking. With goal seeking, Microsoft Excel varies the value in a cell you specify until a formula dependent on that cell returns the result you want. Goal seeking saves you from performing time-consuming trial-and-error analysis. To seek a specific solution to a formula:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Goal Seek.

2.	In the Set Cell box, enter the reference or name of the cell containing the formula for which you want to find a specific solution.

You can do this either by typing the reference or name or by selecting the cell on the worksheet.

3.	In the To Value box, enter the value that you want.

4.	In the By Changing Cell box, enter the reference of the cell containing the value to be changed in solving for the result that you want.

You can do this either by typing the reference or name or by selecting the cell on the worksheet. Be sure to enter the reference of a cell that contains a value that the original formula depends on, either directly or indirectly. Do not enter the reference of a cell containing a formula.

5.	Choose the OK button.

A dialog box that shows the status of the goal seeking is displayed.

6.	To pause while goal seeking, choose the Pause button.

7.	If you choose the Pause button and want to continue goal seeking one step at a time, choose the Step button.

To resume normal goal seeking, choose the Continue button.

When goal seeking is complete, Microsoft Excel displays the results on the worksheet. If the specific solution that you want cannot be reached, Microsoft Excel displays a message.

8.	If Microsoft Excel reaches the solution that you want for your formula, choose the OK button to keep the solution values on the worksheet. To restore the original values, choose the Cancel button.

Note  If you choose the OK button and replace an old value with the new solution but then change your mind, choose Undo Goal Seek from the Edit menu immediately after goal seeking is complete.

See Also

Help

Changing the value of a chart data point

Goal Seek Command (Tools Menu)

Overview of Working with Microsoft Excel Solver

Table Command (Data Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 27, "Solving What-If Problems"


Managing What-If Scenarios

Overview of Using Scenario Manager

Creating a scenario

Displaying a scenario

Editing a scenario

Deleting a scenario

Creating a summary report

Merging scenarios

Protecting scenarios

Saving Solver's changing cell values as a scenario


Overview of Using Scenario Manager

In Microsoft Excel, you can create and save sets of input values that produce different results as scenarios. A scenario is a group of input values called changing cells saved with a name you provide. Each set of changing cells represents a set of what-if assumptions that you can apply to a workbook model to see the effects on other parts of the model. You can define up to 32 changing cells per scenario.

To work with scenarios, use the Scenarios box on the WorkGroup toolbar. With the Scenarios box, you can quickly define and display sets of scenarios on a worksheet. You can also use the Scenarios command on the Tools menu, which provides additional functionality for working with scenarios.

Use the Scenario Manager to:

Create multiple scenarios with multiple sets of changing cells.

View the results of each scenario on your worksheet.

Create a summary report of all input values and results.

Merge scenarios from a group into a single scenario model.

Protect scenarios from modification and hide scenarios.

Keep track of modifications with an automatic scenario history.

See Also

Help

Creating a scenario

Creating a summary report

Deleting a scenario

Displaying a scenario

Editing a scenario

Merging scenarios

Protecting scenarios

Saving Solver's changing cell values as a scenario

User's Guide

Chapter 28, "Managing What-If Scenarios"


Creating a scenario

Overview

To create scenarios with the Scenarios box

1.	Enter the values you want to use into the changing cells to be included in the scenario.

2.	Select all the changing cells that you want in your scenario.

3.	Type the scenario name in the Scenarios box.

4.	Press ENTER.

To add another scenario with the Scenarios box

1	Enter the new values you want to use in the changing cells.

2.	Select all the changing cells that you want in your scenario.

3.	Type the name for the new scenario in the Scenarios box.

4.	Press ENTER.

To create scenarios with the Scenarios command

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Scenarios.

2.	Choose the Add button.

The Add Scenario dialog box appears.

3.	In the Scenario Name box, type a name for your scenario.

4.	If you have not already specified the cells you want to change, or if you want to specify new cells, select the cells or type the cell references in the Changing Cells box.

5.	If you want, edit the text in the Comment box.

6.	If you want, select protection options.

7.	Choose the OK button.

The Scenario Values dialog box appears.

8.	Edit the values for each changing cell.

The current values on the sheet are suggested.

9.	To add the scenario to the list, and then create additional scenarios, choose the Add button. This returns you to the Add Scenario dialog box.

To add the scenario to the list and return to the Scenario Manager dialog box, choose the OK button.

To return to the Scenario Manager dialog box without adding the current scenario, choose the Cancel button.

See Also

Help

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Scenarios Box

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 28, "Managing What-If Scenarios"


Displaying a scenario

Overview

To display scenarios with the Scenarios box

1.	Click the arrow to the right of the Scenarios box.

2.	Select the scenario name from the list.

The values that you entered into the changing cells when you defined the scenario appear.

Note  If a scenario name is displayed in the Scenarios box, and you select the same scenario name again, a dialog box appears, asking you if you want to redefine the existing scenario. If you choose the Yes button, the scenario is redefined. Be sure that you do not modify the changing cells before choosing Yes.

To display scenarios with the Scenarios command

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Scenarios.

2.	In the Scenario Manager dialog box, select the scenario that you want to display.

3.	Choose the Show button.

The changing cell values for the selected scenario appear in the changing cells on the worksheet. The worksheet is recalculated to reflect the new values.

4.	Repeat steps 2 and 3 to display other scenarios.

5.	Choose the Close button.

See Also

Help

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Scenarios Box

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 28, "Managing What-If Scenarios"


Editing a scenario

Overview

To edit scenarios with the Scenarios box

1.	In the Scenarios box, select the scenario you want to redefine.

Microsoft Excel displays the changing cell values on the sheet.

2.	Edit the changing cell values.

3.	In the Scenarios box, select the scenario name again.

A dialog box appears asking if you want to redefine the scenario.

4.	Choose the Yes button to redefine the scenario, or choose the No button to cancel your changes.

To edit scenarios with the Scenarios command

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Scenarios.

2.	In the Scenario Manager dialog box, select the scenario you want to edit.

3.	Choose the Edit button.

The Edit Scenario dialog box appears.

4.	In the Scenario Name box, type a new name for the scenario, if you want.

If you use the scenario's original name, the new changing cell values replace those in the original scenario.

5.	Edit the changing cell references, if you want.

6.	Edit text in the Comment box, if you want.

7.	Select protection options.

8.	Choose the OK button.

The Scenario Values dialog box appears. Make the required changes.

9.	To save the changes made to your scenario, choose the OK button.

To return to the Scenario Manager dialog box without changing the current scenario, choose the Cancel button.

See Also

Help

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Scenarios Box

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 28, "Managing What-If Scenarios"


Deleting a scenario

Overview

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Scenarios.

Note  You cannot delete a scenario with the Scenarios box.

2.	In the Scenario Manager dialog box, select the scenario that you want to delete.

3.	Choose the Delete button.

4.	To delete additional scenarios, repeat steps 2 and 3.

5.	Choose the Close button.

Important  Deletions cannot be canceled or undone.

See Also

Help

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 28, "Managing What-If Scenarios"


Creating a summary report

Overview

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Scenarios.

2.	Choose the Summary button.

3.	In the Report Type box, select either the Summary or PivotTable option button.

4.	In the Result Cells box, specify the cells that contain the significant results of each scenario either by selecting the cells or typing the cell references. These cells should have formulas that refer to changing cells. If you enter more than one reference, separate each reference with a comma.

Note  You do not have to include result cells in your summary report, but they are required for a pivot table.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel places a summary table of your scenarios, named either Scenario Summary or Scenario PivotTable, on a separate sheet in the current workbook.

See Also

Help

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 28, "Managing What-If Scenarios"


Merging scenarios

Overview

Before merging scenarios, make sure all workbooks containing the scenarios you want to merge are open. You can also merge scenarios from separate sheets in the same workbook.

Note  It is easier to merge scenarios if all the what-if models in the workbooks or sheets to be merged are identical. All the changing cells defined in the merged scenarios should refer to appropriate changing cells on the sheet into which you are merging them.

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Scenarios.

2.	Choose the Merge button.

The Merge Scenarios dialog box appears.

3.	In the Book box, select the workbook name.

4.	In the Sheet box, select the sheet name containing the scenarios you want to merge.

5.	Choose the OK button.

All the scenarios defined on the source sheet are copied to the active sheet. If merged scenarios have names that are identical to existing names, Microsoft Excel appends creator names, creation dates, or numbers as necessary to merged scenario names.

See Also

Help

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 28, "Managing What-If Scenarios"


Protecting scenarios

Overview

To prevent changes to a scenario

By default, the changing cells and values that you define as a scenario can be edited. When you prevent changes to a scenario and activate sheet protection, the scenario settings cannot be edited in the Scenario Manager dialog box. To prevent other users from making unwanted changes to your defined scenarios:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Scenarios.

2.	In the Scenario Manager dialog box, select the scenario you want to protect.

3.	Choose the Edit button.

4.	Select the Prevent Changes check box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

The Scenario Values dialog box is displayed.

6.	Choose the OK button.

7.	Choose the Close button.

8.	From the Tools menu, choose Protection, and then choose Protect Sheet.

9.	Choose the OK button.

To hide a scenario

When you hide a scenario and activate sheet protection, the scenario name is hidden from view in the Scenario Manager dialog box. You can't display a hidden scenario when a worksheet is protected.

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Scenarios.

2.	In the Scenario Manager dialog box, select the scenario you want to hide.

3.	Choose the Edit button.

4.	Select the Hide check box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

The Scenario Values dialog box is displayed.

6.	Choose the OK button.

7.	Choose the Close button.

8.	From the Tools menu, choose Protection, and then choose Protect Sheet.

9.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Protecting and unprotecting a sheet

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 28, "Managing What-If Scenarios"


Saving Solver's changing cell values as a scenario

Overview

1.	In the Solver Results dialog box, choose the Save Scenario button.

The Save Scenario dialog box is displayed.

2.	In the Scenario Name box, type a name for the scenario.

3.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel saves the values for the changing cells as a named scenario.

Note  You do not have to save the solution found by Solver to save the changing cells as a scenario. If you want to create a scenario but do not want to display the results on your worksheet, select the Restore Original Values option button in the Solver Results dialog box after saving the scenario, and then choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Solver Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 28, "Managing What-If Scenarios"

Chapter 29, "Using Solver to Analyze Multiple-Variable Problems"


New Window Command (Window Menu)

Creates an additional window for the active workbook so you can view different parts of your workbook simultaneously.

You can open more than one new window for a given sheet or workbook; the maximum number is limited only by the available memory.

The title bar shows the original workbook name followed by a colon and the number of the new window. For example, the second window of your BUDGET.XLS workbook would be named BUDGET.XLS:2.

See Also

Help

Arranging workbook windows

Displaying and closing new windows of a workbook

Arrange and Arrange Icons Commands (Window Menu)


Arrange and Arrange Icons Commands (Window Menu)

The Arrange command provides ways to arrange windows.

You can arrange individual windows by dragging them with the mouse.

You can also arrange individual windows using the Move command and Size command on the Control menu.

Tiled

Arranges windows in small sizes to fit on the screen.

Horizontal

Arranges windows evenly from top to bottom.

Vertical

Arranges windows evenly from left to right.

Cascade

Overlaps windows across the screen.

Windows Of Active Workbook

If selected, the Arrange command arranges only the windows of the active workbook.

If cleared, the Arrange command arranges all unhidden windows.

The Arrange Icons command arranges all the minimized windows. This command is available only when a minimized window is active.

Icons are arranged horizontally from left to right at the bottom of the application window.

See Also

Help

Arranging icons

Arranging workbook windows

Minimizing and restoring windows


Hide and Unhide Commands (Window Menu)

Hides the active workbook window or makes a hidden window visible.

Even though you can't see a hidden window, it's still open.

You can hide a workbook that needs to be open but does not need to be displayed.

If you protected the workbook's window with a password, you're asked for the password when hiding the window.

Add-in macros can't be made visible with the Unhide command.

If all windows are hidden, the Unhide command moves from the Window menu to the File menu.

See Also

Help

Hiding and unhiding a workbook

Protecting a Workbook

Unhide Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 39, "Protecting a Workbook"


Split and Remove Split Commands (Window Menu)

The Split command splits the active window into two or four panes.

This command allows you to scroll multiple panes simultaneously. Two top-to-bottom stacked panes always have the same column headings; two side-by-side panes always have the same row headings.

Use the Freeze Panes command to prevent the top pane, left pane, or both, from scrolling.

The Remove Split command removes the split from the active window.

This command is available only when the active window has been split.

Double-clicking the split box or split bar also removes the split.

See Also

Help

Freeze Panes and Unfreeze Panes Commands (Window Menu)

Freezing and unfreezing worksheet titles and panes

New Window Command (Window Menu)

Split Box

Splitting a window into panes

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"


Freeze Panes and Unfreeze Panes Commands (Window Menu)

Freeze Panes button

The Freeze Panes command freezes the top pane, the left pane, or both, on the active worksheet. The Freeze Panes button is in the Utility category.

This command is useful for keeping row or column titles on the screen while you scroll through long lists on a worksheet.

This command prevents panes to the left of a vertical split from scrolling horizontally, and prevents panes above a horizontal split from scrolling vertically.

You can also use the Freeze Panes button to freeze or unfreeze panes in your worksheet.

If the window is not divided into panes, this command will split the window at the location of the active cell.

Note  Freezing titles on a worksheet does not affect printing.

The Unfreeze Panes command unfreezes frozen panes on your worksheet. You can also click the Freeze Panes button again to unfreeze panes.

This command appears on the Window menu only when you have frozen panes with the Freeze Panes command.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Freezing and unfreezing worksheet titles and panes

Printing titles on multiple pages

Splitting a window into panes

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"


1,2,3,...9 Commands (Window Menu)

Lists the currently open windows at the bottom of the Window menu. Choosing a window switches to it.

A check mark is displayed beside the active window.

If more than nine windows are open, the More Windows command appears at the end of the list. Choose it to see a list of all open windows.

See Also

Help

Arranging workbook windows

Displaying and closing new windows of a workbook

Minimizing and restoring windows


More Windows Command (Window Menu)

Displays a list of open windows and switches to the window you choose.

This command appears on the Window menu only when more than nine windows are open.

See Also

Help

Arranging workbook windows

Displaying and closing new windows of a workbook

Minimizing and restoring windows


Show Document Command (Window Menu)

Displays the sheet containing the information shown in the Info window, while keeping the Info window open.

This command appears only when you select the Info Window check box on the View tab in the Options dialog box, or when you click the Show Info Window button on the Auditing toolbar.

To switch between the worksheet and the Info window, press CTRL+F2.

See Also

Help

  Show Info Window Button

View Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"

Chapter 38, "Troubleshooting and Annotating a Worksheet"


Microsoft Excel Worksheet Functions Contents

About Worksheet Functions

Alphabetical List of Worksheet Functions

Worksheet Functions Listed by Category

New and Changed Worksheet Functions

Using DDE With Functions

See Also


Worksheet Functions Listed by Category

Database & List Management

Date & Time

DDE & External

Engineering

Financial

Information

Logical

Lookup & Reference

Math & Trigonometry

Statistical

Text


New and Changed Worksheet Functions

Database & List Management

Date & Time

DDE & External

Financial

Information

Lookup & Reference

Math & Trigonometry

Text


See Also

Macro Functions

For More Information


Database and List Management Functions
Database & List Management Functions

DAVERAGE	Returns the average of selected database entries

DCOUNT	Counts the cells containing numbers from a specified database and criteria

DCOUNTA	Counts nonblank cells from a specified database and criteria

DGET	Extracts from a database a single record that matches the specified criteria

DMAX	Returns the maximum value from selected database entries

DMIN	Returns the minimum value from selected database entries

DPRODUCT	Multiplies the values in a particular field of records that match the criteria in a database

DSTDEV	Estimates the standard deviation based on a sample of selected database entries

DSTDEVP	Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population of selected database entries

DSUM	Adds the numbers in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria

DVAR	Estimates variance based on a sample from selected database entries

DVARP	Calculates variance based on the entire population of selected database entries

SQLREQUEST	Connects with an external data source and runs a query from a worksheet, then returns the result as an array without the need for macro programming

SUBTOTAL	Returns a subtotal in a list or list or database


Date & Time Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

DATEVALUE	Converts a date in the form of text to a serial number

DAY	Converts a serial number to a day of the month

DAYS360	Calculates the number of days between two dates based on a 360-day year

EDATE	Returns the serial number of the date that is the indicated number of months before or after the start date

EOMONTH	Returns the serial number of the last day of the month before or after a specified number of months

HOUR	Converts a serial number to an hour

MINUTE	Converts a serial number to a minute

MONTH	Converts a serial number to a month

NETWORKDAYS	Returns the number of whole workdays between two dates

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

SECOND	Converts a serial number to a second

TIME	Returns the serial number of a particular time

TIMEVALUE	Converts a time in the form of text to a serial number

TODAY	Returns the serial number of today's date

WEEKDAY	Converts a serial number to a day of the week

WORKDAY	Returns the serial number of the date before or after a specified number of workdays

YEAR	Converts a serial number to a year

YEARFRAC	Returns the year fraction representing the number of whole days between start_date and end_date


DDE & External Functions

CALL	Calls a procedure in a dynamic link library or code resource

REGISTER.ID	Returns the register ID of the specified dynamic link library (DLL) or code resource that has been previously registered

SQLREQUEST	Connects with an external data source and runs a query from a worksheet, then returns the result as an array without the need for macro programming

More on the CALL and REGISTER functions


Engineering Functions

BESSELI	Returns the modified Bessel function In(x)

BESSELJ	Returns the Bessel function Jn(x)

BESSELK	Returns the modified Bessel function Kn(x)

BESSELY	Returns the Bessel function Yn(x)

BIN2DEC	Converts a binary number to decimal

BIN2HEX	Converts a binary number to hexadecimal

BIN2OCT	Converts a binary number to octal

COMPLEX	Converts real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number

CONVERT	Converts a number from one measurement system to another

DEC2BIN	Converts a decimal number to binary

DEC2HEX	Converts a decimal number to hexadecimal

DEC2OCT	Converts a decimal number to octal

DELTA	Tests whether two values are equal

ERF	Returns the error function

ERFC	Returns the complementary error function

GESTEP	Tests whether a number is greater than a threshold value

HEX2BIN	Converts a hexadecimal number to binary

HEX2DEC	Converts a hexadecimal number to decimal

HEX2OCT	Converts a hexadecimal number to octal

IMABS	Returns the absolute value (modulus) of a complex number

IMAGINARY	Returns the imaginary coefficient of a complex number

IMARGUMENT	Returns the argument theta, an angle expressed in radians

IMCONJUGATE	Returns the complex conjugate of a complex number

IMCOS	Returns the cosine of a complex number

IMDIV	Returns the quotient of two complex numbers

IMEXP	Returns the exponential of a complex number

IMLN	Returns the natural logarithm of a complex number

IMLOG10	Returns the base-10 logarithm of a complex number

IMLOG2	Returns the base-2 logarithm of a complex number

IMPOWER	Returns a complex number raised to an integer power

IMPRODUCT	Returns the product of two complex numbers

IMREAL	Returns the real coefficient of a complex number

IMSIN	Returns the sine of a complex number

IMSQRT	Returns the square root of a complex number

IMSUB	Returns the difference of two complex numbers

IMSUM	Returns the sum of complex numbers

OCT2BIN	Converts an octal number to binary

OCT2DEC	Converts an octal number to decimal

OCT2HEX	Converts an octal number to hexadecimal

SQRTPI	Returns the square root of (number * PI)


Financial Functions

ACCRINT	Returns the accrued interest for a security that pays periodic interest

ACCRINTM	Returns the accrued interest for a security that pays interest at maturity

AMORDEGRC	Returns the depreciation for each accounting period

AMORLINC	Returns the depreciation for each accounting period

COUPDAYBS	Returns the number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the settlement date

COUPDAYS	Returns the number of days in the coupon period that contains the settlement date

COUPDAYSNC	Returns the number of days from the settlement date to the next coupon date

COUPNCD	Returns the next coupon date after the settlement date

COUPNUM	Returns the number of coupons payable between the settlement date and maturity date

COUPPCD	Returns the previous coupon date before the settlement date

CUMIPMT	Returns the cumulative interest paid between two periods

CUMPRINC	Returns the cumulative principal paid on a loan between two periods

DB	Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the fixed-declining balance method

DDB	Returns the depreciation of an asset for a spcified period using the double-declining balance method or some other method you specify

DISC	Returns the discount rate for a security

DOLLARDE	Converts a dollar price, expressed as a fraction, into a dollar price, expressed as a decimal number

DOLLARFR	Converts a dollar price, expressed as a decimal number, into a dollar price, expressed as a fraction

DURATION	Returns the annual duration of a security with periodic interest payments

EFFECT	Returns the effective annual interest rate

FV	Returns the future value of an investment

FVSCHEDULE	Returns the future value of an initial principal after applying a series of compound interest rates

INTRATE	Returns the interest rate for a fully invested security

IPMT	Returns the interest payment for an investment for a given period

IRR	Returns the internal rate of return for a series of cash flows

MDURATION	Returns the Macauley modified duration for a security with an assumed par value of $100

MIRR	Returns the internal rate of return where positive and negative cash flows are financed at different rates

NOMINAL	Returns the annual nominal interest rate

NPER	Returns the number of periods for an investment

NPV	Returns the net present value of an investment based on a series of periodic cash flows and a discount rate

ODDFPRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security with an odd first period

ODDFYIELD	Returns the yield of a security with an odd first period

ODDLPRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security with an odd last period

ODDLYIELD	Returns the yield of a security with an odd last period

PMT	Returns the periodic payment for an annuity

PPMT	Returns the payment on the principal for an investment for a given period

PRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security that pays periodic interest

PRICEDISC	Returns the price per $100 face value of a discounted security

PRICEMAT	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security that pays interest at maturity

PV	Returns the present value of an investment

RATE	Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity

RECEIVED	Returns the amount received at maturity for a fully invested security

SLN	Returns the straight-line depreciation of an asset for one period

SYD	Returns the sum-of-years' digits depreciation of an asset for a specified period

TBILLEQ	Returns the bond-equivalent yield for a Treasury bill

TBILLPRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value for a Treasury bill

TBILLYIELD	Returns the yield for a Treasury bill

VDB	Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified or partial period using a declining balance method

XIRR	Returns the internal rate of return for a schedule of cash flows that is not necessarily periodic

XNPV	Returns the net present value for a schedule of cash flows that is not necessarily periodic

YIELD	Returns the yield on a security that pays periodic interest

YIELDDISC	Returns the annual yield for a discounted security. For example, a treasury bill

YIELDMAT	Returns the annual yield of a security that pays interest at maturity


Information Functions

CELL	Returns information about the formatting, location, or contents of a cell

COUNTBLANK	Counts the number of blank cells within a range

ERROR.TYPE	Returns a number corresponding to an error type

INFO	Returns information about the current operating environment

ISBLANK	Returns TRUE if the value is blank

ISERR	Returns TRUE if the value is any error value except #N/A

ISERROR	Returns TRUE if the value is any error value

ISEVEN	Returns TRUE if the number is even

ISLOGICAL	Returns TRUE if the value is a logical value

ISNA	Returns TRUE if the value is the #N/A error value

ISNONTEXT	Returns TRUE if the value is not text

ISNUMBER	Returns TRUE if the value is a number

ISODD	Returns TRUE if the number is odd

ISREF	Returns TRUE if the value is a reference

ISTEXT	Returns TRUE if the value is text

N	Returns a value converted to a number

NA	Returns the error value #N/A

TYPE	Returns a number indicating the data type of a value


Logical Functions

AND	Returns TRUE if all its arguments are TRUE

FALSE	Returns the logical value FALSE

IF	Specifies a logical test to perform

NOT	Reverses the logic of its argument

OR	Returns TRUE if any argument is TRUE

TRUE	Returns the logical value TRUE


Lookup & Reference Functions

ADDRESS	Returns a reference as text to a single cell in a worksheet

AREAS	Returns the number of areas in a reference

CHOOSE	Chooses a value from a list of values

COLUMN	Returns the column number of a reference

COLUMNS	Returns the number of columns in a reference

HLOOKUP	Looks in the top row of an array and returns the value of the indicated cell

INDEX	Uses an index to choose a value from a reference or array

INDIRECT	Returns a reference indicated by a text value

LOOKUP	Looks up values in a vector or array

MATCH	Looks up values in a reference or array

OFFSET	Returns a reference offset from a given reference

ROW	Returns the row number of a reference

ROWS	Returns the number of rows in a reference

TRANSPOSE	Returns the transpose of an array

VLOOKUP	Looks in the first column of an array and moves across the row to return the value of a cell


Math & Trigonometry Functions

ABS	Returns the absolute value of a number

ACOS	Returns the arccosine of a number

ACOSH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number

ASIN	Returns the arcsine of a number

ASINH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number

ATAN	Returns the arctangent of a number

ATAN2	Returns the arctangent from x- and y- coordinates

ATANH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number

CEILING	Rounds a number to the nearest integer or to the nearest multiple of significance

COMBIN	Returns the number of combinations for a given number of objects

COS	Returns the cosine of a number

COSH	Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number

COUNTIF	Counts the number of non-blank cells within a range which meet the given criteria

DEGREES	Converts radians to degrees

EVEN	Rounds a number up to the nearest even integer

EXP	Returns e raised to the power of a given number

FACT	Returns the factorial of a number

FACTDOUBLE	Returns the double factorial of a number

FLOOR	Rounds a number down, toward zero

GCD	Returns the greatest common divisor

INT	Rounds a number down to the nearest integer

LCM	Returns the least common multiple

LN	Returns the natural logarithm of a number

LOG	Returns the logarithm of a number to a specified base

LOG10	Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number

MDETERM	Returns the matrix determinant of an array

MINVERSE	Returns the matrix inverse of an array

MMULT	Returns the matrix product of two arrays

MOD	Returns the remainder from division

MROUND	Returns a number rounded to the desired multiple

MULTINOMIAL	Returns the multinomial of a set of numbers

ODD	Rounds a number up to the nearest odd integer

PI	Returns the value of Pi

POWER	Returns the result of a number raised to a power

PRODUCT	Multiplies its arguments

QUOTIENT	Returns the integer portion of a division

RADIANS	Converts degrees to radians

RAND	Returns a random number between 0 and 1

RANDBETWEEN	Returns a random number between the numbers you specify

ROMAN	Converts an Arabic numeral to Roman, as text

ROUND	Rounds a number to a specified number of digits

ROUNDDOWN	Rounds a number down, toward zero

ROUNDUP	Rounds a number up, away from zero

SERIESSUM	Returns the sum of a power series based on the formula

SIGN	Returns the sign of a number

SIN	Returns the sine of the given angle

SINH	Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number

SQRT	Returns a positive square root

SQRTPI	Returns the square root of (number * PI)

SUM	Adds its arguments

SUMIF	Adds the cells specified by a given criteria

SUMPRODUCT	Returns the sum of the products of corresponding array components

SUMSQ	Returns the sum of the squares of the arguments

SUMX2MY2	Returns the sum of the difference of squares of corresponding values in two arrays

SUMX2PY2	Returns the sum of the sum of squares of corresponding values in two arrays

SUMXMY2	Returns the sum of squares of differences of corresponding values in two arrays

TAN	Returns the tangent of a number

TANH	Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number

TRUNC	Truncates a number to an integer


Statistical Functions

AVEDEV	Returns the average of the absolute deviations of data points from their mean

AVERAGE	Returns the average of its arguments

BETADIST	Returns the cumulative beta probability density function

BETAINV	Returns the inverse of the cumulative beta probability density function

BINOMDIST	Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability

CHIDIST	Returns the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution

CHIINV	Returns the inverse of the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution

CHITEST	Returns the test for independence

CONFIDENCE	Returns the confidence interval for a population mean

CORREL	Returns the correlation coefficient between two data sets

COUNT	Counts how many numbers are in the list of arguments

COUNTA	Counts how many values are in the list of arguments

COVAR	Returns covariance, the average of the products of paired deviations

CRITBINOM	Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is less than or equal to a criterion value

DEVSQ	Returns the sum of squares of deviations

EXPONDIST	Returns the exponential distribution

FDIST	Returns the F probability distribution

FINV	Returns the inverse of the F probability distribution

FISHER	Returns the Fisher transformation

FISHERINV	Returns the inverse of the Fisher transformation

FORECAST	Returns a value along a linear trend

FREQUENCY	Returns a frequency distribution as a vertical array

FTEST	Returns the result of an F-test

GAMMADIST	Returns the gamma distribution

GAMMAINV	Returns the inverse of the gamma cumulative distribution

GAMMALN	Returns the natural logarithm of the gamma function, Γ(x)

GEOMEAN	Returns the geometric mean

GROWTH	Returns values along an exponential trend

HARMEAN	Returns the harmonic mean

HYPGEOMDIST	Returns the hypergeometric distribution

INTERCEPT	Returns the intercept of the linear regression line

KURT	Returns the kurtosis of a data set

LARGE	Returns the k-th largest value in a data set

LINEST	Returns the parameters of a linear trend

LOGEST	Returns the parameters of an exponential trend

LOGINV	Returns the inverse of the lognormal distribution

LOGNORMDIST	Returns the cumulative lognormal distribution

MAX	Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments

MEDIAN	Returns the median of the given numbers

MIN	Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments

MODE	Returns the most common value in a data set

NEGBINOMDIST	Returns the negative binomial distribution

NORMDIST	Returns the normal cumulative distribution

NORMINV	Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution

NORMSDIST	Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution

NORMSINV	Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution

PEARSON	Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient

PERCENTILE	Returns the k-th percentile of values in a range

PERCENTRANK	Returns the percentage rank of a value in a data set

PERMUT	Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects

POISSON	Returns the Poisson distribution

PROB	Returns the probability that values in a range are between two limits

QUARTILE	Returns the quartile of a data set

RANK	Returns the rank of a number in a list of numbers

RSQ	Returns the square of the Pearson product moment correlatin coefficient

SKEW	Returns the skewness of a distribution

SLOPE	Returns the slope of the linear regression line

SMALL	Returns the k-th smallest value in a data set

STANDARDIZE	Returns a normalized value

STDEV	Estimates standard deviation based on a sample

STDEVP	Calculates standard deviation based on the entire population

STEYX	Returns the standard error of the predicted y-value for each x in the regression

TDIST	Returns the Student's t-distribution

TINV	Returns the inverse of the Student's t-distribution

TREND	Returns values along a linear trend

TRIMMEAN	Returns the mean of the interior of a data set

TTEST	Returns the probability associated with a Student's t-Test

VAR	Estimates variance based on a sample

VARP	Calculates variance based on the entire population

WEIBULL	Returns the Weibull distribution

ZTEST	Returns the two-tailed P-value of a z-test


Text Functions

CHAR	Returns the character specified by the code number

CLEAN	Removes all nonprintable characters from text

CODE	Returns a numeric code for the first character in a text string

CONCATENATE	Joins several text items into one text item

DOLLAR	Converts a number to text, using currency format

EXACT	Checks to see if two text values are identical

FIND	Finds one text value within another (case-sensitive)

FIXED	Formats a number as text with a fixed number of decimals

LEFT	Returns the leftmost characters from a text value

LEN	Returns the number of characters in a text string

LOWER	Converts text to lowercase

MID	Returns a specific number of characters from a text string starting at the position you specify

PROPER	Capitalizes the first letter in each word of a text value

REPLACE	Replaces characters within text

REPT	Repeats text a given number of times

RIGHT	Returns the rightmost characters from a text value

SEARCH	Finds one text value within another (not case-sensitive)

SUBSTITUTE	Substitutes new text for old text in a text string

T	Converts its arguments to text

TEXT	Formats a number and converts it to text

TRIM	Removes spaces from text

UPPER	Converts text to uppercase

VALUE	Converts a text argument to a number


New and Changed Database and List Management Functions
New and Changed Database & List Management Functions

SQLREQUEST	Connects with an external data source and runs a query from a worksheet, then returns the result as an array without the need for macro programming

SUBTOTAL	Returns a subtotal in a list or database


New and Changed Date & Time Functions

DAYS360	Calculates the number of days between two dates based on a 360-day year. Now supports European method of calculating days.

WEEKDAY	Converts a serial number to a day of the week. Now provides three different return types.

YEARFRAC	Returns the year fraction representing the number of whole days between start_date and end_date


New and Changed DDE & External Functions

SQLREQUEST	Connects with an external data source and runs a query from a worksheet, then returns the result as an array without the need for macro programming


New and Changed Financial Functions

AMORDEGRC	Returns the depreciation for each accounting period

AMORLINC	Returns the depreciation for each accounting period


New and Changed Information Functions

COUNTBLANK	Counts the number of blank cells within a range


New and Changed Lookup & Reference Functions

HLOOKUP	Looks in the top row of an array and returns the value of the indicated cell. Now supports exact or approximate matching of values.

VLOOKUP	Looks in the first column of an array and moves across the row to return the value of a cell. Now supports exact or approximate matching of values.


New and Changed Math & Trigonometry Functions

COUNTIF	Counts the number of non-blank cells within a range which meet the given criteria

POWER	Returns the result of a number raised to a power

ROMAN	Converts an Arabic numeral to Roman, as text

ROUNDDOWN	Rounds a number down, toward zero

ROUNDUP	Rounds a number up, away from zero

SUMIF	Adds the cells specified by a given criteria


New and Changed Text Functions

CONCATENATE	Joins several text items into one text item


Alphabetical List of Worksheet Functions

ABS	Returns the absolute value of a number

ACCRINTM	Returns the accrued interest for a security that pays interest at maturity

ACCRINT	Returns the accrued interest for a security that pays periodic interest

ACOSH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number

ACOS	Returns the arccosine of a number

ADDRESS	Returns a reference as text to a single cell in a worksheet

AMORDEGRC	Returns the depreciation for each accounting period

AMORLINC	Returns the depreciation for each accounting period

AND	Returns TRUE if all its arguments are TRUE

AREAS	Returns the number of areas in a reference

ASINH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number

ASIN	Returns the arcsine of a number

ATAN2	Returns the arctangent from x- and y- coordinates

ATANH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number

ATAN	Returns the arctangent of a number

AVEDEV	Returns the average of the absolute deviations of data points from their mean

AVERAGE	Returns the average of its arguments

BESSELI	Returns the modified Bessel function In(x)

BESSELJ	Returns the Bessel function Jn(x)

BESSELK	Returns the modified Bessel function Kn(x)

BESSELY	Returns the Bessel function Yn(x)

BETADIST	Returns the cumulative beta probability density function

BETAINV	Returns the inverse of the cumulative beta probability density function

BIN2DEC	Converts a binary number to decimal

BIN2HEX	Converts a binary number to hexadecimal

BIN2OCT	Converts a binary number to octal

BINOMDIST	Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability

CALL	Calls a procedure in a dynamic link library or code resource

CEILING	Rounds a number to the nearest integer or to the nearest multiple of significance

CELL	Returns information about the formatting, location, or contents of a cell

CHAR	Returns the character specified by the code number

CHIDIST	Returns the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution

CHIINV	Returns the inverse of the chi-squared distribution

CHITEST	Returns the test for independence

CHOOSE	Chooses a value from a list of values

CLEAN	Removes all nonprintable characters from text

CODE	Returns a numeric code for the first character in a text string

COLUMNS	Returns the number of columns in a reference

COLUMN	Returns the column number of a reference

COMBIN	Returns the number of combinations for a given number of objects

COMPLEX	Converts real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number

CONCATENATE	Joins several text items into one text item

CONFIDENCE	Returns a confidence interval for a population

CONVERT	Converts a number from one measurement system to another

CORREL	Returns the correlation coefficient between two data sets

COSH	Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number

COS	Returns the cosine of a number

COUNTA	Counts how many values are in the list of arguments

COUNTBLANK	Counts the number of blank cells within a range

COUNTIF	Counts the number of non-blank cells within a range which meet the given criteria

COUNT	Counts how many numbers are in the list of arguments

COUPDAYBS	Returns the number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the settlement date

COUPDAYSNC	Returns the number of days from the settlement date to the next coupon date

COUPDAYS	Returns the number of days in the coupon period that contains the settlement date

COUPNCD	Returns the next coupon date after the settlement date

COUPNUM	Returns the number of coupons payable between the settlement date and maturity date

COUPPCD	Returns the previous coupon date before the settlement date

COVAR	Returns covariance, the average of the products of paired deviations

CRITBINOM	Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is less than or equal to a criterion value

CUMIPMT	Returns the cumulative interest paid between two periods

CUMPRINC	Returns the cumulative principal paid on a loan between two periods

Database Functions	This section describes the 12 worksheet functions used for Microsoft Excel database calculations

DATEVALUE	Converts a date in the form of text to a serial number

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

DAVERAGE	Returns the average of selected database entries

DAYS360	Calculates the number of days between two dates based on a 360-day year

DAY	Converts a serial number to a day of the month

DB	Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the fixed-declining balance method

DCOUNTA	Counts nonblank cells from a specified database and criteria

DCOUNT	Counts the cells containing numbers from a specified database and criteria

DDB	Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the double-declining balance method

DEC2BIN	Converts a decimal number to binary

DEC2HEX	Converts a decimal number to hexadecimal

DEC2OCT	Converts a decimal number to octal

DEGREES	Converts radians to degrees

DELTA	Tests whether two values are equal

DEVSQ	Returns the sum of squares of deviations

DGET	Extracts from a database a single record that matches the specified criteria

DISC	Returns the discount rate for a security

DMAX	Returns the maximum value from selected database entries

DMIN	Returns the minimum value from selected database entries

DOLLARDE	Converts a dollar price, expressed as a fraction, into a dollar price, expressed as a decimal number

DOLLARFR	Converts a dollar price, expressed as a decimal number, into a dollar price, expressed as a fraction

DOLLAR	Converts a number to text, using currency format

DPRODUCT	Multiplies the values in a particular field of records that match the criteria in a database

DSTDEVP	Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population of selected database entries

DSTDEV	Estimates the standard deviation based on a sample of selected database entries

DSUM	Adds the numbers in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria

DURATION	Returns the annual duration of a security with periodic interest payments

DVARP	Calculates variance based on the entire population of selected database entries

DVAR	Estimates variance based on a sample from selected database entries

EDATE	Returns the serial number of the date that is the indicated number of months before or after the start date

EFFECT	Returns the effective annual interest rate

EOMONTH	Returns the serial number of the last day of the month before or after a specified number of months

ERFC	Returns the complementary error function

ERF	Returns the error function

ERROR.TYPE	Returns a number corresponding to an error type

EVEN	Rounds a number up to the nearest even integer

EXACT	Checks to see if two text values are identical

EXPONDIST	Returns the exponential distribution

EXP	Returns e raised to the power of a given number

FACTDOUBLE	Returns the double factorial of a number

FACT	Returns the factorial of a number

FALSE	Returns the logical value FALSE

FDIST	Returns the F probability distribution

FIND	Finds one text value within another (case-sensitive)

FINV	Returns the inverse of the F probability distribution

FISHERINV	Returns the inverse of the Fisher transformation

FISHER	Returns the Fisher transformation

FIXED	Formats a number as text with a fixed number of decimals

FLOOR	Rounds a number down, toward zero

FORECAST	Returns a value along a linear trend

FREQUENCY	Returns a frequency distribution as a vertical array

FTEST	Returns the result of an F-test

FVSCHEDULE	Returns the future value of an initial principal after applying a series of compound interest rates

FV	Returns the future value of an investment

GAMMADIST	Returns the gamma distribution

GAMMAINV	Returns the inverse of the gamma cumulative distribution

GAMMALN	Returns the natural logarithm of the gamma function, Γ(x)

GCD	Returns the greatest common divisor

GEOMEAN	Returns the geometric mean

GESTEP	Tests whether a number is greater than a threshold value

GROWTH	Returns values along an exponential trend

HARMEAN	Returns the harmonic mean

HEX2BIN	Converts a hexadecimal number to binary

HEX2DEC	Converts a hexadecimal number to decimal

HEX2OCT	Converts a hexadecimal number to octal

HLOOKUP	Looks in the top row of an array and returns the value of the indicated cell

HOUR	Converts a serial number to an hour

HYPGEOMDIST	Returns the hypergeometric distribution

IF	Specifies a logical test to perform

IMABS	Returns the absolute value (modulus) of a complex number

IMAGINARY	Returns the imaginary coefficient of a complex number

IMARGUMENT	Returns the argument theta, an angle expressed in radians

IMCONJUGATE	Returns the complex conjugate of a complex number

IMCOS	Returns the cosine of a complex number

IMDIV	Returns the quotient of two complex numbers

IMEXP	Returns the exponential of a complex number

IMLN	Returns the natural logarithm of a complex number

IMLOG10	Returns the base-10 logarithm of a complex number

IMLOG2	Returns the base-2 logarithm of a complex number

IMPOWER	Returns a complex number raised to an integer power

IMPRODUCT	Returns the product of two complex numbers

IMREAL	Returns the real coefficient of a complex number

IMSIN	Returns the sine of a complex number

IMSQRT	Returns the square root of a complex number

IMSUB	Returns the difference of two complex numbers

IMSUM	Returns the sum of complex numbers

INDEX	Uses an index to choose a value from a reference or array

INDIRECT	Returns a reference indicated by a text value

INFO	Returns information about the current operating environment

INTERCEPT	Returns the intercept of the linear regression line

INTRATE	Returns the interest rate for a fully invested security

INT	Rounds a number down to the nearest integer

IPMT	Returns the interest payment for an investment for a given period

IRR	Returns the internal rate of return for a series of cash flows

ISBLANK	Returns TRUE if the value is blank

ISERROR	Returns TRUE if the value is any error value

ISERR	Returns TRUE if the value is any error value except #N/A

ISEVEN	Returns TRUE if the number is even

ISLOGICAL	Returns TRUE if the value is a logical value

ISNA	Returns TRUE if the value is the #N/A error value

ISNONTEXT	Returns TRUE if the value is not text

ISNUMBER	Returns TRUE if the value is a number

ISODD	Returns TRUE if the number is odd

ISREF	Returns TRUE if the value is a reference

ISTEXT	Returns TRUE if the value is text

KURT	Returns the kurtosis of a data set

LARGE	Returns the k-th largest value in a data set

LCM	Returns the least common multiple

LEFT	Returns the leftmost characters from a text value

LEN	Returns the number of characters in a text string

LINEST	Returns the parameters of a linear trend

LN	Returns the natural logarithm of a number

LOG10	Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number

LOGEST	Returns the parameters of an exponential trend

LOGINV	Returns the inverse of the lognormal distribution

LOGNORMDIST	Returns the cumulative lognormal distribution

LOG	Returns the logarithm of a number to a specified base

LOOKUP	Looks up values in a vector or array

LOWER	Converts text to lowercase

MATCH	Looks up values in a reference or array

MAX	Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments

MDETERM	Returns the matrix determinant of an array

MDURATION	Returns the Macauley modified duration for a security with an assumed par value of $100

MEDIAN	Returns the median of the given numbers

MID	Returns a specific number of characters from a text string starting at the position you specify

MINUTE	Converts a serial number to a minute

MINVERSE	Returns the matrix inverse of an array

MIN	Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments

MIRR	Returns the internal rate of return where positive and negative cash flows are financed at different rates

MMULT	Returns the matrix product of two arrays

MODE	Returns the most common value in a data set

MOD	Returns the remainder from division

MONTH	Converts a serial number to a month

MROUND	Returns a number rounded to the desired multiple

MULTINOMIAL	Returns the multinomial of a set of numbers

NA	Returns the error value #N/A

NEGBINOMDIST	Returns the negative binomial distribution

NETWORKDAYS	Returns the number of whole workdays between two dates

NOMINAL	Returns the annual nominal interest rate

NORMDIST	Returns the normal cumulative distribution

NORMINV	Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution

NORMSDIST	Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution

NORMSINV	Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution

NOT	Reverses the logic of its argument

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

NPER	Returns the number of periods for an investment

NPV	Returns the net present value of an investment based on a series of periodic cash flows and a discount rate

N	Returns a value converted to a number

OCT2BIN	Converts an octal number to binary

OCT2DEC	Converts an octal number to decimal

OCT2HEX	Converts an octal number to hexadecimal

ODDFPRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security with an odd first period

ODDFYIELD	Returns the yield of a security with an odd first period

ODDLPRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security with an odd last period

ODDLYIELD	Returns the yield of a security with an odd last period

ODD	Rounds a number up to the nearest odd integer

OFFSET	Returns a reference offset from a given reference

OR	Returns TRUE if any argument is TRUE

PEARSON	Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient

PERCENTILE	Returns the k-th percentile of values in a range

PERCENTRANK	Returns the percentage rank of a value in a data set

PERMUT	Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects

PI	Returns the value of pi.

PMT	Returns the periodic payment for an annuity

POISSON	Returns the Poisson distribution

POWER	Returns the result of a number raised to a power

PPMT	Returns the payment on the principal for an investment for a given period

PRICEDISC	Returns the price per $100 face value of a discounted security

PRICEMAT	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security that pays interest at maturity

PRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security that pays periodic interest

PROB	Returns the probability that values in a range are between two limits

PRODUCT	Multiplies its arguments

PROPER	Capitalizes the first letter in each word of a text value

PV	Returns the present value of an investment

QUARTILE	Returns the quartile of a data set

QUOTIENT	Returns the integer portion of a division

RADIANS	Converts degrees to radians

RANDBETWEEN	Returns a random number between the numbers you specify

RAND	Returns a random number between 0 and 1

RANK	Returns the rank of a number in a list of numbers

RATE	Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity

RECEIVED	Returns the amount received at maturity for a fully invested security

REGISTER.ID	Returns the register ID of the specified dynamic link library (DLL) or code resource that has been previously registered

REPLACE	Replaces characters within text

REPT	Repeats text a given number of times

RIGHT	Returns the rightmost characters from a text value

ROMAN	Converts an Arabic numeral to Roman, as text

ROUNDDOWN	Rounds a number down, toward zero

ROUNDUP	Rounds a number up, away from zero

ROUND	Rounds a number to a specified number of digits

ROWS	Returns the number of rows in a reference

ROW	Returns the row number of a reference

RSQ	Returns the square of the Pearson product moment correlatin coefficient

SEARCH	Finds one text value within another (not case-sensitive)

SECOND	Converts a serial number to a second

SERIESSUM	Returns the sum of a power series based on the formula

SIGN	Returns the sign of a number

SINH	Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number

SIN	Returns the sine of the given angle

SKEW	Returns the skewness of a distribution

SLN	Returns the straight-line depreciation of an asset for one period

SLOPE	Returns the slope of the linear regression line

SMALL	Returns the k-th smallest value in a data set

SQLREQUEST	Connects with an external data source and runs a query from a worksheet, then returns the result as an array without the need for macro programming

SQRTPI	Returns the square root of (number * PI)

SQRT	Returns a positive square root

STANDARDIZE	Returns a normalized value

STDEVP	Calculates standard deviation based on the entire population

STDEV	Estimates standard deviation based on a sample

STEYX	Returns the standard error of the predicted y-value for each x in the regression

SUBSTITUTE	Substitutes new text for old text in a text string

SUBTOTAL	Returns a subtotal in a list or database

SUMIF	Adds the cells specified by a given criteria

SUMPRODUCT	Returns the sum of the products of corresponding array components

SUMSQ	Returns the sum of the squares of the arguments

SUMX2MY2	Returns the sum of the difference of squares of corresponding values in two arrays

SUMX2PY2	Returns the sum of the sum of squares of corresponding values in two arrays

SUM	Adds its arguments

SUMXMY2	Returns the sum of squares of differences of corresponding values in two arrays

SYD	Returns the sum-of-years' digits depreciation of an asset for a specified period

TANH	Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number

TAN	Returns the tangent of a number

TBILLEQ	Returns the bond-equivalent yield for a Treasury bill

TBILLPRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value for a Treasury bill

TBILLYIELD	Returns the yield for a Treasury bill

TDIST	Returns the Student's t-distribution

TEXT	Formats a number and converts it to text

TIMEVALUE	Converts a time in the form of text to a serial number

TIME	Returns the serial number of a particular time

TINV	Returns the inverse of the Student's t-distribution

TODAY	Returns the serial number of today's date

TRANSPOSE	Returns the transpose of an array

TREND	Returns values along a linear trend

TRIMMEAN	Returns the mean of the interior of a data set

TRIM	Removes spaces from text

TRUE	Returns the logical value TRUE

TRUNC	Truncates a number to an integer

TTEST	Returns the probability associated with a Student's t-Test

T	Converts its arguments to text

TYPE	Returns a number indicating the data type of a value

UPPER	Converts text to uppercase

VALUE	Converts a text argument to a number

VARP	Calculates variance based on the entire population

VAR	Estimates variance based on a sample

VDB	Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified or partial period using a declining balance method

VLOOKUP	Looks in the first column of an array and moves across the row to return the value of a cell

WEEKDAY	Converts a serial number to a day of the week

WEIBULL	Returns the Weibull distribution

WORKDAY	Returns the serial number of the date before or after a specified number of workdays

XIRR	Returns the internal rate of return for a schedule of cash flows

XNPV	Returns the net present value for a schedule of cash flows

YEARFRAC	Returns the year fraction representing the number of whole days between start_date and end_date

YEAR	Converts a serial number to a year

YIELDDISC	Returns the annual yield for a discounted security. For example, a treasury bill

YIELDMAT	Returns the annual yield of a security that pays interest at maturity

YIELD	Returns the yield on a security that pays periodic interest

ZTEST	Returns the two-tailed P-value of a z-test


Managing Workbook Files

Overview of Creating or Opening Workbooks

Creating a new workbook

Opening a workbook

Opening a recently opened workbook

Hiding the list of recently opened workbooks on the File menu

Opening several workbooks at one time

Starting Microsoft Excel and opening a workbook automatically

Overview of Saving and Closing Workbooks

Entering and editing summary information

Saving a workbook

Saving a workbook using a different name or file format

Saving your work automatically

Closing a workbook

Closing all workbooks

Overview of Finding Workbooks

Searching for workbooks

Searching with advanced search criteria

Saving search criteria

Modifying saved searches

Using special characters in a search

Overview of Previewing Workbooks and Viewing Summary Information

Sorting a list of files found with the Find File command

Viewing and editing summary information for workbooks

Overview of Managing Workbooks with Find File

Selecting multiple files in the Find File dialog box

Managing files with the Find File command


Overview of Creating or Opening Workbooks

You can create a new workbook or open an existing workbook. You can also open several workbooks at one time, or start Microsoft Excel and open a workbook automatically.

See Also

Help

Creating a new workbook

Hiding the list of recently opened workbooks on the File menu

Opening a recently opened workbook

Opening a workbook

Opening several workbooks at one time

Starting Microsoft Excel and opening a workbook automatically

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Creating a new workbook

Overview

Click the New Workbook button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+N

See Also

Help

  New Workbook Button

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Opening a workbook

Overview

1.	Click the Open button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+O  (the letter O)

The File Name box displays a list of the Microsoft Excel files in the current directory.

To see a list of Microsoft Excel files in another directory, select the directory from the Directories box, or type the name of the directory in the File Name box. Then select Microsoft Excel Files (*.XL*) from the List Files Of Type box.

To see a list of all the files in a directory, including Microsoft Excel files, select All Files (*.*) from the List Files Of Type box.

To see a list of files on another disk, select the disk from the Drives box. If you cannot find the workbook,choose the Find File button to search for the workbook.

If the workbook is on a network disk that you do not have access to, choose the Network button to connect to that network disk.

2.	In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open, or select it from the list.

3.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Open Button

Find File Command (File Menu)

Opening several workbooks at one time

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Opening a recently opened workbook

Overview

From the bottom of the File menu, select the filename.

See Also

Help

Opening a workbook

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Hiding the list of recently opened workbooks on the File menu

Overview

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Select the General tab.

3.	Under Menus, clear the Recently Used File List box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Options Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Opening several workbooks at one time

Overview

1.	Click the Open button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+O  (the letter O)

2.	Select the directory and disk you want.

3.	Hold down CTRL as you select the filenames.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

  Open Button

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Starting Microsoft Excel and opening a workbook automatically

Overview

Double-click the workbook file icon in the Windows File Manager or Program Manager.

If Microsoft Excel is not running, this will start it.

In Windows 3.1 or later, you can also drag the workbook file icon from File Manager to the Microsoft Excel window or minimized Microsoft Excel icon.

See Also

Help

Starting Microsoft Excel

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Overview of Saving and Closing Workbooks

You should frequently save your work. You can set up Microsoft Excel so that it automatically saves your work at the time interval you choose. If you should lose work, you may be able to restore a backup copy of your workbook. You can also save your work in other file formats.

See Also

Help

Closing a workbook

Closing all workbooks

Entering and editing summary information

Saving a workbook

Saving a workbook using a different name or file format

Saving your work automatically

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Entering and editing summary information

Overview

1.	From the File menu, choose Summary Info.

2.	In the Summary Info dialog box, enter the title, subject, and other information that you want to be associated with the workbook file.

3.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Summary Info Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Saving a workbook

Overview

To save a workbook

1.	Click the Save button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+S

2.	If you have not saved the workbook before, the Save As dialog box will appear. In the File Name box, type a name for the workbook or accept the proposed name.

The Microsoft Excel Workbook file format is automatically displayed in the Save File As Type box. If you want to save the file in a format other than the Microsoft Excel Workbook file format, select that format in the Save File As Type box.

3.	Choose the OK button.

To save new unnamed linked workbooks

1.	Switch to the source workbook.

2.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

3.	In the File Name box, type a name for the workbook or accept the proposed name.

4.	Choose the OK button.

5.	Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each additional source workbook.

6.	Switch to the dependent workbook.

7.	Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each dependent workbook.

To save changes in existing linked workbooks

1.	Switch to the source workbook.

2.	From the File menu, choose Save.

3.	Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each additional source workbook.

4.	Switch to the dependent workbook.

5.	From the File menu, choose Save.

6.	Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each dependent workbook.

If you save linked workbooks in different directories, make sure that you use the Save As command on the File menu to save all source workbooks before you save the dependent workbooks, so that the link references in the dependent workbooks are correct.

See Also

Help

  Save Button

Save As Command (File Menu)

Saving a workbook using a different name or file format

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Saving a workbook using a different name or file format

Overview

1.	From the File menu, choose Save As.

2.	In the File Name box, type a name for the workbook or accept the proposed name.

The Microsoft Excel Workbook file format is automatically displayed in the Save File As Type box. If you want to save the file in a format other than the Workbook file format, select that format in the Save File As Type box.

3.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Save As Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Saving your work automatically

Overview

1.	From the Tools menu, choose AutoSave.

If the AutoSave command does not appear on the Tools menu, you need to install the AutoSave add-in.

2.	Select the Automatic Save check box, and then specify how often (in minutes) you want your work saved.

3.	Under Save Options, select what you want saved: the active workbook or all open workbooks.

4.	If you want AutoSave to notify you before saving a workbook, select the Prompt Before Saving check box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

AutoSave Command (Tools Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Closing a workbook

Overview

1.	From the File menu, choose Close.

If there are no changes, the workbook is closed immediately.

If there are unsaved changes, Microsoft Excel asks if you want to save changes.

2.	Choose the Yes button to save changes, the No button to discard changes, or the Cancel button to cancel the command.

If the workbook hasn't been saved before, the Save As dialog box is displayed.

3.	In the File Name box, type a name for the file or accept the proposed name.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Close and Close All Commands (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Closing all workbooks

Overview

1.	Hold down SHIFT and choose Close All from the File menu.

If there are no changes, the workbooks are closed immediately.

If there are unsaved changes, Microsoft Excel asks if you want to save changes.

2.	Choose the Yes button to save changes, the No button to discard changes, or the Cancel button to cancel the command.

If a workbook hasn't been saved before, the Save As dialog box is displayed.

3.	In the File Name box, type a name for the file or accept the proposed name.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Close and Close All Commands (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Overview of Finding Workbooks

The Find File command on the File menu helps you locate Microsoft Excel workbooks or other files. You can search a disk or directory for filenames or for specific words or phrases in the file, or by using summary information you've supplied -- such as a title, author name, and subject. For example, you can search for all workbooks that contain the word "sales" in their titles.

Once you've specified a set of search criteria, you can name and save the search criteria for future use.

Once you've located files that meet the search criteria you specified, you can preview the files, view summary information, and sort the files (by author or size, for example).

You can also use the Find File command to open, copy, move, print, and delete multiple files without leaving Microsoft Excel.

See Also

Help

Modifying saved searches

Saving search criteria

Searching for workbooks

Searching with advanced search criteria

Using special characters in a search

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Searching for workbooks

Overview

1.	From the File menu, choose Find File.

Microsoft Excel does one of the following:

The first time you use Find File, Microsoft Excel displays the Search dialog box. Enter the search criteria you want, and then choose the OK button.

If you've used Find File at least once before, Microsoft Excel uses the last search criteria you specified.

2.	If the list of files that Microsoft Excel builds does not contain the file you want, choose the Search button.

3.	Under Search For, type the filename in the File Name box.

To search for all files that have the same extension, type an asterisk (*), a period, and the three-character extension, or select an extension from the list.

4.	In the Location box, select the disk that contains the file you want to search for.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel displays found files in the Listed Files box. Depending on the type of file you select, you can see its preview, file information or summary information.

6.	When you finish searching for files, choose the Close button.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Search Dialog Box

Searching with advanced search criteria

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Searching with advanced search criteria

Overview

1.	From the File menu, choose Find File.

2.	Choose the Search button.

3.	Choose the Advanced Search button, and then do one or more of the following:

To search by location, select the Location tab. To search by filename or file type, type or select a filename or file type in the File Name box.

To search a directory that is not listed in the Search In box, select the directory in the Directories box, and then choose the Add button. To delete a directory from the Search In box, select it and then choose the Remove button. To remove all directories from the Search In box, choose the Remove All button.

To search all subdirectories of the selected directory or directories, select the Include Subdirectories check box.

To search by summary information, select the Summary tab. Type the summary information you want Microsoft Excel to use in the search.

You can use special characters to search for workbooks by using approximate criteria, instead of exact criteria. For example, you can substitute a wildcard character -- such as a question mark (?) -- for any single character.

To replace, add to, or search within the list of files in the Find File dialog box, select one of the following options in the Options box on the Summary tab.

To	Select

Replace the list of files in the Find File dialog box with a new list	Create New List
Add files to the existing list in the Find File dialog box	Add Matches To List
Search only the files listed in the Find File dialog box	Search Only In List
4.	When you finish selecting search criteria, choose the OK button.

5.	Choose the OK button again.

Microsoft Excel displays found files in the Listed Files box. Depending on the type of file you select, you can see its preview, file information or summary information.

6.	When you finish searching for files, choose the Close button.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Location Tab, Find File Command (File Menu)

Modifying saved searches

Saving search criteria

Search Dialog Box

Summary Tab, Find File Command (File Menu)

Using special characters in a search

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Saving search criteria

Overview

1.	From the File menu, choose Find File.

2.	Choose the Search button.

3.	Choose the Clear button to remove any existing search criteria.

4.	Choose the Advanced Search button.

5.	On the Location, Summary, and Timestamp tabs, type or select the search criteria you want.

6.	When you finish selecting the search criteria, choose the OK button.

7.	Choose the Save Search As button.

8.	In the Search Name box, type a name for the saved search criteria, and then choose the OK button.

9.	To start the search, choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel displays the list of files it finds in the Listed Files box. The name of the saved search is displayed above the list of files.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Location Tab, Find File Command (File Menu)

Modifying saved searches

Summary Tab, Find File Command (File Menu)

Timestamp Tab, Find File Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Modifying saved searches

Overview

1.	From the File menu, choose Find File.

2.	If the Search dialog box does not appear, choose the Search button.

3.	In the Saved Searches box, select the name of the saved search you want to modify, and then choose the Advanced Search button.

4.	Modify the search criteria by typing or selecting different criteria on the Location, Summary, and Timestamp tabs, and then choose the OK button.

5.	Choose the Save Search As button.

If you want to assign a new name to the modified search criteria, type a new name, and then choose the OK button.

6.	To start the search, choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Location Tab, Find File Command (File Menu)

Saving search criteria

Summary Tab, Find File Command (File Menu)

Timestamp Tab, Find File Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Using special characters in a search

Overview

You can use special characters to search for files by using approximate criteria, instead of exact criteria. When you specify search criteria on the Summary tab in the Search dialog box, you can substitute a wildcard character -- such as a question mark (?) -- for any text. You can also use search operators -- such as ampersands (&) -- to control a search in specific ways.

Using search operators, particularly when searching for text contained in a file, saves time because it helps to narrow down the list of files Microsoft Excel finds.

Character	Meaning

? (question mark)	Match any single character. For example, type gr?y to match both "gray" and "grey".
* (asterisk)	Match any number of characters. For example, type account* to match both "accounts" and "accountant".
" " (quotation marks)	Treat the enclosed character (space, asterisk, question mark, comma, ampersand, or tilde) as a normal character. For example, type "?" to indicate a true question mark.
, (comma)	Logical OR. The information may match any or all items, but it must match at least one item. For example, type fiscal, year to find all files that contain either "fiscal" or "year".
& (ampersand) or (space)	Logical AND. The information must match all of the items in the list. For example, type fiscal&year or  fiscal year to find all files that contain both words.
~ (tilde)	Logical NOT. The information must not match this item. For example, type ~fiscal to exclude any files that contain the word "fiscal".
Tip  You can use the Containing Text box on the Summary tab to search for any text in a file. In this box, you can use advanced search criteria to find very specific occurrences of text. Using advanced criteria when searching for text saves you time, because it helps narrow down the list of files Microsoft Excel finds.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Location Tab, Find File Command (File Menu)

Searching with advanced search criteria

Summary Tab, Find File Command (File Menu)

Timestamp Tab, Find File Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Overview of Previewing Workbooks and Viewing Summary Information

With the Find File command on the File menu, you can see a thumbnail view of the upper-left corner of the leftmost sheet in a workbook. If you enter information such as the workbook's title, purpose, and author in this location, seeing the preview can help you quickly select the workbook you want before you open it. You can also view information about a workbook, such as its size, the date it was last modified, and its summary information.

You can also preview other file formats, if they support the thumbnail view.

See Also

Help

Sorting a list of files found with the Find File command

Viewing and editing summary information for workbooks

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Sorting a list of files found with the Find File command

Overview

1.	From the File menu, choose Find File.

2.	Choose the Commands button, and then choose Sorting from the menu.

3.	Under Sort Files By, specify how you want Microsoft Excel to sort the files.

4.	Under List Files By, do one of the following:

To list the sorted files by filename, select the Filename option button.

To list the sorted files by the titles that were entered in the files' summary information, select the Title option button. If no title is available for a file, or if a file was created in another application, Microsoft Excel lists it with its filename enclosed in hyphens (-).

5.	Choose the OK button.

Microsoft Excel sorts the files within each directory.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Options Dialog Box

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Viewing and editing summary information for workbooks

Overview

To view and edit summary information for the active workbook

1.	From the File menu, choose Summary Info.

2.	Make any changes you want in the Title, Subject, Author, Keywords, and Comments boxes.

3.	Choose the OK button.

To view summary information for any workbook

1.	From the File menu, choose Find File.

2.	In the Listed Files box, select the file whose summary information you want to view. If you do not see the file you want, choose the Search button to look for it.

3.	In the View box, select Summary.

You can view, but not edit, summary information in this box.

4.	When you finish viewing summary information, choose the Close button.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

Summary Info Command (File Menu)

Summary Tab, Find File Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Overview of Managing Workbooks with Find File

The Find File command on the File menu makes it easy for you to open, copy, print, and delete files without leaving Microsoft Excel.

See Also

Help

Managing files with the Find File command

Selecting multiple files in the Find File dialog box

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Selecting multiple files in the Find File dialog box

OverviewxlovrManagingWorkbookFiles>Main

You can select multiple files and then open, copy, print, and delete them.

1.	From the File menu, choose Find File.

2.	In the Listed Files box, click the first filename you want to select.

3.	While holding down CTRL, click each additional filename you want to select.

To remove a filename from the selection, hold down CTRL, and then click the filename.

Note  You can also extend the selection over a block of adjacent files. Click the first filename, hold down SHIFT, and then click the last filename you want in the selection. All filenames in between are now selected as well.

See Also

Help

Find File Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Managing files with the Find File command

Overview

You can open multiple files at the same time or copy, print, or delete multiple files without opening them or leaving Microsoft Excel.

1.	From the File menu, choose Find File.

2.	Select the file or files you want to work with. If you don't see the file you want, choose the Search button to look for it.

3.	To open the files, choose the Open button. To perform other tasks, choose the Commands button and then choose the appropriate command to do one or more of the following.

3.	To open the file, choose the Open button. To perform other tasks, choose the Commands button and then choose the appropriate command to do one or more of the following.

To	Do this

Open a file as read-only	Choose the Open Read Only command.
Print a file	Choose Print, select the options you want, and then choose the OK button.
View and edit summary information	Choose Summary View.
Delete a file	Choose Delete. Microsoft Excel asks you to confirm that you want to delete the file.
Copy a file	Choose Copy. In the Directories and Drives boxes, select the location where you want to copy the file, and then choose the OK button.
Create a new directory	Choose Copy, and then choose the New Directory button. In the Name box, type the path and name of the directory you want to create, and then choose the OK button.
See Also

Help

Copy Dialog Box

Create Directory Dialog Box

Find File Command (File Menu)

Options Dialog Box

Selecting multiple files in the Find File dialog box

Summary Tab, Find File Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 6, "Managing Workbook Files"


Customizing Your Workspace

Overview of Changing Defaults and Settings

Changing general Microsoft Excel settings

Changing what Microsoft Excel displays

Changing the way you enter and edit data

Changing chart settings

Using features that help you switch to Microsoft Excel

Overview of Saving Workspace Files

Creating and saving a workspace file

Opening a workspace file

Overview of Customizing Toolbars

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Changing the image on a toolbar button

Moving and copying toolbar buttons

Spacing buttons on a toolbar

Changing the width of a drop-down list box on a toolbar

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Moving and resizing toolbars

Restoring a built-in toolbar

Creating and deleting a custom toolbar

Saving custom toolbars

Overview of Using Custom Colors

Customizing colors in a color palette

Copying color palettes between workbooks


Overview of Changing Defaults and Settings

You can change most of the elements of the Microsoft Excel workbook, sheet, workspace, and window display. You can also turn many features of Microsoft Excel on or off, or change the way they work to suit your working style.

See Also

Help

Changing chart settings

Changing general Microsoft Excel settings

Changing the way you enter and edit data

Changing what Microsoft Excel displays

Using features that help you switch to Microsoft Excel

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Overview of Saving Workspace Files

You can open a group of workbooks in one step if you first save them as a workspace file. Workspace files save the workbooks you have open, including their size, arrangement, and position on the screen.

The size and position of the application window is saved every time you quit Microsoft Excel.

Once you have saved a workspace file, you can open the workspace and all of your workbooks will be displayed in the position you had them.

See Also

Help

Creating and saving a workspace file

Opening a workspace file

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Creating and saving a workspace file

Overview

1.	Open the workbooks you want to save in your workspace.

2.	Position the open workbooks as you want them to appear.

3.	From the File menu, choose Save Workspace.

4.	Accept the suggested filename or give the workspace a new name.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Opening a workspace file

Save Workspace Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Opening a workspace file

Overview

To open a saved workspace file

1.	From the File menu, choose Open.

Microsoft Excel lists the files in the current directory. RESUME.XLW is the default workspace filename.

2.	Select the workspace file you want to open.

3.	Choose the OK button.

To have Microsoft Excel automatically open a workspace file

Place your workspace file in the startup or alternate startup directory.

Every time you start Microsoft Excel, your workspace will be opened.

Note  You should not put the workbook files themselves in the startup directory or alternate startup directory, just the workspace file.

See Also

Help

Creating and saving a workspace file

Opening a workbook automatically

Save Workspace Command (File Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Overview of Customizing Toolbars

You can display any of the Microsoft Excel built-in toolbars. You can customize these toolbars to include the buttons that you use the most, or you can create entirely new custom toolbars of your own. With the Button Editor dialog box, you can create your own button images. In addition, you can create custom buttons that perform actions that you program them to do. See Automating Repeated Tasks with Macros for procedures.

You can move toolbars around in the application window. They can be fixed to a toolbar dock along the edges of the application window or they can be floating toolbars that stay on top of your workbooks. Buttons can be moved from toolbar to toolbar.

Microsoft Excel automatically saves any changes you have made to your toolbars, so they are there the next time you open Microsoft Excel. You can always restore a built-in button or toolbar to its original state.

See Also

Help

Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Changing the image on a toolbar button

Changing the width of a drop-down list box on a toolbar

Creating and deleting a custom toolbar

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Moving and copying toolbar buttons

Moving and resizing toolbars

Restoring a built-in toolbar

Saving custom toolbars

Spacing buttons on a toolbar

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Adding or deleting a toolbar button

Overview

To add a button to a toolbar

You must have the toolbar you want to add the button to displayed.

1.	From the toolbar shortcut menu, choose Customize.

You can also choose Toolbars from the View menu and then choose the Customize button.

2.	In the Categories box, select a button category.

The buttons for that category are displayed in the Buttons box. To see a description for a button, click the button.

3.	Drag the button from the Buttons box to the position on the toolbar where you want to add the button.

You can also drag the button into the workspace and release the mouse button. The button will appear on a new toolbar.

To delete a button from a toolbar

You must have the toolbar you want to delete the button from displayed.

1.	From the toolbar shortcut menu, choose Customize.

2.	Drag the button off the toolbar and release the mouse button.

Note  Built-in buttons are not deleted from Microsoft Excel when you remove them from the toolbars. A button that you customized is permanently deleted once you delete it from the toolbar. If you want to delete a custom button from a toolbar but save it for later use, create a toolbar for storing unused buttons, and then move the button that you want to delete to this storage toolbar.

See Also

Help

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Toolbars Command (View Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Changing the image on a toolbar button

Overview

To change the image on a toolbar button

You must have the button you want to change displayed on a toolbar.

1.	From the toolbar shortcut menu, choose Customize.

2.	Click the right mouse button on the toolbar button that you want to change.

3.	From the button shortcut menu, choose Edit Button Image.

The Button Editor is displayed.

4.	To clear the existing image, choose the Clear button.

5.	Select a color from the Colors box.

Use the Erase color to paint a background color that lightens when the button is active.

6.	With the mouse, click or drag through the pixels in the Picture box to create a new button image.

You can see how the image will look by checking the Preview box as you draw.

7.	When you are done, choose the OK button.

To change the image using another graphics application

You can copy a picture from a graphics application and paste it onto a button. You should copy a picture that is the same size as the built-in button images (16 by 15 pixels or bits) so that the picture will be clear when it appears on the button.

1.	Copy the picture that you want on the button to the Clipboard.

If the application you are copying from lets you select the format stored on the Clipboard, you can select either bitmap or picture format.

2.	Switch to Microsoft Excel.

3.	From the toolbar shortcut menu, choose Customize.

4.	Click the button that you want to change.

5.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Button Image.

If the image is larger than the button (16 by 15 pixels or bits), Microsoft Excel scales it to fit the button.

To copy the image to another button

Use this procedure if you want to use the image from a built-in button or a custom button as the picture on a new button.

1.	From the toolbar shortcut menu, choose Customize.

2.	Click the toolbar button whose image you want to copy to another button.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Copy Button Image.

4.	On the toolbar, click the button on which you want to paste the copied image.

5.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste Button Image.

To restore the original appearance of a button

1.	From the toolbar shortcut menu, choose Customize.

2.	Click the right mouse button on the toolbar button whose image you want to restore.

3.	From the button shortcut menu, choose Reset Button Image.

See Also

Help

Copy Button Image Command (Edit Menu)

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Paste Button Image Command (Edit Menu)

Reset Button Image Command (Shortcut Menu)

Toolbars Command (View Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Changing the width of a drop-down list box on a toolbar

Overview

Drop-down list boxes include the Font box, Font Size box, Zoom Control box, Style box, and Scenarios box.

1.	From the toolbar shortcut menu, choose Customize.

2.	Click the drop-down list box to select it.

3.	Drag either the left or right border of the list box to the size you want.

The pointer changes to a double-headed arrow when positioned over the right or left border.

4.	Choose the Close button.

See Also

Help

Toolbars Command (View Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Creating and deleting a custom toolbar

Overview

To create a new toolbar

1.	From the View menu, choose Toolbars.

You can also choose Toolbars from the toolbar shortcut menu.

2.	In the Toolbar Name box, type the name of the new toolbar.

Once you have created a toolbar, you cannot rename it.

3.	Choose the New button.

Microsoft Excel displays a new blank toolbar and displays the Customize dialog box so that you can add buttons to the toolbar.

4.	In the Categories box, select the category from which you want to add buttons to the new toolbar.

Microsoft Excel displays the buttons for that category in the Buttons box. Click a button to display the description.

5.	Drag the button from the Buttons box to the position on the new toolbar where you want to add the button.

You can also drag buttons from a displayed toolbar to the new toolbar. This moves the button from the original toolbar to the new toolbar. Hold down CTRL while you drag the button to place a copy of the button on the new toolbar without affecting the original toolbar.

Note  You can drag a button from the Buttons box out of the dialog box and place it where there is no toolbar. Microsoft Excel creates a toolbar for the button and names it Toolbar 1. If Toolbar 1 already exists, Microsoft Excel names it Toolbar 2, and so on. You cannot rename toolbars.

6.	Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have added all the buttons you want.

Microsoft Excel resizes the toolbar to accommodate the added buttons.

If you change your mind, you can remove the button from the toolbar by dragging it off the toolbar to anywhere (other than a toolbar).

7.	Choose the Close button.

To delete a custom toolbar

1.	From the View menu, choose Toolbars.

You can also choose Toolbars from the toolbar shortcut menu.

2.	In the Toolbars box, select the custom toolbar you want to delete.

You cannot delete built-in toolbars.

3.	Choose the Delete button.

4.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Moving and copying toolbar buttons

Restoring a built-in toolbar

Toolbars Command (View Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Displaying or hiding toolbars

Overview

To display or hide a toolbar with the toolbar shortcut menu

From the toolbar shortcut menu, choose the name of the toolbar you want to display or hide.

Microsoft Excel places a check mark next to the name of each displayed toolbar.

Note  Not all toolbars are included on this list. You may need to display a toolbar using the Toolbars command.

To display a toolbar with the Toolbars command

1.	From the View menu, choose Toolbars.

You can also choose Toolbars from the toolbar shortcut menu.

2.	In the Toolbars box, select the check box next to the toolbar you want to display.

3.	Choose the OK button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+7 (displays or hides Standard toolbar)

To hide a toolbar

1.	From the View menu, choose Toolbars.

You can also choose Toolbars from the toolbar shortcut menu.

2.	In the Toolbars box, clear the check box next to the toolbar you want to hide.

3.	Choose the OK button.

Shortcut:	CTRL+7 (displays or hides Standard toolbar)

Note  If the toolbar is displayed as a floating toolbar, you can hide it by clicking the Close box.

See Also

Help

Toolbars Command (View Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Moving and copying toolbar buttons

Overview

To move a button

1.	From the toolbar shortcut menu, choose Customize.

2.	Drag the button to a new location on the same toolbar or another displayed toolbar.

To copy a button

1.	From the toolbar shortcut menu, choose Customize.

2.	Hold down CTRL and drag the button to the new location on the same toolbar or another displayed toolbar.

See Also

Help

Toolbars Command (View Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Moving and resizing toolbars

Overview

To move a toolbar

1.	Position the mouse pointer on the background of a toolbar, or on the toolbar title bar if it is a floating toolbar.

2.	Drag the toolbar to a new location in a toolbar dock, or anywhere else in the workspace.

If you place the toolbar in a toolbar dock, Microsoft Excel automatically shifts the other toolbars to accommodate the moved toolbar.

Note  Toolbars with drop-down lists or palettes, such as the Font box or Color button, cannot be docked along the left or right sides of the application window.

Tip  To quickly move toolbars on and off the toolbar dock, double-click the background of a toolbar or the title bar of a floating toolbar.

To change the shape of a floating toolbar

Drag any of the toolbar window borders.

If you change the toolbar height and width, Microsoft Excel automatically wraps the buttons to fit in the new toolbar shape.

See Also

Help

Displaying or hiding toolbars

Spacing buttons on a toolbar

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Restoring a built-in toolbar

Overview

If you have customized a built-in toolbar, you can restore it to its original configuration.

1.	From the View menu, choose Toolbars.

You can also choose Toolbars from the shortcut menu.

2.	In the Toolbars box, select the toolbar you want to restore.

3.	Choose the Reset button.

If the Reset button has changed to a Delete button, you have selected a custom toolbar and not a built-in toolbar. You cannot reset a custom toolbar.

4.	To reset all the built-in toolbars, repeat steps 2 and 3 for each toolbar in the Toolbars box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Toolbars Command (View Menu)

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Saving custom toolbars

Overview

The latest version of your toolbars are saved each time you quit Microsoft Excel.

The toolbar customization and layout is saved in a file called EXCEL5.XLB which is located in your Windows directory.

To save additional toolbar layouts

1.	Customize your toolbars as you would like them saved.

2.	From the File menu, choose Exit.

3.	Make a copy of the toolbar file and save it with another name.

Tip  Use the .XLB extension when saving toolbar files to distinguish them from other files.

4.	Open Microsoft Excel.

Any further customizations will be saved each time you quit Microsoft Excel.

5.	To retrieve your saved toolbar layout, open the toolbar file you named in step 3.

To attach custom toolbars to a workbook

1.	From the Insert menu, choose Macro and then choose Module.

You can also switch to a module if you already have one in your workbook.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Attach Toolbars.

A list of all the custom toolbars appears in the Custom Toolbars box. Built-in toolbars are already attached to workbooks.

3.	Select a custom toolbar that you want to attach to the workbook.

4.	Choose the Copy button.

5.	Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have attached all the custom toolbars you want.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Creating and deleting a custom toolbar

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Spacing buttons on a toolbar

Overview

To move buttons next to each other

1.	From the toolbar shortcut menu, choose Customize.

2.	On the toolbar, drag the button that you want to group with another button toward that button, but not past it.

Microsoft Excel closes the space between the buttons.

To insert spaces between buttons

1.	From the toolbar shortcut menu, choose Customize.

2.	On the toolbar, drag the button slightly away from, but not past the next button.

Microsoft Excel inserts a space between the buttons.

See Also

Help

Toolbars Command (View Menu)


Overview of Using Custom Colors

Each Microsoft Excel workbook has a palette of 56 colors that you can apply to cells, fonts, gridlines, graphic objects, and fills and lines in a chart. If you are using a color monitor, you can customize the shade and intensity of the colors in the color palette for each workbook.

When you change colors in the palette, they are changed for the entire workbook. Anything you formatted with the color you changed will change as well. To use the same custom color scheme in a set of workbooks, you can copy the color palette from one workbook to another. For example, you can create a custom color palette that matches your company's logo and image and then copy it into all the workbooks used in company presentations. You can also create a workbook with a custom color palette that replaces the default color palette that Microsoft Excel uses when it creates a new workbook.

For information about sharing color palettes between Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh, see Moving files between Windows and the Macintosh.

See also

Help

Applying colors, patterns, and borders to chart items

Copying color palettes between workbooks

Customizing colors in a color palette

Shading cells with patterns and colors

User's Guide

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Copying color palettes between workbooks

Overview

1.	Open the workbook that has the color palette you want to copy.

2.	Switch to the workbook to which you want to copy the color palette.

3	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

4.	Select the Color tab.

5.	In the Copy Colors From box, select the workbook that has the color palette you want to copy.

6.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Color Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Customizing colors in a color palette

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Customizing colors in a color palette

Overview

To customize colors

1.	Switch to the workbook for which you want to change the color palette.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

3.	Select the Color tab.

4.	Double-click the color you want to customize.

You can also select the color and then choose the Modify button.

5.	Adjust the color settings to display the new color you want.

6.	Choose the OK button.

7.	Repeat steps 4 through 6 to customize additional colors.

8.	When you are finished customizing colors, choose the OK button.

To restore the default palette

1.	Switch to the workbook for which you want to change the color palette.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

3.	Select the Color tab.

4.	Choose the Reset button.

5.	Choose the OK button.

See Also

Help

Color Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)

Copying color palettes between workbooks

User's Guide

Chapter 12, "Formatting a Worksheet"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Displaying the full screen

Overview

1.	From the View menu, choose Full Screen.

The screen is maximized and the docked toolbars, formula bar, and status bar are hidden.

2.	To return to normal view, click the Full Screen button.

See Also

Help

  Full Screen Button

Changing what Microsoft Excel displays

Full Screen Command (View Menu)

Zooming in or out on a worksheet

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Changing what Microsoft Excel displays

Overview

Use the options in the following tables to change the display of workbooks, sheets, workspaces, and windows in Microsoft Excel.

To display the Options dialog box, choose the Options command from the Tools menu.

To display or hide	Select the View tab and use this option

Cell gridlines	Gridlines

Gridline color	Color

Scroll bars	Horizontal Scroll Bar or Vertical Scroll Bar

Row and column headers	Row & Column Headers

Zero values	Zero Values

Outline symbols	Outline Symbols

Formulas	Formulas

Automatic page breaks	Automatic Page Breaks

Formula bar	Formula Bar

Status bar	Status Bar

Note indicator	Note Indicator

Info window	Info Window

Sheet tabs	Sheet Tabs

Objects	Show All, Show Placeholders, or Hide All

To display or hide	Select the General tab and use this option

Recently used file list	Recently Used File List

Microsoft Excel 4.0 menus	Microsoft Excel 4.0 Menus

See Also

Help

Changing chart settings

Changing general Microsoft Excel settings

Changing the way you enter and edit data

Using features that help you switch to Microsoft Excel

User's Guide

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Changing the way you enter and edit data

Overview

Use the options in the following table to change the way you enter and edit data in cells.

To display the Options dialog box, choose the Options command from the Tools menu.

To turn on or off	Select the Edit tab and use this option

Editing Directly in Cells	Edit Directly in Cell
Cell drag and drop	Allow Cell Drag And Drop
Alert message before overwriting cells	Alert Before Overwriting Cells
ENTER moves active cell	Move Selection After Enter
Fixed decimal places	Fixed Decimal Places
Cut, copy, and sort objects with cells	Cut, Copy, And Sort Objects With Cells
Alert message before updating automatic links	Ask To Update Automatic Links
See Also

Help

Changing chart settings

Changing general Microsoft Excel settings

Changing what Microsoft Excel displays

Copying cells

Editing cell contents

Moving cells

Using features that help you switch to Microsoft Excel

User's Guide

Chapter 9, "Entering Data"

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"

Chapter 11 "Editing a Worksheet"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Changing general Microsoft Excel settings

Overview

Use the options in the following table to change basic settings that affect how you work with Microsoft Excel.

To display the Options dialog box, choose the Options command from the Tools menu.

To specify	Select the General tab and use this option

A1 or R1C1 reference style	Reference Style
Ignore DDE requests	Ignore Other Applications
Request summary information during save	Prompt For Summary Info
Restore all tips	Reset TipWizard
Number of workbook sheets	Sheets In A New Workbook
Standard font	Standard Font
Standard font size	Size
Setting the working directory	Default File Location
Alternate startup file location	Alternate Startup File Location
User name	User Name
To specify	Select the Calculation tab and use this option

Calculation frequency	Automatic, Automatic Except Tables, or Manual
Recalculate before saving	Recalculate Before Save
Iteration	Iteration
Maximum number of iterations	Maximum Iterations
Maximum change	Maximum Change
Updating references to other applications	Update Remote References
Number display precision	Precision As Displayed
Date system	1904 Date System
How link values are saved	Save External Link Values
See Also

Help

Changing chart settings

Changing the way you enter and edit data

Changing what Microsoft Excel displays

Controlling iteration

Controlling whether a DDE or OLE link is updated automatically

Entering and editing summary information

Setting the working directory

Specifying an additional startup directory

Using features that help you switch to Microsoft Excel

User's Guide

Chapter 10, "Creating Formulas and Links"

Chapter 32, "Changing How You View Your Worksheet"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Changing chart settings

Overview

The options in the following table apply to charts on worksheets and chart sheets.

To display the Options dialog box, choose the Options command from the Tools menu.

To specify	Select the Chart tab and use this option

How empty cells are plotted	Empty Cells Plotted As
Chart only visible cells	Plot Visible Cells Only
Chart sized with window	Chart Sizes With Window Frame
Default chart format	Default Chart Format box, or Use The Current Chart button
See Also

Help

Changing general Microsoft Excel settings

Changing the default chart format

Changing the way you enter and edit data

Changing what Microsoft Excel displays

Creating a chart from visible worksheet data

Sizing a chart sheet with the window

Using features that help you switch to Microsoft Excel

User's Guide

Chapter 15, "Creating a Chart"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Using features that help you switch to Microsoft Excel

Overview

Use the options in the following table to change the way Microsoft Excel works so that it is more familiar if you are switching from Lotus 1-2-3.

To display the Options dialog box, choose the Options command from the Tools menu.

To specify	Select the Transition tab and use this option

Alternate menu or Help key	Microsoft Excel Menu Or Help Key
Lotus 1-2-3 navigation keys	Transition Navigation keys
Lotus 1-2-3 formula evaluation	Transition Formula Evaluation
Lotus 1-2-3 formula entry	Transition Formula Entry
See Also

Help

Changing chart settings

Changing general Microsoft Excel settings

Changing the way you enter and edit data

Changing what Microsoft Excel displays

Transition Navigation Keys

User's Guide

Chapter 3, "If You're Switching from Another Spreadsheet"

Chapter 34, "Customizing Your Workspace"


Overview of Using the EXCEL5.INI File to Customize Microsoft Excel

When you install Microsoft Excel version 5.0, the Setup program creates a file named EXCEL5.INI in the same directory as your WIN.INI file. Each time you start Microsoft Excel version 5.0, it checks the EXCEL5.INI file for startup settings. For example, you can use the EXCEL5.INI file to open certain documents automatically when you start Microsoft Excel, to change dialog box appearance, to substitute fonts, and to use Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet settings.

See Also

Help

Controlling Dialog Box Appearance

Controlling Font Substitution

Editing the EXCEL5.INI File

Keeping the .INI File from Earlier Versions of Microsoft Excel

Specifying a Custom Dictionary

Specifying Lotus 1-2-3 Worksheet Settings

Specifying Unique Sets of Random Numbers

Specifying Workbooks You Want Opened Automatically


Editing the EXCEL5.INI File

1.	Start or switch to the text editor or word processor you want to use.

2.	From the File menu, choose Open.

3.	Change to the directory where Microsoft Windows is installed.

4.	Select EXCEL5.INI.

5.	Choose the OK button.

You can edit the EXCEL5.INI file with any text editor or word processor. When you finish editing the file, save it as a text file without any formatting. For changes to the EXCEL5.INI file to take effect, restart Microsoft Excel.


Specifying Workbooks You Want Opened Automatically

You can use either of the following methods to specify the documents you want opened each time you start Microsoft Excel. For each document you want opened automatically:

Move the document to the XLSTART subdirectory.

--Or--

Insert an OPEN= statement in the [Microsoft Excel] section of your EXCEL5.INI file. For example, to open BUDGET93.XLS automatically, type OPEN=c:\excel\budget93.xls

Note  During installation, the Microsoft Excel Setup program automatically created the XLSTART subdirectory in the same directory it created for Microsoft Excel.

To insert an OPEN= statement

When inserting an OPEN= statement, you can include any combination of the options described below to change the way the document is opened. Type these options to the right of the equal sign in the OPEN= statement. For example, to open the file BUDGET.XLS as read-only every time you start Microsoft Excel, type OPEN= /r c:\excel\budget93.xls

/f  Fast-load

Lists template workbooks in the New dialog box on the File menu. When used for a workbook containing custom functions, lists those functions in the Function Wizard dialog box. When you use one of the custom functions in a workbook, the workbook containing the function is opened.

/r  Read-only

Opens the specified document as read only.

When you insert more than one OPEN= statement, number them sequentially in ascending numerical order. For example, type OPEN=, OPEN1=, OPEN2=, and so on. Type each OPEN= statement on a separate line.

See Also

Help

Add-ins Command (Tools Menu)

Creating a new workbook

Overview of Creating and Editing Workbook Templates


Specifying Unique Sets of Random Numbers

If you want Microsoft Excel to generate a unique set of random numbers each time you use the RAND function, type RANDOMIZE=1 in the [Microsoft Excel] section of your EXCEL5.INI file.

See Also

Help

RAND


Controlling Dialog Box Appearance

Microsoft Excel displays dialog boxes with a three-dimensional appearance, but on some monitors dialog boxes are easier to read in two dimensions. If you prefer to see dialog boxes with a two-dimensional appearance, add the following statement in the [Microsoft Excel] section of your EXCEL5.INI file:

3dDialogs=0


Controlling Font Substitution

Microsoft Excel automatically substitutes SmallFonts to display fonts smaller than 8 points. To prevent this substitution, add the following statement in the [Microsoft Excel] section of your EXCEL5.INI file:

FontSub=0


Specifying a Custom Dictionary

With the CUSTOM DICT= line, you can specify the name and location of custom dictionaries you want to use with Microsoft Excel. The following example in the [Spell Checker] section of the EXCEL5.INI file points to the file CUSTOM.DIC at the specified location:

CUSTOM DICT 1=c:\windows\msapps\proof\custom.dic

See Also

Help

Creating a custom dictionary

User's Guide

Chapter 11, "Editing a Worksheet"


Keeping the .INI File from Earlier Versions of Microsoft Excel

The name of the .INI file for Microsoft Excel version 5.0 is different from the name of the .INI file for earlier versions (EXCEL5.INI, rather than EXCEL4.INI or EXCEL.INI). Therefore, you can specify startup settings for MIcrosoft Excel version 5.0 without changing your startup settings for earlier versions of Microsoft Excel.


Index
#DIV/0!

#N/A

#NAME?

#NULL!

#NUM!

#REF!

#VALUE!

% Percent Sign button

& (ampersand)

& operator

( Left Parenthesis button

) Right Parenthesis button

* (asterisk)

* Multiplication Sign button

+ Plus Sign button

, (comma)

, Comma button

- Minus Sign button

.INI file

/ Division Sign button

: Colon button

= Equal Sign button

? (question mark)

^ Exponentiation Sign button

~ (tilde)

1,2,3,...9 commands (Window menu)

1,2,3,4 commands (File menu)

1-2-3 commands

Excel equivalents

overview

X and Y scales

1-2-3 formatting

equivalents

graph options

1-2-3 Help

CNF2INI

instructions

1-2-3 macros

running

translating

1-2-3 worksheets

linking to Excel worksheets

opening in Excel

settings

1-2-3, switching from

definitions

erasing active worksheet

helpful features of Microsoft Excel

mathematical operator evaluation

123.CNF settings, adding to EXCEL5.INI

3-D Area Chart AutoFormat button

3-D Bar Chart AutoFormat button

3-D charts

controlling angles

depth, width

elevating

height, perspective

rotating

view, changing

3-D charts, formatting

3-D Area Chart AutoFormat button

3-D Bar Chart AutoFormat button

3-D Column Chart AutoFormat button

3-D Line Chart AutoFormat button

3-D Perspective Column Chart AutoFormat button

3-D Pie Chart AutoFormat button

3-D Surface Chart AutoFormat button

surface chart levels

walls, floor

3-D Column Chart AutoFormat button

3-D Line Chart AutoFormat button

3-D Perspective Column Chart AutoFormat button

3-D Pie Chart AutoFormat button

3-D references

3-D Surface Chart AutoFormat button

- A -

A1 reference style

About Microsoft Excel command (Help menu)

ABS function

absolute references

changing to relative, mixed

Dollar Sign button

absolute value

Access button

Access Pack for Microsoft Windows

access to workbooks, sheets

controlling changes

hiding, unhiding

preventing opening, saving

accessibility for users with disabilities

Access Pack

overview

accessing external data

accessing with Microsoft Query

accidental keystrokes

accounting

financial functions

French system, AMORDEGRC function

French system, AMORLINC function

underlining

ACCRINT function

ACCRINTM function

ACOS function

ACOSH function

actions

repeating

undoing

activating add-ins

Add-ins command

generally

activating AutoFill

activating chart sheets

described

generally

activating charts

activating embedded charts

described

generally

activating embedded objects

to convert

to edit

activating sheets

generally

Sheet tab

activating slide shows

activating Style box

active cell

moving in worksheets

moving within selection

Add Column Field command (shortcut menu)

Add Data Field command (shortcut menu)

Add Page Field command (shortcut menu)

Add Report dialog box

Add Routing Slip command

Add Row Field command (shortcut menu)

Add Watch command (Tools menu)

add-ins

Add-ins command

described

installing

Make Add-in command

removing

Add-ins command (Tools menu)

adding

borders

buttons to toolbars

categories to Info window

cells to worksheet

chart data

chart items

chart sheets

chart titles

code to existing macros

columns

constraints

data labels

data sources

decimal places

dialogs

embedded objects

error bars

formulas

functions to formulas

graphic objects

gridlines

input values

legends

linked pictures

links between applications

macro references

macros

modules

pictures

pivot table fields

records

reports

routing slips

rows

scenarios

shading

sheets

sound notes

source areas

styles

subscripts

superscripts

text boxes

text notes

titles

toolbars

trendlines

watch expressions

windows

worksheets

addition

math, trigonometry functions

Plus Sign button

additional ODBC drivers

additional startup directory

Options command

specifying

ADDRESS function

addressing

routing slips

adjacent cell ranges

filling

adjusting column width

Column command

described

adjusting rotation, elevation

adjusting row height

described

Row command

advance type

Advanced Filter command (Data menu, Filter submenu)

described

advanced search

Align Left button

Align Right button

aligning chart text

generally

items

aligning objects

Toggle Grid Button

with gridlines

aligning text

centering across columns

generally

justifying

left

page setup

right

with Lotus 1-2-3 prefix characters

wrapping

aligning text, buttons for

Align Left button

Align Right button

Center Across Columns button

Center button

Justify Align button

Vertical Text button

Alignment tab

Cells command

Object command

Selected Object command

All-In-One Support

alpha values

anova with replication

anova without replication

single-factor anova

t-tests, equal variances

t-tests, paired

t-tests, unequal variances

two-sample F-tests

alphabetic list of worksheet functions

alphabetic reference

ALT key combinations

for AutoFilter

for data forms

for dialog boxes

for outlining

for page fields

for PivotTable Wizard

for switching windows

for working in cells

for working in formula bar

with function keys

ALT key combinations, menu commands

Data menu

File menu

generally

Tools menu

View menu

Window menu

alternate input devices

alternate startup directory

generally

Options command

specifying

workspace files

alternate startup folder

AMORDEGRC function

AMORLINC function

ampersand

analysis of variance

single-factor

two-factor with replication

two-factor without replication

Analysis ToolPak, Anova tools

Anova: Single-Factor

Anova: Two-Factor With Replication

Anova: Two-Factor Without Replication

Analysis ToolPak, Correlation tool

Analysis ToolPak, Covariance tool

Analysis ToolPak, Descriptive Statistics tool

Analysis ToolPak, Exponential Smoothing tool

Analysis ToolPak, F-Test: Two-Sample for Variances tool

Analysis ToolPak, Fourier Analysis tool

Analysis ToolPak, Histogram tool

Analysis ToolPak, installation, add-in described

Analysis ToolPak, Moving Average tool

Analysis ToolPak, Random Number Generation tool

Analysis ToolPak, Rank and Percentile tool

Analysis ToolPak, Regression tool

Analysis ToolPak, Sampling tool

Analysis ToolPak, t-test tools

t-Test: Paired Two-Sample for Means tool

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Equal Variances tool

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Unequal Variances tool

Analysis ToolPak, z-Test: Two-Sample for Means tool

analysis tools

analysis of variance, single-factor

analysis of variance, two-factor with replication

analysis of variance, two-factor without replication

anova, single-factor

anova, two-factor with replication

anova, two-factor without replication

confidence level

correlation

count

covariance

exponential smoothing

F-tests, two-sample

Fourier analysis

histograms

input ranges

kurtosis

largest number

linear regression analysis

maximum

mean

median

minimum

mode

moving averages

output tables

Pareto charts

percentile ranking

random number generation

range

ranking values

sampling

skewness

smallest number

standard deviation

standard error of mean

sum

t-tests

univariate statistics

using

variance

z-tests

analyzing data

AND function

and/or criteria range

angles

3-D chart views

COS function

DEGREES function

IMARGUMENT function

RADIANS function

SIN function

TAN function

annotations

overview

tips on

annuities

PMT function

RATE function

anova

single-factor

two-factor with replication

two-factor without replication

Anova: Single-Factor tool

Anova: Two-Factor with Replication tool

Anova: Two-Factor Without Replication tool

ANSI characters

Answer report

creating

described

apostrophe

appearance of dialog boxes

Apple Worldwide Disability Solutions Group

applications, external

functions

importing pictures from

saving Excel documents for

SQLREQUEST function

applications, Microsoft

applying autoformats

AutoFormat button

generally

partially

applying borders

around ranges

to cells

applying colors and shading

dark shading

generally

light shading

applying names

described

Name command

applying number styles

Comma style

Currency style

generally

Percent style

applying styles

generally

overview

Style box

to outlines

Arc button

arc trigonometry functions

ACOS function

ASIN function

ATAN function

ATAN2 function

arccosine

arcs

drawing many

drawing one

tool

arcsine

arctangent

ATAN function

ATAN2 function

Area Chart AutoFormat button

area charts

3-D Area Chart AutoFormat button

Area Chart AutoFormat button

area to print, setting

AREAS function

arguments, formula

changing with Function Wizard

entering with Function Wizard

error values

arguments, function

arithmetic mean

Arrange command (Window menu)

Arrange and Arrange Icons commands

Arrange Icons command (Window menu)

arranging data markers

arranging icons

Arrange Icons command

described

arranging sheets

to other workbooks

within workbook

arranging tick-mark labels

arranging windows

Arrange command

workbook

array formulas

editing

entering

array ranges

clearing

converting to constant values

selecting

arrays

clearing results

converting results

maximum size

overview

worksheet functions

Arrow button

arrow keys

for AutoFilter

for data forms

for menu bars and menus

for moving and selecting

for outlining

for page fields

for print previewing

for scrolling

for selecting chart items

Lotus 1-2-3 transition

arrow mouse cursor

Move command

Size command

arrows, drawing

drawing many

drawing one

formatting

tool for

arrows, tracer

dependent formulas

described

errors

precedent data, formulas

Remove All Arrows button

Remove All Arrows command

Remove Dependent Arrows button

Remove Precedent Arrows button

ascending order, sorting lists in

ASIN function

ASINH function

Assign Macro command (Tools menu)

assigning formats

date formats

number formats

time formats

assigning macros

Assign Macro command

overview

reassigning

to buttons

to custom buttons

to existing buttons

to graphic objects

to Tools menu

assigning names

described

Name command

using 3-D references

assuming linear model

button

completion message

asterisk

Multiplication Sign button

using in a search

ATAN function

ATAN2 function

ATANH function

Attach Note button

Attach Toolbars command (Tools menu)

attaching toolbars

Attach Toolbars command

to workbooks

attachments

routed workbooks

audio cassettes, documentation on

auditing

buttons for

generally

tips on

Auditing command (Tools menu)

Auditing toolbar

described

displaying

Show Auditing Toolbar command

author, displaying

Find File command

Summary Info command

auto open files

auto scaling, 3-D charts

AutoFill

custom lists

customizing

filling adjacent cells

filtered lists

overview

series types

sorting lists

turning on, off

AutoFilter

button

command

Custom AutoFilter dialog box

customizing

described

keys for

overview

removing filters

AutoFit

Column command

column width

Row command

row height

AutoFormat button

AutoFormat command (Format menu for Charts)

autoformats, applying

AutoFormat command

generally

overview

partially

to charts

with button

autoformats, chart

applying

AutoFormat command

described

overview

autoformats, clearing

autoformats, custom

adding

deleting

autoformats, pivot tables

automatic calculation

automatic font substitution

automatic formatting  See autoformats

automatic outlines

creating

automatic page breaks

automatic saving

AutoSave command

described

automatic scaling

automatic subtotals

displaying

displaying multiple

displaying nested

removing, replacing

automatically opening files

automatically opening workbooks

automatically updating links

after editing

controlling

suppressing

automating tasks

accessibility

macros

AutoSave command (Tools menu)

add-in described

described

AutoSum button

described

filtered lists

grand totals

multiple sum formulas

single sum formulas

autotemplates

changing default workbook with

creating

described

overview

using

available memory

AVEDEV function

average deviation

AVERAGE function

averages

AVEDEV function

AVERAGE function

DAVERAGE function

averages, moving

averages, moving, trendlines

adding

overview

Trendline command

axes

assigning to data series

displaying, hiding

formatting

gridlines

inserting

scale

secondary

titles

Axes command (Insert menu)

- B -

Back button

backup files

Save As command

Save Copy As command

Bar Chart AutoFormat button

bar charts

3-D Bar Chart AutoFormat button

Bar Chart AutoFormat button

data markers in

picture markers

Barrel button

bars

error, formatting

in charts

base 10

base 2

batches of files  See workspace files

Bernoulli random variables

BESSELI function

BESSELJ function

BESSELK function

BESSELY function

best fit

Column command

column width

Row command

row height

BETADIST function

BETAINV function

bigger buttons

bigger screen elements

bigger views

BIN2DEC function

BIN2HEX function

BIN2OCT function

binary numbers

BIN2DEC function

BIN2HEX function

BIN2OCT function

DEC2BIN function

HEX2BIN function

OCT2BIN function

BINOMDIST function

binomial distribution

BINOMDIST function

CRITBINOM function

NEGBINOMDIST function

binomial random variables

bitmap format, pictures

copying

copying to another application

blank cells

inserting

selecting

skipping over when copying

sort order

blind users

Blind, Recording for the, Inc.

blocks  See selections

Bold button

bold formatting

Bold button

described

bonds

financial functions

yield

BOOK1.XLS

Boolean operators

AND function

FALSE function

NOT function

TRUE function

Border tab, Cells command (Format menu)

borders

adding

Borders button

Bottom Border button

Bottom Double Border button

chart

Double Underline button

dragging to resize windows

Drop Shadow button

graphic objects

Left Border button

outline

Outline button

Right Border button

styles

tips on

Top Border button

Underline button

underlining

window

Borders button

Bottom Border button

bottom borders

double

generally

Bottom Double Border button

boxes  See rectangles

boxes around cells  See borders

boxes, edit  See edit boxes

boxes, group  See group boxes

boxes, list  See list boxes

boxes, text  See text boxes

Braille displays

break mode

Continue command

Debug Window command (View menu)

Step Macro button

Toggle Breakpoint command (Run menu)

break-even analysis

breaking pages

commands

described

breaking windows into panes

described

Split box

Split command

breakpoints

clearing

setting

browsing lists

built-in formats  See autoformats

built-in headers and footers

built-in styles

overview

built-in toolbars

resetting

button categories

auditing

charting

custom

data

drawing

edit

file

form

formatting

formula

macro

overview

text formatting

TipWizard

utility

button images

changing

copying

editing

pasting

resetting

buttons

adding to toolbar

assigning macros to

borders for

choosing

copying

creating

deleting from toolbar

enlarging

moving

spacing

specifications

text in, centering

using

- C -

Calculate Now button

calculating formulas

Lotus 1-2-3

portions of

using iteration

calculating links

calculating pivot table data

changing calculation type

overview

calculating with displayed precision

calculating worksheets

active

all open

calculation options

Calculation Tab, Options command

changing general settings

Calculation tab, Options command (Tools menu)

calculation, automatic

calculation, custom, pivot tables

calculation, manual

Calculate Now button

switching to

calculation, preventing

before saving

replacing formulas with values

switching to manual

calendar systems

CALL function

arguments and return value data types

DLLs and code resources

using DDE with

Camera button

canceling

actions, commands

entries

group selection

capitalizing text

CAPS LOCK

PROPER function

UPPER function

CAPS LOCK

caret, Exponentiation Sign button

cascading windows, Arrange command

Arrange and Arrange Icons Commands (Window Menu)

cash flow, financial functions

cassette tapes, documentation on

categories, chart

changing

multilevel

reversing order

categorized list of worksheet functions

category axis

2-D and 3-D charts

scale, changing

CEILING function

cell addresses

Cell command (Info menu)

cell contents, alignment

centering

generally

justifying

left

right

cell contents, copying

Copy Cells command

Copy command

described

Paste command

with shortcut menu

cell contents, deleting

Clear command

described

cell contents, editing

described

cell contents, filling

down

generally

left

right

up

cell contents, formatting

bold formatting

changing

color

font size, decreasing

font size, increasing

italic formatting

cell contents, hiding

cell contents, moving

described

with shortcut menu

cell contents, underlining

described

Double Underline button

Underline button

cell contents, wrapping

cell dependents  See dependents

CELL function

cell gridlines

cell notes

printing

Sheet Tab, Page Setup command

cell precedents  See precedents

cell ranges

creating slides from

moving within

pictures of, creating

cell ranges, filling

described

cell ranges, formatting

autoformats

justifying text to fill

cell ranges, intersection of

referencing

cell ranges, locking

described

Lock Cell button

cell ranges, naming

described

cell ranges, outlining

automatically

manually

cell ranges, resizing

generally

to change chart

cell ranges, selecting

generally

Go To command

keys for

named ranges

nonadjacent cells

tables

visible cells

cell ranges, selecting, buttons for

Select All button

Select Current Region button

Select Visible Cells button

cell references

adjustment when relocated

error values

replacing with names

types, changing

cell references to intersecting ranges

described

cell references to other sheets

cell references to range of sheets

cell values

linear trends

multiplying

Cells command

Format menu

Insert menu

cells, borders  See borders

cells, clearing

Clear command

described

cells, copying

cut, copied cells

described

multiple copies

nonblank cells

visible cells

cells, copying, commands for

Copy Cells command

Copy command

Cut or Copied Cells command

Paste command

cells, deleting

Delete command

described

cells, editing contents

keys for

tips

cells, entering data in

numbers

techniques for

text

cells, formatting contents

described

cells, information about

CELL function

identification in name box

cells, inserting

Cells command

copied cells

cut, copied cells

described

cells, linking chart text to

cells, locking

described

Lock Cell button

cells, moving

Cut command

cut, copied cells

described

cells, naming

overview

cells, pictures of

copying

copying as

copying to another application

linking

cells, selecting

by columns

by rows

current region

data regions

described generally

entire worksheet

named ranges

cells, selecting, buttons for

Select All button

Select Current Region button

Select Visible Cells button

cells, selecting, keys for

cells with special characteristics

generally

cells, selecting, using Go To command

nonadjacent cells

overview

visible cells

visible cells in outline

cells, selection of

moving within

resizing

cells, shading

generally

patterns

cells, underlining

described

Double Underline button

Underline button

Center Across Columns button

Center button

center value

centering

across columns

cell contents

Center Across Columns button

Center button

sheets on page

central differencing

central tendency

changed worksheet functions

changes, controlling

hiding sheets, workbooks

overview

preventing opening, saving

changing

3-D chart view

autoformats

calculation, pivot tables

cell contents

cell reference type

chart settings

chart types

charts

colors

column width

constraints

default chart format

displays

embedded objects

error bar settings

fonts

layout, pivot table

links to source data

macros

names

number formats in pivot tables

outline organization

row height

size, text

source data

source workbooks

styles

summary function in pivot tables

trendline settings

window border width

window size

changing cells

defined

Goal Seek

saving as scenario

saving in model

specifying

changing to Microsoft Excel

CHAR function

character limitations

name of sheet

character sets

characters, alignment

justifying

left

right

characters, copying

described

using shortcut menu

characters, finding and replacing

Find command

finding

Replace command

replacing

special characters

characters, font size

changing

decreasing

increasing

characters, formatting

bold

color

italic

overview

subscripts

superscripts

characters, moving

described

using shortcut menu

characters, repeating

characters, underlining

described

Double Underline button

Underline button

chart autoformats

custom

deleting custom

overview

chart axes

displaying, hiding

formatting

inserting

scale

titles

chart categories, multilevel

creating

overview

Chart command (Insert menu)

chart data

chart data labels

adding

formatting

chart data markers

clearing formatting

formatting

labels, changing

overview

chart format, default

Default Chart button

overview

resetting

chart gridlines

deleting

formatting

overview

chart items, adding

chart items, formatting

applying

clearing

overview

Pattern button

chart items, identification in Name box

chart items, moving

described

overview

chart items, removing

chart items, selecting

keys for

overview

using mouse

chart items, sizing

described

overview

chart labels

data, adding

data, changing

data, formatting

tick-mark, changing

chart legends

adding

changing

deleting

formatting

moving, sizing

chart numbers

chart series

chart series, multilevel

creating

overview

chart settings

chart sheets, activating

described

generally

chart sheets, autotemplates

creating

using

chart sheets, copying

Copy Sheet command

to other workbooks

chart sheets, creating

Chart command

ChartWizard

described

overview

using autotemplate

chart sheets, deleting

described

chart sheets, generally

chart sheets, inserting

described

chart sheets, modifying

chart sheets, moving

Move Sheet command

tips on

to other workbooks

within a workbook

chart sheets, moving in, between

moving between sheets

to specific cells, ranges

chart sheets, printing

chart sheets, renaming

chart sheets, sizing

described

generally

Sized with Window command

tips on

chart subtypes

changing

defined

chart text

centering

changing

formatting

chart text boxes

editing

linking to worksheet

chart tick marks

formatting

labels

overview

chart titles

adding

deleting

editing

linking to worksheet

Titles command

Chart toolbar

chart trendlines

adding

deleting

modifying settings

overview

Trendline command

chart type groups

axes

changing types

Chart Type command

formatting

lines, bars

series order

chart types

autoformats

axes

changing

changing data series chart types

Chart Type button

Chart Type command

combining

Default Chart button

overview

chart values

changing

number formats for

charting

buttons for

ChartWizard

new features

charts

activating

adding to

autoformats

commands

copying

copying as pictures

creating

default format

deleting from

editing

error bars in

formatting

options

picture markers in

pictures of, copying

plot order

printing

protecting

saving

specifications

spelling in, checking

tab order

tips on

toolbar

uses for

charts, 3-D

3-D Area Chart AutoFormat button

3-D Bar Chart AutoFormat button

3-D Column Chart AutoFormat button

3-D Line Chart AutoFormat button

3-D Perspective Column Chart AutoFormat button

3-D Pie Chart AutoFormat button

3-D Surface Chart AutoFormat button

3-D View command

depth, width

height, perspective

rotating, elevating

surface, formatting

view, changing

walls, floor

charts, area

3-D Area Chart AutoFormat button

Area Chart AutoFormat button

charts, bar

3-D Bar Chart AutoFormat button

Bar Chart AutoFormat button

charts, column

3-D Column Chart AutoFormat button

3-D Perspective Column Chart AutoFormat button

Column Chart AutoFormat button

Stacked Column Chart AutoFormat button

charts, doughnut

Doughnut Chart AutoFormat button

formatting slices

charts, embedded

ChartWizard

creating

moving, sizing

charts, line

3-D Line Chart AutoFormat button

Line Chart AutoFormat button

charts, line column

charts, multilevel

creating

overview

charts, pie

3-D Pie Chart AutoFormat button

formatting slices

Pie Chart AutoFormat button

charts, radar

charts, scatter

charts, stacked column

charts, surface

3-D Surface Chart AutoFormat button

formatting

charts, volume/high-low-close

charts, XY

ChartWizard

button

creating chart sheets with

creating embedded charts with

described

editing existing charts

generally

ChartWizard button

Check Box button

checkboxes

checking spelling

charts

custom dictionaries

described

Spelling command

tips on

chi-squared test

CHIDIST function

CHIINV function

CHITEST function

CHIDIST function

CHIINV function

CHITEST function

CHOOSE function

choosing

choosing buttons

described

choosing cells

described

choosing commands

from menus

from shortcut menus

keyboard shortcuts

choosing dialog box options

described

choosing printers

choosing worksheets

described

chronological information functions

circles  See ellipses

circular references

CLEAN function

Clear All Breakpoints command (Run menu)

Clear command (Edit menu for worksheets)

clearing

add-ins

array ranges

autoformats

breakpoints

cells

chart items

charts

columns

data marker formatting

data series

data tables

rows

screen

sound notes

text notes

tracer arrows

values from data tables

Clipboard

Copy command

Copy Picture command

Cut command

exchanging data with other applications

file formats

Paste command

Paste Picture command

Paste Picture Link command

Close All command (File menu)

Close command (Control menu)

Close command (File menu)

closing

all workbooks

dialog boxes

Info window

windows

without calculating

workbooks

Co-Net CD

code

breakpoints

creating

editing

executing steps

stopping

stopping execution

CODE function

codes

header and footer

number format

coefficients

COMPLEX function

CORREL function

IMAGINARY function

IMREAL function

LINEST function

LOGEST function

PEARSON function

Colon button

Color button

color palettes

copying

custom, for charts

customizing, restoring

color printers

colors

changing

Color button

customizing

maximum number

number format codes for

options

Pattern button

colors, cell

colors, chart

custom

data markers

items

overview

printing

colors, font

Cycle Font Color button

Font Color button

colors, window

Column Chart AutoFormat button

column charts

3-D Perspective Column Chart AutoFormat button

Column Chart AutoFormat button

data markers in

Line/Column Chart AutoFormat button

picture markers

Stacked Column Chart AutoFormat button

Volume/High-Low-Close Chart AutoFormat button

Column command (Format menu)

column differences

column fields

adding

subtotals, displaying

subtotals, removing

COLUMN function

column headings

described

printing

column input cell

column numbers

cell reference styles

COLUMN function

column titles

freezing and unfreezing

column width

changing

changing with mouse

Column command

fitting text into

columns

centering text across

clearing

COLUMNS function

converting text to

copying into rows

deleting

editing tips

formatting tips

grouping for outlines

Paste Special command

plotting in charts

resizing

sorting by

titles, using as names

totalling values

Columns command (Insert menu)

COLUMNS function

columns, adding and removing

columns, distributing text in

Text to Columns command

TextWizard

columns, hiding

Column command

column headings

generally

columns, inserting

adding pivot table fields

Columns command

generally

columns, selecting

column headings

entire rows, columns or cells

COMBIN function

Combination Drop-Down Edit button

Combination List-Edit button

combinations of formatting  See styles

combinations possible

combining

chart types

data, pivot tables

scenarios

values, during paste

comma

Comma button

Comma style

applying

Comma Style button

COMMAND key combinations

for data forms

for dialog boxes

for entering data

for formatting data

for inserting, deleting, copying, moving

for Lotus 1-2-3 transition

for moving within selection

for outlining

for scrolling

for selecting in worksheets, workbooks

for selecting special cells

for switching windows

for working in cells

for working in formula bar

Format menu

Multiplan

with function keys

COMMAND key combinations, menu commands

Data menu

Edit menu

File menu

Help menu

Insert menu

overview

Tools menu

View menu

Window menu

command line options

command line, MS-DOS

Lotus 1-2-3 system command

Multiplan Run Command command

commands

adding macros as

changes from version 4.0

choosing

Help on

identification in status bar

Lotus 1-2-3

new in version 5.0

repeating

undoing

commas in argument lists

comments, file

comments, worksheet  See text notes

common logarithms

IMLOG10 function

LOG function

LOG10 function

common questions

communications settings, Download Service

comparing text items

comparing values

AND function

GESTEP function

comparison cells

comparison criteria

comparison operator

AutoFilter

complementary error

completion messages, Solver

complex conjugate of complex number

complex criteria

filtered data, copying by

lists, filtering by

COMPLEX function

complex numbers

COMPLEX function

IMABS function

IMCONJUGATE function

IMCOS function

IMEXP function

components of Microsoft Excel

CompuServe

computed criteria

CONCATENATE function

CONFIDENCE function

confidence interval

confidence level

confirmation messages

Conjugate gradient search method

conjugates

Consolidate command (Data menu)

consolidating data

by category

by position

overview

consolidations, adding to

constant values

converting array range to

converting data table values to

displaying in formula bar

Constrain Numeric button

constraints, Solver

defined

satisfying

saving in model

Solver command

specifying

Contents button

Contents command (Help menu)

Continue command (Run menu)

Control Panel

changing decimal separator

changing window colors

Control Properties button

controlling, calculation

controlling, changes

hiding worksheets

overview

preventing opening, saving

controlling, dialog box

controlling, iteration

controls

graphic objects, tips on

Tab Order button

Tab Order command

tips on

toolbar

Convert command (Edit menu, Object submenu)

CONVERT function

converting to Microsoft Excel

from Lotus 1-2-3

from Microsoft Works

from Quattro Pro

converting, binary numbers

BIN2DEC function

BIN2HEX function

BIN2OCT function

converting, coefficients

converting, crosstab tables to pivot tables

converting, dates

converting, decimals

DEC2BIN function

DEC2HEX function

DEC2OCT function

DOLLARFR function

converting, embedded objects

converting, fractions

converting, hexadecimals

HEX2BIN function

HEX2DEC function

HEX2OCT function

converting, measurement systems

converting, octals

OCT2BIN function

OCT2DEC function

OCT2HEX function

converting, remote references to values

converting, serial numbers

converting, text

CHAR function

to columns

VALUE function

converting, text to columns

converting, times

converting, values

array range to constant

data table to constant

Copied Cells command (Insert menu)

Copy Button Image command (Edit menu)

Copy command (Edit menu)

Copy Picture command (Edit menu)

copying

as pictures

button images

buttons

by dragging and dropping

cell contents

cells

cells as pictures

charts

charts as pictures

color palettes

columns into rows

combined values, formulas

data into adjacent cell range

files

filtered data

formats

formulas

from other applications

graphic objects

graphic objects as pictures

keys for

nonblank cells

Paste Special command

pictures

ranges as pictures

rows into columns

sheets

slides

sound notes

styles

text notes

tips on

to charts

to other applications

using pen

using shortcut menu

values

worksheets

CORREL function

correlation coefficients

CORREL function

FISHER function

FISHERINV function

PEARSON function

Correlation tool

COS function

COSH function

cosine

ACOSH function

COS function

COSH function

IMCOS function

COUNT function

count, analyzing data for

COUNTA function

COUNTBLANK function

COUNTIF function

counting

COUNT function

COUNTA function

COUNTBLANK function

COUNTIF function

DCOUNT function

DCOUNTA function

COUPDAYBS function

COUPDAYS function

COUPDAYSNC function

COUPNCD function

COUPNUM function

coupon periods

COUPDAYBS function

COUPDAYS function

COUPDAYSNC function

COUPNCD function

COUPNUM function

COUPPCD function

ODDLPRICE function

COUPPCD function

COVAR function

covariance

COVAR function

tool

using in correlation calculation

Covariance tool

Create Button button

Create From File tab, Object command (Insert menu)

Create New tab, Object command (Insert menu)

CREATE.DIRECTORY

creating

AutoFilter, custom

borders

buttons

chart sheets

charts

constraints

custom AutoFilter

custom dictionaries

custom sort orders

data labels

databases from lists

decimal places

dictionaries, custom

directories

edit boxes

embedded charts

embedded objects

folders

forecasts

gridlines

links

list boxes

macros

modules

number formats

option buttons

outlines

picture markers in charts

pictures

remote references

reports

scenarios

sheets

slide shows

slides

sort orders, custom

sound notes

styles

summary reports, scenarios

templates

text boxes

text notes

toolbars

top borders

trends

user-defined functions

Visual Basic modules

workbooks

worksheet views

workspace files

creating names

overview

CRITBINOM function

criteria ranges

criteria, complex

filtered data, copying by

lists, filtering by

criteria, filter

criteria, search

advanced

Save Search As

saving

using data form

crosstab tables

CTRL key combinations

for data forms

for dialog boxes

for entering data

for formatting data

for inserting, deleting, copying, moving

for Lotus 1-2-3 transition

for menu bars and menus

for moving within selection

for outlining

for scrolling

for selecting in worksheets, workbooks

for selecting special cells

for switching windows

for working in cells

for working in formula bar

keys for

with function keys

CTRL key combinations, menu commands

Edit menu

File menu

Format menu

Insert menu

CUMIPMT function

CUMPRINC function

cumulative beta probability density function

BETADIST function

BETAINV function

cumulative interest

cumulative principal

currency formats

changing, for chart values

Currency Style button

international, creating

Lotus 1-2-3 equivalents

Currency style

Currency Style button

current operating environment

current operations, identification in status bar

current region, selecting

currently installed items

cursor, moving

curves

GROWTH function

LOGEST function

TREND function

custom AutoFill lists

creating

editing and deleting

Custom AutoFilter dialog box

custom autoformats

adding

applying

charts

deleting

custom buttons

assigning macros to

described

images on

custom calculation, pivot tables

custom color palettes

charts

generally

custom data forms

custom dialogs, adding controls

Check Box button

Combination Drop-Down Edit Button

Combination List-Edit button

Control Properties button

Drop-Down button

Group Box button

Label button

List Box button

Scroll Bar button

Spinner button

custom dialogs, running

custom dialogs, tab order

Tab Order button

Tab Order command

custom dictionaries

creating

described

specifying in EXCEL.INI

custom forms

custom headers and footers

codes for

creating

custom lists

custom menus

adding macros to

for accessibility

custom number formats

creating

deleting

custom pivot tables

custom reports

overview

custom sort order

creating

overview

pivot tables

using

custom toolbars

assigning macros to

attaching to workbooks

buttons

creating, deleting

for accessibility

saving

customizing Microsoft Excel

for accessibility

new features for

tips on

customizing Microsoft Windows

customizing workspace

Cut Cells command (Insert menu)

Cut command (Edit menu)

cutting

by dragging and dropping

cells

from other applications

keys for

pictures

tips on

to other applications

Cycle Font Color button

- D -

Dark Shading button

data access macros, writing

data analysis

new features

tips on

data analysis tools

anova

correlation

covariance

exponential smoothing

F-tests

Fourier analysis

histograms

moving average

overview

random number generation

rank, percentile

regression

sampling

statistics

t-tests

z-tests

data bins

data consolidation

by category

by position

Data Distribution command, Lotus 1-2-3

data entry

data fields

adding

function for, changing

removing

data forms

adding records with

browsing lists with

customized, using

deleting records with

displaying, using

editing records with

finding records with

keys for

maintaining lists with

data labels

adding

creating

Data Labels command

deleting

formatting

selecting

tips on

Data Labels command (Insert menu)

data markers

arranging

clearing formatting

formatting

labels, changing

replacing with pictures

selecting

tips on

Data Matrix commands, Lotus 1-2-3

Data menu

data points

adding

changing values

defined

deleting

editing

plot order

selecting

data regions, selecting

described

Select Current Region button

Data Regression commands, Lotus 1-2-3

data retrieval

macros

new features for

data series, adding

by changing plotted range

New Data command

to chart sheet

to embedded chart

data series, chart type

data series, deleting

by changing plotted range

described

data series, editing

by adding data points

by changing values

data series, formatting

data series, plot order

changing

chart type groups

reversing

data series, plotting

along secondary axis

generally

data series, selecting

keys for

with mouse

data sets

correlation

covariance

descriptive statistics

ranking

sampling

data sources

data tables

adding formulas to

adding input values to

clearing

clearing values from

converting results

creating, one-input

creating, two-input

Table command

database functions

Dfunction

list

new and changed

database records

adding

browsing

deleting

editing

managing

databases

Get External Data command

lists

pivot tables

retrieving data from

toolbar

date formats

assigning

changing

codes for

Lotus 1-2-3 equivalents

overview

DATE function

date functions

list

new and changed

date series

filling

incrementing

date systems

changing

described

dates

DATE function

DATEVALUE function

EDATE function

entering

grouping in pivot tables

NOW function

overview

TODAY function

DATEVALUE function

DAVERAGE function

DAY function

days

DAY function

DAYS360 function

filling

WEEKDAY function

WORKDAY function

days, coupon

COUPDAYBS function

COUPDAYS function

COUPDAYSNC function

DAYS360 function

DB function

DCOUNT function

DCOUNTA function

DDB function

DDE

converting references to values

described

opening source documents

remote requests

DDE functions

list

new and changes

DDE links

creating

freezing

redirecting

updating

deaf users

Access Pack

services for

Debug Window command (View menu)

debugging

breakpoints

Debug Window command (View menu)

Step Macro button

DEC NAS service support

DEC2BIN function

DEC2HEX function

DEC2OCT function

decimal dollars

DOLLAR function

DOLLARFR function

decimal formats

applying with buttons

codes for

Lotus 1-2-3 equivalents

overview

decimal places

automatic

fixed

increasing

removing

setting

decimal separators

changing

Multiplan equivalent commands

decimals

BIN2DEC function

DEC2BIN function

DEC2HEX function

DEC2OCT function

HEX2DEC function

OCT2DEC function

declining balances

DDB function

VDB function

Decrease Decimal button

Decrease Font Size button

decreasing

decimal places

font size

default calculation options

default chart format

applying

changing

overview

default colors

default column width

default decimal format

default directories

changing using switches

Lotus command equivalents

working, setting

default editing options

default font

default slide show

default sort orders

default startup workbook

changing appearance, contents

opening automatically

default toolbar

default workbook

changing

overview

defaults, changing

for accessibility

generally

overview

defining, names

described

Name command

using 3-D references

defining, styles

described

using Style box

definitions

degrees

DEGREES function

RADIANS function

DEGREES function

degrees of diversity

FDIST function

FINV function

degrees of freedom

CHIDIST function

CHIINV function

CHITEST function

FDIST function

FINV function

TDIST function

TINV function

Delete command (Edit menu)

Mail Delete Row command (Edit menu)

Delete Sheet command (Edit menu)

deleted searches

deleting

borders

buttons

cell contents

cells

chart data

chart items

charts

column contents

columns

constraints

custom AutoFill lists

data table values

data tables

decimal places

embedded objects

error bars

files

formats

gridlines

keys for

labels

legends

links

macro references

macros

names

notes

outlines

pivot tables

query definitions

records

row contents

rows

scenarios

sheets

slides

sound notes

splits, window

styles

text boxes

text notes

text, with strikethrough formatting

titles

toolbars

tracer arrows

trendlines

watch expressions

worksheet views

DELTA function

dependent workbooks, renaming

dependent worksheets

freezing remote references

linking to sources

redirecting links

source documents, listing

source documents, opening

updating frozen links

dependents

displaying

tips on

Trace Dependents button

tracing

Dependents command (Info menu)

depreciation

AMORDEGRC function

AMORLINC function

DB function

DDB function

SLN function

SYD function

VDB function

depth, 3-D charts

derivatives, Solver

descending order, sorting lists in

Descriptive Statistics tool

destinations

dragging and dropping

embedding Microsoft Excel objects

for result sets

reconsolidating data

detaching graphic objects

detail data, hiding and showing

for pivot table items

in a subtotaled list

overview

determinants

deviations

AVEDEV function

correlation

COVAR function

covariance

DEVSQ function

LOGNORMDIST function

standard

DEVSQ function

Dfunction calculations

DGET function

dialog boxes

appearance

closing

controls

keyboard shortcuts

moving

options

dialogs, custom

controls, adding to

copying

deleting

inserting

moving

moving in, between

renaming

running

tab order

tips on

dictionaries, custom

creating

described

specifying in EXCEL.INI

dictionary of terms

differences, finding cells based on

directories

creating

default, setting

finding files

startup, changing using switches

working, setting

disabilities, users with

Access Pack

accessibility

Microsoft Excel accessibility

products, services for

DISC function

discontiguous cells  See nonadjacent cells

discontiguous selections  See nonadjacent selections

discounts

DISC function

PRICEDISC function

YIELDDISC function

discrete random variables

disks, documentation on

display options

changing

Options command

display, parts of

displayed precision, calculating with

displays

changing

saving as views

distribution of values

calculating

statistical functions

dividing windows into panes

described

Split box

Split command

division

by zero, error value

Division Sign button

IMDIV function

MOD function

QUOTIENT function

Division Sign button

divisor, greatest common, GCD function

DLLs, REGISTER.ID function

DMAX function

DMIN function

document path, default

document specifications

documentation on disk and audio tape

DOLLAR function

Dollar Sign button

DOLLARDE function

DOLLARFR function

DOS command line

Lotus 1-2-3 equivalent

Multiplan equivalent

double factorials

Double Underline button

double underlines

double-declining balance

Doughnut Chart AutoFormat button

doughnut charts

Doughnut Chart AutoFormat button

formatting slices

Down command (Edit menu, Fill submenu)

Download Service, Microsoft

DPRODUCT function

draft quality

dragging

between applications

borders to resize windows

cell ranges to charts

cells to copy

cells to move

graphic objects, to copy

graphic objects, to move

sheets

drawing

arrows

buttons for

lines

polygons

shapes

text boxes

tips for

Drawing button

Drawing Selection button

Drawing toolbar

Driver Library, Microsoft Windows

drivers, ODBC

installing

overview

Drop Shadow button

Drop-Down button

drop-down list boxes

creating

width, changing

DSTDEV function

DSTDEVP function

DSUM function

due dates

duplicating  See copying

duplicating (repeating)

DURATION function

durations

DURATION function

MDURATION function

DVAR function

DVARP function

Dvorak keyboard layouts

described

overview

dynamic data exchange functions  See DDE functions

dynamic data exchanges  See DDE

dynamic link libraries

- E -

e-mail

workbooks, mailing

workbooks, routing

EDATE function

Edit Box button

edit boxes

Edit Button Image command (shortcut menu)

Edit Code button

Edit command (Edit menu, Object submenu)

edit controls

Combination Drop-Down Edit Button

Combination List-Edit button

Edit menu command keys

edit query

Edit Report dialog box

Edit Routing Slip command

Edit tab (Tools menu, Options)

Edit tab, Options command (Tools menu)

Edit Watch command (Tools menu)

editing

array formulas

AutoFill lists

button images

buttons for

cell contents

charts

embedded objects

EXCEL5.INI file

formulas

in formula bar

keys for

legends

links

macro references

macros

names

options for

pivot tables

polygons

queries for pivot tables

records

reports

result sets

routing slips

scenarios

slide shows

slides

styles

summary information

text box text

tips on

watch expressions

EFFECT function

effect speed, slide show

effective annual interest rate

electronic mail

workbooks, mailing

workbooks, routing

elevating, 3-D charts

3-D View command

described

Ellipse button

ellipses

drawing many

drawing one

Ellipse button

embedded charts

Chart Type button

described

Lotus 1-2-3 equivalent commands

embedded charts, activating

described

overview

embedded charts, creating

Chart command

ChartWizard

ChartWizard button

described

overview

embedded charts, editing

adding data to

ChartWizard button

embedded charts, moving

described

overview

embedded charts, protecting

embedded charts, selecting

embedded charts, sizing

described

overview

embedded charts, slides from

embedded objects

See also graphic objects

copying

creating

deleting

editing

format, converting

freezing remote references

overview

pasting

remote requests

slides from

updating links

embedding

described

in Microsoft Excel

in other applications

emphasizing chart data

empty cells

emptying cells  See clearing

enclosures

opening

End command (Run menu)

End mode, keys for

end of the month

engineering analysis tools

Fourier analysis

sampling

engineering functions

enlarging

buttons

print area

screen

screen elements

selections

views

windows

entering

array formulas

AutoFill lists

data

dates

debug information

external references

formulas

functions

Lotus 1-2-3 formulas, names

numbers

summary information

text

times

entries, canceling

described

Undo command

environment information

EOMONTH function

Equal Sign button

equal-variances t-tests

equivalency

DELTA function

GESTEP function

equivalents, Lotus 1-2-3

commands

generally

keys

erasing

data table values

data tables

slides

sound notes

text notes

tracer arrows

worksheets

ERF function

ERFC function

error bars

adding

deleting

Error Bars command

formatting

overview

settings, modifying

Error Bars command (Insert menu)

error tracers

overview

Trace Error button

Trace Error command

using

error values

overview

Solver

sort order

tracing

ERROR.TYPE function

errors, related worksheet functions

ERF function

ERFC function

ERROR.TYPE

NA function

STEYX function

errors, spelling

Checking spelling

Spelling Command (Tools Menu)

estimates, Solver

EVEN function

even numbers

EVEN function

ISEVEN function

EXACT function

Excel

definitions

installing components

quitting

removing components

starting

version number

EXCEL5.INI file

custom dictionary statement

editing

Lotus 1-2-3 settings

OPEN statements

SmallFonts substitution statement

exchanging data

by copying and pasting

by copying as pictures

by dragging and dropping

by embedding objects

by linking

by opening foreign documents

new features for

specifications

tips on

using Clipboard

executing macros

described

Exit command (File menu)

exiting Microsoft Excel

described

Exit command

EXP function

expanding views

EXPONDIST function

exponential curves

GROWTH function

LOGEST function

exponential regression

Exponential Smoothing tool

exponentials

EXP function

EXPONDIST function

IMEXP function

Exponentiation Sign button

exporting

by changing file format

by copying and pasting

by copying as pictures

by dragging and dropping

by embedding

by linking

specifications

tips on

to Lotus 1-2-3

using Clipboard

expressions, watch

extending selections

basics

columns

data regions

entire worksheet

keys for

nonadjacent cells

rows

Select All button

Select Current Region button

Select Visible Cells button

sheet tabs

sizing

skipping hidden cells

using Go To command

external databases

external functions

list

new and changed

SQLREQUEST function

external references

changing

deleting

entering in formulas

replacing with values

using to link workbooks

external sources, retrieving data from

extra characters

- F -

F-probability distribution

FDIST function

FINV function

F-tests

faces, button  See button images

FACT function

FACTDOUBLE function

factorials

FACT function

FACTDOUBLE function

MULTINOMIAL function

FALSE function

Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) method

FDIST function

features, new

charting

data exchange

everyday tasks

organizing data

programming

workbooks

worksheet functions

fields

adding

editing

hiding detail

moving

names, changing

removing

showing detail

file buttons

file formats

changing

defined

Lotus 1-2-3

Microsoft Works

Quattro Pro

File Functions add-ins

File Manager, printing from

File menu command keys

File Reservation Dialog Box

file status

filenames

finding

viewing

Fill command (Edit menu)

Fill Days command (shortcut menu)

Fill Down command

Fill Formats command (shortcut menu)

Fill Left command

Fill Months command (shortcut menu)

fill patterns  See patterns

Fill Right command

Fill Up command

Fill Values command (shortcut menu)

Fill Weekdays command (shortcut menu)

Fill Years command (shortcut menu)

Filled Arc button

Filled Ellipse button

Filled Polygon button

Filled Rectangle button

filling

AutoFill

described

down

Fill command

Fill Days command

Fill Formats command

Fill Months command

Fill Values command

Fill Weekdays command

Fill Years command

left

right

series

up

Filter command (Data menu)

filtered data, copying

by complex criteria

generally

filtered lists

filtering lists

AutoFilter

overview

tips on

filters, removing

financial functions

list

new and changed

Find command (Edit menu)

Find Find command (File menu)

FIND function

finding

cells

commands for

dependents

differences

files

functions for

help and information

numbers

precedents

records

spelling errors

text

tips on

workbooks

FINV function

FISHER function

FISHERINV function

Fix mode

fixed decimal places

fixed declining balance method

FIXED function

floating toolbars

hiding

moving

sizing

FLOOR function

floppy disks, documentation on

Font box

Font Color button

Font Size box

Font tab, Cells command (Format menu)

Font tab, Format Object command

Font tab, Selected Object command (Format menu)

fonts

boldface

changing

chart items

chart text

color, changing

color, selecting

default, changing

italic

list of

maximum number

size, decreasing

size, increasing

sizes, list of

substituting

TrueType

footers

creating

Page Setup command

For More Information

FORECAST function

forecasting

See also trendlines

overview

with Exponential Smoothing tool

with Moving Average tool

forecasts

creating with AutoFill

foreign currency formats

Form command (Data menu)

format codes, number

Format command (Info menu)

Format menu

command keys

Format Options command, Multiplan

Format Painter button

described

using

formats

copying

file

filling

Lotus 1-2-3 equivalents

maximum number of

number

pasting

removing

Formats list

adding custom autoformats

deleting custom autoformats

formatting

autoformats

axes

buttons for

cell contents

cells

chart items

chart text

charts

charts, buttons for

data markers

data series

dates

error bars

formulas

graphic objects

gridlines

keys for

legend entries

legends

modules

numbers

outlines

overview

picture markers

pivot tables

specifications

text box text

tick marks

tick-mark labels

times

tips on

trendlines

using styles

worksheets

Formatting toolbar

Forms toolbar

forms, data

adding records with

editing records with

formula bar

described

displaying

editing in

entering, editing data or formulas

hiding, unhiding

keys for

restoring after Full Screen

tips on

Formula Bar command (View menu)

described

displaying or hiding formula bar

Formula command (Info menu)

formula tracers

dependents

overview

precedents

formulas

adding

array

buttons

calculating

cell references in

combining during paste

copying

displaying

editing

entering

errors in

external references in

finding

freezing external references

functions, using in

hiding

Lotus 1-2-3

names, pasting into

naming

number formatting

operator buttons

Paste Special command

replacing

solving

text operators

tips on

forward differencing

four-headed arrows

moving

sizing

Fourier Analysis tool

FoxPro button

fractions

adding

decimal separators

DOLLARDE function

DOLLARFR function

YEARFRAC function

Freeform button

Freehand button

freezing

calculations

external references

links

panes

remote references

titles

French accounting system

AMORDEGRC function

AMORLINC function

frequencies, calculating

frequency distribution

FREQUENCY function

frequently asked questions

frequently typed characters

accessibility

single-handed users

FTEST function

Full Screen button

Full Screen command (View menu)

Full Screen toolbar

full screens, displaying

described

Full Screen command (View menu)

Function command (Insert menu)

function keys

for Edit menu

for entering data

for Help menu

for inserting, deleting, copying, moving

for Lotus 1-2-3 transition

for menu bars and menus

for working in cells

for working in formula bar

listed

Lotus 1-2-3

Multiplan

Function Wizard

editing formulas

inserting functions in formulas

overview

worksheet functions

functions, add-in, ODBC

functions, summary

functions, worksheet

alphabetical list

categorized list

editing with Function Wizard

inserting with Function command

inserting with Function Wizard

new and changed

new features

overview

further reading

future value

FV function

FVSCHEDULE function

FV function

FVSCHEDULE function

- G -

gamma distribution

GAMMADIST function

GAMMAINV function

GAMMALN function

GAMMADIST function

GAMMAINV function

GAMMALN function

GCD function

General tab, Options command (Tools menu)

display options

general settings

GEnie

GEOMEAN function

geometric mean

GESTEP function

getting Help

overview of online Help

global default directory, Lotus 1-2-3

global settings, Lotus 1-2-3

glossary of terms

Go To button

Go To command

basics

Current Region option

named ranges

Visible Cells Only option

Go To Special

dialog box described

finding anomalies

finding dependents

finding precedents

Info window, using with

overview

selecting cells by content

Goal Seek command

changing chart values

described

using

goal seeking

described

Goal Seek command

using Solver

going to

specific place in sheet

gradient methods, Solver

grand totals

AutoSum button

hiding and displaying

overview

Graph Options Color command, Lotus 1-2-3

Graph Options Format commands, Lotus 1-2-3

Graph Options Grid commands, Lotus 1-2-3

Graph Options Titles command, Lotus 1-2-3

Graph Type commands, Lotus 1-2-3

Graph View commands, Lotus 1-2-3

graphic objects

aligning with gridlines

assigning macros to

borders

copying

detaching

display of

drawing

editing

formatting

grouping

hiding

inserting

locking

moving

overlapped, reordering

pasting

patterns

placement of

printing

selecting

shading

sizing

slides from

sorting

tips on

graphics, sharing

graphs  See charts

greater than

greatest common divisor

gridlines

adding

aligning objects with

deleting

formatting

hiding

printing

Gridlines command (Insert menu)

grids

Group And Outline command (Data menu)

Group Box button

group boxes

Group commands (Format menu for charts)

Group dialog box

date version

number version

grouped chart items

selecting with keyboard

selecting with mouse

grouping

buttons for

graphic objects

in outlines

in pivot tables

groups of chart types

secondary axis

GROWTH function

growth series

growth trends

guide to information

- H -

halting

code

macros

slide shows

handicaps, products and services for

hard-of-hearing users

Access Pack for Microsoft Windows

services described

HARMEAN function

harmonic mean

headers and footers

built-in

codes

creating

customizing

margins

Page Setup command

setup

headings, row and column

centering across columns

columns

hiding, unhiding

printing

row and column

rows

hearing-impaired users

Access Pack

services

height of 3-D charts

3-D View command

setting

height of embedded charts

height of rows

changing

headings

Row command

height of toolbars

changing

Help

about individual menu commands

button

contents

described

index

Lotus 1-2-3

menu command keys

Multiplan, command

Multiplan, described

on tips

overview

searching for topics

table of contents

worksheet functions

searching for topics

Help button

Help for Lotus 1-2-3 users

equivalent commands

how to use

Lotus 1-2-3 command

prompts for more information

Help index

Help menu

heteroscedastic t-tests

HEX2BIN function

HEX2DEC function

HEX2OCT function

hexadecimals

BIN2HEX function

DEC2HEX function

HEX2BIN function

HEX2DEC function

HEX2OCT function

OCT2HEX function

hidden cells

charts, excluding from

Paste Special command

Select Visible Cells button

selecting

skipping over when copying

hidden rows or columns

saving in worksheet views

unhiding

Hide command (Window menu)

hiding

axes

cell contents

cells or ranges

chart axes

columns, as part of formatting

columns, Column command

columns, described

columns, heading

details in outlines

details in pivot tables

details in subtotaled lists

formula bar, command

formula bar, described

formulas

grand totals, pivot tables

graphic objects

grids

items, pivot table field

menu bar

note indicators

outline symbols, described

outline symbols, Show Outline Symbols button

overview

rows, as part of formatting

rows, described

rows, Row command

scenarios

sheets, described

sheets, Sheet command

status bar, described

status bar, Status Bar command

toolbars

windows

workbooks

zero values

hierarchical charts

creating

overview

high-low-close charts

Histogram tool

histograms

History button

HLOOKUP function

homoscedastic t-tests

horizontal gridlines

described

Gridlines command

Horizontal Gridlines button

horizontal panes, splitting screen into

described

split box

Split command

horizontal scroll bars, adjusting size

horizontal titles

Freeze Panes command

freezing and unfreezing

Unfreeze Panes command

HOUR function

hours

hyperbolic functions

ACOSH function

ASINH function

ATANH function

COSH function

SINH function

TANH function

hypergeometric distribution

HYPGEOMDIST function

hypothesis testing

FISHER function

FISHERINV function

NORMDIST function

TDIST function

hypothesized mean difference

equal variances t-tests

paired two-sample t-tests

unequal variances t-tests

- I -

icons

arranging, commands

arranging, described

minimizing with button

minimizing with command

objects displayed as

restoring to previous size, described

restoring to previous size, Restore command

identifiers  See names

IF function

IMABS function

images, button  See button images

imaginary arguments

BESSELI function

BESSELK function

imaginary coefficients

COMPLEX function

IMAGINARY function

IMAGINARY function

imaginary numbers

IMARGUMENT function

IMCONJUGATE function

IMCOS function

IMDIV function

IMEXP function

IMLN function

IMLOG10 function

IMLOG2 function

impaired sight

importing data from other applications

by copying and pasting

by dragging and dropping

compatible formats

embedding objects, existing information

embedding objects, new information

from Lotus 1-2-3

linking dependent worksheets to sources

linking source worksheets to dependents

object linking and embedding

opening imported documents, described

opening imported documents, overview

sound notes, Attach Note button

sound notes, described

specifications

TextWizard

tips on

IMPOWER function

IMPRODUCT function

IMREAL function

IMSIN function

IMSQRT function

IMSUB function

IMSUM function

in-place activation

Increase Decimal button

Increase Font Size button

increasing

decimal places

font size

incrementing

date and number series

days

described

months

values

weekdays

years

independence

Index button

Index command (Help menu)

INDEX function

array values

described

intersection references

INDIRECT function

individual term binomial distribution

INFO function

Info menu

Info window

categories

displaying, described

displaying, Show Info Window button

displaying, specific cells

displaying, working with

hiding, unhiding

names in

overview

printing

Show Document command

information about Microsoft Excel

getting while you work

information functions

list

new and changed

INI file

initial capitalization

initial directory

described

setting

initial workbook

input cells

input devices, alternate

input values

data analysis tools

data tables

Goal Seek

Insert Chart Sheet button

Chart command

inserting chart sheets with

Insert command (shortcut menu)

and Insert Paste command

described

filtered lists

Insert Dialog button

inserting dialog sheets with

Macro command

Insert menu

Insert Microsoft Excel 4.0 Macro Sheet button

inserting XLM sheets with

Macro command

Insert New Data command

Insert Paste command (shortcut menu)

Insert Paste Row command (shortcut menu)

Insert Visual Basic Module button

inserting modules with

Macro command

Insert Worksheet button

inserting worksheets with

Worksheet command

inserting

axes

cells, Cells command

cells, described

chart sheets

columns, Columns command

columns, described

copied cells, Cut or Copied Cells command

copied cells, described

copying cells described

cut cells, Cut or Copied Cells command

cut cells, described

data in chart sheets

data in embedded charts

dialog boxes in macros

dialog sheets

error bars, described

error bars, Error Bars command

error bars, overview

external references

formulas in cells

formulas in data tables

functions into formulas, described

functions into formulas, Function command

graphic objects

input values in data tables

international macro sheets

keys for

macro sheets, described

macro sheets, Macro command (Insert menu)

macro sheets, Macro command (Tools menu)

modules, described

modules, Macro command

moving cells described

page breaks, commands

page breaks, described

pictures, created by other applications

pictures, Picture command

pictures, tips on

rows, cut or copied

rows, described

rows, Rows command

sheets, autotemplate-based

sheets, overview

sheets, template-based

sound notes, Attach Note button

sound notes, imported notes

sound notes, new

spaces between buttons

text notes, Attach Note button

text notes, described

tips on

trendlines, described

trendlines, overview

trendlines, Trendline command

worksheets, described

worksheets, Worksheet command

insertion point, keys for moving

installing

add-ins, Add-Ins command

add-ins, described

add-ins, using Setup

Microsoft Excel, components

Microsoft Excel, described

ODBC drivers

Instant Watch command (Tools menu)

INT function

integer problems

Solver

integers, math & trig functions

INTERCEPT function

interest

ACCRINT function

ACCRINTM function

CUMIPMT function

EFFECT function

INTRATE function

IPMT function

NOMINAL function

RATE function

internal rate of return

IRR function

MIRR function

XIRR function

international currency formats

international macro sheets

adding

copying to other workbooks

copying within a workbook

deleting

finding specific cells or ranges

inserting

Move or Copy Sheet command

moving between sheets

moving to other workbooks

moving within workbooks

renaming

interrupted macros, resuming

interrupting slide shows

interrupting Solver

described

intersection of ranges

nonexistent, error value

referencing

intervals

INTRATE function

inverse hyperbolic cosine

inverse hyperbolic sine

inverse hyperbolic tangent

inverse operating functions

ACOSH function

ASINH function

ATANH function

BETAINV function

CHIINV function

FINV function

FISHERINV function

GAMMAINV function

LOGINV function

MINVERSE function

NORMSINV function

TINV function

inverse transformations

inverse trig functions

ACOS function

ASIN function

ATAN function

ATAN2 function

ATANH function

Invert command, Lotus 1-2-3

IPMT function

IRR function

IS Function functions

ISBLANK function

ISERR function

ISERROR function

ISEVEN function

ISLOGICAL function

ISNA function

ISNONTEXT function

ISNUMBER function

ISODD function

ISREF function

ISTEXT function

Italic button

italic text

items currently installed

items in charts  See chart items

items in pivot tables

changing names

date, ungrouping

displaying in pivot table fields

editing in pivot tables

grouping, described

grouping, in page fields

grouping, overview

hiding or showing

hiding or showing detail

moving

numeric, grouping

numeric, ungrouping

page field, showing

rearranging

showing detail

sorting by labels

sorting by values

subtotals

ungrouping

iterations

controlling

maximum number

options

overview

Solver, adjusting settings

Solver, completion messages

Solver, options

- J -

joining text items

Justify Align button

justifying

described

Justify Align button

- K -

keep query definition

key combinations

for inserting sheets

for scrolling

Keyboard Guide

keyboard shortcuts

dialog boxes

for AutoFilter

for data forms

for Data menu

for dialog boxes

for Edit menu

for entering data

for File menu

for Format menu

for formatting data

for Help menu

for Insert menu

for inserting, deleting, copying, moving

for Lotus 1-2-3 transition

for menus and menu bars

for moving in selections

for moving in worksheets

for moving within selection

for outlining

for page fields

for PivotTable Wizard

for printing and previewing

for scrolling

for selecting in worksheets

for selecting in worksheets, workbooks

for selecting special cells

for switching windows

for Tools menu

for View menu

for Window menu

for working in cells

for working in formula bar

with function keys

keyboards

customizing

Dvorak

layouts

Lotus 1-2-3 equivalents

selecting chart items with

keys

for switching windows

Multiplan, function and special

keys, legend

keywords

for finding Help topics

Help On command

KURT function

kurtosis

analyzing data for

KURT function

- L -

Label button

labels, custom dialog boxes

labels, data

adding to charts

changing

creating

Data Labels command

deleting in charts

labels, pivot table items

labels, tick mark

changing

formatting

labels, trendline

LARGE function

larger buttons

larger screen elements

larger views

largest number, analyzing data for

last entry, deleting

last save of files, date

layout of pivot tables

LCM function

least common multiple of integers

least squares linear regression analysis

LINEST function

Regression tool

leaving Excel

left alignment

Align Left button

cell contents

justifying

Left Border button

left borders

LEFT function

Left Parenthesis button

left, filling data to

left-handed users

left-to-right sort, lists

Legend button

Legend command (Insert menu)

legend entries

changing

formatting

legend keys

legends

adding

changing text

deleting

formatting

moving and sizing

tips on

LEN function

length

levels, 3-D charts

levels, outline

displaying

selecting

Light Shading button

limiting access

changes to open workbooks

control of opening and saving workbooks

hiding and unhiding

limiting pen recognition

limits

characters in sheet name

number of sheets in workbook

Limits report

creating

described

Line button

Line Chart AutoFormat button

line charts

3-D Line Chart AutoFormat button

data markers in

formatting as in Lotus 1-2-3

Line Chart AutoFormat button

overlaying column charts

Volume/High-Low-Close Chart AutoFormat button

Line Print command, Lotus 1-2-3

LINE.PRINT macro function

Line/Column Chart AutoFormat button

linear problems

compared to nonlinear problems

Fourier Analysis

Solver, described

Solver, options

linear regression

FORECAST function

INTERCEPT function

LINEST function

Regression tool

RSQ function

SLOPE function

linear series

linear trends

Linear Trend Command

TREND function

lines

and bars in charts

drawing, Freehand button

drawing, Line button

drawing, multiple

drawing, single

formatting

LINEST function

linked chart text

editing

formatting

text linking

linked objects

described

freezing remote references

remote requests

updating links

linked pictures

creating

described

pasting

updating

linked workbooks

consolidating data

opening source

recalculating

redirecting links

removing links

replacing source

saving

source data, viewing

updating

viewing source list

linking

chart text to cells

described

pictures of cells

pictures of cells, described

source documents list

source documents to dependent worksheets

source worksheets to dependent documents

to renamed or moved documents

workbooks

worksheets

links

pasting

remote, freezing

remote, updating

slide show

source data

to source data

workbook

Links command (Edit menu)

described

opening source documents

purpose

redirecting links

updating automatically

updating, disabling

links, remote

converting to values

dependent worksheets and source documents

enabling or disabling remote requests

freezing

redirecting to moved or renamed source

source worksheets and dependent documents

updating

List Box button

list boxes

Combination Drop-Down Edit Button

Combination List-Edit button

creating with Drop-down button

creating with List Box button

width

list management functions

list

new and changed

list of worksheet functions

alphabetical

categorized

new and changed

list records

adding, with data forms

browsing, with data forms

deleting, with data forms

editing with data forms

managing

listening to sound notes

lists

Advanced Filter

AutoFill

Autofilter

automatic subtotals

browsing, with data forms

buttons

choosing from

complex criteria, filtering with

counting items in, COUNT function

counting items in, COUNTA function

criteria, filtering with complex

custom, Custom Lists tab

custom, entering

data form

data, new features

defined names

filtered

filtering, AutoFilter button

filtering, described

filtering, overview

filtering, with Advanced Filter

filtering, with AutoFilter

filtering, with complex criteria

found files, sorting

hiding detail

maintaining with data forms

managing

organizing data with

pasting lists of names

recently opened workbooks, hiding

removing AutoFilter arrows

retrieving data, described

retrieving data, new features

showing data

sorting by columns

sorting, described

sorting, four or more columns

sorting, highest value to lowest

sorting, left to right

sorting, lowest value to highest

sorting, overview

sorting, top to bottom

specifications

subtotaled, displaying automatically

subtotaled, hiding detail data

subtotaled, Subtotals command

summarizing data, described

summarizing data, overview

summary information

toolbar

using as databases

LN function

locating

cells

files

records, by browsing

records, with search criteria

specific place in sheet

text, numbers, cells

location measure

MEDIAN function

MODE function

Location tab, Find File command (File menu)

Advanced Search dialog box

generally

Lock Cell button

locking

cells or ranges

charts

graphic objects

LOG function

LOG10 function

logarithms

EXP function

GAMMALN function

IMLN function

IMLOG10 function

IMLOG2 function

LN function

LOG function

LOG10 function

LOGEST function

logical functions

logical operators

LOGINV function

lognormal cumulative distribution

LOGINV function

LOGNORMDIST function

LOGNORMDIST function

LOOKUP function

lookup functions

list

new and changed

lottery

Lotus 1-2-3

calculating formulas

commands, described

commands, in-depth information

Data Distribution command

Data Matrix commands

Data Regression commands

entering formulas

entering formulas and names

equivalent Microsoft Excel terms

file formats

files in Microsoft Excel

format equivalents

frequently used commands

function keys

global settings

Graph Options Color command

Graph Options Format commands

Graph Options Grid commands

Graph Options Titles command

Graph Type commands

Graph View commands

Help for users

Help in CNF2INI

keyboard equivalents

Line Print command

linking with Microsoft Excel worksheets

Lotus 1-2-3 command

macro conversion

Macro Translation Assistant

macros, running

mathematical operator evaluation

Menu dialog box

moving workbooks to and from

navigation keys

Print Printer commands

print settings

Prompt dialog box

switching from, helpful features for

switching from, tips on

System command

text alignment prefix characters

transition navigation keys

Worksheet Erase command

Worksheet Global Default Printer commands

worksheet settings

X Scale and Y Scale commands

Lotus 1-2-3 command (Help menu)

low-vision users

LOWER function

lowercase

- M -

Macintosh and Windows, moving files between

generally

overview

Macintosh date system

macro buttons

Macro command (Insert menu)

creating Visual Basic modules

described

Macro command (Tools menu)

assigning macros to menus

described

editing macros

running macros

macro recorder

described

Mark Position For Recording command

relative references

starting at mark

stopping

macro references

macro sheets

adding

autotemplates for

copying to other workbooks

deleting

displaying with Info window

going to specific place in

inserting with Macro command (Insert menu)

inserting with Macro command (Tools menu)

inserting, described

Move or Copy Sheet command

moving between sheets

moving to other workbooks

moving within workbooks

renaming

stepping through

template

tips on

Macro Translation Assistant

Lotus 1-2-3

Multiplan

macros

add-in

as accessibility aid

assigning to buttons on sheets, described

assigning to buttons on sheets, overview

assigning to buttons on toolbars, overview

assigning to custom buttons on toolbars

assigning to existing buttons on toolbars

assigning to graphic objects

assigning to Tools menu

assigning to Tools menu, buttons, or objects

assigning with Assign Macro command

automating repeated tasks

buttons for

changing assignment to buttons or graphics

changing, Macro command

clearing from buttons or graphics

continuing, Continue command

continuing, Resume Macro button

data access

data retrieval

deleting

editing by recording over

editing described

editing, Macro command

Lotus 1-2-3, Macro Translation Assistant

Lotus 1-2-3, Menu dialog box

Lotus 1-2-3, Prompt dialog box

Lotus 1-2-3, running

Lotus 1-2-3, switching information

Microsoft Excel 4.0 macros

Multiplan

opening existing modules

Quattro Pro

Record At Mark command

recording additional code

recording and running

recording described

resuming, Continue command

resuming, Resume Macro button

running, described

running, Macro command

specifications

Start command

stepping through

Stop Recording toolbar

stopping

tips on

toolbar

writing

macros, add-in  See add-ins

magnifying worksheet views

as aid to accessibility

Zoom command

Zoom Control box

Zoom In button

zooming

mail

Microsoft Mail button

toolbar

mailing workbooks

described

overview

routing

Send command

major gridlines

adding

Gridlines command

Make Add-in command (Tools menu)

making add-ins

managing data, new features

managing files

managing lists

managing multiple files

managing workbooks

manual calculation

activating

Calculate Now button

manual page breaks

commands

inserting or removing

manually updating remote links

margins

Margins tab

setting

Mark Position For Recording command (Tools menu, Record Macro submenu)

markers  See data markers

markers, picture

MATCH function

matching case or pattern when finding files

math co-processor

math functions

list

new and changed

mathematical operators, Lotus 1-2-3

matrix determinant

maturity

EDATE function

PRICEMAT function

RECEIVED function

YIELDMAT function

MAX function

Maximize button

Maximize command (Control menu)

described

Maximize button

maximizing screens

Full Screen command (View menu)

full screens, displaying

maximizing values

Solver, overview

maximizing windows

keys for

Maximize button

Maximize command

maximum values

analyzing for

returning

MDETERM function

MDURATION function

mean

analyzing data for

AVERAGE function

data points, deviation

GEOMEAN function

HARMEAN function

hypothesized difference

of populations, testing differences

of samples, determining distinctness

of samples, determining equality

samples

TRIMMEAN function

measurement conversions

MEDIAN function

median, analyzing data for

memory available

About Microsoft Excel command

INFO function

memory shortages, Solver

menu bars

hiding

keyboard shortcuts

menu commands

assigning macros as, described

assigning macros as, overview

changes in version 5

choosing

getting Help

keyboard shortcuts

menu commands, shortcut

choosing

keyboard shortcuts

Select All Sheets

menu dialog boxes, Lotus 1-2-3

menu Editor command (Tools menu)

menus

assigning macros to, described

assigning macros to, overview

choosing commands from

customizing

getting Help

keyboard shortcuts

Microsoft Excel version 4.0

Microsoft Excel version 5.0

menus, shortcut

choosing commands in

columns

displaying with pen

keyboard shortcuts

rows

tips on

merging

scenarios

Scenarios command

styles

messages, alert

generally

Microsoft Query

Slide Show

Solver

messages, Solver completion

Microsoft Access button

Microsoft applications

switching to

toolbar

Microsoft Download Service (MSDL)

Microsoft Excel

about

changing displays

customizing

definitions

installing and starting

installing components, described

installing components, overview

keeping versions separate

maximizing window

new features

new menus

ODBC functions add-in

quitting

registration card

specifications

starting

starting and quitting

startup switches

switching between versions

switching to

using files in Multiplan

version number

Microsoft Excel 4.0

customized data forms

macro specifications

menus

opening files

stopping macros

Microsoft FoxPro

Microsoft Mail

Microsoft Mail button

Microsoft Multiplan

files

Macro Translation Assistant

Multiplan command

Microsoft ODBC functions add-in

for retrieving data

generally

Microsoft OnLine

Microsoft PowerPoint button

Microsoft Product Support Services

deaf and hard-of-hearing persons

getting information while you work

Microsoft Project button

Microsoft Query

add-in described

alert messages

described

Refresh Data command

retrieving data, described

retrieving data, overview

setup for

toolbar

Microsoft Sales and Service

products and services for people with disabilities

services for the deaf and hard-of-hearing

Microsoft Schedule+ button

Microsoft toolbar

described

switching to Microsoft applications

Microsoft Windows Driver Library

Microsoft Windows for Pen Computing

Microsoft Windows, customizing

Microsoft Word button

Microsoft Works files

MID function

middle value, finding with MEDIAN function

MIN function

Minimize button

Minimize command (Control menu)

described

Minimize button

minimizing values

Solver, overview

minimizing windows

described

keys for

Minimize button

Minimize command

minimum values

analyzing data for

DMIN function

minor gridlines

adding

Gridlines command

Minus Sign button

MINUTE function

minutes

MINVERSE function

MIRR function

mixed references

changing to absolute, relative

MMULT function

MOD function

MODE function

mode, analyzing data for

models, Solver

loading and saving, described

loading and saving, dialog boxes

options

modified Bessel function

BESSELI function

BESSELK function

modified internal rate of return

modifying chart types

data series

entire charts

modifying charts

modifying reports

modifying saved searches

modifying settings

error bars

trendlines

Module command (Insert menu, Macro)

creating Visual Basic modules

Macro command

modules

activating

adding

breakpoints, clearing

copying

creating

defined

deleting

formatting, customizing

going to specific place in

inserting, autotemplate-based

inserting, described

inserting, Macro command

Move or Copy Sheet command

moving between sheets

moving to other workbooks

moving within workbooks

recording code into

renaming

template

toolbar

modulus

IMABS function

MOD function

money formats  See currency formats

MONTH function

months

filling

MONTH function

More Windows command (Window menu)

motion disabilities

mouse cursor

mouse, selecting chart items with

Move command (Control menu)

Move Or Copy Sheet command (Edit menu)

moving

active cell, within selection

active cell, within workbook

around on worksheets

between sheets

between Windows and Macintosh, described

between Windows and Macintosh, overview

buttons between toolbars

buttons for accessibility

buttons on a toolbar

by dragging and dropping, described

by dragging and dropping, overview

by scrolling with keys

by scrolling with scroll bars

cells, Cut command

cells, Cut or Copied cells command

cells, described

cells, inserting after cutting or copying

characters within cells

chart items, described

chart items, overview

chart legends

dialog boxes

embedded charts

graphic objects

keys for

legends

Move or Copy Sheets command

pictures

pivot fields

pivot table items

query definitions

sheets to other workbooks

sheets within workbooks

slides

source documents for links

source workbooks to new directories

tips on

to other applications

to specific place in sheet

toolbars

using shortcut menu

windows

Moving Average tool

moving average trendlines

adding

overview

Trendline command

MROUND function

MS Excel 4.0 Macro command

MS-DOS command line

compared with Lotus 1-2-3 System command

compared with Multiplan Run command

MSDL (Microsoft Download Service)

multilevel charts

creating

overview

MULTINOMIAL function

Multiplan

files in Microsoft Excel

Format Options command equivalents

function and special keys

Help for users of

Macro Translation Assistant

Options command equivalents

Print File command

Print Options command

Run Command command

Run Report File command

Run Report Print command

Transfer Clear Window command

Multiplan command (Help menu)

multiple cells

entering data in

multiple chart types

described

multiple files, selecting

multiple pages

printing titles on

multiple regression

multiple sum formulas

Multiplication Sign button

Multiply command, Lotus 1-2-3

multiplying

Growth Trend command

IMPRODUCT function

PRODUCT function

SUMPRODUCT function

- N -

N function

NA function

name box

Name command (Insert menu)

named ranges of cells

names

changing

creating

defining using 3-D reference

deleting from worksheet

different

displaying in Info window

list of, pasting

listing on screen

listing, printing

Lotus 1-2-3, entering

Name command

overview

Paste Names button

pasting into formulas

pasting lists of

pivot table fields

reference of, checking

reference of, editing

replacing cell references with

tips on

unknown, error value

using row, column titles

Names command (Info menu)

names, creating

overview

naming

cells, ranges, formulas

renaming sheets

sheets

styles

workbooks

worksheet views

NAS service support

NASD-compliant dating

National Information System

natural logarithms

EXP function

GAMMALN function

IMLN function

LN function

navigation keys

described

Lotus 1-2-3

overview

negative binomial distribution

negative correlation

negative covariance

NEGBINOMDIST function

nested automatic subtotals

displaying

net present value

NPV function

XNPV function

NETWORKDAYS function

networks

finding files on, Copy dialog box

finding files on, Location tab

Neumann function

new cells

Cells command

inserting

new chart commands

new charts

creating with Chart command

creating with ChartWizard

new columns

Columns command

inserting

New command (File menu)

adding templates to

New command

new data

adding to chart sheets

adding to embedded charts

New Data command (Insert menu)

adding data to embedded charts

described

new documents, starting

new features

charting

customizing Microsoft Excel

data analysis

everyday tasks

exchanging data

generally

organizing data

problem-solving

workbooks

worksheet functions

new names, saving workbooks with

new rows

inserting

Rows command

new sheets

inserting

new slide shows

new toolbars

creating

New Window command (Window menu)

described

splitting a window into panes

new windows

Displaying and closing new windows of a workbook

New Window Command (Window Menu)

New Workbook button

new workbooks

changing

New command

new worksheet functions

new worksheets

Newton gradient search method

next application, switching to

next coupon date

next line of code, executing

Next Window command (Workbook Control menu)

next window, switching to

NOMINAL function

nonadjacent cells

selecting

nonadjacent selections

creating charts from

nonblank cells

copying

Paste Special command

nonlinear problems

Solver

nonscrolling titles

normal cumulative distribution

NORMDIST function

NORMINV function

NORMSDIST function

NORMSINV function

normal distribution

normalizing

NORMDIST function

NORMINV function

NORMSDIST function

NORMSINV function

NOT function

Note command (Info menu)

Note command (Insert menu)

adding text notes

displaying text notes

erasing sound notes

Note command

playing sound notes

recording sound notes

note indicators

hiding, unhiding

notes

removing

tips on

notes, sound

adding

Attach Note button

copying

deleting from cells

erasing

imported

indicators

Note command

playing

recording

notes, text

Attach Note button

copying

creating

deleting

displaying

indicators

Note command

printing

NOW function

NPER function

NPV function

NUM LOCK, status bar display

number codes

number formats

adding decimal places

applying using buttons

assigning

changing for chart values

changing in pivot tables

codes for

Comma style

creating custom

Currency style

currency, international

decimal separators

deleting

for chart items

for chart values

formulas

Lotus 1-2-3 equivalents

Multiplan equivalents

overview

Percent style

removing decimal places

text

tick label scale numbers

tips on

number of active worksheets

number of coupons

number series

filling in

incrementing

Number tab, Cells command (Format menu)

numbers

See also number formats

decimal places, adding

decimal places, automatic

decimal places, fixed

decimal places, removing

decimal separators

entering, described

entering, overview

error values

Find command

finding

formatting

in charts, formatting

in charts, overview

in pivot tables, editing and formatting

in pivot tables, grouping

in pivot tables, ungrouping

random, generating

random, specifying unique sets

Replace command

replacing

sort order

specifications

subscripts

superscripts

- O -

Object Browser command (View menu)

Object command (Edit menu)

converting embedded objects

described

editing embedded objects

Object command (Format menu)

Alignment tab

described

Font tab

Patterns tab

Properties tab

Protection tab

Object command (Insert menu)

Create From File tab

Create New tab

described

embedding existing information

embedding new information

object linking and embedding

converting embedded objects

converting references to values

creating embedded objects

deleting embedded objects

described

dragging and dropping

editing embedded objects from other applications

editing Microsoft Excel objects

embedding existing information in Microsoft Excel

embedding in other applications

embedding new information in Microsoft Excel

freezing a remote reference

freezing all remote references

linking dependent worksheets to sources

linking source worksheets to dependents

opening source documents

redirecting links

remote requests

updating links

updating Microsoft Excel objects

updating objects from other applications

objects

creating code for

Edit Code button

editing code

grids on

locking and unlocking

macros, assigning to

objects, embedded

converting format

deleting

described

editing Microsoft Excel objects

editing objects from other applications

embedding existing information in Microsoft Excel

embedding in other applications

embedding new information in Microsoft Excel

freezing a remote reference

freezing all remote references

remote requests

updating links

updating Microsoft Excel objects

updating objects from other applications

objects, graphic

objects, linked

described

freezing remote references

remote requests

updating links

occurrences, calculating

OCT2BIN function

OCT2DEC function

OCT2HEX function

octals

BIN2OCT function

DEC2OCT function

HEX2OCT function

OCT2BIN function

OCT2DEC function

OCT2HEX function

ODBC

creating pivot tables form external data

data sources

drivers, installing additional

drivers, reference

functions add-in

role in Microsoft Query

ODD function

odd numbers, detecting

ODDFPRICE function

ODDFYIELD function

ODDLPRICE function

ODDLYIELD function

OFFSET function

OLE

converting embedded objects

converting references to values

creating embedded objects

deleting embedded objects

described

dragging and dropping, described

dragging and dropping, overview

editing embedded objects from other applications

editing Microsoft Excel objects

embedding existing information in Microsoft Excel

embedding in other applications

embedding new information in Microsoft Excel

freezing a remote reference

freezing all remote references

linking dependent worksheets to sources

linking source worksheets to dependents

opening source documents

redirecting links

remote requests

updating links

updating Microsoft Excel objects

updating objects from other applications

one finger, typing with

Access Pack

keyboard layouts

one-handed users

one-input data tables

adding formulas to

adding input values to

creating

Table command

online Help

button

Lotus 1-2-3, command

Lotus 1-2-3, how to use

Multiplan, command

Multiplan, how to use

overview

Open command (File menu)

open database connectivity

creating pivot tables form external data

data sources

drivers, installing additional

drivers, reference

functions add-in

role in Microsoft Query

OPEN statements, EXCEL5.INI

open windows

1,2,3,...9 commands

More Windows command

opening charts

opening embedded charts

opening files

for viewing, File Info View

for viewing, Summary view

from other applications

Open command

previewing instead of opening

searching for files

tips on

upon startup

opening Help

Help button

opening Info window

opening mail

routed workbooks

opening Microsoft Excel

opening multiple workbooks

opening slide shows

opening source documents for links

opening source workbooks

opening templates

described

Open command

opening version 4.0 files

opening workbooks

automatically

described

multiple workbooks

Open command

overview

recently opened workbooks

routed workbooks

upon startup

opening workspace files

operands

operating environment

operations in progress, identification

operator buttons

Colon

Comma

Division Sign

Equal Sign

Left Parenthesis

Minus Sign

Multiplication Sign

Plus Sign

Right Parenthesis

operators

comparison

for text

mathematical, Lotus 1-2-3

optimizing values

Solver, overview

option buttons

creating

in group boxes, creating

options

calculation options

chart options

choosing in dialog boxes

color options

custom lists

display options

edit options, described

edit options, Edit tab

general

Options command (Tools menu)

print

Solver, described

Solver, dialog box

transition, Transition tab

transition, using for switching

view, Info window

view, note indicators

view, View tab

Options command (Tools menu)

Calculation tab

Chart tab

Color tab

Custom Lists tab

described

displaying or hiding outline symbols

dragging and dropping options

Edit tab

excluding headers, gridlines from pictures

freezing or updating remote references

remote requests

remote requests, controlling

transition navigation keys

updating links

Options command, Multiplan

OR function

order of printing pages

organization name

organization of outlines

organizing data

new features

with lists

orientation, chart

changing plot order

reversing plot order

setting from data series

other applications

opening documents created in

pictures created by

Outline Border button

outline symbols

described

hiding, unhiding

outlined lists

sorting, left to right

sorting, top to bottom

outlines

creating

displaying or hiding detail

grouping rows, columns

keys for

level bars

levels

organization, changing

removing

selecting sections of

selecting visible cells in

Show Outline Symbols button

showing or hiding data

styles in

symbols, described

symbols, showing

outlining cells  See borders

output values, data analysis tools

ovals  See ellipses

overlapped graphic objects

reordering

- P -

page alignment

Page Break command (Insert menu)

page breaks

hiding, unhiding

inserting and removing

Page Break commands

page fields

Add Page Field command

adding

combined data

grouping items in

keys for

overview

removing

page margins

Margins Tab, Page Setup command

setting

page order

page orientation

Page Tab, Page Setup command

setting

page print order

page ranges

printing

page scaling

Page Setup command (File menu)

Chart tab

Header/Footer tab

Margins tab

overview

Page tab

Sheet tab

page size

printing options

setting

pages, pivot table

displaying

overview

pages, printing

Print Preview command

selecting print size

titles on multiple pages

viewing pages before

pages, setting up

Page Setup command

Page Tab, Page Setup command

paging in print preview

paired two-sample t-tests

palettes

copying

customizing, restoring

selecting from

shading cells

panes, creating

panes, freezing and unfreezing

described

Freeze Panes command (Window menu)

Unfreeze Panes command (Window menu)

panes, splitting

described

split box

Split command (Window menu)

paper size

parentheses

Left Parenthesis button

Right Parenthesis button

Pareto charts

parsing

text across columns

TextWizard

partial calculation of formula

parts of Excel, installing

passwords

charts

for accessing files

for saving files

levels of protection

Protect Sheet command

Protect Workbook command

Save As command

Save Copy As command

passwords, removing

described

Unprotect Sheet command

Unprotect Workbook command

Paste Button Image command (Edit menu)

Paste command (Edit menu)

filtered lists

overview

pasting to other applications

pictures of cells, charts, graphic objects

Paste Formats button

Paste Names button

Paste Picture command (Edit menu)

Paste Picture Link command (Edit menu)

copying linked picture of cells

overview

Paste Special command (Edit menu)

charts

converting remote references to values

coverting values

embedding objects in Microsoft Excel

linking dependent worksheets to sources

pasting from other applications

worksheets

Paste Values button

pasting

Insert Paste Row command

Paste command

Paste Formats button

Paste Special command

Paste Special command for charts

Paste Values button

tips on

pasting button images

pasting by dragging and dropping

overview

pasting cells as pictures

charts, cells or objects

linked pictures

to another application

pasting combined values, formulas

pasting copied cells

copying or replacing cells

Cut or Copied Cells command

inserting cells

pasting cut cells

Cut or Copied Cells command

inserting cells

moving cells

pasting data series or points

to chart sheets

to embedded charts

pasting formats

pasting formulas

pasting from other applications

pasting graphic objects as pictures

charts, cells or objects

to another application

pasting linked pictures

copying

pasting lists of names

all defined names

into a range

pasting multiple copies

pasting names into formulas

Name command

overview

Paste Names button

pasting pictures

charts, cells or objects

copying linked pictures

Past Picture command

Paste Picture Link command

to another application

pasting to embed objects

pasting to other applications

data

pictures

pasting values

values only

values over formulas

pasting, Format Painter button

path

Pattern button

pattern matching

non-matching cells

Summary Tab, Find File command

patterned random variables

patterns

applying to chart data markers

applying to chart items

changing with button

chart item formats

graphic objects

overview

patterns and shading

cells, formatting with

dark shading

light shading

Patterns tab, Cells command (Format menu)

Patterns tab, Format Object command

Patterns tab, Selected Object command (Format menu)

paused macros, resuming

payments

NPER function

PMT function

PPMT function

PEARSON function

Pearson product moment correlation coefficient

pens

recognition, limiting

using Excel with

Percent Sign button

Percent style

applying with button

changing

Percent Style button

percentages

formats, Lotus 1-2-3 equivalents

Percent Style button

PERCENTILE function

PERCENTRANK function

Rank and Percentile

PERCENTILE function

PERCENTRANK function

periodic data, analyzing

PERMUT function

permutations

perspective column chart, 3-D

perspective in 3-D charts

3-D View command

setting height and perspective

phone numbers, users with hearing impairments

pi

PI function

SQRTPI function

PI function

Picture command (Insert menu)

picture markers

pictures, copying

Copy Picture command

to another application

pictures, copying cells, charts, graphic objects as

creating

generally

linked pictures

overview

pictures, creating

of cell ranges

overview

pictures, hiding and unhiding

pictures, inserting

from other applications

Picture command

pictures, linked

copying

pasting

updating

pictures, linking cells, objects, or charts

pictures, moving

pictures, pasting

pictures, printing

pictures, replacing data markers with

pictures, resizing

pictures, using as button images

pie and doughnut slices

Pie Chart AutoFormat button

pie charts

3-D Pie Chart AutoFormat button

formatting slices

Pie Chart AutoFormat button

pivot table buttons

pivot table column fields, adding

pivot table fields

adding

adding data fields

adding page fields

adding row fields

keys for working with

summary function, changing

pivot table items

changing names

hiding or showing detail

pivot table items, grouping and ungrouping

grouping

grouping dates into ranges

ungrouping date items

ungrouping numeric items

ungrouping, described

pivot table items, hiding

pivot table items, moving

described

pivot table items, rearranging

pivot table items, sorting

by labels

by values

overview

pivot table pages

copying to worksheets

displaying

keys for working with

working with, overview

pivot table specifications

pivot table toolbars

pivot tables

adding data to

calculation

explained

overview

tips on

pivot tables, changing information in

calculation of data

calculation types

data calculation

field names

layout

names of fields

names of items

number formats

number formats for data area

rearranging items

source data

summary function for data field

updating data

pivot tables, converting Microsoft Excel 4.0 crosstab tables

pivot tables, creating

described

generally

overview

pivot tables, creating charts from

pivot tables, customizing

pivot tables, deleting

pivot tables, displaying information in

detail data

grand totals

pages

source data

subtotals

pivot tables, editing

pivot tables, editing queries

pivot tables, formatting

AutoFormat table option

described

overview

PivotTable Wizard

pivot tables, grouping and ungrouping data in

dates

items into fields

numeric items into ranges

pivot tables, hiding information in

detail data

grand totals

pivot tables, moving fields

pivot tables, refreshing

pivot tables, removing information from

pivot tables, sorting

pivot tables, source data

changing

displaying

pivot tables, subtotals in

pivot tables, totals in

pivot tables, updating data in

PivotTable command (Data menu)

creating pivot tables

PivotTable command

PivotTable Field command (Data menu)

PivotTable Wizard

creating pivot tables, described

creating pivot tables, overview

formatting pivot tables

keys for

Placement command (Format menu)

Placement tab

playing macros

described

playing sound notes

plot area, selecting

plotted ranges, chart, changing

plotting charts

changing order of

reversing order

setting data series

plotting data

along secondary axis

Plus Sign button

PMT function

point sizes, fonts

points, data, chart

adding

changing values

data labels, changing

deleting

reversing order

tick-mark labels, changing

Poisson distribution, random variables

POISSON function

Polygon button

polygons, drawing

described

Freeform button

Polygon button

polygons, editing

described

Reshape button

population means

population sampling

populations

CONFIDENCE function

HYPGEOMDIST function

QUARTILE function

STDEV function

STDEVP function

VAR function

VARP function

positioning graphic objects

overview

Placement command

positive correlation

positive covariance

possible combinations

POWER function

PowerPoint button

PPMT function

precedents

selecting

tips on

Precedents command (Info menu)

precedents, displaying

described

overview

precedents, tracing

described

overview

Remove Precedent Arrows button

Trace Precedents button

Trace Precedents command

precision

display options

displayed, using in calculation

Solver completion messages

Solver Options Dialog Box

Solver settings, adjusting

predicting

adding trendlines to data series

based on average value of variable

based on error of previous forecasts

FORECAST function

STEYX function

Trendline Command

with Exponential Smoothing tool

with Moving Average tool

preparing charts for printing

preparing slides

present value

NPV function

PV function

preventing calculation

before saving

freezing values

replacing formulas with values

switching to manual

preventing changes

charts

scenarios

previewing

files

workbooks

previewing before printing

described

keys for

Print Preview command

previous application, switching to, keys for

previous coupon date

previous window, switching to, keys for

previously viewed topics

PRICE function

PRICEDISC function

PRICEMAT function

prices

ODDFPRICE function

ODDLPRICE function

PRICE function

PRICEDISC function

PRICEMAT function

TBILLPRICE function

primary axis, data series

principal, cumulative

print area

reducing and enlarging

saving

Set Print Area Button

Sheet Tab, Page Setup command

worksheets

Print command (File menu)

Print File command, Multiplan

print options

Print Options command, Multiplan

print order

print preview

described

keys for

Print Preview command

Print Printer commands, Lotus 1-2-3

print quality

print settings

current, saving

Lotus 1-2-3

print setup

overview

print size

print titles

printers, selecting

printing

overview

Print Button

Print command

removing nonprintable characters

Table of Contents

printing cell notes

printing charts

Chart Tab, Page Setup command

described

with colors

printing files

File Info View

Preview View

Summary View

printing from File Manager

printing graphic objects

printing gridlines

printing headings

printing Info window information

printing options

printing page ranges

printing pictures

printing reports

Add-ins

described

Print Report command

printing selected ranges

described

generally

printing specific worksheet areas

described

specifying

printing text notes

printing titles on multiple pages

printing worksheet views

printing, keys for

printing, Lotus 1-2-3 command equivalents

Lotus 1-2-3 Line Print Command

Lotus 1-2-3 Print Printer Commands

Lotus 1-2-3 Worksheet Global Default Printer Commands

printing, Multiplan equivalent commands

printing, preparation for

printing, setting area for

printing, tips on

described

generally

printing, viewing pages before

described

Print Preview command

PROB function

probability

BETADIST function

BETAINV function

BINOMDIST function

charting with linear regression analysis

POISSON function

PROB function

random number generation

statistical functions

TTEST function

problem solving

See also Solver

Goal Seek command

new features

seeking specific solutions

tips on

problem types

Procedure Definition command (View menu)

procedures

displaying

jumping to

running

writing

procedures, editing

editing macros

recording into existing macros

writing macros

procedures, stepping into

procedures, stepping over

PRODUCT function

product support

Product Support Services, Microsoft

tips

products

IMPRODUCT function

MMULT function

MULTINOMIAL function

PRODUCT function

SUMPRODUCT function

programming, new features

Project button

projecting figures

prompt dialog boxes, Lotus 1-2-3

proofing spelling

PROPER function

properties

changing

controlling

icon

Properties tab, Format Object command

Properties tab, Selected Object command (Format menu)

Protect Sheet command (Tools menu)

Protect Workbook command (Tools menu)

protecting cell ranges

protecting charts

protecting formulas

protecting graphic objects

protecting scenarios

protecting sheets

hiding, unhiding sheets

Protect Sheet command

Sheet command

Unprotect Sheet command

protecting windows

protecting workbooks

hiding, unhiding workbooks

open workbooks

Protect Workbook command

Protection command

saved workbooks

Unprotect Workbook command

protecting worksheets

hiding, unhiding workbooks

Protection command

read-only recommended files

Protection command (Info menu)

Protection command (Tools menu)

Protection tab, Cells command (Format menu)

Protection tab, Format Object command

Protection tab, Selected Object command (Format menu)

protection with passwords

removing

requiring a password for access

requiring a password to save

PV function

- Q -

quadratic approach

quality assurance

QUARTILE function

Quattro Pro

opening

running

queries, editing

for pivot tables

Get External Data command

Query

add-in described

Refresh Data command

retrieving, setup required for

updating results

Query and Pivot toolbar

query definitions

moving between workbooks

removing

query results, updating

query tool

question mark

Quit command (File menu)

quitting Microsoft Excel

described

Exit command

overview

QUOTIENT function

quotients

IMDIV function

QUOTIENT function

QWERTY keyboard layout

- R -

R-squared value

adding trendlines

modifying trendlines

R1C1 reference style

Radar Chart AutoFormat button

radar charts

formatting data markers in

Radar Chart AutoFormat button

radians

DEGREES function

IMARGUMENT function

RADIANS function

RADIANS function

raise to a power

raising integer power

RAND function

RANDBETWEEN function

Random Number Generation tool

random numbers

generating

RAND function

RANDBETWEEN function

specifying unique sets

random variables

range formats

range of macro recorder, setting

ranges

analyzing data for

converting to columns

creating slides from

distribution of values

grouping dates into

grouping numeric items into

justifying text to fill

pasting as pictures

pictures of, creating

ranges of pages, printing

ranges, array

clearing

converting to constant values

selecting

ranges, chart

ranges, copying as pictures

charts, cells or objects

linked pictures

overview

to another application

ranges, criteria

ranges, going to specific

described

ranges, intersecting

referring to

ranges, names

Name box

overview

ranges, outlining

automatically

manually

Outline Border button

ranges, printing

ranges of pages

ranges, selecting

described

extending the selection

Go To command

keys used

named ranges or specified cells

nonadjacent cells or ranges

Select Current Region button

Select Visible Cells button

selecting entire worksheet

size, changing

visible cells only

ranges, sheet

Rank and Percentile tool

RANK function

ranking

PERCENTRANK function

RANK function

values

RATE function

rates

EFFECT function

INTRATE function

RATE function

XIRR function

read-only files

File Info view

Open command

Preview view

Save As command

Save Copy As command

Summary view

Toggle Read Only button

Update File button

read-only recommended files

creating

overview

read-write file status

real coefficients

COMPLEX function

IMREAL function

rebuilding files list

recalculating

controlling

linked workbooks

Multiplan equivalent commands

recalculation mode, current

RECEIVED function

receiving data from other applications

by copying, pasting

by dragging and dropping

embedding existing information

embedding new information

linking dependent worksheets to sources

linking source worksheets to dependents

object linking and embedding

specifications

tips on

using Clipboard

recently opened workbooks

reconsolidating data

Record At Mark command (Tools menu, Record Macro submenu)

Record Macro command (Tools menu)

Record Macro command

recording macros

recording to existing macro

Record Macro dialog box

Record Macro submenu

Record New Macro command (Tools Menu)

Record New Macro command

Record New Macro command (Tools menu, Record Macro)

recording macros

Recording for the Blind, Inc.

recording macros

adding to existing macros

described

Microsoft Excel 4.0 macros

Record At Mark command (Tools menu, Record Macro submenu)

Record New Macro command

toolbar

recording sound notes

records

adding, with data forms

browsing, with data forms

deleting, with data forms

editing, with data forms

finding, with search criteria

keys for

Rectangle button

rectangles

drawing multiple arrows, lines, shapes

drawing rectangle, ellipses or arcs

Rectangle button

redefining style

redirecting links

Redo command

described

options applied

Undo and Redo commands

redoing commands

reducing print area

reducing selections

reducing worksheet views

Zoom command (View menu)

Zoom Control box

Zoom Out button

zooming in or out

reference areas

reference functions

list

new and changed

reference styles, changing

references

adjustment when relocated

ODBC drivers

References command (Tools menu)

references, 3-D

references, cell

error values

intersecting ranges

other worksheets

replacing with names

replacing with names, Name command

types, changing

references, circular, solving using iteration

references, creating

references, external

changing

deleting

entering in formulas

replacing with value

using to link workbooks

references, relative

references, remote

converting to values

creating

freezing

suppressing

updating

updating manually

references, worksheet

to one sheet

to range of sheets

Refresh Data command (Data menu)

refreshable Braille displays

refreshing result sets

regions, selecting

extending selections

Select Current Region button

REGISTER function

REGISTER.ID function

registration card

regression

FORECAST function

INTERCEPT function

LINEST function

RSQ function

SLOPE function

STEYX function

Regression tool

regression trendlines

adding

overview

Trendline command

regrouping buttons

relative position

relative references

changing to absolute, mixed

Use Relative References command (Tools menu, Record Macro submenu)

relative size

MAX function

MIN function

relative standing

LARGE function

PERCENTILE function

RANK function

SMALL function

reliability analysis

remote links

converting to values

dependent worksheets and source documents

enabling or disabling remote requests

freezing

redirecting to moved or renamed source

source worksheets and dependent documents

suppressing updates

remote links, updating

controlling

disabling

editing embedded objects

from source document lists

suppressing

updating

remote references

controlling

converting to values

creating

freezing

suppressing

updating

Remove All Arrows button

Remove All Arrows command

Remove Dependent Arrows button

Remove Page Break command (Insert menu)

Remove Precedent Arrows button

Remove Split command (Window menu)

removing, add-ins

Add-ins command

described

removing, autoformats

autoformats

custom

removing, automatic subtotals

removing, borders

bottom borders

double bottom borders

left borders

right borders

top borders

removing, breakpoints

removing, buttons from toolbars

removing, categories from Info window

removing, cell contents

removing, cells

Delete command

removing, chart data

data series

worksheet ranges

removing, chart items

removing, columns

pivot table columns

removing, decimal places

removing, embedded objects

removing, error bars

removing, filters from lists

removing, gridlines

described

Lotus 1-2-3 commands

removing, keys for

removing, names

removing, outlines

described

overview

removing, page breaks

described

Page Break and Remove Page Break commands

removing, page fields

from pivot tables

removing, pivot table data

data fields

row, column, page fields

removing, query definitions

removing, rows

Delete Row command

from pivot tables

removing, scenarios

described

Scenarios command

removing, sheets

Delete Sheet command

described

removing, sound notes

removing, subtotals

removing, text notes

removing, tracer arrows

described

Remove All Arrows button

Remove All Arrows command

Remove Dependent Arrows button

Remove Precedent Arrows button

removing, trendlines

removing, window splits

Remove Split command

Split box

removing, workbook links

renaming

source documents for links

source workbooks

workbooks

renaming sheets

described

Sheet command

reordering data series in chart type groups

reordering graphic objects

graphic objects

reordering sheets

to other workbooks

within a workbook

Repeat command

described

options applied

Repeat command

repeating actions, commands

described

options applied

Redo command

Repeat command

REPT function

repeating characters

repetitive-motion injuries

Replace command (Edit menu)

REPLACE function

replacing

characters, numbers

Replace command

REPLACE function

source workbooks

SUBSTITUTE function

replacing cell references with names

described

Name command

Report Manager

reports, adding

reports, creating

custom reports

described

Solver Results Dialog Box

using Solver

reports, editing

described

Edit Report dialog box

reports, printing

described

Print Report command

reports, summary

creating

Scenarios command

representative samples

REPT function

Reset Button Image command (shortcut menu)

Reset command (Run menu)

Reset format, Lotus 1-2-3

resetting button images

described

Reset Button Image command

resetting chart defaults

described

resetting colors

resetting column width

described

resetting row height

described

resetting toolbars

restoring built-in toolbars

resetting variables

Reshape button

reshaping polygons

described

Reshape button

resizing

columns

embedded charts

graphic objects

pictures

rows

toolbars

windows

restarting macros

Restore button

Restore command (Control menu)

Restore command

restoring maximized windows

restoring minimized windows

restoring moved or resized windows

restoring button images

described

Reset Button Image command

restoring colors

restoring toolbars

built-in toolbars

restoring windows

described

maximized windows

minimized windows

moved or resized windows

Restore button

Restore command

screen to normal size

result sets

editing

keeping without updating

refreshing, Microsoft Query

updating

results, Query, updating

results, Solver

adjusting settings

completion messages

creating reports

Options dialog box

Results dialog box

Show Trial Solution dialog box

using Solver

Resume Macro button

resuming macros

Continue command (Run menu)

Resume Macro button

Start command (Run menu)

retrieving data

from lists and external databases

Get External Data command

Microsoft ODBC functions add-in

new features

setup for macro writing

retrieving data with Microsoft Query

add-in

described

overview

setup needs

returns

IRR function

MIRR function

XIRR function

reversing commands

reversing order, chart plotting

categories, values or series

data series

reviewing workbooks, new features

RFB (Recording for the Blind, Inc.)

right alignment

Align Right button

cell contents

justifying text

right angle axes in 3-D charts

right borders

adding, removing

Right Border button

RIGHT function

Right Parenthesis button

right, filling data to

right-handed users

ROMAN function

Rotate Text Down button

Rotate Text Up button

rotating 3-D charts

3-D View command

described

rotating text

Rotate Text Down button

Rotate Text Up button

ROUND function

ROUNDDOWN function

rounding

CEILING function

EVEN function

FIXED function

MROUND function

ODD function

ROUND function

TRUNC function

rounding down

FLOOR function

INT function

ROUNDDOWN function

rounding monetary amounts

rounding up

ROUNDUP function

routing slips

adding commands

creating and editing

editing recipient lists

routing workbooks

described

opening

overview

Send command (File menu)

to next recipient, described

to next recipient, overview

toolbar

row and column headings, printing

described

Sheet Tab, Page Setup command

Row command (Format menu)

row differences

row fields

adding

displaying subtotals

removing subtotals

ROW function

row headings

creating

printing

Sheet Tab, Page Setup command

row headings, freezing and unfreezing

described

Freeze Panes command (Window menu)

Unfreeze Panes command (Window menu)

row height

changing

Row command

wrapping text

row input cell

row numbers

cell reference styles

including in result sets

ROW function

row titles, freezing and unfreezing

described

Freeze Panes command (Window menu)

Unfreeze Panes command (Window menu)

row titles, using as names

rows

Row command

Rows command

Rows command (Insert menu)

ROWS function

rows, adding

to pivot tables

rows, clearing

rows, cutting from slide shows

rows, deleting

Delete command

Delete Row command

described

from pivot tables

from slide shows

rows, grouping or ungrouping

rows, hiding and unhiding

described

Row command

Row Heading

rows, hiding detail

rows, inserting

described

rows, number of

rows, pasting

Transposing rows and columns as you paste

cut or copied rows

in slide shows

Paste Special command

rows, plotting data series from

rows, resizing

rows, selecting

described

Row Heading

rows, showing detail

RSQ function

Run command

Run Command command, Multiplan

Run Dialog command (Tools menu)

Run Report File command, Multiplan

Run Report Print command, Multiplan

running macros

described

Macro command (Tools menu)

tips on

running macros, Lotus 1-2-3

in Microsoft Excel

Lotus 1-2-3 Menu dialog box

Lotus 1-2-3 Prompt dialog box

switching from

running slide shows

described

on different computers

- S -

Sales and Service, Microsoft

services for the deaf or hard-of-hearing

services for the disabled

technical support

samples

generating

variances

samples, mean of

Anova: single-factor

Anova: two-factor with replication

Anova: two-factor without replication

t-Test: paired two-sample for means

t-Test: two-sample assuming equal variances

t-Test: two-sample assuming unequal variances

sampling

STDEV function

TDIST function

TINV function

VAR function

Sampling tool

Save As command (File menu)

Save command (File menu)

Save Copy As command (File Menu for OLE Objects)

SAVE DIALOG

saved files, last date

saved searches

modifying

Search dialog box

saving automatically

AutoSave command

described

saving charts to disk

saving documents for other applications

saving files in different formats

saving files, tips on

saving formats as styles

saving scenarios

saving search criteria

saving slide shows

saving toolbars

saving views

saving without calculating

saving workbooks

AutoSave

described

overview

renaming

Save As command

Save command

Save Copy As command

unnamed, linked

using a different name

saving workspace files

described

Save Workspace command

saving, Solver settings

Load Model and Save Model dialog boxes

problem models

problems

Save Scenario dialog box

Solver Options dialog box

scale

value axis

scale indicators

scale numbers

scaling

automatic

Lotus 1-2-3 X Scale and Y Scale commands

sheets

tick labels

scatter charts

formatting

XY (Scatter) Chart AutoFormat button

Scenario Manager

scenarios

Scenarios command

specifications

Scenarios box

creating scenarios

described

displaying scenarios

editing scenarios

Scenarios command (Tools menu)

scenarios, creating

described

scenarios, deleting

scenarios, displaying

described

scenarios, editing

scenarios, merging

scenarios, printing

scenarios, protecting

scenarios, saving

scenarios, Solver

problem solving

saving Solver values as

Solver Results dialog box

Schedule+ button

screen elements

enlarging

Help on

screen readers

screen, parts of

screen-enlargement utilities

screens

clearing

displaying full screen

Full Screen toolbar

maximizing

returning to normal

screens, splitting into panes

described

split box

Split command (Window menu)

Scroll Bar button

scroll bars

creating

described

hiding, unhiding

horizontal, adjusting size

Scroll Bar button

scroll box

SCROLL LOCK

key combinations

status bar display

scrolling

keys for

one column, one row, one window

scroll bars

tab scrolling buttons

using scroll bars

with headings remaining visible

workbook window

scrolling, sheet tabs

Sheet Tab

Tab Scrolling buttons

Search button

search criteria

data forms

Save Search As dialog box

saving

Search dialog box

Search for Help On command

SEARCH function

search options, Solver

searches, advanced

criteria

Search dialog box

searches, deleted

searches, saved

modifying

Search dialog box

searching

and replacing, overview

FIND function

HLOOKUP function

SEARCH function

using special characters

VLOOKUP function

searching for files

Advanced Search dialog box

Create Directory dialog box

File Info View

Find File command

Location Tab, Find File command

Options dialog box

Preview View

Search dialog box

Summary Infor command

Summary Tab, Find File command

Summary View

Timestamp Tab, Find File command

searching for workbooks

described

overview

saving criteria

searching Help

SECOND function

secondary axes

data series

plotting data along

seconds

security for workbooks, worksheets

controlling changes

hiding or unhiding

preventing opening or saving

seeking goal values

charts

described

Goal Seek command

Select All button

Select All Sheets command

Select Current Region button

Select Visible Cells button

Selected Object command (Format menu)

Alignment tab

Font tab

Patterns tab

Properties tab

Protection tab

Selected Object command

selected ranges, printing

described

selecting

array ranges

columns

commands

data form fields, records

data regions

dialog box parts

embedded charts

entire worksheet

keyboard shortcuts

list items

named ranges

outline sections

page field items

ranges

sheet tabs

tips on

selecting cells

current regions

described

entire rows or columns

entire worksheet

extending the selection

Go To command

keyboard shortcuts

named ranges

nonadjacent

sizing selection

skipping hidden cells

visible cells in outlines

visible cells only

selecting chart items

chart items

overview

with keyboard

with mouse

selecting graphic objects

all in a worksheet

described

Drawing Selection button

multiple

Selection button

selecting nonadjacent cells

described

Go To command

selecting options

dialog box

selecting print size

selecting printers

selecting rows

entire rows or columns

Row Heading

selecting skipping hidden cells

Select Visible Cells button

selecting visible cells only

selecting worksheets

all sheets

canceling

canceling selection

described

one or more

Select All button

Select All Sheets command

Selection button

selections

changing size of

Go To command

moving within

selections, copying

Copy command

copying cells

Cut or Copied Cells command

Paste command

with shortcut menu

selections, moving

Cut command

moving cells

with shortcut menu

within a cell

selections, moving within

Send command (File menu)

sending data to other applications

by copying as pictures

by copying, pasting

by dragging and dropping

embedding Microsoft Excel objects

object linking and embedding

specifications

tips on

Update command

using Clipboard

sending workbooks

Sensitivity report

creating

described

separate columns

creating charts from

separate rows

creating charts from

separator characters

changing

Multiplan equivalent commands

serial numbers

date and time functions

software

series

creating

filling

types of

series axis

3-D charts

scale, changing

series order, changing in chart type groups

series, data, chart, adding

described

embedded charts

worksheet ranges

series, data, chart, deleting

deleting

described

series, data, chart, editing

changing values

described

embedded charts

from rows or columns

labels

legend entries

plot order

reversing plot order

tick-mark labels

series, data, chart, multilevel

creating

overview

SERIESSUM function

sets

correlation

covariance

descriptive statistics

ordinal ranking

percentile ranking

ranking values

sampling

setting decimal places

described

formatting numbers

setting formats

Page Setup command

Page Tab, Page Setup command

setting height and perspective in 3-D charts

setting page orientation

setting page size

setting print information

Lotus 1-2-3

overview

print area

print order

setting range of the macro recorder

setting up criteria ranges

setting up pages

Page Setup command

Page Tab, Page Setup command

settings

earlier versions, keeping .INI file

EXCEL.5.INI, overview

EXCEL5.INI and 123.CNF

global, Lotus 1-2-3

Lotus 1-2-3

working directory

worksheet, Lotus 1-2-3

settings, chart, changing

settings, Excel, changing

settings, modifying

error bars

trendlines

settings, Solver

Add Constraint and Change Constrain dialog boxes

adjusting

constraints

defining a problem

initial

options

problem models, saving and loading

Save Scenario dialog box

saving

Solver command

Solver Options dialog box

setup, page

charts

headers, footers

setup, Query

several cells

entering data in

shading

See also patterns

applying with Dark Shading button

applying with Light Shading button

Shape button

shapes, drawing

multiple arrows, lines, shapes

rectangles, ellipses, arcs

Shape button

sharing data

data exchange specifications

opening foreign documents

tips on

using Clipboard

sharing data and graphics

sharing data by copying as pictures

described

overview

sharing data by copying, pasting

from another application

from Microsoft Excel

sharing data by dragging and dropping

described

overview

sharing data with embedding

embedding existing objects in Microsoft Excel

embedding Microsoft Excel objects in other applications

embedding new objects in Microsoft Excel

object linking and embedding

Update command

sharing data with linking

linking dependent worksheets to sources

linking source worksheets to dependents

object linking and embedding

sharing workbooks

new features

Sheet command (Format menu)

sheet tabs

adding new sheets

copying sheets

defined

displaying more or fewer

hiding, unhiding

scrolling

selecting

sheets

creating autotemplates

dimensions

dragging

going to specific place in

managing, overview

moving between

naming

number allowed in workbook

removing

scaling

types

sheets, adding

adding

sheets, chart

print size

sizing

sizing with window

sheets, copying

copying

sheets, deleting

deleting

sheets, hiding and unhiding

described

formulas

Sheet command

sheets, inserting

based on autotemplate

based on template

described

inserting

sheets, locking and unlocking

cell ranges

graphic objects

sheets, moving

tips on

to other workbooks

within a workbook

sheets, printing

described

print areas for

Print Preview command

viewing before printing

sheets, protecting

controlling changes

described

hiding, unhiding

Protect Sheet and Unprotect Sheet commands

sheets, renaming

described

Sheet command

sheets, sizing

sheets, template

SHIFT key combinations

for data forms

for dialog boxes

for entering data

for formatting data

for Insert menu

for inserting, deleting, copying, moving

for Lotus 1-2-3 transition

for menu bars and menus

for moving within selection

for outlining

for selecting in worksheets, workbooks

for selecting special cells

for switching windows

for working in cells

for working in formula bar

with function keys

shortcut keys

dialog boxes

for AutoFilter

for data forms

for Data menu

for dialog boxes

for Edit menu

for entering data

for File menu

for Format menu

for formatting data

for Help menu

for Insert menu

for inserting, deleting, copying, moving

for Lotus 1-2-3 transition

for moving within selection

for outlining

for page fields

for PivotTable Wizard

for printing

for scrolling

for selecting in worksheets, workbooks

for selecting special cells

for switching windows

for Tools menu

for View menu

for Window menu

for working in cells

for working in formula bar

for working in menus

moving in selection

moving in worksheet

selecting in worksheet

with function keys

shortcut menu commands

choosing

keyboard shortcuts

shortcut menus

columns

displaying with pen

keyboard shortcuts

rows

tips on

using

shortcuts

analyzing data and solving problems

buttons for

customizing Microsoft Excel

described

editing data

entering data

formatting data

getting information while you work

Help

importing, exporting and sharing data

moving and sizing

printing

protecting, auditing and annotating

selecting and choosing

sorting, filtering, linking and outlining

TipWizard box

toolbar for

working with charts

working with files and documents

working with formulas

working with graphic objects

working with macros

working with pivot tables

Show All command (Data menu, Filter submenu)

Show Auditing Toolbar command

Show Document command (Window menu)

Show Info Window button

Show Pages command (shortcut menu)

Show Trial Solution

showing

axes

chart axes

formula bar

graphic objects

status bar

using Options command

zero values

combined data

page field items

showing columns

Column command

described

showing detail data

described

in outlines

in pivot tables

showing outline symbols

displaying or hiding

Show Outline Symbols button

showing rows

hidden

Row command

showing scenarios

described

Scenarios command

showing toolbars

described

Toolbars command

shrinking print area

shrinking windows

described

Minimize command

minimizing Microsoft Excel to icon

shrinking worksheet views

Zoom command (View menu)

Zoom Control box

Zoom Out button

zooming

sight impairment

SIGN function

sign of a number

SIN function

sine

ASINH function

IMSIN function

SIN function

SINH function

Single Step dialog box

single steps

single-factor anova

single-finger typing

Access pack for Microsoft Windows

keyboard layouts

single-handed users, keyboard layouts

single-series charts

formatting data markers

SINH function

size

chart sheets

embedded charts

fonts, decreasing

fonts, increasing

Font Size Box

fonts, substituting SmallFonts

horizontal scroll bar

of windows, changing

selections

Size command (Control menu)

Size command (Control menu)

size options

Zoom command (View menu)

Zoom Control box

Zoom In button

Zoom Out button

zooming

Sized With Window command (View menu)

sizing chart items

described

overview

sizing chart legends

sizing chart sheets

choosing sizes

with window

sizing column width

described

sizing embedded charts

sizing graphic objects

sizing legends

sizing row height

described

sizing text

sizing toolbars

sizing windows

sizing worksheet ranges

SKEW function

skewness of distributions

skewness, analyzing data for

skipping blank cells

Paste Special command

when copying

skipping hidden cells

Select Visible Cells button

selecting visible cells only

slide advancement

slide display options

SLIDE SHOW ADD-IN file

slide show templates

described

new slide show

running a slide show

slide shows

activating existing

add-ins

alert messages

creating

defaults

different computers

editing

interrupting

linking

overview

producing

running

running on different computers

running, stopping and saving

saving

Slide Show add-in

starting

slide sound

slide transition effect

slides

copying

deleting

editing

editing in templates

moving

pasting

preparing

slides, creating

from cell ranges

from embedded charts

from graphic objects

from ranges of cells

SLIDES.XLA file

SLN function

SLOPE function

SMALL function

smallest number

SmallFonts

smoothing data

software serial number

solid colors

shading cells with

solution time

adjusting Solver settings

Solver completion messages

Solver Options dialog box

solutions, trial

adjusting Solver settings

Show Trial Solution dialog box

Solver completion messages

Solver Options dialog box

Solver

add-in described

an overview

defining problems

interrupting

linear and nonlinear problem types

saving problem models

saving values as scenario

Solver command

Solver Options dialog box

solving problems

starting

Solver constraints

Add Constraint and Change Constraint dialog boxes

adding, changing, deleting

Solver command

Solver messages

alert messages

completion messages

Solver models

Load Model and Save Model dialog boxes

saving and loading

Solver Options dialog box

Solver options

setting

Solver Options dialog box

Solver reports

creating

Solver Results dialog box

Solver results

Adjusting the Solver settings

Creating a report using Solver

Show Trial Solution Dialog Box

Solver Completion Messages

Solver Options Dialog Box

Solver Results Dialog Box

Solving a problem using Solver

Solver settings

adjusting

Load Model and Save Model dialog boxes

saving

Solver values, saving as scenario

SOLVER.DLL

solving problems

Goal Seek

new features

using Solver

Sort Ascending button

Sort command (Data menu)

filtered lists

pivot tables

worksheets

Sort Descending button

sort order

default

left to right

overview

top to bottom

sort order, custom

creating

in pivot tables

using

sorting

AutoFill command

buttons for

data in lists

Fill command

options

pivot table items

tips on

top to bottom

custom, in pivot tables

sorting columns

sorting files

File Info View

Find File command

Preview View

Summary View

sorting graphic objects

sorting lists

ascending order

descending order

described

left to right

lists of files

overview

top to bottom

undoing left to right

undoing top to bottom

sorting pivot table items

by labels

by values in the data area

overview

sound notes

copying to another cell

imported, adding

indicators, displaying or hiding

playing

recording

sound notes, attaching

Attach Note button

Note command

sound notes, deleting

Clear command

described

erasing

sound, slide show

sound, visual cues for

source areas, adding, adjusting

source data

changing links to

consolidating

creating links to

deleting links to

displaying

viewing

source documents

described

dragging and dropping

linking documents from other applications

linking Microsoft Excel documents

list of, viewing

listing

moving

opening

renaming

Save Copy As command

viewing

source workbooks

moving, renaming

opening

replacing

updating

spacing buttons

spacing data markers

special characters

selecting

using in searches

special keys, Multiplan

specifications, Microsoft Excel

specifying default working directory

specifying print area

specifying random numbers

specifying startup settings

spelling checking

custom dictionaries, creating

custom dictionaries, specifying

described

in charts

Spelling command

tips on

Spelling command (Tools menu)

Spinner button

spinners, creating

split box

described

Remove Split command (Window menu)

separating panes

Split command (Window menu)

using

split box, tab

Split command (Window menu)

split windows, freezing and unfreezing

described

Freeze Panes command (Window menu)

Unfreeze Panes command (Window menu)

splitting windows

described

Remove Split command (Window menu)

split box

Split command (Window menu)

SQLREQUEST function

SQRT function

SQRTPI function

square root

IMSQRT function

SQRT function

SQRTPI function

squares

See also rectangles

DEVSQ function

SUMSQ function

SUMX2MY2 function

SUMX2PY2 function

SUMXMY2 function

Stacked Column Chart AutoFormat button

stacked column charts

stand-alone workbooks, renaming

standard chart format

changing

default charts

standard deviation

analyzing data for

LOGNORMDIST function

random number distribution

STDEV function

STDEVP function

using in correlation calculation

standard error of mean

standard errors

Exponential Smoothing tool

moving average calculation

STEYX function

standard font, changing

standard normal cumulative distribution

NORMSDIST function

NORMSINV function

Standard toolbar

STANDARDIZE function

standings

LARGE function

RANK function

SMALL function

Start command (Run menu)

starting Help

Help button

starting Microsoft Excel

described

information

installing and starting

opening workbooks automatically

overview

startup switches

with workbook

starting page number

starting Solver

settings

Solve button

Solver command

startup

default workbook, changing

overview

switches

startup directory

additional, specifying

alternate

automatically opening workbook

overview

setting

specifying

startup switches

workspace files

startup folder

overview

startup settings, earlier versions

startup switches

overview

using

startup template

startup workbook

statistical analysis

analysis of variance, single-factor

analysis of variance, two-factor with replication

analysis of variance, two-factor without replication

anova, single-factor

anova, two-factor with replication

anova, two-factor without replication

confidence level

correlation

count

covariance

exponential smoothing

F-tests, two-sample

Fourier analysis

histograms

input ranges

kurtosis

largest number

linear regression analysis

list of statistical worksheet functions

maximum

mean

median

minimum

mode

moving averages

output tables

Pareto charts

percentile ranking

random number generation

range

ranking values

sampling

skewness

smallest number

standard deviation

standard error of mean

sum

t-test: two-sample assuming equal variances

t-test: two-sample assuming unequal variances

t-test:paired two-sample for means

tools

univariate statistics

variance

z-tests

statistical functions list

status bar

changing display

described

displaying

displaying full screen

restoring after Full Screen

Status Bar command (View menu)

displaying or hiding status bar

using

STDEV function

STDEVP function

Step Into command (Run menu)

Step Macro button

Step Over command (Run menu)

stepping into procedures

stepping over procedures

stepping through macros

Step Macro button

STEYX function

Stop Macro button

Stop Recording Toolbar

stopping code execution

End command (Run menu)

Reset command (Run menu)

stopping macro recording

stopping macros

stopping slide shows

stopping Solver

completion messages

described

straight line

LINEST function

TREND function

straight line depreciation

Strikethrough button

strings, text

LEN function

MID function

Student's t-distribution

TDIST function

TINV function

Student's t-Tests

t-Test: paired two-sample for means

t-Test: two-sample assuming equal variances

t-Test: two-sample assuming unequal variances

TTEST function

Style box

activating

applying or defining styles

Style Box button

Style command (Format menu)

styles

See also autoformats

applying

copying

creating

defining

deleting

maximum number

merging

naming

overview

redefining

Style command

tips on

styles, border

applying

Borders button

styles, cell

applying

styles, comma

styles, number

See also number formats

applying using buttons

styles, outline

styles, percent

styles,currency

subject files

Summary Info command

Summary Tab, Find File command

subscripts

SUBSTITUTE function

substituting

REPLACE function

SUBSTITUTE function

SUBTOTAL function

subtotal rows

overview

subtotaled lists

hiding and showing detail data

subtotals

changing summary function for

pivot tables

SUBTOTAL function

Subtotals command (Data menu)

filtered lists

using

subtotals, automatic

displaying

for more than one column

nested, displaying

overview

removing or replacing

subtotals, displaying

pivot tables

subtotals, removing

column fields

row field

subtracting

IMSUB function

Minus Sign button

subtypes, chart

suggestions

SUM function

AutoSum button

grand totals

multiple-sum formulas

single-sum formulas

using

sum of power series

sum of squares

DEVSQ function

SUMSQ function

SUMX2MY2 function

SUMX2PY2 function

SUMXMY2 function

sum-of-years' digits depreciation

SUMIF function

summarizing data in lists

overview

summary functions

changing

changing calculation

changing calculation type

changing for subtotals

changing in pivot tables

consolidating data by category

consolidating data by position

Summary Info command (File menu)

Create Directory dialog box

Summary Info command

summary information

editing

entering and editing

summary information, viewing

described

overview

summary reports

creating

Scenarios command

Summary tab, Find File command (File menu)

Advanced Search dialog box

Summary Tab, Find File command

summary view

SUMPRODUCT function

sums, analyzing data for%xlrefDescriptiveStatistics>Main

SUMSQ function

SUMX2MY2 function

SUMX2PY2 function

SUMXMY2 function

superscripts

support services

technical

tips on

surface charts

Switch To command (Application control menu)

switches, startup

controlling

overview

switching

among sheets

between versions of Microsoft Excel

switching file status

switching to manual calculation

switching to Microsoft Excel

equivalents for Lotus 1-2-3 commands

from Lotus 1-2-3

from Microsoft Works

from Multiplan

from other applications

from Quattro Pro

help using CNF2INI

helpful features

linking with Lotus 1-2-3 worksheets

Lotus 1-2-3 commands

Lotus 1-2-3 macro interpreter

math operator evaluations

moving workbooks to or from Lotus 1-2-3

opening Microsoft Works files

opening Quattro Pro for MS-DOS files

running Quattro Pro for MS-DOS macros

specifying settings for Lotus 1-2-3 files

starting Macro Translation Assistant for Lotus 1-2-3

terms and definitions

Transition Tab, Options command

using Help for Lotus 1-2-3

switching to Microsoft Excel 4.0 menus

switching to Microsoft Excel 5.0 menus

switching to MS-DOS

switching to MS-DOS or Microsoft Excel

switching to other applications

switching to Task List

switching to wait mode

switching to workbook window

switching windows, keys for

SYD function

symbols, number format codes

symbols, outline

hiding, displaying

Show Outline Symbols button

syntax of worksheet functions

synthesized voice output

System command, Lotus 1-2-3

system requirements for mailing

for mailing

for routing

- T -

T function

t-Test: Paired Two-Sample for Means tool

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Equal Variances tool

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Unequal Variances tool

tab dialog boxes

keys for

options

Tab Order button

Tab Order command (Tools menu)

tab order of controls

tab scrolling buttons

tab split box

defined

described

using

table command

described

one-input data table

two-input data table

table of contents

Contents command

Microsoft Excel Help contents

protecting workbooks

routing workbooks

using Microsoft Excel

workbooks

worksheet functions

worksheet functions, new and changed

tables

external, retrieving data from

retrieving data from

Select Current Region button

selecting

toolbar

tables, data, adding to

formulas

input values

tables, data, clearing

entire tables

resulting values

tables, data, converting results

tables, data, creating

tables, data, filling in

one-input tables

two-input tables

tabs

Advanced Search dialog box

Location

Options command (Tools menu)

tabs, sheet

copying sheets

displaying

displaying more or fewer

hiding, unhiding

inserting sheets

scrolling

Sheet tab

tabs, summary

Advanced Search dialog box

Summary Tab, Find File command

tabs, Timestamp

Advanced Search dialog box

Timestamp Tab, Find File command

tallying

TAN function

tangent

TAN function

TANH function

tangent approach

TANH function

target cell

defined

Load Model and Save Model dialog boxes

saving

specifying

values

Task List (Windows Program Manager)

TBILLEQ function

TBILLPRICE function

TBILLYIELD function

TDIST function

Technical Support command (Help menu)

techniques for data entry

using

telephone numbers

product support

sales and service

technical support

TT/TDD (text telephone) services

templates

access

access to

autotemplates

editing

overview

templates, creating

autotemplates

overview

templates, new sheets based on

inserting

overview

templates, new workbooks based on

creating

overview

templates, opening

templates, slide show

new slide shows

running slide shows in

Slide Show template

templates, workbook

creating

new workbooks

saving workbooks as templates

terms defined

testing independence

testing text

EXACT function

T function

testing values

DELTA function

GESTEP function

IS Functions

testing, conditional

testing, hypothesis

FISHER function

FISHERINV function

testing, probability

BINOMDIST function

FTEST function

ZTEST function

text

controlling appearance of

numbers, formatting as

TextWizard

Text Box button

text boxes

creating, deleting

described

editing

editing text in

formatting text in

Text Box button

text in, centering

tips on

text color

changing character color

Cycle Font Color button

Text format, Lotus 1-2-3

text formatting buttons

TEXT function

text functions

list

new and changed

text in columns

TextWizard

text items

joining

selecting

text labels

text notes

attaching

copying to another cell

creating

deleting from a cell

displaying

indicators

Note command

printing

removing

text operators

text strings

LEN function

MID function

text telephone (TT/TDD) services

text testing

EXACT function

T function

text wrapping

text, aligning

changing alignment

left

right

vertical

within cells

text, bold

text, centering across columns

Center Across Columns button

described

text, centering in cells

text, changing

overview

text, converting to columns

described

TextWizard

text, distributing in columns

text, entering

in cells

overview

text, finding

described

Find command

text, fonts

changing

decreasing

increasing

text, importing

text, italic

text, justifying

described

Justify Align button

text, parsing

text, point size

text, replacing

described

Replace command

text, rotating

rotating down

rotating up

text, sort order

text, striking through

text, underlining

Double Underline button

Underline button

TextWizard

described

thickness, window borders

tick mark labels

editing

formatting and arranging

formatting scale numbers

scaling

value axis scale, changing

x-axis

tick marks, formatting

described

overview

tildes

tiling windows, Arrange command

Arrange and Arrange Icons Commands (Window Menu)

time

HOUR function

MINUTE function

NOW function

SECOND function

TIME function

TIMEVALUE function

time formats

assigning

changing, for chart values

codes for

Lotus 1-2-3 equivalents

overview

TIME function

time functions

list

new and changed

time series

times, entering

described

overview

Timestamp tab, Find File command (File menu)

Advanced Search dialog box

Timestamp Tab, Find File command

TIMEVALUE function

TINV function

Tip Help button

tip of the day

tips

buttons for

described

for analyzing data and solving problems

for customizing Microsoft Excel

for editing data

for entering data

for formatting data

for getting information while you work

for importing, exporting, sharing data

for moving, sizing

for printing

for protecting, auditing, annotating

for selecting, choosing

for sorting, filtering, linking, outlining

for working with charts

for working with files, documents

for working with formulas

for working with graphic objects

for working with macros

for working with pivot tables

Help

TipWizard box

TipWizard button

toolbar for

TipWizard

box

button

buttons category

Help overview

overview

toolbar

titles

adding

deleting

editing

linking to cells

printing

Titles command

Titles command (Insert menu)

titles, freezing and unfreezing

described

Freeze Panes command (Window menu)

Unfreeze Panes command (Window menu)

titles, row and column

using as names

titles, worksheet

today

NOW function

TODAY function

TODAY function

Toggle Breakpoint command (Run menu)

Toggle Grid button

tool faces

toolbar boxes  See list boxes

toolbar buttons

See also buttons

choosing

default display

dragging from TipWizard

enlarging

using

toolbar buttons, assigning macros to

changing macro assignment

custom buttons

existing buttons

overview

toolbars

attaching to workbooks

described

displaying, hiding

Drawing toolbar

Formatting toolbar

Forms toolbar

Full Screen toolbar

Microsoft toolbar

moving

Query and Pivot toolbar

resetting

restoring after Full Screen

saving

sizing

spacing buttons

specifications

Standard toolbar

Stop Recording toolbar

tips on

TipWizard toolbar

workbooks, attaching to

Workgroup toolbar

Toolbars command (View menu)

toolbars, auditing

Attach Note button

displaying

Show Auditing Toolbar command

Show Info Window button

using

toolbars, customizing

accessibility considerations

creating, deleting

Tools menu

assigning macros to

command keys

Top Border button

top to bottom sort, lists

described

topics

finding

previously viewed

totals

AutoSum button

DSUM function

pivot tables

SUM function

Trace Dependents button

Trace Dependents command

Trace Error button

Trace Error command

Trace Precedents button

Trace Precedents command

Trace R&D Center

Trace Resource Book

tracer arrows

Remove All Arrows button

Remove Dependent Arrows button

Remove Precedent Arrows button

removing

tracers

overview

Trace Error command

Trace Precedents command

using

tracing dependents

Trace Dependents button

Trace Dependents command

tracing dependent formulas

tracing errors

tracing precedents

described

Trace Precedents button

tracing, buttons for

Transfer Clear Window command, Multiplan

transition effect, slides

transition options

Transition tab, Options command (Tools menu)

translating from Lotus 1-2-3

commands

guidelines

macro interpreter

mathematical operator evaluation

translating from Multiplan

translating Microsoft Works files

translating Quattro Pro for MS-DOS files

translating Quattro Pro for MS-DOS macros

TRANSPOSE function

transposing

Paste Special command

rows, columns

Treasury bills

TBILLEQ function

TBILLPRICE function

TBILLYIELD function

TREND function

trend series

FORECAST function

GROWTH function

Trendline command (Insert menu)

trendlines

adding

deleting

formatting

modifying

overview

Trendline command

trends

growth

linear

simple, creating

trial solutions, Solver

trigonometric functions

list

new and changed

TRIM function

TRIMMEAN function

TRUE function

TrueType fonts

TRUNC function

truncating

TT/TDD (text telephone) services

TTEST function

turning calculation on, off

before saving

replacing formulas with values

switching between manual, automatic

two-factor anova with replication

two-factor anova without replication

two-input data tables

adding to

creating

filling in

two-sample F-tests

two-sample student's t-tests

t-Test: paired two-sample for means

t-Test: two-sample assuming equal variances

t-Test: two-sample assuming unequal variances

two-sample t-tests

equal variances

paired samples

unequal variances

two-sample z-tests

TYPE function

types of cell references

changing

types of problems

types of series

typing errors

checking spelling

Spelling command

typing with wand

typing, one finger

- U -

unassigned buttons

uncovering, charts

Underline button

underlining

cell contents

Double Underline button

Underline button

Undo command

options

Undo and Redo commands

undoing a command

Undo Sort command

undoing

autoformats

commands

entries

keys for

options

Undo and Redo commands

undoing sorts

See also sorting lists

unequal-variances t-tests

unfreezing

described

Unfreeze Panes command (Window menu)

Ungroup Sheets command

sheet tab

Ungroup Sheets command

ungrouping

date items

graphic objects

items

keys for

numeric items

rows or columns

Unhide command (File menu)

Unhide command (Window menu)

unhiding, axes

unhiding, columns

Column command

described

unhiding, detail data

unhiding, formula bar

unhiding, graphic objects

unhiding, items

unhiding, outline symbols

described

Show Outline Symbols button

unhiding, overview

unhiding, rows

described

Row command

unhiding, screens

unhiding, sheets

described

Sheet command

unhiding, status bar

unhiding, toolbars

described

Toolbars command

unhiding, windows

Unhide command (File menu)

Unhide command (Window menu)

unhiding, workbooks

unhiding, zero values

unique sets of random numbers

univariate statistics

unlinking

unlocking

cell ranges

graphic objects

Unprotect Sheet command (Tools menu)

Unprotect Workbook command (Tools menu)

unprotecting

Protection command

sheets

Unprotect Sheet command

Unprotect Workbook command

workbooks

Up command (Edit menu)

Update command (File Menu for OLE Objects)

Update command (File menu)

updating, charts

adding data to chart sheet

adding data to embedded chart

changing values

deleting data

legends

plot order, changing

plot order, reversing

plotted range, changing

plotting

preventing

updating, data

updating, embedded objects

in another application

in Microsoft Excel document

updating, links

automatically

data from source workbook

disabling

from list of source documents

in another application

in Microsoft Excel document

manually

remote references

updating, pictures

updating, query results

updating, read-only files

updating, remote references

upgraded worksheet functions

UPPER function

uppercase

PROPER function

UPPER function

Use Relative References command (Tools menu)

user name

user-defined functions

creating

entering in worksheets

overview

user-interface controls

users of Lotus 1-2-3, Help for

users with disabilities

accessibility

information on products and services

utility buttons

- V -

value axis scale

changing

Value command (Info menu)

VALUE function

value tick-marks

value types

values

axis scale, changing

chart data point

clearing

combining during paste

comparing using AND

comparing using DELTA

constant

converting

copying

displaying instead of formulas

Fill Series command

filling

Find command

finding

freezing in ranges

hiding

incrementing

naming

optimizing with Solver

Paste Special command

Paste Values button

Replace command

replacing formulas with

replacing text or numbers

reversing plot order

Solver, saving as scenarios

sorting highest to lowest

sorting lowest to highest

totalling

values, error

overview

Trace Error command

tracing

values, input

adding

Goal Seek command

one-input data table

seeking solution to formula

Table command

two-input data table

VAR function

variability

in data sets

of data

variable declining balance

variables

adjusting

Goal Seek command

random

resetting

variances

analyzing data for

comparing

equal, t-test

FTEST function

known, z-test

single-factor analysis

statistical functions

TTEST function

two-factor analysis

unequal, t-test

VAR function

VARP function

variations of charts

VARP function

VDB function

version 4.0

files

menus

switching

version 5.0

chart command changes

menus

switching

worksheet command changes

vertical and horizontal alignment

vertical gridlines

adding

Gridlines command

Vertical Gridlines button

vertical panes

Split and Remove Split commands

Split box

splitting screen into

vertical scroll bar

Vertical Text button

vertical titles

Freeze Panes command (Window menu)

freezing and unfreezing

Unfreeze Panes command (Window menu)

View Manager

command (View menu)

described

View menu

view options

cell note indicators

changing the display

Info window

View Tab, Options command

viewing

debug information

details in outlines

documents

formula bar

full screens

graphic objects

outline symbols

preview view

scenarios

source data, links

source documents, list of

status bar

summary information

summary view

toolbars

zero values

views

3-D chart

defined

views, creating

views, deleting

views, displaying

views, maximizing

views, maximum number

views, preview view

views, Print Report command

views, printing

views, saving

views, sizing

views, summary view

views, zooming

Zoom command (View menu)

Zoom Control box

Zoom In button

Zoom Out button

zooming in or out

visible cells

charting

copying

Paste Special command

Select Visible Cells button

selecting

selecting in outlines

VisiCalc

Visual Basic modules

creating

defined

recording code into

Visual Basic specifications

Visual Basic toolbar

described

Resume Macro button

Stop Macro button

visual cues for sound

VLOOKUP function

voice output screen readers

Volume/High-Low-Close Chart AutoFormat button

volumes, finding files

- W -

wait mode

wand, typing with

watch expressions

adding

adding to a list

deleting

editing

using

Weber function

WEEKDAY function

weekdays

WEEKNUM function

weeks

WEIBULL function

weighted averages

what-if problems

what-if scenarios

width

3-D charts

embedded charts

list boxes

window border

width, column

changing

Column command

headings

width, toolbar

changing

wildcards

Find command

Replace command

Window menu

window panes, defined

window panes, freezing and unfreezing

described

Freeze Panes command (Window menu)

Unfreeze Panes command (Window menu)

window panes, splitting

described

Remove Split command (Window menu)

split box

Split command (Window menu)

Windows and Macintosh

moving files between

overview of moving files

Windows date system

Windows for Pen Computing

windows, arranging

Arrange and Arrange Icons command

described

windows, borders

windows, clearing

windows, closing

Close command

described

windows, colors

windows, displaying

windows, dividing into panes

windows, enlarging

Maximize button

Maximize command

windows, hiding

windows, keys for working with

windows, maximizing

Maximize button

Maximize command

Windows, Microsoft, customizing

windows, minimizing

described

Minimize button

Minimize command

windows, moving

windows, new

Displaying and closing new windows of a workbook

New Window Command (Window Menu)

windows, open

1,2,3,...9 command

More Windows command

windows, protecting

windows, resizing

windows, restoring

described

Maximize button

Minimize button

Restore button

Restore command

windows, scrolling

windows, shrinking

Minimize button

Minimize command

windows, sizing

border

chart sheets

Size command

windows, splitting

described

Remove Split command (Window menu)

Split box

Split command (Window menu)

windows, switching

windows, tips on

windows, unhiding

Hide and Unhide commands

Sheet command

Unhide command

windows, workbook

See also workbook windows

WK3 format

Word button

words defined

workbook icon

minimizing and restoring windows

workbook sheets

canceling selection

Select All Sheets command

selecting all

selecting one

workbook tabs

adding new sheets

defined

displaying more or fewer

scrolling

selecting

WORKBOOK template

workbook windows

arranging

displaying and closing

going to next

managing, overview

maximizing

minimizing

moving

new

scrolling in

sizing

WORKBOOK.XLT

WORKBOOK1

workbooks, auto open

workbooks, automatic starting

workbooks, autotemplate

workbooks, clearing breakpoints

workbooks, closing

all workbooks

Close and Close All commands

one workbook

workbooks, color schemes

workbooks, converting to add-in form

workbooks, copying sheets

Move Or Copy Sheet command

to other workbooks

workbooks, creating

chart sheet in

new

new based on template

New command

workbooks, default

workbooks, deleting sheets

workbooks, dragging sheets

workbooks, editing result sets

workbooks, finding

described

managing with Find File command

modifying saved searches

multiple files

overview

saving search criteria

sorting list of found files

special characters in search

summary information

workbooks, hiding and unhiding

described

formulas

Hide and Unhide commands

list of recently opened workbooks

workbooks, in mail

opening routed workbook

workbooks, inserting sheets

workbooks, linking

creating links

overview

redirecting links

removing links

workbooks, list of recently opened

workbooks, locking and unlocking

cell ranges

graphic objects

workbooks, Lotus 1-2-3

mathematical operator evaluation

moving

workbooks, mailing

described

overview

Send command

workbooks, managing

multiple files

overview

windows

with Find File command

workbooks, minimizing

workbooks, moving

around in window

between sheets

data between

Move Or Copy Sheet command

sheets

workbooks, opening

at startup

described

Open command

recently opened

routed workbook

several at one time

source workbook

workbooks, overview

workbooks, passwords

removing

requiring to open

requiring when saved

workbooks, previewing

workbooks, printing

described

Print button

workbooks, protecting

controlling changes

hiding and unhiding

preventing opening or saving

Protect Workbook command

protecting sheets

protecting windows or structure

Protection command

workbooks, read-only

workbooks, referencing

another sheet

range of sheets

workbooks, renaming

workbooks, reviewing and sharing

workbooks, routing

described

Send command

to next recipient

workbooks, saving

as template

AutoSave add-in

AutoSave command

described

Save As command

Save command

Save Copy As command

Save Workspace command

using different name

workspace file

workbooks, scrolling in

workbooks, searching for

described

managing with Find File command

modifying saved searches

multiple files

saving search criteria

sorting list of found files

special characters in search

summary information

workbooks, sending

described

overview

routing

Send command

workbooks, specifications

workbooks, styles

workbooks, tabs

workbooks, templates

workbooks, tips

workbooks, toolbars

Attach Toolbars command

attaching

workbooks, unhiding

WORKDAY function

Workgroup toolbar

working days

NETWORKDAYS function

WORKDAY function

working directory

working faster

worksheet cells

entering text in

Worksheet command (Insert menu)

worksheet commands

Worksheet Erase command, Lotus 1-2-3

worksheet functions

alphabetical list

categorized list

editing with Function Wizard

Function command

Function Wizard and Help

inserting into formula

new and changed

overview

worksheet global default directory

Worksheet Global Default Printer commands (Lotus 1-2-3)

worksheet references

to one sheet

to range of sheets

worksheet scale, changing

Zoom command (View menu)

Zoom In button

Zoom Out button

worksheet settings

worksheet views

creating

deleting

displaying

printing

sizing

View Manager command

zooming in or out

worksheets, active

worksheets, adding

worksheets, calculating

active only

all

worksheets, centering headers

worksheets, controls

worksheets, copying

Move Or Copy Sheet command

to other workbooks

within a workbook

worksheets, custom lists

worksheets, deleting

Delete Sheet command

deleting names

deleting sheets

worksheets, dependent

freezing remote references

linking to sources

opening source documents

redirecting links

updating frozen links

worksheets, displaying with Info window

worksheets, dividing

worksheets, editing

formatting

worksheets, embedded charts

worksheets, erasing

worksheets, formatting

worksheets, going to specific place in

described

worksheets, inserting

based on autotemplate

described

worksheets, linking

worksheets, moving

between sheets

moving around on

to other workbook

within workbook

worksheets, names on

worksheets, outlining

automatically

manually

worksheets, outlining data

worksheets, printing

cell notes

specified area

worksheets, protecting

worksheets, removing query definitions

worksheets, renaming

described

worksheets, saving

worksheets, selecting

all sheets

canceling

one sheet

row or column

Select All button

Select All Sheets command

worksheets, selecting cells

worksheets, source

worksheets, specifications

worksheets, splitting

worksheets, templates

worksheets, tips on

worksheets, user-defined functions

worksheets, Worksheet command

workspace files

creating

opening

Save Workspace command

saving

workspace specifications

worldwide technical support

wrapping text

cell contents

justifying

write-protection

write-reservation protection

writing macros

data retrieval

described

- X -

X axis

changing chart text

editing title

tick labels

X Scale command (Lotus 1-2-3)

XIRR function

XNPV function

XY (Scatter) Chart AutoFormat button

XY (scatter) charts

formatting data markers

graph format options

XY (Scatter) Chart AutoFormat button

- Y -

Y axis

changing chart text

editing title

Y Scale command (Lotus 1-2-3)

Y-intercept

adding trendline

modifying trendline

Trendline command

YEAR function

YEARFRAC function

years

YIELD function

YIELDDISC function

YIELDMAT function

yields

ODDFYIELD function

ODDLYIELD function

TBILLEQ function

TBILLYIELD function

YIELDDISC function

YIELDMAT function

- Z -

z-tests

zero values

changing the display

hiding data in cells

zero, division by

Zoom command (View menu)

Zoom In button

Zoom Out button

zooming

accessibility

described

Zoom command

Zoom Control box

Zoom In button

Zoom Out button

ZTEST function


Choosing dialog box options

Repeat Command (Edit Menu)

Undo and Redo Commands (Edit Menu)

Undoing or repeating a command


Choosing dialog box options

Undo and Redo Commands (Edit Menu)

Undoing or repeating a command


Editing a Microsoft Excel object embedded in another application

Editing an object embedded in a Microsoft Excel document


Adding borders

Bottom Border Button

Bottom Double Border Button

Left Border Button

Outline Border Button

Right Border Button

Top Border Button


Cells Command (Insert Menu)

Inserting blank cells


Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

Adding data series or data points to an embedded chart

Changing the worksheet range plotted in a chart

New Data Command (Insert Menu)


Columns Command (Insert Menu)

Inserting rows and columns


Add Constraint and Change Constraint Dialog Boxes

Adding, changing, or deleting constraints in Solver


Adding Data Labels

Creating data labels

Data Labels Command (Insert Menu)


Embedding a Microsoft Excel object in another application

Embedding existing information in a Microsoft Excel document

Embedding new information in a Microsoft Excel document


Adding error bars to a data series

Error Bars Command (Insert Menu)

Overview of Adding Error Bars to a Data Series


Adding a formula to an existing data table

Entering formulas


Function Command (Insert Menu)

Inserting a worksheet function into a formula with Function Wizard


Adding gridlines

Applying Lotus 1-2-3 Graph Options Grid Commands

Gridlines Command (Insert Menu)


Adding a legend

Legend Command (Insert Menu)


Linking a document from another application to a Microsoft Excel worksheet

Linking a Microsoft Excel document to a document from another application


Inserting sheets

Macro Command (Insert Menu)

Recording a Macro

Writing a macro


Inserting sheets

Writing a macro


Copying a linked picture of cells

Copying a picture of a chart, cells, or an object

Copying a picture to another application

Picture Command (Insert Menu)


Add Column Field Command (Shortcut Menu)

Add Data Field Command (Shortcut Menu)

Add Page Field Command (Shortcut Menu)

Add Row Field Command (Shortcut Menu)

Adding a field to a pivot table

Overview of Adding and Removing Pivot Table Data


Add Routing Slip and Edit Routing Slip Commands (File Menu)

Creating and editing a routing slip


Inserting rows and columns

Rows Command (Insert Menu)


Creating a scenario

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)


Dark Shading Button

Light Shading Button


Inserting sheets

Sheet Tab


Adding an imported sound note

Attach Note Button

Recording a sound note


Creating and deleting text boxes

Text Box Button


Attach Note Button

Creating text notes


Creating and deleting a custom toolbar

Using Toolbar Buttons


Adding a trendline to a data series

Overview of Adding a Trendline to a Data Series

Trendline Command (Insert Menu)


t-Test: Paired Two-Sample for Means

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Equal Variances

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Unequal Variances


#NUM!

#VALUE!


Arrange and Arrange Icons Commands (Window Menu)


Keys for Selecting Chart Items

Selecting items in a chart with the keyboard


Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Formatting Axes, Tick Marks, and Gridlines


Applying Lotus 1-2-3 X Scale and Y Scale Commands

Changing the category or series axis scale

Changing the value axis scale


Adding a chart title and axis titles

Deleting data labels, titles, legends, or gridlines

Editing titles and text boxes

Linking chart text to a worksheet cell

Titles Command (Insert Menu)


Cells Command (Insert Menu)

Inserting blank cells


Copying only visible or nonblank cells

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets)


Applying colors, patterns, and borders to chart items

Formatting data markers

Overview of Changing Colors, Patterns, Borders, Text, and Numbers


Changing the image on a toolbar button

Copy Button Image Command (Edit Menu)


Changing the image on a toolbar button

Reset Button Image Command (Shortcut Menu)


Assigning a macro to a button on a sheet

Assigning a macro to a custom button on a toolbar

Assigning a macro to an existing button on a toolbar

Changing the macro assigned to a button or graphic object

Overview of Assigning a Macro to the Tools Menu, a Button, or a Graphic Object

TipWizard Box


Create Button Button

Option Button Button


Freezing the values in a range of cells

Replacing an entire formula with its calculated value


Choosing a menu bar command

Choosing dialog box options

Undo and Redo Commands (Edit Menu)

Undoing or repeating a command


Creating a chart with multilevel categories and series

Overview of Charting Multilevel Categories and Series


Justify Align Button

Justifying text in cells


Name Command (Insert Menu)

Replacing cell references with a defined name


Copying only visible or nonblank cells

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets)


Copying only visible or nonblank cells

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets)


Cut or Copied Cells Command (Insert Menu)

Inserting cut or copied cells


Cut or Copied Cells Command (Insert Menu)

Inserting cut or copied cells


Copying a chart, cells, or a graphic object as a picture

Overview of Copying Cells, Objects, or Charts as Pictures


Dark Shading Button

Light Shading Button

Pattern Button

Shading cells with patterns and colors


Changing the calculation type for a pivot table data field

Overview of Changing How Pivot Table Data Is Calculated


Changing the chart type of an entire chart

Chart Type Command (Format Menu)


Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

Adding data series or data points to an embedded chart

Changing the plot order of data series

Changing the value of a chart data point

Changing the worksheet range plotted in a chart

Changing tick-mark labels

ChartWizard Button

Deleting a data series

Editing titles and text boxes

Plotting data series from rows or columns

Reversing the plot order of categories, values, or series


Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Color Button

Cycle Font Color Button


Adjusting column width

Column Command (Format Menu)


Add Constraint and Change Constraint Dialog Boxes

Adding, changing, or deleting constraints in Solver


Changing the default chart format

Default Charts


Converting an embedded object to a different format

Editing a Microsoft Excel object embedded in another application

Editing an object embedded in a Microsoft Excel document


Error Bars Command (Insert Menu)

Modifying error bar settings


Editing a macro

Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Recording code into an existing macro

Writing a macro


Changing a name

Changing the name of a pivot table item

Name Command (Insert Menu)

Sheet Command (Format Menu)


Adjusting row height

Row Command (Format Menu)


Modifying trendline settings

Trendline Command (Insert Menu)


Load Model and Save Model Dialog Boxes

Saving and loading a problem model using Solver


Changing the font, size, and color of characters

Cycle Font Color Button


Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Guide to Formatting Chart Items

Overview of Formatting Axes, Tick Marks, and Gridlines


Keys for Selecting Chart Items

Selecting items in a chart with the keyboard


Multiple Chart Types and a Secondary Axis


Activating a chart

Overview of Activating a Chart and Selecting Chart Items


Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

New Data Command (Insert Menu)


Applying an autoformat to a chart

AutoFormat Command (Format Menu for Charts)

Overview of Working with Chart Autoformats


Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Command (Edit Menu)


Copying a chart, cells, or a graphic object as a picture

Overview of Copying Cells, Objects, or Charts as Pictures


About Creating Charts from Nonadjacent Selections

Chart Command (Insert Menu)

ChartWizard

Creating a Chart

Creating a chart from a pivot table

Creating a chart from visible worksheet data

Creating a chart sheet in a workbook

Creating a chart with multilevel categories and series

Creating an embedded chart on a worksheet

New Features for Creating and Formatting Charts


Changing the default chart format

Default Charts


Adding data series or data points to an embedded chart

Changing the value of a chart data point

Changing the worksheet range plotted in a chart

Deleting a data series


Adding error bars to a data series

Deleting error bars

Error Bars Command (Insert Menu)

Formatting error bars

Modifying error bar settings

Overview of Adding Error Bars to a Data Series


Custom Color Palettes for Charts in a Workbook

Formatting a Chart

Overview of Changing Colors, Patterns, Borders, Text, and Numbers


Copying a picture of a chart, cells, or an object

Copying a picture to another application


Changing the plot order of data series

Plotting data series from rows or columns

Reversing the plot order of categories, values, or series


Chart Tab, Page Setup Command (File Menu)

Overview of Preparing a Chart for Printing

Printing a chart

Printing charts with colors


Changing the worksheet range plotted in a chart

Overview of Changing the Way Your Data Is Plotted

Reversing the plot order of categories, values, or series


Add-ins Command (Tools Menu)

Installing or removing an add-in


Clear Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets)

Clearing cells


Deleting text or sound notes from a cell

Erasing a sound note


Remove All Arrows Button

Remove All Arrows Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Remove Dependent Arrows Button

Remove Precedent Arrows Button


Clearing your work and starting a new document

Closing all workbooks


Close and Close All Commands (File Menu)

Close Command (Control Menu)


Close Command (Control Menu)

Displaying and closing new windows of a workbook


Close and Close All Commands (File Menu)

Closing a workbook

Overview of Saving and Closing Workbooks


Adjusting column width

Overview of Changing Column Widths and Row Heights


Delete Command (Edit Menu)

Deleting rows and columns

Removing a row, column, or page field from a pivot table


Adjusting column width

Column Heading


Calculating as you paste

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets)


Adding a macro to the Tools menu

Overview of Assigning a Macro to the Tools Menu, a Button, or a Graphic Object


Choosing a menu bar command

Choosing a shortcut menu command

Choosing a toolbar button

Keys for Working in Menus


Getting help on the command or screen element you choose

Lotus 1-2-3 Command (Help Menu)

Menu Commands


Commands Requiring More Information

Lotus 1-2-3 Command (Help Menu)

Lotus 1-2-3 Commands


Chart Command Changes in Version 5.0

Worksheet Command Changes in Version 5.0


Repeat Command (Edit Menu)

Undo and Redo Commands (Edit Menu)

Undoing or repeating a command


Undo and Redo Commands (Edit Menu)

Undoing or repeating a command


Load Model and Save Model Dialog Boxes

Saving and loading a problem model using Solver


Changing the image on a toolbar button

Copy Button Image Command (Edit Menu)


Dragging data between applications

Overview of Dragging Data Between Applications


Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Copying or moving characters within a cell

Paste Command (Edit Menu)


Copy Cells Command (Shortcut Menu)

Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Copying cells

Cut or Copied Cells Command (Insert Menu)

Inserting cut or copied cells

Overview of Copying and Moving Cells

Paste Command (Edit Menu)

Pasting multiple copies


Copying a linked picture of cells

Copying a picture of a chart, cells, or an object

Copying a picture to another application

Overview of Copying Cells, Objects, or Charts as Pictures


Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Command (Edit Menu)


Copying a picture of a chart, cells, or an object

Copying a picture to another application

Overview of Copying Cells, Objects, or Charts as Pictures


File Info View

Managing files with the Find File command

Preview View

Summary View


Copying filtered data

Copying filtered data that meets complex criteria


Copying formats using the Format Painter button

Copying only the cell format

Format Painter Button

Paste Formats Button


Copying data from another application to Microsoft Excel

Dragging data between applications

Overview of Dragging Data Between Applications


Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Copying a graphic object

Paste Command (Edit Menu)


Copying a picture of a chart, cells, or an object

Copying a picture to another application

Overview of Copying Cells, Objects, or Charts as Pictures


Copy Picture Command (Edit Menu)

Copying a linked picture of cells

Copying a picture of a chart, cells, or an object

Copying a picture to another application


Copying a linked picture of cells

Copying ranges as pictues

Copying a picture to another application

Overview of Copying Cells, Objects, or Charts as Pictures


Copying sheets to other workbooks

Move Or Copy Sheet Command (Edit Menu)

Tips for Moving and Sizing


Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

Adding data series or data points to an embedded chart


Copying a picture to another application

Copying data from Microsoft Excel to another application

Dragging data between applications

Embedding a Microsoft Excel object in another application

Overview of Dragging Data Between Applications


Copying only the cell value

Paste Values button


Copying sheets to other workbooks

Copying sheets within a workbook

Move Or Copy Sheet Command (Edit Menu)

Tips for Moving and Sizing


Bottom Border Button

Bottom Double Border Button

Left Border Button

Outline Border Button

Right Border Button


Chart Command (Insert Menu)

Creating a Chart

Creating a chart from a pivot table

Creating a chart from visible worksheet data

Creating a chart with multilevel categories and series

New Features for Creating and Formatting Charts


Add Constraint and Change Constraint Dialog Boxes

Adding, changing, or deleting constraints in Solver


Embedding a Microsoft Excel object in another application

Embedding existing information in a Microsoft Excel document

Embedding new information in a Microsoft Excel document


Creating links between workbooks

Creating links to source data

Linking a document from another application to a Microsoft Excel worksheet

Linking a Microsoft Excel document to a document from another application


Recording a Macro

Writing a macro


Creating and deleting custom number formats

Creating international currency formats


Creating an outline automatically

Creating an outline manually

Overview of Creating and Removing an Outline


Camera Button

Copying a linked picture of cells

Copying a picture of a chart, cells, or an object

Copying a picture to another application

Overview of Creating Pictures of Charts and Worksheets


Creating a report

Creating a report using Solver

Creating a summary report

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)


Creating a scenario

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)


Creating a slide from a graphic object from another application

Creating a slide from a range of cells

Creating a slide from an embedded chart or graphic on a worksheet

Creating a slide from an embedded chart or graphic on a worksheet


Attach Note Button

Recording a sound note


Creating and deleting a style

Style Box


Creating a summary report

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)


Creating an autotemplate for new sheets

Saving a workbook as a template


Creating and deleting text boxes

Text Box Button


Attach Note Button

Creating text notes


Creating and deleting a custom toolbar

Using Toolbar Buttons


Creating a user-defined function

Overview of Creating a User-Defined Function


Creating a new workbook

New Command (File Menu)

Overview of Creating or Opening Workbooks


Creating or deleting a view of a worksheet

View Manager Command (View Menu)


Dragging data between applications

Overview of Dragging Data Between Applications


Cut Command (Edit Menu)

Cut or Copied Cells Command (Insert Menu)

Inserting cut or copied cells

Moving cells


Dragging data between applications

Overview of Dragging Data Between Applications


Dragging data between applications

Overview of Dragging Data Between Applications


New Features for Retrieving and Analyzing Data from Lists and Tables

New Features for Solving Problems by Analyzing Data


Anova: Single-Factor

Anova: Two-Factor with Replication

Anova: Two-Factor Without Replication


t-Test: Paired Two-Sample for Means

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Equal Variances

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Unequal Variances


Formatting data markers

Formatting data markers in line, radar, and xy (scatter) charts

Overview of Formatting Data Markers


Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

Adding data series or data points to an embedded chart

Changing the worksheet range plotted in a chart

New Data Command (Insert Menu)


Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

Adding data series or data points to an embedded chart


Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

Adding data series or data points to an embedded chart


Linking a document from another application to a Microsoft Excel worksheet

Linking a Microsoft Excel document to a document from another application


Freezing the remote reference portion of a larger formula

Opening and updating data from a list of source documents

Suppressing the updating of all remote references in a worksheet


Controlling whether a DDE or OLE link is updated automatically

Disabling updating of all links to other applications on a worksheet

Opening and updating data from a list of source documents

Suppressing the updating of all remote references in a worksheet

Updating a DDE or OLE link manually


Bottom Border Button

Bottom Double Border Button

Left Border Button

Right Border Button

Top Border Button


Clear Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets)

Clearing cells

Undo and Redo Commands (Edit Menu)


Delete Command (Edit Menu)

Deleting cells

Overview of Inserting, Deleting, and Clearing Cells, Rows, and Columns


Changing the worksheet range plotted in a chart

Deleting a data series


Delete Command (Edit Menu)

Deleting rows and columns


Adding, changing, or deleting constraints in Solver

Solver Command (Tools Menu)


File Info View

Preview View

Search Dialog Box

Summary View


Clear Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets)

Clearing an autoformat

Creating and deleting custom number formats

Deleting a custom autoformat from the Formats list


Applying Lotus 1-2-3 Graph Options Grid Commands

Deleting data labels, titles, legends, or gridlines


Delete Command (Edit Menu)

Delete Row Command (Edit Menu)

Deleting rows and columns


Deleting a scenario

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)


Delete Sheet Command (Edit Menu)

Deleting sheets


Deleting text or sound notes from a cell

Erasing a sound note


Split and Remove Split Commands (Window Menu)

Split Box

Splitting a window into panes


Remove All Arrows Button

Remove All Arrows Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Remove Dependent Arrows Button

Remove Precedent Arrows Button

Removing tracer arrows


Creating or deleting a view of a worksheet

View Manager Command (View Menu)


Finding cells with formulas that refer to selected cells (dependents)

Overview of Using the Info Window to Investigate Cells


Overview of Using the Tracers to Audit Your Worksheets

Remove Dependent Arrows Button

Trace Dependents Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Tracing dependent formulas


Correlation

Descriptive Statistics

Random Number Generation


Close and Close All Commands (File Menu)

Close Command (Control Menu)


Check Box Button

Combination Drop-Down Edit Button

Combination List-Edit Button

Control Properties Button

Drop-Down Button

Group Box Button

Label Button

List Box Button

Scroll Bar Button

Spinner Button


Copying sheets to other workbooks

Move Or Copy Sheet Command (Edit Menu)


Creating an autotemplate for new sheets

Inserting a new sheet based on an autotemplate

Inserting sheets

Macro Command (Tools Menu)


Move Or Copy Sheet Command (Edit Menu)

Moving sheets to other workbooks

Moving sheets within a workbook


Going to specific cells or ranges

Moving between sheets


Tab Order Button

Tab Order Command (Tools Menu)


Location Tab, Find File Command (File Menu)

Summary Info Command (File Menu)


Dragging data between applications

Overview of Dragging Data Between Applications


Copying and moving with the shortcut menu

Copying cells


Copying and moving with the shortcut menu

Moving cells


Arrow Button

Drawing a line or an arrow

Drawing multiple arrows, lines, or shapes

Freehand Button

Line Button


Drawing Buttons Category

Drawing Toolbar


Drawing a line or an arrow

Drawing multiple arrows, lines, or shapes

Freehand Button

Line Button


Drawing a polygon

Editing a polygon

Freeform Button

Polygon Button


Drawing a rectangle, an ellipse, or an arc

Drawing multiple arrows, lines, or shapes

Ellipse Button

Shape Button


Creating and deleting text boxes

Text Box Button


Combination Drop-Down Edit Button

Drop-Down Button


Changing the image on a toolbar button

Edit Button Image Command (Shortcut Menu)


Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

Adding data series or data points to an embedded chart

Changing the plot order of data series

Changing the value of a chart data point

Changing the worksheet range plotted in a chart

Deleting a data series

Plotting data series from rows or columns

Reversing the plot order of categories, values, or series


Converting an embedded object to a different format

Editing a Microsoft Excel object embedded in another application

Editing an object embedded in a Microsoft Excel document


Editing a macro

Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Recording code into an existing macro

Writing a macro


Editing a name's reference or formula

Name Command (Insert Menu)


Changing the way you enter and edit data

Edit Tab, Options Command (Tools Menu)


Editing a polygon

Reshape Button


Add Report and Edit Report Dialog Boxes

Editing a report


Add Routing Slip and Edit Routing Slip Commands (File Menu)

Creating and editing a routing slip

Editing the routing slip


Editing a scenario

Scenarios Command (Tools Menu)


Entering and editing summary information

Viewing and editing summary information for workbooks


Editing the text in a text box

Formatting the text in a text box


Embedding existing information in a Microsoft Excel document

Embedding new information in a Microsoft Excel document


Editing a Microsoft Excel object embedded in another application

Editing an object embedded in a Microsoft Excel document


Freezing the remote reference portion of a larger formula

Suppressing the updating of all remote references in a worksheet


Controlling whether a DDE or OLE link is updated automatically

Disabling updating of all links to other applications on a worksheet

Editing a Microsoft Excel object embedded in another application

Editing an object embedded in a Microsoft Excel document

Opening and updating data from a list of source documents

Suppressing the updating of all remote references in a worksheet

Updating a DDE or OLE link manually


Embedding existing information in a Microsoft Excel document

Embedding new information in a Microsoft Excel document


Displaying the full screen

Full Screen Command (View Menu)


Microsoft Excel Accessibility

Zoom Command (View Menu)

Zoom Control Box

Zoom In Button

Zooming in or out on a worksheet


Maximize Button

Maximize Command (Control Menu)


Changing the way you enter and edit data

Data entry techniques

Formula Bar

Keys for Entering Data

Tips for Entering Data


Entering formulas

Formula Bar

Tips for Working with Formulas


Entering a user-defined function in a worksheet

Function Command (Insert Menu)

Inserting a worksheet function into a formula with Function Wizard


Entering Lotus 1-2-3 formulas

Entering Lotus 1-2-3 Formulas and Names


Entering numbers in cells

Formatting numbers as text


Entering text in cells

Overview of Entering Text


Lotus 1-2-3 Command (Help Menu)


Deleting text or sound notes from a cell

Erasing a sound note


Remove All Arrows Button

Remove All Arrows Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Remove Dependent Arrows Button

Remove Precedent Arrows Button


Formatting error bars

Guide to Formatting Chart Items


Adding 123.CNF settings to the EXCEL5.INI settings

Specifying Lotus 1-2-3 Global Settings

Specifying Lotus 1-2-3 Print Settings

Specifying Lotus 1-2-3 Worksheet Settings


Copying data from another application to Microsoft Excel

Copying data from Microsoft Excel to another application


Copying a picture to another application

Overview of Copying Cells, Objects, or Charts as Pictures


Embedding a Microsoft Excel object in another application

Embedding existing information in a Microsoft Excel document

Embedding new information in a Microsoft Excel document

Overview of Linking and Embedding

Update Command (File Menu for OLE Objects)


Linking a document from another application to a Microsoft Excel worksheet

Linking a Microsoft Excel document to a document from another application

Overview of Linking and Embedding


File Formats (Windows)

Overview of Opening and Saving Documents in Different File Formats

Saving a document for use in another application


Copying a picture to another application

Overview of Copying Cells, Objects, or Charts as Pictures


Embedding a Microsoft Excel object in another application

Overview of Linking and Embedding


Add Column Field Command (Shortcut Menu)

Add Data Field Command (Shortcut Menu)

Add Page Field Command (Shortcut Menu)

Add Row Field Command (Shortcut Menu)

Adding a field to a pivot table


Overview of Opening and Saving Documents in Different File Formats

Save As Command (File Menu)

Save Copy As Command (File Menu for OLE Objects

Saving a workbook using a different name or file format


File Formats for Lotus 1-2-3

Guidelines for Moving Workbooks Between Lotus 1-2-3 and Microsoft Excel

Specifying Settings When Working with Lotus 1-2-3 Files in Microsoft Excel


Opening Quattro Pro for MS-DOS Files in Microsoft Excel

Running Quattro Pro for MS-DOS Macros in Microsoft Excel


Entering a custom Autofill list on a worksheet

Turning AutoFill on or off


Fill Series Command (Shortcut Menu)

Series Command (Edit Menu, Fill Submenu)


AutoFilter Button

Filtering a list using AutoFilter


Going to specific cells or ranges

Selecting cells with common types of contents


Find Command (Edit Menu)

Find File Command (File Menu)

Replace Command (Edit Menu)


Find File Command (File Menu)

Managing files with the Find File command

Modifying saved searches

Overview of Finding Workbooks

Saving search criteria

Searching for workbooks

Searching with advanced search criteria

Selecting multiple files in the Find File dialog box

Sorting a list of files found with the Find File command

Summary Info Command (File Menu)

Using special characters in a search

Viewing and editing summary information for workbooks


FIND

HLOOKUP

SEARCH

VLOOKUP


Getting Information While You Work

Overview of Using Help to Find the Information You Need

Searching Help for a particular topic


Finding and replacing text or numbers

Finding text or numbers


Finding and replacing text or numbers

Finding text or numbers


Find File Command (File Menu)

Managing files with the Find File command

Modifying saved searches

Overview of Finding Workbooks

Saving search criteria

Searching for workbooks

Searching with advanced search criteria

Selecting multiple files in the Find File dialog box

Sorting a list of files found with the Find File command

Summary Info Command (File Menu)

Using special characters in a search

Viewing and editing summary information for workbooks


Copying formats using the Format Painter button

Copying only the cell format


Copying formats using the Format Painter button

Copying only the cell format

Format Painter Button

Paste Formats Button


File Formats (Windows)

File Formats for Lotus 1-2-3

Guidelines for Moving Workbooks Between Lotus 1-2-3 and Microsoft Excel

Mathematical Operator Evaluation in Lotus 1-2-3 and Microsoft Excel

Opening Microsoft Works Files in Microsoft Excel

Opening Quattro Pro for MS-DOS Files in Microsoft Excel

Running Quattro Pro for MS-DOS Macros in Microsoft Excel

Save As Command (File Menu)

Save Copy As Command (File Menu for OLE Objects

Saving a workbook using a different name or file format

Specifying Settings When Working with Lotus 1-2-3 Files in Microsoft Excel


Changing number formats for chart values

Changing the number format for the data area of a pivot table

Overview of Using Number Formats


Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Overview of Formatting Axes, Tick Marks, and Gridlines


Formatting Buttons Category

Formatting Toolbar

Text Formatting Buttons Category


Formatting cell contents

Overview of Formatting Characters in Cells

Text Formatting Buttons Category


AutoFormat Button

Borders Button

Bottom Border Button

Bottom Double Border Button

CELL

Dark Shading Button

Left Border Button

Light Shading Button

Outline Border Button

Overview of Formatting Cells with Borders, Patterns, and Color

Pattern Button

Right Border Button

Top Border Button


Applying colors, patterns, and borders to chart items

Clear Command (Edit Menu for Charts)

Formatting Toolbar

Guide to Formatting Chart Items


Applying Lotus 1-2-3 Graph Format Options

Formatting 3-D surface chart levels

Formatting a 3-D chart's walls and floor

Formatting a Chart

Formatting pie and doughnut slices

New Features for Creating and Formatting Charts

Overview of Changing Colors, Patterns, Borders, Text, and Numbers

Overview of Formatting Data Series and Chart Type Groups


3-D Area Chart AutoFormat Button

3-D Bar Chart AutoFormat Button

3-D Column Chart AutoFormat Button

3-D Line Chart AutoFormat Button

3-D Perspective Column Chart AutoFormat Button

3-D Pie Chart AutoFormat Button

3-D Surface Chart AutoFormat Button

Area Chart AutoFormat Button

Bar Chart AutoFormat Button

Column Chart AutoFormat Button

Doughnut Chart AutoFormat Button

Line Chart AutoFormat Button

Line/Column Chart AutoFormat Button

Pie Chart AutoFormat Button

Radar Chart AutoFormat Button

Stacked Column Chart AutoFormat Button

Volume/High-Low-Close Chart AutoFormat Button


Arranging and spacing data markers in bar and column charts

Clearing formatting from data markers

Formatting data markers

Formatting data markers in line, radar, and xy (scatter) charts

Overview of Formatting Data Markers


Formatting Toolbar

Object Command (Format Menu)

Overview of Formatting a Graphic Object

Selected Object Command (Format Menu)


Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Overview of Formatting Axes, Tick Marks, and Gridlines


Comma Style Button

Currency Style Button

Decrease Decimal Button

Increase Decimal Button

Information on Number Formatting for Formulas

Multiplan Format Options Command

Overview of Using Number Formats

Percent Style Button


Applying Lotus 1-2-3 X Scale and Y Scale Commands

Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Overview of Formatting Axes, Tick Marks, and Gridlines


Overview of Using Styles to Save and Apply Format Combinations


Changing what Microsoft Excel displays

Displaying the full screen


Tips for Editing Data

Tips for Working with Formulas


Remove Dependent Arrows Button

Trace Dependents Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Tracing dependent formulas


Remove Precedent Arrows Button

Trace Precedents Command (Tools Menu, Auditing Submenu)

Tracing precedent data and formulas


Editing an array formula

Entering an array formula


Calculate Now Button

Calculating a portion of a formula


Formatting cell contents

Formula Bar


Entering formulas

Overview of Entering a Formula


Find Command (Edit Menu)

Finding text or numbers


Changing what Microsoft Excel displays

Hiding formulas


Calculating Lotus 1-2-3 Formulas

Entering Lotus 1-2-3 formulas

Entering Lotus 1-2-3 Formulas and Names


Paste Names Button

Pasting a name into a formula


Finding and replacing text or numbers

Freezing the values in a range of cells

Replace Command (Edit Menu)

Replacing an entire formula with its calculated value


Goal Seek Command (Tools Menu)

Seeking a specific solution to a formula using the Goal Seek command


Changing the decimal separator

Multiplan Format Options Command


Freezing the values in a range of cells

Replacing an entire formula with its calculated value

Switching between manual and automatic calculation

Turning off calculation before saving


Freeze Panes and Unfreeze Panes Commands (Window Menu)

Freezing and unfreezing worksheet titles and panes


Freezing the remote reference portion of a larger formula

Suppressing the updating of all remote references in a worksheet


Freeze Panes and Unfreeze Panes Commands (Window Menu)

Freezing and unfreezing worksheet titles and panes


Assigning a macro to a graphic object

Overview of Assigning a Macro to the Tools Menu, a Button, or a Graphic Object


Drop Shadow Button

Formatting an object's border and fill pattern


Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Copying a chart, cells, or a graphic object as a picture

Copying a graphic object

Copying a picture of a chart, cells, or an object

Copying a picture to another application

Overview of Copying Cells, Objects, or Charts as Pictures

Paste Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets)


About Graphic Objects

Overview of Drawing Lines, Arrows, and Shapes


Object Command (Format Menu)

Overview of Formatting a Graphic Object

Selected Object Command (Format Menu)


Object Command (Insert Menu)

Picture Command (Insert Menu)


Moving a graphic object

Overview of Controlling the Way a Graphic Object Is Moved or Sized


Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Copying a picture of a chart, cells, or an object

Paste Command (Edit Menu)

Paste Special Command (Edit Menu for Worksheets)


Formatting an object's border and fill pattern

Pattern Button


Placement Command (Format Menu)


Selecting a graphic object

Selecting all graphic objects on a worksheet

Selecting multiple graphic objects


Dark Shading Button

Light Shading Button


Overview of Controlling the Way a Graphic Object Is Moved or Sized

Overview of Sizing, Moving, and Copying Graphic Objects

Resizing a graphic object


Adding gridlines

Applying Lotus 1-2-3 Graph Options Grid Commands

Gridlines Command (Insert Menu)


Applying Lotus 1-2-3 Graph Options Grid Commands

Deleting data labels, titles, legends, or gridlines


Formatting axes, tick marks, and gridlines

Overview of Formatting Axes, Tick Marks, and Gridlines


Grouping and ungrouping graphic objects

Placement Command (Format Menu)


Grouping dates into ranges in a pivot table

Grouping items in a page field

Grouping numeric items into ranges in a pivot table

Grouping selected items in a pivot table field

Overview of Grouping Items in a Pivot Table


Using Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users


Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users


Hiding and showing detail for items in a pivot table

Overview of Hiding and Showing Detail Data in a Pivot Table


Displaying or hiding toolbars

Toolbars Command (View Menu)

Using Toolbar Buttons


Adding input values to a data table

Filling in a one-input data table

Filling in a two-input data table

Table Command (Data Menu)


Goal Seek Command (Tools Menu)

Seeking a specific solution to a formula using the Goal Seek command


Adding a legend

Legend Command (Insert Menu)


Formatting legend entries and keys

Overview of Formatting the Legend


Renaming a sheet

Sheet Command (Format Menu)


Controlling whether a DDE or OLE link is updated automatically

Disabling updating of all links to other applications on a worksheet

Editing a Microsoft Excel object embedded in another application

Editing an object embedded in a Microsoft Excel document

Opening and updating data from a list of source documents

Suppressing the updating of all remote references in a worksheet

Updating a DDE or OLE link manually


Changing the reference to a source area

Creating links to source data

Deleting a reference to a source area


Creating links between workbooks

Redirecting links for source workbooks

Removing links between workbooks


Controlling whether a DDE or OLE link is updated automatically

Disabling updating of all links to other applications on a worksheet

Editing a Microsoft Excel object embedded in another application

Editing an object embedded in a Microsoft Excel document

Opening and updating data from a list of source documents

Suppressing the updating of all remote references in a worksheet


Help for Lotus 1-2-3 Users

Using Help for Lotus 1-2-3 users


Assigning a macro to a graphic object

Overview of Assigning a Macro to the Tools Menu, a Button, or a Graphic Object


t-Test: Paired Two-Sample for Means

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Equal Variances

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Unequal Variances


t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Equal Variances

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Unequal Variances


Anova: Single-Factor

Anova: Two-Factor with Replication

Anova: Two-Factor Without Replication


Choosing a menu bar command

Choosing a shortcut menu command

Keys for Working in Menus


Error Bars Command (Insert Menu)

Modifying error bar settings


Modifying trendline settings

Trendline Command (Insert Menu)


Embedded Chart

Moving and sizing an embedded chart


Tips for Editing Data

Tips for Moving and Sizing


Dragging data between applications

Overview of Dragging Data Between Applications


Keys for Moving and Selecting in Worksheets and Workbooks

Keys for Moving Within a Selection


Go To Command (Edit Menu)

Selecting nonadjacent cells or ranges


Overview of Working with Microsoft Excel Solver

The Difference Between Linear and Nonlinear Problems


Dragging data between applications

Overview of Dragging Data Between Applications


Controlling whether a DDE or OLE link is updated automatically

Disabling updating of all links to other applications on a worksheet

Opening and updating data from a list of source documents

Suppressing the updating of all remote references in a worksheet

Updating a DDE or OLE link manually


Lock Cell Button

Locking and unlocking graphic objects on a worksheet or chart sheet


Controlling whether a DDE or OLE link is updated automatically

Disabling updating of all links to other applications on a worksheet

Editing a Microsoft Excel object embedded in another application

Editing an object embedded in a Microsoft Excel document

Opening and updating data from a list of source documents

Suppressing the updating of all remote references in a worksheet

Updating a DDE or OLE link manually


Controlling whether a DDE or OLE link is updated automatically

Disabling updating of all links to other applications on a worksheet

Editing a Microsoft Excel object embedded in another application

Editing an object embedded in a Microsoft Excel document

Opening and updating data from a list of source documents

Suppressing the updating of all remote references in a worksheet

Updating a DDE or OLE link manually


Controlling whether a DDE or OLE link is updated automatically

Disabling updating of all links to other applications on a worksheet

Opening and updating data from a list of source documents

Suppressing the updating of all remote references in a worksheet

Updating a DDE or OLE link manually


Lotus 1-2-3 Command (Help Menu)


Getting Information While You Work

Overview of Using Help to Find the Information You Need


Specifying an additional startup directory


Opening a workbook automatically

Specifying an additional startup directory


Creating an outline automatically

Creating an outline manually

Overview of Creating and Removing an Outline


Outline Symbols

Overview of Showing or Hiding Details in an Outline


Placement Command (Format Menu)

Reordering overlapped graphic objects


Copying a picture of a chart, cells, or an object


Copying a picture to another application


Adding data series or data points to a chart sheet

Changing the worksheet range plotted in a chart


Adding a trendline to a data series

Overview of Adding a Trendline to a Data Series


Dragging data between applications

Overview of Dragging Data Between Applications


Entering a reference to a range of sheets in a workbook

Entering a reference to another sheet in a workbook


Editing a Microsoft Excel object embedded in another application

Editing an object embedded in a Microsoft Excel document


Placement Command (Format Menu)

Reordering overlapped graphic objects


Keys for Moving and Selecting in Worksheets and Workbooks

Keys for Scrolling in a Workbook Window


Copying cells

Copying or moving characters within a cell


Copying a picture to another application

Overview of Copying Cells, Objects, or Charts as Pictures


Dragging data between applications

Overview of Dragging Data Between Applications


Goal Seek Command (Tools Menu)

Seeking a specific solution to a formula using the Goal Seek command


Overview of Sorting Pivot Table Items

Sorting pivot table items by labels


Overview of Managing Lists in Microsoft Excel

Overview of Sorting a List


Open Command (File Menu)

Opening and editing the original template


Freezing the values in a range of cells

Replacing an entire formula with its calculated value


t-Test: Paired Two-Sample for Means

t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Equal Variances


Anova: Two-Factor with Replication

Anova: Two-Factor Without Replication


Displaying and closing new windows of a workbook

New Window Command (Window Menu)


Opening a workbook automatically

Specifying an additional startup directory

Specifying Workbooks You Want Opened Automatically


Creating and saving a workspace file

Overview of Saving Workspace Files